<?xml version="1.0"?>
<doc>
    <assembly>
        <name>qyoto-qtgui</name>
    </assembly>
    <members>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QApplication">
            <summary>
            The QApplication class manages the GUI application's control flow and main settings.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QApplication contains the main event loop, where all events from the window system and other sources are processed and dispatched. It also handles the application's initialization, finalization, and provides session management. In addition, QApplication handles most of the system-wide and application-wide settings.</para>
            <para>For any GUI application using Qt, there is precisely one QApplication object, no matter whether the application has 0, 1, 2 or more windows at any given time. For non-GUI Qt applications, use QCoreApplication instead, as it does not depend on the QtGui library.</para>
            <para>The QApplication object is accessible through the instance() function that returns a pointer equivalent to the global qApp pointer.</para>
            <para>QApplication's main areas of responsibility are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>It initializes the application with the user's desktop settings such as palette(), font() and doubleClickInterval(). It keeps track of these properties in case the user changes the desktop globally, for example through some kind of control panel.</para>
            <para>It performs event handling, meaning that it receives events from the underlying window system and dispatches them to the relevant widgets. By using sendEvent() and postEvent() you can send your own events to widgets.</para>
            <para>It parses common command line arguments and sets its internal state accordingly. See the constructor documentation below for more details.</para>
            <para>It defines the application's look and feel, which is encapsulated in a QStyle object. This can be changed at runtime with setStyle().</para>
            <para>It specifies how the application is to allocate colors. See setColorSpec() for details.</para>
            <para>It provides localization of strings that are visible to the user via translate().</para>
            <para>It provides some magical objects like the desktop() and the clipboard().</para>
            <para>It knows about the application's windows. You can ask which widget is at a certain position using widgetAt(), get a list of topLevelWidgets() and closeAllWindows(), etc.</para>
            <para>It manages the application's mouse cursor handling, see setOverrideCursor()</para>
            <para>On the X window system, it provides functions to flush and sync the communication stream, see flushX() and syncX().</para>
            <para>It provides support for sophisticated session management. This makes it possible for applications to terminate gracefully when the user logs out, to cancel a shutdown process if termination isn't possible and even to preserve the entire application's state for a future session. See isSessionRestored(), sessionId() and commitData() and saveState() for details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Since the QApplication object does so much initialization, it must be created before any other objects related to the user interface are created. QApplication also deals with common command line arguments. Hence, it is usually a good idea to create it before any interpretation or modification of argv is done in the application itself.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Groups of functions</para>
            <para>System settings	desktopSettingsAware(), setDesktopSettingsAware(), cursorFlashTime(), setCursorFlashTime(), doubleClickInterval(), setDoubleClickInterval(), setKeyboardInputInterval(), wheelScrollLines(), setWheelScrollLines(), palette(), setPalette(), font(), setFont(), fontMetrics().</para>
            <para>Event handling	exec(), processEvents(), exit(), quit(). sendEvent(), postEvent(), sendPostedEvents(), removePostedEvents(), hasPendingEvents(), notify(), macEventFilter(), qwsEventFilter(), x11EventFilter(), x11ProcessEvent(), winEventFilter().</para>
            <para>GUI Styles	style(), setStyle().</para>
            <para>Color usage	colorSpec(), setColorSpec(), qwsSetCustomColors().</para>
            <para>Text handling	installTranslator(), removeTranslator() translate().</para>
            <para>Widgets	allWidgets(), topLevelWidgets(), desktop(), activePopupWidget(), activeModalWidget(), clipboard(), focusWidget(), activeWindow(), widgetAt().</para>
            <para>Advanced cursor handling	overrideCursor(), setOverrideCursor(), restoreOverrideCursor().</para>
            <para>X Window System synchronization	flushX(), syncX().</para>
            <para>Session management	isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), saveState().</para>
            <para>Miscellaneous	closeAllWindows(), startingUp(), closingDown(), type().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QCoreApplication, QAbstractEventDispatcher, QEventLoop, and QSettings.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.AboutQt">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays a simple message box about Qt. The message includes the version number of Qt being used by the application.</para>
            <para>This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application, as shown in the Menus example.</para>
            <para>This function is a convenience slot for QMessageBox::aboutQt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.ActiveModalWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the active modal widget.</para>
            <para>A modal widget is a special top-level widget which is a subclass of QDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as true. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program.</para>
            <para>Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active modal widget at the top of the stack.</para>
            <para>See also activePopupWidget() and topLevelWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.ActivePopupWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the active popup widget.</para>
            <para>A popup widget is a special top-level widget that sets the Qt::WType_Popup widget flag, e.g. the QMenu widget. When the application opens a popup widget, all events are sent to the popup. Normal widgets and modal widgets cannot be accessed before the popup widget is closed.</para>
            <para>Only other popup widgets may be opened when a popup widget is shown. The popup widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active popup widget at the top of the stack.</para>
            <para>See also activeModalWidget() and topLevelWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Alert(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Causes an alert to be shown for widget if the window is not the active window. The alert is shown for msec miliseconds. If msec is zero (the default), then the alert is shown indefinitely until the window becomes active again.</para>
            <para>Currently this function does nothing on Qt for Embedded Linux.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, this works more at the application level and will cause the application icon to bounce in the dock.</para>
            <para>On Windows, this causes the window's taskbar entry to flash for a time. If msec is zero, the flashing will stop and the taskbar entry will turn a different color (currently orange).</para>
            <para>On X11, this will cause the window to be marked as &quot;demands attention&quot;, the window must not be hidden (i.e. not have hide() called on it, but be visible in some sort of way) in order for this to work.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.AllWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the widgets in the application.</para>
            <para>The list is empty (QList::isEmpty()) if there are no widgets.</para>
            <para>Note: Some of the widgets may be hidden.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void updateAllWidgets()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     foreach (QWidget *widget, QApplication::allWidgets())</para>
            <para>         widget-&gt;update();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also topLevelWidgets() and QWidget::isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Beep">
            <summary>
            <para>Sounds the bell, using the default volume and sound. The function is not available in Qt for Embedded Linux.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.ChangeOverrideCursor(QtGui.QCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the currently active application override cursor to cursor.</para>
            <para>This function has no effect if setOverrideCursor() was not called.</para>
            <para>See also setOverrideCursor(), overrideCursor(), restoreOverrideCursor(), and QWidget::setCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Clipboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the application global clipboard.</para>
            <para>Note: The QApplication object should already be constructed before accessing the clipboard.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.CloseAllWindows">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes all top-level windows.</para>
            <para>This function is particularly useful for applications with many top-level windows. It could, for example, be connected to a Exit entry in the File menu:</para>
            <para>     exitAct = new QAction(tr(&quot;E&amp;xit&quot;), this);</para>
            <para>     exitAct-&gt;setShortcuts(QKeySequence::Quit);</para>
            <para>     exitAct-&gt;setStatusTip(tr(&quot;Exit the application&quot;));</para>
            <para>     connect(exitAct, SIGNAL(triggered()), qApp, SLOT(closeAllWindows()));</para>
            <para>The windows are closed in random order, until one window does not accept the close event. The application quits when the last window was successfully closed; this can be turned off by setting quitOnLastWindowClosed to false.</para>
            <para>See also quitOnLastWindowClosed, lastWindowClosed(), QWidget::close(), QWidget::closeEvent(), lastWindowClosed(), quit(), topLevelWidgets(), and QWidget::isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.CommitData(QtGui.QSessionManager)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function deals with session management. It is invoked when the QSessionManager wants the application to commit all its data.</para>
            <para>Usually this means saving all open files, after getting permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means by which the user can cancel the shutdown.</para>
            <para>You should not exit the application within this function. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example usage.</para>
            <para>The default implementation requests interaction and sends a close event to all visible top-level widgets. If any event was rejected, the shutdown is canceled.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), saveState(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.OnCommitDataRequest(QtGui.QSessionManager)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal deals with session management. It is emitted when the QSessionManager wants the application to commit all its data.</para>
            <para>Usually this means saving all open files, after getting permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means by which the user can cancel the shutdown.</para>
            <para>You should not exit the application within this signal. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this signal, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example usage.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use Qt::DirectConnection when connecting to this signal.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), saveState(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Desktop">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the desktop widget (also called the root window).</para>
            <para>The desktop may be composed of multiple screens, so it would be incorrect, for example, to attempt to center some widget in the desktop's geometry. QDesktopWidget has various functions for obtaining useful geometries upon the desktop, such as QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry() and QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry().</para>
            <para>On X11, it is also possible to draw on the desktop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.OnFocusChanged(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the widget that has keyboard focus changed from old to now, i.e., because the user pressed the tab-key, clicked into a widget or changed the active window. Both old and now can be the null-pointer.</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted after both widget have been notified about the change through QFocusEvent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::clearFocus(), and Qt::FocusReason.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.FocusWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the application widget that has the keyboard input focus, or 0 if no widget in this application has the focus.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::hasFocus(), activeWindow(), and focusChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default application font.</para>
            <para>See also setFont(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::font().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Font(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the default font for the widget.</para>
            <para>See also fontMetrics() and QWidget::setFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Font(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the font for widgets of the given className.</para>
            <para>See also setFont() and QWidget::font().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.OnFontDatabaseChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when application fonts are loaded or removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QFontDatabase::addApplicationFont(), QFontDatabase::addApplicationFontFromData(), QFontDatabase::removeAllApplicationFonts(), and QFontDatabase::removeApplicationFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.FontMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns display (screen) font metrics for the application font.</para>
            <para>See also font(), setFont(), QWidget::fontMetrics(), and QPainter::fontMetrics().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.IsEffectEnabled(QtCore.Qt.UIEffect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if effect is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>By default, Qt will try to use the desktop settings. To prevent this, call setDesktopSettingsAware(false).</para>
            <para>Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.</para>
            <para>See also setEffectEnabled() and Qt::UIEffect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.IsLeftToRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the application's layout direction is Qt::LeftToRight; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also layoutDirection() and isRightToLeft().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.IsRightToLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the application's layout direction is Qt::RightToLeft; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also layoutDirection() and isLeftToRight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.IsSessionRestored">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the application has been restored from an earlier session; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.KeyboardInputDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current keyboard input direction.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.KeyboardInputLocale">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current keyboard input locale.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.KeyboardModifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current state of the modifier keys on the keyboard. The current state is updated sychronously as the event queue is emptied of events that will spontaneously change the keyboard state (QEvent::KeyPress and QEvent::KeyRelease events).</para>
            <para>It should be noted this may not reflect the actual keys held on the input device at the time of calling but rather the modifiers as last reported in one of the above events. If no keys are being held Qt::NoModifier is returned.</para>
            <para>See also mouseButtons() and queryKeyboardModifiers().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.OnLastWindowClosed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted from QApplication::exec() when the last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed.</para>
            <para>By default,</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>this attribute is set for all widgets except transient windows such as splash screens, tool windows, and popup menus</para>
            <para>QApplication implicitly quits when this signal is emitted.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>This feature can be turned off by setting quitOnLastWindowClosed to false.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::close().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.MouseButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current state of the buttons on the mouse. The current state is updated syncronously as the event queue is emptied of events that will spontaneously change the mouse state (QEvent::MouseButtonPress and QEvent::MouseButtonRelease events).</para>
            <para>It should be noted this may not reflect the actual buttons held on the input device at the time of calling but rather the mouse buttons as last reported in one of the above events. If no mouse buttons are being held Qt::NoButton is returned.</para>
            <para>See also keyboardModifiers().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Notify(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QCoreApplication::notify().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the application palette.</para>
            <para>See also setPalette() and QWidget::palette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Palette(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>If a widget is passed, the default palette for the widget's class is returned. This may or may not be the application palette. In most cases there is no special palette for certain types of widgets, but one notable exception is the popup menu under Windows, if the user has defined a special background color for menus in the display settings.</para>
            <para>See also setPalette() and QWidget::palette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Palette(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the palette for widgets of the given className.</para>
            <para>See also setPalette() and QWidget::palette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.QueryKeyboardModifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Queries and returns the state of the modifier keys on the keyboard. Unlike keyboardModifiers, this method returns the actual keys held on the input device at the time of calling the method.</para>
            <para>It does not rely on the keypress events having been received by this process, which makes it possible to check the modifiers while moving a window, for instance. Note that in most cases, you should use keyboardModifiers(), which is faster and more accurate since it contains the state of the modifiers as they were when the currently processed event was received.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also keyboardModifiers().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.RestoreOverrideCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Undoes the last setOverrideCursor().</para>
            <para>If setOverrideCursor() has been called twice, calling restoreOverrideCursor() will activate the first cursor set. Calling this function a second time restores the original widgets' cursors.</para>
            <para>See also setOverrideCursor() and overrideCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SaveState(QtGui.QSessionManager)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function deals with session management. It is invoked when the session manager wants the application to preserve its state for a future session.</para>
            <para>For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.</para>
            <para>You should never exit the application within this function. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after the application has been started. This permits the session manager to learn about the application's restart policy.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.OnSaveStateRequest(QtGui.QSessionManager)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal deals with session management. It is invoked when the session manager wants the application to preserve its state for a future session.</para>
            <para>For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.</para>
            <para>You should never exit the application within this signal. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after the application has been started. This permits the session manager to learn about the application's restart policy.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use Qt::DirectConnection when connecting to this signal.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SessionId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current session's identifier.</para>
            <para>If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this identifier is the same as it was in that previous session. The session identifier is guaranteed to be unique both for different applications and for different instances of the same application.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionKey(), commitData(), and saveState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SessionKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the session key in the current session.</para>
            <para>If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.</para>
            <para>The session key changes with every call of commitData() or saveState().</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SetEffectEnabled(QtCore.Qt.UIEffect,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables the UI effect effect if enable is true, otherwise the effect will not be used.</para>
            <para>Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.</para>
            <para>See also isEffectEnabled(), Qt::UIEffect, and setDesktopSettingsAware().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SetFont(QtGui.QFont,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the default application font to font. If className is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit className (as reported by QObject::inherits()).</para>
            <para>On application start-up, the default font depends on the window system. It can vary depending on both the window system version and the locale. This function lets you override the default font; but overriding may be a bad idea because, for example, some locales need extra large fonts to support their special characters.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. The font of an application can be customized using the &quot;font&quot; style sheet property. To set a bold font for all QPushButtons, set the application styleSheet() as &quot;QPushButton { font: bold }&quot;</para>
            <para>See also font(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::setFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SetGraphicsSystem(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the default graphics backend to system, which will be used for on-screen widgets and QPixmaps. The available systems are &quot;native&quot;, &quot;raster&quot; and &quot;opengl&quot;.</para>
            <para>There are several ways to set the graphics backend, in order of decreasing precedence:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>the application commandline -graphicssystem switch</para>
            <para>QApplication::setGraphicsSystem()</para>
            <para>the QT_GRAPHICSSYSTEM environment variable</para>
            <para>the Qt configure -graphicssystem switch</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the highest precedence switch sets an invalid name, the error will be ignored and the default backend will be used.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is only effective before the QApplication constructor is called.</para>
            <para>Note: The &quot;opengl&quot; option is currently experimental.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SetPalette(QtGui.QPalette,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the default application palette to palette.</para>
            <para>If className is passed, the change applies only to widgets that inherit className (as reported by QObject::inherits()). If className is left 0, the change affects all widgets, thus overriding any previously set class specific palettes.</para>
            <para>The palette may be changed according to the current GUI style in QStyle::polish().</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. When using style sheets, the palette of a widget can be customized using the &quot;color&quot;, &quot;background-color&quot;, &quot;selection-color&quot;, &quot;selection-background-color&quot; and &quot;alternate-background-color&quot;.</para>
            <para>Note: Some styles do not use the palette for all drawing, for instance, if they make use of native theme engines. This is the case for the Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Mac OS X styles.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setPalette(), palette(), and QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SetStyle(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Requests a QStyle object for style from the QStyleFactory.</para>
            <para>The string must be one of the QStyleFactory::keys(), typically one of &quot;windows&quot;, &quot;motif&quot;, &quot;cde&quot;, &quot;plastique&quot;, &quot;windowsxp&quot;, or &quot;macintosh&quot;. Style names are case insensitive.</para>
            <para>Returns 0 if an unknown style is passed, otherwise the QStyle object returned is set as the application's GUI style.</para>
            <para>Warning: To ensure that the application's style is set correctly, it is best to call this function before the QApplication constructor, if possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.SyncX">
            <summary>
            <para>Synchronizes with the X server in the X11 implementation. This normally takes some time. Does nothing on other platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.TopLevelAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the top-level widget at the given point; returns 0 if there is no such widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.TopLevelAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the top-level widget at the point (x, y); returns 0 if there is no such widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.TopLevelWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the top-level widgets (windows) in the application.</para>
            <para>Note: Some of the top-level widgets may be hidden, for example a tooltip if no tooltip is currently shown.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void showAllHiddenTopLevelWidgets()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     foreach (QWidget *widget, QApplication::topLevelWidgets()) {</para>
            <para>         if (widget-&gt;isHidden())</para>
            <para>             widget-&gt;show();</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also allWidgets(), QWidget::isWindow(), and QWidget::isHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of application (Tty, GuiClient, or GuiServer). The type is set when constructing the QApplication object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.WidgetAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget at global screen position point, or 0 if there is no Qt widget there.</para>
            <para>This function can be slow.</para>
            <para>See also QCursor::pos(), QWidget::grabMouse(), and QWidget::grabKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.WidgetAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the widget at global screen position (x, y), or 0 if there is no Qt widget there.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QApplication.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Cleans up any window system resources that were allocated by this application. Sets the global variable qApp to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QApplication.LastWindowClosed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted from QApplication::exec() when the last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed.</para>
            <para>By default,</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>this attribute is set for all widgets except transient windows such as splash screens, tool windows, and popup menus</para>
            <para>QApplication implicitly quits when this signal is emitted.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>This feature can be turned off by setting quitOnLastWindowClosed to false.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::close().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QApplication.FocusChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the widget that has keyboard focus changed from old to now, i.e., because the user pressed the tab-key, clicked into a widget or changed the active window. Both old and now can be the null-pointer.</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted after both widget have been notified about the change through QFocusEvent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::clearFocus(), and Qt::FocusReason.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QApplication.FontDatabaseChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when application fonts are loaded or removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QFontDatabase::addApplicationFont(), QFontDatabase::addApplicationFontFromData(), QFontDatabase::removeAllApplicationFonts(), and QFontDatabase::removeApplicationFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QApplication.CommitDataRequest">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal deals with session management. It is emitted when the QSessionManager wants the application to commit all its data.</para>
            <para>Usually this means saving all open files, after getting permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means by which the user can cancel the shutdown.</para>
            <para>You should not exit the application within this signal. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this signal, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example usage.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use Qt::DirectConnection when connecting to this signal.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), saveState(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QApplication.SaveStateRequest">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal deals with session management. It is invoked when the session manager wants the application to preserve its state for a future session.</para>
            <para>For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.</para>
            <para>You should never exit the application within this signal. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after the application has been started. This permits the session manager to learn about the application's restart policy.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use Qt::DirectConnection when connecting to this signal.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.ActiveWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the application top-level window that has the keyboard input focus, or 0 if no application window has the focus. There might be an activeWindow() even if there is no focusWidget(), for example if no widget in that window accepts key events.</para>
            <para>Sets the active window to the active widget in response to a system event. The function is called from the platform specific event handlers.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function does not set the keyboard focus to the active widget. Call QWidget::activateWindow() instead.</para>
            <para>It sets the activeWindow() and focusWidget() attributes and sends proper WindowActivate/WindowDeactivate and FocusIn/FocusOut events to all appropriate widgets. The window will then be painted in active state (e.g. cursors in line edits will blink), and it will have tool tips enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.colorSpec">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color specification.</para>
            <para>Sets the color specification for the application to spec.</para>
            <para>The color specification controls how the application allocates colors when run on a display with a limited amount of colors, e.g. 8 bit / 256 color displays.</para>
            <para>The color specification must be set before you create the QApplication object.</para>
            <para>The options are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QApplication::NormalColor. This is the default color allocation strategy. Use this option if your application uses buttons, menus, texts and pixmaps with few colors. With this option, the application uses system global colors. This works fine for most applications under X11, but on the Windows platform, it may cause dithering of non-standard colors.</para>
            <para>QApplication::CustomColor. Use this option if your application needs a small number of custom colors. On X11, this option is the same as NormalColor. On Windows, Qt creates a Windows palette, and allocates colors to it on demand.</para>
            <para>QApplication::ManyColor. Use this option if your application is very color hungry, e.g., it requires thousands of colors.  Under X11 the effect is:</para>
            <para>For 256-color displays which have at best a 256 color true color visual, the default visual is used, and colors are allocated from a color cube. The color cube is the 6x6x6 (216 color) &quot;Web palette&quot; (the red, green, and blue components always have one of the following values: 0x00, 0x33, 0x66, 0x99, 0xCC, or 0xFF), but the number of colors can be changed by the -ncols option. The user can force the application to use the true color visual with the -visual option.</para>
            <para>For 256-color displays which have a true color visual with more than 256 colors, use that visual. Silicon Graphics X servers this feature, for example. They provide an 8 bit visual by default but can deliver true color when asked.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>On Windows, Qt creates a Windows palette, and fills it with a color cube.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.DesktopSettingsAware">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if Qt is set to use the system's standard colors, fonts, etc.; otherwise returns false. The default is true.</para>
            <para>Sets whether Qt should use the system's standard colors, fonts, etc., to on. By default, this is true.</para>
            <para>This function must be called before creating the QApplication object, like this:</para>
            <para> int main(int argc, char *argv[])</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware(false);</para>
            <para>     QApplication app(argc, argv);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     return app.exec();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.InputContext">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QInputContext instance used by the application.</para>
            <para>This function replaces the QInputContext instance used by the application with inputContext.</para>
            <para>Qt takes ownership of the given inputContext.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.OverrideCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the active application override cursor.</para>
            <para>This function returns 0 if no application cursor has been defined (i.e. the internal cursor stack is empty).</para>
            <para>Sets the application override cursor to cursor.</para>
            <para>Application override cursors are intended for showing the user that the application is in a special state, for example during an operation that might take some time.</para>
            <para>This cursor will be displayed in all the application's widgets until restoreOverrideCursor() or another setOverrideCursor() is called.</para>
            <para>Application cursors are stored on an internal stack. setOverrideCursor() pushes the cursor onto the stack, and restoreOverrideCursor() pops the active cursor off the stack. changeOverrideCursor() changes the curently active application override cursor.</para>
            <para>Every setOverrideCursor() must eventually be followed by a corresponding restoreOverrideCursor(), otherwise the stack will never be emptied.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QApplication::setOverrideCursor(QCursor(Qt::WaitCursor));</para>
            <para> calculateHugeMandelbrot();              // lunch time...</para>
            <para> QApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the application's style object.</para>
            <para>Sets the application's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style object is transferred to QApplication, so QApplication will delete the style object on application exit or when a new style is set and the old style is still the parent of the application object.</para>
            <para>Example usage:</para>
            <para> QApplication::setStyle(new QWindowsStyle);</para>
            <para>When switching application styles, the color palette is set back to the initial colors or the system defaults. This is necessary since certain styles have to adapt the color palette to be fully style-guide compliant.</para>
            <para>Setting the style before a palette has been set, i.e., before creating QApplication, will cause the application to use QStyle::standardPalette() for the palette.</para>
            <para>Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default layout direction for this application.</para>
            <para>On system start-up, the default layout direction depends on the application's language.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.WindowIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default window icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.CursorFlashTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text cursor's flash (blink) time in milliseconds.</para>
            <para>The flash time is the time required to display, invert and restore the caret display. Usually the text cursor is displayed for half the cursor flash time, then hidden for the same amount of time, but this may vary.</para>
            <para>The default value on X11 is 1000 milliseconds. On Windows, the Control Panel value is used and setting this property sets the cursor flash time for all applications.</para>
            <para>We recommend that widgets do not cache this value as it may change at any time if the user changes the global desktop settings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.DoubleClickInterval">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the time limit in milliseconds that distinguishes a double click from two consecutive mouse clicks.</para>
            <para>The default value on X11 is 400 milliseconds. On Windows and Mac OS, the operating system's value is used. However, on Windows and Symbian OS, calling this function sets the double click interval for all applications.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.KeyboardInputInterval">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the time limit in milliseconds that distinguishes a key press from two consecutive key presses.</para>
            <para>The default value on X11 is 400 milliseconds. On Windows and Mac OS, the operating system's value is used.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.WheelScrollLines">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of lines to scroll a widget, when the mouse wheel is rotated.</para>
            <para>If the value exceeds the widget's number of visible lines, the widget should interpret the scroll operation as a single page up or page down. If the widget is an item view class, then the result of scrolling one line depends on the setting of the widget's scroll mode. Scroll one line can mean scroll one item or scroll one pixel.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.GlobalStrut">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum size that any GUI element that the user can interact with should have.</para>
            <para>For example, no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size. The strut size should be considered when reimplementing GUI controls that may be used on touch-screens or similar I/O devices.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QSize MyWidget::sizeHint() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return QSize(80, 25).expandedTo(QApplication::globalStrut());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a QSize object with zero width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.StartDragTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the time in milliseconds that a mouse button must be held down before a drag and drop operation will begin.</para>
            <para>If you support drag and drop in your application, and want to start a drag and drop operation after the user has held down a mouse button for a certain amount of time, you should use this property's value as the delay.</para>
            <para>Qt also uses this delay internally, e.g. in QTextEdit and QLineEdit, for starting a drag.</para>
            <para>The default value is 500 ms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.QuitOnLastWindowClosed">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the application implicitly quits when the last window is closed.</para>
            <para>The default is true.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, the applications quits when the last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed. By default this attribute is set for all widgets except for sub-windows. Refer to Qt::WindowType for a detailed list of Qt::Window objects.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.StyleSheet">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the application style sheet.</para>
            <para>By default, this property returns an empty string unless the user specifies the -stylesheet option on the command line when running the application.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QApplication.AutoSipEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds toggles automatic SIP (software input panel) visibility.</para>
            <para>Set this property to true to automatically display the SIP when entering widgets that accept keyboard input. This property only affects widgets with the WA_InputMethodEnabled attribute set, and is typically used to launch a virtual keyboard on devices which have very few or no keys.</para>
            <para> The property only has an effect on platforms which use software input panels, such as Windows CE and Symbian.</para>
            <para>The default is platform dependent.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QApplication.ColorSpec">
            <summary>
            <para>See setColorSpec() for full details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QApplication.ColorSpec.CustomColor">
            <summary>
            <para>The same as NormalColor for X11; allocates colors to a palette on demand under Windows</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QApplication.ColorSpec.ManyColor">
            <summary>
            <para>The right choice for applications that use thousands of colors</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QApplication.ColorSpec.NormalColor">
            <summary>
            <para>The default color allocation policy</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QApplication.Type.GuiClient">
            <summary>
            <para>A GUI client application</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QApplication.Type.GuiServer">
            <summary>
            <para>A GUI server application (for Qt for Embedded Linux)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QApplication.Type.Tty">
            <summary>
            <para>A console application</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QBrush">
            <summary>
            The QBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by QPainter.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A brush has a style, a color, a gradient and a texture.</para>
            <para>The brush style() defines the fill pattern using the Qt::BrushStyle enum. The default brush style is Qt::NoBrush (depending on how you construct a brush). This style tells the painter to not fill shapes. The standard style for filling is Qt::SolidPattern. The style can be set when the brush is created using the appropriate constructor, and in addition the setStyle() function provides means for altering the style once the brush is constructed.</para>
            <para>The brush color() defines the color of the fill pattern. The color can either be one of Qt's predefined colors, Qt::GlobalColor, or any other custom QColor. The currently set color can be retrieved and altered using the color() and setColor() functions, respectively.</para>
            <para>The gradient() defines the gradient fill used when the current style is either Qt::LinearGradientPattern, Qt::RadialGradientPattern or Qt::ConicalGradientPattern. Gradient brushes are created by giving a QGradient as a constructor argument when creating the QBrush. Qt provides three different gradients: QLinearGradient, QConicalGradient, and QRadialGradient - all of which inherit QGradient.</para>
            <para>     QRadialGradient gradient(50, 50, 50, 50, 50);</para>
            <para>     gradient.setColorAt(0, QColor::fromRgbF(0, 1, 0, 1));</para>
            <para>     gradient.setColorAt(1, QColor::fromRgbF(0, 0, 0, 0));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QBrush brush(gradient);</para>
            <para>The texture() defines the pixmap used when the current style is Qt::TexturePattern. You can create a brush with a texture by providing the pixmap when the brush is created or by using setTexture().</para>
            <para>Note that applying setTexture() makes style() == Qt::TexturePattern, regardless of previous style settings. Also, calling setColor() will not make a difference if the style is a gradient. The same is the case if the style is Qt::TexturePattern style unless the current texture is a QBitmap.</para>
            <para>The isOpaque() function returns true if the brush is fully opaque otherwise false. A brush is considered opaque if:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The alpha component of the color() is 255.</para>
            <para>Its texture() does not have an alpha channel and is not a QBitmap.</para>
            <para>The colors in the gradient() all have an alpha component that is 255.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	To specify the style and color of lines and outlines, use the QPainter's pen combined with Qt::PenStyle and Qt::GlobalColor: QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(Qt::cyan);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(Qt::darkCyan);</para>
            <para> painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100,100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(Qt::darkGreen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawRect(40, 40, 100, 100);</para>
            <para>Note that, by default, QPainter renders the outline (using the currently set pen) when drawing shapes. Use painter.setPen(Qt::NoPen) to disable this behavior.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For more information about painting in general, see the Paint System.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Qt::BrushStyle, QPainter, and QColor.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default black brush with the style Qt::NoBrush (i.e. this brush will not fill shapes).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a brush with a black color and a texture set to the given pixmap. The style is set to Qt::TexturePattern.</para>
            <para>See also setTexture().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a brush with a black color and a texture set to the given image. The style is set to Qt::TexturePattern.</para>
            <para>See also setTextureImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtGui.QGradient)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a brush based on the given gradient.</para>
            <para>The brush style is set to the corresponding gradient style (either Qt::LinearGradientPattern, Qt::RadialGradientPattern or Qt::ConicalGradientPattern).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a brush with the given color and the custom pattern stored in pixmap.</para>
            <para>The style is set to Qt::TexturePattern. The color will only have an effect for QBitmaps.</para>
            <para>See also setColor() and setPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtGui.QColor,QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default black brush with the style Qt::NoBrush (i.e. this brush will not fill shapes).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a black brush with the given style.</para>
            <para>See also setStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a brush with the given color and the custom pattern stored in pixmap.</para>
            <para>The style is set to Qt::TexturePattern. The color will only have an effect for QBitmaps.</para>
            <para>See also setColor() and setPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor,QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default black brush with the style Qt::NoBrush (i.e. this brush will not fill shapes).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.Gradient">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the gradient describing this brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.IsOpaque">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the brush is fully opaque otherwise false. A brush is considered opaque if:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The alpha component of the color() is 255.</para>
            <para>Its texture() does not have an alpha channel and is not a QBitmap.</para>
            <para>The colors in the gradient() all have an alpha component that is 255.</para>
            <para>It is an extended radial gradient.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.op_Inequality(QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the brush is different from the given brush; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two brushes are different if they have different styles, colors or transforms or different pixmaps or gradients depending on the style.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.op_Equality(QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the brush is equal to the given brush; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two brushes are equal if they have equal styles, colors and transforms and equal pixmaps or gradients depending on the style.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.SetColor(QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush color to the given color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.Swap(QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps brush other with this brush. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBrush.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBrush.Color">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush color.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush color to the given color.</para>
            <para>Note that calling setColor() will not make a difference if the style is a gradient. The same is the case if the style is Qt::TexturePattern style unless the current texture is a QBitmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBrush.Matrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current transformation matrix for the brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets matrix as an explicit transformation matrix on the current brush. The brush transformation matrix is merged with QPainter transformation matrix to produce the final result.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBrush.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush style.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush style to style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBrush.Texture">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the custom brush pattern, or a null pixmap if no custom brush pattern has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush pixmap to pixmap. The style is set to Qt::TexturePattern.</para>
            <para>The current brush color will only have an effect for monochrome pixmaps, i.e. for QPixmap::depth() == 1 (QBitmaps).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBrush.TextureImage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the custom brush pattern, or a null image if no custom brush pattern has been set.</para>
            <para>If the texture was set as a QPixmap it will be converted to a QImage.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush image to image. The style is set to Qt::TexturePattern.</para>
            <para>Note the current brush color will not have any affect on monochrome images, as opposed to calling setTexture() with a QBitmap. If you want to change the color of monochrome image brushes, either convert the image to QBitmap with QBitmap::fromImage() and set the resulting QBitmap as a texture, or change the entries in the color table for the image.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBrush.Transform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current transformation matrix for the brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets matrix as an explicit transformation matrix on the current brush. The brush transformation matrix is merged with QPainter transformation matrix to produce the final result.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColor">
            <summary>
            The QColor class provides colors based on RGB, HSV or CMYK values.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A color is normally specified in terms of RGB (red, green, and blue) components, but it is also possible to specify it in terms of HSV (hue, saturation, and value) and CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) components. In addition a color can be specified using a color name. The color name can be any of the SVG 1.0 color names.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>RGBHSVCMYK</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QColor constructor creates the color based on RGB values. To create a QColor based on either HSV or CMYK values, use the toHsv() and toCmyk() functions respectively. These functions return a copy of the color using the desired format. In addition the static fromRgb(), fromHsv() and fromCmyk() functions create colors from the specified values. Alternatively, a color can be converted to any of the three formats using the convertTo() function (returning a copy of the color in the desired format), or any of the setRgb(), setHsv() and setCmyk() functions altering this color's format. The spec() function tells how the color was specified.</para>
            <para>A color can be set by passing an RGB string (such as &amp;quot;#112233&amp;quot;), or a color name (such as &amp;quot;blue&amp;quot;), to the setNamedColor() function. The color names are taken from the SVG 1.0 color names. The name() function returns the name of the color in the format &amp;quot;#RRGGBB&amp;quot;. Colors can also be set using setRgb(), setHsv() and setCmyk(). To get a lighter or darker color use the lighter() and darker() functions respectively.</para>
            <para>The isValid() function indicates whether a QColor is legal at all. For example, a RGB color with RGB values out of range is illegal. For performance reasons, QColor mostly disregards illegal colors, and for that reason, the result of using an invalid color is undefined.</para>
            <para>The color components can be retrieved individually, e.g with red(), hue() and cyan(). The values of the color components can also be retrieved in one go using the getRgb(), getHsv() and getCmyk() functions. Using the RGB color model, the color components can in addition be accessed with rgb().</para>
            <para>There are several related non-members: QRgb is a typdef for an unsigned int representing the RGB value triplet (r, g, b). Note that it also can hold a value for the alpha-channel (for more information, see the Alpha-Blended Drawing section). The qRed(), qBlue() and qGreen() functions return the respective component of the given QRgb value, while the qRgb() and qRgba() functions create and return the QRgb triplet based on the given component values. Finally, the qAlpha() function returns the alpha component of the provided QRgb, and the qGray() function calculates and return a gray value based on the given value.</para>
            <para>QColor is platform and device independent. The QColormap class maps the color to the hardware.</para>
            <para>For more information about painting in general, see the Paint System documentation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Integer vs. Floating Point Precision</para>
            <para>QColor supports floating point precision and provides floating point versions of all the color components functions, e.g. getRgbF(), hueF() and fromCmykF(). Note that since the components are stored using 16-bit integers, there might be minor deviations between the values set using, for example, setRgbF() and the values returned by the getRgbF() function due to rounding.</para>
            <para>While the integer based functions take values in the range 0-255 (except hue() which must have values within the range 0-359), the floating point functions accept values in the range 0.0 - 1.0.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Alpha-Blended Drawing</para>
            <para>QColor also support alpha-blended outlining and filling. The alpha channel of a color specifies the transparency effect, 0 represents a fully transparent color, while 255 represents a fully opaque color. For example:</para>
            <para> // Specify semi-transparent red</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(QColor(255, 0, 0, 127));</para>
            <para> painter.drawRect(0, 0, width()/2, height());</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // Specify semi-transparent blue</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(QColor(0, 0, 255, 127));</para>
            <para> painter.drawRect(0, 0, width(), height()/2);</para>
            <para>The code above produces the following output:</para>
            <para>Alpha-blended drawing is supported on Windows, Mac OS X, and on X11 systems that have the X Render extension installed.</para>
            <para>The alpha channel of a color can be retrieved and set using the alpha() and setAlpha() functions if its value is an integer, and alphaF() and setAlphaF() if its value is qreal (double). By default, the alpha-channel is set to 255 (opaque). To retrieve and set all the RGB color components (including the alpha-channel) in one go, use the rgba() and setRgba() functions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Predefined Colors</para>
            <para>There are 20 predefined QColors described by the Qt::GlobalColor enum, including black, white, primary and secondary colors, darker versions of these colors and three shades of gray. QColor also recognizes a variety of color names; the static colorNames() function returns a QStringList color names that QColor knows about.</para>
            <para>Additionally, the Qt::color0, Qt::color1 and Qt::transparent colors are used for special purposes.</para>
            <para>Qt::color0 (zero pixel value) and Qt::color1 (non-zero pixel value) are special colors for drawing in QBitmaps. Painting with Qt::color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0 (transparent; i.e., background), and painting with Qt::color1 sets the bits to 1 (opaque; i.e., foreground).</para>
            <para>Qt::transparent is used to indicate a transparent pixel. When painting with this value, a pixel value will be used that is appropriate for the underlying pixel format in use.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The HSV Color Model</para>
            <para>The RGB model is hardware-oriented. Its representation is close to what most monitors show. In contrast, HSV represents color in a way more suited to the human perception of color. For example, the relationships &amp;quot;stronger than&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;darker than&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;the opposite of&amp;quot; are easily expressed in HSV but are much harder to express in RGB.</para>
            <para>HSV, like RGB, has three components:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>H, for hue, is in the range 0 to 359 if the color is chromatic (not gray), or meaningless if it is gray. It represents degrees on the color wheel familiar to most people. Red is 0 (degrees), green is 120, and blue is 240.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>S, for saturation, is in the range 0 to 255, and the bigger it is, the stronger the color is. Grayish colors have saturation near 0; very strong colors have saturation near 255.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>V, for value, is in the range 0 to 255 and represents lightness or brightness of the color. 0 is black; 255 is as far from black as possible.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Here are some examples: pure red is H=0, S=255, V=255; a dark red, moving slightly towards the magenta, could be H=350 (equivalent to -10), S=255, V=180; a grayish light red could have H about 0 (say 350-359 or 0-10), S about 50-100, and S=255.</para>
            <para>Qt returns a hue value of -1 for achromatic colors. If you pass a hue value that is too large, Qt forces it into range. Hue 360 or 720 is treated as 0; hue 540 is treated as 180.</para>
            <para>In addition to the standard HSV model, Qt provides an alpha-channel to feature alpha-blended drawing.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The HSL Color Model</para>
            <para>HSL is similar to HSV. Instead of value parameter from HSV, HSL has the lightness parameter. The lightness parameter goes from black to color and from color to white. If you go outside at the night its black or dark gray. At day its colorful but if you look in a really strong light a things they are going to white and wash out.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The CMYK Color Model</para>
            <para>While the RGB and HSV color models are used for display on computer monitors, the CMYK model is used in the four-color printing process of printing presses and some hard-copy devices.</para>
            <para>CMYK has four components, all in the range 0-255: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). Cyan, magenta and yellow are called subtractive colors; the CMYK color model creates color by starting with a white surface and then subtracting color by applying the appropriate components. While combining cyan, magenta and yellow gives the color black, subtracting one or more will yield any other color. When combined in various percentages, these three colors can create the entire spectrum of colors.</para>
            <para>Mixing 100 percent of cyan, magenta and yellow does produce black, but the result is unsatisfactory since it wastes ink, increases drying time, and gives a muddy colour when printing. For that reason, black is added in professional printing to provide a solid black tone; hence the term 'four color process'.</para>
            <para>In addition to the standard CMYK model, Qt provides an alpha-channel to feature alpha-blended drawing.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPalette, QBrush, and QApplication::setColorSpec().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>The alpha value of an invalid color is unspecified.</para>
            <para>See also isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a color that is a copy of color.</para>
            <para>See also isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Constructs a new color with a color value of color.</para>
            <para>See also isValid() and Predefined Colors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>The alpha value of an invalid color is unspecified.</para>
            <para>See also isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a named color in the same way as setNamedColor() using the given name.</para>
            <para>The color is left invalid if the name cannot be parsed.</para>
            <para>See also setNamedColor(), name(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor(QtGui.QColor.Spec)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>The alpha value of an invalid color is unspecified.</para>
            <para>See also isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a color with the RGB value r, g, b, and the alpha-channel (transparency) value of a.</para>
            <para>The color is left invalid if any of the arguments are invalid.</para>
            <para>See also setRgba() and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Black">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the black color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also blackF(), getCmyk(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.BlackF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the black color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also black(), getCmykF(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ColorNames">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QStringList containing the color names Qt knows about.</para>
            <para>See also Predefined Colors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ConvertTo(QtGui.QColor.Spec)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a copy of this color in the format specified by colorSpec.</para>
            <para>See also spec(), toCmyk(), toHsv(), toRgb(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Cyan">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cyan color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also cyanF(), getCmyk(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.CyanF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cyan color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also cyan(), getCmykF(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Dark(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use darker(factor) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Darker(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a darker (or lighter) color, but does not change this object.</para>
            <para>If the factor is greater than 100, this functions returns a darker color. Setting factor to 300 returns a color that has one-third the brightness. If the factor is less than 100, the return color is lighter, but we recommend using the lighter() function for this purpose. If the factor is 0 or negative, the return value is unspecified.</para>
            <para>The function converts the current RGB color to HSV, divides the value (V) component by factor and converts the color back to RGB.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also lighter() and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromCmyk(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the given CMYK color values: c (cyan), m (magenta), y (yellow), k (black), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0-255.</para>
            <para>See also toCmyk(), fromCmykF(), isValid(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromCmykF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the given CMYK color values: c (cyan), m (magenta), y (yellow), k (black), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>See also toCmyk(), fromCmyk(), isValid(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromHsl(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the HSV color values, h (hue), s (saturation), l (lightness), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>The value of s, l, and a must all be in the range 0-255; the value of h must be in the range 0-359.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also toHsl(), fromHslF(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromHslF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the HSV color values, h (hue), s (saturation), l (lightness), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also toHsl(), fromHsl(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromHsv(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the HSV color values, h (hue), s (saturation), v (value), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>The value of s, v, and a must all be in the range 0-255; the value of h must be in the range 0-359.</para>
            <para>See also toHsv(), fromHsvF(), isValid(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromHsvF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the HSV color values, h (hue), s (saturation), v (value), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>See also toHsv(), fromHsv(), isValid(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromRgb(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the given QRgb value rgb.</para>
            <para>The alpha component of rgb is ignored (i.e. it is automatically set to 255), use the fromRgba() function to include the alpha-channel specified by the given QRgb value.</para>
            <para>See also fromRgba(), fromRgbF(), toRgb(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromRgb(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the RGB color values, r (red), g (green), b (blue), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0-255.</para>
            <para>See also toRgb(), fromRgbF(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromRgbF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the RGB color values, r (red), g (green), b (blue), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>See also fromRgb(), toRgb(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.FromRgba(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function that returns a QColor constructed from the given QRgb value rgba.</para>
            <para>Unlike the fromRgb() function, the alpha-channel specified by the given QRgb value is included.</para>
            <para>See also fromRgb() and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetCmyk(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by c, m, y, k, and a, to the cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's CMYK value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the cyan(), magenta(), yellow(), black() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setCmyk() and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetCmyk(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by c, m, y, k, and a, to the cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's CMYK value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the cyan(), magenta(), yellow(), black() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setCmyk() and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetCmykF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by c, m, y, k, and a, to the cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's CMYK value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the cyanF(), magentaF(), yellowF(), blackF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setCmykF() and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetCmykF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by c, m, y, k, and a, to the cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's CMYK value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the cyanF(), magentaF(), yellowF(), blackF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setCmykF() and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHsl(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, l, and a, to the hue, saturation, lightness, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSL value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hueHsl(), saturationHsl(), lightness() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHsl(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, l, and a, to the hue, saturation, lightness, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSL value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hueHsl(), saturationHsl(), lightness() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHslF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, l, and a, to the hue, saturation, lightness, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSL value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hueHslF(), saturationHslF(), lightnessF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHslF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, l, and a, to the hue, saturation, lightness, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSL value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hueHslF(), saturationHslF(), lightnessF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHsv(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, v, and a, to the hue, saturation, value, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSV value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hue(), saturation(), value() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setHsv() and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHsv(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, v, and a, to the hue, saturation, value, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSV value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hue(), saturation(), value() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setHsv() and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHsvF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, v, and a, to the hue, saturation, value, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSV value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hueF(), saturationF(), valueF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setHsv() and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetHsvF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by h, s, v, and a, to the hue, saturation, value, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's HSV value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the hueF(), saturationF(), valueF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>See also setHsv() and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetRgb(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by r, g, b, and a, to the red, green, blue, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's RGB value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the red(), green(), blue() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>See also rgb() and setRgb().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetRgb(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by r, g, b, and a, to the red, green, blue, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's RGB value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the red(), green(), blue() and alpha() functions.</para>
            <para>See also rgb() and setRgb().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetRgbF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by r, g, b, and a, to the red, green, blue, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's RGB value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the redF(), greenF(), blueF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>See also rgb() and setRgb().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.GetRgbF(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents pointed to by r, g, b, and a, to the red, green, blue, and alpha-channel (transparency) components of the color's RGB value.</para>
            <para>These components can be retrieved individually using the redF(), greenF(), blueF() and alphaF() functions.</para>
            <para>See also rgb() and setRgb().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HslHue">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also getHslF() and getHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HslHueF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also hue() and getHslF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HslSaturation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the saturation color component of this color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also saturationF(), getHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HslSaturationF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the saturation color component of this color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also saturationF() and getHslF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HsvHue">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also hueF(), getHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HsvHueF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also hue(), getHsvF(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HsvSaturation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the saturation color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also saturationF(), getHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HsvSaturationF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the saturation color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also saturation(), getHsvF(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Hue">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>The color is implicitly converted to HSV.</para>
            <para>See also hsvHue(), hueF(), getHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.HueF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>The color is implicitly converted to HSV.</para>
            <para>See also hsvHueF(), hue(), getHsvF(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the color is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.IsValidColor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the name is a valid color name and can be used to construct a valid QColor object, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>It uses the same algorithm used in setNamedColor().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also setNamedColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Light(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use lighter(factor) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Lighter(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a lighter (or darker) color, but does not change this object.</para>
            <para>If the factor is greater than 100, this functions returns a lighter color. Setting factor to 150 returns a color that is 50% brighter. If the factor is less than 100, the return color is darker, but we recommend using the darker() function for this purpose. If the factor is 0 or negative, the return value is unspecified.</para>
            <para>The function converts the current RGB color to HSV, multiplies the value (V) component by factor and converts the color back to RGB.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also darker() and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Lightness">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the lightness color component of this color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also lightnessF() and getHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.LightnessF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the lightness color component of this color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also value() and getHslF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Magenta">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the magenta color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also magentaF(), getCmyk(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.MagentaF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the magenta color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also magenta(), getCmykF(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Name">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the color in the format &quot;#RRGGBB&quot;; i.e. a &quot;#&quot; character followed by three two-digit hexadecimal numbers.</para>
            <para>See also setNamedColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.op_Inequality(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this color has a different RGB and alpha values from color; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.op_Equality(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this color has the same RGB and alpha values as color; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Saturation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the saturation color component of this color.</para>
            <para>The color is implicitly converted to HSV.</para>
            <para>See also hsvSaturation(), saturationF(), getHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SaturationF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the saturation color component of this color.</para>
            <para>The color is implicitly converted to HSV.</para>
            <para>See also hsvSaturationF(), saturation(), getHsvF(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetCmyk(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the color to CMYK values, c (cyan), m (magenta), y (yellow), k (black), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0-255.</para>
            <para>See also getCmyk(), setCmykF(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetCmykF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the color to CMYK values, c (cyan), m (magenta), y (yellow), k (black), and a (alpha-channel, i.e. transparency).</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>See also getCmykF(), setCmyk(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetHsl(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets a HSL color value; h is the hue, s is the saturation, l is the lightness and a is the alpha component of the HSL color.</para>
            <para>The saturation, value and alpha-channel values must be in the range 0-255, and the hue value must be greater than -1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also getHsl() and setHslF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetHslF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets a HSL color lightness; h is the hue, s is the saturation, l is the lightness and a is the alpha component of the HSL color.</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also getHslF() and setHsl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetHsv(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets a HSV color value; h is the hue, s is the saturation, v is the value and a is the alpha component of the HSV color.</para>
            <para>The saturation, value and alpha-channel values must be in the range 0-255, and the hue value must be greater than -1.</para>
            <para>See also hsv(), getHsv(), setHsvF(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetHsvF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets a HSV color value; h is the hue, s is the saturation, v is the value and a is the alpha component of the HSV color.</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>See also getHsvF(), setHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetNamedColor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the RGB value of this QColor to name, which may be in one of these formats:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>#RGB (each of R, G, and B is a single hex digit)</para>
            <para>#RRGGBB</para>
            <para>#RRRGGGBBB</para>
            <para>#RRRRGGGGBBBB</para>
            <para>A name from the list of colors defined in the list of SVG color keyword names provided by the World Wide Web Consortium; for example, &quot;steelblue&quot; or &quot;gainsboro&quot;. These color names work on all platforms. Note that these color names are not the same as defined by the Qt::GlobalColor enums, e.g. &quot;green&quot; and Qt::green does not refer to the same color.</para>
            <para>transparent - representing the absence of a color.</para>
            <para>X11 only: If allowX11ColorNames() returns true, any valid X11 color name. See the documentation for XParseColor() for information about valid X11 color names.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The color is invalid if name cannot be parsed.</para>
            <para>See also QColor(), name(), isValid(), and allowX11ColorNames().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetRgb(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the RGB value to r, g, b and the alpha value to a.</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0-255.</para>
            <para>See also rgb(), getRgb(), and setRgbF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.SetRgbF(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the color channels of this color to r (red), g (green), b (blue) and a (alpha, transparency).</para>
            <para>All values must be in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            <para>See also rgb(), getRgbF(), and setRgb().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.spec">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns how the color was specified.</para>
            <para>See also Spec and convertTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ToCmyk">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a CMYK QColor based on this color.</para>
            <para>See also fromCmyk(), convertTo(), isValid(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ToHsl">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns an HSL QColor based on this color.</para>
            <para>See also fromHsl(), convertTo(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ToHsv">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns an HSV QColor based on this color.</para>
            <para>See also fromHsv(), convertTo(), isValid(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ToRgb">
            <summary>
            <para>Create and returns an RGB QColor based on this color.</para>
            <para>See also fromRgb(), convertTo(), and isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also valueF(), getHsv(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.ValueF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also value(), getHsvF(), and The HSV Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.Yellow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the yellow color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also yellowF(), getCmyk(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColor.YellowF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the yellow color component of this color.</para>
            <para>See also yellow(), getCmykF(), and The CMYK Color Model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.Alpha">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alpha color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the alpha of this color to alpha. Integer alpha is specified in the range 0-255.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.AlphaF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alpha color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the alpha of this color to alpha. qreal alpha is specified in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.Blue">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the blue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the blue color component of this color to blue. Integer components are specified in the range 0-255.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.BlueF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the blue color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the blue color component of this color to blue. Float components are specified in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.Green">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the green color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the green color component of this color to green. Integer components are specified in the range 0-255.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.GreenF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the green color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the green color component of this color to green. Float components are specified in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.Red">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the red color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the red color component of this color to red. Integer components are specified in the range 0-255.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.RedF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the red color component of this color.</para>
            <para>Sets the red color component of this color to red. Float components are specified in the range 0.0-1.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.Rgb">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the RGB value of the color. The alpha value is opaque.</para>
            <para>Sets the RGB value to r, g, b and the alpha value to a.</para>
            <para>All the values must be in the range 0-255.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColor.Rgba">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the RGB value of the color, including its alpha.</para>
            <para>For an invalid color, the alpha value of the returned color is unspecified.</para>
            <para>Sets the RGB value to rgba, including its alpha.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColor.Spec">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of color specified, either RGB, HSV, CMYK or HSL.</para>
            <para>See also spec() and convertTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCursor">
            <summary>
            The QCursor class provides a mouse cursor with an arbitrary shape.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is mainly used to create mouse cursors that are associated with particular widgets and to get and set the position of the mouse cursor.</para>
            <para>Qt has a number of standard cursor shapes, but you can also make custom cursor shapes based on a QBitmap, a mask and a hotspot.</para>
            <para>To associate a cursor with a widget, use QWidget::setCursor(). To associate a cursor with all widgets (normally for a short period of time), use QApplication::setOverrideCursor().</para>
            <para>To set a cursor shape use QCursor::setShape() or use the QCursor constructor which takes the shape as argument, or you can use one of the predefined cursors defined in the Qt::CursorShape enum.</para>
            <para>If you want to create a cursor with your own bitmap, either use the QCursor constructor which takes a bitmap and a mask or the constructor which takes a pixmap as arguments.</para>
            <para>To set or get the position of the mouse cursor use the static methods QCursor::pos() and QCursor::setPos().</para>
            <para>Note: It is possible to create a QCursor before QApplication, but it is not useful except as a place-holder for a real QCursor created after QApplication. Attempting to use a QCursor that was created before QApplication will result in a crash.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A Note for X11 Users</para>
            <para>On X11, Qt supports the Xcursor library, which allows for full color icon themes. The table below shows the cursor name used for each Qt::CursorShape value. If a cursor cannot be found using the name shown below, a standard X11 cursor will be used instead. Note: X11 does not provide appropriate cursors for all possible Qt::CursorShape values. It is possible that some cursors will be taken from the Xcursor theme, while others will use an internal bitmap cursor.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ShapeQt::CursorShape ValueCursor NameShapeQt::CursorShape ValueCursor Name</para>
            <para>	Qt::ArrowCursor	left_ptr	Qt::SizeVerCursor	size_ver</para>
            <para>	Qt::UpArrowCursor	up_arrow	Qt::SizeHorCursor	size_hor</para>
            <para>	Qt::CrossCursor	cross	Qt::SizeBDiagCursor	size_bdiag</para>
            <para>	Qt::IBeamCursor	ibeam	Qt::SizeFDiagCursor	size_fdiag</para>
            <para>	Qt::WaitCursor	wait	Qt::SizeAllCursor	size_all</para>
            <para>	Qt::BusyCursor	left_ptr_watch	Qt::SplitVCursor	split_v</para>
            <para>	Qt::ForbiddenCursor	forbidden	Qt::SplitHCursor	split_h</para>
            <para>	Qt::PointingHandCursor	pointing_hand	Qt::OpenHandCursor	openhand</para>
            <para>	Qt::WhatsThisCursor	whats_this	Qt::ClosedHandCursor	closedhand</para>
            <para>	Qt::DragMoveCursor	dnd-move or move	Qt::DragCopyCursor	dnd-copy or copy</para>
            <para>	Qt::DragLinkCursor	dnd-link or link</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget and GUI Design Handbook: Cursors.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor with the default arrow shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the cursor c.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.#ctor(System.IntPtr)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor with the default arrow shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QBitmap,QtGui.QBitmap,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor with the default arrow shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor with the default arrow shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.CursorShape)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor with the specified shape.</para>
            <para>See Qt::CursorShape for a list of shapes.</para>
            <para>See also setShape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.Bitmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor bitmap, or 0 if it is one of the standard cursors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.Handle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a platform-specific cursor handle. The HCURSOR_or_HANDLE type is HCURSOR on Windows and Qt::HANDLE on X11 and Mac OS X. On Qt for Embedded Linux it is an integer.</para>
            <para>Warning: Using the value returned by this function is not portable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.HotSpot">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor hot spot, or (0, 0) if it is one of the standard cursors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor bitmap mask, or 0 if it is one of the standard cursors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.Pixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor pixmap. This is only valid if the cursor is a pixmap cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.SetPos(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor (hot spot) to the global screen position (x, y).</para>
            <para>You can call QWidget::mapToGlobal() to translate widget coordinates to global screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), QWidget::mapFromGlobal(), and QWidget::mapToGlobal().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCursor.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCursor.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the cursor (hot spot) in global screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>You can call QWidget::mapFromGlobal() to translate it to widget coordinates.</para>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Moves the cursor (hot spot) to the global screen position at point p.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCursor.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor shape identifier. The return value is one of the Qt::CursorShape enum values (cast to an int).</para>
            <para>Sets the cursor to the shape identified by shape.</para>
            <para>See Qt::CursorShape for the list of cursor shapes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIcon">
            <summary>
            The QIcon class provides scalable icons in different modes and states.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QIcon can generate smaller, larger, active, and disabled pixmaps from the set of pixmaps it is given. Such pixmaps are used by Qt widgets to show an icon representing a particular action.</para>
            <para>The simplest use of QIcon is to create one from a QPixmap file or resource, and then use it, allowing Qt to work out all the required icon styles and sizes. For example:</para>
            <para> QToolButton *button = new QToolButton;</para>
            <para> button-&amp;gt;setIcon(QIcon(&amp;quot;open.xpm&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>To undo a QIcon, simply set a null icon in its place:</para>
            <para> button-&amp;gt;setIcon(QIcon());</para>
            <para>Use the QImageReader::supportedImageFormats() and QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() functions to retrieve a complete list of the supported file formats.</para>
            <para>When you retrieve a pixmap using pixmap(QSize, Mode, State), and no pixmap for this given size, mode and state has been added with addFile() or addPixmap(), then QIcon will generate one on the fly. This pixmap generation happens in a QIconEngineV2. The default engine scales pixmaps down if required, but never up, and it uses the current style to calculate a disabled appearance. By using custom icon engines, you can customize every aspect of generated icons. With QIconEnginePluginV2 it is possible to register different icon engines for different file suffixes, making it possible for third parties to provide additional icon engines to those included with Qt.</para>
            <para>Note: Since Qt 4.2, an icon engine that supports SVG is included.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Making Classes that Use QIcon</para>
            <para>If you write your own widgets that have an option to set a small pixmap, consider allowing a QIcon to be set for that pixmap. The Qt class QToolButton is an example of such a widget.</para>
            <para>Provide a method to set a QIcon, and when you draw the icon, choose whichever pixmap is appropriate for the current state of your widget. For example:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::drawIcon(QPainter *painter, QPoint pos)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPixmap pixmap = icon.pixmap(QSize(22, 22),</para>
            <para>                                    isEnabled() ? QIcon::Normal</para>
            <para>                                                : QIcon::Disabled,</para>
            <para>                                    isChecked() ? QIcon::On</para>
            <para>                                                : QIcon::Off);</para>
            <para>     painter-&amp;gt;drawPixmap(pos, pixmap);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>You might also make use of the Active mode, perhaps making your widget Active when the mouse is over the widget (see QWidget::enterEvent()), while the mouse is pressed pending the release that will activate the function, or when it is the currently selected item. If the widget can be toggled, the &amp;quot;On&amp;quot; mode might be used to draw a different icon.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also GUI Design Handbook: Iconic Label and Icons Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an icon from a pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other. This is very fast.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.#ctor(QtGui.QIconEngine)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an icon with a specific icon engine. The icon takes ownership of the engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.#ctor(QtGui.QIconEngineV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an icon with a specific icon engine. The icon takes ownership of the engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an icon from the file with the given fileName. The file will be loaded on demand.</para>
            <para>If fileName contains a relative path (e.g. the filename only) the relevant file must be found relative to the runtime working directory.</para>
            <para>The file name can be either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See the Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>Use the QImageReader::supportedImageFormats() and QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() functions to retrieve a complete list of the supported file formats.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.ActualSize(QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the actual size of the icon for the requested size, mode, and state. The result might be smaller than requested, but never larger.</para>
            <para>See also pixmap() and paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.AddFile(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds an image from the file with the given fileName to the icon, as a specialization for size, mode and state. The file will be loaded on demand. Note: custom icon engines are free to ignore additionally added pixmaps.</para>
            <para>If fileName contains a relative path (e.g. the filename only) the relevant file must be found relative to the runtime working directory.</para>
            <para>The file name can be either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See the Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>Use the QImageReader::supportedImageFormats() and QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() functions to retrieve a complete list of the supported file formats.</para>
            <para>Note: When you add a non-empty filename to a QIcon, the icon becomes non-null, even if the file doesn't exist or points to a corrupt file.</para>
            <para>See also addPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.AddFile(System.String,QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds an image from the file with the given fileName to the icon, as a specialization for size, mode and state. The file will be loaded on demand. Note: custom icon engines are free to ignore additionally added pixmaps.</para>
            <para>If fileName contains a relative path (e.g. the filename only) the relevant file must be found relative to the runtime working directory.</para>
            <para>The file name can be either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See the Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>Use the QImageReader::supportedImageFormats() and QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() functions to retrieve a complete list of the supported file formats.</para>
            <para>Note: When you add a non-empty filename to a QIcon, the icon becomes non-null, even if the file doesn't exist or points to a corrupt file.</para>
            <para>See also addPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.AddPixmap(QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds pixmap to the icon, as a specialization for mode and state.</para>
            <para>Custom icon engines are free to ignore additionally added pixmaps.</para>
            <para>See also addFile().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.AvailableSizes(QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of available icon sizes for the specified mode and state.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.CacheKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies the contents of this QIcon object. Distinct QIcon objects can have the same key if they refer to the same contents.</para>
            <para>The cacheKey() will change when the icon is altered via addPixmap() or addFile().</para>
            <para>Cache keys are mostly useful in conjunction with caching.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::cacheKey().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.FromTheme(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QIcon corresponding to name in the current icon theme. If no such icon is found in the current theme fallback is returned instead.</para>
            <para>The latest version of the freedesktop icon specification and naming specification can be obtained here:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>http://standards.freedesktop.org/icon-theme-spec/icon-theme-spec-latest.html</para>
            <para>http://standards.freedesktop.org/icon-naming-spec/icon-naming-spec-latest.html</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To fetch an icon from the current icon theme:</para>
            <para>     QIcon undoicon = QIcon::fromTheme(&quot;edit-undo&quot;);</para>
            <para>Or if you want to provide a guaranteed fallback for platforms that do not support theme icons, you can use the second argument:</para>
            <para>     QIcon undoicon = QIcon::fromTheme(&quot;edit-undo&quot;, QIcon(&quot;:/undo.png&quot;));</para>
            <para>Note: By default, only X11 will support themed icons. In order to use themed icons on Mac and Windows, you will have to bundle a compliant theme in one of your themeSearchPaths() and set the appropriate themeName().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also themeName(), setThemeName(), and themeSearchPaths().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.FromTheme(System.String,QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QIcon corresponding to name in the current icon theme. If no such icon is found in the current theme fallback is returned instead.</para>
            <para>The latest version of the freedesktop icon specification and naming specification can be obtained here:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>http://standards.freedesktop.org/icon-theme-spec/icon-theme-spec-latest.html</para>
            <para>http://standards.freedesktop.org/icon-naming-spec/icon-naming-spec-latest.html</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To fetch an icon from the current icon theme:</para>
            <para>     QIcon undoicon = QIcon::fromTheme(&quot;edit-undo&quot;);</para>
            <para>Or if you want to provide a guaranteed fallback for platforms that do not support theme icons, you can use the second argument:</para>
            <para>     QIcon undoicon = QIcon::fromTheme(&quot;edit-undo&quot;, QIcon(&quot;:/undo.png&quot;));</para>
            <para>Note: By default, only X11 will support themed icons. In order to use themed icons on Mac and Windows, you will have to bundle a compliant theme in one of your themeSearchPaths() and set the appropriate themeName().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also themeName(), setThemeName(), and themeSearchPaths().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.HasThemeIcon(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if there is an icon available for name in the current icon theme, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also themeSearchPaths(), fromTheme(), and setThemeName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the icon is empty; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>An icon is empty if it has neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            <para>Note: Even a non-null icon might not be able to create valid pixmaps, eg. if the file does not exist or cannot be read.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Name">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name used to create the icon, if available.</para>
            <para>Depending on the way the icon was created, it may have an associated name. This is the case for icons created with fromTheme() or icons using a QIconEngine which supports the QIconEngineV2::IconNameHook.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also fromTheme() and QIconEngine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Uses the painter to paint the icon with specified alignment, required mode, and state into the rectangle rect.</para>
            <para>See also actualSize() and pixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Uses the painter to paint the icon with specified alignment, required mode, and state into the rectangle rect.</para>
            <para>See also actualSize() and pixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Pixmap(QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pixmap with the requested size, mode, and state, generating one if necessary. The pixmap might be smaller than requested, but never larger.</para>
            <para>See also setPixmap(), actualSize(), and paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Pixmap(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a pixmap of size QSize(extent, extent). The pixmap might be smaller than requested, but never larger.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Pixmap(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a pixmap of size QSize(w, h). The pixmap might be smaller than requested, but never larger.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.SerialNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies the contents of this QIcon object. Distinct QIcon objects can have the same serial number if they refer to the same contents (but they don't have to). Also, the serial number of a QIcon object may change during its lifetime.</para>
            <para>Use cacheKey() instead.</para>
            <para>A null icon always has a serial number of 0.</para>
            <para>Serial numbers are mostly useful in conjunction with caching.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::serialNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Swap(QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps icon other with this icon. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIcon.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIcon.ThemeName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the current icon theme.</para>
            <para>On X11, the current icon theme depends on your desktop settings. On other platforms it is not set by default.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the current icon theme to name.</para>
            <para>The name should correspond to a directory name in the themeSearchPath() containing an index.theme file describing it's contents.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIcon.ThemeSearchPaths">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the search paths for icon themes.</para>
            <para>The default value will depend on the platform:</para>
            <para>On X11, the search path will use the XDG_DATA_DIRS environment variable if available.</para>
            <para>By default all platforms will have the resource directory :\icons as a fallback. You can use &quot;rcc -project&quot; to generate a resource file from your icon theme.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the search paths for icon themes to paths.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIcon.Mode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type describes the mode for which a pixmap is intended to be used. The currently defined modes are:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIcon.Mode.Active">
            <summary>
            <para>Display the pixmap when the functionality represented by the icon is available and the user is interacting with the icon, for example, moving the mouse over it or clicking it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIcon.Mode.Disabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Display the pixmap when the functionality represented by the icon is not available.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIcon.Mode.Normal">
            <summary>
            <para>Display the pixmap when the user is not interacting with the icon, but the functionality represented by the icon is available.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIcon.Mode.Selected">
            <summary>
            <para>Display the pixmap when the item represented by the icon is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIcon.State">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the state for which a pixmap is intended to be used. The state can be:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIcon.State.Off">
            <summary>
            <para>Display the pixmap when the widget is in an &quot;off&quot; state</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIcon.State.On">
            <summary>
            <para>Display the pixmap when the widget is in an &quot;on&quot; state</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QKeySequence">
            <summary>
            The QKeySequence class encapsulates a key sequence as used by shortcuts.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>In its most common form, a key sequence describes a combination of keys that must be used together to perform some action. Key sequences are used with QAction objects to specify which keyboard shortcuts can be used to trigger actions.</para>
            <para>Key sequences can be constructed for use as keyboard shortcuts in three different ways:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For standard shortcuts, a standard key can be used to request the platform-specific key sequence associated with each shortcut.</para>
            <para>For custom shortcuts, human-readable strings such as &amp;quot;Ctrl+X&amp;quot; can be used, and these can be translated into the appropriate shortcuts for users of different languages. Translations are made in the &amp;quot;QShortcut&amp;quot; context.</para>
            <para>For hard-coded shortcuts, integer key codes can be specified with a combination of values defined by the Qt::Key and Qt::Modifier enum values. Each key code consists of a single Qt::Key value and zero or more modifiers, such as Qt::SHIFT, Qt::CTRL, Qt::ALT and Qt::META.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For example, Ctrl P might be a sequence used as a shortcut for printing a document, and can be specified in any of the following ways:</para>
            <para> QKeySequence(QKeySequence::Print);</para>
            <para> QKeySequence(tr(&amp;quot;Ctrl+P&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> QKeySequence(tr(&amp;quot;Ctrl+p&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> QKeySequence(Qt::CTRL + Qt::Key_P);</para>
            <para>Note that, for letters, the case used in the specification string does not matter. In the above examples, the user does not need to hold down the Shift key to activate a shortcut specified with &amp;quot;Ctrl+P&amp;quot;. However, for other keys, the use of Shift as an unspecified extra modifier key can lead to confusion for users of an application whose keyboards have different layouts to those used by the developers. See the Keyboard Layout Issues section below for more details.</para>
            <para>It is preferable to use standard shortcuts where possible. When creating key sequences for non-standard shortcuts, you should use human-readable strings in preference to hard-coded integer values.</para>
            <para>QKeySequence objects can be cast to a QString to obtain a human-readable translated version of the sequence. Similarly, the toString() function produces human-readable strings for use in menus. On Mac OS X, the appropriate symbols are used to describe keyboard shortcuts using special keys on the Macintosh keyboard.</para>
            <para>An alternative way to specify hard-coded key codes is to use the Unicode code point of the character; for example, 'A' gives the same key sequence as Qt::Key_A.</para>
            <para>Note: On Mac OS X, references to &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot;, Qt::CTRL, Qt::Control and Qt::ControlModifier correspond to the Command keys on the Macintosh keyboard, and references to &amp;quot;Meta&amp;quot;, Qt::META, Qt::Meta and Qt::MetaModifier correspond to the Control keys. Developers on Mac OS X can use the same shortcut descriptions across all platforms, and their applications will automatically work as expected on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Standard Shortcuts</para>
            <para>QKeySequence defines many standard keyboard shortcuts to reduce the amount of effort required when setting up actions in a typical application. The table below shows some common key sequences that are often used for these standard shortcuts by applications on four widely-used platforms. Note that on Mac OS X, the Ctrl value corresponds to the Command keys on the Macintosh keyboard, and the Meta value corresponds to the Control keys.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>StandardKeyWindowsMac OS XKDEGNOMES60</para>
            <para>HelpContents	F1	Ctrl+?	F1	F1	F2</para>
            <para>WhatsThis	Shift+F1	Shift+F1	Shift+F1	Shift+F1	Shift+F1</para>
            <para>Open	Ctrl+O	Ctrl+O	Ctrl+O	Ctrl+O	(none)</para>
            <para>Close	Ctrl+F4, Ctrl+W	Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4	Ctrl+W	Ctrl+W	(none)</para>
            <para>Save	Ctrl+S	Ctrl+S	Ctrl+S	Ctrl+S	(none)</para>
            <para>Quit	Ctrl+Q	Qtrl+Q	Qtrl+Q	(none)</para>
            <para>SaveAs	Ctrl+Shift+S	Ctrl+Shift+S	(none)</para>
            <para>New	Ctrl+N	Ctrl+N	Ctrl+N	Ctrl+N	(none)</para>
            <para>Delete	Del	Del, Meta+D	Del, Ctrl+D	Del, Ctrl+D	Del</para>
            <para>Cut	Ctrl+X, Shift+Del	Ctrl+X	Ctrl+X, F20, Shift+Del	Ctrl+X, F20, Shift+Del	Ctrl+X</para>
            <para>Copy	Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Ins	Ctrl+C	Ctrl+C, F16, Ctrl+Ins	Ctrl+C, F16, Ctrl+Ins	Ctrl+C</para>
            <para>Paste	Ctrl+V, Shift+Ins	Ctrl+V	Ctrl+V, F18, Shift+Ins	Ctrl+V, F18, Shift+Ins	Ctrl+V</para>
            <para>Preferences	Ctrl+,	(none)</para>
            <para>Undo	Ctrl+Z, Alt+Backspace	Ctrl+Z	Ctrl+Z, F14	Ctrl+Z, F14	Ctrl+Z</para>
            <para>Redo	Ctrl+Y, Shift+Ctrl+Z, Alt+Shift+Backspace	Ctrl+Shift+Z	Ctrl+Shift+Z	Ctrl+Shift+Z	(none)</para>
            <para>Back	Alt+Left, Backspace	Ctrl+[	Alt+Left	Alt+Left	(none)</para>
            <para>Forward	Alt+Right, Shift+Backspace	Ctrl+]	Alt+Right	Alt+Right	(none)</para>
            <para>Refresh	F5	F5	F5	Ctrl+R, F5	(none)</para>
            <para>ZoomIn	Ctrl+Plus	Ctrl+Plus	Ctrl+Plus	Ctrl+Plus	(none)</para>
            <para>ZoomOut	Ctrl+Minus	Ctrl+Minus	Ctrl+Minus	Ctrl+Minus	(none)</para>
            <para>Print	Ctrl+P	Ctrl+P	Ctrl+P	Ctrl+P	(none)</para>
            <para>AddTab	Ctrl+T	Ctrl+T	Ctrl+Shift+N, Ctrl+T	Ctrl+T	(none)</para>
            <para>NextChild	Ctrl+Tab, Forward, Ctrl+F6	Ctrl+}, Forward, Ctrl+Tab	Ctrl+Tab, Forward, Ctrl+Comma	Ctrl+Tab, Forward	(none)</para>
            <para>PreviousChild	Ctrl+Shift+Tab, Back, Ctrl+Shift+F6	Ctrl+{, Back, Ctrl+Shift+Tab	Ctrl+Shift+Tab, Back, Ctrl+Period	Ctrl+Shift+Tab, Back	(none)</para>
            <para>Find	Ctrl+F	Ctrl+F	Ctrl+F	Ctrl+F	(none)</para>
            <para>FindNext	F3, Ctrl+G	Ctrl+G	F3	Ctrl+G, F3	(none)</para>
            <para>FindPrevious	Shift+F3, Ctrl+Shift+G	Ctrl+Shift+G	Shift+F3	Ctrl+Shift+G, Shift+F3	(none)</para>
            <para>Replace	Ctrl+H	(none)	Ctrl+R	Ctrl+H	(none)</para>
            <para>SelectAll	Ctrl+A	Ctrl+A	Ctrl+A	Ctrl+A	(none)</para>
            <para>Bold	Ctrl+B	Ctrl+B	Ctrl+B	Ctrl+B	(none)</para>
            <para>Italic	Ctrl+I	Ctrl+I	Ctrl+I	Ctrl+I	(none)</para>
            <para>Underline	Ctrl+U	Ctrl+U	Ctrl+U	Ctrl+U	(none)</para>
            <para>MoveToNextChar	Right	Right	Right	Right	Right</para>
            <para>MoveToPreviousChar	Left	Left	Left	Left	Left</para>
            <para>MoveToNextWord	Ctrl+Right	Alt+Right	Ctrl+Right	Ctrl+Right	Ctrl+Right</para>
            <para>MoveToPreviousWord	Ctrl+Left	Alt+Left	Ctrl+Left	Ctrl+Left	Ctrl+Left</para>
            <para>MoveToNextLine	Down	Down	Down	Down	Down</para>
            <para>MoveToPreviousLine	Up	Up	Up	Up	Up</para>
            <para>MoveToNextPage	PgDown	PgDown, Alt+PgDown, Meta+Down, Meta+PgDown	PgDown	PgDown	PgDown</para>
            <para>MoveToPreviousPage	PgUp	PgUp, Alt+PgUp, Meta+Up, Meta+PgUp	PgUp	PgUp	PgUp</para>
            <para>MoveToStartOfLine	Home	Ctrl+Left, Meta+Left	Home	Home	Home</para>
            <para>MoveToEndOfLine	End	Ctrl+Right, Meta+Right	End	End	End</para>
            <para>MoveToStartOfBlock	(none)	Alt+Up, Meta+A	(none)	(none)	(none)</para>
            <para>MoveToEndOfBlock	(none)	Alt+Down, Meta+E	(none)	(none)	(none)</para>
            <para>MoveToStartOfDocument	Ctrl+Home	Ctrl+Up, Home	Ctrl+Home	Ctrl+Home	Ctrl+Home</para>
            <para>MoveToEndOfDocument	Ctrl+End	Ctrl+Down, End	Ctrl+End	Ctrl+End	Ctrl+End</para>
            <para>SelectNextChar	Shift+Right	Shift+Right	Shift+Right	Shift+Right	Shift+Right</para>
            <para>SelectPreviousChar	Shift+Left	Shift+Left	Shift+Left	Shift+Left	Shift+Left</para>
            <para>SelectNextWord	Ctrl+Shift+Right	Alt+Shift+Right	Ctrl+Shift+Right	Ctrl+Shift+Right	Ctrl+Shift+Right</para>
            <para>SelectPreviousWord	Ctrl+Shift+Left	Alt+Shift+Left	Ctrl+Shift+Left	Ctrl+Shift+Left	Ctrl+Shift+Left</para>
            <para>SelectNextLine	Shift+Down	Shift+Down	Shift+Down	Shift+Down	Shift+Down</para>
            <para>SelectPreviousLine	Shift+Up	Shift+Up	Shift+Up	Shift+Up	Shift+Up</para>
            <para>SelectNextPage	Shift+PgDown	Shift+PgDown	Shift+PgDown	Shift+PgDown	Shift+PgDown</para>
            <para>SelectPreviousPage	Shift+PgUp	Shift+PgUp	Shift+PgUp	Shift+PgUp	Shift+PgUp</para>
            <para>SelectStartOfLine	Shift+Home	Ctrl+Shift+Left	Shift+Home	Shift+Home	Shift+Home</para>
            <para>SelectEndOfLine	Shift+End	Ctrl+Shift+Right	Shift+End	Shift+End	Shift+End</para>
            <para>SelectStartOfBlock	(none)	Alt+Shift+Up, Meta+Shift+A	(none)	(none)	(none)</para>
            <para>SelectEndOfBlock	(none)	Alt+Shift+Down, Meta+Shift+E	(none)	(none)	(none)</para>
            <para>SelectStartOfDocument	Ctrl+Shift+Home	Ctrl+Shift+Up, Shift+Home	Ctrl+Shift+Home	Ctrl+Shift+Home	Ctrl+Shift+Home</para>
            <para>SelectEndOfDocument	Ctrl+Shift+End	Ctrl+Shift+Down, Shift+End	Ctrl+Shift+End	Ctrl+Shift+End	Ctrl+Shift+End</para>
            <para>DeleteStartOfWord	Ctrl+Backspace	Alt+Backspace	Ctrl+Backspace	Ctrl+Backspace	(none)</para>
            <para>DeleteEndOfWord	Ctrl+Del	(none)	Ctrl+Del	Ctrl+Del	(none)</para>
            <para>DeleteEndOfLine	(none)	(none)	Ctrl+K	Ctrl+K	(none)</para>
            <para>InsertParagraphSeparator	Enter	Enter	Enter	Enter	(none)</para>
            <para>InsertLineSeparator	Shift+Enter	Meta+Enter	Shift+Enter	Shift+Enter	(none)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that, since the key sequences used for the standard shortcuts differ between platforms, you still need to test your shortcuts on each platform to ensure that you do not unintentionally assign the same key sequence to many actions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Keyboard Layout Issues</para>
            <para>Many key sequence specifications are chosen by developers based on the layout of certain types of keyboard, rather than choosing keys that represent the first letter of an action's name, such as Ctrl S (&amp;quot;Ctrl+S&amp;quot;) or Ctrl C (&amp;quot;Ctrl+C&amp;quot;). Additionally, because certain symbols can only be entered with the help of modifier keys on certain keyboard layouts, key sequences intended for use with one keyboard layout may map to a different key, map to no keys at all, or require an additional modifier key to be used on different keyboard layouts.</para>
            <para>For example, the shortcuts, Ctrl plus and Ctrl minus, are often used as shortcuts for zoom operations in graphics applications, and these may be specified as &amp;quot;Ctrl++&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Ctrl+-&amp;quot; respectively. However, the way these shortcuts are specified and interpreted depends on the keyboard layout. Users of Norwegian keyboards will note that the + and - keys are not adjacent on the keyboard, but will still be able to activate both shortcuts without needing to press the Shift key. However, users with British keyboards will need to hold down the Shift key to enter the + symbol, making the shortcut effectively the same as &amp;quot;Ctrl+Shift+=&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para>Although some developers might resort to fully specifying all the modifiers they use on their keyboards to activate a shortcut, this will also result in unexpected behavior for users of different keyboard layouts.</para>
            <para>For example, a developer using a British keyboard may decide to specify &amp;quot;Ctrl+Shift+=&amp;quot; as the key sequence in order to create a shortcut that coincidentally behaves in the same way as Ctrl plus. However, the = key needs to be accessed using the Shift key on Norwegian keyboard, making the required shortcut effectively Ctrl Shift Shift = (an impossible key combination).</para>
            <para>As a result, both human-readable strings and hard-coded key codes can both be problematic to use when specifying a key sequence that can be used on a variety of different keyboard layouts. Only the use of standard shortcuts guarantees that the user will be able to use the shortcuts that the developer intended.</para>
            <para>Despite this, we can address this issue by ensuring that human-readable strings are used, making it possible for translations of key sequences to be made for users of different languages. This approach will be successful for users whose keyboards have the most typical layout for the language they are using.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>GNU Emacs Style Key Sequences</para>
            <para>Key sequences similar to those used in GNU Emacs, allowing up to four key codes, can be created by using the multiple argument constructor, or by passing a human-readable string of comma-separated key sequences.</para>
            <para>For example, the key sequence, Ctrl X followed by Ctrl C, can be specified using either of the following ways:</para>
            <para> QKeySequence(tr(&amp;quot;Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> QKeySequence(Qt::CTRL + Qt::Key_X, Qt::CTRL + Qt::Key_C);</para>
            <para>Warning: A QApplication instance must have been constructed before a QKeySequence is created; otherwise, your application may crash.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QShortcut.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty key sequence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.#ctor(QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copy constructor. Makes a copy of keysequence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a key sequence from the key string. For example &quot;Ctrl+O&quot; gives CTRL+'O'. The strings &quot;Ctrl&quot;, &quot;Shift&quot;, &quot;Alt&quot; and &quot;Meta&quot; are recognized, as well as their translated equivalents in the &quot;QShortcut&quot; context (using QObject::tr()).</para>
            <para>Up to four key codes may be entered by separating them with commas, e.g. &quot;Alt+X,Ctrl+S,Q&quot;.</para>
            <para>key should be in NativeText format.</para>
            <para>This constructor is typically used with tr(), so that shortcut keys can be replaced in translations:</para>
            <para> QMenu *file = new QMenu(this);</para>
            <para> file-&gt;addAction(tr(&quot;&amp;Open...&quot;), this, SLOT(open()),</para>
            <para>                   QKeySequence(tr(&quot;Ctrl+O&quot;, &quot;File|Open&quot;)));</para>
            <para>Note the &quot;File|Open&quot; translator comment. It is by no means necessary, but it provides some context for the human translator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.#ctor(QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QKeySequence object for the given key. The result will depend on the currently running platform.</para>
            <para>The resulting object will be based on the first element in the list of key bindings for the key.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a key sequence from the key string based on format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a key sequence with up to 4 keys k1, k2, k3 and k4.</para>
            <para>The key codes are listed in Qt::Key and can be combined with modifiers (see Qt::Modifier) such as Qt::SHIFT, Qt::CTRL, Qt::ALT, or Qt::META.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of keys in the key sequence. The maximum is 4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.FromString(System.String,QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Return a QKeySequence from the string str based on format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also toString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.KeyBindings(QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of key bindings for the given key. The result of calling this function will vary based on the target platform. The first element of the list indicates the primary shortcut for the given platform. If the result contains more than one result, these can be considered alternative shortcuts on the same platform for the given key.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.Matches(QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Matches the sequence with seq. Returns ExactMatch if successful, PartialMatch if seq matches incompletely, and NoMatch if the sequences have nothing in common. Returns NoMatch if seq is shorter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.Mnemonic(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the shortcut key sequence for the mnemonic in text, or an empty key sequence if no mnemonics are found.</para>
            <para>For example, mnemonic(&quot;E&amp;xit&quot;) returns Qt::ALT+Qt::Key_X, mnemonic(&quot;&amp;Quit&quot;) returns ALT+Key_Q, and mnemonic(&quot;Quit&quot;) returns an empty QKeySequence.</para>
            <para>We provide a list of common mnemonics in English. At the time of writing, Microsoft and Open Group do not appear to have issued equivalent recommendations for other languages.</para>
            <para>See also qt_set_sequence_auto_mnemonic().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_Explicit(QtGui.QKeySequence)~System.String">
            <summary>
            <para>Use toString() instead.</para>
            <para>Returns the key sequence as a QString. This is equivalent to calling toString(QKeySequence::NativeText). Note that the result is not platform independent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_Explicit(QtGui.QKeySequence)~System.Int32">
            <summary>
            <para>For backward compatibility: returns the first keycode as integer. If the key sequence is empty, 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_Inequality(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this key sequence is not equal to the other key sequence; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_LessThan(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Provides an arbitrary comparison of this key sequence and other key sequence. All that is guaranteed is that the operator returns false if both key sequences are equal and that (ks1 &lt; ks2) == !( ks2 &lt; ks1) if the key sequences are not equal.</para>
            <para>This function is useful in some circumstances, for example if you want to use QKeySequence objects as keys in a QMap.</para>
            <para>See also operator==(), operator!=(), operator&gt;(), operator&lt;=(), and operator&gt;=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_LessThanOrEqual(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this key sequence is smaller or equal to the other key sequence; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator==(), operator!=(), operator&lt;(), operator&gt;(), and operator&gt;=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_Equality(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this key sequence is equal to the other key sequence; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_GreaterThan(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this key sequence is larger than the other key sequence; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator==(), operator!=(), operator&lt;(), operator&lt;=(), and operator&gt;=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.op_GreaterThanOrEqual(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this key sequence is larger or equal to the other key sequence; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator==(), operator!=(), operator&lt;(), operator&gt;(), and operator&lt;=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.Swap(QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps key sequence other with this key sequence. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.ToString">
            <summary>
            <para>Return a string representation of the key sequence, based on format.</para>
            <para>For example, the value Qt::CTRL+Qt::Key_O results in &quot;Ctrl+O&quot;. If the key sequence has multiple key codes, each is separated by commas in the string returned, such as &quot;Alt+X, Ctrl+Y, Z&quot;. The strings, &quot;Ctrl&quot;, &quot;Shift&quot;, etc. are translated using QObject::tr() in the &quot;QShortcut&quot; context.</para>
            <para>If the key sequence has no keys, an empty string is returned.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, the string returned resembles the sequence that is shown in the menu bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also fromString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.ToString(QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Return a string representation of the key sequence, based on format.</para>
            <para>For example, the value Qt::CTRL+Qt::Key_O results in &quot;Ctrl+O&quot;. If the key sequence has multiple key codes, each is separated by commas in the string returned, such as &quot;Alt+X, Ctrl+Y, Z&quot;. The strings, &quot;Ctrl&quot;, &quot;Shift&quot;, etc. are translated using QObject::tr() in the &quot;QShortcut&quot; context.</para>
            <para>If the key sequence has no keys, an empty string is returned.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, the string returned resembles the sequence that is shown in the menu bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also fromString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeySequence.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the key sequence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceFormat.NativeText">
            <summary>
            <para>The key sequence as a platform specific string. This means that it will be shown translated and on the Mac it will resemble a key sequence from the menu bar. This enum is best used when you want to display the string to the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceFormat.PortableText">
            <summary>
            <para>The key sequence is given in a &quot;portable&quot; format, suitable for reading and writing to a file. In many cases, it will look similar to the native text on Windows and X11.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceMatch.ExactMatch">
            <summary>
            <para>The key sequences are the same.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceMatch.NoMatch">
            <summary>
            <para>The key sequences are different; not even partially matching.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.SequenceMatch.PartialMatch">
            <summary>
            <para>The key sequences match partially, but are not the same.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum represent standard key bindings. They can be used to assign platform dependent keyboard shortcuts to a QAction.</para>
            <para>Note that the key bindings are platform dependent. The currently bound shortcuts can be queried using keyBindings().</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.AddTab">
            <summary>
            <para>Add new tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Back">
            <summary>
            <para>Navigate back.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Bold">
            <summary>
            <para>Bold text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Close">
            <summary>
            <para>Close document/tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Copy">
            <summary>
            <para>Copy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Cut">
            <summary>
            <para>Cut.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Delete">
            <summary>
            <para>Delete.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.DeleteEndOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Delete end of line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.DeleteEndOfWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Delete word from the end of the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.DeleteStartOfWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Delete the beginning of a word up to the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Find">
            <summary>
            <para>Find in document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.FindNext">
            <summary>
            <para>Find next result.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.FindPrevious">
            <summary>
            <para>Find previous result.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Forward">
            <summary>
            <para>Navigate forward.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.HelpContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Open help contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.InsertLineSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Insert a new line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.InsertParagraphSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Insert a new paragraph.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Italic">
            <summary>
            <para>Italic text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToEndOfBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to end of block. This shortcut is only used on the OS X.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToEndOfDocument">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to end of document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToEndOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to end of line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToNextChar">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to next character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToNextLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to next line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToNextPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to next page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToNextWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to next word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToPreviousChar">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to previous character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToPreviousLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to previous line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToPreviousPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to previous page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToPreviousWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to previous word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToStartOfBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to start of a block. This shortcut is only used on OS X.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToStartOfDocument">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to start of document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.MoveToStartOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Move cursor to start of line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.New">
            <summary>
            <para>Create new document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.NextChild">
            <summary>
            <para>Navigate to next tab or child window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>Open document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Paste">
            <summary>
            <para>Paste.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Preferences">
            <summary>
            <para>Open the preferences dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.PreviousChild">
            <summary>
            <para>Navigate to previous tab or child window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Print">
            <summary>
            <para>Print document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Quit">
            <summary>
            <para>Quit the application.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Redo.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Refresh">
            <summary>
            <para>Refresh or reload current document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Replace">
            <summary>
            <para>Find and replace.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Save">
            <summary>
            <para>Save document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SaveAs">
            <summary>
            <para>Save document after prompting the user for a file name.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Select all text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectEndOfBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to the end of a text block. This shortcut is only used on OS X.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectEndOfDocument">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to end of document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectEndOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to end of line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectNextChar">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to next character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectNextLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to next line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectNextPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to next page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectNextWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to next word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectPreviousChar">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to previous character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectPreviousLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to previous line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectPreviousPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to previous page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectPreviousWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to previous word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectStartOfBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to the start of a text block. This shortcut is only used on OS X.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectStartOfDocument">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to start of document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.SelectStartOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend selection to start of line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Underline">
            <summary>
            <para>Underline text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Undo.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.UnknownKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Unbound key.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>Activate whats this.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.ZoomIn">
            <summary>
            <para>Zoom in.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey.ZoomOut">
            <summary>
            <para>Zoom out.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPen">
            <summary>
            The QPen class defines how a QPainter should draw lines and outlines of shapes.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A pen has a style(), width(), brush(), capStyle() and joinStyle().</para>
            <para>The pen style defines the line type. The brush is used to fill strokes generated with the pen. Use the QBrush class to specify fill styles. The cap style determines the line end caps that can be drawn using QPainter, while the join style describes how joins between two lines are drawn. The pen width can be specified in both integer (width()) and floating point (widthF()) precision. A line width of zero indicates a cosmetic pen. This means that the pen width is always drawn one pixel wide, independent of the transformation set on the painter.</para>
            <para>The various settings can easily be modified using the corresponding setStyle(), setWidth(), setBrush(), setCapStyle() and setJoinStyle() functions (note that the painter's pen must be reset when altering the pen's properties).</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> QPen pen(Qt::green, 3, Qt::DashDotLine, Qt::RoundCap, Qt::RoundJoin);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(pen);</para>
            <para>which is equivalent to</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> QPen pen;  // creates a default pen</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> pen.setStyle(Qt::DashDotLine);</para>
            <para> pen.setWidth(3);</para>
            <para> pen.setBrush(Qt::green);</para>
            <para> pen.setCapStyle(Qt::RoundCap);</para>
            <para> pen.setJoinStyle(Qt::RoundJoin);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> painter.setPen(pen);</para>
            <para>The default pen is a solid black brush with 0 width, square cap style (Qt::SquareCap), and bevel join style (Qt::BevelJoin).</para>
            <para>In addition QPen provides the color() and setColor() convenience functions to extract and set the color of the pen's brush, respectively. Pens may also be compared and streamed.</para>
            <para>For more information about painting in general, see the Paint System documentation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pen Style</para>
            <para>Qt provides several built-in styles represented by the Qt::PenStyle enum:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>Qt::SolidLine	Qt::DashLine	Qt::DotLine</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>Qt::DashDotLine	Qt::DashDotDotLine	Qt::CustomDashLine</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Simply use the setStyle() function to convert the pen style to either of the built-in styles, except the Qt::CustomDashLine style which we will come back to shortly. Setting the style to Qt::NoPen tells the painter to not draw lines or outlines. The default pen style is Qt::SolidLine.</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.1 it is also possible to specify a custom dash pattern using the setDashPattern() function which implicitly converts the style of the pen to Qt::CustomDashLine. The pattern argument, a QVector, must be specified as an even number of qreal entries where the entries 1, 3, 5... are the dashes and 2, 4, 6... are the spaces. For example, the custom pattern shown above is created using the following code:</para>
            <para> QPen pen;</para>
            <para> QVector&amp;lt;qreal&amp;gt; dashes;</para>
            <para> qreal space = 4;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> dashes &amp;lt;&amp;lt; 1 &amp;lt;&amp;lt; space &amp;lt;&amp;lt; 3 &amp;lt;&amp;lt; space &amp;lt;&amp;lt; 9 &amp;lt;&amp;lt; space</para>
            <para>            &amp;lt;&amp;lt; 27 &amp;lt;&amp;lt; space &amp;lt;&amp;lt; 9 &amp;lt;&amp;lt; space;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> pen.setDashPattern(dashes);</para>
            <para>Note that the dash pattern is specified in units of the pens width, e.g. a dash of length 5 in width 10 is 50 pixels long.</para>
            <para>The currently set dash pattern can be retrieved using the dashPattern() function. Use the isSolid() function to determine whether the pen has a solid fill, or not.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Cap Style</para>
            <para>The cap style defines how the end points of lines are drawn using QPainter. The cap style only apply to wide lines, i.e. when the width is 1 or greater. The Qt::PenCapStyle enum provides the following styles:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>Qt::SquareCap	Qt::FlatCap	Qt::RoundCap</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Qt::SquareCap style is a square line end that covers the end point and extends beyond it by half the line width. The Qt::FlatCap style is a square line end that does not cover the end point of the line. And the Qt::RoundCap style is a rounded line end covering the end point.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::SquareCap.</para>
            <para>Whether or not end points are drawn when the pen width is 0 or 1 depends on the cap style. Using Qt::SquareCap or Qt::RoundCap they are drawn, using Qt::FlatCap they are not drawn.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Join Style</para>
            <para>The join style defines how joins between two connected lines can be drawn using QPainter. The join style only apply to wide lines, i.e. when the width is 1 or greater. The Qt::PenJoinStyle enum provides the following styles:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>Qt::BevelJoin	Qt::MiterJoin	Qt::RoundJoin</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Qt::BevelJoin style fills the triangular notch between the two lines. The Qt::MiterJoin style extends the lines to meet at an angle. And the Qt::RoundJoin style fills a circular arc between the two lines.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::BevelJoin.</para>
            <para>When the Qt::MiterJoin style is applied, it is possible to use the setMiterLimit() function to specify how far the miter join can extend from the join point. The miterLimit() is used to reduce artifacts between line joins where the lines are close to parallel.</para>
            <para>The miterLimit() must be specified in units of the pens width, e.g. a miter limit of 5 in width 10 is 50 pixels long. The default miter limit is 2, i.e. twice the pen width in pixels.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	The Path Stroking DemoThe Path Stroking demo shows Qt's built-in dash patterns and shows how custom patterns can be used to extend the range of available patterns.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter, QBrush, Path Stroking Demo, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default black solid line pen with 0 width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.#ctor(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a solid line pen with 0 width and the given color.</para>
            <para>See also setBrush() and setColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.#ctor(QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a pen that is a copy of the given pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.#ctor(QtGui.QBrush,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.PenStyle,QtCore.Qt.PenCapStyle,QtCore.Qt.PenJoinStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default black solid line pen with 0 width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.PenStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a black pen with 0 width and the given style.</para>
            <para>See also setStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.IsCosmetic">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the pen is cosmetic; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Cosmetic pens are used to draw strokes that have a constant width regardless of any transformations applied to the QPainter they are used with. Drawing a shape with a cosmetic pen ensures that its outline will have the same thickness at different scale factors.</para>
            <para>A zero width pen is cosmetic by default; pens with a non-zero width are non-cosmetic.</para>
            <para>See also setCosmetic() and widthF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.IsSolid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the pen has a solid fill, otherwise false.</para>
            <para>See also style() and dashPattern().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.op_Inequality(QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the pen is different from the given pen; otherwise false. Two pens are different if they have different styles, widths or colors.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.op_Equality(QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the pen is equal to the given pen; otherwise false. Two pens are equal if they have equal styles, widths and colors.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.SetCosmetic(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets this pen to cosmetic or non-cosmetic, depending on the value of cosmetic.</para>
            <para>See also isCosmetic().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.Swap(QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps pen other with this pen. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPen.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.Brush">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to fill strokes generated with this pen.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush used to fill strokes generated with this pen to the given brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.CapStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen's cap style.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen's cap style to the given style. The default value is Qt::SquareCap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.Color">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color of this pen's brush.</para>
            <para>Sets the color of this pen's brush to the given color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.DashOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dash offset for the pen.</para>
            <para>Sets the dash offset (the starting point on the dash pattern) for this pen to the offset specified. The offset is measured in terms of the units used to specify the dash pattern.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	For example, a pattern where each stroke is four units long, followed by a gap of two units, will begin with the stroke when drawn as a line.However, if the dash offset is set to 4.0, any line drawn will begin with the gap. Values of the offset up to 4.0 will cause part of the stroke to be drawn first, and values of the offset between 4.0 and 6.0 will cause the line to begin with part of the gap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.DashPattern">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dash pattern of this pen.</para>
            <para>Sets the dash pattern for this pen to the given pattern. This implicitly converts the style of the pen to Qt::CustomDashLine.</para>
            <para>The pattern must be specified as an even number of positive entries where the entries 1, 3, 5... are the dashes and 2, 4, 6... are the spaces. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QPen pen;</para>
            <para> QVector&lt;qreal&gt; dashes;</para>
            <para> qreal space = 4;</para>
            <para> dashes &lt;&lt; 1 &lt;&lt; space &lt;&lt; 3 &lt;&lt; space &lt;&lt; 9 &lt;&lt; space</para>
            <para>            &lt;&lt; 27 &lt;&lt; space &lt;&lt; 9 &lt;&lt; space;</para>
            <para> pen.setDashPattern(dashes);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.JoinStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen's join style.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen's join style to the given style. The default value is Qt::BevelJoin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.MiterLimit">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the miter limit of the pen. The miter limit is only relevant when the join style is set to Qt::MiterJoin.</para>
            <para>Sets the miter limit of this pen to the given limit.</para>
            <para>The miter limit describes how far a miter join can extend from the join point. This is used to reduce artifacts between line joins where the lines are close to parallel.</para>
            <para>This value does only have effect when the pen style is set to Qt::MiterJoin. The value is specified in units of the pen's width, e.g. a miter limit of 5 in width 10 is 50 pixels long. The default miter limit is 2, i.e. twice the pen width in pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen style.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen style to the given style.</para>
            <para>See the Qt::PenStyle documentation for a list of the available styles. Since Qt 4.1 it is also possible to specify a custom dash pattern using the setDashPattern() function which implicitly converts the style of the pen to Qt::CustomDashLine.</para>
            <para>Note: This function resets the dash offset to zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen width with integer precision.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen width to the given width in pixels with integer precision.</para>
            <para>A line width of zero indicates a cosmetic pen. This means that the pen width is always drawn one pixel wide, independent of the transformation set on the painter.</para>
            <para>Setting a pen width with a negative value is not supported.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPen.WidthF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen width with floating point precision.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen width to the given width in pixels with floating point precision.</para>
            <para>A line width of zero indicates a cosmetic pen. This means that the pen width is always drawn one pixel wide, independent of the transformation on the painter.</para>
            <para>Setting a pen width with a negative value is not supported.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPolygon">
            <summary>
            The QPolygon class provides a vector of points using integer precision.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QPolygon object is a QVector&amp;lt;QPoint&amp;gt;. The easiest way to add points to a QPolygon is to use QVector's streaming operator, as illustrated below:</para>
            <para>         QPolygon polygon;</para>
            <para>         polygon &amp;lt;&amp;lt; QPoint(10, 20) &amp;lt;&amp;lt; QPoint(20, 30);</para>
            <para>In addition to the functions provided by QVector, QPolygon provides some point-specific functions.</para>
            <para>Each point in a polygon can be retrieved by passing its index to the point() function. To populate the polygon, QPolygon provides the setPoint() function to set the point at a given index, the setPoints() function to set all the points in the polygon (resizing it to the given number of points), and the putPoints() function which copies a number of given points into the polygon from a specified index (resizing the polygon if necessary).</para>
            <para>QPolygon provides the boundingRect() and translate() functions for geometry functions. Use the QMatrix::map() function for more general transformations of QPolygons.</para>
            <para>The QPolygon class is implicitly shared.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QVector, QPolygonF, and QLine.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon with no points.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.#ctor(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the given polygon.</para>
            <para>See also setPoints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.#ctor(QtCore.QRect,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon from the given rectangle. If closed is false, the polygon just contains the four points of the rectangle ordered clockwise, otherwise the polygon's fifth point is set to rectangle.topLeft().</para>
            <para>Note that the bottom-right corner of the rectangle is located at (rectangle.x() + rectangle.width(), rectangle.y() + rectangle.height()).</para>
            <para>See also setPoints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon of the given size. Creates an empty polygon if size == 0.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon with no points.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QPoint})">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon containing the specified points.</para>
            <para>See also setPoints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the polygon, or QRect(0, 0, 0, 0) if the polygon is empty.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.ContainsPoint(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given point is inside the polygon according to the specified fillRule; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Intersected(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a polygon which is the intersection of this polygon and r.</para>
            <para>Set operations on polygons will treat the polygons as areas. Non-closed polygons will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Point(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the point at the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Point(System.Int32,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Extracts the coordinates of the point at the given index to *x and *y (if they are valid pointers).</para>
            <para>See also setPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.PutPoints(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPolygon,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Copies nPoints points from the given fromIndex ( 0 by default) in fromPolygon into this polygon, starting at the specified index. For example:</para>
            <para>         QPolygon polygon1;</para>
            <para>         polygon1.putPoints(0, 3, 1,2, 0,0, 5,6);</para>
            <para>         // polygon1 is now the three-point polygon(1,2, 0,0, 5,6);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         QPolygon polygon2;</para>
            <para>         polygon2.putPoints(0, 3, 4,4, 5,5, 6,6);</para>
            <para>         // polygon2 is now (4,4, 5,5, 6,6);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         polygon1.putPoints(2, 3, polygon2);</para>
            <para>         // polygon1 is now the five-point polygon(1,2, 0,0, 4,4, 5,5, 6,6);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.PutPoints(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies nPoints points from the variable argument list into this polygon from the given index.</para>
            <para>The points are given as a sequence of integers, starting with firstx then firsty, and so on. The polygon is resized if index+nPoints exceeds its current size.</para>
            <para>The example code creates a polygon with three points (4,5), (6,7) and (8,9), by expanding the polygon from 1 to 3 points:</para>
            <para>         QPolygon polygon(1);</para>
            <para>         polygon[0] = QPoint(4, 5);</para>
            <para>         polygon.putPoints(1, 2, 6,7, 8,9);</para>
            <para>The following code has the same result, but here the putPoints() function overwrites rather than extends:</para>
            <para>         QPolygon polygon(3);</para>
            <para>         polygon.putPoints(0, 3, 4,5, 0,0, 8,9);</para>
            <para>         polygon.putPoints(1, 1, 6,7);</para>
            <para>See also setPoints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.SetPoint(System.Int32,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the point at the given index to the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.SetPoint(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the point at the given index to the point specified by (x, y).</para>
            <para>See also point(), putPoints(), and setPoints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.SetPoints(System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the polygon to nPoints and populates it with the given points.</para>
            <para>The example code creates a polygon with two points (10, 20) and (30, 40):</para>
            <para>         static const int points[] = { 10, 20, 30, 40 };</para>
            <para>         QPolygon polygon;</para>
            <para>         polygon.setPoints(2, points);</para>
            <para>See also setPoint() and putPoints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Subtracted(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a polygon which is r subtracted from this polygon.</para>
            <para>Set operations on polygons will treat the polygons as areas. Non-closed polygons will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Swap(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps polygon other with this polygon. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Translate(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Translates all points in the polygon by the given offset.</para>
            <para>See also translated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Translate(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates all points in the polygon by (dx, dy).</para>
            <para>See also translated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Translated(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a copy of the polygon that is translated by the given offset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Translated(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the polygon that is translated by (dx, dy).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.United(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a polygon which is the union of this polygon and r.</para>
            <para>Set operations on polygons, will treat the polygons as areas, and implicitly close the polygon.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also intersected() and subtracted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygon.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the polygon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPolygonF">
            <summary>
            The QPolygonF class provides a vector of points using floating point precision.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QPolygonF is a QVector&amp;lt;QPointF&amp;gt;. The easiest way to add points to a QPolygonF is to use its streaming operator, as illustrated below:</para>
            <para>         QPolygonF polygon;</para>
            <para>         polygon &amp;lt;&amp;lt; QPointF(10.4, 20.5) &amp;lt;&amp;lt; QPointF(20.2, 30.2);</para>
            <para>In addition to the functions provided by QVector, QPolygonF provides the boundingRect() and translate() functions for geometry operations. Use the QMatrix::map() function for more general transformations of QPolygonFs.</para>
            <para>QPolygonF also provides the isClosed() function to determine whether a polygon's start and end points are the same, and the toPolygon() function returning an integer precision copy of this polygon.</para>
            <para>The QPolygonF class is implicitly shared.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QVector, QPolygon, and QLineF.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon with no points.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.#ctor(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the given polygon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.#ctor(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a closed polygon from the specified rectangle.</para>
            <para>The polygon contains the four vertices of the rectangle in clockwise order starting and ending with the top-left vertex.</para>
            <para>See also isClosed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.#ctor(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a float based polygon from the specified integer based polygon.</para>
            <para>See also toPolygon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon of the given size. Creates an empty polygon if size == 0.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QPointF})">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a polygon containing the specified points.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the polygon, or QRectF(0,0,0,0) if the polygon is empty.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.ContainsPoint(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given point is inside the polygon according to the specified fillRule; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Intersected(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a polygon which is the intersection of this polygon and r.</para>
            <para>Set operations on polygons will treat the polygons as areas. Non-closed polygons will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.IsClosed">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the polygon is closed; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>A polygon is said to be closed if its start point and end point are equal.</para>
            <para>See also QVector::first() and QVector::last().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Subtracted(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a polygon which is r subtracted from this polygon.</para>
            <para>Set operations on polygons will treat the polygons as areas. Non-closed polygons will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Swap(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps polygon other with this polygon. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.ToPolygon">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygon by converting each QPointF to a QPoint.</para>
            <para>See also QPointF::toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Translate(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translate all points in the polygon by the given offset.</para>
            <para>See also translated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translate all points in the polygon by the given offset.</para>
            <para>See also translated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Translated(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the polygon that is translated by the given offset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Translated(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the polygon that is translated by the given offset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.United(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a polygon which is the union of this polygon and r.</para>
            <para>Set operations on polygons will treat the polygons as areas. Non-closed polygons will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also intersected() and subtracted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPolygonF.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the polygon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRegion">
            <summary>
            The QRegion class specifies a clip region for a painter.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QRegion is used with QPainter::setClipRegion() to limit the paint area to what needs to be painted. There is also a QWidget::repaint() function that takes a QRegion parameter. QRegion is the best tool for minimizing the amount of screen area to be updated by a repaint.</para>
            <para>This class is not suitable for constructing shapes for rendering, especially as outlines. Use QPainterPath to create paths and shapes for use with QPainter.</para>
            <para>QRegion is an implicitly shared class.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating and Using Regions</para>
            <para>A region can be created from a rectangle, an ellipse, a polygon or a bitmap. Complex regions may be created by combining simple regions using united(), intersected(), subtracted(), or xored() (exclusive or). You can move a region using translate().</para>
            <para>You can test whether a region isEmpty() or if it contains() a QPoint or QRect. The bounding rectangle can be found with boundingRect().</para>
            <para>The function rects() gives a decomposition of the region into rectangles.</para>
            <para>Example of using complex regions:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QRegion r1(QRect(100, 100, 200, 80),    // r1: elliptic region</para>
            <para>                QRegion::Ellipse);</para>
            <para>     QRegion r2(QRect(100, 120, 90, 30));    // r2: rectangular region</para>
            <para>     QRegion r3 = r1.intersected(r2);        // r3: intersection</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setClipRegion(r3);</para>
            <para>     ...                                     // paint clipped graphics</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Additional License Information</para>
            <para>On Embedded Linux, Windows CE and X11 platforms, parts of this class rely on code obtained under the following licenses:</para>
            <para>Copyright (c) 1987 X Consortium</para>
            <para>Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the &amp;quot;Software&amp;quot;), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:</para>
            <para>The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.</para>
            <para>THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED &amp;quot;AS IS&amp;quot;, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.</para>
            <para>Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium.</para>
            <para>Copyright 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts.</para>
            <para>All Rights Reserved</para>
            <para>Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of Digital not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.</para>
            <para>DIGITAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter::setClipRegion(), QPainter::setClipRect(), and QPainterPath.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty region.</para>
            <para>See also isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.#ctor(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new region which is equal to region r.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.#ctor(QtGui.QBitmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a region from the bitmap bm.</para>
            <para>The resulting region consists of the pixels in bitmap bm that are Qt::color1, as if each pixel was a 1 by 1 rectangle.</para>
            <para>This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down painting when used. Note that drawing masked pixmaps can be done much faster using QPixmap::setMask().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.#ctor(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QRegion.RegionType)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Create a region based on the rectange r with region type t.</para>
            <para>If the rectangle is invalid a null region will be created.</para>
            <para>See also QRegion::RegionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.#ctor(QtGui.QPolygon,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty region.</para>
            <para>See also isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QRegion.RegionType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a rectangular or elliptic region.</para>
            <para>If t is Rectangle, the region is the filled rectangle (x, y, w, h). If t is Ellipse, the region is the filled ellipse with center at (x + w / 2, y + h / 2) and size (w ,h).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of this region. An empty region gives a rectangle that is QRect::isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Contains(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the region contains the point p; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Contains(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the region overlaps the rectangle r; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Eor(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use xored(r) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Handle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a platform-specific region handle. The Handle type is HRGN on Windows, Region on X11, and RgnHandle on Mac OS X. On Qt for Embedded Linux it is void *.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is not portable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Intersect(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use intersected(r) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Intersect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use intersected(r) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Intersected(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a region which is the intersection of this region and r.</para>
            <para>The figure shows the intersection of two elliptical regions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also subtracted(), united(), and xored().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Intersected(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a region which is the intersection of this region and the given rect.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also subtracted(), united(), and xored().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Intersects(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this region intersects with region, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Intersects(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this region intersects with rect, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the region is empty; otherwise returns false. An empty region is a region that contains no points.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QRegion r1(10, 10, 20, 20);</para>
            <para> r1.isEmpty();               // false</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QRegion r3;</para>
            <para> r3.isEmpty();               // true</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QRegion r2(40, 40, 20, 20);</para>
            <para> r3 = r1.intersected(r2);    // r3: intersection of r1 and r2</para>
            <para> r3.isEmpty();               // true</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> r3 = r1.united(r2);         // r3: union of r1 and r2</para>
            <para> r3.isEmpty();               // false</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_Inequality(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this region is different from the other region; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_BitwiseAnd(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies the intersected() function to this region and r. r1&amp;r2 is equivalent to r1.intersected(r2).</para>
            <para>See also intersected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_BitwiseAnd(QtGui.QRegion,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_Addition(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies the united() function to this region and r. r1+r2 is equivalent to r1.united(r2).</para>
            <para>See also united() and operator|().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_Addition(QtGui.QRegion,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies the subtracted() function to this region and r. r1-r2 is equivalent to r1.subtracted(r2).</para>
            <para>See also subtracted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_Equality(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the region is equal to r; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_ExclusiveOr(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies the xored() function to this region and r. r1^r2 is equivalent to r1.xored(r2).</para>
            <para>See also xored().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.op_BitwiseOr(QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies the united() function to this region and r. r1|r2 is equivalent to r1.united(r2).</para>
            <para>See also united() and operator+().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.RectCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rectangles that will be returned in rects().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Rects">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an array of non-overlapping rectangles that make up the region.</para>
            <para>The union of all the rectangles is equal to the original region.</para>
            <para>See also setRects().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.SetRects(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the region using the array of rectangles specified by rects and number. The rectangles must be optimally Y-X sorted and follow these restrictions:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The rectangles must not intersect.</para>
            <para>All rectangles with a given top coordinate must have the same height.</para>
            <para>No two rectangles may abut horizontally (they should be combined into a single wider rectangle in that case).</para>
            <para>The rectangles must be sorted in ascending order, with Y as the major sort key and X as the minor sort key.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also rects().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Subtract(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use subtracted(r) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Subtracted(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a region which is r subtracted from this region.</para>
            <para>The figure shows the result when the ellipse on the right is subtracted from the ellipse on the left (left - right).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also intersected(), united(), and xored().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Swap(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps region other with this region. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Translate(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Translates the region point.x() along the x axis and point.y() along the y axis, relative to the current position. Positive values move the region to the right and down.</para>
            <para>Translates to the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Translate(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates (moves) the region dx along the X axis and dy along the Y axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Translated(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a copy of the regtion that is translated p.x() along the x axis and p.y() along the y axis, relative to the current position. Positive values move the rectangle to the right and down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Translated(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the region that is translated dx along the x axis and dy along the y axis, relative to the current position. Positive values move the region to the right and down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Unite(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use united(r) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Unite(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use united(r) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.United(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a region which is the union of this region and r.</para>
            <para>The figure shows the union of two elliptical regions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also intersected(), subtracted(), and xored().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.United(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a region which is the union of this region and the given rect.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also intersected(), subtracted(), and xored().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegion.Xored(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a region which is the exclusive or (XOR) of this region and r.</para>
            <para>The figure shows the exclusive or of two elliptical regions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also intersected(), united(), and subtracted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRegion.RegionType">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the shape of the region to be created.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QRegion.RegionType.Ellipse">
            <summary>
            <para>The region is an ellipse inside the rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QRegion.RegionType.Rectangle">
            <summary>
            <para>The region covers the entire rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTransform">
            <summary>
            The QTransform class specifies 2D transformations of a coordinate system.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A transformation specifies how to translate, scale, shear, rotate or project the coordinate system, and is typically used when rendering graphics.</para>
            <para>QTransform differs from QMatrix(obsolete) in that it is a true 3x3 matrix, allowing perspective transformations. QTransform's toAffine() method allows casting QTransform to QMatrix(obsolete). If a perspective transformation has been specified on the matrix, then the conversion will cause loss of data.</para>
            <para>QTransform is the recommended transformation class in Qt.</para>
            <para>A QTransform object can be built using the setMatrix(), scale(), rotate(), translate() and shear() functions. Alternatively, it can be built by applying basic matrix operations. The matrix can also be defined when constructed, and it can be reset to the identity matrix (the default) using the reset() function.</para>
            <para>The QTransform class supports mapping of graphic primitives: A given point, line, polygon, region, or painter path can be mapped to the coordinate system defined by this matrix using the map() function. In case of a rectangle, its coordinates can be transformed using the mapRect() function. A rectangle can also be transformed into a polygon (mapped to the coordinate system defined by this matrix), using the mapToPolygon() function.</para>
            <para>QTransform provides the isIdentity() function which returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix, and the isInvertible() function which returns true if the matrix is non-singular (i.e. AB = BA = I). The inverted() function returns an inverted copy of this matrix if it is invertible (otherwise it returns the identity matrix), and adjoint() returns the matrix's classical adjoint. In addition, QTransform provides the determinant() function which returns the matrix's determinant.</para>
            <para>Finally, the QTransform class supports matrix multiplication, addition and subtraction, and objects of the class can be streamed as well as compared.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Rendering Graphics</para>
            <para>When rendering graphics, the matrix defines the transformations but the actual transformation is performed by the drawing routines in QPainter.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter operates on the associated device's own coordinate system. The standard coordinate system of a QPaintDevice has its origin located at the top-left position. The x values increase to the right; y values increase downward. For a complete description, see the coordinate system documentation.</para>
            <para>QPainter has functions to translate, scale, shear and rotate the coordinate system without using a QTransform. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 void SimpleTransformation::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 1, Qt::DashLine));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.rotate(45);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;, 24));</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 1));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(20, 10, &amp;quot;QTransform&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Although these functions are very convenient, it can be more efficient to build a QTransform and call QPainter::setTransform() if you want to perform more than a single transform operation. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 void CombinedTransformation::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 1, Qt::DashLine));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QTransform transform;</para>
            <para>     transform.translate(50, 50);</para>
            <para>     transform.rotate(45);</para>
            <para>     transform.scale(0.5, 1.0);</para>
            <para>     painter.setTransform(transform);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;, 24));</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 1));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(20, 10, &amp;quot;QTransform&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Basic Matrix Operations</para>
            <para>A QTransform object contains a 3 x 3 matrix. The m31 (dx) and m32 (dy) elements specify horizontal and vertical translation. The m11 and m22 elements specify horizontal and vertical scaling. The m21 and m12 elements specify horizontal and vertical shearing. And finally, the m13 and m23 elements specify horizontal and vertical projection, with m33 as an additional projection factor.</para>
            <para>QTransform transforms a point in the plane to another point using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para> if (is not affine) {</para>
            <para>     w' = m13*x + m23*y + m33</para>
            <para>     x' /= w'</para>
            <para>     y' /= w'</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The point (x, y) is the original point, and (x', y') is the transformed point. (x', y') can be transformed back to (x, y) by performing the same operation on the inverted() matrix.</para>
            <para>The various matrix elements can be set when constructing the matrix, or by using the setMatrix() function later on. They can also be manipulated using the translate(), rotate(), scale() and shear() convenience functions. The currently set values can be retrieved using the m11(), m12(), m13(), m21(), m22(), m23(), m31(), m32(), m33(), dx() and dy() functions.</para>
            <para>Translation is the simplest transformation. Setting dx and dy will move the coordinate system dx units along the X axis and dy units along the Y axis. Scaling can be done by setting m11 and m22. For example, setting m11 to 2 and m22 to 1.5 will double the height and increase the width by 50%. The identity matrix has m11, m22, and m33 set to 1 (all others are set to 0) mapping a point to itself. Shearing is controlled by m12 and m21. Setting these elements to values different from zero will twist the coordinate system. Rotation is achieved by setting both the shearing factors and the scaling factors. Perspective transformation is achieved by setting both the projection factors and the scaling factors.</para>
            <para>Here's the combined transformations example using basic matrix operations:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 void BasicOperations::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     double pi = 3.14;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     double a    = pi/180 * 45.0;</para>
            <para>     double sina = sin(a);</para>
            <para>     double cosa = cos(a);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QTransform translationTransform(1, 0, 0, 1, 50.0, 50.0);</para>
            <para>     QTransform rotationTransform(cosa, sina, -sina, cosa, 0, 0);</para>
            <para>     QTransform scalingTransform(0.5, 0, 0, 1.0, 0, 0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QTransform transform;</para>
            <para>     transform = scalingTransform * rotationTransform * translationTransform;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 1, Qt::DashLine));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setTransform(transform);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;, 24));</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 1));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(20, 10, &amp;quot;QTransform&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter, Coordinate System, Affine Transformations Demo, and Transformations Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) and m13 which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.#ctor(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a matrix that is a copy of the given matrix. Note that the m13, m23, and m33 elements are set to 0, 0, and 1 respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.#ctor(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) and m13 which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Initialization)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) and m13 which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) and m13 which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) and m13 which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.op_Multiply(QtGui.QTransform,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by the given matrix.</para>
            <para>Note that matrix multiplication is not commutative, i.e. a*b != b*a.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Adjoint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the adjoint of this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Det">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix's determinant. Use determinant() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Determinant">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix's determinant.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Dx">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal translation factor.</para>
            <para>See also m31(), translate(), and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Dy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical translation factor.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.FromScale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a matrix which corresponds to a scaling of sx horizontally and sy vertically. This is the same as QTransform().scale(sx, sy) but slightly faster.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.FromTranslate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a matrix which corresponds to a translation of dx along the x axis and dy along the y axis. This is the same as QTransform().translate(dx, dy) but slightly faster.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Inverted">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an inverted copy of this matrix.</para>
            <para>If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the returned matrix is the identity matrix. If invertible is valid (i.e. not 0), its value is set to true if the matrix is invertible, otherwise it is set to false.</para>
            <para>See also isInvertible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Inverted(System.Boolean@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an inverted copy of this matrix.</para>
            <para>If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the returned matrix is the identity matrix. If invertible is valid (i.e. not 0), its value is set to true if the matrix is invertible, otherwise it is set to false.</para>
            <para>See also isInvertible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.IsAffine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix represent an affine transformation, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.IsIdentity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.IsInvertible">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix is invertible, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also inverted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.IsRotating">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix represents some kind of a rotating transformation, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.IsScaling">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix represents a scaling transformation, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.IsTranslating">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix represents a translating transformation, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M11">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal scaling factor.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M12">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical shearing factor.</para>
            <para>See also shear() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M13">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal projection factor.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M21">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal shearing factor.</para>
            <para>See also shear() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M22">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical scaling factor.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M23">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical projection factor.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M31">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal translation factor.</para>
            <para>See also dx(), translate(), and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M32">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical translation factor.</para>
            <para>See also dy(), translate(), and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.M33">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the division factor.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPoint object that is a copy of the given point, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPointF object that is a copy of the given point, p, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtCore.QLine)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QLineF object that is a copy of the given line, l, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtCore.QLineF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QLine object that is a copy of the given line, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygonF object that is a copy of the given polygon, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygon object that is a copy of the given polygon, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QRegion object that is a copy of the given region, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            <para>Calling this method can be rather expensive if rotations or shearing are used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPainterPath object that is a copy of the given path, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Maps the given coordinates x and y into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. The resulting values are put in *tx and *ty, respectively. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Map(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the given coordinates x and y into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. The resulting values are put in *tx and *ty, respectively.</para>
            <para>The coordinates are transformed using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para> if (is not affine) {</para>
            <para>     w' = m13*x + m23*y + m33</para>
            <para>     x' /= w'</para>
            <para>     y' /= w'</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The point (x, y) is the original point, and (x', y') is the transformed point.</para>
            <para>See also Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.MapRect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QRect object that is a copy of the given rectangle, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.MapRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QRectF object that is a copy of the given rectangle, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            <para>The rectangle's coordinates are transformed using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para> if (is not affine) {</para>
            <para>     w' = m13*x + m23*y + m33</para>
            <para>     x' /= w'</para>
            <para>     y' /= w'</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>If rotation or shearing has been specified, this function returns the bounding rectangle. To retrieve the exact region the given rectangle maps to, use the mapToPolygon() function instead.</para>
            <para>See also mapToPolygon() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.MapToPolygon(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygon representation of the given rectangle, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            <para>The rectangle's coordinates are transformed using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para> if (is not affine) {</para>
            <para>     w' = m13*x + m23*y + m33</para>
            <para>     x' /= w'</para>
            <para>     y' /= w'</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Polygons and rectangles behave slightly differently when transformed (due to integer rounding), so matrix.map(QPolygon(rectangle)) is not always the same as matrix.mapToPolygon(rectangle).</para>
            <para>See also mapRect() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTransform,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is not equal to the given matrix, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.op_Multiply(QtGui.QTransform,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by the given matrix.</para>
            <para>Note that matrix multiplication is not commutative, i.e. a*b != b*a.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.op_Equality(QtGui.QTransform,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is equal to the given matrix, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.QuadToQuad(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a transformation matrix, trans, that maps a four-sided polygon, one, to another four-sided polygon, two. Returns true if the transformation is possible; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This is a convenience method combining quadToSquare() and squareToQuad() methods. It allows the input quad to be transformed into any other quad.</para>
            <para>See also squareToQuad() and quadToSquare().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.QuadToSquare(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a transformation matrix, trans, that maps a four-sided polygon, quad, to a unit square. Returns true if the transformation is constructed or false if such a transformation does not exist.</para>
            <para>See also squareToQuad() and quadToQuad().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the matrix to an identity matrix, i.e. all elements are set to zero, except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) and m33 which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also QTransform(), isIdentity(), and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Rotate(System.Double,QtCore.Qt.Axis)">
            <summary>
            <para>Rotates the coordinate system counterclockwise by the given angle about the specified axis and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>Note that if you apply a QTransform to a point defined in widget coordinates, the direction of the rotation will be clockwise because the y-axis points downwards.</para>
            <para>The angle is specified in degrees.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.RotateRadians(System.Double,QtCore.Qt.Axis)">
            <summary>
            <para>Rotates the coordinate system counterclockwise by the given angle about the specified axis and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>Note that if you apply a QTransform to a point defined in widget coordinates, the direction of the rotation will be clockwise because the y-axis points downwards.</para>
            <para>The angle is specified in radians.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Scale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the coordinate system by sx horizontally and sy vertically, and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.SetMatrix(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the matrix elements to the specified values, m11, m12, m13 m21, m22, m23 m31, m32 and m33. Note that this function replaces the previous values. QTransform provides the translate(), rotate(), scale() and shear() convenience functions to manipulate the various matrix elements based on the currently defined coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also QTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Shear(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shears the coordinate system by sh horizontally and sv vertically, and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.SquareToQuad(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a transformation matrix, trans, that maps a unit square to a four-sided polygon, quad. Returns true if the transformation is constructed or false if such a transformation does not exist.</para>
            <para>See also quadToSquare() and quadToQuad().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.ToAffine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QTransform as an affine matrix.</para>
            <para>Warning: If a perspective transformation has been specified, then the conversion will cause loss of data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the coordinate system dx along the x axis and dy along the y axis, and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Transposed">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the transpose of this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTransform.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the transformation type of this matrix.</para>
            <para>The transformation type is the highest enumeration value capturing all of the matrix's transformations. For example, if the matrix both scales and shears, the type would be TxShear, because TxShear has a higher enumeration value than TxScale.</para>
            <para>Knowing the transformation type of a matrix is useful for optimization: you can often handle specific types more optimally than handling the generic case.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractButton">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractButton class is the abstract base class of button widgets, providing functionality common to buttons.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class implements an abstract button. Subclasses of this class handle user actions, and specify how the button is drawn.</para>
            <para>QAbstractButton provides support for both push buttons and checkable (toggle) buttons. Checkable buttons are implemented in the QRadioButton and QCheckBox classes. Push buttons are implemented in the QPushButton and QToolButton classes; these also provide toggle behavior if required.</para>
            <para>Any button can display a label containing text and an icon. setText() sets the text; setIcon() sets the icon. If a button is disabled, its label is changed to give the button a &amp;quot;disabled&amp;quot; appearance.</para>
            <para>If the button is a text button with a string containing an ampersand ('&amp;amp;'), QAbstractButton automatically creates a shortcut key. For example:</para>
            <para> QPushButton *button = new QPushButton(tr(&amp;quot;Ro&amp;amp;ck &amp;amp;&amp;amp; Roll&amp;quot;), this);</para>
            <para>The Alt+C shortcut is assigned to the button, i.e., when the user presses Alt+C the button will call animateClick(). See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;amp;&amp;amp;').</para>
            <para>You can also set a custom shortcut key using the setShortcut() function. This is useful mostly for buttons that do not have any text, because they have no automatic shortcut.</para>
            <para> button-&amp;gt;setIcon(QIcon(&amp;quot;:/images/print.png&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> button-&amp;gt;setShortcut(tr(&amp;quot;Alt+F7&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>All of the buttons provided by Qt (QPushButton, QToolButton, QCheckBox, and QRadioButton) can display both text and icons.</para>
            <para>A button can be made the default button in a dialog are provided by QPushButton::setDefault() and QPushButton::setAutoDefault().</para>
            <para>QAbstractButton provides most of the states used for buttons:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>isDown() indicates whether the button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>isChecked() indicates whether the button is checked. Only checkable buttons can be checked and unchecked (see below).</para>
            <para>isEnabled() indicates whether the button can be pressed by the user. Note: As opposed to other widgets, buttons derived from QAbstractButton accepts mouse and context menu events when disabled.</para>
            <para>setAutoRepeat() sets whether the button will auto-repeat if the user holds it down. autoRepeatDelay and autoRepeatInterval define how auto-repetition is done.</para>
            <para>setCheckable() sets whether the button is a toggle button or not.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The difference between isDown() and isChecked() is as follows. When the user clicks a toggle button to check it, the button is first pressed then released into the checked state. When the user clicks it again (to uncheck it), the button moves first to the pressed state, then to the unchecked state (isChecked() and isDown() are both false).</para>
            <para>QAbstractButton provides four signals:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>pressed() is emitted when the left mouse button is pressed while the mouse cursor is inside the button.</para>
            <para>released() is emitted when the left mouse button is released.</para>
            <para>clicked() is emitted when the button is first pressed and then released, when the shortcut key is typed, or when click() or animateClick() is called.</para>
            <para>toggled() is emitted when the state of a toggle button changes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To subclass QAbstractButton, you must reimplement at least paintEvent() to draw the button's outline and its text or pixmap. It is generally advisable to reimplement sizeHint() as well, and sometimes hitButton() (to determine whether a button press is within the button). For buttons with more than two states (like tri-state buttons), you will also have to reimplement checkStateSet() and nextCheckState().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QButtonGroup.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWidget">
            <summary>
            The QWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse, keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a representation of itself on the screen. Every widget is rectangular, and they are sorted in a Z-order. A widget is clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of it.</para>
            <para>A widget that is not embedded in a parent widget is called a window. Usually, windows have a frame and a title bar, although it is also possible to create windows without such decoration using suitable window flags). In Qt, QMainWindow and the various subclasses of QDialog are the most common window types.</para>
            <para>Every widget's constructor accepts one or two standard arguments:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWidget *parent = 0 is the parent of the new widget. If it is 0 (the default), the new widget will be a window. If not, it will be a child of parent, and be constrained by parent's geometry (unless you specify Qt::Window as window flag).</para>
            <para>Qt::WindowFlags f = 0 (where available) sets the window flags; the default is suitable for almost all widgets, but to get, for example, a window without a window system frame, you must use special flags.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little direct functionality; for example, QWidget has a font property, but never uses this itself. There are many subclasses which provide real functionality, such as QLabel, QPushButton, QListWidget, and QTabWidget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Top-Level and Child Widgets</para>
            <para>A widget without a parent widget is always an independent window (top-level widget). For these widgets, setWindowTitle() and setWindowIcon() set the title bar and icon respectively.</para>
            <para>Non-window widgets are child widgets, displayed within their parent widgets. Most widgets in Qt are mainly useful as child widgets. For example, it is possible to display a button as a top-level window, but most people prefer to put their buttons inside other widgets, such as QDialog.</para>
            <para>The diagram above shows a QGroupBox widget being used to hold various child widgets in a layout provided by QGridLayout. The QLabel child widgets have been outlined to indicate their full sizes.</para>
            <para>If you want to use a QWidget to hold child widgets you will usually want to add a layout to the parent QWidget. See Layout Management for more information.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Composite Widgets</para>
            <para>When a widget is used as a container to group a number of child widgets, it is known as a composite widget. These can be created by constructing a widget with the required visual properties - a QFrame, for example - and adding child widgets to it, usually managed by a layout. The above diagram shows such a composite widget that was created using Qt Designer.</para>
            <para>Composite widgets can also be created by subclassing a standard widget, such as QWidget or QFrame, and adding the necessary layout and child widgets in the constructor of the subclass. Many of the examples provided with Qt use this approach, and it is also covered in the Qt Tutorials.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Custom Widgets and Painting</para>
            <para>Since QWidget is a subclass of QPaintDevice, subclasses can be used to display custom content that is composed using a series of painting operations with an instance of the QPainter class. This approach contrasts with the canvas-style approach used by the Graphics View Framework where items are added to a scene by the application and are rendered by the framework itself.</para>
            <para>Each widget performs all painting operations from within its paintEvent() function. This is called whenever the widget needs to be redrawn, either as a result of some external change or when requested by the application.</para>
            <para>The Analog Clock example shows how a simple widget can handle paint events.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Size Hints and Size Policies</para>
            <para>When implementing a new widget, it is almost always useful to reimplement sizeHint() to provide a reasonable default size for the widget and to set the correct size policy with setSizePolicy().</para>
            <para>By default, composite widgets which do not provide a size hint will be sized according to the space requirements of their child widgets.</para>
            <para>The size policy lets you supply good default behavior for the layout management system, so that other widgets can contain and manage yours easily. The default size policy indicates that the size hint represents the preferred size of the widget, and this is often good enough for many widgets.</para>
            <para>Note: The size of top-level widgets are constrained to 2/3 of the desktop's height and width. You can resize() the widget manually if these bounds are inadequate.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Events</para>
            <para>Widgets respond to events that are typically caused by user actions. Qt delivers events to widgets by calling specific event handler functions with instances of QEvent subclasses containing information about each event.</para>
            <para>If your widget only contains child widgets, you probably do not need to implement any event handlers. If you want to detect a mouse click in a child widget call the child's underMouse() function inside the widget's mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>The Scribble example implements a wider set of events to handle mouse movement, button presses, and window resizing.</para>
            <para>You will need to supply the behavior and content for your own widgets, but here is a brief overview of the events that are relevant to QWidget, starting with the most common ones:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>paintEvent() is called whenever the widget needs to be repainted. Every widget displaying custom content must implement it. Painting using a QPainter can only take place in a paintEvent() or a function called by a paintEvent().</para>
            <para>resizeEvent() is called when the widget has been resized.</para>
            <para>mousePressEvent() is called when a mouse button is pressed while the mouse cursor is inside the widget, or when the widget has grabbed the mouse using grabMouse(). Pressing the mouse without releasing it is effectively the same as calling grabMouse().</para>
            <para>mouseReleaseEvent() is called when a mouse button is released. A widget receives mouse release events when it has received the corresponding mouse press event. This means that if the user presses the mouse inside your widget, then drags the mouse somewhere else before releasing the mouse button, your widget receives the release event. There is one exception: if a popup menu appears while the mouse button is held down, this popup immediately steals the mouse events.</para>
            <para>mouseDoubleClickEvent() is called when the user double-clicks in the widget. If the user double-clicks, the widget receives a mouse press event, a mouse release event and finally this event instead of a second mouse press event. (Some mouse move events may also be received if the mouse is not held steady during this operation.) It is not possible to distinguish a click from a double-click until the second click arrives. (This is one reason why most GUI books recommend that double-clicks be an extension of single-clicks, rather than trigger a different action.)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Widgets that accept keyboard input need to reimplement a few more event handlers:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>keyPressEvent() is called whenever a key is pressed, and again when a key has been held down long enough for it to auto-repeat. The Tab and Shift+Tab keys are only passed to the widget if they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms. To force those keys to be processed by your widget, you must reimplement QWidget::event().</para>
            <para>focusInEvent() is called when the widget gains keyboard focus (assuming you have called setFocusPolicy()). Well-behaved widgets indicate that they own the keyboard focus in a clear but discreet way.</para>
            <para>focusOutEvent() is called when the widget loses keyboard focus.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You may be required to also reimplement some of the less common event handlers:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>mouseMoveEvent() is called whenever the mouse moves while a mouse button is held down. This can be useful during drag and drop operations. If you call setMouseTracking(true), you get mouse move events even when no buttons are held down. (See also the Drag and Drop guide.)</para>
            <para>keyReleaseEvent() is called whenever a key is released and while it is held down (if the key is auto-repeating). In that case, the widget will receive a pair of key release and key press event for every repeat. The Tab and Shift+Tab keys are only passed to the widget if they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms. To force those keys to be processed by your widget, you must reimplement QWidget::event().</para>
            <para>wheelEvent() is called whenever the user turns the mouse wheel while the widget has the focus.</para>
            <para>enterEvent() is called when the mouse enters the widget's screen space. (This excludes screen space owned by any of the widget's children.)</para>
            <para>leaveEvent() is called when the mouse leaves the widget's screen space. If the mouse enters a child widget it will not cause a leaveEvent().</para>
            <para>moveEvent() is called when the widget has been moved relative to its parent.</para>
            <para>closeEvent() is called when the user closes the widget (or when close() is called).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>There are also some rather obscure events described in the documentation for QEvent::Type. To handle these events, you need to reimplement event() directly.</para>
            <para>The default implementation of event() handles Tab and Shift+Tab (to move the keyboard focus), and passes on most of the other events to one of the more specialized handlers above.</para>
            <para>Events and the mechanism used to deliver them are covered in The Event System.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Groups of Functions and Properties</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ContextFunctions and Properties</para>
            <para>Window functions	show(), hide(), raise(), lower(), close().</para>
            <para>Top-level windows	windowModified, windowTitle, windowIcon, windowIconText, isActiveWindow, activateWindow(), minimized, showMinimized(), maximized, showMaximized(), fullScreen, showFullScreen(), showNormal().</para>
            <para>Window contents	update(), repaint(), scroll().</para>
            <para>Geometry	pos, x(), y(), rect, size, width(), height(), move(), resize(), sizePolicy, sizeHint(), minimumSizeHint(), updateGeometry(), layout(), frameGeometry, geometry, childrenRect, childrenRegion, adjustSize(), mapFromGlobal(), mapToGlobal(), mapFromParent(), mapToParent(), maximumSize, minimumSize, sizeIncrement, baseSize, setFixedSize()</para>
            <para>Mode	visible, isVisibleTo(), enabled, isEnabledTo(), modal, isWindow(), mouseTracking, updatesEnabled, visibleRegion().</para>
            <para>Look and feel	style(), setStyle(), styleSheet, cursor, font, palette, backgroundRole(), setBackgroundRole(), fontInfo(), fontMetrics().</para>
            <para>Keyboard focus functions	focus, focusPolicy, setFocus(), clearFocus(), setTabOrder(), setFocusProxy(), focusNextChild(), focusPreviousChild().</para>
            <para>Mouse and keyboard grabbing	grabMouse(), releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), mouseGrabber(), keyboardGrabber().</para>
            <para>Event handlers	event(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), wheelEvent(), enterEvent(), leaveEvent(), paintEvent(), moveEvent(), resizeEvent(), closeEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), dropEvent(), childEvent(), showEvent(), hideEvent(), customEvent(). changeEvent(),</para>
            <para>System functions	parentWidget(), window(), setParent(), winId(), find(), metric().</para>
            <para>Interactive help	setToolTip(), setWhatsThis()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Widget Style Sheets</para>
            <para>In addition to the standard widget styles for each platform, widgets can also be styled according to rules specified in a style sheet. This feature enables you to customize the appearance of specific widgets to provide visual cues to users about their purpose. For example, a button could be styled in a particular way to indicate that it performs a destructive action.</para>
            <para>The use of widget style sheets is described in more detail in the Qt Style Sheets document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Transparency and Double Buffering</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid flicker.</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.1, the Qt::WA_ContentsPropagated widget attribute has been deprecated. Instead, the contents of parent widgets are propagated by default to each of their children as long as Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen is not set. Custom widgets can be written to take advantage of this feature by updating irregular regions (to create non-rectangular child widgets), or painting with colors that have less than full alpha component. The following diagram shows how attributes and properties of a custom widget can be fine-tuned to achieve different effects.</para>
            <para>In the above diagram, a semi-transparent rectangular child widget with an area removed is constructed and added to a parent widget (a QLabel showing a pixmap). Then, different properties and widget attributes are set to achieve different effects:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The left widget has no additional properties or widget attributes set. This default state suits most custom widgets using transparency, are irregularly-shaped, or do not paint over their entire area with an opaque brush.</para>
            <para>The center widget has the autoFillBackground property set. This property is used with custom widgets that rely on the widget to supply a default background, and do not paint over their entire area with an opaque brush.</para>
            <para>The right widget has the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute set. This indicates that the widget will paint over its entire area with opaque colors. The widget's area will initially be uninitialized, represented in the diagram with a red diagonal grid pattern that shines through the overpainted area. The Qt::WA_OpaquePaintArea attribute is useful for widgets that need to paint their own specialized contents quickly and do not need a default filled background.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To rapidly update custom widgets with simple background colors, such as real-time plotting or graphing widgets, it is better to define a suitable background color (using setBackgroundRole() with the QPalette::Window role), set the autoFillBackground property, and only implement the necessary drawing functionality in the widget's paintEvent().</para>
            <para>To rapidly update custom widgets that constantly paint over their entire areas with opaque content, e.g., video streaming widgets, it is better to set the widget's Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent, avoiding any unnecessary overhead associated with repainting the widget's background.</para>
            <para>If a widget has both the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute and the autoFillBackground property set, the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent attribute takes precedence. Depending on your requirements, you should choose either one of them.</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.1, the contents of parent widgets are also propagated to standard Qt widgets. This can lead to some unexpected results if the parent widget is decorated in a non-standard way, as shown in the diagram below.</para>
            <para>The scope for customizing the painting behavior of standard Qt widgets, without resorting to subclassing, is slightly less than that possible for custom widgets. Usually, the desired appearance of a standard widget can be achieved by setting its autoFillBackground property.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Translucent Windows</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.5, it has been possible to create windows with translucent regions on window systems that support compositing.</para>
            <para>To enable this feature in a top-level widget, set its Qt::WA_TranslucentBackground attribute with setAttribute() and ensure that its background is painted with non-opaque colors in the regions you want to be partially transparent.</para>
            <para>Platform notes:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>X11: This feature relies on the use of an X server that supports ARGB visuals and a compositing window manager.</para>
            <para>Windows: The widget needs to have the Qt::FramelessWindowHint window flag set for the translucency to work.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Native Widgets vs Alien Widgets</para>
            <para>Introduced in Qt 4.4, alien widgets are widgets unknown to the windowing system. They do not have a native window handle associated with them. This feature significantly speeds up widget painting, resizing, and removes flicker.</para>
            <para>Should you require the old behavior with native windows, you can choose one of the following options:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use the QT_USE_NATIVE_WINDOWS=1 in your environment.</para>
            <para>Set the Qt::AA_NativeWindows attribute on your application. All widgets will be native widgets.</para>
            <para>Set the Qt::WA_NativeWindow attribute on widgets: The widget itself and all of its ancestors will become native (unless Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors is set).</para>
            <para>Call QWidget::winId to enforce a native window (this implies 3).</para>
            <para>Set the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen attribute to enforce a native window (this implies 3).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Softkeys</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.6, Softkeys are usually physical keys on a device that have a corresponding label or other visual representation on the screen that is generally located next to its physical counterpart. They are most often found on mobile phone platforms. In modern touch based user interfaces it is also possible to have softkeys that do not correspond to any physical keys. Softkeys differ from other onscreen labels in that they are contextual.</para>
            <para>In Qt, contextual softkeys are added to a widget by calling addAction() and passing a QAction with a softkey role set on it. When the widget containing the softkey actions has focus, its softkeys should appear in the user interface. Softkeys are discovered by traversing the widget hierarchy so it is possible to define a single set of softkeys that are present at all times by calling addAction() for a given top level widget.</para>
            <para>On some platforms, this concept overlaps with QMenuBar such that if no other softkeys are found and the top level widget is a QMainWindow containing a QMenuBar, the menubar actions may appear on one of the softkeys.</para>
            <para>Note: Currently softkeys are only supported on the Symbian Platform.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QEvent, QPainter, QGridLayout, QBoxLayout, addAction(), QAction, and QMenuBar.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a widget which is a child of parent, with widget flags set to f.</para>
            <para>If parent is 0, the new widget becomes a window. If parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window inside parent. The new widget is deleted when its parent is deleted.</para>
            <para>The widget flags argument, f, is normally 0, but it can be set to customize the frame of a window (i.e. parent must be 0). To customize the frame, use a value composed from the bitwise OR of any of the window flags.</para>
            <para>If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must explicitly show the child to make it visible.</para>
            <para>Note that the X11 version of Qt may not be able to deliver all combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on X11, Qt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager can override the application's settings. On Windows, Qt can set whatever flags you want.</para>
            <para>See also windowFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnActionEvent(QtGui.QActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called with the given event whenever the widget's actions are changed.</para>
            <para>See also addAction(), insertAction(), removeAction(), actions(), and QActionEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Actions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the (possibly empty) list of this widget's actions.</para>
            <para>See also contextMenuPolicy, insertAction(), and removeAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ActivateWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the top-level widget containing this widget to be the active window.</para>
            <para>An active window is a visible top-level window that has the keyboard input focus.</para>
            <para>This function performs the same operation as clicking the mouse on the title bar of a top-level window. On X11, the result depends on the Window Manager. If you want to ensure that the window is stacked on top as well you should also call raise(). Note that the window must be visible, otherwise activateWindow() has no effect.</para>
            <para>On Windows, if you are calling this when the application is not currently the active one then it will not make it the active window. It will change the color of the taskbar entry to indicate that the window has changed in some way. This is because Microsoft does not allow an application to interrupt what the user is currently doing in another application.</para>
            <para>See also isActiveWindow(), window(), and show().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.AddAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the action action to this widget's list of actions.</para>
            <para>All QWidgets have a list of QActions, however they can be represented graphically in many different ways. The default use of the QAction list (as returned by actions()) is to create a context QMenu.</para>
            <para>A QWidget should only have one of each action and adding an action it already has will not cause the same action to be in the widget twice.</para>
            <para>The ownership of action is not transferred to this QWidget.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), insertAction(), actions(), and QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.AddActions(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QAction})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the actions actions to this widget's list of actions.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), QMenu, and addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.AdjustSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Adjusts the size of the widget to fit its contents.</para>
            <para>This function uses sizeHint() if it is valid, i.e., the size hint's width and height are &gt;= 0. Otherwise, it sets the size to the children rectangle that covers all child widgets (the union of all child widget rectangles).</para>
            <para>For windows, the screen size is also taken into account. If the sizeHint() is less than (200, 100) and the size policy is expanding, the window will be at least (200, 100). The maximum size of a window is 2/3 of the screen's width and height.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint() and childrenRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.</para>
            <para>The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through the event supplied.</para>
            <para>Change events include: QEvent::ToolBarChange, QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange, QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange, QEvent::WindowTitleChange, QEvent::IconTextChange, QEvent::ModifiedChange, QEvent::MouseTrackingChange, QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::WindowStateChange, QEvent::LanguageChange, QEvent::LocaleChange, QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ChildAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the visible child widget at point p in the widget's own coordinate system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ChildAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visible child widget at the position (x, y) in the widget's coordinate system. If there is no visible child widget at the specified position, the function returns 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ClearFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Takes keyboard input focus from the widget.</para>
            <para>If the widget has active focus, a focus out event is sent to this widget to tell it that it is about to lose the focus.</para>
            <para>This widget must enable focus setting in order to get the keyboard input focus, i.e. it must call setFocusPolicy().</para>
            <para>See also hasFocus(), setFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), and QApplication::focusWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ClearMask">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes any mask set by setMask().</para>
            <para>See also setMask().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Close">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>First it sends the widget a QCloseEvent. The widget is hidden if it accepts the close event. If it ignores the event, nothing happens. The default implementation of QWidget::closeEvent() accepts the close event.</para>
            <para>If the widget has the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag, the widget is also deleted. A close events is delivered to the widget no matter if the widget is visible or not.</para>
            <para>The QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed. By default this attribute is set for all widgets except transient windows such as splash screens, tool windows, and popup menus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called with the given event when Qt receives a window close request for a top-level widget from the window system.</para>
            <para>By default, the event is accepted and the widget is closed. You can reimplement this function to change the way the widget responds to window close requests. For example, you can prevent the window from closing by calling ignore() on all events.</para>
            <para>Main window applications typically use reimplementations of this function to check whether the user's work has been saved and ask for permission before closing. For example, the Application Example uses a helper function to determine whether or not to close the window:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (maybeSave()) {</para>
            <para>         writeSettings();</para>
            <para>         event-&gt;accept();</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         event-&gt;ignore();</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also event(), hide(), close(), QCloseEvent, and Application Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ContentsRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the area inside the widget's margins.</para>
            <para>See also setContentsMargins() and getContentsMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget context menu events.</para>
            <para>The handler is called when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::DefaultContextMenu.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the context event. See the QContextMenuEvent documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>See also event(), QContextMenuEvent, and customContextMenuRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Create">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new widget window if window is 0, otherwise sets the widget's window to window.</para>
            <para>Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is true. If initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.</para>
            <para>Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is true. If destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).</para>
            <para>The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Create(NativeULong,System.Boolean,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new widget window if window is 0, otherwise sets the widget's window to window.</para>
            <para>Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is true. If initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.</para>
            <para>Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is true. If destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).</para>
            <para>The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnCustomContextMenuRequested(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::CustomContextMenu, and the user has requested a context menu on the widget. The position pos is the position of the context menu event that the widget receives. Normally this is in widget coordinates. The exception to this rule is QAbstractScrollArea and its subclasses that map the context menu event to coordinates of the viewport() .</para>
            <para>See also mapToGlobal(), QMenu, and contextMenuPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Destroy(System.Boolean,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if destroyWindow is true.</para>
            <para>destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing destroySubWindows for the destroyWindow parameter. To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy subwidgets selectively first.</para>
            <para>This function is usually called from the QWidget destructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse enters this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>If the event is ignored, the widget won't receive any drag move events.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragEnterEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse leaves this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragLeaveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called if a drag is in progress, and when any of the following conditions occur: the cursor enters this widget, the cursor moves within this widget, or a modifier key is pressed on the keyboard while this widget has the focus. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDropEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.EffectiveWinId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the effective window system identifier of the widget, i.e. the native parent's window system identifier.</para>
            <para>If the widget is native, this function returns the native widget ID. Otherwise, the window ID of the first native parent widget, i.e., the top-level widget that contains this widget, is returned.</para>
            <para>Note: We recommend that you do not store this value as it is likely to change at run-time.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also nativeParentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.EnsurePolished">
            <summary>
            <para>Ensures that the widget has been polished by QStyle (i.e., has a proper font and palette).</para>
            <para>QWidget calls this function after it has been fully constructed but before it is shown the very first time. You can call this function if you want to ensure that the widget is polished before doing an operation, e.g., the correct font size might be needed in the widget's sizeHint() reimplementation. Note that this function is called from the default implementation of sizeHint().</para>
            <para>Polishing is useful for final initialization that must happen after all constructors (from base classes as well as from subclasses) have been called.</para>
            <para>If you need to change some settings when a widget is polished, reimplement event() and handle the QEvent::Polish event type.</para>
            <para>Note: The function is declared const so that it can be called from other const functions (e.g., sizeHint()).</para>
            <para>See also event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnEnterEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget enter events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the widget.</para>
            <para>See also leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            <para>This is the main event handler; it handles event event. You can reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using one of the specialized event handlers instead.</para>
            <para>Key press and release events are treated differently from other events. event() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to move the focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to (or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls keyPressEvent().</para>
            <para>Mouse and tablet event handling is also slightly special: only when the widget is enabled, event() will call the specialized handlers such as mousePressEvent(); otherwise it will discard the event.</para>
            <para>This function returns true if the event was recognized, otherwise it returns false. If the recognized event was accepted (see QEvent::accepted), any further processing such as event propagation to the parent widget stops.</para>
            <para>See also closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), moveEvent(), paintEvent(), resizeEvent(), QObject::event(), and QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Find(NativeULong)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the widget with window identifer/handle id.</para>
            <para>The window identifier type depends on the underlying window system, see qwindowdefs.h for the actual definition. If there is no widget with this identifier, 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget. The event is passed in the event parameter</para>
            <para>A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)</para>
            <para>The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).</para>
            <para>See also focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.FocusNextChild">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it can't.</para>
            <para>See also focusPreviousChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it can't.</para>
            <para>If next is true, this function searches forward, if next is false, it searches backward.</para>
            <para>Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its &quot;current active link&quot; forward or backward, and call focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or first link on the &quot;page&quot;.</para>
            <para>Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets, but only the window that contains the child widgets decides where to redirect focus. By reimplementing this function for an object, you thus gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets.</para>
            <para>See also focusNextChild() and focusPreviousChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget. The events is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)</para>
            <para>The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).</para>
            <para>See also focusInEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.FocusPreviousChild">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it can't.</para>
            <para>See also focusNextChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.FocusWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last child of this widget that setFocus had been called on. For top level widgets this is the widget that will get focus in case this window gets activated</para>
            <para>This is not the same as QApplication::focusWidget(), which returns the focus widget in the currently active window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.FontInfo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font info for the widget's current font. Equivalent to QFontInto(widget-&gt;font()).</para>
            <para>See also font(), fontMetrics(), and setFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.FontMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font metrics for the widget's current font. Equivalent to QFontMetrics(widget-&gt;font()).</para>
            <para>See also font(), fontInfo(), and setFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GetContentsMargins(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget's contents margins for left, top, right, and bottom.</para>
            <para>See also setContentsMargins() and contentsRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GetDC">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window system handle of the widget, for low-level access. Using this function is not portable.</para>
            <para>An HDC acquired with getDC() has to be released with releaseDC().</para>
            <para>Warning: Using this function is not portable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GrabGesture(QtCore.Qt.GestureType,QtCore.Qt.GestureFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Subscribes the widget to a given gesture with specific flags.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also ungrabGesture() and QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GrabKeyboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Grabs the keyboard input.</para>
            <para>This widget receives all keyboard events until releaseKeyboard() is called; other widgets get no keyboard events at all. Mouse events are not affected. Use grabMouse() if you want to grab that.</para>
            <para>The focus widget is not affected, except that it doesn't receive any keyboard events. setFocus() moves the focus as usual, but the new focus widget receives keyboard events only after releaseKeyboard() is called.</para>
            <para>If a different widget is currently grabbing keyboard input, that widget's grab is released first.</para>
            <para>See also releaseKeyboard(), grabMouse(), releaseMouse(), and focusWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GrabMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>Grabs the mouse input.</para>
            <para>This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is called; other widgets get no mouse events at all. Keyboard events are not affected. Use grabKeyboard() if you want to grab that.</para>
            <para>Warning: Bugs in mouse-grabbing applications very often lock the terminal. Use this function with extreme caution, and consider using the -nograb command line option while debugging.</para>
            <para>It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last button is released.</para>
            <para>Note: Only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If isVisible() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call grabMouse().</para>
            <para>Note: (Mac OS X developers) For Cocoa, calling grabMouse() on a widget only works when the mouse is inside the frame of that widget. For Carbon, it works outside the widget's frame as well, like for Windows and X11.</para>
            <para>See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GrabMouse(QtGui.QCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function overloads grabMouse().</para>
            <para>Grabs the mouse input and changes the cursor shape.</para>
            <para>The cursor will assume shape cursor (for as long as the mouse focus is grabbed) and this widget will be the only one to receive mouse events until releaseMouse() is called().</para>
            <para>Warning: Grabbing the mouse might lock the terminal.</para>
            <para>Note: (Mac OS X developers) See the note in QWidget::grabMouse().</para>
            <para>See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), and setCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GrabShortcut(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtCore.Qt.ShortcutContext)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given key sequence in the given context. If the context is Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut, or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut.</para>
            <para>If the same key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets, when the key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic order, but with the ``ambiguous'' flag set to true.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not normally need to use this function; instead create QActions with the shortcut key sequences you require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar buttons), or create QShortcuts if you just need key sequences. Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you, and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level function.</para>
            <para>See also releaseShortcut() and setShortcutEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.GraphicsProxyWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the proxy widget for the corresponding embedded widget in a graphics view; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsProxyWidget::createProxyForChildWidget() and QGraphicsScene::addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred height for this widget, given the width w.</para>
            <para>If this widget has a layout, the default implementation returns the layout's preferred height. if there is no layout, the default implementation returns -1 indicating that the preferred height does not depend on the width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Hide">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the widget. This function is equivalent to setVisible(false).</para>
            <para>Note: If you are working with QDialog or its subclasses and you invoke the show() function after this function, the dialog will be displayed in its original position.</para>
            <para>See also hideEvent(), isHidden(), show(), setVisible(), isVisible(), and close().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget hide events. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been hidden.</para>
            <para>Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also visible, event(), and QHideEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler is called when the state of the input method changes.</para>
            <para>Note that when creating custom text editing widgets, the Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled window attribute must be set explicitly (using the setAttribute() function) in order to receive input method events.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls event-&gt;ignore(), which rejects the Input Method event. See the QInputMethodEvent documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>See also event() and QInputMethodEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>This method is only relevant for input widgets. It is used by the input method to query a set of properties of the widget to be able to support complex input method operations as support for surrounding text and reconversions.</para>
            <para>query specifies which property is queried.</para>
            <para>See also inputMethodEvent(), QInputMethodEvent, QInputContext, and inputMethodHints.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.InsertAction(QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the action action to this widget's list of actions, before the action before. It appends the action if before is 0 or before is not a valid action for this widget.</para>
            <para>A QWidget should only have one of each action.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), addAction(), QMenu, contextMenuPolicy, and actions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.InsertActions(QtGui.QAction,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QAction})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the actions actions to this widget's list of actions, before the action before. It appends the action if before is 0 or before is not a valid action for this widget.</para>
            <para>A QWidget can have at most one of each action.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), QMenu, insertAction(), and contextMenuPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsAncestorOf(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this widget is a parent, (or grandparent and so on to any level), of the given child, and both widgets are within the same window; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsEnabledTo(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this widget would become enabled if ancestor is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly disabled.</para>
            <para>isEnabledTo(0) is equivalent to isEnabled().</para>
            <para>See also setEnabled() and enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsEnabledToTLW">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isEnabled()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsHidden">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the widget is hidden, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>A hidden widget will only become visible when show() is called on it. It will not be automatically shown when the parent is shown.</para>
            <para>To check visibility, use !isVisible() instead (notice the exclamation mark).</para>
            <para>isHidden() implies !isVisible(), but a widget can be not visible and not hidden at the same time. This is the case for widgets that are children of widgets that are not visible.</para>
            <para>Widgets are hidden if:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>they were created as independent windows,</para>
            <para>they were created as children of visible widgets,</para>
            <para>hide() or setVisible(false) was called.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsTopLevel">
            <summary>
            <para>Use isWindow() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsVisibleTo(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this widget would become visible if ancestor is shown; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The true case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly hidden.</para>
            <para>This function will still return true if the widget is obscured by other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it or they were to be moved.</para>
            <para>isVisibleTo(0) is identical to isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also show(), hide(), and isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.IsWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the widget is an independent window, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>A window is a widget that isn't visually the child of any other widget and that usually has a frame and a window title.</para>
            <para>A window can have a parent widget. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a common taskbar entry with its parent.</para>
            <para>QDialog and QMainWindow widgets are by default windows, even if a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the Qt::Window flag.</para>
            <para>See also window(), isModal(), and parentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key press events for the widget.</para>
            <para>A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key press event.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.</para>
            <para>The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user presses Esc. Otherwise the event is ignored, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.</para>
            <para>See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), QKeyEvent, and Tetrix Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events for the widget.</para>
            <para>A widget must accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key release event.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.</para>
            <para>See also keyPressEvent(), QKeyEvent::ignore(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and QKeyEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.KeyboardGrabber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the keyboard input.</para>
            <para>If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the keyboard, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>See also grabMouse() and mouseGrabber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.LanguageChange">
            <summary>
            <para>void QWidget::resetInputContext () [protected]</para>
            <para>This function can be called on the widget that currently has focus to reset the input method operating on it.</para>
            <para>This function is providing for convenience, instead you should use reset() on the input context that was returned by inputContext().</para>
            <para>See also QInputContext, inputContext(), and QInputContext::reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnLeaveEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget leave events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves the widget.</para>
            <para>See also enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Lower">
            <summary>
            <para>Lowers the widget to the bottom of the parent widget's stack.</para>
            <para>After this call the widget will be visually behind (and therefore obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets.</para>
            <para>See also raise() and stackUnder().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MapFrom(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the widget coordinate pos from the coordinate system of parent to this widget's coordinate system. The parent must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.</para>
            <para>See also mapTo(), mapFromParent(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MapFromGlobal(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the global screen coordinate pos to widget coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also mapToGlobal(), mapFrom(), and mapFromParent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MapFromParent(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the parent widget coordinate pos to widget coordinates.</para>
            <para>Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no parent.</para>
            <para>See also mapToParent(), mapFrom(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MapTo(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the widget coordinate pos to the coordinate system of parent. The parent must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.</para>
            <para>See also mapFrom(), mapToParent(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MapToGlobal(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the widget coordinate pos to global screen coordinates. For example, mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)) would give the global coordinates of the top-left pixel of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromGlobal(), mapTo(), and mapToParent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MapToParent(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the widget coordinate pos to a coordinate in the parent widget.</para>
            <para>Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromParent(), mapTo(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Metric(QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QPaintDevice::metric().</para>
            <para>Internal implementation of the virtual QPaintDevice::metric() function.</para>
            <para>m is the metric to get.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.</para>
            <para>The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.</para>
            <para>Note: The widget will also receive mouse press and mouse release events in addition to the double click event. It is up to the developer to ensure that the application interprets these events correctly.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and QMouseEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.MouseGrabber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the mouse input.</para>
            <para>If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the mouse, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>See also grabMouse() and keyboardGrabber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse button is pressed.</para>
            <para>QMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor, relative to this widget. For press and release events, the position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes. This is a feature of the underlying window system, not Qt.</para>
            <para>If you want to show a tooltip immediately, while the mouse is moving (e.g., to get the mouse coordinates with QMouseEvent::pos() and show them as a tooltip), you must first enable mouse tracking as described above. Then, to ensure that the tooltip is updated immediately, you must call QToolTip::showText() instead of setToolTip() in your implementation of mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>See also setMouseTracking(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets' location and maybe more.</para>
            <para>The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnMoveEvent(QtGui.QMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget move events which are passed in the event parameter. When the widget receives this event, it is already at the new position.</para>
            <para>The old position is accessible through QMoveEvent::oldPos().</para>
            <para>See also resizeEvent(), event(), move(), and QMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.NativeParentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the native parent for this widget, i.e. the next ancestor widget that has a system identifier, or 0 if it does not have any native parent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also effectiveWinId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.NextInFocusChain">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the next widget in this widget's focus chain.</para>
            <para>See also previousInFocusChain().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OverrideWindowFlags(QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the window flags for the widget to flags, without telling the window system.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not call this function unless you really know what you're doing.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.PaintEngine">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QPaintDevice::paintEngine().</para>
            <para>Returns the widget's paint engine.</para>
            <para>Note that this function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it's meant for reimplementation purposes only. The function is called by Qt internally, and the default implementation may not always return a valid pointer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events passed in event.</para>
            <para>A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of a widget. It can happen for one of the following reasons:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>repaint() or update() was invoked,</para>
            <para>the widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or</para>
            <para>many other reasons.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked to, but some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the requested region: QPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization does not change the result, as painting is clipped to that region during event processing. QListView and QTableView do this, for example.</para>
            <para>Qt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint events into one. When update() is called several times or the window system sends several paint events, Qt merges these events into one event with a larger region (see QRegion::united()). The repaint() function does not permit this optimization, so we suggest using update() whenever possible.</para>
            <para>When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been erased, so you are painting on the widget's background.</para>
            <para>The background can be set using setBackgroundRole() and setPalette().</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid flicker.</para>
            <para>Note for the X11 platform: It is possible to toggle global double buffering by calling qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(). For example,</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> extern void qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(bool);</para>
            <para> qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(false);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para>Note: Generally, you should refrain from calling update() or repaint() inside a paintEvent(). For example, calling update() or repaint() on children inside a paintevent() results in undefined behavior; the child may or may not get a paint event.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you are using a custom paint engine without Qt's backingstore, Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen must be set. Otherwise, QWidget::paintEngine() will never be called; the backingstore will be used instead.</para>
            <para>See also event(), repaint(), update(), QPainter, QPixmap, QPaintEvent, and Analog Clock Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ParentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.PreviousInFocusChain">
            <summary>
            <para>The previousInFocusChain function returns the previous widget in this widget's focus chain.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also nextInFocusChain().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Raise">
            <summary>
            <para>Raises this widget to the top of the parent widget's stack.</para>
            <para>After this call the widget will be visually in front of any overlapping sibling widgets.</para>
            <para>Note: When using activateWindow(), you can call this function to ensure that the window is stacked on top.</para>
            <para>See also lower() and stackUnder().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ReleaseDC(System.IntPtr)">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the HDC hdc acquired by a previous call to getDC().</para>
            <para>Warning: Using this function is not portable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ReleaseKeyboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the keyboard grab.</para>
            <para>See also grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and releaseMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ReleaseMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the mouse grab.</para>
            <para>See also grabMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ReleaseShortcut(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the shortcut with the given id from Qt's shortcut system. The widget will no longer receive QEvent::Shortcut events for the shortcut's key sequence (unless it has other shortcuts with the same key sequence).</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system removes shortcuts automatically when their parent widget is destroyed. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function. Note also that this is an expensive operation.</para>
            <para>See also grabShortcut() and setShortcutEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.RemoveAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the action action from this widget's list of actions.</para>
            <para>See also insertAction(), actions(), and insertAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Render(QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(widget-&gt;size());</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;render(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.</para>
            <para>Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> painter.end();</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;render(this);</para>
            <para>Note: To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Render(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(widget-&gt;size());</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;render(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.</para>
            <para>Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> painter.end();</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;render(this);</para>
            <para>Note: To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Render(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(widget-&gt;size());</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;render(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.</para>
            <para>Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> painter.end();</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;render(this);</para>
            <para>Note: To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Render(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(widget-&gt;size());</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;render(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.</para>
            <para>Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> painter.end();</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;render(this);</para>
            <para>Note: To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Render(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QWidget.RenderFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(widget-&gt;size());</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;render(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.</para>
            <para>Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> painter.end();</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;render(this);</para>
            <para>Note: To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Render(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QRegion,QtGui.QWidget.RenderFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(widget-&gt;size());</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;render(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.</para>
            <para>Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> painter.end();</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;render(this);</para>
            <para>Note: To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Repaint">
            <summary>
            <para>Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.</para>
            <para>We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint, for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update() is better, as it permits Qt to optimize for speed and minimize flicker.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion.</para>
            <para>See also update(), paintEvent(), and setUpdatesEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Repaint(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version repaints a rectangle rect inside the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Repaint(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version repaints a region rgn inside the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Repaint(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version repaints a rectangle (x, y, w, h) inside the widget.</para>
            <para>If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x, and if h is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ResetInputContext">
            <summary>
            <para>This function can be called on the widget that currently has focus to reset the input method operating on it.</para>
            <para>This function is providing for convenience, instead you should use reset() on the input context that was returned by inputContext().</para>
            <para>See also QInputContext, inputContext(), and QInputContext::reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget resize events which are passed in the event parameter. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through QResizeEvent::oldSize().</para>
            <para>The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should be) done inside this handler.</para>
            <para>See also moveEvent(), event(), resize(), QResizeEvent, paintEvent(), and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.RestoreGeometry(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the geometry and state top-level widgets stored in the byte array geometry. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If the restored geometry is off-screen, it will be modified to be inside the available screen geometry.</para>
            <para>To restore geometry saved using QSettings, you can use code like this:</para>
            <para> QSettings settings(&quot;MyCompany&quot;, &quot;MyApp&quot;);</para>
            <para> myWidget-&gt;restoreGeometry(settings.value(&quot;myWidget/geometry&quot;).toByteArray());</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>Use QMainWindow::restoreState() to restore the geometry and the state of toolbars and dock widgets.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also saveGeometry(), QSettings, QMainWindow::saveState(), and QMainWindow::restoreState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SaveGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the current geometry and state for top-level widgets.</para>
            <para>To save the geometry when the window closes, you can implement a close event like this:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QSettings settings(&quot;MyCompany&quot;, &quot;MyApp&quot;);</para>
            <para>     settings.setValue(&quot;geometry&quot;, saveGeometry());</para>
            <para>     QWidget::closeEvent(event);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>Use QMainWindow::saveState() to save the geometry and the state of toolbars and dock widgets.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also restoreGeometry(), QMainWindow::saveState(), and QMainWindow::restoreState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Scroll(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the widget including its children dx pixels to the right and dy downward. Both dx and dy may be negative.</para>
            <para>After scrolling, the widgets will receive paint events for the areas that need to be repainted. For widgets that Qt knows to be opaque, this is only the newly exposed parts. For example, if an opaque widget is scrolled 8 pixels to the left, only an 8-pixel wide stripe at the right edge needs updating.</para>
            <para>Since widgets propagate the contents of their parents by default, you need to set the autoFillBackground property, or use setAttribute() to set the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent attribute, to make a widget opaque.</para>
            <para>For widgets that use contents propagation, a scroll will cause an update of the entire scroll area.</para>
            <para>See also Transparency and Double Buffering.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Scroll(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version only scrolls r and does not move the children of the widget.</para>
            <para>If r is empty or invalid, the result is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also QScrollArea.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetAttribute(QtCore.Qt.WidgetAttribute,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the attribute attribute on this widget if on is true; otherwise clears the attribute.</para>
            <para>See also testAttribute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetContentsMargins(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the margins around the contents of the widget to have the sizes left, top, right, and bottom. The margins are used by the layout system, and may be used by subclasses to specify the area to draw in (e.g. excluding the frame).</para>
            <para>Changing the margins will trigger a resizeEvent().</para>
            <para>See also contentsMargins(), contentsRect(), and getContentsMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetDisabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Disables widget input events if disable is true; otherwise enables input events.</para>
            <para>See the enabled documentation for more information.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabledTo(), QKeyEvent, QMouseEvent, and changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetFixedHeight(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets both the minimum and maximum heights of the widget to h without changing the widths. Provided for convenience.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), and setFixedSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetFixedSize(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to s, thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.</para>
            <para>This will override the default size constraints set by QLayout.</para>
            <para>To remove constraints, set the size to QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.</para>
            <para>Alternatively, if you want the widget to have a fixed size based on its contents, you can call QLayout::setSizeConstraint(QLayout::SetFixedSize);</para>
            <para>See also maximumSize and minimumSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetFixedSize(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the width of the widget to w and the height to h.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetFixedWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets both the minimum and maximum width of the widget to w without changing the heights. Provided for convenience.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), and setFixedSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the active window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetFocus(QtCore.Qt.FocusReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the active window. The reason argument will be passed into any focus event sent from this function, it is used to give an explanation of what caused the widget to get focus. If the window is not active, the widget will be given the focus when the window becomes active.</para>
            <para>First, a focus out event is sent to the focus widget (if any) to tell it that it is about to lose the focus. Then a focus in event is sent to this widget to tell it that it just received the focus. (Nothing happens if the focus in and focus out widgets are the same.)</para>
            <para>Note: On embedded platforms, setFocus() will not cause an input panel to be opened by the input method. If you want this to happen, you have to send a QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel event to the widget yourself.</para>
            <para>setFocus() gives focus to a widget regardless of its focus policy, but does not clear any keyboard grab (see grabKeyboard()).</para>
            <para>Be aware that if the widget is hidden, it will not accept focus until it is shown.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you call setFocus() in a function which may itself be called from focusOutEvent() or focusInEvent(), you may get an infinite recursion.</para>
            <para>See also hasFocus(), clearFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusWidget(), QApplication::focusWidget(), grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), Keyboard Focus, and QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetHidden(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function, equivalent to setVisible(!hidden).</para>
            <para>See also isHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetMask(QtGui.QBitmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Causes only the pixels of the widget for which bitmap has a corresponding 1 bit to be visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be visible, depending on the platform.</para>
            <para>Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly complex.</para>
            <para>The following code shows how an image with an alpha channel can be used to generate a mask for a widget:</para>
            <para>     QLabel topLevelLabel;</para>
            <para>     QPixmap pixmap(&quot;:/images/tux.png&quot;);</para>
            <para>     topLevelLabel.setPixmap(pixmap);</para>
            <para>     topLevelLabel.setMask(pixmap.mask());</para>
            <para>The label shown by this code is masked using the image it contains, giving the appearance that an irregularly-shaped image is being drawn directly onto the screen.</para>
            <para>Masked widgets receive mouse events only on their visible portions.</para>
            <para>See also mask(), clearMask(), windowOpacity(), and Shaped Clock Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetParent(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the parent of the widget to parent, and resets the window flags. The widget is moved to position (0, 0) in its new parent.</para>
            <para>If the new parent widget is in a different window, the reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the tab chain of the new parent widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved widgets had keyboard focus, setParent() calls clearFocus() for that widget.</para>
            <para>If the new parent widget is in the same window as the old parent, setting the parent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>If the &quot;new&quot; parent widget is the old parent widget, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>Note: The widget becomes invisible as part of changing its parent, even if it was previously visible. You must call show() to make the widget visible again.</para>
            <para>Warning: It is very unlikely that you will ever need this function. If you have a widget that changes its content dynamically, it is far easier to use QStackedWidget.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetParent(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the parent of the widget to parent, and resets the window flags. The widget is moved to position (0, 0) in its new parent.</para>
            <para>If the new parent widget is in a different window, the reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the tab chain of the new parent widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved widgets had keyboard focus, setParent() calls clearFocus() for that widget.</para>
            <para>If the new parent widget is in the same window as the old parent, setting the parent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>If the &quot;new&quot; parent widget is the old parent widget, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>Note: The widget becomes invisible as part of changing its parent, even if it was previously visible. You must call show() to make the widget visible again.</para>
            <para>Warning: It is very unlikely that you will ever need this function. If you have a widget that changes its content dynamically, it is far easier to use QStackedWidget.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetShortcutAutoRepeat(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enable is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also grabShortcut() and releaseShortcut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetShortcutEnabled(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enable is true, the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function.</para>
            <para>See also grabShortcut() and releaseShortcut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.SetTabOrder(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Puts the second widget after the first widget in the focus order.</para>
            <para>Note that since the tab order of the second widget is changed, you should order a chain like this:</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(c, d); // a to b to c to d</para>
            <para>not like this:</para>
            <para> // WRONG</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(c, d); // c to d</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b AND c to d</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c, but not c to d</para>
            <para>If first or second has a focus proxy, setTabOrder() correctly substitutes the proxy.</para>
            <para>See also setFocusPolicy(), setFocusProxy(), and Keyboard Focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Show">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the widget and its child widgets. This function is equivalent to setVisible(true).</para>
            <para>See also raise(), showEvent(), hide(), setVisible(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), showNormal(), and isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget show events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately before they are shown. The spontaneous show events of windows are delivered afterwards.</para>
            <para>Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also visible, event(), and QShowEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ShowFullScreen">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the widget in full-screen mode.</para>
            <para>Calling this function only affects windows.</para>
            <para>To return from full-screen mode, call showNormal().</para>
            <para>Full-screen mode works fine under Windows, but has certain problems under X. These problems are due to limitations of the ICCCM protocol that specifies the communication between X11 clients and the window manager. ICCCM simply does not understand the concept of non-decorated full-screen windows. Therefore, the best we can do is to request a borderless window and place and resize it to fill the entire screen. Depending on the window manager, this may or may not work. The borderless window is requested using MOTIF hints, which are at least partially supported by virtually all modern window managers.</para>
            <para>An alternative would be to bypass the window manager entirely and create a window with the Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint flag. This has other severe problems though, like totally broken keyboard focus and very strange effects on desktop changes or when the user raises other windows.</para>
            <para>X11 window managers that follow modern post-ICCCM specifications support full-screen mode properly.</para>
            <para>See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ShowMaximized">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the widget maximized.</para>
            <para>Calling this function only affects windows.</para>
            <para>On X11, this function may not work properly with certain window managers. See the Window Geometry documentation for an explanation.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowState(), showNormal(), showMinimized(), show(), hide(), and isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ShowMinimized">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the widget minimized, as an icon.</para>
            <para>Calling this function only affects windows.</para>
            <para>See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), isVisible(), and isMinimized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.ShowNormal">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the widget after it has been maximized or minimized.</para>
            <para>Calling this function only affects windows.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowState(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.StackUnder(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Places the widget under w in the parent widget's stack.</para>
            <para>To make this work, the widget itself and w must be siblings.</para>
            <para>See also raise() and lower().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnTabletEvent(QtGui.QTabletEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also QTabletEvent::ignore(), QTabletEvent::accept(), event(), and QTabletEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.TestAttribute(QtCore.Qt.WidgetAttribute)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if attribute attribute is set on this widget; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setAttribute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.TopLevelWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Use window() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.UnderMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This value is not updated properly during drag and drop operations.</para>
            <para>See also enterEvent() and leaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.UngrabGesture(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Unsubscribes the widget from a given gesture type</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also grabGesture() and QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.</para>
            <para>This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main event loop. This permits Qt to optimize for more speed and less flicker than a call to repaint() does.</para>
            <para>Calling update() several times normally results in just one paintEvent() call.</para>
            <para>Qt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call. If the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute is set, the widget is responsible for painting all its pixels with an opaque color.</para>
            <para>See also repaint(), paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled(), and Analog Clock Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Update(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version updates a rectangle rect inside the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Update(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version repaints a region rgn inside the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Update(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This version updates a rectangle (x, y, w, h) inside the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.UpdateGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Notifies the layout system that this widget has changed and may need to change geometry.</para>
            <para>Call this function if the sizeHint() or sizePolicy() have changed.</para>
            <para>For explicitly hidden widgets, updateGeometry() is a no-op. The layout system will be notified as soon as the widget is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.UpdateMicroFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the widget's micro focus.</para>
            <para>See also QInputContext.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.VisibleRegion">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the unobscured region where paint events can occur.</para>
            <para>For visible widgets, this is an approximation of the area not covered by other widgets; otherwise, this is an empty region.</para>
            <para>The repaint() function calls this function if necessary, so in general you do not need to call it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also QWheelEvent::ignore(), QWheelEvent::accept(), event(), and QWheelEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.WinId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window system identifier of the widget.</para>
            <para>Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to do something non-portable. Be careful.</para>
            <para>If a widget is non-native (alien) and winId() is invoked on it, that widget will be provided a native handle.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, the type returned depends on which framework Qt was linked against. If Qt is using Carbon, the {WId} is actually an HIViewRef. If Qt is using Cocoa, {WId} is a pointer to an NSView.</para>
            <para>This value may change at run-time. An event with type QEvent::WinIdChange will be sent to the widget following a change in window system identifier.</para>
            <para>See also find().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Window">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window for this widget, i.e. the next ancestor widget that has (or could have) a window-system frame.</para>
            <para>If the widget is a window, the widget itself is returned.</para>
            <para>Typical usage is changing the window title:</para>
            <para> aWidget-&gt;window()-&gt;setWindowTitle(&quot;New Window Title&quot;);</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.WindowType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window type of this widget. This is identical to windowFlags() &amp; Qt::WindowType_Mask.</para>
            <para>See also windowFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the widget.</para>
            <para>All this widget's children are deleted first. The application exits if this widget is the main widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.ActionEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called with the given event whenever the widget's actions are changed.</para>
            <para>See also addAction(), insertAction(), removeAction(), actions(), and QActionEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.ChangeEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.</para>
            <para>The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through the event supplied.</para>
            <para>Change events include: QEvent::ToolBarChange, QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange, QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange, QEvent::WindowTitleChange, QEvent::IconTextChange, QEvent::ModifiedChange, QEvent::MouseTrackingChange, QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::WindowStateChange, QEvent::LanguageChange, QEvent::LocaleChange, QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.CloseEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called with the given event when Qt receives a window close request for a top-level widget from the window system.</para>
            <para>By default, the event is accepted and the widget is closed. You can reimplement this function to change the way the widget responds to window close requests. For example, you can prevent the window from closing by calling ignore() on all events.</para>
            <para>Main window applications typically use reimplementations of this function to check whether the user's work has been saved and ask for permission before closing. For example, the Application Example uses a helper function to determine whether or not to close the window:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (maybeSave()) {</para>
            <para>         writeSettings();</para>
            <para>         event-&gt;accept();</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         event-&gt;ignore();</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also event(), hide(), close(), QCloseEvent, and Application Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.ContextMenuEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget context menu events.</para>
            <para>The handler is called when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::DefaultContextMenu.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the context event. See the QContextMenuEvent documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>See also event(), QContextMenuEvent, and customContextMenuRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.DragEnterEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse enters this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>If the event is ignored, the widget won't receive any drag move events.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragEnterEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.DragLeaveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse leaves this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragLeaveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.DragMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called if a drag is in progress, and when any of the following conditions occur: the cursor enters this widget, the cursor moves within this widget, or a modifier key is pressed on the keyboard while this widget has the focus. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.DropEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDropEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.EnterEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget enter events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the widget.</para>
            <para>See also leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.FocusInEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget. The event is passed in the event parameter</para>
            <para>A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)</para>
            <para>The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).</para>
            <para>See also focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.FocusOutEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget. The events is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)</para>
            <para>The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).</para>
            <para>See also focusInEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.HideEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget hide events. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been hidden.</para>
            <para>Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also visible, event(), and QHideEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.InputMethodEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler is called when the state of the input method changes.</para>
            <para>Note that when creating custom text editing widgets, the Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled window attribute must be set explicitly (using the setAttribute() function) in order to receive input method events.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls event-&gt;ignore(), which rejects the Input Method event. See the QInputMethodEvent documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>See also event() and QInputMethodEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.KeyPressEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key press events for the widget.</para>
            <para>A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key press event.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.</para>
            <para>The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user presses Esc. Otherwise the event is ignored, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.</para>
            <para>See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), QKeyEvent, and Tetrix Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.KeyReleaseEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events for the widget.</para>
            <para>A widget must accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key release event.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.</para>
            <para>See also keyPressEvent(), QKeyEvent::ignore(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and QKeyEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.LeaveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget leave events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves the widget.</para>
            <para>See also enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.MouseDoubleClickEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.</para>
            <para>The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.</para>
            <para>Note: The widget will also receive mouse press and mouse release events in addition to the double click event. It is up to the developer to ensure that the application interprets these events correctly.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and QMouseEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.MouseMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse button is pressed.</para>
            <para>QMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor, relative to this widget. For press and release events, the position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes. This is a feature of the underlying window system, not Qt.</para>
            <para>If you want to show a tooltip immediately, while the mouse is moving (e.g., to get the mouse coordinates with QMouseEvent::pos() and show them as a tooltip), you must first enable mouse tracking as described above. Then, to ensure that the tooltip is updated immediately, you must call QToolTip::showText() instead of setToolTip() in your implementation of mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>See also setMouseTracking(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.MousePressEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets' location and maybe more.</para>
            <para>The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.MouseReleaseEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.MoveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget move events which are passed in the event parameter. When the widget receives this event, it is already at the new position.</para>
            <para>The old position is accessible through QMoveEvent::oldPos().</para>
            <para>See also resizeEvent(), event(), move(), and QMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.PaintEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events passed in event.</para>
            <para>A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of a widget. It can happen for one of the following reasons:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>repaint() or update() was invoked,</para>
            <para>the widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or</para>
            <para>many other reasons.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked to, but some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the requested region: QPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization does not change the result, as painting is clipped to that region during event processing. QListView and QTableView do this, for example.</para>
            <para>Qt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint events into one. When update() is called several times or the window system sends several paint events, Qt merges these events into one event with a larger region (see QRegion::united()). The repaint() function does not permit this optimization, so we suggest using update() whenever possible.</para>
            <para>When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been erased, so you are painting on the widget's background.</para>
            <para>The background can be set using setBackgroundRole() and setPalette().</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid flicker.</para>
            <para>Note for the X11 platform: It is possible to toggle global double buffering by calling qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(). For example,</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> extern void qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(bool);</para>
            <para> qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(false);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para>Note: Generally, you should refrain from calling update() or repaint() inside a paintEvent(). For example, calling update() or repaint() on children inside a paintevent() results in undefined behavior; the child may or may not get a paint event.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you are using a custom paint engine without Qt's backingstore, Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen must be set. Otherwise, QWidget::paintEngine() will never be called; the backingstore will be used instead.</para>
            <para>See also event(), repaint(), update(), QPainter, QPixmap, QPaintEvent, and Analog Clock Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.ResizeEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget resize events which are passed in the event parameter. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through QResizeEvent::oldSize().</para>
            <para>The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should be) done inside this handler.</para>
            <para>See also moveEvent(), event(), resize(), QResizeEvent, paintEvent(), and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.ShowEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget show events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately before they are shown. The spontaneous show events of windows are delivered afterwards.</para>
            <para>Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also visible, event(), and QShowEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.TabletEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also QTabletEvent::ignore(), QTabletEvent::accept(), event(), and QTabletEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.WheelEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also QWheelEvent::ignore(), QWheelEvent::accept(), event(), and QWheelEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWidget.CustomContextMenuRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::CustomContextMenu, and the user has requested a context menu on the widget. The position pos is the position of the context menu event that the widget receives. Normally this is in widget coordinates. The exception to this rule is QAbstractScrollArea and its subclasses that map the context menu event to coordinates of the viewport() .</para>
            <para>See also mapToGlobal(), QMenu, and contextMenuPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.BackgroundRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the background role of the widget.</para>
            <para>The background role defines the brush from the widget's palette that is used to render the background.</para>
            <para>If no explicit background role is set, the widget inherts its parent widget's background role.</para>
            <para>Sets the background role of the widget to role.</para>
            <para>The background role defines the brush from the widget's palette that is used to render the background.</para>
            <para>If role is QPalette::NoRole, then the widget inherits its parent's background role.</para>
            <para>Note that styles are free to choose any color from the palette. You can modify the palette or set a style sheet if you don't achieve the result you want with setBackgroundRole().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.ContentsMargins">
            <summary>
            <para>The contentsMargins function returns the widget's contents margins.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The setContentsMargins function sets the margins around the widget's contents.</para>
            <para>Sets the margins around the contents of the widget to have the sizes determined by margins. The margins are used by the layout system, and may be used by subclasses to specify the area to draw in (e.g. excluding the frame).</para>
            <para>Changing the margins will trigger a resizeEvent().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.FocusProxy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the focus proxy, or 0 if there is no focus proxy.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget's focus proxy to widget w. If w is 0, the function resets this widget to have no focus proxy.</para>
            <para>Some widgets can &quot;have focus&quot;, but create a child widget, such as QLineEdit, to actually handle the focus. In this case, the widget can set the line edit to be its focus proxy.</para>
            <para>setFocusProxy() sets the widget which will actually get focus when &quot;this widget&quot; gets it. If there is a focus proxy, setFocus() and hasFocus() operate on the focus proxy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.ForegroundRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the foreground role.</para>
            <para>The foreground role defines the color from the widget's palette that is used to draw the foreground.</para>
            <para>If no explicit foreground role is set, the function returns a role that contrasts with the background role.</para>
            <para>Sets the foreground role of the widget to role.</para>
            <para>The foreground role defines the color from the widget's palette that is used to draw the foreground.</para>
            <para>If role is QPalette::NoRole, the widget uses a foreground role that contrasts with the background role.</para>
            <para>Note that styles are free to choose any color from the palette. You can modify the palette or set a style sheet if you don't achieve the result you want with setForegroundRole().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.GraphicsEffect">
            <summary>
            <para>The graphicsEffect function returns a pointer to the widget's graphics effect.</para>
            <para>If the widget has no graphics effect, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>The setGraphicsEffect function is for setting the widget's graphics effect.</para>
            <para>Sets effect as the widget's effect. If there already is an effect installed on this widget, QWidget will delete the existing effect before installing the new effect.</para>
            <para>If effect is the installed on a different widget, setGraphicsEffect() will remove the effect from the widget and install it on this widget.</para>
            <para>QWidget takes ownership of effect.</para>
            <para>Note: This function will apply the effect on itself and all its children.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.InputContext">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns the QInputContext for this widget. By default the input context is inherited from the widgets parent. For toplevels it is inherited from QApplication.</para>
            <para>You can override this and set a special input context for this widget by using the setInputContext() method.</para>
            <para>This function sets the input context context on this widget.</para>
            <para>Qt takes ownership of the given input context.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Layout">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout manager that is installed on this widget, or 0 if no layout manager is installed.</para>
            <para>The layout manager sets the geometry of the widget's children that have been added to the layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the layout manager for this widget to layout.</para>
            <para>If there already is a layout manager installed on this widget, QWidget won't let you install another. You must first delete the existing layout manager (returned by layout()) before you can call setLayout() with the new layout.</para>
            <para>If layout is the layout manger on a different widget, setLayout() will reparent the layout and make it the layout manager for this widget.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para>     QVBoxLayout *layout = new QVBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     layout-&gt;addWidget(formWidget);</para>
            <para>     setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para>An alternative to calling this function is to pass this widget to the layout's constructor.</para>
            <para>The QWidget will take ownership of layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mask currently set on a widget. If no mask is set the return value will be an empty region.</para>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Causes only the parts of the widget which overlap region to be visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be visible, depending on the platform.</para>
            <para>Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly complex.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the widget's GUI style to style. The ownership of the style object is not transferred.</para>
            <para>If no style is set, the widget uses the application's style, QApplication::style() instead.</para>
            <para>Setting a widget's style has no effect on existing or future child widgets.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is particularly useful for demonstration purposes, where you want to show Qt's styling capabilities. Real applications should avoid it and use one consistent GUI style instead.</para>
            <para>Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window's role, or an empty string.</para>
            <para>Sets the window's role to role. This only makes sense for windows on X11.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current window state. The window state is a OR'ed combination of Qt::WindowState: Qt::WindowMinimized, Qt::WindowMaximized, Qt::WindowFullScreen, and Qt::WindowActive.</para>
            <para>Sets the window state to windowState. The window state is a OR'ed combination of Qt::WindowState: Qt::WindowMinimized, Qt::WindowMaximized, Qt::WindowFullScreen, and Qt::WindowActive.</para>
            <para>If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns false), the window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between full-screen and normal mode, use the following code:</para>
            <para> w-&gt;setWindowState(w-&gt;windowState() ^ Qt::WindowFullScreen);</para>
            <para>In order to restore and activate a minimized window (while preserving its maximized and/or full-screen state), use the following:</para>
            <para> w-&gt;setWindowState(w-&gt;windowState() &amp; ~Qt::WindowMinimized | Qt::WindowActive);</para>
            <para>Calling this function will hide the widget. You must call show() to make the widget visible again.</para>
            <para>Note: On some window systems Qt::WindowActive is not immediate, and may be ignored in certain cases.</para>
            <para>When the window state changes, the widget receives a changeEvent() of type QEvent::WindowStateChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Modal">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the widget is a modal widget.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense for windows. A modal widget prevents widgets in all other windows from getting any input.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowModality">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds which windows are blocked by the modal widget.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense for windows. A modal widget prevents widgets in other windows from getting input. The value of this property controls which windows are blocked when the widget is visible. Changing this property while the window is visible has no effect; you must hide() the widget first, then show() it again.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is Qt::NonModal.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Enabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the widget is enabled.</para>
            <para>In general an enabled widget handles keyboard and mouse events; a disabled widget does not. An exception is made with QAbstractButton.</para>
            <para>Some widgets display themselves differently when they are disabled. For example a button might draw its label grayed out. If your widget needs to know when it becomes enabled or disabled, you can use the changeEvent() with type QEvent::EnabledChange.</para>
            <para>Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling respectively enables all child widgets unless they have been explicitly disabled.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.</para>
            <para>When changing the geometry, the widget, if visible, receives a move event (moveEvent()) and/or a resize event (resizeEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive appropriate events before it is shown.</para>
            <para>The size component is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize().</para>
            <para>Warning: Calling setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() or moveEvent() can lead to infinite recursion.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.FrameGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.NormalGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the geometry of the widget as it will appear when shown as a normal (not maximized or full screen) top-level widget.</para>
            <para>For child widgets this property always holds an empty rectangle.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.X">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position of the widget within its parent widget.</para>
            <para>If the widget is a window, the position is that of the widget on the desktop, including its frame.</para>
            <para>When changing the position, the widget, if visible, receives a move event (moveEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a position that refers to the origin.</para>
            <para>Warning: Calling move() or setGeometry() inside moveEvent() can lead to infinite recursion.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.FrameSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of the widget including any window frame.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of the widget excluding any window frame.</para>
            <para>If the widget is visible when it is being resized, it receives a resize event (resizeEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.</para>
            <para>The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize().</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            <para>Warning: Calling resize() or setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() can lead to infinite recursion.</para>
            <para>Note: Setting the size to QSize(0, 0) will cause the widget to not appear on screen. This also applies to windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the width of the widget excluding any window frame.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>Note: Do not use this function to find the width of a screen on a multiple screen desktop. Read this note for details.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the height of the widget excluding any window frame.</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>Note: Do not use this function to find the height of a screen on a multiple screen desktop. Read this note for details.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame.</para>
            <para>The rect property equals QRect(0, 0, width(), height()).</para>
            <para>See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.ChildrenRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the bounding rectangle of the widget's children.</para>
            <para>Hidden children are excluded.</para>
            <para>By default, for a widget with no children, this property contains a rectangle with zero width and height located at the origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.ChildrenRegion">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the combined region occupied by the widget's children.</para>
            <para>Hidden children are excluded.</para>
            <para>By default, for a widget with no children, this property contains an empty region.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.SizePolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default layout behavior of the widget.</para>
            <para>If there is a QLayout that manages this widget's children, the size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such QLayout, the result of this function is used.</para>
            <para>The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as QLineEdit, QSpinBox or an editable QComboBox) and other horizontally orientated widgets (such as QProgressBar). QToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as QSlider, QScrollBar or QHeader) specify stretching in the respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scroll bars (usually subclasses of QScrollArea) tend to specify that they can use additional space, and that they can make do with less than sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's minimum size.</para>
            <para>The widget cannot be resized to a smaller size than the minimum widget size. The widget's size is forced to the minimum size if the current size is smaller.</para>
            <para>The minimum size set by this function will override the minimum size defined by QLayout. In order to unset the minimum size, use a value of QSize(0, 0).</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a size with zero width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's maximum size in pixels.</para>
            <para>The widget cannot be resized to a larger size than the maximum widget size.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a size in which both width and height have values of 16777215.</para>
            <para>Note: The definition of the QWIDGETSIZE_MAX macro limits the maximum size of widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MinimumWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's minimum width in pixels.</para>
            <para>This property corresponds to the width held by the minimumSize property.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MinimumHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's minimum height in pixels.</para>
            <para>This property corresponds to the height held by the minimumSize property.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MaximumWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's maximum width in pixels.</para>
            <para>This property corresponds to the width held by the maximumSize property.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 16777215.</para>
            <para>Note: The definition of the QWIDGETSIZE_MAX macro limits the maximum size of widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MaximumHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's maximum height in pixels.</para>
            <para>This property corresponds to the height held by the maximumSize property.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 16777215.</para>
            <para>Note: The definition of the QWIDGETSIZE_MAX macro limits the maximum size of widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.SizeIncrement">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size increment of the widget.</para>
            <para>When the user resizes the window, the size will move in steps of sizeIncrement().width() pixels horizontally and sizeIncrement.height() pixels vertically, with baseSize() as the basis. Preferred widget sizes are for non-negative integers i and j:</para>
            <para> width = baseSize().width() + i * sizeIncrement().width();</para>
            <para> height = baseSize().height() + j * sizeIncrement().height();</para>
            <para>Note that while you can set the size increment for all widgets, it only affects windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a size with zero width and height.</para>
            <para>Warning: The size increment has no effect under Windows, and may be disregarded by the window manager on X11.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.BaseSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the base size of the widget.</para>
            <para>The base size is used to calculate a proper widget size if the widget defines sizeIncrement().</para>
            <para>By default, for a newly-created widget, this property contains a size with zero width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's palette.</para>
            <para>This property describes the widget's palette. The palette is used by the widget's style when rendering standard components, and is available as a means to ensure that custom widgets can maintain consistency with the native platform's look and feel. It's common that different platforms, or different styles, have different palettes.</para>
            <para>When you assign a new palette to a widget, the color roles from this palette are combined with the widget's default palette to form the widget's final palette. The palette entry for the widget's background role is used to fill the widget's background (see QWidget::autoFillBackground), and the foreground role initializes QPainter's pen.</para>
            <para>The default depends on the system environment. QApplication maintains a system/theme palette which serves as a default for all widgets. There may also be special palette defaults for certain types of widgets (e.g., on Windows XP and Vista, all classes that derive from QMenuBar have a special default palette). You can also define default palettes for widgets yourself by passing a custom palette and the name of a widget to QApplication::setPalette(). Finally, the style always has the option of polishing the palette as it's assigned (see QStyle::polish()).</para>
            <para>QWidget propagates explicit palette roles from parent to child. If you assign a brush or color to a specific role on a palette and assign that palette to a widget, that role will propagate to all the widget's children, overriding any system defaults for that role. Note that palettes by default don't propagate to windows (see isWindow()) unless the Qt::WA_WindowPropagation attribute is enabled.</para>
            <para>QWidget's palette propagation is similar to its font propagation.</para>
            <para>The current style, which is used to render the content of all standard Qt widgets, is free to choose colors and brushes from the widget palette, or in some cases, to ignore the palette (partially, or completely). In particular, certain styles like GTK style, Mac style, Windows XP, and Vista style, depend on third party APIs to render the content of widgets, and these styles typically do not follow the palette. Because of this, assigning roles to a widget's palette is not guaranteed to change the appearance of the widget. Instead, you may choose to apply a styleSheet. You can refer to our Knowledge Base article here for more information.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. When using style sheets, the palette of a widget can be customized using the &quot;color&quot;, &quot;background-color&quot;, &quot;selection-color&quot;, &quot;selection-background-color&quot; and &quot;alternate-background-color&quot;.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the font currently set for the widget.</para>
            <para>This property describes the widget's requested font. The font is used by the widget's style when rendering standard components, and is available as a means to ensure that custom widgets can maintain consistency with the native platform's look and feel. It's common that different platforms, or different styles, define different fonts for an application.</para>
            <para>When you assign a new font to a widget, the properties from this font are combined with the widget's default font to form the widget's final font. You can call fontInfo() to get a copy of the widget's final font. The final font is also used to initialize QPainter's font.</para>
            <para>The default depends on the system environment. QApplication maintains a system/theme font which serves as a default for all widgets. There may also be special font defaults for certain types of widgets. You can also define default fonts for widgets yourself by passing a custom font and the name of a widget to QApplication::setFont(). Finally, the font is matched against Qt's font database to find the best match.</para>
            <para>QWidget propagates explicit font properties from parent to child. If you change a specific property on a font and assign that font to a widget, that property will propagate to all the widget's children, overriding any system defaults for that property. Note that fonts by default don't propagate to windows (see isWindow()) unless the Qt::WA_WindowPropagation attribute is enabled.</para>
            <para>QWidget's font propagation is similar to its palette propagation.</para>
            <para>The current style, which is used to render the content of all standard Qt widgets, is free to choose to use the widget font, or in some cases, to ignore it (partially, or completely). In particular, certain styles like GTK style, Mac style, Windows XP, and Vista style, apply special modifications to the widget font to match the platform's native look and feel. Because of this, assigning properties to a widget's font is not guaranteed to change the appearance of the widget. Instead, you may choose to apply a styleSheet.</para>
            <para>Note: If Qt Style Sheets are used on the same widget as setFont(), style sheets will take precedence if the settings conflict.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Cursor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the cursor shape for this widget.</para>
            <para>The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this widget. See the list of predefined cursor objects for a range of useful shapes.</para>
            <para>An editor widget might use an I-beam cursor:</para>
            <para> setCursor(Qt::IBeamCursor);</para>
            <para>If no cursor has been set, or after a call to unsetCursor(), the parent's cursor is used.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a cursor with the Qt::ArrowCursor shape.</para>
            <para>Some underlying window implementations will reset the cursor if it leaves a widget even if the mouse is grabbed. If you want to have a cursor set for all widgets, even when outside the window, consider QApplication::setOverrideCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.MouseTracking">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget.</para>
            <para>If mouse tracking is disabled (the default), the widget only receives mouse move events when at least one mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved.</para>
            <para>If mouse tracking is enabled, the widget receives mouse move events even if no buttons are pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.IsActiveWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether this widget's window is the active window.</para>
            <para>The active window is the window that contains the widget that has keyboard focus (The window may still have focus if it has no widgets or none of its widgets accepts keyboard focus).</para>
            <para>When popup windows are visible, this property is true for both the active window and for the popup.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.FocusPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>The policy is Qt::TabFocus if the widget accepts keyboard focus by tabbing, Qt::ClickFocus if the widget accepts focus by clicking, Qt::StrongFocus if it accepts both, and Qt::NoFocus (the default) if it does not accept focus at all.</para>
            <para>You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's constructor. For instance, the QLineEdit constructor calls setFocusPolicy(Qt::StrongFocus).</para>
            <para>If the widget has a focus proxy, then the focus policy will be propagated to it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Focus">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>Note: Obtaining the value of this property for a widget is effectively equivalent to checking whether QApplication::focusWidget() refers to the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.ContextMenuPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the widget shows a context menu.</para>
            <para>The default value of this property is Qt::DefaultContextMenu, which means the contextMenuEvent() handler is called. Other values are Qt::NoContextMenu, Qt::PreventContextMenu, Qt::ActionsContextMenu, and Qt::CustomContextMenu. With Qt::CustomContextMenu, the signal customContextMenuRequested() is emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.UpdatesEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether updates are enabled.</para>
            <para>An updates enabled widget receives paint events and has a system background; a disabled widget does not. This also implies that calling update() and repaint() has no effect if updates are disabled.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            <para>setUpdatesEnabled() is normally used to disable updates for a short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during large changes. In Qt, widgets normally do not generate screen flicker, but on X11 the server might erase regions on the screen when widgets get hidden before they can be replaced by other widgets. Disabling updates solves this.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> setUpdatesEnabled(false);</para>
            <para> bigVisualChanges();</para>
            <para> setUpdatesEnabled(true);</para>
            <para>Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling a widget enables all child widgets except top-level widgets or those that have been explicitly disabled. Re-enabling updates implicitly calls update() on the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Visible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the widget is visible.</para>
            <para>Calling setVisible(true) or show() sets the widget to visible status if all its parent widgets up to the window are visible. If an ancestor is not visible, the widget won't become visible until all its ancestors are shown. If its size or position has changed, Qt guarantees that a widget gets move and resize events just before it is shown. If the widget has not been resized yet, Qt will adjust the widget's size to a useful default using adjustSize().</para>
            <para>Calling setVisible(false) or hide() hides a widget explicitly. An explicitly hidden widget will never become visible, even if all its ancestors become visible, unless you show it.</para>
            <para>A widget receives show and hide events when its visibility status changes. Between a hide and a show event, there is no need to waste CPU cycles preparing or displaying information to the user. A video application, for example, might simply stop generating new frames.</para>
            <para>A widget that happens to be obscured by other windows on the screen is considered to be visible. The same applies to iconified windows and windows that exist on another virtual desktop (on platforms that support this concept). A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again.</para>
            <para>You almost never have to reimplement the setVisible() function. If you need to change some settings before a widget is shown, use showEvent() instead. If you need to do some delayed initialization use the Polish event delivered to the event() function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Minimized">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether this widget is minimized (iconified).</para>
            <para>This property is only relevant for windows.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Maximized">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether this widget is maximized.</para>
            <para>This property is only relevant for windows.</para>
            <para>Note: Due to limitations on some window systems, this does not always report the expected results (e.g., if the user on X11 maximizes the window via the window manager, Qt has no way of distinguishing this from any other resize). This is expected to improve as window manager protocols evolve.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.FullScreen">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the widget is shown in full screen mode.</para>
            <para>A widget in full screen mode occupies the whole screen area and does not display window decorations, such as a title bar.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.AcceptDrops">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget.</para>
            <para>Setting this property to true announces to the system that this widget may be able to accept drop events.</para>
            <para>If the widget is the desktop (windowType() == Qt::Desktop), this may fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call acceptDrops() to test if this occurs.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not modify this property in a drag and drop event handler.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the window title (caption).</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense for top-level widgets, such as windows and dialogs. If no caption has been set, the title is based of the windowFilePath. If neither of these is set, then the title is an empty string.</para>
            <para>If you use the windowModified mechanism, the window title must contain a &quot;[*]&quot; placeholder, which indicates where the '*' should appear. Normally, it should appear right after the file name (e.g., &quot;document1.txt[*] - Text Editor&quot;). If the windowModified property is false (the default), the placeholder is simply removed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's icon.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense for windows. If no icon has been set, windowIcon() returns the application icon (QApplication::windowIcon()).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowIconText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's icon text.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense for windows. If no icon text has been set, this functions returns an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowOpacity">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the level of opacity for the window.</para>
            <para>The valid range of opacity is from 1.0 (completely opaque) to 0.0 (completely transparent).</para>
            <para>By default the value of this property is 1.0.</para>
            <para>This feature is available on Embedded Linux, Mac OS X, Windows, and X11 platforms that support the Composite extension.</para>
            <para>This feature is not available on Windows CE.</para>
            <para>Note that under X11 you need to have a composite manager running, and the X11 specific _NET_WM_WINDOW_OPACITY atom needs to be supported by the window manager you are using.</para>
            <para>Warning: Changing this property from opaque to transparent might issue a paint event that needs to be processed before the window is displayed correctly. This affects mainly the use of QPixmap::grabWindow(). Also note that semi-transparent windows update and resize significantly slower than opaque windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowModified">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the document shown in the window has unsaved changes.</para>
            <para>A modified window is a window whose content has changed but has not been saved to disk. This flag will have different effects varied by the platform. On Mac OS X the close button will have a modified look; on other platforms, the window title will have an '*' (asterisk).</para>
            <para>The window title must contain a &quot;[*]&quot; placeholder, which indicates where the '*' should appear. Normally, it should appear right after the file name (e.g., &quot;document1.txt[*] - Text Editor&quot;). If the window isn't modified, the placeholder is simply removed.</para>
            <para>Note that if a widget is set as modified, all its ancestors will also be set as modified. However, if you call setWindowModified(false) on a widget, this will not propagate to its parent because other children of the parent might have been modified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's tooltip.</para>
            <para>Note that by default tooltips are only shown for widgets that are children of the active window. You can change this behavior by setting the attribute Qt::WA_AlwaysShowToolTips on the window, not on the widget with the tooltip.</para>
            <para>If you want to control a tooltip's behavior, you can intercept the event() function and catch the QEvent::ToolTip event (e.g., if you want to customize the area for which the tooltip should be shown).</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.StatusTip">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's status tip.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's What's This help text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.AccessibleName">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's name as seen by assistive technologies.</para>
            <para>This property is used by accessible clients to identify, find, or announce the widget for accessible clients.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.AccessibleDescription">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's description as seen by assistive technologies.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the layout direction for this widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to Qt::LeftToRight.</para>
            <para>When the layout direction is set on a widget, it will propagate to the widget's children, but not to a child that is a window and not to a child for which setLayoutDirection() has been explicitly called. Also, child widgets added after setLayoutDirection() has been called for the parent do not inherit the parent's layout direction.</para>
            <para>This method no longer affects text layout direction since Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.AutoFillBackground">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the widget background is filled automatically.</para>
            <para>If enabled, this property will cause Qt to fill the background of the widget before invoking the paint event. The color used is defined by the QPalette::Window color role from the widget's palette.</para>
            <para>In addition, Windows are always filled with QPalette::Window, unless the WA_OpaquePaintEvent or WA_NoSystemBackground attributes are set.</para>
            <para>This property cannot be turned off (i.e., set to false) if a widget's parent has a static gradient for its background.</para>
            <para>Warning: Use this property with caution in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. When a widget has a style sheet with a valid background or a border-image, this property is automatically disabled.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.StyleSheet">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's style sheet.</para>
            <para>The style sheet contains a textual description of customizations to the widget's style, as described in the Qt Style Sheets document.</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.5, Qt style sheets fully supports Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.Locale">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's locale.</para>
            <para>As long as no special locale has been set, this is either the parent's locale or (if this widget is a top level widget), the default locale.</para>
            <para>If the widget displays dates or numbers, these should be formatted using the widget's locale.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.WindowFilePath">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the file path associated with a widget.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense for windows. It associates a file path with a window. If you set the file path, but have not set the window title, Qt sets the window title to contain a string created using the following components.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The file name of the specified path, obtained using QFileInfo::fileName().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>On Windows and X11:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The file name of the specified path, obtained using QFileInfo::fileName().</para>
            <para>An optional * character, if the windowModified property is set.</para>
            <para>The 0x2014 unicode character, padded either side by spaces.</para>
            <para>The application name, obtained from the application's applicationName property.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the window title is set at any point, then the window title takes precedence and will be shown instead of the file path string.</para>
            <para>Additionally, on Mac OS X, this has an added benefit that it sets the proxy icon for the window, assuming that the file path exists.</para>
            <para>If no file path is set, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidget.InputMethodHints">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds what input method specific hints the widget has.</para>
            <para>This is only relevant for input widgets. It is used by the input method to retrieve hints as to how the input method should operate. For example, if the Qt::ImhFormattedNumbersOnly flag is set, the input method may change its visual components to reflect that only numbers can be entered.</para>
            <para>Note: The flags are only hints, so the particular input method implementation is free to ignore them. If you want to be sure that a certain type of characters are entered, you should also set a QValidator on the widget.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::ImhNone.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWidget.RenderFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how to render the widget when calling QWidget::render().</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWidget.RenderFlag.DrawChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>If you enable this option, the widget's children are rendered recursively into the target. By default, this option is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWidget.RenderFlag.DrawWindowBackground">
            <summary>
            <para>If you enable this option, the widget's background is rendered into the target even if autoFillBackground is not set. By default, this option is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWidget.RenderFlag.IgnoreMask">
            <summary>
            <para>If you enable this option, the widget's QWidget::mask() is ignored when rendering into the target. By default, this option is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an abstract button with a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.AnimateClick(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Performs an animated click: the button is pressed immediately, and released msec milliseconds later (the default is 100 ms).</para>
            <para>Calling this function again before the button was released will reset the release timer.</para>
            <para>All signals associated with a click are emitted as appropriate.</para>
            <para>This function does nothing if the button is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also click().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.CheckStateSet">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called when setChecked() was called, unless it was called from within nextCheckState(). It allows subclasses to reset their intermediate button states.</para>
            <para>See also nextCheckState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Click">
            <summary>
            <para>Performs a click.</para>
            <para>All the usual signals associated with a click are emitted as appropriate. If the button is checkable, the state of the button is toggled.</para>
            <para>This function does nothing if the button is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also animateClick().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnClicked(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the shortcut key is typed, or when click() or animateClick() is called. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setDown(), setChecked() or toggle().</para>
            <para>If the button is checkable, checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also pressed(), released(), and toggled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Group">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the group that this button belongs to.</para>
            <para>If the button is not a member of any QButtonGroup, this function returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also QButtonGroup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.HitButton(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if pos is inside the clickable button rectangle; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses may reimplement this function to provide support for clickable areas of different shapes and sizes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.NextCheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called when a button is clicked. The default implementation calls setChecked(!isChecked()) if the button isCheckable(). It allows subclasses to implement intermediate button states.</para>
            <para>See also checkStateSet().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>See also released() and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnReleased">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is released.</para>
            <para>See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Toggle">
            <summary>
            <para>Toggles the state of a checkable button.</para>
            <para>See also checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.OnToggled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a checkable button changes its state. checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.</para>
            <para>This may be the result of a user action, click() slot activation, or because setChecked() was called.</para>
            <para>The states of buttons in exclusive button groups are updated before this signal is emitted. This means that slots can act on either the &quot;off&quot; signal or the &quot;on&quot; signal emitted by the buttons in the group whose states have changed.</para>
            <para>For example, a slot that reacts to signals emitted by newly checked buttons but which ignores signals from buttons that have been unchecked can be implemented using the following pattern:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::reactToToggle(bool checked)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>    if (checked) {</para>
            <para>       // Examine the new button states.</para>
            <para>       ...</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Button groups can be created using the QButtonGroup class, and updates to the button states monitored with the QButtonGroup::buttonClicked() signal.</para>
            <para>See also checked and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractButton.PaintEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Pressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>See also released() and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Released">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is released.</para>
            <para>See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the shortcut key is typed, or when click() or animateClick() is called. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setDown(), setChecked() or toggle().</para>
            <para>If the button is checkable, checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also pressed(), released(), and toggled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Toggled">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a checkable button changes its state. checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.</para>
            <para>This may be the result of a user action, click() slot activation, or because setChecked() was called.</para>
            <para>The states of buttons in exclusive button groups are updated before this signal is emitted. This means that slots can act on either the &quot;off&quot; signal or the &quot;on&quot; signal emitted by the buttons in the group whose states have changed.</para>
            <para>For example, a slot that reacts to signals emitted by newly checked buttons but which ignores signals from buttons that have been unchecked can be implemented using the following pattern:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::reactToToggle(bool checked)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>    if (checked) {</para>
            <para>       // Examine the new button states.</para>
            <para>       ...</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Button groups can be created using the QButtonGroup class, and updates to the button states monitored with the QButtonGroup::buttonClicked() signal.</para>
            <para>See also checked and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text shown on the button.</para>
            <para>If the button has no text, the text() function will return a an empty string.</para>
            <para>If the text contains an ampersand character ('&amp;'), a shortcut is automatically created for it. The character that follows the '&amp;' will be used as the shortcut key. Any previous shortcut will be overwritten, or cleared if no shortcut is defined by the text. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;&amp;').</para>
            <para>There is no default text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the icon shown on the button.</para>
            <para>The icon's default size is defined by the GUI style, but can be adjusted by setting the iconSize property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the icon size used for this button.</para>
            <para>The default size is defined by the GUI style. This is a maximum size for the icons. Smaller icons will not be scaled up.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Shortcut">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the mnemonic associated with the button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Checkable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button is checkable.</para>
            <para>By default, the button is not checkable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Checked">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button is checked.</para>
            <para>Only checkable buttons can be checked. By default, the button is unchecked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.AutoRepeat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.</para>
            <para>If autoRepeat is enabled, then the pressed(), released(), and clicked() signals are emitted at regular intervals when the button is down. autoRepeat is off by default. The initial delay and the repetition interval are defined in milliseconds by autoRepeatDelay and autoRepeatInterval.</para>
            <para>Note: If a button is pressed down by a shortcut key, then auto-repeat is enabled and timed by the system and not by this class. The pressed(), released(), and clicked() signals will be emitted like in the normal case.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.AutoExclusive">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether auto-exclusivity is enabled.</para>
            <para>If auto-exclusivity is enabled, checkable buttons that belong to the same parent widget behave as if they were part of the same exclusive button group. In an exclusive button group, only one button can be checked at any time; checking another button automatically unchecks the previously checked one.</para>
            <para>The property has no effect on buttons that belong to a button group.</para>
            <para>autoExclusive is off by default, except for radio buttons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.AutoRepeatDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the initial delay of auto-repetition.</para>
            <para>If autoRepeat is enabled, then autoRepeatDelay defines the initial delay in milliseconds before auto-repetition kicks in.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.AutoRepeatInterval">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the interval of auto-repetition.</para>
            <para>If autoRepeat is enabled, then autoRepeatInterval defines the length of the auto-repetition interval in millisecons.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractButton.Down">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, the button is pressed down. The signals pressed() and clicked() are not emitted if you set this property to true. The default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem class provides a common base for all path items.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class does not fully implement an item by itself; in particular, it does not implement boundingRect() and paint(), which are inherited by QGraphicsItem.</para>
            <para>You can subclass this item to provide a simple base implementation of accessors for the item's pen and brush.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsLineItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsItem class is the base class for all graphical items in a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>It provides a light-weight foundation for writing your own custom items. This includes defining the item's geometry, collision detection, its painting implementation and item interaction through its event handlers. QGraphicsItem is part of the Graphics View Framework</para>
            <para>For convenience, Qt provides a set of standard graphics items for the most common shapes. These are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsEllipseItem provides an ellipse item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLineItem provides a line item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsPathItem provides an arbitrary path item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsPixmapItem provides a pixmap item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsPolygonItem provides a polygon item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsRectItem provides a rectangular item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsSimpleTextItem provides a simple text label item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsTextItem provides an advanced text browser item</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>All of an item's geometric information is based on its local coordinate system. The item's position, pos(), is the only function that does not operate in local coordinates, as it returns a position in parent coordinates. The Graphics View Coordinate System describes the coordinate system in detail.</para>
            <para>You can set whether an item should be visible (i.e., drawn, and accepting events), by calling setVisible(). Hiding an item will also hide its children. Similarly, you can enable or disable an item by calling setEnabled(). If you disable an item, all its children will also be disabled. By default, items are both visible and enabled. To toggle whether an item is selected or not, first enable selection by setting the ItemIsSelectable flag, and then call setSelected(). Normally, selection is toggled by the scene, as a result of user interaction.</para>
            <para>To write your own graphics item, you first create a subclass of QGraphicsItem, and then start by implementing its two pure virtual public functions: boundingRect(), which returns an estimate of the area painted by the item, and paint(), which implements the actual painting. For example:</para>
            <para> class SimpleItem : public QGraphicsItem</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para> public:</para>
            <para>     QRectF boundingRect() const</para>
            <para>     {</para>
            <para>         qreal penWidth = 1;</para>
            <para>         return QRectF(-10 - penWidth / 2, -10 - penWidth / 2,</para>
            <para>                       20 + penWidth, 20 + penWidth);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     void paint(QPainter *painter, const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,</para>
            <para>                QWidget *widget)</para>
            <para>     {</para>
            <para>         painter-&amp;gt;drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>The boundingRect() function has many different purposes. QGraphicsScene bases its item index on boundingRect(), and QGraphicsView uses it both for culling invisible items, and for determining the area that needs to be recomposed when drawing overlapping items. In addition, QGraphicsItem's collision detection mechanisms use boundingRect() to provide an efficient cut-off. The fine grained collision algorithm in collidesWithItem() is based on calling shape(), which returns an accurate outline of the item's shape as a QPainterPath.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene expects all items boundingRect() and shape() to remain unchanged unless it is notified. If you want to change an item's geometry in any way, you must first call prepareGeometryChange() to allow QGraphicsScene to update its bookkeeping.</para>
            <para>Collision detection can be done in two ways:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Reimplement shape() to return an accurate shape for your item, and rely on the default implementation of collidesWithItem() to do shape-shape intersection. This can be rather expensive if the shapes are complex.</para>
            <para>Reimplement collidesWithItem() to provide your own custom item and shape collision algorithm.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The contains() function can be called to determine whether the item contains a point or not. This function can also be reimplemented by the item. The default behavior of contains() is based on calling shape().</para>
            <para>Items can contain other items, and also be contained by other items. All items can have a parent item and a list of children. Unless the item has no parent, its position is in parent coordinates (i.e., the parent's local coordinates). Parent items propagate both their position and their transformation to all children.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Transformations</para>
            <para>QGraphicsItem supports projective transformations in addition to its base position, pos(). There are several ways to change an item's transformation. For simple transformations, you can call either of the convenience functions setRotation() or setScale(), or you can pass any transformation matrix to setTransform(). For advanced transformation control you also have the option of setting several combined transformations by calling setTransformations().</para>
            <para>Item transformations accumulate from parent to child, so if both a parent and child item are rotated 90 degrees, the child's total transformation will be 180 degrees. Similarly, if the item's parent is scaled to 2x its original size, its children will also be twice as large. An item's transformation does not affect its own local geometry; all geometry functions (e.g., contains(), update(), and all the mapping functions) still operate in local coordinates. For convenience, QGraphicsItem provides the functions sceneTransform(), which returns the item's total transformation matrix (including its position and all parents' positions and transformations), and scenePos(), which returns its position in scene coordinates. To reset an item's matrix, call resetTransform().</para>
            <para>Certain transformation operations produce a different outcome depending on the order in which they are applied. For example, if you scale an transform, and then rotate it, you may get a different result than if the transform was rotated first. However, the order you set the transformation properties on QGraphicsItem does not affect the resulting transformation; QGraphicsItem always applies the properties in a fixed, defined order:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The item's base transform is applied (transform())</para>
            <para>The item's transformations list is applied in order (transformations())</para>
            <para>The item is rotated relative to its transform origin point (rotation(), transformOriginPoint())</para>
            <para>The item is scaled relative to its transform origin point (scale(), transformOriginPoint())</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Painting</para>
            <para>The paint() function is called by QGraphicsView to paint the item's contents. The item has no background or default fill of its own; whatever is behind the item will shine through all areas that are not explicitly painted in this function. You can call update() to schedule a repaint, optionally passing the rectangle that needs a repaint. Depending on whether or not the item is visible in a view, the item may or may not be repainted; there is no equivalent to QWidget::repaint() in QGraphicsItem.</para>
            <para>Items are painted by the view, starting with the parent items and then drawing children, in ascending stacking order. You can set an item's stacking order by calling setZValue(), and test it by calling zValue(), where items with low z-values are painted before items with high z-values. Stacking order applies to sibling items; parents are always drawn before their children.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Sorting</para>
            <para>All items are drawn in a defined, stable order, and this same order decides which items will receive mouse input first when you click on the scene. Normally you don't have to worry about sorting, as the items follow a &amp;quot;natural order&amp;quot;, following the logical structure of the scene.</para>
            <para>An item's children are stacked on top of the parent, and sibling items are stacked by insertion order (i.e., in the same order that they were either added to the scene, or added to the same parent). If you add item A, and then B, then B will be on top of A. If you then add C, the items' stacking order will be A, then B, then C.</para>
            <para>This example shows the stacking order of all limbs of the robot from the Drag and Drop Robot example. The torso is the root item (all other items are children or descendants of the torso), so it is drawn first. Next, the head is drawn, as it is the first item in the torso's list of children. Then the upper left arm is drawn. As the lower arm is a child of the upper arm, the lower arm is then drawn, followed by the upper arm's next sibling, which is the upper right arm, and so on.</para>
            <para>For advanced users, there are ways to alter how your items are sorted:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can call setZValue() on an item to explicitly stack it on top of, or under, other sibling items. The default Z value for an item is 0. Items with the same Z value are stacked by insertion order.</para>
            <para>You can call stackBefore() to reorder the list of children. This will directly modify the insertion order.</para>
            <para>You can set the ItemStacksBehindParent flag to stack a child item behind its parent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The stacking order of two sibling items also counts for each item's children and descendant items. So if one item is on top of another, then all its children will also be on top of all the other item's children as well.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Events</para>
            <para>QGraphicsItem receives events from QGraphicsScene through the virtual function sceneEvent(). This function distributes the most common events to a set of convenience event handlers:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>contextMenuEvent() handles context menu events</para>
            <para>focusInEvent() and focusOutEvent() handle focus in and out events</para>
            <para>hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), and hoverLeaveEvent() handles hover enter, move and leave events</para>
            <para>inputMethodEvent() handles input events, for accessibility support</para>
            <para>keyPressEvent() and keyReleaseEvent() handle key press and release events</para>
            <para>mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), and mouseDoubleClickEvent() handles mouse press, move, release, click and doubleclick events</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can filter events for any other item by installing event filters. This functionality is separate from Qt's regular event filters (see QObject::installEventFilter()), which only work on subclasses of QObject. After installing your item as an event filter for another item by calling installSceneEventFilter(), the filtered events will be received by the virtual function sceneEventFilter(). You can remove item event filters by calling removeSceneEventFilter().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Custom Data</para>
            <para>Sometimes it's useful to register custom data with an item, be it a custom item, or a standard item. You can call setData() on any item to store data in it using a key-value pair (the key being an integer, and the value is a QVariant). To get custom data from an item, call data(). This functionality is completely untouched by Qt itself; it is provided for the user's convenience.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene, QGraphicsView, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsItem with the given parent item. It does not modify the parent object returned by QObject::parent().</para>
            <para>If parent is 0, you can add the item to a scene by calling QGraphicsScene::addItem(). The item will then become a top-level item.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem() and setParentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Advance(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called twice for all items by the QGraphicsScene::advance() slot. In the first phase, all items are called with phase == 0, indicating that items on the scene are about to advance, and then all items are called with phase == 1. Reimplement this function to update your item if you need simple scene-controlled animation.</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>For individual item animation, an alternative to this function is to either use QGraphicsItemAnimation, or to multiple-inherit from QObject and QGraphicsItem, and animate your item using QObject::startTimer() and QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItemAnimation and QTimeLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.</para>
            <para>Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.</para>
            <para>If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that its can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left around in the view).</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.</para>
            <para>Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     qreal penWidth = 1;</para>
            <para>     return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,</para>
            <para>                   diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.BoundingRegion(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding region for this item. The coordinate space of the returned region depends on itemToDeviceTransform. If you pass an identity QTransform as a parameter, this function will return a local coordinate region.</para>
            <para>The bounding region describes a coarse outline of the item's visual contents. Although it's expensive to calculate, it's also more precise than boundingRect(), and it can help to avoid unnecessary repainting when an item is updated. This is particularly efficient for thin items (e.g., lines or simple polygons). You can tune the granularity for the bounding region by calling setBoundingRegionGranularity(). The default granularity is 0; in which the item's bounding region is the same as its bounding rect.</para>
            <para>itemToDeviceTransform is the transformation from item coordinates to device coordinates. If you want this function to return a QRegion in scene coordinates, you can pass sceneTransform() as an argument.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRegionGranularity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ChildItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of this item's children.</para>
            <para>The items are sorted by stacking order. This takes into account both the items' insertion order and their Z-values.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setParentItem(), zValue(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Children">
            <summary>
            <para>Use childItems() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setParentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ChildrenBoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rect of this item's descendants (i.e., its children, their children, etc.) in local coordinates. The rectangle will contain all descendants after they have been mapped to local coordinates. If the item has no children, this function returns an empty QRectF.</para>
            <para>This does not include this item's own bounding rect; it only returns its descendants' accumulated bounding rect. If you need to include this item's bounding rect, you can add boundingRect() to childrenBoundingRect() using QRectF::operator|().</para>
            <para>This function is linear in complexity; it determines the size of the returned bounding rect by iterating through all descendants.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect() and sceneBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ClearFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Takes keyboard input focus from the item.</para>
            <para>If it has focus, a focus out event is sent to this item to tell it that it is about to lose the focus.</para>
            <para>Only items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, or widgets that set an appropriate focus policy, can accept keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>See also setFocus(), hasFocus(), and QGraphicsWidget::focusPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ClipPath">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's clip path, or an empty QPainterPath if this item is not clipped. The clip path constrains the item's appearance and interaction (i.e., restricts the area the item can draw, and it also restricts the area that the item receives events).</para>
            <para>You can enable clipping by setting the ItemClipsToShape or ItemClipsChildrenToShape flags. The item's clip path is calculated by intersecting all clipping ancestors' shapes. If the item sets ItemClipsToShape, the final clip is intersected with the item's own shape.</para>
            <para>Note: Clipping introduces a performance penalty for all items involved; you should generally avoid using clipping if you can (e.g., if your items always draw inside boundingRect() or shape() boundaries, clipping is not necessary).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also isClipped(), shape(), and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CollidesWithItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item collides with other; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The mode is applied to other, and the resulting shape or bounding rectangle is then compared to this item's shape. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; other collides with this item if it either intersects, contains, or is contained by this item's shape (see Qt::ItemSelectionMode for details).</para>
            <para>The default implementation is based on shape intersection, and it calls shape() on both items. Because the complexity of arbitrary shape-shape intersection grows with an order of magnitude when the shapes are complex, this operation can be noticably time consuming. You have the option of reimplementing this function in a subclass of QGraphicsItem to provide a custom algorithm. This allows you to make use of natural constraints in the shapes of your own items, in order to improve the performance of the collision detection. For instance, two untransformed perfectly circular items' collision can be determined very efficiently by comparing their positions and radii.</para>
            <para>Keep in mind that when reimplementing this function and calling shape() or boundingRect() on other, the returned coordinates must be mapped to this item's coordinate system before any intersection can take place.</para>
            <para>See also contains() and shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CollidesWithPath(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item collides with path.</para>
            <para>The collision is determined by mode. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; path collides with this item if it either intersects, contains, or is contained by this item's shape.</para>
            <para>Note that this function checks whether the item's shape or bounding rectangle (depending on mode) is contained within path, and not whether path is contained within the items shape or bounding rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also collidesWithItem(), contains(), and shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CollidingItems(QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items that collide with this item.</para>
            <para>The way collisions are detected is determined by applying mode to items that are compared to this item, i.e., each item's shape or bounding rectangle is checked against this item's shape. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape.</para>
            <para>See also collidesWithItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CommonAncestorItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the closest common ancestor item of this item and other, or 0 if either other is 0, or there is no common ancestor.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also isAncestorOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.</para>
            <para>By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.</para>
            <para>See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to process context menu events. The event parameter contains details about the event to be handled.</para>
            <para>If you ignore the event, (i.e., by calling QEvent::ignore(),) event will propagate to any item beneath this item. If no items accept the event, it will be ignored by the scene, and propagate to the view.</para>
            <para>It's common to open a QMenu in response to receiving a context menu event. Example:</para>
            <para> void CustomItem::contextMenuEvent(QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QMenu menu;</para>
            <para>     QAction *removeAction = menu.addAction(&quot;Remove&quot;);</para>
            <para>     QAction *markAction = menu.addAction(&quot;Mark&quot;);</para>
            <para>     QAction *selectedAction = menu.exec(event-&gt;screenPos());</para>
            <para>     // ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Data(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's custom data for the key key as a QVariant.</para>
            <para>Custom item data is useful for storing arbitrary properties in any item. Example:</para>
            <para> static const int ObjectName = 0;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsItem *item = scene.itemAt(100, 50);</para>
            <para> if (item-&gt;data(ObjectName).toString().isEmpty()) {</para>
            <para>     if (qgraphicsitem_cast&lt;ButtonItem *&gt;(item))</para>
            <para>         item-&gt;setData(ObjectName, &quot;Button&quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Qt does not use this feature for storing data; it is provided solely for the convenience of the user.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.DeviceTransform(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's device transformation matrix, using viewportTransform to map from scene to device coordinates. This matrix can be used to map coordinates and geometrical shapes from this item's local coordinate system to the viewport's (or any device's) coordinate system. To map coordinates from the viewport, you must first invert the returned matrix.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsRectItem rect;</para>
            <para> rect.setPos(100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> rect.deviceTransform(view-&gt;viewportTransform()).map(QPointF(0, 0));</para>
            <para> // returns the item's (0, 0) point in view's viewport coordinates</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> rect.deviceTransform(view-&gt;viewportTransform()).inverted().map(QPointF(100, 100));</para>
            <para> // returns view's viewport's (100, 100) coordinate in item coordinates</para>
            <para>This function is the same as combining this item's scene transform with the view's viewport transform, but it also understands the ItemIgnoresTransformations flag. The device transform can be used to do accurate coordinate mapping (and collision detection) for untransformable items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also transform(), setTransform(), scenePos(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and itemTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag enter events for this item. Drag enter events are generated as the cursor enters the item's area.</para>
            <para>By accepting the event, (i.e., by calling QEvent::accept(),) the item will accept drop events, in addition to receiving drag move and drag leave. Otherwise, the event will be ignored and propagate to the item beneath. If the event is accepted, the item will receive a drag move event before control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>A common implementation of dragEnterEvent accepts or ignores event depending on the associated mime data in event. Example:</para>
            <para> CustomItem::CustomItem()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     setAcceptDrops(true);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void CustomItem::dragEnterEvent(QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     event-&gt;setAccepted(event-&gt;mimeData()-&gt;hasFormat(&quot;text/plain&quot;));</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also dropEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag leave events for this item. Drag leave events are generated as the cursor leaves the item's area. Most often you will not need to reimplement this function, but it can be useful for resetting state in your item (e.g., highlighting).</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also dragEnterEvent(), dropEvent(), and dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag move events for this item. Drag move events are generated as the cursor moves around inside the item's area. Most often you will not need to reimplement this function; it is used to indicate that only parts of the item can accept drops.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event toggles whether or not the item will accept drops at the position from the event. By default, event is accepted, indicating that the item allows drops at the specified position.</para>
            <para>Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also dropEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drop events for this item. Items can only receive drop events if the last drag move event was accepted.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.EffectiveOpacity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's effective opacity, which is between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (opaque). This value is a combination of this item's local opacity, and its parent and ancestors' opacities. The effective opacity decides how the item is rendered.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also opacity(), setOpacity(), paint(), ItemIgnoresParentOpacity, and ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.EnsureVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.</para>
            <para>If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.</para>
            <para>If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.EnsureVisible(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.</para>
            <para>If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.</para>
            <para>If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.EnsureVisible(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.</para>
            <para>If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.</para>
            <para>If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive focus in events for this item. The default implementation calls ensureVisible().</para>
            <para>See also focusOutEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setFocus().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.FocusItem">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item, a child or descendant of this item currently has input focus, this function will return a pointer to that item. If no descendant has input focus, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also hasFocus(), setFocus(), and QWidget::focusWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive focus out events for this item. The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also focusInEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setFocus().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GrabKeyboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Grabs the keyboard input.</para>
            <para>The item will receive all keyboard input to the scene until one of the following events occur:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The item becomes invisible</para>
            <para>The item is removed from the scene</para>
            <para>The item is deleted</para>
            <para>The item calls ungrabKeyboard()</para>
            <para>Another item calls grabKeyboard(); the item will regain the keyboard grab when the other item calls ungrabKeyboard().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>When an item gains the keyboard grab, it receives a QEvent::GrabKeyboard event. When it loses the keyboard grab, it receives a QEvent::UngrabKeyboard event. These events can be used to detect when your item gains or loses the keyboard grab through other means than gaining input focus.</para>
            <para>It is almost never necessary to explicitly grab the keyboard in Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the keyboard when your item gains input focus, and releases it when your item loses input focus, or when the item is hidden.</para>
            <para>Note that only visible items can grab keyboard input. Calling grabKeyboard() on an invisible item has no effect.</para>
            <para>Keyboard events are not affected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also ungrabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and setFocus().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GrabMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>Grabs the mouse input.</para>
            <para>This item will receive all mouse events for the scene until any of the following events occurs:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The item becomes invisible</para>
            <para>The item is removed from the scene</para>
            <para>The item is deleted</para>
            <para>The item call ungrabMouse()</para>
            <para>Another item calls grabMouse(); the item will regain the mouse grab when the other item calls ungrabMouse().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>When an item gains the mouse grab, it receives a QEvent::GrabMouse event. When it loses the mouse grab, it receives a QEvent::UngrabMouse event. These events can be used to detect when your item gains or loses the mouse grab through other means than receiving mouse button events.</para>
            <para>It is almost never necessary to explicitly grab the mouse in Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the mouse when you press a mouse button, and keeps the mouse grabbed until you release the last mouse button. Also, Qt::Popup widgets implicitly call grabMouse() when shown, and ungrabMouse() when hidden.</para>
            <para>Note that only visible items can grab mouse input. Calling grabMouse() on an invisible item has no effect.</para>
            <para>Keyboard events are not affected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::mouseGrabberItem(), ungrabMouse(), and grabKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.HasCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item has a cursor set; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>By default, items don't have any cursor set. cursor() will return a standard pointing arrow cursor.</para>
            <para>See also unsetCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.HasFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is active, and it or its focus proxy has keyboard input focus; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also focusItem(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Hide">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the item. (Items are visible by default.)</para>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling setVisible(false).</para>
            <para>See also show() and setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnHoverEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover enter events for this item. The default implementation calls update(); otherwise it does nothing.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also hoverMoveEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnHoverLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover leave events for this item. The default implementation calls update(); otherwise it does nothing.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnHoverMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover move events for this item. The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also hoverEnterEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive input method events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also inputMethodQuery() and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>This method is only relevant for input items. It is used by the input method to query a set of properties of the item to be able to support complex input method operations, such as support for surrounding text and reconversions. query specifies which property is queried.</para>
            <para>See also inputMethodEvent(), QInputMethodEvent, and QInputContext.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.InstallSceneEventFilter(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Installs an event filter for this item on filterItem, causing all events for this item to first pass through filterItem's sceneEventFilter() function.</para>
            <para>To filter another item's events, install this item as an event filter for the other item. Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsEllipseItem *ellipse = scene.addEllipse(QRectF(-10, -10, 20, 20));</para>
            <para> QGraphicsLineItem *line = scene.addLine(QLineF(-10, -10, 20, 20));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> line-&gt;installSceneEventFilter(ellipse);</para>
            <para> // line's events are filtered by ellipse's sceneEventFilter() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> ellipse-&gt;installSceneEventFilter(line);</para>
            <para> // ellipse's events are filtered by line's sceneEventFilter() function.</para>
            <para>An item can only filter events for other items in the same scene. Also, an item cannot filter its own events; instead, you can reimplement sceneEvent() directly.</para>
            <para>Items must belong to a scene for scene event filters to be installed and used.</para>
            <para>See also removeSceneEventFilter(), sceneEventFilter(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsActive">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is active; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>An item can only be active if the scene is active. An item is active if it is, or is a descendent of, an active panel. Items in non-active panels are not active.</para>
            <para>Items that are not part of a panel follow scene activation when the scene has no active panel.</para>
            <para>Only active items can gain input focus.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::isActive(), QGraphicsScene::activePanel(), panel(), and isPanel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsAncestorOf(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is an ancestor of child (i.e., if this item is child's parent, or one of child's parent's ancestors).</para>
            <para>See also parentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsBlockedByModalPanel(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is blocked by a modal panel, false otherwise. If blockingPanel is non-zero, blockingPanel will be set to the modal panel that is blocking this item. If this item is not blocked, blockingPanel will not be set by this function.</para>
            <para>This function always returns false for items not in a scene.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also panelModality(), setPanelModality(), and PanelModality.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsClipped">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is clipped. An item is clipped if it has either set the ItemClipsToShape flag, or if it or any of its ancestors has set the ItemClipsChildrenToShape flag.</para>
            <para>Clipping affects the item's appearance (i.e., painting), as well as mouse and hover event delivery.</para>
            <para>See also clipPath(), shape(), and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is enabled; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>See also setEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsObscured">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of any of colliding items above it (i.e., with a higher Z value than this item).</para>
            <para>Its implementation is based on calling isObscuredBy(), which you can reimplement to provide a custom obscurity algorithm.</para>
            <para>See also opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsObscured(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns true if rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of any of colliding items above it (i.e., with a higher Z value than this item).</para>
            <para>Unlike the default isObscured() function, this function does not call isObscuredBy().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsObscured(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of any of colliding items above it (i.e., with a higher Z value than this item).</para>
            <para>Its implementation is based on calling isObscuredBy(), which you can reimplement to provide a custom obscurity algorithm.</para>
            <para>See also opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.</para>
            <para>The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.</para>
            <para>See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsPanel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is a panel; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::panel() and ItemIsPanel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is selected; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>Items that are in a group inherit the group's selected state.</para>
            <para>Items are not selected by default.</para>
            <para>See also setSelected() and QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsUnderMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is currently under the mouse cursor in one of the views; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4,4.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::views() and QCursor::pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is visible; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's general visibility is unrelated to whether or not it is actually being visualized by a QGraphicsView.</para>
            <para>See also setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsVisibleTo(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is visible to parent; otherwise, false is returned. parent can be 0, in which case this function will return whether the item is visible to the scene or not.</para>
            <para>An item may not be visible to its ancestors even if isVisible() is true. It may also be visible to its ancestors even if isVisible() is false. If any ancestor is hidden, the item itself will be implicitly hidden, in which case this function will return false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also isVisible() and setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is a widget (i.e., QGraphicsWidget); otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.IsWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is a QGraphicsWidget window, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget::windowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ItemChange(QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QGraphicsItem to notify custom items that some part of the item's state changes. By reimplementing this function, your can react to a change, and in some cases, (depending on change,) adjustments can be made.</para>
            <para>change is the parameter of the item that is changing. value is the new value; the type of the value depends on change.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QVariant Component::itemChange(GraphicsItemChange change, const QVariant &amp;value)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (change == ItemPositionChange &amp;&amp; scene()) {</para>
            <para>         // value is the new position.</para>
            <para>         QPointF newPos = value.toPointF();</para>
            <para>         QRectF rect = scene()-&gt;sceneRect();</para>
            <para>         if (!rect.contains(newPos)) {</para>
            <para>             // Keep the item inside the scene rect.</para>
            <para>             newPos.setX(qMin(rect.right(), qMax(newPos.x(), rect.left())));</para>
            <para>             newPos.setY(qMin(rect.bottom(), qMax(newPos.y(), rect.top())));</para>
            <para>             return newPos;</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     return QGraphicsItem::itemChange(change, value);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing, and returns value.</para>
            <para>Note: Certain QGraphicsItem functions cannot be called in a reimplementation of this function; see the GraphicsItemChange documentation for details.</para>
            <para>See also GraphicsItemChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ItemTransform(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QTransform that maps coordinates from this item to other. If ok is not null, and if there is no such transform, the boolean pointed to by ok will be set to false; otherwise it will be set to true.</para>
            <para>This transform provides an alternative to the mapToItem() or mapFromItem() functions, by returning the appropriate transform so that you can map shapes and coordinates yourself. It also helps you write more efficient code when repeatedly mapping between the same two items.</para>
            <para>Note: In rare circumstances, there is no transform that maps between two items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapFromItem(), and deviceTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ItemTransform(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Boolean@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QTransform that maps coordinates from this item to other. If ok is not null, and if there is no such transform, the boolean pointed to by ok will be set to false; otherwise it will be set to true.</para>
            <para>This transform provides an alternative to the mapToItem() or mapFromItem() functions, by returning the appropriate transform so that you can map shapes and coordinates yourself. It also helps you write more efficient code when repeatedly mapping between the same two items.</para>
            <para>Note: In rare circumstances, there is no transform that maps between two items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapFromItem(), and deviceTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive key press events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event. If you reimplement this handler, the event will by default be accepted.</para>
            <para>Note that key events are only received for items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, and that have keyboard input focus.</para>
            <para>See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive key release events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event. If you reimplement this handler, the event will by default be accepted.</para>
            <para>Note that key events are only received for items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, and that have keyboard input focus.</para>
            <para>See also keyPressEvent(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a polygon.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene()</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the polygon polygon, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped polygon.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the path path, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped path.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromParent(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromParent(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToParent(), mapFromItem(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromParent(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the polygon polygon, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToParent(), mapToItem(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromParent(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the path path, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped path.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromScene(), mapFromItem(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromParent(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromParent(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromScene(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromScene(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromScene(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the polygon polygon, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene(), mapFromParent(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromScene(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the path path, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped path.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromParent(), mapFromItem(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromScene(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapFromScene(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectFromScene().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectFromItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectFromScene().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectFromParent(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectFromParent(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectFromScene(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in scene coordinates, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectFromScene(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in scene coordinates, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectToScene().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectToScene().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectToParent(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectToParent(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectToScene(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapRectToScene(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a polygon.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the polygon polygon, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped polygon.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the path path, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped path.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().</para>
            <para>See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToParent(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToParent(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a polygon. If the item has no parent, rect will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene(), mapToItem(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToParent(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the polygon polygon, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped polygon. If the item has no parent, polygon will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene(), mapToItem(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToParent(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the path path, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped path. If the item has no parent, path will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene(), mapToItem(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToParent(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToParent(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToScene(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToScene(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToParent(), mapToItem(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToScene(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the polygon polygon, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToParent(), mapToItem(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToScene(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the path path, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped path.</para>
            <para>See also mapToParent(), mapToItem(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToScene(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MapToScene(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse doubleclick events for this item.</para>
            <para>When doubleclicking an item, the item will first receive a mouse press event, followed by a release event (i.e., a click), then a doubleclick event, and finally a release event.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls mousePressEvent(). If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent() in your reimplementation.</para>
            <para>Note that an item will not receive double click events if it is neither selectable nor movable (single mouse clicks are ignored in this case, and that stops the generation of double clicks).</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse move events for this item. If you do receive this event, you can be certain that this item also received a mouse press event, and that this item is the current mouse grabber.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent() in your reimplementation.</para>
            <para>Please note that mousePressEvent() decides which graphics item it is that receives mouse events. See the mousePressEvent() description for details.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse press events for this item. Mouse press events are only delivered to items that accept the mouse button that is pressed. By default, an item accepts all mouse buttons, but you can change this by calling setAcceptedMouseButtons().</para>
            <para>The mouse press event decides which item should become the mouse grabber (see QGraphicsScene::mouseGrabberItem()). If you do not reimplement this function, the press event will propagate to any topmost item beneath this item, and no other mouse events will be delivered to this item.</para>
            <para>If you do reimplement this function, event will by default be accepted (see QEvent::accept()), and this item is then the mouse grabber. This allows the item to receive future move, release and doubleclick events. If you call QEvent::ignore() on event, this item will lose the mouse grab, and event will propagate to any topmost item beneath. No further mouse events will be delivered to this item unless a new mouse press event is received.</para>
            <para>The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent() in your reimplementation.</para>
            <para>The event is QEvent::ignore()d for items that are neither movable nor selectable.</para>
            <para>See also mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse release events for this item.</para>
            <para>Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent() in your reimplementation.</para>
            <para>Please note that mousePressEvent() decides which graphics item it is that receives mouse events. See the mousePressEvent() description for details.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.MoveBy(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the item by dx points horizontally, and dy point vertically. This function is equivalent to calling setPos(pos() + QPointF(dx, dy)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).</para>
            <para>This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.</para>
            <para>See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.</para>
            <para> void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,</para>
            <para>                           const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,</para>
            <para>                           QWidget *widget)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     painter-&gt;drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.</para>
            <para>Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.</para>
            <para>All painting is done in local coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Panel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's panel, or 0 if this item does not have a panel. If the item is a panel, it will return itself. Otherwise it will return the closest ancestor that is a panel.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isPanel() and ItemIsPanel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ParentObject">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item's parent, cast to a QGraphicsObject. returns 0 if the parent item is not a QGraphicsObject.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also parentItem() and childItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ParentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item's parent widget. The item's parent widget is the closest parent item that is a widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also parentItem() and childItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.PrepareGeometryChange">
            <summary>
            <para>Prepares the item for a geometry change. Call this function before changing the bounding rect of an item to keep QGraphicsScene's index up to date.</para>
            <para>prepareGeometryChange() will call update() if this is necessary.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void CircleItem::setRadius(qreal newRadius)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (radius != newRadius) {</para>
            <para>         prepareGeometryChange();</para>
            <para>         radius = newRadius;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.RemoveSceneEventFilter(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes an event filter on this item from filterItem.</para>
            <para>See also installSceneEventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ResetMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Use resetTransform() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ResetTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets this item's transformation matrix to the identity matrix or all the transformation properties to their default values. This is equivalent to calling setTransform(QTransform()).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform() and transform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Rotate(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use</para>
            <para> setRotation(rotation() + angle);</para>
            <para>instead.</para>
            <para>Rotates the current item transformation angle degrees clockwise around its origin. To translate around an arbitrary point (x, y), you need to combine translation and rotation with setTransform().</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> // Rotate an item 45 degrees around (0, 0).</para>
            <para> item-&gt;rotate(45);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // Rotate an item 45 degrees around (x, y).</para>
            <para> item-&gt;setTransform(QTransform().translate(x, y).rotate(45).translate(-x, -y));</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), transform(), scale(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Scale">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scale factor of the item. The default scale factor is 1.0 (i.e., the item is not scaled).</para>
            <para>The scale is combined with the item's rotation(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setScale(), rotation(), and Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Scale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scale factor of the item. The default scale factor is 1.0 (i.e., the item is not scaled).</para>
            <para>The scale is combined with the item's rotation(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setScale(), rotation(), and Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Scene">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current scene for the item, or 0 if the item is not stored in a scene.</para>
            <para>To add or move an item to a scene, call QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SceneBoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rect of this item in scene coordinates, by combining sceneTransform() with boundingRect().</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect() and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnSceneEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function receives events to this item. Reimplement this function to intercept events before they are dispatched to the specialized event handlers contextMenuEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the event was recognized and handled; otherwise, (e.g., if the event type was not recognized,) false is returned.</para>
            <para>event is the intercepted event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SceneEventFilter(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Filters events for the item watched. event is the filtered event.</para>
            <para>Reimplementing this function in a subclass makes it possible for the item to be used as an event filter for other items, intercepting all the events send to those items before they are able to respond.</para>
            <para>Reimplementations must return true to prevent further processing of a given event, ensuring that it will not be delivered to the watched item, or return false to indicate that the event should be propagated further by the event system.</para>
            <para>See also installSceneEventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SceneMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Use sceneTransform() instead.</para>
            <para>See also transform(), setTransform(), scenePos(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's position in scene coordinates. This is equivalent to calling mapToScene(0, 0).</para>
            <para>See also pos(), sceneTransform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SceneTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's scene transformation matrix. This matrix can be used to map coordinates and geometrical shapes from this item's local coordinate system to the scene's coordinate system. To map coordinates from the scene, you must first invert the returned matrix.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsRectItem rect;</para>
            <para> rect.setPos(100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> rect.sceneTransform().map(QPointF(0, 0));</para>
            <para> // returns QPointF(100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> rect.sceneTransform().inverted().map(QPointF(100, 100));</para>
            <para> // returns QPointF(0, 0);</para>
            <para>Unlike transform(), which returns only an item's local transformation, this function includes the item's (and any parents') position, and all the transfomation properties.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also transform(), setTransform(), scenePos(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Scroll(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of rect by dx, dy. If rect is a null rect (the default), the item's bounding rect is scrolled.</para>
            <para>Scrolling provides a fast alternative to simply redrawing when the contents of the item (or parts of the item) are shifted vertically or horizontally. Depending on the current transformation and the capabilities of the paint device (i.e., the viewport), this operation may consist of simply moving pixels from one location to another using memmove(). In most cases this is faster than rerendering the entire area.</para>
            <para>After scrolling, the item will issue an update for the newly exposed areas. If scrolling is not supported (e.g., you are rendering to an OpenGL viewport, which does not benefit from scroll optimizations), this function is equivalent to calling update(rect).</para>
            <para>Note: Scrolling is only supported when QGraphicsItem::ItemCoordinateCache is enabled; in all other cases calling this function is equivalent to calling update(rect). If you for sure know that the item is opaque and not overlapped by other items, you can map the rect to viewport coordinates and scroll the viewport.</para>
            <para> QTransform xform = item-&gt;deviceTransform(view-&gt;viewportTransform());</para>
            <para> QRect deviceRect = xform.mapRect(rect).toAlignedRect();</para>
            <para> view-&gt;viewport()-&gt;scroll(dx, dy, deviceRect);</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Scroll(System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of rect by dx, dy. If rect is a null rect (the default), the item's bounding rect is scrolled.</para>
            <para>Scrolling provides a fast alternative to simply redrawing when the contents of the item (or parts of the item) are shifted vertically or horizontally. Depending on the current transformation and the capabilities of the paint device (i.e., the viewport), this operation may consist of simply moving pixels from one location to another using memmove(). In most cases this is faster than rerendering the entire area.</para>
            <para>After scrolling, the item will issue an update for the newly exposed areas. If scrolling is not supported (e.g., you are rendering to an OpenGL viewport, which does not benefit from scroll optimizations), this function is equivalent to calling update(rect).</para>
            <para>Note: Scrolling is only supported when QGraphicsItem::ItemCoordinateCache is enabled; in all other cases calling this function is equivalent to calling update(rect). If you for sure know that the item is opaque and not overlapped by other items, you can map the rect to viewport coordinates and scroll the viewport.</para>
            <para> QTransform xform = item-&gt;deviceTransform(view-&gt;viewportTransform());</para>
            <para> QRect deviceRect = xform.mapRect(rect).toAlignedRect();</para>
            <para> view-&gt;viewport()-&gt;scroll(dx, dy, deviceRect);</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetActive(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If active is true, and the scene is active, this item's panel will be activated. Otherwise, the panel is deactivated.</para>
            <para>If the item is not part of an active scene, active will decide what happens to the panel when the scene becomes active or the item is added to the scene. If true, the item's panel will be activated when the item is either added to the scene or the scene is activated. Otherwise, the item will stay inactive independent of the scene's activated state.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isPanel(), QGraphicsScene::setActivePanel(), and QGraphicsScene::isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetCacheMode(QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CacheMode,QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's cache mode to mode.</para>
            <para>The optional logicalCacheSize argument is used only by ItemCoordinateCache mode, and describes the resolution of the cache buffer; if logicalCacheSize is (100, 100), QGraphicsItem will fit the item into 100x100 pixels in graphics memory, regardless of the logical size of the item itself. By default QGraphicsItem uses the size of boundingRect(). For all other cache modes than ItemCoordinateCache, logicalCacheSize is ignored.</para>
            <para>Caching can speed up rendering if your item spends a significant time redrawing itself. In some cases the cache can also slow down rendering, in particular when the item spends less time redrawing than QGraphicsItem spends redrawing from the cache. When enabled, the item's paint() function will be called only once for each call to update(); for any subsequent repaint requests, the Graphics View framework will redraw from the cache. This approach works particularly well with QGLWidget, which stores all the cache as OpenGL textures.</para>
            <para>Be aware that QPixmapCache's cache limit may need to be changed to obtain optimal performance.</para>
            <para>You can read more about the different cache modes in the CacheMode documentation.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also cacheMode(), CacheMode, and QPixmapCache::setCacheLimit().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetData(System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets this item's custom data for the key key to value.</para>
            <para>Custom item data is useful for storing arbitrary properties for any item. Qt does not use this feature for storing data; it is provided solely for the convenience of the user.</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetEnabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true, the item is enabled; otherwise, it is disabled.</para>
            <para>Disabled items are visible, but they do not receive any events, and cannot take focus nor be selected. Mouse events are discarded; they are not propagated unless the item is also invisible, or if it does not accept mouse events (see acceptedMouseButtons()). A disabled item cannot become the mouse grabber, and as a result of this, an item loses the grab if it becomes disabled when grabbing the mouse, just like it loses focus if it had focus when it was disabled.</para>
            <para>Disabled items are traditionally drawn using grayed-out colors (see QPalette::Disabled).</para>
            <para>If you disable a parent item, all its children will also be disabled. If you enable a parent item, all children will be enabled, unless they have been explicitly disabled (i.e., if you call setEnabled(false) on a child, it will not be reenabled if its parent is disabled, and then enabled again).</para>
            <para>Items are enabled by default.</para>
            <para>Note: If you install an event filter, you can still intercept events before they are delivered to items; this mechanism disregards the item's enabled state.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetFlag(QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true, the item flag flag is enabled; otherwise, it is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also flags() and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetFocus(QtCore.Qt.FocusReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives keyboard input focus to this item. The focusReason argument will be passed into any focus event generated by this function; it is used to give an explanation of what caused the item to get focus.</para>
            <para>Only enabled items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag can accept keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>If this item is not visible, not active, or not associated with a scene, it will not gain immediate input focus. However, it will be registered as the preferred focus item for its subtree of items, should it later become visible.</para>
            <para>As a result of calling this function, this item will receive a focus in event with focusReason. If another item already has focus, that item will first receive a focus out event indicating that it has lost input focus.</para>
            <para>See also clearFocus(), hasFocus(), focusItem(), and focusProxy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetMatrix(QtGui.QMatrix,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's affine transformation matrix. This is a subset or the item's full transformation matrix, and might not represent the item's full transformation.</para>
            <para>Use setTransform() instead.</para>
            <para>See also matrix(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetPos(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the position of the item to pos, which is in parent coordinates. For items with no parent, pos is in scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>The position of the item describes its origin (local coordinate (0, 0)) in parent coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), scenePos(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetScale(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the scale factor of the item. The default scale factor is 1.0 (i.e., the item is not scaled). A scale factor of 0.0 will collapse the item to a single point. If you provide a negative scale factor, the item will be flipped and mirrored (i.e., rotated 180 degrees).</para>
            <para>The item is scaled around its transform origin point, which by default is (0, 0). You can select a different transformation origin by calling setTransformOriginPoint().</para>
            <para>The scale is combined with the item's rotation(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also scale(), setTransformOriginPoint(), and Transformations Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetSelected(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If selected is true and this item is selectable, this item is selected; otherwise, it is unselected.</para>
            <para>If the item is in a group, the whole group's selected state is toggled by this function. If the group is selected, all items in the group are also selected, and if the group is not selected, no item in the group is selected.</para>
            <para>Only visible, enabled, selectable items can be selected. If selected is true and this item is either invisible or disabled or unselectable, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>By default, items cannot be selected. To enable selection, set the ItemIsSelectable flag.</para>
            <para>This function is provided for convenience, allowing individual toggling of the selected state of an item. However, a more common way of selecting items is to call QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea(), which will call this function for all visible, enabled, and selectable items within a specified area on the scene.</para>
            <para>See also isSelected() and QGraphicsScene::selectedItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetTransform(QtGui.QTransform,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's current transformation matrix to matrix.</para>
            <para>If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.</para>
            <para>To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsItem provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between items' and the scene's coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map an item coordiate to a scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from scene coordinates to item coordinates.</para>
            <para>The transformation matrix is combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transformations() into a combined transformation that maps the item's coordinate system to its parent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also transform(), setRotation(), setScale(), setTransformOriginPoint(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetTransformOriginPoint(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the origin point for the transformation in item coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also transformOriginPoint() and Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If visible is true, the item is made visible. Otherwise, the item is made invisible. Invisible items are not painted, nor do they receive any events. In particular, mouse events pass right through invisible items, and are delivered to any item that may be behind. Invisible items are also unselectable, they cannot take input focus, and are not detected by QGraphicsScene's item location functions.</para>
            <para>If an item becomes invisible while grabbing the mouse, (i.e., while it is receiving mouse events,) it will automatically lose the mouse grab, and the grab is not regained by making the item visible again; it must receive a new mouse press to regain the mouse grab.</para>
            <para>Similarly, an invisible item cannot have focus, so if the item has focus when it becomes invisible, it will lose focus, and the focus is not regained by simply making the item visible again.</para>
            <para>If you hide a parent item, all its children will also be hidden. If you show a parent item, all children will be shown, unless they have been explicitly hidden (i.e., if you call setVisible(false) on a child, it will not be reshown even if its parent is hidden, and then shown again).</para>
            <para>Items are visible by default; it is unnecessary to call setVisible() on a new item.</para>
            <para>See also isVisible(), show(), and hide().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:</para>
            <para> QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainterPath path;</para>
            <para>     path.addEllipse(boundingRect());</para>
            <para>     return path;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.</para>
            <para>This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Shear(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use</para>
            <para> setTransform(QTransform().shear(sh, sv), true);</para>
            <para>instead.</para>
            <para>Shears the current item transformation by (sh, sv).</para>
            <para>See also setTransform() and transform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Show">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the item. (Items are visible by default.)</para>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling setVisible(true).</para>
            <para>See also hide() and setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.StackBefore(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Stacks this item before sibling, which must be a sibling item (i.e., the two items must share the same parent item, or must both be toplevel items). The sibling must have the same Z value as this item, otherwise calling this function will have no effect.</para>
            <para>By default, all sibling items are stacked by insertion order (i.e., the first item you add is drawn before the next item you add). If two items' Z values are different, then the item with the highest Z value is drawn on top. When the Z values are the same, the insertion order will decide the stacking order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setZValue(), ItemStacksBehindParent, and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ToGraphicsObject">
            <summary>
            <para>Return the graphics item cast to a QGraphicsObject, if the class is actually a graphics object, 0 otherwise.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.TopLevelItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's top-level item. The top-level item is the item's topmost ancestor item whose parent is 0. If an item has no parent, its own pointer is returned (i.e., a top-level item is its own top-level item).</para>
            <para>See also parentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.TopLevelWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item's top level widget (i.e., the item's ancestor whose parent is 0, or whose parent is not a widget), or 0 if this item does not have a top level widget. If the item is its own top level widget, this function returns a pointer to the item itself.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use setPos() or setTransformOriginPoint() instead. For identical behavior, use</para>
            <para> setTransform(QTransform::fromTranslate(dx, dy), true);</para>
            <para>Translates the current item transformation by (dx, dy).</para>
            <para>If all you want is to move an item, you should call moveBy() or setPos() instead; this function changes the item's translation, which is conceptually separate from its position.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform() and transform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.</para>
            <para>The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.</para>
            <para>To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>    ...</para>
            <para>    enum { Type = UserType + 1 };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>    int type() const</para>
            <para>    {</para>
            <para>        // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.</para>
            <para>        return Type;</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para>    ...</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>See also UserType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.UngrabKeyboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the keyboard grab.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also grabKeyboard() and ungrabMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.UngrabMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the mouse grab.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also grabMouse() and ungrabKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.UnsetCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the cursor from this item.</para>
            <para>See also hasCursor() and setCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the area covered by rect in this item. You can call this function whenever your item needs to be redrawn, such as if it changes appearance or size.</para>
            <para>This function does not cause an immediate paint; instead it schedules a paint request that is processed by QGraphicsView after control reaches the event loop. The item will only be redrawn if it is visible in any associated view.</para>
            <para>As a side effect of the item being repainted, other items that overlap the area rect may also be repainted.</para>
            <para>If the item is invisible (i.e., isVisible() returns false), this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also paint() and boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Update(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the area covered by rect in this item. You can call this function whenever your item needs to be redrawn, such as if it changes appearance or size.</para>
            <para>This function does not cause an immediate paint; instead it schedules a paint request that is processed by QGraphicsView after control reaches the event loop. The item will only be redrawn if it is visible in any associated view.</para>
            <para>As a side effect of the item being repainted, other items that overlap the area rect may also be repainted.</para>
            <para>If the item is invisible (i.e., isVisible() returns false), this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also paint() and boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Update(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the area covered by rect in this item. You can call this function whenever your item needs to be redrawn, such as if it changes appearance or size.</para>
            <para>This function does not cause an immediate paint; instead it schedules a paint request that is processed by QGraphicsView after control reaches the event loop. The item will only be redrawn if it is visible in any associated view.</para>
            <para>As a side effect of the item being repainted, other items that overlap the area rect may also be repainted.</para>
            <para>If the item is invisible (i.e., isVisible() returns false), this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also paint() and boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.UpdateMicroFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the item's micro focus.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QInputContext.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive wheel events for this item. If you reimplement this function, event will be accepted by default.</para>
            <para>If you ignore the event, (i.e., by calling QEvent::ignore(),) it will propagate to any item beneath this item. If no items accept the event, it will be ignored by the scene, and propagate to the view (e.g., the view's vertical scroll bar).</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Window">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's window, or 0 if this item does not have a window. If the item is a window, it will return itself. Otherwise it will return the closest ancestor that is a window.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget::isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsItem and all its children. If this item is currently associated with a scene, the item will be removed from the scene before it is deleted.</para>
            <para>Note: It is more efficient to remove the item from the QGraphicsScene before destroying the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.AcceptDrops">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item can accept drag and drop events; otherwise, returns false. By default, items do not accept drag and drop events; items are transparent to drag and drop.</para>
            <para>If on is true, this item will accept drag and drop events; otherwise, it is transparent for drag and drop events. By default, items do not accept drag and drop events.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.AcceptHoverEvents">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if an item accepts hover events (QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent); otherwise, returns false. By default, items do not accept hover events.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>If enabled is true, this item will accept hover events; otherwise, it will ignore them. By default, items do not accept hover events.</para>
            <para>Hover events are delivered when there is no current mouse grabber item. They are sent when the mouse cursor enters an item, when it moves around inside the item, and when the cursor leaves an item. Hover events are commonly used to highlight an item when it's entered, and for tracking the mouse cursor as it hovers over the item (equivalent to QWidget::mouseTracking).</para>
            <para>Parent items receive hover enter events before their children, and leave events after their children. The parent does not receive a hover leave event if the cursor enters a child, though; the parent stays &quot;hovered&quot; until the cursor leaves its area, including its children's areas.</para>
            <para>If a parent item handles child events, it will receive hover move, drag move, and drop events as the cursor passes through its children, but it does not receive hover enter and hover leave, nor drag enter and drag leave events on behalf of its children.</para>
            <para>A QGraphicsWidget with window decorations will accept hover events regardless of the value of acceptHoverEvents().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.AcceptTouchEvents">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if an item accepts touch events; otherwise, returns false. By default, items do not accept touch events.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>If enabled is true, this item will accept touch events; otherwise, it will ignore them. By default, items do not accept touch events.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.AcceptedMouseButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse buttons that this item accepts mouse events for. By default, all mouse buttons are accepted.</para>
            <para>If an item accepts a mouse button, it will become the mouse grabber item when a mouse press event is delivered for that mouse button. However, if the item does not accept the button, QGraphicsScene will forward the mouse events to the first item beneath it that does.</para>
            <para>Sets the mouse buttons that this item accepts mouse events for.</para>
            <para>By default, all mouse buttons are accepted. If an item accepts a mouse button, it will become the mouse grabber item when a mouse press event is delivered for that button. However, if the item does not accept the mouse button, QGraphicsScene will forward the mouse events to the first item beneath it that does.</para>
            <para>To disable mouse events for an item (i.e., make it transparent for mouse events), call setAcceptedMouseButtons(0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.AcceptsHoverEvents">
            <summary>
            <para>Call acceptHoverEvents() instead.</para>
            <para>Use setAcceptHoverEvents(enabled) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.BoundingRegionGranularity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's bounding region granularity; a value between and including 0 and 1. The default value is 0 (i.e., the lowest granularity, where the bounding region corresponds to the item's bounding rectangle).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the bounding region granularity to granularity; a value between and including 0 and 1. The default value is 0 (i.e., the lowest granularity, where the bounding region corresponds to the item's bounding rectangle).</para>
            <para>The granularity is used by boundingRegion() to calculate how fine the bounding region of the item should be. The highest achievable granularity is 1, where boundingRegion() will return the finest outline possible for the respective device (e.g., for a QGraphicsView viewport, this gives you a pixel-perfect bounding region). The lowest possible granularity is 0. The value of granularity describes the ratio between device resolution and the resolution of the bounding region (e.g., a value of 0.25 will provide a region where each chunk corresponds to 4x4 device units / pixels).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.cacheMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cache mode for this item. The default mode is NoCache (i.e., cache is disabled and all painting is immediate).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's cache mode to mode.</para>
            <para>The optional logicalCacheSize argument is used only by ItemCoordinateCache mode, and describes the resolution of the cache buffer; if logicalCacheSize is (100, 100), QGraphicsItem will fit the item into 100x100 pixels in graphics memory, regardless of the logical size of the item itself. By default QGraphicsItem uses the size of boundingRect(). For all other cache modes than ItemCoordinateCache, logicalCacheSize is ignored.</para>
            <para>Caching can speed up rendering if your item spends a significant time redrawing itself. In some cases the cache can also slow down rendering, in particular when the item spends less time redrawing than QGraphicsItem spends redrawing from the cache. When enabled, the item's paint() function will be called only once for each call to update(); for any subsequent repaint requests, the Graphics View framework will redraw from the cache. This approach works particularly well with QGLWidget, which stores all the cache as OpenGL textures.</para>
            <para>Be aware that QPixmapCache's cache limit may need to be changed to obtain optimal performance.</para>
            <para>You can read more about the different cache modes in the CacheMode documentation.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Cursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current cursor shape for the item. The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this item. See the list of predefined cursor objects for a range of useful shapes.</para>
            <para>An editor item might want to use an I-beam cursor:</para>
            <para> item-&gt;setCursor(Qt::IBeamCursor);</para>
            <para>If no cursor has been set, the cursor of the item beneath is used.</para>
            <para>Sets the current cursor shape for the item to cursor. The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this item. See the list of predefined cursor objects for a range of useful shapes.</para>
            <para>An editor item might want to use an I-beam cursor:</para>
            <para> item-&gt;setCursor(Qt::IBeamCursor);</para>
            <para>If no cursor has been set, the cursor of the item beneath is used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.FiltersChildEvents">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item filters child events (i.e., all events intended for any of its children are instead sent to this item); otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>The default value is false; child events are not filtered.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>If enabled is true, this item is set to filter all events for all its children (i.e., all events intented for any of its children are instead sent to this item); otherwise, if enabled is false, this item will only handle its own events. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Flags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's flags. The flags describe what configurable features of the item are enabled and not. For example, if the flags include ItemIsFocusable, the item can accept input focus.</para>
            <para>By default, no flags are enabled.</para>
            <para>Sets the item flags to flags. All flags in flags are enabled; all flags not in flags are disabled.</para>
            <para>If the item had focus and flags does not enable ItemIsFocusable, the item loses focus as a result of calling this function. Similarly, if the item was selected, and flags does not enabled ItemIsSelectable, the item is automatically unselected.</para>
            <para>By default, no flags are enabled. (QGraphicsWidget enables the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag by default in order to track position changes.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.FocusProxy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's focus proxy, or 0 if this item has no focus proxy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's focus proxy to item.</para>
            <para>If an item has a focus proxy, the focus proxy will receive input focus when the item gains input focus. The item itself will still have focus (i.e., hasFocus() will return true), but only the focus proxy will receive the keyboard input.</para>
            <para>A focus proxy can itself have a focus proxy, and so on. In such case, keyboard input will be handled by the outermost focus proxy.</para>
            <para>The focus proxy item must belong to the same scene as this item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsEffect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to this item's effect if it has one; otherwise 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets effect as the item's effect. If there already is an effect installed on this item, QGraphicsItem will delete the existing effect before installing the new effect.</para>
            <para>If effect is the installed on a different item, setGraphicsEffect() will remove the effect from the item and install it on this item.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsItem takes ownership of effect.</para>
            <para>Note: This function will apply the effect on itself and all its children.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Group">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to this item's item group, or 0 if this item is not member of a group.</para>
            <para>Adds this item to the item group group. If group is 0, this item is removed from any current group and added as a child of the previous group's parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.HandlesChildEvents">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item handles child events (i.e., all events intended for any of its children are instead sent to this item); otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>This property is useful for item groups; it allows one item to handle events on behalf of its children, as opposed to its children handling their events individually.</para>
            <para>The default is to return false; children handle their own events. The exception for this is if the item is a QGraphicsItemGroup, then it defaults to return true.</para>
            <para>If enabled is true, this item is set to handle all events for all its children (i.e., all events intented for any of its children are instead sent to this item); otherwise, if enabled is false, this item will only handle its own events. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>This property is useful for item groups; it allows one item to handle events on behalf of its children, as opposed to its children handling their events individually.</para>
            <para>If a child item accepts hover events, its parent will receive hover move events as the cursor passes through the child, but it does not receive hover enter and hover leave events on behalf of its child.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.InputMethodHints">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current input method hints of this item.</para>
            <para>Input method hints are only relevant for input items. The hints are used by the input method to indicate how it should operate. For example, if the Qt::ImhNumbersOnly flag is set, the input method may change its visual components to reflect that only numbers can be entered.</para>
            <para>The effect may vary between input method implementations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the current input method hints of this item to hints.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Opacity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's local opacity, which is between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (opaque). This value is combined with parent and ancestor values into the effectiveOpacity(). The effective opacity decides how the item is rendered.</para>
            <para>The opacity property decides the state of the painter passed to the paint() function. If the item is cached, i.e., ItemCoordinateCache or DeviceCoordinateCache, the effective property will be applied to the item's cache as it is rendered.</para>
            <para>The default opacity is 1.0; fully opaque.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>Sets this item's local opacity, between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (opaque). The item's local opacity is combined with parent and ancestor opacities into the effectiveOpacity().</para>
            <para>By default, opacity propagates from parent to child, so if a parent's opacity is 0.5 and the child is also 0.5, the child's effective opacity will be 0.25.</para>
            <para>The opacity property decides the state of the painter passed to the paint() function. If the item is cached, i.e., ItemCoordinateCache or DeviceCoordinateCache, the effective property will be applied to the item's cache as it is rendered.</para>
            <para>There are two item flags that affect how the item's opacity is combined with the parent: ItemIgnoresParentOpacity and ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.panelModality">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the modality for this item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the modality for this item to panelModality.</para>
            <para>Changing the modality of a visible item takes effect immediately.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ParentItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to this item's parent item. If this item does not have a parent, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets this item's parent item to newParent. If this item already has a parent, it is first removed from the previous parent. If newParent is 0, this item will become a top-level item.</para>
            <para>Note that this implicitly adds this graphics item to the scene of the parent. You should not add the item to the scene yourself.</para>
            <para>Calling this function on an item that is an ancestor of newParent have undefined behaviour.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the item in parent coordinates. If the item has no parent, its position is given in scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>The position of the item describes its origin (local coordinate (0, 0)) in parent coordinates; this function returns the same as mapToParent(0, 0).</para>
            <para>For convenience, you can also call scenePos() to determine the item's position in scene coordinates, regardless of its parent.</para>
            <para>Sets the position of the item to pos, which is in parent coordinates. For items with no parent, pos is in scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>The position of the item describes its origin (local coordinate (0, 0)) in parent coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Rotation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clockwise rotation, in degrees, around the Z axis. The default value is 0 (i.e., the item is not rotated).</para>
            <para>The rotation is combined with the item's scale(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the clockwise rotation angle, in degrees, around the Z axis. The default value is 0 (i.e., the item is not rotated). Assigning a negative value will rotate the item counter-clockwise. Normally the rotation angle is in the range (-360, 360), but it's also possible to assign values outside of this range (e.g., a rotation of 370 degrees is the same as a rotation of 10 degrees).</para>
            <para>The item is rotated around its transform origin point, which by default is (0, 0). You can select a different transformation origin by calling setTransformOriginPoint().</para>
            <para>The rotation is combined with the item's scale(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's tool tip, or an empty QString if no tool tip has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's tool tip to toolTip. If toolTip is empty, the item's tool tip is cleared.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.TransformOriginPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the origin point for the transformation in item coordinates.</para>
            <para>The default is QPointF(0,0).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the origin point for the transformation in item coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Transformations">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of graphics transforms that currently apply to this item.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsTransform is for applying and controlling a chain of individual transformation operations on an item. It's particularly useful in animations, where each transform operation needs to be interpolated independently, or differently.</para>
            <para>The transformations are combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transform() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets a list of graphics transformations (QGraphicsTransform) that currently apply to this item.</para>
            <para>If all you want is to rotate or scale an item, you should call setRotation() or setScale() instead. If you want to set an arbitrary transformation on an item, you can call setTransform().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsTransform is for applying and controlling a chain of individual transformation operations on an item. It's particularly useful in animations, where each transform operation needs to be interpolated independently, or differently.</para>
            <para>The transformations are combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transform() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.X">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling pos().x().</para>
            <para>Set's the x coordinate of the item's position. Equivalent to calling setPos(x, y()).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling pos().y().</para>
            <para>Set's the y coordinate of the item's position. Equivalent to calling setPos(x(), y).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.zValue">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the Z-value of the item. The Z-value affects the stacking order of sibling (neighboring) items.</para>
            <para>The default Z-value is 0.</para>
            <para>Sets the Z-value of the item to z. The Z value decides the stacking order of sibling (neighboring) items. A sibling item of high Z value will always be drawn on top of another sibling item with a lower Z value.</para>
            <para>If you restore the Z value, the item's insertion order will decide its stacking order.</para>
            <para>The Z-value does not affect the item's size in any way.</para>
            <para>The default Z-value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Matrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's affine transformation matrix. This is a subset or the item's full transformation matrix, and might not represent the item's full transformation.</para>
            <para>Use transform() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix(), setTransform(), and sceneTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.Transform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this item's transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>The transformation matrix is combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transformations() into a combined transformations for the item.</para>
            <para>The default transformation matrix is an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform() and sceneTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CacheMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes QGraphicsItem's cache modes. Caching is used to speed up rendering by allocating and rendering to an off-screen pixel buffer, which can be reused when the item requires redrawing. For some paint devices, the cache is stored directly in graphics memory, which makes rendering very quick.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::setCacheMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CacheMode.DeviceCoordinateCache">
            <summary>
            <para>Caching is enabled at the paint device level, in device coordinates. This mode is for items that can move, but are not rotated, scaled or sheared. If the item is transformed directly or indirectly, the cache will be regenerated automatically. Unlike ItemCoordinateCacheMode, DeviceCoordinateCache always renders at maximum quality.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CacheMode.ItemCoordinateCache">
            <summary>
            <para>Caching is enabled for the item's logical (local) coordinate system. QGraphicsItem creates an off-screen pixel buffer with a configurable size / resolution that you can pass to QGraphicsItem::setCacheMode(). Rendering quality will typically degrade, depending on the resolution of the cache and the item transformation. The first time the item is redrawn, it will render itself into the cache, and the cache is then reused for every subsequent expose. The cache is also reused as the item is transformed. To adjust the resolution of the cache, you can call setCacheMode() again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.CacheMode.NoCache">
            <summary>
            <para>The default; all item caching is disabled. QGraphicsItem::paint() is called every time the item needs redrawing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the state changes that are notified by QGraphicsItem::itemChange(). The notifications are sent as the state changes, and in some cases, adjustments can be made (see the documentation for each change for details).</para>
            <para>Note: Be careful with calling functions on the QGraphicsItem itself inside itemChange(), as certain function calls can lead to unwanted recursion. For example, you cannot call setPos() in itemChange() on an ItemPositionChange notification, as the setPos() function will again call itemChange(ItemPositionChange). Instead, you can return the new, adjusted position from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemChildAddedChange">
            <summary>
            <para>A child is added to this item. The value argument is the new child item (i.e., a QGraphicsItem pointer). Do not pass this item to any item's setParentItem() function as this notification is delivered. The return value is unused; you cannot adjust anything in this notification. Note that the new child might not be fully constructed when this notification is sent; calling pure virtual functions on the child can lead to a crash.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemChildRemovedChange">
            <summary>
            <para>A child is removed from this item. The value argument is the child item that is about to be removed (i.e., a QGraphicsItem pointer). The return value is unused; you cannot adjust anything in this notification.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemCursorChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's cursor changes. The value argument is the new cursor (i.e., a QCursor). Do not call setCursor() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return a new cursor from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemCursorHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's cursor has changed. The value argument is the new cursor (i.e., a QCursor). Do not call setCursor() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemEnabledChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's enabled state changes. If the item is presently enabled, it will become disabled, and vice verca. The value argument is the new enabled state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setEnabled() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return the new state from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemEnabledHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's enabled state has changed. The value argument is the new enabled state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setEnabled() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemFlagsChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's flags change. The value argument is the new flags (i.e., a quint32). Do not call setFlags() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return the new flags from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemFlagsHaveChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's flags have changed. The value argument is the new flags (i.e., a quint32). Do not call setFlags() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemMatrixChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's affine transformation matrix is changing. This value is obsolete; you can use ItemTransformChange instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemOpacityChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's opacity changes. The value argument is the new opacity (i.e., a double). Do not call setOpacity() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return a new opacity from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemOpacityHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's opacity has changed. The value argument is the new opacity (i.e., a double). Do not call setOpacity() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemParentChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's parent changes. The value argument is the new parent item (i.e., a QGraphicsItem pointer). Do not call setParentItem() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new parent from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemParentHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's parent has changed. The value argument is the new parent (i.e., a pointer to a QGraphicsItem). Do not call setParentItem() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemPositionChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's position changes. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's local position changes, relative to its parent (i.e., as a result of calling setPos() or moveBy()). The value argument is the new position (i.e., a QPointF). You can call pos() to get the original position. Do not call setPos() or moveBy() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new, adjusted position from itemChange(). After this notification, QGraphicsItem immediately sends the ItemPositionHasChanged notification if the position changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemPositionHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's position has changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's local position, relative to its parent, has changed. The value argument is the new position (the same as pos()), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemRotationChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's rotation property changes. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's rotation property changes (i.e., as a result of calling setRotation()). The value argument is the new rotation (i.e., a double); to get the old rotation, call rotation(). Do not call setRotation() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new rotation from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemRotationHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's rotation property has changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's rotation property has changed. The value argument is the new rotation (i.e., a double), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification). Do not call setRotation() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemScaleChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's scale property changes. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's scale property changes (i.e., as a result of calling setScale()). The value argument is the new scale (i.e., a double); to get the old scale, call scale(). Do not call setScale() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new scale from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemScaleHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's scale property has changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's scale property has changed. The value argument is the new scale (i.e., a double), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification). Do not call setScale() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemSceneChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is moved to a new scene. This notification is also sent when the item is added to its initial scene, and when it is removed. The item's scene() is the old scene (or 0 if the item has not been added to a scene yet). The value argument is the new scene (i.e., a QGraphicsScene pointer), or a null pointer if the item is removed from a scene. Do not override this change by passing this item to QGraphicsScene::addItem() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new scene from itemChange(). Use this feature with caution; objecting to a scene change can quickly lead to unwanted recursion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemSceneHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's scene has changed. The item's scene() is the new scene. This notification is also sent when the item is added to its initial scene, and when it is removed.The value argument is the new scene (i.e., a pointer to a QGraphicsScene). Do not call setScene() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemScenePositionHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's scene position has changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsScenePositionChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's scene position has changed (i.e., the position or transformation of the item itself or the position or transformation of any ancestor has changed). The value argument is the new scene position (the same as scenePos()), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemSelectedChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's selected state changes. If the item is presently selected, it will become unselected, and vice verca. The value argument is the new selected state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setSelected() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new selected state from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemSelectedHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's selected state has changed. The value argument is the new selected state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setSelected() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemToolTipChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's tooltip changes. The value argument is the new tooltip (i.e., a QToolTip). Do not call setToolTip() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return a new tooltip from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemToolTipHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's tooltip has changed. The value argument is the new tooltip (i.e., a QToolTip). Do not call setToolTip() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemTransformChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's transformation matrix changes. This notification is send if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's local transformation matrix changes (i.e., as a result of calling setTransform(). The value argument is the new matrix (i.e., a QTransform); to get the old matrix, call transform(). Do not call setTransform() or set any of the transformation properties in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new matrix from itemChange(). This notification is not sent if you change the transformation properties.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemTransformHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's transformation matrix has changed either because setTransform is called, or one of the transformation properties is changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's local transformation matrix has changed. The value argument is the new matrix (same as transform()), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemTransformOriginPointChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's transform origin point property changes. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's transform origin point property changes (i.e., as a result of calling setTransformOriginPoint()). The value argument is the new origin point (i.e., a QPointF); to get the old origin point, call transformOriginPoint(). Do not call setTransformOriginPoint() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new transform origin point from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemTransformOriginPointHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's transform origin point property has changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's transform origin point property has changed. The value argument is the new origin point (i.e., a QPointF), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification). Do not call setTransformOriginPoint() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemVisibleChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's visible state changes. If the item is presently visible, it will become invisible, and vice verca. The value argument is the new visible state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setVisible() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new visible state from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemVisibleHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's visible state has changed. The value argument is the new visible state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setVisible() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemZValueChange">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's Z-value changes. The value argument is the new Z-value (i.e., a double). Do not call setZValue() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return a new Z-value from itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange.ItemZValueHasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The item's Z-value has changed. The value argument is the new Z-value (i.e., a double). Do not call setZValue() as this notification is delivered. The return value is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes different flags that you can set on an item to toggle different features in the item's behavior.</para>
            <para>All flags are disabled by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemAcceptsInputMethod">
            <summary>
            <para>The item supports input methods typically used for Asian languages. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemClipsChildrenToShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The item clips the painting of all its descendants to its own shape. Items that are either direct or indirect children of this item cannot draw outside this item's shape. By default, this flag is disabled; children can draw anywhere. This behavior is enforced by QGraphicsView::drawItems() or QGraphicsScene::drawItems(). This flag was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemClipsToShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The item clips to its own shape. The item cannot draw or receive mouse, tablet, drag and drop or hover events outside its shape. It is disabled by default. This behavior is enforced by QGraphicsView::drawItems() or QGraphicsScene::drawItems(). This flag was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>The item doesn't propagate its opacity to its children. This flag allows you to create a semitransparent item that does not affect the opacity of its children. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemHasNoContents">
            <summary>
            <para>The item does not paint anything (i.e., calling paint() on the item has no effect). You should set this flag on items that do not need to be painted to ensure that Graphics View avoids unnecessary painting preparations. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemIgnoresParentOpacity">
            <summary>
            <para>The item ignores its parent's opacity. The item's effective opacity is the same as its own; it does not combine with the parent's opacity. This flags allows your item to keep its absolute opacity even if the parent is semitransparent. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemIgnoresTransformations">
            <summary>
            <para>The item ignores inherited transformations (i.e., its position is still anchored to its parent, but the parent or view rotation, zoom or shear transformations are ignored). This flag is useful for keeping text label items horizontal and unscaled, so they will still be readable if the view is transformed. When set, the item's view geometry and scene geometry will be maintained separately. You must call deviceTransform() to map coordinates and detect collisions in the view. By default, this flag is disabled. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.3. Note: With this flag set you can still scale the item itself, and that scale transformation will influence the item's children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemIsFocusable">
            <summary>
            <para>The item supports keyboard input focus (i.e., it is an input item). Enabling this flag will allow the item to accept focus, which again allows the delivery of key events to QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent() and QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemIsMovable">
            <summary>
            <para>The item supports interactive movement using the mouse. By clicking on the item and then dragging, the item will move together with the mouse cursor. If the item has children, all children are also moved. If the item is part of a selection, all selected items are also moved. This feature is provided as a convenience through the base implementation of QGraphicsItem's mouse event handlers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemIsPanel">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is a panel. A panel provides activation and contained focus handling. Only one panel can be active at a time (see QGraphicsItem::isActive()). When no panel is active, QGraphicsScene activates all non-panel items. Window items (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isWindow() returns true) are panels. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemIsSelectable">
            <summary>
            <para>The item supports selection. Enabling this feature will enable setSelected() to toggle selection for the item. It will also let the item be selected automatically as a result of calling QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea(), by clicking on an item, or by using rubber band selection in QGraphicsView.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemNegativeZStacksBehindParent">
            <summary>
            <para>The item automatically stacks behind it's parent if it's z-value is negative. This flag enables setZValue() to toggle ItemStacksBehindParent. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemSendsGeometryChanges">
            <summary>
            <para>The item enables itemChange() notifications for ItemPositionChange, ItemPositionHasChanged, ItemMatrixChange, ItemTransformChange, ItemTransformHasChanged, ItemRotationChange, ItemRotationHasChanged, ItemScaleChange, ItemScaleHasChanged, ItemTransformOriginPointChange, and ItemTransformOriginPointHasChanged. For performance reasons, these notifications are disabled by default. You must enable this flag to receive notifications for position and transform changes. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemSendsScenePositionChanges">
            <summary>
            <para>The item enables itemChange() notifications for ItemScenePositionHasChanged. For performance reasons, these notifications are disabled by default. You must enable this flag to receive notifications for scene position changes. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemStacksBehindParent">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is stacked behind its parent. By default, child items are stacked on top of the parent item. But setting this flag, the child will be stacked behind it. This flag is useful for drop shadow effects and for decoration objects that follow the parent item's geometry without drawing on top of it. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemFlag.ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption">
            <summary>
            <para>The item makes use of either exposedRect or matrix(obsolete) in QStyleOptionGraphicsItem. By default, the exposedRect is initialized to the item's boundingRect() and the matrix(obsolete) is untransformed. You can enable this flag for the style options to be set up with more fine-grained values. Note that QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetail(obsolete) is unaffected by this flag and always initialized to 1. Use QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetailFromTransform() if you need a higher value. This flag was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.PanelModality">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the behavior of a modal panel. A modal panel is one that blocks input to other panels. Note that items that are children of a modal panel are not blocked.</para>
            <para>The values are:</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::setPanelModality(), QGraphicsItem::panelModality(), and QGraphicsItem::ItemIsPanel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.PanelModality.NonModal">
            <summary>
            <para>The panel is not modal and does not block input to other panels. This is the default value for panels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.PanelModality.PanelModal">
            <summary>
            <para>The panel is modal to a single item hierarchy and blocks input to its parent pane, all grandparent panels, and all siblings of its parent and grandparent panels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsItem.PanelModality.SceneModal">
            <summary>
            <para>The window is modal to the entire scene and blocks input to all panels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys a QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.Brush">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's brush, or an empty brush if no brush has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's brush to brush.</para>
            <para>The item's brush is used to fill the item.</para>
            <para>If you use a brush with a QGradient, the gradient is relative to the item's coordinate system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem.Pen">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's pen. If no pen has been set, this function returns QPen(), a default black solid line pen with 0 width.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen for this item to pen.</para>
            <para>The pen is used to draw the item's outline.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractItemDelegate class is used to display and edit data items from a model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QAbstractItemDelegate provides the interface and common functionality for delegates in the model/view architecture. Delegates display individual items in views, and handle the editing of model data.</para>
            <para>The QAbstractItemDelegate class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>To render an item in a custom way, you must implement paint() and sizeHint(). The QItemDelegate class provides default implementations for these functions; if you do not need custom rendering, subclass that class instead.</para>
            <para>We give an example of drawing a progress bar in items; in our case for a package management program.</para>
            <para>We create the WidgetDelegate class, which inherits from QStyledItemDelegate. We do the drawing in the paint() function:</para>
            <para> void WidgetDelegate::paint(QPainter *painter, const QStyleOptionViewItem &amp;amp;option,</para>
            <para>                            const QModelIndex &amp;amp;index) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (index.column() == 1) {</para>
            <para>         int progress = index.data().toInt();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         QStyleOptionProgressBar progressBarOption;</para>
            <para>         progressBarOption.rect = option.rect;</para>
            <para>         progressBarOption.minimum = 0;</para>
            <para>         progressBarOption.maximum = 100;</para>
            <para>         progressBarOption.progress = progress;</para>
            <para>         progressBarOption.text = QString::number(progress) + &amp;quot;%&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para>         progressBarOption.textVisible = true;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         QApplication::style()-&amp;gt;drawControl(QStyle::CE_ProgressBar,</para>
            <para>                                            &amp;amp;progressBarOption, painter);</para>
            <para>     } else</para>
            <para>         QStyledItemDelegate::paint(painter, option, index);</para>
            <para>Notice that we use a QStyleOptionProgressBar and initialize its members. We can then use the current QStyle to draw it.</para>
            <para>To provide custom editing, there are two approaches that can be used. The first approach is to create an editor widget and display it directly on top of the item. To do this you must reimplement createEditor() to provide an editor widget, setEditorData() to populate the editor with the data from the model, and setModelData() so that the delegate can update the model with data from the editor.</para>
            <para>The second approach is to handle user events directly by reimplementing editorEvent().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming, QItemDelegate, Pixelator Example, QStyledItemDelegate, and QStyle.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new abstract item delegate with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.OnCloseEditor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user has finished editing an item using the specified editor.</para>
            <para>The hint provides a way for the delegate to influence how the model and view behave after editing is completed. It indicates to these components what action should be performed next to provide a comfortable editing experience for the user. For example, if EditNextItem is specified, the view should use a delegate to open an editor on the next item in the model.</para>
            <para>See also EndEditHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.OnCommitData(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal must be emitted when the editor widget has completed editing the data, and wants to write it back into the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.CreateEditor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the editor to be used for editing the data item with the given index. Note that the index contains information about the model being used. The editor's parent widget is specified by parent, and the item options by option.</para>
            <para>The base implementation returns 0. If you want custom editing you will need to reimplement this function.</para>
            <para>The returned editor widget should have Qt::StrongFocus; otherwise, QMouseEvents received by the widget will propagate to the view. The view's background will shine through unless the editor paints its own background (e.g., with setAutoFillBackground()).</para>
            <para>See also setModelData() and setEditorData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.OnEditorEvent(QtCore.QEvent,QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>When editing of an item starts, this function is called with the event that triggered the editing, the model, the index of the item, and the option used for rendering the item.</para>
            <para>Mouse events are sent to editorEvent() even if they don't start editing of the item. This can, for instance, be useful if you wish to open a context menu when the right mouse button is pressed on an item.</para>
            <para>The base implementation returns false (indicating that it has not handled the event).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.ElidedText(QtGui.QFontMetrics,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.TextElideMode,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use QFontMetrics::elidedText() instead.</para>
            <para>For example, if you have code like</para>
            <para> QFontMetrics fm = ...</para>
            <para> QString str = QAbstractItemDelegate::elidedText(fm, width, mode, text);</para>
            <para>you can rewrite it as</para>
            <para> QFontMetrics fm = ...</para>
            <para> QString str = fm.elidedText(text, mode, width);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.OnHelpEvent(QtGui.QHelpEvent,QtGui.QAbstractItemView,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Whenever a help event occurs, this function is called with the event view option and the index that corresponds to the item where the event occurs.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the delegate can handle the event; otherwise returns false. A return value of true indicates that the data obtained using the index had the required role.</para>
            <para>For QEvent::ToolTip and QEvent::WhatsThis events that were handled successfully, the relevant popup may be shown depending on the user's system configuration.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also QHelpEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure abstract function must be reimplemented if you want to provide custom rendering. Use the painter and style option to render the item specified by the item index.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this you must also reimplement sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.SetEditorData(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents of the given editor to the data for the item at the given index. Note that the index contains information about the model being used.</para>
            <para>The base implementation does nothing. If you want custom editing you will need to reimplement this function.</para>
            <para>See also setModelData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.SetModelData(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the data for the item at the given index in the model to the contents of the given editor.</para>
            <para>The base implementation does nothing. If you want custom editing you will need to reimplement this function.</para>
            <para>See also setEditorData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.SizeHint(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure abstract function must be reimplemented if you want to provide custom rendering. The options are specified by option and the model item by index.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this you must also reimplement paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.OnSizeHintChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal must be emitted when the sizeHint() of index changed.</para>
            <para>Views automatically connect to this signal and relayout items as necessary.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.UpdateEditorGeometry(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the geometry of the editor for the item with the given index, according to the rectangle specified in the option. If the item has an internal layout, the editor will be laid out accordingly. Note that the index contains information about the model being used.</para>
            <para>The base implementation does nothing. If you want custom editing you must reimplement this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the abstract item delegate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.CommitData">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal must be emitted when the editor widget has completed editing the data, and wants to write it back into the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.CloseEditor">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user has finished editing an item using the specified editor.</para>
            <para>The hint provides a way for the delegate to influence how the model and view behave after editing is completed. It indicates to these components what action should be performed next to provide a comfortable editing experience for the user. For example, if EditNextItem is specified, the view should use a delegate to open an editor on the next item in the model.</para>
            <para>See also EndEditHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.SizeHintChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal must be emitted when the sizeHint() of index changed.</para>
            <para>Views automatically connect to this signal and relayout items as necessary.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different hints that the delegate can give to the model and view components to make editing data in a model a comfortable experience for the user.</para>
            <para>These hints let the delegate influence the behavior of the view:</para>
            <para>Note that custom views may interpret the concepts of next and previous differently.</para>
            <para>The following hints are most useful when models are used that cache data, such as those that manipulate data locally in order to increase performance or conserve network bandwidth.</para>
            <para>Although models and views should respond to these hints in appropriate ways, custom components may ignore any or all of them if they are not relevant.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint.EditNextItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The view should use the delegate to open an editor on the next item in the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint.EditPreviousItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The view should use the delegate to open an editor on the previous item in the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint.NoHint">
            <summary>
            <para>There is no recommended action to be performed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint.RevertModelCache">
            <summary>
            <para>If the model caches data, it should discard cached data and replace it with data from the underlying data store.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint.SubmitModelCache">
            <summary>
            <para>If the model caches data, it should write out cached data to the underlying data store.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractItemView class provides the basic functionality for item view classes.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QAbstractItemView class is the base class for every standard view that uses a QAbstractItemModel. QAbstractItemView is an abstract class and cannot itself be instantiated. It provides a standard interface for interoperating with models through the signals and slots mechanism, enabling subclasses to be kept up-to-date with changes to their models. This class provides standard support for keyboard and mouse navigation, viewport scrolling, item editing, and selections. The keyboard navigation implements this functionality:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeysFunctionality</para>
            <para>Arrow keys	Changes the current item and selects it.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Arrow keys	Changes the current item but does not select it.</para>
            <para>Shift+Arrow keys	Changes the current item and selects it. The previously selected item(s) is not deselected.</para>
            <para>Ctr+Space	Toggles selection of the current item.</para>
            <para>Tab/Backtab	Changes the current item to the next/previous item.</para>
            <para>Home/End	Selects the first/last item in the model.</para>
            <para>Page up/Page down	Scrolls the rows shown up/down by the number of visible rows in the view.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+A	Selects all items in the model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that the above table assumes that the selection mode allows the operations. For instance, you cannot select items if the selection mode is QAbstractItemView::NoSelection.</para>
            <para>The QAbstractItemView class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>The view classes that inherit QAbstractItemView only need to implement their own view-specific functionality, such as drawing items, returning the geometry of items, finding items, etc.</para>
            <para>QAbstractItemView provides common slots such as edit() and setCurrentIndex(). Many protected slots are also provided, including dataChanged(), rowsInserted(), rowsAboutToBeRemoved(), selectionChanged(), and currentChanged().</para>
            <para>The root item is returned by rootIndex(), and the current item by currentIndex(). To make sure that an item is visible use scrollTo().</para>
            <para>Some of QAbstractItemView's functions are concerned with scrolling, for example setHorizontalScrollMode() and setVerticalScrollMode(). To set the range of the scroll bars, you can, for example, reimplement the view's resizeEvent() function:</para>
            <para> void MyView::resizeEvent(QResizeEvent *event) {</para>
            <para>     horizontalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;setRange(0, realWidth - width());</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Note that the range is not updated until the widget is shown.</para>
            <para>Several other functions are concerned with selection control; for example setSelectionMode(), and setSelectionBehavior(). This class provides a default selection model to work with (selectionModel()), but this can be replaced by using setSelectionModel() with an instance of QItemSelectionModel.</para>
            <para>For complete control over the display and editing of items you can specify a delegate with setItemDelegate().</para>
            <para>QAbstractItemView provides a lot of protected functions. Some are concerned with editing, for example, edit(), and commitData(), whilst others are keyboard and mouse event handlers.</para>
            <para>Note: If you inherit QAbstractItemView and intend to update the contents of the viewport, you should use viewport-&amp;gt;update() instead of update() as all painting operations take place on the viewport.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also View Classes, Model/View Programming, QAbstractItemModel, and Chart Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractScrollArea widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QAbstractScrollArea is a low-level abstraction of a scrolling area. The area provides a central widget called the viewport, in which the contents of the area is to be scrolled (i.e, the visible parts of the contents are rendered in the viewport).</para>
            <para>Next to the viewport is a vertical scroll bar, and below is a horizontal scroll bar. When all of the area contents fits in the viewport, each scroll bar can be either visible or hidden depending on the scroll bar's Qt::ScrollBarPolicy. When a scroll bar is hidden, the viewport expands in order to cover all available space. When a scroll bar becomes visible again, the viewport shrinks in order to make room for the scroll bar.</para>
            <para>It is possible to reserve a margin area around the viewport, see setViewportMargins(). The feature is mostly used to place a QHeaderView widget above or beside the scrolling area. Subclasses of QAbstractScrollArea should implement margins.</para>
            <para>When inheriting QAbstractScrollArea, you need to do the following:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Control the scroll bars by setting their range, value, page step, and tracking their movements.</para>
            <para>Draw the contents of the area in the viewport according to the values of the scroll bars.</para>
            <para>Handle events received by the viewport in viewportEvent() - notably resize events.</para>
            <para>Use viewport-&amp;gt;update() to update the contents of the viewport instead of update() as all painting operations take place on the viewport.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>With a scroll bar policy of Qt::ScrollBarAsNeeded (the default), QAbstractScrollArea shows scroll bars when they provide a non-zero scrolling range, and hides them otherwise.</para>
            <para>The scroll bars and viewport should be updated whenever the viewport receives a resize event or the size of the contents changes. The viewport also needs to be updated when the scroll bars values change. The initial values of the scroll bars are often set when the area receives new contents.</para>
            <para>We give a simple example, in which we have implemented a scroll area that can scroll any QWidget. We make the widget a child of the viewport; this way, we do not have to calculate which part of the widget to draw but can simply move the widget with QWidget::move(). When the area contents or the viewport size changes, we do the following:</para>
            <para>     QSize areaSize = viewport()-&amp;gt;size();</para>
            <para>     QSize  widgetSize = widget-&amp;gt;size();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     verticalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;setPageStep(areaSize.height());</para>
            <para>     horizontalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;setPageStep(areaSize.width());</para>
            <para>     verticalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;setRange(0, widgetSize.height() - areaSize.height());</para>
            <para>     horizontalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;setRange(0, widgetSize.width() - areaSize.width());</para>
            <para>     updateWidgetPosition();</para>
            <para>When the scroll bars change value, we need to update the widget position, i.e., find the part of the widget that is to be drawn in the viewport:</para>
            <para>     int hvalue = horizontalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;value();</para>
            <para>     int vvalue = verticalScrollBar()-&amp;gt;value();</para>
            <para>     QPoint topLeft = viewport()-&amp;gt;rect().topLeft();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     widget-&amp;gt;move(topLeft.x() - hvalue, topLeft.y() - vvalue);</para>
            <para>In order to track scroll bar movements, reimplement the virtual function scrollContentsBy(). In order to fine-tune scrolling behavior, connect to a scroll bar's QAbstractSlider::actionTriggered() signal and adjust the QAbstractSlider::sliderPosition as you wish.</para>
            <para>For convenience, QAbstractScrollArea makes all viewport events available in the virtual viewportEvent() handler. QWidget's specialized handlers are remapped to viewport events in the cases where this makes sense. The remapped specialized handlers are: paintEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), wheelEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), dropEvent(), contextMenuEvent(), and resizeEvent().</para>
            <para>QScrollArea, which inherits QAbstractScrollArea, provides smooth scrolling for any QWidget (i.e., the widget is scrolled pixel by pixel). You only need to subclass QAbstractScrollArea if you need more specialized behavior. This is, for instance, true if the entire contents of the area is not suitable for being drawn on a QWidget or if you do not want smooth scrolling.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QScrollArea.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFrame">
            <summary>
            The QFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMenu uses this to &amp;quot;raise&amp;quot; the menu above the surrounding screen. QProgressBar has a &amp;quot;sunken&amp;quot; look. QLabel has a flat look. The frames of widgets like these can be changed.</para>
            <para> QLabel label(...);</para>
            <para> label.setFrameStyle(QFrame::Panel | QFrame::Raised);</para>
            <para> label.setLineWidth(2);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QProgressBar pbar(...);</para>
            <para> label.setFrameStyle(QFrame::NoFrame);</para>
            <para>The QFrame class can also be used directly for creating simple placeholder frames without any contents.</para>
            <para>The frame style is specified by a frame shape and a shadow style that is used to visually separate the frame from surrounding widgets. These properties can be set together using the setFrameStyle() function and read with frameStyle().</para>
            <para>The frame shapes are NoFrame, Box, Panel, StyledPanel, HLine and VLine; the shadow styles are Plain, Raised and Sunken.</para>
            <para>A frame widget has three attributes that describe the thickness of the border: lineWidth, midLineWidth, and frameWidth.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The line width is the width of the frame border. It can be modified to customize the frame's appearance.</para>
            <para>The mid-line width specifies the width of an extra line in the middle of the frame, which uses a third color to obtain a special 3D effect. Notice that a mid-line is only drawn for Box, HLine and VLine frames that are raised or sunken.</para>
            <para>The frame width is determined by the frame style, and the frameWidth() function is used to obtain the value defined for the style used.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The margin between the frame and the contents of the frame can be customized with the QWidget::setContentsMargins() function.</para>
            <para>This table shows some of the combinations of styles and line widths:</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFrame.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a frame widget with frame style NoFrame and a 1-pixel frame width.</para>
            <para>The parent and f arguments are passed to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFrame.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFrame.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFrame.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFrame.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFrame.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.FrameStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the frame style.</para>
            <para>The default value is QFrame::Plain.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame style to style.</para>
            <para>The style is the bitwise OR between a frame shape and a frame shadow style. See the picture of the frames in the main class documentation.</para>
            <para>The frame shapes are given in QFrame::Shape and the shadow styles in QFrame::Shadow.</para>
            <para>If a mid-line width greater than 0 is specified, an additional line is drawn for Raised or Sunken Box, HLine, and VLine frames. The mid-color of the current color group is used for drawing middle lines.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.FrameShape">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the frame shape value from the frame style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.FrameShadow">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the frame shadow value from the frame style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the line width.</para>
            <para>Note that the total line width for frames used as separators (HLine and VLine) is specified by frameWidth.</para>
            <para>The default value is 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.MidLineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the width of the mid-line.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.FrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the width of the frame that is drawn.</para>
            <para>Note that the frame width depends on the frame style, not only the line width and the mid-line width. For example, the style specified by NoFrame always has a frame width of 0, whereas the style Panel has a frame width equivalent to the line width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFrame.FrameRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the frame's rectangle.</para>
            <para>The frame's rectangle is the rectangle the frame is drawn in. By default, this is the entire widget. Setting the rectangle does does not cause a widget update. The frame rectangle is automatically adjusted when the widget changes size.</para>
            <para>If you set the rectangle to a null rectangle (for example, QRect(0, 0, 0, 0)), then the resulting frame rectangle is equivalent to the widget rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFrame.Shadow">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the types of shadow that are used to give a 3D effect to frames.</para>
            <para>Shadow interacts with QFrame::Shape, the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth(). See the picture of the frames in the main class documentation.</para>
            <para>See also QFrame::Shape, lineWidth(), and midLineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shadow.Plain">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame and contents appear level with the surroundings; draws using the palette QPalette::WindowText color (without any 3D effect)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shadow.Raised">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame and contents appear raised; draws a 3D raised line using the light and dark colors of the current color group</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shadow.Sunken">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame and contents appear sunken; draws a 3D sunken line using the light and dark colors of the current color group</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFrame.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the shapes of frame available.</para>
            <para>When it does not call QStyle, Shape interacts with QFrame::Shadow, the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth() to create the total result. See the picture of the frames in the main class documentation.</para>
            <para>See also QFrame::Shadow, QFrame::style(), and QStyle::drawPrimitive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.Box">
            <summary>
            <para>QFrame draws a box around its contents</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.HLine">
            <summary>
            <para>QFrame draws a horizontal line that frames nothing (useful as separator)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.NoFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>QFrame draws nothing</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.Panel">
            <summary>
            <para>QFrame draws a panel to make the contents appear raised or sunken</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.StyledPanel">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a rectangular panel with a look that depends on the current GUI style. It can be raised or sunken.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.VLine">
            <summary>
            <para>QFrame draws a vertical line that frames nothing (useful as separator)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.Shape.WinPanel">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a rectangular panel that can be raised or sunken like those in Windows 2000. Specifying this shape sets the line width to 2 pixels. WinPanel is provided for compatibility. For GUI style independence we recommend using StyledPanel instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFrame.StyleMask">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum defines two constants that can be used to extract the two components of frameStyle():</para>
            <para>Normally, you don't need to use these, since frameShadow() and frameShape() already extract the Shadow and the Shape parts of frameStyle().</para>
            <para>See also frameStyle() and setFrameStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.StyleMask.Shadow_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The Shadow part of frameStyle()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFrame.StyleMask.Shape_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The Shape part of frameStyle()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a viewport.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.AddScrollBarWidget(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds widget as a scroll bar widget in the location specified by alignment.</para>
            <para>Scroll bar widgets are shown next to the horizontal or vertical scroll bar, and can be placed on either side of it. If you want the scroll bar widgets to be always visible, set the scrollBarPolicy for the corresponding scroll bar to AlwaysOn.</para>
            <para>alignment must be one of Qt::Alignleft and Qt::AlignRight, which maps to the horizontal scroll bar, or Qt::AlignTop and Qt::AlignBottom, which maps to the vertical scroll bar.</para>
            <para>A scroll bar widget can be removed by either re-parenting the widget or deleting it. It's also possible to hide a widget with QWidget::hide()</para>
            <para>The scroll bar widget will be resized to fit the scroll bar geometry for the current style. The following describes the case for scroll bar widgets on the horizontal scroll bar:</para>
            <para>The height of the widget will be set to match the height of the scroll bar. To control the width of the widget, use QWidget::setMinimumWidth and QWidget::setMaximumWidth, or implement QWidget::sizeHint() and set a horizontal size policy. If you want a square widget, call QStyle::pixelMetric(QStyle::PM_ScrollBarExtent) and set the width to this value.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also scrollBarWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive context menu events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag enter events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag leave events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag move events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drop events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            <para>This is the main event handler for the QAbstractScrollArea widget (not the scrolling area viewport()). The specified event is a general event object that may need to be cast to the appropriate class depending on its type.</para>
            <para>See also QEvent::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with key event e when key presses occur. It handles PageUp, PageDown, Up, Down, Left, and Right, and ignores all other key presses.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MaximumViewportSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the viewport as if the scroll bars had no valid scrolling range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse double click events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.</para>
            <para>Note: If you open a painter, make sure to open it on the viewport().</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive resize events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.</para>
            <para>When resizeEvent() is called, the viewport already has its new geometry: Its new size is accessible through the QResizeEvent::size() function, and the old size through QResizeEvent::oldSize().</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ScrollBarWidgets(QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the currently set scroll bar widgets. alignment can be any combination of the four location flags.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addScrollBarWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called when the scroll bars are moved by dx, dy, and consequently the viewport's contents should be scrolled accordingly.</para>
            <para>The default implementation simply calls update() on the entire viewport(), subclasses can reimplement this handler for optimization purposes, or - like QScrollArea - to move a contents widget. The parameters dx and dy are there for convenience, so that the class knows how much should be scrolled (useful e.g. when doing pixel-shifts). You may just as well ignore these values and scroll directly to the position the scroll bars indicate.</para>
            <para>Calling this function in order to scroll programmatically is an error, use the scroll bars instead (e.g. by calling QScrollBar::setValue() directly).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.SetViewportMargins(QtCore.QMargins)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets margins around the scrolling area. This is useful for applications such as spreadsheets with &quot;locked&quot; rows and columns. The marginal space is is left blank; put widgets in the unused area.</para>
            <para>By default all margins are zero.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.SetViewportMargins(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the margins around the scrolling area to left, top, right and bottom. This is useful for applications such as spreadsheets with &quot;locked&quot; rows and columns. The marginal space is is left blank; put widgets in the unused area.</para>
            <para>Note that this function is frequently called by QTreeView and QTableView, so margins must be implemented by QAbstractScrollArea subclasses. Also, if the subclasses are to be used in item views, they should not call this function.</para>
            <para>By default all margins are zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.SetupViewport(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called by QAbstractScrollArea after setViewport(viewport) has been called. Reimplement this function in a subclass of QAbstractScrollArea to initialize the new viewport before it is used.</para>
            <para>See also setViewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnViewportEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>The main event handler for the scrolling area (the viewport() widget). It handles the event specified, and can be called by subclasses to provide reasonable default behavior.</para>
            <para>Returns true to indicate to the event system that the event has been handled, and needs no further processing; otherwise returns false to indicate that the event should be propagated further.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using one of the specialized event handlers instead.</para>
            <para>Specialized handlers for viewport events are: paintEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), wheelEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), dropEvent(), contextMenuEvent(), and resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive wheel events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ViewportEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>The main event handler for the scrolling area (the viewport() widget). It handles the event specified, and can be called by subclasses to provide reasonable default behavior.</para>
            <para>Returns true to indicate to the event system that the event has been handled, and needs no further processing; otherwise returns false to indicate that the event should be propagated further.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using one of the specialized event handlers instead.</para>
            <para>Specialized handlers for viewport events are: paintEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), wheelEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), dropEvent(), contextMenuEvent(), and resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.CornerWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.</para>
            <para>By default, no corner widget is present.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars to be widget.</para>
            <para>You will probably also want to set at least one of the scroll bar modes to AlwaysOn.</para>
            <para>Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.</para>
            <para>Any previous corner widget is hidden.</para>
            <para>You may call setCornerWidget() with the same widget at different times.</para>
            <para>All widgets set here will be deleted by the scroll area when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0).</para>
            <para>Any newly set widget should have no current parent.</para>
            <para>By default, no corner widget is present.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.HorizontalScrollBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal scroll bar.</para>
            <para>Replaces the existing horizontal scroll bar with scrollBar, and sets all the former scroll bar's slider properties on the new scroll bar. The former scroll bar is then deleted.</para>
            <para>QAbstractScrollArea already provides horizontal and vertical scroll bars by default. You can call this function to replace the default horizontal scroll bar with your own custom scroll bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.VerticalScrollBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical scroll bar.</para>
            <para>Replaces the existing vertical scroll bar with scrollBar, and sets all the former scroll bar's slider properties on the new scroll bar. The former scroll bar is then deleted.</para>
            <para>QAbstractScrollArea already provides vertical and horizontal scroll bars by default. You can call this function to replace the default vertical scroll bar with your own custom scroll bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.Viewport">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the viewport widget.</para>
            <para>Use the QScrollArea::widget() function to retrieve the contents of the viewport widget.</para>
            <para>Sets the viewport to be the given widget. The QAbstractScrollArea will take ownership of the given widget.</para>
            <para>If widget is 0, QAbstractScrollArea will assign a new QWidget instance for the viewport.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.PaintEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events passed in event.</para>
            <para>A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of a widget. It can happen for one of the following reasons:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>repaint() or update() was invoked,</para>
            <para>the widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or</para>
            <para>many other reasons.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked to, but some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the requested region: QPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization does not change the result, as painting is clipped to that region during event processing. QListView and QTableView do this, for example.</para>
            <para>Qt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint events into one. When update() is called several times or the window system sends several paint events, Qt merges these events into one event with a larger region (see QRegion::united()). The repaint() function does not permit this optimization, so we suggest using update() whenever possible.</para>
            <para>When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been erased, so you are painting on the widget's background.</para>
            <para>The background can be set using setBackgroundRole() and setPalette().</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid flicker.</para>
            <para>Note for the X11 platform: It is possible to toggle global double buffering by calling qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(). For example,</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> extern void qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(bool);</para>
            <para> qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(false);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para>Note: Generally, you should refrain from calling update() or repaint() inside a paintEvent(). For example, calling update() or repaint() on children inside a paintevent() results in undefined behavior; the child may or may not get a paint event.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you are using a custom paint engine without Qt's backingstore, Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen must be set. Otherwise, QWidget::paintEngine() will never be called; the backingstore will be used instead.</para>
            <para>See also event(), repaint(), update(), QPainter, QPixmap, QPaintEvent, and Analog Clock Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ActionEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called with the given event whenever the widget's actions are changed.</para>
            <para>See also addAction(), insertAction(), removeAction(), actions(), and QActionEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ChangeEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.</para>
            <para>The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through the event supplied.</para>
            <para>Change events include: QEvent::ToolBarChange, QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange, QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange, QEvent::WindowTitleChange, QEvent::IconTextChange, QEvent::ModifiedChange, QEvent::MouseTrackingChange, QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::WindowStateChange, QEvent::LanguageChange, QEvent::LocaleChange, QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.CloseEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called with the given event when Qt receives a window close request for a top-level widget from the window system.</para>
            <para>By default, the event is accepted and the widget is closed. You can reimplement this function to change the way the widget responds to window close requests. For example, you can prevent the window from closing by calling ignore() on all events.</para>
            <para>Main window applications typically use reimplementations of this function to check whether the user's work has been saved and ask for permission before closing. For example, the Application Example uses a helper function to determine whether or not to close the window:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (maybeSave()) {</para>
            <para>         writeSettings();</para>
            <para>         event-&gt;accept();</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         event-&gt;ignore();</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also event(), hide(), close(), QCloseEvent, and Application Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ContextMenuEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget context menu events.</para>
            <para>The handler is called when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::DefaultContextMenu.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the context event. See the QContextMenuEvent documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>See also event(), QContextMenuEvent, and customContextMenuRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.DragEnterEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse enters this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>If the event is ignored, the widget won't receive any drag move events.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragEnterEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.DragLeaveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse leaves this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragLeaveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.DragMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called if a drag is in progress, and when any of the following conditions occur: the cursor enters this widget, the cursor moves within this widget, or a modifier key is pressed on the keyboard while this widget has the focus. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDragMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.DropEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag and QDropEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.EnterEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget enter events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the widget.</para>
            <para>See also leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.FocusInEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget. The event is passed in the event parameter</para>
            <para>A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)</para>
            <para>The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).</para>
            <para>See also focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.FocusOutEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget. The events is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)</para>
            <para>The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).</para>
            <para>See also focusInEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.HideEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget hide events. The event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been hidden.</para>
            <para>Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also visible, event(), and QHideEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.InputMethodEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler is called when the state of the input method changes.</para>
            <para>Note that when creating custom text editing widgets, the Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled window attribute must be set explicitly (using the setAttribute() function) in order to receive input method events.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls event-&gt;ignore(), which rejects the Input Method event. See the QInputMethodEvent documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>See also event() and QInputMethodEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.KeyPressEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key press events for the widget.</para>
            <para>A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key press event.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.</para>
            <para>The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user presses Esc. Otherwise the event is ignored, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.</para>
            <para>See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), QKeyEvent, and Tetrix Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.KeyReleaseEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events for the widget.</para>
            <para>A widget must accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key release event.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.</para>
            <para>See also keyPressEvent(), QKeyEvent::ignore(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and QKeyEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.LeaveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget leave events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves the widget.</para>
            <para>See also enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MouseDoubleClickEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.</para>
            <para>The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.</para>
            <para>Note: The widget will also receive mouse press and mouse release events in addition to the double click event. It is up to the developer to ensure that the application interprets these events correctly.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and QMouseEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MouseMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse button is pressed.</para>
            <para>QMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor, relative to this widget. For press and release events, the position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes. This is a feature of the underlying window system, not Qt.</para>
            <para>If you want to show a tooltip immediately, while the mouse is moving (e.g., to get the mouse coordinates with QMouseEvent::pos() and show them as a tooltip), you must first enable mouse tracking as described above. Then, to ensure that the tooltip is updated immediately, you must call QToolTip::showText() instead of setToolTip() in your implementation of mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>See also setMouseTracking(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MousePressEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets' location and maybe more.</para>
            <para>The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MouseReleaseEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.</para>
            <para>See also mousePressEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.MoveEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget move events which are passed in the event parameter. When the widget receives this event, it is already at the new position.</para>
            <para>The old position is accessible through QMoveEvent::oldPos().</para>
            <para>See also resizeEvent(), event(), move(), and QMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ResizeEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget resize events which are passed in the event parameter. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through QResizeEvent::oldSize().</para>
            <para>The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should be) done inside this handler.</para>
            <para>See also moveEvent(), event(), resize(), QResizeEvent, paintEvent(), and Scribble Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.ShowEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget show events which are passed in the event parameter.</para>
            <para>Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately before they are shown. The spontaneous show events of windows are delivered afterwards.</para>
            <para>Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().</para>
            <para>See also visible, event(), and QShowEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.TabletEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also QTabletEvent::ignore(), QTabletEvent::accept(), event(), and QTabletEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.WheelEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the event.</para>
            <para>See also QWheelEvent::ignore(), QWheelEvent::accept(), event(), and QWheelEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.VerticalScrollBarPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the policy for the vertical scroll bar.</para>
            <para>The default policy is Qt::ScrollBarAsNeeded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractScrollArea.HorizontalScrollBarPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the policy for the horizontal scroll bar.</para>
            <para>The default policy is Qt::ScrollBarAsNeeded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an abstract item view with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnActivated(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is activated by the user. How to activate items depends on the platform; e.g., by single- or double-clicking the item, or by pressing the Return or Enter key when the item is current.</para>
            <para>See also clicked(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ClearSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Deselects all selected items. The current index will not be changed.</para>
            <para>See also setSelection() and selectAll().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnClicked(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The item the mouse was clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>See also activated(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CloseEditor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the given editor, and releases it. The hint is used to specify how the view should respond to the end of the editing operation. For example, the hint may indicate that the next item in the view should be opened for editing.</para>
            <para>See also edit() and commitData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ClosePersistentEditor(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the persistent editor for the item at the given index.</para>
            <para>See also openPersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CommitData(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Commit the data in the editor to the model.</para>
            <para>See also closeEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when a new item becomes the current item. The previous current item is specified by the previous index, and the new item by the current index.</para>
            <para>If you want to know about changes to items see the dataChanged() signal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DataChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when items are changed in the model. The changed items are those from topLeft to bottomRight inclusive. If just one item is changed topLeft == bottomRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DirtyRegionOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the offset of the dirty regions in the view.</para>
            <para>If you use scrollDirtyRegion() and implement a paintEvent() in a subclass of QAbstractItemView, you should translate the area given by the paint event with the offset returned from this function.</para>
            <para>See also scrollDirtyRegion() and setDirtyRegion().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnDoubleClicked(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is double-clicked. The item the mouse was double-clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>See also clicked() and activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a drag and drop operation enters the widget. If the drag is over a valid dropping place (e.g. over an item that accepts drops), the event is accepted; otherwise it is ignored.</para>
            <para>See also dropEvent() and startDrag().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called when the item being dragged leaves the view. The event describes the state of the drag and drop operation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called continuously with the given event during a drag and drop operation over the widget. It can cause the view to scroll if, for example, the user drags a selection to view's right or bottom edge. In this case, the event will be accepted; otherwise it will be ignored.</para>
            <para>See also dropEvent() and startDrag().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a drop event occurs over the widget. If the model accepts the even position the drop event is accepted; otherwise it is ignored.</para>
            <para>See also startDrag().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.dropIndicatorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the drop indicator in relation to the closest item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Edit(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts editing the item corresponding to the given index if it is editable.</para>
            <para>Note that this function does not change the current index. Since the current index defines the next and previous items to edit, users may find that keyboard navigation does not work as expected. To provide consistent navigation behavior, call setCurrentIndex() before this function with the same model index.</para>
            <para>See also QModelIndex::flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Edit(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts editing the item at index, creating an editor if necessary, and returns true if the view's State is now EditingState; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The action that caused the editing process is described by trigger, and the associated event is specified by event.</para>
            <para>Editing can be forced by specifying the trigger to be QAbstractItemView::AllEditTriggers.</para>
            <para>See also closeEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditorDestroyed(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called when the given editor has been destroyed.</para>
            <para>See also closeEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnEntered(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the item specified by index. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also viewportEntered(), activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ExecuteDelayedItemsLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Executes the scheduled layouts without waiting for the event processing to begin.</para>
            <para>See also scheduleDelayedItemsLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when the widget obtains the focus. By default, the event is ignored.</para>
            <para>See also setFocus() and focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when the widget looses the focus. By default, the event is ignored.</para>
            <para>See also clearFocus() and focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.HorizontalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal offset of the view.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            <para>See also verticalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.IndexAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model index of the item at the viewport coordinates point.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            <para>See also visualRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.IndexWidget(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget for the item at the given index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setIndexWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.IsIndexHidden(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item referred to by the given index is hidden in the view, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Hiding is a view specific feature. For example in TableView a column can be marked as hidden or a row in the TreeView.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item delegate used by this view and model. This is either one set with setItemDelegate(), or the default one.</para>
            <para>See also setItemDelegate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ItemDelegate(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item delegate used by this view and model for the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ItemDelegateForColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item delegate used by this view and model for the given column. You can call itemDelegate() to get a pointer to the current delegate for a given index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setItemDelegateForColumn(), itemDelegateForRow(), and itemDelegate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ItemDelegateForRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item delegate used by this view and model for the given row, or 0 if no delegate has been assigned. You can call itemDelegate() to get a pointer to the current delegate for a given index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setItemDelegateForRow(), itemDelegateForColumn(), and setItemDelegate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a key event is sent to the widget. The default implementation handles basic cursor movement, e.g. Up, Down, Left, Right, Home, PageUp, and PageDown; the activated() signal is emitted if the current index is valid and the activation key is pressed (e.g. Enter or Return, depending on the platform). This function is where editing is initiated by key press, e.g. if F2 is pressed.</para>
            <para>See also edit(), moveCursor(), keyboardSearch(), and tabKeyNavigation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.KeyboardSearch(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves to and selects the item best matching the string search. If no item is found nothing happens.</para>
            <para>In the default implementation, the search is reset if search is empty, or the time interval since the last search has exceeded QApplication::keyboardInputInterval().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a mouse button is double clicked inside the widget. If the double-click is on a valid item it emits the doubleClicked() signal and calls edit() on the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a mouse move event is sent to the widget. If a selection is in progress and new items are moved over the selection is extended; if a drag is in progress it is continued.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a mouse button is pressed while the cursor is inside the widget. If a valid item is pressed on it is made into the current item. This function emits the pressed() signal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a mouse button is released, after a mouse press event on the widget. If a user presses the mouse inside your widget and then drags the mouse to another location before releasing the mouse button, your widget receives the release event. The function will emit the clicked() signal if an item was being pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.MoveCursor(QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QModelIndex object pointing to the next object in the view, based on the given cursorAction and keyboard modifiers specified by modifiers.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OpenPersistentEditor(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a persistent editor on the item at the given index. If no editor exists, the delegate will create a new editor.</para>
            <para>See also closePersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnPressed(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is pressed. The item the mouse was pressed on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>Use the QApplication::mouseButtons() function to get the state of the mouse buttons.</para>
            <para>See also activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and entered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reset the internal state of the view.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function will reset open editors, scroll bar positions, selections, etc. Existing changes will not be committed. If you would like to save your changes when resetting the view, you can reimplement this function, commit your changes, and then call the superclass' implementation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a resize event is sent to the widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.RowsAboutToBeRemoved(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when rows are about to be removed. The deleted rows are those under the given parent from start to end inclusive.</para>
            <para>See also rowsInserted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.RowsInserted(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when rows are inserted. The new rows are those under the given parent from start to end inclusive. The base class implementation calls fetchMore() on the model to check for more data.</para>
            <para>See also rowsAboutToBeRemoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScheduleDelayedItemsLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a layout of the items in the view to be executed when the event processing starts.</para>
            <para>Even if scheduleDelayedItemsLayout() is called multiple times before events are processed, the view will only do the layout once.</para>
            <para>See also executeDelayedItemsLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollDirtyRegion(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Prepares the view for scrolling by (dx,dy) pixels by moving the dirty regions in the opposite direction. You only need to call this function if you are implementing a scrolling viewport in your view subclass.</para>
            <para>If you implement scrollContentsBy() in a subclass of QAbstractItemView, call this function before you call QWidget::scroll() on the viewport. Alternatively, just call update().</para>
            <para>See also scrollContentsBy(), dirtyRegionOffset(), and setDirtyRegion().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollTo(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item at index is visible. The view will try to position the item according to the given hint.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollToBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the view to the bottom.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also scrollTo() and scrollToTop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollToTop">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the view to the top.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also scrollTo() and scrollToBottom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects all items in the view. This function will use the selection behavior set on the view when selecting.</para>
            <para>See also setSelection(), selectedIndexes(), and clearSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectedIndexes">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function returns a list of all selected and non-hidden item indexes in the view. The list contains no duplicates, and is not sorted.</para>
            <para>See also QItemSelectionModel::selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when the selection is changed. The previous selection (which may be empty), is specified by deselected, and the new selection by selected.</para>
            <para>See also setSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionCommand(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the SelectionFlags to be used when updating a selection with to include the index specified. The event is a user input event, such as a mouse or keyboard event.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function to define your own selection behavior.</para>
            <para>See also setSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SetDirtyRegion(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Marks the given region as dirty and schedules it to be updated. You only need to call this function if you are implementing your own view subclass.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also scrollDirtyRegion() and dirtyRegionOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SetIndexWidget(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given widget on the item at the given index, passing the ownership of the widget to the viewport.</para>
            <para>If index is invalid (e.g., if you pass the root index), this function will do nothing.</para>
            <para>The given widget's autoFillBackground property must be set to true, otherwise the widget's background will be transparent, showing both the model data and the item at the given index.</para>
            <para>If index widget A is replaced with index widget B, index widget A will be deleted. For example, in the code snippet below, the QLineEdit object will be deleted.</para>
            <para> setIndexWidget(index, new QLineEdit);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> setIndexWidget(index, new QTextEdit);</para>
            <para>This function should only be used to display static content within the visible area corresponding to an item of data. If you want to display custom dynamic content or implement a custom editor widget, subclass QItemDelegate instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also indexWidget() and Delegate Classes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SetItemDelegate(QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item delegate for this view and its model to delegate. This is useful if you want complete control over the editing and display of items.</para>
            <para>Any existing delegate will be removed, but not deleted. QAbstractItemView does not take ownership of delegate.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.</para>
            <para>See also itemDelegate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SetItemDelegateForColumn(System.Int32,QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given item delegate used by this view and model for the given column. All items on column will be drawn and managed by delegate instead of using the default delegate (i.e., itemDelegate()).</para>
            <para>Any existing column delegate for column will be removed, but not deleted. QAbstractItemView does not take ownership of delegate.</para>
            <para>Note: If a delegate has been assigned to both a row and a column, the row delegate will take precedence and manage the intersecting cell index.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also itemDelegateForColumn(), setItemDelegateForRow(), and itemDelegate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SetItemDelegateForRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given item delegate used by this view and model for the given row. All items on row will be drawn and managed by delegate instead of using the default delegate (i.e., itemDelegate()).</para>
            <para>Any existing row delegate for row will be removed, but not deleted. QAbstractItemView does not take ownership of delegate.</para>
            <para>Note: If a delegate has been assigned to both a row and a column, the row delegate (i.e., this delegate) will take precedence and manage the intersecting cell index.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also itemDelegateForRow(), setItemDelegateForColumn(), and itemDelegate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SetSelection(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies the selection flags to the items in or touched by the rectangle, rect.</para>
            <para>When implementing your own itemview setSelection should call selectionModel()-&gt;select(selection, flags) where selection is either an empty QModelIndex or a QItemSelection that contains all items that are contained in rect.</para>
            <para>See also selectionCommand() and selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SizeHintForColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width size hint for the specified column or -1 if there is no model.</para>
            <para>This function is used in views with a horizontal header to find the size hint for a header section based on the contents of the given column.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHintForRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SizeHintForIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint for the item with the specified index or an invalid size for invalid indexes.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHintForRow() and sizeHintForColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SizeHintForRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height size hint for the specified row or -1 if there is no model.</para>
            <para>The returned height is calculated using the size hints of the given row's items, i.e. the returned value is the maximum height among the items. Note that to control the height of a row, you must reimplement the QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint() function.</para>
            <para>This function is used in views with a vertical header to find the size hint for a header section based on the contents of the given row.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHintForColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.StartDrag(QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts a drag by calling drag-&gt;exec() using the given supportedActions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is called with the given event when a timer event is sent to the widget.</para>
            <para>See also QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Update(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the area occupied by the given index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.UpdateGeometries">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the geometry of the child widgets of the view.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.VerticalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical offset of the view.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ViewOptions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QStyleOptionViewItem structure populated with the view's palette, font, state, alignments etc.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnViewportEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the viewport. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also entered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.OnViewportEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().</para>
            <para>This function is used to handle tool tips, and What's This? mode, if the given event is a QEvent::ToolTip,or a QEvent::WhatsThis. It passes all other events on to its base class viewportEvent() handler.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.VisualRect(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at index.</para>
            <para>If your item is displayed in several areas then visualRect should return the primary area that contains index and not the complete area that index might encompasses, touch or cause drawing.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            <para>See also indexAt() and visualRegionForSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.VisualRegionForSelection(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the region from the viewport of the items in the given selection.</para>
            <para>In the base class this is a pure virtual function.</para>
            <para>See also visualRect() and selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Pressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is pressed. The item the mouse was pressed on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>Use the QApplication::mouseButtons() function to get the state of the mouse buttons.</para>
            <para>See also activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and entered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The item the mouse was clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>See also activated(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is double-clicked. The item the mouse was double-clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>See also clicked() and activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is activated by the user. How to activate items depends on the platform; e.g., by single- or double-clicking the item, or by pressing the Return or Enter key when the item is current.</para>
            <para>See also clicked(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Entered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the item specified by index. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also viewportEntered(), activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ViewportEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the viewport. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also entered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model index of the current item.</para>
            <para>Sets the current item to be the item at index.</para>
            <para>Unless the current selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected. Note that this function also updates the starting position for any new selections the user performs.</para>
            <para>To set an item as the current item without selecting it, call</para>
            <para>selectionModel()-&gt;setCurrentIndex(index, QItemSelectionModel::NoUpdate);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.HorizontalStepsPerItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal scroll bar's steps per item.</para>
            <para>Sets the horizontal scroll bar's steps per item to steps.</para>
            <para>This is the number of steps used by the horizontal scroll bar to represent the width of an item.</para>
            <para>Note that if the view has a horizontal header, the item steps will be ignored and the header section size will be used instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model that this view is presenting.</para>
            <para>Sets the model for the view to present.</para>
            <para>This function will create and set a new selection model, replacing any model that was previously set with setSelectionModel(). However, the old selection model will not be deleted as it may be shared between several views. We recommend that you delete the old selection model if it is no longer required. This is done with the following code:</para>
            <para> QItemSelectionModel *m = view-&gt;selectionModel();</para>
            <para> view-&gt;setModel(new model);</para>
            <para> delete m;</para>
            <para>If both the old model and the old selection model do not have parents, or if their parents are long-lived objects, it may be preferable to call their deleteLater() functions to explicitly delete them.</para>
            <para>The view does not take ownership of the model unless it is the model's parent object because the model may be shared between many different views.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.RootIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model index of the model's root item. The root item is the parent item to the view's toplevel items. The root can be invalid.</para>
            <para>Sets the root item to the item at the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current selection model.</para>
            <para>Sets the current selection model to the given selectionModel.</para>
            <para>Note that, if you call setModel() after this function, the given selectionModel will be replaced by one created by the view.</para>
            <para>Note: It is up to the application to delete the old selection model if it is no longer needed; i.e., if it is not being used by other views. This will happen automatically when its parent object is deleted. However, if it does not have a parent, or if the parent is a long-lived object, it may be preferable to call its deleteLater() function to explicitly delete it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.state">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item view's state.</para>
            <para>Sets the item view's state to the given state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.VerticalStepsPerItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical scroll bar's steps per item.</para>
            <para>Sets the vertical scroll bar's steps per item to steps.</para>
            <para>This is the number of steps used by the vertical scroll bar to represent the height of an item.</para>
            <para>Note that if the view has a vertical header, the item steps will be ignored and the header section size will be used instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.AutoScroll">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to true (the default), the QAbstractItemView automatically scrolls the contents of the view if the user drags within 16 pixels of the viewport edge. If the current item changes, then the view will scroll automatically to ensure that the current item is fully visible.</para>
            <para>This property only works if the viewport accepts drops. Autoscroll is switched off by setting this property to false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.AutoScrollMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of the area when auto scrolling is triggered.</para>
            <para>This property controls the size of the area at the edge of the viewport that triggers autoscrolling. The default value is 16 pixels.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTriggers">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds which actions will initiate item editing.</para>
            <para>This property is a selection of flags defined by EditTrigger, combined using the OR operator. The view will only initiate the editing of an item if the action performed is set in this property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.TabKeyNavigation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether item navigation with tab and backtab is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ShowDropIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the drop indicator is shown when dragging items and dropping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the view supports dragging of its own items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropOverwriteMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the view's drag and drop behavior.</para>
            <para>If its value is true, the selected data will overwrite the existing item data when dropped, while moving the data will clear the item. If its value is false, the selected data will be inserted as a new item when the data is dropped. When the data is moved, the item is removed as well.</para>
            <para>The default value is false, as in the QListView and QTreeView subclasses. In the QTableView subclass, on the other hand, the property has been set to true.</para>
            <para>Note: This is not intended to prevent overwriting of items. The model's implementation of flags() should do that by not returning Qt::ItemIsDropEnabled.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.dragDropMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the drag and drop event the view will act upon.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DefaultDropAction">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the drop action that will be used by default in QAbstractItemView::drag().</para>
            <para>If the property is not set, the drop action is CopyAction when the supported actions support CopyAction.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.AlternatingRowColors">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether to draw the background using alternating colors.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, the item background will be drawn using QPalette::Base and QPalette::AlternateBase; otherwise the background will be drawn using the QPalette::Base color.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.selectionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds which selection mode the view operates in.</para>
            <para>This property controls whether the user can select one or many items and, in many-item selections, whether the selection must be a continuous range of items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.selectionBehavior">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds which selection behavior the view uses.</para>
            <para>This property holds whether selections are done in terms of single items, rows or columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of items' icons.</para>
            <para>Setting this property when the view is visible will cause the items to be laid out again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.TextElideMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position of the &quot;...&quot; in elided text.</para>
            <para>The default value for all item views is Qt::ElideRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.VerticalScrollMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the view scrolls its contents in the vertical direction.</para>
            <para>This property controls how the view scroll its contents vertically. Scrolling can be done either per pixel or per item.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.HorizontalScrollMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the view scrolls its contents in the horizontal direction.</para>
            <para>This property controls how the view scroll its contents horizontally. Scrolling can be done either per pixel or per item.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different ways to navigate between items,</para>
            <para>See also moveCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the item below the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the bottom-right corner item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveHome">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the top-left corner item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the item left of the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveNext">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the item after the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MovePageDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Move one page down below the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MovePageUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Move one page up above the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MovePrevious">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the item before the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the item right of the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction.MoveUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the item above the current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Describes the various drag and drop events the view can act upon. By default the view does not support dragging or dropping (NoDragDrop).</para>
            <para>Note that the model used needs to provide support for drag and drop operations.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setDragDropMode() and Using drag and drop with item views.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropMode.DragDrop">
            <summary>
            <para>The view supports both dragging and dropping</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropMode.DragOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>The view supports dragging of its own items</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropMode.DropOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>The view accepts drops</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropMode.InternalMove">
            <summary>
            <para>The view accepts move (not copy) operations only from itself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DragDropMode.NoDragDrop">
            <summary>
            <para>Does not support dragging or dropping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DropIndicatorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum indicates the position of the drop indicator in relation to the index at the current mouse position:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DropIndicatorPosition.AboveItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The item will be dropped above the index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DropIndicatorPosition.BelowItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The item will be dropped below the index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DropIndicatorPosition.OnItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The item will be dropped on the index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.DropIndicatorPosition.OnViewport">
            <summary>
            <para>The item will be dropped onto a region of the viewport with no items. The way each view handles items dropped onto the viewport depends on the behavior of the underlying model in use.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes actions which will initiate item editing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.AllEditTriggers">
            <summary>
            <para>Editing starts for all above actions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.AnyKeyPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>Editing starts when any key is pressed over an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>Editing start whenever current item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.DoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>Editing starts when an item is double clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.EditKeyPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>Editing starts when the platform edit key has been pressed over an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.NoEditTriggers">
            <summary>
            <para>No editing possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.EditTrigger.SelectedClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>Editing starts when clicking on an already selected item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint.EnsureVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll to ensure that the item is visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint.PositionAtBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll to position the item at the bottom of the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint.PositionAtCenter">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll to position the item at the center of the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint.PositionAtTop">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll to position the item at the top of the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollMode.ScrollPerItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The view will scroll the contents one item at a time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollMode.ScrollPerPixel">
            <summary>
            <para>The view will scroll the contents one pixel at a time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionBehavior.SelectColumns">
            <summary>
            <para>Selecting only columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionBehavior.SelectItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Selecting single items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionBehavior.SelectRows">
            <summary>
            <para>Selecting only rows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum indicates how the view responds to user selections:</para>
            <para>The most commonly used modes are SingleSelection and ExtendedSelection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionMode.ContiguousSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>When the user selects an item in the usual way, the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between the current item and the clicked item are selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionMode.ExtendedSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>When the user selects an item in the usual way, the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets toggled and all other items are left untouched. If the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between the current item and the clicked item are selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked item. Multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse over them.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionMode.MultiSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>When the user selects an item in the usual way, the selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are left alone. Multiple items can be toggled by dragging the mouse over them.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionMode.NoSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Items cannot be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.SelectionMode.SingleSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>When the user selects an item, any already-selected item becomes unselected, and the user cannot unselect the selected item by clicking on it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State">
            <summary>
            <para>Describes the different states the view can be in. This is usually only interesting when reimplementing your own view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.AnimatingState">
            <summary>
            <para>The item view is performing an animation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.CollapsingState">
            <summary>
            <para>The user is closing a branch of items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.DragSelectingState">
            <summary>
            <para>The user is selecting items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.DraggingState">
            <summary>
            <para>The user is dragging items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.EditingState">
            <summary>
            <para>The user is editing an item in a widget editor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.ExpandingState">
            <summary>
            <para>The user is opening a branch of items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractItemView.State.NoState">
            <summary>
            <para>The is the default state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDialog">
            <summary>
            The QDialog class is the base class of dialog windows.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications with the user. QDialogs may be modal or modeless. QDialogs can provide a return value, and they can have default buttons. QDialogs can also have a QSizeGrip in their lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled().</para>
            <para>Note that QDialog (an any other widget that has type Qt::Dialog) uses the parent widget slightly differently from other classes in Qt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.</para>
            <para>Use the overload of the QWidget::setParent() function to change the ownership of a QDialog widget. This function allows you to explicitly set the window flags of the reparented widget; using the overloaded function will clear the window flags specifying the window-system properties for the widget (in particular it will reset the Qt::Dialog flag).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Modal Dialogs</para>
            <para>A modal dialog is a dialog that blocks input to other visible windows in the same application. Dialogs that are used to request a file name from the user or that are used to set application preferences are usually modal. Dialogs can be application modal (the default) or window modal.</para>
            <para>When an application modal dialog is opened, the user must finish interacting with the dialog and close it before they can access any other window in the application. Window modal dialogs only block access to the window associated with the dialog, allowing the user to continue to use other windows in an application.</para>
            <para>The most common way to display a modal dialog is to call its exec() function. When the user closes the dialog, exec() will provide a useful return value. Typically, to get the dialog to close and return the appropriate value, we connect a default button, e.g. OK, to the accept() slot and a Cancel button to the reject() slot. Alternatively you can call the done() slot with Accepted or Rejected.</para>
            <para>An alternative is to call setModal(true) or setWindowModality(), then show(). Unlike exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling setModal(true) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g. to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and setModal(true) together to perform a long operation, you must call QApplication::processEvents() periodically during processing to enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See QProgressDialog.)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Modeless Dialogs</para>
            <para>A modeless dialog is a dialog that operates independently of other windows in the same application. Find and replace dialogs in word-processors are often modeless to allow the user to interact with both the application's main window and with the dialog.</para>
            <para>Modeless dialogs are displayed using show(), which returns control to the caller immediately.</para>
            <para>If you invoke the show() function after hiding a dialog, the dialog will be displayed in its original position. This is because the window manager decides the position for windows that have not been explicitly placed by the programmer. To preserve the position of a dialog that has been moved by the user, save its position in your closeEvent() handler and then move the dialog to that position, before showing it again.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Default Button</para>
            <para>A dialog's default button is the button that's pressed when the user presses Enter (Return). This button is used to signify that the user accepts the dialog's settings and wants to close the dialog. Use QPushButton::setDefault(), QPushButton::isDefault() and QPushButton::autoDefault() to set and control the dialog's default button.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Escape Key</para>
            <para>If the user presses the Esc key in a dialog, QDialog::reject() will be called. This will cause the window to close: The close event cannot be ignored.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Extensibility</para>
            <para>Extensibility is the ability to show the dialog in two ways: a partial dialog that shows the most commonly used options, and a full dialog that shows all the options. Typically an extensible dialog will initially appear as a partial dialog, but with a More toggle button. If the user presses the More button down, the dialog is expanded. The Extension Example shows how to achieve extensible dialogs using Qt.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Return Value (Modal Dialogs)</para>
            <para>Modal dialogs are often used in situations where a return value is required, e.g. to indicate whether the user pressed OK or Cancel. A dialog can be closed by calling the accept() or the reject() slots, and exec() will return Accepted or Rejected as appropriate. The exec() call returns the result of the dialog. The result is also available from result() if the dialog has not been destroyed.</para>
            <para>In order to modify your dialog's close behavior, you can reimplement the functions accept(), reject() or done(). The closeEvent() function should only be reimplemented to preserve the dialog's position or to override the standard close or reject behavior.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Code Examples</para>
            <para>A modal dialog:</para>
            <para> void EditorWindow::countWords()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     WordCountDialog dialog(this);</para>
            <para>     dialog.setWordCount(document().wordCount());</para>
            <para>     dialog.exec();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>A modeless dialog:</para>
            <para> void EditorWindow::find()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (!findDialog) {</para>
            <para>         findDialog = new FindDialog(this);</para>
            <para>         connect(findDialog, SIGNAL(findNext()), this, SLOT(findNext()));</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     findDialog-&amp;gt;show();</para>
            <para>     findDialog-&amp;gt;raise();</para>
            <para>     findDialog-&amp;gt;activateWindow();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDialogButtonBox, QTabWidget, QWidget, QProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Dialogs, Standard, Extension Example, and Standard Dialogs Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a dialog with parent parent.</para>
            <para>A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.</para>
            <para>The widget flags f are passed on to the QWidget constructor. If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the title bar of the dialog, pass Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint in f.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.Accept">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Accepted.</para>
            <para>See also reject() and done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnAccepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog has been accepted either by the user or by calling accept() or done() with the QDialog::Accepted argument.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also finished() and rejected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the dialog and sets its result code to r. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return r.</para>
            <para>As with QWidget::close(), done() deletes the dialog if the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag is set. If the dialog is the application's main widget, the application terminates. If the dialog is the last window closed, the QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted.</para>
            <para>See also accept(), reject(), QApplication::activeWindow(), and QApplication::quit().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.Exec">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the dialog as a modal dialog, blocking until the user closes it. The function returns a DialogCode result.</para>
            <para>If the dialog is application modal, users cannot interact with any other window in the same application until they close the dialog. If the dialog is window modal, only interaction with the parent window is blocked while the dialog is open. By default, the dialog is application modal.</para>
            <para>See also open(), show(), result(), and setWindowModality().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnFinished(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog's result code has been set, either by the user or by calling done(), accept(), or reject().</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also accepted() and rejected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the dialog as a window modal dialog, returning immediately.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also exec(), show(), result(), and setWindowModality().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.Reject">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Rejected.</para>
            <para>See also accept() and done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnRejected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog has been rejected either by the user or by calling reject() or done() with the QDialog::Rejected argument.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also finished() and accepted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.ShowExtension(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If showIt is true, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the extension is hidden.</para>
            <para>Instead of using this functionality, we recommend that you simply call show() or hide() on the part of the dialog that you want to use as an extension. See the Extension Example for details.</para>
            <para>See also show(), setExtension(), and setOrientation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QDialog, deleting all its children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialog.Finished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog's result code has been set, either by the user or by calling done(), accept(), or reject().</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also accepted() and rejected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialog.Accepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog has been accepted either by the user or by calling accept() or done() with the QDialog::Accepted argument.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also finished() and rejected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialog.Rejected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog has been rejected either by the user or by calling reject() or done() with the QDialog::Rejected argument.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also finished() and accepted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialog.Extension">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dialog's extension or 0 if no extension has been defined.</para>
            <para>Instead of using this functionality, we recommend that you simply call show() or hide() on the part of the dialog that you want to use as an extension. See the Extension Example for details.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget, extension, to be the dialog's extension, deleting any previous extension. The dialog takes ownership of the extension. Note that if 0 is passed any existing extension will be deleted. This function must only be called while the dialog is hidden.</para>
            <para>Instead of using this functionality, we recommend that you simply call show() or hide() on the part of the dialog that you want to use as an extension. See the Extension Example for details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialog.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dialog's extension orientation.</para>
            <para>Instead of using this functionality, we recommend that you simply call show() or hide() on the part of the dialog that you want to use as an extension. See the Extension Example for details.</para>
            <para>If orientation is Qt::Horizontal, the extension will be displayed to the right of the dialog's main area. If orientation is Qt::Vertical, the extension will be displayed below the dialog's main area.</para>
            <para>Instead of using this functionality, we recommend that you simply call show() or hide() on the part of the dialog that you want to use as an extension. See the Extension Example for details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialog.Result">
            <summary>
            <para>In general returns the modal dialog's result code, Accepted or Rejected.</para>
            <para>Note: When used from QMessageBox instance the result code type is QMessageBox::StandardButton</para>
            <para>Do not call this function if the dialog was constructed with the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose attribute.</para>
            <para>Sets the modal dialog's result code to i.</para>
            <para>Note: We recommend that you use one of the values defined by QDialog::DialogCode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialog.SizeGripEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the size grip is enabled.</para>
            <para>A QSizeGrip is placed in the bottom-right corner of the dialog when this property is enabled. By default, the size grip is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDialog.DialogCode">
            <summary>
            <para>The value returned by a modal dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractPrintDialog class provides a base implementation for print dialogs used to configure printers.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class implements getter and setter functions that are used to customize settings shown in print dialogs, but it is not used directly. Use QPrintDialog to display a print dialog in your application.</para>
            <para>In Symbian, there is no support for printing. Hence, this dialog should not be used in Symbian.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPrintDialog, QPrinter, and Printing with Qt.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an abstract print dialog for printer with parent as parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.AddEnabledOption(QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use QPrintDialog::setOption(option, true) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.Exec">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called to pop up the dialog. It must be reimplemented in subclasses.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.FromPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first page to be printed By default, this value is set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.IsOptionEnabled(QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use QPrintDialog::testOption(option) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.MaxPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the maximum page in the page range. As of Qt 4.4, this function returns INT_MAX by default. Previous versions returned 1 by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.MinPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum page in the page range. By default, this value is set to 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.Printer">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the printer that this printer dialog operates on.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.SetFromTo(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the range in the print dialog to be from from to to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.SetMinMax(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the page range in this dialog to be from min to max. This also enables the PrintPageRange option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.SetOptionTabs(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QWidget})">
            <summary>
            <para>Set a list of widgets as tabs to be shown on the print dialog, if supported.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>Setting the option tabs will transfer their ownership to the print dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.ToPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last page to be printed. By default, this value is set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.EnabledOptions">
            <summary>
            <para>Use QPrintDialog::options() instead.</para>
            <para>Use QPrintDialog::setOptions() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.printRange">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the print range.</para>
            <para>Sets the print range option in to be range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to specify which parts of the print dialog should be visible.</para>
            <para>This value is obsolete and does nothing since Qt 4.5:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.DontUseSheet">
            <summary>
            <para>In previous versions of Qt, exec() the print dialog would create a sheet by default the dialog was given a parent. This is no longer supported in Qt 4.5. If you want to use sheets, use QPrintDialog::open() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.None">
            <summary>
            <para>None of the options are enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.PrintCollateCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>The collate copies option is enabled</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.PrintCurrentPage">
            <summary>
            <para>The print current page option is enabled (This value was introduced in 4.7.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.PrintPageRange">
            <summary>
            <para>The page range selection option is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.PrintSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>The print selection option is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.PrintShowPageSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the page size + margins page only if this is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption.PrintToFile">
            <summary>
            <para>The print to file option is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintRange">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to specify the print range selection option.</para>
            <para>See also QPrinter::PrintRange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintRange.AllPages">
            <summary>
            <para>All pages should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintRange.CurrentPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Only the currently visible page should be printed. (This value was introduced in 4.7.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintRange.PageRange">
            <summary>
            <para>The specified page range should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintRange.Selection">
            <summary>
            <para>Only the selection should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractProxyModel class provides a base class for proxy item models that can do sorting, filtering or other data processing tasks.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class defines the standard interface that proxy models must use to be able to interoperate correctly with other model/view components. It is not supposed to be instantiated directly.</para>
            <para>All standard proxy models are derived from the QAbstractProxyModel class. If you need to create a new proxy model class, it is usually better to subclass an existing class that provides the closest behavior to the one you want to provide.</para>
            <para>Proxy models that filter or sort items of data from a source model should be created by using or subclassing QSortFilterProxyModel.</para>
            <para>To subclass QAbstractProxyModel, you need to implement mapFromSource() and mapToSource(). The mapSelectionFromSource() and mapSelectionToSource() functions only need to be reimplemented if you need a behavior different from the default behavior.</para>
            <para>Note: If the source model is deleted or no source model is specified, the proxy model operates on a empty placeholder model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QSortFilterProxyModel, QAbstractItemModel, and Model/View Programming.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a proxy model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Buddy(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::buddy().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.CanFetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::canFetchMore().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.FetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::fetchMore().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.HasChildren(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.HeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().</para>
            <para>See also setHeaderData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.ItemData(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::itemData().</para>
            <para>See also setItemData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.MapFromSource(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to return the model index in the proxy model that corresponds to the sourceIndex from the source model.</para>
            <para>See also mapToSource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.MapSelectionFromSource(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a proxy selection mapped from the specified sourceSelection.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this method to map source selections to proxy selections.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.MapSelectionToSource(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a source selection mapped from the specified proxySelection.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this method to map proxy selections to source selections.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.MapToSource(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to return the model index in the source model that corresponds to the proxyIndex in the proxy model.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromSource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeData().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Revert">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::revert().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.SetHeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setHeaderData().</para>
            <para>See also headerData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.SetItemData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Collections.Generic.Dictionary{System.Int32,System.Object})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setItemData().</para>
            <para>See also itemData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Span(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::span().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Submit">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::submit().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the proxy model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractProxyModel.SourceModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model that contains the data that is available through the proxy model.</para>
            <para>Sets the given sourceModel to be processed by the proxy model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractSlider">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractSlider class provides an integer value within a range.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The class is designed as a common super class for widgets like QScrollBar, QSlider and QDial.</para>
            <para>Here are the main properties of the class:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>value: The bounded integer that QAbstractSlider maintains.</para>
            <para>minimum: The lowest possible value.</para>
            <para>maximum: The highest possible value.</para>
            <para>singleStep: The smaller of two natural steps that an abstract sliders provides and typically corresponds to the user pressing an arrow key.</para>
            <para>pageStep: The larger of two natural steps that an abstract slider provides and typically corresponds to the user pressing PageUp or PageDown.</para>
            <para>tracking: Whether slider tracking is enabled.</para>
            <para>sliderPosition: The current position of the slider. If tracking is enabled (the default), this is identical to value.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Unity (1) may be viewed as a third step size. setValue() lets you set the current value to any integer in the allowed range, not just minimum() + n * singleStep() for integer values of n. Some widgets may allow the user to set any value at all; others may just provide multiples of singleStep() or pageStep().</para>
            <para>QAbstractSlider emits a comprehensive set of signals:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>SignalEmitted when</para>
            <para>valueChanged()	the value has changed. The tracking determines whether this signal is emitted during user interaction.</para>
            <para>sliderPressed()	the user starts to drag the slider.</para>
            <para>sliderMoved()	the user drags the slider.</para>
            <para>sliderReleased()	the user releases the slider.</para>
            <para>actionTriggered()	a slider action was triggerd.</para>
            <para>rangeChanged()	a the range has changed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QAbstractSlider provides a virtual sliderChange() function that is well suited for updating the on-screen representation of sliders. By calling triggerAction(), subclasses trigger slider actions. Two helper functions QStyle::sliderPositionFromValue() and QStyle::sliderValueFromPosition() help subclasses and styles to map screen coordinates to logical range values.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSpinBox, QSlider, QDial, QScrollBar, and Sliders Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an abstract slider.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnActionTriggered(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider action action is triggered. Actions are SliderSingleStepAdd, SliderSingleStepSub, SliderPageStepAdd, SliderPageStepSub, SliderToMinimum, SliderToMaximum, and SliderMove.</para>
            <para>When the signal is emitted, the sliderPosition has been adjusted according to the action, but the value has not yet been propagated (meaning the valueChanged() signal was not yet emitted), and the visual display has not been updated. In slots connected to this signal you can thus safely adjust any action by calling setSliderPosition() yourself, based on both the action and the slider's value.</para>
            <para>See also triggerAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnRangeChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider range has changed, with min being the new minimum, and max being the new maximum.</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SetRange(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the slider's minimum to min and its maximum to max.</para>
            <para>If max is smaller than min, min becomes the only legal value.</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SetRepeatAction(QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderAction,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets action action to be triggered repetitively in intervals of repeatTime, after an initial delay of thresholdTime.</para>
            <para>See also triggerAction() and repeatAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.sliderChange(QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderChange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this virtual function to track slider changes such as SliderRangeChange, SliderOrientationChange, SliderStepsChange, or SliderValueChange. The default implementation only updates the display and ignores the change parameter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnSliderMoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when sliderDown is true and the slider moves. This usually happens when the user is dragging the slider. The value is the new slider position.</para>
            <para>This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.</para>
            <para>See also setTracking(), valueChanged(), isSliderDown(), sliderPressed(), and sliderReleased().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnSliderPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(true) is called.</para>
            <para>See also sliderReleased(), sliderMoved(), and isSliderDown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnSliderReleased">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(false) is called.</para>
            <para>See also sliderPressed(), sliderMoved(), and sliderDown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.TriggerAction(QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Triggers a slider action. Possible actions are SliderSingleStepAdd, SliderSingleStepSub, SliderPageStepAdd, SliderPageStepSub, SliderToMinimum, SliderToMaximum, and SliderMove.</para>
            <para>See also actionTriggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider value has changed, with the new slider value as argument.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.ValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider value has changed, with the new slider value as argument.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(true) is called.</para>
            <para>See also sliderReleased(), sliderMoved(), and isSliderDown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when sliderDown is true and the slider moves. This usually happens when the user is dragging the slider. The value is the new slider position.</para>
            <para>This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.</para>
            <para>See also setTracking(), valueChanged(), isSliderDown(), sliderPressed(), and sliderReleased().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderReleased">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(false) is called.</para>
            <para>See also sliderPressed(), sliderMoved(), and sliderDown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.RangeChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider range has changed, with min being the new minimum, and max being the new maximum.</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.ActionTriggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider action action is triggered. Actions are SliderSingleStepAdd, SliderSingleStepSub, SliderPageStepAdd, SliderPageStepSub, SliderToMinimum, SliderToMaximum, and SliderMove.</para>
            <para>When the signal is emitted, the sliderPosition has been adjusted according to the action, but the value has not yet been propagated (meaning the valueChanged() signal was not yet emitted), and the visual display has not been updated. In slots connected to this signal you can thus safely adjust any action by calling setSliderPosition() yourself, based on both the action and the slider's value.</para>
            <para>See also triggerAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.RepeatAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current repeat action.</para>
            <para>See also setRepeatAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the sliders's minimum value.</para>
            <para>When setting this property, the maximum is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. Also the slider's current value is adjusted to be within the new range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the slider's maximum value.</para>
            <para>When setting this property, the minimum is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. Also the slider's current value is adjusted to be within the new range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SingleStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the single step.</para>
            <para>The smaller of two natural steps that an abstract sliders provides and typically corresponds to the user pressing an arrow key.</para>
            <para>If the property is modified during an auto repeating key event, behavior is undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.PageStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the page step.</para>
            <para>The larger of two natural steps that an abstract slider provides and typically corresponds to the user pressing PageUp or PageDown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the slider's current value.</para>
            <para>The slider forces the value to be within the legal range: minimum &lt;= value &lt;= maximum.</para>
            <para>Changing the value also changes the sliderPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current slider position.</para>
            <para>If tracking is enabled (the default), this is identical to value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.Tracking">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether slider tracking is enabled.</para>
            <para>If tracking is enabled (the default), the slider emits the valueChanged() signal while the slider is being dragged. If tracking is disabled, the slider emits the valueChanged() signal only when the user releases the slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the orientation of the slider.</para>
            <para>The orientation must be Qt::Vertical (the default) or Qt::Horizontal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.InvertedAppearance">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not a slider shows its values inverted.</para>
            <para>If this property is false (the default), the minimum and maximum will be shown in its classic position for the inherited widget. If the value is true, the minimum and maximum appear at their opposite location.</para>
            <para>Note: This property makes most sense for sliders and dials. For scroll bars, the visual effect of the scroll bar subcontrols depends on whether or not the styles understand inverted appearance; most styles ignore this property for scroll bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.InvertedControls">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not the slider inverts its wheel and key events.</para>
            <para>If this property is false, scrolling the mouse wheel &quot;up&quot; and using keys like page up will increase the slider's value towards its maximum. Otherwise pressing page up will move value towards the slider's minimum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderDown">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the slider is pressed down.</para>
            <para>The property is set by subclasses in order to let the abstract slider know whether or not tracking has any effect.</para>
            <para>Changing the slider down property emits the sliderPressed() and sliderReleased() signals.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractSpinBox class provides a spinbox and a line edit to display values.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The class is designed as a common super class for widgets like QSpinBox, QDoubleSpinBox and QDateTimeEdit</para>
            <para>Here are the main properties of the class:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>text: The text that is displayed in the QAbstractSpinBox.</para>
            <para>alignment: The alignment of the text in the QAbstractSpinBox.</para>
            <para>wrapping: Whether the QAbstractSpinBox wraps from the minimum value to the maximum value and vica versa.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QAbstractSpinBox provides a virtual stepBy() function that is called whenever the user triggers a step. This function takes an integer value to signify how many steps were taken. E.g. Pressing Qt::Key_Down will trigger a call to stepBy(-1).</para>
            <para>QAbstractSpinBox also provide a virtual function stepEnabled() to determine whether stepping up/down is allowed at any point. This function returns a bitset of StepEnabled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSlider, QSpinBox, QDoubleSpinBox, QDateTimeEdit, and Spin Boxes Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an abstract spinbox with the given parent with default wrapping, and alignment properties.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the lineedit of all text but prefix and suffix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnEditingFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted editing is finished. This happens when the spinbox loses focus and when enter is pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Fixup(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by the QAbstractSpinBox if the input is not validated to QValidator::Acceptable when Return is pressed or interpretText() is called. It will try to change the text so it is valid. Reimplemented in the various subclasses.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QSpinBox. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSpinBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.InterpretText">
            <summary>
            <para>This function interprets the text of the spin box. If the value has changed since last interpretation it will emit signals.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            <para>This function handles keyboard input.</para>
            <para>The following keys are handled specifically:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Enter/Return	This will reinterpret the text and emit a signal even if the value has not changed since last time a signal was emitted.</para>
            <para>Up	This will invoke stepBy(1)</para>
            <para>Down	This will invoke stepBy(-1)</para>
            <para>Page up	This will invoke stepBy(10)</para>
            <para>Page down	This will invoke stepBy(-10)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects all the text in the spinbox except the prefix and suffix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.StepBy(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Virtual function that is called whenever the user triggers a step. The steps parameter indicates how many steps were taken, e.g. Pressing Qt::Key_Down will trigger a call to stepBy(-1), whereas pressing Qt::Key_Prior will trigger a call to stepBy(10).</para>
            <para>If you subclass QAbstractSpinBox you must reimplement this function. Note that this function is called even if the resulting value will be outside the bounds of minimum and maximum. It's this function's job to handle these situations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.StepDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Steps down by one linestep Calling this slot is analogous to calling stepBy(-1);</para>
            <para>See also stepBy() and stepUp().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.StepEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Virtual function that determines whether stepping up and down is legal at any given time.</para>
            <para>The up arrow will be painted as disabled unless (stepEnabled() &amp; StepUpEnabled) != 0.</para>
            <para>The default implementation will return (StepUpEnabled| StepDownEnabled) if wrapping is turned on. Else it will return StepDownEnabled if value is &gt; minimum() or'ed with StepUpEnabled if value &lt; maximum().</para>
            <para>If you subclass QAbstractSpinBox you will need to reimplement this function.</para>
            <para>See also QSpinBox::minimum(), QSpinBox::maximum(), and wrapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.StepUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Steps up by one linestep Calling this slot is analogous to calling stepBy(1);</para>
            <para>See also stepBy() and stepDown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by the QAbstractSpinBox to determine whether input is valid. The pos parameter indicates the position in the string. Reimplemented in the various subclasses.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Called when the QAbstractSpinBox is destroyed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.EditingFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted editing is finished. This happens when the spinbox loses focus and when enter is pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.LineEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns a pointer to the line edit of the spin box.</para>
            <para>Sets the line edit of the spinbox to be lineEdit instead of the current line edit widget. lineEdit can not be 0.</para>
            <para>QAbstractSpinBox takes ownership of the new lineEdit</para>
            <para>If QLineEdit::validator() for the lineEdit returns 0, the internal validator of the spinbox will be set on the line edit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Wrapping">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the spin box is circular.</para>
            <para>If wrapping is true stepping up from maximum() value will take you to the minimum() value and vica versa. Wrapping only make sense if you have minimum() and maximum() values set.</para>
            <para> QSpinBox *spinBox = new QSpinBox(this);</para>
            <para> spinBox-&gt;setRange(0, 100);</para>
            <para> spinBox-&gt;setWrapping(true);</para>
            <para> spinBox-&gt;setValue(100);</para>
            <para> spinBox-&gt;stepBy(1);</para>
            <para> // value is 0</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the spin box draws itself with a frame.</para>
            <para>If enabled (the default) the spin box draws itself inside a frame, otherwise the spin box draws itself without any frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the spin box.</para>
            <para>Possible Values are Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight, and Qt::AlignHCenter.</para>
            <para>By default, the alignment is Qt::AlignLeft</para>
            <para>Attempting to set the alignment to an illegal flag combination does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the spin box is read only.</para>
            <para>In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the clipboard, or drag and drop the text; but cannot edit it.</para>
            <para>The QLineEdit in the QAbstractSpinBox does not show a cursor in read-only mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.buttonSymbols">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current button symbol mode.</para>
            <para>The possible values can be either UpDownArrows or PlusMinus. The default is UpDownArrows.</para>
            <para>Note that some styles might render PlusMinus and UpDownArrows identically.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.SpecialValueText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the special-value text.</para>
            <para>If set, the spin box will display this text instead of a numeric value whenever the current value is equal to minimum(). Typical use is to indicate that this choice has a special (default) meaning.</para>
            <para>For example, if your spin box allows the user to choose a scale factor (or zoom level) for displaying an image, and your application is able to automatically choose one that will enable the image to fit completely within the display window, you can set up the spin box like this:</para>
            <para>     QSpinBox *zoomSpinBox = new QSpinBox;</para>
            <para>     zoomSpinBox-&gt;setRange(0, 1000);</para>
            <para>     zoomSpinBox-&gt;setSingleStep(10);</para>
            <para>     zoomSpinBox-&gt;setSuffix(&quot;%&quot;);</para>
            <para>     zoomSpinBox-&gt;setSpecialValueText(tr(&quot;Automatic&quot;));</para>
            <para>     zoomSpinBox-&gt;setValue(100);</para>
            <para>The user will then be able to choose a scale from 1% to 1000% or select &quot;Auto&quot; to leave it up to the application to choose. Your code must then interpret the spin box value of 0 as a request from the user to scale the image to fit inside the window.</para>
            <para>All values are displayed with the prefix and suffix (if set), except for the special value, which only shows the special value text. This special text is passed in the QSpinBox::valueChanged() signal that passes a QString.</para>
            <para>To turn off the special-value text display, call this function with an empty string. The default is no special-value text, i.e. the numeric value is shown as usual.</para>
            <para>If no special-value text is set, specialValueText() returns an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the spin box's text, including any prefix and suffix.</para>
            <para>There is no default text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.Accelerated">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the spin box will accelerate the frequency of the steps when pressing the step Up/Down buttons.</para>
            <para>If enabled the spin box will increase/decrease the value faster the longer you hold the button down.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.correctionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the mode to correct an Intermediate value if editing finishes.</para>
            <para>The default mode is QAbstractSpinBox::CorrectToPreviousValue.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.AcceptableInput">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the input satisfies the current validation.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.KeyboardTracking">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether keyboard tracking is enabled for the spinbox.</para>
            <para>If keyboard tracking is enabled (the default), the spinbox emits the valueChanged() signal while the new value is being entered from the keyboard.</para>
            <para>E.g. when the user enters the value 600 by typing 6, 0, and 0, the spinbox emits 3 signals with the values 6, 60, and 600 respectively.</para>
            <para>If keyboard tracking is disabled, the spinbox doesn't emit the valueChanged() signal while typing. It emits the signal later, when the return key is pressed, when keyboard focus is lost, or when other spinbox functionality is used, e.g. pressing an arrow key.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.ButtonSymbols">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type describes the symbols that can be displayed on the buttons in a spin box.</para>
            <para> </para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSpinBox::buttonSymbols.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.ButtonSymbols.NoButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't display buttons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.ButtonSymbols.PlusMinus">
            <summary>
            <para>+ and - symbols.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.ButtonSymbols.UpDownArrows">
            <summary>
            <para>Little arrows in the classic style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.CorrectionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type describes the mode the spinbox will use to correct an Intermediate value if editing finishes.</para>
            <para>See also correctionMode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.CorrectionMode.CorrectToNearestValue">
            <summary>
            <para>The spinbox will revert to the nearest valid value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAbstractSpinBox.CorrectionMode.CorrectToPreviousValue">
            <summary>
            <para>The spinbox will revert to the last valid value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractTextDocumentLayout class is an abstract base class used to implement custom layouts for QTextDocuments.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The standard layout provided by Qt can handle simple word processing including inline images, lists and tables.</para>
            <para>Some applications, e.g., a word processor or a DTP application might need more features than the ones provided by Qt's layout engine, in which case you can subclass QAbstractTextDocumentLayout to provide custom layout behavior for your text documents.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QAbstractTextDocumentLayout subclass can be installed on a QTextDocument object with the setDocumentLayout() function.</para>
            <para>You can insert custom objects into a QTextDocument; see the QTextObjectInterface class description for details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextObjectInterface.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new text document layout for the given document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.AnchorAt(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the reference of the anchor the given position, or an empty string if no anchor exists at that point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.BlockBoundingRect(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text document that this layout is operating on.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.DocumentChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called whenever the contents of the document change. A change occurs when text is inserted, removed, or a combination of these two. The change is specified by position, charsRemoved, and charsAdded corresponding to the starting character position of the change, the number of characters removed from the document, and the number of characters added.</para>
            <para>For example, when inserting the text &quot;Hello&quot; into an empty document, charsRemoved would be 0 and charsAdded would be 5 (the length of the string).</para>
            <para>Replacing text is a combination of removing and inserting. For example, if the text &quot;Hello&quot; gets replaced by &quot;Hi&quot;, charsRemoved would be 5 and charsAdded would be 2.</para>
            <para>For subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout, this is the central function where a large portion of the work to lay out and position document contents is done.</para>
            <para>For example, in a subclass that only arranges blocks of text, an implementation of this function would have to do the following:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Determine the list of changed QTextBlock(s) using the parameters provided.</para>
            <para>Each QTextBlock object's corresponding QTextLayout object needs to be processed. You can access the QTextBlock's layout using the QTextBlock::layout() function. This processing should take the document's page size into consideration.</para>
            <para>If the total number of pages changed, the pageCountChanged() signal should be emitted.</para>
            <para>If the total size changed, the documentSizeChanged() signal should be emitted.</para>
            <para>The update() signal should be emitted to schedule a repaint of areas in the layout that require repainting.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.DocumentSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the total size of the document's layout.</para>
            <para>This information can be used by display widgets to update their scroll bars correctly.</para>
            <para>See also documentSizeChanged() and QTextDocument::pageSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.OnDocumentSizeChanged(QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of the document layout changes to newSize.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the document's entire layout size changes. This signal is useful for widgets that display text documents since it enables them to update their scroll bars correctly.</para>
            <para>See also documentSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Draw(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the layout with the given painter using the given context.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.DrawInlineObject(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QTextInlineObject,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called to draw the inline object, object, with the given painter within the rectangle specified by rect using the specified text format.</para>
            <para>posInDocument specifies the position of the object within the document.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls drawObject() on the object handlers. This function is called only within Qt. Subclasses can reimplement this function to customize the drawing of inline objects.</para>
            <para>See also draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Format(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the character format that is applicable at the given position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.FrameBoundingRect(QtGui.QTextFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.HandlerForObject(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a handler for objects of the given objectType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.HitTest(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.Qt.HitTestAccuracy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor postion for the given point with the specified accuracy. Returns -1 if no valid cursor position was found.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PageCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of pages contained in the layout.</para>
            <para>See also pageCountChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.OnPageCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of pages in the layout changes; newPages is the updated page count.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the number of pages in the layout has changed. Changes to the page count are caused by changes to the layout or the document content itself.</para>
            <para>See also pageCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PositionInlineObject(QtGui.QTextInlineObject,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Lays out the inline object item using the given text format.</para>
            <para>posInDocument specifies the position of the object within the document.</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing. This function is called only within Qt. Subclasses can reimplement this function to customize the position of inline objects.</para>
            <para>See also drawInlineObject().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.RegisterHandler(System.Int32,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Registers the given component as a handler for items of the given objectType.</para>
            <para>Note: registerHandler() has to be called once for each object type. This means that there is only one handler for multiple replacement characters of the same object type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.ResizeInlineObject(QtGui.QTextInlineObject,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the size of the inline object item corresponding to the text format.</para>
            <para>posInDocument specifies the position of the object within the document.</para>
            <para>The default implementation resizes the item to the size returned by the object handler's intrinsicSize() function. This function is called only within Qt. Subclasses can reimplement this function to customize the resizing of inline objects.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.OnUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rectangle rect has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of the contents change in order to repaint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.OnUpdate(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rectangle rect has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of the contents change in order to repaint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.OnUpdateBlock(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified block has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of block has changed in order to repaint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rectangle rect has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of the contents change in order to repaint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.UpdateBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified block has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of block has changed in order to repaint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.DocumentSizeChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of the document layout changes to newSize.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the document's entire layout size changes. This signal is useful for widgets that display text documents since it enables them to update their scroll bars correctly.</para>
            <para>See also documentSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PageCountChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of pages in the layout changes; newPages is the updated page count.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the number of pages in the layout has changed. Changes to the page count are caused by changes to the layout or the document content itself.</para>
            <para>See also pageCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintDevice">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paint device used to render the document's layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the paint device used for rendering the document's layout to the given device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::PaintContext class is a convenience class defining the parameters used when painting a document's layout.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A paint context is used when rendering custom layouts for QTextDocuments with the QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::draw() function. It is specified by a cursor position, default text color, clip rectangle and a collection of selections.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext.Clip">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a hint to the layout specifying the area around paragraphs, frames or text require painting.</para>
            <para>Everything outside of this rectangle does not need to be painted.</para>
            <para>Specifying a clip rectangle can speed up drawing of large documents significantly. Note that the clip rectangle is in document coordinates (not in viewport coordinates). It is not a substitute for a clip region set on the painter but merely a hint.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null rectangle indicating everything needs to be painted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext.CursorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position within the document, where the cursor line should be drawn.</para>
            <para>The default value is -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the default color that is used for the text, when no color is specified.</para>
            <para>The default value is the application's default palette.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext.Selections">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the collection of selections that will be rendered when passing this paint context to QAbstractTextDocumentLayout's draw() function.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty vector indicating no selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Selection">
            <summary>
            The QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::Selection class is a convenience class defining the parameters of a selection.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A selection can be used to specify a part of a document that should be highlighted when drawing custom layouts for QTextDocuments with the QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::draw() function. It is specified using cursor and a format.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractTextDocumentLayout and PaintContext.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Selection.Cursor">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the selection's cursor.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.Selection.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the format of the selection.</para>
            <para>The default value is QTextFormat::InvalidFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAction">
            <summary>
            The QAction class provides an abstract user interface action that can be inserted into widgets.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>In applications many common commands can be invoked via menus, toolbar buttons, and keyboard shortcuts. Since the user expects each command to be performed in the same way, regardless of the user interface used, it is useful to represent each command as an action.</para>
            <para>Actions can be added to menus and toolbars, and will automatically keep them in sync. For example, in a word processor, if the user presses a Bold toolbar button, the Bold menu item will automatically be checked.</para>
            <para>Actions can be created as independent objects, but they may also be created during the construction of menus; the QMenu class contains convenience functions for creating actions suitable for use as menu items.</para>
            <para>A QAction may contain an icon, menu text, a shortcut, status text, &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; text, and a tooltip. Most of these can be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with setIcon(), setText(), setIconText(), setShortcut(), setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis(), and setToolTip(). For menu items, it is possible to set an individual font with setFont().</para>
            <para>Actions are added to widgets using QWidget::addAction() or QGraphicsWidget::addAction(). Note that an action must be added to a widget before it can be used; this is also true when the shortcut should be global (i.e., Qt::ApplicationShortcut as Qt::ShortcutContext).</para>
            <para>Once a QAction has been created it should be added to the relevant menu and toolbar, then connected to the slot which will perform the action. For example:</para>
            <para>     openAct = new QAction(QIcon(&amp;quot;:/images/open.png&amp;quot;), tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Open...&amp;quot;), this);</para>
            <para>     openAct-&amp;gt;setShortcuts(QKeySequence::Open);</para>
            <para>     openAct-&amp;gt;setStatusTip(tr(&amp;quot;Open an existing file&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     connect(openAct, SIGNAL(triggered()), this, SLOT(open()));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     fileMenu-&amp;gt;addAction(openAct);</para>
            <para>     fileToolBar-&amp;gt;addAction(openAct);</para>
            <para>We recommend that actions are created as children of the window they are used in. In most cases actions will be children of the application's main window.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMenu, QToolBar, and Application Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action with an icon and some text and parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.</para>
            <para>The action uses a stripped version of text (e.g. &quot;&amp;Menu Option...&quot; becomes &quot;Menu Option&quot;) as descriptive text for tool buttons. You can override this by setting a specific description with setText(). The same text will be used for tooltips unless you specify a different text using setToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action with some text and parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.</para>
            <para>The action uses a stripped version of text (e.g. &quot;&amp;Menu Option...&quot; becomes &quot;Menu Option&quot;) as descriptive text for tool buttons. You can override this by setting a specific description with setText(). The same text will be used for tooltips unless you specify a different text using setToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.Activate(QtGui.QAction.ActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sends the relevant signals for ActionEvent event.</para>
            <para>Action based widgets use this API to cause the QAction to emit signals as well as emitting their own.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.AssociatedGraphicsWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of widgets this action has been added to.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and associatedWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.AssociatedWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of widgets this action has been added to.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and associatedGraphicsWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.OnChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action has changed. If you are only interested in actions in a given widget, you can watch for QWidget::actionEvent() sent with an QEvent::ActionChanged.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.Hover">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience slot that calls activate(Hover).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.OnHovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.IsSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this action is a separator action; otherwise it returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::setSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.ParentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.SetDisabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function for the enabled property, that is useful for signals--slots connections. If b is true the action is disabled; otherwise it is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.SetSeparator(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If b is true then this action will be considered a separator.</para>
            <para>How a separator is represented depends on the widget it is inserted into. Under most circumstances the text, submenu, and icon will be ignored for separator actions.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::isSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.SetShortcuts(QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets a platform dependent list of shortcuts based on the key. The result of calling this function will depend on the currently running platform. Note that more than one shortcut can assigned by this action. If only the primary shortcut is required, use setShortcut instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QKeySequence::keyBindings().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.ShowStatusText(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the relevant status bar for the widget specified by sending a QStatusTipEvent to its parent widget. Returns true if an event was sent; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If a null widget is specified, the event is sent to the action's parent.</para>
            <para>See also statusTip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.Toggle">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function for the checked property. Connect to it to change the checked state to its opposite state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.OnToggled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a checkable action changes its isChecked() status. This can be the result of a user interaction, or because setChecked() was called.</para>
            <para>checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate(), QAction::triggered(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.Trigger">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience slot that calls activate(Trigger).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.OnTriggered(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination, or when trigger() was called. Notably, it is not emitted when setChecked() or toggle() is called.</para>
            <para>If the action is checkable, checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate(), QAction::toggled(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QAction.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAction.Changed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action has changed. If you are only interested in actions in a given widget, you can watch for QWidget::actionEvent() sent with an QEvent::ActionChanged.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAction.Triggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination, or when trigger() was called. Notably, it is not emitted when setChecked() or toggle() is called.</para>
            <para>If the action is checkable, checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate(), QAction::toggled(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAction.Hovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QAction.Toggled">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a checkable action changes its isChecked() status. This can be the result of a user interaction, or because setChecked() was called.</para>
            <para>checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate(), QAction::triggered(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.ActionGroup">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the action group for this action. If no action group manages this action then 0 will be returned.</para>
            <para>Sets this action group to group. The action will be automatically added to the group's list of actions.</para>
            <para>Actions within the group will be mutually exclusive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Data">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user data as set in QAction::setData.</para>
            <para>Sets the action's internal data to the given userData.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Menu">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the menu contained by this action. Actions that contain menus can be used to create menu items with submenus, or inserted into toolbars to create buttons with popup menus.</para>
            <para>Sets the menu contained by this action to the specified menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Shortcuts">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of shortcuts, with the primary shortcut as the first element of the list.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets shortcuts as the list of shortcuts that trigger the action. The first element of the list is the primary shortcut.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Checkable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action is a checkable action.</para>
            <para>A checkable action is one which has an on/off state. For example, in a word processor, a Bold toolbar button may be either on or off. An action which is not a toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply executed, e.g. file save. By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, &quot;Left Align&quot;, &quot;Center&quot; and &quot;Right Align&quot; toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a QActionGroup with the QActionGroup::exclusive property set to true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Checked">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action is checked.</para>
            <para>Only checkable actions can be checked. By default, this is false (the action is unchecked).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Enabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action is enabled.</para>
            <para>Disabled actions cannot be chosen by the user. They do not disappear from menus or toolbars, but they are displayed in a way which indicates that they are unavailable. For example, they might be displayed using only shades of gray.</para>
            <para>What's This? help on disabled actions is still available, provided that the QAction::whatsThis property is set.</para>
            <para>An action will be disabled when all widgets to which it is added (with QWidget::addAction()) are disabled or not visible. When an action is disabled, it is not possible to trigger it through its shortcut.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true (actions are enabled).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's icon.</para>
            <para>In toolbars, the icon is used as the tool button icon; in menus, it is displayed to the left of the menu text. There is no default icon.</para>
            <para>On Symbian the icons which are passed to softkeys, i.e. to actions with softkey role, need to have pixmap alpha channel correctly set otherwise drawing artifacts will appear when softkey is pressed down.</para>
            <para>If a null icon (QIcon::isNull() is passed into this function, the icon of the action is cleared.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's descriptive text.</para>
            <para>If the action is added to a menu, the menu option will consist of the icon (if there is one), the text, and the shortcut (if there is one). If the text is not explicitly set in the constructor, or by using setText(), the action's description icon text will be used as text. There is no default text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.IconText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's descriptive icon text.</para>
            <para>If QToolBar::toolButtonStyle is set to a value that permits text to be displayed, the text defined held in this property appears as a label in the relevant tool button.</para>
            <para>It also serves as the default text in menus and tooltips if the action has not been defined with setText() or setToolTip(), and will also be used in toolbar buttons if no icon has been defined using setIcon().</para>
            <para>If the icon text is not explicitly set, the action's normal text will be used for the icon text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's tooltip.</para>
            <para>This text is used for the tooltip. If no tooltip is specified, the action's text is used.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains the action's text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.StatusTip">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's status tip.</para>
            <para>The status tip is displayed on all status bars provided by the action's top-level parent widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's &quot;What's This?&quot; help text.</para>
            <para>The &quot;What's This?&quot; text is used to provide a brief description of the action. The text may contain rich text. There is no default &quot;What's This?&quot; text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's font.</para>
            <para>The font property is used to render the text set on the QAction. The font will can be considered a hint as it will not be consulted in all cases based upon application and style.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains the application's default font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Shortcut">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's primary shortcut key.</para>
            <para>Valid keycodes for this property can be found in Qt::Key and Qt::Modifier. There is no default shortcut key.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.ShortcutContext">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the context for the action's shortcut.</para>
            <para>Valid values for this property can be found in Qt::ShortcutContext. The default value is Qt::WindowShortcut.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.AutoRepeat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action can auto repeat.</para>
            <para>If true, the action will auto repeat when the keyboard shortcut combination is held down, provided that keyboard auto repeat is enabled on the system. The default value is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.Visible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).</para>
            <para>If visible is true the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars) and chosen by the user; if visible is false the action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.</para>
            <para>Actions which are not visible are not grayed out; they do not appear at all.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true (actions are visible).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.menuRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's menu role.</para>
            <para>This indicates what role the action serves in the application menu on Mac OS X. By default all action have the TextHeuristicRole, which means that the action is added based on its text (see QMenuBar for more information).</para>
            <para>The menu role can only be changed before the actions are put into the menu bar in Mac OS X (usually just before the first application window is shown).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.softKeyRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the action's softkey role.</para>
            <para>This indicates what type of role this action describes in the softkey framework on platforms where such a framework is supported. Currently this is only supported on the Symbian platform.</para>
            <para>The softkey role can be changed any time.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.IconVisibleInMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not an action should show an icon in a menu.</para>
            <para>In some applications, it may make sense to have actions with icons in the toolbar, but not in menus. If true, the icon (if valid) is shown in the menu, when it is false, it is not shown.</para>
            <para>The default is to follow whether the Qt::AA_DontShowIconsInMenus attribute is set for the application. Explicitly settings this property overrides the presence (or abscence) of the attribute.</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> QApplication app(argc, argv);</para>
            <para> app.setAttribute(Qt::AA_DontShowIconsInMenus);  // Icons are *no longer shown* in menus</para>
            <para> // ...</para>
            <para> QAction *myAction = new QAction();</para>
            <para> // ...</para>
            <para> myAction-&gt;setIcon(SomeIcon);</para>
            <para> myAction-&gt;setIconVisibleInMenu(true);   // Icon *will* be shown in menus for *this* action.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QAction.priority">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the actions's priority in the user interface.</para>
            <para>This property can be set to indicate how the action should be prioritized in the user interface.</para>
            <para>For instance, when toolbars have the Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon mode set, then actions with LowPriority will not show the text labels.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAction.ActionEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type is used when calling QAction::activate()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.ActionEvent.Hover">
            <summary>
            <para>This will cause the QAction::hovered() signal to be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.ActionEvent.Trigger">
            <summary>
            <para>This will cause the QAction::triggered() signal to be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how an action should be moved into the application menu on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>Setting this value only has effect on items that are in the immediate menus of the menubar, not the submenus of those menus. For example, if you have File menu in your menubar and the File menu has a submenu, setting the MenuRole for the actions in that submenu have no effect. They will never be moved.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.AboutQtRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action matches handles the &quot;About Qt&quot; menu item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.AboutRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should be placed where the &quot;About&quot; menu item is in the application menu. The text of the menu item will be set to &quot;About &lt;application name&gt;&quot;. The application name is fetched from the Info.plist file in the application's bundle (See Deploying an Application on Mac OS X).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.ApplicationSpecificRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should be put in the application menu with an application specific role</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.NoRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should not be put into the application menu</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.PreferencesRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should be placed where the &quot;Preferences...&quot; menu item is in the application menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.QuitRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should be placed where the Quit menu item is in the application menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.MenuRole.TextHeuristicRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should be put in the application menu based on the action's text as described in the QMenuBar documentation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAction.Priority">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum defines priorities for actions in user interface.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also priority.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.Priority.HighPriority">
            <summary>
            <para>The action should be prioritized in the user interface.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.Priority.LowPriority">
            <summary>
            <para>The action should not be prioritized in the user interface.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QAction.SoftKeyRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how an action should be placed in the softkey bar. Currently this enum only has an effect on the Symbian platform.</para>
            <para>Actions with a softkey role defined are only visible in the softkey bar when the widget containing the action has focus. If no widget currently has focus, the softkey framework will traverse up the widget parent hierarchy looking for a widget containing softkey actions.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.SoftKeyRole.NegativeSoftKey">
            <summary>
            <para>This action is used to describe a soft ey with a negative or destructive role role such as Cancel, Discard, or Close.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.SoftKeyRole.NoSoftKey">
            <summary>
            <para>This action should not be used as a softkey</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.SoftKeyRole.PositiveSoftKey">
            <summary>
            <para>This action is used to describe a softkey with a positive or non-destructive role such as Ok, Select, or Options.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QAction.SoftKeyRole.SelectSoftKey">
            <summary>
            <para>This action is used to describe a role that selects a particular item or widget in the application.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QActionEvent">
            <summary>
            The QActionEvent class provides an event that is generated when a QAction is added, removed, or changed.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Actions can be added to widgets using QWidget::addAction(). This generates an ActionAdded event, which you can handle to provide custom behavior. For example, QToolBar reimplements QWidget::actionEvent() to create QToolButtons for the actions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAction, QWidget::addAction(), QWidget::removeAction(), and QWidget::actions().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action event. The type can be ActionChanged, ActionAdded, or ActionRemoved.</para>
            <para>action is the action that is changed, added, or removed. If type is ActionAdded, the action is to be inserted before the action before. If before is 0, the action is appended.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionEvent.#ctor(System.Int32,QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action event. The type can be ActionChanged, ActionAdded, or ActionRemoved.</para>
            <para>action is the action that is changed, added, or removed. If type is ActionAdded, the action is to be inserted before the action before. If before is 0, the action is appended.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionEvent.Action">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the action that is changed, added, or removed.</para>
            <para>See also before().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionEvent.Before">
            <summary>
            <para>If type() is ActionAdded, returns the action that should appear before action(). If this function returns 0, the action should be appended to already existing actions on the same widget.</para>
            <para>See also action() and QWidget::actions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QActionGroup">
            <summary>
            The QActionGroup class groups actions together.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>In some situations it is useful to group QAction objects together. For example, if you have a Left Align action, a Right Align action, a Justify action, and a Center action, only one of these actions should be active at any one time. One simple way of achieving this is to group the actions together in an action group.</para>
            <para>Here's a example (from the Menus example):</para>
            <para>     alignmentGroup = new QActionGroup(this);</para>
            <para>     alignmentGroup-&amp;gt;addAction(leftAlignAct);</para>
            <para>     alignmentGroup-&amp;gt;addAction(rightAlignAct);</para>
            <para>     alignmentGroup-&amp;gt;addAction(justifyAct);</para>
            <para>     alignmentGroup-&amp;gt;addAction(centerAct);</para>
            <para>     leftAlignAct-&amp;gt;setChecked(true);</para>
            <para>Here we create a new action group. Since the action group is exclusive by default, only one of the actions in the group is checked at any one time.</para>
            <para>A QActionGroup emits an triggered() signal when one of its actions is chosen. Each action in an action group emits its triggered() signal as usual.</para>
            <para>As stated above, an action group is exclusive by default; it ensures that only one checkable action is active at any one time. If you want to group checkable actions without making them exclusive, you can turn of exclusiveness by calling setExclusive(false).</para>
            <para>Actions can be added to an action group using addAction(), but it is usually more convenient to specify a group when creating actions; this ensures that actions are automatically created with a parent. Actions can be visually separated from each other by adding a separator action to the group; create an action and use QAction's setSeparator() function to make it considered a separator. Action groups are added to widgets with the QWidget::addActions() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAction.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action group for the parent object.</para>
            <para>The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(false) to make the action group non-exclusive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.Actions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of this groups's actions. This may be empty.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.AddAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the action to this group, and returns it.</para>
            <para>Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as its parent, so this function is not usually used.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::setActionGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.AddAction(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns an action with text and an icon. The newly created action is a child of this action group.</para>
            <para>Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as its parent, so this function is not usually used.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::setActionGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.AddAction(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns an action with text. The newly created action is a child of this action group.</para>
            <para>Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as parent, so this function is not usually used.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::setActionGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.CheckedAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently checked action in the group, or 0 if none are checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.OnHovered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.RemoveAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the action from this group. The action will have no parent as a result.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::setActionGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.SetDisabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function for the enabled property, that is useful for signals--slots connections. If b is true the action group is disabled; otherwise it is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.OnTriggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>Connect to this signal for command actions.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QActionGroup.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the action group.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QActionGroup.Triggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>Connect to this signal for command actions.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QActionGroup.Hovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QActionGroup.Exclusive">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action group does exclusive checking.</para>
            <para>If exclusive is true, only one checkable action in the action group can ever be active at any time. If the user chooses another checkable action in the group, the one they chose becomes active and the one that was active becomes inactive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QActionGroup.Enabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action group is enabled.</para>
            <para>Each action in the group will be enabled or disabled unless it has been explicitly disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QActionGroup.Visible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the action group is visible.</para>
            <para>Each action in the action group will match the visible state of this group unless it has been explicitly hidden.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QBitmap">
            <summary>
            The QBitmap class provides monochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QBitmap class is a monochrome off-screen paint device used mainly for creating custom QCursor and QBrush objects, constructing QRegion objects, and for setting masks for pixmaps and widgets.</para>
            <para>QBitmap is a QPixmap subclass ensuring a depth of 1, except for null objects which have a depth of 0. If a pixmap with a depth greater than 1 is assigned to a bitmap, the bitmap will be dithered automatically.</para>
            <para>Use the QColor objects Qt::color0 and Qt::color1 when drawing on a QBitmap object (or a QPixmap object with depth 1).</para>
            <para>Painting with Qt::color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0, and painting with Qt::color1 sets the bits to 1. For a bitmap, 0-bits indicate background (or transparent pixels) and 1-bits indicate foreground (or opaque pixels). Use the clear() function to set all the bits to Qt::color0. Note that using the Qt::black and Qt::white colors make no sense because the QColor::pixel() value is not necessarily 0 for black and 1 for white.</para>
            <para>The QBitmap class provides the transformed() function returning a transformed copy of the bitmap; use the QTransform argument to translate, scale, shear, and rotate the bitmap. In addition, QBitmap provides the static fromData() function which returns a bitmap constructed from the given uchar data, and the static fromImage() function returning a converted copy of a QImage object.</para>
            <para>Just like the QPixmap class, QBitmap is optimized by the use of implicit data sharing. For more information, see the Implicit Data Sharing documentation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPixmap, QImage, QImageReader, and QImageWriter.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPixmap">
            <summary>
            The QPixmap class is an off-screen image representation that can be used as a paint device.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt provides four classes for handling image data: QImage, QPixmap, QBitmap and QPicture. QImage is designed and optimized for I/O, and for direct pixel access and manipulation, while QPixmap is designed and optimized for showing images on screen. QBitmap is only a convenience class that inherits QPixmap, ensuring a depth of 1. The isQBitmap() function returns true if a QPixmap object is really a bitmap, otherwise returns false. Finally, the QPicture class is a paint device that records and replays QPainter commands.</para>
            <para>A QPixmap can easily be displayed on the screen using QLabel or one of QAbstractButton's subclasses (such as QPushButton and QToolButton). QLabel has a pixmap property, whereas QAbstractButton has an icon property.</para>
            <para>In addition to the ordinary constructors, a QPixmap can be constructed using the static grabWidget() and grabWindow() functions which creates a QPixmap and paints the given widget, or window, into it.</para>
            <para>QPixmap objects can be passed around by value since the QPixmap class uses implicit data sharing. For more information, see the Implicit Data Sharing documentation. QPixmap objects can also be streamed.</para>
            <para>Note that the pixel data in a pixmap is internal and is managed by the underlying window system. Because QPixmap is a QPaintDevice subclass, QPainter can be used to draw directly onto pixmaps. Pixels can only be accessed through QPainter functions or by converting the QPixmap to a QImage. However, the fill() function is available for initializing the entire pixmap with a given color.</para>
            <para>There are functions to convert between QImage and QPixmap. Typically, the QImage class is used to load an image file, optionally manipulating the image data, before the QImage object is converted into a QPixmap to be shown on screen. Alternatively, if no manipulation is desired, the image file can be loaded directly into a QPixmap. On Windows, the QPixmap class also supports conversion between HBITMAP and QPixmap. On Symbian, the QPixmap class also supports conversion between CFbsBitmap and QPixmap.</para>
            <para>QPixmap provides a collection of functions that can be used to obtain a variety of information about the pixmap. In addition, there are several functions that enables transformation of the pixmap.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Reading and Writing Image Files</para>
            <para>QPixmap provides several ways of reading an image file: The file can be loaded when constructing the QPixmap object, or by using the load() or loadFromData() functions later on. When loading an image, the file name can either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See The Qt Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>Simply call the save() function to save a QPixmap object.</para>
            <para>The complete list of supported file formats are available through the QImageReader::supportedImageFormats() and QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() functions. New file formats can be added as plugins. By default, Qt supports the following formats:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FormatDescriptionQt's support</para>
            <para>BMP	Windows Bitmap	Read/write</para>
            <para>GIF	Graphic Interchange Format (optional)	Read</para>
            <para>JPG	Joint Photographic Experts Group	Read/write</para>
            <para>JPEG	Joint Photographic Experts Group	Read/write</para>
            <para>PNG	Portable Network Graphics	Read/write</para>
            <para>PBM	Portable Bitmap	Read</para>
            <para>PGM	Portable Graymap	Read</para>
            <para>PPM	Portable Pixmap	Read/write</para>
            <para>XBM	X11 Bitmap	Read/write</para>
            <para>XPM	X11 Pixmap	Read/write</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixmap Information</para>
            <para>QPixmap provides a collection of functions that can be used to obtain a variety of information about the pixmap:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Available Functions</para>
            <para>Geometry	The size(), width() and height() functions provide information about the pixmap's size. The rect() function returns the image's enclosing rectangle.</para>
            <para>Alpha component	The hasAlphaChannel() returns true if the pixmap has a format that respects the alpha channel, otherwise returns false. The hasAlpha(), setMask() and mask() functions are legacy and should not be used. They are potentially very slow.The createHeuristicMask() function creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask (i.e. a QBitmap) for this pixmap. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away pixels of that color, starting at all the edges. The createMaskFromColor() function creates and returns a mask (i.e. a QBitmap) for the pixmap based on a given color.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Low-level information	The depth() function returns the depth of the pixmap. The defaultDepth() function returns the default depth, i.e. the depth used by the application on the given screen.The cacheKey() function returns a number that uniquely identifies the contents of the QPixmap object.</para>
            <para>The x11Info() function returns information about the configuration of the X display used by the screen to which the pixmap currently belongs. The x11PictureHandle() function returns the X11 Picture handle of the pixmap for XRender support. Note that the two latter functions are only available on x11.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixmap Conversion</para>
            <para>A QPixmap object can be converted into a QImage using the toImage() function. Likewise, a QImage can be converted into a QPixmap using the fromImage(). If this is too expensive an operation, you can use QBitmap::fromImage() instead.</para>
            <para>In addition, on Windows, the QPixmap class supports conversion to and from HBITMAP: the toWinHBITMAP() function creates a HBITMAP equivalent to the QPixmap, based on the given HBitmapFormat, and returns the HBITMAP handle. The fromWinHBITMAP() function returns a QPixmap that is equivalent to the given bitmap which has the specified format. The QPixmap class also supports conversion to and from HICON: the toWinHICON() function creates a HICON equivalent to the QPixmap, and returns the HICON handle. The fromWinHICON() function returns a QPixmap that is equivalent to the given icon.</para>
            <para>In addition, on Symbian, the QPixmap class supports conversion to and from CFbsBitmap: the toSymbianCFbsBitmap() function creates CFbsBitmap equivalent to the QPixmap, based on given mode and returns a CFbsBitmap object. The fromSymbianCFbsBitmap() function returns a QPixmap that is equivalent to the given bitmap and given mode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixmap Transformations</para>
            <para>QPixmap supports a number of functions for creating a new pixmap that is a transformed version of the original:</para>
            <para>The scaled(), scaledToWidth() and scaledToHeight() functions return scaled copies of the pixmap, while the copy() function creates a QPixmap that is a plain copy of the original one.</para>
            <para>The transformed() function returns a copy of the pixmap that is transformed with the given transformation matrix and transformation mode: Internally, the transformation matrix is adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation, i.e. transformed() returns the smallest pixmap containing all transformed points of the original pixmap. The static trueMatrix() function returns the actual matrix used for transforming the pixmap.</para>
            <para>Note: When using the native X11 graphics system, the pixmap becomes invalid when the QApplication instance is destroyed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QBitmap, QImage, QImageReader, and QImageWriter.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintDevice">
            <summary>
            The QPaintDevice class is the base class of objects that can be painted.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A paint device is an abstraction of a two-dimensional space that can be drawn using a QPainter. Its default coordinate system has its origin located at the top-left position. X increases to the right and Y increases downwards. The unit is one pixel.</para>
            <para>The drawing capabilities of QPaintDevice are currently implemented by the QWidget, QImage, QPixmap, QGLPixelBuffer, QPicture, and QPrinter subclasses.</para>
            <para>To implement support for a new backend, you must derive from QPaintDevice and reimplement the virtual paintEngine() function to tell QPainter which paint engine should be used to draw on this particular device. Note that you also must create a corresponding paint engine to be able to draw on the device, i.e derive from QPaintEngine and reimplement its virtual functions.</para>
            <para>Warning: Qt requires that a QApplication object exists before any paint devices can be created. Paint devices access window system resources, and these resources are not initialized before an application object is created.</para>
            <para>The QPaintDevice class provides several functions returning the various device metrics: The depth() function returns its bit depth (number of bit planes). The height() function returns its height in default coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget) while heightMM() returns the height of the device in millimeters. Similiarily, the width() and widthMM() functions return the width of the device in default coordinate system units and in millimeters, respectively. Alternatively, the protected metric() function can be used to retrieve the metric information by specifying the desired PaintDeviceMetric as argument.</para>
            <para>The logicalDpiX() and logicalDpiY() functions return the horizontal and vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch. The physicalDpiX() and physicalDpiY() functions also return the resolution of the device in dots per inch, but note that if the logical and physical resolution differ, the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the mapping. Finally, the colorCount() function returns the number of different colors available for the paint device.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPaintEngine, QPainter, Coordinate System, and Paint System.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a paint device. This constructor can be invoked only from subclasses of QPaintDevice.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.ColorCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of different colors available for the paint device. Since this value is an int, it will not be sufficient to represent the number of colors on 32 bit displays, in this case INT_MAX is returned instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.Depth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bit depth (number of bit planes) of the paint device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the paint device in default coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget).</para>
            <para>See also heightMM().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.HeightMM">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the paint device in millimeters. Due to platform limitations it may not be possible to use this function to determine the actual physical size of a widget on the screen.</para>
            <para>See also height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.LogicalDpiX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch, which is used when computing font sizes. For X11, this is usually the same as could be computed from widthMM().</para>
            <para>Note that if the logicalDpiX() doesn't equal the physicalDpiX(), the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping.</para>
            <para>See also logicalDpiY() and physicalDpiX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.LogicalDpiY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch, which is used when computing font sizes. For X11, this is usually the same as could be computed from heightMM().</para>
            <para>Note that if the logicalDpiY() doesn't equal the physicalDpiY(), the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping.</para>
            <para>See also logicalDpiX() and physicalDpiY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.Metric(QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the metric information for the given paint device metric.</para>
            <para>See also PaintDeviceMetric.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.NumColors">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated.</para>
            <para>Use colorCount() instead.</para>
            <para>Returns the number of different colors available for the paint device. Since this value is an int, it will not be sufficient to represent the number of colors on 32 bit displays, in this case INT_MAX is returned instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintEngine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the paint engine used for drawing on the device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintingActive">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the device is currently being painted on, i.e. someone has called QPainter::begin() but not yet called QPainter::end() for this device; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QPainter::isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PhysicalDpiX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch. For example, when printing, this resolution refers to the physical printer's resolution. The logical DPI on the other hand, refers to the resolution used by the actual paint engine.</para>
            <para>Note that if the physicalDpiX() doesn't equal the logicalDpiX(), the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping.</para>
            <para>See also physicalDpiY() and logicalDpiX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PhysicalDpiY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch. For example, when printing, this resolution refers to the physical printer's resolution. The logical DPI on the other hand, refers to the resolution used by the actual paint engine.</para>
            <para>Note that if the physicalDpiY() doesn't equal the logicalDpiY(), the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping.</para>
            <para>See also physicalDpiX() and logicalDpiY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the paint device in default coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget).</para>
            <para>See also widthMM().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.WidthMM">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the paint device in millimeters. Due to platform limitations it may not be possible to use this function to determine the actual physical size of a widget on the screen.</para>
            <para>See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintDevice.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the paint device and frees window system resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric">
            <summary>
            <para>Describes the various metrics of a paint device.</para>
            <para>See also metric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmDepth">
            <summary>
            <para>The bit depth (number of bit planes) of the paint device. See also depth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmDpiX">
            <summary>
            <para>The horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch. See also logicalDpiX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmDpiY">
            <summary>
            <para>The vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch. See also logicalDpiY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>The height of the paint device in default coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget). See also height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmHeightMM">
            <summary>
            <para>The height of the paint device in millimeters. See also heightMM().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmNumColors">
            <summary>
            <para>The number of different colors available for the paint device. See also colorCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmPhysicalDpiX">
            <summary>
            <para>The horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch. See also physicalDpiX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmPhysicalDpiY">
            <summary>
            <para>The vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch. See also physicalDpiY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of the paint device in default coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget). See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric.PdmWidthMM">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of the paint device in millimeters. See also widthMM().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.#ctor(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Constructs a pixmap of the given size.</para>
            <para>Warning: This will create a QPixmap with uninitialized data. Call fill() to fill the pixmap with an appropriate color before drawing onto it with QPainter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a pixmap that is a copy of the given pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also copy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a pixmap with the given width and height. If either width or height is zero, a null pixmap is constructed.</para>
            <para>Warning: This will create a QPixmap with uninitialized data. Call fill() to fill the pixmap with an appropriate color before drawing onto it with QPainter.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.#ctor(System.String,System.String,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.CacheKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies this QPixmap. Distinct QPixmap objects can only have the same cache key if they refer to the same contents.</para>
            <para>The cacheKey() will change when the pixmap is altered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.ConvertFromImage(QtGui.QImage,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replaces this pixmap's data with the given image using the specified flags to control the conversion. The flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the Qt::ImageConversionFlags. Passing 0 for flags sets all the default options. Returns true if the result is that this pixmap is not null.</para>
            <para>Note: this function was part of Qt 3 support in Qt 4.6 and earlier. It has been promoted to official API status in 4.7 to support updating the pixmap's image without creating a new QPixmap as fromImage() would.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also fromImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Copy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a deep copy of the subset of the pixmap that is specified by the given rectangle. For more information on deep copies, see the Implicit Data Sharing documentation.</para>
            <para>If the given rectangle is empty, the whole image is copied.</para>
            <para>See also operator=(), QPixmap(), and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Copy(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a deep copy of the subset of the pixmap that is specified by the given rectangle. For more information on deep copies, see the Implicit Data Sharing documentation.</para>
            <para>If the given rectangle is empty, the whole image is copied.</para>
            <para>See also operator=(), QPixmap(), and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Copy(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a deep copy of the subset of the pixmap that is specified by the rectangle QRect( x, y, width, height).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.CreateHeuristicMask(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a heuristic mask for this pixmap.</para>
            <para>The function works by selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away pixels of that color, starting at all the edges. If clipTight is true (the default) the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.</para>
            <para>The mask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you can do things such as the following:</para>
            <para> QPixmap myPixmap;</para>
            <para> myPixmap-&gt;setMask(myPixmap-&gt;createHeuristicMask());</para>
            <para>This function is slow because it involves converting to/from a QImage, and non-trivial computations.</para>
            <para>See also QImage::createHeuristicMask() and createMaskFromColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.CreateMaskFromColor(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a mask for this pixmap based on the given maskColor. Same as calling createMaskFromColor(maskColor, Qt::MaskInColor)</para>
            <para>See also createHeuristicMask() and QImage::createMaskFromColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.CreateMaskFromColor(QtGui.QColor,QtCore.Qt.MaskMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a mask for this pixmap based on the given maskColor. If the mode is Qt::MaskInColor, all pixels matching the maskColor will be transparent. If mode is Qt::MaskOutColor, all pixels matching the maskColor will be opaque.</para>
            <para>This function is slow because it involves converting to/from a QImage.</para>
            <para>See also createHeuristicMask() and QImage::createMaskFromColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.DefaultDepth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default pixmap depth used by the application.</para>
            <para>On Windows and Mac, the default depth is always 32. On X11 and embedded, the depth of the screen will be returned by this function.</para>
            <para>See also depth(), QColormap::depth(), and Pixmap Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Depth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the depth of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>The pixmap depth is also called bits per pixel (bpp) or bit planes of a pixmap. A null pixmap has depth 0.</para>
            <para>See also defaultDepth() and Pixmap Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Detach">
            <summary>
            <para>Detaches the pixmap from shared pixmap data.</para>
            <para>A pixmap is automatically detached by Qt whenever its contents are about to change. This is done in almost all QPixmap member functions that modify the pixmap (fill(), fromImage(), load(), etc.), and in QPainter::begin() on a pixmap.</para>
            <para>There are two exceptions in which detach() must be called explicitly, that is when calling the handle() or the x11PictureHandle() function (only available on X11). Otherwise, any modifications done using system calls, will be performed on the shared data.</para>
            <para>The detach() function returns immediately if there is just a single reference or if the pixmap has not been initialized yet.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Fill">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills the pixmap with the given color.</para>
            <para>The effect of this function is undefined when the pixmap is being painted on.</para>
            <para>See also Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Fill(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills the pixmap with the given color.</para>
            <para>The effect of this function is undefined when the pixmap is being painted on.</para>
            <para>See also Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Fill(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills the pixmap with the widget's background color or pixmap according to the given offset.</para>
            <para>The QPoint offset defines a point in widget coordinates to which the pixmap's top-left pixel will be mapped to. This is only significant if the widget has a background pixmap; otherwise the pixmap will simply be filled with the background color of the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Fill(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the pixmap with the widget's background color or pixmap. The given point, (x, y), defines an offset in widget coordinates to which the pixmap's top-left pixel will be mapped to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.FromImage(QtGui.QImage,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the given image to a pixmap using the specified flags to control the conversion. The flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the Qt::ImageConversionFlags. Passing 0 for flags sets all the default options.</para>
            <para>In case of monochrome and 8-bit images, the image is first converted to a 32-bit pixmap and then filled with the colors in the color table. If this is too expensive an operation, you can use QBitmap::fromImage() instead.</para>
            <para>See also fromImageReader(), toImage(), and Pixmap Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.FromImageReader(QtGui.QImageReader,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Create a QPixmap from an image read directly from an imageReader. The flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the Qt::ImageConversionFlags. Passing 0 for flags sets all the default options.</para>
            <para>On some systems, reading an image directly to QPixmap can use less memory than reading a QImage to convert it to QPixmap.</para>
            <para>See also fromImage(), toImage(), and Pixmap Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.FromWinHBITMAP(System.IntPtr,QtGui.QPixmap.HBitmapFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Win32 only: Returns a QPixmap that is equivalent to the given bitmap. The conversion is based on the specified format.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is only available on Windows.</para>
            <para>See also toWinHBITMAP() and Pixmap Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.FromWinHICON(System.IntPtr)">
            <summary>
            <para>Win32 only: Returns a QPixmap that is equivalent to the given icon.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is only available on Windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also toWinHICON() and Pixmap Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.GrabWidget(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a pixmap and paints the given widget, restricted by the given rectangle, in it. If the widget has any children, then they are also painted in the appropriate positions.</para>
            <para>If no rectangle is specified (the default) the entire widget is painted.</para>
            <para>If widget is 0, the specified rectangle doesn't overlap the widget's rectangle, or an error occurs, the function will return a null QPixmap. If the rectangle is a superset of the given widget, the areas outside the widget are covered with the widget's background.</para>
            <para>This function actually asks widget to paint itself (and its children to paint themselves) by calling paintEvent() with painter redirection turned on. But QPixmap also provides the grabWindow() function which is a bit faster by grabbing pixels directly off the screen. In addition, if there are overlaying windows, grabWindow(), unlike grabWidget(), will see them.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not grab a widget from its QWidget::paintEvent(). However, it is safe to grab a widget from another widget's paintEvent().</para>
            <para>See also grabWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.GrabWidget(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a pixmap and paints the given widget, restricted by the given rectangle, in it. If the widget has any children, then they are also painted in the appropriate positions.</para>
            <para>If no rectangle is specified (the default) the entire widget is painted.</para>
            <para>If widget is 0, the specified rectangle doesn't overlap the widget's rectangle, or an error occurs, the function will return a null QPixmap. If the rectangle is a superset of the given widget, the areas outside the widget are covered with the widget's background.</para>
            <para>This function actually asks widget to paint itself (and its children to paint themselves) by calling paintEvent() with painter redirection turned on. But QPixmap also provides the grabWindow() function which is a bit faster by grabbing pixels directly off the screen. In addition, if there are overlaying windows, grabWindow(), unlike grabWidget(), will see them.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not grab a widget from its QWidget::paintEvent(). However, it is safe to grab a widget from another widget's paintEvent().</para>
            <para>See also grabWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.GrabWindow(NativeULong,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a pixmap constructed by grabbing the contents of the given window restricted by QRect(x, y, width, height).</para>
            <para>The arguments (x, y) specify the offset in the window, whereas (width, height) specify the area to be copied. If width is negative, the function copies everything to the right border of the window. If height is negative, the function copies everything to the bottom of the window.</para>
            <para>The window system identifier (WId) can be retrieved using the QWidget::winId() function. The rationale for using a window identifier and not a QWidget, is to enable grabbing of windows that are not part of the application, window system frames, and so on.</para>
            <para>The grabWindow() function grabs pixels from the screen, not from the window, i.e. if there is another window partially or entirely over the one you grab, you get pixels from the overlying window, too. The mouse cursor is generally not grabbed.</para>
            <para>Note on X11 that if the given window doesn't have the same depth as the root window, and another window partially or entirely obscures the one you grab, you will not get pixels from the overlying window. The contents of the obscured areas in the pixmap will be undefined and uninitialized.</para>
            <para>On Windows Vista and above grabbing a layered window, which is created by setting the Qt::WA_TranslucentBackground attribute, will not work. Instead grabbing the desktop widget should work.</para>
            <para>Warning: In general, grabbing an area outside the screen is not safe. This depends on the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>See also grabWidget() and Screenshot Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.HasAlpha">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this pixmap has an alpha channel, or has a mask, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also hasAlphaChannel() and mask().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.HasAlphaChannel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the pixmap has a format that respects the alpha channel, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also hasAlpha().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also size() and Pixmap Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>A null pixmap has zero width, zero height and no contents. You cannot draw in a null pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.IsQBitmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this is a QBitmap; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Load(System.String,System.String,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads a pixmap from the file with the given fileName. Returns true if the pixmap was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If the format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format.</para>
            <para>The file name can either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See the Resource System overview for details on how to embed pixmaps and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>If the data needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to control the conversion.</para>
            <para>Note that QPixmaps are automatically added to the QPixmapCache when loaded from a file; the key used is internal and can not be acquired.</para>
            <para>See also loadFromData() and Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.LoadFromData(QtCore.QByteArray,System.String,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads a pixmap from the len first bytes of the given binary data. Returns true if the pixmap was loaded successfully; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If the format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format.</para>
            <para>If the data needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to control the conversion.</para>
            <para>See also load() and Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.LoadFromData(QtCore.Pointer{System.Byte},System.UInt32,System.String,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads a pixmap from the len first bytes of the given binary data. Returns true if the pixmap was loaded successfully; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If the format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format.</para>
            <para>If the data needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to control the conversion.</para>
            <para>See also load() and Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.op_LogicalNot(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap's enclosing rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also Pixmap Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Save(QtCore.QIODevice,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the pixmap to the file with the given fileName using the specified image file format and quality factor. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The quality factor must be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use the default settings.</para>
            <para>If format is 0, an image format will be chosen from fileName's suffix.</para>
            <para>See also Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Save(System.String,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the pixmap to the file with the given fileName using the specified image file format and quality factor. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The quality factor must be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use the default settings.</para>
            <para>If format is 0, an image format will be chosen from fileName's suffix.</para>
            <para>See also Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Scaled(QtCore.QSize,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the pixmap to the given size, using the aspect ratio and transformation modes specified by aspectRatioMode and transformMode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, the pixmap is scaled to size.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatio, the pixmap is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible inside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding, the pixmap is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible outside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the given size is empty, this function returns a null pixmap.</para>
            <para>In some cases it can be more beneficial to draw the pixmap to a painter with a scale set rather than scaling the pixmap. This is the case when the painter is for instance based on OpenGL or when the scale factor changes rapidly.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Scaled(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the pixmap to the given size, using the aspect ratio and transformation modes specified by aspectRatioMode and transformMode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, the pixmap is scaled to size.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatio, the pixmap is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible inside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding, the pixmap is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible outside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the given size is empty, this function returns a null pixmap.</para>
            <para>In some cases it can be more beneficial to draw the pixmap to a painter with a scale set rather than scaling the pixmap. This is the case when the painter is for instance based on OpenGL or when the scale factor changes rapidly.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.ScaledToHeight(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image is scaled to the given height using the specified transformation mode. The width of the pixmap is automatically calculated so that the aspect ratio of the pixmap is preserved.</para>
            <para>If height is 0 or negative, a null pixmap is returned.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.ScaledToWidth(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image is scaled to the given width using the specified transformation mode. The height of the pixmap is automatically calculated so that the aspect ratio of the pixmap is preserved.</para>
            <para>If width is 0 or negative, a null pixmap is returned.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Scroll(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the area rect of this pixmap by (dx, dy). The exposed region is left unchanged. You can optionally pass a pointer to an empty QRegion to get the region that is exposed by the scroll operation.</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(&quot;background.png&quot;);</para>
            <para> QRegion exposed;</para>
            <para> pixmap.scroll(10, 10, pixmap.rect(), &amp;exposed);</para>
            <para>You cannot scroll while there is an active painter on the pixmap.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::scroll() and QGraphicsItem::scroll().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Scroll(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling QPixmap::scroll(dx, dy, QRect(x, y, width, height), exposed).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::scroll() and QGraphicsItem::scroll().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also width(), height(), and Pixmap Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Swap(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps pixmap other with this pixmap. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.ToImage">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the pixmap to a QImage. Returns a null image if the conversion fails.</para>
            <para>If the pixmap has 1-bit depth, the returned image will also be 1 bit deep. Images with more bits will be returned in a format closely represents the underlying system. Usually this will be QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied for pixmaps with an alpha and QImage::Format_RGB32 or QImage::Format_RGB16 for pixmaps without alpha.</para>
            <para>Note that for the moment, alpha masks on monochrome images are ignored.</para>
            <para>See also fromImage() and Image Formats.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.ToWinHBITMAP(QtGui.QPixmap.HBitmapFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Win32 only: Creates a HBITMAP equivalent to the QPixmap, based on the given format. Returns the HBITMAP handle.</para>
            <para>It is the caller's responsibility to free the HBITMAP data after use.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is only available on Windows.</para>
            <para>See also fromWinHBITMAP() and Pixmap Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.ToWinHICON">
            <summary>
            <para>Win32 only: Creates a HICON equivalent to the QPixmap. Returns the HICON handle.</para>
            <para>It is the caller's responsibility to free the HICON data after use.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is only available on Windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also fromWinHICON() and Pixmap Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Transformed(QtGui.QMatrix,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the pixmap that is transformed using the given transformation transform and transformation mode. The original pixmap is not changed.</para>
            <para>The transformation transform is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation; i.e. the pixmap produced is the smallest pixmap that contains all the transformed points of the original pixmap. Use the trueMatrix() function to retrieve the actual matrix used for transforming the pixmap.</para>
            <para>This function is slow because it involves transformation to a QImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a QPixmap.</para>
            <para>See also trueMatrix() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Transformed(QtGui.QTransform,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the pixmap that is transformed using the given transformation transform and transformation mode. The original pixmap is not changed.</para>
            <para>The transformation transform is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation; i.e. the pixmap produced is the smallest pixmap that contains all the transformed points of the original pixmap. Use the trueMatrix() function to retrieve the actual matrix used for transforming the pixmap.</para>
            <para>This function is slow because it involves transformation to a QImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a QPixmap.</para>
            <para>See also trueMatrix() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.TrueMatrix(QtGui.QMatrix,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function loads the matrix m into a QTransform and calls the overloaded function with the QTransform and the width w and the height h.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.TrueMatrix(QtGui.QTransform,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the actual matrix used for transforming a pixmap with the given width, height and matrix.</para>
            <para>When transforming a pixmap using the transformed() function, the transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation, i.e. transformed() returns the smallest pixmap containing all transformed points of the original pixmap. This function returns the modified matrix, which maps points correctly from the original pixmap into the new pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also transformed() and Pixmap Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also size() and Pixmap Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmap.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPixmap.Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>Extracts a bitmap mask from the pixmap's alpha channel.</para>
            <para>Warning: This is potentially an expensive operation. The mask of the pixmap is extracted dynamically from the pixeldata.</para>
            <para>Sets a mask bitmap.</para>
            <para>This function merges the mask with the pixmap's alpha channel. A pixel value of 1 on the mask means the pixmap's pixel is unchanged; a value of 0 means the pixel is transparent. The mask must have the same size as this pixmap.</para>
            <para>Setting a null mask resets the mask, leaving the previously transparent pixels black. The effect of this function is undefined when the pixmap is being painted on.</para>
            <para>Warning: This is potentially an expensive operation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPixmap.HBitmapFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Win32 only: This enum defines how the conversion between HBITMAP and QPixmap is performed.</para>
            <para>Warning: This enum is only available on Windows.</para>
            <para>See also fromWinHBITMAP() and toWinHBITMAP().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPixmap.HBitmapFormat.Alpha">
            <summary>
            <para>The HBITMAP is treated as having a plain alpha channel. This is the preferred format if the HBITMAP is going to be used as an application icon or systray icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPixmap.HBitmapFormat.NoAlpha">
            <summary>
            <para>The alpha channel is ignored and always treated as being set to fully opaque. This is preferred if the HBITMAP is used with standard GDI calls, such as BitBlt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPixmap.HBitmapFormat.PremultipliedAlpha">
            <summary>
            <para>The HBITMAP is treated as having an alpha channel and premultiplied colors. This is preferred if the HBITMAP is accessed through the AlphaBlend() GDI function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null bitmap.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a bitmap that is a copy of the given pixmap.</para>
            <para>If the pixmap has a depth greater than 1, the resulting bitmap will be dithered automatically.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::depth(), fromImage(), and fromData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.#ctor(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a bitmap with the given size. The pixels in the bitmap are uninitialized.</para>
            <para>See also clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a bitmap with the given width and height. The pixels inside are uninitialized.</para>
            <para>See also clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.#ctor(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a bitmap from the file specified by the given fileName. If the file does not exist, or has an unknown format, the bitmap becomes a null bitmap.</para>
            <para>The fileName and format parameters are passed on to the QPixmap::load() function. If the file format uses more than 1 bit per pixel, the resulting bitmap will be dithered automatically.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::isNull() and QImageReader::imageFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the bitmap, setting all its bits to Qt::color0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.FromData(QtCore.QSize,QtCore.Pointer{System.Byte},QtGui.QImage.Format)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a bitmap with the given size, and sets the contents to the bits supplied.</para>
            <para>The bitmap data has to be byte aligned and provided in in the bit order specified by monoFormat. The mono format must be either QImage::Format_Mono or QImage::Format_MonoLSB. Use QImage::Format_Mono to specify data on the XBM format.</para>
            <para>See also fromImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.FromImage(QtGui.QImage,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given image converted to a bitmap using the specified image conversion flags.</para>
            <para>See also fromData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.Swap(QtGui.QBitmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps bitmap other with this bitmap. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.Transformed(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of this bitmap, transformed according to the given matrix.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::transformed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.Transformed(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of this bitmap, transformed according to the given matrix.</para>
            <para>See also QPixmap::transformed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBitmap.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the bitmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QBoxLayout">
            <summary>
            The QBoxLayout class lines up child widgets horizontally or vertically.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QBoxLayout takes the space it gets (from its parent layout or from the parentWidget()), divides it up into a row of boxes, and makes each managed widget fill one box.</para>
            <para>If the QBoxLayout's orientation is Qt::Horizontal the boxes are placed in a row, with suitable sizes. Each widget (or other box) will get at least its minimum size and at most its maximum size. Any excess space is shared according to the stretch factors (more about that below).</para>
            <para>If the QBoxLayout's orientation is Qt::Vertical, the boxes are placed in a column, again with suitable sizes.</para>
            <para>The easiest way to create a QBoxLayout is to use one of the convenience classes, e.g. QHBoxLayout (for Qt::Horizontal boxes) or QVBoxLayout (for Qt::Vertical boxes). You can also use the QBoxLayout constructor directly, specifying its direction as LeftToRight, RightToLeft, TopToBottom, or BottomToTop.</para>
            <para>If the QBoxLayout is not the top-level layout (i.e. it is not managing all of the widget's area and children), you must add it to its parent layout before you can do anything with it. The normal way to add a layout is by calling parentLayout-&amp;gt;addLayout().</para>
            <para>Once you have done this, you can add boxes to the QBoxLayout using one of four functions:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>addWidget() to add a widget to the QBoxLayout and set the widget's stretch factor. (The stretch factor is along the row of boxes.)</para>
            <para>addSpacing() to create an empty box; this is one of the functions you use to create nice and spacious dialogs. See below for ways to set margins.</para>
            <para>addStretch() to create an empty, stretchable box.</para>
            <para>addLayout() to add a box containing another QLayout to the row and set that layout's stretch factor.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use insertWidget(), insertSpacing(), insertStretch() or insertLayout() to insert a box at a specified position in the layout.</para>
            <para>QBoxLayout also includes two margin widths:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>setContentsMargins() sets the width of the outer border on each side of the widget. This is the width of the reserved space along each of the QBoxLayout's four sides.</para>
            <para>setSpacing() sets the width between neighboring boxes. (You can use addSpacing() to get more space at a particular spot.)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The margin default is provided by the style. The default margin most Qt styles specify is 9 for child widgets and 11 for windows. The spacing defaults to the same as the margin width for a top-level layout, or to the same as the parent layout.</para>
            <para>To remove a widget from a layout, call removeWidget(). Calling QWidget::hide() on a widget also effectively removes the widget from the layout until QWidget::show() is called.</para>
            <para>You will almost always want to use QVBoxLayout and QHBoxLayout rather than QBoxLayout because of their convenient constructors.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGridLayout, QStackedLayout, and Layout Management.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLayout">
            <summary>
            The QLayout class is the base class of geometry managers.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This is an abstract base class inherited by the concrete classes QBoxLayout, QGridLayout, QFormLayout, and QStackedLayout.</para>
            <para>For users of QLayout subclasses or of QMainWindow there is seldom any need to use the basic functions provided by QLayout, such as setSizeConstraint() or setMenuBar(). See Layout Management for more information.</para>
            <para>To make your own layout manager, implement the functions addItem(), sizeHint(), setGeometry(), itemAt() and takeAt(). You should also implement minimumSize() to ensure your layout isn't resized to zero size if there is too little space. To support children whose heights depend on their widths, implement hasHeightForWidth() and heightForWidth(). See the Border Layout and Flow Layout examples for more information about implementing custom layout managers.</para>
            <para>Geometry management stops when the layout manager is deleted.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLayoutItem, Layout Management, Basic Layouts Example, Border Layout Example, and Flow Layout Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new child QLayout.</para>
            <para>This layout has to be inserted into another layout before geometry management will work.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new top-level QLayout, with parent parent. parent may not be 0.</para>
            <para>There can be only one top-level layout for a widget. It is returned by QWidget::layout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.Activate">
            <summary>
            <para>Redoes the layout for parentWidget() if necessary.</para>
            <para>You should generally not need to call this because it is automatically called at the most appropriate times. It returns true if the layout was redone.</para>
            <para>See also update() and QWidget::updateGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.AddChildLayout(QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called from addLayout() or insertLayout() functions in subclasses to add layout l as a sub-layout.</para>
            <para>The only scenario in which you need to call it directly is if you implement a custom layout that supports nested layouts.</para>
            <para>See also QBoxLayout::addLayout(), QBoxLayout::insertLayout(), and QGridLayout::addLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.AddChildWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called from addWidget() functions in subclasses to add w as a managed widget of a layout.</para>
            <para>If w is already managed by a layout, this function will give a warning and remove w from that layout. This function must therefore be called before adding w to the layout's data structure.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Implemented in subclasses to add an item. How it is added is specific to each subclass.</para>
            <para>This function is not usually called in application code. To add a widget to a layout, use the addWidget() function; to add a child layout, use the addLayout() function provided by the relevant QLayout subclass.</para>
            <para>Note: The ownership of item is transferred to the layout, and it's the layout's responsibility to delete it.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), QBoxLayout::addLayout(), and QGridLayout::addLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds widget w to this layout in a manner specific to the layout. This function uses addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.AlignmentRect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle that should be covered when the geometry of this layout is set to r, provided that this layout supports setAlignment().</para>
            <para>The result is derived from sizeHint() and expanding(). It is never larger than r.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.ClosestAcceptableSize(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a size that satisfies all size constraints on widget, including heightForWidth() and that is as close as possible to size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.ContentsRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout's geometry() rectangle, but taking into account the contents margins.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setContentsMargins() and getContentsMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Must be implemented in subclasses to return the number of items in the layout.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().</para>
            <para>Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Qt::Vertical or Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas Qt::Vertical | Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical. Subclasses reimplement it to return a meaningful value based on their child widgets's size policies.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.GetContentsMargins(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Extracts the left, top, right, and bottom margins used around the layout, and assigns them to *left, *top, *right, and *bottom (unless they are null pointers).</para>
            <para>By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setContentsMargins(), QStyle::pixelMetric(), PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.IndexOf(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Searches for widget widget in this layout (not including child layouts).</para>
            <para>Returns the index of widget, or -1 if widget is not found.</para>
            <para>The default implementation iterates over all items using itemAt()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.IsEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Must be implemented in subclasses to return the layout item at index. If there is no such item, the function must return 0. Items are numbered consecutively from 0. If an item is deleted, other items will be renumbered.</para>
            <para>This function can be used to iterate over a layout. The following code will draw a rectangle for each layout item in the layout structure of the widget.</para>
            <para> static void paintLayout(QPainter *painter, QLayoutItem *item)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QLayout *layout = item-&gt;layout();</para>
            <para>     if (layout) {</para>
            <para>         for (int i = 0; i &lt; layout-&gt;count(); ++i)</para>
            <para>             paintLayout(painter, layout-&gt;itemAt(i));</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     painter-&gt;drawRect(item-&gt;geometry());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     if (layout())</para>
            <para>         paintLayout(&amp;painter, layout());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also count() and takeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.Layout">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::layout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().</para>
            <para>Returns the maximum size of this layout. This is the largest size that the layout can have while still respecting the specifications.</para>
            <para>The returned value doesn't include the space required by QWidget::setContentsMargins() or menuBar().</para>
            <para>The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            <para>Returns the minimum size of this layout. This is the smallest size that the layout can have while still respecting the specifications.</para>
            <para>The returned value doesn't include the space required by QWidget::setContentsMargins() or menuBar().</para>
            <para>The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.ParentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the parent widget of this layout, or 0 if this layout is not installed on any widget.</para>
            <para>If the layout is a sub-layout, this function returns the parent widget of the parent layout.</para>
            <para>See also parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.RemoveItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the layout item item from the layout. It is the caller's responsibility to delete the item.</para>
            <para>Notice that item can be a layout (since QLayout inherits QLayoutItem).</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget() and addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.RemoveWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the widget widget from the layout. After this call, it is the caller's responsibility to give the widget a reasonable geometry or to put the widget back into a layout.</para>
            <para>Note: The ownership of widget remains the same as when it was added.</para>
            <para>See also removeItem(), QWidget::setGeometry(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.SetAlignment(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment for widget w to alignment and returns true if w is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.SetAlignment(QtGui.QLayout,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment for widget w to alignment and returns true if w is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.SetContentsMargins(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the left, top, right, and bottom margins to use around the layout.</para>
            <para>By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also contentsMargins(), getContentsMargins(), QStyle::pixelMetric(), PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.SetEnabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables this layout if enable is true, otherwise disables it.</para>
            <para>An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled layout acts as if it did not exist.</para>
            <para>By default all layouts are enabled.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.TakeAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Must be implemented in subclasses to remove the layout item at index from the layout, and return the item. If there is no such item, the function must do nothing and return 0. Items are numbered consecutively from 0. If an item is removed, other items will be renumbered.</para>
            <para>The following code fragment shows a safe way to remove all items from a layout:</para>
            <para> QLayoutItem *child;</para>
            <para> while ((child = layout-&gt;takeAt(0)) != 0) {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     delete child;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also itemAt() and count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayout.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the layout for parentWidget().</para>
            <para>You should generally not need to call this because it is automatically called at the most appropriate times.</para>
            <para>See also activate() and invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment for widget w to alignment and returns true if w is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.ContentsMargins">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the margins used around the layout.</para>
            <para>By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the margins to use around the layout.</para>
            <para>By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::geometry().</para>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.MenuBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the menu bar set for this layout, or 0 if no menu bar is set.</para>
            <para>Tells the geometry manager to place the menu bar widget at the top of parentWidget(), outside QWidget::contentsMargins(). All child widgets are placed below the bottom edge of the menu bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.Margin">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the width of the outside border of the layout.</para>
            <para>Use setContentsMargins() and getContentsMargins() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.Spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the spacing between widgets inside the layout.</para>
            <para>If no value is explicitly set, the layout's spacing is inherited from the parent layout, or from the style settings for the parent widget.</para>
            <para>For QGridLayout and QFormLayout, it is possible to set different horizontal and vertical spacings using setHorizontalSpacing() and setVerticalSpacing(). In that case, spacing() returns -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayout.sizeConstraint">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the resize mode of the layout.</para>
            <para>The default mode is SetDefaultConstraint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint">
            <summary>
            <para>The possible values are:</para>
            <para>See also setSizeConstraint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint.SetDefaultConstraint">
            <summary>
            <para>The main widget's minimum size is set to minimumSize(), unless the widget already has a minimum size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint.SetFixedSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The main widget's size is set to sizeHint(); it cannot be resized at all.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint.SetMaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The main widget's maximum size is set to maximumSize(); it cannot be larger.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint.SetMinAndMaxSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The main widget's minimum size is set to minimumSize() and its maximum size is set to maximumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint.SetMinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The main widget's minimum size is set to minimumSize(); it cannot be smaller.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLayout.SizeConstraint.SetNoConstraint">
            <summary>
            <para>The widget is not constrained.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QBoxLayout.Direction,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QBoxLayout with direction dir and parent widget parent.</para>
            <para>See also direction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddLayout(QtGui.QLayout,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds layout to the end of the box, with serial stretch factor stretch.</para>
            <para>See also insertLayout(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddSpacerItem(QtGui.QSpacerItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds spacerItem to the end of this box layout.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also addSpacing() and addStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddSpacing(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a non-stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) with size size to the end of this box layout. QBoxLayout provides default margin and spacing. This function adds additional space.</para>
            <para>See also insertSpacing(), addItem(), and QSpacerItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddStretch(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) with zero minimum size and stretch factor stretch to the end of this box layout.</para>
            <para>See also insertStretch(), addItem(), and QSpacerItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddStrut(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Limits the perpendicular dimension of the box (e.g. height if the box is LeftToRight) to a minimum of size. Other constraints may increase the limit.</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds widget to the end of this box layout, with a stretch factor of stretch and alignment alignment.</para>
            <para>The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.</para>
            <para>If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            <para>See also insertWidget(), addItem(), addLayout(), addStretch(), addSpacing(), and addStrut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.HasHeightForWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts item into this box layout at position index. If index is negative, the item is added at the end.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), insertWidget(), insertLayout(), insertStretch(), and insertSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.InsertLayout(System.Int32,QtGui.QLayout,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts layout at position index, with stretch factor stretch. If index is negative, the layout is added at the end.</para>
            <para>layout becomes a child of the box layout.</para>
            <para>See also addLayout() and insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.InsertSpacerItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QSpacerItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts spacerItem at position index, with zero minimum size and stretch factor. If index is negative the space is added at the end.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also addSpacerItem(), insertStretch(), and insertSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.InsertSpacing(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a non-stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) at position index, with size size. If index is negative the space is added at the end.</para>
            <para>The box layout has default margin and spacing. This function adds additional space.</para>
            <para>See also addSpacing(), insertItem(), and QSpacerItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.InsertStretch(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) at position index, with zero minimum size and stretch factor stretch. If index is negative the space is added at the end.</para>
            <para>See also addStretch(), insertItem(), and QSpacerItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.InsertWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts widget at position index, with stretch factor stretch and alignment alignment. If index is negative, the widget is added at the end.</para>
            <para>The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.</para>
            <para>If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget() and insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().</para>
            <para>Resets cached information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.MinimumHeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.SetStretch(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor at position index. to stretch.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also stretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.SetStretchFactor(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor for widget to stretch and returns true if widget is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.SetStretchFactor(QtGui.QLayout,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor for the layout layout to stretch and returns true if layout is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Stretch(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor at position index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.TakeAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this box layout.</para>
            <para>The layout's widgets aren't destroyed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBoxLayout.direction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the direction of the box. addWidget() and addSpacing() work in this direction; the stretch stretches in this direction.</para>
            <para>Sets the direction of this layout to direction.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QBoxLayout.spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplements QLayout::spacing(). If the spacing property is valid, that value is returned. Otherwise, a value for the spacing property is computed and returned. Since layout spacing in a widget is style dependent, if the parent is a widget, it queries the style for the (horizontal or vertical) spacing of the layout. Otherwise, the parent is a layout, and it queries the parent layout for the spacing().</para>
            <para>Reimplements QLayout::setSpacing(). Sets the spacing property to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Direction">
            <summary>
            <para>This type is used to determine the direction of a box layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Direction.BottomToTop">
            <summary>
            <para>Vertical from bottom to top.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Direction.LeftToRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Horizontal from left to right.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Direction.RightToLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Horizontal from right to left.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QBoxLayout.Direction.TopToBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>Vertical from top to bottom.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QButtonGroup">
            <summary>
            The QButtonGroup class provides a container to organize groups of button widgets.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QButtonGroup provides an abstract container into which button widgets can be placed. It does not provide a visual representation of this container (see QGroupBox for a container widget), but instead manages the states of each of the buttons in the group.</para>
            <para>An exclusive button group switches off all checkable (toggle) buttons except the one that was clicked. By default, a button group is exclusive. The buttons in a button group are usually checkable QPushButton's, QCheckBoxes (normally for non-exclusive button groups), or QRadioButtons. If you create an exclusive button group, you should ensure that one of the buttons in the group is initially checked; otherwise, the group will initially be in a state where no buttons are checked.</para>
            <para>A button is added to the group with addButton(). It can be removed from the group with removeButton(). If the group is exclusive, the currently checked button is available as checkedButton(). If a button is clicked the buttonClicked() signal is emitted. For a checkable button in an exclusive group this means that the button was checked. The list of buttons in the group is returned by buttons().</para>
            <para>In addition, QButtonGroup can map between integers and buttons. You can assign an integer id to a button with setId(), and retrieve it with id(). The id of the currently checked button is available with checkedId(), and there is an overloaded signal buttonClicked() which emits the id of the button. The id -1 is reserved by QButtonGroup to mean &amp;quot;no such button&amp;quot;. The purpose of the mapping mechanism is to simplify the representation of enum values in a user interface.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGroupBox, QPushButton, QCheckBox, and QRadioButton.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new, empty button group with the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also addButton() and setExclusive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.AddButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given button to the end of the group's internal list of buttons. An id will be assigned to the button by this QButtonGroup. Automatically assigned ids are guaranteed to be negative, starting with -2. If you are also assigning your own ids, use positive values to avoid conflicts.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton() and buttons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.AddButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given button to the button group, with the given id. It is recommended to assign only positive ids.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton() and buttons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.Button(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button with the specified id, or 0 if no such button exists.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.OnButtonClicked(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is clicked. A button is clicked when it is first pressed and then released, when its shortcut key is typed, or programmatically when QAbstractButton::click() or QAbstractButton::animateClick() is called.</para>
            <para>See also checkedButton() and QAbstractButton::clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.OnButtonClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button with the given id is clicked.</para>
            <para>See also checkedButton() and QAbstractButton::clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.OnButtonPressed(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.OnButtonPressed(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button with the given id is pressed down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.OnButtonReleased(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is released.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::released().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.OnButtonReleased(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button with the given id is released.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::released().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of this groups's buttons. This may be empty.</para>
            <para>See also addButton() and removeButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.CheckedButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button group's checked button, or 0 if no buttons are checked.</para>
            <para>See also buttonClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.CheckedId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the id of the checkedButton(), or -1 if no button is checked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.Id(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the id for the specified button, or -1 if no such button exists.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.RemoveButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given button from the button group.</para>
            <para>See also addButton() and buttons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.SetId(QtGui.QAbstractButton,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the id for the specified button. Note that id can not be -1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also id().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QButtonGroup.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the button group.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QButtonGroup.ButtonClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is clicked. A button is clicked when it is first pressed and then released, when its shortcut key is typed, or programmatically when QAbstractButton::click() or QAbstractButton::animateClick() is called.</para>
            <para>See also checkedButton() and QAbstractButton::clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QButtonGroup.ButtonPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QButtonGroup.ButtonReleased">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is released.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::released().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QButtonGroup.Exclusive">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button group is exclusive.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then only one button in the group can be checked at any given time. The user can click on any button to check it, and that button will replace the existing one as the checked button in the group.</para>
            <para>In an exclusive group, the user cannot uncheck the currently checked button by clicking on it; instead, another button in the group must be clicked to set the new checked button for that group.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCalendarWidget">
            <summary>
            The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly based calendar widget allowing the user to select a date.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The widget is initialized with the current month and year, but QCalendarWidget provides several public slots to change the year and month that is shown.</para>
            <para>By default, today's date is selected, and the user can select a date using both mouse and keyboard. The currently selected date can be retrieved using the selectedDate() function. It is possible to constrain the user selection to a given date range by setting the minimumDate and maximumDate properties. Alternatively, both properties can be set in one go using the setDateRange() convenience slot. Set the selectionMode property to NoSelection to prohibit the user from selecting at all. Note that a date also can be selected programmatically using the setSelectedDate() slot.</para>
            <para>The currently displayed month and year can be retrieved using the monthShown() and yearShown() functions, respectively.</para>
            <para>A newly created calendar widget uses abbreviated day names, and both Saturdays and Sundays are marked in red. The calendar grid is not visible. The week numbers are displayed, and the first column day is Sunday.</para>
            <para>The notation of the days can be altered to a single letter abbreviations (&amp;quot;M&amp;quot; for &amp;quot;Monday&amp;quot;) by setting the horizontalHeaderFormat property to QCalendarWidget::SingleLetterDayNames. Setting the same property to QCalendarWidget::LongDayNames makes the header display the complete day names. The week numbers can be removed by setting the verticalHeaderFormat property to QCalendarWidget::NoVerticalHeader. The calendar grid can be turned on by setting the gridVisible property to true using the setGridVisible() function:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QCalendarWidget *calendar;</para>
            <para> calendar-&amp;gt;setGridVisible(true);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Finally, the day in the first column can be altered using the setFirstDayOfWeek() function.</para>
            <para>The QCalendarWidget class also provides three signals, selectionChanged(), activated() and currentPageChanged() making it possible to respond to user interaction.</para>
            <para>The rendering of the headers, weekdays or single days can be largely customized by setting QTextCharFormat's for some special weekday, a special date or for the rendering of the headers.</para>
            <para>Only a subset of the properties in QTextCharFormat are used by the calendar widget. Currently, the foreground, background and font properties are used to determine the rendering of individual cells in the widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDate, QDateEdit, and QTextCharFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a calendar widget with the given parent.</para>
            <para>The widget is initialized with the current month and year, and the currently selected date is today.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnActivated(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the Return or Enter key or double-clicks a date in the calendar widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnClicked(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The date the mouse was clicked on is specified by date. The signal is only emitted when clicked on a valid date, e.g., dates are not outside the minimumDate() and maximumDate(). If the selection mode is NoSelection, this signal will not be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnCurrentPageChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the currently shown month is changed. The new year and month are passed as parameters.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.DateTextFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QMap from QDate to QTextCharFormat showing all dates that use a special format that alters their rendering.</para>
            <para>See also setDateTextFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.DateTextFormat(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QTextCharFormat for date. The char format can be be empty if the date is not renderd specially.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.MonthShown">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently displayed month. Months are numbered from 1 to 12.</para>
            <para>See also yearShown() and setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.PaintCell(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Paints the cell specified by the given date, using the given painter and rect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.OnSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the currently selected date is changed.</para>
            <para>The currently selected date can be changed by the user using the mouse or keyboard, or by the programmer using setSelectedDate().</para>
            <para>See also selectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SetCurrentPage(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays the given month of the given year without changing the selected date. Use the setSelectedDate() function to alter the selected date.</para>
            <para>The currently displayed month and year can be retrieved using the monthShown() and yearShown() functions respectively.</para>
            <para>See also yearShown(), monthShown(), showPreviousMonth(), showNextMonth(), showPreviousYear(), and showNextYear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SetDateRange(QtCore.QDate,QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines a date range by setting the minimumDate and maximumDate properties.</para>
            <para>The date range restricts the user selection, i.e. the user can only select dates within the specified date range. Note that</para>
            <para> QCalendarWidget *calendar;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setDateRange(min, max);</para>
            <para>is analogous to</para>
            <para> QCalendarWidget *calendar;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setMinimumDate(min);</para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setMaximumDate(max);</para>
            <para>If either the min or max parameters are not valid QDate objects, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimumDate() and setMaximumDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SetDateTextFormat(QtCore.QDate,QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the format used to render the given date to that specified by format.</para>
            <para>If date is null, all date formats are cleared.</para>
            <para>See also dateTextFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SetWeekdayTextFormat(QtCore.Qt.DayOfWeek,QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text char format for rendering of day in the week dayOfWeek to format. The format will take precedence over the header format in case of foreground and background color. Other text formatting information is taken from the headers format.</para>
            <para>See also weekdayTextFormat() and setHeaderTextFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.ShowNextMonth">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the next month relative to the currently displayed month. Note that the selected date is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also showPreviousMonth(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.ShowNextYear">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the currently displayed month in the next year relative to the currently displayed year. Note that the selected date is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also showPreviousYear(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.ShowPreviousMonth">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the previous month relative to the currently displayed month. Note that the selected date is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also showNextMonth(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.ShowPreviousYear">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the currently displayed month in the previous year relative to the currently displayed year. Note that the selected date is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also showNextYear(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.ShowSelectedDate">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the month of the selected date.</para>
            <para>See also selectedDate() and setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.ShowToday">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the month of the today's date.</para>
            <para>See also selectedDate() and setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.UpdateCell(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the cell specified by the given date unless updates are disabled or the cell is hidden.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also updateCells(), yearShown(), and monthShown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.UpdateCells">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates all visible cells unless updates are disabled.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also updateCell().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.WeekdayTextFormat(QtCore.Qt.DayOfWeek)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text char format for rendering of day in the week dayOfWeek.</para>
            <para>See also setWeekdayTextFormat() and headerTextFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.YearShown">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the year of the currently displayed month. Months are numbered from 1 to 12.</para>
            <para>See also monthShown() and setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the calendar widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the currently selected date is changed.</para>
            <para>The currently selected date can be changed by the user using the mouse or keyboard, or by the programmer using setSelectedDate().</para>
            <para>See also selectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The date the mouse was clicked on is specified by date. The signal is only emitted when clicked on a valid date, e.g., dates are not outside the minimumDate() and maximumDate(). If the selection mode is NoSelection, this signal will not be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the Return or Enter key or double-clicks a date in the calendar widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.CurrentPageChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the currently shown month is changed. The new year and month are passed as parameters.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HeaderTextFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text char format for rendering the header.</para>
            <para>Sets the text char format for rendering the header to format. If you also set a weekday text format, this format's foreground and background color will take precedence over the header's format. The other formatting information will still be decided by the header's format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SelectedDate">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the currently selected date.</para>
            <para>The selected date must be within the date range specified by the minimumDate and maximumDate properties. By default, the selected date is the current date.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.MinimumDate">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum date of the currently specified date range.</para>
            <para>The user will not be able to select a date that is before the currently set minimum date.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QCalendarWidget *calendar;</para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setGridVisible(true);</para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setMinimumDate(QDate(2006, 6, 19));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>By default, the minimum date is the earliest date that the QDate class can handle.</para>
            <para>When setting a minimum date, the maximumDate and selectedDate properties are adjusted if the selection range becomes invalid. If the provided date is not a valid QDate object, the setMinimumDate() function does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.MaximumDate">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum date of the currently specified date range.</para>
            <para>The user will not be able to select a date which is after the currently set maximum date.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QCalendarWidget *calendar;</para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setGridVisible(true);</para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setMaximumDate(QDate(2006, 7, 3));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>By default, the maximum date is the last day the QDate class can handle.</para>
            <para>When setting a maximum date, the minimumDate and selectedDate properties are adjusted if the selection range becomes invalid. If the provided date is not a valid QDate object, the setMaximumDate() function does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.FirstDayOfWeek">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds a value identifying the day displayed in the first column.</para>
            <para>By default, the day displayed in the first column is Sunday</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.GridVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the table grid is displayed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QCalendarWidget *calendar;</para>
            <para> calendar-&gt;setGridVisible(true);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.selectionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the type of selection the user can make in the calendar.</para>
            <para>When this property is set to SingleSelection, the user can select a date within the minimum and maximum allowed dates, using either the mouse or the keyboard.</para>
            <para>When the property is set to NoSelection, the user will be unable to select dates, but they can still be selected programmatically. Note that the date that is selected when the property is set to NoSelection will still be the selected date of the calendar.</para>
            <para>The default value is SingleSelection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.horizontalHeaderFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the format of the horizontal header.</para>
            <para>The default value is QCalendarWidget::ShortDayNames.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.verticalHeaderFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the format of the vertical header.</para>
            <para>The default value is QCalendarWidget::ISOWeekNumber.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HeaderVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the navigation bar is shown or not.</para>
            <para>Use navigationBarVisible() instead.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.NavigationBarVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the navigation bar is shown or not.</para>
            <para>When this property is true (the default), the next month, previous month, month selection, year selection controls are shown on top.</para>
            <para>When the property is set to false, these controls are hidden.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.DateEditEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the date edit popup is enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is enabled, pressing a non-modifier key will cause a date edit to popup if the calendar widget has focus, allowing the user to specify a date in the form specified by the current locale.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is enabled.</para>
            <para>The date edit is simpler in appearance than QDateEdit, but allows the user to navigate between fields using the left and right cursor keys, increment and decrement individual fields using the up and down cursor keys, and enter values directly using the number keys.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.DateEditAcceptDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the time an inactive date edit is shown before its contents are accepted.</para>
            <para>If the calendar widget's date edit is enabled, this property specifies the amount of time (in millseconds) that the date edit remains open after the most recent user input. Once this time has elapsed, the date specified in the date edit is accepted and the popup is closed.</para>
            <para>By default, the delay is defined to be 1500 milliseconds (1.5 seconds).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HorizontalHeaderFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the various formats the horizontal header can display.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalHeaderFormat() and VerticalHeaderFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HorizontalHeaderFormat.LongDayNames">
            <summary>
            <para>The header displays complete day names (e.g. Monday).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HorizontalHeaderFormat.NoHorizontalHeader">
            <summary>
            <para>The header is hidden.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HorizontalHeaderFormat.ShortDayNames">
            <summary>
            <para>The header displays a short abbreviation for day names (e.g. Mon for Monday).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.HorizontalHeaderFormat.SingleLetterDayNames">
            <summary>
            <para>The header displays a single letter abbreviation for day names (e.g. M for Monday).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SelectionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types of selection offered to the user for selecting dates in the calendar.</para>
            <para>See also selectionMode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SelectionMode.NoSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Dates cannot be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.SelectionMode.SingleSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Single dates can be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.VerticalHeaderFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the various formats the vertical header can display.</para>
            <para>See also verticalHeaderFormat() and HorizontalHeaderFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.VerticalHeaderFormat.ISOWeekNumbers">
            <summary>
            <para>The header displays ISO week numbers as described by QDate::weekNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCalendarWidget.VerticalHeaderFormat.NoVerticalHeader">
            <summary>
            <para>The header is hidden.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCheckBox">
            <summary>
            The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QCheckBox is an option button that can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). Checkboxes are typically used to represent features in an application that can be enabled or disabled without affecting others, but different types of behavior can be implemented. For example, a QButtonGroup can be used to group check buttons logically, allowing exclusive checkboxes. However, QButtonGroup does not provide any visual representation.</para>
            <para>The image below further illustrates the differences between exclusive and non-exclusive checkboxes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Whenever a checkbox is checked or cleared it emits the signal stateChanged(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action each time the checkbox changes state. You can use isChecked() to query whether or not a checkbox is checked.</para>
            <para>In addition to the usual checked and unchecked states, QCheckBox optionally provides a third state to indicate &amp;quot;no change&amp;quot;. This is useful whenever you need to give the user the option of neither checking nor unchecking a checkbox. If you need this third state, enable it with setTristate(), and use checkState() to query the current toggle state.</para>
            <para>Just like QPushButton, a checkbox displays text, and optionally a small icon. The icon is set with setIcon(). The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(). A shortcut key can be specified by preceding the preferred character with an ampersand. For example:</para>
            <para> QCheckBox *checkbox = new QCheckBox(&amp;quot;C&amp;amp;ase sensitive&amp;quot;, this);</para>
            <para>In this example the shortcut is Alt+A. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;amp;&amp;amp;').</para>
            <para>Important inherited functions: text(), setText(), text(), pixmap(), setPixmap(), accel(), setAccel(), isToggleButton(), setDown(), isDown(), isOn(), checkState(), autoRepeat(), isExclusiveToggle(), group(), setAutoRepeat(), toggle(), pressed(), released(), clicked(), toggled(), checkState(), and stateChanged().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A checkbox shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A checkbox shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A checkbox shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton, QRadioButton, and GUI Design Handbook: Check Box.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a checkbox with the given parent, but with no text.</para>
            <para>parent is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a checkbox with the given parent and text.</para>
            <para>parent is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.CheckStateSet">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::checkStateSet().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.HitButton(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::hitButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initializes option with the values from this QCheckBox. This method is useful for subclasses that require a QStyleOptionButton, but do not want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.NextCheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::nextCheckState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCheckBox.OnStateChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the check box's state changes, i.e. whenever the user checks or unchecks it.</para>
            <para>state contains the check box's new Qt::CheckState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCheckBox.StateChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the check box's state changes, i.e. whenever the user checks or unchecks it.</para>
            <para>state contains the check box's new Qt::CheckState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCheckBox.CheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the check box's check state. If you do not need tristate support, you can also use QAbstractButton::isChecked() which returns a boolean.</para>
            <para>Sets the check box's check state to state. If you do not need tristate support, you can also use QAbstractButton::setChecked() which takes a boolean.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCheckBox.Tristate">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox.</para>
            <para>The default is false; i.e. the checkbox has only two states.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QClipboard">
            <summary>
            The QClipboard class provides access to the window system clipboard.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The clipboard offers a simple mechanism to copy and paste data between applications.</para>
            <para>QClipboard supports the same data types that QDrag does, and uses similar mechanisms. For advanced clipboard usage read Drag and Drop.</para>
            <para>There is a single QClipboard object in an application, accessible as QApplication::clipboard().</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QClipboard *clipboard = QApplication::clipboard();</para>
            <para> QString originalText = clipboard-&amp;gt;text();</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> clipboard-&amp;gt;setText(newText);</para>
            <para>QClipboard features some convenience functions to access common data types: setText() allows the exchange of Unicode text and setPixmap() and setImage() allows the exchange of QPixmaps and QImages between applications. The setMimeData() function is the ultimate in flexibility: it allows you to add any QMimeData into the clipboard. There are corresponding getters for each of these, e.g. text(), image() and pixmap(). You can clear the clipboard by calling clear().</para>
            <para>A typical example of the use of these functions follows:</para>
            <para> void DropArea::paste()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     const QClipboard *clipboard = QApplication::clipboard();</para>
            <para>     const QMimeData *mimeData = clipboard-&amp;gt;mimeData();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     if (mimeData-&amp;gt;hasImage()) {</para>
            <para>         setPixmap(qvariant_cast&amp;lt;QPixmap&amp;gt;(mimeData-&amp;gt;imageData()));</para>
            <para>     } else if (mimeData-&amp;gt;hasHtml()) {</para>
            <para>         setText(mimeData-&amp;gt;html());</para>
            <para>         setTextFormat(Qt::RichText);</para>
            <para>     } else if (mimeData-&amp;gt;hasText()) {</para>
            <para>         setText(mimeData-&amp;gt;text());</para>
            <para>         setTextFormat(Qt::PlainText);</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         setText(tr(&amp;quot;Cannot display data&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Notes for X11 Users</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The X11 Window System has the concept of a separate selection and clipboard. When text is selected, it is immediately available as the global mouse selection. The global mouse selection may later be copied to the clipboard. By convention, the middle mouse button is used to paste the global mouse selection.</para>
            <para>X11 also has the concept of ownership; if you change the selection within a window, X11 will only notify the owner and the previous owner of the change, i.e. it will not notify all applications that the selection or clipboard data changed.</para>
            <para>Lastly, the X11 clipboard is event driven, i.e. the clipboard will not function properly if the event loop is not running. Similarly, it is recommended that the contents of the clipboard are stored or retrieved in direct response to user-input events, e.g. mouse button or key presses and releases. You should not store or retrieve the clipboard contents in response to timer or non-user-input events.</para>
            <para>Since there is no standard way to copy and paste files between applications on X11, various MIME types and conventions are currently in use. For instance, Nautilus expects files to be supplied with a x-special/gnome-copied-files MIME type with data beginning with the cut/copy action, a newline character, and the URL of the file.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Notes for Mac OS X Users</para>
            <para>Mac OS X supports a separate find buffer that holds the current search string in Find operations. This find clipboard can be accessed by specifying the FindBuffer mode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Notes for Windows and Mac OS X Users</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Windows and Mac OS X do not support the global mouse selection; they only supports the global clipboard, i.e. they only add text to the clipboard when an explicit copy or cut is made.</para>
            <para>Windows and Mac OS X does not have the concept of ownership; the clipboard is a fully global resource so all applications are notified of changes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QApplication.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OnChanged(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the data for the given clipboard mode is changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), selectionChanged(), and findBufferChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.Clear(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Clear the clipboard contents.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, this function clears the global clipboard contents. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, this function clears the global mouse selection contents. If mode is QClipboard::FindBuffer, this function clears the search string buffer.</para>
            <para>See also QClipboard::Mode and supportsSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OnDataChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the clipboard data is changed.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X and with Qt version 4.3 or higher, clipboard changes made by other applications will only be detected when the application is activated.</para>
            <para>See also findBufferChanged(), selectionChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OnFindBufferChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the find buffer is changed. This only applies to Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>With Qt version 4.3 or higher, clipboard changes made by other applications will only be detected when the application is activated.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), selectionChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.Image(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clipboard image, or returns a null image if the clipboard does not contain an image or if it contains an image in an unsupported image format.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the image is retrieved from the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the image is retrieved from the global mouse selection.</para>
            <para>See also setImage(), pixmap(), mimeData(), and QImage::isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.MimeData(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a reference to a QMimeData representation of the current clipboard data.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the data is retrieved from the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the data is retrieved from the global mouse selection. If mode is QClipboard::FindBuffer, the data is retrieved from the search string buffer.</para>
            <para>The text(), image(), and pixmap() functions are simpler wrappers for retrieving text, image, and pixmap data.</para>
            <para>See also setMimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OwnsClipboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OwnsFindBuffer">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this clipboard object owns the find buffer data; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OwnsSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection data; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.Pixmap(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clipboard pixmap, or null if the clipboard does not contain a pixmap. Note that this can lose information. For example, if the image is 24-bit and the display is 8-bit, the result is converted to 8 bits, and if the image has an alpha channel, the result just has a mask.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the pixmap is retrieved from the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the pixmap is retrieved from the global mouse selection.</para>
            <para>See also setPixmap(), image(), mimeData(), and QPixmap::convertFromImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.OnSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the selection is changed. This only applies to windowing systems that support selections, e.g. X11. Windows and Mac OS X don't support selections.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), findBufferChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.SetImage(QtGui.QImage,QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the image into the clipboard.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the image is stored in the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the data is stored in the global mouse selection.</para>
            <para>This is shorthand for:</para>
            <para> QMimeData *data = new QMimeData;</para>
            <para> data-&gt;setImageData(image);</para>
            <para> clipboard-&gt;setMimeData(data, mode);</para>
            <para>See also image(), setPixmap(), and setMimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.SetMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData,QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the clipboard data to src. Ownership of the data is transferred to the clipboard. If you want to remove the data either call clear() or call setMimeData() again with new data.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the data is stored in the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the data is stored in the global mouse selection. If mode is QClipboard::FindBuffer, the data is stored in the search string buffer.</para>
            <para>The setText(), setImage() and setPixmap() functions are simpler wrappers for setting text, image and pixmap data respectively.</para>
            <para>See also mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.SetPixmap(QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies pixmap into the clipboard. Note that this is slower than setImage() because it needs to convert the QPixmap to a QImage first.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the pixmap is stored in the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the pixmap is stored in the global mouse selection.</para>
            <para>See also pixmap(), setImage(), and setMimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.SetText(System.String,QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies text into the clipboard as plain text.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the text is stored in the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the text is stored in the global mouse selection. If mode is QClipboard::FindBuffer, the text is stored in the search string buffer.</para>
            <para>See also text() and setMimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.SupportsFindBuffer">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the clipboard supports a separate search buffer; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.SupportsSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.Text(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clipboard text as plain text, or an empty string if the clipboard does not contain any text.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the text is retrieved from the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the text is retrieved from the global mouse selection. If mode is QClipboard::FindBuffer, the text is retrieved from the search string buffer.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QClipboard.Text(System.String,QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the clipboard text in subtype subtype, or an empty string if the clipboard does not contain any text. If subtype is null, any subtype is acceptable, and subtype is set to the chosen subtype.</para>
            <para>The mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If mode is QClipboard::Clipboard, the text is retrieved from the global clipboard. If mode is QClipboard::Selection, the text is retrieved from the global mouse selection.</para>
            <para>Common values for subtype are &quot;plain&quot; and &quot;html&quot;.</para>
            <para>Note that calling this function repeatedly, for instance from a key event handler, may be slow. In such cases, you should use the dataChanged() signal instead.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QClipboard.Changed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the data for the given clipboard mode is changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), selectionChanged(), and findBufferChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QClipboard.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the selection is changed. This only applies to windowing systems that support selections, e.g. X11. Windows and Mac OS X don't support selections.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), findBufferChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QClipboard.FindBufferChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the find buffer is changed. This only applies to Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>With Qt version 4.3 or higher, clipboard changes made by other applications will only be detected when the application is activated.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), selectionChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QClipboard.DataChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the clipboard data is changed.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X and with Qt version 4.3 or higher, clipboard changes made by other applications will only be detected when the application is activated.</para>
            <para>See also findBufferChanged(), selectionChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QClipboard.Mode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used by QClipboard::mimeData(), QClipboard::setMimeData() and related functions.</para>
            <para>See also QClipboard::supportsSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QClipboard.Mode.Clipboard">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from the global clipboard.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QClipboard.Mode.FindBuffer">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from the Find buffer. This mode is used for holding search strings on Mac OS X.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QClipboard.Mode.Selection">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from the global mouse selection. Support for Selection is provided only on systems with a global mouse selection (e.g. X11).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCloseEvent">
            <summary>
            The QCloseEvent class contains parameters that describe a close event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Close events are sent to widgets that the user wants to close, usually by choosing &amp;quot;Close&amp;quot; from the window menu, or by clicking the X title bar button. They are also sent when you call QWidget::close() to close a widget programmatically.</para>
            <para>Close events contain a flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the widget to be closed or not. When a widget accepts the close event, it is hidden (and destroyed if it was created with the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag). If it refuses to accept the close event nothing happens. (Under X11 it is possible that the window manager will forcibly close the window; but at the time of writing we are not aware of any window manager that does this.)</para>
            <para>The event handler QWidget::closeEvent() receives close events. The default implementation of this event handler accepts the close event. If you do not want your widget to be hidden, or want some special handing, you should reimplement the event handler and ignore() the event.</para>
            <para>The closeEvent() in the Application example shows a close event handler that asks whether to save a document before closing.</para>
            <para>If you want the widget to be deleted when it is closed, create it with the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag. This is very useful for independent top-level windows in a multi-window application.</para>
            <para>QObjects emits the destroyed() signal when they are deleted.</para>
            <para>If the last top-level window is closed, the QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted.</para>
            <para>The isAccepted() function returns true if the event's receiver has agreed to close the widget; call accept() to agree to close the widget and call ignore() if the receiver of this event does not want the widget to be closed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget::close(), QWidget::hide(), QObject::destroyed(), QCoreApplication::exec(), QCoreApplication::quit(), and QApplication::lastWindowClosed().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCloseEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a close event object.</para>
            <para>See also accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCloseEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a close event object.</para>
            <para>See also accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColorDialog">
            <summary>
            The QColorDialog class provides a dialog widget for specifying colors.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The color dialog's function is to allow users to choose colors. For example, you might use this in a drawing program to allow the user to set the brush color.</para>
            <para>The static functions provide modal color dialogs.</para>
            <para>The static getColor() function shows the dialog, and allows the user to specify a color. This function can also be used to let users choose a color with a level of transparency: pass the ShowAlphaChannel option as an additional argument.</para>
            <para>The user can store customCount() different custom colors. The custom colors are shared by all color dialogs, and remembered during the execution of the program. Use setCustomColor() to set the custom colors, and use customColor() to get them.</para>
            <para>Additional widgets that allow users to pick colors are available as Qt Solutions.</para>
            <para>The Standard Dialogs example shows how to use QColorDialog as well as other built-in Qt dialogs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QColor, QFileDialog, QPrintDialog, QFontDialog, and Standard Dialogs Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a color dialog with the given parent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a color dialog with the given parent and specified initial color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.OnColorSelected(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just after the user has clicked OK to select a color to use. The chosen color is specified by color.</para>
            <para>See also color and currentColorChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.OnCurrentColorChanged(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current color changes in the dialog. The current color is specified by color.</para>
            <para>See also color and colorSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.CustomColor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the custom color at the given index as a QRgb value.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setCustomColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.CustomCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of custom colors supported by QColorDialog. All color dialogs share the same custom colors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            <para>Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.</para>
            <para>See also QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.GetColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or &quot;Select Color&quot; if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.</para>
            <para>The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.</para>
            <para>On Symbian, this static function will use the native color dialog and not a QColorDialog. On Symbian the parameters title and parent has no relevance and the options parameter is only used to define if the native color dialog is used or not.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.GetColor(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or &quot;Select Color&quot; if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.</para>
            <para>The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.</para>
            <para>On Symbian, this static function will use the native color dialog and not a QColorDialog. On Symbian the parameters title and parent has no relevance and the options parameter is only used to define if the native color dialog is used or not.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.GetColor(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QWidget,System.String,QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or &quot;Select Color&quot; if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.</para>
            <para>The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.</para>
            <para>On Symbian, this static function will use the native color dialog and not a QColorDialog. On Symbian the parameters title and parent has no relevance and the options parameter is only used to define if the native color dialog is used or not.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.GetRgba(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent.</para>
            <para>If ok is non-null, *a ok is set to true if the user clicked OK, and to false if the user clicked Cancel.</para>
            <para>If the user clicks Cancel, the initial value is returned.</para>
            <para>Use QColorDialog::getColor() instead, passing the QColorDialog::ShowAlphaChannel option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.GetRgba(System.UInt32,System.Boolean@,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent.</para>
            <para>If ok is non-null, *a ok is set to true if the user clicked OK, and to false if the user clicked Cancel.</para>
            <para>If the user clicks Cancel, the initial value is returned.</para>
            <para>Use QColorDialog::getColor() instead, passing the QColorDialog::ShowAlphaChannel option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the dialog as a window modal dialog, returning immediately.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QDialog::open().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its colorSelected() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.SelectedColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color that the user selected by clicking the OK or equivalent button.</para>
            <para>Note: This color is not always the same as the color held by the currentColor property since the user can choose different colors before finally selecting the one to use.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.SetCustomColor(System.Int32,System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the custom color at index to the QRgb color value.</para>
            <para>Note: This function does not apply to the Native Color Dialog on the Mac OS X platform. If you still require this function, use the QColorDialog::DontUseNativeDialog option.</para>
            <para>See also customColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.SetOption(QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>See also options and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.SetStandardColor(System.Int32,System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the standard color at index to the QRgb color value.</para>
            <para>Note: This function does not apply to the Native Color Dialog on the Mac OS X platform. If you still require this function, use the QColorDialog::DontUseNativeDialog option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            <para>Changes the visibility of the dialog. If visible is true, the dialog is shown; otherwise, it is hidden.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.TestOption(QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also options and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColorDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the color dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QColorDialog.CurrentColorChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current color changes in the dialog. The current color is specified by color.</para>
            <para>See also color and colorSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just after the user has clicked OK to select a color to use. The chosen color is specified by color.</para>
            <para>See also color and currentColorChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColorDialog.CurrentColor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the currently selected color in the dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColorDialog.Options">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the various options that affect the look and feel of the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, all options are disabled.</para>
            <para>Options should be set before showing the dialog. Setting them while the dialog is visible is not guaranteed to have an immediate effect on the dialog (depending on the option and on the platform).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies various options that affect the look and feel of a color dialog.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also options, setOption(), testOption(), and windowModality().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption.DontUseNativeDialog">
            <summary>
            <para>Use Qt's standard color dialog on the Mac instead of Apple's native color panel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption.NoButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't display OK and Cancel buttons. (Useful for &quot;live dialogs&quot;.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QColorDialog.ColorDialogOption.ShowAlphaChannel">
            <summary>
            <para>Allow the user to select the alpha component of a color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColormap">
            <summary>
            The QColormap class maps device independent QColors to device dependent pixel values.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.#ctor(QtGui.QColormap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of another colormap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.ColorAt(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QColor for the pixel.</para>
            <para>See also pixel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.Colormap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a vector of colors which represents the devices colormap for Indexed and Gray modes. This function returns an empty vector for Direct mode.</para>
            <para>See also size().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.Depth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the depth of the device.</para>
            <para>See also size().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.hPal">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is only available on Windows.</para>
            <para>Returns an handle to the HPALETTE used by this colormap. If no HPALETTE is being used, this function returns zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.Instance(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the colormap for the specified screen. If screen is -1, this function returns the colormap for the default screen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.mode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mode of this colormap.</para>
            <para>See also QColormap::Mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.Pixel(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a device dependent pixel value for the color.</para>
            <para>See also colorAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the colormap for Indexed and Gray modes; Returns -1 for Direct mode.</para>
            <para>See also colormap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColormap.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the colormap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColormap.Mode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how QColormap maps device independent RGB values to device dependent pixel values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QColormap.Mode.Direct">
            <summary>
            <para>Pixel values are derived directly from the RGB values, also known as &quot;True Color.&quot;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QColormap.Mode.Gray">
            <summary>
            <para>Similar to Indexed, pixel values represent a vector of available gray tones. QColormap uses the index of the gray tone that most closely matches the computed gray tone of an RGB value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QColormap.Mode.Indexed">
            <summary>
            <para>Pixel values represent indexes into a vector of available colors, i.e. QColormap uses the index of the color that most closely matches an RGB value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QColumnView">
            <summary>
            The QColumnView class provides a model/view implementation of a column view.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QColumnView displays a model in a number of QListViews, one for each hierarchy in the tree. This is sometimes referred to as a cascading list.</para>
            <para>The QColumnView class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>QColumnView implements the interfaces defined by the QAbstractItemView class to allow it to display data provided by models derived from the QAbstractItemModel class.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a column view with a parent to represent a model's data. Use setModel() to set the model.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.CreateColumn(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>To use a custom widget for the final column when you select an item overload this function and return a widget. index is the root index that will be assigned to the view.</para>
            <para>Return the new view. QColumnView will automatically take ownership of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also setPreviewWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.HorizontalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.IndexAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.InitializeColumn(QtGui.QAbstractItemView)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the behavior and options of the column view and applies them to the column such as the iconSize(), textElideMode() and alternatingRowColors(). This can be useful when reimplementing createColumn().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also createColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.IsIndexHidden(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.MoveCursor(QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().</para>
            <para>Move left should go to the parent index Move right should go to the child index or down if there is no child</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.RowsInserted(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsInserted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.ScrollTo(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectAll().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.SetSelection(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.OnUpdatePreviewWidget(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the preview widget should be updated to provide rich information about index</para>
            <para>See also previewWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.VerticalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.VisualRect(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.VisualRegionForSelection(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRegionForSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QColumnView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the column view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QColumnView.UpdatePreviewWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the preview widget should be updated to provide rich information about index</para>
            <para>See also previewWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColumnView.ColumnWidths">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the width of all the columns in this view.</para>
            <para>Sets the column widths to the values given in the list. Extra values in the list are kept and used when the columns are created.</para>
            <para>If list contains too few values, only width of the rest of the columns will not be modified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColumnView.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColumnView.PreviewWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preview widget, or 0 if there is none.</para>
            <para>Sets the preview widget.</para>
            <para>The widget becomes a child of the column view, and will be destroyed when the column area is deleted or when a new widget is set.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColumnView.RootIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setRootIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColumnView.SelectionModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QColumnView.ResizeGripsVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way to specify if the list views gets resize grips or not.</para>
            <para>By default, visible is set to true</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QComboBox">
            <summary>
            The QComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QComboBox provides a means of presenting a list of options to the user in a way that takes up the minimum amount of screen space.</para>
            <para>A combobox is a selection widget that displays the current item, and can pop up a list of selectable items. A combobox may be editable, allowing the user to modify each item in the list.</para>
            <para>Comboboxes can contain pixmaps as well as strings; the insertItem() and setItemText() functions are suitably overloaded. For editable comboboxes, the function clearEditText() is provided, to clear the displayed string without changing the combobox's contents.</para>
            <para>There are two signals emitted if the current item of a combobox changes, currentIndexChanged() and activated(). currentIndexChanged() is always emitted regardless if the change was done programmatically or by user interaction, while activated() is only emitted when the change is caused by user interaction. The highlighted() signal is emitted when the user highlights an item in the combobox popup list. All three signals exist in two versions, one with a QString argument and one with an int argument. If the user selects or highlights a pixmap, only the int signals are emitted. Whenever the text of an editable combobox is changed the editTextChanged() signal is emitted.</para>
            <para>When the user enters a new string in an editable combobox, the widget may or may not insert it, and it can insert it in several locations. The default policy is is AtBottom but you can change this using setInsertPolicy().</para>
            <para>It is possible to constrain the input to an editable combobox using QValidator; see setValidator(). By default, any input is accepted.</para>
            <para>A combobox can be populated using the insert functions, insertItem() and insertItems() for example. Items can be changed with setItemText(). An item can be removed with removeItem() and all items can be removed with clear(). The text of the current item is returned by currentText(), and the text of a numbered item is returned with text(). The current item can be set with setCurrentIndex(). The number of items in the combobox is returned by count(); the maximum number of items can be set with setMaxCount(). You can allow editing using setEditable(). For editable comboboxes you can set auto-completion using setCompleter() and whether or not the user can add duplicates is set with setDuplicatesEnabled().</para>
            <para>QComboBox uses the model/view framework for its popup list and to store its items. By default a QStandardItemModel stores the items and a QListView subclass displays the popuplist. You can access the model and view directly (with model() and view()), but QComboBox also provides functions to set and get item data (e.g., setItemData() and itemText()). You can also set a new model and view (with setModel() and setView()). For the text and icon in the combobox label, the data in the model that has the Qt::DisplayRole and Qt::DecorationRole is used. Note that you cannot alter the SelectionMode of the view(), e.g., by using setSelectionMode().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLineEdit, QSpinBox, QRadioButton, QButtonGroup, and GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box, Drop-Down List Box.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a combobox with the given parent, using the default model QStandardItemModel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnActivated(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when the user chooses an item in the combobox. The item's index is passed. Note that this signal is sent even when the choice is not changed. If you need to know when the choice actually changes, use signal currentIndexChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnActivated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when the user chooses an item in the combobox. The item's text is passed. Note that this signal is sent even when the choice is not changed. If you need to know when the choice actually changes, use signal currentIndexChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.AddItem(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.AddItem(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.AddItem(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.AddItem(System.String,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.AddItems(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds each of the strings in the given texts to the combobox. Each item is appended to the list of existing items in turn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the combobox, removing all items.</para>
            <para>Note: If you have set an external model on the combobox this model will still be cleared when calling this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.ClearEditText">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the contents of the line edit used for editing in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnCurrentIndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent whenever the currentIndex in the combobox changes either through user interaction or programmatically. The item's index is passed or -1 if the combobox becomes empty or the currentIndex was reset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnCurrentIndexChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent whenever the currentIndex in the combobox changes either through user interaction or programmatically. The item's text is passed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnEditTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the text in the combobox's line edit widget is changed. The new text is specified by text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.FindData(System.Object,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the item containing the given data for the given role; otherwise returns -1.</para>
            <para>The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.FindText(System.String,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the item containing the given text; otherwise returns -1.</para>
            <para>The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.HidePopup">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the list of items in the combobox if it is currently visible and resets the internal state, so that if the custom pop-up was shown inside the reimplemented showPopup(), then you also need to reimplement the hidePopup() function to hide your custom pop-up and call the base class implementation to reset the internal state whenever your custom pop-up widget is hidden.</para>
            <para>See also showPopup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnHighlighted(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the combobox popup list is highlighted by the user. The item's index is passed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnHighlighted(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the combobox popup list is highlighted by the user. The item's text is passed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QComboBox. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionComboBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.</para>
            <para>If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.</para>
            <para>See also insertItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon,System.String,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.</para>
            <para>If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.</para>
            <para>See also insertItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertItem(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.</para>
            <para>If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.</para>
            <para>See also insertItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertItem(System.Int32,System.String,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.</para>
            <para>If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.</para>
            <para>See also insertItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertItems(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the strings from the list into the combobox as separate items, starting at the index specified.</para>
            <para>If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new items are appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new items are prepended to the list of existing items.</para>
            <para>See also insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertSeparator(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a separator item into the combobox at the given index.</para>
            <para>If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.ItemData(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the data for the given role in the given index in the combobox, or QVariant::Invalid if there is no data for this role.</para>
            <para>See also setItemData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.ItemIcon(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon for the given index in the combobox.</para>
            <para>See also setItemIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.ItemText(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text for the given index in the combobox.</para>
            <para>See also setItemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.RemoveItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item at the given index from the combobox. This will update the current index if the index is removed.</para>
            <para>This function does nothing if index is out of range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.SetEditText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text in the combobox's text edit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.SetItemData(System.Int32,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the data role for the item on the given index in the combobox to the specified value.</para>
            <para>See also itemData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.SetItemIcon(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the icon for the item on the given index in the combobox.</para>
            <para>See also itemIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.SetItemText(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text for the item on the given index in the combobox.</para>
            <para>See also itemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.ShowPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays the list of items in the combobox. If the list is empty then the no items will be shown.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function to show a custom pop-up, make sure you call hidePopup() to reset the internal state.</para>
            <para>See also hidePopup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            <para>This implementation caches the size hint to avoid resizing when the contents change dynamically. To invalidate the cached value change the sizeAdjustPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QComboBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QComboBox.EditTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the text in the combobox's line edit widget is changed. The new text is specified by text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QComboBox.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when the user chooses an item in the combobox. The item's index is passed. Note that this signal is sent even when the choice is not changed. If you need to know when the choice actually changes, use signal currentIndexChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QComboBox.Highlighted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the combobox popup list is highlighted by the user. The item's index is passed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QComboBox.CurrentIndexChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent whenever the currentIndex in the combobox changes either through user interaction or programmatically. The item's index is passed or -1 if the combobox becomes empty or the currentIndex was reset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.Completer">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the completer that is used to auto complete text input for the combobox.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the completer to use instead of the current completer. If completer is 0, auto completion is disabled.</para>
            <para>By default, for an editable combo box, a QCompleter that performs case insensitive inline completion is automatically created.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.ItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item delegate used by the popup list view.</para>
            <para>Sets the item delegate for the popup list view. The combobox takes ownership of the delegate.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between comboboxes, widget mappers or views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.LineEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line edit used to edit items in the combobox, or 0 if there is no line edit.</para>
            <para>Only editable combo boxes have a line edit.</para>
            <para>Sets the line edit to use instead of the current line edit widget.</para>
            <para>The combo box takes ownership of the line edit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model used by the combobox.</para>
            <para>Sets the model to be model. model must not be 0. If you want to clear the contents of a model, call clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.RootModelIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the root model item index for the items in the combobox.</para>
            <para>Sets the root model item index for the items in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.Validator">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the validator that is used to constrain text input for the combobox.</para>
            <para>Sets the validator to use instead of the current validator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.View">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list view used for the combobox popup.</para>
            <para>Sets the view to be used in the combobox popup to the given itemView. The combobox takes ownership of the view.</para>
            <para>Note: If you want to use the convenience views (like QListWidget, QTableWidget or QTreeWidget), make sure to call setModel() on the combobox with the convenience widgets model before calling this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.Editable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the combo box can be edited by the user.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of items in the combobox.</para>
            <para>By default, for an empty combo box, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.CurrentText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text of the current item.</para>
            <para>By default, for an empty combo box or a combo box in which no current item is set, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index of the current item in the combobox.</para>
            <para>The current index can change when inserting or removing items.</para>
            <para>By default, for an empty combo box or a combo box in which no current item is set, this property has a value of -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.MaxVisibleItems">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum allowed size on screen of the combo box, measured in items.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 10.</para>
            <para>Note: This property is ignored for non-editable comboboxes in styles that returns true for QStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup such as the Mac style or the Gtk+ Style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.MaxCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.</para>
            <para>Note: If you set the maximum number to be less then the current amount of items in the combobox, the extra items will be truncated. This also applies if you have set an external model on the combobox.</para>
            <para>By default, this property's value is derived from the highest signed integer available (typically 2147483647).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.insertPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the policy used to determine where user-inserted items should appear in the combobox.</para>
            <para>The default value is AtBottom, indicating that new items will appear at the bottom of the list of items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.sizeAdjustPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the policy describing how the size of the combobox changes when the content changes.</para>
            <para>The default value is AdjustToContentsOnFirstShow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.MinimumContentsLength">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum number of characters that should fit into the combobox.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to a positive value, the minimumSizeHint() and sizeHint() take it into account.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of the icons shown in the combobox.</para>
            <para>Unless explicitly set this returns the default value of the current style. This size is the maximum size that icons can have; icons of smaller size are not scaled up.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.AutoCompletion">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the combobox provides auto-completion for editable items.</para>
            <para>Use setCompleter() instead.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.AutoCompletionCaseSensitivity">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether string comparisons are case-sensitive or case-insensitive for auto-completion.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is Qt::CaseInsensitive.</para>
            <para>Use setCompleter() instead. Case sensitivity of the auto completion can be changed using QCompleter::setCaseSensitivity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.DuplicatesEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the user can enter duplicate items into the combobox.</para>
            <para>Note that it is always possible to programmatically insert duplicate items into the combobox.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false (duplicates are not allowed).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the combo box draws itself with a frame.</para>
            <para>If enabled (the default) the combo box draws itself inside a frame, otherwise the combo box draws itself without any frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QComboBox.ModelColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the column in the model that is visible.</para>
            <para>If set prior to populating the combo box, the pop-up view will not be affected and will show the first column (using this property's default value).</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies what the QComboBox should do when a new string is entered by the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.InsertAfterCurrent">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is inserted after the current item in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.InsertAlphabetically">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is inserted in the alphabetic order in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.InsertAtBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>The string will be inserted after the last item in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.InsertAtCurrent">
            <summary>
            <para>The current item will be replaced by the string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.InsertAtTop">
            <summary>
            <para>The string will be inserted as the first item in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.InsertBeforeCurrent">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is inserted before the current item in the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.InsertPolicy.NoInsert">
            <summary>
            <para>The string will not be inserted into the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QComboBox.SizeAdjustPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies how the size hint of the QComboBox should adjust when new content is added or content changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.SizeAdjustPolicy.AdjustToContents">
            <summary>
            <para>The combobox will always adjust to the contents</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.SizeAdjustPolicy.AdjustToContentsOnFirstShow">
            <summary>
            <para>The combobox will adjust to its contents the first time it is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.SizeAdjustPolicy.AdjustToMinimumContentsLength">
            <summary>
            <para>Use AdjustToContents or AdjustToContentsOnFirstShow instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QComboBox.SizeAdjustPolicy.AdjustToMinimumContentsLengthWithIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The combobox will adjust to minimumContentsLength plus space for an icon. For performance reasons use this policy on large models.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton">
            <summary>
            The QCommandLinkButton widget provides a Vista style command link button.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The command link is a new control that was introduced by Windows Vista. It's intended use is similar to that of a radio button in that it is used to choose between a set of mutually exclusive options. Command link buttons should not be used by themselves but rather as an alternative to radio buttons in Wizards and dialogs and makes pressing the &amp;quot;next&amp;quot; button redundant. The appearance is generally similar to that of a flat pushbutton, but it allows for a descriptive text in addition to the normal button text. By default it will also carry an arrow icon, indicating that pressing the control will open another window or page.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPushButton and QRadioButton.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPushButton">
            <summary>
            The QPushButton widget provides a command button.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The push button, or command button, is perhaps the most commonly used widget in any graphical user interface. Push (click) a button to command the computer to perform some action, or to answer a question. Typical buttons are OK, Apply, Cancel, Close, Yes, No and Help.</para>
            <para>A command button is rectangular and typically displays a text label describing its action. A shortcut key can be specified by preceding the preferred character with an ampersand in the text. For example:</para>
            <para> QPushButton *button = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Download&amp;quot;, this);</para>
            <para>In this example the shortcut is Alt+D. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;amp;&amp;amp;').</para>
            <para>Push buttons display a textual label, and optionally a small icon. These can be set using the constructors and changed later using setText() and setIcon(). If the button is disabled the appearance of the text and icon will be manipulated with respect to the GUI style to make the button look &amp;quot;disabled&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para>A push button emits the signal clicked() when it is activated by the mouse, the Spacebar or by a keyboard shortcut. Connect to this signal to perform the button's action. Push buttons also provide less commonly used signals, for example, pressed() and released().</para>
            <para>Command buttons in dialogs are by default auto-default buttons, i.e. they become the default push button automatically when they receive the keyboard input focus. A default button is a push button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return key in a dialog. You can change this with setAutoDefault(). Note that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(false).</para>
            <para>Being so central, the button widget has grown to accommodate a great many variations in the past decade. The Microsoft style guide now shows about ten different states of Windows push buttons and the text implies that there are dozens more when all the combinations of features are taken into consideration.</para>
            <para>The most important modes or states are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Available or not (grayed out, disabled).</para>
            <para>Standard push button, toggling push button or menu button.</para>
            <para>On or off (only for toggling push buttons).</para>
            <para>Default or normal. The default button in a dialog can generally be &amp;quot;clicked&amp;quot; using the Enter or Return key.</para>
            <para>Auto-repeat or not.</para>
            <para>Pressed down or not.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>As a general rule, use a push button when the application or dialog window performs an action when the user clicks on it (such as Apply, Cancel, Close and Help) and when the widget is supposed to have a wide, rectangular shape with a text label. Small, typically square buttons that change the state of the window rather than performing an action (such as the buttons in the top-right corner of the QFileDialog) are not command buttons, but tool buttons. Qt provides a special class (QToolButton) for these buttons.</para>
            <para>If you need toggle behavior (see setCheckable()) or a button that auto-repeats the activation signal when being pushed down like the arrows in a scroll bar (see setAutoRepeat()), a command button is probably not what you want. When in doubt, use a tool button.</para>
            <para>A variation of a command button is a menu button. These provide not just one command, but several, since when they are clicked they pop up a menu of options. Use the method setMenu() to associate a popup menu with a push button.</para>
            <para>Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see QRadioButton) and check boxes (see QCheckBox).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A push button shown in the Macintosh widget style.Note that when a button's width becomes smaller than 50 or its height becomes smaller than 30, the button's corners are changed from round to square. Use the setMinimumSize() function to prevent this behavior.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	A push button shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A push button shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>In Qt, the QAbstractButton base class provides most of the modes and other API, and QPushButton provides GUI logic. See QAbstractButton for more information about the API.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QToolButton, QRadioButton, QCheckBox, and GUI Design Handbook: Push Button.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a push button with an icon and a text, and a parent.</para>
            <para>Note that you can also pass a QPixmap object as an icon (thanks to the implicit type conversion provided by C++).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a push button with the parent parent and the text text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QPushButton. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionButton, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.ShowMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return until the popup menu has been closed by the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPushButton.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the push button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPushButton.Menu">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu has been set.</para>
            <para>Associates the popup menu menu with this push button. This turns the button into a menu button, which in some styles will produce a small triangle to the right of the button's text.</para>
            <para>Ownership of the menu is not transferred to the push button.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	Push buttons with popup menus shown in the Plastique widget style (left) and Cleanlooks widget style (right).</para>
            <para></para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPushButton.AutoDefault">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the push button is an auto default button.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to true then the push button is an auto default button.</para>
            <para>In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame around it, up to 3 pixels or more. Qt automatically keeps this space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons may have a slightly larger size hint.</para>
            <para>This property's default is true for buttons that have a QDialog parent; otherwise it defaults to false.</para>
            <para>See the default property for details of how default and auto-default interact.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPushButton.Default">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the push button is the default button.</para>
            <para>Default and autodefault buttons decide what happens when the user presses enter in a dialog.</para>
            <para>A button with this property set to true (i.e., the dialog's default button,) will automatically be pressed when the user presses enter, with one exception: if an autoDefault button currently has focus, the autoDefault button is pressed. When the dialog has autoDefault buttons but no default button, pressing enter will press either the autoDefault button that currently has focus, or if no button has focus, the next autoDefault button in the focus chain.</para>
            <para>In a dialog, only one push button at a time can be the default button. This button is then displayed with an additional frame (depending on the GUI style).</para>
            <para>The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Spacebar when the button has focus.</para>
            <para>If the default property is set to false on the current default button while the dialog is visible, a new default will automatically be assigned the next time a pushbutton in the dialog receives focus.</para>
            <para>This property's default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPushButton.Flat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button border is raised.</para>
            <para>This property's default is false. If this property is set, most styles will not paint the button background unless the button is being pressed. setAutoFillBackground() can be used to ensure that the background is filled using the QPalette::Button brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a command link with the parent parent and the text text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.#ctor(System.String,System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a command link with a text, a description, and a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCommandLinkButton.Description">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds a descriptive label to complement the button text.</para>
            <para>Setting this property will set a descriptive text on the button, complementing the text label. This will usually be displayed in a smaller font than the primary text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCommonStyle">
            <summary>
            The QCommonStyle class encapsulates the common Look and Feel of a GUI.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This abstract class implements some of the widget's look and feel that is common to all GUI styles provided and shipped as part of Qt.</para>
            <para>Since QCommonStyle inherits QStyle, all of its functions are fully documented in the QStyle documentation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyle, QMotifStyle, and QWindowsStyle.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle">
            <summary>
            The QStyle class is an abstract base class that encapsulates the look and feel of a GUI.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt contains a set of QStyle subclasses that emulate the styles of the different platforms supported by Qt (QWindowsStyle, QMacStyle, QMotifStyle, etc.). By default, these styles are built into the QtGui library. Styles can also be made available as plugins.</para>
            <para>Qt's built-in widgets use QStyle to perform nearly all of their drawing, ensuring that they look exactly like the equivalent native widgets. The diagram below shows a QComboBox in eight different styles.</para>
            <para>Topics:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Setting a Style</para>
            <para>The style of the entire application can be set using the QApplication::setStyle() function. It can also be specified by the user of the application, using the -style command-line option:</para>
            <para> ./myapplication -style motif</para>
            <para>If no style is specified, Qt will choose the most appropriate style for the user's platform or desktop environment.</para>
            <para>A style can also be set on an individual widget using the QWidget::setStyle() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Developing Style-Aware Custom Widgets</para>
            <para>If you are developing custom widgets and want them to look good on all platforms, you can use QStyle functions to perform parts of the widget drawing, such as drawItemText(), drawItemPixmap(), drawPrimitive(), drawControl(), and drawComplexControl().</para>
            <para>Most QStyle draw functions take four arguments:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>an enum value specifying which graphical element to draw</para>
            <para>a QStyleOption specifying how and where to render that element</para>
            <para>a QPainter that should be used to draw the element</para>
            <para>a QWidget on which the drawing is performed (optional)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For example, if you want to draw a focus rectangle on your widget, you can write:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent * /* event */)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QStyleOptionFocusRect option;</para>
            <para>     option.initFrom(this);</para>
            <para>     option.backgroundColor = palette().color(QPalette::Background);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     style()-&amp;gt;drawPrimitive(QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect, &amp;amp;option, &amp;amp;painter, this);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>QStyle gets all the information it needs to render the graphical element from QStyleOption. The widget is passed as the last argument in case the style needs it to perform special effects (such as animated default buttons on Mac OS X), but it isn't mandatory. In fact, you can use QStyle to draw on any paint device, not just widgets, by setting the QPainter properly.</para>
            <para>QStyleOption has various subclasses for the various types of graphical elements that can be drawn. For example, PE_FrameFocusRect expects a QStyleOptionFocusRect argument.</para>
            <para>To ensure that drawing operations are as fast as possible, QStyleOption and its subclasses have public data members. See the QStyleOption class documentation for details on how to use it.</para>
            <para>For convenience, Qt provides the QStylePainter class, which combines a QStyle, a QPainter, and a QWidget. This makes it possible to write</para>
            <para>     QStylePainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     painter.drawPrimitive(QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect, option);</para>
            <para>instead of</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     style()-&amp;gt;drawPrimitive(QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect, &amp;amp;option, &amp;amp;painter, this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating a Custom Style</para>
            <para>You can create a custom look and feel for your application by creating a custom style. There are two approaches to creating a custom style. In the static approach, you either choose an existing QStyle class, subclass it, and reimplement virtual functions to provide the custom behavior, or you create an entire QStyle class from scratch. In the dynamic approach, you modify the behavior of your system style at runtime. The static approach is described below. The dynamic approach is described in QProxyStyle.</para>
            <para>The first step in the static approach is to pick one of the styles provided by Qt from which you will build your custom style. Your choice of QStyle class will depend on which style resembles your desired style the most. The most general class that you can use as a base is QCommonStyle (not QStyle). This is because Qt requires its styles to be QCommonStyles.</para>
            <para>Depending on which parts of the base style you want to change, you must reimplement the functions that are used to draw those parts of the interface. To illustrate this, we will modify the look of the spin box arrows drawn by QWindowsStyle. The arrows are primitive elements that are drawn by the drawPrimitive() function, so we need to reimplement that function. We need the following class declaration:</para>
            <para> class CustomStyle : public QWindowsStyle</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     Q_OBJECT</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> public:</para>
            <para>     CustomStyle()</para>
            <para>     ~CustomStyle() {}</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     void drawPrimitive(PrimitiveElement element, const QStyleOption *option,</para>
            <para>                        QPainter *painter, const QWidget *widget) const;</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>To draw its up and down arrows, QSpinBox uses the PE_IndicatorSpinUp and PE_IndicatorSpinDown primitive elements. Here's how to reimplement the drawPrimitive() function to draw them differently:</para>
            <para> void CustomStyle::drawPrimitive(PrimitiveElement element, const QStyleOption *option,</para>
            <para>                                 QPainter *painter, const QWidget *widget) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (element == PE_IndicatorSpinUp || element == PE_IndicatorSpinDown) {</para>
            <para>         QPolygon points(3);</para>
            <para>         int x = option-&amp;gt;rect.x();</para>
            <para>         int y = option-&amp;gt;rect.y();</para>
            <para>         int w = option-&amp;gt;rect.width() / 2;</para>
            <para>         int h = option-&amp;gt;rect.height() / 2;</para>
            <para>         x += (option-&amp;gt;rect.width() - w) / 2;</para>
            <para>         y += (option-&amp;gt;rect.height() - h) / 2;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         if (element == PE_IndicatorSpinUp) {</para>
            <para>             points[0] = QPoint(x, y + h);</para>
            <para>             points[1] = QPoint(x + w, y + h);</para>
            <para>             points[2] = QPoint(x + w / 2, y);</para>
            <para>         } else { // PE_SpinBoxDown</para>
            <para>             points[0] = QPoint(x, y);</para>
            <para>             points[1] = QPoint(x + w, y);</para>
            <para>             points[2] = QPoint(x + w / 2, y + h);</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         if (option-&amp;gt;state &amp;amp; State_Enabled) {</para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;setPen(option-&amp;gt;palette.mid().color());</para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;setBrush(option-&amp;gt;palette.buttonText());</para>
            <para>         } else {</para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;setPen(option-&amp;gt;palette.buttonText().color());</para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;setBrush(option-&amp;gt;palette.mid());</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>         painter-&amp;gt;drawPolygon(points);</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         QWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive(element, option, painter, widget);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Notice that we don't use the widget argument, except to pass it on to the QWindowStyle::drawPrimitive() function. As mentioned earlier, the information about what is to be drawn and how it should be drawn is specified by a QStyleOption object, so there is no need to ask the widget.</para>
            <para>If you need to use the widget argument to obtain additional information, be careful to ensure that it isn't 0 and that it is of the correct type before using it. For example:</para>
            <para>     QSpinBox *spinBox = qobject_cast&amp;lt;QSpinBox *&amp;gt;(widget);</para>
            <para>     if (spinBox) {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>When implementing a custom style, you cannot assume that the widget is a QSpinBox just because the enum value is called PE_IndicatorSpinUp or PE_IndicatorSpinDown.</para>
            <para>The documentation for the Styles example covers this topic in more detail.</para>
            <para>Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using a Custom Style</para>
            <para>There are several ways of using a custom style in a Qt application. The simplest way is to pass the custom style to the QApplication::setStyle() static function before creating the QApplication object:</para>
            <para> #include &amp;lt;QtGui&amp;gt;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> #include &amp;quot;customstyle.h&amp;quot;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int main(int argc, char *argv[])</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QApplication::setStyle(new CustomStyle);</para>
            <para>     QApplication app(argc, argv);</para>
            <para>     QSpinBox spinBox;</para>
            <para>     spinBox.show();</para>
            <para>     return app.exec();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>You can call QApplication::setStyle() at any time, but by calling it before the constructor, you ensure that the user's preference, set using the -style command-line option, is respected.</para>
            <para>You may want to make your custom style available for use in other applications, which may not be yours and hence not available for you to recompile. The Qt Plugin system makes it possible to create styles as plugins. Styles created as plugins are loaded as shared objects at runtime by Qt itself. Please refer to the Qt Plugin documentation for more information on how to go about creating a style plugin.</para>
            <para>Compile your plugin and put it into Qt's plugins/styles directory. We now have a pluggable style that Qt can load automatically. To use your new style with existing applications, simply start the application with the following argument:</para>
            <para> ./myapplication -style custom</para>
            <para>The application will use the look and feel from the custom style you implemented.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Right-to-Left Desktops</para>
            <para>Languages written from right to left (such as Arabic and Hebrew) usually also mirror the whole layout of widgets, and require the light to come from the screen's top-right corner instead of top-left.</para>
            <para>If you create a custom style, you should take special care when drawing asymmetric elements to make sure that they also look correct in a mirrored layout. An easy way to test your styles is to run applications with the -reverse command-line option or to call QApplication::setLayoutDirection() in your main() function.</para>
            <para>Here are some things to keep in mind when making a style work well in a right-to-left environment:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>subControlRect() and subElementRect() return rectangles in screen coordinates</para>
            <para>QStyleOption::direction indicates in which direction the item should be drawn in</para>
            <para>If a style is not right-to-left aware it will display items as if it were left-to-right</para>
            <para>visualRect(), visualPos(), and visualAlignment() are helpful functions that will translate from logical to screen representations.</para>
            <para>alignedRect() will return a logical rect aligned for the current direction</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Styles in Item Views</para>
            <para>The painting of items in views is performed by a delegate. Qt's default delegate, QStyledItemDelegate, is also used for for calculating bounding rectangles of items, and their sub-elements for the various kind of item data roles QStyledItemDelegate supports. See the QStyledItemDelegate class description to find out which datatypes and roles are supported. You can read more about item data roles in Model/View Programming.</para>
            <para>When QStyledItemDelegate paints its items, it draws CE_ItemViewItem, and calculates their size with CT_ItemViewItem. Note also that it uses SE_ItemViewItemText to set the size of editors. When implementing a style to customize drawing of item views, you need to check the implementation of QCommonStyle (and any other subclasses from which your style inherits). This way, you find out which and how other style elements are painted, and you can then reimplement the painting of elements that should be drawn differently.</para>
            <para>We include a small example where we customize the drawing of item backgrounds.</para>
            <para>     switch (element) {</para>
            <para>         case (PE_PanelItemViewItem): {</para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;save();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>             QPoint topLeft = option-&amp;gt;rect.topLeft();</para>
            <para>             QPoint bottomRight = option-&amp;gt;rect.topRight();</para>
            <para>             QLinearGradient backgroundGradient(topLeft, bottomRight);</para>
            <para>             backgroundGradient.setColorAt(0.0, QColor(Qt::yellow).lighter(190));</para>
            <para>             backgroundGradient.setColorAt(1.0, Qt::white);</para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;fillRect(option-&amp;gt;rect, QBrush(backgroundGradient));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>             painter-&amp;gt;restore();</para>
            <para>         break;</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>         default:</para>
            <para>             QWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive(element, option, painter, widget);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>The primitive element PE_PanelItemViewItem is responsible for painting the background of items, and is called from QCommonStyle's implementation of CE_ItemViewItem.</para>
            <para>To add support for drawing of new datatypes and item data roles, it is necessary to create a custom delegate. But if you only need to support the datatypes implemented by the default delegate, a custom style does not need an accompanying delegate. The QStyledItemDelegate class description gives more information on custom delegates.</para>
            <para>The drawing of item view headers is also done by the style, giving control over size of header items and row and column sizes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption, QStylePainter, Styles Example, Styles and Style Aware Widgets, and QStyledItemDelegate.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a style object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.AlignedRect(QtCore.Qt.LayoutDirection,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag,QtCore.QSize,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new rectangle of the specified size that is aligned to the given rectangle according to the specified alignment and direction.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.CombinedLayoutSpacing(QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the spacing that should be used between controls1 and controls2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.</para>
            <para>controls1 and controls2 are OR-combination of zero or more control types.</para>
            <para>This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also layoutSpacing() and layoutSpacingImplementation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.DrawComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given control using the provided painter with the style options specified by option.</para>
            <para>The widget argument is optional and can be used as aid in drawing the control.</para>
            <para>The option parameter is a pointer to a QStyleOptionComplex object that can be cast to the correct subclass using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the rect member of the specified option must be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical coordinates into screen coordinates before calling the drawPrimitive() or drawControl() function.</para>
            <para>The table below is listing the complex control elements and their associated style option subclass. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the controls, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Complex ControlQStyleOptionComplex SubclassStyle FlagRemark</para>
            <para>CC_SpinBox	QStyleOptionSpinBox	State_Enabled	Set if the spin box is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the spin box has input focus.</para>
            <para>CC_ComboBox	QStyleOptionComboBox	State_Enabled	Set if the combobox is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the combobox has input focus.</para>
            <para>CC_ScrollBar	QStyleOptionSlider	State_Enabled	Set if the scroll bar is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the scroll bar has input focus.</para>
            <para>CC_Slider	QStyleOptionSlider	State_Enabled	Set if the slider is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the slider has input focus.</para>
            <para>CC_Dial	QStyleOptionSlider	State_Enabled	Set if the dial is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the dial has input focus.</para>
            <para>CC_ToolButton	QStyleOptionToolButton	State_Enabled	Set if the tool button is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the tool button has input focus.</para>
            <para>State_DownArrow	Set if the tool button is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed).</para>
            <para>State_On	Set if the tool button is a toggle button and is toggled on.</para>
            <para>State_AutoRaise	Set if the tool button has auto-raise enabled.</para>
            <para>State_Raised	Set if the button is not down, not on, and doesn't contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled.</para>
            <para>CC_TitleBar	QStyleOptionTitleBar	State_Enabled	Set if the title bar is enabled.</para>
            <para>CC_Q3ListView	QStyleOptionQ3ListView	State_Enabled	Set if the list view is enabled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also drawPrimitive() and drawControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.DrawControl(QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given element with the provided painter with the style options specified by option.</para>
            <para>The widget argument is optional and can be used as aid in drawing the control. The option parameter is a pointer to a QStyleOption object that can be cast to the correct subclass using the qstyleoption_cast() function.</para>
            <para>The table below is listing the control elements and their associated style option subclass. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the controls, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.</para>
            <para>Note that if a control element is not listed here, it is because it uses a plain QStyleOption object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Control ElementQStyleOption SubclassStyle FlagRemark</para>
            <para>CE_MenuItem, CE_MenuBarItem	QStyleOptionMenuItem	State_Selected	The menu item is currently selected item.</para>
            <para>State_Enabled	The item is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_DownArrow	Indicates that a scroll down arrow should be drawn.</para>
            <para>State_UpArrow	Indicates that a scroll up arrow should be drawn</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the menu bar has input focus.</para>
            <para>CE_PushButton, CE_PushButtonBevel, CE_PushButtonLabel	QStyleOptionButton	State_Enabled	Set if the button is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the button has input focus.</para>
            <para>State_Raised	Set if the button is not down, not on and not flat.</para>
            <para>State_On	Set if the button is a toggle button and is toggled on.</para>
            <para>State_Sunken	Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button).</para>
            <para>CE_RadioButton, CE_RadioButtonLabel, CE_CheckBox, CE_CheckBoxLabel	QStyleOptionButton	State_Enabled	Set if the button is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the button has input focus.</para>
            <para>State_On	Set if the button is checked.</para>
            <para>State_Off	Set if the button is not checked.</para>
            <para>State_NoChange	Set if the button is in the NoChange state.</para>
            <para>State_Sunken	Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button).</para>
            <para>CE_ProgressBarContents, CE_ProgressBarLabel, CE_ProgressBarGroove	QStyleOptionProgressBar	State_Enabled	Set if the progress bar is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the progress bar has input focus.</para>
            <para>CE_Header, CE_HeaderSection, CE_HeaderLabel	QStyleOptionHeader	</para>
            <para>CE_TabBarTab, CE_TabBarTabShape, CE_TabBarTabLabel	QStyleOptionTab	State_Enabled	Set if the tab bar is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_Selected	The tab bar is the currently selected tab bar.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the tab bar tab has input focus.</para>
            <para>CE_ToolButtonLabel	QStyleOptionToolButton	State_Enabled	Set if the tool button is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the tool button has input focus.</para>
            <para>State_Sunken	Set if the tool button is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed).</para>
            <para>State_On	Set if the tool button is a toggle button and is toggled on.</para>
            <para>State_AutoRaise	Set if the tool button has auto-raise enabled.</para>
            <para>State_MouseOver	Set if the mouse pointer is over the tool button.</para>
            <para>State_Raised	Set if the button is not down and is not on.</para>
            <para>CE_ToolBoxTab	QStyleOptionToolBox	State_Selected	The tab is the currently selected tab.</para>
            <para>CE_HeaderSection	QStyleOptionHeader	State_Sunken	Indicates that the section is pressed.</para>
            <para>State_UpArrow	Indicates that the sort indicator should be pointing up.</para>
            <para>State_DownArrow	Indicates that the sort indicator should be pointing down.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also drawPrimitive() and drawComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.DrawItemPixmap(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given pixmap in the specified rectangle, according to the specified alignment, using the provided painter.</para>
            <para>See also drawItemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.DrawItemText(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPalette,System.Boolean,System.String,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given text in the specified rectangle using the provided painter and palette.</para>
            <para>The text is drawn using the painter's pen, and aligned and wrapped according to the specified alignment. If an explicit textRole is specified, the text is drawn using the palette's color for the given role. The enabled parameter indicates whether or not the item is enabled; when reimplementing this function, the enabled parameter should influence how the item is drawn.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::Alignment and drawItemPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.DrawPrimitive(QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given primitive element with the provided painter using the style options specified by option.</para>
            <para>The widget argument is optional and may contain a widget that may aid in drawing the primitive element.</para>
            <para>The table below is listing the primitive elements and their associated style option subclasses. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the elements, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.</para>
            <para>Note that if a primitive element is not listed here, it is because it uses a plain QStyleOption object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Primitive ElementQStyleOption SubclassStyle FlagRemark</para>
            <para>PE_FrameFocusRect	QStyleOptionFocusRect	State_FocusAtBorder	Whether the focus is is at the border or inside the widget.</para>
            <para>PE_IndicatorCheckBox	QStyleOptionButton	State_NoChange	Indicates a &quot;tri-state&quot; checkbox.</para>
            <para>State_On	Indicates the indicator is checked.</para>
            <para>PE_IndicatorRadioButton	QStyleOptionButton	State_On	Indicates that a radio button is selected.</para>
            <para>PE_Q3CheckListExclusiveIndicator, PE_Q3CheckListIndicator	QStyleOptionQ3ListView	State_On	Indicates whether or not the controller is selected.</para>
            <para>State_NoChange	Indicates a &quot;tri-state&quot; controller.</para>
            <para>State_Enabled	Indicates the controller is enabled.</para>
            <para>PE_IndicatorBranch	QStyleOption	State_Children	Indicates that the control for expanding the tree to show child items, should be drawn.</para>
            <para>State_Item	Indicates that a horizontal branch (to show a child item), should be drawn.</para>
            <para>State_Open	Indicates that the tree branch is expanded.</para>
            <para>State_Sibling	Indicates that a vertical line (to show a sibling item), should be drawn.</para>
            <para>PE_IndicatorHeaderArrow	QStyleOptionHeader	State_UpArrow	Indicates that the arrow should be drawn up; otherwise it should be down.</para>
            <para>PE_FrameGroupBox, PE_Frame, PE_FrameLineEdit, PE_FrameMenu, PE_FrameDockWidget, PE_FrameWindow	QStyleOptionFrame	State_Sunken	Indicates that the Frame should be sunken.</para>
            <para>PE_IndicatorToolBarHandle	QStyleOption	State_Horizontal	Indicates that the window handle is horizontal instead of vertical.</para>
            <para>PE_Q3DockWindowSeparator	QStyleOption	State_Horizontal	Indicates that the separator is horizontal instead of vertical.</para>
            <para>PE_IndicatorSpinPlus, PE_IndicatorSpinMinus, PE_IndicatorSpinUp, PE_IndicatorSpinDown,	QStyleOptionSpinBox	State_Sunken	Indicates that the button is pressed.</para>
            <para>PE_PanelButtonCommand	QStyleOptionButton	State_Enabled	Set if the button is enabled.</para>
            <para>State_HasFocus	Set if the button has input focus.</para>
            <para>State_Raised	Set if the button is not down, not on and not flat.</para>
            <para>State_On	Set if the button is a toggle button and is toggled on.</para>
            <para>State_Sunken	Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also drawComplexControl() and drawControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.GeneratedIconPixmap(QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given pixmap, styled to conform to the specified iconMode and taking into account the palette specified by option.</para>
            <para>The option parameter can pass extra information, but it must contain a palette.</para>
            <para>Note that not all pixmaps will conform, in which case the returned pixmap is a plain copy.</para>
            <para>See also QIcon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.HitTestComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the sub control at the given position in the given complex control (with the style options specified by option).</para>
            <para>Note that the position is expressed in screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>The option argument is a pointer to a QStyleOptionComplex object (or one of its subclasses). The object can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See drawComplexControl() for details. The widget argument is optional and can contain additional information for the function.</para>
            <para>See also drawComplexControl() and subControlRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.ItemPixmapRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the area within the given rectangle in which to draw the specified pixmap according to the defined alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.ItemTextRect(QtGui.QFontMetrics,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.Boolean,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the area within the given rectangle in which to draw the provided text according to the specified font metrics and alignment. The enabled parameter indicates whether or not the associated item is enabled.</para>
            <para>If the given rectangle is larger than the area needed to render the text, the rectangle that is returned will be offset within rectangle according to the specified alignment. For example, if alignment is Qt::AlignCenter, the returned rectangle will be centered within rectangle. If the given rectangle is smaller than the area needed, the returned rectangle will be the smallest rectangle large enough to render the text.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::Alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.LayoutSpacing(QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.</para>
            <para>This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.</para>
            <para>For binary compatibility reasons, this function is not virtual. If you want to specify custom layout spacings in a QStyle subclass, implement a slot called layoutSpacingImplementation(). QStyle will discover the slot at run-time (using Qt's meta-object system) and direct all calls to layoutSpacing() to layoutSpacingImplementation().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also combinedLayoutSpacing() and layoutSpacingImplementation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.LayoutSpacingImplementation(QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called by layoutSpacing() to determine the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.</para>
            <para>If you want to provide custom layout spacings in a QStyle subclass, implement a slot called layoutSpacingImplementation() in your subclass. Be aware that this slot will only be called if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns -1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also layoutSpacing() and combinedLayoutSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the given pixel metric.</para>
            <para>The specified option and widget can be used for calculating the metric. In general, the widget argument is not used. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the option may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use of it. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixel MetricQStyleOption Subclass</para>
            <para>PM_SliderControlThickness	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderLength	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderTickmarkOffset	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderSpaceAvailable	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_ScrollBarExtent	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabOverlap	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabHSpace	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabVSpace	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarBaseHeight	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarBaseOverlap	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Some pixel metrics are called from widgets and some are only called internally by the style. If the metric is not called by a widget, it is the discretion of the style author to make use of it. For some styles, this may not be appropriate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the given pixel metric.</para>
            <para>The specified option and widget can be used for calculating the metric. In general, the widget argument is not used. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the option may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use of it. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixel MetricQStyleOption Subclass</para>
            <para>PM_SliderControlThickness	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderLength	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderTickmarkOffset	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderSpaceAvailable	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_ScrollBarExtent	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabOverlap	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabHSpace	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabVSpace	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarBaseHeight	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarBaseOverlap	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Some pixel metrics are called from widgets and some are only called internally by the style. If the metric is not called by a widget, it is the discretion of the style author to make use of it. For some styles, this may not be appropriate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the given pixel metric.</para>
            <para>The specified option and widget can be used for calculating the metric. In general, the widget argument is not used. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the option may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use of it. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixel MetricQStyleOption Subclass</para>
            <para>PM_SliderControlThickness	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderLength	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderTickmarkOffset	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_SliderSpaceAvailable	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_ScrollBarExtent	QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabOverlap	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabHSpace	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarTabVSpace	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarBaseHeight	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para>PM_TabBarBaseOverlap	QStyleOptionTab</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Some pixel metrics are called from widgets and some are only called internally by the style. If the metric is not called by a widget, it is the discretion of the style author to make use of it. For some styles, this may not be appropriate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Polish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initializes the appearance of the given widget.</para>
            <para>This function is called for every widget at some point after it has been fully created but just before it is shown for the very first time.</para>
            <para>Note that the default implementation does nothing. Reasonable actions in this function might be to call the QWidget::setBackgroundMode() function for the widget. Do not use the function to set, for example, the geometry. Reimplementing this function provides a back-door through which the appearance of a widget can be changed, but with Qt's style engine it is rarely necessary to implement this function; reimplement drawItemPixmap(), drawItemText(), drawPrimitive(), etc. instead.</para>
            <para>The QWidget::inherits() function may provide enough information to allow class-specific customizations. But because new QStyle subclasses are expected to work reasonably with all current and future widgets, limited use of hard-coded customization is recommended.</para>
            <para>See also unpolish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Polish(QtGui.QApplication)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Late initialization of the given application object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Polish(QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Changes the palette according to style specific requirements for color palettes (if any).</para>
            <para>See also QPalette and QApplication::setPalette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Proxy">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns the current proxy for this style. By default most styles will return themselves. However when a proxy style is in use, it will allow the style to call back into its proxy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.SizeFromContents(QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the element described by the specified option and type, based on the provided contentsSize.</para>
            <para>The option argument is a pointer to a QStyleOption or one of its subclasses. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. The widget is an optional argument and can contain extra information used for calculating the size.</para>
            <para>See the table below for the appropriate option casts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Contents TypeQStyleOption Subclass</para>
            <para>CT_PushButton	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>CT_CheckBox	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>CT_RadioButton	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>CT_ToolButton	QStyleOptionToolButton</para>
            <para>CT_ComboBox	QStyleOptionComboBox</para>
            <para>CT_Splitter	QStyleOption</para>
            <para>CT_Q3DockWindow	QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow</para>
            <para>CT_ProgressBar	QStyleOptionProgressBar</para>
            <para>CT_MenuItem	QStyleOptionMenuItem</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also ContentsType and QStyleOption.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.SliderPositionFromValue(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the given logicalValue to a pixel position. The min parameter maps to 0, max maps to span and other values are distributed evenly in-between.</para>
            <para>This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow, providing that span is less than 4096.</para>
            <para>By default, this function assumes that the maximum value is on the right for horizontal items and on the bottom for vertical items. Set the upsideDown parameter to true to reverse this behavior.</para>
            <para>See also sliderValueFromPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.SliderValueFromPosition(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the given pixel position to a logical value. 0 maps to the min parameter, span maps to max and other values are distributed evenly in-between.</para>
            <para>This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow.</para>
            <para>By default, this function assumes that the maximum value is on the right for horizontal items and on the bottom for vertical items. Set the upsideDown parameter to true to reverse this behavior.</para>
            <para>See also sliderPositionFromValue().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.StandardIcon(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.</para>
            <para>The standardIcon is a standard pixmap which can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the icon.</para>
            <para>Warning: Because of binary compatibility constraints, this function is not virtual. If you want to provide your own icons in a QStyle subclass, reimplement the standardIconImplementation() slot in your subclass instead. The standardIcon() function will dynamically detect the slot and call it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also standardIconImplementation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.StandardIconImplementation(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this slot to provide your own icons in a QStyle subclass; because of binary compatibility constraints, the standardIcon() function (introduced in Qt 4.1) is not virtual. Instead, standardIcon() will dynamically detect and call this slot.</para>
            <para>The standardIcon is a standard pixmap which can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the icon.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also standardIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPalette">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style's standard palette.</para>
            <para>Note that on systems that support system colors, the style's standard palette is not used. In particular, the Windows XP, Vista, and Mac styles do not use the standard palette, but make use of native theme engines. With these styles, you should not set the palette with QApplication::setStandardPalette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pixmap for the given standardPixmap.</para>
            <para>A standard pixmap is a pixmap that can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate pixmap. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>Developers calling standardPixmap() should instead call standardIcon() Developers who re-implemented standardPixmap() should instead re-implement the slot standardIconImplementation().</para>
            <para>See also standardIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pixmap for the given standardPixmap.</para>
            <para>A standard pixmap is a pixmap that can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate pixmap. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>Developers calling standardPixmap() should instead call standardIcon() Developers who re-implemented standardPixmap() should instead re-implement the slot standardIconImplementation().</para>
            <para>See also standardIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pixmap for the given standardPixmap.</para>
            <para>A standard pixmap is a pixmap that can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate pixmap. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the pixmap.</para>
            <para>Developers calling standardPixmap() should instead call standardIcon() Developers who re-implemented standardPixmap() should instead re-implement the slot standardIconImplementation().</para>
            <para>See also standardIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.</para>
            <para>returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.</para>
            <para>returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.</para>
            <para>returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleHintReturn)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.</para>
            <para>returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.SubControlRect(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtGui.QStyle.SubControl,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle containing the specified subControl of the given complex control (with the style specified by option). The rectangle is defined in screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>The option argument is a pointer to QStyleOptionComplex or one of its subclasses, and can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See drawComplexControl() for details. The widget is optional and can contain additional information for the function.</para>
            <para>See also drawComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.SubElementRect(QtGui.QStyle.SubElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the sub-area for the given element as described in the provided style option. The returned rectangle is defined in screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>The widget argument is optional and can be used to aid determining the area. The QStyleOption object can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Sub ElementQStyleOption Subclass</para>
            <para>SE_PushButtonContents	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_PushButtonFocusRect	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_CheckBoxIndicator	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_CheckBoxContents	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_CheckBoxFocusRect	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_RadioButtonIndicator	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_RadioButtonContents	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_RadioButtonFocusRect	QStyleOptionButton</para>
            <para>SE_ComboBoxFocusRect	QStyleOptionComboBox</para>
            <para>SE_Q3DockWindowHandleRect	QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow</para>
            <para>SE_ProgressBarGroove	QStyleOptionProgressBar</para>
            <para>SE_ProgressBarContents	QStyleOptionProgressBar</para>
            <para>SE_ProgressBarLabel	QStyleOptionProgressBar</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Unpolish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Uninitialize the given widget's appearance.</para>
            <para>This function is the counterpart to polish(). It is called for every polished widget whenever the style is dynamically changed; the former style has to unpolish its settings before the new style can polish them again.</para>
            <para>Note that unpolish() will only be called if the widget is destroyed. This can cause problems in some cases, e.g, if you remove a widget from the UI, cache it, and then reinsert it after the style has changed; some of Qt's classes cache their widgets.</para>
            <para>See also polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Unpolish(QtGui.QApplication)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Uninitialize the given application.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.VisualAlignment(QtCore.Qt.LayoutDirection,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Transforms an alignment of Qt::AlignLeft or Qt::AlignRight without Qt::AlignAbsolute into Qt::AlignLeft or Qt::AlignRight with Qt::AlignAbsolute according to the layout direction. The other alignment flags are left untouched.</para>
            <para>If no horizontal alignment was specified, the function returns the default alignment for the given layout direction.</para>
            <para>QWidget::layoutDirection</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.VisualPos(QtCore.Qt.LayoutDirection,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the given logicalPosition converted to screen coordinates based on the specified direction. The boundingRectangle is used when performing the translation.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::layoutDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.VisualRect(QtCore.Qt.LayoutDirection,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the given logicalRectangle converted to screen coordinates based on the specified direction. The boundingRectangle is used when performing the translation.</para>
            <para>This function is provided to support right-to-left desktops, and is typically used in implementations of the subControlRect() function.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::layoutDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyle.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the style object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the available complex controls. Complex controls have different behavior depending upon where the user clicks on them or which keys are pressed.</para>
            <para>See also SubControl and drawComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_ComboBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A combobox, like QComboBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom complex controls. Custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_Dial">
            <summary>
            <para>A dial, like QDial.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_GroupBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A group box, like QGroupBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_MdiControls">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimize, close, and normal button in the menu bar for a maximized MDI subwindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_Q3ListView">
            <summary>
            <para>Used for drawing the Q3ListView class.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_ScrollBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A scroll bar, like QScrollBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_Slider">
            <summary>
            <para>A slider, like QSlider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_SpinBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A spinbox, like QSpinBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_TitleBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A Title bar, like those used in QMdiSubWindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl.CC_ToolButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A tool button, like QToolButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the available contents types. These are used to calculate sizes for the contents of various widgets.</para>
            <para>See also sizeFromContents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_CheckBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A check box, like QCheckBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_ComboBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A combo box, like QComboBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom contents types. Custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_GroupBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A group box, like QGroupBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_HeaderSection">
            <summary>
            <para>A header section, like QHeader.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_ItemViewItem">
            <summary>
            <para>An item inside an item view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_LineEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>A line edit, like QLineEdit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_MdiControls">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimize, normal, and close button in the menu bar for a maximized MDI subwindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_Menu">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu, like QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_MenuBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu bar, like QMenuBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_MenuBarItem">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu bar item, like the buttons in a QMenuBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_MenuItem">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu item, like QMenuItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_ProgressBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A progress bar, like QProgressBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_PushButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A push button, like QPushButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_Q3DockWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>A Q3DockWindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_Q3Header">
            <summary>
            <para>A Qt 3 header section, like Q3Header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_RadioButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A radio button, like QRadioButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_ScrollBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A scroll bar, like QScrollBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_SizeGrip">
            <summary>
            <para>A size grip, like QSizeGrip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_Slider">
            <summary>
            <para>A slider, like QSlider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_SpinBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A spin box, like QSpinBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_Splitter">
            <summary>
            <para>A splitter, like QSplitter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_TabBarTab">
            <summary>
            <para>A tab on a tab bar, like QTabBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_TabWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>A tab widget, like QTabWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType.CT_ToolButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A tool button, like QToolButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum represents a control element. A control element is a part of a widget that performs some action or displays information to the user.</para>
            <para>See also drawControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_CheckBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A QCheckBox, draws a PE_IndicatorCheckBox, a CE_CheckBoxLabel and a PE_FrameFocusRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_CheckBoxLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The label (text or pixmap) of a QCheckBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ComboBoxLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The label of a non-editable QComboBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom control elements; custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_DockWidgetTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>Dock window title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_FocusFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Focus frame that is style controlled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_Header">
            <summary>
            <para>A header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_HeaderEmptyArea">
            <summary>
            <para>The area of a header view where there are no header sections.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_HeaderLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The header's label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_HeaderSection">
            <summary>
            <para>A header section.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ItemViewItem">
            <summary>
            <para>An item inside an item view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuBarEmptyArea">
            <summary>
            <para>The empty area of a QMenuBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuBarItem">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu item in a QMenuBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuEmptyArea">
            <summary>
            <para>The area in a menu without menu items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuHMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>The horizontal extra space on the left/right of a menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuItem">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu item in a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuScroller">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolling areas in a QMenu when the style supports scrolling.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuTearoff">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu item representing the tear off section of a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_MenuVMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>The vertical extra space on the top/bottom of a menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ProgressBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A QProgressBar, draws CE_ProgressBarGroove, CE_ProgressBarContents and CE_ProgressBarLabel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ProgressBarContents">
            <summary>
            <para>The progress indicator of a QProgressBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ProgressBarGroove">
            <summary>
            <para>The groove where the progress indicator is drawn in a QProgressBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ProgressBarLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The text label of a QProgressBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_PushButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A QPushButton, draws CE_PushButtonBevel, CE_PushButtonLabel and PE_FrameFocusRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_PushButtonBevel">
            <summary>
            <para>The bevel and default indicator of a QPushButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_PushButtonLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The label (an icon with text or pixmap) of a QPushButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_Q3DockWindowEmptyArea">
            <summary>
            <para>The empty area of a QDockWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_RadioButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A QRadioButton, draws a PE_IndicatorRadioButton, a CE_RadioButtonLabel and a PE_FrameFocusRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_RadioButtonLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The label (text or pixmap) of a QRadioButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_RubberBand">
            <summary>
            <para>Rubber band used in for example an icon view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarAddLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar line increase indicator. (i.e., scroll down); see also QScrollBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarAddPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Scolllbar page increase indicator (i.e., page down).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarFirst">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar first line indicator (i.e., home).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarLast">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar last line indicator (i.e., end).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarSlider">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarSubLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar line decrease indicator (i.e., scroll up).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ScrollBarSubPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar page decrease indicator (i.e., page up).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ShapedFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame with the shape specified in the QStyleOptionFrameV3; see QFrame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_SizeGrip">
            <summary>
            <para>Window resize handle; see also QSizeGrip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_Splitter">
            <summary>
            <para>Splitter handle; see also QSplitter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_TabBarTab">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab and label within a QTabBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_TabBarTabLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The label within a tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_TabBarTabShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab shape within a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ToolBar">
            <summary>
            <para>A toolbar like QToolBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ToolBoxTab">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbox's tab and label within a QToolBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ToolBoxTabLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbox's tab label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ToolBoxTabShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbox's tab shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement.CE_ToolButtonLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>A tool button's label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the various available pixel metrics. A pixel metric is a style dependent size represented by a single pixel value.</para>
            <para>The following values are obsolete:</para>
            <para>See also pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of the default-button indicator frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ButtonIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The default size of button icons</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ButtonMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Amount of whitespace between push button labels and the frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal">
            <summary>
            <para>Horizontal contents shift of a button when the button is down.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ButtonShiftVertical">
            <summary>
            <para>Vertical contents shift of a button when the button is down.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_CheckBoxLabelSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>The spacing between a check box indicator and its label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_CheckListButtonSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Area (width/height) of the checkbox/radio button in a Q3CheckListItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_CheckListControllerSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Area (width/height) of the controller in a Q3CheckListItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ComboBoxFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame width of a combo box, defaults to PM_DefaultFrameWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom pixel metrics. Custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DefaultChildMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Use PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DefaultFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Default frame width (usually 2).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DefaultLayoutSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Use PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing and PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DefaultTopLevelMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Use PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DockWidgetFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame width of a dock window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DockWidgetHandleExtent">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of the handle in a horizontal dock window and the height of the handle in a vertical dock window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DockWidgetSeparatorExtent">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a separator in a horizontal dock window and the height of a separator in a vertical dock window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DockWidgetTitleBarButtonMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Amount of whitespace between dock widget's title bar button labels and the frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_DockWidgetTitleMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Margin of the dock window title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ExclusiveIndicatorHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Height of a radio button indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ExclusiveIndicatorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a radio button indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_FocusFrameHMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Horizontal margin that the focus frame will outset the widget by.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_FocusFrameVMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Vertical margin that the focus frame will outset the widget by.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_HeaderGripMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>The size of the resize grip in a header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_HeaderMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>The size of the margin between the sort indicator and the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_HeaderMarkSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The size of the sort indicator in a header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_IconViewIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The default size for icons in an icon view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_IndicatorHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Height of a checkbox indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_IndicatorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a check box indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LargeIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Default large icon size</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LayoutBottomMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Default bottom margin for a QLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Default horizontal spacing for a QLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LayoutLeftMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Default left margin for a QLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LayoutRightMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Default right margin for a QLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LayoutTopMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Default top margin for a QLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Default vertical spacing for a QLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ListViewIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The default size for icons in a list view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MDIFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Obsolete. Use PM_MdiSubWindowFrameWidth instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MDIMinimizedWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Obsolete. Use PM_MdiSubWindowMinimizedWidth instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MaximumDragDistance">
            <summary>
            <para>The maximum allowed distance between the mouse and a scrollbar when dragging. Exceeding the specified distance will cause the slider to jump back to the original position; a value of -1 disables this behavior.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MdiSubWindowFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame width of an MDI window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MdiSubWindowMinimizedWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a minimized MDI window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuBarHMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Spacing between menu bar items and left/right of bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuBarItemSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Spacing between menu bar items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuBarPanelWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame width of a menu bar, defaults to PM_DefaultFrameWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuBarVMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Spacing between menu bar items and top/bottom of bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuButtonIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of the menu button indicator proportional to the widget height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuDesktopFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame width for the menu on the desktop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuHMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Additional border (used on left and right) for a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuPanelWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Border width (applied on all sides) for a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuScrollerHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Height of the scroller area in a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuTearoffHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Height of a tear off area in a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MenuVMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Additional border (used for bottom and top) for a QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_MessageBoxIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The size of the standard icons in a message box</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a chunk in a progress bar indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_RadioButtonLabelSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>The spacing between a radio button indicator and its label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ScrollBarExtent">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a vertical scroll bar and the height of a horizontal scroll bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ScrollBarSliderMin">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimum height of a vertical scroll bar's slider and the minimum width of a horizontal scroll bar's slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ScrollView_ScrollBarSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Distance between frame and scrollbar with SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents set.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SizeGripSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The size of a size grip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SliderControlThickness">
            <summary>
            <para>Thickness of the slider handle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SliderLength">
            <summary>
            <para>Length of the slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SliderSpaceAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>The available space for the slider to move.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SliderThickness">
            <summary>
            <para>Total slider thickness.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SliderTickmarkOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>The offset between the tickmarks and the slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SmallIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Default small icon size</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SpinBoxFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame width of a spin box, defaults to PM_DefaultFrameWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SpinBoxSliderHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>The height of the optional spin box slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SplitterWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a splitter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_SubMenuOverlap">
            <summary>
            <para>The horizontal overlap between a submenu and its parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarBaseHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Height of the area between the tab bar and the tab pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarBaseOverlap">
            <summary>
            <para>Number of pixels the tab bar overlaps the tab bar base.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The default icon size for a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarTabHSpace">
            <summary>
            <para>Extra space added to the tab width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarTabOverlap">
            <summary>
            <para>Number of pixels the tabs should overlap. (Currently only used in styles, not inside of QTabBar)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal">
            <summary>
            <para>Horizontal pixel shift when a tab is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical">
            <summary>
            <para>Vertical pixel shift when a tab is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBarTabVSpace">
            <summary>
            <para>Extra space added to the tab height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabBar_ScrollButtonOverlap">
            <summary>
            <para>The distance between the left and right buttons in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabCloseIndicatorHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>The default height of a close button on a tab in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TabCloseIndicatorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The default width of a close button on a tab in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TextCursorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of the cursor in a line edit or text edit</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_TitleBarHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Height of the title bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarExtensionExtent">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a toolbar extension button in a horizontal toolbar and the height of the button in a vertical toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of the frame around toolbars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarHandleExtent">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a toolbar handle in a horizontal toolbar and the height of the handle in a vertical toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarIconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Default tool bar icon size</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarItemMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Spacing between the toolbar frame and the items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarItemSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Spacing between toolbar items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolBarSeparatorExtent">
            <summary>
            <para>Width of a toolbar separator in a horizontal toolbar and the height of a separator in a vertical toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric.PM_ToolTipLabelFrameWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame width for a tool tip label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the various primitive elements. A primitive element is a common GUI element, such as a checkbox indicator or button bevel.</para>
            <para>See also drawPrimitive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom primitive elements. All values above this are reserved for custom use. Custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic frame</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameButtonBevel">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel frame for a button bevel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameButtonTool">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel frame for a tool button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameDefaultButton">
            <summary>
            <para>This frame around a default button, e.g. in a dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameDockWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel frame for dock windows and toolbars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic focus indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameGroupBox">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel frame around group boxes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameLineEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel frame for line edits.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame for popup windows/menus; see also QMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameStatusBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameStatusBarItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame for an item of a status bar; see also QStatusBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameTabBarBase">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame that is drawn for a tab bar, ususally drawn for a tab bar that isn't part of a tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameTabWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame for tab widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_FrameWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Frame around a MDI window or a docking window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorArrowDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic Down arrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorArrowLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic Left arrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorArrowRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic Right arrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorArrowUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic Up arrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorBranch">
            <summary>
            <para>Lines used to represent the branch of a tree in a tree view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorButtonDropDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicator for a drop down button, for example, a tool button that displays a menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorCheckBox">
            <summary>
            <para>On/off indicator, for example, a QCheckBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorColumnViewArrow">
            <summary>
            <para>An arrow in a QColumnView.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorDockWidgetResizeHandle">
            <summary>
            <para>Resize handle for dock windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorHeaderArrow">
            <summary>
            <para>Arrow used to indicate sorting on a list or table header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorItemViewItemCheck">
            <summary>
            <para>On/off indicator for a view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorItemViewItemDrop">
            <summary>
            <para>An indicator that is drawn to show where an item in an item view is about to be dropped during a drag-and-drop operation in an item view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorMenuCheckMark">
            <summary>
            <para>Check mark used in a menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorProgressChunk">
            <summary>
            <para>Section of a progress bar indicator; see also QProgressBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorRadioButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Exclusive on/off indicator, for example, a QRadioButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorSpinDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Down symbol for a spin widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorSpinMinus">
            <summary>
            <para>Decrease symbol for a spin widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorSpinPlus">
            <summary>
            <para>Increase symbol for a spin widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorSpinUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Up symbol for a spin widget, for example a QSpinBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorTabClose">
            <summary>
            <para>The close button on a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorTabTear">
            <summary>
            <para>An indicator that a tab is partially scrolled out of the visible tab bar when there are many tabs.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorToolBarHandle">
            <summary>
            <para>The handle of a toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_IndicatorToolBarSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>The separator in a toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelButtonBevel">
            <summary>
            <para>Generic panel with a button bevel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelButtonCommand">
            <summary>
            <para>Button used to initiate an action, for example, a QPushButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelButtonTool">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel for a Tool button, used with QToolButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelItemViewItem">
            <summary>
            <para>The background for an item in an item view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelItemViewRow">
            <summary>
            <para>The background of a row in an item view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelLineEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel for a QLineEdit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>The panel for a menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelMenuBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel for menu bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelScrollAreaCorner">
            <summary>
            <para>Panel at the bottom-right (or bottom-left) corner of a scroll area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelStatusBar">
            <summary>
            <para>The panel for a status bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelTipLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The panel for a tip label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_PanelToolBar">
            <summary>
            <para>The panel for a toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Q3CheckListController">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt 3 compatible controller part of a list view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Q3CheckListExclusiveIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt 3 compatible radio button part of a list view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Q3CheckListIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt 3 compatible checkbox part of a list view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Q3DockWindowSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Item separator for Qt 3 compatible dock window and toolbar contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Q3Separator">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt 3 compatible generic separator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement.PE_Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>A plain QWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.RequestSoftwareInputPanel">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes under what circumstances a software input panel will be requested by input capable widgets.</para>
            <para>See also QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel and QInputContext.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.RequestSoftwareInputPanel.RSIP_OnMouseClick">
            <summary>
            <para>Requests an input panel if the user clicks on the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.RequestSoftwareInputPanel.RSIP_OnMouseClickAndAlreadyFocused">
            <summary>
            <para>Requests an input panel if the user clicks on the widget, but only if it is already focused.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the available standard pixmaps. A standard pixmap is a pixmap that can follow some existing GUI style or guideline.</para>
            <para>See also standardIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ArrowBack">
            <summary>
            <para>Equivalent to SP_ArrowLeft when the current layout direction is Qt::LeftToRight, otherwise SP_ArrowRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ArrowDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon arrow pointing down.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ArrowForward">
            <summary>
            <para>Equivalent to SP_ArrowRight when the current layout direction is Qt::LeftToRight, otherwise SP_ArrowLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ArrowLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon arrow pointing left.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ArrowRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon arrow pointing right.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ArrowUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon arrow pointing up.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_BrowserReload">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that the current page should be reloaded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_BrowserStop">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that the page loading should stop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_CommandLink">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon used to indicate a Vista style command link glyph.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ComputerIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;My computer&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom standard pixmaps; custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DesktopIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;desktop&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogApplyButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Apply button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogCancelButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Cancel button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogCloseButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Close button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogDiscardButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Discard button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogHelpButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Help button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogNoButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard No button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogOkButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard OK button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogOpenButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Open button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogResetButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Reset button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogSaveButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Save button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DialogYesButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon for a standard Yes button in a QDialogButtonBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DirClosedIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The closed directory icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DirHomeIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The home directory icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DirIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The directory icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DirLinkIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The link to directory icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DirOpenIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The open directory icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DockWidgetCloseButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Close button on dock windows (see also QDockWidget).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DriveCDIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The CD icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DriveDVDIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The DVD icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DriveFDIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The floppy icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DriveHDIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The harddrive icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_DriveNetIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The network icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogBack">
            <summary>
            <para>The back arrow in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogContentsView">
            <summary>
            <para>The contents view icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogDetailedView">
            <summary>
            <para>The detailed view icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;end&quot; icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogInfoView">
            <summary>
            <para>The file info icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogListView">
            <summary>
            <para>The list view icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogNewFolder">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;create new folder&quot; icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogStart">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;start&quot; icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileDialogToParent">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;parent directory&quot; icon in a file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The file icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_FileLinkIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The link to file icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaPause">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should pause playback.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaPlay">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should begin playback.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaSeekBackward">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should seek backward.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaSeekForward">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should seek forward.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaSkipBackward">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should skip backward.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaSkipForward">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should skip forward.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaStop">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating that media should stop playback.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaVolume">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating a volume control.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MediaVolumeMuted">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon indicating a muted volume control.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MessageBoxCritical">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;critical&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MessageBoxInformation">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;information&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MessageBoxQuestion">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;question&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_MessageBoxWarning">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;warning&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarCloseButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Close button on title bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarContextHelpButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Context help button on title bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarMaxButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Maximize button on title bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarMenuButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Menu button on a title bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarMinButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Minimize button on title bars (e.g., in QMdiSubWindow).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarNormalButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Normal (restore) button on title bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarShadeButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Shade button on title bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Unshade button on title bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ToolBarHorizontalExtensionButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Extension button for horizontal toolbars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_ToolBarVerticalExtensionButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Extension button for vertical toolbars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_TrashIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The &quot;trash&quot; icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap.SP_VistaShield">
            <summary>
            <para>Icon used to indicate UAC prompts on Windows Vista. This will return a null pixmap or icon on all other platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes flags that are used when drawing primitive elements.</para>
            <para>Note that not all primitives use all of these flags, and that the flags may mean different things to different items.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also drawPrimitive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Active">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the widget is active.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_AutoRaise">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if auto-raise appearance should be usd on a tool button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Children">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if an item view branch has children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_DownArrow">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if a down arrow should be visible on the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Editing">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if an editor is opened on the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Enabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget is enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_HasFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget has focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Horizontal">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget is laid out horizontally, for example. a tool bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Item">
            <summary>
            <para>Used by item views to indicate if a horizontal branch should be drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_KeyboardFocusChange">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the focus was changed with the keyboard, e.g., tab, backtab or shortcut.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Mini">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate a mini style Mac widget or button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_MouseOver">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget is under the mouse.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_NoChange">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate a tri-state checkbox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_None">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the widget does not have a state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Off">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget is not checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_On">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget is checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Open">
            <summary>
            <para>Used by item views to indicate if the tree branch is open.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Raised">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if a button is raised.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if a widget is read-only.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Selected">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if a widget is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Sibling">
            <summary>
            <para>Used by item views to indicate if a vertical line needs to be drawn (for siblings).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Small">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate a small style Mac widget or button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_Sunken">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if the widget is sunken or pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StateFlag.State_UpArrow">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to indicate if an up arrow should be visible on the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the available style hints. A style hint is a general look and/or feel hint.</para>
            <para>See also styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether cursor should blink when text is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Button_FocusPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>The default focus policy for buttons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ComboBox_LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>The layout direction for the combo box. By default it should be the same as indicated by the QStyleOption::direction variable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking">
            <summary>
            <para>Mouse tracking in combobox drop-down lists.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ComboBox_Popup">
            <summary>
            <para>Allows popups as a combobox drop-down menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ComboBox_PopupFrameStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame style used when drawing a combobox popup menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom style hints. Custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Dial_BackgroundRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines the style's preferred background role (as QPalette::ColorRole) for a dial widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_DialogButtonBox_ButtonsHaveIcons">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates whether or not StandardButtons in QDialogButtonBox should have icons or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_DialogButtonLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Controls how buttons are laid out in a QDialogButtonBox, returns a QDialogButtonBox::ButtonLayout enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Which button gets the default status in a dialog's button widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_DitherDisabledText">
            <summary>
            <para>Disabled text is dithered as it is on Motif.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_DockWidget_ButtonsHaveFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines if dockwidget buttons should have frames. Default is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_DrawMenuBarSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates whether or not the menu bar draws separators.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_EtchDisabledText">
            <summary>
            <para>Disabled text is &quot;etched&quot; as it is on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FocusFrame_AboveWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>The FocusFrame is stacked above the widget that it is &quot;focusing on&quot;.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FocusFrame_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The mask of the focus frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText">
            <summary>
            <para>Select the text in the line edit, or when selecting an item from the listbox, or when the line edit receives focus, as done on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FormLayoutFieldGrowthPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Provides a default for how fields can grow in a QFormLayout. Returns a QFormLayout::FieldGrowthPolicy enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FormLayoutFormAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Provides a default for how a QFormLayout aligns its contents within the available space. Returns a Qt::Alignment enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FormLayoutLabelAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Provides a default for how a QFormLayout aligns labels within the available space. Returns a Qt::Alignment enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_FormLayoutWrapPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Provides a default for how rows are wrapped in a QFormLayout. Returns a QFormLayout::RowWrapPolicy enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor">
            <summary>
            <para>How to paint a group box's text label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>How to vertically align a group box's text label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Header_ArrowAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>The placement of the sorting indicator may appear in list or table headers. Possible values are Qt::Left or Qt::Right.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick">
            <summary>
            <para>Emit the activated signal when the user single clicks on an item in an item in an item view. Otherwise the signal is emitted when the user double clicks on an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_ArrowKeysNavigateIntoChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Controls whether the tree view will select the first child when it is exapanded and the right arrow key is pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Gray out selected items when losing focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_DrawDelegateFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines if there should be a frame for a delegate widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_EllipsisLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>The location where ellipses should be added for item text that is too long to fit in an view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_MovementWithoutUpdatingSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>The item view is able to indicate a current item without changing the selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_PaintAlternatingRowColorsForEmptyArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether QTreeView paints alternating row colors for the area that does not have any items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>When an item in an item view is selected, also highlight the branch or other decoration.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter">
            <summary>
            <para>The Unicode character to be used for passwords.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar">
            <summary>
            <para>One or two pixel space between the menu bar and the dockarea, as done on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation">
            <summary>
            <para>Menu bars items are navigable by pressing Alt, followed by using the arrow keys to select the desired item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MenuBar_DismissOnSecondClick">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean indicating if a menu in the menu bar should be dismissed when it is clicked on a second time. (Example: Clicking and releasing on the File Menu in a menu bar and then immediately clicking on the File Menu again.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking">
            <summary>
            <para>Mouse tracking in menu bars.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_AllowActiveAndDisabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Allows disabled menu items to be active.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_FadeOutOnHide">
            <summary>
            <para>Fade out the menu instead of hiding it immediately.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_FillScreenWithScroll">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether scrolling popups should fill the screen as they are scrolled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_FlashTriggeredItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Flash triggered item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_KeyboardSearch">
            <summary>
            <para>Typing causes a menu to be search for relevant items, otherwise only mnemnonic is considered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The mask for a popup menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_MouseTracking">
            <summary>
            <para>Mouse tracking in popup menus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_Scrollable">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether popup menus must support scrolling.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_SelectionWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether popups should allow the selections to wrap, that is when selection should the next item be the first item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_SloppySubMenus">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether popupmenu's must support sloppy submenu; as implemented on Mac OS.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_SpaceActivatesItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Pressing the space bar activates the item, as done on Motif.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Menu_SubMenuPopupDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>The number of milliseconds to wait before opening a submenu (256 on Windows, 96 on Motif).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MessageBox_CenterButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean indicating whether the buttons in the message box should be centered or not (see QDialogButtonBox::setCentered()).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MessageBox_TextInteractionFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean indicating if the text in a message box should allow user interfactions (e.g. selection) or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_MessageBox_UseBorderForButtonSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean indicating what the to use the border of the buttons (computed as half the button height) for the spacing of the button in a message box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Right align buttons in the print dialog, as done on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Center button on progress dialogs, like Motif, otherwise right aligned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>The alignment for text labels in progress dialogs; Qt::AlignCenter on Windows, Qt::AlignVCenter otherwise.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Q3ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType">
            <summary>
            <para>Which type of mouse event should cause a list view expansion to be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_RequestSoftwareInputPanel">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines when a software input panel should be requested by input widgets. Returns an enum of type QStyle::RequestSoftwareInputPanel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether richtext selections should extend to the full width of the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_RubberBand_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The mask of the rubber band.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollBar_ContextMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether or not a scroll bar has a context menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value. If true, left clicking on a scroll bar causes the slider to jump to that position. If false, left clicking will behave as appropriate for each control.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value. If true, middle clicking on a scroll bar causes the slider to jump to that position. If false, middle clicking is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollBar_RollBetweenButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value. If true, when clicking a scroll bar button (SC_ScrollBarAddLine or SC_ScrollBarSubLine) and dragging over to the opposite button (rolling) will press the new button and release the old one. When it is false, the original button is released and nothing happens (like a push button).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value. If true, when clicking a scroll bar SubControl, holding the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the SubControl, the scroll bar continues to scroll. If false, the scollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the SubControl.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider">
            <summary>
            <para>Obsolete. Use SH_Slider_StopMouseOverSlider instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether scrollviews draw their frame only around contents (like Motif), or around contents, scroll bars and corner widgets (like Windows).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Slider_AbsoluteSetButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Which mouse buttons cause a slider to set the value to the position clicked on.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Slider_PageSetButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Which mouse buttons cause a slider to page step the value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents">
            <summary>
            <para>Key presses handled in a sloppy manner, i.e., left on a vertical slider subtracts a line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Slider_SnapToValue">
            <summary>
            <para>Sliders snap to values while moving, as they do on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Slider_StopMouseOverSlider">
            <summary>
            <para>Stops auto-repeat when the slider reaches the mouse position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_SpellCheckUnderlineStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>A QTextCharFormat::UnderlineStyle value that specifies the way misspelled words should be underlined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_SpinBox_AnimateButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Animate a click when up or down is pressed in a spin box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_SpinBox_ClickAutoRepeatRate">
            <summary>
            <para>Auto-repeat interval for spinbox mouse clicks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_SpinBox_ClickAutoRepeatThreshold">
            <summary>
            <para>Auto-repeat threshold for spinbox mouse clicks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_SpinBox_KeyPressAutoRepeatRate">
            <summary>
            <para>Auto-repeat interval for spinbox key presses.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_SpinControls_DisableOnBounds">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines if the spin controls will shown as disabled when reaching the spin range boundary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TabBar_Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>The alignment for tabs in a QTabWidget. Possible values are Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignCenter and Qt::AlignRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TabBar_CloseButtonPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines the position of the close button on a tab in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TabBar_ElideMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The default eliding style for a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether a tab bar should suggest a size to prevent scoll arrows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType">
            <summary>
            <para>Which type of mouse event should cause a tab to be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TabWidget_DefaultTabPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Default position of the tab bar in a tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Table_GridLineColor">
            <summary>
            <para>The RGB value of the grid for a table.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TextControl_FocusIndicatorTextCharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the text format used to highlight focused anchors in rich text documents displayed for example in QTextBrowser. The format has to be a QTextCharFormat returned in the variant of the QStyleHintReturnVariant return value. The QTextFormat::OutlinePen property is used for the outline and QTextFormat::BackgroundBrush for the background of the highlighted area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TitleBar_AutoRaise">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean indicating whether controls on a title bar ought to update when the mouse is over them.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TitleBar_ModifyNotification">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates if the title bar should show a '*' for windows that are modified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_TitleBar_NoBorder">
            <summary>
            <para>The title bar has no border.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ToolBar_Movable">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines if the tool bar is movable by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold">
            <summary>
            <para>Boldness of the selected page title in a QToolBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ToolButtonStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Determines the default system style for tool buttons that uses Qt::ToolButtonFollowStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ToolButton_PopupDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>An int indicating the popup delay in milliseconds for menus attached to tool buttons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ToolTipLabel_Opacity">
            <summary>
            <para>An integer indicating the opacity for the tip label, 0 is completely transparent, 255 is completely opaque.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_ToolTip_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The mask of a tool tip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_UnderlineShortcut">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether shortcuts are underlined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Widget_ShareActivation">
            <summary>
            <para>Turn on sharing activation with floating modeless dialogs.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_WindowFrame_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>The mask of the window frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_WizardStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Controls the look and feel of a QWizard. Returns a QWizard::WizardStyle enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint.SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize">
            <summary>
            <para>The workspace should maximize the client area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the available sub controls. A subcontrol is a control element within a complex control (ComplexControl).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also ComplexControl.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_All">
            <summary>
            <para>Special value that matches all sub-controls.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ComboBoxArrow">
            <summary>
            <para>Combobox arrow button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ComboBoxEditField">
            <summary>
            <para>Combobox edit field; see also QComboBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ComboBoxFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Combobox frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>The reference rectangle for the combobox popup. Used to calculate the position of the popup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_DialGroove">
            <summary>
            <para>The groove for the dial.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_DialHandle">
            <summary>
            <para>The handle of the dial (i.e. what you use to control the dial).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_DialTickmarks">
            <summary>
            <para>The tickmarks for the dial.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_GroupBoxCheckBox">
            <summary>
            <para>The optional check box of a group box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_GroupBoxContents">
            <summary>
            <para>The group box contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_GroupBoxFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>The frame of a group box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_GroupBoxLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>The title of a group box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_MdiCloseButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The close button for a MDI subwindow in the menu bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_MdiMinButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimize button for a MDI subwindow in the menu bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_MdiNormalButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The normal button for a MDI subwindow in the menu bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_None">
            <summary>
            <para>Special value that matches no other sub control.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_Q3ListView">
            <summary>
            <para>The list view area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_Q3ListViewExpand">
            <summary>
            <para>Expand item (i.e., show/hide child items).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarAddLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar add line (i.e., down/right arrow); see also QScrollBar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarAddPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar add page (i.e., page down).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarFirst">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar first line (i.e., home).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarGroove">
            <summary>
            <para>Special sub-control which contains the area in which the slider handle may move.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarLast">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar last line (i.e., end).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarSlider">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar slider handle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarSubLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar sub line (i.e., up/left arrow).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ScrollBarSubPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Scroll bar sub page (i.e., page up).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SliderGroove">
            <summary>
            <para>Special sub-control which contains the area in which the slider handle may move.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SliderHandle">
            <summary>
            <para>Slider handle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SliderTickmarks">
            <summary>
            <para>Slider tickmarks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SpinBoxDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Spin widget down/decrease.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SpinBoxEditField">
            <summary>
            <para>Spin widget edit field.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SpinBoxFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Spin widget frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_SpinBoxUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Spin widget up/increase; see also QSpinBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarCloseButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Close button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarContextHelpButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Context Help button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>Window title label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarMaxButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Maximize button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarMinButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Minimize button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarNormalButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Normal (restore) button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarShadeButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Shade button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarSysMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>System menu button (i.e., restore, close, etc.).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Unshade button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ToolButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Tool button (see also QToolButton).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubControl.SC_ToolButtonMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Sub-control for opening a popup menu in a tool button; see also Q3PopupMenu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum represents a sub-area of a widget. Style implementations use these areas to draw the different parts of a widget.</para>
            <para>See also subElementRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_CheckBoxClickRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Clickable area, defaults to SE_CheckBoxFocusRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_CheckBoxContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the label (text or pixmap).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_CheckBoxFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the focus indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_CheckBoxIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the state indicator (e.g., check mark).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_CheckBoxLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ComboBoxFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the focus indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ComboBoxLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Base value for custom sub-elements. Custom values must be greater than this value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_DateTimeEditLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_DialogButtonBoxLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_DockWidgetCloseButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The close button of a dock widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_DockWidgetFloatButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The float button of a dock widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_DockWidgetIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The icon of a dock widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_DockWidgetTitleBarText">
            <summary>
            <para>The text bounds of the dock widgets title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_FrameContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a frame's contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_FrameLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_GroupBoxLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_HeaderArrow">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the sort indicator for a header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_HeaderLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the label in a header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ItemViewItemCheckIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a view item's check mark.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ItemViewItemDecoration">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a view item's decoration (icon).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ItemViewItemFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a view item's focus rect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ItemViewItemText">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a view item's text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_LabelLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_LineEditContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a line edit's contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ProgressBarContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the progress indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ProgressBarGroove">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the groove.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ProgressBarLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the text label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ProgressBarLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_PushButtonContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area containing the label (icon with text or pixmap).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_PushButtonFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the focus rect (usually larger than the contents rect).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_PushButtonLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_Q3DockWindowHandleRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the tear-off handle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_RadioButtonClickRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Clickable area, defaults to SE_RadioButtonFocusRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_RadioButtonContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_RadioButtonFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the focus indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_RadioButtonIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the state indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_RadioButtonLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ShapedFrameContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a frame's contents using the shape in QStyleOptionFrameV3; see QFrame</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_SliderFocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the focus indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_SliderLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_SpinBoxLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabBarTabLeftButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a widget on the left side of a tab in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabBarTabRightButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a widget on the right side of a tab in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabBarTabText">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the text on a tab in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabBarTearIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the tear indicator on a tab bar with scroll arrows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabWidgetLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabWidgetLeftCorner">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the left corner widget in a tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabWidgetRightCorner">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the right corner widget in a tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabWidgetTabBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the tab bar widget in a tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabWidgetTabContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the contents of the tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TabWidgetTabPane">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the pane of a tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ToolBarHandle">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the handle of a tool bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ToolBoxTabContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for a toolbox tab's icon and label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_ToolButtonLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area that counts for the parent layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyle.SubElement.SE_TreeViewDisclosureItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Area for the actual disclosure item in a tree branch.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QCommonStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.DrawComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.DrawControl(QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.DrawPrimitive(QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawPrimitive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.GeneratedIconPixmap(QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::generatedIconPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.HitTestComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::hitTestComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.Polish(QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.Polish(QtGui.QApplication)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.Polish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.SizeFromContents(QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::sizeFromContents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleHintReturn)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.SubControlRect(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtGui.QStyle.SubControl,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::subControlRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.SubElementRect(QtGui.QStyle.SubElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::subElementRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.Unpolish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.Unpolish(QtGui.QApplication)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCommonStyle.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCompleter">
            <summary>
            The QCompleter class provides completions based on an item model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can use QCompleter to provide auto completions in any Qt widget, such as QLineEdit and QComboBox. When the user starts typing a word, QCompleter suggests possible ways of completing the word, based on a word list. The word list is provided as a QAbstractItemModel. (For simple applications, where the word list is static, you can pass a QStringList to QCompleter's constructor.)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Basic Usage</para>
            <para>A QCompleter is used typically with a QLineEdit or QComboBox. For example, here's how to provide auto completions from a simple word list in a QLineEdit:</para>
            <para> QStringList wordList;</para>
            <para> wordList &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;alpha&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;omega&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;omicron&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;zeta&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QLineEdit *lineEdit = new QLineEdit(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QCompleter *completer = new QCompleter(wordList, this);</para>
            <para> completer-&amp;gt;setCaseSensitivity(Qt::CaseInsensitive);</para>
            <para> lineEdit-&amp;gt;setCompleter(completer);</para>
            <para>A QFileSystemModel can be used to provide auto completion of file names. For example:</para>
            <para> QCompleter *completer = new QCompleter(this);</para>
            <para> completer-&amp;gt;setModel(new QDirModel(completer));</para>
            <para> lineEdit-&amp;gt;setCompleter(completer);</para>
            <para>To set the model on which QCompleter should operate, call setModel(). By default, QCompleter will attempt to match the completion prefix (i.e., the word that the user has started typing) against the Qt::EditRole data stored in column 0 in the model case sensitively. This can be changed using setCompletionRole(), setCompletionColumn(), and setCaseSensitivity().</para>
            <para>If the model is sorted on the column and role that are used for completion, you can call setModelSorting() with either QCompleter::CaseSensitivelySortedModel or QCompleter::CaseInsensitivelySortedModel as the argument. On large models, this can lead to significant performance improvements, because QCompleter can then use binary search instead of linear search.</para>
            <para>The model can be a list model, a table model, or a tree model. Completion on tree models is slightly more involved and is covered in the Handling Tree Models section below.</para>
            <para>The completionMode() determines the mode used to provide completions to the user.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Iterating Through Completions</para>
            <para>To retrieve a single candidate string, call setCompletionPrefix() with the text that needs to be completed and call currentCompletion(). You can iterate through the list of completions as below:</para>
            <para> for (int i = 0; completer-&amp;gt;setCurrentRow(i); i++)</para>
            <para>     qDebug() &amp;lt;&amp;lt; completer-&amp;gt;currentCompletion() &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot; is match number &amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; i;</para>
            <para>completionCount() returns the total number of completions for the current prefix. completionCount() should be avoided when possible, since it requires a scan of the entire model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Completion Model</para>
            <para>completionModel() return a list model that contains all possible completions for the current completion prefix, in the order in which they appear in the model. This model can be used to display the current completions in a custom view. Calling setCompletionPrefix() automatically refreshes the completion model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Handling Tree Models</para>
            <para>QCompleter can look for completions in tree models, assuming that any item (or sub-item or sub-sub-item) can be unambiguously represented as a string by specifying the path to the item. The completion is then performed one level at a time.</para>
            <para>Let's take the example of a user typing in a file system path. The model is a (hierarchical) QFileSystemModel. The completion occurs for every element in the path. For example, if the current text is C:\Wind, QCompleter might suggest Windows to complete the current path element. Similarly, if the current text is C:\Windows\Sy, QCompleter might suggest System.</para>
            <para>For this kind of completion to work, QCompleter needs to be able to split the path into a list of strings that are matched at each level. For C:\Windows\Sy, it needs to be split as &amp;quot;C:&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Windows&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Sy&amp;quot;. The default implementation of splitPath(), splits the completionPrefix using QDir::separator() if the model is a QFileSystemModel.</para>
            <para>To provide completions, QCompleter needs to know the path from an index. This is provided by pathFromIndex(). The default implementation of pathFromIndex(), returns the data for the edit role for list models and the absolute file path if the mode is a QFileSystemModel.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel, QLineEdit, QComboBox, and Completer Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a completer object with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.#ctor(QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a completer object with the given parent that provides completions from the specified model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QCompleter object with the given parent that uses the specified list as a source of possible completions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.OnActivated(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is activated by the user. (by clicking or pressing return). The item's index in the completionModel() is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.OnActivated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is activated by the user (by clicking or pressing return). The item's text is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.Complete">
            <summary>
            <para>For QCompleter::PopupCompletion and QCompletion::UnfilteredPopupCompletion modes, calling this function displays the popup displaying the current completions. By default, if rect is not specified, the popup is displayed on the bottom of the widget(). If rect is specified the popup is displayed on the left edge of the rectangle.</para>
            <para>For QCompleter::InlineCompletion mode, the highlighted() signal is fired with the current completion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.Complete(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>For QCompleter::PopupCompletion and QCompletion::UnfilteredPopupCompletion modes, calling this function displays the popup displaying the current completions. By default, if rect is not specified, the popup is displayed on the bottom of the widget(). If rect is specified the popup is displayed on the left edge of the rectangle.</para>
            <para>For QCompleter::InlineCompletion mode, the highlighted() signal is fired with the current completion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of completions for the current prefix. For an unsorted model with a large number of items this can be expensive. Use setCurrentRow() and currentCompletion() to iterate through all the completions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the completion model. The completion model is a read-only list model that contains all the possible matches for the current completion prefix. The completion model is auto-updated to reflect the current completions.</para>
            <para>Note: The return value of this function is defined to be an QAbstractItemModel purely for generality. This actual kind of model returned is an instance of an QAbstractProxyModel subclass.</para>
            <para>See also completionPrefix and model().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.CurrentCompletion">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current completion string. This includes the completionPrefix. When used alongside setCurrentRow(), it can be used to iterate through all the matches.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentRow() and currentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model index of the current completion in the completionModel().</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentRow(), currentCompletion(), and model().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.CurrentRow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current row.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.OnHighlighted(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is highlighted by the user. It is also sent if complete() is called with the completionMode() set to QCompleter::InlineCompletion. The item's index in the completionModel() is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.OnHighlighted(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is highlighted by the user. It is also sent if complete() is called with the completionMode() set to QCompleter::InlineCompletion. The item's text is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.PathFromIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the path for the given index. The completer object uses this to obtain the completion text from the underlying model.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns the edit role of the item for list models. It returns the absolute file path if the model is a QFileSystemModel.</para>
            <para>See also splitPath().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.SetCurrentRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current row to the row specified. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function may be used along with currentCompletion() to iterate through all the possible completions.</para>
            <para>See also currentRow(), currentCompletion(), and completionCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.SplitPath(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Splits the given path into strings that are used to match at each level in the model().</para>
            <para>The default implementation of splitPath() splits a file system path based on QDir::separator() when the sourceModel() is a QFileSystemModel.</para>
            <para>When used with list models, the first item in the returned list is used for matching.</para>
            <para>See also pathFromIndex() and Handling Tree Models.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QCompleter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the completer object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCompleter.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is activated by the user. (by clicking or pressing return). The item's index in the completionModel() is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QCompleter.Highlighted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is highlighted by the user. It is also sent if complete() is called with the completionMode() set to QCompleter::InlineCompletion. The item's index in the completionModel() is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model that provides completion strings.</para>
            <para>Sets the model which provides completions to model. The model can be list model or a tree model. If a model has been already previously set and it has the QCompleter as its parent, it is deleted.</para>
            <para>For convenience, if model is a QFileSystemModel, QCompleter switches its caseSensitivity to Qt::CaseInsensitive on Windows and Qt::CaseSensitive on other platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.Popup">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the popup used to display completions.</para>
            <para>Sets the popup used to display completions to popup. QCompleter takes ownership of the view.</para>
            <para>A QListView is automatically created when the completionMode() is set to QCompleter::PopupCompletion or QCompleter::UnfilteredPopupCompletion. The default popup displays the completionColumn().</para>
            <para>Ensure that this function is called before the view settings are modified. This is required since view's properties may require that a model has been set on the view (for example, hiding columns in the view requires a model to be set on the view).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget for which the completer object is providing completions.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget for which completion are provided for to widget. This function is automatically called when a QCompleter is set on a QLineEdit using QLineEdit::setCompleter() or on a QComboBox using QComboBox::setCompleter(). The widget needs to be set explicitly when providing completions for custom widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionPrefix">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the completion prefix used to provide completions.</para>
            <para>The completionModel() is updated to reflect the list of possible matches for prefix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.modelSorting">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way the model is sorted.</para>
            <para>By default, no assumptions are made about the order of the items in the model that provides the completions.</para>
            <para>If the model's data for the completionColumn() and completionRole() is sorted in ascending order, you can set this property to CaseSensitivelySortedModel or CaseInsensitivelySortedModel. On large models, this can lead to significant performance improvements because the completer object can then use a binary search algorithm instead of linear search algorithm.</para>
            <para>The sort order (i.e ascending or descending order) of the model is determined dynamically by inspecting the contents of the model.</para>
            <para>Note: The performance improvements described above cannot take place when the completer's caseSensitivity is different to the case sensitivity used by the model's when sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.completionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the completions are provided to the user.</para>
            <para>The default value is QCompleter::PopupCompletion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the column in the model in which completions are searched for.</para>
            <para>If the popup() is a QListView, it is automatically setup to display this column.</para>
            <para>By default, the match column is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item role to be used to query the contents of items for matching.</para>
            <para>The default role is Qt::EditRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.MaxVisibleItems">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum allowed size on screen of the completer, measured in items.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 7.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.CaseSensitivity">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the case sensitivity of the matching.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::CaseSensitive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QCompleter.WrapAround">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the completions wrap around when navigating through items.</para>
            <para>The default is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies how completions are provided to the user.</para>
            <para>See also setCompletionMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionMode.InlineCompletion">
            <summary>
            <para>Completions appear inline (as selected text).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionMode.PopupCompletion">
            <summary>
            <para>Current completions are displayed in a popup window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCompleter.CompletionMode.UnfilteredPopupCompletion">
            <summary>
            <para>All possible completions are displayed in a popup window with the most likely suggestion indicated as current.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QCompleter.ModelSorting">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies how the items in the model are sorted.</para>
            <para>See also setModelSorting().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCompleter.ModelSorting.CaseInsensitivelySortedModel">
            <summary>
            <para>The model is sorted case insensitively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCompleter.ModelSorting.CaseSensitivelySortedModel">
            <summary>
            <para>The model is sorted case sensitively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QCompleter.ModelSorting.UnsortedModel">
            <summary>
            <para>The model is unsorted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QConicalGradient">
            <summary>
            The QConicalGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify a conical gradient brush.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Conical gradients interpolate interpolate colors counter-clockwise around a center point.</para>
            <para>The colors in a gradient is defined using stop points of the QGradientStop type, i.e. a position and a color. Use the QGradient::setColorAt() or the QGradient::setStops() function to define the stop points. It is the gradient's complete set of stop points that describes how the gradient area should be filled. If no stop points have been specified, a gradient of black at 0 to white at 1 is used.</para>
            <para>In addition to the functions inherited from QGradient, the QConicalGradient class provides the angle() and center() functions returning the start angle and center of the gradient.</para>
            <para>Note that the setSpread() function has no effect for conical gradients. The reason is that the conical gradient is closed by definition, i.e. the conical gradient fills the entire circle from 0 - 360 degrees, while the boundary of a radial or a linear gradient can be specified through its radius or final stop points, respectively.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLinearGradient, QRadialGradient, and The Gradients Demo.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGradient">
            <summary>
            The QGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify gradient fills.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt currently supports three types of gradient fills:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Linear gradients interpolate colors between start and end points.</para>
            <para>Simple radial gradients interpolate colors between a focal point and end points on a circle surrounding it.</para>
            <para>Extended radial gradients interpolate colors between a center and a focal circle.</para>
            <para>Conical gradients interpolate colors around a center point.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A gradient's type can be retrieved using the type() function. Each of the types is represented by a subclass of QGradient:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QLinearGradientQRadialGradientQConicalGradient</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The colors in a gradient are defined using stop points of the QGradientStop type; i.e., a position and a color. Use the setColorAt() function to define a single stop point. Alternatively, use the setStops() function to define several stop points in one go. Note that the latter function replaces the current set of stop points.</para>
            <para>It is the gradient's complete set of stop points (accessible through the stops() function) that describes how the gradient area should be filled. If no stop points have been specified, a gradient of black at 0 to white at 1 is used.</para>
            <para>A diagonal linear gradient from black at (100, 100) to white at (200, 200) could be specified like this:</para>
            <para>     QLinearGradient linearGrad(QPointF(100, 100), QPointF(200, 200));</para>
            <para>     linearGrad.setColorAt(0, Qt::black);</para>
            <para>     linearGrad.setColorAt(1, Qt::white);</para>
            <para>A gradient can have an arbitrary number of stop points. The following would create a radial gradient starting with red in the center, blue and then green on the edges:</para>
            <para>     QRadialGradient radialGrad(QPointF(100, 100), 100);</para>
            <para>     radialGrad.setColorAt(0, Qt::red);</para>
            <para>     radialGrad.setColorAt(0.5, Qt::blue);</para>
            <para>     radialGrad.setColorAt(1, Qt::green);</para>
            <para>It is possible to repeat or reflect the gradient outside its area by specifiying the spread method using the setSpread() function. The default is to pad the outside area with the color at the closest stop point. The currently set spread method can be retrieved using the spread() function. The QGradient::Spread enum defines three different methods:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>PadSpread	RepeatSpread	ReflectSpread</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that the setSpread() function only has effect for linear and radial gradients. The reason is that the conical gradient is closed by definition, i.e. the conical gradient fills the entire circle from 0 - 360 degrees, while the boundary of a radial or a linear gradient can be specified through its radius or final stop points, respectively.</para>
            <para>The gradient coordinates can be specified in logical coordinates, relative to device coordinates, or relative to object bounding box coordinates. The coordinate mode can be set using the setCoordinateMode() function. The default is LogicalMode, where the gradient coordinates are specified in the same way as the object coordinates. To retrieve the currently set coordinate mode use coordinateMode().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also The Gradients Demo and QBrush.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGradient.op_Inequality(QtGui.QGradient,QtGui.QGradient)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the gradient is the same as the other gradient specified; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGradient.op_Equality(QtGui.QGradient,QtGui.QGradient)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the gradient is the same as the other gradient specified; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGradient.SetColorAt(System.Double,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a stop point at the given position with the given color. The given position must be in the range 0 to 1.</para>
            <para>See also setStops() and stops().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGradient.type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of gradient.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGradient.coordinateMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the coordinate mode of this gradient. The default mode is LogicalMode.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the coordinate mode of this gradient to mode. The default mode is LogicalMode.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGradient.spread">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the spread method use by this gradient. The default is PadSpread.</para>
            <para>Specifies the spread method that should be used for this gradient.</para>
            <para>Note that this function only has effect for linear and radial gradients.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGradient.CoordinateMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies how gradient coordinates map to the paint device on which the gradient is used.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.CoordinateMode.LogicalMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This is the default mode. The gradient coordinates are specified logical space just like the object coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.CoordinateMode.ObjectBoundingMode">
            <summary>
            <para>In this mode the gradient coordinates are relative to the bounding rectangle of the object being drawn, with (0,0) in the top left corner, and (1,1) in the bottom right corner of the object's bounding rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.CoordinateMode.StretchToDeviceMode">
            <summary>
            <para>In this mode the gradient coordinates are relative to the bounding rectangle of the paint device, with (0,0) in the top left corner, and (1,1) in the bottom right corner of the paint device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGradient.Spread">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies how the area outside the gradient area should be filled.</para>
            <para>See also spread() and setSpread().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Spread.PadSpread">
            <summary>
            <para>The area is filled with the closest stop color. This is the default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Spread.ReflectSpread">
            <summary>
            <para>The gradient is reflected outside the gradient area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Spread.RepeatSpread">
            <summary>
            <para>The gradient is repeated outside the gradient area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGradient.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the type of gradient.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Type.ConicalGradient">
            <summary>
            <para>Interpolate colors around a center point (QConicalGradient).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Type.LinearGradient">
            <summary>
            <para>Interpolates colors between start and end points (QLinearGradient).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Type.NoGradient">
            <summary>
            <para>No gradient is used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGradient.Type.RadialGradient">
            <summary>
            <para>Interpolate colors between a focal point and end points on a circle surrounding it (QRadialGradient).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QConicalGradient.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a conical with center at (0, 0) starting the interpolation at angle 0.</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setCenter(), and setAngle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QConicalGradient.#ctor(QtGui.QConicalGradient)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a conical with center at (0, 0) starting the interpolation at angle 0.</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setCenter(), and setAngle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QConicalGradient.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a conical with center at (0, 0) starting the interpolation at angle 0.</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setCenter(), and setAngle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QConicalGradient.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a conical with center at (0, 0) starting the interpolation at angle 0.</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setCenter(), and setAngle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QConicalGradient.SetCenter(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the center of this conical gradient in logical coordinates to center.</para>
            <para>See also center().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QConicalGradient.Angle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the start angle of the conical gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets angle to be the start angle for this conical gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QConicalGradient.Center">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the center of the conical gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets the center of this conical gradient in logical coordinates to center.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent">
            <summary>
            The QContextMenuEvent class contains parameters that describe a context menu event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Context menu events are sent to widgets when a user performs an action associated with opening a context menu. The actions required to open context menus vary between platforms; for example, on Windows, pressing the menu button or clicking the right mouse button will cause this event to be sent.</para>
            <para>When this event occurs it is customary to show a QMenu with a context menu, if this is relevant to the context.</para>
            <para>Context menu events contain a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver accepted the event. If the event handler does not accept the event then, if possible, whatever triggered the event will be handled as a regular input event.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputEvent">
            <summary>
            The QInputEvent class is the base class for events that describe user input.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QInputEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifier flags that existed immediately before the event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.</para>
            <para>The reason parameter must be QContextMenuEvent::Mouse or QContextMenuEvent::Keyboard.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget. globalPos is the mouse position in absolute coordinates. The modifiers holds the keyboard modifiers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.</para>
            <para>The reason parameter must be QContextMenuEvent::Mouse or QContextMenuEvent::Keyboard.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget.</para>
            <para>The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos(), which may not be appropriate. Use the other constructor to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.</para>
            <para>The reason parameter must be QContextMenuEvent::Mouse or QContextMenuEvent::Keyboard.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget. globalPos is the mouse position in absolute coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.</para>
            <para>The reason parameter must be QContextMenuEvent::Mouse or QContextMenuEvent::Keyboard.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget. globalPos is the mouse position in absolute coordinates. The modifiers holds the keyboard modifiers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.GlobalPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global position of the mouse pointer at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.GlobalX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global x position of the mouse pointer at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalY() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.GlobalY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global y position of the mouse pointer at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalX() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse pointer relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.reason">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the reason for this context event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x position of the mouse pointer, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also y() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y position of the mouse pointer, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also x() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the reason why the event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason.Keyboard">
            <summary>
            <para>The keyboard caused this event to be sent. On Windows, this means the menu button was pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason.Mouse">
            <summary>
            <para>The mouse caused the event to be sent. Normally this means the right mouse button was clicked, but this is platform dependent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QContextMenuEvent.Reason.Other">
            <summary>
            <para>The event was sent by some other means (i.e. not by the mouse or keyboard).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper">
            <summary>
            The QDataWidgetMapper class provides mapping between a section of a data model to widgets.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QDataWidgetMapper can be used to create data-aware widgets by mapping them to sections of an item model. A section is a column of a model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise a row.</para>
            <para>Every time the current index changes, each widget is updated with data from the model via the property specified when its mapping was made. If the user edits the contents of a widget, the changes are read using the same property and written back to the model. By default, each widget's user property is used to transfer data between the model and the widget. Since Qt 4.3, an additional addMapping() function enables a named property to be used instead of the default user property.</para>
            <para>It is possible to set an item delegate to support custom widgets. By default, a QItemDelegate is used to synchronize the model with the widgets.</para>
            <para>Let us assume that we have an item model named model with the following contents:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>1	Qt Norway	Oslo</para>
            <para>2	Qt Australia	Brisbane</para>
            <para>3	Qt USA	Palo Alto</para>
            <para>4	Qt China	Beijing</para>
            <para>5	Qt Germany	Berlin</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The following code will map the columns of the model to widgets called mySpinBox, myLineEdit and myCountryChooser:</para>
            <para> QDataWidgetMapper *mapper = new QDataWidgetMapper;</para>
            <para> mapper-&amp;gt;setModel(model);</para>
            <para> mapper-&amp;gt;addMapping(mySpinBox, 0);</para>
            <para> mapper-&amp;gt;addMapping(myLineEdit, 1);</para>
            <para> mapper-&amp;gt;addMapping(myCountryChooser, 2);</para>
            <para> mapper-&amp;gt;toFirst();</para>
            <para>After the call to toFirst(), mySpinBox displays the value 1, myLineEdit displays Qt Norway and myCountryChooser displays Oslo. The navigational functions toFirst(), toNext(), toPrevious(), toLast() and setCurrentIndex() can be used to navigate in the model and update the widgets with contents from the model.</para>
            <para>The setRootIndex() function enables a particular item in a model to be specified as the root index - children of this item will be mapped to the relevant widgets in the user interface.</para>
            <para>QDataWidgetMapper supports two submit policies, AutoSubmit and ManualSubmit. AutoSubmit will update the model as soon as the current widget loses focus, ManualSubmit will not update the model unless submit() is called. ManualSubmit is useful when displaying a dialog that lets the user cancel all modifications. Also, other views that display the model won't update until the user finishes all their modifications and submits.</para>
            <para>Note that QDataWidgetMapper keeps track of external modifications. If the contents of the model are updated in another module of the application, the widgets are updated as well.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel and QAbstractItemDelegate.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QDataWidgetMapper with parent object parent. By default, the orientation is horizontal and the submit policy is AutoSubmit.</para>
            <para>See also setOrientation() and setSubmitPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.AddMapping(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a mapping between a widget and a section from the model. The section is a column in the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise a row.</para>
            <para>For the following example, we assume a model myModel that has two columns: the first one contains the names of people in a group, and the second column contains their ages. The first column is mapped to the QLineEdit nameLineEdit, and the second is mapped to the QSpinBox ageSpinBox:</para>
            <para> QDataWidgetMapper *mapper = new QDataWidgetMapper();</para>
            <para> mapper-&gt;setModel(myModel);</para>
            <para> mapper-&gt;addMapping(nameLineEdit, 0);</para>
            <para> mapper-&gt;addMapping(ageSpinBox, 1);</para>
            <para>Notes:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the widget is already mapped to a section, the old mapping will be replaced by the new one.</para>
            <para>Only one-to-one mappings between sections and widgets are allowed. It is not possible to map a single section to multiple widgets, or to map a single widget to multiple sections.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also removeMapping(), mappedSection(), and clearMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.AddMapping(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Essentially the same as addMapping(), but adds the possibility to specify the property to use specifying propertyName.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also addMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.ClearMapping">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears all mappings.</para>
            <para>See also addMapping() and removeMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.OnCurrentIndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted after the current index has changed and all widgets were populated with new data. index is the new current index.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.MappedPropertyName(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the property that is used when mapping data to the given widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also mappedSection(), addMapping(), and removeMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.MappedSection(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the section the widget is mapped to or -1 if the widget is not mapped.</para>
            <para>See also addMapping() and removeMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.MappedWidgetAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget that is mapped at section, or 0 if no widget is mapped at that section.</para>
            <para>See also addMapping() and removeMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.RemoveMapping(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the mapping for the given widget.</para>
            <para>See also addMapping() and clearMapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.Revert">
            <summary>
            <para>Repopulates all widgets with the current data of the model. All unsubmitted changes will be lost.</para>
            <para>See also submit() and setSubmitPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.SetCurrentModelIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current index to the row of the index if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise to the column of the index.</para>
            <para>Calls setCurrentIndex() internally. This convenience slot can be connected to the signal currentRowChanged() or currentColumnChanged() of another view's selection model.</para>
            <para>The following example illustrates how to update all widgets with new data whenever the selection of a QTableView named myTableView changes:</para>
            <para> QDataWidgetMapper *mapper = new QDataWidgetMapper();</para>
            <para> connect(myTableView-&gt;selectionModel(), SIGNAL(currentRowChanged(QModelIndex,QModelIndex)),</para>
            <para>         mapper, SLOT(setCurrentModelIndex(QModelIndex)));</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.Submit">
            <summary>
            <para>Submits all changes from the mapped widgets to the model.</para>
            <para>For every mapped section, the item delegate reads the current value from the widget and sets it in the model. Finally, the model's submit() method is invoked.</para>
            <para>Returns true if all the values were submitted, otherwise false.</para>
            <para>Note: For database models, QSqlQueryModel::lastError() can be used to retrieve the last error.</para>
            <para>See also revert() and setSubmitPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.ToFirst">
            <summary>
            <para>Populates the widgets with data from the first row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the first column.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to calling setCurrentIndex(0).</para>
            <para>See also toLast() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.ToLast">
            <summary>
            <para>Populates the widgets with data from the last row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the last column.</para>
            <para>Calls setCurrentIndex() internally.</para>
            <para>See also toFirst() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.ToNext">
            <summary>
            <para>Populates the widgets with data from the next row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the next column.</para>
            <para>Calls setCurrentIndex() internally. Does nothing if there is no next row in the model.</para>
            <para>See also toPrevious() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.ToPrevious">
            <summary>
            <para>Populates the widgets with data from the previous row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the previous column.</para>
            <para>Calls setCurrentIndex() internally. Does nothing if there is no previous row in the model.</para>
            <para>See also toNext() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.CurrentIndexChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted after the current index has changed and all widgets were populated with new data. index is the new current index.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.ItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current item delegate.</para>
            <para>Sets the item delegate to delegate. The delegate will be used to write data from the model into the widget and from the widget to the model, using QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData() and QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData().</para>
            <para>The delegate also decides when to apply data and when to change the editor, using QAbstractItemDelegate::commitData() and QAbstractItemDelegate::closeEditor().</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between widget mappers or views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current model.</para>
            <para>Sets the current model to model. If another model was set, all mappings to that old model are cleared.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.RootIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current root index.</para>
            <para>Sets the root item to index. This can be used to display a branch of a tree. Pass an invalid model index to display the top-most branch.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current row or column.</para>
            <para>The widgets are populated with with data from the row at index if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the column at index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the orientation of the model.</para>
            <para>If the orientation is Qt::Horizontal (the default), a widget is mapped to a column of a data model. The widget will be populated with the model's data from its mapped column and the row that currentIndex() points at.</para>
            <para>Use Qt::Horizontal for tabular data that looks like this:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>1	Qt Norway	Oslo</para>
            <para>2	Qt Australia	Brisbane</para>
            <para>3	Qt USA	Silicon Valley</para>
            <para>4	Qt China	Beijing</para>
            <para>5	Qt Germany	Berlin</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the orientation is set to Qt::Vertical, a widget is mapped to a row. Calling setCurrentIndex() will change the current column. The widget will be populates with the model's data from its mapped row and the column that currentIndex() points at.</para>
            <para>Use Qt::Vertical for tabular data that looks like this:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>1	2	3	4	5</para>
            <para>Qt Norway	Qt Australia	Qt USA	Qt China	Qt Germany</para>
            <para>Oslo	Brisbane	Silicon Valley	Beijing	Berlin</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Changing the orientation clears all existing mappings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.submitPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current submit policy.</para>
            <para>Changing the current submit policy will revert all widgets to the current data from the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.SubmitPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the possible submit policies a QDataWidgetMapper supports.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.SubmitPolicy.AutoSubmit">
            <summary>
            <para>Whenever a widget loses focus, the widget's current value is set to the item model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDataWidgetMapper.SubmitPolicy.ManualSubmit">
            <summary>
            <para>The model is not updated until submit() is called.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDateEdit">
            <summary>
            The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates based on the QDateTimeEdit widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many of the properties and functions provided by QDateEdit are implemented in QDateTimeEdit. The following properties are most relevant to users of this class:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>date holds the date displayed by the widget.</para>
            <para>minimumDate defines the minimum (earliest) date that can be set by the user.</para>
            <para>maximumDate defines the maximum (latest) date that can be set by the user.</para>
            <para>displayFormat contains a string that is used to format the date displayed in the widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A date editing widget shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A date editing widget shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A date editing widget shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTimeEdit and QDateTimeEdit.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit">
            <summary>
            The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QDateTimeEdit allows the user to edit dates by using the keyboard or the arrow keys to increase and decrease date and time values. The arrow keys can be used to move from section to section within the QDateTimeEdit box. Dates and times appear in accordance with the format set; see setDisplayFormat().</para>
            <para> QDateTimeEdit *dateEdit = new QDateTimeEdit(QDate::currentDate());</para>
            <para> dateEdit-&amp;gt;setMinimumDate(QDate::currentDate().addDays(-365));</para>
            <para> dateEdit-&amp;gt;setMaximumDate(QDate::currentDate().addDays(365));</para>
            <para> dateEdit-&amp;gt;setDisplayFormat(&amp;quot;yyyy.MM.dd&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>Here we've created a new QDateTimeEdit object initialized with today's date, and restricted the valid date range to today plus or minus 365 days. We've set the order to month, day, year.</para>
            <para>The minimum value for QDateTimeEdit is 14 September 1752, and 2 January 4713BC for QDate. You can change this by calling setMinimumDate(), setMaximumDate(), setMinimumTime(), and setMaximumTime().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using a Pop-up Calendar Widget</para>
            <para>QDateTimeEdit can be configured to allow a QCalendarWidget to be used to select dates. This is enabled by setting the calendarPopup property. Additionally, you can supply a custom calendar widget for use as the calendar pop-up by calling the setCalendarWidget() function. The existing calendar widget can be retrieved with calendarWidget().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A date time editing widget shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A date time editing widget shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A date time editing widget shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDateEdit, QTimeEdit, QDate, and QTime.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.#ctor(QtCore.QDateTime,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent. The value is set to datetime.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.#ctor(QtCore.QDate,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent. The value is set to date.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.#ctor(QtCore.QTime,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent. The value is set to time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.#ctor(System.Object,QtCore.QVariant.Type,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnDateChanged(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the date is changed. The new date is passed in date.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnDateTimeChanged(QtCore.QDateTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the date or time is changed. The new date and time is passed in datetime.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.DateTimeFromText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an appropriate datetime for the given text.</para>
            <para>This virtual function is used by the datetime edit whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value.</para>
            <para>See also textFromDateTime() and validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Fixup(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::fixup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QDataTimeEdit. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSpinBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SectionAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the Section at index.</para>
            <para>If the format is 'yyyy/MM/dd', sectionAt(0) returns YearSection, sectionAt(1) returns MonthSection, and sectionAt(2) returns YearSection,</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SectionText(QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Section)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text from the given section.</para>
            <para>See also currentSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SetDateRange(QtCore.QDate,QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to set minimum and maximum date with one function call.</para>
            <para> setDateRange(min, max);</para>
            <para>is analogous to:</para>
            <para> setMinimumDate(min);</para>
            <para> setMaximumDate(max);</para>
            <para>If either min or max are not valid, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimumDate(), maximumDate(), setMaximumDate(), clearMinimumDate(), setMinimumTime(), maximumTime(), setMaximumTime(), clearMinimumTime(), and QDate::isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SetDateTimeRange(QtCore.QDateTime,QtCore.QDateTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to set minimum and maximum date time with one function call.</para>
            <para> setDateTimeRange(min, max);</para>
            <para>is analogous to:</para>
            <para> setMinimumDateTime(min);</para>
            <para> setMaximumDateTime(max);</para>
            <para>If either min or max are not valid, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimumDate(), maximumDate(), setMaximumDate(), clearMinimumDate(), setMinimumTime(), maximumTime(), setMaximumTime(), clearMinimumTime(), and QDateTime::isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SetSelectedSection(QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Section)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects section. If section doesn't exist in the currently displayed sections this function does nothing. If section is NoSection this function will unselect all text in the editor. Otherwise this function will move the cursor and the current section to the selected section.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also currentSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SetTimeRange(QtCore.QTime,QtCore.QTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to set minimum and maximum time with one function call.</para>
            <para> setTimeRange(min, max);</para>
            <para>is analogous to:</para>
            <para> setMinimumTime(min);</para>
            <para> setMaximumTime(max);</para>
            <para>If either min or max are not valid, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimumDate(), maximumDate(), setMaximumDate(), clearMinimumDate(), setMinimumTime(), maximumTime(), setMaximumTime(), clearMinimumTime(), and QTime::isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.StepBy(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::stepBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.StepEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::stepEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.TextFromDateTime(QtCore.QDateTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is used by the date time edit whenever it needs to display dateTime.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement validate().</para>
            <para>See also dateTimeFromText() and validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnTimeChanged(QtCore.QTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the time is changed. The new time is passed in time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.DateTimeChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the date or time is changed. The new date and time is passed in datetime.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.TimeChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the time is changed. The new time is passed in time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.DateChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the date is changed. The new date is passed in date.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.CalendarWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the calendar widget for the editor if calendarPopup is set to true and (sections() &amp; DateSections_Mask) != 0.</para>
            <para>This function creates and returns a calendar widget if none has been set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the given calendarWidget as the widget to be used for the calendar pop-up. The editor does not automatically take ownership of the calendar widget.</para>
            <para>Note: calendarPopup must be set to true before setting the calendar widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.DateTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the QDateTime that is set in the QDateTimeEdit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the timespec of the QDateTimeEdit remains the same and the timespec of the new QDateTime is ignored.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a date that refers to January 1, 2000 and a time of 00:00:00 and 0 milliseconds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Date">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the QDate that is set in the widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a date that refers to January 1, 2000.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.Time">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the QTime that is set in the widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a time of 00:00:00 and 0 milliseconds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.MaximumDateTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum datetime of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the minimumDateTime() is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. If the datetime is not a valid QDateTime object, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>The default maximumDateTime can be restored with clearMaximumDateTime().</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a date that refers to 31 December, 7999 and a time of 23:59:59 and 999 milliseconds.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.MinimumDateTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum datetime of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the maximumDateTime() is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. If the datetime is not a valid QDateTime object, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>The default minimumDateTime can be restored with clearMinimumDateTime()</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a date that refers to September 14, 1752 and a time of 00:00:00 and 0 milliseconds.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.MaximumDate">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum date of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the minimumDate is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. If the date is not a valid QDate object, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a date that refers to December 31, 7999.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.MinimumDate">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum date of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the maximumDate is adjusted if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. If the date is not a valid QDate object, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a date that refers to September 14, 1752. The minimum date must be at least the first day in year 100, otherwise setMinimumDate() has no effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.MaximumTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum time of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property, the minimumTime is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. If the time is not a valid QTime object, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a time of 23:59:59 and 999 milliseconds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.MinimumTime">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum time of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the maximumTime is adjusted if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. If the time is not a valid QTime object, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a time of 00:00:00 and 0 milliseconds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.CurrentSection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current section of the spinbox setCurrentSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.DisplayedSections">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the currently displayed fields of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>Returns a bit set of the displayed sections for this format. setDisplayFormat(), displayFormat()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.DisplayFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the format used to display the time/date of the date time edit.</para>
            <para>This format is the same as the one used described in QDateTime::toString() and QDateTime::fromString()</para>
            <para>Example format strings (assuming that the date is 2nd of July 1969):</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FormatResult</para>
            <para>dd.MM.yyyy	02.07.1969</para>
            <para>MMM d yy	Jul 2 69</para>
            <para>MMMM d yy	July 2 69</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that if you specify a two digit year, it will be interpreted to be in the century in which the date time edit was initialized. The default century is the 21 (2000-2099).</para>
            <para>If you specify an invalid format the format will not be set.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.CalendarPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current calendar pop-up showing mode.</para>
            <para>The calendar pop-up will be shown upon clicking the arrow button. This property is valid only if there is a valid date display format.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.CurrentSectionIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current section index of the spinbox.</para>
            <para>If the format is 'yyyy/MM/dd', the displayText is '2001/05/21' and the cursorPosition is 5 currentSectionIndex returns 1. If the cursorPosition is 3 currentSectionIndex is 0 etc.</para>
            <para>setCurrentSection()</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.SectionCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of sections displayed. If the format is 'yyyy/yy/yyyy', sectionCount returns 3.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDateTimeEdit.TimeSpec">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current timespec used by the date time edit.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateEdit.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date editor with a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDateEdit.#ctor(QtCore.QDate,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty date editor with a parent. The date is set to date.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDesktopServices">
            <summary>
            The QDesktopServices class provides methods for accessing common desktop services.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many desktop environments provide services that can be used by applications to perform common tasks, such as opening a web page, in a way that is both consistent and takes into account the user's application preferences.</para>
            <para>This class contains functions that provide simple interfaces to these services that indicate whether they succeeded or failed.</para>
            <para>The openUrl() function is used to open files located at arbitrary URLs in external applications. For URLs that correspond to resources on the local filing system (where the URL scheme is &amp;quot;file&amp;quot;), a suitable application will be used to open the file; otherwise, a web browser will be used to fetch and display the file.</para>
            <para>The user's desktop settings control whether certain executable file types are opened for browsing, or if they are executed instead. Some desktop environments are configured to prevent users from executing files obtained from non-local URLs, or to ask the user's permission before doing so.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>URL Handlers</para>
            <para>The behavior of the openUrl() function can be customized for individual URL schemes to allow applications to override the default handling behavior for certain types of URLs.</para>
            <para>The dispatch mechanism allows only one custom handler to be used for each URL scheme; this is set using the setUrlHandler() function. Each handler is implemented as a slot which accepts only a single QUrl argument.</para>
            <para>The existing handlers for each scheme can be removed with the unsetUrlHandler() function. This returns the handling behavior for the given scheme to the default behavior.</para>
            <para>This system makes it easy to implement a help system, for example. Help could be provided in labels and text browsers using help://myapplication/mytopic URLs, and by registering a handler it becomes possible to display the help text inside the application:</para>
            <para> class MyHelpHandler : public QObject</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     Q_OBJECT</para>
            <para> public:</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> public slots:</para>
            <para>     void showHelp(const QUrl &amp;amp;url);</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QDesktopServices::setUrlHandler(&amp;quot;help&amp;quot;, helpInstance, &amp;quot;showHelp&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>If inside the handler you decide that you can't open the requested URL, you can just call QDesktopServices::openUrl() again with the same argument, and it will try to open the URL using the appropriate mechanism for the user's desktop environment.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QSystemTrayIcon and QProcess.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopServices.DisplayName(QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a localized display name for the given location type or an empty QString if no relevant location can be found.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopServices.OpenUrl(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens the given url in the appropriate Web browser for the user's desktop environment, and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If the URL is a reference to a local file (i.e., the URL scheme is &quot;file&quot;) then it will be opened with a suitable application instead of a Web browser.</para>
            <para>The following example opens a file on the Windows file system residing on a path that contains spaces:</para>
            <para> QDesktopServices::openUrl(QUrl(&quot;file:///C:/Documents and Settings/All Users/Desktop&quot;, QUrl::TolerantMode));</para>
            <para>If a mailto URL is specified, the user's e-mail client will be used to open a composer window containing the options specified in the URL, similar to the way mailto links are handled by a Web browser.</para>
            <para>For example, the following URL contains a recipient (user@foo.com), a subject (Test), and a message body (Just a test):</para>
            <para> mailto:user@foo.com?subject=Test&amp;body=Just a test</para>
            <para>Warning: Although many e-mail clients can send attachments and are Unicode-aware, the user may have configured their client without these features. Also, certain e-mail clients (e.g., Lotus Notes) have problems with long URLs.</para>
            <para>Note: On Symbian OS, SwEvent capability is required to open the given url if the Web browser is already running.</para>
            <para>See also setUrlHandler().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopServices.SetUrlHandler(System.String,QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the handler for the given scheme to be the handler method provided by the receiver object.</para>
            <para>This function provides a way to customize the behavior of openUrl(). If openUrl() is called with a URL with the specified scheme then the given method on the receiver object is called instead of QDesktopServices launching an external application.</para>
            <para>The provided method must be implemented as a slot that only accepts a single QUrl argument.</para>
            <para>If setUrlHandler() is used to set a new handler for a scheme which already has a handler, the existing handler is simply replaced with the new one. Since QDesktopServices does not take ownership of handlers, no objects are deleted when a handler is replaced.</para>
            <para>Note that the handler will always be called from within the same thread that calls QDesktopServices::openUrl().</para>
            <para>See also openUrl() and unsetUrlHandler().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StorageLocation(QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default system directory where files of type belong, or an empty string if the location cannot be determined.</para>
            <para>Note: The storage location returned can be a directory that does not exist; i.e., it may need to be created by the system or the user.</para>
            <para>Note: On Symbian OS, ApplicationsLocation always point /sys/bin folder on the same drive with executable. FontsLocation always points to folder on ROM drive. Symbian OS does not have desktop concept, DesktopLocation returns same path as DocumentsLocation. Rest of the standard locations point to folder on same drive with executable, except that if executable is in ROM the folder from C drive is returned.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopServices.UnsetUrlHandler(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes a previously set URL handler for the specified scheme.</para>
            <para>See also setUrlHandler().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different locations that can be queried by QDesktopServices::storageLocation and QDesktopServices::displayName.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also storageLocation() and displayName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.ApplicationsLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's applications.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.CacheLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a directory location where user-specific non-essential (cached) data should be written.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.DataLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a directory location where persistent application data can be stored. QCoreApplication::applicationName and QCoreApplication::organizationName should work on all platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.DesktopLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's desktop directory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.DocumentsLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.FontsLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.HomeLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's home directory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.MoviesLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's movies.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.MusicLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the users music.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.PicturesLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the user's pictures.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDesktopServices.StandardLocation.TempLocation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the system's temporary directory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDesktopWidget">
            <summary>
            The QDesktopWidget class provides access to screen information on multi-head systems.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Systems with more than one graphics card and monitor can manage the physical screen space available either as multiple desktops, or as a large virtual desktop.</para>
            <para>This class provides information about the user's desktop, such as its total size, number of screens, the geometry of each screen, and whether they are configured as separate desktops or a single virtual desktop.</para>
            <para>Widgets provided by Qt use this class to place tooltips, menus and dialog boxes on the correct screen for their parent or application widgets. Applications can use this class to obtain information that can be used to save window positions, or to place child widgets and dialogs on one particular screen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Obtaining a Desktop Widget</para>
            <para>The QApplication::desktop() function is used to get an instance of QDesktopWidget.</para>
            <para>The widget's screenGeometry() function provides information about the geometry of the available screens with. The number of screens available is returned by screenCount, and the screenCountChanged() signal is emitted when screens are added or removed. The screen number that a particular point or widget is located in is returned by screenNumber().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Screen Geometry</para>
            <para>To obtain the dimensions of a particular screen, call the screenGeometry() function. On some desktop environments, not all of the screen is available for applications to use; for example, an application dock or menu bar may take up some space. Use the availableGeometry() function to obtain the available area for applications.</para>
            <para>QDesktopWidget also inherits the QWidget properties, width() and height(), which specify the size of the desktop. However, for desktops with multiple screens, the size of the desktop is the union of all the screen sizes, so width() and height() should not be used for computing the size of a widget to be placed on one of the screens.</para>
            <para>On systems that are configured to use the available screens as a single, large virtual desktop, the virtualDesktop property will be set to true. In this case, the widget's size is usually the size of the bounding rectangle of all the screens.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use of the Primary Screen</para>
            <para>For an application, the screen where the main widget resides is the primary screen. This is stored in the primaryScreen property. All windows opened in the context of the application should be constrained to the boundaries of the primary screen; for example, it would be inconvenient if a dialog box popped up on a different screen, or split over two screens.</para>
            <para>In the illustration above, Application One's primary screen is screen 0, and App Two's primary screen is screen 1.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QApplication, QApplication::desktop(), and QX11Info::appRootWindow().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.AvailableGeometry(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains widget.</para>
            <para>See also screenGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.AvailableGeometry(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains p.</para>
            <para>See also screenGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.AvailableGeometry(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the platform decides is available (for example excludes the dock and menu bar on Mac OS X, or the task bar on Windows). The default screen is used if screen is -1.</para>
            <para>Note: In Symbian devices the available geometry reported by QDesktopWidget is not guaranteed to be correct at the time the geometry change resize event is passed to widgets. The correct way to listen for available geometry changes is to connect to the workAreaResized() signal of QDesktopWidget.</para>
            <para>See also screenNumber() and screenGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.NumScreens">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of available screens.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use screenCount instead.</para>
            <para>See also primaryScreen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.OnResized(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of screen changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.Screen(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a widget that represents the screen with index screen (a value of -1 means the default screen).</para>
            <para>If the system uses a virtual desktop, the returned widget will have the geometry of the entire virtual desktop; i.e., bounding every screen.</para>
            <para>See also primaryScreen, screenCount, and virtualDesktop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.OnScreenCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of screens changes to newCount.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also screenCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenGeometry(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the geometry of the screen which contains widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenGeometry(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the geometry of the screen which contains p.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenGeometry(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen. The default screen is used if screen is -1.</para>
            <para>Note: In Symbian devices the screen geometry reported by QDesktopWidget is not guaranteed to be correct at the time the geometry change resize event is passed to widgets. The correct way to listen for screen geometry changes is to connect to the resized() signal of QDesktopWidget.</para>
            <para>See also screenNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenNumber(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest part of widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen.</para>
            <para>See also primaryScreen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenNumber(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the index of the screen that contains the point, or the screen which is the shortest distance from the point.</para>
            <para>See also primaryScreen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.OnWorkAreaResized(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the work area available on screen changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.Resized">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of screen changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.WorkAreaResized">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the work area available on screen changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenCountChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of screens changes to newCount.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also screenCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.VirtualDesktop">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds if the system manages the available screens in a virtual desktop.</para>
            <para>For virtual desktops, screen() will always return the same widget. The size of the virtual desktop is the size of this desktop widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.ScreenCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of screens currently available on the system.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDesktopWidget.PrimaryScreen">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index of the screen that is configured to be the primary screen on the system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDial">
            <summary>
            The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer).
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a program-definable range, and the range either wraps around (for example, with angles measured from 0 to 359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square widget.</para>
            <para>Since QDial inherits from QAbstractSlider, the dial behaves in a similar way to a slider. When wrapping() is false (the default setting) there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They both share the same signals, slots and member functions. Which one you use depends on the expectations of your users and on the type of application.</para>
            <para>The dial initially emits valueChanged() signals continuously while the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less often by disabling the tracking property. The sliderMoved() signal is emitted continuously even when tracking is disabled.</para>
            <para>The dial also emits sliderPressed() and sliderReleased() signals when the mouse button is pressed and released. Note that the dial's value can change without these signals being emitted since the keyboard and wheel can also be used to change the value.</para>
            <para>Unlike the slider, QDial attempts to draw a &amp;quot;nice&amp;quot; number of notches rather than one per line step. If possible, the number of notches drawn is one per line step, but if there aren't enough pixels to draw every one, QDial will skip notches to try and draw a uniform set (e.g. by drawing every second or third notch).</para>
            <para>Like the slider, the dial makes the QAbstractSlider functions setValue(), addLine(), subtractLine(), addPage() and subtractPage() available as slots.</para>
            <para>The dial's keyboard interface is fairly simple: The left/up and right/down arrow keys adjust the dial's value by the defined singleStep, Page Up and Page Down by the defined pageStep, and the Home and End keys set the value to the defined minimum and maximum values.</para>
            <para>If you are using the mouse wheel to adjust the dial, the increment value is determined by the lesser value of wheelScrollLines multipled by singleStep, and pageStep.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>Dials shown in various widget styles (from left to right): Plastique, Windows XP, Macintosh.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QScrollBar, QSpinBox, QSlider, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Sliders Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a dial.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is sent to the QAbstractSlider constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QDial. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSlider, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.sliderChange(QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderChange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSlider::sliderChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDial.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the dial.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDial.Wrapping">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether wrapping is enabled.</para>
            <para>If true, wrapping is enabled; otherwise some space is inserted at the bottom of the dial to separate the ends of the range of valid values.</para>
            <para>If enabled, the arrow can be oriented at any angle on the dial. If disabled, the arrow will be restricted to the upper part of the dial; if it is rotated into the space at the bottom of the dial, it will be clamped to the closest end of the valid range of values.</para>
            <para>By default this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDial.NotchSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current notch size.</para>
            <para>The notch size is in range control units, not pixels, and if possible it is a multiple of singleStep() that results in an on-screen notch size near notchTarget().</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDial.NotchTarget">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the target number of pixels between notches.</para>
            <para>The notch target is the number of pixels QDial attempts to put between each notch.</para>
            <para>The actual size may differ from the target size.</para>
            <para>The default notch target is 3.7 pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDial.NotchesVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the notches are shown.</para>
            <para>If the property is true, a series of notches are drawn around the dial to indicate the range of values available; otherwise no notches are shown.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox">
            <summary>
            The QDialogButtonBox class is a widget that presents buttons in a layout that is appropriate to the current widget style.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Dialogs and message boxes typically present buttons in a layout that conforms to the interface guidelines for that platform. Invariably, different platforms have different layouts for their dialogs. QDialogButtonBox allows a developer to add buttons to it and will automatically use the appropriate layout for the user's desktop environment.</para>
            <para>Most buttons for a dialog follow certain roles. Such roles include:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Accepting or rejecting the dialog.</para>
            <para>Asking for help.</para>
            <para>Performing actions on the dialog itself (such as resetting fields or applying changes).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>There can also be alternate ways of dismissing the dialog which may cause destructive results.</para>
            <para>Most dialogs have buttons that can almost be considered standard (e.g. OK and Cancel buttons). It is sometimes convenient to create these buttons in a standard way.</para>
            <para>There are a couple ways of using QDialogButtonBox. One ways is to create the buttons (or button texts) yourself and add them to the button box, specifying their role.</para>
            <para>     findButton = new QPushButton(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Find&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     findButton-&amp;gt;setDefault(true);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     moreButton = new QPushButton(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;More&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     moreButton-&amp;gt;setCheckable(true);</para>
            <para>     moreButton-&amp;gt;setAutoDefault(false);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     buttonBox = new QDialogButtonBox(Qt::Vertical);</para>
            <para>     buttonBox-&amp;gt;addButton(findButton, QDialogButtonBox::ActionRole);</para>
            <para>     buttonBox-&amp;gt;addButton(moreButton, QDialogButtonBox::ActionRole);</para>
            <para>Alternatively, QDialogButtonBox provides several standard buttons (e.g. OK, Cancel, Save) that you can use. They exist as flags so you can OR them together in the constructor.</para>
            <para>     buttonBox = new QDialogButtonBox(QDialogButtonBox::Ok</para>
            <para>                                      | QDialogButtonBox::Cancel);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     connect(buttonBox, SIGNAL(accepted()), this, SLOT(accept()));</para>
            <para>     connect(buttonBox, SIGNAL(rejected()), this, SLOT(reject()));</para>
            <para>You can mix and match normal buttons and standard buttons.</para>
            <para>Currently the buttons are laid out in the following way if the button box is horizontal:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	Button box laid out in horizontal GnomeLayout</para>
            <para>	Button box laid out in horizontal KdeLayout</para>
            <para>	Button box laid out in horizontal MacLayout</para>
            <para>	Button box laid out in horizontal WinLayout</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The buttons are laid out the following way if the button box is vertical:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>GnomeLayout	KdeLayout	MacLayout	WinLayout</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Additionally, button boxes that contain only buttons with ActionRole or HelpRole can be considered modeless and have an alternate look on Mac OS X:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>modeless horizontal MacLayout	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>When a button is clicked in the button box, the clicked() signal is emitted for the actual button is that is pressed. For convenience, if the button has an AcceptRole, RejectRole, or HelpRole, the accepted(), rejected(), or helpRequested() signals are emitted respectively.</para>
            <para>If you want a specific button to be default you need to call QPushButton::setDefault() on it yourself. However, if there is no default button set and to preserve which button is the default button across platforms when using the QPushButton::autoDefault property, the first push button with the accept role is made the default button when the QDialogButtonBox is shown,</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMessageBox, QPushButton, and QDialog.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also orientation and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty button box with the given orientation and parent.</para>
            <para>See also orientation and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.#ctor(QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also orientation and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.OnAccepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the AcceptRole or YesRole.</para>
            <para>See also rejected(), clicked(), and helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.AddButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton,QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given button to the button box with the specified role. If the role is invalid, the button is not added.</para>
            <para>If the button has already been added, it is removed and added again with the new role.</para>
            <para>Note: The button box takes ownership of the button.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton() and clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.AddButton(QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a standard button to the button box if it is valid to do so, and returns a push button. If button is invalid, it is not added to the button box, and zero is returned.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton() and clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.AddButton(System.String,QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a push button with the given text, adds it to the button box for the specified role, and returns the corresponding push button. If role is invalid, no button is created, and zero is returned.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton() and clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Button(QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPushButton corresponding to the standard button which, or 0 if the standard button doesn't exist in this button box.</para>
            <para>See also standardButton(), standardButtons(), and buttons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.buttonRole(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button role for the specified button. This function returns InvalidRole if button is 0 or has not been added to the button box.</para>
            <para>See also buttons() and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the buttons that have been added to the button box.</para>
            <para>See also buttonRole(), addButton(), and removeButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the button box, deleting all buttons within it.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton() and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.OnClicked(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked. The specific button that was pressed is specified by button.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), rejected(), and helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.OnHelpRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the HelpRole.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), rejected(), and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.OnRejected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the RejectRole or NoRole.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), helpRequested(), and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.RemoveButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes button from the button box without deleting it and sets its parent to zero.</para>
            <para>See also clear(), buttons(), and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.standardButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the standard button enum value corresponding to the given button, or NoButton if the given button isn't a standard button.</para>
            <para>See also button(), buttons(), and standardButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the button box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked. The specific button that was pressed is specified by button.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), rejected(), and helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Accepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the AcceptRole or YesRole.</para>
            <para>See also rejected(), clicked(), and helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.HelpRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the HelpRole.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), rejected(), and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Rejected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the RejectRole or NoRole.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), helpRequested(), and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the orientation of the button box.</para>
            <para>By default, the orientation is horizontal (i.e. the buttons are laid out side by side). The possible orientations are Qt::Horizontal and Qt::Vertical.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds collection of standard buttons in the button box.</para>
            <para>This property controls which standard buttons are used by the button box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.CenterButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the buttons in the button box are centered.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false. This behavior is appopriate for most types of dialogs. A notable exception is message boxes on most platforms (e.g. Windows), where the button box is centered horizontally.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the layout policy to be used when arranging the buttons contained in the button box.</para>
            <para>The button layout is specified by the current style. However, on the X11 platform, it may be influenced by the desktop environment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonLayout.GnomeLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Use a policy appropriate for applications on GNOME.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonLayout.KdeLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Use a policy appropriate for applications on KDE.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonLayout.MacLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Use a policy appropriate for applications on Mac OS X.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonLayout.WinLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Use a policy appropriate for applications on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the roles that can be used to describe buttons in the button box. Combinations of these roles are as flags used to describe different aspects of their behavior.</para>
            <para>See also StandardButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.AcceptRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes the dialog to be accepted (e.g. OK).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.ActionRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes changes to the elements within the dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.ApplyRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button applies current changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.DestructiveRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes a destructive change (e.g. for Discarding Changes) and closes the dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.HelpRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button can be clicked to request help.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.InvalidRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.NoRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button is a &quot;No&quot;-like button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.RejectRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes the dialog to be rejected (e.g. Cancel).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.ResetRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button resets the dialog's fields to default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.ButtonRole.YesRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button is a &quot;Yes&quot;-like button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton">
            <summary>
            <para>These enums describe flags for standard buttons. Each button has a defined ButtonRole.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also ButtonRole and standardButtons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Abort">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;Abort&quot; button defined with the RejectRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Apply">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;Apply&quot; button defined with the ApplyRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Cancel">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Cancel&quot; button defined with the RejectRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Close">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Close&quot; button defined with the RejectRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Discard">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Discard&quot; or &quot;Don't Save&quot; button, depending on the platform, defined with the DestructiveRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Help">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Help&quot; button defined with the HelpRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Ignore">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;Ignore&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.No">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;No&quot; button defined with the NoRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.NoButton">
            <summary>
            <para>An invalid button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.NoToAll">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;No to All&quot; button defined with the NoRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Ok">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;OK&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Open&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Reset&quot; button defined with the ResetRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.RestoreDefaults">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Restore Defaults&quot; button defined with the ResetRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Retry">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Retry&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Save">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Save&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.SaveAll">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Save All&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.Yes">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Yes&quot; button defined with the YesRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDialogButtonBox.StandardButton.YesToAll">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Yes to All&quot; button defined with the YesRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDirModel">
            <summary>
            The QDirModel class provides a data model for the local filesystem.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The usage of QDirModel is not recommended anymore. The QFileSystemModel class is a more performant alternative.</para>
            <para>This class provides access to the local filesystem, providing functions for renaming and removing files and directories, and for creating new directories. In the simplest case, it can be used with a suitable display widget as part of a browser or filer.</para>
            <para>QDirModel keeps a cache with file information. The cache needs to be updated with refresh().</para>
            <para>QDirModel can be accessed using the standard interface provided by QAbstractItemModel, but it also provides some convenience functions that are specific to a directory model. The fileInfo() and isDir() functions provide information about the underlying files and directories related to items in the model.</para>
            <para>Directories can be created and removed using mkdir(), rmdir(), and the model will be automatically updated to take the changes into account.</para>
            <para>Note: QDirModel requires an instance of a GUI application.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also nameFilters(), setFilter(), filter(), QListView, QTreeView, QFileSystemModel, Dir View Example, and Model Classes.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a directory model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},QtCore.QDir.Filter,QtCore.QDir.SortFlag,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new directory model with the given parent. Only those files matching the nameFilters and the filters are included in the model. The sort order is given by the sort flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in the parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.ColumnCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in the parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>Returns the data for the model item index with the given role.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.DropMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().</para>
            <para>Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action over the row in the model specified by the row and column and by the parent index.</para>
            <para>See also supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.FileIcon(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icons for the item stored in the model under the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.FileInfo(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file information for the specified model index.</para>
            <para>Note: If the model index represents a symbolic link in the underlying filing system, the file information returned will contain information about the symbolic link itself, regardless of whether resolveSymlinks is enabled or not.</para>
            <para>See also QFileInfo::symLinkTarget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.FileName(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the item stored in the model under the index given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.FilePath(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the path of the item stored in the model under the index given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            <para>Returns the item flags for the given index in the model.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the parent model item has children; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.HasChildren(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the parent model item has children; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.HeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().</para>
            <para>Returns the data stored under the given role for the specified section of the header with the given orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Index(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the model item index for the given path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            <para>Returns the model item index for the item in the parent with the given row and column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            <para>Returns the model item index for the item in the parent with the given row and column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.IsDir(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the model item index represents a directory; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeData().</para>
            <para>Returns an object that contains a serialized description of the specified indexes. The format used to describe the items corresponding to the indexes is obtained from the mimeTypes() function.</para>
            <para>If the list of indexes is empty, 0 is returned rather than a serialized empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().</para>
            <para>Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of items in the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Mkdir(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Create a directory with the name in the parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            <para>Return the parent of the given child model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Parent(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            <para>Return the parent of the given child model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Refresh">
            <summary>
            <para>QDirModel caches file information. This function updates the cache. The parent parameter is the directory from which the model is updated; the default value will update the model from root directory of the file system (the entire model).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Refresh(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>QDirModel caches file information. This function updates the cache. The parent parameter is the directory from which the model is updated; the default value will update the model from root directory of the file system (the entire model).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Remove(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the model item index from the directory model and deletes the corresponding file from the file system, returning true if successful. If the item cannot be removed, false is returned.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function deletes files from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.</para>
            <para>See also rmdir().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Rmdir(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the directory corresponding to the model item index in the directory model and deletes the corresponding directory from the file system, returning true if successful. If the directory cannot be removed, false is returned.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function deletes directories from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.</para>
            <para>See also remove().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.RowCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>Sets the data for the model item index with the given role to the data referenced by the value. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also data() and Qt::ItemDataRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            <para>Sort the model items in the column using the order given. The order is a value defined in Qt::SortOrder.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            <para>Returns the drop actions supported by this model.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::DropActions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDirModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this directory model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.Filter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the filter specification for the directory model.</para>
            <para>Sets the directory model's filter to that specified by filters.</para>
            <para>Note that the filter you set should always include the QDir::AllDirs enum value, otherwise QDirModel won't be able to read the directory structure.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.IconProvider">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file icon provider for this directory model.</para>
            <para>Sets the provider of file icons for the directory model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.NameFilters">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of filters applied to the names in the model.</para>
            <para>Sets the name filters for the directory model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.Sorting">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the sorting method used for the directory model.</para>
            <para>Sets the directory model's sorting order to that specified by sort.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.ResolveSymlinks">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the directory model should resolve symbolic links.</para>
            <para>This is only relevant on operating systems that support symbolic links.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the directory model allows writing to the file system.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to false, the directory model will allow renaming, copying and deleting of files and directories.</para>
            <para>This property is true by default</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDirModel.LazyChildCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the directory model optimizes the hasChildren function to only check if the item is a directory.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to false, the directory model will make sure that a directory actually containes any files before reporting that it has children. Otherwise the directory model will report that an item has children if the item is a directory.</para>
            <para>This property is false by default</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDockWidget">
            <summary>
            The QDockWidget class provides a widget that can be docked inside a QMainWindow or floated as a top-level window on the desktop.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QDockWidget provides the concept of dock widgets, also know as tool palettes or utility windows. Dock windows are secondary windows placed in the dock widget area around the central widget in a QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>Dock windows can be moved inside their current area, moved into new areas and floated (e.g., undocked) by the end-user. The QDockWidget API allows the programmer to restrict the dock widgets ability to move, float and close, as well as the areas in which they can be placed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Appearance</para>
            <para>A QDockWidget consists of a title bar and the content area. The title bar displays the dock widgets window title, a float button and a close button. Depending on the state of the QDockWidget, the float and close buttons may be either disabled or not shown at all.</para>
            <para>The visual appearance of the title bar and buttons is dependent on the style in use.</para>
            <para>A QDockWidget acts as a wrapper for its child widget, set with setWidget(). Custom size hints, minimum and maximum sizes and size policies should be implemented in the child widget. QDockWidget will respect them, adjusting its own constraints to include the frame and title. Size constraints should not be set on the QDockWidget itself, because they change depending on whether it is docked; a docked QDockWidget has no frame and a smaller title bar.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMainWindow and Dock Widgets Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.</para>
            <para>The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowTitle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.</para>
            <para>The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowTitle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnAllowedAreasChanged(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the allowedAreas property changes. The allowedAreas parameter gives the new value of the property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnDockLocationChanged(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dock widget is moved to another dock area, or is moved to a different location in its current dock area. This happens when the dock widget is moved programmatically or is dragged to a new location by the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnFeaturesChanged(QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the features property changes. The features parameter gives the new value of the property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QDockWidget. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionDockWidget, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.IsAreaAllowed(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this dock widget can be placed in the given area; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.ToggleViewAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a checkable action that can be used to show or close this dock widget.</para>
            <para>The action's text is set to the dock widget's window title.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::text and QWidget::windowTitle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnTopLevelChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the dock widget is now floating; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.OnVisibilityChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dock widget becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown, as well as when it is docked in a tabbed dock area and its tab becomes selected or unselected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDockWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the dock widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDockWidget.FeaturesChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the features property changes. The features parameter gives the new value of the property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDockWidget.TopLevelChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the dock widget is now floating; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDockWidget.AllowedAreasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the allowedAreas property changes. The allowedAreas parameter gives the new value of the property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDockWidget.VisibilityChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dock widget becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown, as well as when it is docked in a tabbed dock area and its tab becomes selected or unselected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockLocationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dock widget is moved to another dock area, or is moved to a different location in its current dock area. This happens when the dock widget is moved programmatically or is dragged to a new location by the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDockWidget.TitleBarWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the custom title bar widget set on the QDockWidget, or 0 if no custom title bar has been set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets an arbitrary widget as the dock widget's title bar. If widget is 0, any custom title bar widget previously set on the dock widget is removed, but not deleted, and the default title bar will be used instead.</para>
            <para>If a title bar widget is set, QDockWidget will not use native window decorations when it is floated.</para>
            <para>Here are some tips for implementing custom title bars:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Mouse events that are not explicitly handled by the title bar widget must be ignored by calling QMouseEvent::ignore(). These events then propagate to the QDockWidget parent, which handles them in the usual manner, moving when the title bar is dragged, docking and undocking when it is double-clicked, etc.</para>
            <para>When DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar is set on QDockWidget, the title bar widget is repositioned accordingly. In resizeEvent(), the title bar should check what orientation it should assume: QDockWidget *dockWidget = qobject_cast&lt;QDockWidget*&gt;(parentWidget());</para>
            <para> if (dockWidget-&gt;features() &amp; QDockWidget::DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar) {</para>
            <para>     // I need to be vertical</para>
            <para> } else {</para>
            <para>     // I need to be horizontal</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The title bar widget must have a valid QWidget::sizeHint() and QWidget::minimumSizeHint(). These functions should take into account the current orientation of the title bar.</para>
            <para>It is not possible to remove a title bar from a dock widget. However, a similar effect can be achieved by setting a default constructed QWidget as the title bar widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using qobject_cast() as shown above, the title bar widget has full access to its parent QDockWidget. Hence it can perform such operations as docking and hiding in response to user actions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDockWidget.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget for the dock widget. This function returns zero if the widget has not been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget for the dock widget to widget.</para>
            <para>If the dock widget is visible when widget is added, you must show() it explicitly.</para>
            <para>Note that you must add the layout of the widget before you call this function; if not, the widget will not be visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDockWidget.Floating">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the dock widget is floating.</para>
            <para>A floating dock widget is presented to the user as an independent window &quot;on top&quot; of its parent QMainWindow, instead of being docked in the QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDockWidget.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the dock widget is movable, closable, and floatable.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to a combination of DockWidgetClosable, DockWidgetMovable and DockWidgetFloatable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDockWidget.AllowedAreas">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds areas where the dock widget may be placed.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::AllDockWidgetAreas.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature.AllDockWidgetFeatures">
            <summary>
            <para>(Deprecated) The dock widget can be closed, moved, and floated. Since new features might be added in future releases, the look and behavior of dock widgets might change if you use this flag. Please specify individual flags instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature.DockWidgetClosable">
            <summary>
            <para>The dock widget can be closed. On some systems the dock widget always has a close button when it's floating (for example on MacOS 10.5).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature.DockWidgetFloatable">
            <summary>
            <para>The dock widget can be detached from the main window, and floated as an independent window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature.DockWidgetMovable">
            <summary>
            <para>The dock widget can be moved between docks by the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature.DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar">
            <summary>
            <para>The dock widget displays a vertical title bar on its left side. This can be used to increase the amount of vertical space in a QMainWindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature.NoDockWidgetFeatures">
            <summary>
            <para>The dock widget cannot be closed, moved, or floated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox">
            <summary>
            The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that takes doubles.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QDoubleSpinBox allows the user to choose a value by clicking the up and down buttons or by pressing Up or Down on the keyboard to increase or decrease the value currently displayed. The user can also type the value in manually. The spin box supports double values but can be extended to use different strings with validate(), textFromValue() and valueFromText().</para>
            <para>Every time the value changes QDoubleSpinBox emits the valueChanged() signal. The current value can be fetched with value() and set with setValue().</para>
            <para>Note: QDoubleSpinBox will round numbers so they can be displayed with the current precision. In a QDoubleSpinBox with decimals set to 2, calling setValue(2.555) will cause value() to return 2.56.</para>
            <para>Clicking the up and down buttons or using the keyboard accelerator's Up and Down arrows will increase or decrease the current value in steps of size singleStep(). If you want to change this behavior you can reimplement the virtual function stepBy(). The minimum and maximum value and the step size can be set using one of the constructors, and can be changed later with setMinimum(), setMaximum() and setSingleStep(). The spinbox has a default precision of 2 decimal places but this can be changed using setDecimals().</para>
            <para>Most spin boxes are directional, but QDoubleSpinBox can also operate as a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0.0-99.9 and the current value is 99.9, clicking &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; will give 0 if wrapping() is set to true. Use setWrapping() if you want circular behavior.</para>
            <para>The displayed value can be prepended and appended with arbitrary strings indicating, for example, currency or the unit of measurement. See setPrefix() and setSuffix(). The text in the spin box is retrieved with text() (which includes any prefix() and suffix()), or with cleanText() (which has no prefix(), no suffix() and no leading or trailing whitespace).</para>
            <para>It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default) choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with QDoubleSpinBox.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QSpinBox, QDateTimeEdit, QSlider, and Spin Boxes Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a spin box with 0.0 as minimum value and 99.99 as maximum value, a step value of 1.0 and a precision of 2 decimal places. The value is initially set to 0.00. The spin box has the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimum(), setMaximum(), and setSingleStep().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Fixup(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::fixup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.SetRange(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to set the minimum and maximum values with a single function call.</para>
            <para>Note: The maximum and minimum values will be rounded to match the decimals property.</para>
            <para> setRange(minimum, maximum);</para>
            <para>is equivalent to:</para>
            <para> setMinimum(minimum);</para>
            <para> setMaximum(maximum);</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.TextFromValue(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to display the given value. The default implementation returns a string containing value printed using QWidget::locale().toString(value, QLatin1Char('f'), decimals()) and will remove the thousand separator. Reimplementations may return anything.</para>
            <para>Note: QDoubleSpinBox does not call this function for specialValueText() and that neither prefix() nor suffix() should be included in the return value.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement valueFromText().</para>
            <para>See also valueFromText() and QLocale::groupSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.OnValueChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value is passed in d.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.OnValueChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The new value is passed literally in text with no prefix() or suffix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.ValueFromText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value.</para>
            <para>Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function.</para>
            <para>Note: QDoubleSpinBox handles specialValueText() separately; this function is only concerned with the other values.</para>
            <para>See also textFromValue() and validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.ValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value is passed in d.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Prefix">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the spin box's prefix.</para>
            <para>The prefix is prepended to the start of the displayed value. Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For example:</para>
            <para> spinbox-&gt;setPrefix(&quot;$&quot;);</para>
            <para>To turn off the prefix display, set this property to an empty string. The default is no prefix. The prefix is not displayed when value() == minimum() and specialValueText() is set.</para>
            <para>If no prefix is set, prefix() returns an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Suffix">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the suffix of the spin box.</para>
            <para>The suffix is appended to the end of the displayed value. Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For example:</para>
            <para> spinbox-&gt;setSuffix(&quot; km&quot;);</para>
            <para>To turn off the suffix display, set this property to an empty string. The default is no suffix. The suffix is not displayed for the minimum() if specialValueText() is set.</para>
            <para>If no suffix is set, suffix() returns an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.CleanText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text of the spin box excluding any prefix, suffix, or leading or trailing whitespace.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Decimals">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the precision of the spin box, in decimals.</para>
            <para>Sets how many decimals the spinbox will use for displaying and interpreting doubles.</para>
            <para>Warning: The maximum value for decimals is DBL_MAX_10_EXP + DBL_DIG (ie. 323) because of the limitations of the double type.</para>
            <para>Note: The maximum, minimum and value might change as a result of changing this property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum value of the spin box.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the maximum is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.</para>
            <para>The default minimum value is 0.0.</para>
            <para>Note: The minimum value will be rounded to match the decimals property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum value of the spin box.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the minimum is adjusted if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.</para>
            <para>The default maximum value is 99.99.</para>
            <para>Note: The maximum value will be rounded to match the decimals property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.SingleStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the step value.</para>
            <para>When the user uses the arrows to change the spin box's value the value will be incremented/decremented by the amount of the singleStep. The default value is 1.0. Setting a singleStep value of less than 0 does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleSpinBox.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the value of the spin box.</para>
            <para>setValue() will emit valueChanged() if the new value is different from the old one.</para>
            <para>Note: The value will be rounded so it can be displayed with the current setting of decimals.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDoubleValidator">
            <summary>
            The QDoubleValidator class provides range checking of floating-point numbers.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QDoubleValidator provides an upper bound, a lower bound, and a limit on the number of digits after the decimal point. It does not provide a fixup() function.</para>
            <para>You can set the acceptable range in one call with setRange(), or with setBottom() and setTop(). Set the number of decimal places with setDecimals(). The validate() function returns the validation state.</para>
            <para>QDoubleValidator uses its locale() to interpret the number. For example, in the German locale, &amp;quot;1,234&amp;quot; will be accepted as the fractional number 1.234. In Arabic locales, QDoubleValidator will accept Arabic digits.</para>
            <para>In addition, QDoubleValidator is always guaranteed to accept a number formatted according to the &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; locale. QDoubleValidator will not accept numbers with thousand-separators.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QIntValidator, QRegExpValidator, and Line Edits Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QValidator">
            <summary>
            The QValidator class provides validation of input text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The class itself is abstract. Two subclasses, QIntValidator and QDoubleValidator, provide basic numeric-range checking, and QRegExpValidator provides general checking using a custom regular expression.</para>
            <para>If the built-in validators aren't sufficient, you can subclass QValidator. The class has two virtual functions: validate() and fixup().</para>
            <para>validate() must be implemented by every subclass. It returns Invalid, Intermediate or Acceptable depending on whether its argument is valid (for the subclass's definition of valid).</para>
            <para>These three states require some explanation. An Invalid string is clearly invalid. Intermediate is less obvious: the concept of validity is difficult to apply when the string is incomplete (still being edited). QValidator defines Intermediate as the property of a string that is neither clearly invalid nor acceptable as a final result. Acceptable means that the string is acceptable as a final result. One might say that any string that is a plausible intermediate state during entry of an Acceptable string is Intermediate.</para>
            <para>Here are some examples:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For a line edit that accepts integers from 10 to 1000 inclusive, 42 and 123 are Acceptable, the empty string and 5 are Intermediate, and &amp;quot;asdf&amp;quot; and 1114 is Invalid.</para>
            <para>For an editable combobox that accepts URLs, any well-formed URL is Acceptable, &amp;quot;http://example.com/,&amp;quot; is Intermediate (it might be a cut and paste action that accidentally took in a comma at the end), the empty string is Intermediate (the user might select and delete all of the text in preparation for entering a new URL) and &amp;quot;http:///./&amp;quot; is Invalid.</para>
            <para>For a spin box that accepts lengths, &amp;quot;11cm&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;1in&amp;quot; are Acceptable, &amp;quot;11&amp;quot; and the empty string are Intermediate, and &amp;quot;http://example.com&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;hour&amp;quot; are Invalid.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>fixup() is provided for validators that can repair some user errors. The default implementation does nothing. QLineEdit, for example, will call fixup() if the user presses Enter (or Return) and the content is not currently valid. This allows the fixup() function the opportunity of performing some magic to make an Invalid string Acceptable.</para>
            <para>A validator has a locale, set with setLocale(). It is typically used to parse localized data. For example, QIntValidator and QDoubleValidator use it to parse localized representations of integers and doubles.</para>
            <para>QValidator is typically used with QLineEdit, QSpinBox and QComboBox.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QIntValidator, QDoubleValidator, QRegExpValidator, and Line Edits Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QValidator.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets up the validator. The parent parameter is passed on to the QObject constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QValidator.Fixup(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function attempts to change input to be valid according to this validator's rules. It need not result in a valid string: callers of this function must re-test afterwards; the default does nothing.</para>
            <para>Reimplementations of this function can change input even if they do not produce a valid string. For example, an ISBN validator might want to delete every character except digits and &quot;-&quot;, even if the result is still not a valid ISBN; a surname validator might want to remove whitespace from the start and end of the string, even if the resulting string is not in the list of accepted surnames.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QValidator.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function returns Invalid if input is invalid according to this validator's rules, Intermediate if it is likely that a little more editing will make the input acceptable (e.g. the user types &quot;4&quot; into a widget which accepts integers between 10 and 99), and Acceptable if the input is valid.</para>
            <para>The function can change both input and pos (the cursor position) if required.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QValidator.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the validator, freeing any storage and other resources used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QValidator.Locale">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the locale for the validator. The locale is by default initialized to the same as QLocale().</para>
            <para>Sets the locale that will be used for the validator. Unless setLocale has been called, the validator will use the default locale set with QLocale::setDefault(). If a default locale has not been set, it is the operating system's locale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QValidator.State">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the states in which a validated string can exist.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QValidator.State.Acceptable">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is acceptable as a final result; i.e. it is valid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QValidator.State.Intermediate">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is a plausible intermediate value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QValidator.State.Invalid">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is clearly invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a validator object with a parent object that accepts any double.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a validator object with a parent object. This validator will accept doubles from bottom to top inclusive, with up to decimals digits after the decimal point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.SetRange(System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the validator to accept doubles from minimum to maximum inclusive, with at most decimals digits after the decimal point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QValidator::validate().</para>
            <para>Returns Acceptable if the string input contains a double that is within the valid range and is in the correct format.</para>
            <para>Returns Intermediate if input contains a double that is outside the range or is in the wrong format; e.g. with too many digits after the decimal point or is empty.</para>
            <para>Returns Invalid if the input is not a double.</para>
            <para>Note: If the valid range consists of just positive doubles (e.g. 0.0 to 100.0) and input is a negative double then Invalid is returned. If notation() is set to StandardNotation, and the input contains more digits before the decimal point than a double in the valid range may have, Invalid is returned. If notation() is ScientificNotation, and the input is not in the valid range, Intermediate is returned. The value may yet become valid by changing the exponent.</para>
            <para>By default, the pos parameter is not used by this validator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the validator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Bottom">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the validator's minimum acceptable value.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of -infinity.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Top">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the validator's maximum acceptable value.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of infinity.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Decimals">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the validator's maximum number of digits after the decimal point.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 1000.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.notation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the notation of how a string can describe a number.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to ScientificNotation.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Notation">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum defines the allowed notations for entering a double.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Notation.ScientificNotation">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is written in scientific form. It may have an exponent part(i.e. 1.5E-2).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QDoubleValidator.Notation.StandardNotation">
            <summary>
            <para>The string is written as a standard number (i.e. 0.015).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDrag">
            <summary>
            The QDrag class provides support for MIME-based drag and drop data transfer.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Drag and drop is an intuitive way for users to copy or move data around in an application, and is used in many desktop environments as a mechanism for copying data between applications. Drag and drop support in Qt is centered around the QDrag class that handles most of the details of a drag and drop operation.</para>
            <para>The data to be transferred by the drag and drop operation is contained in a QMimeData object. This is specified with the setMimeData() function in the following way:</para>
            <para>         QDrag *drag = new QDrag(this);</para>
            <para>         QMimeData *mimeData = new QMimeData;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         mimeData-&amp;gt;setText(commentEdit-&amp;gt;toPlainText());</para>
            <para>         drag-&amp;gt;setMimeData(mimeData);</para>
            <para>Note that setMimeData() assigns ownership of the QMimeData object to the QDrag object. The QDrag must be constructed on the heap with a parent QWidget to ensure that Qt can clean up after the drag and drop operation has been completed.</para>
            <para>A pixmap can be used to represent the data while the drag is in progress, and will move with the cursor to the drop target. This pixmap typically shows an icon that represents the MIME type of the data being transferred, but any pixmap can be set with setPixmap(). The cursor's hot spot can be given a position relative to the top-left corner of the pixmap with the setHotSpot() function. The following code positions the pixmap so that the cursor's hot spot points to the center of its bottom edge:</para>
            <para>     drag-&amp;gt;setHotSpot(QPoint(drag-&amp;gt;pixmap().width()/2,</para>
            <para>                             drag-&amp;gt;pixmap().height()));</para>
            <para>Note: On X11, the pixmap may not be able to keep up with the mouse movements if the hot spot causes the pixmap to be displayed directly under the cursor.</para>
            <para>The source and target widgets can be found with source() and target(). These functions are often used to determine whether drag and drop operations started and finished at the same widget, so that special behavior can be implemented.</para>
            <para>QDrag only deals with the drag and drop operation itself. It is up to the developer to decide when a drag operation begins, and how a QDrag object should be constructed and used. For a given widget, it is often necessary to reimplement mousePressEvent() to determine whether the user has pressed a mouse button, and reimplement mouseMoveEvent() to check whether a QDrag is required.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Drag and Drop, QClipboard, QMimeData, QWindowsMime, QMacPasteboardMime, Draggable Icons Example, Draggable Text Example, Drop Site Example, and Fridge Magnets Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new drag object for the widget specified by dragSource.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.OnActionChanged(QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the action associated with the drag changes.</para>
            <para>See also targetChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.Exec(QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts the drag and drop operation and returns a value indicating the requested drop action when it is completed. The drop actions that the user can choose from are specified in supportedActions. The default proposed action will be selected among the allowed actions in the following order: Move, Copy and Link.</para>
            <para>Note: On Linux and Mac OS X, the drag and drop operation can take some time, but this function does not block the event loop. Other events are still delivered to the application while the operation is performed. On Windows, the Qt event loop is blocked while during the operation.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.Exec(QtCore.Qt.DropAction,QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts the drag and drop operation and returns a value indicating the requested drop action when it is completed. The drop actions that the user can choose from are specified in supportedActions. The default proposed action will be selected among the allowed actions in the following order: Move, Copy and Link.</para>
            <para>Note: On Linux and Mac OS X, the drag and drop operation can take some time, but this function does not block the event loop. Other events are still delivered to the application while the operation is performed. On Windows, the Qt event loop is blocked while during the operation.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.SetDragCursor(QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the drag cursor for the action. This allows you to override the default native cursors. To revert to using the native cursor for action pass in a null QPixmap as cursor.</para>
            <para>The action can only be CopyAction, MoveAction or LinkAction. All other values of DropAction are ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.Source">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the source of the drag object. This is the widget where the drag and drop operation originated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.Start(QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Note: It is recommended to use exec() instead of this function.</para>
            <para>Starts the drag and drop operation and returns a value indicating the requested drop action when it is completed. The drop actions that the user can choose from are specified in request. Qt::CopyAction is always allowed.</para>
            <para>Note: Although the drag and drop operation can take some time, this function does not block the event loop. Other events are still delivered to the application while the operation is performed.</para>
            <para>See also exec().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.Target">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the target of the drag and drop operation. This is the widget where the drag object was dropped.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.OnTargetChanged(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the target of the drag and drop operation changes, with newTarget the new target.</para>
            <para>See also target() and actionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDrag.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the drag object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDrag.ActionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the action associated with the drag changes.</para>
            <para>See also targetChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QDrag.TargetChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the target of the drag and drop operation changes, with newTarget the new target.</para>
            <para>See also target() and actionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDrag.HotSpot">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the hot spot relative to the top-left corner of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Sets the position of the hot spot relative to the top-left corner of the pixmap used to the point specified by hotspot.</para>
            <para>Note: on X11, the pixmap may not be able to keep up with the mouse movements if the hot spot causes the pixmap to be displayed directly under the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDrag.MimeData">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the MIME data that is encapsulated by the drag object.</para>
            <para>Sets the data to be sent to the given MIME data. Ownership of the data is transferred to the QDrag object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDrag.Pixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap used to represent the data in a drag and drop operation.</para>
            <para>Sets pixmap as the pixmap used to represent the data in a drag and drop operation. You can only set a pixmap before the drag is started.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDragEnterEvent">
            <summary>
            The QDragEnterEvent class provides an event which is sent to a widget when a drag and drop action enters it.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A widget must accept this event in order to receive the drag move events that are sent while the drag and drop action is in progress. The drag enter event is always immediately followed by a drag move event.</para>
            <para>QDragEnterEvent inherits most of its functionality from QDragMoveEvent, which in turn inherits most of its functionality from QDropEvent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDragLeaveEvent, QDragMoveEvent, and QDropEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            The QDragMoveEvent class provides an event which is sent while a drag and drop action is in progress.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A widget will receive drag move events repeatedly while the drag is within its boundaries, if it accepts drop events and enter events. The widget should examine the event to see what kind of data it provides, and call the accept() function to accept the drop if appropriate.</para>
            <para>The rectangle supplied by the answerRect() function can be used to restrict drops to certain parts of the widget. For example, we can check whether the rectangle intersects with the geometry of a certain child widget and only call acceptProposedAction() if that is the case.</para>
            <para>Note that this class inherits most of its functionality from QDropEvent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDragEnterEvent, QDragLeaveEvent, and QDropEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDropEvent">
            <summary>
            The QDropEvent class provides an event which is sent when a drag and drop action is completed.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When a widget accepts drop events, it will receive this event if it has accepted the most recent QDragEnterEvent or QDragMoveEvent sent to it.</para>
            <para>The drop event contains a proposed action, available from proposedAction(), for the widget to either accept or ignore. If the action can be handled by the widget, you should call the acceptProposedAction() function. Since the proposed action can be a combination of Qt::DropAction values, it may be useful to either select one of these values as a default action or ask the user to select their preferred action.</para>
            <para>If the proposed drop action is not suitable, perhaps because your custom widget does not support that action, you can replace it with any of the possible drop actions by calling setDropAction() with your preferred action. If you set a value that is not present in the bitwise OR combination of values returned by possibleActions(), the default copy action will be used. Once a replacement drop action has been set, call accept() instead of acceptProposedAction() to complete the drop operation.</para>
            <para>The mimeData() function provides the data dropped on the widget in a QMimeData object. This contains information about the MIME type of the data in addition to the data itself.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMimeData, QDrag, and Drag and Drop.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a drop event of a certain type corresponding to a drop at the point specified by pos in the destination widget's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>The actions indicate which types of drag and drop operation can be performed, and the drag data is stored as MIME-encoded data in data.</para>
            <para>The states of the mouse buttons and keyboard modifiers at the time of the drop are specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,QtCore.QEvent.Type)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a drop event of a certain type corresponding to a drop at the point specified by pos in the destination widget's coordinate system.</para>
            <para>The actions indicate which types of drag and drop operation can be performed, and the drag data is stored as MIME-encoded data in data.</para>
            <para>The states of the mouse buttons and keyboard modifiers at the time of the drop are specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.AcceptProposedAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the drop action to be the proposed action.</para>
            <para>See also setDropAction(), proposedAction(), and accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.KeyboardModifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the modifier keys that are pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.MimeData">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the data that was dropped on the widget and its associated MIME type information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.MouseButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse buttons that are pressed..</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position where the drop was made.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.PossibleActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an OR-combination of possible drop actions.</para>
            <para>See also dropAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.ProposedAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the proposed drop action.</para>
            <para>See also dropAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDropEvent.Source">
            <summary>
            <para>If the source of the drag operation is a widget in this application, this function returns that source; otherwise it returns 0. The source of the operation is the first parameter to the QDrag object used instantiate the drag.</para>
            <para>This is useful if your widget needs special behavior when dragging to itself.</para>
            <para>See also QDrag::QDrag().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QDropEvent.DropAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the action to be performed on the data by the target. This may be different from the action supplied in proposedAction() if you have called setDropAction() to explicitly choose a drop action.</para>
            <para>Sets the action to be performed on the data by the target. Use this to override the proposed action with one of the possible actions.</para>
            <para>If you set a drop action that is not one of the possible actions, the drag and drop operation will default to a copy operation.</para>
            <para>Once you have supplied a replacement drop action, call accept() instead of acceptProposedAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QDragMoveEvent of the required type indicating that the mouse is at position pos given within a widget.</para>
            <para>The mouse and keyboard states are specified by buttons and modifiers, and the actions describe the types of drag and drop operation that are possible. The drag data is passed as MIME-encoded information in data.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not attempt to create a QDragMoveEvent yourself. These objects rely on Qt's internal state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,QtCore.QEvent.Type)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QDragMoveEvent of the required type indicating that the mouse is at position pos given within a widget.</para>
            <para>The mouse and keyboard states are specified by buttons and modifiers, and the actions describe the types of drag and drop operation that are possible. The drag data is passed as MIME-encoded information in data.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not attempt to create a QDragMoveEvent yourself. These objects rely on Qt's internal state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.Accept">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Calls QDropEvent::accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.Accept(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>The same as accept(), but also notifies that future moves will also be acceptable if they remain within the rectangle given on the widget. This can improve performance, but may also be ignored by the underlying system.</para>
            <para>If the rectangle is empty, drag move events will be sent continuously. This is useful if the source is scrolling in a timer event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.AnswerRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle in the widget where the drop will occur if accepted. You can use this information to restrict drops to certain places on the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.Ignore">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Calls QDropEvent::ignore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.Ignore(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>The opposite of the accept(const QRect&amp;) function. Moves within the rectangle are not acceptable, and will be ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragMoveEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragEnterEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QDragEnterEvent that represents a drag entering a widget at the given point with mouse and keyboard states specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            <para>The drag data is passed as MIME-encoded information in data, and the specified actions describe the possible types of drag and drop operation that can be performed.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not create a QDragEnterEvent yourself since these objects rely on Qt's internal state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragEnterEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QDragEnterEvent that represents a drag entering a widget at the given point with mouse and keyboard states specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            <para>The drag data is passed as MIME-encoded information in data, and the specified actions describe the possible types of drag and drop operation that can be performed.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not create a QDragEnterEvent yourself since these objects rely on Qt's internal state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent">
            <summary>
            The QDragLeaveEvent class provides an event that is sent to a widget when a drag and drop action leaves it.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This event is always preceded by a QDragEnterEvent and a series of QDragMoveEvents. It is not sent if a QDropEvent is sent instead.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDragEnterEvent, QDragMoveEvent, and QDropEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QDragLeaveEvent.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not create a QDragLeaveEvent yourself since these objects rely on Qt's internal state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QDragLeaveEvent.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not create a QDragLeaveEvent yourself since these objects rely on Qt's internal state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QErrorMessage">
            <summary>
            The QErrorMessage class provides an error message display dialog.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An error message widget consists of a text label and a checkbox. The checkbox lets the user control whether the same error message will be displayed again in the future, typically displaying the text, &amp;quot;Show this message again&amp;quot; translated into the appropriate local language.</para>
            <para>For production applications, the class can be used to display messages which the user only needs to see once. To use QErrorMessage like this, you create the dialog in the usual way, and show it by calling the showMessage() slot or connecting signals to it.</para>
            <para>The static qtHandler() function installs a message handler using qInstallMsgHandler() and creates a QErrorMessage that displays qDebug(), qWarning() and qFatal() messages. This is most useful in environments where no console is available to display warnings and error messages.</para>
            <para>In both cases QErrorMessage will queue pending messages and display them in order, with each new message being shown as soon as the user has accepted the previous message. Once the user has specified that a message is not to be shown again it is automatically skipped, and the dialog will show the next appropriate message in the queue.</para>
            <para>The Standard Dialogs example shows how to use QErrorMessage as well as other built-in Qt dialogs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMessageBox, QStatusBar::showMessage(), and Standard Dialogs Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs and installs an error handler window with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.QtHandler">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to a QErrorMessage object that outputs the default Qt messages. This function creates such an object, if there isn't one already.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.ShowMessage(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the given message, message, and returns immediately. If the user has requested for the message not to be shown again, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>Normally, the message is displayed immediately. However, if there are pending messages, it will be queued to be displayed later.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.ShowMessage(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Shows the given message, message, and returns immediately. If the user has requested for messages of type, type, not to be shown again, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>Normally, the message is displayed immediately. However, if there are pending messages, it will be queued to be displayed later.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QErrorMessage.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the error message dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFileDialog">
            <summary>
            The QFileDialog class provides a dialog that allow users to select files or directories.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QFileDialog class enables a user to traverse the file system in order to select one or many files or a directory.</para>
            <para>The easiest way to create a QFileDialog is to use the static functions. On Windows, Mac OS X, KDE and GNOME, these static functions will call the native file dialog when possible.</para>
            <para> fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this,</para>
            <para>     tr(&amp;quot;Open Image&amp;quot;), &amp;quot;/home/jana&amp;quot;, tr(&amp;quot;Image Files (*.png *.jpg *.bmp)&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>In the above example, a modal QFileDialog is created using a static function. The dialog initially displays the contents of the &amp;quot;/home/jana&amp;quot; directory, and displays files matching the patterns given in the string &amp;quot;Image Files (*.png *.jpg *.bmp)&amp;quot;. The parent of the file dialog is set to this, and the window title is set to &amp;quot;Open Image&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para>If you want to use multiple filters, separate each one with two semicolons. For example:</para>
            <para> &amp;quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)&amp;quot;</para>
            <para>You can create your own QFileDialog without using the static functions. By calling setFileMode(), you can specify what the user must select in the dialog:</para>
            <para> QFileDialog dialog(this);</para>
            <para> dialog.setFileMode(QFileDialog::AnyFile);</para>
            <para>In the above example, the mode of the file dialog is set to AnyFile, meaning that the user can select any file, or even specify a file that doesn't exist. This mode is useful for creating a &amp;quot;Save As&amp;quot; file dialog. Use ExistingFile if the user must select an existing file, or Directory if only a directory may be selected. See the QFileDialog::FileMode enum for the complete list of modes.</para>
            <para>The fileMode property contains the mode of operation for the dialog; this indicates what types of objects the user is expected to select. Use setNameFilter() to set the dialog's file filter. For example:</para>
            <para> dialog.setNameFilter(tr(&amp;quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>In the above example, the filter is set to &amp;quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)&amp;quot;, this means that only files with the extension png, xpm, or jpg will be shown in the QFileDialog. You can apply several filters by using setNameFilters(). Use selectNameFilter() to select one of the filters you've given as the file dialog's default filter.</para>
            <para>The file dialog has two view modes: List and Detail. List presents the contents of the current directory as a list of file and directory names. Detail also displays a list of file and directory names, but provides additional information alongside each name, such as the file size and modification date. Set the mode with setViewMode():</para>
            <para> dialog.setViewMode(QFileDialog::Detail);</para>
            <para>The last important function you will need to use when creating your own file dialog is selectedFiles().</para>
            <para> QStringList fileNames;</para>
            <para> if (dialog.exec())</para>
            <para>     fileNames = dialog.selectedFiles();</para>
            <para>In the above example, a modal file dialog is created and shown. If the user clicked OK, the file they selected is put in fileName.</para>
            <para>The dialog's working directory can be set with setDirectory(). Each file in the current directory can be selected using the selectFile() function.</para>
            <para>The Standard Dialogs example shows how to use QFileDialog as well as other built-in Qt dialogs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDir, QFileInfo, QFile, QPrintDialog, QColorDialog, QFontDialog, Standard Dialogs Example, and Application Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.Accept">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.OnCurrentChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>When the current file changes, this signal is emitted with the new file name as the path parameter.</para>
            <para>See also filesSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.OnDirectoryEntered(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user enters a directory.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.OnFileSelected(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) selected file.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.OnFilesSelected(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) list of selected files.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.OnFilterSelected(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.GetExistingDirectory(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QFileDialog.Option)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.</para>
            <para> QString dir = QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(this, tr(&quot;Open Directory&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                                 &quot;/home&quot;,</para>
            <para>                                                 QFileDialog::ShowDirsOnly</para>
            <para>                                                 | QFileDialog::DontResolveSymlinks);</para>
            <para>This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.</para>
            <para>The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is set to caption. Either of these may be an empty string in which case the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.</para>
            <para>The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass. To ensure a native file dialog, ShowDirsOnly must be set.</para>
            <para>On Windows, Mac OS X and Symbian^3, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On Windows CE, if the device has no native file dialog, a QFileDialog will be used.</para>
            <para>On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.</para>
            <para>On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.</para>
            <para>On Symbian^3 the options parameter is only used to define if the native file dialog is used.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.GetOpenFileName(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Text.StringBuilder,QtGui.QFileDialog.Option)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.</para>
            <para> QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr(&quot;Open File&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                                 &quot;/home&quot;,</para>
            <para>                                                 tr(&quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)&quot;));</para>
            <para>The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.</para>
            <para>The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:</para>
            <para> &quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)&quot;</para>
            <para>The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.</para>
            <para>The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.</para>
            <para>On Windows, Mac OS X and Symbian^3, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.</para>
            <para>On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.</para>
            <para>On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.</para>
            <para>On Symbian^3 the parameter selectedFilter has no meaning and the options parameter is only used to define if the native file dialog is used.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.GetOpenFileNames(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Text.StringBuilder,QtGui.QFileDialog.Option)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.</para>
            <para> QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(</para>
            <para>                         this,</para>
            <para>                         &quot;Select one or more files to open&quot;,</para>
            <para>                         &quot;/home&quot;,</para>
            <para>                         &quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)&quot;);</para>
            <para>This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.</para>
            <para>The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:</para>
            <para> &quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)&quot;</para>
            <para>The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.</para>
            <para>On Windows, Mac OS X and Symbian^3, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.</para>
            <para>On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.</para>
            <para>On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.</para>
            <para>Note: If you want to iterate over the list of files, you should iterate over a copy. For example:</para>
            <para> QStringList list = files;</para>
            <para> QStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();</para>
            <para> while(it != list.end()) {</para>
            <para>     myProcessing(*it);</para>
            <para>     ++it;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>On Symbian^3 the parameter selectedFilter has no meaning and the options parameter is only used to define if the native file dialog is used. On Symbian^3, this function can only return a single filename.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.GetSaveFileName(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Text.StringBuilder,QtGui.QFileDialog.Option)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.</para>
            <para>It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.</para>
            <para> QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr(&quot;Save File&quot;),</para>
            <para>                            &quot;/home/jana/untitled.png&quot;,</para>
            <para>                            tr(&quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)&quot;));</para>
            <para>The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:</para>
            <para> &quot;Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)&quot;</para>
            <para>The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.</para>
            <para>The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.</para>
            <para>The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.</para>
            <para>On Windows, Mac OS X and Symbian^3, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.</para>
            <para>On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On Mac OS X, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.</para>
            <para>On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.</para>
            <para>On Symbian^3 the parameters filter and selectedFilter have no meaning. The options parameter is only used to define if the native file dialog is used.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.LabelText(QtGui.QFileDialog.DialogLabel)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text shown in the filedialog in the specified label.</para>
            <para>See also setLabelText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function connects one of its signals to the slot specified by receiver and member. The specific signal depends is filesSelected() if fileMode is ExistingFiles and fileSelected() if fileMode is anything else.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function connects one of its signals to the slot specified by receiver and member. The specific signal depends is filesSelected() if fileMode is ExistingFiles and fileSelected() if fileMode is anything else.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.RestoreState(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the dialogs's layout, history and current directory to the state specified.</para>
            <para>Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to restore the size from a past session.</para>
            <para>Returns false if there are errors</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SaveState">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the state of the dialog's layout, history and current directory.</para>
            <para>Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to remember the size for a future session. A version number is stored as part of the data.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SelectFile(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the given filename in the file dialog.</para>
            <para>See also selectedFiles().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SelectNameFilter(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current file type filter. Multiple filters can be passed in filter by separating them with semicolons or spaces.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setNameFilter(), setNameFilters(), and selectedNameFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SelectedFiles">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of strings containing the absolute paths of the selected files in the dialog. If no files are selected, or the mode is not ExistingFiles or ExistingFile, selectedFiles() contains the current path in the viewport.</para>
            <para>See also selectedNameFilter() and selectFile().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SelectedNameFilter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the filter that the user selected in the file dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also selectedFiles().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SetDirectory(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the file dialog's current directory.</para>
            <para>See also directory().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SetFilter(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the filter used by the model to filters. The filter is used to specify the kind of files that should be shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also filter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SetLabelText(QtGui.QFileDialog.DialogLabel,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text shown in the filedialog in the specified label.</para>
            <para>See also labelText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SetNameFilter(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the filter used in the file dialog to the given filter.</para>
            <para>If filter contains a pair of parentheses containing one or more of anything*something, separated by spaces, then only the text contained in the parentheses is used as the filter. This means that these calls are all equivalent:</para>
            <para> dialog.setNameFilter(&quot;All C++ files (*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++)&quot;);</para>
            <para> dialog.setNameFilter(&quot;*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++&quot;);</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setNameFilters().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SetOption(QtGui.QFileDialog.Option,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also options and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.TestOption(QtGui.QFileDialog.Option)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also options and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the file dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) selected file.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileDialog.FilesSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) list of selected files.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileDialog.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>When the current file changes, this signal is emitted with the new file name as the path parameter.</para>
            <para>See also filesSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileDialog.DirectoryEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user enters a directory.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileDialog.FilterSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.Directory">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the directory currently being displayed in the dialog.</para>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.Filter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the filter that is used when displaying files.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the filter used by the model to filters. The filter is used to specify the kind of files that should be shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.History">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the browsing history of the filedialog as a list of paths.</para>
            <para>Sets the browsing history of the filedialog to contain the given paths.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.IconProvider">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon provider used by the filedialog.</para>
            <para>Sets the icon provider used by the filedialog to the specified provider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.ItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item delegate used to render the items in the views in the filedialog.</para>
            <para>Sets the item delegate used to render items in the views in the file dialog to the given delegate.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.</para>
            <para>Note that the model used is QFileSystemModel. It has custom item data roles, which is described by the Roles enum. You can use a QFileIconProvider if you only want custom icons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.NameFilters">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file type filters that are in operation on this file dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the filters used in the file dialog.</para>
            <para> QStringList filters;</para>
            <para> filters &lt;&lt; &quot;Image files (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)&quot;</para>
            <para>         &lt;&lt; &quot;Text files (*.txt)&quot;</para>
            <para>         &lt;&lt; &quot;Any files (*)&quot;;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QFileDialog dialog(this);</para>
            <para> dialog.setNameFilters(filters);</para>
            <para> dialog.exec();</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.ProxyModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the proxy model used by the file dialog. By default no proxy is set.</para>
            <para>Sets the model for the views to the given proxyModel. This is useful if you want to modify the underlying model; for example, to add columns, filter data or add drives.</para>
            <para>Any existing proxy model will be removed, but not deleted. The file dialog will take ownership of the proxyModel.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.SidebarUrls">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of urls that are currently in the sidebar</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the urls that are located in the sidebar.</para>
            <para>For instance:</para>
            <para>     QList&lt;QUrl&gt; urls;</para>
            <para>     urls &lt;&lt; QUrl::fromLocalFile(&quot;/home/gvatteka/dev/qt-45&quot;)</para>
            <para>          &lt;&lt; QUrl::fromLocalFile(QDesktopServices::storageLocation(QDesktopServices::MusicLocation));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QFileDialog dialog;</para>
            <para>     dialog.setSidebarUrls(urls);</para>
            <para>     dialog.setFileMode(QFileDialog::AnyFile);</para>
            <para>     if(dialog.exec()) {</para>
            <para>         // ...</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>The file dialog will then look like this:</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.viewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way files and directories are displayed in the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, the Detail mode is used to display information about files and directories.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.fileMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the file mode of the dialog.</para>
            <para>The file mode defines the number and type of items that the user is expected to select in the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to AnyFile.</para>
            <para>This function will set the labels for the FileName and Accept DialogLabels. It is possible to set custom text after the call to setFileMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.acceptMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the accept mode of the dialog.</para>
            <para>The action mode defines whether the dialog is for opening or saving files.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to AcceptOpen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the filedialog is read-only.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to false, the file dialog will allow renaming, and deleting of files and directories and creating directories.</para>
            <para>Use setOption(ReadOnly, enabled) or testOption(ReadOnly) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.ResolveSymlinks">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the filedialog should resolve shortcuts.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to true, the file dialog will resolve shortcuts or symbolic links.</para>
            <para>Use setOption(DontResolveSymlinks, !enabled) or !testOption(DontResolveSymlinks).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.ConfirmOverwrite">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the filedialog should ask before accepting a selected file, when the accept mode is AcceptSave.</para>
            <para>Use setOption(DontConfirmOverwrite, !enabled) or !testOption(DontConfirmOverwrite) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.DefaultSuffix">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds suffix added to the filename if no other suffix was specified.</para>
            <para>This property specifies a string that will be added to the filename if it has no suffix already. The suffix is typically used to indicate the file type (e.g. &quot;txt&quot; indicates a text file).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.NameFilterDetailsVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds this property holds whether the filter details is shown or not.</para>
            <para>When this property is true (the default), the filter details are shown in the combo box. When the property is set to false, these are hidden.</para>
            <para>Use setOption(HideNameFilterDetails, !enabled) or !testOption(HideNameFilterDetails).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileDialog.Options">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the various options that affect the look and feel of the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, all options are disabled.</para>
            <para>Options should be set before showing the dialog. Setting them while the dialog is visible is not guaranteed to have an immediate effect on the dialog (depending on the option and on the platform).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to indicate what the user may select in the file dialog; i.e. what the dialog will return if the user clicks OK.</para>
            <para>This value is obsolete since Qt 4.5:</para>
            <para>See also setFileMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileMode.AnyFile">
            <summary>
            <para>The name of a file, whether it exists or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileMode.Directory">
            <summary>
            <para>The name of a directory. Both files and directories are displayed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileMode.DirectoryOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>Use Directory and setOption(ShowDirsOnly, true) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileMode.ExistingFile">
            <summary>
            <para>The name of a single existing file.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.FileMode.ExistingFiles">
            <summary>
            <para>The names of zero or more existing files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.DontConfirmOverwrite">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't ask for confirmation if an existing file is selected. By default confirmation is requested.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.DontResolveSymlinks">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't resolve symlinks in the file dialog. By default symlinks are resolved.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.DontUseNativeDialog">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't use the native file dialog. By default, the native file dialog is used unless you use a subclass of QFileDialog that contains the Q_OBJECT macro.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.DontUseSheet">
            <summary>
            <para>In previous versions of Qt, the static functions would create a sheet by default if the static function was given a parent. This is no longer supported and does nothing in Qt 4.5, The static functions will always be an application modal dialog. If you want to use sheets, use QFileDialog::open() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.HideNameFilterDetails">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates if the file name filter details are hidden or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the model is readonly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.Option.ShowDirsOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>Only show directories in the file dialog. By default both files and directories are shown. (Valid only in the Directory file mode.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFileDialog.ViewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the view mode of the file dialog; i.e. what information about each file will be displayed.</para>
            <para>See also setViewMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.ViewMode.Detail">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays an icon, a name, and details for each item in the directory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFileDialog.ViewMode.List">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays only an icon and a name for each item in the directory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFileIconProvider">
            <summary>
            The QFileIconProvider class provides file icons for the QDirModel(obsolete) and the QFileSystemModel classes.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileIconProvider.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a file icon provider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileIconProvider.Icon(QtCore.QFileInfo)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an icon for the file described by info.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileIconProvider.Icon(QtGui.QFileIconProvider.IconType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an icon set for the given type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileIconProvider.Type(QtCore.QFileInfo)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of the file described by info.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileIconProvider.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the file icon provider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFileOpenEvent">
            <summary>
            The QFileOpenEvent class provides an event that will be sent when there is a request to open a file or a URL.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>File open events will be sent to the QApplication::instance() when the operating system requests that a file or URL should be opened. This is a high-level event that can be caused by different user actions depending on the user's desktop environment; for example, double clicking on an file icon in the Finder on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>This event is only used to notify the application of a request. It may be safely ignored.</para>
            <para>Note: This class is currently supported for Mac OS X and Symbian only.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileOpenEvent.File">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file that is being opened.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileOpenEvent.OpenFile(QtCore.QFile,QtCore.QIODevice.OpenModeFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a QFile on the file referenced by this event in the mode specified by flags. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This is necessary as some files cannot be opened by name, but require specific information stored in this event. For example, if this QFileOpenEvent contains a request to open a Symbian data caged file, the QFile could only be opened from the Symbian RFile used in the construction of this event.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileOpenEvent.Url">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the url that is being opened.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFileSystemModel">
            <summary>
            The QFileSystemModel class provides a data model for the local filesystem.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class provides access to the local filesystem, providing functions for renaming and removing files and directories, and for creating new directories. In the simplest case, it can be used with a suitable display widget as part of a browser or filter.</para>
            <para>QFileSystemModel can be accessed using the standard interface provided by QAbstractItemModel, but it also provides some convenience functions that are specific to a directory model. The fileInfo(), isDir(), name(), and path() functions provide information about the underlying files and directories related to items in the model. Directories can be created and removed using mkdir(), rmdir().</para>
            <para>Note: QFileSystemModel requires an instance of a GUI application.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Example Usage</para>
            <para>A directory model that displays the contents of a default directory is usually constructed with a parent object:</para>
            <para>     QFileSystemModel *model = new QFileSystemModel;</para>
            <para>     model-&amp;gt;setRootPath(QDir::currentPath());</para>
            <para>A tree view can be used to display the contents of the model</para>
            <para>     QTreeView *tree = new QTreeView(splitter);</para>
            <para>     tree-&amp;gt;setModel(model);</para>
            <para>and the contents of a particular directory can be displayed by setting the tree view's root index:</para>
            <para>     tree-&amp;gt;setRootIndex(model-&amp;gt;index(QDir::currentPath()));</para>
            <para>The view's root index can be used to control how much of a hierarchical model is displayed. QDirModel(obsolete) provides a convenience function that returns a suitable model index for a path to a directory within the model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Caching and Performance</para>
            <para>QFileSystemModel will not fetch any files or directories until setRootPath() is called. This will prevent any unnecessary querying on the file system until that point such as listing the drives on Windows.</para>
            <para>Unlike QDirModel(obsolete), QFileSystemModel uses a separate thread to populate itself so it will not cause the main thread to hang as the file system is being queried. Calls to rowCount() will return 0 until the model populates a directory.</para>
            <para>QFileSystemModel keeps a cache with file information. The cache is automatically kept up to date using the QFileSystemWatcher.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model Classes.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a file system model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.CanFetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::canFetchMore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.ColumnCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.OnDirectoryLoaded(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the gatherer thread has finished to load the path.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.DropMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().</para>
            <para>Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action over the row in the model specified by the row and column and by the parent index.</para>
            <para>See also supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.FetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::fetchMore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.FileIcon(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon for the item stored in the model under the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.FileInfo(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QFileInfo for the item stored in the model under the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.FileName(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file name for the item stored in the model under the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.FilePath(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the path of the item stored in the model under the index given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.OnFileRenamed(System.String,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a file with the oldName is successfully renamed to newName. The file is located in in the directory path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.HasChildren(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.HeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Index(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the model item index for the given path and column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.IsDir(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the model item index represents a directory; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.LastModified(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the date and time when index was last modified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeData().</para>
            <para>Returns an object that contains a serialized description of the specified indexes. The format used to describe the items corresponding to the indexes is obtained from the mimeTypes() function.</para>
            <para>If the list of indexes is empty, 0 is returned rather than a serialized empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().</para>
            <para>Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of items in the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Mkdir(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Create a directory with the name in the parent model index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.MyComputer(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the data stored under the given role for the item &quot;My Computer&quot;.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemDataRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Parent(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Permissions(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the complete OR-ed together combination of QFile::Permission for the index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Remove(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the model item index from the file system model and deletes the corresponding file from the file system, returning true if successful. If the item cannot be removed, false is returned.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function deletes files from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.</para>
            <para>See also rmdir().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Rmdir(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the directory corresponding to the model item index in the file system model and deletes the corresponding directory from the file system, returning true if successful. If the directory cannot be removed, false is returned.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function deletes directories from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.</para>
            <para>See also remove().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.RootDirectory">
            <summary>
            <para>The currently set directory</para>
            <para>See also rootPath().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.RootPath">
            <summary>
            <para>The currently set root path</para>
            <para>See also setRootPath() and rootDirectory().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.OnRootPathChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the root path has been changed to a newPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.RowCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.SetRootPath(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the directory that is being watched by the model to newPath by installing a file system watcher on it. Any changes to files and directories within this directory will be reflected in the model.</para>
            <para>If the path is changed, the rootPathChanged() signal will be emitted.</para>
            <para>Note: This function does not change the structure of the model or modify the data available to views. In other words, the &quot;root&quot; of the model is not changed to include only files and directories within the directory specified by newPath in the file system.</para>
            <para>See also rootPath().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Size(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size in bytes of index. If the file does not exist, 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Type(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of file index such as &quot;Directory&quot; or &quot;JPEG file&quot;.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this file system model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.RootPathChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the root path has been changed to a newPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.FileRenamed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a file with the oldName is successfully renamed to newName. The file is located in in the directory path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.DirectoryLoaded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the gatherer thread has finished to load the path.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.Filter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the filter specified for the directory model.</para>
            <para>If a filter has not been set, the default filter is QDir::AllEntries | QDir::NoDotAndDotDot | QDir::AllDirs.</para>
            <para>Sets the directory model's filter to that specified by filters.</para>
            <para>Note that the filter you set should always include the QDir::AllDirs enum value, otherwise QFileSystemModel won't be able to read the directory structure.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.IconProvider">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file icon provider for this directory model.</para>
            <para>Sets the provider of file icons for the directory model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.NameFilters">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of filters applied to the names in the model.</para>
            <para>Sets the name filters to apply against the existing files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.ResolveSymlinks">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the directory model should resolve symbolic links.</para>
            <para>This is only relevant on operating systems that support symbolic links.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the directory model allows writing to the file system.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to false, the directory model will allow renaming, copying and deleting of files and directories.</para>
            <para>This property is true by default</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFileSystemModel.NameFilterDisables">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether files that don't pass the name filter are hidden or disabled.</para>
            <para>This property is true by default</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFocusEvent">
            <summary>
            The QFocusEvent class contains event parameters for widget focus events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Focus events are sent to widgets when the keyboard input focus changes. Focus events occur due to mouse actions, key presses (such as Tab or Backtab), the window system, popup menus, keyboard shortcuts, or other application-specific reasons. The reason for a particular focus event is returned by reason() in the appropriate event handler.</para>
            <para>The event handlers QWidget::focusInEvent(), QWidget::focusOutEvent(), QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent and QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent() receive focus events.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::setFocusPolicy(), and Keyboard Focus.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a focus event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be either QEvent::FocusIn or QEvent::FocusOut. The reason describes the cause of the change in focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.Qt.FocusReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a focus event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be either QEvent::FocusIn or QEvent::FocusOut. The reason describes the cause of the change in focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusEvent.GotFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if type() is QEvent::FocusIn; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusEvent.LostFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if type() is QEvent::FocusOut; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusEvent.Reason">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the reason for this focus event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFocusFrame">
            <summary>
            The QFocusFrame widget provides a focus frame which can be outside of a widget's normal paintable area.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Normally an application will not need to create its own QFocusFrame as QStyle will handle this detail for you. A style writer can optionally use a QFocusFrame to have a focus area outside of the widget's paintable geometry. In this way space need not be reserved for the widget to have focus but only set on a QWidget with QFocusFrame::setWidget. It is, however, legal to create your own QFocusFrame on a custom widget and set its geometry manually via QWidget::setGeometry however you will not get auto-placement when the focused widget changes size or placement.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusFrame.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QFocusFrame.</para>
            <para>The focus frame will not monitor parent for updates but rather can be placed manually or by using QFocusFrame::setWidget. A QFocusFrame sets Qt::WA_NoChildEventsForParent attribute; as a result the parent will not receive a QEvent::ChildInserted event, this will make it possible to manually set the geometry of the QFocusFrame inside of a QSplitter or other child event monitoring widget.</para>
            <para>See also QFocusFrame::setWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusFrame.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusFrame.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusFrame.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QFocusFrame. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOption, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusFrame.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFocusFrame.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFocusFrame.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently monitored widget for automatically resize and update.</para>
            <para>QFocusFrame will track changes to widget and resize itself automatically. If the monitored widget's parent changes, QFocusFrame will follow the widget and place itself around the widget automatically. If the monitored widget is deleted, QFocusFrame will set it to zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont">
            <summary>
            The QFont class specifies a font used for drawing text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When you create a QFont object you specify various attributes that you want the font to have. Qt will use the font with the specified attributes, or if no matching font exists, Qt will use the closest matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is actually used are retrievable from a QFontInfo object. If the window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns true. Use QFontMetrics to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a string using QFontMetrics::width().</para>
            <para>Note that a QApplication instance must exist before a QFont can be used. You can set the application's default font with QApplication::setFont().</para>
            <para>If a chosen font does not include all the characters that need to be displayed, QFont will try to find the characters in the nearest equivalent fonts. When a QPainter draws a character from a font the QFont will report whether or not it has the character; if it does not, QPainter will draw an unfilled square.</para>
            <para>Create QFonts like this:</para>
            <para> QFont serifFont(&amp;quot;Times&amp;quot;, 10, QFont::Bold);</para>
            <para> QFont sansFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&amp;quot;, 12);</para>
            <para>The attributes set in the constructor can also be set later, e.g. setFamily(), setPointSize(), setPointSizeFloat(), setWeight() and setItalic(). The remaining attributes must be set after contstruction, e.g. setBold(), setUnderline(), setOverline(), setStrikeOut() and setFixedPitch(). QFontInfo objects should be created after the font's attributes have been set. A QFontInfo object will not change, even if you change the font's attributes. The corresponding &amp;quot;get&amp;quot; functions, e.g. family(), pointSize(), etc., return the values that were set, even though the values used may differ. The actual values are available from a QFontInfo object.</para>
            <para>If the requested font family is unavailable you can influence the font matching algorithm by choosing a particular QFont::StyleHint and QFont::StyleStrategy with setStyleHint(). The default family (corresponding to the current style hint) is returned by defaultFamily().</para>
            <para>The font-matching algorithm has a lastResortFamily() and lastResortFont() in cases where a suitable match cannot be found. You can provide substitutions for font family names using insertSubstitution() and insertSubstitutions(). Substitutions can be removed with removeSubstitution(). Use substitute() to retrieve a family's first substitute, or the family name itself if it has no substitutes. Use substitutes() to retrieve a list of a family's substitutes (which may be empty).</para>
            <para>Every QFont has a key() which you can use, for example, as the key in a cache or dictionary. If you want to store a user's font preferences you could use QSettings, writing the font information with toString() and reading it back with fromString(). The operator&amp;lt;&amp;lt;() and operator&amp;gt;&amp;gt;() functions are also available, but they work on a data stream.</para>
            <para>It is possible to set the height of characters shown on the screen to a specified number of pixels with setPixelSize(); however using setPointSize() has a similar effect and provides device independence.</para>
            <para>In X11 you can set a font using its system specific name with setRawName().</para>
            <para>Loading fonts can be expensive, especially on X11. QFont contains extensive optimizations to make the copying of QFont objects fast, and to cache the results of the slow window system functions it depends upon.</para>
            <para>The font matching algorithm works as follows:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The specified font family is searched for.</para>
            <para>If not found, the styleHint() is used to select a replacement family.</para>
            <para>Each replacement font family is searched for.</para>
            <para>If none of these are found or there was no styleHint(), &amp;quot;helvetica&amp;quot; will be searched for.</para>
            <para>If &amp;quot;helvetica&amp;quot; isn't found Qt will try the lastResortFamily().</para>
            <para>If the lastResortFamily() isn't found Qt will try the lastResortFont() which will always return a name of some kind.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that the actual font matching algorithm varies from platform to platform.</para>
            <para>In Windows a request for the &amp;quot;Courier&amp;quot; font is automatically changed to &amp;quot;Courier New&amp;quot;, an improved version of Courier that allows for smooth scaling. The older &amp;quot;Courier&amp;quot; bitmap font can be selected by setting the PreferBitmap style strategy (see setStyleStrategy()).</para>
            <para>Once a font is found, the remaining attributes are matched in order of priority:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>fixedPitch()</para>
            <para>pointSize() (see below)</para>
            <para>weight()</para>
            <para>style()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If you have a font which matches on family, even if none of the other attributes match, this font will be chosen in preference to a font which doesn't match on family but which does match on the other attributes. This is because font family is the dominant search criteria.</para>
            <para>The point size is defined to match if it is within 20% of the requested point size. When several fonts match and are only distinguished by point size, the font with the closest point size to the one requested will be chosen.</para>
            <para>The actual family, font size, weight and other font attributes used for drawing text will depend on what's available for the chosen family under the window system. A QFontInfo object can be used to determine the actual values used for drawing the text.</para>
            <para>Examples:</para>
            <para> QFont f(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>If you had both an Adobe and a Cronyx Helvetica, you might get either.</para>
            <para> QFont f(&amp;quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>You can specify the foundry you want in the family name. The font f in the above example will be set to &amp;quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para>To determine the attributes of the font actually used in the window system, use a QFontInfo object, e.g.</para>
            <para> QFontInfo info(f1);</para>
            <para> QString family = info.family();</para>
            <para>To find out font metrics use a QFontMetrics object, e.g.</para>
            <para> QFontMetrics fm(f1);</para>
            <para> int textWidthInPixels = fm.width(&amp;quot;How many pixels wide is this text?&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> int textHeightInPixels = fm.height();</para>
            <para>For more general information on fonts, see the comp.fonts FAQ. Information on encodings can be found from Roman Czyborra's page.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFontComboBox, QFontMetrics, QFontInfo, QFontDatabase, and Character Map Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font object that uses the application's default font.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::setFont() and QApplication::font().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.#ctor(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font that is a copy of font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.#ctor(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font from font for use on the paint device pd.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.#ctor(System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font object that uses the application's default font.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::setFont() and QApplication::font().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.DefaultFamily">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the family name that corresponds to the current style hint.</para>
            <para>See also StyleHint, styleHint(), and setStyleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.ExactMatch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if a window system font exactly matching the settings of this font is available.</para>
            <para>See also QFontInfo.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.FromString(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets this font to match the description descrip. The description is a comma-separated list of the font attributes, as returned by toString().</para>
            <para>See also toString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Handle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window system handle to the font, for low-level access. Using this function is not portable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.InsertSubstitution(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts substituteName into the substitution table for the family familyName.</para>
            <para>See also insertSubstitutions(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), substitute(), and substitutes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.InsertSubstitutions(System.String,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the list of families substituteNames into the substitution list for familyName.</para>
            <para>See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substitute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.IsCopyOf(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this font and f are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has been modified since. This is much stricter than equality.</para>
            <para>See also operator=() and operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Key">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font's key, a textual representation of a font. It is typically used as the key for a cache or dictionary of fonts.</para>
            <para>See also QMap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.LastResortFamily">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the &quot;last resort&quot; font family name.</para>
            <para>The current implementation tries a wide variety of common fonts, returning the first one it finds. Is is possible that no family is found in which case an empty string is returned.</para>
            <para>See also lastResortFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.LastResortFont">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a &quot;last resort&quot; font name for the font matching algorithm. This is used if the last resort family is not available. It will always return a name, if necessary returning something like &quot;fixed&quot; or &quot;system&quot;.</para>
            <para>The current implementation tries a wide variety of common fonts, returning the first one it finds. The implementation may change at any time, but this function will always return a string containing something.</para>
            <para>It is theoretically possible that there really isn't a lastResortFont() in which case Qt will abort with an error message. We have not been able to identify a case where this happens. Please report it as a bug if it does, preferably with a list of the fonts you have installed.</para>
            <para>See also lastResortFamily() and rawName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.LetterSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the letter spacing for the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setLetterSpacing(), letterSpacingType(), and setWordSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.LetterSpacingType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the spacing type used for letter spacing.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also letterSpacing(), setLetterSpacing(), and setWordSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.op_Inequality(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this font is different from f; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two QFonts are considered to be different if their font attributes are different. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family fields are compared.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.op_LessThan(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Provides an arbitrary comparison of this font and font f. All that is guaranteed is that the operator returns false if both fonts are equal and that (f1 &lt; f2) == !(f2 &lt; f1) if the fonts are not equal.</para>
            <para>This function is useful in some circumstances, for example if you want to use QFont objects as keys in a QMap.</para>
            <para>See also operator==(), operator!=(), and isCopyOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.op_Equality(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this font is equal to f; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two QFonts are considered equal if their font attributes are equal. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family fields are compared.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=() and isCopyOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.RemoveSubstitution(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all the substitutions for familyName.</para>
            <para>See also insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substitute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Resolve">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new QFont that has attributes copied from other that have not been previously set on this font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Resolve(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new QFont that has attributes copied from other that have not been previously set on this font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Resolve(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new QFont that has attributes copied from other that have not been previously set on this font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.SetLetterSpacing(QtGui.QFont.SpacingType,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the letter spacing for the font to spacing and the type of spacing to type.</para>
            <para>Letter spacing changes the default spacing between individual letters in the font. The spacing between the letters can be made smaller as well as larger.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also letterSpacing(), letterSpacingType(), and setWordSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.SetStyleHint(QtGui.QFont.StyleHint,QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the style hint and strategy to hint and strategy, respectively.</para>
            <para>If these aren't set explicitly the style hint will default to AnyStyle and the style strategy to PreferDefault.</para>
            <para>Qt does not support style hints on X11 since this information is not provided by the window system.</para>
            <para>See also StyleHint, styleHint(), StyleStrategy, styleStrategy(), and QFontInfo.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Substitute(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first family name to be used whenever familyName is specified. The lookup is case insensitive.</para>
            <para>If there is no substitution for familyName, familyName is returned.</para>
            <para>To obtain a list of substitutions use substitutes().</para>
            <para>See also setFamily(), insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), and removeSubstitution().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Substitutes(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of family names to be used whenever familyName is specified. The lookup is case insensitive.</para>
            <para>If there is no substitution for familyName, an empty list is returned.</para>
            <para>See also substitute(), insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), and removeSubstitution().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Substitutions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sorted list of substituted family names.</para>
            <para>See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), and substitute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.ToString">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a description of the font. The description is a comma-separated list of the attributes, perfectly suited for use in QSettings.</para>
            <para>See also fromString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFont.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the font object and frees all allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.Bold">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if weight() is a value greater than QFont::Normal; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true sets the font's weight to QFont::Bold; otherwise sets the weight to QFont::Normal.</para>
            <para>For finer boldness control use setWeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.capitalization">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current capitalization type of the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the capitalization of the text in this font to caps.</para>
            <para>A font's capitalization makes the text appear in the selected capitalization mode.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.Family">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the requested font family name, i.e. the name set in the constructor or the last setFont() call.</para>
            <para>Sets the family name of the font. The name is case insensitive and may include a foundry name.</para>
            <para>The family name may optionally also include a foundry name, e.g. &quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&quot;. If the family is available from more than one foundry and the foundry isn't specified, an arbitrary foundry is chosen. If the family isn't available a family will be set using the font matching algorithm.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.FixedPitch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed pitch off.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.hintingPreference">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently preferred hinting level for glyphs rendered with this font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Set the preference for the hinting level of the glyphs to hintingPreference. This is a hint to the underlying font rendering system to use a certain level of hinting, and has varying support across platforms. See the table in the documentation for QFont::HintingPreference for more details.</para>
            <para>The default hinting preference is QFont::PreferDefaultHinting.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.Italic">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the style() of the font is not QFont::StyleNormal</para>
            <para>Sets the style() of the font to QFont::StyleItalic if enable is true; otherwise the style is set to QFont::StyleNormal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.Kerning">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if kerning should be used when drawing text with this font.</para>
            <para>Enables kerning for this font if enable is true; otherwise disables it. By default, kerning is enabled.</para>
            <para>When kerning is enabled, glyph metrics do not add up anymore, even for Latin text. In other words, the assumption that width('a') + width('b') is equal to width(&quot;ab&quot;) is not neccesairly true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.Overline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if overline has been set; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.PixelSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixel size of the font if it was set with setPixelSize(). Returns -1 if the size was set with setPointSize() or setPointSizeF().</para>
            <para>Sets the font size to pixelSize pixels.</para>
            <para>Using this function makes the font device dependent. Use setPointSize() or setPointSizeF() to set the size of the font in a device independent manner.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.PointSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size was specified in pixels.</para>
            <para>Sets the point size to pointSize. The point size must be greater than zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.PointSizeF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size was specified in pixels.</para>
            <para>Sets the point size to pointSize. The point size must be greater than zero. The requested precision may not be achieved on all platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.RawMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode off. This function only has an effect under X11.</para>
            <para>If raw mode is enabled, Qt will search for an X font with a complete font name matching the family name, ignoring all other values set for the QFont. If the font name matches several fonts, Qt will use the first font returned by X. QFontInfo cannot be used to fetch information about a QFont using raw mode (it will return the values set in the QFont for all parameters, including the family name).</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not use raw mode unless you really, really need it! In most (if not all) cases, setRawName() is a much better choice.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.RawName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the font within the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>On X11, this function will return an empty string if Qt is built with FontConfig support; otherwise the XLFD (X Logical Font Description) is returned.</para>
            <para>Using the return value of this function is usually not portable.</para>
            <para>Sets a font by its system specific name. The function is particularly useful under X, where system font settings (for example X resources) are usually available in XLFD (X Logical Font Description) form only. You can pass an XLFD as name to this function.</para>
            <para>A font set with setRawName() is still a full-featured QFont. It can be queried (for example with italic()) or modified (for example with setItalic()) and is therefore also suitable for rendering rich text.</para>
            <para>If Qt's internal font database cannot resolve the raw name, the font becomes a raw font with name as its family.</para>
            <para>Note that the present implementation does not handle wildcards in XLFDs well, and that font aliases (file fonts.alias in the font directory on X11) are not supported.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.stretch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor for the font.</para>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor for the font.</para>
            <para>The stretch factor changes the width of all characters in the font by factor percent. For example, setting factor to 150 results in all characters in the font being 1.5 times (ie. 150%) wider. The default stretch factor is 100. The minimum stretch factor is 1, and the maximum stretch factor is 4000.</para>
            <para>The stretch factor is only applied to outline fonts. The stretch factor is ignored for bitmap fonts.</para>
            <para>NOTE: QFont cannot stretch XLFD fonts. When loading XLFD fonts on X11, the stretch factor is matched against a predefined set of values for the SETWIDTH_NAME field of the XLFD.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.StrikeOut">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout off.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style of the font.</para>
            <para>Sets the style of the font to style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.StyleName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the requested font style name, it will be used to match the font with irregular styles (that can't be normalized in other style properties). It depends on system font support, thus only works for Mac OS X and X11 so far. On Windows irregular styles will be added as separate font families so there is no need for this.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the style name of the font to the given styleName. When set, other style properties like style() and weight() will be ignored for font matching.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.styleStrategy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the StyleStrategy.</para>
            <para>The style strategy affects the font matching algorithm. See QFont::StyleStrategy for the list of available strategies.</para>
            <para>Sets the style strategy for the font to s.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.Underline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if underline has been set; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline off.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.weight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the weight of the font which is one of the enumerated values from QFont::Weight.</para>
            <para>Sets the weight the font to weight, which should be a value from the QFont::Weight enumeration.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.WordSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the word spacing for the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the word spacing for the font to spacing.</para>
            <para>Word spacing changes the default spacing between individual words. A positive value increases the word spacing by a corresponding amount of pixels, while a negative value decreases the inter-word spacing accordingly.</para>
            <para>Word spacing will not apply to writing systems, where indiviaul words are not separated by white space.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFont.styleHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the StyleHint.</para>
            <para>The style hint affects the font matching algorithm. See QFont::StyleHint for the list of available hints.</para>
            <para>See also setStyleHint(), QFont::StyleStrategy, and QFontInfo::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.Capitalization">
            <summary>
            <para>Rendering option for text this font applies to.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Capitalization.AllLowercase">
            <summary>
            <para>This alters the text to be rendered in all lowercase type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Capitalization.AllUppercase">
            <summary>
            <para>This alters the text to be rendered in all uppercase type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Capitalization.Capitalize">
            <summary>
            <para>This alters the text to be rendered with the first character of each word as an uppercase character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Capitalization.MixedCase">
            <summary>
            <para>This is the normal text rendering option where no capitalization change is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Capitalization.SmallCaps">
            <summary>
            <para>This alters the text to be rendered in small-caps type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different levels of hinting that can be applied to glyphs to improve legibility on displays where it might be warranted by the density of pixels.</para>
            <para>Please note that this enum only describes a preference, as the full range of hinting levels are not supported on all of Qt's supported platforms. The following table details the effect of a given hinting preference on a selected set of target platforms.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>PreferDefaultHintingPreferNoHintingPreferVerticalHintingPreferFullHinting</para>
            <para>Windows Vista (w/o Platform Update) and earlier	Full hinting	Full hinting	Full hinting	Full hinting</para>
            <para>Windows 7 and Windows Vista (w/Platform Update) and DirectWrite enabled in Qt	Full hinting	Vertical hinting	Vertical hinting	Full hinting</para>
            <para>FreeType	Operating System setting	No hinting	Vertical hinting (light)	Full hinting</para>
            <para>Cocoa on Mac OS X	No hinting	No hinting	No hinting	No hinting</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note: Please be aware that altering the hinting preference on Windows is available through the DirectWrite font engine. This is available on Windows Vista after installing the platform update, and on Windows 7. In order to use this extension, configure Qt using -directwrite. The target application will then depend on the availability of DirectWrite on the target system.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference.PreferDefaultHinting">
            <summary>
            <para>Use the default hinting level for the target platform.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference.PreferFullHinting">
            <summary>
            <para>If possible, render text with hinting in both horizontal and vertical directions. The text will be altered to optimize legibility on the target device, but since the metrics will depend on the target size of the text, the positions of glyphs, line breaks, and other typographical detail will not scale, meaning that a text layout may look different on devices with different pixel densities.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference.PreferNoHinting">
            <summary>
            <para>If possible, render text without hinting the outlines of the glyphs. The text layout will be typographically accurate and scalable, using the same metrics as are used e.g. when printing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference.PreferVerticalHinting">
            <summary>
            <para>If possible, render text with no horizontal hinting, but align glyphs to the pixel grid in the vertical direction. The text will appear crisper on displays where the density is too low to give an accurate rendering of the glyphs. But since the horizontal metrics of the glyphs are unhinted, the text's layout will be scalable to higher density devices (such as printers) without impacting details such as line breaks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.SpacingType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.SpacingType.AbsoluteSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>A positive value increases the letter spacing by the corresponding pixels; a negative value decreases the spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.SpacingType.PercentageSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>A value of 100 will keep the spacing unchanged; a value of 200 will enlarge the spacing after a character by the width of the character itself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.Stretch">
            <summary>
            <para>Predefined stretch values that follow the CSS naming convention. The higher the value, the more stretched the text is.</para>
            <para>See also setStretch() and stretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.Condensed">
            <summary>
            <para>75</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.Expanded">
            <summary>
            <para>125</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.ExtraCondensed">
            <summary>
            <para>62</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.ExtraExpanded">
            <summary>
            <para>150</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.SemiCondensed">
            <summary>
            <para>87</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.SemiExpanded">
            <summary>
            <para>112</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.UltraCondensed">
            <summary>
            <para>50</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.UltraExpanded">
            <summary>
            <para>200</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Stretch.Unstretched">
            <summary>
            <para>100</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different styles of glyphs that are used to display text.</para>
            <para>See also Weight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Style.StyleItalic">
            <summary>
            <para>Italic glyphs that are specifically designed for the purpose of representing italicized text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Style.StyleNormal">
            <summary>
            <para>Normal glyphs used in unstyled text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Style.StyleOblique">
            <summary>
            <para>Glyphs with an italic appearance that are typically based on the unstyled glyphs, but are not fine-tuned for the purpose of representing italicized text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Style hints are used by the font matching algorithm to find an appropriate default family if a selected font family is not available.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.AnyStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Leaves the font matching algorithm to choose the family. This is the default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Courier">
            <summary>
            <para>A synonym for TypeWriter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Cursive">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers fonts that map to the CSS generic font-family 'cursive'.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Decorative">
            <summary>
            <para>Is a synonym for OldEnglish.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Fantasy">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers fonts that map to the CSS generic font-family 'fantasy'.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Helvetica">
            <summary>
            <para>Is a synonym for SansSerif.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Monospace">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers fonts that map to the CSS generic font-family 'monospace'.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.OldEnglish">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers decorative fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.SansSerif">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefer sans serif fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Serif">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers serif fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.System">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers system fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.Times">
            <summary>
            <para>Is a synonym for Serif.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleHint.TypeWriter">
            <summary>
            <para>The font matcher prefers fixed pitch fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy">
            <summary>
            <para>The style strategy tells the font matching algorithm what type of fonts should be used to find an appropriate default family.</para>
            <para>The following strategies are available:</para>
            <para>Any of these may be OR-ed with one of these flags:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.ForceIntegerMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>Forces the use of integer values in font engines that support fractional font metrics.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.ForceOutline">
            <summary>
            <para>Forces the use of outline fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.NoAntialias">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't antialias the fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.NoFontMerging">
            <summary>
            <para>If the font selected for a certain writing system does not contain a character requested to draw, then Qt automatically chooses a similar looking font that contains the character. The NoFontMerging flag disables this feature. Please note that enabling this flag will not prevent Qt from automatically picking a suitable font when the selected font does not support the writing system of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.OpenGLCompatible">
            <summary>
            <para>Forces the use of OpenGL compatible fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferAntialias">
            <summary>
            <para>Antialias if possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferBitmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Prefers bitmap fonts (as opposed to outline fonts).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferDefault">
            <summary>
            <para>The default style strategy. It does not prefer any type of font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferDevice">
            <summary>
            <para>Prefers device fonts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferMatch">
            <summary>
            <para>Prefer an exact match. The font matcher will try to use the exact font size that has been specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferOutline">
            <summary>
            <para>Prefers outline fonts (as opposed to bitmap fonts).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy.PreferQuality">
            <summary>
            <para>Prefer the best quality font. The font matcher will use the nearest standard point size that the font supports.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFont.Weight">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt uses a weighting scale from 0 to 99 similar to, but not the same as, the scales used in Windows or CSS. A weight of 0 is ultralight, whilst 99 will be an extremely black.</para>
            <para>This enum contains the predefined font weights:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Weight.Black">
            <summary>
            <para>87</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Weight.Bold">
            <summary>
            <para>75</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Weight.DemiBold">
            <summary>
            <para>63</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Weight.Light">
            <summary>
            <para>25</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFont.Weight.Normal">
            <summary>
            <para>50</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontComboBox">
            <summary>
            The QFontComboBox widget is a combobox that lets the user select a font family.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The combobox is populated with an alphabetized list of font family names, such as Arial, Helvetica, and Times New Roman. Family names are displayed using the actual font when possible. For fonts such as Symbol, where the name is not representable in the font itself, a sample of the font is displayed next to the family name.</para>
            <para>QFontComboBox is often used in toolbars, in conjunction with a QComboBox for controlling the font size and two QToolButtons for bold and italic.</para>
            <para>When the user selects a new font, the currentFontChanged() signal is emitted in addition to currentIndexChanged().</para>
            <para>Call setWritingSystem() to tell QFontComboBox to show only fonts that support a given writing system, and setFontFilters() to filter out certain types of fonts as e.g. non scalable fonts or monospaced fonts.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QComboBox, QFont, QFontInfo, QFontMetrics, QFontDatabase, and Character Map Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontComboBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font combobox with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontComboBox.OnCurrentFontChanged(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current font changes, with the new font.</para>
            <para>See also currentFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontComboBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontComboBox.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontComboBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the combobox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFontComboBox.CurrentFontChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current font changes, with the new font.</para>
            <para>See also currentFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFontComboBox.WritingSystem">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the writing system that serves as a filter for the combobox.</para>
            <para>If script is QFontDatabase::Any (the default), all fonts are listed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilters">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the filter for the combobox.</para>
            <para>By default, all fonts are listed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFontComboBox.CurrentFont">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the currently selected font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilter">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum can be used to only show certain types of fonts in the font combo box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilter.AllFonts">
            <summary>
            <para>Show all fonts</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilter.MonospacedFonts">
            <summary>
            <para>Show monospaced fonts</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilter.NonScalableFonts">
            <summary>
            <para>Show non scalable fonts</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilter.ProportionalFonts">
            <summary>
            <para>Show proportional fonts</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontComboBox.FontFilter.ScalableFonts">
            <summary>
            <para>Show scalable fonts</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontDatabase">
            <summary>
            The QFontDatabase class provides information about the fonts available in the underlying window system.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The most common uses of this class are to query the database for the list of font families() and for the pointSizes() and styles() that are available for each family. An alternative to pointSizes() is smoothSizes() which returns the sizes at which a given family and style will look attractive.</para>
            <para>If the font family is available from two or more foundries the foundry name is included in the family name; for example: &amp;quot;Helvetica [Adobe]&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&amp;quot;. When you specify a family, you can either use the old hyphenated &amp;quot;foundry-family&amp;quot; format or the bracketed &amp;quot;family [foundry]&amp;quot; format; for example: &amp;quot;Cronyx-Helvetica&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&amp;quot;. If the family has a foundry it is always returned using the bracketed format, as is the case with the value returned by families().</para>
            <para>The font() function returns a QFont given a family, style and point size.</para>
            <para>A family and style combination can be checked to see if it is italic() or bold(), and to retrieve its weight(). Similarly we can call isBitmapScalable(), isSmoothlyScalable(), isScalable() and isFixedPitch().</para>
            <para>Use the styleString() to obtain a text version of a style.</para>
            <para>The QFontDatabase class also supports some static functions, for example, standardSizes(). You can retrieve the description of a writing system using writingSystemName(), and a sample of characters in a writing system with writingSystemSample().</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para>     QFontDatabase database;</para>
            <para>     QTreeWidget fontTree;</para>
            <para>     fontTree.setColumnCount(2);</para>
            <para>     fontTree.setHeaderLabels(QStringList() &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;Font&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;Smooth Sizes&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     foreach (const QString &amp;amp;family, database.families()) {</para>
            <para>         QTreeWidgetItem *familyItem = new QTreeWidgetItem(&amp;amp;fontTree);</para>
            <para>         familyItem-&amp;gt;setText(0, family);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         foreach (const QString &amp;amp;style, database.styles(family)) {</para>
            <para>             QTreeWidgetItem *styleItem = new QTreeWidgetItem(familyItem);</para>
            <para>             styleItem-&amp;gt;setText(0, style);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>             QString sizes;</para>
            <para>             foreach (int points, database.smoothSizes(family, style))</para>
            <para>                 sizes += QString::number(points) + &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>             styleItem-&amp;gt;setText(1, sizes.trimmed());</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>This example gets the list of font families, the list of styles for each family, and the point sizes that are available for each combination of family and style, displaying this information in a tree view.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFont, QFontInfo, QFontMetrics, QFontComboBox, and Character Map Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a font database object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.#ctor(QtGui.QFontDatabase)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a font database object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.AddApplicationFont(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads the font from the file specified by fileName and makes it available to the application. An ID is returned that can be used to remove the font again with removeApplicationFont() or to retrieve the list of family names contained in the font.</para>
            <para>The function returns -1 if the font could not be loaded.</para>
            <para>Currently only TrueType fonts, TrueType font collections, and OpenType fonts are supported.</para>
            <para>Note: Adding application fonts on Unix/X11 platforms without fontconfig is currently not supported.</para>
            <para>Note: On Symbian, the font family names get truncated to a length of 20 characters.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addApplicationFontFromData(), applicationFontFamilies(), and removeApplicationFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.AddApplicationFontFromData(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads the font from binary data specified by fontData and makes it available to the application. An ID is returned that can be used to remove the font again with removeApplicationFont() or to retrieve the list of family names contained in the font.</para>
            <para>The function returns -1 if the font could not be loaded.</para>
            <para>Currently only TrueType fonts and TrueType font collections are supported.</para>
            <para>Note: Adding application fonts on Unix/X11 platforms without fontconfig is currently not supported.</para>
            <para>Note: On Symbian, the font family names get truncated to a length of 20 characters.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addApplicationFont(), applicationFontFamilies(), and removeApplicationFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.ApplicationFontFamilies(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of font families for the given application font identified by id.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addApplicationFont() and addApplicationFontFromData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.Bold(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font that has family family and style style is bold; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also italic() and weight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.Families(QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sorted list of the available font families which support the writingSystem.</para>
            <para>If a family exists in several foundries, the returned name for that font is in the form &quot;family [foundry]&quot;. Examples: &quot;Times [Adobe]&quot;, &quot;Times [Cronyx]&quot;, &quot;Palatino&quot;.</para>
            <para>See also writingSystems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.Font(System.String,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QFont object that has family family, style style and point size pointSize. If no matching font could be created, a QFont object that uses the application's default font is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.IsBitmapScalable(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font that has family family and style style is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns false. Scaling a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed sizes returned by smoothSizes().</para>
            <para>See also isScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.IsFixedPitch(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font that has family family and style style is fixed pitch; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.IsScalable(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font that has family family and style style is scalable; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isBitmapScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.IsSmoothlyScalable(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font that has family family and style style is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns false. If this function returns true, it's safe to scale this font to any size, and the result will always look attractive.</para>
            <para>See also isScalable() and isBitmapScalable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.Italic(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font that has family family and style style is italic; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also weight() and bold().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.PointSizes(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the point sizes available for the font with the given family and style. The list may be empty.</para>
            <para>See also smoothSizes() and standardSizes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.RemoveAllApplicationFonts">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all application-local fonts previously added using addApplicationFont() and addApplicationFontFromData().</para>
            <para>Returns true if unloading of the fonts succeeded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also removeApplicationFont(), addApplicationFont(), and addApplicationFontFromData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.RemoveApplicationFont(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the previously loaded application font identified by id. Returns true if unloading of the font succeeded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also removeAllApplicationFonts(), addApplicationFont(), and addApplicationFontFromData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.SmoothSizes(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point sizes of a font with the given family and style that will look attractive. The list may be empty. For non-scalable fonts and bitmap scalable fonts, this function is equivalent to pointSizes().</para>
            <para>See also pointSizes() and standardSizes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.StandardSizes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of standard font sizes.</para>
            <para>See also smoothSizes() and pointSizes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.StyleString(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string that describes the style of the font. For example, &quot;Bold Italic&quot;, &quot;Bold&quot;, &quot;Italic&quot; or &quot;Normal&quot;. An empty string may be returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.StyleString(QtGui.QFontInfo)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string that describes the style of the fontInfo. For example, &quot;Bold Italic&quot;, &quot;Bold&quot;, &quot;Italic&quot; or &quot;Normal&quot;. An empty string may be returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.Styles(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the styles available for the font family family. Some example styles: &quot;Light&quot;, &quot;Light Italic&quot;, &quot;Bold&quot;, &quot;Oblique&quot;, &quot;Demi&quot;. The list may be empty.</para>
            <para>See also families().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.SupportsThreadedFontRendering">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if font rendering is supported outside the GUI thread, false otherwise. In other words, a return value of false means that all QPainter::drawText() calls outside the GUI thread will not produce readable output.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also Painting In Threads.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.Weight(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the weight of the font that has family family and style style. If there is no such family and style combination, returns -1.</para>
            <para>See also italic() and bold().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystemName(QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the names the writingSystem (e.g. for displaying to the user in a dialog).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystemSample(QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string with sample characters from writingSystem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sorted list of the available writing systems. This is list generated from information about all installed fonts on the system.</para>
            <para>See also families().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystems(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sorted list of the writing systems supported by a given font family.</para>
            <para>See also families().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystem.Other">
            <summary>
            <para>(the same as Symbol)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontDialog">
            <summary>
            The QFontDialog class provides a dialog widget for selecting a font.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A font dialog is created through one of the static getFont() functions.</para>
            <para>Examples:</para>
            <para> bool ok;</para>
            <para> QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(</para>
            <para>                 &amp;amp;ok, QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica [Cronyx]&amp;quot;, 10), this);</para>
            <para> if (ok) {</para>
            <para>     // the user clicked OK and font is set to the font the user selected</para>
            <para> } else {</para>
            <para>     // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial</para>
            <para>     // value, in this case Helvetica [Cronyx], 10</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:</para>
            <para> myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));</para>
            <para>If the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used for myWidget, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFont, QFontInfo, QFontMetrics, QColorDialog, QFileDialog, QPrintDialog, and Standard Dialogs Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a standard font dialog.</para>
            <para>Use setCurrentFont() to set the initial font attributes.</para>
            <para>The parent parameter is passed to the QDialog constructor.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also getFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a standard font dialog with the given parent and specified initial font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.OnCurrentFontChanged(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current font is changed. The new font is specified in font.</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted while a user is selecting a font. Ultimately, the chosen font may differ from the font currently selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also currentFont, fontSelected(), and selectedFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            <para>Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.</para>
            <para>See also QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.OnFontSelected(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a font has been selected. The selected font is specified in font.</para>
            <para>The signal is only emitted when a user has chosen the final font to be used. It is not emitted while the user is changing the current font in the font dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also selectedFont(), currentFontChanged(), and currentFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.GetFont(System.Boolean@,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.</para>
            <para>If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the Qt default font is returned.</para>
            <para>The dialog is constructed with the given parent. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and false if the user clicks Cancel.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> bool ok;</para>
            <para> QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&amp;ok, this);</para>
            <para> if (ok) {</para>
            <para>     // font is set to the font the user selected</para>
            <para> } else {</para>
            <para>     // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the default</para>
            <para>     // application font, QApplication::font()</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.GetFont(System.Boolean@,QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.GetFont(System.Boolean@,QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QWidget,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.GetFont(System.Boolean@,QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QWidget,System.String,QtGui.QFontDialog.FontDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.</para>
            <para>If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.</para>
            <para>The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.</para>
            <para>Examples:</para>
            <para> bool ok;</para>
            <para> QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&amp;ok, QFont(&quot;Times&quot;, 12), this);</para>
            <para> if (ok) {</para>
            <para>     // font is set to the font the user selected</para>
            <para> } else {</para>
            <para>     // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial</para>
            <para>     // value, in this case Times, 12.</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:</para>
            <para> myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));</para>
            <para>In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its fontSelected() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its fontSelected() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.SelectedFont">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font that the user selected by clicking the OK or equivalent button.</para>
            <para>Note: This font is not always the same as the font held by the currentFont property since the user can choose different fonts before finally selecting the one to use.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.SetOption(QtGui.QFontDialog.FontDialogOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>See also options and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontDialog.TestOption(QtGui.QFontDialog.FontDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also options and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFontDialog.CurrentFontChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current font is changed. The new font is specified in font.</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted while a user is selecting a font. Ultimately, the chosen font may differ from the font currently selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also currentFont, fontSelected(), and selectedFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QFontDialog.FontSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a font has been selected. The selected font is specified in font.</para>
            <para>The signal is only emitted when a user has chosen the final font to be used. It is not emitted while the user is changing the current font in the font dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also selectedFont(), currentFontChanged(), and currentFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFontDialog.CurrentFont">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current font of the dialog.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFontDialog.Options">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the various options that affect the look and feel of the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, all options are disabled.</para>
            <para>Options should be set before showing the dialog. Setting them while the dialog is visible is not guaranteed to have an immediate effect on the dialog (depending on the option and on the platform).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontDialog.FontDialogOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies various options that affect the look and feel of a font dialog.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also options, setOption(), and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontDialog.FontDialogOption.DontUseNativeDialog">
            <summary>
            <para>Use Qt's standard font dialog on the Mac instead of Apple's native font panel. (Currently, the native dialog is never used, but this is likely to change in future Qt releases.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFontDialog.FontDialogOption.NoButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't display OK and Cancel buttons. (Useful for &quot;live dialogs&quot;.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontInfo">
            <summary>
            The QFontInfo class provides general information about fonts.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QFontInfo class provides the same access functions as QFont, e.g. family(), pointSize(), italic(), weight(), fixedPitch(), styleHint() etc. But whilst the QFont access functions return the values that were set, a QFontInfo object returns the values that apply to the font that will actually be used to draw the text.</para>
            <para>For example, when the program asks for a 25pt Courier font on a machine that has a non-scalable 24pt Courier font, QFont will (normally) use the 24pt Courier for rendering. In this case, QFont::pointSize() returns 25 and QFontInfo::pointSize() returns 24.</para>
            <para>There are three ways to create a QFontInfo object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Calling the QFontInfo constructor with a QFont creates a font info object for a screen-compatible font, i.e. the font cannot be a printer font. If the font is changed later, the font info object is not updated.(Note: If you use a printer font the values returned may be inaccurate. Printer fonts are not always accessible so the nearest screen font is used if a printer font is supplied.)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWidget::fontInfo() returns the font info for a widget's font. This is equivalent to calling QFontInfo(widget-&amp;gt;font()). If the widget's font is changed later, the font info object is not updated.</para>
            <para>QPainter::fontInfo() returns the font info for a painter's current font. If the painter's font is changed later, the font info object is not updated.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFont, QFontMetrics, and QFontDatabase.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.#ctor(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font info object for font.</para>
            <para>The font must be screen-compatible, i.e. a font you use when drawing text in widgets or pixmaps, not QPicture or QPrinter.</para>
            <para>The font info object holds the information for the font that is passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not updated if the font's attributes are changed later.</para>
            <para>Use QPainter::fontInfo() to get the font info when painting. This will give correct results also when painting on paint device that is not screen-compatible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.#ctor(QtGui.QFontInfo)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of fi.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.Bold">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if weight() would return a value greater than QFont::Normal; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also weight() and QFont::bold().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.ExactMatch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matched window system font is exactly the same as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::exactMatch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.Family">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the family name of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::family().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.FixedPitch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the fixed pitch value of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::fixedPitch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.Italic">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the italic value of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::italic().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.PixelSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixel size of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::pointSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.PointSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point size of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also pointSizeF() and QFont::pointSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.PointSizeF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point size of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::pointSizeF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.RawMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If it is a raw mode font, all other functions in QFontInfo will return the same values set in the QFont, regardless of the font actually used.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::rawMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style value of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::style().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.StyleHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>Currently only returns the style hint set in QFont.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::styleHint() and QFont::StyleHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.StyleName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style name of the matched window system font on system that supports it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::styleName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.Weight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the weight of the matched window system font.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::weight() and bold().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontInfo.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the font info object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontMetrics">
            <summary>
            The QFontMetrics class provides font metrics information.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QFontMetrics functions calculate the size of characters and strings for a given font. There are three ways you can create a QFontMetrics object:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Calling the QFontMetrics constructor with a QFont creates a font metrics object for a screen-compatible font, i.e. the font cannot be a printer font. If the font is changed later, the font metrics object is not updated.(Note: If you use a printer font the values returned may be inaccurate. Printer fonts are not always accessible so the nearest screen font is used if a printer font is supplied.)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWidget::fontMetrics() returns the font metrics for a widget's font. This is equivalent to QFontMetrics(widget-&amp;gt;font()). If the widget's font is changed later, the font metrics object is not updated.</para>
            <para>QPainter::fontMetrics() returns the font metrics for a painter's current font. If the painter's font is changed later, the font metrics object is not updated.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Once created, the object provides functions to access the individual metrics of the font, its characters, and for strings rendered in the font.</para>
            <para>There are several functions that operate on the font: ascent(), descent(), height(), leading() and lineSpacing() return the basic size properties of the font. The underlinePos(), overlinePos(), strikeOutPos() and lineWidth() functions, return the properties of the line that underlines, overlines or strikes out the characters. These functions are all fast.</para>
            <para>There are also some functions that operate on the set of glyphs in the font: minLeftBearing(), minRightBearing() and maxWidth(). These are by necessity slow, and we recommend avoiding them if possible.</para>
            <para>For each character, you can get its width(), leftBearing() and rightBearing() and find out whether it is in the font using inFont(). You can also treat the character as a string, and use the string functions on it.</para>
            <para>The string functions include width(), to return the width of a string in pixels (or points, for a printer), boundingRect(), to return a rectangle large enough to contain the rendered string, and size(), to return the size of that rectangle.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QFont font(&amp;quot;times&amp;quot;, 24);</para>
            <para> QFontMetrics fm(font);</para>
            <para> int pixelsWide = fm.width(&amp;quot;What's the width of this text?&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> int pixelsHigh = fm.height();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFont, QFontInfo, QFontDatabase, QFontComboBox, and Character Map Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.#ctor(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font metrics object for font.</para>
            <para>The font metrics will be compatible with the paintdevice used to create font.</para>
            <para>The font metrics object holds the information for the font that is passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not updated if the font's attributes are changed later.</para>
            <para>Use QFontMetrics(const QFont &amp;, QPaintDevice *) to get the font metrics that are compatible with a certain paint device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.#ctor(QtGui.QFontMetrics)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of fm.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.#ctor(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font metrics object for font and paintdevice.</para>
            <para>The font metrics will be compatible with the paintdevice passed. If the paintdevice is 0, the metrics will be screen-compatible, ie. the metrics you get if you use the font for drawing text on a widgets or pixmaps, not on a QPicture or QPrinter.</para>
            <para>The font metrics object holds the information for the font that is passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not updated if the font's attributes are changed later.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Ascent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the ascent of the font.</para>
            <para>The ascent of a font is the distance from the baseline to the highest position characters extend to. In practice, some font designers break this rule, e.g. when they put more than one accent on top of a character, or to accommodate an unusual character in an exotic language, so it is possible (though rare) that this value will be too small.</para>
            <para>See also descent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.AverageCharWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the average width of glyphs in the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.BoundingRect(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle that is covered by ink if character ch were to be drawn at the origin of the coordinate system.</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0) (e.g., for italicized fonts), and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle. For a space character the rectangle will usually be empty.</para>
            <para>Note that the rectangle usually extends both above and below the base line.</para>
            <para>Warning: The width of the returned rectangle is not the advance width of the character. Use boundingRect(const QString &amp;) or width() instead.</para>
            <para>See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle that is covered by ink if character ch were to be drawn at the origin of the coordinate system.</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0) (e.g., for italicized fonts), and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle. For a space character the rectangle will usually be empty.</para>
            <para>Note that the rectangle usually extends both above and below the base line.</para>
            <para>Warning: The width of the returned rectangle is not the advance width of the character. Use boundingRect(const QString &amp;) or width() instead.</para>
            <para>See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the characters in the string specified by text, which is the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn at (0, 0). The drawing, and hence the bounding rectangle, is constrained to the rectangle rect.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft aligns to the left border, except for Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the right.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight aligns to the right border, except for Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the left.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignJustify produces justified text.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter aligns horizontally centered.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignTop aligns to the top border.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignBottom aligns to the bottom border.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignVCenter aligns vertically centered</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignCenter (== Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignVCenter)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine ignores newline characters in the text.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic interprets &quot;&amp;x&quot; as x; i.e., underlined.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordWrap breaks the text to fit the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::Horizontal alignment defaults to Qt::AlignLeft and vertical alignment defaults to Qt::AlignTop.</para>
            <para>If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.</para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags, then: if tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs; otherwise if tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the bounding rectangles of &quot;Yes&quot; and &quot;yes&quot; are the same.</para>
            <para>The bounding rectangle returned by this function is somewhat larger than that calculated by the simpler boundingRect() function. This function uses the maximum left and right font bearings as is necessary for multi-line text to align correctly. Also, fontHeight() and lineSpacing() are used to calculate the height, rather than individual character heights.</para>
            <para>See also width(), QPainter::boundingRect(), and Qt::Alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.BoundingRect(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the characters in the string specified by text. The bounding rectangle always covers at least the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn at (0, 0).</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the width of the returned rectangle might be different than what the width() method returns.</para>
            <para>If you want to know the advance width of the string (to layout a set of strings next to each other), use width() instead.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as normal characters, not as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>The height of the bounding rectangle is at least as large as the value returned by height().</para>
            <para>See also width(), height(), QPainter::boundingRect(), and tightBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.BoundingRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle that is covered by ink if character ch were to be drawn at the origin of the coordinate system.</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0) (e.g., for italicized fonts), and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle. For a space character the rectangle will usually be empty.</para>
            <para>Note that the rectangle usually extends both above and below the base line.</para>
            <para>Warning: The width of the returned rectangle is not the advance width of the character. Use boundingRect(const QString &amp;) or width() instead.</para>
            <para>See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.BoundingRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle for the given text within the rectangle specified by the x and y coordinates, width, and height.</para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags and tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs; otherwise, if tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.CharWidth(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the character at position pos in the string text.</para>
            <para>The whole string is needed, as the glyph drawn may change depending on the context (the letter before and after the current one) for some languages (e.g. Arabic).</para>
            <para>This function also takes non spacing marks and ligatures into account.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Descent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the descent of the font.</para>
            <para>The descent is the distance from the base line to the lowest point characters extend to. In practice, some font designers break this rule, e.g. to accommodate an unusual character in an exotic language, so it is possible (though rare) that this value will be too small.</para>
            <para>See also ascent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.ElidedText(System.String,QtCore.Qt.TextElideMode,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>If the string text is wider than width, returns an elided version of the string (i.e., a string with &quot;...&quot; in it). Otherwise, returns the original string.</para>
            <para>The mode parameter specifies whether the text is elided on the left (e.g., &quot;...tech&quot;), in the middle (e.g., &quot;Tr...ch&quot;), or on the right (e.g., &quot;Trol...&quot;).</para>
            <para>The width is specified in pixels, not characters.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is optional and currently only supports Qt::TextShowMnemonic as value.</para>
            <para>The elide mark will follow the layout direction; it will be on the right side of the text for right-to-left layouts, and on the left side for right-to-left layouts. Note that this behavior is independent of the text language.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the font.</para>
            <para>This is always equal to ascent()+descent()+1 (the 1 is for the base line).</para>
            <para>See also leading() and lineSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.InFont(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if character ch is a valid character in the font; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.InFontUcs4(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given character encoded in UCS-4/UTF-32 is a valid character in the font; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Leading">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the leading of the font.</para>
            <para>This is the natural inter-line spacing.</para>
            <para>See also height() and lineSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.LeftBearing(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the left bearing of character ch in the font.</para>
            <para>The left bearing is the right-ward distance of the left-most pixel of the character from the logical origin of the character. This value is negative if the pixels of the character extend to the left of the logical origin.</para>
            <para>See width(QChar) for a graphical description of this metric.</para>
            <para>See also rightBearing(), minLeftBearing(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.LineSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from one base line to the next.</para>
            <para>This value is always equal to leading()+height().</para>
            <para>See also height() and leading().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the underline and strikeout lines, adjusted for the point size of the font.</para>
            <para>See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and strikeOutPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.MaxWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the widest character in the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.MinLeftBearing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum left bearing of the font.</para>
            <para>This is the smallest leftBearing(char) of all characters in the font.</para>
            <para>Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.</para>
            <para>See also minRightBearing() and leftBearing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.MinRightBearing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum right bearing of the font.</para>
            <para>This is the smallest rightBearing(char) of all characters in the font.</para>
            <para>Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.</para>
            <para>See also minLeftBearing() and rightBearing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.op_Inequality(QtGui.QFontMetrics,QtGui.QFontMetrics)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if other is not equal to this object; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two font metrics are considered equal if they were constructed from the same QFont and the paint devices they were constructed for are considered compatible.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.op_Equality(QtGui.QFontMetrics,QtGui.QFontMetrics)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if other is equal to this object; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two font metrics are considered equal if they were constructed from the same QFont and the paint devices they were constructed for are considered compatible.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.OverlinePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from the base line to where an overline should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also underlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.RightBearing(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the right bearing of character ch in the font.</para>
            <para>The right bearing is the left-ward distance of the right-most pixel of the character from the logical origin of a subsequent character. This value is negative if the pixels of the character extend to the right of the width() of the character.</para>
            <para>See width() for a graphical description of this metric.</para>
            <para>See also leftBearing(), minRightBearing(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Size(System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size in pixels of text.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine ignores newline characters.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic interprets &quot;&amp;x&quot; as x; i.e., underlined.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags, then: if tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs; otherwise if tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the bounding rectangles of &quot;Yes&quot; and &quot;yes&quot; are the same.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Size(System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size in pixels of text.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine ignores newline characters.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic interprets &quot;&amp;x&quot; as x; i.e., underlined.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags, then: if tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs; otherwise if tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the bounding rectangles of &quot;Yes&quot; and &quot;yes&quot; are the same.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.StrikeOutPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from the base line to where the strikeout line should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and lineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.TightBoundingRect(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a tight bounding rectangle around the characters in the string specified by text. The bounding rectangle always covers at least the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn at (0, 0).</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the width of the returned rectangle might be different than what the width() method returns.</para>
            <para>If you want to know the advance width of the string (to layout a set of strings next to each other), use width() instead.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as normal characters, not as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>Warning: Calling this method is very slow on Windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also width(), height(), and boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.UnderlinePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from the base line to where an underscore should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also overlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Width(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the logical width of character ch in pixels. This is a distance appropriate for drawing a subsequent character after ch.</para>
            <para>Some of the metrics are described in the image to the right. The central dark rectangles cover the logical width() of each character. The outer pale rectangles cover the leftBearing() and rightBearing() of each character. Notice that the bearings of &quot;f&quot; in this particular font are both negative, while the bearings of &quot;o&quot; are both positive.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function will produce incorrect results for Arabic characters or non-spacing marks in the middle of a string, as the glyph shaping and positioning of marks that happens when processing strings cannot be taken into account. When implementing an interactive text control, use QTextLayout instead.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Width(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width in pixels of the first len characters of text. If len is negative (the default), the entire string is used.</para>
            <para>Note that this value is not equal to boundingRect().width(); boundingRect() returns a rectangle describing the pixels this string will cover whereas width() returns the distance to where the next string should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Width(System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width in pixels of the first len characters of text. If len is negative (the default), the entire string is used.</para>
            <para>Note that this value is not equal to boundingRect().width(); boundingRect() returns a rectangle describing the pixels this string will cover whereas width() returns the distance to where the next string should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.xHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 'x' height of the font. This is often but not always the same as the height of the character 'x'.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetrics.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the font metrics object and frees all allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFontMetricsF">
            <summary>
            The QFontMetricsF class provides font metrics information.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QFontMetricsF functions calculate the size of characters and strings for a given font. You can construct a QFontMetricsF object with an existing QFont to obtain metrics for that font. If the font is changed later, the font metrics object is not updated.</para>
            <para>Once created, the object provides functions to access the individual metrics of the font, its characters, and for strings rendered in the font.</para>
            <para>There are several functions that operate on the font: ascent(), descent(), height(), leading() and lineSpacing() return the basic size properties of the font. The underlinePos(), overlinePos(), strikeOutPos() and lineWidth() functions, return the properties of the line that underlines, overlines or strikes out the characters. These functions are all fast.</para>
            <para>There are also some functions that operate on the set of glyphs in the font: minLeftBearing(), minRightBearing() and maxWidth(). These are by necessity slow, and we recommend avoiding them if possible.</para>
            <para>For each character, you can get its width(), leftBearing() and rightBearing() and find out whether it is in the font using inFont(). You can also treat the character as a string, and use the string functions on it.</para>
            <para>The string functions include width(), to return the width of a string in pixels (or points, for a printer), boundingRect(), to return a rectangle large enough to contain the rendered string, and size(), to return the size of that rectangle.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QFont font(&amp;quot;times&amp;quot;, 24);</para>
            <para> QFontMetricsF fm(font);</para>
            <para> qreal pixelsWide = fm.width(&amp;quot;What's the width of this text?&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> qreal pixelsHigh = fm.height();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFont, QFontInfo, and QFontDatabase.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.#ctor(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font metrics object for font.</para>
            <para>The font metrics will be compatible with the paintdevice used to create font.</para>
            <para>The font metrics object holds the information for the font that is passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not updated if the font's attributes are changed later.</para>
            <para>Use QFontMetricsF(const QFont &amp;, QPaintDevice *) to get the font metrics that are compatible with a certain paint device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.#ctor(QtGui.QFontMetrics)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font metrics object with floating point precision from the given fontMetrics object.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.#ctor(QtGui.QFontMetricsF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of fm.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.#ctor(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a font metrics object for font and paintdevice.</para>
            <para>The font metrics will be compatible with the paintdevice passed. If the paintdevice is 0, the metrics will be screen-compatible, ie. the metrics you get if you use the font for drawing text on a widgets or pixmaps, not on a QPicture or QPrinter.</para>
            <para>The font metrics object holds the information for the font that is passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not updated if the font's attributes are changed later.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Ascent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the ascent of the font.</para>
            <para>The ascent of a font is the distance from the baseline to the highest position characters extend to. In practice, some font designers break this rule, e.g. when they put more than one accent on top of a character, or to accommodate an unusual character in an exotic language, so it is possible (though rare) that this value will be too small.</para>
            <para>See also descent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.AverageCharWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the average width of glyphs in the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.BoundingRect(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the character ch relative to the left-most point on the base line.</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note that the rectangle usually extends both above and below the base line.</para>
            <para>See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the characters in the string specified by text. The bounding rectangle always covers at least the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn at (0, 0).</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the width of the returned rectangle might be different than what the width() method returns.</para>
            <para>If you want to know the advance width of the string (to layout a set of strings next to each other), use width() instead.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as normal characters, not as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>The height of the bounding rectangle is at least as large as the value returned height().</para>
            <para>See also width(), height(), and QPainter::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the characters in the given text. This is the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn when constrained to the bounding rectangle specified by rect.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft aligns to the left border, except for Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the right.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight aligns to the right border, except for Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the left.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignJustify produces justified text.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter aligns horizontally centered.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignTop aligns to the top border.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignBottom aligns to the bottom border.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignVCenter aligns vertically centered</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignCenter (== Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignVCenter)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine ignores newline characters in the text.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic interprets &quot;&amp;x&quot; as x; i.e., underlined.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordWrap breaks the text to fit the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::Horizontal alignment defaults to Qt::AlignLeft and vertical alignment defaults to Qt::AlignTop.</para>
            <para>If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.</para>
            <para>These flags are defined in Qt::AlignmentFlag.</para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags, the following behavior is used to interpret tab characters in the text:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs in the text.</para>
            <para>If tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as line breaks.</para>
            <para>Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the bounding rectangles of &quot;Yes&quot; and &quot;yes&quot; are the same.</para>
            <para>The bounding rectangle returned by this function is somewhat larger than that calculated by the simpler boundingRect() function. This function uses the maximum left and right font bearings as is necessary for multi-line text to align correctly. Also, fontHeight() and lineSpacing() are used to calculate the height, rather than individual character heights.</para>
            <para>See also width(), QPainter::boundingRect(), and Qt::Alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.BoundingRect(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the characters in the string specified by text. The bounding rectangle always covers at least the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn at (0, 0).</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the width of the returned rectangle might be different than what the width() method returns.</para>
            <para>If you want to know the advance width of the string (to layout a set of strings next to each other), use width() instead.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as normal characters, not as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>The height of the bounding rectangle is at least as large as the value returned height().</para>
            <para>See also width(), height(), and QPainter::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Descent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the descent of the font.</para>
            <para>The descent is the distance from the base line to the lowest point characters extend to. (Note that this is different from X, which adds 1 pixel.) In practice, some font designers break this rule, e.g. to accommodate an unusual character in an exotic language, so it is possible (though rare) that this value will be too small.</para>
            <para>See also ascent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.ElidedText(System.String,QtCore.Qt.TextElideMode,System.Double,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>If the string text is wider than width, returns an elided version of the string (i.e., a string with &quot;...&quot; in it). Otherwise, returns the original string.</para>
            <para>The mode parameter specifies whether the text is elided on the left (e.g., &quot;...tech&quot;), in the middle (e.g., &quot;Tr...ch&quot;), or on the right (e.g., &quot;Trol...&quot;).</para>
            <para>The width is specified in pixels, not characters.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is optional and currently only supports Qt::TextShowMnemonic as value.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the font.</para>
            <para>This is always equal to ascent()+descent()+1 (the 1 is for the base line).</para>
            <para>See also leading() and lineSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.InFont(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if character ch is a valid character in the font; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.InFontUcs4(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the character given by ch, encoded in UCS-4/UTF-32, is a valid character in the font; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Leading">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the leading of the font.</para>
            <para>This is the natural inter-line spacing.</para>
            <para>See also height() and lineSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.LeftBearing(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the left bearing of character ch in the font.</para>
            <para>The left bearing is the right-ward distance of the left-most pixel of the character from the logical origin of the character. This value is negative if the pixels of the character extend to the left of the logical origin.</para>
            <para>See width(QChar) for a graphical description of this metric.</para>
            <para>See also rightBearing(), minLeftBearing(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.LineSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from one base line to the next.</para>
            <para>This value is always equal to leading()+height().</para>
            <para>See also height() and leading().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the underline and strikeout lines, adjusted for the point size of the font.</para>
            <para>See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and strikeOutPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.MaxWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the widest character in the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.MinLeftBearing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum left bearing of the font.</para>
            <para>This is the smallest leftBearing(char) of all characters in the font.</para>
            <para>Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.</para>
            <para>See also minRightBearing() and leftBearing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.MinRightBearing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum right bearing of the font.</para>
            <para>This is the smallest rightBearing(char) of all characters in the font.</para>
            <para>Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.</para>
            <para>See also minLeftBearing() and rightBearing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.op_Inequality(QtGui.QFontMetricsF,QtGui.QFontMetricsF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font metrics are not equal to the other font metrics; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.op_Equality(QtGui.QFontMetricsF,QtGui.QFontMetricsF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font metrics are equal to the other font metrics; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Two font metrics are considered equal if they were constructed from the same QFont and the paint devices they were constructed for are considered to be compatible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.OverlinePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from the base line to where an overline should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also underlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.RightBearing(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the right bearing of character ch in the font.</para>
            <para>The right bearing is the left-ward distance of the right-most pixel of the character from the logical origin of a subsequent character. This value is negative if the pixels of the character extend to the right of the width() of the character.</para>
            <para>See width() for a graphical description of this metric.</para>
            <para>See also leftBearing(), minRightBearing(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Size(System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size in pixels of the characters in the given text.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine ignores newline characters.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic interprets &quot;&amp;x&quot; as x; i.e., underlined.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>These flags are defined in Qt::TextFlags.</para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags, the following behavior is used to interpret tab characters in the text:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs in the text.</para>
            <para>If tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as line breaks.</para>
            <para>Note: Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the bounding rectangles of &quot;Yes&quot; and &quot;yes&quot; are the same.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Size(System.Int32,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size in pixels of the characters in the given text.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine ignores newline characters.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic interprets &quot;&amp;x&quot; as x; i.e., underlined.</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>These flags are defined in Qt::TextFlags.</para>
            <para>If Qt::TextExpandTabs is set in flags, the following behavior is used to interpret tab characters in the text:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If tabArray is non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions for tabs in the text.</para>
            <para>If tabStops is non-zero, it is used as the tab spacing (in pixels).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as line breaks.</para>
            <para>Note: Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the bounding rectangles of &quot;Yes&quot; and &quot;yes&quot; are the same.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.StrikeOutPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from the base line to where the strikeout line should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and lineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.TightBoundingRect(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a tight bounding rectangle around the characters in the string specified by text. The bounding rectangle always covers at least the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn at (0, 0).</para>
            <para>Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0), e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the width of the returned rectangle might be different than what the width() method returns.</para>
            <para>If you want to know the advance width of the string (to layout a set of strings next to each other), use width() instead.</para>
            <para>Newline characters are processed as normal characters, not as linebreaks.</para>
            <para>Warning: Calling this method is very slow on Windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also width(), height(), and boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.UnderlinePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from the base line to where an underscore should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also overlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Width(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the logical width of character ch in pixels. This is a distance appropriate for drawing a subsequent character after ch.</para>
            <para>Some of the metrics are described in the image to the right. The central dark rectangles cover the logical width() of each character. The outer pale rectangles cover the leftBearing() and rightBearing() of each character. Notice that the bearings of &quot;f&quot; in this particular font are both negative, while the bearings of &quot;o&quot; are both positive.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function will produce incorrect results for Arabic characters or non-spacing marks in the middle of a string, as the glyph shaping and positioning of marks that happens when processing strings cannot be taken into account. When implementing an interactive text control, use QTextLayout instead.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Width(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width in pixels of the characters in the given text.</para>
            <para>Note that this value is not equal to the width returned by boundingRect().width() because boundingRect() returns a rectangle describing the pixels this string will cover whereas width() returns the distance to where the next string should be drawn.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.xHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 'x' height of the font. This is often but not always the same as the height of the character 'x'.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFontMetricsF.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the font metrics object and frees all allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFormLayout">
            <summary>
            The QFormLayout class manages forms of input widgets and their associated labels.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QFormLayout is a convenience layout class that lays out its children in a two-column form. The left column consists of labels and the right column consists of &amp;quot;field&amp;quot; widgets (line editors, spin boxes, etc.).</para>
            <para>Traditionally, such two-column form layouts were achieved using QGridLayout. QFormLayout is a higher-level alternative that provides the following advantages:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Adherence to the different platform's look and feel guidelines.For example, the Mac OS X Aqua and KDE guidelines specify that the labels should be right-aligned, whereas Windows and GNOME applications normally use left-alignment.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Support for wrapping long rows.For devices with small displays, QFormLayout can be set to wrap long rows, or even to wrap all rows.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Convenient API for creating label--field pairs.The addRow() overload that takes a QString and a QWidget * creates a QLabel behind the scenes and automatically set up its buddy. We can then write code like this:</para>
            <para> QFormLayout *formLayout = new QFormLayout;</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;addRow(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Name:&amp;quot;), nameLineEdit);</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;addRow(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Email:&amp;quot;), emailLineEdit);</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;addRow(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Age:&amp;quot;), ageSpinBox);</para>
            <para> setLayout(formLayout);</para>
            <para>Compare this with the following code, written using QGridLayout:</para>
            <para> nameLabel = new QLabel(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Name:&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> nameLabel-&amp;gt;setBuddy(nameLineEdit);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> emailLabel = new QLabel(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Name:&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> emailLabel-&amp;gt;setBuddy(emailLineEdit);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> ageLabel = new QLabel(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Name:&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> ageLabel-&amp;gt;setBuddy(ageSpinBox);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGridLayout *gridLayout = new QGridLayout;</para>
            <para> gridLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(nameLabel, 0, 0);</para>
            <para> gridLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(nameLineEdit, 0, 1);</para>
            <para> gridLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(emailLabel, 1, 0);</para>
            <para> gridLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(emailLineEdit, 1, 1);</para>
            <para> gridLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(ageLabel, 2, 0);</para>
            <para> gridLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(ageSpinBox, 2, 1);</para>
            <para> setLayout(gridLayout);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The table below shows the default appearance in different styles.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QCommonStyle derived styles (except QPlastiqueStyle)QMacStyleQPlastiqueStyleQt Extended styles</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>Traditional style used for Windows, GNOME, and earlier versions of KDE. Labels are left aligned, and expanding fields grow to fill the available space. (This normally corresponds to what we would get using a two-column QGridLayout.)	Style based on the Mac OS X Aqua guidelines. Labels are right-aligned, the fields don't grow beyond their size hint, and the form is horizontally centered.	Recommended style for KDE applications. Similar to MacStyle, except that the form is left-aligned and all fields grow to fill the available space.	Default style for Qt Extended styles. Labels are right-aligned, expanding fields grow to fill the available space, and row wrapping is enabled for long lines.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The form styles can be also be overridden individually by calling setLabelAlignment(), setFormAlignment(), setFieldGrowthPolicy(), and setRowWrapPolicy(). For example, to simulate the form layout appearance of QMacStyle on all platforms, but with left-aligned labels, you could write:</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;setRowWrapPolicy(QFormLayout::DontWrapRows);</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;setFieldGrowthPolicy(QFormLayout::FieldsStayAtSizeHint);</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;setFormAlignment(Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignTop);</para>
            <para> formLayout-&amp;gt;setLabelAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGridLayout, QBoxLayout, and QStackedLayout.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new form layout with the given parent widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddRow(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Adds the specified widget at the end of this form layout. The widget spans both columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddRow(QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Adds the specified layout at the end of this form layout. The layout spans both columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddRow(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.</para>
            <para>See also insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddRow(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddRow(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This overload automatically creates a QLabel behind the scenes with labelText as its text. The field is set as the new QLabel's buddy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.AddRow(System.String,QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This overload automatically creates a QLabel behind the scenes with labelText as its text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.GetItemPosition(System.Int32,System.Int32@,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Retrieves the row and role (column) of the item at the specified index. If index is out of bounds, *rowPtr is set to -1; otherwise the row is stored in *rowPtr and the role is stored in *rolePtr.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt(), count(), getLayoutPosition(), and getWidgetPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.GetLayoutPosition(QtGui.QLayout,System.Int32@,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Retrieves the row and role (column) of the specified child layout. If layout is not in the form layout, *rowPtr is set to -1; otherwise the row is stored in *rowPtr and the role is stored in *rolePtr.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.GetWidgetPosition(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32@,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Retrieves the row and role (column) of the specified widget in the layout. If widget is not in the layout, *rowPtr is set to -1; otherwise the row is stored in *rowPtr and the role is stored in *rolePtr.</para>
            <para>See also getItemPosition() and itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.HasHeightForWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts the specified widget at position row in this form layout. The widget spans both columns. If row is out of bounds, the widget is added at the end.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts the specified layout at position row in this form layout. The layout spans both columns. If row is out of bounds, the widget is added at the end.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.</para>
            <para>See also addRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.InsertRow(System.Int32,System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This overload automatically creates a QLabel behind the scenes with labelText as its text. The field is set as the new QLabel's buddy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.InsertRow(System.Int32,System.String,QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This overload automatically creates a QLabel behind the scenes with labelText as its text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout item in the given row with the specified role (column). Returns 0 if there is no such item.</para>
            <para>See also QLayout::itemAt() and setItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.LabelForField(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the label associated with the given field.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.LabelForField(QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the form.</para>
            <para>See also QLayout::count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.SetItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole,QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item in the given row for the given role to item, extending the layout with empty rows if necessary.</para>
            <para>If the cell is already occupied, the item is not inserted and an error message is sent to the console. The item spans both columns.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use setLayout() or setWidget() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.SetLayout(System.Int32,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole,QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the sub-layout in the given row for the given role to layout, extending the form layout with empty rows if necessary.</para>
            <para>If the cell is already occupied, the layout is not inserted and an error message is sent to the console.</para>
            <para>Note: For most applications, addRow() or insertRow() should be used instead of setLayout().</para>
            <para>See also setWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.SetWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the widget in the given row for the given role to widget, extending the layout with empty rows if necessary.</para>
            <para>If the cell is already occupied, the widget is not inserted and an error message is sent to the console.</para>
            <para>Note: For most applications, addRow() or insertRow() should be used instead of setWidget().</para>
            <para>See also setLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.TakeAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QFormLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the form layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>If the vertical spacing is equal to the horizontal spacing, this function returns that value; otherwise it returns -1.</para>
            <para>This function sets both the vertical and horizontal spacing to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.fieldGrowthPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way in which the form's fields grow.</para>
            <para>The default value depends on the widget or application style. For QMacStyle, the default is FieldsStayAtSizeHint; for QCommonStyle derived styles (like Plastique and Windows), the default is ExpandingFieldsGrow; for Qt Extended styles, the default is AllNonFixedFieldsGrow.</para>
            <para>If none of the fields can grow and the form is resized, extra space is distributed according to the current form alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.rowWrapPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way in which the form's rows wrap.</para>
            <para>The default value depends on the widget or application style. For Qt Extended styles and QS60Style, the default is WrapLongRows; for the other styles, the default is DontWrapRows.</para>
            <para>If you want to display each label above its associated field (instead of next to it), set this property to WrapAllRows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.LabelAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the horizontal alignment of the labels.</para>
            <para>The default value depends on the widget or application style. For QCommonStyle derived styles, except for QPlastiqueStyle, the default is Qt::AlignLeft; for the other styles, the default is Qt::AlignRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.FormAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the form layout's contents within the layout's geometry.</para>
            <para>The default value depends on the widget or application style. For QMacStyle, the default is Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignTop; for the other styles, the default is Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignTop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.HorizontalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the spacing between widgets that are laid out side by side.</para>
            <para>By default, if no value is explicitly set, the layout's horizontal spacing is inherited from the parent layout, or from the style settings for the parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QFormLayout.VerticalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the spacing between widgets that are laid out vertically.</para>
            <para>By default, if no value is explicitly set, the layout's vertical spacing is inherited from the parent layout, or from the style settings for the parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFormLayout.FieldGrowthPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the different policies that can be used to control the way in which the form's fields grow.</para>
            <para>See also fieldGrowthPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.FieldGrowthPolicy.AllNonFixedFieldsGrow">
            <summary>
            <para>All fields with a size policy that allows them to grow will grow to fill the available space. This is the default policy for most styles.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.FieldGrowthPolicy.ExpandingFieldsGrow">
            <summary>
            <para>Fields with an horizontal size policy of Expanding or MinimumExpanding will grow to fill the available space. The other fields will not grow beyond their effective size hint. This is the default policy for Plastique.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.FieldGrowthPolicy.FieldsStayAtSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>The fields never grow beyond their effective size hint. This is the default for QMacStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the types of widgets (or other layout items) that may appear in a row.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt() and getItemPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole.FieldRole">
            <summary>
            <para>A field widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole.LabelRole">
            <summary>
            <para>A label widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.ItemRole.SpanningRole">
            <summary>
            <para>A widget that spans label and field columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QFormLayout.RowWrapPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the different policies that can be used to control the way in which the form's rows wrap.</para>
            <para>See also rowWrapPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.RowWrapPolicy.DontWrapRows">
            <summary>
            <para>Fields are always laid out next to their label. This is the default policy for all styles except Qt Extended styles and QS60Style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.RowWrapPolicy.WrapAllRows">
            <summary>
            <para>Fields are always laid out below their label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QFormLayout.RowWrapPolicy.WrapLongRows">
            <summary>
            <para>Labels are given enough horizontal space to fit the widest label, and the rest of the space is given to the fields. If the minimum size of a field pair is wider than the available space, the field is wrapped to the next line. This is the default policy for Qt Extended styles and and QS60Style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGesture">
            <summary>
            The QGesture class represents a gesture, containing properties that describe the corresponding user input.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Gesture objects are not constructed directly by developers. They are created by the QGestureRecognizer object that is registered with the application; see QGestureRecognizer::registerRecognizer().</para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Gesture Properties</para>
            <para>The class has a list of properties that can be queried by the user to get some gesture-specific arguments. For example, the pinch gesture has a scale factor that is exposed as a property.</para>
            <para>Developers of custom gesture recognizers can add additional properties in order to provide additional information about a gesture. This can be done by adding new dynamic properties to a QGesture object, or by subclassing the QGesture class (or one of its subclasses).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Lifecycle of a Gesture Object</para>
            <para>A QGesture instance is implicitly created when needed and is owned by Qt. Developers should never destroy them or store them for later use as Qt may destroy particular instances of them and create new ones to replace them.</para>
            <para>The registered gesture recognizer monitors the input events for the target object via its recognize() function, updating the properties of the gesture object as required.</para>
            <para>The gesture object may be delivered to the target object in a QGestureEvent if the corresponding gesture is active or has just been canceled. Each event that is delivered contains a list of gesture objects, since support for more than one gesture may be enabled for the target object. Due to the way events are handled in Qt, gesture events may be filtered by other objects.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGestureEvent and QGestureRecognizer.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGesture.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new gesture object with the given parent.</para>
            <para>QGesture objects are created by gesture recognizers in the QGestureRecognizer::create() function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGesture.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the gesture object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGesture.State">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current state of the gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGesture.GestureType">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the type of the gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGesture.gestureCancelPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the policy for deciding what happens on accepting a gesture.</para>
            <para>On accepting one gesture Qt can automatically cancel other gestures that belong to other targets. The policy is normally set to not cancel any other gestures and can be set to cancel all active gestures in the context. For example for all child widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGesture.HotSpot">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the point that is used to find the receiver for the gesture event.</para>
            <para>The hot-spot is a point in the global coordinate system, use QWidget::mapFromGlobal() or QGestureEvent::mapToGraphicsScene() to get a local hot-spot.</para>
            <para>The hot-spot should be set by the gesture recognizer to allow gesture event delivery to a QGraphicsObject.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGesture.HasHotSpot">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the gesture has a hot-spot.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGesture.GestureCancelPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how accepting a gesture can cancel other gestures automatically.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGesture.GestureCancelPolicy.CancelAllInContext">
            <summary>
            <para>On accepting this gesture all gestures that are active in the context (respecting the Qt::GestureFlag that were specified when subscribed to the gesture) will be cancelled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGesture.GestureCancelPolicy.CancelNone">
            <summary>
            <para>On accepting this gesture no other gestures will be affected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGestureEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGestureEvent class provides the description of triggered gestures.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QGestureEvent class contains a list of gestures, which can be obtained using the gestures() function.</para>
            <para>The gestures are either active or canceled. A list of those that are currently being executed can be obtained using the activeGestures() function. A list of those which were previously active and have been canceled can be accessed using the canceledGestures() function. A gesture might be canceled if the current window loses focus, for example, or because of a timeout, or for other reasons.</para>
            <para>If the event handler does not accept the event by calling the generic QEvent::accept() function, all individual QGesture object that were not accepted and in the Qt::GestureStarted state will be propagated up the parent widget chain until a widget accepts them individually, by calling QGestureEvent::accept() for each of them, or an event filter consumes the event.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Further Reading</para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGesture, QGestureRecognizer, QWidget::grabGesture(), and QGraphicsObject::grabGesture().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QGestureEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates new QGestureEvent containing a list of gestures.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QGesture})">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates new QGestureEvent containing a list of gestures.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Accept">
            <summary>
            <para>Accepts the event, the equivalent of calling setAccepted(true).</para>
            <para>See also QEvent::accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Accept(QtGui.QGesture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the accept flag of the given gesture object, the equivalent of calling setAccepted(gesture, true).</para>
            <para>Setting the accept flag indicates that the event receiver wants the gesture. Unwanted gestures may be propagated to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>See also QGestureEvent::ignore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Accept(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the accept flag of the given gestureType, the equivalent of calling setAccepted(gestureType, true).</para>
            <para>Setting the accept flag indicates that the event receiver wants the gesture. Unwanted gestures may be propagated to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>See also QGestureEvent::ignore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.ActiveGestures">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of active (not canceled) gestures.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.CanceledGestures">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of canceled gestures.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Gesture(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a gesture object by type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Gestures">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns all gestures that are delivered in the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Ignore">
            <summary>
            <para>Ignores the event, the equivalent of calling setAccepted(false).</para>
            <para>See also QEvent::ignore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Ignore(QtGui.QGesture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the accept flag parameter of the given gesture object, the equivalent of calling setAccepted(gesture, false).</para>
            <para>Clearing the accept flag indicates that the event receiver does not want the gesture. Unwanted gestures may be propagated to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>See also QGestureEvent::accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Ignore(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the accept flag parameter of the given gestureType, the equivalent of calling setAccepted(gesture, false).</para>
            <para>Clearing the accept flag indicates that the event receiver does not want the gesture. Unwanted gestures may be propgated to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>See also QGestureEvent::accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.IsAccepted">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true is the event has been accepted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QEvent::accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.IsAccepted(QtGui.QGesture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the gesture is accepted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.IsAccepted(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the gesture of type gestureType is accepted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.MapToGraphicsScene(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene-local coordinates if the gesturePoint is inside a graphics view.</para>
            <para>This functional might be useful when the gesture event is delivered to a QGraphicsObject to translate a point in screen coordinates to scene-local coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also QPointF::isNull() and ..</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.SetAccepted(QtGui.QGesture,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the accept flag of the given gesture object to the specified value.</para>
            <para>Setting the accept flag indicates that the event receiver wants the gesture. Unwanted gestures may be propagated to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>By default, gestures in events of type QEvent::Gesture are accepted, and gestures in QEvent::GestureOverride events are ignored.</para>
            <para>For convenience, the accept flag can also be set with accept(gesture), and cleared with ignore(gesture).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.SetAccepted(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets or clears the event's internal flag that determines whether it should be delivered to other objects.</para>
            <para>Calling this function with a value of true for accepted indicates that the caller has accepted the event and that it should not be propagated further. Calling this function with a value of false indicates that the caller has ignored the event and that it should be delivered to other objects.</para>
            <para>For convenience, the accept flag can also be set with accept(), and cleared with ignore().</para>
            <para>See also isAccepted() and QEvent::accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.SetAccepted(QtCore.Qt.GestureType,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the accept flag of the given gestureType object to the specified value.</para>
            <para>Setting the accept flag indicates that the event receiver wants to receive gestures of the specified type, gestureType. Unwanted gestures may be propagated to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>By default, gestures in events of type QEvent::Gesture are accepted, and gestures in QEvent::GestureOverride events are ignored.</para>
            <para>For convenience, the accept flag can also be set with accept(gestureType), and cleared with ignore(gestureType).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGestureEvent.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget on which the event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer">
            <summary>
            The QGestureRecognizer class provides the infrastructure for gesture recognition.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Gesture recognizers are responsible for creating and managing QGesture objects and monitoring input events sent to QWidget and QGraphicsObject subclasses. QGestureRecognizer is the base class for implementing custom gestures.</para>
            <para>Developers that only need to provide gesture recognition for standard gestures do not need to use this class directly. Instances will be created behind the scenes by the framework.</para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Recognizing Gestures</para>
            <para>The process of recognizing gestures involves filtering input events sent to specific objects, and modifying the associated QGesture objects to include relevant information about the user's input.</para>
            <para>Gestures are created when the framework calls create() to handle user input for a particular instance of a QWidget or QGraphicsObject subclass. A QGesture object is created for each widget or item that is configured to use gestures.</para>
            <para>Once a QGesture has been created for a target object, the gesture recognizer will receive events for it in its recognize() handler function.</para>
            <para>When a gesture is canceled, the reset() function is called, giving the recognizer the chance to update the appropriate properties in the corresponding QGesture object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Supporting New Gestures</para>
            <para>To add support for new gestures, you need to derive from QGestureRecognizer to create a custom recognizer class, construct an instance of this class, and register it with the application by calling QGestureRecognizer::registerRecognizer(). You can also subclass QGesture to create a custom gesture class, or rely on dynamic properties to express specific details of the gesture you want to handle.</para>
            <para>Your custom QGestureRecognizer subclass needs to reimplement the recognize() function to handle and filter the incoming input events for QWidget and QGraphicsObject subclasses. Although the logic for gesture recognition is implemented in this function, you can store persistent information about the state of the recognition process in the QGesture object supplied. The recognize() function must return a value of QGestureRecognizer::Result that indicates the state of recognition for a given gesture and target object. This determines whether or not a gesture event will be delivered to a target object.</para>
            <para>If you choose to represent a gesture by a custom QGesture subclass, you will need to reimplement the create() function to construct instances of your gesture class. Similarly, you may need to reimplement the reset() function if your custom gesture objects need to be specially handled when a gesture is canceled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGesture.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new gesture recognizer object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.#ctor(QtGui.QGestureRecognizer)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new gesture recognizer object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.Create(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called by Qt to create a new QGesture object for the given target (QWidget or QGraphicsObject).</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function to create a custom QGesture-derived gesture object if necessary.</para>
            <para>The application takes ownership of the created gesture object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.Recognize(QtGui.QGesture,QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Handles the given event for the watched object, updating the state of the gesture object as required, and returns a suitable result for the current recognition step.</para>
            <para>This function is called by the framework to allow the recognizer to filter input events dispatched to QWidget or QGraphicsObject instances that it is monitoring.</para>
            <para>The result reflects how much of the gesture has been recognized. The state of the gesture object is set depending on the result.</para>
            <para>See also QGestureRecognizer::Result.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.RegisterRecognizer(QtGui.QGestureRecognizer)">
            <summary>
            <para>Registers the given recognizer in the gesture framework and returns a gesture ID for it.</para>
            <para>The application takes ownership of the recognizer and returns the gesture type ID associated with it. For gesture recognizers which handle custom QGesture objects (i.e., those which return Qt::CustomGesture in a QGesture::gestureType() function) the return value is a generated gesture ID with the Qt::CustomGesture flag set.</para>
            <para>See also unregisterRecognizer(), QGestureRecognizer::create(), and QGesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.Reset(QtGui.QGesture)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called by the framework to reset a given gesture.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function to implement additional requirements for custom QGesture objects. This may be necessary if you implement a custom QGesture whose properties need special handling when the gesture is reset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.UnregisterRecognizer(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Unregisters all gesture recognizers of the specified type.</para>
            <para>See also registerRecognizer().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the gesture recognizer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the result of the current event filtering step in a gesture recognizer state machine.</para>
            <para>The result consists of a state value (one of Ignore, MayBeGesture, TriggerGesture, FinishGesture, CancelGesture) and an optional hint (ConsumeEventHint).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGestureRecognizer::recognize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag.CancelGesture">
            <summary>
            <para>The event made it clear that it is not a gesture. If the gesture recognizer was in GestureTriggered state before, then the gesture is canceled and the appropriate QGesture object will be delivered to the target as a part of a QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag.ConsumeEventHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This hint specifies that the gesture framework should consume the filtered event and not deliver it to the receiver.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag.FinishGesture">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture has been finished successfully and the appropriate QGesture object will be delivered to the target as a part of a QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag.Ignore">
            <summary>
            <para>The event does not change the state of the recognizer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag.MayBeGesture">
            <summary>
            <para>The event changed the internal state of the recognizer, but it isn't clear yet if it is a gesture or not. The recognizer needs to filter more events to decide. Gesture recognizers in the MayBeGesture state may be reset automatically if they take too long to recognize gestures.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGestureRecognizer.ResultFlag.TriggerGesture">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture has been triggered and the appropriate QGesture object will be delivered to the target as a part of a QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGlyphRun">
            <summary>
            The QGlyphRun class provides direct access to the internal glyphs in a font.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When Qt displays a string of text encoded in Unicode, it will first convert the Unicode points into a list of glyph indexes and a list of positions based on one or more fonts. The Unicode representation of the text and the QFont object will in this case serve as a convenient abstraction that hides the details of what actually takes place when displaying the text on-screen. For instance, by the time the text actually reaches the screen, it may be represented by a set of fonts in addition to the one specified by the user, e.g. in case the originally selected font did not support all the writing systems contained in the text.</para>
            <para>Under certain circumstances, it can be useful as an application developer to have more low-level control over which glyphs in a specific font are drawn to the screen. This could for instance be the case in applications that use an external font engine and text shaper together with Qt. QGlyphRun provides an interface to the raw data needed to get text on the screen. It contains a list of glyph indexes, a position for each glyph and a font.</para>
            <para>It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the selected font actually contains the provided glyph indexes.</para>
            <para>QTextLayout::glyphRuns() or QTextFragment::glyphRuns() can be used to convert unicode encoded text into a list of QGlyphRun objects, and QPainter::drawGlyphRun() can be used to draw the glyphs.</para>
            <para>Note: Please note that QRawFont is considered local to the thread in which it is constructed. This in turn means that a new QRawFont will have to be created and set on the QGlyphRun if it is moved to a different thread. If the QGlyphRun contains a reference to a QRawFont from a different thread than the current, it will not be possible to draw the glyphs using a QPainter, as the QRawFont is considered invalid and inaccessible in this case.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QGlyphRun object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.#ctor(QtGui.QGlyphRun)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGlyphRun object which is a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears all data in the QGlyphRun object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.op_Inequality(QtGui.QGlyphRun,QtGui.QGlyphRun)">
            <summary>
            <para>Compares other to this QGlyphRun object. Returns true if any of the list of glyph indexes, the list of positions or the font are different, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.op_Equality(QtGui.QGlyphRun,QtGui.QGlyphRun)">
            <summary>
            <para>Compares other to this QGlyphRun object. Returns true if the list of glyph indexes, the list of positions and the font are all equal, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.SetRawData(System.UInt32@,QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the glyph indexes and positions of this QGlyphRun to use the first size elements in the arrays glyphIndexArray and glyphPositionArray. The data is not copied. The caller must guarantee that the arrays are not deleted as long as this QGlyphRun and any copies of it exists.</para>
            <para>See also setGlyphIndexes() and setPositions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGlyphRun.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGlyphRun.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGlyphRun.GlyphIndexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the glyph indexes for this QGlyphRun object.</para>
            <para>Set the glyph indexes for this QGlyphRun object to glyphIndexes. The glyph indexes must be valid for the selected font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGlyphRun.Overline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this QGlyphRun should be painted with an overline decoration.</para>
            <para>Indicates that this QGlyphRun should be painted with an overline decoration if overline is true. Otherwise the QGlyphRun should be painted with no overline decoration.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGlyphRun.Positions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the edge of the baseline for each glyph in this set of glyph indexes.</para>
            <para>Sets the positions of the edge of the baseline for each glyph in this set of glyph indexes to positions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGlyphRun.RawFont">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font selected for this QGlyphRun object.</para>
            <para>Sets the font specified by rawFont to be the font used to look up the glyph indexes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGlyphRun.StrikeOut">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this QGlyphRun should be painted with a strike out decoration.</para>
            <para>Indicates that this QGlyphRun should be painted with an strike out decoration if strikeOut is true. Otherwise the QGlyphRun should be painted with no strike out decoration.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGlyphRun.Underline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this QGlyphRun should be painted with an underline decoration.</para>
            <para>Indicates that this QGlyphRun should be painted with an underline decoration if underline is true. Otherwise the QGlyphRun should be painted with no underline decoration.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchor">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsAnchor class represents an anchor between two items in a QGraphicsAnchorLayout.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The graphics anchor provides an API that enables you to query and manipulate the properties an anchor has. When an anchor is added to the layout with QGraphicsAnchorLayout::addAnchor(), a QGraphicsAnchor instance is returned where the properties are initialized to their default values. The properties can then be further changed, and they will be picked up the next time the layout is activated.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsAnchorLayout::anchor().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchor.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the QGraphicsAnchor object from the layout and destroys it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchor.Spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the preferred space between items in the QGraphicsAnchorLayout.</para>
            <para>Depending on the anchor type, the default spacing is either 0 or a value returned from the style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchor.SizePolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size policy for the QGraphicsAnchor.</para>
            <para>By setting the size policy on an anchor you can configure how the anchor can resize itself from its preferred spacing. For instance, if the anchor has the size policy QSizePolicy::Minimum, the spacing is the minimum size of the anchor. However, its size can grow up to the anchors maximum size. If the default size policy is QSizePolicy::Fixed, the anchor can neither grow or shrink, which means that the only size the anchor can have is the spacing. QSizePolicy::Fixed is the default size policy. QGraphicsAnchor always has a minimum spacing of 0 and a very large maximum spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsAnchorLayout class provides a layout where one can anchor widgets together in Graphics View.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The anchor layout allows developers to specify how widgets should be placed relative to each other, and to the layout itself. The specification is made by adding anchors to the layout by calling addAnchor(), addAnchors() or addCornerAnchors().</para>
            <para>Existing anchors in the layout can be accessed with the anchor() function. Items that are anchored are automatically added to the layout, and if items are removed, all their anchors will be automatically removed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Anchors are always set up between edges of an item, where the &amp;quot;center&amp;quot; is also considered to be an edge. Consider the following example:</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorLeft, a, Qt::AnchorRight);</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorTop, a, Qt::AnchorBottom);</para>
            <para>Here, the right edge of item a is anchored to the left edge of item b and the bottom edge of item a is anchored to the top edge of item b, with the result that item b will be placed diagonally to the right and below item b.</para>
            <para>The addCornerAnchors() function provides a simpler way of anchoring the corners of two widgets than the two individual calls to addAnchor() shown in the code above. Here, we see how a widget can be anchored to the top-left corner of the enclosing layout:</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addCornerAnchors(a, Qt::TopLeftCorner, layout, Qt::TopLeftCorner);</para>
            <para>In cases where anchors are used to match the widths or heights of widgets, it is convenient to use the addAnchors() function. As with the other functions for specifying anchors, it can also be used to anchor a widget to a layout.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Size Hints and Size Policies in an Anchor Layout</para>
            <para>QGraphicsAnchorLayout respects each item's size hints and size policies. Note that there are some properties of QSizePolicy that are not respected.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Spacing within an Anchor Layout</para>
            <para>The layout may distribute some space between the items. If the spacing has not been explicitly specified, the actual amount of space will usually be 0.</para>
            <para>However, if the first edge is the opposite of the second edge (e.g., the right edge of the first widget is anchored to the left edge of the second widget), the size of the anchor will be queried from the style through a pixel metric: PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing for horizontal anchors and PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing for vertical anchors.</para>
            <para>If the spacing is negative, the items will overlap to some extent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Known issues</para>
            <para>There are some features that QGraphicsAnchorLayout currently does not support. This might change in the future, so avoid using these features if you want to avoid any future regressions in behaviour:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Stretch factors are not respected.</para>
            <para>QSizePolicy::ExpandFlag is not respected.</para>
            <para>Height for width is not respected.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsLinearLayout, QGraphicsGridLayout, and QGraphicsLayout.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsLayout class provides the base class for all layouts in Graphics View.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayout is an abstract class that defines a virtual API for arranging QGraphicsWidget children and other QGraphicsLayoutItem objects for a QGraphicsWidget. QGraphicsWidget assigns responsibility to a QGraphicsLayout through QGraphicsWidget::setLayout(). As the widget is resized, the layout will automatically arrange the widget's children. QGraphicsLayout inherits QGraphicsLayoutItem, so, it can be managed by any layout, including its own subclasses.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Writing a Custom Layout</para>
            <para>You can use QGraphicsLayout as a base to write your own custom layout (e.g., a flowlayout), but it is more common to use one of its subclasses instead - QGraphicsLinearLayout or QGraphicsGridLayout. When creating a custom layout, the following functions must be reimplemented as a bare minimum:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FunctionDescription</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry()	Notifies you when the geometry of the layout is set. You can store the geometry in your own layout class in a reimplementation of this function.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint()	Returns the layout's size hints.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayout::count()	Returns the number of items in your layout.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayout::itemAt()	Returns a pointer to an item in your layout.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayout::removeAt()	Removes an item from your layout without destroying it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For more details on how to implement each function, refer to the individual function documentation.</para>
            <para>Each layout defines its own API for arranging widgets and layout items. For example, with a grid layout, you require a row and a column index with optional row and column spans, alignment, spacing, and more. A linear layout, however, requires a single row or column index to position its items. For a grid layout, the order of insertion does not affect the layout in any way, but for a linear layout, the order is essential. When writing your own layout subclass, you are free to choose the API that best suits your layout.</para>
            <para>For adding layout items to the custom layout, the QGraphicsLayout provides convenience function addChildLayoutItem(). The function will take care of automatically reparenting graphics items, if needed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Activating the Layout</para>
            <para>When the layout's geometry changes, QGraphicsLayout immediately rearranges all of its managed items by calling setGeometry() on each item. This rearrangement is called activating the layout.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayout updates its own geometry to match the contentsRect() of the QGraphicsLayoutItem it is managing. Thus, it will automatically rearrange all its items when the widget is resized. QGraphicsLayout caches the sizes of all its managed items to avoid calling setGeometry() too often.</para>
            <para>Note: A QGraphicsLayout will have the same geometry as the contentsRect() of the widget (not the layout) it is assigned to.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Activating the Layout Implicitly</para>
            <para>The layout can be activated implicitly using one of two ways: by calling activate() or by calling invalidate(). Calling activate() activates the layout immediately. In contrast, calling invalidate() is delayed, as it posts a LayoutRequest event to the managed widget. Due to event compression, the activate() will only be called once after control has returned to the event loop. This is referred to as invalidating the layout. Invalidating the layout also invalidates any cached information. Also, the invalidate() function is a virtual function. So, you can invalidate your own cache in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout by reimplementing this function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Event Handling</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayout listens to events for the widget it manages through the virtual widgetEvent() event handler. When the layout is assigned to a widget, all events delivered to the widget are first processed by widgetEvent(). This allows the layout to be aware of any relevant state changes on the widget such as visibility changes or layout direction changes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Margin Handling</para>
            <para>The margins of a QGraphicsLayout can be modified by reimplementing setContentsMargins() and getContentsMargins().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsLayoutItem class can be inherited to allow your custom items to be managed by layouts.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayoutItem is an abstract class that defines a set of virtual functions describing sizes, size policies, and size hints for any object arranged by QGraphicsLayout. The API contains functions relevant for both the item itself and for the user of the item as most of QGraphicsLayoutItem's functions are also part of the subclass' public API.</para>
            <para>In most cases, existing layout-aware classes such as QGraphicsWidget and QGraphicsLayout already provide the functionality you require. However, subclassing these classes will enable you to create both graphical elements that work well with layouts (QGraphicsWidget) or custom layouts (QGraphicsLayout).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing QGraphicsLayoutItem</para>
            <para>If you create a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem and reimplement its virtual functions, you will enable the layout to resize and position your item along with other QGraphicsLayoutItems including QGraphicsWidget and QGraphicsLayout.</para>
            <para>You can start by reimplementing important functions: the protected sizeHint() function, as well as the public setGeometry() function. If you want your items to be aware of immediate geometry changes, you can also reimplement updateGeometry().</para>
            <para>The geometry, size hint, and size policy affect the item's size and position. Calling setGeometry() will always resize and reposition the item immediately. Normally, this function is called by QGraphicsLayout after the layout has been activated, but it can also be called by the item's user at any time.</para>
            <para>The sizeHint() function returns the item' minimum, preferred and maximum size hints. You can override these properties by calling setMinimumSize(), setPreferredSize() or setMaximumSize(). You can also use functions such as setMinimumWidth() or setMaximumHeight() to set only the width or height component if desired.</para>
            <para>The effectiveSizeHint() function, on the other hand, returns a size hint for any given Qt::SizeHint, and guarantees that the returned size is bound to the minimum and maximum sizes and size hints. You can set the item's vertical and horizontal size policy by calling setSizePolicy(). The sizePolicy property is used by the layout system to describe how this item prefers to grow or shrink.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Nesting QGraphicsLayoutItems</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayoutItems can be nested within other QGraphicsLayoutItems, similar to layouts that can contain sublayouts. This is done either by passing a QGraphicsLayoutItem pointer to QGraphicsLayoutItem's protected constructor, or by calling setParentLayoutItem(). The parentLayoutItem() function returns a pointer to the item's layoutItem parent. If the item's parent is 0 or if the parent does not inherit from QGraphicsItem, the parentLayoutItem() function then returns 0. isLayout() returns true if the QGraphicsLayoutItem subclass is itself a layout, or false otherwise.</para>
            <para>Qt uses QGraphicsLayoutItem to provide layout functionality in the Graphics View Framework, but in the future its use may spread throughout Qt itself.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget, QGraphicsLayout, QGraphicsLinearLayout, and QGraphicsGridLayout.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs the QGraphicsLayoutItem object. parent becomes the object's parent. If isLayout is true the item is a layout, otherwise isLayout is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.ContentsRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the contents rect in local coordinates.</para>
            <para>The contents rect defines the subrectangle used by an associated layout when arranging subitems. This function is a convenience function that adjusts the item's geometry() by its contents margins. Note that getContentsMargins() is a virtual function that you can reimplement to return the item's contents margins.</para>
            <para>See also getContentsMargins() and geometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.EffectiveSizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the effective size hint for this QGraphicsLayoutItem.</para>
            <para>which is the size hint in question. constraint is an optional argument that defines a special constrain when calculating the effective size hint. By default, constraint is QSizeF(-1, -1), which means there is no constraint to the size hint.</para>
            <para>If you want to specify the widget's size hint for a given width or height, you can provide the fixed dimension in constraint. This is useful for widgets that can grow only either vertically or horizontally, and need to set either their width or their height to a special value.</para>
            <para>For example, a text paragraph item fit into a column width of 200 may grow vertically. You can pass QSizeF(200, -1) as a constraint to get a suitable minimum, preferred and maximum height).</para>
            <para>You can adjust the effective size hint by reimplementing sizeHint() in a QGraphicsLayoutItem subclass, or by calling one of the following functions: setMinimumSize(), setPreferredSize, or setMaximumSize() (or a combination of both).</para>
            <para>This function caches each of the size hints and guarantees that sizeHint() will be called only once for each value of which - unless constraint is not specified and updateGeometry() has been called.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.EffectiveSizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the effective size hint for this QGraphicsLayoutItem.</para>
            <para>which is the size hint in question. constraint is an optional argument that defines a special constrain when calculating the effective size hint. By default, constraint is QSizeF(-1, -1), which means there is no constraint to the size hint.</para>
            <para>If you want to specify the widget's size hint for a given width or height, you can provide the fixed dimension in constraint. This is useful for widgets that can grow only either vertically or horizontally, and need to set either their width or their height to a special value.</para>
            <para>For example, a text paragraph item fit into a column width of 200 may grow vertically. You can pass QSizeF(200, -1) as a constraint to get a suitable minimum, preferred and maximum height).</para>
            <para>You can adjust the effective size hint by reimplementing sizeHint() in a QGraphicsLayoutItem subclass, or by calling one of the following functions: setMinimumSize(), setPreferredSize, or setMaximumSize() (or a combination of both).</para>
            <para>This function caches each of the size hints and guarantees that sizeHint() will be called only once for each value of which - unless constraint is not specified and updateGeometry() has been called.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.GetContentsMargins(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function provides the left, top, right and bottom contents margins for this QGraphicsLayoutItem. The default implementation assumes all contents margins are 0. The parameters point to values stored in qreals. If any of the pointers is 0, that value will not be updated.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget::setContentsMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.GraphicsItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QGraphicsItem that this layout item represents. For QGraphicsWidget it will return itself. For custom items it can return an aggregated value.</para>
            <para>See also setGraphicsItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.IsLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this QGraphicsLayoutItem is a layout (e.g., is inherited by an object that arranges other QGraphicsLayoutItem objects); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.OwnedByLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether a layout should delete this item in its destructor. If its true, then the layout will delete it. If its false, then it is assumed that another object has the ownership of it, and the layout won't delete this item.</para>
            <para>If the item inherits both QGraphicsItem and QGraphicsLayoutItem (such as QGraphicsWidget does) the item is really part of two ownership hierarchies. This property informs what the layout should do with its child items when it is destructed. In the case of QGraphicsWidget, it is preferred that when the layout is deleted it won't delete its children (since they are also part of the graphics item hierarchy).</para>
            <para>By default this value is initialized to false in QGraphicsLayoutItem, but it is overridden by QGraphicsLayout to return true. This is because QGraphicsLayout is not normally part of the QGraphicsItem hierarchy, so the parent layout should delete it. Subclasses might override this default behaviour by calling setOwnedByLayout(true).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setOwnedByLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SetGraphicsItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>If the QGraphicsLayoutItem represents a QGraphicsItem, and it wants to take advantage of the automatic reparenting capabilities of QGraphicsLayout it should set this value. Note that if you delete item and not delete the layout item, you are responsible of calling setGraphicsItem(0) in order to avoid having a dangling pointer.</para>
            <para>See also graphicsItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SetMaximumSize(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the maximum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MaximumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size larger than size. In order to unset the maximum size, use an invalid size.</para>
            <para>See also maximumSize(), minimumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MaximumSize, and sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SetMinimumSize(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the minimum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MinimumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size smaller than size. In order to unset the minimum size, use an invalid size.</para>
            <para>See also minimumSize(), maximumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MinimumSize, sizeHint(), setMinimumWidth(), and setMinimumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SetOwnedByLayout(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether a layout should delete this item in its destructor or not. ownership must be true to in order for the layout to delete it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also ownedByLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SetPreferredSize(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the preferred size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::PreferredSize and provides the default value for effectiveSizeHint(). In order to unset the preferred size, use an invalid size.</para>
            <para>See also preferredSize(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), Qt::PreferredSize, and sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SetSizePolicy(QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the size policy to policy. The size policy describes how the item should grow horizontally and vertically when arranged in a layout.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayoutItem's default size policy is (QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::DefaultType), but it is common for subclasses to change the default. For example, QGraphicsWidget defaults to (QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::DefaultType).</para>
            <para>See also sizePolicy() and QWidget::sizePolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function returns the size hint for which of the QGraphicsLayoutItem, using the width or height of constraint to constrain the output.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem to provide the necessary size hints for your items.</para>
            <para>See also effectiveSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function returns the size hint for which of the QGraphicsLayoutItem, using the width or height of constraint to constrain the output.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem to provide the necessary size hints for your items.</para>
            <para>See also effectiveSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.UpdateGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function discards any cached size hint information. You should always call this function if you change the return value of the sizeHint() function. Subclasses must always call the base implementation when reimplementing this function.</para>
            <para>See also effectiveSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsLayoutItem object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's geometry (e.g., position and size) as a QRectF. This function is equivalent to QRectF(pos(), size()).</para>
            <para>This virtual function sets the geometry of the QGraphicsLayoutItem to rect, which is in parent coordinates (e.g., the top-left corner of rect is equivalent to the item's position in parent coordinates).</para>
            <para>You must reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem to receive geometry updates. The layout will call this function when it does a rearrangement.</para>
            <para>If rect is outside of the bounds of minimumSize and maximumSize, it will be adjusted to its closest size so that it is within the legal bounds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.MaximumHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the maximum height.</para>
            <para>Sets the maximum height to height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the maximum size.</para>
            <para>Sets the maximum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MaximumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size larger than size. In order to unset the maximum size, use an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.MaximumWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the maximum width.</para>
            <para>Sets the maximum width to width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.MinimumHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum height.</para>
            <para>Sets the minimum height to height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum size.</para>
            <para>Sets the minimum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MinimumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size smaller than size. In order to unset the minimum size, use an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.MinimumWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum width.</para>
            <para>Sets the minimum width to width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.ParentLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the parent of this QGraphicsLayoutItem, or 0 if there is no parent, or if the parent does not inherit from QGraphicsLayoutItem (QGraphicsLayoutItem is often used through multiple inheritance with QObject-derived classes).</para>
            <para>Sets the parent of this QGraphicsLayoutItem to parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.PreferredHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred height.</para>
            <para>Sets the preferred height to height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.PreferredSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred size.</para>
            <para>Sets the preferred size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::PreferredSize and provides the default value for effectiveSizeHint(). In order to unset the preferred size, use an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.PreferredWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred width.</para>
            <para>Sets the preferred width to width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayoutItem.SizePolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current size policy.</para>
            <para>Sets the size policy to policy. The size policy describes how the item should grow horizontally and vertically when arranged in a layout.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLayoutItem's default size policy is (QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::DefaultType), but it is common for subclasses to change the default. For example, QGraphicsWidget defaults to (QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::DefaultType).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Contructs a QGraphicsLayout object.</para>
            <para>parent is passed to QGraphicsLayoutItem's constructor and the QGraphicsLayoutItem's isLayout argument is set to true.</para>
            <para>If parent is a QGraphicsWidget the layout will be installed on that widget. (Note that installing a layout will delete the old one installed.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.Activate">
            <summary>
            <para>Activates the layout, causing all items in the layout to be immediately rearranged. This function is based on calling count() and itemAt(), and then calling setGeometry() on all items sequentially. When activated, the layout will adjust its geometry to its parent's contentsRect(). The parent will then invalidate any layout of its own.</para>
            <para>If called in sequence or recursively, e.g., by one of the arranged items in response to being resized, this function will do nothing.</para>
            <para>Note that the layout is free to use geometry caching to optimize this process. To forcefully invalidate any such cache, you can call invalidate() before calling activate().</para>
            <para>See also invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.AddChildLayoutItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is a convenience function provided for custom layouts, and will go through all items in the layout and reparent their graphics items to the closest QGraphicsWidget ancestor of the layout.</para>
            <para>If layoutItem is already in a different layout, it will be removed from that layout.</para>
            <para>If custom layouts want special behaviour they can ignore to use this function, and implement their own behaviour.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also graphicsItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function must be reimplemented in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout to return the number of items in the layout.</para>
            <para>The subclass is free to decide how to store the items.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt() and removeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.GetContentsMargins(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::getContentsMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears any cached geometry and size hint information in the layout, and posts a LayoutRequest event to the managed parent QGraphicsLayoutItem.</para>
            <para>See also activate() and setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.IsActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the layout is currently being activated; otherwise, returns false. If the layout is being activated, this means that it is currently in the process of rearranging its items (i.e., the activate() function has been called, and has not yet returned).</para>
            <para>See also activate() and invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function must be reimplemented in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout to return a pointer to the item at index i. The reimplementation can assume that i is valid (i.e., it respects the value of count()). Together with count(), it is provided as a means of iterating over all items in a layout.</para>
            <para>The subclass is free to decide how to store the items, and the visual arrangement does not have to be reflected through this function.</para>
            <para>See also count() and removeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.RemoveAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function must be reimplemented in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout to remove the item at index. The reimplementation can assume that index is valid (i.e., it respects the value of count()).</para>
            <para>The implementation must ensure that the parentLayoutItem() of the removed item does not point to this layout, since the item is considered to be removed from the layout hierarchy.</para>
            <para>If the layout is to be reused between applications, we recommend that the layout deletes the item, but the graphics view framework does not depend on this.</para>
            <para>The subclass is free to decide how to store the items.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt() and count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.SetContentsMargins(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents margins to left, top, right and bottom. The default contents margins for toplevel layouts are style dependent (by querying the pixelMetric for QStyle::PM_LayoutLeftMargin, QStyle::PM_LayoutTopMargin, QStyle::PM_LayoutRightMargin and QStyle::PM_LayoutBottomMargin).</para>
            <para>For sublayouts the default margins are 0.</para>
            <para>Changing the contents margins automatically invalidates the layout.</para>
            <para>See also invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.UpdateGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::updateGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.OnWidgetEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual event handler receives all events for the managed widget. QGraphicsLayout uses this event handler to listen for layout related events such as geometry changes, layout changes or layout direction changes.</para>
            <para>e is a pointer to the event.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this event handler to track similar events for your own custom layout.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget::event() and QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsLayout object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLayout.InstantInvalidatePropagation">
            <summary>
            <para>returns true if the complete widget/layout hierarchy is rearranged in one go.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Calling this function with enable set to true will enable a feature that makes propagation of invalidation up to ancestor layout items to be done in one go. It will propagate up the parentLayoutItem() hierarchy until it has reached the root. If the root item is a QGraphicsWidget, it will *post* a layout request to it. When the layout request is consumed it will traverse down the hierarchy of layouts and widgets and activate all layouts that is invalid (not activated). This is the recommended behaviour.</para>
            <para>If not set it will also propagate up the parentLayoutItem() hierarchy, but it will stop at the first widget it encounters, and post a layout request to the widget. When the layout request is consumed, this might cause it to continue propagation up to the parentLayoutItem() of the widget. It will continue in this fashion until it has reached a widget with no parentLayoutItem(). This strategy might cause drawing artifacts, since it is not done in one go, and the consumption of layout requests might be interleaved by consumption of paint events, which might cause significant flicker. Note, this is not the recommended behavior, but for compatibility reasons this is the default behaviour.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsAnchorLayout instance. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.AddAnchor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.AnchorPoint,QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.AnchorPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an anchor between the edge firstEdge of item firstItem and the edge secondEdge of item secondItem. The spacing of the anchor is picked up from the style. Anchors between a layout edge and an item edge will have a size of 0. If there is already an anchor between the edges, the the new anchor will replace the old one.</para>
            <para>firstItem and secondItem are automatically added to the layout if they are not part of the layout. This means that count() can increase by up to 2.</para>
            <para>The spacing an anchor will get depends on the type of anchor. For instance, anchors from the Right edge of one item to the Left edge of another (or vice versa) will use the default horizontal spacing. The same behaviour applies to Bottom to Top anchors, (but they will use the default vertical spacing). For all other anchor combinations, the spacing will be 0. All anchoring functions will follow this rule.</para>
            <para>The spacing can also be set manually by using QGraphicsAnchor::setSpacing() method.</para>
            <para>Calling this function where firstItem or secondItem are ancestors of the layout have undefined behaviour.</para>
            <para>See also addAnchors() and addCornerAnchors().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.AddAnchors(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Anchors two or four edges of firstItem with the corresponding edges of secondItem, so that firstItem has the same size as secondItem in the dimensions specified by orientations.</para>
            <para>For example, the following example anchors the left and right edges of two items to match their widths:</para>
            <para> layout-&gt;addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorLeft, c, Qt::AnchorLeft);</para>
            <para> layout-&gt;addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorRight, c, Qt::AnchorRight);</para>
            <para>This can also be achieved using the following line of code:</para>
            <para> layout-&gt;addAnchors(b, c, Qt::Horizontal);</para>
            <para>See also addAnchor() and addCornerAnchors().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.AddCornerAnchors(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.Corner,QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.Corner)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates two anchors between firstItem and secondItem specified by the corners, firstCorner and secondCorner, where one is for the horizontal edge and another one for the vertical edge.</para>
            <para>This is a convenience function, since anchoring corners can be expressed as anchoring two edges. For instance:</para>
            <para> layout-&gt;addAnchor(a, Qt::AnchorTop, layout, Qt::AnchorTop);</para>
            <para> layout-&gt;addAnchor(a, Qt::AnchorLeft, layout, Qt::AnchorLeft);</para>
            <para>This can also be achieved with the following line of code:</para>
            <para> layout-&gt;addCornerAnchors(a, Qt::TopLeftCorner, layout, Qt::TopLeftCorner);</para>
            <para>If there is already an anchor between the edge pairs, it will be replaced by the anchors that this function specifies.</para>
            <para>firstItem and secondItem are automatically added to the layout if they are not part of the layout. This means that count() can increase by up to 2.</para>
            <para>See also addAnchor() and addAnchors().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.Anchor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.AnchorPoint,QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.AnchorPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the anchor between the anchor points defined by firstItem and firstEdge and secondItem and secondEdge. If there is no such anchor, the function will return 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.RemoveAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::removeAt().</para>
            <para>Removes the layout item at index without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>Removing an item will also remove any of the anchors associated with it.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt() and count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.SetSpacing(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the default horizontal and the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.</para>
            <para>If an item is anchored with no spacing associated with the anchor, it will use the default spacing.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsAnchorLayout does not support negative spacings. Setting a negative value will unset the previous spacing and make the layout use the spacing provided by the current widget style.</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalSpacing() and setVerticalSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsAnchorLayout object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.HorizontalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default horizontal spacing for the anchor layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the default horizontal spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsAnchorLayout.VerticalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsBlurEffect class provides a blur effect.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A blur effect blurs the source. This effect is useful for reducing details, such as when the source loses focus and you want to draw attention to other elements. The level of detail can be modified using the setBlurRadius() function. Use setBlurHints() to choose the blur hints.</para>
            <para>By default, the blur radius is 5 pixels. The blur radius is specified in device coordinates.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsDropShadowEffect, QGraphicsColorizeEffect, and QGraphicsOpacityEffect.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsEffect class is the base class for all graphics effects.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Effects alter the appearance of elements by hooking into the rendering pipeline and operating between the source (e.g., a QGraphicsPixmapItem) and the destination device (e.g., QGraphicsView's viewport). Effects can be disabled by calling setEnabled(false). If effects are disabled, the source is rendered directly.</para>
            <para>To add a visual effect to a QGraphicsItem, for example, you can use one of the standard effects, or alternately, create your own effect by creating a subclass of QGraphicsEffect. The effect can then be installed on the item using QGraphicsItem::setGraphicsEffect().</para>
            <para>Qt provides the following standard effects:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsBlurEffect - blurs the item by a given radius</para>
            <para>QGraphicsDropShadowEffect - renders a dropshadow behind the item</para>
            <para>QGraphicsColorizeEffect - renders the item in shades of any given color</para>
            <para>QGraphicsOpacityEffect - renders the item with an opacity</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For more information on how to use each effect, refer to the specific effect's documentation.</para>
            <para>To create your own custom effect, create a subclass of QGraphicsEffect (or any other existing effects) and reimplement the virtual function draw(). This function is called whenever the effect needs to redraw. The draw() function takes the painter with which to draw as an argument. For more information, refer to the documenation for draw(). In the draw() function you can call sourcePixmap() to get a pixmap of the graphics effect source which you can then process.</para>
            <para>If your effect changes, use update() to request for a redraw. If your custom effect changes the bounding rectangle of the source, e.g., a radial glow effect may need to apply an extra margin, you can reimplement the virtual boundingRectFor() function, and call updateBoundingRect() to notify the framework whenever this rectangle changes. The virtual sourceChanged() function is called to notify the effects that the source has changed in some way - e.g., if the source is a QGraphicsRectItem and its rectangle parameters have changed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::setGraphicsEffect() and QWidget::setGraphicsEffect().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsEffect instance having the specified parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the effective bounding rectangle for this effect, i.e., the bounding rectangle of the source in device coordinates, adjusted by any margins applied by the effect itself.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRectFor() and updateBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.BoundingRectFor(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the effective bounding rectangle for this effect, given the provided rect in the device coordinates. When writing you own custom effect, you must call updateBoundingRect() whenever any parameters are changed that may cause this this function to return a different value.</para>
            <para>See also sourceBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.Draw(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual function draws the effect and is called whenever the source needs to be drawn.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsEffect subclass to provide the effect's drawing implementation, using painter.</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> MyGraphicsEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     QPoint offset;</para>
            <para>     if (sourceIsPixmap()) {</para>
            <para>         // No point in drawing in device coordinates (pixmap will be scaled anyways).</para>
            <para>         const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::LogicalCoordinates, &amp;offset);</para>
            <para>         ...</para>
            <para>         painter-&gt;drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         // Draw pixmap in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling;</para>
            <para>         const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::DeviceCoordinates, &amp;offset);</para>
            <para>         painter-&gt;setWorldTransform(QTransform());</para>
            <para>         ...</para>
            <para>         painter-&gt;drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>This function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it is meant for reimplementation purposes only.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.DrawSource(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the source directly using the given painter.</para>
            <para>This function should only be called from QGraphicsEffect::draw().</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> MyGraphicsOpacityEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Fully opaque; draw directly without going through a pixmap.</para>
            <para>     if (qFuzzyCompare(m_opacity, 1)) {</para>
            <para>         drawSource(painter);</para>
            <para>         return;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsEffect::draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.OnEnabledChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect is enabled or disabled. The enabled parameter holds the effects's new enabled state.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.SourceBoundingRect(QtCore.Qt.CoordinateSystem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the source mapped to the given system.</para>
            <para>Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.</para>
            <para>See also draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.SourceChanged(QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.ChangeFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QGraphicsEffect to notify the effect that the source has changed. If the effect applies any cache, then this cache must be purged in order to reflect the new appearance of the source.</para>
            <para>The flags describes what has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.SourceIsPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the source effectively is a pixmap, e.g., a QGraphicsPixmapItem.</para>
            <para>This function is useful for optimization purposes. For instance, there's no point in drawing the source in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling if this function returns true - the source pixmap will be scaled anyways.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.SourcePixmap(QtCore.Qt.CoordinateSystem,QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.PixmapPadMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pixmap with the source painted into it.</para>
            <para>The system specifies which coordinate system to be used for the source. The optional offset parameter returns the offset where the pixmap should be painted at using the current painter. For control on how the pixmap is padded use the mode parameter.</para>
            <para>The returned pixmap is clipped to the current painter's device rectangle when system is Qt::DeviceCoordinates.</para>
            <para>Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.</para>
            <para>See also draw() and boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the effect. Call this function whenever the effect needs to be redrawn. This function does not trigger a redraw of the source.</para>
            <para>See also updateBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.UpdateBoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This function notifies the effect framework when the effect's bounding rectangle has changed. As a custom effect author, you must call this function whenever you change any parameters that will cause the virtual boundingRectFor() function to return a different value.</para>
            <para>This function will call update() if this is necessary.</para>
            <para>See also boundingRectFor(), boundingRect(), and sourceBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the effect from the source, and destroys the graphics effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.EnabledChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect is enabled or disabled. The enabled parameter holds the effects's new enabled state.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.Enabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the effect is enabled or not.</para>
            <para>If an effect is disabled, the source will be rendered with as normal, with no interference from the effect. If the effect is enabled, the source will be rendered with the effect applied.</para>
            <para>This property is enabled by default.</para>
            <para>Using this property, you can disable certain effects on slow platforms, in order to ensure that the user interface is responsive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.ChangeFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes what has changed in QGraphicsEffectSource.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.ChangeFlag.SourceAttached">
            <summary>
            <para>The effect is installed on a source.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.ChangeFlag.SourceBoundingRectChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The bounding rect of the source has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.ChangeFlag.SourceDetached">
            <summary>
            <para>The effect is uninstalled on a source.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.ChangeFlag.SourceInvalidated">
            <summary>
            <para>The visual appearance of the source has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.PixmapPadMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how the pixmap returned from sourcePixmap should be padded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.PixmapPadMode.NoPad">
            <summary>
            <para>The pixmap should not receive any additional padding.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.PixmapPadMode.PadToEffectiveBoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>The pixmap should be padded to match the effective bounding rectangle of the effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsEffect.PixmapPadMode.PadToTransparentBorder">
            <summary>
            <para>The pixmap should be padded to ensure it has a completely transparent border.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsBlurEffect instance. The parent parameter is passed to QGraphicsEffect's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.OnBlurHintsChanged(QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur hints changes. The hints parameter holds the effect's new blur hints.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.OnBlurRadiusChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur radius changes. The radius parameter holds the effect's new blur radius.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BoundingRectFor(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsEffect::boundingRectFor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.Draw(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsEffect::draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurRadiusChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur radius changes. The radius parameter holds the effect's new blur radius.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHintsChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur hints changes. The hints parameter holds the effect's new blur hints.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurRadius">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the blur radius of the effect.</para>
            <para>Using a smaller radius results in a sharper appearance, whereas a bigger radius results in a more blurred appearance.</para>
            <para>By default, the blur radius is 5 pixels.</para>
            <para>The radius is given in device coordinates, meaning it is unaffected by scale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHints">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the blur hint of the effect.</para>
            <para>Use the PerformanceHint hint to say that you want a faster blur, the QualityHint hint to say that you prefer a higher quality blur, or the AnimationHint when you want to animate the blur radius.</para>
            <para>By default, the blur hint is PerformanceHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the possible hints that can be used to control how blur effects are applied. The hints might not have an effect in all the paint engines.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also blurHints() and setBlurHints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHint.AnimationHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the blur radius is going to be animated, hinting that the implementation can keep a cache of blurred verisons of the source. Do not use this hint if the source is going to be dynamically changing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHint.PerformanceHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that rendering performance is the most important factor, at the potential cost of lower quality.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHint.QualityHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that rendering quality is the most important factor, at the potential cost of lower performance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsColorizeEffect class provides a colorize effect.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A colorize effect renders the source with a tint of its color(). The color can be modified using the setColor() function.</para>
            <para>By default, the color is light blue (QColor(0, 0, 192)).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsDropShadowEffect, QGraphicsBlurEffect, and QGraphicsOpacityEffect.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsColorizeEffect instance. The parent parameter is passed to QGraphicsEffect's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.OnColorChanged(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's color changes. The color parameter holds the effect's new color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.Draw(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsEffect::draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.OnStrengthChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever setStrength() changes the colorize strength property. strength contains the new strength value of the colorize effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.ColorChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's color changes. The color parameter holds the effect's new color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.StrengthChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever setStrength() changes the colorize strength property. strength contains the new strength value of the colorize effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.Color">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the color of the effect.</para>
            <para>By default, the color is light blue (QColor(0, 0, 192)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsColorizeEffect.Strength">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the strength of the effect.</para>
            <para>By default, the strength is 1.0. A strength 0.0 equals to no effect, while 1.0 means full colorization.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsDropShadowEffect class provides a drop shadow effect.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A drop shadow effect renders the source with a drop shadow. The color of the drop shadow can be modified using the setColor() function. The drop shadow offset can be modified using the setOffset() function and the blur radius of the drop shadow can be changed with the setBlurRadius() function.</para>
            <para>By default, the drop shadow is a semi-transparent dark gray (QColor(63, 63, 63, 180)) shadow, blurred with a radius of 1 at an offset of 8 pixels towards the lower right. The drop shadow offset is specified in device coordinates.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsBlurEffect, QGraphicsColorizeEffect, and QGraphicsOpacityEffect.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsDropShadowEffect instance. The parent parameter is passed to QGraphicsEffect's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.OnBlurRadiusChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur radius changes. The blurRadius parameter holds the effect's new blur radius.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.BoundingRectFor(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsEffect::boundingRectFor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.OnColorChanged(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's color changes. The color parameter holds the effect's new color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.Draw(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsEffect::draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.OnOffsetChanged(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's shadow offset changes. The offset parameter holds the effect's new shadow offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.OffsetChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's shadow offset changes. The offset parameter holds the effect's new shadow offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.BlurRadiusChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur radius changes. The blurRadius parameter holds the effect's new blur radius.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.ColorChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's color changes. The color parameter holds the effect's new color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.Offset">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the shadow offset in pixels.</para>
            <para>By default, the offset is 8 pixels towards the lower right.</para>
            <para>The offset is given in device coordinates, which means it is unaffected by scale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.XOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the horizontal shadow offset in pixels.</para>
            <para>By default, the horizontal shadow offset is 8 pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.YOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the vertical shadow offset in pixels.</para>
            <para>By default, the vertical shadow offset is 8 pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.BlurRadius">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the blur radius in pixels of the drop shadow.</para>
            <para>Using a smaller radius results in a sharper shadow, whereas using a bigger radius results in a more blurred shadow.</para>
            <para>By default, the blur radius is 1 pixel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsDropShadowEffect.Color">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the color of the drop shadow.</para>
            <para>By default, the drop color is a semi-transparent dark gray (QColor(63, 63, 63, 180)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsEllipseItem class provides an ellipse item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsEllipseItem respresents an ellipse with a fill and an outline, and you can also use it for ellipse segments (see startAngle(), spanAngle()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's ellipse, pass a QRectF to QGraphicsEllipseItem's constructor, or call setRect(). The rect() function returns the current ellipse geometry.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsEllipseItem uses the rect and the pen width to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). The paint() function draws the ellipse using the item's associated pen and brush, which you can set by calling setPen() and setBrush().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsLineItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsEllipseItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.#ctor(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsEllipseItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsEllipseItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.SetRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's ellipse geometry to rect. The rectangle's left edge defines the left edge of the ellipse, and the rectangle's top edge describes the top of the ellipse. The height and width of the rectangle describe the height and width of the ellipse.</para>
            <para>See also rect() and QPainter::drawEllipse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsEllipseItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's ellipse geometry as a QRectF.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's ellipse geometry to rect. The rectangle's left edge defines the left edge of the ellipse, and the rectangle's top edge describes the top of the ellipse. The height and width of the rectangle describe the height and width of the ellipse.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.SpanAngle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the span angle of an ellipse segment in 16ths of a degree. This angle is used together with startAngle() for representing an ellipse segment (a pie). By default, this function returns 5760 (360 * 16, a full ellipse).</para>
            <para>Sets the span angle for an ellipse segment to angle, which is in 16ths of a degree. This angle is used together with startAngle() to represent an ellipse segment (a pie). By default, the span angle is 5760 (360 * 16, a full ellipse).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsEllipseItem.StartAngle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the start angle for an ellipse segment in 16ths of a degree. This angle is used together with spanAngle() for representing an ellipse segment (a pie). By default, the start angle is 0.</para>
            <para>Sets the start angle for an ellipse segment to angle, which is in 16ths of a degree. This angle is used together with spanAngle() for representing an ellipse segment (a pie). By default, the start angle is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsGridLayout class provides a grid layout for managing widgets in Graphics View.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The most common way to use QGraphicsGridLayout is to construct an object on the heap with no parent, add widgets and layouts by calling addItem(), and finally assign the layout to a widget by calling QGraphicsWidget::setLayout(). QGraphicsGridLayout automatically computes the dimensions of the grid as you add items.</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsWidget *textEdit = scene.addWidget(new QTextEdit);</para>
            <para> QGraphicsWidget *pushButton = scene.addWidget(new QPushButton);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsGridLayout *layout = new QGraphicsGridLayout;</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addItem(textEdit, 0, 0);</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addItem(pushButton, 0, 1);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsWidget *form = new QGraphicsWidget;</para>
            <para> form-&amp;gt;setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(form);</para>
            <para>The layout takes ownership of the items. In some cases when the layout item also inherits from QGraphicsItem (such as QGraphicsWidget) there will be a ambiguity in ownership because the layout item belongs to two ownership hierarchies. See the documentation of QGraphicsLayoutItem::setOwnedByLayout() how to handle this. You can access each item in the layout by calling count() and itemAt(). Calling removeAt() will remove an item from the layout, without destroying it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Size Hints and Size Policies in QGraphicsGridLayout</para>
            <para>QGraphicsGridLayout respects each item's size hints and size policies, and when a cell in the grid has more space than the items can fill, each item is arranged according to the layout's alignment for that item. You can set an alignment for each item by calling setAlignment(), and check the alignment for any item by calling alignment(). You can also set the alignment for an entire row or column by calling setRowAlignment() and setColumnAlignment() respectively. By default, items are aligned to the top left.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsLinearLayout and QGraphicsWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsGridLayout instance. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds item to the grid on row and column. You can specify a rowSpan and columnSpan and an optional alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds item to the grid on row and column. You can specify a rowSpan and columnSpan and an optional alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.Alignment(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alignment for item.</para>
            <para>See also setAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnAlignment(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alignment for column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in the grid layout. This is always one more than the index of the last column that is occupied by a layout item (empty columns are counted except for those at the end).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnMaximumWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the maximum width for column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnMaximumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnMinimumWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum width for column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnMinimumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnPreferredWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred width for column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnPreferredWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnSpacing(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column spacing for column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ColumnStretchFactor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor for column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnStretchFactor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::count().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of layout items in this grid layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::itemAt().</para>
            <para>Returns the layout item at index, or 0 if there is no layout item at this index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the layout item at (row, column).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RemoveAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::removeAt().</para>
            <para>Removes the layout item at index without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RemoveItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the layout item item without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowAlignment(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alignment of row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the grid layout. This is always one more than the index of the last row that is occupied by a layout item (empty rows are counted except for those at the end).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowMaximumHeight(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the maximum height for row, row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowMaximumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowMinimumHeight(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum height for row, row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowMinimumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowPreferredHeight(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred height for row, row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowPreferredHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowSpacing(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row spacing for row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.RowStretchFactor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor for row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowStretchFactor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetAlignment(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment for item to alignment.</para>
            <para>See also alignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnAlignment(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment for column to alignment.</para>
            <para>See also columnAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnFixedWidth(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the fixed width of column to width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnMaximumWidth(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the maximum width of column to width.</para>
            <para>See also columnMaximumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnMinimumWidth(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the minimum width for column to width.</para>
            <para>See also columnMinimumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnPreferredWidth(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the preferred width for column to width.</para>
            <para>See also columnPreferredWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnSpacing(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the spacing for column to spacing.</para>
            <para>See also columnSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetColumnStretchFactor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor for column to stretch.</para>
            <para>See also columnStretchFactor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowAlignment(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment of row to alignment.</para>
            <para>See also rowAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowFixedHeight(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the fixed height for row, row, to height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowMaximumHeight(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the maximum height for row, row, to height.</para>
            <para>See also rowMaximumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowMinimumHeight(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the minimum height for row, row, to height.</para>
            <para>See also rowMinimumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowPreferredHeight(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the preferred height for row, row, to height.</para>
            <para>See also rowPreferredHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowSpacing(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the spacing for row to spacing.</para>
            <para>See also rowSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetRowStretchFactor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor for row to stretch.</para>
            <para>See also rowStretchFactor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SetSpacing(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the grid layout's default spacing, both vertical and horizontal, to spacing.</para>
            <para>See also rowSpacing() and columnSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsGridLayout object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            <para>Sets the bounding geometry of the grid layout to rect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.HorizontalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default horizontal spacing for the grid layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the default horizontal spacing for the grid layout to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsGridLayout.VerticalSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default vertical spacing for the grid layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the default vertical spacing for the grid layout to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsItemAnimation class provides simple animation support for QGraphicsItem.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QGraphicsItemAnimation class animates a QGraphicsItem. You can schedule changes to the item's transformation matrix at specified steps. The QGraphicsItemAnimation class has a current step value. When this value changes the transformations scheduled at that step are performed. The current step of the animation is set with the setStep() function.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsItemAnimation will do a simple linear interpolation between the nearest adjacent scheduled changes to calculate the matrix. For instance, if you set the position of an item at values 0.0 and 1.0, the animation will show the item moving in a straight line between these positions. The same is true for scaling and rotation.</para>
            <para>It is usual to use the class with a QTimeLine. The timeline's valueChanged() signal is then connected to the setStep() slot. For example, you can set up an item for rotation by calling setRotationAt() for different step values. The animations timeline is set with the setTimeLine() function.</para>
            <para>An example animation with a timeline follows:</para>
            <para>     QGraphicsItem *ball = new QGraphicsEllipseItem(0, 0, 20, 20);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QTimeLine *timer = new QTimeLine(5000);</para>
            <para>     timer-&amp;gt;setFrameRange(0, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QGraphicsItemAnimation *animation = new QGraphicsItemAnimation;</para>
            <para>     animation-&amp;gt;setItem(ball);</para>
            <para>     animation-&amp;gt;setTimeLine(timer);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     for (int i = 0; i &amp;lt; 200; ++i)</para>
            <para>         animation-&amp;gt;setPosAt(i / 200.0, QPointF(i, i));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QGraphicsScene *scene = new QGraphicsScene();</para>
            <para>     scene-&amp;gt;setSceneRect(0, 0, 250, 250);</para>
            <para>     scene-&amp;gt;addItem(ball);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QGraphicsView *view = new QGraphicsView(scene);</para>
            <para>     view-&amp;gt;show();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     timer-&amp;gt;start();</para>
            <para>Note that steps lie between 0.0 and 1.0. It may be necessary to use setUpdateInterval(). The default update interval is 40 ms. A scheduled transformation cannot be removed when set, so scheduling several transformations of the same kind (e.g., rotations) at the same step is not recommended.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTimeLine and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an animation object with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.AfterAnimationStep(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This method is meant to be overridden in subclasses that need to execute additional code after a new step has taken place. The animation step is provided for use in cases where the action depends on its value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.BeforeAnimationStep(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This method is meant to be overridden by subclassed that needs to execute additional code before a new step takes place. The animation step is provided for use in cases where the action depends on its value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the scheduled transformations used for the animation, but retains the item and timeline.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.HorizontalScaleAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal scale for the item at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setScaleAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.HorizontalShearAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal shear for the item at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setShearAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.MatrixAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix used to transform the item at the specified step value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.PosAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the item at the given step value.</para>
            <para>See also setPosAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the item to its starting position and transformation.</para>
            <para>You can call setStep(0) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.RotationAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the angle at which the item is rotated at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setRotationAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.SetPosAt(System.Double,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the position of the item at the given step value to the point specified.</para>
            <para>See also posAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.SetRotationAt(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the rotation of the item at the given step value to the angle specified.</para>
            <para>See also rotationAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.SetScaleAt(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the scale of the item at the given step value using the horizontal and vertical scale factors specified by sx and sy.</para>
            <para>See also verticalScaleAt() and horizontalScaleAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.SetShearAt(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the shear of the item at the given step value using the horizontal and vertical shear factors specified by sh and sv.</para>
            <para>See also verticalShearAt() and horizontalShearAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.SetStep(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current step value for the animation, causing the transformations scheduled at this step to be performed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.SetTranslationAt(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the translation of the item at the given step value using the horizontal and vertical coordinates specified by dx and dy.</para>
            <para>See also xTranslationAt() and yTranslationAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.VerticalScaleAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical scale for the item at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setScaleAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.VerticalShearAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical shear for the item at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setShearAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.xTranslationAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal translation of the item at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setTranslationAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.yTranslationAt(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical translation of the item at the specified step value.</para>
            <para>See also setTranslationAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the animation object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.Item">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item on which the animation object operates.</para>
            <para>Sets the specified item to be used in the animation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsItemAnimation.TimeLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the timeline object used to control the rate at which the animation occurs.</para>
            <para>Sets the timeline object used to control the rate of animation to the timeLine specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsItemGroup class provides a container that treats a group of items as a single item.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QGraphicsItemGroup is a special type of compound item that treats itself and all its children as one item (i.e., all events and geometries for all children are merged together). It's common to use item groups in presentation tools, when the user wants to group several smaller items into one big item in order to simplify moving and copying of items.</para>
            <para>If all you want is to store items inside other items, you can use any QGraphicsItem directly by passing a suitable parent to setParentItem().</para>
            <para>The boundingRect() function of QGraphicsItemGroup returns the bounding rectangle of all items in the item group. QGraphicsItemGroup ignores the ItemIgnoresTransformations flag on its children (i.e., with respect to the geometry of the group item, the children are treated as if they were transformable).</para>
            <para>There are two ways to construct an item group. The easiest and most common approach is to pass a list of items (e.g., all selected items) to QGraphicsScene::createItemGroup(), which returns a new QGraphicsItemGroup item. The other approach is to manually construct a QGraphicsItemGroup item, add it to the scene calling QGraphicsScene::addItem(), and then add items to the group manually, one at a time by calling addToGroup(). To dismantle (&amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot;) an item group, you can either call QGraphicsScene::destroyItemGroup(), or you can manually remove all items from the group by calling removeFromGroup().</para>
            <para> // Group all selected items together</para>
            <para> QGraphicsItemGroup *group = scene-&amp;gt;createItemGroup(scene-&amp;gt;selecteditems());</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // Destroy the group, and delete the group item</para>
            <para> scene-&amp;gt;destroyItemGroup(group);</para>
            <para>The operation of adding and removing items preserves the items' scene-relative position and transformation, as opposed to calling setParentItem(), where only the child item's parent-relative position and transformation are kept.</para>
            <para>The addtoGroup() function reparents the target item to this item group, keeping the item's position and transformation intact relative to the scene. Visually, this means that items added via addToGroup() will remain completely unchanged as a result of this operation, regardless of the item or the group's current position or transformation; although the item's position and matrix are likely to change.</para>
            <para>The removeFromGroup() function has similar semantics to setParentItem(); it reparents the item to the parent item of the item group. As with addToGroup(), the item's scene-relative position and transformation remain intact.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsItemGroup. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.AddToGroup(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given item and item's child items to this item group. The item and child items will be reparented to this group, but its position and transformation relative to the scene will stay intact.</para>
            <para>See also removeFromGroup() and QGraphicsScene::createItemGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            <para>Returns the bounding rect of this group item, and all its children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.RemoveFromGroup(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the specified item from this group. The item will be reparented to this group's parent item, or to 0 if this group has no parent. Its position and transformation relative to the scene will stay intact.</para>
            <para>See also addToGroup() and QGraphicsScene::destroyItemGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsItemGroup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsLineItem class provides a line item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's line, pass a QLineF to QGraphicsLineItem's constructor, or call the setLine() function. The line() function returns the current line. By default the line is black with a width of 0, but you can change this by calling setPen().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLineItem uses the line and the pen width to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). The paint() function draws the line using the item's associated pen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsLineItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.#ctor(QtCore.QLineF,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsLineItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsLineItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.SetLine(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's line to be the given line.</para>
            <para>See also line().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsLineItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Line">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's line, or a null line if no line has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's line to be the given line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLineItem.Pen">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's pen, or a black solid 0-width pen if no pen has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's pen to pen. If no pen is set, the line will be painted using a black solid 0-width pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsLinearLayout class provides a horizontal or vertical layout for managing widgets in Graphics View.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The default orientation for a linear layout is Qt::Horizontal. You can choose a vertical orientation either by calling setOrientation(), or by passing Qt::Vertical to QGraphicsLinearLayout's constructor.</para>
            <para>The most common way to use QGraphicsLinearLayout is to construct an object on the heap with no parent, add widgets and layouts by calling addItem(), and finally assign the layout to a widget by calling QGraphicsWidget::setLayout().</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsWidget *textEdit = scene.addWidget(new QTextEdit);</para>
            <para> QGraphicsWidget *pushButton = scene.addWidget(new QPushButton);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsLinearLayout *layout = new QGraphicsLinearLayout;</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addItem(textEdit);</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addItem(pushButton);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsWidget *form = new QGraphicsWidget;</para>
            <para> form-&amp;gt;setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(form);</para>
            <para>You can add widgets, layouts, stretches (addStretch(), insertStretch() or setStretchFactor()), and spacings (setItemSpacing()) to a linear layout. The layout takes ownership of the items. In some cases when the layout item also inherits from QGraphicsItem (such as QGraphicsWidget) there will be a ambiguity in ownership because the layout item belongs to two ownership hierarchies. See the documentation of QGraphicsLayoutItem::setOwnedByLayout() how to handle this. You can access each item in the layout by calling count() and itemAt(). Calling removeAt() or removeItem() will remove an item from the layout, without destroying it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Size Hints and Size Policies in QGraphicsLinearLayout</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLinearLayout respects each item's size hints and size policies, and when the layout contains more space than the items can fill, each item is arranged according to the layout's alignment for that item. You can set an alignment for each item by calling setAlignment(), and check the alignment for any item by calling alignment(). By default, items are aligned to the top left.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Spacing within QGraphicsLinearLayout</para>
            <para>Between the items, the layout distributes some space. The actual amount of space depends on the managed widget's current style, but the common spacing is 4. You can also set your own spacing by calling setSpacing(), and get the current spacing value by calling spacing(). If you want to configure individual spacing for your items, you can call setItemSpacing().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Stretch Factor in QGraphicsLinearLayout</para>
            <para>You can assign a stretch factor to each item to control how much space it will get compared to the other items. By default, two identical widgets arranged in a linear layout will have the same size, but if the first widget has a stretch factor of 1 and the second widget has a stretch factor of 2, the first widget will get 1/3 of the available space, and the second will get 2/3.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLinearLayout calculates the distribution of sizes by adding up the stretch factors of all items, and then dividing the available space accordingly. The default stretch factor is 0 for all items; a factor of 0 means the item does not have any defined stretch factor; effectively this is the same as setting the stretch factor to 1. The stretch factor only applies to the available space in the lengthwise direction of the layout (following its orientation). If you want to control both the item's horizontal and vertical stretch, you can use QGraphicsGridLayout instead.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsLinearLayout Compared to Other Layouts</para>
            <para>QGraphicsLinearLayout is very similar to QVBoxLayout and QHBoxLayout, but in contrast to these classes, it is used to manage QGraphicsWidget and QGraphicsLayout instead of QWidget and QLayout.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsGridLayout and QGraphicsWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsLinearLayout instance using Qt::Horizontal orientation. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsLinearLayout instance. You can pass the orientation for the layout, either horizontal or vertical, and parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling insertItem(-1, item).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.AddStretch(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling insertStretch(-1, stretch).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Alignment(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alignment for item. The default alignment is Qt::AlignTop | Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            <para>The alignment decides how the item is positioned within its assigned space in the case where there's more space available in the layout than the widgets can occupy.</para>
            <para>See also setAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts item into the layout at index, or before any item that is currently at index.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), itemAt(), insertStretch(), and setItemSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.InsertStretch(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a stretch of stretch at index, or before any item that is currently at index.</para>
            <para>See also addStretch(), setStretchFactor(), setItemSpacing(), and insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::itemAt().</para>
            <para>When iterating from 0 and up, it will return the items in the visual arranged order.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.ItemSpacing(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the spacing after item at index.</para>
            <para>See also setItemSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.RemoveAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::removeAt().</para>
            <para>Removes the item at index without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>See also removeItem() and insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.RemoveItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes item from the layout without destroying it. Ownership of item is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>See also removeAt() and insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.SetAlignment(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the alignment of item to alignment. If item's alignment changes, the layout is automatically invalidated.</para>
            <para>See also alignment() and invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.SetItemSpacing(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the spacing after item at index to spacing.</para>
            <para>See also itemSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.SetStretchFactor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor for item to stretch. If an item's stretch factor changes, this function will invalidate the layout.</para>
            <para>Setting stretch to 0 removes the stretch factor from the item, and is effectively equivalent to setting stretch to 1.</para>
            <para>See also stretchFactor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.StretchFactor(QtGui.IQGraphicsLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor for item. The default stretch factor is 0, meaning that the item has no assigned stretch factor.</para>
            <para>See also setStretchFactor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsLinearLayout object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout orientation.</para>
            <para>Change the layout orientation to orientation. Changing the layout orientation will automatically invalidate the layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsLinearLayout.Spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout's spacing. Spacing refers to the vertical and horizontal distances between items.</para>
            <para>Sets the layout's spacing to spacing. Spacing refers to the vertical and horizontal distances between items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsObject">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsObject class provides a base class for all graphics items that require signals, slots and properties.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The class extends a QGraphicsItem with QObject's signal/slot and property mechanisms. It maps many of QGraphicsItem's basic setters and getters to properties and adds notification signals for many of them.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Parents and Children</para>
            <para>Each graphics object can be constructed with a parent item. This ensures that the item will be destroyed when its parent item is destroyed. Although QGraphicsObject inherits from both QObject and QGraphicsItem, you should use the functions provided by QGraphicsItem, not QObject, to manage the relationships between parent and child items.</para>
            <para>The relationships between items can be explored using the parentItem() and childItems() functions. In the hierarchy of items in a scene, the parentObject() and parentWidget() functions are the equivalent of the QWidget::parent() and QWidget::parentWidget() functions for QWidget subclasses.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsObject with parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OnEnabledChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the item get's enabled or disabled.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.GrabGesture(QtCore.Qt.GestureType,QtCore.Qt.GestureFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Subscribes the graphics object to the given gesture with specific flags.</para>
            <para>See also ungrabGesture() and QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OnOpacityChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the opacity of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::opacity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OnParentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the parent of the item changes</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OnRotationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the roation of the item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OnScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the scale of the item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.UngrabGesture(QtCore.Qt.GestureType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Unsubscribes the graphics object from the given gesture.</para>
            <para>See also grabGesture() and QGestureEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.UpdateMicroFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the item's micro focus. This is slot for convenience.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QInputContext.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OnVisibleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the visibility of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.xChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the x position of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.yChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the y position of the item changes.</para>
            <para>See also pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.zChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the z value of the item changes.</para>
            <para>See also pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.ParentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the parent of the item changes</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.OpacityChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the opacity of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::opacity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.VisibleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the visibility of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.EnabledChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the item get's enabled or disabled.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.RotationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the roation of the item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsObject.ScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the scale of the item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsOpacityEffect class provides an opacity effect.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An opacity effect renders the source with an opacity. This effect is useful for making the source semi-transparent, similar to a fade-in/fade-out sequence. The opacity can be modified using the setOpacity() function.</para>
            <para>By default, the opacity is 0.7.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsDropShadowEffect, QGraphicsBlurEffect, and QGraphicsColorizeEffect.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsOpacityEffect instance. The parent parameter is passed to QGraphicsEffect's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.Draw(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsEffect::draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.OnOpacityChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's opacity changes. The opacity parameter holds the effect's new opacity.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.OnOpacityMaskChanged(QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's opacity mask changes. The mask parameter holds the effect's new opacity mask.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.OpacityChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's opacity changes. The opacity parameter holds the effect's new opacity.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.OpacityMaskChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's opacity mask changes. The mask parameter holds the effect's new opacity mask.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.Opacity">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the opacity of the effect.</para>
            <para>The value should be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0, where 0.0 is fully transparent and 1.0 is fully opaque.</para>
            <para>By default, the opacity is 0.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsOpacityEffect.OpacityMask">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the opacity mask of the effect.</para>
            <para>An opacity mask allows you apply opacity to portions of an element.</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> QLinearGradient alphaGradient(rect.topLeft(), rect.bottomLeft());</para>
            <para> alphaGradient.setColorAt(0.0, Qt::transparent);</para>
            <para> alphaGradient.setColorAt(0.5, Qt::black);</para>
            <para> alphaGradient.setColorAt(1.0, Qt::transparent);</para>
            <para> QGraphicsOpacityEffect *effect = new QGraphicsOpacityEffect;</para>
            <para> effect-&gt;setOpacityMask(alphaGradient);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para>There is no opacity mask by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsPathItem class provides a path item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's path, pass a QPainterPath to QGraphicsPathItem's constructor, or call the setPath() function. The path() function returns the current path.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsPathItem uses the path to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). The paint() function draws the path using the item's associated pen and brush, which you can set by calling the setPen() and setBrush() functions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsLineItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsPath. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.#ctor(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsPath. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsPathItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPathItem.Path">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's path as a QPainterPath. If no item has been set, an empty QPainterPath is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's path to be the given path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsPixmapItem class provides a pixmap item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's pixmap, pass a QPixmap to QGraphicsPixmapItem's constructor, or call the setPixmap() function. The pixmap() function returns the current pixmap.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsPixmapItem uses pixmap's optional alpha mask to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains().</para>
            <para>The pixmap is drawn at the item's (0, 0) coordinate, as returned by offset(). You can change the drawing offset by calling setOffset().</para>
            <para>You can set the pixmap's transformation mode by calling setTransformationMode(). By default, Qt::FastTransformation is used, which provides fast, non-smooth scaling. Qt::SmoothTransformation enables QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform on the painter, and the quality depends on the platform and viewport. The result is usually not as good as calling QPixmap::scale() directly. Call transformationMode() to get the current transformation mode for the item.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsLineItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsPixmapItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsPixmapItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.SetOffset(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the pixmap item's offset to offset. QGraphicsPixmapItem will draw its pixmap using offset for its top-left corner.</para>
            <para>See also offset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsPixmapItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Offset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap item's offset, which defines the point of the top-left corner of the pixmap, in local coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets the pixmap item's offset to offset. QGraphicsPixmapItem will draw its pixmap using offset for its top-left corner.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.Pixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's pixmap, or an invalid QPixmap if no pixmap has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's pixmap to pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.shapeMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's shape mode. The shape mode describes how QGraphicsPixmapItem calculates its shape. The default mode is MaskShape.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's shape mode to mode. The shape mode describes how QGraphicsPixmapItem calculates its shape. The default mode is MaskShape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.TransformationMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the transformation mode of the pixmap. The default mode is Qt::FastTransformation, which provides quick transformation with no smoothing.</para>
            <para>Sets the pixmap item's transformation mode to mode, and toggles an update of the item. The default mode is Qt::FastTransformation, which provides quick transformation with no smoothing.</para>
            <para>Qt::SmoothTransformation enables QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform on the painter, and the quality depends on the platform and viewport. The result is usually not as good as calling QPixmap::scale() directly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.ShapeMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how QGraphicsPixmapItem calculates its shape and opaque area.</para>
            <para>The default value is MaskShape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.ShapeMode.BoundingRectShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The shape is determined by tracing the outline of the pixmap. This is the fastest shape mode, but it does not take into account any transparent areas on the pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.ShapeMode.HeuristicMaskShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The shape is determine by calling QPixmap::createHeuristicMask(). The performance and memory consumption is similar to MaskShape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsPixmapItem.ShapeMode.MaskShape">
            <summary>
            <para>The shape is determined by calling QPixmap::mask(). This shape includes only the opaque pixels of the pixmap. Because the shape is more complex, however, it can be slower than the other modes, and uses more memory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsPolygonItem class provides a polygon item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's polygon, pass a QPolygonF to QGraphicsPolygonItem's constructor, or call the setPolygon() function. The polygon() function returns the current polygon.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsPolygonItem uses the polygon and the pen width to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). The paint() function draws the polygon using the item's associated pen and brush, which you can set by calling the setPen() and setBrush() functions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsLineItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsPolygonItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.#ctor(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsPolygonItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsPolygonItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.FillRule">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the fill rule of the polygon. The default fill rule is Qt::OddEvenFill.</para>
            <para>Sets the fill rule of the polygon to rule. The default fill rule is Qt::OddEvenFill.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsPolygonItem.Polygon">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's polygon, or an empty polygon if no polygon has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's polygon to be the given polygon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsProxyWidget class provides a proxy layer for embedding a QWidget in a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsProxyWidget embeds QWidget-based widgets, for example, a QPushButton, QFontComboBox, or even QFileDialog, into QGraphicsScene. It forwards events between the two objects and translates between QWidget's integer-based geometry and QGraphicsWidget's qreal-based geometry. QGraphicsProxyWidget supports all core features of QWidget, including tab focus, keyboard input, Drag &amp;amp; Drop, and popups. You can also embed complex widgets, e.g., widgets with subwidgets.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> int main(int argc, char **argv)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QApplication app(argc, argv);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QTabWidget *tabWidget = new QTabWidget;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para>     QGraphicsProxyWidget *proxy = scene.addWidget(tabWidget);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QGraphicsView view(&amp;amp;scene);</para>
            <para>     view.show();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     return app.exec();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>QGraphicsProxyWidget takes care of automatically embedding popup children of embedded widgets through creating a child proxy for each popup. This means that when an embedded QComboBox shows its popup list, a new QGraphicsProxyWidget is created automatically, embedding the popup, and positioning it correctly. This only works if the popup is child of the embedded widget (for example QToolButton::setMenu() requires the QMenu instance to be child of the QToolButton).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Embedding a Widget with QGraphicsProxyWidget</para>
            <para>There are two ways to embed a widget using QGraphicsProxyWidget. The most common way is to pass a widget pointer to QGraphicsScene::addWidget() together with any relevant Qt::WindowFlags. This function returns a pointer to a QGraphicsProxyWidget. You can then choose to reparent or position either the proxy, or the embedded widget itself.</para>
            <para>For example, in the code snippet below, we embed a group box into the proxy:</para>
            <para> QGroupBox *groupBox = new QGroupBox(&amp;quot;Contact Details&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> QLabel *numberLabel = new QLabel(&amp;quot;Telephone number&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> QLineEdit *numberEdit = new QLineEdit;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QFormLayout *layout = new QFormLayout;</para>
            <para> layout-&amp;gt;addRow(numberLabel, numberEdit);</para>
            <para> groupBox-&amp;gt;setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsProxyWidget *proxy = scene.addWidget(groupBox);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para>The image below is the output obtained with its contents margin and contents rect labeled.</para>
            <para>Alternatively, you can start by creating a new QGraphicsProxyWidget item, and then call setWidget() to embed a QWidget later. The widget() function returns a pointer to the embedded widget. QGraphicsProxyWidget shares ownership with QWidget, so if either of the two widgets are destroyed, the other widget will be automatically destroyed as well.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Synchronizing Widget States</para>
            <para>QGraphicsProxyWidget keeps its state in sync with the embedded widget. For example, if the proxy is hidden or disabled, the embedded widget will be hidden or disabled as well, and vice versa. When the widget is embedded by calling addWidget(), QGraphicsProxyWidget copies the state from the widget into the proxy, and after that, the two will stay synchronized where possible. By default, when you embed a widget into a proxy, both the widget and the proxy will be visible because a QGraphicsWidget is visible when created (you do not have to call show()). If you explicitly hide the embedded widget, the proxy will also become invisible.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QLineEdit *edit = new QLineEdit;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsProxyWidget *proxy = scene.addWidget(edit);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> edit-&amp;gt;isVisible();  // returns true</para>
            <para> proxy-&amp;gt;isVisible(); // also returns true</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> edit-&amp;gt;hide();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> edit-&amp;gt;isVisible();  // returns false</para>
            <para> proxy-&amp;gt;isVisible(); // also returns false</para>
            <para>QGraphicsProxyWidget maintains symmetry for the following states:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWidget stateQGraphicsProxyWidget stateNotes</para>
            <para>QWidget::enabled	QGraphicsProxyWidget::enabled	</para>
            <para>QWidget::visible	QGraphicsProxyWidget::visible	The explicit state is also symmetric.</para>
            <para>QWidget::geometry	QGraphicsProxyWidget::geometry	Geometry is only guaranteed to be symmetric while the embedded widget is visible.</para>
            <para>QWidget::layoutDirection	QGraphicsProxyWidget::layoutDirection	</para>
            <para>QWidget::style	QGraphicsProxyWidget::style	</para>
            <para>QWidget::palette	QGraphicsProxyWidget::palette	</para>
            <para>QWidget::font	QGraphicsProxyWidget::font	</para>
            <para>QWidget::cursor	QGraphicsProxyWidget::cursor	The embedded widget overrides the proxy widget cursor. The proxy cursor changes depending on which embedded subwidget is currently under the mouse.</para>
            <para>QWidget::sizeHint()	QGraphicsProxyWidget::sizeHint()	All size hint functionality from the embedded widget is forwarded by the proxy.</para>
            <para>QWidget::getContentsMargins()	QGraphicsProxyWidget::getContentsMargins()	Updated once by setWidget().</para>
            <para>QWidget::windowTitle	QGraphicsProxyWidget::windowTitle	Updated once by setWidget().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note: QGraphicsScene keeps the embedded widget in a special state that prevents it from disturbing other widgets (both embedded and not embedded) while the widget is embedded. In this state, the widget may differ slightly in behavior from when it is not embedded.</para>
            <para>Warning: This class is provided for convenience when bridging QWidgets and QGraphicsItems, it should not be used for high-performance scenarios.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addWidget() and QGraphicsWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsWidget class is the base class for all widget items in a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidget is an extended base item that provides extra functionality over QGraphicsItem. It is similar to QWidget in many ways:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Provides a palette, a font and a style().</para>
            <para>Has a defined geometry().</para>
            <para>Supports layouts with setLayout() and layout().</para>
            <para>Supports shortcuts and actions with grabShortcut() and insertAction()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Unlike QGraphicsItem, QGraphicsWidget is not an abstract class; you can create instances of a QGraphicsWidget without having to subclass it. This approach is useful for widgets that only serve the purpose of organizing child widgets into a layout.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidget can be used as a base item for your own custom item if you require advanced input focus handling, e.g., tab focus and activation, or layouts.</para>
            <para>Since QGraphicsWidget resembles QWidget and has similar API, it is easier to port a widget from QWidget to QGraphicsWidget, instead of QGraphicsItem.</para>
            <para>Note: QWidget-based widgets can be directly embedded into a QGraphicsScene using QGraphicsProxyWidget.</para>
            <para>Noticeable differences between QGraphicsWidget and QWidget are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidgetQWidget</para>
            <para>Coordinates and geometry are defined with qreals (doubles or floats, depending on the platform).	QWidget uses integer geometry (QPoint, QRect).</para>
            <para>The widget is already visible by default; you do not have to call show() to display the widget.	QWidget is hidden by default until you call show().</para>
            <para>A subset of widget attributes are supported.	All widget attributes are supported.</para>
            <para>A top-level item's style defaults to QGraphicsScene::style	A top-level widget's style defaults to QApplication::style</para>
            <para>Graphics View provides a custom drag and drop framework, different from QWidget.	Standard drag and drop framework.</para>
            <para>Widget items do not support modality.	Full modality support.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidget supports a subset of Qt's widget attributes, (Qt::WidgetAttribute), as shown in the table below. Any attributes not listed in this table are unsupported, or otherwise unused.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Widget AttributeUsage</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_SetLayoutDirection	Set by setLayoutDirection(), cleared by unsetLayoutDirection(). You can test this attribute to check if the widget has been explicitly assigned a layoutDirection. If the attribute is not set, the layoutDirection() is inherited.</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_RightToLeft	Toggled by setLayoutDirection(). Inherited from the parent/scene. If set, the widget's layout will order horizontally arranged widgets from right to left.</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_SetStyle	Set and cleared by setStyle(). If this attribute is set, the widget has been explicitly assigned a style. If it is unset, the widget will use the scene's or the application's style.</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_Resized	Set by setGeometry() and resize().</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_SetPalette	Set by setPalette().</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_SetFont	Set by setFont().</para>
            <para>Qt::WA_WindowPropagation	Enables propagation to window widgets.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Although QGraphicsWidget inherits from both QObject and QGraphicsItem, you should use the functions provided by QGraphicsItem, not QObject, to manage the relationships between parent and child items. These functions control the stacking order of items as well as their ownership.</para>
            <para>Note: The QObject::parent() should always return 0 for QGraphicsWidgets, but this policy is not strictly defined.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsProxyWidget, QGraphicsItem, and Widgets and Layouts.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsWidget instance. The optional parent argument is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor. The optional wFlags argument specifies the widget's window flags (e.g., whether the widget should be a window, a tool, a popup, etc).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Actions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the (possibly empty) list of this widget's actions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also insertAction(), removeAction(), QWidget::actions(), QAction::associatedWidgets(), and QAction::associatedGraphicsWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.AddAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the action action to this widget's list of actions.</para>
            <para>All QGraphicsWidgets have a list of QActions, however they can be represented graphically in many different ways. The default use of the QAction list (as returned by actions()) is to create a context QMenu.</para>
            <para>A QGraphicsWidget should only have one of each action and adding an action it already has will not cause the same action to be in the widget twice.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), insertAction(), actions(), and QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.AddActions(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QAction})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the actions actions to this widget's list of actions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), QMenu, addAction(), and QWidget::addActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.AdjustSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Adjusts the size of the widget to its effective preferred size hint.</para>
            <para>This function is called implicitly when the item is shown for the first time.</para>
            <para>See also effectiveSizeHint() and Qt::MinimumSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.</para>
            <para>The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through event.</para>
            <para>Change events include: QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange, QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange, QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange, and QEvent::ContentsRectChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Close">
            <summary>
            <para>Call this function to close the widget.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the widget was closed; otherwise returns false. This slot will first send a QCloseEvent to the widget, which may or may not accept the event. If the event was ignored, nothing happens. If the event was accepted, it will hide() the widget.</para>
            <para>If the widget has the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose attribute set it will be deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget close events. The default implementation accepts the event.</para>
            <para>See also close() and QCloseEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            <para>Handles the event. QGraphicsWidget handles the following events:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Polish	Delivered to the widget some time after it has been shown.</para>
            <para>GraphicsSceneMove	Delivered to the widget after its local position has changed.</para>
            <para>GraphicsSceneResize	Delivered to the widget after its size has changed.</para>
            <para>Show	Delivered to the widget before it has been shown.</para>
            <para>Hide	Delivered to the widget after it has been hidden.</para>
            <para>PaletteChange	Delivered to the widget after its palette has changed.</para>
            <para>FontChange	Delivered to the widget after its font has changed.</para>
            <para>EnabledChange	Delivered to the widget after its enabled state has changed.</para>
            <para>StyleChange	Delivered to the widget after its style has changed.</para>
            <para>LayoutDirectionChange	Delivered to the widget after its layout direction has changed.</para>
            <para>ContentsRectChange	Delivered to the widget after its contents margins/ contents rect has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget; returns false otherwise. If next is true, this function searches forward; if next is false, it searches backward.</para>
            <para>Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function to provide special focus handling for your widget and its subwidgets. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its current active link forward or backward, and call the base implementation only when it reaches the last or first link on the page.</para>
            <para>Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets, but only the window that contains the child widgets decides where to redirect focus. By reimplementing this function for an object, you gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets.</para>
            <para>See also focusPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.FocusWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>If this widget, a child or descendant of this widget currently has input focus, this function will return a pointer to that widget. If no descendant widget has input focus, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::focusItem() and QWidget::focusWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnGeometryChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the geometry is changed in setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.GetContentsMargins(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::getContentsMargins().</para>
            <para>Gets the widget's contents margins. The margins are stored in left, top, right and bottom, as pointers to qreals. Each argument can be omitted by passing 0.</para>
            <para>See also setContentsMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.GetWindowFrameMargins(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Gets the widget's window frame margins. The margins are stored in left, top, right and bottom as pointers to qreals. Each argument can be omitted by passing 0.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowFrameMargins() and windowFrameRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnGrabKeyboardEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::GrabKeyboard events.</para>
            <para>See also grabKeyboard() and grabMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnGrabMouseEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::GrabMouse events.</para>
            <para>See also grabMouse() and grabKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.GrabShortcut(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtCore.Qt.ShortcutContext)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given key sequence in the given context. If the context is Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut, or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut. For widgets that are not part of a window (i.e., top-level widgets and their children), Qt::WindowShortcut shortcuts apply to the scene.</para>
            <para>If the same key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets, when the key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic order, but with the ``ambiguous'' flag set to true.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not normally need to use this function; instead create QActions with the shortcut key sequences you require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar buttons), or create QShortcuts if you just need key sequences. Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you, and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also releaseShortcut(), setShortcutEnabled(), and QWidget::grabShortcut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for Hide events, is delivered after the widget has been hidden, for example, setVisible(false) has been called for the widget or one of its ancestors when the widget was previously shown.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget is hidden. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also showEvent(), QWidget::hideEvent(), and ItemVisibleChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnHoverLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnHoverMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Populates a style option object for this widget based on its current state, and stores the output in option. The default implementation populates option with the following properties.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Style Option PropertyValue</para>
            <para>state &amp; QStyle::State_Enabled	Corresponds to QGraphicsItem::isEnabled().</para>
            <para>state &amp; QStyle::State_HasFocus	Corresponds to QGraphicsItem::hasFocus().</para>
            <para>state &amp; QStyle::State_MouseOver	Corresponds to QGraphicsItem::isUnderMouse().</para>
            <para>direction	Corresponds to QGraphicsWidget::layoutDirection().</para>
            <para>rect	Corresponds to QGraphicsWidget::rect().toRect().</para>
            <para>palette	Corresponds to QGraphicsWidget::palette().</para>
            <para>fontMetrics	Corresponds to QFontMetrics(QGraphicsWidget::font()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclasses of QGraphicsWidget should call the base implementation, and then test the type of option using qstyleoption_cast&lt;&gt;() or test QStyleOption::Type before storing widget-specific options.</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> void MyGroupBoxWidget::initStyleOption(QStyleOption *option) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QGraphicsWidget::initStyleOption(option);</para>
            <para>     if (QStyleOptionGroupBox *box = qstyleoption_cast&lt;QStyleOptionGroupBox *&gt;(option)) {</para>
            <para>         // Add group box specific state.</para>
            <para>         box-&gt;flat = isFlat();</para>
            <para>         ...</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.InsertAction(QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the action action to this widget's list of actions, before the action before. It appends the action if before is 0 or before is not a valid action for this widget.</para>
            <para>A QGraphicsWidget should only have one of each action.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), addAction(), QMenu, actions(), and QWidget::insertActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.InsertActions(QtGui.QAction,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QAction})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the actions actions to this widget's list of actions, before the action before. It appends the action if before is 0 or before is not a valid action for this widget.</para>
            <para>A QGraphicsWidget can have at most one of each action.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction(), QMenu, insertAction(), and QWidget::insertActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.IsActiveWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this widget's window is in the active window, or if the widget does not have a window but is in an active scene (i.e., a scene that currently has focus).</para>
            <para>The active window is the window that either contains a child widget that currently has input focus, or that itself has input focus.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::activeWindow(), QGraphicsScene::setActiveWindow(), and isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.ItemChange(QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::itemChange().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidget uses the base implementation of this function to catch and deliver events related to state changes in the item. Because of this, it is very important that subclasses call the base implementation.</para>
            <para>change specifies the type of change, and value is the new value.</para>
            <para>For example, QGraphicsWidget uses ItemVisibleChange to deliver Show and Hide events, ItemPositionHasChanged to deliver Move events, and ItemParentChange both to deliver ParentChange events, and for managing the focus chain.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidget enables the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag by default in order to track position changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for GraphicsSceneMove events, is delivered after the widget has moved (e.g., its local position has changed).</para>
            <para>This event is only delivered when the item is moved locally. Calling setTransform() or moving any of the item's ancestors does not affect the item's local position.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget has moved. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also ItemPositionChange and ItemPositionHasChanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.PaintWindowFrame(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QGraphicsScene to draw the window frame for windows using painter, option, and widget, in local coordinates. The base implementation uses the current style to render the frame and title bar.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget to provide custom rendering of the widget's window frame.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnPolishEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This event is delivered to the item by the scene at some point after it has been constructed, but before it is shown or otherwise accessed through the scene. You can use this event handler to do last-minute initializations of the widget which require the item to be fully constructed.</para>
            <para>The base implementation does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's local rect as a QRectF. This function is equivalent to QRectF(QPointF(), size()).</para>
            <para>See also setGeometry() and resize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.ReleaseShortcut(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the shortcut with the given id from Qt's shortcut system. The widget will no longer receive QEvent::Shortcut events for the shortcut's key sequence (unless it has other shortcuts with the same key sequence).</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system removes shortcuts automatically when their parent widget is destroyed. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function. Note also that this is an expensive operation.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also grabShortcut(), setShortcutEnabled(), and QWidget::releaseShortcut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.RemoveAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the action action from this widget's list of actions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also insertAction(), actions(), insertAction(), and QWidget::removeAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for GraphicsSceneResize events, is delivered after the widget has been resized (i.e., its local size has changed). event contains both the old and the new size.</para>
            <para>This event is only delivered when the widget is resized locally; calling setTransform() on the widget or any of its ancestors or view, does not affect the widget's local size.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget has been resized. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also geometry() and setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnSceneEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsWidget's implementation of sceneEvent() simply passes event to QGraphicsWidget::event(). You can handle all events for your widget in event() or in any of the convenience functions; you should not have to reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SetAttribute(QtCore.Qt.WidgetAttribute,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If on is true, this function enables attribute; otherwise attribute is disabled.</para>
            <para>See the class documentation for QGraphicsWidget for a complete list of which attributes are supported, and what they are for.</para>
            <para>See also testAttribute() and QWidget::setAttribute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SetContentsMargins(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the widget's contents margins to left, top, right and bottom.</para>
            <para>Contents margins are used by the assigned layout to define the placement of subwidgets and layouts. Margins are particularly useful for widgets that constrain subwidgets to only a section of its own geometry. For example, a group box with a layout will place subwidgets inside its frame, but below the title.</para>
            <para>Changing a widget's contents margins will always trigger an update(), and any assigned layout will be activated automatically. The widget will then receive a ContentsRectChange event.</para>
            <para>See also getContentsMargins() and setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SetShortcutAutoRepeat(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also grabShortcut(), releaseShortcut(), and QWidget::setShortcutAutoRepeat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SetShortcutEnabled(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true, the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.</para>
            <para>Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also grabShortcut(), releaseShortcut(), and QWidget::setShortcutEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SetTabOrder(QtGui.QGraphicsWidget,QtGui.QGraphicsWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the second widget around the ring of focus widgets so that keyboard focus moves from the first widget to the second widget when the Tab key is pressed.</para>
            <para>Note that since the tab order of the second widget is changed, you should order a chain like this:</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(c, d); // a to b to c to d</para>
            <para>not like this:</para>
            <para> // WRONG</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(c, d); // c to d</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b AND c to d</para>
            <para> setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c, but not c to d</para>
            <para>If first is 0, this indicates that second should be the first widget to receive input focus should the scene gain Tab focus (i.e., the user hits Tab so that focus passes into the scene). If second is 0, this indicates that first should be the first widget to gain focus if the scene gained BackTab focus.</para>
            <para>By default, tab order is defined implicitly using widget creation order.</para>
            <para>See also focusPolicy and Keyboard Focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SetWindowFrameMargins(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the widget's window frame margins to left, top, right and bottom. The default frame margins are provided by the style, and they depend on the current window flags.</para>
            <para>If you would like to draw your own window decoration, you can set your own frame margins to override the default margins.</para>
            <para>See also unsetWindowFrameMargins(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and windowFrameRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for Show events, is delivered before the widget has been shown, for example, setVisible(true) has been called for the widget or one of its ancestors when the widget was previously hidden.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget is shown. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.</para>
            <para>See also hideEvent(), QWidget::showEvent(), and ItemVisibleChange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.TestAttribute(QtCore.Qt.WidgetAttribute)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if attribute is enabled for this widget; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setAttribute().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnUngrabKeyboardEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::UngrabKeyboard events.</para>
            <para>See also ungrabKeyboard() and ungrabMouse().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnUngrabMouseEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::UngrabMouse events.</para>
            <para>See also ungrabMouse() and ungrabKeyboard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.UnsetWindowFrameMargins">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the window frame margins to the default value, provided by the style.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowFrameMargins(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and windowFrameRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.UpdateGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::updateGeometry().</para>
            <para>If this widget is currently managed by a layout, this function notifies the layout that the widget's size hints have changed and the layout may need to resize and reposition the widget accordingly.</para>
            <para>Call this function if the widget's sizeHint() has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.OnWindowFrameEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event, receives events for the window frame if this widget is a window. Its base implementation provides support for default window frame interaction such as moving, resizing, etc.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this handler in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget to provide your own custom window frame interaction support.</para>
            <para>Returns true if event has been recognized and processed; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.WindowFrameGeometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget's geometry in parent coordinates including any window frame.</para>
            <para>See also windowFrameRect(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and setWindowFrameMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.WindowFrameRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget's local rect including any window frame.</para>
            <para>See also windowFrameGeometry(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and setWindowFrameMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.WindowFrameSectionAt(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window frame section at position pos, or Qt::NoSection if there is no window frame section at this position.</para>
            <para>This function is used in QGraphicsWidget's base implementation for window frame interaction.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this function if you want to customize how a window can be interactively moved or resized. For instance, if you only want to allow a window to be resized by the bottom right corner, you can reimplement this function to return Qt::NoSection for all sections except Qt::BottomRightSection.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also windowFrameEvent(), paintWindowFrame(), and windowFrameGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.WindowType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widgets window type.</para>
            <para>See also windowFlags(), isWindow(), and isPanel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsWidget instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.GeometryChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the geometry is changed in setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the widget's style. If this widget does not have any explicitly assigned style, the scene's style is returned instead. In turn, if the scene does not have any assigned style, this function returns QApplication::style().</para>
            <para>Sets the widget's style to style. QGraphicsWidget does not take ownership of style.</para>
            <para>If no style is assigned, or style is 0, the widget will use QGraphicsScene::style() (if this has been set). Otherwise the widget will use QApplication::style().</para>
            <para>This function sets the Qt::WA_SetStyle attribute if style is not 0; otherwise it clears the attribute.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's palette.</para>
            <para>This property provides the widget's palette. The palette provides colors and brushes for color groups (e.g., QPalette::Button) and states (e.g., QPalette::Inactive), loosely defining the general look of the widget and its children.</para>
            <para>QPalette consists of color groups that have been explicitly defined, and groups that are implicitly inherited from the widget's parent. Because of this, palette() can return a different palette than what has been set with setPalette(). This scheme allows you to define single entries in a palette without affecting the palette's inherited entries.</para>
            <para>When a widget's palette changes, it resolves its entries against its parent widget, or if it doesn't have a parent widget, it resolves against the scene. It then sends itself a PaletteChange event, and notifies all its descendants so they can resolve their palettes as well.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains the application's default palette.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widgets' font.</para>
            <para>This property provides the widget's font.</para>
            <para>QFont consists of font properties that have been explicitly defined and properties implicitly inherited from the widget's parent. Hence, font() can return a different font compared to the one set with setFont(). This scheme allows you to define single entries in a font without affecting the font's inherited entries.</para>
            <para>When a widget's font changes, it resolves its entries against its parent widget. If the widget does not have a parent widget, it resolves its entries against the scene. The widget then sends itself a FontChange event and notifies all its descendants so that they can resolve their fonts as well.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains the application's default font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the layout direction for this widget.</para>
            <para>This property modifies this widget's and all of its descendants' Qt::WA_RightToLeft attribute. It also sets this widget's Qt::WA_SetLayoutDirection attribute.</para>
            <para>The widget's layout direction determines the order in which the layout manager horizontally arranges subwidgets of this widget. The default value depends on the language and locale of the application, and is typically in the same direction as words are read and written. With Qt::LeftToRight, the layout starts placing subwidgets from the left side of this widget towards the right. Qt::RightToLeft does the opposite - the layout will place widgets starting from the right edge moving towards the left.</para>
            <para>Subwidgets inherit their layout direction from the parent. Top-level widget items inherit their layout direction from QGraphicsScene::layoutDirection. If you change a widget's layout direction by calling setLayoutDirection(), the widget will send itself a LayoutDirectionChange event, and then propagate the new layout direction to all its descendants.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of the widget.</para>
            <para>Calling resize() resizes the widget to a size bounded by minimumSize() and maximumSize(). This property only affects the widget's width and height (e.g., its right and bottom edges); the widget's position and top-left corner remains unaffected.</para>
            <para>Resizing a widget triggers the widget to immediately receive a GraphicsSceneResize event with the widget's old and new size. If the widget has a layout assigned when this event arrives, the layout will be activated and it will automatically update any child widgets's geometry.</para>
            <para>This property does not affect any layout of the parent widget. If the widget itself is managed by a parent layout; e.g., it has a parent widget with a layout assigned, that layout will not activate.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a size with zero width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.FocusPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>The focus policy is Qt::TabFocus if the widget accepts keyboard focus by tabbing, Qt::ClickFocus if the widget accepts focus by clicking, Qt::StrongFocus if it accepts both, and Qt::NoFocus (the default) if it does not accept focus at all.</para>
            <para>You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's constructor. For instance, the QLineEdit constructor calls setFocusPolicy(Qt::StrongFocus).</para>
            <para>If you enable a focus policy (i.e., not Qt::NoFocus), QGraphicsWidget will automatically enable the ItemIsFocusable flag. Setting Qt::NoFocus on a widget will clear the ItemIsFocusable flag. If the widget currently has keyboard focus, the widget will automatically lose focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.WindowFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the widget's window flags.</para>
            <para>Window flags are a combination of a window type (e.g., Qt::Dialog) and several flags giving hints on the behavior of the window. The behavior is platform-dependent.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains no window flags.</para>
            <para>Windows are panels. If you set the Qt::Window flag, the ItemIsPanel flag will be set automatically. If you clear the Qt::Window flag, the ItemIsPanel flag is also cleared. Note that the ItemIsPanel flag can be set independently of Qt::Window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.WindowTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds this property holds the window title (caption).</para>
            <para>This property is only used for windows.</para>
            <para>By default, if no title has been set, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsWidget.AutoFillBackground">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the widget background is filled automatically.</para>
            <para>If enabled, this property will cause Qt to fill the background of the widget before invoking the paint() method. The color used is defined by the QPalette::Window color role from the widget's palette.</para>
            <para>In addition, Windows are always filled with QPalette::Window, unless the WA_OpaquePaintEvent or WA_NoSystemBackground attributes are set.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsProxy widget. parent and wFlags are passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.CreateProxyForChildWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a proxy widget for the given child of the widget contained in this proxy.</para>
            <para>This function makes it possible to acquire proxies for non top-level widgets. For instance, you can embed a dialog, and then transform only one of its widgets.</para>
            <para>If the widget is already embedded, return the existing proxy widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also newProxyWidget() and QGraphicsScene::addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnGrabMouseEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::grabMouseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnHoverEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnHoverLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnHoverMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.ItemChange(QtGui.QGraphicsItem.GraphicsItemChange,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::itemChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.NewProxyWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a proxy widget for the given child of the widget contained in this proxy.</para>
            <para>You should not call this function directly; use QGraphicsProxyWidget::createProxyForChildWidget() instead.</para>
            <para>This function is a fake virtual slot that you can reimplement in your subclass in order to control how new proxy widgets are created. The default implementation returns a proxy created with the QGraphicsProxyWidget() constructor with this proxy widget as the parent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also createProxyForChildWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.SizeHint(QtCore.Qt.SizeHint,QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.SubWidgetRect(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle for widget, which must be a descendant of widget(), or widget() itself, in this proxy item's local coordinates.</para>
            <para>If no widget is embedded, widget is 0, or widget is not a descendant of the embedded widget, this function returns an empty QRectF.</para>
            <para>See also widget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnUngrabMouseEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::ungrabMouseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the proxy widget and any embedded widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsProxyWidget.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the embedded widget.</para>
            <para>Embeds widget into this proxy widget. The embedded widget must reside exclusively either inside or outside of Graphics View. You cannot embed a widget as long as it is is visible elsewhere in the UI, at the same time.</para>
            <para>widget must be a top-level widget whose parent is 0.</para>
            <para>When the widget is embedded, its state (e.g., visible, enabled, geometry, size hints) is copied into the proxy widget. If the embedded widget is explicitly hidden or disabled, the proxy widget will become explicitly hidden or disabled after embedding is complete. The class documentation has a full overview over the shared state.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsProxyWidget's window flags determine whether the widget, after embedding, will be given window decorations or not.</para>
            <para>After this function returns, QGraphicsProxyWidget will keep its state synchronized with that of widget whenever possible.</para>
            <para>If a widget is already embedded by this proxy when this function is called, that widget will first be automatically unembedded. Passing 0 for the widget argument will only unembed the widget, and the ownership of the currently embedded widget will be passed on to the caller. Every child widget that are embedded will also be embedded and their proxy widget destroyed.</para>
            <para>Note that widgets with the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen widget attribute set and widgets that wrap an external application or controller cannot be embedded. Examples are QGLWidget and QAxWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsRectItem class provides a rectangle item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's rectangle, pass a QRectF to QGraphicsRectItem's constructor, or call the setRect() function. The rect() function returns the current rectangle.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsRectItem uses the rectangle and the pen width to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). The paint() function draws the rectangle using the item's associated pen and brush, which you can set by calling the setPen() and setBrush() functions.</para>
            <para>Note: The rendering of invalid rectangles, such as those with negative widths or heights, is undefined. If you cannot be sure that you are using valid rectangles (for example, if you are creating rectangles using data from an unreliable source) then you should use QRectF::normalized() to create normalized rectangles, and use those instead.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsLineItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsRectItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.#ctor(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsRectItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsRectItem. parent is passed to QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.SetRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's rectangle to be the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also rect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsRectItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsRectItem.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's rectangle.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's rectangle to be the given rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsRotation class provides a rotation transformation around a given axis.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can provide the desired axis by assigning a QVector3D to the axis property or by passing a member if Qt::Axis to the setAxis convenience function. By default the axis is (0, 0, 1) i.e., rotation around the Z axis.</para>
            <para>The angle property, which is provided by QGraphicsRotation, now describes the number of degrees to rotate around this axis.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsRotation provides certain parameters to help control how the rotation should be applied.</para>
            <para>The origin is the point that the item is rotated around (i.e., it stays fixed relative to the parent as the rest of the item is rotated). By default the origin is QPointF(0, 0).</para>
            <para>The angle property provides the number of degrees to rotate the item clockwise around the origin. This value also be negative, indicating a counter-clockwise rotation. For animation purposes it may also be useful to provide rotation angles exceeding (-360, 360) degrees, for instance to animate how an item rotates several times.</para>
            <para>Note: the final rotation is the combined effect of a rotation in 3D space followed by a projection back to 2D. If several rotations are performed in succession, they will not behave as expected unless they were all around the Z axis.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsTransform, QGraphicsItem::setRotation(), and QTransform::rotate().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsTransform">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsTransform class is an abstract base class for building advanced transformations on QGraphicsItems.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>As an alternative to QGraphicsItem::transform, QGraphicsTransform lets you create and control advanced transformations that can be configured independently using specialized properties.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsItem allows you to assign any number of QGraphicsTransform instances to one QGraphicsItem. Each QGraphicsTransform is applied in order, one at a time, to the QGraphicsItem it's assigned to.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsTransform is particularly useful for animations. Whereas QGraphicsItem::setTransform() lets you assign any transform directly to an item, there is no direct way to interpolate between two different transformations (e.g., when transitioning between two states, each for which the item has a different arbitrary transform assigned). Using QGraphicsTransform you can interpolate the property values of each independent transformation. The resulting operation is then combined into a single transform which is applied to QGraphicsItem.</para>
            <para>Transformations are computed in true 3D space using QMatrix4x4. When the transformation is applied to a QGraphicsItem, it will be projected back to a 2D QTransform. When multiple QGraphicsTransform objects are applied to a QGraphicsItem, all of the transformations are computed in true 3D space, with the projection back to 2D only occurring after the last QGraphicsTransform is applied. The exception to this is QGraphicsRotation, which projects back to 2D after each rotation to preserve the perspective effect around the X and Y axes.</para>
            <para>If you want to create your own configurable transformation, you can create a subclass of QGraphicsTransform (or any or the existing subclasses), and reimplement the pure virtual applyTo() function, which takes a pointer to a QMatrix4x4. Each operation you would like to apply should be exposed as properties (e.g., customTransform-&amp;gt;setVerticalShear(2.5)). Inside you reimplementation of applyTo(), you can modify the provided transform respectively.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsTransform can be used together with QGraphicsItem::setTransform(), QGraphicsItem::setRotation(), and QGraphicsItem::setScale().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::transform(), QGraphicsScale, and QGraphicsRotation.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTransform.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsTransform with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTransform.ApplyTo(QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>This pure virtual method has to be reimplemented in derived classes.</para>
            <para>It applies this transformation to matrix.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::transform() and QMatrix4x4::toTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTransform.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>Notifies that this transform operation has changed its parameters in such a way that applyTo() will return a different result than before.</para>
            <para>When implementing you own custom graphics transform, you must call this function every time you change a parameter, to let QGraphicsItem know that its transformation needs to be updated.</para>
            <para>See also applyTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTransform.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the graphics transform.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGraphicsRotation with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.OnAngleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the angle has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::angle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.ApplyTo(QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsTransform::applyTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.OnAxisChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the axis of the object changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.OnOriginChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the origin has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the graphics rotation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.OriginChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the origin has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.AngleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the angle has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::angle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.AxisChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the axis of the object changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.Origin">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the origin of the rotation in 3D space.</para>
            <para>All rotations will be done relative to this point (i.e., this point will stay fixed, relative to the parent, when the item is rotated).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.Angle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the angle for clockwise rotation, in degrees.</para>
            <para>The angle can be any real number; the default value is 0.0. A value of 180 will rotate 180 degrees, clockwise. If you provide a negative number, the item will be rotated counter-clockwise. Normally the rotation angle will be in the range (-360, 360), but you can also provide numbers outside of this range (e.g., a angle of 370 degrees gives the same result as 10 degrees). Setting the angle to NaN results in no rotation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsRotation.Axis">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds a rotation axis, specified by a vector in 3D space.</para>
            <para>This can be any axis in 3D space. By default the axis is (0, 0, 1), which is aligned with the Z axis. If you provide another axis, QGraphicsRotation will provide a transformation that rotates around this axis. For example, if you would like to rotate an item around its X axis, you could pass (1, 0, 0) as the axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsScale">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsScale class provides a scale transformation.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene provides certain parameters to help control how the scale should be applied.</para>
            <para>The origin is the point that the item is scaled from (i.e., it stays fixed relative to the parent as the rest of the item grows). By default the origin is QPointF(0, 0).</para>
            <para>The parameters xScale, yScale, and zScale describe the scale factors to apply in horizontal, vertical, and depth directions. They can take on any value, including 0 (to collapse the item to a point) or negative value. A negative xScale value will mirror the item horizontally. A negative yScale value will flip the item vertically. A negative zScale will flip the item end for end.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsTransform, QGraphicsItem::setScale(), and QTransform::scale().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QGraphicsScale object with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.ApplyTo(QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsTransform::applyTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.OnOriginChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>QGraphicsScale emits this signal when its origin changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScale::origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.OnScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the xScale, yScale, or zScale of the object changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScale::xScale, QGraphicsScale::yScale, and QGraphicsScale::zScale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.xScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the xScale property changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.yScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the yScale property changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.zScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the zScale property changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the graphics scale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.OriginChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>QGraphicsScale emits this signal when its origin changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScale::origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.ScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the xScale, yScale, or zScale of the object changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScale::xScale, QGraphicsScale::yScale, and QGraphicsScale::zScale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.Origin">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the origin of the scale in 3D space.</para>
            <para>All scaling will be done relative to this point (i.e., this point will stay fixed, relative to the parent, when the item is scaled).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.XScale">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the horizontal scale factor.</para>
            <para>The scale factor can be any real number; the default value is 1.0. If you set the factor to 0.0, the item will be collapsed to a single point. If you provide a negative value, the item will be mirrored horizontally around its origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.YScale">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the vertical scale factor.</para>
            <para>The scale factor can be any real number; the default value is 1.0. If you set the factor to 0.0, the item will be collapsed to a single point. If you provide a negative value, the item will be flipped vertically around its origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScale.ZScale">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the depth scale factor.</para>
            <para>The scale factor can be any real number; the default value is 1.0. If you set the factor to 0.0, the item will be collapsed to a single point. If you provide a negative value, the item will be flipped end for end around its origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsScene">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsScene class provides a surface for managing a large number of 2D graphical items.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The class serves as a container for QGraphicsItems. It is used together with QGraphicsView for visualizing graphical items, such as lines, rectangles, text, or even custom items, on a 2D surface. QGraphicsScene is part of the Graphics View Framework.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene also provides functionality that lets you efficiently determine both the location of items, and for determining what items are visible within an arbitrary area on the scene. With the QGraphicsView widget, you can either visualize the whole scene, or zoom in and view only parts of the scene.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addText(&amp;quot;Hello, world!&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsScene has no visual appearance of its own; it only manages the items. You need to create a QGraphicsView widget to visualize the scene.</para>
            <para>To add items to a scene, you start off by constructing a QGraphicsScene object. Then, you have two options: either add your existing QGraphicsItem objects by calling addItem(), or you can call one of the convenience functions addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addPolygon(), addRect(), or addText(), which all return a pointer to the newly added item. The dimensions of the items added with these functions are relative to the item's coordinate system, and the items position is initialized to (0, 0) in the scene.</para>
            <para>You can then visualize the scene using QGraphicsView. When the scene changes, (e.g., when an item moves or is transformed) QGraphicsScene emits the changed() signal. To remove an item, call removeItem().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene uses an indexing algorithm to manage the location of items efficiently. By default, a BSP (Binary Space Partitioning) tree is used; an algorithm suitable for large scenes where most items remain static (i.e., do not move around). You can choose to disable this index by calling setItemIndexMethod(). For more information about the available indexing algorithms, see the itemIndexMethod property.</para>
            <para>The scene's bounding rect is set by calling setSceneRect(). Items can be placed at any position on the scene, and the size of the scene is by default unlimited. The scene rect is used only for internal bookkeeping, maintaining the scene's item index. If the scene rect is unset, QGraphicsScene will use the bounding area of all items, as returned by itemsBoundingRect(), as the scene rect. However, itemsBoundingRect() is a relatively time consuming function, as it operates by collecting positional information for every item on the scene. Because of this, you should always set the scene rect when operating on large scenes.</para>
            <para>One of QGraphicsScene's greatest strengths is its ability to efficiently determine the location of items. Even with millions of items on the scene, the items() functions can determine the location of an item within few milliseconds. There are several overloads to items(): one that finds items at a certain position, one that finds items inside or intersecting with a polygon or a rectangle, and more. The list of returned items is sorted by stacking order, with the topmost item being the first item in the list. For convenience, there is also an itemAt() function that returns the topmost item at a given position.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene maintains selection information for the scene. To select items, call setSelectionArea(), and to clear the current selection, call clearSelection(). Call selectedItems() to get the list of all selected items.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Event Handling and Propagation</para>
            <para>Another responsibility that QGraphicsScene has, is to propagate events from QGraphicsView. To send an event to a scene, you construct an event that inherits QEvent, and then send it using, for example, QApplication::sendEvent(). event() is responsible for dispatching the event to the individual items. Some common events are handled by convenience event handlers. For example, key press events are handled by keyPressEvent(), and mouse press events are handled by mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>Key events are delivered to the focus item. To set the focus item, you can either call setFocusItem(), passing an item that accepts focus, or the item itself can call QGraphicsItem::setFocus(). Call focusItem() to get the current focus item. For compatibility with widgets, the scene also maintains its own focus information. By default, the scene does not have focus, and all key events are discarded. If setFocus() is called, or if an item on the scene gains focus, the scene automatically gains focus. If the scene has focus, hasFocus() will return true, and key events will be forwarded to the focus item, if any. If the scene loses focus, (i.e., someone calls clearFocus()) while an item has focus, the scene will maintain its item focus information, and once the scene regains focus, it will make sure the last focus item regains focus.</para>
            <para>For mouse-over effects, QGraphicsScene dispatches hover events. If an item accepts hover events (see QGraphicsItem::acceptHoverEvents()), it will receive a GraphicsSceneHoverEnter event when the mouse enters its area. As the mouse continues moving inside the item's area, QGraphicsScene will send it GraphicsSceneHoverMove events. When the mouse leaves the item's area, the item will receive a GraphicsSceneHoverLeave event.</para>
            <para>All mouse events are delivered to the current mouse grabber item. An item becomes the scene's mouse grabber if it accepts mouse events (see QGraphicsItem::acceptedMouseButtons()) and it receives a mouse press. It stays the mouse grabber until it receives a mouse release when no other mouse buttons are pressed. You can call mouseGrabberItem() to determine what item is currently grabbing the mouse.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem and QGraphicsView.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.#ctor(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsScene object, using sceneRect for its scene rectangle. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also sceneRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddEllipse(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddEllipse(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddEllipse(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddEllipse(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddEllipse(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddEllipse(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds or moves the item and all its childen to this scene. This scene takes ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>If the item is already in a different scene, it will first be removed from its old scene, and then added to this scene as a top-level.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene will send ItemSceneChange notifications to item while it is added to the scene. If item does not currently belong to a scene, only one notification is sent. If it does belong to scene already (i.e., it is moved to this scene), QGraphicsScene will send an addition notification as the item is removed from its previous scene.</para>
            <para>If the item is a panel, the scene is active, and there is no active panel in the scene, then the item will be activated.</para>
            <para>See also removeItem(), addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addWidget(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddLine(QtCore.QLineF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddLine(QtCore.QLineF,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddLine(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddLine(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPath(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a path item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the path is defined by path, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPath(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a path item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the path is defined by path, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPath(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a path item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the path is defined by path, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPixmap(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a pixmap item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The pixmap is defined by pixmap.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPolygon(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a polygon item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The polygon is defined by polygon, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPolygon(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a polygon item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The polygon is defined by polygon, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddPolygon(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a polygon item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The polygon is defined by polygon, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QPen,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.</para>
            <para>Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddSimpleText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a QGraphicsSimpleTextItem to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.</para>
            <para>The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddSimpleText(System.String,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a QGraphicsSimpleTextItem to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.</para>
            <para>The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a text item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.</para>
            <para>The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddText(System.String,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and adds a text item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.</para>
            <para>The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new QGraphicsProxyWidget for widget, adds it to the scene, and returns a pointer to the proxy. wFlags set the default window flags for the embedding proxy widget.</para>
            <para>The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.</para>
            <para>Note that widgets with the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen widget attribute set and widgets that wrap an external application or controller are not supported. Examples are QGLWidget and QAxWidget.</para>
            <para>See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addSimpleText(), and addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Advance">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot advances the scene by one step, by calling QGraphicsItem::advance() for all items on the scene. This is done in two phases: in the first phase, all items are notified that the scene is about to change, and in the second phase all items are notified that they can move. In the first phase, QGraphicsItem::advance() is called passing a value of 0 as an argument, and 1 is passed in the second phase.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::advance(), QGraphicsItemAnimation, and QTimeLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnChanged(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QRectF})">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene when control reaches the event loop, if the scene content changes. The region parameter contains a list of scene rectangles that indicate the area that has been changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::updateScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes and deletes all items from the scene, but otherwise leaves the state of the scene unchanged.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ClearFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears focus from the scene. If any item has focus when this function is called, it will lose focus, and regain focus again once the scene regains focus.</para>
            <para>A scene that does not have focus ignores key events.</para>
            <para>See also hasFocus(), setFocus(), and setFocusItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ClearSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the current selection.</para>
            <para>See also setSelectionArea() and selectedItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.CollidingItems(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items that collide with item. Collisions are determined by calling QGraphicsItem::collidesWithItem(); the collision detection is determined by mode. By default, all items whose shape intersects item or is contained inside item's shape are returned.</para>
            <para>The items are returned in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the list is the uppermost item, and the last item is the lowermost item).</para>
            <para>See also items(), itemAt(), QGraphicsItem::collidesWithItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event contextMenuEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive context menu events. The default implementation forwards the event to the topmost item that accepts context menu events at the position of the event. If no items accept context menu events at this position, the event is ignored.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.CreateItemGroup(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.IQGraphicsItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Groups all items in items into a new QGraphicsItemGroup, and returns a pointer to the group. The group is created with the common ancestor of items as its parent, and with position (0, 0). The items are all reparented to the group, and their positions and transformations are mapped to the group. If items is empty, this function will return an empty top-level QGraphicsItemGroup.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene has ownership of the group item; you do not need to delete it. To dismantle (ungroup) a group, call destroyItemGroup().</para>
            <para>See also destroyItemGroup() and QGraphicsItemGroup::addToGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.DestroyItemGroup(QtGui.QGraphicsItemGroup)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reparents all items in group to group's parent item, then removes group from the scene, and finally deletes it. The items' positions and transformations are mapped from the group to the group's parent.</para>
            <para>See also createItemGroup() and QGraphicsItemGroup::removeFromGroup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag enter events for the scene.</para>
            <para>The default implementation accepts the event and prepares the scene to accept drag move events.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), and dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag leave events for the scene.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::dragLeaveEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag move events for the scene.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::dragMoveEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), and dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.DrawBackground(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the background of the scene using painter, before any items and the foreground are drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom background for the scene.</para>
            <para>All painting is done in scene coordinates. The rect parameter is the exposed rectangle.</para>
            <para>If all you want is to define a color, texture, or gradient for the background, you can call setBackgroundBrush() instead.</para>
            <para>See also drawForeground() and drawItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.DrawForeground(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the foreground of the scene using painter, after the background and all items have been drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom foreground for the scene.</para>
            <para>All painting is done in scene coordinates. The rect parameter is the exposed rectangle.</para>
            <para>If all you want is to define a color, texture or gradient for the foreground, you can call setForegroundBrush() instead.</para>
            <para>See also drawBackground() and drawItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.DrawItems(QtGui.QPainter,System.Int32,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Paints the given items using the provided painter, after the background has been drawn, and before the foreground has been drawn. All painting is done in scene coordinates. Before drawing each item, the painter must be transformed using QGraphicsItem::sceneTransform().</para>
            <para>The options parameter is the list of style option objects for each item in items. The numItems parameter is the number of items in items and options in options. The widget parameter is optional; if specified, it should point to the widget that is being painted on.</para>
            <para>The default implementation prepares the painter matrix, and calls QGraphicsItem::paint() on all items. Reimplement this function to provide custom painting of all items for the scene; gaining complete control over how each item is drawn. In some cases this can increase drawing performance significantly.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void CustomScene::drawItems(QPainter *painter, int numItems,</para>
            <para>                             QGraphicsItem *items[],</para>
            <para>                             const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem options[],</para>
            <para>                             QWidget *widget)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     for (int i = 0; i &lt; numItems; ++i) {</para>
            <para>          // Draw the item</para>
            <para>          painter-&gt;save();</para>
            <para>          painter-&gt;setMatrix(items[i]-&gt;sceneMatrix(), true);</para>
            <para>          items[i]-&gt;paint(painter, &amp;options[i], widget);</para>
            <para>          painter-&gt;restore();</para>
            <para>      }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.6, this function is not called anymore unless the QGraphicsView::IndirectPainting flag is given as an Optimization flag.</para>
            <para>See also drawBackground() and drawForeground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drop events for the scene.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::dropEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            <para>Processes the event event, and dispatches it to the respective event handlers.</para>
            <para>In addition to calling the convenience event handlers, this function is responsible for converting mouse move events to hover events for when there is no mouse grabber item. Hover events are delivered directly to items; there is no convenience function for them.</para>
            <para>Unlike QWidget, QGraphicsScene does not have the convenience functions enterEvent() and leaveEvent(). Use this function to obtain those events instead.</para>
            <para>See also contextMenuEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), focusInEvent(), and focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene filters QApplication's events to detect palette and font changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event focusEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive focus in events.</para>
            <para>The default implementation sets focus on the scene, and then on the last focus item.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it cannot. If next is true, this function searches forward; if next is false, it searches backward.</para>
            <para>You can reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsScene to provide fine-grained control over how tab focus passes inside your scene. The default implementation is based on the tab focus chain defined by QGraphicsWidget::setTabOrder().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event focusEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive focus out events.</para>
            <para>The default implementation removes focus from any focus item, then removes focus from the scene.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.HasFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the scene has focus; otherwise returns false. If the scene has focus, it will will forward key events from QKeyEvent to any item that has focus.</para>
            <para>See also setFocus() and setFocusItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling sceneRect().height().</para>
            <para>See also width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnHelpEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event helpEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive help events. The events are of type QEvent::ToolTip, which are created when a tooltip is requested.</para>
            <para>The default implementation shows the tooltip of the topmost item, i.e., the item with the highest z-value, at the mouse cursor position. If no item has a tooltip set, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::toolTip() and QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive input method events for the scene.</para>
            <para>The default implementation forwards the event to the focusItem(). If no item currently has focus or the current focus item does not accept input methods, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>This method is used by input methods to query a set of properties of the scene to be able to support complex input method operations as support for surrounding text and reconversions.</para>
            <para>The query parameter specifies which property is queried.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.</para>
            <para>You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).</para>
            <para>     return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &amp;pixmap)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.</para>
            <para>     if (x &gt;= 0 &amp;&amp; x &lt; numTilesH &amp;&amp; y &gt;= 0 &amp;&amp; y &lt; numTilesV) {</para>
            <para>         tiles[y][x] = pixmap;</para>
            <para>         invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &amp;exposed)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.</para>
            <para>     for (int y = 0; y &lt; numTilesV; ++y) {</para>
            <para>         for (int x = 0; x &lt; numTilesH; ++x) {</para>
            <para>             QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);</para>
            <para>             if (exposed.intersects(rect))</para>
            <para>                 painter-&gt;drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Invalidate(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer)">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.</para>
            <para>You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).</para>
            <para>     return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &amp;pixmap)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.</para>
            <para>     if (x &gt;= 0 &amp;&amp; x &lt; numTilesH &amp;&amp; y &gt;= 0 &amp;&amp; y &lt; numTilesV) {</para>
            <para>         tiles[y][x] = pixmap;</para>
            <para>         invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &amp;exposed)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.</para>
            <para>     for (int y = 0; y &lt; numTilesV; ++y) {</para>
            <para>         for (int x = 0; x &lt; numTilesH; ++x) {</para>
            <para>             QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);</para>
            <para>             if (exposed.intersects(rect))</para>
            <para>                 painter-&gt;drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Invalidate(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer)">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.</para>
            <para>You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).</para>
            <para>     return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &amp;pixmap)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.</para>
            <para>     if (x &gt;= 0 &amp;&amp; x &lt; numTilesH &amp;&amp; y &gt;= 0 &amp;&amp; y &lt; numTilesV) {</para>
            <para>         tiles[y][x] = pixmap;</para>
            <para>         invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &amp;exposed)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.</para>
            <para>     for (int y = 0; y &lt; numTilesV; ++y) {</para>
            <para>         for (int x = 0; x &lt; numTilesH; ++x) {</para>
            <para>             QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);</para>
            <para>             if (exposed.intersects(rect))</para>
            <para>                 painter-&gt;drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.IsActive">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the scene is active (e.g., it's viewed by at least one QGraphicsView that is active); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::isActive() and QWidget::isActiveWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemAt(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the topmost visible item at the specified position, or 0 if there are no items at this position.</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also items(), collidingItems(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemAt(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the topmost visible item at the specified position, or 0 if there are no items at this position.</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also items(), collidingItems(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemAt(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the topmost visible item at the specified position, or 0 if there are no items at this position.</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also items(), collidingItems(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemAt(System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the topmost visible item at the specified position, or 0 if there are no items at this position.</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also items(), collidingItems(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an ordered list of all items on the scene. order decides the stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Items(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all items in the scene in descending stacking order.</para>
            <para>See also addItem(), removeItem(), and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemsBoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Calculates and returns the bounding rect of all items on the scene. This function works by iterating over all items, and because if this, it can be slow for large scenes.</para>
            <para>See also sceneRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event keyEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keypress events. The default implementation forwards the event to current focus item.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent() and focusItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event keyEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events. The default implementation forwards the event to current focus item.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent() and focusItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse doubleclick events for the scene.</para>
            <para>If someone doubleclicks on the scene, the scene will first receive a mouse press event, followed by a release event (i.e., a click), then a doubleclick event, and finally a release event. If the doubleclick event is delivered to a different item than the one that received the first press and release, it will be delivered as a press event. However, tripleclick events are not delivered as doubleclick events in this case.</para>
            <para>The default implementation is similar to mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent(), and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.MouseGrabberItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current mouse grabber item, or 0 if no item is currently grabbing the mouse. The mouse grabber item is the item that receives all mouse events sent to the scene.</para>
            <para>An item becomes a mouse grabber when it receives and accepts a mouse press event, and it stays the mouse grabber until either of the following events occur:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the item receives a mouse release event when there are no other buttons pressed, it loses the mouse grab.</para>
            <para>If the item becomes invisible (i.e., someone calls item-&gt;setVisible(false)), or if it becomes disabled (i.e., someone calls item-&gt;setEnabled(false)), it loses the mouse grab.</para>
            <para>If the item is removed from the scene, it loses the mouse grab.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the item loses its mouse grab, the scene will ignore all mouse events until a new item grabs the mouse (i.e., until a new item receives a mouse press event).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the scene.</para>
            <para>The default implementation depends on the mouse grabber state. If there is a mouse grabber item, the event is sent to the mouse grabber. If there are any items that accept hover events at the current position, the event is translated into a hover event and accepted; otherwise it's ignored.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the scene.</para>
            <para>The default implementation depends on the state of the scene. If there is a mouse grabber item, then the event is sent to the mouse grabber. Otherwise, it is forwarded to the topmost item that accepts mouse events at the scene position from the event, and that item promptly becomes the mouse grabber item.</para>
            <para>If there is no item at the given position on the scene, the selection area is reset, any focus item loses its input focus, and the event is then ignored.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent() and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the scene.</para>
            <para>The default implementation depends on the mouse grabber state. If there is no mouse grabber, the event is ignored. Otherwise, if there is a mouse grabber item, the event is sent to the mouse grabber. If this mouse release represents the last pressed button on the mouse, the mouse grabber item then loses the mouse grab.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.RemoveItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item item and all its children from the scene. The ownership of item is passed on to the caller (i.e., QGraphicsScene will no longer delete item when destroyed).</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Render(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(...</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);</para>
            <para> printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(&amp;printer);</para>
            <para> scene.render(&amp;painter);</para>
            <para>If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.</para>
            <para>The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::render().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Render(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(...</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);</para>
            <para> printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(&amp;printer);</para>
            <para> scene.render(&amp;painter);</para>
            <para>If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.</para>
            <para>The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::render().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Render(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(...</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);</para>
            <para> printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(&amp;printer);</para>
            <para> scene.render(&amp;painter);</para>
            <para>If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.</para>
            <para>The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::render().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnSceneRectChanged(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the scene rect changes. The rect parameter is the new scene rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::updateSceneRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SelectedItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all currently selected items. The items are returned in no particular order.</para>
            <para>See also setSelectionArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the selection changes. You can call selectedItems() to get the new list of selected items.</para>
            <para>The selection changes whenever an item is selected or unselected, a selection area is set, cleared or otherwise changed, if a preselected item is added to the scene, or if a selected item is removed from the scene.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene emits this signal only once for group selection operations. For example, if you set a selection area, select or unselect a QGraphicsItemGroup, or if you add or remove from the scene a parent item that contains several selected items, selectionChanged() is emitted only once after the operation has completed (instead of once for each item).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setSelectionArea(), selectedItems(), and QGraphicsItem::setSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnSendEvent(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sends event event to item item through possible event filters.</para>
            <para>The event is sent only if the item is enabled.</para>
            <para>Returns false if the event was filtered or if the item is disabled. Otherwise returns the value that was returned from the event handler.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent() and QGraphicsItem::sceneEventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SetFocus(QtCore.Qt.FocusReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets focus on the scene by sending a QFocusEvent to the scene, passing focusReason as the reason. If the scene regains focus after having previously lost it while an item had focus, the last focus item will receive focus with focusReason as the reason.</para>
            <para>If the scene already has focus, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also hasFocus(), clearFocus(), and setFocusItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SetFocusItem(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.Qt.FocusReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the scene's focus item to item, with the focus reason focusReason, after removing focus from any previous item that may have had focus.</para>
            <para>If item is 0, or if it either does not accept focus (i.e., it does not have the QGraphicsItem::ItemIsFocusable flag enabled), or is not visible or not enabled, this function only removes focus from any previous focusitem.</para>
            <para>If item is not 0, and the scene does not currently have focus (i.e., hasFocus() returns false), this function will call setFocus() automatically.</para>
            <para>See also focusItem(), hasFocus(), and setFocus().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SetSelectionArea(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SetSelectionArea(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SetSelectionArea(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the selection area to path using mode to determine if items are included in the selection area.</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the area rect on the scene.</para>
            <para>See also sceneRect() and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Update(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the area rect on the scene.</para>
            <para>See also sceneRect() and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Update(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules a redraw of the area rect on the scene.</para>
            <para>See also sceneRect() and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Views">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the views that display this scene.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::scene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This event handler, for event wheelEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse wheel events for the scene.</para>
            <para>By default, the event is delivered to the topmost visible item under the cursor. If ignored, the event propagates to the item beneath, and again until the event is accepted, or it reaches the scene. If no items accept the event, it is ignored.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function is equivalent to calling sceneRect().width().</para>
            <para>See also height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes and deletes all items from the scene object before destroying the scene object. The scene object is removed from the application's global scene list, and it is removed from all associated views.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Changed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene when control reaches the event loop, if the scene content changes. The region parameter contains a list of scene rectangles that indicate the area that has been changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::updateScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneRectChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the scene rect changes. The rect parameter is the new scene rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::updateSceneRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the selection changes. You can call selectedItems() to get the new list of selected items.</para>
            <para>The selection changes whenever an item is selected or unselected, a selection area is set, cleared or otherwise changed, if a preselected item is added to the scene, or if a selected item is removed from the scene.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene emits this signal only once for group selection operations. For example, if you set a selection area, select or unselect a QGraphicsItemGroup, or if you add or remove from the scene a parent item that contains several selected items, selectionChanged() is emitted only once after the operation has completed (instead of once for each item).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setSelectionArea(), selectedItems(), and QGraphicsItem::setSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ActivePanel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current active panel, or 0 if no panel is currently active.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Activates item, which must be an item in this scene. You can also pass 0 for item, in which case QGraphicsScene will deactivate any currently active panel.</para>
            <para>If the scene is currently inactive, item remains inactive until the scene becomes active (or, ir item is 0, no item will be activated).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ActiveWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current active window, or 0 if no window is currently active.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Activates widget, which must be a widget in this scene. You can also pass 0 for widget, in which case QGraphicsScene will deactivate any currently active window.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SelectionArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the selection area that was previously set with setSelectionArea(), or an empty QPainterPath if no selection area has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().</para>
            <para>deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.</para>
            <para>For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene's style, or the same as QApplication::style() if the scene has not been explicitly assigned a style.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets or replaces the style of the scene to style, and reparents the style to this scene. Any previously assigned style is deleted. The scene's style defaults to QApplication::style(), and serves as the default for all QGraphicsWidget items in the scene.</para>
            <para>Changing the style, either directly by calling this function, or indirectly by calling QApplication::setStyle(), will automatically update the style for all widgets in the scene that do not have a style explicitly assigned to them.</para>
            <para>If style is 0, QGraphicsScene will revert to QApplication::style().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.FocusItem">
            <summary>
            <para>When the scene is active, this functions returns the scene's current focus item, or 0 if no item currently has focus. When the scene is inactive, this functions returns the item that will gain input focus when the scene becomes active.</para>
            <para>The focus item receives keyboard input when the scene receives a key event.</para>
            <para>See also setFocusItem(), QGraphicsItem::hasFocus(), and isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.BackgroundBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the background brush of the scene.</para>
            <para>Set this property to changes the scene's background to a different color, gradient or texture. The default background brush is Qt::NoBrush. The background is drawn before (behind) the items.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // a blue background</para>
            <para> scene.setBackgroundBrush(Qt::blue);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // a gradient background</para>
            <para> QRadialGradient gradient(0, 0, 10);</para>
            <para> gradient.setSpread(QGradient::RepeatSpread);</para>
            <para> scene.setBackgroundBrush(gradient);</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene::render() calls drawBackground() to draw the scene background. For more detailed control over how the background is drawn, you can reimplement drawBackground() in a subclass of QGraphicsScene.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ForegroundBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the foreground brush of the scene.</para>
            <para>Change this property to set the scene's foreground to a different color, gradient or texture.</para>
            <para>The foreground is drawn after (on top of) the items. The default foreground brush is Qt::NoBrush ( i.e. the foreground is not drawn).</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // a white semi-transparent foreground</para>
            <para> scene.setForegroundBrush(QColor(255, 255, 255, 127));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // a grid foreground</para>
            <para> scene.setForegroundBrush(QBrush(Qt::lightGray, Qt::CrossPattern));</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene::render() calls drawForeground() to draw the scene foreground. For more detailed control over how the foreground is drawn, you can reimplement the drawForeground() function in a QGraphicsScene subclass.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.itemIndexMethod">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item indexing method.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene applies an indexing algorithm to the scene, to speed up item discovery functions like items() and itemAt(). Indexing is most efficient for static scenes (i.e., where items don't move around). For dynamic scenes, or scenes with many animated items, the index bookkeeping can outweight the fast lookup speeds.</para>
            <para>For the common case, the default index method BspTreeIndex works fine. If your scene uses many animations and you are experiencing slowness, you can disable indexing by calling setItemIndexMethod(NoIndex).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the scene rectangle; the bounding rectangle of the scene.</para>
            <para>The scene rectangle defines the extent of the scene. It is primarily used by QGraphicsView to determine the view's default scrollable area, and by QGraphicsScene to manage item indexing.</para>
            <para>If unset, or if set to a null QRectF, sceneRect() will return the largest bounding rect of all items on the scene since the scene was created (i.e., a rectangle that grows when items are added to or moved in the scene, but never shrinks).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.BspTreeDepth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the depth of QGraphicsScene's BSP index tree.</para>
            <para>This property has no effect when NoIndex is used.</para>
            <para>This value determines the depth of QGraphicsScene's BSP tree. The depth directly affects QGraphicsScene's performance and memory usage; the latter growing exponentially with the depth of the tree. With an optimal tree depth, QGraphicsScene can instantly determine the locality of items, even for scenes with thousands or millions of items. This also greatly improves rendering performance.</para>
            <para>By default, the value is 0, in which case Qt will guess a reasonable default depth based on the size, location and number of items in the scene. If these parameters change frequently, however, you may experience slowdowns as QGraphicsScene retunes the depth internally. You can avoid potential slowdowns by fixating the tree depth through setting this property.</para>
            <para>The depth of the tree and the size of the scene rectangle decide the granularity of the scene's partitioning. The size of each scene segment is determined by the following algorithm:</para>
            <para> QSizeF segmentSize = sceneRect().size() / pow(2, depth - 1);</para>
            <para>The BSP tree has an optimal size when each segment contains between 0 and 10 items.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the scene's default palette.</para>
            <para>This property provides the scene's palette. The scene palette defaults to, and resolves all its entries from, QApplication::palette.</para>
            <para>If the scene's palette changes, either directly through setPalette() or indirectly when the application palette changes, QGraphicsScene first sends itself a PaletteChange event, and it then sends PaletteChange events to all top-level widget items in the scene. These items respond by resolving their own palettes to the scene, and they then notify their children, who again notify their children, and so on, until all widget items have updated their palettes.</para>
            <para>Changing the scene palette, (directly or indirectly through QApplication::setPalette(),) automatically schedules a redraw the entire scene.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the scene's default font.</para>
            <para>This property provides the scene's font. The scene font defaults to, and resolves all its entries from, QApplication::font.</para>
            <para>If the scene's font changes, either directly through setFont() or indirectly when the application font changes, QGraphicsScene first sends itself a FontChange event, and it then sends FontChange events to all top-level widget items in the scene. These items respond by resolving their own fonts to the scene, and they then notify their children, who again notify their children, and so on, until all widget items have updated their fonts.</para>
            <para>Changing the scene font, (directly or indirectly through QApplication::setFont(),) automatically schedules a redraw the entire scene.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SortCacheEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether sort caching is enabled.</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.6, this property has no effect.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.StickyFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether clicking into the scene background will clear focus.</para>
            <para>In a QGraphicsScene with stickyFocus set to true, focus will remain unchanged when the user clicks into the scene background or on an item that does not accept focus. Otherwise, focus will be cleared.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>Focus changes in response to a mouse press. You can reimplement mousePressEvent() in a subclass of QGraphicsScene to toggle this property based on where the user has clicked.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemIndexMethod">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the indexing algorithms QGraphicsScene provides for managing positional information about items on the scene.</para>
            <para>See also setItemIndexMethod() and bspTreeDepth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemIndexMethod.BspTreeIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>A Binary Space Partitioning tree is applied. All QGraphicsScene's item location algorithms are of an order close to logarithmic complexity, by making use of binary search. Adding, moving and removing items is logarithmic. This approach is best for static scenes (i.e., scenes where most items do not move).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.ItemIndexMethod.NoIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>No index is applied. Item location is of linear complexity, as all items on the scene are searched. Adding, moving and removing items, however, is done in constant time. This approach is ideal for dynamic scenes, where many items are added, moved or removed continuously.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the rendering layers in a QGraphicsScene. When QGraphicsScene draws the scene contents, it renders each of these layers separately, in order.</para>
            <para>Each layer represents a flag that can be OR'ed together when calling functions such as invalidate() or QGraphicsView::invalidateScene().</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also invalidate() and QGraphicsView::invalidateScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer.AllLayers">
            <summary>
            <para>All layers; this value represents a combination of all three layers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer.BackgroundLayer">
            <summary>
            <para>The background layer. QGraphicsScene renders the scene's background in this layer by calling the virtual function drawBackground(). The background layer is drawn first of all layers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer.ForegroundLayer">
            <summary>
            <para>The foreground layer. QGraphicsScene renders the scene's foreground in this layer by calling the virtual function drawForeground(). The foreground layer is drawn last of all layers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer.ItemLayer">
            <summary>
            <para>The item layer. QGraphicsScene renders all items are in this layer by calling the virtual function drawItems(). The item layer is drawn after the background layer, but before the foreground layer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent class provides context menu events in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QContextMenuEvent received by a QGraphicsView is translated into a QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent. The QContextMenuEvent::globalPos() is translated into item, scene, and screen coordinates (pos(), scenePos(), and screenPos()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent, QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent, and QContextMenuEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneEvent class provides a base class for all graphics view related events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When a QGraphicsView receives Qt mouse, keyboard, and drag and drop events (QMouseEvent, QKeyEvent, QDragEvent, etc.), it translates them into instances of QGraphicsSceneEvent subclasses and forwards them to the QGraphicsScene it displays. The scene then forwards the events to the relevant items.</para>
            <para>For example, when a QGraphicsView receives a QMouseEvent of type MousePress as a response to a user click, the view sends a QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent of type GraphicsSceneMousePress to the underlying QGraphicsScene through its mousePressEvent() function. The default QGraphicsScene::mousePressEvent() implementation determines which item was clicked and forwards the event to QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>Subclasses such as QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent and QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent provide the coordinates from the original QEvent in screen, scene, and item coordinates (see screenPos(), scenePos(), and pos()). The item coordinates are set by the QGraphicsScene before it forwards the event to the event to a QGraphicsItem. The mouse events also add the possibility to retrieve the coordinates from the last event received by the view (see lastScreenPos(), lastScenePos(), and lastPos()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneEvent.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget where the event originated, or 0 if the event originates from another application.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifiers in use when the context menu was requested.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in item coordinates at the moment the context menu was requested.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.reason">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the reason for the context menu event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in scene coordinates at the moment the the context menu was requested.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in screen coordinates at the moment the the context menu was requested.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Reason">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the reason why the context event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Reason.Keyboard">
            <summary>
            <para>The keyboard caused this event to be sent. On Windows and Mac OS X, this means the menu button was pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Reason.Mouse">
            <summary>
            <para>The mouse caused the event to be sent. On most platforms, this means the right mouse button was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent.Reason.Other">
            <summary>
            <para>The event was sent by some other means (i.e. not by the mouse or keyboard).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent class provides events for drag and drop in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsView inherits the drag and drop functionality provided by QWidget. When it receives a drag and drop event, it translates it to a QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent stores events of type GraphicsSceneDragEnter, GraphicsSceneDragLeave, GraphicsSceneDragMove, or GraphicsSceneDrop.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent contains the position of the mouse cursor in both item, scene, and screen coordinates; this can be retrieved with pos(), scenePos(), and screenPos().</para>
            <para>The scene sends the event to the first QGraphicsItem under the mouse cursor that accepts drops; a graphics item is set to accept drops with setAcceptDrops().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.AcceptProposedAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the proposed action as accepted, i.e, the drop action is set to the proposed action. This is equal to:</para>
            <para> setDropAction(proposedAction());</para>
            <para>When using this function, one should not call accept().</para>
            <para>See also dropAction(), setDropAction(), and proposedAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a Qt::MouseButtons value indicating which buttons were pressed on the mouse when this mouse event was generated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.DropAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the action that was performed in this drag and drop. This should be set by the receiver of the drop and is returned by QDrag::exec().</para>
            <para>This function lets the receiver of the drop set the drop action that was performed to action, which should be one of the possible actions. Call accept() in stead of acceptProposedAction() if you use this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.MimeData">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns the MIME data of the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifiers that were pressed when the drag and drop event was created.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse position of the event relative to the view that sent the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.PossibleActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the possible drop actions that the drag and drop can result in.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.ProposedAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the drop action that is proposed, i.e., preferred. The action must be one of the possible actions as defined by possibleActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse in scene coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse relative to the screen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.Source">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns the QGraphicsView that created the QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent class provides events when a tooltip is requested.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When a QGraphicsView receives a QEvent of type QEvent::ToolTip, it creates a QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent, which is forwarded to the scene. You can set a tooltip on a QGraphicsItem with setToolTip(); by default QGraphicsScene displays the tooltip of the QGraphicsItem with the highest z-value (i.e, the top-most item) under the mouse position.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView does not forward events when &amp;quot;What's This&amp;quot; and status tip help is requested. If you need this, you can reimplement QGraphicsView::viewportEvent() and forward QStatusTipEvent events and QEvents of type QEvent::WhatsThis to the scene.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in scene coordinates at the moment the help event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in screen coordinates at the moment the help event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent class provides hover events in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When a QGraphicsView receives a QHoverEvent event, it translates it into QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent. The event is then forwarded to the QGraphicsScene associated with the view.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent, QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent, QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent, and QHoverEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.LastPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last recorded mouse cursor position in item coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.LastScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last recorded, the scene coordinates of the previous mouse or hover event received by the view, that created the event mouse cursor position in scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.LastScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last recorded mouse cursor position in screen coordinates. The last recorded position is the position of the previous mouse or hover event received by the view that created the event.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifiers at the moment the hover event was sent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in item coordinates at the moment the hover event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in scene coordinates at the moment the hover event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor in screen coordinates at the moment the hover event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent class provides mouse events in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When a QGraphicsView receives a QMouseEvent, it translates it to a QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent. The event is then forwarded to the QGraphicsScene associated with the view. If the event is not handled by the scene, the view may use it, e.g., for the DragMode.</para>
            <para>In addition to containing the item, scene, and screen coordinates of the event (as pos(), scenePos(), and screenPos()), mouse events also contain the coordinates of the previous mouse event received by the view. These can be retrieved with lastPos(), lastScreenPos(), and lastScenePos().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent, QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent, QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent, and QMouseEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.ButtonDownPos(QtCore.Qt.MouseButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position in item coordinates where the specified button was clicked.</para>
            <para>See also buttonDownScenePos(), buttonDownScreenPos(), and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.ButtonDownScenePos(QtCore.Qt.MouseButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position in scene coordinates where the specified button was clicked.</para>
            <para>See also buttonDownPos(), buttonDownScreenPos(), and scenePos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.ButtonDownScreenPos(QtCore.Qt.MouseButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position in screen coordinates where the specified button was clicked.</para>
            <para>See also screenPos(), buttonDownPos(), and buttonDownScenePos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.Button">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse button (if any) that caused the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the combination of mouse buttons that were pressed at the time the event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.LastPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last recorded mouse cursor position in item coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.LastScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last recorded mouse cursor position in scene coordinates. The last recorded position is the position of the previous mouse event received by the view that created the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.LastScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last recorded mouse cursor position in screen coordinates. The last recorded position is the position of the previous mouse event received by the view that created the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifiers in use at the time the event was sent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position in item coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position in scene coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position in screen coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent class provides events for widget moving in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QGraphicsWidget sends itself a QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent immediately when its local position changes. The delivery is implemented as part of QGraphicsItem::itemChange().</para>
            <para>It's similar to QMoveEvent, but its positions, oldPos() and newPos(), use QPointF instead of QPoint.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::setPos(), QGraphicsItem::ItemPositionChange, and QGraphicsItem::ItemPositionHasChanged.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent.NewPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the new position (i.e., the current position).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent.OldPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the old position (i.e., the position immediately before the widget was moved).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent class provides events for widget resizing in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QGraphicsWidget sends itself a QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent immediately when its geometry changes.</para>
            <para>It's similar to QResizeEvent, but its sizes, oldSize() and newSize(), use QSizeF instead of QSize.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsWidget::setGeometry() and QGraphicsWidget::resize().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent.NewSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the new size (i.e., the current size).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent.OldSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the old size (i.e., the size immediately before the widget was resized).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent class provides wheel events in the graphics view framework.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWheelEvents received by a QGraphicsView are translated into QGraphicsSceneWheelEvents; it translates the QWheelEvent::globalPos() into item, scene, and screen coordinates (pos(), scenePos(), and screenPos()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent, QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent, QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent, and QWheelEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse buttons that were pressed when the wheel event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.Delta">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance that the wheel is rotated, in eighths (1/8s) of a degree. A positive value indicates that the wheel was rotated forwards away from the user; a negative value indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards toward the user.</para>
            <para>Most mouse types work in steps of 15 degrees, in which case the delta value is a multiple of 120 (== 15 * 8).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifiers that were active when the wheel event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the wheel orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the cursor in item coordinates when the wheel event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the cursor in scene coordinates when the wheel event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the cursor in screen coordinates when the wheel event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsSimpleTextItem class provides a simple text path item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To set the item's text, you can either pass a QString to QGraphicsSimpleTextItem's constructor, or call setText() to change the text later. To set the text fill color, call setBrush().</para>
            <para>The simple text item can have both a fill and an outline; setBrush() will set the text fill (i.e., text color), and setPen() sets the pen that will be used to draw the text outline. (The latter can be slow, especially for complex pens, and items with long text content.) If all you want is to draw a simple line of text, you should call setBrush() only, and leave the pen unset; QGraphicsSimpleTextItem's pen is by default Qt::NoPen.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsSimpleTextItem uses the text's formatted size and the associated font to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). You can set the font by calling setFont().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsSimpleText does not display rich text; instead, you can use QGraphicsTextItem, which provides full text control capabilities.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsTextItem, QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsLineItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.</para>
            <para>parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.</para>
            <para>parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font that is used to draw the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the font that is used to draw the item's text to font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's text to text. The text will be displayed as plain text. Newline characters ('\n') as well as characters of type QChar::LineSeparator will cause item to break the text into multiple lines.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsTextItem class provides a text item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene to display formatted text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>If you only need to show plain text in an item, consider using QGraphicsSimpleTextItem instead.</para>
            <para>To set the item's text, pass a QString to QGraphicsTextItem's constructor, or call setHtml()/setPlainText().</para>
            <para>QGraphicsTextItem uses the text's formatted size and the associated font to provide a reasonable implementation of boundingRect(), shape(), and contains(). You can set the font by calling setFont().</para>
            <para>It is possible to make the item editable by setting the Qt::TextEditorInteraction flag using setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            <para>The item's preferred text width can be set using setTextWidth() and obtained using textWidth().</para>
            <para>Note: In order to align HTML text in the center, the item's text width must be set.</para>
            <para>Note: QGraphicsTextItem accepts hover events by default. You can change this with setAcceptHoverEvents().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsSimpleTextItem, QGraphicsPathItem, QGraphicsRectItem, QGraphicsEllipseItem, QGraphicsPixmapItem, QGraphicsPolygonItem, QGraphicsLineItem, and Graphics View Framework.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsTextItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QGraphicsScene)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsTextItem. parent is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.AdjustSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Adjusts the text item to a reasonable size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnHoverEnterEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnHoverLeaveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnHoverMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.IsObscuredBy(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::isObscuredBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnLinkActivated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks on a link on a text item that enables Qt::LinksAccessibleByMouse or Qt::LinksAccessibleByKeyboard. link is the link that was clicked.</para>
            <para>See also setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnLinkHovered(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link on a text item that enables Qt::LinksAccessibleByMouse. link is the link that was hovered over.</para>
            <para>See also setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OpaqueArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::opaqueArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.OnSceneEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.SetHtml(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's text to text, assuming that text is HTML formatted. If the item has keyboard input focus, this function will also call ensureVisible() to ensure that the text is visible in all viewports.</para>
            <para>See also toHtml(), hasFocus(), and QGraphicsSimpleTextItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.SetPlainText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's text to text. If the item has keyboard input focus, this function will also call ensureVisible() to ensure that the text is visible in all viewports.</para>
            <para>See also toHtml() and hasFocus().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.ToHtml">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's text converted to HTML, or an empty QString if no text has been set.</para>
            <para>See also setHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.ToPlainText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's text converted to plain text, or an empty QString if no text has been set.</para>
            <para>See also setPlainText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QGraphicsTextItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.LinkActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks on a link on a text item that enables Qt::LinksAccessibleByMouse or Qt::LinksAccessibleByKeyboard. link is the link that was clicked.</para>
            <para>See also setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.LinkHovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link on a text item that enables Qt::LinksAccessibleByMouse. link is the link that was hovered over.</para>
            <para>See also setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.DefaultTextColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default text color that is used to for unformatted text.</para>
            <para>Sets the color for unformatted text to col.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's text document.</para>
            <para>Sets the text document document on the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's font, which is used to render the text.</para>
            <para>Sets the font used to render the text item to font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.TabChangesFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the Tab key will cause the widget to change focus; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>By default, this behavior is disabled, and this function will return false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>If b is true, the Tab key will cause the widget to change focus; otherwise, the tab key will insert a tab into the document.</para>
            <para>In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the Tab key, as this breaks the focus chain. The default is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.TextInteractionFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current text interaction flags.</para>
            <para>Sets the flags flags to specify how the text item should react to user input.</para>
            <para>The default for a QGraphicsTextItem is Qt::NoTextInteraction. This function also affects the ItemIsFocusable QGraphicsItem flag by setting it if flags is different from Qt::NoTextInteraction and clearing it otherwise.</para>
            <para>By default, the text is read-only. To transform the item into an editor, set the Qt::TextEditable flag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsTextItem.TextWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text width.</para>
            <para>The width is calculated with the QTextDocument that QGraphicsTextItem keeps internally.</para>
            <para>Sets the preferred width for the item's text. If the actual text is wider than the specified width then it will be broken into multiple lines.</para>
            <para>If width is set to -1 then the text will not be broken into multiple lines unless it is enforced through an explicit line break or a new paragraph.</para>
            <para>The default value is -1.</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsTextItem keeps a QTextDocument internally, which is used to calculate the text width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsView">
            <summary>
            The QGraphicsView class provides a widget for displaying the contents of a QGraphicsScene.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGraphicsView visualizes the contents of a QGraphicsScene in a scrollable viewport. To create a scene with geometrical items, see QGraphicsScene's documentation. QGraphicsView is part of the Graphics View Framework.</para>
            <para>To visualize a scene, you start by constructing a QGraphicsView object, passing the address of the scene you want to visualize to QGraphicsView's constructor. Alternatively, you can call setScene() to set the scene at a later point. After you call show(), the view will by default scroll to the center of the scene and display any items that are visible at this point. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addText(&amp;quot;Hello, world!&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para>You can explicitly scroll to any position on the scene by using the scroll bars, or by calling centerOn(). By passing a point to centerOn(), QGraphicsView will scroll its viewport to ensure that the point is centered in the view. An overload is provided for scrolling to a QGraphicsItem, in which case QGraphicsView will see to that the center of the item is centered in the view. If all you want is to ensure that a certain area is visible, (but not necessarily centered,) you can call ensureVisible() instead.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView can be used to visualize a whole scene, or only parts of it. The visualized area is by default detected automatically when the view is displayed for the first time (by calling QGraphicsScene::itemsBoundingRect()). To set the visualized area rectangle yourself, you can call setSceneRect(). This will adjust the scroll bars' ranges appropriately. Note that although the scene supports a virtually unlimited size, the range of the scroll bars will never exceed the range of an integer (INT_MIN, INT_MAX).</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView visualizes the scene by calling render(). By default, the items are drawn onto the viewport by using a regular QPainter, and using default render hints. To change the default render hints that QGraphicsView passes to QPainter when painting items, you can call setRenderHints().</para>
            <para>By default, QGraphicsView provides a regular QWidget for the viewport widget. You can access this widget by calling viewport(), or you can replace it by calling setViewport(). To render using OpenGL, simply call setViewport(new QGLWidget). QGraphicsView takes ownership of the viewport widget.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView supports affine transformations, using QTransform. You can either pass a matrix to setTransform(), or you can call one of the convenience functions rotate(), scale(), translate() or shear(). The most two common transformations are scaling, which is used to implement zooming, and rotation. QGraphicsView keeps the center of the view fixed during a transformation. Because of the scene alignment (setAligment()), translating the view will have no visual impact.</para>
            <para>You can interact with the items on the scene by using the mouse and keyboard. QGraphicsView translates the mouse and key events into scene events, (events that inherit QGraphicsSceneEvent,), and forward them to the visualized scene. In the end, it's the individual item that handles the events and reacts to them. For example, if you click on a selectable item, the item will typically let the scene know that it has been selected, and it will also redraw itself to display a selection rectangle. Similiary, if you click and drag the mouse to move a movable item, it's the item that handles the mouse moves and moves itself. Item interaction is enabled by default, and you can toggle it by calling setInteractive().</para>
            <para>You can also provide your own custom scene interaction, by creating a subclass of QGraphicsView, and reimplementing the mouse and key event handlers. To simplify how you programmatically interact with items in the view, QGraphicsView provides the mapping functions mapToScene() and mapFromScene(), and the item accessors items() and itemAt(). These functions allow you to map points, rectangles, polygons and paths between view coordinates and scene coordinates, and to find items on the scene using view coordinates.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene, QGraphicsItem, and QGraphicsSceneEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsView. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.#ctor(QtGui.QGraphicsScene,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QGraphicsView and sets the visualized scene to scene. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CenterOn(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the viewport to ensure that the scene coordinate pos, is centered in the view.</para>
            <para>Because pos is a floating point coordinate, and the scroll bars operate on integer coordinates, the centering is only an approximation.</para>
            <para>Note: If the item is close to or outside the border, it will be visible in the view, but not centered.</para>
            <para>See also ensureVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CenterOn(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the viewport to ensure that item is centered in the view.</para>
            <para>See also ensureVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CenterOn(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the viewport to ensure that the scene coordinate pos, is centered in the view.</para>
            <para>Because pos is a floating point coordinate, and the scroll bars operate on integer coordinates, the centering is only an approximation.</para>
            <para>Note: If the item is close to or outside the border, it will be visible in the view, but not centered.</para>
            <para>See also ensureVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DrawBackground(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the background of the scene using painter, before any items and the foreground are drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom background for this view.</para>
            <para>If all you want is to define a color, texture or gradient for the background, you can call setBackgroundBrush() instead.</para>
            <para>All painting is done in scene coordinates. rect is the exposed rectangle.</para>
            <para>The default implementation fills rect using the view's backgroundBrush. If no such brush is defined (the default), the scene's drawBackground() function is called instead.</para>
            <para>See also drawForeground() and QGraphicsScene::drawBackground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DrawForeground(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the foreground of the scene using painter, after the background and all items are drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom foreground for this view.</para>
            <para>If all you want is to define a color, texture or gradient for the foreground, you can call setForegroundBrush() instead.</para>
            <para>All painting is done in scene coordinates. rect is the exposed rectangle.</para>
            <para>The default implementation fills rect using the view's foregroundBrush. If no such brush is defined (the default), the scene's drawForeground() function is called instead.</para>
            <para>See also drawBackground() and QGraphicsScene::drawForeground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DrawItems(QtGui.QPainter,System.Int32,QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the items items in the scene using painter, after the background and before the foreground are drawn. numItems is the number of items in items and options in options. options is a list of styleoptions; one for each item. Reimplement this function to provide custom item drawing for this view.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls the scene's drawItems() function.</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.6, this function is not called anymore unless the QGraphicsView::IndirectPainting flag is given as an Optimization flag.</para>
            <para>See also drawForeground(), drawBackground(), and QGraphicsScene::drawItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.EnsureVisible(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.</para>
            <para>See also centerOn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.EnsureVisible(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the center of item item is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.</para>
            <para>See also centerOn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.EnsureVisible(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.</para>
            <para>See also centerOn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.FitInView(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.</para>
            <para>This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.</para>
            <para>It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).</para>
            <para>If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.FitInView(QtGui.IQGraphicsItem,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.</para>
            <para>This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.</para>
            <para>It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).</para>
            <para>If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.FitInView(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.</para>
            <para>This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.</para>
            <para>It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).</para>
            <para>If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.InvalidateScene">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates and schedules a redraw of layers inside rect. rect is in scene coordinates. Any cached content for layers inside rect is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.</para>
            <para>You can call this function to notify QGraphicsView of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. It is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled background caching.</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but QGraphicsScene::BackgroundLayer is passed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::invalidate() and update().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.InvalidateScene(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QGraphicsScene.SceneLayer)">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates and schedules a redraw of layers inside rect. rect is in scene coordinates. Any cached content for layers inside rect is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.</para>
            <para>You can call this function to notify QGraphicsView of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. It is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled background caching.</para>
            <para>Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but QGraphicsScene::BackgroundLayer is passed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::invalidate() and update().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.IsTransformed">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the view is transformed (i.e., a non-identity transform has been assigned, or the scrollbars are adjusted).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), horizontalScrollBar(), and verticalScrollBar().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ItemAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item at position pos, which is in viewport coordinates. If there are several items at this position, this function returns the topmost item.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void CustomView::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (QGraphicsItem *item = itemAt(event-&gt;pos())) {</para>
            <para>         qDebug() &lt;&lt; &quot;You clicked on item&quot; &lt;&lt; item;</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         qDebug() &lt;&lt; &quot;You didn't click on an item.&quot;;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ItemAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function is provided for convenience. It's equivalent to calling itemAt(QPoint(x, y)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the items in the associated scene, in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the returned list is the uppermost item).</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the items at the position pos in the view. The items are listed in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the list is the uppermost item, and the last item is the lowermost item). pos is in viewport coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function is most commonly called from within mouse event handlers in a subclass in QGraphicsView. pos is in untransformed viewport coordinates, just like QMouseEvent::pos().</para>
            <para> void CustomView::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     qDebug() &lt;&lt; &quot;There are&quot; &lt;&lt; items(event-&gt;pos()).size()</para>
            <para>              &lt;&lt; &quot;items at position&quot; &lt;&lt; mapToScene(event-&gt;pos());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items(QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the items in the associated scene, in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the returned list is the uppermost item).</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items(QtGui.QPolygon,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the items in the associated scene, in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the returned list is the uppermost item).</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the items in the associated scene, in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the returned list is the uppermost item).</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is provided for convenience. It's equivalent to calling items(QPoint(x, y)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Items(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.ItemSelectionMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the items in the associated scene, in descending stacking order (i.e., the first item in the returned list is the uppermost item).</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::items() and Sorting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapFromScene(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapFromScene(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene rectangle rect to a viewport coordinate polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapFromScene(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene coordinate polygon polygon to a viewport coordinate polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapFromScene(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene coordinate painter path path to a viewport coordinate painter path.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapFromScene(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapFromScene(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapToScene(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).</para>
            <para>See also mapFromScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapToScene(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the viewport rectangle rect mapped to a scene coordinate polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapToScene(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the viewport polygon polygon mapped to a scene coordinate polygon.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapToScene(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the viewport painter path path mapped to a scene coordinate painter path.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapToScene(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is provided for convenience. It's equivalent to calling mapToScene(QPoint(x, y)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.MapToScene(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is provided for convenience. It's equivalent to calling mapToScene(QRect(x, y, w, h)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Render(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(...</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);</para>
            <para> printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(&amp;printer);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page</para>
            <para> view.render(&amp;painter);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.</para>
            <para> // half of the page.</para>
            <para> QRect viewport = view.viewport()-&gt;rect();</para>
            <para> view.render(&amp;painter,</para>
            <para>             QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,</para>
            <para>                    printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),</para>
            <para>             viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));</para>
            <para>If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()-&gt;rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.</para>
            <para>The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::render().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Render(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(...</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);</para>
            <para> printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(&amp;printer);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page</para>
            <para> view.render(&amp;painter);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.</para>
            <para> // half of the page.</para>
            <para> QRect viewport = view.viewport()-&gt;rect();</para>
            <para> view.render(&amp;painter,</para>
            <para>             QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,</para>
            <para>                    printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),</para>
            <para>             viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));</para>
            <para>If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()-&gt;rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.</para>
            <para>The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::render().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Render(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addItem(...</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);</para>
            <para> printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(&amp;printer);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page</para>
            <para> view.render(&amp;painter);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.</para>
            <para> // half of the page.</para>
            <para> QRect viewport = view.viewport()-&gt;rect();</para>
            <para> view.render(&amp;painter,</para>
            <para>             QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,</para>
            <para>                    printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),</para>
            <para>             viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));</para>
            <para>If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()-&gt;rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.</para>
            <para>The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::render().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ResetCachedContent">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets any cached content. Calling this function will clear QGraphicsView's cache. If the current cache mode is CacheNone, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>This function is called automatically for you when the backgroundBrush or QGraphicsScene::backgroundBrush properties change; you only need to call this function if you have reimplemented QGraphicsScene::drawBackground() or QGraphicsView::drawBackground() to draw a custom background, and need to trigger a full redraw.</para>
            <para>See also cacheMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ResetMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the view transformation matrix to the identity matrix.</para>
            <para>See also resetTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ResetTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the view transformation to the identity matrix.</para>
            <para>See also transform() and setTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Rotate(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Rotates the current view transformation angle degrees clockwise.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), transform(), scale(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Scale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the current view transformation by (sx, sy).</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), transform(), rotate(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SetMatrix(QtGui.QMatrix,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the view's current transformation matrix to matrix.</para>
            <para>If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.</para>
            <para>The transformation matrix tranforms the scene into view coordinates. Using the default transformation, provided by the identity matrix, one pixel in the view represents one unit in the scene (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is drawn using 10x10 pixels in the view). If a 2x2 scaling matrix is applied, the scene will be drawn in 1:2 (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is then drawn using 20x20 pixels in the view).</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addText(&quot;GraphicsView rotated clockwise&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.rotate(90); // the text is rendered with a 90 degree clockwise rotation</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para>To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsView provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between scene and view coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map a view coordinate to a floating point scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from floating point scene coordinates to view coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also matrix(), setTransform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SetOptimizationFlag(QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlag,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables flag if enabled is true; otherwise disables flag.</para>
            <para>See also optimizationFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SetRenderHint(QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true, the render hint hint is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also renderHints.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SetTransform(QtGui.QTransform,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the view's current transformation matrix to matrix.</para>
            <para>If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.</para>
            <para>The transformation matrix tranforms the scene into view coordinates. Using the default transformation, provided by the identity matrix, one pixel in the view represents one unit in the scene (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is drawn using 10x10 pixels in the view). If a 2x2 scaling matrix is applied, the scene will be drawn in 1:2 (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is then drawn using 20x20 pixels in the view).</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addText(&quot;GraphicsView rotated clockwise&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.rotate(90); // the text is rendered with a 90 degree clockwise rotation</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            <para>To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsView provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between scene and view coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map a view coordiate to a floating point scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from floating point scene coordinates to view coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also transform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SetupViewport(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called by QAbstractScrollArea after setViewport() has been called. Reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsView to initialize the new viewport widget before it is used.</para>
            <para>See also setViewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Shear(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shears the current view transformation by (sh, sv).</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), transform(), rotate(), scale(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the current view transformation by (dx, dy).</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), transform(), rotate(), and shear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.UpdateScene(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QRectF})">
            <summary>
            <para>Schedules an update of the scene rectangles rects.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScene::changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.UpdateSceneRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Notifies QGraphicsView that the scene's scene rect has changed. rect is the new scene rect. If the view already has an explicitly set scene rect, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also sceneRect and QGraphicsScene::sceneRectChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnViewportEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a matrix that maps viewport coordinates to scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also mapToScene() and mapFromScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the QGraphicsView object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Scene">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the scene that is currently visualized in the view. If no scene is currently visualized, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the current scene to scene. If scene is already being viewed, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>When a scene is set on a view, the QGraphicsScene::changed() signal is automatically connected to this view's updateScene() slot, and the view's scroll bars are adjusted to fit the size of the scene.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Matrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current transformation matrix for the view. If no current transformation is set, the identity matrix is returned.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix(), transform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Transform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current transformation matrix for the view. If no current transformation is set, the identity matrix is returned.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.BackgroundBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the background brush of the scene.</para>
            <para>This property sets the background brush for the scene in this view. It is used to override the scene's own background, and defines the behavior of drawBackground(). To provide custom background drawing for this view, you can reimplement drawBackground() instead.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a brush with the Qt::NoBrush pattern.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ForegroundBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the foreground brush of the scene.</para>
            <para>This property sets the foreground brush for the scene in this view. It is used to override the scene's own foreground, and defines the behavior of drawForeground(). To provide custom foreground drawing for this view, you can reimplement drawForeground() instead.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a brush with the Qt::NoBrush pattern.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Interactive">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the view allowed scene interaction.</para>
            <para>If enabled, this view is set to allow scene interaction. Otherwise, this view will not allow interaction, and any mouse or key events are ignored (i.e., it will act as a read-only view).</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.SceneRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the area of the scene visualized by this view.</para>
            <para>The scene rectangle defines the extent of the scene, and in the view's case, this means the area of the scene that you can navigate using the scroll bars.</para>
            <para>If unset, or if a null QRectF is set, this property has the same value as QGraphicsScene::sceneRect, and it changes with QGraphicsScene::sceneRect. Otherwise, the view's scene rect is unaffected by the scene.</para>
            <para>Note that, although the scene supports a virtually unlimited size, the range of the scroll bars will never exceed the range of an integer (INT_MIN, INT_MAX). When the scene is larger than the scroll bars' values, you can choose to use translate() to navigate the scene instead.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a rectangle at the origin with zero width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the scene in the view when the whole scene is visible.</para>
            <para>If the whole scene is visible in the view, (i.e., there are no visible scroll bars,) the view's alignment will decide where the scene will be rendered in the view. For example, if the alignment is Qt::AlignCenter, which is default, the scene will be centered in the view, and if the alignment is (Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignTop), the scene will be rendered in the top-left corner of the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.RenderHints">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default render hints for the view.</para>
            <para>These hints are used to initialize QPainter before each visible item is drawn. QPainter uses render hints to toggle rendering features such as antialiasing and smooth pixmap transformation.</para>
            <para>QPainter::TextAntialiasing is enabled by default.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsScene scene;</para>
            <para> scene.addRect(QRectF(-10, -10, 20, 20));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view(&amp;scene);</para>
            <para> view.setRenderHints(QPainter::Antialiasing | QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform);</para>
            <para> view.show();</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.dragMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the behavior for dragging the mouse over the scene while the left mouse button is pressed.</para>
            <para>This property defines what should happen when the user clicks on the scene background and drags the mouse (e.g., scrolling the viewport contents using a pointing hand cursor, or selecting multiple items with a rubber band). The default value, NoDrag, does nothing.</para>
            <para>This behavior only affects mouse clicks that are not handled by any item. You can define a custom behavior by creating a subclass of QGraphicsView and reimplementing mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CacheMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds which parts of the view are cached.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView can cache pre-rendered content in a QPixmap, which is then drawn onto the viewport. The purpose of such caching is to speed up the total rendering time for areas that are slow to render. Texture, gradient and alpha blended backgrounds, for example, can be notibly slow to render; especially with a transformed view. The CacheBackground flag enables caching of the view's background. For example:</para>
            <para> QGraphicsView view;</para>
            <para> view.setBackgroundBrush(QImage(&quot;:/images/backgroundtile.png&quot;));</para>
            <para> view.setCacheMode(QGraphicsView::CacheBackground);</para>
            <para>The cache is invalidated every time the view is transformed. However, when scrolling, only partial invalidation is required.</para>
            <para>By default, nothing is cached.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.TransformationAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the view should position the scene during transformations.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView uses this property to decide how to position the scene in the viewport when the transformation matrix changes, and the coordinate system of the view is transformed. The default behavior, AnchorViewCenter, ensures that the scene point at the center of the view remains unchanged during transformations (e.g., when rotating, the scene will appear to rotate around the center of the view).</para>
            <para>Note that the effect of this property is noticeable when only a part of the scene is visible (i.e., when there are scroll bars). Otherwise, if the whole scene fits in the view, QGraphicsScene uses the view alignment to position the scene in the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ResizeAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the view should position the scene when the view is resized.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView uses this property to decide how to position the scene in the viewport when the viewport widget's size changes. The default behavior, NoAnchor, leaves the scene's position unchanged during a resize; the top-left corner of the view will appear to be anchored while resizing.</para>
            <para>Note that the effect of this property is noticeable when only a part of the scene is visible (i.e., when there are scroll bars). Otherwise, if the whole scene fits in the view, QGraphicsScene uses the view alignment to position the scene in the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.viewportUpdateMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how the viewport should update its contents.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView uses this property to decide how to update areas of the scene that have been reexposed or changed. Usually you do not need to modify this property, but there are some cases where doing so can improve rendering performance. See the ViewportUpdateMode documentation for specific details.</para>
            <para>The default value is MinimalViewportUpdate, where QGraphicsView will update as small an area of the viewport as possible when the contents change.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.RubberBandSelectionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the behavior for selecting items with a rubber band selection rectangle.</para>
            <para>This property defines how items are selected when using the RubberBandDrag drag mode.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; all items whose shape intersects with or is contained by the rubber band are selected.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds flags that can be used to tune QGraphicsView's performance.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsView uses clipping, extra bounding rect adjustments, and certain other aids to improve rendering quality and performance for the common case graphics scene. However, depending on the target platform, the scene, and the viewport in use, some of these operations can degrade performance.</para>
            <para>The effect varies from flag to flag; see the OptimizationFlags documentation for details.</para>
            <para>By default, no optimization flags are enabled.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CacheModeFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the flags that you can set for a QGraphicsView's cache mode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also cacheMode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CacheModeFlag.CacheBackground">
            <summary>
            <para>The background is cached. This affects both custom backgrounds, and backgrounds based on the backgroundBrush property. When this flag is enabled, QGraphicsView will allocate one pixmap with the full size of the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.CacheModeFlag.CacheNone">
            <summary>
            <para>All painting is done directly onto the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DragMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the default action for the view when pressing and dragging the mouse over the viewport.</para>
            <para>See also dragMode and QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DragMode.NoDrag">
            <summary>
            <para>Nothing happens; the mouse event is ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DragMode.RubberBandDrag">
            <summary>
            <para>A rubber band will appear. Dragging the mouse will set the rubber band geometry, and all items covered by the rubber band are selected. This mode is disabled for non-interactive views.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.DragMode.ScrollHandDrag">
            <summary>
            <para>The cursor changes into a pointing hand, and dragging the mouse around will scroll the scrolbars. This mode works both in interactive and non-interactive mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes flags that you can enable to improve rendering performance in QGraphicsView. By default, none of these flags are set. Note that setting a flag usually imposes a side effect, and this effect can vary between paint devices and platforms.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlag.DontAdjustForAntialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>Disables QGraphicsView's antialiasing auto-adjustment of exposed areas. Items that render antialiased lines on the boundaries of their QGraphicsItem::boundingRect() can end up rendering parts of the line outside. To prevent rendering artifacts, QGraphicsView expands all exposed regions by 2 pixels in all directions. If you enable this flag, QGraphicsView will no longer perform these adjustments, minimizing the areas that require redrawing, which improves performance. A common side effect is that items that do draw with antialiasing can leave painting traces behind on the scene as they are moved.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlag.DontClipPainter">
            <summary>
            <para>This value is obsolete and has no effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlag.DontSavePainterState">
            <summary>
            <para>When rendering, QGraphicsView protects the painter state (see QPainter::save()) when rendering the background or foreground, and when rendering each item. This allows you to leave the painter in an altered state (i.e., you can call QPainter::setPen() or QPainter::setBrush() without restoring the state after painting). However, if the items consistently do restore the state, you should enable this flag to prevent QGraphicsView from doing the same.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.OptimizationFlag.IndirectPainting">
            <summary>
            <para>Since Qt 4.6, restore the old painting algorithm that calls QGraphicsView::drawItems() and QGraphicsScene::drawItems(). To be used only for compatibility with old code.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>This enums describe the possible anchors that QGraphicsView can use when the user resizes the view or when the view is transformed.</para>
            <para>See also resizeAnchor and transformationAnchor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportAnchor.AnchorUnderMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>The point under the mouse is used as the anchor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportAnchor.AnchorViewCenter">
            <summary>
            <para>The scene point at the center of the view is used as the anchor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportAnchor.NoAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>No anchor, i.e. the view leaves the scene's position unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportUpdateMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how QGraphicsView updates its viewport when the scene contents change or are exposed.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also viewportUpdateMode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportUpdateMode.BoundingRectViewportUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>The bounding rectangle of all changes in the viewport will be redrawn. This mode has the advantage that QGraphicsView searches only one region for changes, minimizing time spent determining what needs redrawing. The disadvantage is that areas that have not changed also need to be redrawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportUpdateMode.FullViewportUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>When any visible part of the scene changes or is reexposed, QGraphicsView will update the entire viewport. This approach is fastest when QGraphicsView spends more time figuring out what to draw than it would spend drawing (e.g., when very many small items are repeatedly updated). This is the preferred update mode for viewports that do not support partial updates, such as QGLWidget, and for viewports that need to disable scroll optimization.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportUpdateMode.MinimalViewportUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>QGraphicsView will determine the minimal viewport region that requires a redraw, minimizing the time spent drawing by avoiding a redraw of areas that have not changed. This is QGraphicsView's default mode. Although this approach provides the best performance in general, if there are many small visible changes on the scene, QGraphicsView might end up spending more time finding the minimal approach than it will spend drawing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportUpdateMode.NoViewportUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>QGraphicsView will never update its viewport when the scene changes; the user is expected to control all updates. This mode disables all (potentially slow) item visibility testing in QGraphicsView, and is suitable for scenes that either require a fixed frame rate, or where the viewport is otherwise updated externally.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QGraphicsView.ViewportUpdateMode.SmartViewportUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>QGraphicsView will attempt to find an optimal update mode by analyzing the areas that require a redraw.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGridLayout">
            <summary>
            The QGridLayout class lays out widgets in a grid.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QGridLayout takes the space made available to it (by its parent layout or by the parentWidget()), divides it up into rows and columns, and puts each widget it manages into the correct cell.</para>
            <para>Columns and rows behave identically; we will discuss columns, but there are equivalent functions for rows.</para>
            <para>Each column has a minimum width and a stretch factor. The minimum width is the greatest of that set using setColumnMinimumWidth() and the minimum width of each widget in that column. The stretch factor is set using setColumnStretch() and determines how much of the available space the column will get over and above its necessary minimum.</para>
            <para>Normally, each managed widget or layout is put into a cell of its own using addWidget(). It is also possible for a widget to occupy multiple cells using the row and column spanning overloads of addItem() and addWidget(). If you do this, QGridLayout will guess how to distribute the size over the columns/rows (based on the stretch factors).</para>
            <para>To remove a widget from a layout, call removeWidget(). Calling QWidget::hide() on a widget also effectively removes the widget from the layout until QWidget::show() is called.</para>
            <para>This illustration shows a fragment of a dialog with a five-column, three-row grid (the grid is shown overlaid in magenta):</para>
            <para>Columns 0, 2 and 4 in this dialog fragment are made up of a QLabel, a QLineEdit, and a QListBox. Columns 1 and 3 are placeholders made with setColumnMinimumWidth(). Row 0 consists of three QLabel objects, row 1 of three QLineEdit objects and row 2 of three QListBox objects. We used placeholder columns (1 and 3) to get the right amount of space between the columns.</para>
            <para>Note that the columns and rows are not equally wide or tall. If you want two columns to have the same width, you must set their minimum widths and stretch factors to be the same yourself. You do this using setColumnMinimumWidth() and setColumnStretch().</para>
            <para>If the QGridLayout is not the top-level layout (i.e. does not manage all of the widget's area and children), you must add it to its parent layout when you create it, but before you do anything with it. The normal way to add a layout is by calling addLayout() on the parent layout.</para>
            <para>Once you have added your layout you can start putting widgets and other layouts into the cells of your grid layout using addWidget(), addItem(), and addLayout().</para>
            <para>QGridLayout also includes two margin widths: the contents margin and the spacing(). The contents margin is the width of the reserved space along each of the QGridLayout's four sides. The spacing() is the width of the automatically allocated spacing between neighboring boxes.</para>
            <para>The default contents margin values are provided by the style. The default value Qt styles specify is 9 for child widgets and 11 for windows. The spacing defaults to the same as the margin width for a top-level layout, or to the same as the parent layout.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QBoxLayout, QStackedLayout, Layout Management, and Basic Layouts Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new grid layout.</para>
            <para>You must insert this grid into another layout. You can insert widgets and layouts into this layout at any time, but laying out will not be performed before this is inserted into another layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QGridLayout with parent widget, parent. The layout has one row and one column initially, and will expand when new items are inserted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds item at position row, column, spanning rowSpan rows and columnSpan columns, and aligns it according to alignment. If rowSpan and/or columnSpan is -1, then the item will extend to the bottom and/or right edge, respectively. The layout takes ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use addLayout() or addWidget() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddLayout(QtGui.QLayout,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Places the layout at position (row, column) in the grid. The top-left position is (0, 0).</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            <para>A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to fill the available space but should be sized according to sizeHint().</para>
            <para>layout becomes a child of the grid layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddLayout(QtGui.QLayout,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Places the layout at position (row, column) in the grid. The top-left position is (0, 0).</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            <para>A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to fill the available space but should be sized according to sizeHint().</para>
            <para>layout becomes a child of the grid layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.</para>
            <para>The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.CellRect(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the geometry of the cell with row row and column column in the grid. Returns an invalid rectangle if row or column is outside the grid.</para>
            <para>Warning: in the current version of Qt this function does not return valid results until setGeometry() has been called, i.e. after the parentWidget() is visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in this grid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.ColumnMinimumWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column spacing for column column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnMinimumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.ColumnStretch(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor for column column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.GetItemPosition(System.Int32,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position information of the item with the given index.</para>
            <para>The variables passed as row and column are updated with the position of the item in the layout, and the rowSpan and columnSpan variables are updated with the vertical and horizontal spans of the item.</para>
            <para>See also itemAtPosition() and itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.HasHeightForWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.ItemAtPosition(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout item that occupies cell (row, column), or 0 if the cell is empty.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also getItemPosition() and indexOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.MinimumHeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in this grid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.RowMinimumHeight(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum width set for row row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowMinimumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.RowStretch(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stretch factor for row row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.SetColumnMinimumWidth(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the minimum width of column column to minSize pixels.</para>
            <para>See also columnMinimumWidth() and setRowMinimumHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.SetColumnStretch(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor of column column to stretch. The first column is number 0.</para>
            <para>The stretch factor is relative to the other columns in this grid. Columns with a higher stretch factor take more of the available space.</para>
            <para>The default stretch factor is 0. If the stretch factor is 0 and no other column in this table can grow at all, the column may still grow.</para>
            <para>An alternative approach is to add spacing using addItem() with a QSpacerItem.</para>
            <para>See also columnStretch() and setRowStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.SetRowMinimumHeight(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the minimum height of row row to minSize pixels.</para>
            <para>See also rowMinimumHeight() and setColumnMinimumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.SetRowStretch(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the stretch factor of row row to stretch. The first row is number 0.</para>
            <para>The stretch factor is relative to the other rows in this grid. Rows with a higher stretch factor take more of the available space.</para>
            <para>The default stretch factor is 0. If the stretch factor is 0 and no other row in this table can grow at all, the row may still grow.</para>
            <para>See also rowStretch(), setRowMinimumHeight(), and setColumnStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.TakeAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGridLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the grid layout. Geometry management is terminated if this is a top-level grid.</para>
            <para>The layout's widgets aren't destroyed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGridLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGridLayout.OriginCorner">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the corner that's used for the grid's origin, i.e. for position (0, 0).</para>
            <para>Sets the grid's origin corner, i.e. position (0, 0), to corner.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGridLayout.spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>If the vertical spacing is equal to the horizontal spacing, this function returns that value; otherwise it return -1.</para>
            <para>This function sets both the vertical and horizontal spacing to spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QGroupBox">
            <summary>
            The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A group box provides a frame, a title and a keyboard shortcut, and displays various other widgets inside itself. The title is on top, the keyboard shortcut moves keyboard focus to one of the group box's child widgets.</para>
            <para>QGroupBox also lets you set the title (normally set in the constructor) and the title's alignment. Group boxes can be checkable; child widgets in checkable group boxes are enabled or disabled depending on whether or not the group box is checked.</para>
            <para>You can minimize the space consumption of a group box by enabling the flat property. In most styles, enabling this property results in the removal of the left, right and bottom edges of the frame.</para>
            <para>QGroupBox doesn't automatically lay out the child widgets (which are often QCheckBoxes or QRadioButtons but can be any widgets). The following example shows how we can set up a QGroupBox with a layout:</para>
            <para>     QGroupBox *groupBox = new QGroupBox(tr(&amp;quot;Exclusive Radio Buttons&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QRadioButton *radio1 = new QRadioButton(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Radio button 1&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     QRadioButton *radio2 = new QRadioButton(tr(&amp;quot;R&amp;amp;adio button 2&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     QRadioButton *radio3 = new QRadioButton(tr(&amp;quot;Ra&amp;amp;dio button 3&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     radio1-&amp;gt;setChecked(true);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QVBoxLayout *vbox = new QVBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     vbox-&amp;gt;addWidget(radio1);</para>
            <para>     vbox-&amp;gt;addWidget(radio2);</para>
            <para>     vbox-&amp;gt;addWidget(radio3);</para>
            <para>     vbox-&amp;gt;addStretch(1);</para>
            <para>     groupBox-&amp;gt;setLayout(vbox);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style group box.	A Macintosh style group box.	A Plastique style group box.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QButtonGroup and Group Box Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a group box widget with the given parent but with no title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a group box with the given title and parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnClicked(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the check box is activated (i.e. pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), or when the shortcut key is typed, Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setChecked().</para>
            <para>If the check box is checked checked is true; it is false if the check box is unchecked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also checkable, toggled(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QGroupBox. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionGroupBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.OnToggled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If the group box is checkable, this signal is emitted when the check box is toggled. on is true if the check box is checked; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also checkable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QGroupBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the group box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGroupBox.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the check box is activated (i.e. pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), or when the shortcut key is typed, Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setChecked().</para>
            <para>If the check box is checked checked is true; it is false if the check box is unchecked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also checkable, toggled(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QGroupBox.Toggled">
            <summary>
            <para>If the group box is checkable, this signal is emitted when the check box is toggled. on is true if the check box is checked; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also checkable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGroupBox.Title">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the group box title text.</para>
            <para>The group box title text will have a keyboard shortcut if the title contains an ampersand ('&amp;') followed by a letter.</para>
            <para> g-&gt;setTitle(&quot;&amp;User information&quot;);</para>
            <para>In the example above, Alt+U moves the keyboard focus to the group box. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;&amp;').</para>
            <para>There is no default title text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGroupBox.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the group box title.</para>
            <para>Most styles place the title at the top of the frame. The horizontal alignment of the title can be specified using single values from the following list:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft aligns the title text with the left-hand side of the group box.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight aligns the title text with the right-hand side of the group box.</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter aligns the title text with the horizontal center of the group box.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The default alignment is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGroupBox.Flat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame.</para>
            <para>A group box usually consists of a surrounding frame with a title at the top. If this property is enabled, only the top part of the frame is drawn in most styles; otherwise the whole frame is drawn.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is disabled; i.e. group boxes are not flat unless explicitly specified.</para>
            <para>Note: In some styles, flat and non-flat group boxes have similar representations and may not be as distinguishable as they are in other styles.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGroupBox.Checkable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, the group box displays its title using a checkbox in place of an ordinary label. If the checkbox is checked, the group box's children are enabled; otherwise they are disabled and inaccessible.</para>
            <para>By default, group boxes are not checkable.</para>
            <para>If this property is enabled for a group box, it will also be initially checked to ensure that its contents are enabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QGroupBox.Checked">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the group box is checked.</para>
            <para>If the group box is checkable, it is displayed with a check box. If the check box is checked, the group box's children are enabled; otherwise the children are disabled and are inaccessible to the user.</para>
            <para>By default, checkable group boxes are also checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QHBoxLayout">
            <summary>
            The QHBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is used to construct horizontal box layout objects. See QBoxLayout for details.</para>
            <para>The simplest use of the class is like this:</para>
            <para>     QWidget *window = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button1 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;One&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button2 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Two&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button3 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Three&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button4 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Four&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button5 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Five&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QHBoxLayout *layout = new QHBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button1);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button2);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button3);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button4);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button5);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     window-&amp;gt;setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para>     window-&amp;gt;show();</para>
            <para>First, we create the widgets we want in the layout. Then, we create the QHBoxLayout object and add the widgets into the layout. Finally, we call QWidget::setLayout() to install the QHBoxLayout object onto the widget. At that point, the widgets in the layout are reparented to have window as their parent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QVBoxLayout, QGridLayout, QStackedLayout, Layout Management, and Basic Layouts Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHBoxLayout.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new horizontal box. You must add it to another layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHBoxLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new top-level horizontal box with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHBoxLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this box layout.</para>
            <para>The layout's widgets aren't destroyed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QHeaderView">
            <summary>
            The QHeaderView class provides a header row or header column for item views.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QHeaderView displays the headers used in item views such as the QTableView and QTreeView classes. It takes the place of Qt3's QHeader class previously used for the same purpose, but uses the Qt's model/view architecture for consistency with the item view classes.</para>
            <para>The QHeaderView class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>The header gets the data for each section from the model using the QAbstractItemModel::headerData() function. You can set the data by using QAbstractItemModel::setHeaderData().</para>
            <para>Each header has an orientation() and a number of sections, given by the count() function. A section refers to a part of the header - either a row or a column, depending on the orientation.</para>
            <para>Sections can be moved and resized using moveSection() and resizeSection(); they can also be hidden and shown with hideSection() and showSection().</para>
            <para>Each section of a header is described by a section ID, specified by its section(), and can be located at a particular visualIndex() in the header. A section can have a sort indicator set with setSortIndicator(); this indicates whether the items in the associated item view will be sorted in the order given by the section.</para>
            <para>For a horizontal header the section is equivalent to a column in the model, and for a vertical header the section is equivalent to a row in the model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Moving Header Sections</para>
            <para>A header can be fixed in place, or made movable with setMovable(). It can be made clickable with setClickable(), and has resizing behavior in accordance with setResizeMode().</para>
            <para>Note: Double-clicking on a header to resize a section only applies for visible rows.</para>
            <para>A header will emit sectionMoved() if the user moves a section, sectionResized() if the user resizes a section, and sectionClicked() as well as sectionHandleDoubleClicked() in response to mouse clicks. A header will also emit sectionCountChanged() and sectionAutoResize().</para>
            <para>You can identify a section using the logicalIndex() and logicalIndexAt() functions, or by its index position, using the visualIndex() and visualIndexAt() functions. The visual index will change if a section is moved, but the logical index will not change.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Appearance</para>
            <para>QTableWidget and QTableView create default headers. If you want the headers to be visible, you can use setVisible().</para>
            <para>Not all ItemDataRoles will have an effect on a QHeaderView. If you need to draw other roles, you can subclass QHeaderView and reimplement paintEvent(). QHeaderView respects the following item data roles: TextAlignmentRole, DisplayRole, FontRole, DecorationRole, ForegroundRole, and BackgroundRole.</para>
            <para>Note: Each header renders the data for each section itself, and does not rely on a delegate. As a result, calling a header's setItemDelegate() function will have no effect.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming, QListView, QTableView, and QTreeView.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new generic header with the given orientation and parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of sections in the header.</para>
            <para>See also sectionCountChanged() and length().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnGeometriesChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the header's geometries have changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.HeaderDataChanged(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the changed header sections with the given orientation, from logicalFirst to logicalLast inclusive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.HiddenSectionCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of sections in the header that has been hidden.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setSectionHidden() and isSectionHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.HideSection(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the section specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also showSection(), isSectionHidden(), hiddenSectionCount(), and setSectionHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.HorizontalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().</para>
            <para>Returns the horizontal offset of the header. This is 0 for vertical headers.</para>
            <para>See also offset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QHeaderView. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionHeader, but do not want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.IsClickable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the header is clickable; otherwise returns false. A clickable header could be set up to allow the user to change the representation of the data in the view related to the header.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.IsMovable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the header can be moved by the user; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setMovable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.IsSectionHidden(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the section specified by logicalIndex is explicitly hidden from the user; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also hideSection(), showSection(), setSectionHidden(), and hiddenSectionCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length along the orientation of the header.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint(), setResizeMode(), and offset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.LogicalIndex(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the logicalIndex for the section at the given visualIndex position, or -1 if visualIndex &lt; 0 or visualIndex &gt;= QHeaderView::count().</para>
            <para>Note that the visualIndex is not affected by hidden sections.</para>
            <para>See also visualIndex() and sectionPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.LogicalIndexAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the logical index of the section at the position given in pos. If the header is horizontal the x-coordinate will be used, otherwise the y-coordinate will be used to find the logical index.</para>
            <para>See also sectionPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.LogicalIndexAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the section that covers the given position in the viewport.</para>
            <para>See also visualIndexAt() and isSectionHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.LogicalIndexAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the logical index of the section at the given coordinate. If the header is horizontal x will be used, otherwise y will be used to find the logical index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.MoveSection(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the section at visual index from to occupy visual index to.</para>
            <para>See also sectionsMoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the orientation of the header.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::Orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.PaintSection(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Paints the section specified by the given logicalIndex, using the given painter and rect.</para>
            <para>Normally, you do not have to call this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.resizeMode(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the resize mode that applies to the section specified by the given logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setResizeMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeSection(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the section specified by logicalIndex to size measured in pixels.</para>
            <para>See also sectionResized(), resizeMode(), and sectionSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeSections">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the sections according to their size hints. Normally, you do not have to call this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeSections(QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the sections according to the given mode, ignoring the current resize mode.</para>
            <para>See also resizeMode() and sectionResized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.RestoreState(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the state of this header view. This function returns true if the state was restored; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also saveState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SaveState">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the current state of this header view.</para>
            <para>To restore the saved state, pass the return value to restoreState().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also restoreState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionAutoResize(System.Int32,QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is automatically resized. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, and the resize mode by mode.</para>
            <para>See also setResizeMode() and stretchLastSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>Note that the sectionPressed signal will also be emitted.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable() and sectionPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionCountChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of sections changes, i.e., when sections are added or deleted. The original count is specified by oldCount, and the new count by newCount.</para>
            <para>See also count(), length(), and headerDataChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionDoubleClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionEntered(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cursor moves over the section and the left mouse button is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable() and sectionPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionHandleDoubleClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is moved. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, the old index by oldVisualIndex, and the new index position by newVisualIndex.</para>
            <para>See also moveSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the section position of the given logicalIndex, or -1 if the section is hidden. The position is measured in pixels from the first visible item's top-left corner to the top-left corner of the item with logicalIndex. The measurement is along the x-axis for horizontal headers and along the y-axis for vertical headers.</para>
            <para>See also sectionViewportPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionPressed(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSectionResized(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is resized. The section's logical number is specified by logicalIndex, the old size by oldSize, and the new size by newSize.</para>
            <para>See also resizeSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionSize(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width (or height for vertical headers) of the given logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also length(), setResizeMode(), and defaultSectionSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionSizeFromContents(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the contents of the section specified by the given logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also defaultSectionSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionSizeHint(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a suitable size hint for the section specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint(), defaultSectionSize(), minimumSectionSize(), and Qt::SizeHintRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionViewportPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the section viewport position of the given logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>If the section is hidden, the return value is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also sectionPosition() and isSectionHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionsAboutToBeRemoved(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when sections are removed from the parent. logicalFirst and logicalLast signify where the sections were removed.</para>
            <para>If only one section is removed, logicalFirst and logicalLast will be the same.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionsHidden">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if sections in the header has been hidden; otherwise returns false;</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setSectionHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionsInserted(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called when sections are inserted into the parent. logicalFirst and logicalLast indices signify where the new sections were inserted.</para>
            <para>If only one section is inserted, logicalFirst and logicalLast will be the same.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionsMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if sections in the header has been moved; otherwise returns false;</para>
            <para>See also moveSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetClickable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If clickable is true, the header will respond to single clicks.</para>
            <para>See also isClickable(), sectionClicked(), sectionPressed(), and setSortIndicatorShown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetMovable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If movable is true, the header may be moved by the user; otherwise it is fixed in place.</para>
            <para>See also isMovable() and sectionMoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetOffsetToLastSection">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the offset to make the last section visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setOffset(), sectionPosition(), and setOffsetToSectionPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetOffsetToSectionPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the offset to the start of the section at the given visualIndex.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setOffset() and sectionPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetResizeMode(QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the constraints on how the header can be resized to those described by the given mode.</para>
            <para>See also resizeMode(), length(), sectionResized(), and sectionAutoResize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetResizeMode(System.Int32,QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the constraints on how the section specified by logicalIndex in the header can be resized to those described by the given mode. The logical index should exist at the time this function is called.</para>
            <para>Note: This setting will be ignored for the last section if the stretchLastSection property is set to true. This is the default for the horizontal headers provided by QTreeView.</para>
            <para>See also setStretchLastSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetSectionHidden(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true the section specified by logicalIndex is hidden; otherwise the section is shown.</para>
            <para>See also isSectionHidden() and hiddenSectionCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetSelection(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().</para>
            <para>Selects the items in the given rect according to the specified flags.</para>
            <para>The base class implementation does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SetSortIndicator(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the sort indicator for the section specified by the given logicalIndex in the direction specified by order, and removes the sort indicator from any other section that was showing it.</para>
            <para>logicalIndex may be -1, in which case no sort indicator will be shown and the model will return to its natural, unsorted order. Note that not all models support this and may even crash in this case.</para>
            <para>See also sortIndicatorSection() and sortIndicatorOrder().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.ShowSection(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the section specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also hideSection(), isSectionHidden(), hiddenSectionCount(), and setSectionHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns a suitable size hint for this header.</para>
            <para>See also sectionSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnSortIndicatorChanged(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the section containing the sort indicator or the order indicated is changed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex and the sort order is specified by order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setSortIndicator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SortIndicatorOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the order for the sort indicator. If no section has a sort indicator the return value of this function is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SortIndicatorSection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the logical index of the section that has a sort indicator. By default this is section 0.</para>
            <para>See also setSortIndicator(), sortIndicatorOrder(), and setSortIndicatorShown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.StretchSectionCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of sections that are set to resize mode stretch. In views, this can be used to see if the headerview needs to resize the sections when the view's geometry changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also stretchLastSection and resizeMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.SwapSections(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps the section at visual index first with the section at visual index second.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also moveSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.VerticalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().</para>
            <para>Returns the vertical offset of the header. This is 0 for horizontal headers.</para>
            <para>See also offset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.OnViewportEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.VisualIndex(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visual index position of the section specified by the given logicalIndex, or -1 otherwise.</para>
            <para>Hidden sections still have valid visual indexes.</para>
            <para>See also logicalIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.VisualIndexAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visual index of the section that covers the given position in the viewport.</para>
            <para>See also logicalIndexAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHeaderView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is moved. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, the old index by oldVisualIndex, and the new index position by newVisualIndex.</para>
            <para>See also moveSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionResized">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is resized. The section's logical number is specified by logicalIndex, the old size by oldSize, and the new size by newSize.</para>
            <para>See also resizeSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>Note that the sectionPressed signal will also be emitted.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable() and sectionPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cursor moves over the section and the left mouse button is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable() and sectionPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionDoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionCountChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of sections changes, i.e., when sections are added or deleted. The original count is specified by oldCount, and the new count by newCount.</para>
            <para>See also count(), length(), and headerDataChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionHandleDoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SectionAutoResize">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is automatically resized. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, and the resize mode by mode.</para>
            <para>See also setResizeMode() and stretchLastSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.GeometriesChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the header's geometries have changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QHeaderView.SortIndicatorChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the section containing the sort indicator or the order indicated is changed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex and the sort order is specified by order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setSortIndicator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.Offset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the offset of the header: this is the header's left-most (or top-most for vertical headers) visible pixel.</para>
            <para>Sets the header's offset to offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.ShowSortIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the sort indicator is shown.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.HighlightSections">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the sections containing selected items are highlighted.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.StretchLastSection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the last visible section in the header takes up all the available space.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>Note: The horizontal headers provided by QTreeView are configured with this property set to true, ensuring that the view does not waste any of the space assigned to it for its header. If this value is set to true, this property will override the resize mode set on the last section in the header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.CascadingSectionResizes">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether interactive resizing will be cascaded to the following sections once the section being resized by the user has reached its minimum size.</para>
            <para>This property only affects sections that have Interactive as their resize mode.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.DefaultSectionSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default size of the header sections before resizing.</para>
            <para>This property only affects sections that have Interactive or Fixed as their resize mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.MinimumSectionSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum size of the header sections.</para>
            <para>The minimum section size is the smallest section size allowed. If the minimum section size is set to -1, QHeaderView will use the maximum of the global strut or the font metrics size.</para>
            <para>This property is honored by all resize modes.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QHeaderView.DefaultAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default alignment of the text in each header section.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The resize mode specifies the behavior of the header sections. It can be set on the entire header view or on individual sections using setResizeMode().</para>
            <para>The following values are obsolete:</para>
            <para>See also setResizeMode(), stretchLastSection, and minimumSectionSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode.Custom">
            <summary>
            <para>Use Fixed instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode.Fixed">
            <summary>
            <para>The user cannot resize the section. The section can only be resized programmatically using resizeSection(). The section size defaults to defaultSectionSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode.Interactive">
            <summary>
            <para>The user can resize the section. The section can also be resized programmatically using resizeSection(). The section size defaults to defaultSectionSize. (See also cascadingSectionResizes.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode.ResizeToContents">
            <summary>
            <para>QHeaderView will automatically resize the section to its optimal size based on the contents of the entire column or row. The size cannot be changed by the user or programmatically. (This value was introduced in 4.2)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode.Stretch">
            <summary>
            <para>QHeaderView will automatically resize the section to fill the available space. The size cannot be changed by the user or programmatically.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QHelpEvent">
            <summary>
            The QHelpEvent class provides an event that is used to request helpful information about a particular point in a widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This event can be intercepted in applications to provide tooltips or &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; help for custom widgets. The type() can be either QEvent::ToolTip or QEvent::WhatsThis.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QToolTip, QWhatsThis, QStatusTipEvent, and QWhatsThisClickedEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QHelpEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a help event with the given type corresponding to the widget-relative position specified by pos and the global position specified by globalPos.</para>
            <para>type must be either QEvent::ToolTip or QEvent::WhatsThis.</para>
            <para>See also pos() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a help event with the given type corresponding to the widget-relative position specified by pos and the global position specified by globalPos.</para>
            <para>type must be either QEvent::ToolTip or QEvent::WhatsThis.</para>
            <para>See also pos() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.GlobalPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position when the event was generated in global coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), globalX(), and globalY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.GlobalX">
            <summary>
            <para>Same as globalPos().x().</para>
            <para>See also x(), globalY(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.GlobalY">
            <summary>
            <para>Same as globalPos().y().</para>
            <para>See also y(), globalX(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse cursor position when the event was generated, relative to the widget to which the event is dispatched.</para>
            <para>See also globalPos(), x(), and y().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Same as pos().x().</para>
            <para>See also y(), pos(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHelpEvent.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Same as pos().y().</para>
            <para>See also x(), pos(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QHideEvent">
            <summary>
            The QHideEvent class provides an event which is sent after a widget is hidden.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This event is sent just before QWidget::hide() returns, and also when a top-level window has been hidden (iconified) by the user.</para>
            <para>If spontaneous() is true, the event originated outside the application. In this case, the user hid the window using the window manager controls, either by iconifying the window or by switching to another virtual desktop where the window isn't visible. The window will become hidden but not withdrawn. If the window was iconified, QWidget::isMinimized() returns true.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QShowEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHideEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QHideEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHideEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QHideEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QHoverEvent">
            <summary>
            The QHoverEvent class contains parameters that describe a mouse event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Mouse events occur when a mouse cursor is moved into, out of, or within a widget, and if the widget has the Qt::WA_Hover attribute.</para>
            <para>The function pos() gives the current cursor position, while oldPos() gives the old mouse position.</para>
            <para>There are a few similarities between the events QEvent::HoverEnter and QEvent::HoverLeave, and the events QEvent::Enter and QEvent::Leave. However, they are slightly different because we do an update() in the event handler of HoverEnter and HoverLeave.</para>
            <para>QEvent::HoverMove is also slightly different from QEvent::MouseMove. Let us consider a top-level window A containing a child B which in turn contains a child C (all with mouse tracking enabled):</para>
            <para>Now, if you move the cursor from the top to the bottom in the middle of A, you will get the following QEvent::MouseMove events:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A::MouseMove</para>
            <para>B::MouseMove</para>
            <para>C::MouseMove</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You will get the same events for QEvent::HoverMove, except that the event always propagates to the top-level regardless whether the event is accepted or not. It will only stop propagating with the Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation attribute.</para>
            <para>In this case the events will occur in the following way:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A::HoverMove</para>
            <para>A::HoverMove, B::HoverMove</para>
            <para>A::HoverMove, B::HoverMove, C::HoverMove</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHoverEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QHoverEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a hover event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be QEvent::HoverEnter, QEvent::HoverLeave, or QEvent::HoverMove.</para>
            <para>The pos is the current mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget, while oldPos is the previous mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHoverEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a hover event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be QEvent::HoverEnter, QEvent::HoverLeave, or QEvent::HoverMove.</para>
            <para>The pos is the current mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget, while oldPos is the previous mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHoverEvent.OldPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the previous position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event. If there is no previous position, oldPos() will return the same position as pos().</para>
            <para>On QEvent::HoverEnter events, this position will always be QPoint(-1, -1).</para>
            <para>See also pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QHoverEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>On QEvent::HoverLeave events, this position will always be QPoint(-1, -1).</para>
            <para>See also oldPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIconDragEvent">
            <summary>
            The QIconDragEvent class indicates that a main icon drag has begun.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Icon drag events are sent to widgets when the main icon of a window has been dragged away. On Mac OS X, this happens when the proxy icon of a window is dragged off the title bar.</para>
            <para>It is normal to begin using drag and drop in response to this event.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Drag and Drop, QMimeData, and QDrag.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconDragEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an icon drag event object with the accept flag set to false.</para>
            <para>See also accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconDragEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QIconDragEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an icon drag event object with the accept flag set to false.</para>
            <para>See also accept().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIconEngine">
            <summary>
            The QIconEngine class provides an abstract base class for QIcon renderers.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use QIconEngineV2 instead.</para>
            <para>An icon engine provides the rendering functions for a QIcon. Each icon has a corresponding icon engine that is responsible for drawing the icon with a requested size, mode and state.</para>
            <para>The icon is rendered by the paint() function, and the icon can additionally be obtained as a pixmap with the pixmap() function (the default implementation simply uses paint() to achieve this). The addPixmap() function can be used to add new pixmaps to the icon engine, and is used by QIcon to add specialized custom pixmaps.</para>
            <para>The paint(), pixmap(), and addPixmap() functions are all virtual, and can therefore be reimplemented in subclasses of QIconEngine.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QIconEngineV2 and QIconEnginePlugin.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngine.ActualSize(QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the actual size of the icon the engine provides for the requested size, mode and state. The default implementation returns the given size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngine.AddFile(System.String,QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Called by QIcon::addFile(). Adds a specialized pixmap from the file with the given fileName, size, mode and state. The default pixmap-based engine stores any supplied file names, and it loads the pixmaps on demand instead of using scaled pixmaps if the size of a pixmap matches the size of icon requested. Custom icon engines that implement scalable vector formats are free to ignores any extra files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngine.AddPixmap(QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Called by QIcon::addPixmap(). Adds a specialized pixmap for the given mode and state. The default pixmap-based engine stores any supplied pixmaps, and it uses them instead of scaled pixmaps if the size of a pixmap matches the size of icon requested. Custom icon engines that implement scalable vector formats are free to ignores any extra pixmaps.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngine.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Uses the given painter to paint the icon with the required mode and state into the rectangle rect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngine.Pixmap(QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon as a pixmap with the required size, mode, and state. The default implementation creates a new pixmap and calls paint() to fill it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngine.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the icon engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIconEnginePlugin">
            <summary>
            The QIconEnginePlugin class provides an abstract base for custom QIconEngine plugins.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use QIconEnginePluginV2 instead.</para>
            <para>The icon engine plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy to create custom icon engines that can be loaded dynamically into applications through QIcon. QIcon uses the file or resource name's suffix to determine what icon engine to use.</para>
            <para>Writing a icon engine plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and create(), and exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also How to Create Qt Plugins.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePlugin.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a icon engine plugin with the given parent. This is invoked automatically by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePlugin.Create(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QIconEngine object for the icon with the given filename.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePlugin.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of icon engine keys that this plugin supports. The keys correspond to the suffix of the file or resource name used when the plugin was created. Keys are case insensitive.</para>
            <para>See also create().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePlugin.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the icon engine plugin.</para>
            <para>You never have to call this explicitly. Qt destroys a plugin automatically when it is no longer used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIconEnginePluginV2">
            <summary>
            The QIconEnginePluginV2 class provides an abstract base for custom QIconEngineV2 plugins.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Icon engine plugins produces QIconEngines for QIcons; an icon engine is used to render the icon. The keys that identifies the engines the plugin can create are suffixes of icon filenames; they are returned by keys(). The create() function receives the icon filename to return an engine for; it should return 0 if it cannot produce an engine for the file.</para>
            <para>Writing an icon engine plugin is achieved by inheriting QIconEnginePluginV2, reimplementing keys() and create(), and adding the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            <para>You should ensure that you do not duplicate keys. Qt will query the plugins for icon engines in the order in which the plugins are found during plugin search (see the plugins overview document).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also How to Create Qt Plugins.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePluginV2.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a icon engine plugin with the given parent. This is invoked automatically by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePluginV2.Create(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QIconEngine object for the icon with the given filename.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePluginV2.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of icon engine keys that this plugin supports. The keys correspond to the suffix of the file or resource name used when the plugin was created. Keys are case insensitive.</para>
            <para>See also create().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEnginePluginV2.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the icon engine plugin.</para>
            <para>You never have to call this explicitly. Qt destroys a plugin automatically when it is no longer used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIconEngineV2">
            <summary>
            The QIconEngineV2 class provides an abstract base class for QIcon renderers.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An icon engine renders QIcons. With icon engines, you can customize icons. Qt provides a default engine that makes icons adhere to the current style by scaling the icons and providing a disabled appearance.</para>
            <para>An engine is installed on an icon either through a QIcon constructor or through a QIconEnginePluginV2. The plugins are used by Qt if a specific engine is not given when the icon is created. See the QIconEngineV2 class description to learn how to create icon engine plugins.</para>
            <para>An icon engine provides the rendering functions for a QIcon. Each icon has a corresponding icon engine that is responsible for drawing the icon with a requested size, mode and state.</para>
            <para>QIconEngineV2 extends the API of QIconEngine to allow streaming of the icon engine contents, and should be used instead of QIconEngine for implementing new icon engines.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QIconEnginePluginV2.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.AvailableSizes(QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QIcon.State)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns sizes of all images that are contained in the engine for the specific mode and state.</para>
            <para>Note: This is a helper method and the actual work is done by virtual_hook() method, hence this method depends on icon engine support and may not work with all icon engines.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.Clone">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a clone of this icon engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.IconName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name used to create the engine, if available.</para>
            <para>Note: This is a helper method and the actual work is done by virtual_hook() method, hence this method depends on icon engine support and may not work with all icon engines.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.Key">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a key that identifies this icon engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.Read(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads icon engine contents from the QDataStream in. Returns true if the contents were read; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>QIconEngineV2's default implementation always return false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.Write(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the contents of this engine to the QDataStream out. Returns true if the contents were written; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>QIconEngineV2's default implementation always return false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.AvailableSizesArgument.Mode">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the requested mode of an image.</para>
            <para>See also QIcon::Mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.AvailableSizesArgument.Sizes">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds image sizes that are available with specified mode and state. This is an output parameter and is filled after call to virtual_hook(). Engines that work in terms of a scalable, vectorial format normally return an empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.AvailableSizesArgument.State">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the requested state of an image.</para>
            <para>See also QIcon::State.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.IconEngineHook">
            <summary>
            <para>These enum values are used for virtual_hook() to allow additional queries to icon engine without breaking binary compatibility.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also virtual_hook().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.IconEngineHook.AvailableSizesHook">
            <summary>
            <para>Allows to query the sizes of the contained pixmaps for pixmap-based engines. The data argument of the virtual_hook() function is a AvailableSizesArgument pointer that should be filled with icon sizes. Engines that work in terms of a scalable, vectorial format normally return an empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QIconEngineV2.IconEngineHook.IconNameHook">
            <summary>
            <para>Allows to query the name used to create the icon, for example when instantiating an icon using QIcon::fromTheme().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImage">
            <summary>
            The QImage class provides a hardware-independent image representation that allows direct access to the pixel data, and can be used as a paint device.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt provides four classes for handling image data: QImage, QPixmap, QBitmap and QPicture. QImage is designed and optimized for I/O, and for direct pixel access and manipulation, while QPixmap is designed and optimized for showing images on screen. QBitmap is only a convenience class that inherits QPixmap, ensuring a depth of 1. Finally, the QPicture class is a paint device that records and replays QPainter commands.</para>
            <para>Because QImage is a QPaintDevice subclass, QPainter can be used to draw directly onto images. When using QPainter on a QImage, the painting can be performed in another thread than the current GUI thread.</para>
            <para>The QImage class supports several image formats described by the Format enum. These include monochrome, 8-bit, 32-bit and alpha-blended images which are available in all versions of Qt 4.x.</para>
            <para>QImage provides a collection of functions that can be used to obtain a variety of information about the image. There are also several functions that enables transformation of the image.</para>
            <para>QImage objects can be passed around by value since the QImage class uses implicit data sharing. QImage objects can also be streamed and compared.</para>
            <para>Note: If you would like to load QImage objects in a static build of Qt, refer to the Plugin HowTo.</para>
            <para>Warning: Painting on a QImage with the format QImage::Format_Indexed8 is not supported.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Reading and Writing Image Files</para>
            <para>QImage provides several ways of loading an image file: The file can be loaded when constructing the QImage object, or by using the load() or loadFromData() functions later on. QImage also provides the static fromData() function, constructing a QImage from the given data. When loading an image, the file name can either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See The Qt Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>Simply call the save() function to save a QImage object.</para>
            <para>The complete list of supported file formats are available through the QImageReader::supportedImageFormats() and QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() functions. New file formats can be added as plugins. By default, Qt supports the following formats:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FormatDescriptionQt's support</para>
            <para>BMP	Windows Bitmap	Read/write</para>
            <para>GIF	Graphic Interchange Format (optional)	Read</para>
            <para>JPG	Joint Photographic Experts Group	Read/write</para>
            <para>JPEG	Joint Photographic Experts Group	Read/write</para>
            <para>PNG	Portable Network Graphics	Read/write</para>
            <para>PBM	Portable Bitmap	Read</para>
            <para>PGM	Portable Graymap	Read</para>
            <para>PPM	Portable Pixmap	Read/write</para>
            <para>TIFF	Tagged Image File Format	Read/write</para>
            <para>XBM	X11 Bitmap	Read/write</para>
            <para>XPM	X11 Pixmap	Read/write</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Image Information</para>
            <para>QImage provides a collection of functions that can be used to obtain a variety of information about the image:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Available Functions</para>
            <para>Geometry	The size(), width(), height(), dotsPerMeterX(), and dotsPerMeterY() functions provide information about the image size and aspect ratio.The rect() function returns the image's enclosing rectangle. The valid() function tells if a given pair of coordinates is within this rectangle. The offset() function returns the number of pixels by which the image is intended to be offset by when positioned relative to other images, which also can be manipulated using the setOffset() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Colors	The color of a pixel can be retrieved by passing its coordinates to the pixel() function. The pixel() function returns the color as a QRgb value indepedent of the image's format.In case of monochrome and 8-bit images, the colorCount() and colorTable() functions provide information about the color components used to store the image data: The colorTable() function returns the image's entire color table. To obtain a single entry, use the pixelIndex() function to retrieve the pixel index for a given pair of coordinates, then use the color() function to retrieve the color. Note that if you create an 8-bit image manually, you have to set a valid color table on the image as well.</para>
            <para>The hasAlphaChannel() function tells if the image's format respects the alpha channel, or not. The allGray() and isGrayscale() functions tell whether an image's colors are all shades of gray.</para>
            <para>See also the Pixel Manipulation and Image Transformations sections.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Text	The text() function returns the image text associated with the given text key. An image's text keys can be retrieved using the textKeys() function. Use the setText() function to alter an image's text.</para>
            <para>Low-level information	The depth() function returns the depth of the image. The supported depths are 1 (monochrome), 8, 16, 24 and 32 bits. The bitPlaneCount() function tells how many of those bits that are used. For more information see the Image Formats section.The format(), bytesPerLine(), and byteCount() functions provide low-level information about the data stored in the image.</para>
            <para>The cacheKey() function returns a number that uniquely identifies the contents of this QImage object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Pixel Manipulation</para>
            <para>The functions used to manipulate an image's pixels depend on the image format. The reason is that monochrome and 8-bit images are index-based and use a color lookup table, while 32-bit images store ARGB values directly. For more information on image formats, see the Image Formats section.</para>
            <para>In case of a 32-bit image, the setPixel() function can be used to alter the color of the pixel at the given coordinates to any other color specified as an ARGB quadruplet. To make a suitable QRgb value, use the qRgb() (adding a default alpha component to the given RGB values, i.e. creating an opaque color) or qRgba() function. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>32-bit</para>
            <para>	 QImage image(3, 3, QImage::Format_RGB32);</para>
            <para> QRgb value;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> value = qRgb(189, 149, 39); // 0xffbd9527</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(1, 1, value);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> value = qRgb(122, 163, 39); // 0xff7aa327</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(0, 1, value);</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(1, 0, value);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> value = qRgb(237, 187, 51); // 0xffedba31</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(2, 1, value);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>In case of a 8-bit and monchrome images, the pixel value is only an index from the image's color table. So the setPixel() function can only be used to alter the color of the pixel at the given coordinates to a predefined color from the image's color table, i.e. it can only change the pixel's index value. To alter or add a color to an image's color table, use the setColor() function.</para>
            <para>An entry in the color table is an ARGB quadruplet encoded as an QRgb value. Use the qRgb() and qRgba() functions to make a suitable QRgb value for use with the setColor() function. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>8-bit</para>
            <para>	 QImage image(3, 3, QImage::Format_Indexed8);</para>
            <para> QRgb value;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> value = qRgb(122, 163, 39); // 0xff7aa327</para>
            <para> image.setColor(0, value);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> value = qRgb(237, 187, 51); // 0xffedba31</para>
            <para> image.setColor(1, value);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> value = qRgb(189, 149, 39); // 0xffbd9527</para>
            <para> image.setColor(2, value);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> image.setPixel(0, 1, 0);</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(1, 0, 0);</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(1, 1, 2);</para>
            <para> image.setPixel(2, 1, 1);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QImage also provide the scanLine() function which returns a pointer to the pixel data at the scanline with the given index, and the bits() function which returns a pointer to the first pixel data (this is equivalent to scanLine(0)).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Image Formats</para>
            <para>Each pixel stored in a QImage is represented by an integer. The size of the integer varies depending on the format. QImage supports several image formats described by the Format enum.</para>
            <para>Monochrome images are stored using 1-bit indexes into a color table with at most two colors. There are two different types of monochrome images: big endian (MSB first) or little endian (LSB first) bit order.</para>
            <para>8-bit images are stored using 8-bit indexes into a color table, i.e. they have a single byte per pixel. The color table is a QVector&amp;lt;QRgb&amp;gt;, and the QRgb typedef is equivalent to an unsigned int containing an ARGB quadruplet on the format 0xAARRGGBB.</para>
            <para>32-bit images have no color table; instead, each pixel contains an QRgb value. There are three different types of 32-bit images storing RGB (i.e. 0xffRRGGBB), ARGB and premultiplied ARGB values respectively. In the premultiplied format the red, green, and blue channels are multiplied by the alpha component divided by 255.</para>
            <para>An image's format can be retrieved using the format() function. Use the convertToFormat() functions to convert an image into another format. The allGray() and isGrayscale() functions tell whether a color image can safely be converted to a grayscale image.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Image Transformations</para>
            <para>QImage supports a number of functions for creating a new image that is a transformed version of the original: The createAlphaMask() function builds and returns a 1-bpp mask from the alpha buffer in this image, and the createHeuristicMask() function creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image. The latter function works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping away pixels of that color starting at all the edges.</para>
            <para>The mirrored() function returns a mirror of the image in the desired direction, the scaled() returns a copy of the image scaled to a rectangle of the desired measures, and the rgbSwapped() function constructs a BGR image from a RGB image.</para>
            <para>The scaledToWidth() and scaledToHeight() functions return scaled copies of the image.</para>
            <para>The transformed() function returns a copy of the image that is transformed with the given transformation matrix and transformation mode: Internally, the transformation matrix is adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation, i.e. transformed() returns the smallest image containing all transformed points of the original image. The static trueMatrix() function returns the actual matrix used for transforming the image.</para>
            <para>There are also functions for changing attributes of an image in-place:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FunctionDescription</para>
            <para>setDotsPerMeterX()	Defines the aspect ratio by setting the number of pixels that fit horizontally in a physical meter.</para>
            <para>setDotsPerMeterY()	Defines the aspect ratio by setting the number of pixels that fit vertically in a physical meter.</para>
            <para>fill()	Fills the entire image with the given pixel value.</para>
            <para>invertPixels()	Inverts all pixel values in the image using the given InvertMode value.</para>
            <para>setColorTable()	Sets the color table used to translate color indexes. Only monochrome and 8-bit formats.</para>
            <para>setColorCount()	Resizes the color table. Only monochrome and 8-bit formats.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Legal Information</para>
            <para>For smooth scaling, the transformed() functions use code based on smooth scaling algorithm by Daniel M. Duley.</para>
            <para>Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Daniel M. Duley</para>
            <para>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:</para>
            <para>1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.</para>
            <para>THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QImageReader, QImageWriter, QPixmap, QSvgRenderer, Image Composition Example, Image Viewer Example, Scribble Example, and Pixelator Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null image.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a shallow copy of the given image.</para>
            <para>For more information about shallow copies, see the Implicit Data Sharing documentation.</para>
            <para>See also copy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor(QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QImage.Format)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an image with the given size and format.</para>
            <para>A null image is returned if memory cannot be allocated.</para>
            <para>Warning: This will create a QImage with uninitialized data. Call fill() to fill the image with an appropriate pixel value before drawing onto it with QPainter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an image and tries to load the image from the file with the given fileName.</para>
            <para>The loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If the format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format.</para>
            <para>If the loading of the image failed, this object is a null image.</para>
            <para>The file name can either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See the Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QImage.Format)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an image with the given width, height and format.</para>
            <para>A null image will be returned if memory cannot be allocated.</para>
            <para>Warning: This will create a QImage with uninitialized data. Call fill() to fill the image with an appropriate pixel value before drawing onto it with QPainter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor(QtCore.Pointer{System.Byte},System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QImage.Format)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null image.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.#ctor(QtCore.Pointer{System.Byte},System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QImage.Format)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null image.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.AllGray">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if all the colors in the image are shades of gray (i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise false.</para>
            <para>Note that this function is slow for images without color table.</para>
            <para>See also isGrayscale().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.BitPlaneCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of bit planes in the image.</para>
            <para>The number of bit planes is the number of bits of color and transparency information for each pixel. This is different from (i.e. smaller than) the depth when the image format contains unused bits.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also depth(), format(), and Image Formats.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Bits">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the first pixel data. This is equivalent to scanLine(0).</para>
            <para>Note that QImage uses implicit data sharing. This function performs a deep copy of the shared pixel data, thus ensuring that this QImage is the only one using the current return value.</para>
            <para>See also scanLine(), byteCount(), and constBits().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ByteCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of bytes occupied by the image data.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also bytesPerLine(), bits(), and Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.BytesPerLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of bytes per image scanline.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to byteCount() / height().</para>
            <para>See also scanLine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.CacheKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies the contents of this QImage object. Distinct QImage objects can only have the same key if they refer to the same contents.</para>
            <para>The key will change when the image is altered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Color(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color in the color table at index i. The first color is at index 0.</para>
            <para>The colors in an image's color table are specified as ARGB quadruplets (QRgb). Use the qAlpha(), qRed(), qGreen(), and qBlue() functions to get the color value components.</para>
            <para>See also setColor(), pixelIndex(), and Pixel Manipulation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ConstBits">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the first pixel data.</para>
            <para>Note that QImage uses implicit data sharing, but this function does not perform a deep copy of the shared pixel data, because the returned data is const.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also bits() and constScanLine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ConstScanLine(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the pixel data at the scanline with index i. The first scanline is at index 0.</para>
            <para>The scanline data is aligned on a 32-bit boundary.</para>
            <para>Note that QImage uses implicit data sharing, but this function does not perform a deep copy of the shared pixel data, because the returned data is const.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also scanLine() and constBits().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ConvertToFormat(QtGui.QImage.Format,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the image in the given format.</para>
            <para>The specified image conversion flags control how the image data is handled during the conversion process.</para>
            <para>See also Image Format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ConvertToFormat(QtGui.QImage.Format,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.UInt32},QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the image in the given format.</para>
            <para>The specified image conversion flags control how the image data is handled during the conversion process.</para>
            <para>See also Image Format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Copy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sub-area of the image as a new image.</para>
            <para>The returned image is copied from the position (rectangle.x(), rectangle.y()) in this image, and will always have the size of the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>In areas beyond this image, pixels are set to 0. For 32-bit RGB images, this means black; for 32-bit ARGB images, this means transparent black; for 8-bit images, this means the color with index 0 in the color table which can be anything; for 1-bit images, this means Qt::color0.</para>
            <para>If the given rectangle is a null rectangle the entire image is copied.</para>
            <para>See also QImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Copy(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sub-area of the image as a new image.</para>
            <para>The returned image is copied from the position (rectangle.x(), rectangle.y()) in this image, and will always have the size of the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>In areas beyond this image, pixels are set to 0. For 32-bit RGB images, this means black; for 32-bit ARGB images, this means transparent black; for 8-bit images, this means the color with index 0 in the color table which can be anything; for 1-bit images, this means Qt::color0.</para>
            <para>If the given rectangle is a null rectangle the entire image is copied.</para>
            <para>See also QImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Copy(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The returned image is copied from the position (x, y) in this image, and will always have the given width and height. In areas beyond this image, pixels are set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.CreateAlphaMask(QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Builds and returns a 1-bpp mask from the alpha buffer in this image. Returns a null image if the image's format is QImage::Format_RGB32.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the Qt::ImageConversionFlags, and controls the conversion process. Passing 0 for flags sets all the default options.</para>
            <para>The returned image has little-endian bit order (i.e. the image's format is QImage::Format_MonoLSB), which you can convert to big-endian (QImage::Format_Mono) using the convertToFormat() function.</para>
            <para>See also createHeuristicMask() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.CreateHeuristicMask(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image.</para>
            <para>The function works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping away pixels of that color starting at all the edges. The four corners vote for which color is to be masked away. In case of a draw (this generally means that this function is not applicable to the image), the result is arbitrary.</para>
            <para>The returned image has little-endian bit order (i.e. the image's format is QImage::Format_MonoLSB), which you can convert to big-endian (QImage::Format_Mono) using the convertToFormat() function.</para>
            <para>If clipTight is true (the default) the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.</para>
            <para>Note that this function disregards the alpha buffer.</para>
            <para>See also createAlphaMask() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.CreateMaskFromColor(System.UInt32,QtCore.Qt.MaskMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a mask for this image based on the given color value. If the mode is MaskInColor (the default value), all pixels matching color will be opaque pixels in the mask. If mode is MaskOutColor, all pixels matching the given color will be transparent.</para>
            <para>See also createAlphaMask() and createHeuristicMask().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Depth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the depth of the image.</para>
            <para>The image depth is the number of bits used to store a single pixel, also called bits per pixel (bpp).</para>
            <para>The supported depths are 1, 8, 16, 24 and 32.</para>
            <para>See also bitPlaneCount(), convertToFormat(), Image Formats, and Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Fill(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the entire image with the given color.</para>
            <para>If the depth of the image is 1, the image will be filled with 1 if color equals Qt::color1; it will otherwise be filled with 0.</para>
            <para>If the depth of the image is 8, the image will be filled with the index corresponding the color in the color table if present; it will otherwise be filled with 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Fill(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills the entire image with the given pixelValue.</para>
            <para>If the depth of this image is 1, only the lowest bit is used. If you say fill(0), fill(2), etc., the image is filled with 0s. If you say fill(1), fill(3), etc., the image is filled with 1s. If the depth is 8, the lowest 8 bits are used and if the depth is 16 the lowest 16 bits are used.</para>
            <para>Note: QImage::pixel() returns the color of the pixel at the given coordinates while QColor::pixel() returns the pixel value of the underlying window system (essentially an index value), so normally you will want to use QImage::pixel() to use a color from an existing image or QColor::rgb() to use a specific color.</para>
            <para>See also depth() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Fill(QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the image with the given color, described as a standard global color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format of the image.</para>
            <para>See also Image Formats.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.FromData(QtCore.QByteArray,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Loads an image from the given QByteArray data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.FromData(QtCore.Pointer{System.Byte},System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QImage from the first size bytes of the given binary data. The loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format. binary data. The loader attempts to read the image, either using the optional image format specified or by determining the image format from the data.</para>
            <para>If format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to determine the file format. If format is specified, it must be one of the values returned by QImageReader::supportedImageFormats().</para>
            <para>If the loading of the image fails, the image returned will be a null image.</para>
            <para>See also load(), save(), and Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.HasAlphaChannel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the image has a format that respects the alpha channel, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the image.</para>
            <para>See also Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.InvertPixels(QtGui.QImage.InvertMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inverts all pixel values in the image.</para>
            <para>The given invert mode only have a meaning when the image's depth is 32. The default mode is InvertRgb, which leaves the alpha channel unchanged. If the mode is InvertRgba, the alpha bits are also inverted.</para>
            <para>Inverting an 8-bit image means to replace all pixels using color index i with a pixel using color index 255 minus i. The same is the case for a 1-bit image. Note that the color table is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.IsGrayscale">
            <summary>
            <para>For 32-bit images, this function is equivalent to allGray().</para>
            <para>For 8-bpp images, this function returns true if color(i) is QRgb(i, i, i) for all indexes of the color table; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also allGray() and Image Formats.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if it is a null image, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>A null image has all parameters set to zero and no allocated data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Load(QtCore.QIODevice,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function reads a QImage from the given device. This can, for example, be used to load an image directly into a QByteArray.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Load(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads an image from the file with the given fileName. Returns true if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The loader attempts to read the image using the specified format, e.g., PNG or JPG. If format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format.</para>
            <para>The file name can either refer to an actual file on disk or to one of the application's embedded resources. See the Resource System overview for details on how to embed images and other resource files in the application's executable.</para>
            <para>See also Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.LoadFromData(QtCore.QByteArray,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Loads an image from the given QByteArray data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.LoadFromData(QtCore.Pointer{System.Byte},System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads an image from the first len bytes of the given binary data. Returns true if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The loader attempts to read the image using the specified format, e.g., PNG or JPG. If format is not specified (which is the default), the loader probes the file for a header to guess the file format.</para>
            <para>See also Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Mirrored(System.Boolean,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or the vertical direction depending on whether horizontal and vertical are set to true or false.</para>
            <para>Note that the original image is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.op_Inequality(QtGui.QImage,QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this image and the given image have different contents; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly.</para>
            <para>See also operator=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.op_Equality(QtGui.QImage,QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this image and the given image have the same contents; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference (e.g. different size or format), in which case the function will return quickly.</para>
            <para>See also operator=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Pixel(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color of the pixel at the given position.</para>
            <para>If the position is not valid, the results are undefined.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is expensive when used for massive pixel manipulations.</para>
            <para>See also setPixel(), valid(), and Pixel Manipulation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Pixel(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (x, y).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.PixelIndex(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixel index at the given position.</para>
            <para>If position is not valid, or if the image is not a paletted image (depth() &gt; 8), the results are undefined.</para>
            <para>See also valid(), depth(), and Pixel Manipulation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.PixelIndex(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the pixel index at (x, y).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the enclosing rectangle (0, 0, width(), height()) of the image.</para>
            <para>See also Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.RgbSwapped">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QImage in which the values of the red and blue components of all pixels have been swapped, effectively converting an RGB image to an BGR image.</para>
            <para>The original QImage is not changed.</para>
            <para>See also Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Save(QtCore.QIODevice,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the image to the file with the given fileName, using the given image file format and quality factor. If format is 0, QImage will attempt to guess the format by looking at fileName's suffix.</para>
            <para>The quality factor must be in the range 0 to 100 or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the default) to use the default settings.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the image was successfully saved; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Save(System.String,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the image to the file with the given fileName, using the given image file format and quality factor. If format is 0, QImage will attempt to guess the format by looking at fileName's suffix.</para>
            <para>The quality factor must be in the range 0 to 100 or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the default) to use the default settings.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the image was successfully saved; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also Reading and Writing Image Files.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Scaled(QtCore.QSize,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the image scaled to a rectangle defined by the given size according to the given aspectRatioMode and transformMode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, the image is scaled to size.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatio, the image is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible inside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding, the image is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible outside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the given size is empty, this function returns a null image.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Scaled(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.AspectRatioMode,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the image scaled to a rectangle defined by the given size according to the given aspectRatioMode and transformMode.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, the image is scaled to size.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatio, the image is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible inside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para>If aspectRatioMode is Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding, the image is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible outside size, preserving the aspect ratio.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the given size is empty, this function returns a null image.</para>
            <para>See also isNull() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ScaledToHeight(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image is scaled to the given height using the specified transformation mode.</para>
            <para>This function automatically calculates the width of the image so that the ratio of the image is preserved.</para>
            <para>If the given height is 0 or negative, a null image is returned.</para>
            <para>See also Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ScaledToWidth(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image is scaled to the given width using the specified transformation mode.</para>
            <para>This function automatically calculates the height of the image so that its aspect ratio is preserved.</para>
            <para>If the given width is 0 or negative, a null image is returned.</para>
            <para>See also Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.ScanLine(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the pixel data at the scanline with index i. The first scanline is at index 0.</para>
            <para>The scanline data is aligned on a 32-bit boundary.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you are accessing 32-bpp image data, cast the returned pointer to QRgb* (QRgb has a 32-bit size) and use it to read/write the pixel value. You cannot use the uchar* pointer directly, because the pixel format depends on the byte order on the underlying platform. Use qRed(), qGreen(), qBlue(), and qAlpha() to access the pixels.</para>
            <para>See also bytesPerLine(), bits(), Pixel Manipulation, and constScanLine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.SerialNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies the contents of this QImage object. Distinct QImage objects can only have the same serial number if they refer to the same contents (but they don't have to).</para>
            <para>Use cacheKey() instead.</para>
            <para>Warning: The serial number doesn't necessarily change when the image is altered. This means that it may be dangerous to use it as a cache key.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.SetColor(System.Int32,System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the color at the given index in the color table, to the given to colorValue. The color value is an ARGB quadruplet.</para>
            <para>If index is outside the current size of the color table, it is expanded with setColorCount().</para>
            <para>See also color(), colorCount(), setColorTable(), and Pixel Manipulation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.SetPixel(QtCore.QPoint,System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the pixel index or color at the given position to index_or_rgb.</para>
            <para>If the image's format is either monochrome or 8-bit, the given index_or_rgb value must be an index in the image's color table, otherwise the parameter must be a QRgb value.</para>
            <para>If position is not a valid coordinate pair in the image, or if index_or_rgb &gt;= colorCount() in the case of monochrome and 8-bit images, the result is undefined.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is expensive due to the call of the internal detach() function called within; if performance is a concern, we recommend the use of scanLine() to access pixel data directly.</para>
            <para>See also pixel() and Pixel Manipulation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.SetPixel(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the pixel index or color at the given position to index_or_rgb.</para>
            <para>If the image's format is either monochrome or 8-bit, the given index_or_rgb value must be an index in the image's color table, otherwise the parameter must be a QRgb value.</para>
            <para>If position is not a valid coordinate pair in the image, or if index_or_rgb &gt;= colorCount() in the case of monochrome and 8-bit images, the result is undefined.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is expensive due to the call of the internal detach() function called within; if performance is a concern, we recommend the use of scanLine() to access pixel data directly.</para>
            <para>See also pixel() and Pixel Manipulation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.SetText(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the image text to the given text and associate it with the given key.</para>
            <para>If you just want to store a single text block (i.e., a &quot;comment&quot; or just a description), you can either pass an empty key, or use a generic key like &quot;Description&quot;.</para>
            <para>The image text is embedded into the image data when you call save() or QImageWriter::write().</para>
            <para>Not all image formats support embedded text. You can find out if a specific image or format supports embedding text by using QImageWriter::supportsOption(). We give an example:</para>
            <para>         QImageWriter writer;</para>
            <para>         writer.setFormat(&quot;png&quot;);</para>
            <para>         if (writer.supportsOption(QImageIOHandler::Description))</para>
            <para>             qDebug() &lt;&lt; &quot;Png supports embedded text&quot;;</para>
            <para>You can use QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() to find out which image formats are available to you.</para>
            <para>See also text() and textKeys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.SetText(System.String,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the image text to the given text and associate it with the given key.</para>
            <para>If you just want to store a single text block (i.e., a &quot;comment&quot; or just a description), you can either pass an empty key, or use a generic key like &quot;Description&quot;.</para>
            <para>The image text is embedded into the image data when you call save() or QImageWriter::write().</para>
            <para>Not all image formats support embedded text. You can find out if a specific image or format supports embedding text by using QImageWriter::supportsOption(). We give an example:</para>
            <para>         QImageWriter writer;</para>
            <para>         writer.setFormat(&quot;png&quot;);</para>
            <para>         if (writer.supportsOption(QImageIOHandler::Description))</para>
            <para>             qDebug() &lt;&lt; &quot;Png supports embedded text&quot;;</para>
            <para>You can use QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats() to find out which image formats are available to you.</para>
            <para>See also text() and textKeys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the image, i.e. its width() and height().</para>
            <para>See also Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Swap(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps image other with this image. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Text(QtGui.QImageTextKeyLang)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the image text associated with the given key. If the specified key is an empty string, the whole image text is returned, with each key-text pair separated by a newline.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and textKeys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Text(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the image text associated with the given key. If the specified key is an empty string, the whole image text is returned, with each key-text pair separated by a newline.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and textKeys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.TextKeys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text keys for this image.</para>
            <para>You can use these keys with text() to list the image text for a certain key.</para>
            <para>See also text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Transformed(QtGui.QMatrix,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the image that is transformed using the given transformation matrix and transformation mode.</para>
            <para>The transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation; i.e. the image produced is the smallest image that contains all the transformed points of the original image. Use the trueMatrix() function to retrieve the actual matrix used for transforming an image.</para>
            <para>See also trueMatrix() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Transformed(QtGui.QTransform,QtCore.Qt.TransformationMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the image that is transformed using the given transformation matrix and transformation mode.</para>
            <para>The transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation; i.e. the image produced is the smallest image that contains all the transformed points of the original image. Use the trueMatrix() function to retrieve the actual matrix used for transforming an image.</para>
            <para>See also trueMatrix() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.TrueMatrix(QtGui.QMatrix,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the actual matrix used for transforming an image with the given width, height and matrix.</para>
            <para>When transforming an image using the transformed() function, the transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation, i.e. transformed() returns the smallest image containing all transformed points of the original image. This function returns the modified matrix, which maps points correctly from the original image into the new image.</para>
            <para>See also transformed() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.TrueMatrix(QtGui.QTransform,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the actual matrix used for transforming an image with the given width, height and matrix.</para>
            <para>When transforming an image using the transformed() function, the transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation, i.e. transformed() returns the smallest image containing all transformed points of the original image. This function returns the modified matrix, which maps points correctly from the original image into the new image.</para>
            <para>Unlike the other overload, this function creates transformation matrices that can be used to perform perspective transformations on images.</para>
            <para>See also transformed() and Image Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Valid(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if pos is a valid coordinate pair within the image; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also rect() and QRect::contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Valid(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns true if QPoint(x, y) is a valid coordinate pair within the image; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the image.</para>
            <para>See also Image Information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImage.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the image and cleans up.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImage.AlphaChannel">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alpha channel of the image as a new grayscale QImage in which each pixel's red, green, and blue values are given the alpha value of the original image. The color depth of the returned image is 8-bit.</para>
            <para>You can see an example of use of this function in QPixmap's alphaChannel(), which works in the same way as this function on QPixmaps.</para>
            <para>Most usecases for this function can be replaced with QPainter and using composition modes.</para>
            <para>Warning: This is an expensive function.</para>
            <para>Sets the alpha channel of this image to the given alphaChannel.</para>
            <para>If alphaChannel is an 8 bit grayscale image, the intensity values are written into this buffer directly. Otherwise, alphaChannel is converted to 32 bit and the intensity of the RGB pixel values is used.</para>
            <para>Note that the image will be converted to the Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied format if the function succeeds.</para>
            <para>Use one of the composition modes in QPainter::CompositionMode instead.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is expensive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImage.ColorCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the color table for the image.</para>
            <para>Notice that colorCount() returns 0 for 32-bpp images because these images do not use color tables, but instead encode pixel values as ARGB quadruplets.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Resizes the color table to contain colorCount entries.</para>
            <para>If the color table is expanded, all the extra colors will be set to transparent (i.e qRgba(0, 0, 0, 0)).</para>
            <para>When the image is used, the color table must be large enough to have entries for all the pixel/index values present in the image, otherwise the results are undefined.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImage.ColorTable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the colors contained in the image's color table, or an empty list if the image does not have a color table</para>
            <para>Sets the color table used to translate color indexes to QRgb values, to the specified colors.</para>
            <para>When the image is used, the color table must be large enough to have entries for all the pixel/index values present in the image, otherwise the results are undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImage.DotsPerMeterX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of pixels that fit horizontally in a physical meter. Together with dotsPerMeterY(), this number defines the intended scale and aspect ratio of the image.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of pixels that fit horizontally in a physical meter, to x.</para>
            <para>Together with dotsPerMeterY(), this number defines the intended scale and aspect ratio of the image, and determines the scale at which QPainter will draw graphics on the image. It does not change the scale or aspect ratio of the image when it is rendered on other paint devices.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImage.DotsPerMeterY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of pixels that fit vertically in a physical meter. Together with dotsPerMeterX(), this number defines the intended scale and aspect ratio of the image.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of pixels that fit vertically in a physical meter, to y.</para>
            <para>Together with dotsPerMeterX(), this number defines the intended scale and aspect ratio of the image, and determines the scale at which QPainter will draw graphics on the image. It does not change the scale or aspect ratio of the image when it is rendered on other paint devices.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImage.Offset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of pixels by which the image is intended to be offset by when positioning relative to other images.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of pixels by which the image is intended to be offset by when positioning relative to other images, to offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImage.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>The following image formats are available in Qt. Values greater than QImage::Format_RGB16 were added in Qt 4.4. See the notes after the table.</para>
            <para>Note: Drawing into a QImage with QImage::Format_Indexed8 is not supported.</para>
            <para>Note: Do not render into ARGB32 images using QPainter. Using QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied is significantly faster.</para>
            <para>See also format() and convertToFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_ARGB32">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 32-bit ARGB format (0xAARRGGBB).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a premultiplied 32-bit ARGB format (0xAARRGGBB), i.e. the red, green, and blue channels are multiplied by the alpha component divided by 255. (If RR, GG, or BB has a higher value than the alpha channel, the results are undefined.) Certain operations (such as image composition using alpha blending) are faster using premultiplied ARGB32 than with plain ARGB32.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_ARGB4444_Premultiplied">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a premultiplied 16-bit ARGB format (4-4-4-4).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_ARGB6666_Premultiplied">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a premultiplied 24-bit ARGB format (6-6-6-6).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_ARGB8555_Premultiplied">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a premultiplied 24-bit ARGB format (8-5-5-5).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_ARGB8565_Premultiplied">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a premultiplied 24-bit ARGB format (8-5-6-5).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_Indexed8">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using 8-bit indexes into a colormap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_Invalid">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_Mono">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using 1-bit per pixel. Bytes are packed with the most significant bit (MSB) first.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_MonoLSB">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using 1-bit per pixel. Bytes are packed with the less significant bit (LSB) first.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_RGB16">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 16-bit RGB format (5-6-5).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_RGB32">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 32-bit RGB format (0xffRRGGBB).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_RGB444">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 16-bit RGB format (4-4-4). The unused bits are always zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_RGB555">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 16-bit RGB format (5-5-5). The unused most significant bit is always zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_RGB666">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 24-bit RGB format (6-6-6). The unused most significant bits is always zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.Format.Format_RGB888">
            <summary>
            <para>The image is stored using a 24-bit RGB format (8-8-8).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImage.InvertMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type is used to describe how pixel values should be inverted in the invertPixels() function.</para>
            <para>See also invertPixels().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.InvertMode.InvertRgb">
            <summary>
            <para>Invert only the RGB values and leave the alpha channel unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImage.InvertMode.InvertRgba">
            <summary>
            <para>Invert all channels, including the alpha channel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageIOHandler">
            <summary>
            The QImageIOHandler class defines the common image I/O interface for all image formats in Qt.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt uses QImageIOHandler for reading and writing images through QImageReader and QImageWriter. You can also derive from this class to write your own image format handler using Qt's plugin mechanism.</para>
            <para>Call setDevice() to assign a device to the handler, and setFormat() to assign a format to it. One QImageIOHandler may support more than one image format. canRead() returns true if an image can be read from the device, and read() and write() return true if reading or writing an image was completed successfully.</para>
            <para>QImageIOHandler also has support for animations formats, through the functions loopCount(), imageCount(), nextImageDelay() and currentImageNumber().</para>
            <para>In order to determine what options an image handler supports, Qt will call supportsOption() and setOption(). Make sure to reimplement these functions if you can provide support for any of the options in the ImageOption enum.</para>
            <para>To write your own image handler, you must at least reimplement canRead() and read(). Then create a QImageIOPlugin that can create the handler. Finally, install your plugin, and QImageReader and QImageWriter will then automatically load the plugin, and start using it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QImageIOPlugin, QImageReader, and QImageWriter.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QImageIOHandler object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.CanRead">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if an image can be read from the device (i.e., the image format is supported, the device can be read from and the initial header information suggests that the image can be read); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>When reimplementing canRead(), make sure that the I/O device (device()) is left in its original state (e.g., by using peek() rather than read()).</para>
            <para>See also read() and QIODevice::peek().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.CurrentImageNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the sequence number of the current image in the animation. If this function is called before any image is read(), -1 is returned. The number of the first image in the sequence is 0.</para>
            <para>If the image format does not support animation, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>See also read().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.CurrentImageRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rect of the current image. If no rect is defined for the image, and empty QRect() is returned.</para>
            <para>This function is useful for animations, where only parts of the frame may be updated at a time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageCount">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the number of images in the animation. If the image format does not support animation, or if it is unable to determine the number of images, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns 1 if canRead() returns true; otherwise 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.JumpToImage(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function jumps to the image whose sequence number is imageNumber. The next call to read() will attempt to read this image.</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing, and returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.JumpToNextImage">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function jumps to the next image.</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing, and returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.LoopCount">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the number of times the animation should loop. If the image format does not support animation, 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Name">
            <summary>
            <para>Use format() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.NextImageDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the number of milliseconds to wait until reading the next image. If the image format does not support animation, 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Option(QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value assigned to option as a QVariant. The type of the value depends on the option. For example, option(Size) returns a QSize variant.</para>
            <para>See also setOption() and supportsOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Read(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Read an image from the device, and stores it in image. Returns true if the image is successfully read; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>For image formats that support incremental loading, and for animation formats, the image handler can assume that image points to the previous frame.</para>
            <para>See also canRead().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.SetOption(QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the option option with the value value.</para>
            <para>See also option() and ImageOption.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.SupportsOption(QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the QImageIOHandler supports the option option; otherwise returns false. For example, if the QImageIOHandler supports the Size option, supportsOption(Size) must return true.</para>
            <para>See also setOption() and option().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Write(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the image image to the assigned device. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing, and simply returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the QImageIOHandler object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the device currently assigned to the QImageIOHandler. If not device has been assigned, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the device of the QImageIOHandler to device. The image handler will use this device when reading and writing images.</para>
            <para>The device can only be set once and must be set before calling canRead(), read(), write(), etc. If you need to read multiple files, construct multiple instances of the appropriate QImageIOHandler subclass.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format that is currently assigned to QImageIOHandler. If no format has been assigned, an empty string is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the format of the QImageIOHandler to format. The format is most useful for handlers that support multiple image formats.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different options supported by QImageIOHandler. Some options are used to query an image for properties, and others are used to toggle the way in which an image should be written.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Animation">
            <summary>
            <para>Image formats that support animation return true for this value in supportsOption(); otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.BackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Certain image formats allow the background color to be specified. A handler that supports BackgroundColor initializes the background color to this option (a QColor) when reading an image.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.ClipRect">
            <summary>
            <para>The clip rect, or ROI (Region Of Interest). A handler that supports this option is expected to only read the provided QRect area from the original image in read(), before any other transformation is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.CompressionRatio">
            <summary>
            <para>The compression ratio of the image data. A handler that supports this option is expected to set its compression rate depending on the value of this option (an int) when writing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Description">
            <summary>
            <para>The image description. Some image formats, such as GIF and PNG, allow embedding of text or comments into the image data (e.g., for storing copyright information). It's common that the text is stored in key-value pairs, but some formats store all text in one continuous block. QImageIOHandler returns the text as one QString, where keys and values are separated by a ':', and keys-value pairs are separated by two newlines (\n\n). For example, &quot;Title: Sunset\n\nAuthor: Jim Smith\nSarah Jones\n\n&quot;. Formats that store text in a single block can use &quot;Description&quot; as the key.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Endianness">
            <summary>
            <para>The endianness of the image. Certain image formats can be stored as BigEndian or LittleEndian. A handler that supports Endianness uses the value of this option to determine how the image should be stored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Gamma">
            <summary>
            <para>The gamma level of the image. A handler that supports this option is expected to set the image gamma level depending on the value of this option (a float) when writing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.ImageFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The image's data format returned by the handler. This can be any of the formats listed in QImage::Format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.IncrementalReading">
            <summary>
            <para>A handler that supports this option is expected to read the image in several passes, as if it was an animation. QImageReader will treat the image as an animation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Name">
            <summary>
            <para>The name of the image. A handler that supports this option is expected to read the name from the image metadata and return this as a QString, or when writing an image it is expected to store the name in the image metadata.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Quality">
            <summary>
            <para>The quality level of the image. A handler that supports this option is expected to set the image quality level depending on the value of this option (an int) when writing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.ScaledClipRect">
            <summary>
            <para>The scaled clip rect (or ROI, Region Of Interest) of the image. A handler that supports this option is expected to apply the provided clip rect (a QRect), after applying any scaling (ScaleSize) or regular clipping (ClipRect). If the handler does not support this option, QImageReader will apply the scaled clip rect after the image has been read.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.ScaledSize">
            <summary>
            <para>The scaled size of the image. A handler that supports this option is expected to scale the image to the provided size (a QSize), after applying any clip rect transformation (ClipRect). If the handler does not support this option, QImageReader will perform the scaling after the image has been read.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>The original size of an image. A handler that supports this option is expected to read the size of the image from the image metadata, and return this size from option() as a QSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption.SubType">
            <summary>
            <para>The subtype of the image. A handler that supports this option can use the subtype value to help when reading and writing images. For example, a PPM handler may have a subtype value of &quot;ppm&quot; or &quot;ppmraw&quot;.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin">
            <summary>
            The QImageIOPlugin class defines an interface for writing an image format plugin.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QImageIOPlugin is a factory for creating QImageIOHandler objects, which are used internally by QImageReader and QImageWriter to add support for different image formats to Qt.</para>
            <para>Writing an image I/O plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions capabilities(), create(), and keys(), and exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro. See How to Create Qt Plugins for details.</para>
            <para>An image format plugin can support three capabilities: reading (CanRead), writing (CanWrite) and incremental reading (CanReadIncremental). Reimplement capabilities() in you subclass to expose the capabilities of your image format.</para>
            <para>create() should create an instance of your QImageIOHandler subclass, with the provided device and format properly set, and return this handler. You must also reimplement keys() so that Qt knows which image formats your plugin supports.</para>
            <para>Different plugins can support different capabilities. For example, you may have one plugin that supports reading the GIF format, and another that supports writing. Qt will select the correct plugin for the job, depending on the return value of capabilities(). If several plugins support the same capability, Qt will select one arbitrarily.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QImageIOHandler and How to Create Qt Plugins.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an image plugin with the given parent. This is invoked automatically by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Capabilities(QtCore.QIODevice,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the capabilities on the plugin, based on the data in device and the format format. For example, if the QImageIOHandler supports the BMP format, and the data in the device starts with the characters &quot;BM&quot;, this function should return CanRead. If format is &quot;bmp&quot; and the handler supports both reading and writing, this function should return CanRead | CanWrite.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Create(QtCore.QIODevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QImageIOHandler subclass, with device and format set. The format must come from the list returned by keys(). Format names are case sensitive.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Create(QtCore.QIODevice,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QImageIOHandler subclass, with device and format set. The format must come from the list returned by keys(). Format names are case sensitive.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of image keys this plugin supports.</para>
            <para>These keys are usually the names of the image formats that are implemented in the plugin (e.g., &quot;jpg&quot; or &quot;gif&quot;).</para>
            <para>See also capabilities().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the picture format plugin.</para>
            <para>You never have to call this explicitly. Qt destroys a plugin automatically when it is no longer used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Capability">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the capabilities of a QImageIOPlugin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Capability.CanRead">
            <summary>
            <para>The plugin can read images.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Capability.CanReadIncremental">
            <summary>
            <para>The plugin can read images incrementally.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageIOPlugin.Capability.CanWrite">
            <summary>
            <para>The plugin can write images.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageReader">
            <summary>
            The QImageReader class provides a format independent interface for reading images from files or other devices.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The most common way to read images is through QImage and QPixmap's constructors, or by calling QImage::load() and QPixmap::load(). QImageReader is a specialized class which gives you more control when reading images. For example, you can read an image into a specific size by calling setScaledSize(), and you can select a clip rect, effectively loading only parts of an image, by calling setClipRect(). Depending on the underlying support in the image format, this can save memory and speed up loading of images.</para>
            <para>To read an image, you start by constructing a QImageReader object. Pass either a file name or a device pointer, and the image format to QImageReader's constructor. You can then set several options, such as the clip rect (by calling setClipRect()) and scaled size (by calling setScaledSize()). canRead() returns the image if the QImageReader can read the image (i.e., the image format is supported and the device is open for reading). Call read() to read the image.</para>
            <para>If any error occurs when reading the image, read() will return a null QImage. You can then call error() to find the type of error that occurred, or errorString() to get a human readable description of what went wrong.</para>
            <para>Call supportedImageFormats() for a list of formats that QImageReader can read. QImageReader supports all built-in image formats, in addition to any image format plugins that support reading.</para>
            <para>QImageReader autodetects the image format by default, by looking at the provided (optional) format string, the file name suffix, and the data stream contents. You can enable or disable this feature, by calling setAutoDetectImageFormat().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QImageWriter, QImageIOHandler, and QImageIOPlugin.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageReader object. Before reading an image, call setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageReader object. Before reading an image, call setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageReader object. Before reading an image, call setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageReader object. Before reading an image, call setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageReader object. Before reading an image, call setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.CanRead">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if an image can be read for the device (i.e., the image format is supported, and the device seems to contain valid data); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>canRead() is a lightweight function that only does a quick test to see if the image data is valid. read() may still return false after canRead() returns true, if the image data is corrupt.</para>
            <para>For images that support animation, canRead() returns false when all frames have been read.</para>
            <para>See also read() and supportedImageFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.CurrentImageNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the sequence number of the current frame. If the image format doesn't support animation, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>This function returns -1 if an error occurred.</para>
            <para>See also supportsAnimation(), QImageIOHandler::currentImageNumber(), and canRead().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.CurrentImageRect">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the rect for the current frame. Otherwise, a null rect is returned.</para>
            <para>See also supportsAnimation() and QImageIOHandler::currentImageRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.Error">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of error that occurred last.</para>
            <para>See also ImageReaderError and errorString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.ErrorString">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a human readable description of the last error that occurred.</para>
            <para>See also error().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageCount">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the total number of images in the animation. If the format does not support animation, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>This function returns -1 if an error occurred.</para>
            <para>See also supportsAnimation(), QImageIOHandler::imageCount(), and canRead().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format of the image, without actually reading the image contents. The format describes the image format QImageReader::read() returns, not the format of the actual image.</para>
            <para>If the image format does not support this feature, this function returns an invalid format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QImageIOHandler::ImageOption, QImageIOHandler::option(), and QImageIOHandler::supportsOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageFormat(QtCore.QIODevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>If supported, this function returns the image format of the device device. Otherwise, an empty string is returned.</para>
            <para>See also QImageReader::autoDetectImageFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageFormat(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>If supported, this function returns the image format of the file fileName. Otherwise, an empty string is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.JumpToImage(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function skips to the image whose sequence number is imageNumber, returning true if successful or false if the corresponding image cannot be found.</para>
            <para>The next call to read() will attempt to read this image.</para>
            <para>See also jumpToNextImage() and QImageIOHandler::jumpToImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.JumpToNextImage">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function steps over the current image, returning true if successful or false if there is no following image in the animation.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls read(), then discards the resulting image, but the image handler may have a more efficient way of implementing this operation.</para>
            <para>See also jumpToImage() and QImageIOHandler::jumpToNextImage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.LoopCount">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the number of times the animation should loop. If this function returns -1, it can either mean the animation should loop forever, or that an error occurred. If an error occurred, canRead() will return false.</para>
            <para>See also supportsAnimation(), QImageIOHandler::loopCount(), and canRead().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.NextImageDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, this function returns the number of milliseconds to wait until displaying the next frame in the animation. If the image format doesn't support animation, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>This function returns -1 if an error occurred.</para>
            <para>See also supportsAnimation(), QImageIOHandler::nextImageDelay(), and canRead().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.Read">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads an image from the device. On success, the image that was read is returned; otherwise, a null QImage is returned. You can then call error() to find the type of error that occurred, or errorString() to get a human readable description of the error.</para>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, calling read() repeatedly will return the next frame. When all frames have been read, a null image will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also canRead(), supportedImageFormats(), supportsAnimation(), and QMovie.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.Read(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Reads an image from the device into image, which must point to a QImage. Returns true on success; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>If image has same format and size as the image data that is about to be read, this function may not need to allocate a new image before reading. Because of this, it can be faster than the other read() overload, which always constructs a new image; especially when reading several images with the same format and size.</para>
            <para> QImage icon(64, 64, QImage::Format_RGB32);</para>
            <para> QImageReader reader(&quot;icon_64x64.bmp&quot;);</para>
            <para> if (reader.read(&amp;icon)) {</para>
            <para>     // Display icon</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>For image formats that support animation, calling read() repeatedly will return the next frame. When all frames have been read, a null image will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also canRead(), supportedImageFormats(), supportsAnimation(), and QMovie.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the image, without actually reading the image contents.</para>
            <para>If the image format does not support this feature, this function returns an invalid size. Qt's built-in image handlers all support this feature, but custom image format plugins are not required to do so.</para>
            <para>See also QImageIOHandler::ImageOption, QImageIOHandler::option(), and QImageIOHandler::supportsOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.SupportedImageFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of image formats supported by QImageReader.</para>
            <para>By default, Qt can read the following formats:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FormatDescription</para>
            <para>BMP	Windows Bitmap</para>
            <para>GIF	Graphic Interchange Format (optional)</para>
            <para>JPG	Joint Photographic Experts Group</para>
            <para>JPEG	Joint Photographic Experts Group</para>
            <para>MNG	Multiple-image Network Graphics</para>
            <para>PNG	Portable Network Graphics</para>
            <para>PBM	Portable Bitmap</para>
            <para>PGM	Portable Graymap</para>
            <para>PPM	Portable Pixmap</para>
            <para>TIFF	Tagged Image File Format</para>
            <para>XBM	X11 Bitmap</para>
            <para>XPM	X11 Pixmap</para>
            <para>SVG	Scalable Vector Graphics</para>
            <para>TGA	Targa Image Format</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Reading and writing SVG files is supported through Qt's SVG Module.</para>
            <para>TGA support only extends to reading non-RLE compressed files. In particular calls to capabilities for the tga plugin returns only QImageIOPlugin::CanRead, not QImageIOPlugin::CanWrite.</para>
            <para>To configure Qt with GIF support, pass -qt-gif to the configure script or check the appropriate option in the graphical installer.</para>
            <para>Note that the QApplication instance must be created before this function is called.</para>
            <para>See also setFormat(), QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats(), and QImageIOPlugin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.SupportsAnimation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the image format supports animation; otherwise, false is returned.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::supportedFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.SupportsOption(QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the reader supports option; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Different image formats support different options. Call this function to determine whether a certain option is supported by the current format. For example, the PNG format allows you to embed text into the image's metadata (see text()), and the BMP format allows you to determine the image's size without loading the whole image into memory (see size()).</para>
            <para> QImageReader reader(&quot;:/image.png&quot;);</para>
            <para> if (reader.supportsOption(QImageIOHandler::Size))</para>
            <para>     qDebug() &lt;&lt; &quot;Size:&quot; &lt;&lt; reader.size();</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QImageWriter::supportsOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.Text(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the image text associated with key.</para>
            <para>Support for this option is implemented through QImageIOHandler::Description.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also textKeys() and QImageWriter::setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.TextKeys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text keys for this image. You can use these keys with text() to list the image text for a certain key.</para>
            <para>Support for this option is implemented through QImageIOHandler::Description.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also text(), QImageWriter::setText(), and QImage::textKeys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageReader.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the QImageReader object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.AutoDetectImageFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if image format autodetection is enabled on this image reader; otherwise returns false. By default, autodetection is enabled.</para>
            <para>If enabled is true, image format autodetection is enabled; otherwise, it is disabled. By default, autodetection is enabled.</para>
            <para>QImageReader uses an extensive approach to detecting the image format; firstly, if you pass a file name to QImageReader, it will attempt to detect the file extension if the given file name does not point to an existing file, by appending supported default extensions to the given file name, one at a time. It then uses the following approach to detect the image format:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Image plugins are queried first, based on either the optional format string, or the file name suffix (if the source device is a file). No content detection is done at this stage. QImageReader will choose the first plugin that supports reading for this format.</para>
            <para>If no plugin supports the image format, Qt's built-in handlers are checked based on either the optional format string, or the file name suffix.</para>
            <para>If no capable plugins or built-in handlers are found, each plugin is tested by inspecting the content of the data stream.</para>
            <para>If no plugins could detect the image format based on data contents, each built-in image handler is tested by inspecting the contents.</para>
            <para>Finally, if all above approaches fail, QImageReader will report failure when trying to read the image.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>By disabling image format autodetection, QImageReader will only query the plugins and built-in handlers based on the format string (i.e., no file name extensions are tested).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.BackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the background color that's used when reading an image. If the image format does not support setting the background color an invalid color is returned.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the background color to color. Image formats that support this operation are expected to initialize the background to color before reading an image.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.ClipRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clip rect (also known as the ROI, or Region Of Interest) of the image. If no clip rect has been set, an invalid QRect is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the image clip rect (also known as the ROI, or Region Of Interest) to rect. The coordinates of rect are relative to the untransformed image size, as returned by size().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.DecideFormatFromContent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the image reader should decide which plugin to use only based on the contents of the datastream rather than on the file extension.</para>
            <para>If ignored is set to true, then the image reader will ignore specified formats or file extensions and decide which plugin to use only based on the contents in the datastream.</para>
            <para>Setting this flag means that all image plugins gets loaded. Each plugin will read the first bytes in the image data and decide if the plugin is compatible or not.</para>
            <para>This also disables auto detecting the image format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the device currently assigned to QImageReader, or 0 if no device has been assigned.</para>
            <para>Sets QImageReader's device to device. If a device has already been set, the old device is removed from QImageReader and is otherwise left unchanged.</para>
            <para>If the device is not already open, QImageReader will attempt to open the device in QIODevice::ReadOnly mode by calling open(). Note that this does not work for certain devices, such as QProcess, QTcpSocket and QUdpSocket, where more logic is required to open the device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.FileName">
            <summary>
            <para>If the currently assigned device is a QFile, or if setFileName() has been called, this function returns the name of the file QImageReader reads from. Otherwise (i.e., if no device has been assigned or the device is not a QFile), an empty QString is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the file name of QImageReader to fileName. Internally, QImageReader will create a QFile object and open it in QIODevice::ReadOnly mode, and use this when reading images.</para>
            <para>If fileName does not include a file extension (e.g., .png or .bmp), QImageReader will cycle through all supported extensions until it finds a matching file.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format QImageReader uses for reading images.</para>
            <para>You can call this function after assigning a device to the reader to determine the format of the device. For example:</para>
            <para> QImageReader reader(&quot;image.png&quot;);</para>
            <para> // reader.format() == &quot;png&quot;</para>
            <para>If the reader cannot read any image from the device (e.g., there is no image there, or the image has already been read), or if the format is unsupported, this function returns an empty QByteArray().</para>
            <para>Sets the format QImageReader will use when reading images, to format. format is a case insensitive text string. Example:</para>
            <para> QImageReader reader;</para>
            <para> reader.setFormat(&quot;png&quot;); // same as reader.setFormat(&quot;PNG&quot;);</para>
            <para>You can call supportedImageFormats() for the full list of formats QImageReader supports.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.Quality">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the quality level of the image.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>This is an image format specific function that sets the quality level of the image to quality. For image formats that do not support setting the quality, this value is ignored.</para>
            <para>The value range of quality depends on the image format. For example, the &quot;jpeg&quot; format supports a quality range from 0 (low quality, high compression) to 100 (high quality, low compression).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.ScaledClipRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scaled clip rect of the image.</para>
            <para>Sets the scaled clip rect to rect. The scaled clip rect is the clip rect (also known as ROI, or Region Of Interest) that is applied after the image has been scaled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageReader.ScaledSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scaled size of the image.</para>
            <para>Sets the scaled size of the image to size. The scaling is performed after the initial clip rect, but before the scaled clip rect is applied. The algorithm used for scaling depends on the image format. By default (i.e., if the image format does not support scaling), QImageReader will use QImage::scale() with Qt::SmoothScaling.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different types of errors that can occur when reading images with QImageReader.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError.DeviceError">
            <summary>
            <para>QImageReader encountered a device error when reading the image. You can consult your particular device for more details on what went wrong.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError.FileNotFoundError">
            <summary>
            <para>QImageReader was used with a file name, but not file was found with that name. This can also happen if the file name contained no extension, and the file with the correct extension is not supported by Qt.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError.InvalidDataError">
            <summary>
            <para>The image data was invalid, and QImageReader was unable to read an image from it. The can happen if the image file is damaged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError.UnknownError">
            <summary>
            <para>An unknown error occurred. If you get this value after calling read(), it is most likely caused by a bug in QImageReader.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError.UnsupportedFormatError">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt does not support the requested image format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageWriter">
            <summary>
            The QImageWriter class provides a format independent interface for writing images to files or other devices.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QImageWriter supports setting format specific options, such as the gamma level, compression level and quality, prior to storing the image. If you do not need such options, you can use QImage::save() or QPixmap::save() instead.</para>
            <para>To store an image, you start by constructing a QImageWriter object. Pass either a file name or a device pointer, and the image format to QImageWriter's constructor. You can then set several options, such as the gamma level (by calling setGamma()) and quality (by calling setQuality()). canWrite() returns true if QImageWriter can write the image (i.e., the image format is supported and the device is open for writing). Call write() to write the image to the device.</para>
            <para>If any error occurs when writing the image, write() will return false. You can then call error() to find the type of error that occurred, or errorString() to get a human readable description of what went wrong.</para>
            <para>Call supportedImageFormats() for a list of formats that QImageWriter can write. QImageWriter supports all built-in image formats, in addition to any image format plugins that support writing.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QImageReader, QImageIOHandler, and QImageIOPlugin.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageWriter object. Before writing, you must call setFormat() to set an image format, then setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QImageWriter object using the device device and image format format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageWriter object. Before writing, you must call setFormat() to set an image format, then setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QImageWriter object. Before writing, you must call setFormat() to set an image format, then setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.CanWrite">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if QImageWriter can write the image; i.e., the image format is supported and the assigned device is open for reading.</para>
            <para>See also write(), setDevice(), and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.Error">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of error that last occurred.</para>
            <para>See also ImageWriterError and errorString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.ErrorString">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a human readable description of the last error that occurred.</para>
            <para>See also error().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.SetText(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the image text associated with the key key to text. This is useful for storing copyright information or other information about the image. Example:</para>
            <para> QImage image(&quot;some/image.jpeg&quot;);</para>
            <para> QImageWriter writer(&quot;images/outimage.png&quot;, &quot;png&quot;);</para>
            <para> writer.setText(&quot;Author&quot;, &quot;John Smith&quot;);</para>
            <para> writer.write(image);</para>
            <para>If you want to store a single block of data (e.g., a comment), you can pass an empty key, or use a generic key like &quot;Description&quot;.</para>
            <para>The key and text will be embedded into the image data after calling write().</para>
            <para>Support for this option is implemented through QImageIOHandler::Description.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QImage::setText() and QImageReader::text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.SupportedImageFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of image formats supported by QImageWriter.</para>
            <para>By default, Qt can write the following formats:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FormatDescription</para>
            <para>BMP	Windows Bitmap</para>
            <para>JPG	Joint Photographic Experts Group</para>
            <para>JPEG	Joint Photographic Experts Group</para>
            <para>PNG	Portable Network Graphics</para>
            <para>PPM	Portable Pixmap</para>
            <para>TIFF	Tagged Image File Format</para>
            <para>XBM	X11 Bitmap</para>
            <para>XPM	X11 Pixmap</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Reading and writing SVG files is supported through Qt's SVG Module.</para>
            <para>Note that the QApplication instance must be created before this function is called.</para>
            <para>See also setFormat(), QImageReader::supportedImageFormats(), and QImageIOPlugin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.SupportsOption(QtGui.QImageIOHandler.ImageOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the writer supports option; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Different image formats support different options. Call this function to determine whether a certain option is supported by the current format. For example, the PNG format allows you to embed text into the image's metadata (see text()).</para>
            <para> QImageWriter writer(fileName);</para>
            <para> if (writer.supportsOption(QImageIOHandler::Description))</para>
            <para>     writer.setText(&quot;Author&quot;, &quot;John Smith&quot;);</para>
            <para>Options can be tested after the writer has been associated with a format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QImageReader::supportsOption() and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.Write(QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the image image to the assigned device or file name. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. If the operation fails, you can call error() to find the type of error that occurred, or errorString() to get a human readable description of the error.</para>
            <para>See also canWrite(), error(), and errorString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QImageWriter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the QImageWriter object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.Compression">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the compression of the image.</para>
            <para>This is an image format specific function that set the compression of an image. For image formats that do not support setting the compression, this value is ignored.</para>
            <para>The value range of compression depends on the image format. For example, the &quot;tiff&quot; format supports two values, 0(no compression) and 1(LZW-compression).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.Description">
            <summary>
            <para>Use QImageReader::text() instead.</para>
            <para>Returns the description of the image.</para>
            <para>Use setText() instead.</para>
            <para>This is an image format specific function that sets the description of the image to description. For image formats that do not support setting the description, this value is ignored.</para>
            <para>The contents of description depends on the image format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the device currently assigned to QImageWriter, or 0 if no device has been assigned.</para>
            <para>Sets QImageWriter's device to device. If a device has already been set, the old device is removed from QImageWriter and is otherwise left unchanged.</para>
            <para>If the device is not already open, QImageWriter will attempt to open the device in QIODevice::WriteOnly mode by calling open(). Note that this does not work for certain devices, such as QProcess, QTcpSocket and QUdpSocket, where more logic is required to open the device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.FileName">
            <summary>
            <para>If the currently assigned device is a QFile, or if setFileName() has been called, this function returns the name of the file QImageWriter writes to. Otherwise (i.e., if no device has been assigned or the device is not a QFile), an empty QString is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the file name of QImageWriter to fileName. Internally, QImageWriter will create a QFile and open it in QIODevice::WriteOnly mode, and use this file when writing images.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format QImageWriter uses for writing images.</para>
            <para>Sets the format QImageWriter will use when writing images, to format. format is a case insensitive text string. Example:</para>
            <para> QImageWriter writer;</para>
            <para> writer.setFormat(&quot;png&quot;); // same as writer.setFormat(&quot;PNG&quot;);</para>
            <para>You can call supportedImageFormats() for the full list of formats QImageWriter supports.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.Gamma">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the gamma level of the image.</para>
            <para>This is an image format specific function that sets the gamma level of the image to gamma. For image formats that do not support setting the gamma level, this value is ignored.</para>
            <para>The value range of gamma depends on the image format. For example, the &quot;png&quot; format supports a gamma range from 0.0 to 1.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QImageWriter.Quality">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the quality level of the image.</para>
            <para>This is an image format specific function that sets the quality level of the image to quality. For image formats that do not support setting the quality, this value is ignored.</para>
            <para>The value range of quality depends on the image format. For example, the &quot;jpeg&quot; format supports a quality range from 0 (low quality, high compression) to 100 (high quality, low compression).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QImageWriter.ImageWriterError">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes errors that can occur when writing images with QImageWriter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageWriter.ImageWriterError.DeviceError">
            <summary>
            <para>QImageWriter encountered a device error when writing the image data. Consult your device for more details on what went wrong.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageWriter.ImageWriterError.UnknownError">
            <summary>
            <para>An unknown error occurred. If you get this value after calling write(), it is most likely caused by a bug in QImageWriter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QImageWriter.ImageWriterError.UnsupportedFormatError">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt does not support the requested image format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputContext">
            <summary>
            The QInputContext class abstracts the input method dependent data and composing state.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An input method is responsible for inputting complex text that cannot be inputted via simple keymap. It converts a sequence of input events (typically key events) into a text string through the input method specific converting process. The class of the processes are widely ranging from simple finite state machine to complex text translator that pools a whole paragraph of a text with text editing capability to perform grammar and semantic analysis.</para>
            <para>To abstract such different input method specific intermediate information, Qt offers the QInputContext as base class. The concept is well known as 'input context' in the input method domain. An input context is created for a text widget in response to a demand. It is ensured that an input context is prepared for an input method before input to a text widget.</para>
            <para>Multiple input contexts that belong to a single input method may concurrently coexist. Suppose multi-window text editor. Each text widget of window A and B holds different QInputContext instance which contains different state information such as partially composed text.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Groups of Functions</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ContextFunctions</para>
            <para>Receiving information	x11FilterEvent(), filterEvent(), mouseHandler()</para>
            <para>Sending back composed text	sendEvent()</para>
            <para>State change notification	setFocusWidget(), reset()</para>
            <para>Context information	identifierName(), language(), font(), isComposing()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Licensing Information</para>
            <para>Copyright (C) 2003-2004 immodule for Qt Project. All rights reserved.</para>
            <para>This file is written to contribute to Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) under their own license. You may use this file under your Qt license. Following description is copied from their original file headers. Contact immodule-qt@freedesktop.org if any conditions of this licensing are not clear to you.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QInputContextPlugin, QInputContextFactory, and QApplication::setInputContext().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an input context with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.Actions">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a preliminary interface for Qt 4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.OnFilterEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to filter input events.</para>
            <para>Return true if the event has been consumed. Otherwise, the unfiltered event will be forwarded to widgets as ordinary way. Although the input events have accept() and ignore() methods, leave it untouched.</para>
            <para>event is currently restricted to events of these types:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>CloseSoftwareInputPanel</para>
            <para>KeyPress</para>
            <para>KeyRelease</para>
            <para>MouseButtonDblClick</para>
            <para>MouseButtonPress</para>
            <para>MouseButtonRelease</para>
            <para>MouseMove</para>
            <para>RequestSoftwareInputPanel</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>But some input method related events such as QWheelEvent or QTabletEvent may be added in future.</para>
            <para>The filtering opportunity is always given to the input context as soon as possible. It has to be taken place before any other key event consumers such as eventfilters and accelerators because some input methods require quite various key combination and sequences. It often conflicts with accelerators and so on, so we must give the input context the filtering opportunity first to ensure all input methods work properly regardless of application design.</para>
            <para>Ordinary input methods require discrete key events to work properly, so Qt's key compression is always disabled for any input contexts.</para>
            <para>See also QKeyEvent and x11FilterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font of the current input widget</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.IdentifierName">
            <summary>
            <para>This function must be implemented in any subclasses to return the identifier name of the input method.</para>
            <para>Return value is the name to identify and specify input methods for the input method switching mechanism and so on. The name has to be consistent with QInputContextPlugin::keys(). The name has to consist of ASCII characters only.</para>
            <para>There are two different names with different responsibility in the input method domain. This function returns one of them. Another name is called 'display name' that stands for the name for endusers appeared in a menu and so on.</para>
            <para>See also QInputContextPlugin::keys() and QInputContextPlugin::displayName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.IsComposing">
            <summary>
            <para>This function indicates whether InputMethodStart event had been sent to the current focus widget. It is ensured that an input context can send InputMethodCompose or InputMethodEnd event safely if this function returned true.</para>
            <para>The state is automatically being tracked through sendEvent().</para>
            <para>See also sendEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.Language">
            <summary>
            <para>This function must be implemented in any subclasses to return a language code (e.g. &quot;zh_CN&quot;, &quot;zh_TW&quot;, &quot;zh_HK&quot;, &quot;ja&quot;, &quot;ko&quot;, ...) of the input context. If the input context can handle multiple languages, return the currently used one. The name has to be consistent with QInputContextPlugin::language().</para>
            <para>This information will be used by language tagging feature in QInputMethodEvent. It is required to distinguish unified han characters correctly. It enables proper font and character code handling. Suppose CJK-awared multilingual web browser (that automatically modifies fonts in CJK-mixed text) and XML editor (that automatically inserts lang attr).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.MouseHandler(System.Int32,QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to handle mouse press, release, double-click, and move events within the preedit text. You can use the function to implement mouse-oriented user interface such as text selection or popup menu for candidate selection.</para>
            <para>The x parameter is the offset within the string that was sent with the InputMethodCompose event. The alteration boundary of x is ensured as character boundary of preedit string accurately.</para>
            <para>The event parameter is the event that was sent to the editor widget. The event type is QEvent::MouseButtonPress, QEvent::MouseButtonRelease, QEvent::MouseButtonDblClick or QEvent::MouseMove. The event's button and state indicate the kind of operation that was performed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to reset the state of the input method.</para>
            <para>This function is called by several widgets to reset input state. For example, a text widget call this function before inserting a text to make widget ready to accept a text.</para>
            <para>Default implementation is sufficient for simple input method. You can override this function to reset external input method engines in complex input method. In the case, call QInputContext::reset() to ensure proper termination of inputting.</para>
            <para>In a reimplementation of reset(), you must not send any QInputMethodEvent containing preedit text. You can only commit string and attributes; otherwise, you risk breaking input state consistency.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.OnSendEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sends an input method event specified by event to the current focus widget. Implementations of QInputContext should call this method to send the generated input method events and not QApplication::sendEvent(), as the events might have to get dispatched to a different application on some platforms.</para>
            <para>Some complex input methods route the handling to several child contexts (e.g. to enable language switching). To account for this, QInputContext will check if the parent object is a QInputContext. If yes, it will call the parents sendEvent() implementation instead of sending the event directly.</para>
            <para>See also QInputMethodEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.standardFormat(QtGui.QInputContext.StandardFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QTextFormat object that specifies the format for component s.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called when a state in the focus widget has changed. QInputContext can then use QWidget::inputMethodQuery() to query the new state of the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.WidgetDestroyed(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called when the specified widget is destroyed. The widget is a widget on which this input context is installed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContext.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the input context.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputContext.FilterEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to filter input events.</para>
            <para>Return true if the event has been consumed. Otherwise, the unfiltered event will be forwarded to widgets as ordinary way. Although the input events have accept() and ignore() methods, leave it untouched.</para>
            <para>event is currently restricted to events of these types:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>CloseSoftwareInputPanel</para>
            <para>KeyPress</para>
            <para>KeyRelease</para>
            <para>MouseButtonDblClick</para>
            <para>MouseButtonPress</para>
            <para>MouseButtonRelease</para>
            <para>MouseMove</para>
            <para>RequestSoftwareInputPanel</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>But some input method related events such as QWheelEvent or QTabletEvent may be added in future.</para>
            <para>The filtering opportunity is always given to the input context as soon as possible. It has to be taken place before any other key event consumers such as eventfilters and accelerators because some input methods require quite various key combination and sequences. It often conflicts with accelerators and so on, so we must give the input context the filtering opportunity first to ensure all input methods work properly regardless of application design.</para>
            <para>Ordinary input methods require discrete key events to work properly, so Qt's key compression is always disabled for any input contexts.</para>
            <para>See also QKeyEvent and x11FilterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputContext.SendEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>Sends an input method event specified by event to the current focus widget. Implementations of QInputContext should call this method to send the generated input method events and not QApplication::sendEvent(), as the events might have to get dispatched to a different application on some platforms.</para>
            <para>Some complex input methods route the handling to several child contexts (e.g. to enable language switching). To account for this, QInputContext will check if the parent object is a QInputContext. If yes, it will call the parents sendEvent() implementation instead of sending the event directly.</para>
            <para>See also QInputMethodEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QInputContext.FocusWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget that has an input focus for this input context.</para>
            <para>The return value may differ from holderWidget() if the input context is shared between several text widgets.</para>
            <para>Warning: To ensure platform independence and support flexible configuration of widgets, ordinary input methods should not call this function directly.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget that has an input focus for this input context.</para>
            <para>Warning: Ordinary input methods must not call this function directly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputContext.StandardFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>See also standardFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputContext.StandardFormat.PreeditFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The preedit text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputContext.StandardFormat.SelectionFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The selection text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputContextFactory">
            <summary>
            The QInputContextFactory class creates QInputContext objects.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The input context factory creates a QInputContext object for a given key with QInputContextFactory::create().</para>
            <para>The input contexts are either built-in or dynamically loaded from an input context plugin (see QInputContextPlugin).</para>
            <para>keys() returns a list of valid keys. The keys are the names used, for example, to identify and specify input methods for the input method switching mechanism. The names have to be consistent with QInputContext::identifierName(), and may only contain ASCII characters.</para>
            <para>A key can be used to retrieve the associated input context's supported languages using languages(). You can retrieve the input context's description using description() and finally you can get a user friendly internationalized name of the QInputContext object specified by the key using displayName().</para>
            <para>Copyright (C) 2003-2004 immodule for Qt Project. All rights reserved.</para>
            <para>This file is written to contribute to Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) under their own license. You may use this file under your Qt license. Following description is copied from their original file headers. Contact immodule-qt@freedesktop.org if any conditions of this licensing are not clear to you.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QInputContext and QInputContextPlugin.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextFactory.Create(System.String,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QInputContext object for the input context specified by key with the given parent. Keys are case sensitive.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextFactory.Description(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an internationalized brief description of the QInputContext object specified by key. You can, for example, use this description in a user interface.</para>
            <para>See also keys() and displayName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextFactory.DisplayName(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a user friendly internationalized name of the QInputContext object specified by key. You can, for example, use this name in a menu.</para>
            <para>See also keys() and QInputContext::identifierName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextFactory.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of keys this factory can create input contexts for.</para>
            <para>The keys are the names used, for example, to identify and specify input methods for the input method switching mechanism. The names have to be consistent with QInputContext::identifierName(), and may only contain ASCII characters.</para>
            <para>See also create(), displayName(), and QInputContext::identifierName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextFactory.Languages(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the languages supported by the QInputContext object specified by key.</para>
            <para>The languages are expressed as language code (e.g. &quot;zh_CN&quot;, &quot;zh_TW&quot;, &quot;zh_HK&quot;, &quot;ja&quot;, &quot;ko&quot;, ...). An input context that supports multiple languages can return all supported languages as a QStringList. The name has to be consistent with QInputContext::language().</para>
            <para>This information may be used to optimize a user interface.</para>
            <para>See also keys(), QInputContext::language(), and QLocale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin">
            <summary>
            The QInputContextPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom QInputContext plugins.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The input context plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy to create custom input contexts that can be loaded dynamically into applications.</para>
            <para>To create an input context plugin you subclass this base class, reimplement the pure virtual functions keys(), create(), languages(), displayName(), and description(), and export the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            <para>Copyright (C) 2003-2004 immodule for Qt Project. All rights reserved.</para>
            <para>This file is written to contribute to Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) under their own license. You may use this file under your Qt license. Following description is copied from their original file headers. Contact immodule-qt@freedesktop.org if any conditions of this licensing are not clear to you.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QInputContext and How to Create Qt Plugins.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a input context plugin with the given parent. This is invoked automatically by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.Create(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QInputContext object for the input context key key. The input context key is usually the class name of the required input method.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.Description(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an internationalized brief description of the QInputContext object specified by key. You can, for example, use this description in a user interface.</para>
            <para>See also keys() and displayName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.DisplayName(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a user friendly internationalized name of the QInputContext object specified by key. You can, for example, use this name in a menu.</para>
            <para>See also keys() and QInputContext::identifierName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of QInputContext keys this plugin provides.</para>
            <para>These keys are usually the class names of the custom input context that are implemented in the plugin. The names are used, for example, to identify and specify input methods for the input method switching mechanism. They have to be consistent with QInputContext::identifierName(), and may only contain ASCII characters.</para>
            <para>See also create(), displayName(), and QInputContext::identifierName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.Languages(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the languages supported by the QInputContext object specified by key.</para>
            <para>The languages are expressed as language code (e.g. &quot;zh_CN&quot;, &quot;zh_TW&quot;, &quot;zh_HK&quot;, &quot;ja&quot;, &quot;ko&quot;, ...). An input context that supports multiple languages can return all supported languages as QStringList. The name has to be consistent with QInputContext::language().</para>
            <para>This information may be used to optimize user interface.</para>
            <para>See also keys(), QInputContext::language(), and QLocale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputContextPlugin.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the input context plugin.</para>
            <para>You never have to call this explicitly. Qt destroys a plugin automatically when it's no longer used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputDialog">
            <summary>
            The QInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The input value can be a string, a number or an item from a list. A label must be set to tell the user what they should enter.</para>
            <para>Four static convenience functions are provided: getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getItem(). All the functions can be used in a similar way, for example:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr(&amp;quot;QInputDialog::getText()&amp;quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&amp;quot;User name:&amp;quot;), QLineEdit::Normal,</para>
            <para>                                          QDir::home().dirName(), &amp;amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;amp;&amp;amp; !text.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         textLabel-&amp;gt;setText(text);</para>
            <para>The ok variable is set to true if the user clicks OK; otherwise it is set to false.</para>
            <para>The Standard Dialogs example shows how to use QInputDialog as well as other built-in Qt dialogs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMessageBox and Standard Dialogs Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new input dialog with the given parent and window flags.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            <para>Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.</para>
            <para>See also QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.OnDoubleValueChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the double value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.OnDoubleValueSelected(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a double value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetDouble(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getDouble()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                        tr(&quot;Amount:&quot;), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok)</para>
            <para>         doubleLabel-&gt;setText(QString(&quot;$%1&quot;).arg(d));</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getInt(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetDouble(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getDouble()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                        tr(&quot;Amount:&quot;), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok)</para>
            <para>         doubleLabel-&gt;setText(QString(&quot;$%1&quot;).arg(d));</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getInt(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetInt(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getInteger()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                  tr(&quot;Percentage:&quot;), 25, 0, 100, 1, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok)</para>
            <para>         integerLabel-&gt;setText(tr(&quot;%1%&quot;).arg(i));</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getDouble(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetInt(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getInteger()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                  tr(&quot;Percentage:&quot;), 25, 0, 100, 1, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok)</para>
            <para>         integerLabel-&gt;setText(tr(&quot;%1%&quot;).arg(i));</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getDouble(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetInteger(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use getInt() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetInteger(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use getInt() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetItem(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combobox. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combobox is editable and an input method is active.</para>
            <para>If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise the user may only select one of the existing items.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combobox.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     QStringList items;</para>
            <para>     items &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Spring&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Summer&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Fall&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Winter&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getItem()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&quot;Season:&quot;), items, 0, false, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;&amp; !item.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         itemLabel-&gt;setText(item);</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getInt(), and getDouble().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetItem(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},System.Int32,System.Boolean,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combobox. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combobox is editable and an input method is active.</para>
            <para>If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise the user may only select one of the existing items.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combobox.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     QStringList items;</para>
            <para>     items &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Spring&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Summer&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Fall&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Winter&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getItem()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&quot;Season:&quot;), items, 0, false, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;&amp; !item.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         itemLabel-&gt;setText(item);</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getInt(), and getDouble().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetItem(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},System.Int32,System.Boolean,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType,QtCore.Qt.InputMethodHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combobox. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combobox is editable and an input method is active.</para>
            <para>If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise the user may only select one of the existing items.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.</para>
            <para>This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combobox.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     QStringList items;</para>
            <para>     items &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Spring&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Summer&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Fall&quot;) &lt;&lt; tr(&quot;Winter&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getItem()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&quot;Season:&quot;), items, 0, false, &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;&amp; !item.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         itemLabel-&gt;setText(item);</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getText(), getInt(), and getDouble().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetText(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get a string from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.</para>
            <para>If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getText()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&quot;User name:&quot;), QLineEdit::Normal,</para>
            <para>                                          QDir::home().dirName(), &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;&amp; !text.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         textLabel-&gt;setText(text);</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getInt(), getDouble(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetText(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode,System.String,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get a string from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.</para>
            <para>If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getText()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&quot;User name:&quot;), QLineEdit::Normal,</para>
            <para>                                          QDir::home().dirName(), &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;&amp; !text.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         textLabel-&gt;setText(text);</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getInt(), getDouble(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.GetText(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode,System.String,System.Boolean@,QtCore.Qt.WindowType,QtCore.Qt.InputMethodHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Static convenience function to get a string from the user.</para>
            <para>title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.</para>
            <para>If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.</para>
            <para>If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.</para>
            <para>Use this static function like this:</para>
            <para>     bool ok;</para>
            <para>     QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr(&quot;QInputDialog::getText()&quot;),</para>
            <para>                                          tr(&quot;User name:&quot;), QLineEdit::Normal,</para>
            <para>                                          QDir::home().dirName(), &amp;ok);</para>
            <para>     if (ok &amp;&amp; !text.isEmpty())</para>
            <para>         textLabel-&gt;setText(text);</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QInputDialog constructors.</para>
            <para>See also getInt(), getDouble(), and getItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.OnIntValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the integer value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.OnIntValueSelected(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a integer value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function connects one of its signals to the slot specified by receiver and member. The specific signal depends on the arguments that are specified in member. These are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>textValueSelected() if member has a QString for its first argument.</para>
            <para>intValueSelected() if member has an int for its first argument.</para>
            <para>doubleValueSelected() if member has a double for its first argument.</para>
            <para>accepted() if member has NO arguments.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This function connects one of its signals to the slot specified by receiver and member. The specific signal depends on the arguments that are specified in member. These are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>textValueSelected() if member has a QString for its first argument.</para>
            <para>intValueSelected() if member has an int for its first argument.</para>
            <para>doubleValueSelected() if member has a double for its first argument.</para>
            <para>accepted() if member has NO arguments.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.SetDoubleRange(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the range of double precision floating point values accepted by the dialog when used in DoubleInput mode, with minimum and maximum values specified by min and max respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.SetIntRange(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the range of integer values accepted by the dialog when used in IntInput mode, with minimum and maximum values specified by min and max respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.SetOption(QtGui.QInputDialog.InputDialogOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>See also options and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.TestOption(QtGui.QInputDialog.InputDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also options and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.OnTextValueChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text string changes in the dialog. The current string is specified by text.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.OnTextValueSelected(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a text string by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected string is specified by text.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the input dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputDialog.TextValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text string changes in the dialog. The current string is specified by text.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputDialog.TextValueSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a text string by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected string is specified by text.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputDialog.IntValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the integer value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputDialog.IntValueSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a integer value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputDialog.DoubleValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the double value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QInputDialog.DoubleValueSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a double value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputDialogOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies various options that affect the look and feel of an input dialog.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also options, setOption(), and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputDialogOption.NoButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't display OK and Cancel buttons. (Useful for &quot;live dialogs&quot;.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputDialogOption.UseListViewForComboBoxItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Use a QListView rather than a non-editable QComboBox for displaying the items set with setComboBoxItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different modes of input that can be selected for the dialog.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also inputMode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputMode.DoubleInput">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to input floating point numbers with double precision accuracy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputMode.IntInput">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to input integers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputDialog.InputMode.TextInput">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to input text strings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent">
            <summary>
            The QInputMethodEvent class provides parameters for input method events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Input method events are sent to widgets when an input method is used to enter text into a widget. Input methods are widely used to enter text for languages with non-Latin alphabets.</para>
            <para>Note that when creating custom text editing widgets, the Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled window attribute must be set explicitly (using the QWidget::setAttribute() function) in order to receive input method events.</para>
            <para>The events are of interest to authors of keyboard entry widgets who want to be able to correctly handle languages with complex character input. Text input in such languages is usually a three step process:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Starting to ComposeWhen the user presses the first key on a keyboard, an input context is created. This input context will contain a string of the typed characters.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ComposingWith every new key pressed, the input method will try to create a matching string for the text typed so far called preedit string. While the input context is active, the user can only move the cursor inside the string belonging to this input context.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>CompletingAt some point, the user will activate a user interface component (perhaps using a particular key) where they can choose from a number of strings matching the text they have typed so far. The user can either confirm their choice cancel the input; in either case the input context will be closed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QInputMethodEvent models these three stages, and transfers the information needed to correctly render the intermediate result. A QInputMethodEvent has two main parameters: preeditString() and commitString(). The preeditString() parameter gives the currently active preedit string. The commitString() parameter gives a text that should get added to (or replace parts of) the text of the editor widget. It usually is a result of the input operations and has to be inserted to the widgets text directly before the preedit string.</para>
            <para>If the commitString() should replace parts of the of the text in the editor, replacementLength() will contain the number of characters to be replaced. replacementStart() contains the position at which characters are to be replaced relative from the start of the preedit string.</para>
            <para>A number of attributes control the visual appearance of the preedit string (the visual appearance of text outside the preedit string is controlled by the widget only). The AttributeType enum describes the different attributes that can be set.</para>
            <para>A class implementing QWidget::inputMethodEvent() or QGraphicsItem::inputMethodEvent() should at least understand and honor the TextFormat and Cursor attributes.</para>
            <para>Since input methods need to be able to query certain properties from the widget or graphics item, subclasses must also implement QWidget::inputMethodQuery() and QGraphicsItem::inputMethodQuery(), respectively.</para>
            <para>When receiving an input method event, the text widget has to performs the following steps:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the widget has selected text, the selected text should get removed.</para>
            <para>Remove the text starting at replacementStart() with length replacementLength() and replace it by the commitString(). If replacementLength() is 0, replacementStart() gives the insertion position for the commitString().When doing replacement the area of the preedit string is ignored, thus a replacement starting at -1 with a length of 2 will remove the last character before the preedit string and the first character afterwards, and insert the commit string directly before the preedit string.</para>
            <para>If the widget implements undo/redo, this operation gets added to the undo stack.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If there is no current preedit string, insert the preeditString() at the current cursor position; otherwise replace the previous preeditString with the one received from this event.If the widget implements undo/redo, the preeditString() should not influence the undo/redo stack in any way.</para>
            <para>The widget should examine the list of attributes to apply to the preedit string. It has to understand at least the TextFormat and Cursor attributes and render them as specified.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QInputContext.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an event of type QEvent::InputMethod. The attributes(), preeditString(), commitString(), replacementStart(), and replacementLength() are initialized to default values.</para>
            <para>See also setCommitString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.#ctor(System.String,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.Attribute})">
            <summary>
            <para>Construcs an event of type QEvent::InputMethod. The preedit text is set to preeditText, the attributes to attributes.</para>
            <para>The commitString(), replacementStart(), and replacementLength() values can be set using setCommitString().</para>
            <para>See also preeditString() and attributes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.Attributes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of attributes passed to the QInputMethodEvent constructor. The attributes control the visual appearance of the preedit string (the visual appearance of text outside the preedit string is controlled by the widget only).</para>
            <para>See also preeditString() and Attribute.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.PreeditString">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preedit text, i.e. the text before the user started editing it.</para>
            <para>See also commitString() and attributes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.ReplacementLength">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of characters to be replaced in the preedit string.</para>
            <para>See also replacementStart() and setCommitString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.ReplacementStart">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position at which characters are to be replaced relative from the start of the preedit string.</para>
            <para>See also replacementLength() and setCommitString().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.SetCommitString(System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the commit string to commitString.</para>
            <para>The commit string is the text that should get added to (or replace parts of) the text of the editor widget. It usually is a result of the input operations and has to be inserted to the widgets text directly before the preedit string.</para>
            <para>If the commit string should replace parts of the of the text in the editor, replaceLength specifies the number of characters to be replaced. replaceFrom specifies the position at which characters are to be replaced relative from the start of the preedit string.</para>
            <para>See also commitString(), replacementStart(), and replacementLength().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.CommitString">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text that should get added to (or replace parts of) the text of the editor widget. It usually is a result of the input operations and has to be inserted to the widgets text directly before the preedit string.</para>
            <para>See also setCommitString(), preeditString(), replacementStart(), and replacementLength().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.Attribute">
            <summary>
            The QInputMethodEvent::Attribute class stores an input method attribute.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.Attribute.#ctor(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.Attribute)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an input method attribute. type specifies the type of attribute, start and length the position of the attribute, and value the value of the attribute.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.Attribute.#ctor(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an input method attribute. type specifies the type of attribute, start and length the position of the attribute, and value the value of the attribute.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType">
            <summary>
            <para>See also Attribute.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType.Cursor">
            <summary>
            <para>If set, a cursor should be shown inside the preedit string at position start. The length variable determines whether the cursor is visible or not. If the length is 0 the cursor is invisible. If value is a QVariant of type QColor this color will be used for rendering the cursor, otherwise the color of the surrounding text will be used. There should be at most one Cursor attribute per event. If several are specified the behaviour is undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType.Language">
            <summary>
            <para>The variant contains a QLocale object specifying the language of a certain part of the preedit string. There should be at most one language set for every part of the preedit string. If several are specified for any character in the string the behavior is undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType.Ruby">
            <summary>
            <para>The ruby text for a part of the preedit string. There should be at most one ruby text set for every part of the preedit string. If several are specified for any character in the string the behaviour is undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType.Selection">
            <summary>
            <para>If set, the edit cursor should be moved to the specified position in the editor text contents. In contrast with Cursor, this attribute does not work on the preedit text, but on the surrounding text. The cursor will be moved after the commit string has been committed, and the preedit string will be located at the new edit position. The start position specifies the new position and the length variable can be used to set a selection starting from that point. The value is unused.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QInputMethodEvent.AttributeType.TextFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>A QTextCharFormat for the part of the preedit string specified by start and length. value contains a QVariant of type QTextFormat specifying rendering of this part of the preedit string. There should be at most one format for every part of the preedit string. If several are specified for any character in the string the behaviour is undefined. A conforming implementation has to at least honor the backgroundColor, textColor and fontUnderline properties of the format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QIntValidator">
            <summary>
            The QIntValidator class provides a validator that ensures a string contains a valid integer within a specified range.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Example of use:</para>
            <para> QValidator *validator = new QIntValidator(100, 999, this);</para>
            <para> QLineEdit *edit = new QLineEdit(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // the edit lineedit will only accept integers between 100 and 999</para>
            <para> edit-&amp;gt;setValidator(validator);</para>
            <para>Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.</para>
            <para> QString str;</para>
            <para> int pos = 0;</para>
            <para> QIntValidator v(100, 900, this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Intermediate</para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;012&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Intermediate</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;123&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Acceptable</para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;678&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Acceptable</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;999&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);    // returns Intermediate</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;1234&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Invalid</para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;-123&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Invalid</para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;abc&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Invalid</para>
            <para> str = &amp;quot;12cm&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(str, pos);     // returns Invalid</para>
            <para>Notice that the value 999 returns Intermediate. Values consisting of a number of digits equal to or less than the max value are considered intermediate. This is intended because the digit that prevents a number to be in range is not necessarily the last digit typed. This also means that an intermediate number can have leading zeros.</para>
            <para>The minimum and maximum values are set in one call with setRange(), or individually with setBottom() and setTop().</para>
            <para>QIntValidator uses its locale() to interpret the number. For example, in Arabic locales, QIntValidator will accept Arabic digits. In addition, QIntValidator is always guaranteed to accept a number formatted according to the &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; locale.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDoubleValidator, QRegExpValidator, and Line Edits Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIntValidator.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a validator with a parent object that accepts all integers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIntValidator.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a validator with a parent, that accepts integers from minimum to maximum inclusive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIntValidator.Fixup(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QValidator::fixup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIntValidator.SetRange(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the range of the validator to only accept integers between bottom and top inclusive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIntValidator.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QValidator::validate().</para>
            <para>Returns Acceptable if the input is an integer within the valid range, Intermediate if the input is a prefix of an integer in the valid range, and Invalid otherwise.</para>
            <para>If the valid range consists of just positive integers (e.g., 32 to 100) and input is a negative integer, then Invalid is returned. (On the other hand, if the range consists of negative integers (e.g., -100 to -32) and input is a positive integer, then Intermediate is returned, because the user might be just about to type the minus (especially for right-to-left languages).</para>
            <para> int pos = 0;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> s = &quot;abc&quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(s, pos);    // returns Invalid</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> s = &quot;5&quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(s, pos);    // returns Intermediate</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> s = &quot;50&quot;;</para>
            <para> v.validate(s, pos);    // returns Acceptable</para>
            <para>By default, the pos parameter is not used by this validator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QIntValidator.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the validator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIntValidator.Bottom">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the validator's lowest acceptable value.</para>
            <para>By default, this property's value is derived from the lowest signed integer available (typically -2147483647).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QIntValidator.Top">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the validator's highest acceptable value.</para>
            <para>By default, this property's value is derived from the highest signed integer available (typically 2147483647).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            The QItemDelegate class provides display and editing facilities for data items from a model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QItemDelegate can be used to provide custom display features and editor widgets for item views based on QAbstractItemView subclasses. Using a delegate for this purpose allows the display and editing mechanisms to be customized and developed independently from the model and view.</para>
            <para>The QItemDelegate class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework. Note that QStyledItemDelegate has taken over the job of drawing Qt's item views. We recommend the use of QStyledItemDelegate when creating new delegates.</para>
            <para>When displaying items from a custom model in a standard view, it is often sufficient to simply ensure that the model returns appropriate data for each of the roles that determine the appearance of items in views. The default delegate used by Qt's standard views uses this role information to display items in most of the common forms expected by users. However, it is sometimes necessary to have even more control over the appearance of items than the default delegate can provide.</para>
            <para>This class provides default implementations of the functions for painting item data in a view and editing data from item models. Default implementations of the paint() and sizeHint() virtual functions, defined in QAbstractItemDelegate, are provided to ensure that the delegate implements the correct basic behavior expected by views. You can reimplement these functions in subclasses to customize the appearance of items.</para>
            <para>When editing data in an item view, QItemDelegate provides an editor widget, which is a widget that is placed on top of the view while editing takes place. Editors are created with a QItemEditorFactory; a default static instance provided by QItemEditorFactory is installed on all item delegates. You can set a custom factory using setItemEditorFactory() or set a new default factory with QItemEditorFactory::setDefaultFactory(). It is the data stored in the item model with the Qt::EditRole that is edited.</para>
            <para>Only the standard editing functions for widget-based delegates are reimplemented here:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>createEditor() returns the widget used to change data from the model and can be reimplemented to customize editing behavior.</para>
            <para>setEditorData() provides the widget with data to manipulate.</para>
            <para>updateEditorGeometry() ensures that the editor is displayed correctly with respect to the item view.</para>
            <para>setModelData() returns updated data to the model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The closeEditor() signal indicates that the user has completed editing the data, and that the editor widget can be destroyed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Standard Roles and Data Types</para>
            <para>The default delegate used by the standard views supplied with Qt associates each standard role (defined by Qt::ItemDataRole) with certain data types. Models that return data in these types can influence the appearance of the delegate as described in the following table.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>RoleAccepted Types</para>
            <para>Qt::BackgroundRole	QBrush</para>
            <para>Qt::BackgroundColorRole	QColor (obsolete; use Qt::BackgroundRole instead)</para>
            <para>Qt::CheckStateRole	Qt::CheckState</para>
            <para>Qt::DecorationRole	QIcon, QPixmap and QColor</para>
            <para>Qt::DisplayRole	QString and types with a string representation</para>
            <para>Qt::EditRole	See QItemEditorFactory for details</para>
            <para>Qt::FontRole	QFont</para>
            <para>Qt::SizeHintRole	QSize</para>
            <para>Qt::TextAlignmentRole	Qt::Alignment</para>
            <para>Qt::ForegroundRole	QBrush</para>
            <para>Qt::TextColorRole	QColor (obsolete; use Qt::ForegroundRole instead)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If the default delegate does not allow the level of customization that you need, either for display purposes or for editing data, it is possible to subclass QItemDelegate to implement the desired behavior.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing</para>
            <para>When subclassing QItemDelegate to create a delegate that displays items using a custom renderer, it is important to ensure that the delegate can render items suitably for all the required states; e.g. selected, disabled, checked. The documentation for the paint() function contains some hints to show how this can be achieved.</para>
            <para>You can provide custom editors by using a QItemEditorFactory. The Color Editor Factory Example shows how a custom editor can be made available to delegates with the default item editor factory. This way, there is no need to subclass QItemDelegate. An alternative is to reimplement createEditor(), setEditorData(), setModelData(), and updateEditorGeometry(). This process is described in the Spin Box Delegate Example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyledItemDelegate vs. QItemDelegate</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.4, there are two delegate classes: QItemDelegate and QStyledItemDelegate. However, the default delegate is QStyledItemDelegate. These two classes are independent alternatives to painting and providing editors for items in views. The difference between them is that QStyledItemDelegate uses the current style to paint its items. We therefore recommend using QStyledItemDelegate as the base class when implementing custom delegates or when working with Qt style sheets. The code required for either class should be equal unless the custom delegate needs to use the style for drawing.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Delegate Classes, QStyledItemDelegate, QAbstractItemDelegate, Spin Box Delegate Example, Settings Editor Example, and Icons Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item delegate with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.CreateEditor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().</para>
            <para>Returns the widget used to edit the item specified by index for editing. The parent widget and style option are used to control how the editor widget appears.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.DrawBackground(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the item background for the given index, using the given painter and style option.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.DrawCheck(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.CheckState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders a check indicator within the rectangle specified by rect, using the given painter and style option, using the given state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.DrawDecoration(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the decoration pixmap within the rectangle specified by rect using the given painter and style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.DrawDisplay(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QRect,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the item view text within the rectangle specified by rect using the given painter and style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.DrawFocus(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Renders the region within the rectangle specified by rect, indicating that it has the focus, using the given painter and style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.OnEditorEvent(QtCore.QEvent,QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::editorEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the given editor is a valid QWidget and the given event is handled; otherwise returns false. The following key press events are handled by default:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Tab</para>
            <para>Backtab</para>
            <para>Enter</para>
            <para>Return</para>
            <para>Esc</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>In the case of Tab, Backtab, Enter and Return key press events, the editor's data is comitted to the model and the editor is closed. If the event is a Tab key press the view will open an editor on the next item in the view. Likewise, if the event is a Backtab key press the view will open an editor on the previous item in the view.</para>
            <para>If the event is a Esc key press event, the editor is closed without committing its data.</para>
            <para>See also commitData() and closeEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::paint().</para>
            <para>Renders the delegate using the given painter and style option for the item specified by index.</para>
            <para>When reimplementing this function in a subclass, you should update the area held by the option's rect variable, using the option's state variable to determine the state of the item to be displayed, and adjust the way it is painted accordingly.</para>
            <para>For example, a selected item may need to be displayed differently to unselected items, as shown in the following code:</para>
            <para>     if (option.state &amp; QStyle::State_Selected)</para>
            <para>         painter-&gt;fillRect(option.rect, option.palette.highlight());</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     int size = qMin(option.rect.width(), option.rect.height());</para>
            <para>     int brightness = index.model()-&gt;data(index, Qt::DisplayRole).toInt();</para>
            <para>     double radius = (size/2.0) - (brightness/255.0 * size/2.0);</para>
            <para>     if (radius == 0.0)</para>
            <para>         return;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter-&gt;save();</para>
            <para>     painter-&gt;setRenderHint(QPainter::Antialiasing, true);</para>
            <para>     painter-&gt;setPen(Qt::NoPen);</para>
            <para>     if (option.state &amp; QStyle::State_Selected)</para>
            <para>         painter-&gt;setBrush(option.palette.highlightedText());</para>
            <para>     else</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>After painting, you should ensure that the painter is returned to its the state it was supplied in when this function was called. For example, it may be useful to call QPainter::save() before painting and QPainter::restore() afterwards.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::State.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.SetEditorData(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData().</para>
            <para>Sets the data to be displayed and edited by the editor from the data model item specified by the model index.</para>
            <para>The default implementation stores the data in the editor widget's user property.</para>
            <para>See also QMetaProperty::isUser().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.SetModelData(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData().</para>
            <para>Gets data from the editor widget and stores it in the specified model at the item index.</para>
            <para>The default implementation gets the value to be stored in the data model from the editor widget's user property.</para>
            <para>See also QMetaProperty::isUser().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.SizeHint(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns the size needed by the delegate to display the item specified by index, taking into account the style information provided by option.</para>
            <para>When reimplementing this function, note that in case of text items, QItemDelegate adds a margin (i.e. 2 * QStyle::PM_FocusFrameHMargin) to the length of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.UpdateEditorGeometry(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::updateEditorGeometry().</para>
            <para>Updates the editor for the item specified by index according to the style option given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemDelegate.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the item delegate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QItemDelegate.ItemEditorFactory">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the editor factory used by the item delegate. If no editor factory is set, the function will return null.</para>
            <para>Sets the editor factory to be used by the item delegate to be the factory specified. If no editor factory is set, the item delegate will use the default editor factory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QItemDelegate.Clipping">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds if the delegate should clip the paint events.</para>
            <para>This property will set the paint clip to the size of the item. The default value is on. It is useful for cases such as when images are larger than the size of the item.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemEditorCreatorBase">
            <summary>
            The QItemEditorCreatorBase class provides an abstract base class that must be subclassed when implementing new item editor creators.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QItemEditorCreatorBase objects are specialized widget factories that provide editor widgets for one particular QVariant data type. They are used by QItemEditorFactory to create editors for QItemDelegates. Creator bases must be registered with QItemEditorFactory::registerEditor().</para>
            <para>An editor should provide a user property for the data it edits. QItemDelagates can then access the property using Qt's meta-object system to set and retrieve the editing data. A property is set as the user property with the USER keyword:</para>
            <para> Q_PROPERTY(QColor color READ color WRITE setColor USER true)</para>
            <para>If the editor does not provide a user property, it must return the name of the property from valuePropertyName(); delegates will then use the name to access the property. If a user property exists, item delegates will not call valuePropertyName().</para>
            <para>QStandardItemEditorCreator is a convenience template class that can be used to register widgets without the need to subclass QItemEditorCreatorBase.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStandardItemEditorCreator, QItemEditorFactory, Model/View Programming, and Color Editor Factory Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorCreatorBase.CreateWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an editor widget with the given parent.</para>
            <para>When implementing this function in subclasses of this class, you must construct and return new editor widgets with the parent widget specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorCreatorBase.ValuePropertyName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the property used to get and set values in the creator's editor widgets.</para>
            <para>When implementing this function in subclasses, you must ensure that the editor widget's property specified by this function can accept the type the creator is registered for. For example, a creator which constructs QCheckBox widgets to edit boolean values would return the checkable property name from this function, and must be registered in the item editor factory for the QVariant::Bool type.</para>
            <para>Note: Since Qt 4.2 the item delegates query the user property of widgets, and only call this function if the widget has no user property. You can override this behavior by reimplementing QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData() and QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData().</para>
            <para>See also QMetaObject::userProperty() and QItemEditorFactory::registerEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorCreatorBase.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the editor creator object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory">
            <summary>
            The QItemEditorFactory class provides widgets for editing item data in views and delegates.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When editing data in an item view, editors are created and displayed by a delegate. QItemDelegate, which is the delegate by default installed on Qt's item views, uses a QItemEditorFactory to create editors for it. A default unique instance provided by QItemEditorFactory is used by all item delegates. If you set a new default factory with setDefaultFactory(), the new factory will be used by existing and new delegates.</para>
            <para>A factory keeps a collection of QItemEditorCreatorBase instances, which are specialized editors that produce editors for one particular QVariant data type (All Qt models store their data in QVariants).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Standard Editing Widgets</para>
            <para>The standard factory implementation provides editors for a variety of data types. These are created whenever a delegate needs to provide an editor for data supplied by a model. The following table shows the relationship between types and the standard editors provided.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>TypeEditor Widget</para>
            <para>bool	QComboBox</para>
            <para>double	QDoubleSpinBox</para>
            <para>int	QSpinBox</para>
            <para>unsigned int</para>
            <para>QDate	QDateEdit</para>
            <para>QDateTime	QDateTimeEdit</para>
            <para>QPixmap	QLabel</para>
            <para>QString	QLineEdit</para>
            <para>QTime	QTimeEdit</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Additional editors can be registered with the registerEditor() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QItemDelegate, Model/View Programming, and Color Editor Factory Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new item editor factory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.#ctor(QtGui.QItemEditorFactory)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new item editor factory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.CreateEditor(QtCore.QVariant.Type,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an editor widget with the given parent for the specified type of data, and returns it as a QWidget.</para>
            <para>See also registerEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.RegisterEditor(QtCore.QVariant.Type,QtGui.QItemEditorCreatorBase)">
            <summary>
            <para>Registers an item editor creator specified by creator for the given type of data.</para>
            <para>Note: The factory takes ownership of the item editor creator and will destroy it if a new creator for the same type is registered later.</para>
            <para>See also createEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.ValuePropertyName(QtCore.QVariant.Type)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the property name used to access data for the given type of data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the item editor factory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QItemEditorFactory.DefaultFactory">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default item editor factory.</para>
            <para>Sets the default item editor factory to the given factory. Both new and existing delegates will use the new factory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemSelection">
            <summary>
            The QItemSelection class manages information about selected items in a model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QItemSelection describes the items in a model that have been selected by the user. A QItemSelection is basically a list of selection ranges, see QItemSelectionRange. It provides functions for creating and manipulating selections, and selecting a range of items from a model.</para>
            <para>The QItemSelection class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>An item selection can be constructed and initialized to contain a range of items from an existing model. The following example constructs a selection that contains a range of items from the given model, beginning at the topLeft, and ending at the bottomRight.</para>
            <para> QItemSelection *selection = new QItemSelection(topLeft, bottomRight);</para>
            <para>An empty item selection can be constructed, and later populated as required. So, if the model is going to be unavailable when we construct the item selection, we can rewrite the above code in the following way:</para>
            <para> QItemSelection *selection = new QItemSelection();</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> selection-&amp;gt;select(topLeft, bottomRight);</para>
            <para>QItemSelection saves memory, and avoids unnecessary work, by working with selection ranges rather than recording the model item index for each item in the selection. Generally, an instance of this class will contain a list of non-overlapping selection ranges.</para>
            <para>Use merge() to merge one item selection into another without making overlapping ranges. Use split() to split one selection range into smaller ranges based on a another selection range.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming and QItemSelectionModel.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.#ctor(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.#ctor(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item selection that extends from the top-left model item, specified by the topLeft index, to the bottom-right item, specified by bottomRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.Contains(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the selection contains the given index; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.Indexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of model indexes that correspond to the selected items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.Merge(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Merges the other selection with this QItemSelection using the command given. This method guarantees that no ranges are overlapping.</para>
            <para>Note that only QItemSelectionModel::Select, QItemSelectionModel::Deselect, and QItemSelectionModel::Toggle are supported.</para>
            <para>See also split().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.Select(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the items in the range that extends from the top-left model item, specified by the topLeft index, to the bottom-right item, specified by bottomRight to the list.</para>
            <para>Note: topLeft and bottomRight must have the same parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelection.Split(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange,QtGui.QItemSelectionRange,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Splits the selection range using the selection other range. Removes all items in other from range and puts the result in result. This can be compared with the semantics of the subtract operation of a set.</para>
            <para>See also merge().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel">
            <summary>
            The QItemSelectionModel class keeps track of a view's selected items.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QItemSelectionModel keeps track of the selected items in a view, or in several views onto the same model. It also keeps track of the currently selected item in a view.</para>
            <para>The QItemSelectionModel class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>The selected items are stored using ranges. Whenever you want to modify the selected items use select() and provide either a QItemSelection, or a QModelIndex and a QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlag.</para>
            <para>The QItemSelectionModel takes a two layer approach to selection management, dealing with both selected items that have been committed and items that are part of the current selection. The current selected items are part of the current interactive selection (for example with rubber-band selection or keyboard-shift selections).</para>
            <para>To update the currently selected items, use the bitwise OR of QItemSelectionModel::Current and any of the other SelectionFlags. If you omit the QItemSelectionModel::Current command, a new current selection will be created, and the previous one added to the whole selection. All functions operate on both layers; for example, selectedItems() will return items from both layers.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming, QAbstractItemModel, and Chart Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.#ctor(QtCore.QAbstractItemModel)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a selection model that operates on the specified item model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.#ctor(QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a selection model that operates on the specified item model with parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the selection model. Emits selectionChanged() and currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.ClearSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the selection in the selection model. Emits selectionChanged().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.ColumnIntersectsSelection(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if there are any items selected in the column with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.OnCurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous model item index is replaced by the current index as the selection's current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex(), setCurrentIndex(), and selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.OnCurrentColumnChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current item changes and its column is different to the column of the previous current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged(), currentRowChanged(), currentIndex(), and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.OnCurrentRowChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current item changes and its row is different to the row of the previous current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged(), currentColumnChanged(), currentIndex(), and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.EmitSelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Compares the two selections newSelection and oldSelection and emits selectionChanged() with the deselected and selected items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.HasSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the selection model contains any selection ranges; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.IsColumnSelected(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if all items are selected in the column with the given parent.</para>
            <para>Note that this function is usually faster than calling isSelected() on all items in the same column and that unselectable items are ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.IsRowSelected(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if all items are selected in the row with the given parent.</para>
            <para>Note that this function is usually faster than calling isSelected() on all items in the same row and that unselectable items are ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.IsSelected(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given model item index is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item model operated on by the selection model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the selection model. Does not emit any signals.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.RowIntersectsSelection(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if there are any items selected in the row with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Select(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the model item index using the specified command, and emits selectionChanged().</para>
            <para>See also QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Select(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the model item index using the specified command, and emits selectionChanged().</para>
            <para>See also QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectedColumns(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the indexes in the given row for columns where all rows are selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also selectedIndexes() and selectedRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectedIndexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all selected model item indexes. The list contains no duplicates, and is not sorted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectedRows(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the indexes in the given column for the rows where all columns are selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also selectedIndexes() and selectedColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Selection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the selection ranges stored in the selection model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.OnSelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes. The change in the selection is represented as an item selection of deselected items and an item selection of selected items.</para>
            <para>Note the that the current index changes independently from the selection. Also note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also select() and currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SetCurrentIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the model item index to be the current item, and emits currentChanged(). The current item is used for keyboard navigation and focus indication; it is independent of any selected items, although a selected item can also be the current item.</para>
            <para>Depending on the specified command, the index can also become part of the current selection.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex() and select().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the selection model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes. The change in the selection is represented as an item selection of deselected items and an item selection of selected items.</para>
            <para>Note the that the current index changes independently from the selection. Also note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also select() and currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous model item index is replaced by the current index as the selection's current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex(), setCurrentIndex(), and selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.CurrentRowChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current item changes and its row is different to the row of the previous current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged(), currentColumnChanged(), currentIndex(), and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.CurrentColumnChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current item changes and its column is different to the column of the previous current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged(), currentRowChanged(), currentIndex(), and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model item index for the current item, or an invalid index if there is no current item.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the way the selection model will be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>The complete selection will be cleared.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.ClearAndSelect">
            <summary>
            <para>A combination of Clear and Select, provided for convenience.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Columns">
            <summary>
            <para>All indexes will be expanded to span columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Current">
            <summary>
            <para>The current selection will be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Deselect">
            <summary>
            <para>All specified indexes will be deselected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.NoUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>No selection will be made.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Rows">
            <summary>
            <para>All indexes will be expanded to span rows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Select">
            <summary>
            <para>All specified indexes will be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.SelectCurrent">
            <summary>
            <para>A combination of Select and Current, provided for convenience.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.Toggle">
            <summary>
            <para>All specified indexes will be selected or deselected depending on their current state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag.ToggleCurrent">
            <summary>
            <para>A combination of Toggle and Current, provided for convenience.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange">
            <summary>
            The QItemSelectionRange class manages information about a range of selected items in a model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QItemSelectionRange contains information about a range of selected items in a model. A range of items is a contiguous array of model items, extending to cover a number of adjacent rows and columns with a common parent item; this can be visualized as a two-dimensional block of cells in a table. A selection range has a top(), left() a bottom(), right() and a parent().</para>
            <para>The QItemSelectionRange class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>The model items contained in the selection range can be obtained using the indexes() function. Use QItemSelectionModel::selectedIndexes() to get a list of all selected items for a view.</para>
            <para>You can determine whether a given model item lies within a particular range by using the contains() function. Ranges can also be compared using the overloaded operators for equality and inequality, and the intersects() function allows you to determine whether two ranges overlap.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming, QAbstractItemModel, QItemSelection, and QItemSelectionModel.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.#ctor(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copy constructor. Constructs a new selection range with the same contents as the other range given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.#ctor(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new selection range containing only the model item specified by the model index index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.#ctor(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new selection range containing only the index specified by the topLeft and the index bottomRight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Bottom">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row index corresponding to the lowermost selected row in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.BottomRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index for the item located at the bottom-right corner of the selection range.</para>
            <para>See also bottom(), right(), and topLeft().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Contains(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the model item specified by the index lies within the range of selected items; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Contains(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the model item specified by (row, column) and with parentIndex as the parent item lies within the range of selected items; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of selected rows in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Indexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of model index items stored in the selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Intersect(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use intersected(other) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Intersected(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new selection range containing only the items that are found in both the selection range and the other selection range.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Intersects(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this selection range intersects (overlaps with) the other range given; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the selection range contains no selectable item</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the selection range is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Left">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column index corresponding to the leftmost selected column in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model that the items in the selection range belong to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.op_Inequality(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange,QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the selection range differs from the other range given; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.op_LessThan(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange,QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>bool QItemSelectionRange::operator== ( const QItemSelectionRange &amp; other ) const</para>
            <para>Returns true if the selection range is exactly the same as the other range given; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.op_Equality(QtGui.QItemSelectionRange,QtGui.QItemSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the selection range is exactly the same as the other range given; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the parent model item index of the items in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Right">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column index corresponding to the rightmost selected column in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Top">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row index corresponding to the uppermost selected row in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.TopLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index for the item located at the top-left corner of the selection range.</para>
            <para>See also top(), left(), and bottomRight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QItemSelectionRange.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of selected columns in the selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QKeyEvent">
            <summary>
            The QKeyEvent class describes a key event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Key events are sent to the widget with keyboard input focus when keys are pressed or released.</para>
            <para>A key event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver will handle the key event. You should call ignore() if the key press or release event is not handled by your widget. A key event is propagated up the parent widget chain until a widget accepts it with accept() or an event filter consumes it. Key events for multimedia keys are ignored by default. You should call accept() if your widget handles those events.</para>
            <para>The QWidget::setEnable() function can be used to enable or disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget.</para>
            <para>The event handlers QWidget::keyPressEvent(), QWidget::keyReleaseEvent(), QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent() and QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent() receive key events.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QFocusEvent and QWidget::grabKeyboard().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a key event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be QEvent::KeyPress, QEvent::KeyRelease, or QEvent::ShortcutOverride.</para>
            <para>Int key is the code for the Qt::Key that the event loop should listen for. If key is 0, the event is not a result of a known key; for example, it may be the result of a compose sequence or keyboard macro. The modifiers holds the keyboard modifiers, and the given text is the Unicode text that the key generated. If autorep is true, isAutoRepeat() will be true. count is the number of keys involved in the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,System.String,System.Boolean,System.UInt16)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a key event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be QEvent::KeyPress, QEvent::KeyRelease, or QEvent::ShortcutOverride.</para>
            <para>Int key is the code for the Qt::Key that the event loop should listen for. If key is 0, the event is not a result of a known key; for example, it may be the result of a compose sequence or keyboard macro. The modifiers holds the keyboard modifiers, and the given text is the Unicode text that the key generated. If autorep is true, isAutoRepeat() will be true. count is the number of keys involved in the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of keys involved in this event. If text() is not empty, this is simply the length of the string.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::WA_KeyCompression.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.IsAutoRepeat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this event comes from an auto-repeating key; returns false if it comes from an initial key press.</para>
            <para>Note that if the event is a multiple-key compressed event that is partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either true or false indeterminately.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.Key">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the code of the key that was pressed or released.</para>
            <para>See Qt::Key for the list of keyboard codes. These codes are independent of the underlying window system. Note that this function does not distinguish between capital and non-capital letters, use the text() function (returning the Unicode text the key generated) for this purpose.</para>
            <para>A value of either 0 or Qt::Key_unknown means that the event is not the result of a known key; for example, it may be the result of a compose sequence, a keyboard macro, or due to key event compression.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::WA_KeyCompression.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.Matches(QtGui.QKeySequence.StandardKey)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the key event matches the given standard key; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.Modifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the keyboard modifier flags that existed immediately after the event occurred.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function cannot always be trusted. The user can confuse it by pressing both Shift keys simultaneously and releasing one of them, for example.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::keyboardModifiers().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.NativeModifiers">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the native modifiers of a key event. If the key event does not contain this data 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Note: The native modifiers may be 0, even if the key event contains extended information.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.NativeScanCode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the native scan code of the key event. If the key event does not contain this data 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Note: The native scan code may be 0, even if the key event contains extended information.</para>
            <para>Note: On Mac OS/X, this function is not useful, because there is no way to get the scan code from Carbon or Cocoa. The function always returns 1 (or 0 in the case explained above).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.NativeVirtualKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the native virtual key, or key sym of the key event. If the key event does not contain this data 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Note: The native virtual key may be 0, even if the key event contains extended information.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEvent.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the Unicode text that this key generated. The text returned can be an empty string in cases where modifier keys, such as Shift, Control, Alt, and Meta, are being pressed or released. In such cases key() will contain a valid value.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::WA_KeyCompression.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition">
            <summary>
            The QKeyEventTransition class provides a transition for key events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QKeyEventTransition is part of The State Machine Framework.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QState::addTransition().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.#ctor(QtCore.QState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new key event transition with the given sourceState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.#ctor(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent.Type,System.Int32,QtCore.QState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new key event transition for events of the given type for the given object, with the given key and sourceState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.EventTest(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::eventTest().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.OnTransition(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::onTransition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this key event transition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.Key">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the key that this key event transition is associated with.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QKeyEventTransition.ModifierMask">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the keyboard modifier mask that this key event transition checks for.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLCDNumber">
            <summary>
            The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>It can display a number in just about any size. It can display decimal, hexadecimal, octal or binary numbers. It is easy to connect to data sources using the display() slot, which is overloaded to take any of five argument types.</para>
            <para>There are also slots to change the base with setMode() and the decimal point with setSmallDecimalPoint().</para>
            <para>QLCDNumber emits the overflow() signal when it is asked to display something beyond its range. The range is set by setDigitCount(), but setSmallDecimalPoint() also influences it. If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the value is displayed.</para>
            <para>These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. QLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters.</para>
            <para>It is not possible to retrieve the contents of a QLCDNumber object, although you can retrieve the numeric value with value(). If you really need the text, we recommend that you connect the signals that feed the display() slot to another slot as well and store the value there.</para>
            <para>Incidentally, QLCDNumber is the very oldest part of Qt, tracing its roots back to a BASIC program on the Sinclair Spectrum.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     </para>
            <para>LCD number widgets shown in various widget styles (from left to right): Motif, CDE, Windows, Windows XP, Macintosh, Plastique.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLabel, QFrame, Digital Clock Example, and Tetrix Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is passed to the QFrame constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setDigitCount() and setSmallDecimalPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.#ctor(System.UInt32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is passed to the QFrame constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setDigitCount() and setSmallDecimalPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.CheckOverflow(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also display(), digitCount(), and smallDecimalPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.CheckOverflow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns true if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also display(), digitCount(), and smallDecimalPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.OnOverflow">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the QLCDNumber is asked to display a too-large number or a too-long string.</para>
            <para>It is never emitted by setDigitCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SetBinMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Calls setMode(Bin). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).</para>
            <para>See also setMode(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and mode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SetDecMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Calls setMode(Dec). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).</para>
            <para>See also setMode(), setHexMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SetHexMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Calls setMode(Hex). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).</para>
            <para>See also setMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SetOctMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Calls setMode(Oct). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).</para>
            <para>See also setMode(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setBinMode(), and mode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the LCD number.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Overflow">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the QLCDNumber is asked to display a too-large number or a too-long string.</para>
            <para>It is never emitted by setDigitCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SmallDecimalPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the style of the decimal point.</para>
            <para>If true the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn in a digit position. The default is false.</para>
            <para>The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal point is drawn between the digits.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.NumDigits">
            <summary>
            <para>This property is deprecated.</para>
            <para>This property holds the current number of digits displayed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.DigitCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current number of digits displayed.</para>
            <para>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is false, the decimal point occupies one digit position.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 5.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.mode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current display mode (number base).</para>
            <para>Corresponds to the current display mode, which is one of Bin, Oct, Dec (the default) and Hex. Dec mode can display floating point values, the other modes display the integer equivalent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.segmentStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the style of the LCDNumber.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>StyleResult</para>
            <para>Outline	Produces raised segments filled with the background color</para>
            <para>Filled (this is the default).	Produces raised segments filled with the foreground color.</para>
            <para>Flat	Produces flat segments filled with the foreground color.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Outline and Filled will additionally use QPalette::light() and QPalette::dark() for shadow effects.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the displayed value.</para>
            <para>This property corresponds to the current value displayed by the LCDNumber.</para>
            <para>If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value of 0.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLCDNumber.IntValue">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            <para>This property corresponds to the nearest integer to the current value displayed by the LCDNumber. This is the value used for hexadecimal, octal and binary modes.</para>
            <para>If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value of 0.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Mode">
            <summary>
            <para>This type determines how numbers are shown.</para>
            <para>If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the value is displayed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Mode.Bin">
            <summary>
            <para>Binary</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Mode.Dec">
            <summary>
            <para>Decimal</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Mode.Hex">
            <summary>
            <para>Hexadecimal</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.Mode.Oct">
            <summary>
            <para>Octal</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SegmentStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This type determines the visual appearance of the QLCDNumber widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SegmentStyle.Filled">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives raised segments filled with the windowText color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SegmentStyle.Flat">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives flat segments filled with the windowText color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLCDNumber.SegmentStyle.Outline">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives raised segments filled with the background color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLabel">
            <summary>
            The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QLabel is used for displaying text or an image. No user interaction functionality is provided. The visual appearance of the label can be configured in various ways, and it can be used for specifying a focus mnemonic key for another widget.</para>
            <para>A QLabel can contain any of the following content types:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ContentSetting</para>
            <para>Plain text	Pass a QString to setText().</para>
            <para>Rich text	Pass a QString that contains rich text to setText().</para>
            <para>A pixmap	Pass a QPixmap to setPixmap().</para>
            <para>A movie	Pass a QMovie to setMovie().</para>
            <para>A number	Pass an int or a double to setNum(), which converts the number to plain text.</para>
            <para>Nothing	The same as an empty plain text. This is the default. Set by clear().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Warning: When passing a QString to the constructor or calling setText(), make sure to sanitize your input, as QLabel tries to guess whether it displays the text as plain text or as rich text. You may want to call setTextFormat() explicitly, e.g. in case you expect the text to be in plain format but cannot control the text source (for instance when displaying data loaded from the Web).</para>
            <para>When the content is changed using any of these functions, any previous content is cleared.</para>
            <para>By default, labels display left-aligned, vertically-centered text and images, where any tabs in the text to be displayed are automatically expanded. However, the look of a QLabel can be adjusted and fine-tuned in several ways.</para>
            <para>The positioning of the content within the QLabel widget area can be tuned with setAlignment() and setIndent(). Text content can also wrap lines along word boundaries with setWordWrap(). For example, this code sets up a sunken panel with a two-line text in the bottom right corner (both lines being flush with the right side of the label):</para>
            <para> QLabel *label = new QLabel(this);</para>
            <para> label-&amp;gt;setFrameStyle(QFrame::Panel | QFrame::Sunken);</para>
            <para> label-&amp;gt;setText(&amp;quot;first line\nsecond line&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> label-&amp;gt;setAlignment(Qt::AlignBottom | Qt::AlignRight);</para>
            <para>The properties and functions QLabel inherits from QFrame can also be used to specify the widget frame to be used for any given label.</para>
            <para>A QLabel is often used as a label for an interactive widget. For this use QLabel provides a useful mechanism for adding an mnemonic (see QKeySequence) that will set the keyboard focus to the other widget (called the QLabel's &amp;quot;buddy&amp;quot;). For example:</para>
            <para> QLineEdit* phoneEdit = new QLineEdit(this);</para>
            <para> QLabel* phoneLabel = new QLabel(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Phone:&amp;quot;, this);</para>
            <para> phoneLabel-&amp;gt;setBuddy(phoneEdit);</para>
            <para>In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy (the QLineEdit) when the user presses Alt+P. If the buddy was a button (inheriting from QAbstractButton), triggering the mnemonic would emulate a button click.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A label shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A label shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para>	A label shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLineEdit, QTextEdit, QPixmap, QMovie, and GUI Design Handbook: Label.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty label.</para>
            <para>The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty label.</para>
            <para>The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears any label contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnLinkActivated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also linkHovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnLinkHovered(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also linkActivated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.SelectionStart">
            <summary>
            <para>selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the label or -1 if no text is selected.</para>
            <para>Note: The textInteractionFlags set on the label need to include either TextSelectableByMouse or TextSelectableByKeyboard.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.SetNum(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual representation of integer num. Any previous content is cleared. Does nothing if the integer's string representation is the same as the current contents of the label.</para>
            <para>The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also setText(), QString::setNum(), and setBuddy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.SetNum(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual representation of double num. Any previous content is cleared. Does nothing if the double's string representation is the same as the current contents of the label.</para>
            <para>The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also setText(), QString::setNum(), and setBuddy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.SetSelection(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects text from position start and for length characters.</para>
            <para>Note: The textInteractionFlags set on the label need to include either TextSelectableByMouse or TextSelectableByKeyboard.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLabel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the label.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLabel.LinkActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also linkHovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLabel.LinkHovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also linkActivated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Buddy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this label's buddy, or 0 if no buddy is currently set.</para>
            <para>Sets this label's buddy to buddy.</para>
            <para>When the user presses the shortcut key indicated by this label, the keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy widget.</para>
            <para>The buddy mechanism is only available for QLabels that contain text in which one character is prefixed with an ampersand, '&amp;'. This character is set as the shortcut key. See the QKeySequence::mnemonic() documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;&amp;').</para>
            <para>In a dialog, you might create two data entry widgets and a label for each, and set up the geometry layout so each label is just to the left of its data entry widget (its &quot;buddy&quot;), for example:</para>
            <para> QLineEdit *nameEd  = new QLineEdit(this);</para>
            <para> QLabel    *nameLb  = new QLabel(&quot;&amp;Name:&quot;, this);</para>
            <para> nameLb-&gt;setBuddy(nameEd);</para>
            <para> QLineEdit *phoneEd = new QLineEdit(this);</para>
            <para> QLabel    *phoneLb = new QLabel(&quot;&amp;Phone:&quot;, this);</para>
            <para> phoneLb-&gt;setBuddy(phoneEd);</para>
            <para> // (layout setup not shown)</para>
            <para>With the code above, the focus jumps to the Name field when the user presses Alt+N, and to the Phone field when the user presses Alt+P.</para>
            <para>To unset a previously set buddy, call this function with buddy set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Movie">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the label's movie, or 0 if no movie has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the label contents to movie. Any previous content is cleared. The label does NOT take ownership of the movie.</para>
            <para>The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Picture">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the label's picture or 0 if the label doesn't have a picture.</para>
            <para>Sets the label contents to picture. Any previous content is cleared.</para>
            <para>The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label's text.</para>
            <para>If no text has been set this will return an empty string. Setting the text clears any previous content.</para>
            <para>The text will be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text, depending on the text format setting; see setTextFormat(). The default setting is Qt::AutoText; i.e. QLabel will try to auto-detect the format of the text set.</para>
            <para>If a buddy has been set, the buddy mnemonic key is updated from the new text.</para>
            <para>Note that QLabel is well-suited to display small rich text documents, such as small documents that get their document specific settings (font, text color, link color) from the label's palette and font properties. For large documents, use QTextEdit in read-only mode instead. QTextEdit can also provide a scroll bar when necessary.</para>
            <para>Note: This function enables mouse tracking if text contains rich text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.TextFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label's text format.</para>
            <para>See the Qt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible options.</para>
            <para>The default format is Qt::AutoText.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Pixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label's pixmap.</para>
            <para>If no pixmap has been set this will return 0.</para>
            <para>Setting the pixmap clears any previous content. The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.ScaledContents">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space.</para>
            <para>When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the pixmap to fill the available space.</para>
            <para>This property's default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the label's contents.</para>
            <para>By default, the contents of the label are left-aligned and vertically-centered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.WordWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label's word-wrapping policy.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then label text is wrapped where necessary at word-breaks; otherwise it is not wrapped at all.</para>
            <para>By default, word wrap is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Margin">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the width of the margin.</para>
            <para>The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the frame and the outermost pixel of contents.</para>
            <para>The default margin is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.Indent">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label's text indent in pixels.</para>
            <para>If a label displays text, the indent applies to the left edge if alignment() is Qt::AlignLeft, to the right edge if alignment() is Qt::AlignRight, to the top edge if alignment() is Qt::AlignTop, and to to the bottom edge if alignment() is Qt::AlignBottom.</para>
            <para>If indent is negative, or if no indent has been set, the label computes the effective indent as follows: If frameWidth() is 0, the effective indent becomes 0. If frameWidth() is greater than 0, the effective indent becomes half the width of the &quot;x&quot; character of the widget's current font().</para>
            <para>By default, the indent is -1, meaning that an effective indent is calculating in the manner described above.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.HasSelectedText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether there is any text selected.</para>
            <para>hasSelectedText() returns true if some or all of the text has been selected by the user; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>Note: The textInteractionFlags set on the label need to include either TextSelectableByMouse or TextSelectableByKeyboard.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLabel.SelectedText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the selected text.</para>
            <para>If there is no selected text this property's value is an empty string.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>Note: The textInteractionFlags set on the label need to include either TextSelectableByMouse or TextSelectableByKeyboard.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLayoutItem">
            <summary>
            The QLayoutItem class provides an abstract item that a QLayout manipulates.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This is used by custom layouts.</para>
            <para>Pure virtual functions are provided to return information about the layout, including, sizeHint(), minimumSize(), maximumSize() and expanding().</para>
            <para>The layout's geometry can be set and retrieved with setGeometry() and geometry(), and its alignment with setAlignment() and alignment().</para>
            <para>isEmpty() returns whether the layout item is empty. If the concrete item is a QWidget, it can be retrieved using widget(). Similarly for layout() and spacerItem().</para>
            <para>Some layouts have width and height interdependencies. These can be expressed using hasHeightForWidth(), heightForWidth(), and minimumHeightForWidth(). For more explanation see the Qt Quarterly article Trading Height for Width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLayout.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.#ctor(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a layout item with an alignment. Not all subclasses support alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a layout item with an alignment. Not all subclasses support alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.ControlTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the control type(s) for the layout item. For a QWidgetItem, the control type comes from the widget's size policy; for a QLayoutItem, the control types is derived from the layout's contents.</para>
            <para>See also QSizePolicy::controlType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether this layout item can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Qt::Vertical or Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas Qt::Vertical | Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.HasHeightForWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false. The default implementation returns false.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width.</para>
            <para>See also heightForWidth() and QWidget::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred height for this layout item, given the width w.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns -1, indicating that the preferred height is independent of the width of the item. Using the function hasHeightForWidth() will typically be much faster than calling this function and testing for -1.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width. A typical implementation will look like this:</para>
            <para> int MyLayout::heightForWidth(int w) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (cache_dirty || cached_width != w) {</para>
            <para>         // not all C++ compilers support &quot;mutable&quot;</para>
            <para>         MyLayout *that = (MyLayout*)this;</para>
            <para>         int h = calculateHeightForWidth(w);</para>
            <para>         that-&gt;cached_hfw = h;</para>
            <para>         return h;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     return cached_hfw;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Caching is strongly recommended; without it layout will take exponential time.</para>
            <para>See also hasHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates any cached information in this layout item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Implemented in subclasses to return whether this item is empty, i.e. whether it contains any widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.Layout">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item is a QLayout, it is returned as a QLayout; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.MinimumHeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the minimum height this widget needs for the given width, w. The default implementation simply returns heightForWidth(w).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.SpacerItem">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item is a QSpacerItem, it is returned as a QSpacerItem; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>If this item is a QWidget, it is returned as a QWidget; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLayoutItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QLayoutItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayoutItem.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alignment of this item.</para>
            <para>Sets the alignment of this item to alignment.</para>
            <para>Note: Item alignment is only supported by QLayoutItem subclasses where it would have a visual effect. Except for QSpacerItem, which provides blank space for layouts, all public Qt classes that inherit QLayoutItem support item alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLayoutItem.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle covered by this layout item.</para>
            <para>Implemented in subclasses to set this item's geometry to r.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLineEdit">
            <summary>
            The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A line edit allows the user to enter and edit a single line of plain text with a useful collection of editing functions, including undo and redo, cut and paste, and drag and drop.</para>
            <para>By changing the echoMode() of a line edit, it can also be used as a &amp;quot;write-only&amp;quot; field, for inputs such as passwords.</para>
            <para>The length of the text can be constrained to maxLength(). The text can be arbitrarily constrained using a validator() or an inputMask(), or both. When switching between a validator and an input mask on the same line edit, it is best to clear the validator or input mask to prevent undefined behavior.</para>
            <para>A related class is QTextEdit which allows multi-line, rich text editing.</para>
            <para>You can change the text with setText() or insert(). The text is retrieved with text(); the displayed text (which may be different, see EchoMode) is retrieved with displayText(). Text can be selected with setSelection() or selectAll(), and the selection can be cut(), copy()ied and paste()d. The text can be aligned with setAlignment().</para>
            <para>When the text changes the textChanged() signal is emitted; when the text changes other than by calling setText() the textEdited() signal is emitted; when the cursor is moved the cursorPositionChanged() signal is emitted; and when the Return or Enter key is pressed the returnPressed() signal is emitted.</para>
            <para>When editing is finished, either because the line edit lost focus or Return/Enter is pressed the editingFinished() signal is emitted.</para>
            <para>Note that if there is a validator set on the line edit, the returnPressed()/editingFinished() signals will only be emitted if the validator returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            <para>By default, QLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling setFrame(false).</para>
            <para>The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click) that presents some of these editing options. </para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeypressAction</para>
            <para>Left Arrow	Moves the cursor one character to the left.</para>
            <para>Shift+Left Arrow	Moves and selects text one character to the left.</para>
            <para>Right Arrow	Moves the cursor one character to the right.</para>
            <para>Shift+Right Arrow	Moves and selects text one character to the right.</para>
            <para>Home	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.</para>
            <para>End	Moves the cursor to the end of the line.</para>
            <para>Backspace	Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Backspace	Deletes the word to the left of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Delete	Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Delete	Deletes the word to the right of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+A	Select all.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+C	Copies the selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Insert	Copies the selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+K	Deletes to the end of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+V	Pastes the clipboard text into line edit.</para>
            <para>Shift+Insert	Pastes the clipboard text into line edit.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+X	Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Shift+Delete	Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Z	Undoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Y	Redoes the last undone operation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Any other key sequence that represents a valid character, will cause the character to be inserted into the line edit.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A line edit shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A line edit shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A line edit shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextEdit, QLabel, QComboBox, GUI Design Handbook: Field, Entry, and Line Edits Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a line edit with no text.</para>
            <para>The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and setMaxLength().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a line edit containing the text contents.</para>
            <para>The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum text length to 32767 characters.</para>
            <para>The parent and argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>See also text() and setMaxLength().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Backspace">
            <summary>
            <para>If no text is selected, deletes the character to the left of the text cursor and moves the cursor one position to the left. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.</para>
            <para>See also del().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the contents of the line edit.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and insert().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            <para>Shows the standard context menu created with createStandardContextMenu().</para>
            <para>If you do not want the line edit to have a context menu, you can set its contextMenuPolicy to Qt::NoContextMenu. If you want to customize the context menu, reimplement this function. If you want to extend the standard context menu, reimplement this function, call createStandardContextMenu() and extend the menu returned.</para>
            <para> void LineEdit::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QMenu *menu = createStandardContextMenu();</para>
            <para>     menu-&gt;addAction(tr(&quot;My Menu Item&quot;));</para>
            <para>     //...</para>
            <para>     menu-&gt;exec(event-&gt;globalPos());</para>
            <para>     delete menu;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The event parameter is used to obtain the position where the mouse cursor was when the event was generated.</para>
            <para>See also setContextMenuPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Copy">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.</para>
            <para>See also cut() and paste().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CreateStandardContextMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorBackward(System.Boolean,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor back steps characters. If mark is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is false the selection is cleared.</para>
            <para>See also cursorForward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorForward(System.Boolean,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor forward steps characters. If mark is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is false the selection is cleared.</para>
            <para>See also cursorBackward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorPositionAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor position under the point pos.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnCursorPositionChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the cursor moves. The previous position is given by old, and the new position by new.</para>
            <para>See also setCursorPosition() and cursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a rectangle that includes the lineedit cursor.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorWordBackward(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor one word backward. If mark is true, the word is also selected.</para>
            <para>See also cursorWordForward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorWordForward(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor one word forward. If mark is true, the word is also selected.</para>
            <para>See also cursorWordBackward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Cut">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.</para>
            <para>If the current validator disallows deleting the selected text, cut() will copy without deleting.</para>
            <para>See also copy(), paste(), and setValidator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Del">
            <summary>
            <para>If no text is selected, deletes the character to the right of the text cursor. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.</para>
            <para>See also backspace().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Deselect">
            <summary>
            <para>Deselects any selected text.</para>
            <para>See also setSelection() and selectAll().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnEditingFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed or the line edit loses focus. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit and enter/return is pressed, the editingFinished() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.End(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already there. If mark is true, text is selected towards the last position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.</para>
            <para>See also home().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.GetTextMargins(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget's text margins for left, top, right, and bottom.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTextMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Home(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is already there. If mark is true, text is selected towards the first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.</para>
            <para>See also end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QLineEdit. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionFrame or QStyleOptionFrameV2, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves. This function will check the version of the QStyleOptionFrame and fill in the additional values for a QStyleOptionFrameV2.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Insert(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Deletes any selected text, inserts newText, and validates the result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line edit.</para>
            <para>See also setText() and clear().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            <para>Converts the given key press event into a line edit action.</para>
            <para>If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or can be made valid by the validator), the signal returnPressed() is emitted.</para>
            <para>The default key bindings are listed in the class's detailed description.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns a minimum size for the line edit.</para>
            <para>The width returned is enough for at least one character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Paste">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the clipboard's text at the cursor position, deleting any selected text, providing the line edit is not read-only.</para>
            <para>If the end result would not be acceptable to the current validator, nothing happens.</para>
            <para>See also copy() and cut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Redoes the last operation if redo is available.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnReturnPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects all the text (i.e. highlights it) and moves the cursor to the end. This is useful when a default value has been inserted because if the user types before clicking on the widget, the selected text will be deleted.</para>
            <para>See also setSelection() and deselect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also hasSelectedText() and selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.SelectionStart">
            <summary>
            <para>selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the line edit or -1 if no text is selected.</para>
            <para>See also selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.SetSelection(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects text from position start and for length characters. Negative lengths are allowed.</para>
            <para>See also deselect(), selectAll(), and selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.SetTextMargins(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the margins around the text inside the frame to have the sizes left, top, right, and bottom.</para>
            <para>See also getTextMargins().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also textMargins().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns a recommended size for the widget.</para>
            <para>The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to 20 characters.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The text argument is the new text.</para>
            <para>Unlike textEdited(), this signal is also emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.OnTextEdited(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text is edited. The text argument is the new text.</para>
            <para>Unlike textChanged(), this signal is not emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Undoes the last operation if undo is available. Deselects any current selection, and updates the selection start to the current cursor position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLineEdit.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the line edit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLineEdit.TextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The text argument is the new text.</para>
            <para>Unlike textEdited(), this signal is also emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLineEdit.TextEdited">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text is edited. The text argument is the new text.</para>
            <para>Unlike textChanged(), this signal is not emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the cursor moves. The previous position is given by old, and the new position by new.</para>
            <para>See also setCursorPosition() and cursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLineEdit.ReturnPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLineEdit.EditingFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed or the line edit loses focus. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit and enter/return is pressed, the editingFinished() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QLineEdit.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also hasSelectedText() and selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.Completer">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current QCompleter that provides completions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets this line edit to provide auto completions from the completer, c. The completion mode is set using QCompleter::setCompletionMode().</para>
            <para>To use a QCompleter with a QValidator or QLineEdit::inputMask, you need to ensure that the model provided to QCompleter contains valid entries. You can use the QSortFilterProxyModel to ensure that the QCompleter's model contains only valid entries.</para>
            <para>If c == 0, setCompleter() removes the current completer, effectively disabling auto completion.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.TextMargins">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget's text margins.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Sets the margins around the text inside the frame.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.Validator">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current input validator, or 0 if no validator has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets this line edit to only accept input that the validator, v, will accept. This allows you to place any arbitrary constraints on the text which may be entered.</para>
            <para>If v == 0, setValidator() removes the current input validator. The initial setting is to have no input validator (i.e. any input is accepted up to maxLength()).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.InputMask">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the validation input mask.</para>
            <para>If no mask is set, inputMask() returns an empty string.</para>
            <para>Sets the QLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator().</para>
            <para>Unset the mask and return to normal QLineEdit operation by passing an empty string (&quot;&quot;) or just calling setInputMask() with no arguments.</para>
            <para>The table below shows the characters that can be used in an input mask. A space character, the default character for a blank, is needed for cases where a character is permitted but not required.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>CharacterMeaning</para>
            <para>A	ASCII alphabetic character required. A-Z, a-z.</para>
            <para>a	ASCII alphabetic character permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>N	ASCII alphanumeric character required. A-Z, a-z, 0-9.</para>
            <para>n	ASCII alphanumeric character permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>X	Any character required.</para>
            <para>x	Any character permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>9	ASCII digit required. 0-9.</para>
            <para>0	ASCII digit permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>D	ASCII digit required. 1-9.</para>
            <para>d	ASCII digit permitted but not required (1-9).</para>
            <para>#	ASCII digit or plus/minus sign permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>H	Hexadecimal character required. A-F, a-f, 0-9.</para>
            <para>h	Hexadecimal character permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>B	Binary character required. 0-1.</para>
            <para>b	Binary character permitted but not required.</para>
            <para>&gt;	All following alphabetic characters are uppercased.</para>
            <para>&lt;	All following alphabetic characters are lowercased.</para>
            <para>!	Switch off case conversion.</para>
            <para>\	Use \ to escape the special characters listed above to use them as separators.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The mask consists of a string of mask characters and separators, optionally followed by a semicolon and the character used for blanks. The blank characters are always removed from the text after editing.</para>
            <para>Examples:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>MaskNotes</para>
            <para>000.000.000.000;_	IP address; blanks are _.</para>
            <para>HH:HH:HH:HH:HH:HH;_	MAC address</para>
            <para>0000-00-00	ISO Date; blanks are space</para>
            <para>&gt;AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA;#	License number; blanks are - and all (alphabetic) characters are converted to uppercase.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To get range control (e.g., for an IP address) use masks together with validators.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the line edit's text.</para>
            <para>Setting this property clears the selection, clears the undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and resets the modified property to false. The text is not validated when inserted with setText().</para>
            <para>The text is truncated to maxLength() length.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.MaxLength">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum permitted length of the text.</para>
            <para>If the text is too long, it is truncated at the limit.</para>
            <para>If truncation occurs any selected text will be unselected, the cursor position is set to 0 and the first part of the string is shown.</para>
            <para>If the line edit has an input mask, the mask defines the maximum string length.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 32767.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the line edit draws itself with a frame.</para>
            <para>If enabled (the default) the line edit draws itself inside a frame, otherwise the line edit draws itself without any frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.echoMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the line edit's echo mode.</para>
            <para>The echo mode determines how the text entered in the line edit is displayed (or echoed) to the user.</para>
            <para>The most common setting is Normal, in which the text entered by the user is displayed verbatim, but QLineEdit also supports modes that allow the entered text to be suppressed or obscured: these include NoEcho, Password and PasswordEchoOnEdit.</para>
            <para>The widget's display and the ability to copy or drag the text is affected by this setting.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to Normal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.DisplayText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the displayed text.</para>
            <para>If echoMode is Normal this returns the same as text(); if EchoMode is Password or PasswordEchoOnEdit it returns a string of asterisks text().length() characters long, e.g. &quot;******&quot;; if EchoMode is NoEcho returns an empty string, &quot;&quot;.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current cursor position for this line edit.</para>
            <para>Setting the cursor position causes a repaint when appropriate.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the line edit.</para>
            <para>Both horizontal and vertical alignment is allowed here, Qt::AlignJustify will map to Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a combination of Qt::AlignLeft and Qt::AlignVCenter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.Modified">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user.</para>
            <para>The modified flag is never read by QLineEdit; it has a default value of false and is changed to true whenever the user changes the line edit's contents.</para>
            <para>This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without the best default, and when the default is known, if modified() returns false (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the default value.</para>
            <para>Calling setText() resets the modified flag to false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.HasSelectedText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether there is any text selected.</para>
            <para>hasSelectedText() returns true if some or all of the text has been selected by the user; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.SelectedText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the selected text.</para>
            <para>If there is no selected text this property's value is an empty string.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.DragEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text.</para>
            <para>Dragging is disabled by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the line edit is read only.</para>
            <para>In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the clipboard, or drag and drop the text (if echoMode() is Normal), but cannot edit it.</para>
            <para>QLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.UndoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether undo is available.</para>
            <para>Undo becomes available once the user has modified the text in the line edit.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.RedoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether redo is available.</para>
            <para>Redo becomes available once the user has performed one or more undo operations on text in the line edit.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.AcceptableInput">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.PlaceholderText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the line edit's placeholder text.</para>
            <para>Setting this property makes the line edit display a grayed-out placeholder text as long as the text() is empty and the widget doesn't have focus.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLineEdit.CursorMoveStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the movement style of cursor in this line edit.</para>
            <para>When this property is set to Qt::VisualMoveStyle, the line edit will use visual movement style. Pressing the left arrow key will always cause the cursor to move left, regardless of the text's writing direction. The same behavior applies to right arrow key.</para>
            <para>When the property is Qt::LogicalMoveStyle (the default), within a LTR text block, increase cursor position when pressing left arrow key, decrease cursor position when pressing the right arrow key. If the text block is right to left, the opposite behavior applies.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type describes how a line edit should display its contents.</para>
            <para>See also setEchoMode() and echoMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode.NoEcho">
            <summary>
            <para>Do not display anything. This may be appropriate for passwords where even the length of the password should be kept secret.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode.Normal">
            <summary>
            <para>Display characters as they are entered. This is the default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode.Password">
            <summary>
            <para>Display asterisks instead of the characters actually entered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QLineEdit.EchoMode.PasswordEchoOnEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>Display characters as they are entered while editing otherwise display asterisks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QLinearGradient">
            <summary>
            The QLinearGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify a linear gradient brush.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Linear gradients interpolate colors between start and end points. Outside these points the gradient is either padded, reflected or repeated depending on the currently set spread method:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>PadSpread (default)	ReflectSpread	RepeatSpread</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The colors in a gradient is defined using stop points of the QGradientStop type, i.e. a position and a color. Use the QGradient::setColorAt() or the QGradient::setStops() function to define the stop points. It is the gradient's complete set of stop points that describes how the gradient area should be filled. If no stop points have been specified, a gradient of black at 0 to white at 1 is used.</para>
            <para>In addition to the functions inherited from QGradient, the QLinearGradient class provides the finalStop() function which returns the final stop point of the gradient, and the start() function returning the start point of the gradient.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QRadialGradient, QConicalGradient, and The Gradients Demo.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLinearGradient.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default linear gradient with interpolation area between (0, 0) and (1, 1).</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setStart(), and setFinalStop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLinearGradient.#ctor(QtGui.QLinearGradient)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default linear gradient with interpolation area between (0, 0) and (1, 1).</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setStart(), and setFinalStop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLinearGradient.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a linear gradient with interpolation area between the given start point and finalStop.</para>
            <para>Note: The expected parameter values are in pixels.</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt() and QGradient::setStops().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLinearGradient.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a default linear gradient with interpolation area between (0, 0) and (1, 1).</para>
            <para>See also QGradient::setColorAt(), setStart(), and setFinalStop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLinearGradient.SetFinalStop(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the final stop point of this linear gradient in logical coordinates to stop.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also finalStop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QLinearGradient.SetStart(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the start point of this linear gradient in logical coordinates to start.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also start().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLinearGradient.FinalStop">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the final stop point of this linear gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets the final stop point of this linear gradient in logical coordinates to stop.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QLinearGradient.Start">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the start point of this linear gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets the start point of this linear gradient in logical coordinates to start.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QListView">
            <summary>
            The QListView class provides a list or icon view onto a model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QListView presents items stored in a model, either as a simple non-hierarchical list, or as a collection of icons. This class is used to provide lists and icon views that were previously provided by the QListBox and QIconView classes, but using the more flexible approach provided by Qt's model/view architecture.</para>
            <para>The QListView class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>This view does not display horizontal or vertical headers; to display a list of items with a horizontal header, use QTreeView instead.</para>
            <para>QListView implements the interfaces defined by the QAbstractItemView class to allow it to display data provided by models derived from the QAbstractItemModel class.</para>
            <para>Items in a list view can be displayed using one of two view modes: In ListMode, the items are displayed in the form of a simple list; in IconMode, the list view takes the form of an icon view in which the items are displayed with icons like files in a file manager. By default, the list view is in ListMode. To change the view mode, use the setViewMode() function, and to determine the current view mode, use viewMode().</para>
            <para>Items in these views are laid out in the direction specified by the flow() of the list view. The items may be fixed in place, or allowed to move, depending on the view's movement() state.</para>
            <para>If the items in the model cannot be completely laid out in the direction of flow, they can be wrapped at the boundary of the view widget; this depends on isWrapping(). This property is useful when the items are being represented by an icon view.</para>
            <para>The resizeMode() and layoutMode() govern how and when the items are laid out. Items are spaced according to their spacing(), and can exist within a notional grid of size specified by gridSize(). The items can be rendered as large or small icons depending on their iconSize().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style list view.	A Macintosh style list view.	A Plastique style list view.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Improving Performance</para>
            <para>It is possible to give the view hints about the data it is handling in order to improve its performance when displaying large numbers of items. One approach that can be taken for views that are intended to display items with equal sizes is to set the uniformItemSizes property to true.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also View Classes, QTreeView, QTableView, and QListWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new QListView with the given parent to view a model. Use setModel() to set the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.ClearPropertyFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the QListView-specific property flags. See viewMode.</para>
            <para>Properties inherited from QAbstractItemView are not covered by the property flags. Specifically, dragEnabled and acceptsDrops are computed by QListView when calling setMovement() or setViewMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.DataChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::dataChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.HorizontalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.IndexAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnIndexesMoved(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified indexes are moved in the view.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.IsIndexHidden(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.IsRowHidden(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the row is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.MoveCursor(QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.RectForIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle of the item at position index in the model. The rectangle is in contents coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also visualRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.RowsAboutToBeRemoved(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsAboutToBeRemoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.RowsInserted(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsInserted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.ScrollTo(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.SelectedIndexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.SelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.SetPositionForIndex(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the contents position of the item at index in the model to the given position. If the list view's movement mode is Static or its view mode is ListView, this function will have no effect.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.SetRowHidden(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true, the given row will be hidden; otherwise the row will be shown.</para>
            <para>See also isRowHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.SetSelection(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.StartDrag(QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::startDrag().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.UpdateGeometries">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::updateGeometries().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.VerticalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.ViewOptions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::viewOptions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.VisualRect(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.VisualRegionForSelection(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRegionForSelection().</para>
            <para>Since 4.7, the returned region only contains rectangles intersecting (or included in) the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListView.IndexesMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified indexes are moved in the view.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.movement">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the items can be moved freely, are snapped to a grid, or cannot be moved at all.</para>
            <para>This property determines how the user can move the items in the view. Static means that the items can't be moved the user. Free means that the user can drag and drop the items to any position in the view. Snap means that the user can drag and drop the items, but only to the positions in a notional grid signified by the gridSize property.</para>
            <para>Setting this property when the view is visible will cause the items to be laid out again.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to Static.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.flow">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds which direction the items layout should flow.</para>
            <para>If this property is LeftToRight, the items will be laid out left to right. If the isWrapping property is true, the layout will wrap when it reaches the right side of the visible area. If this property is TopToBottom, the items will be laid out from the top of the visible area, wrapping when it reaches the bottom.</para>
            <para>Setting this property when the view is visible will cause the items to be laid out again.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to TopToBottom.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.IsWrapping">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the items layout should wrap.</para>
            <para>This property holds whether the layout should wrap when there is no more space in the visible area. The point at which the layout wraps depends on the flow property.</para>
            <para>Setting this property when the view is visible will cause the items to be laid out again.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.resizeMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the items are laid out again when the view is resized.</para>
            <para>If this property is Adjust, the items will be laid out again when the view is resized. If the value is Fixed, the items will not be laid out when the view is resized.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to Fixed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.layoutMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property determines whether the layout of items should happen immediately or be delayed.</para>
            <para>This property holds the layout mode for the items. When the mode is SinglePass (the default), the items are laid out all in one go. When the mode is Batched, the items are laid out in batches of batchSize items, while processing events. This makes it possible to instantly view and interact with the visible items while the rest are being laid out.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.Spacing">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the space around the items in the layout.</para>
            <para>This property is the size of the empty space that is padded around an item in the layout.</para>
            <para>Setting this property when the view is visible will cause the items to be laid out again.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.GridSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size of the layout grid.</para>
            <para>This property is the size of the grid in which the items are laid out. The default is an empty size which means that there is no grid and the layout is not done in a grid. Setting this property to a non-empty size switches on the grid layout. (When a grid layout is in force the spacing property is ignored.)</para>
            <para>Setting this property when the view is visible will cause the items to be laid out again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.viewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the view mode of the QListView.</para>
            <para>This property will change the other unset properties to conform with the set view mode. QListView-specific properties that have already been set will not be changed, unless clearPropertyFlags() has been called.</para>
            <para>Setting the view mode will enable or disable drag and drop based on the selected movement. For ListMode, the default movement is Static (drag and drop disabled); for IconMode, the default movement is Free (drag and drop enabled).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.ModelColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the column in the model that is visible.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains 0, indicating that the first column in the model will be shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.UniformItemSizes">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether all items in the listview have the same size.</para>
            <para>This property should only be set to true if it is guaranteed that all items in the view have the same size. This enables the view to do some optimizations for performance purposes.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.BatchSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of items laid out in each batch if layoutMode is set to Batched.</para>
            <para>The default value is 100.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.WordWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item text word-wrapping policy.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then the item text is wrapped where necessary at word-breaks; otherwise it is not wrapped at all. This property is false by default.</para>
            <para>Please note that even if wrapping is enabled, the cell will not be expanded to make room for the text. It will print ellipsis for text that cannot be shown, according to the view's textElideMode.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListView.SelectionRectVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds if the selection rectangle should be visible.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then the selection rectangle is visible; otherwise it will be hidden.</para>
            <para>Note: The selection rectangle will only be visible if the selection mode is in a mode where more than one item can be selected; i.e., it will not draw a selection rectangle if the selection mode is QAbstractItemView::SingleSelection.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.Flow.LeftToRight">
            <summary>
            <para>The items are laid out in the view from the left to the right.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.Flow.TopToBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>The items are laid out in the view from the top to the bottom.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QListView.LayoutMode">
            <summary>
            <para>See also batchSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.LayoutMode.Batched">
            <summary>
            <para>The items are laid out in batches of batchSize items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.LayoutMode.SinglePass">
            <summary>
            <para>The items are laid out all at once.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.Movement.Free">
            <summary>
            <para>The items can be moved freely by the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.Movement.Snap">
            <summary>
            <para>The items snap to the specified grid when moved; see setGridSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.Movement.Static">
            <summary>
            <para>The items cannot be moved by the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.ResizeMode.Adjust">
            <summary>
            <para>The items will be laid out every time the view is resized.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.ResizeMode.Fixed">
            <summary>
            <para>The items will only be laid out the first time the view is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.ViewMode.IconMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The items are laid out using LeftToRight flow, with Large size and Free movement</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListView.ViewMode.ListMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The items are laid out using TopToBottom flow, with Small size and Static movement</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QListWidget">
            <summary>
            The QListWidget class provides an item-based list widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QListWidget is a convenience class that provides a list view similar to the one supplied by QListView, but with a classic item-based interface for adding and removing items. QListWidget uses an internal model to manage each QListWidgetItem in the list.</para>
            <para>For a more flexible list view widget, use the QListView class with a standard model.</para>
            <para>List widgets are constructed in the same way as other widgets:</para>
            <para>     QListWidget *listWidget = new QListWidget(this);</para>
            <para>The selectionMode() of a list widget determines how many of the items in the list can be selected at the same time, and whether complex selections of items can be created. This can be set with the setSelectionMode() function.</para>
            <para>There are two ways to add items to the list: they can be constructed with the list widget as their parent widget, or they can be constructed with no parent widget and added to the list later. If a list widget already exists when the items are constructed, the first method is easier to use:</para>
            <para>     new QListWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;Oak&amp;quot;), listWidget);</para>
            <para>     new QListWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;Fir&amp;quot;), listWidget);</para>
            <para>     new QListWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;Pine&amp;quot;), listWidget);</para>
            <para>If you need to insert a new item into the list at a particular position, then it should be constructed without a parent widget. The insertItem() function should then be used to place it within the list. The list widget will take ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>     QListWidgetItem *newItem = new QListWidgetItem;</para>
            <para>     newItem-&amp;gt;setText(itemText);</para>
            <para>     listWidget-&amp;gt;insertItem(row, newItem);</para>
            <para>For multiple items, insertItems() can be used instead. The number of items in the list is found with the count() function. To remove items from the list, use takeItem().</para>
            <para>The current item in the list can be found with currentItem(), and changed with setCurrentItem(). The user can also change the current item by navigating with the keyboard or clicking on a different item. When the current item changes, the currentItemChanged() signal is emitted with the new current item and the item that was previously current.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style list widget.	A Macintosh style list widget.	A Plastique style list widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QListWidgetItem, QListView, QTreeView, Model/View Programming, and Config Dialog Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QListWidget with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.AddItem(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the item at the end of the list widget.</para>
            <para>Warning: A QListWidgetItem can only be added to a QListWidget once. Adding the same QListWidgetItem multiple times to a QListWidget will result in undefined behavior.</para>
            <para>See also insertItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.AddItem(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts an item with the text label at the end of the list widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.AddItems(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts items with the text labels at the end of the list widget.</para>
            <para>See also insertItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all items and selections in the view.</para>
            <para>Warning: All items will be permanently deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.ClosePersistentEditor(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the persistent editor for the given item.</para>
            <para>See also openPersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnCurrentItemChanged(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>previous is the item that previously had the focus; current is the new current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnCurrentRowChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>currentRow is the row of the current item. If there is no current item, the currentRow is -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnCurrentTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>currentText is the text data in the current item. If there is no current item, the currentText is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.DropMimeData(System.Int32,QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Handles data supplied by an external drag and drop operation that ended with the given action in the given index. Returns true if data and action can be handled by the model; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.EditItem(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts editing the item if it is editable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.FindItems(System.String,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds items with the text that matches the string text using the given flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.IndexFromItem(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QModelIndex assocated with the given item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the item at the position in the list given by row.</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.InsertItem(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts an item with the text label in the list widget at the position given by row.</para>
            <para>See also addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.InsertItems(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts items from the list of labels into the list, starting at the given row.</para>
            <para>See also insertItem() and addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.IsItemHidden(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QListWidgetItem::isHidden() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.IsItemSelected(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if item is selected; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QListWidgetItem::isSelected() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.Item(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item that occupies the given row in the list if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also row().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemActivated(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item is activated. The item is activated when the user clicks or double clicks on it, depending on the system configuration. It is also activated when the user presses the activation key (on Windows and X11 this is the Return key, on Mac OS X it is Ctrl+0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates p. The coordinates are relative to the list widget's viewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates (x, y). The coordinates are relative to the list widget's viewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemChanged(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemClicked(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is clicked on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemPressed() and itemDoubleClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemDoubleClicked(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is double clicked on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemClicked() and itemPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemEntered(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered. This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setMouseTracking().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemFromIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the QListWidgetItem assocated with the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemPressed(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is pressed on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemClicked() and itemDoubleClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OnItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also selectedItems(), QListWidgetItem::isSelected(), and currentItemChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemWidget(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget displayed in the given item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setItemWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.Items(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of pointers to the items contained in the data object. If the object was not created by a QListWidget in the same process, the list is empty.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QListWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an object that contains a serialized description of the specified items. The format used to describe the items is obtained from the mimeTypes() function.</para>
            <para>If the list of items is empty, 0 is returned instead of a serialized empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of listwidget items.</para>
            <para>See also mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.OpenPersistentEditor(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens an editor for the given item. The editor remains open after editing.</para>
            <para>See also closePersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.RemoveItemWidget(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the widget set on the given item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.Row(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row containing the given item.</para>
            <para>See also item().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.ScrollToItem(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item is visible.</para>
            <para>hint specifies where the item should be located after the operation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SelectedItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all selected items in the list widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SetCurrentItem(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current item to item.</para>
            <para>Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected.</para>
            <para>See also currentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SetItemHidden(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true, the item will be hidden; otherwise it will be shown.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QListWidgetItem::setHidden() instead.</para>
            <para>See also isItemHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SetItemSelected(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects or deselects the given item depending on whether select is true of false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QListWidgetItem::setSelected() instead.</para>
            <para>See also isItemSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SetItemWidget(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the widget to be displayed in the give item.</para>
            <para>This function should only be used to display static content in the place of a list widget item. If you want to display custom dynamic content or implement a custom editor widget, use QListView and subclass QItemDelegate instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also itemWidget() and Delegate Classes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SortItems(QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts all the items in the list widget according to the specified order.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the drop actions supported by this view.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::DropActions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.TakeItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes and returns the item from the given row in the list widget; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>Items removed from a list widget will not be managed by Qt, and will need to be deleted manually.</para>
            <para>See also insertItem() and addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.VisualItemRect(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the list widget and all its items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is pressed on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemClicked() and itemDoubleClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is clicked on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemPressed() and itemDoubleClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemDoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is double clicked on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemClicked() and itemPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item is activated. The item is activated when the user clicks or double clicks on it, depending on the system configuration. It is also activated when the user presses the activation key (on Windows and X11 this is the Return key, on Mac OS X it is Ctrl+0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered. This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setMouseTracking().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.CurrentItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>previous is the item that previously had the focus; current is the new current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.CurrentTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>currentText is the text data in the current item. If there is no current item, the currentText is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.CurrentRowChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>currentRow is the row of the current item. If there is no current item, the currentRow is -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QListWidget.ItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also selectedItems(), QListWidgetItem::isSelected(), and currentItemChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidget.CurrentItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current item.</para>
            <para>Sets the current item to item.</para>
            <para>Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidget.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of items in the list including any hidden items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidget.CurrentRow">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the row of the current item.</para>
            <para>Depending on the current selection mode, the row may also be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidget.SortingEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether sorting is enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, sorting is enabled for the list; if the property is false, sorting is not enabled.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QListWidgetItem">
            <summary>
            The QListWidgetItem class provides an item for use with the QListWidget item view class.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QListWidgetItem represents a single item in a QListWidget. Each item can hold several pieces of information, and will display them appropriately.</para>
            <para>The item view convenience classes use a classic item-based interface rather than a pure model/view approach. For a more flexible list view widget, consider using the QListView class with a standard model.</para>
            <para>List items can be inserted automatically into a list, when they are constructed, by specifying the list widget:</para>
            <para>     new QListWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;Hazel&amp;quot;), listWidget);</para>
            <para>Alternatively, list items can also be created without a parent widget, and later inserted into a list using QListWidget::insertItem().</para>
            <para>List items are typically used to display text() and an icon(). These are set with the setText() and setIcon() functions. The appearance of the text can be customized with setFont(), setForeground(), and setBackground(). Text in list items can be aligned using the setTextAlignment() function. Tooltips, status tips and &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; help can be added to list items with setToolTip(), setStatusTip(), and setWhatsThis().</para>
            <para>By default, items are enabled, selectable, checkable, and can be the source of drag and drop operations.</para>
            <para>Each item's flags can be changed by calling setFlags() with the appropriate value (see Qt::ItemFlags). Checkable items can be checked, unchecked and partially checked with the setCheckState() function. The corresponding checkState() function indicates the item's current check state.</para>
            <para>The isHidden() function can be used to determine whether the item is hidden. To hide an item, use setHidden().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing</para>
            <para>When subclassing QListWidgetItem to provide custom items, it is possible to define new types for them enabling them to be distinguished from standard items. For subclasses that require this feature, ensure that you call the base class constructor with a new type value equal to or greater than UserType, within your constructor.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QListWidget, Model/View Programming, QTreeWidgetItem, and QTableWidgetItem.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other. Note that type() and listWidget() are not copied.</para>
            <para>This function is useful when reimplementing clone().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also data() and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QListWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty list widget item of the specified type with the given parent. If parent is not specified, the item will need to be inserted into a list widget with QListWidget::insertItem().</para>
            <para>This constructor inserts the item into the model of the parent that is passed to the constructor. If the model is sorted then the behavior of the insert is undetermined since the model will call the '&lt;' operator method on the item which, at this point, is not yet constructed. To avoid the undetermined behavior, we recommend not to specify the parent and use QListWidget::insertItem() instead.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,QtGui.QListWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty list widget item of the specified type with the given icon, text and parent. If the parent is not specified, the item will need to be inserted into a list widget with QListWidget::insertItem().</para>
            <para>This constructor inserts the item into the model of the parent that is passed to the constructor. If the model is sorted then the behavior of the insert is undetermined since the model will call the '&lt;' operator method on the item which, at this point, is not yet constructed. To avoid the undetermined behavior, we recommend not to specify the parent and use QListWidget::insertItem() instead.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QListWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty list widget item of the specified type with the given text and parent. If the parent is not specified, the item will need to be inserted into a list widget with QListWidget::insertItem().</para>
            <para>This constructor inserts the item into the model of the parent that is passed to the constructor. If the model is sorted then the behavior of the insert is undetermined since the model will call the '&lt;' operator method on the item which, at this point, is not yet constructed. To avoid the undetermined behavior, we recommend not to specify the parent and use QListWidget::insertItem() instead.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Clone">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an exact copy of the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Data(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's data for a given role. Reimplement this function if you need extra roles or special behavior for certain roles.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemDataRole and setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.IsHidden">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.IsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is selected; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.ListWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list widget containing the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.op_LessThan(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item's text is less then other item's text; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Read(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads the item from stream in.</para>
            <para>See also write().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.SetData(System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the data for a given role to the given value. Reimplement this function if you need extra roles or special behavior for certain roles.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemDataRole and data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.SetHidden(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the item if hide is true; otherwise shows the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.SetSelected(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the selected state of the item to select.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type passed to the QListWidgetItem constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Write(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the item to stream out.</para>
            <para>See also read().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the list item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to display the list item's background.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the background brush of the list item to the given brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.BackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use background() instead.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setBackground() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.CheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the checked state of the list item (see Qt::CheckState).</para>
            <para>Sets the check state of the list item to state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Flags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item flags for this item (see Qt::ItemFlags).</para>
            <para>Sets the item flags for the list item to flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font used to display this list item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the font used when painting the item to the given font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Foreground">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to display the list item's foreground (e.g. text).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the foreground brush of the list item to the given brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list item's icon.</para>
            <para>Sets the icon for the list item to the given icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint set for the list item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the size hint for the list item to be size. If no size hint is set, the item delegate will compute the size hint based on the item data.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.StatusTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list item's status tip.</para>
            <para>Sets the status tip for the list item to the text specified by statusTip. QListWidget mouseTracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the text for the list widget item's to the given text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.TextAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text alignment for the list item.</para>
            <para>Sets the list item's text alignment to alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.TextColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color used to display the list item's text.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use foreground() instead.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setForeground() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list item's tooltip.</para>
            <para>Sets the tooltip for the list item to the text specified by toolTip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list item's &quot;What's This?&quot; help text.</para>
            <para>Sets the &quot;What's This?&quot; help for the list item to the text specified by whatsThis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.ItemType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types that are used to describe list widget items.</para>
            <para>You can define new user types in QListWidgetItem subclasses to ensure that custom items are treated specially.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.ItemType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The default type for list widget items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QListWidgetItem.ItemType.UserType">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimum value for custom types. Values below UserType are reserved by Qt.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMainWindow">
            <summary>
            The QMainWindow class provides a main application window.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt Main Window Framework</para>
            <para>A main window provides a framework for building an application's user interface. Qt has QMainWindow and its related classes for main window management. QMainWindow has its own layout to which you can add QToolBars, QDockWidgets, a QMenuBar, and a QStatusBar. The layout has a center area that can be occupied by any kind of widget. You can see an image of the layout below.</para>
            <para>Note: Creating a main window without a central widget is not supported. You must have a central widget even if it is just a placeholder.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Main Window Components</para>
            <para>A central widget will typically be a standard Qt widget such as a QTextEdit or a QGraphicsView. Custom widgets can also be used for advanced applications. You set the central widget with setCentralWidget().</para>
            <para>Main windows have either a single (SDI) or multiple (MDI) document interface. You create MDI applications in Qt by using a QMdiArea as the central widget.</para>
            <para>We will now examine each of the other widgets that can be added to a main window. We give examples on how to create and add them.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Menus</para>
            <para>Qt implements menus in QMenu and QMainWindow keeps them in a QMenuBar. QActions are added to the menus, which display them as menu items.</para>
            <para>You can add new menus to the main window's menu bar by calling menuBar(), which returns the QMenuBar for the window, and then add a menu with QMenuBar::addMenu().</para>
            <para>QMainWindow comes with a default menu bar, but you can also set one yourself with setMenuBar(). If you wish to implement a custom menu bar (i.e., not use the QMenuBar widget), you can set it with setMenuWidget().</para>
            <para>An example of how to create menus follows:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::createMenus()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     fileMenu = menuBar()-&amp;gt;addMenu(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;File&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     fileMenu-&amp;gt;addAction(newAct);</para>
            <para>     fileMenu-&amp;gt;addAction(openAct);</para>
            <para>     fileMenu-&amp;gt;addAction(saveAct);</para>
            <para>The createPopupMenu() function creates popup menus when the main window receives context menu events. The default implementation generates a menu with the checkable actions from the dock widgets and toolbars. You can reimplement createPopupMenu() for a custom menu.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Toolbars</para>
            <para>Toolbars are implemented in the QToolBar class. You add a toolbar to a main window with addToolBar().</para>
            <para>You control the initial position of toolbars by assigning them to a specific Qt::ToolBarArea. You can split an area by inserting a toolbar break - think of this as a line break in text editing - with addToolBarBreak() or insertToolBarBreak(). You can also restrict placement by the user with QToolBar::setAllowedAreas() and QToolBar::setMovable().</para>
            <para>The size of toolbar icons can be retrieved with iconSize(). The sizes are platform dependent; you can set a fixed size with setIconSize(). You can alter the appearance of all tool buttons in the toolbars with setToolButtonStyle().</para>
            <para>An example of toolbar creation follows:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::createToolBars()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     fileToolBar = addToolBar(tr(&amp;quot;File&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     fileToolBar-&amp;gt;addAction(newAct);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Dock Widgets</para>
            <para>Dock widgets are implemented in the QDockWidget class. A dock widget is a window that can be docked into the main window. You add dock widgets to a main window with addDockWidget().</para>
            <para>There are four dock widget areas as given by the Qt::DockWidgetArea enum: left, right, top, and bottom. You can specify which dock widget area that should occupy the corners where the areas overlap with setCorner(). By default each area can only contain one row (vertical or horizontal) of dock widgets, but if you enable nesting with setDockNestingEnabled(), dock widgets can be added in either direction.</para>
            <para>Two dock widgets may also be stacked on top of each other. A QTabBar is then used to select which of the widgets that should be displayed.</para>
            <para>We give an example of how to create and add dock widgets to a main window:</para>
            <para>     QDockWidget *dockWidget = new QDockWidget(tr(&amp;quot;Dock Widget&amp;quot;), this);</para>
            <para>     dockWidget-&amp;gt;setAllowedAreas(Qt::LeftDockWidgetArea |</para>
            <para>                                 Qt::RightDockWidgetArea);</para>
            <para>     dockWidget-&amp;gt;setWidget(dockWidgetContents);</para>
            <para>     addDockWidget(Qt::LeftDockWidgetArea, dockWidget);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Status Bar</para>
            <para>You can set a status bar with setStatusBar(), but one is created the first time statusBar() (which returns the main window's status bar) is called. See QStatusBar for information on how to use it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Storing State</para>
            <para>QMainWindow can store the state of its layout with saveState(); it can later be retrieved with restoreState(). It is the position and size (relative to the size of the main window) of the toolbars and dock widgets that are stored.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMenuBar, QToolBar, QStatusBar, QDockWidget, Application Example, Dock Widgets Example, MDI Example, SDI Example, and Menus Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QMainWindow with the given parent and the specified widget flags.</para>
            <para>QMainWindow sets the Qt::Window flag itself, and will hence always be created as a top-level widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.AddDockWidget(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea,QtGui.QDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given dockwidget to the specified area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.AddDockWidget(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea,QtGui.QDockWidget,QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds dockwidget into the given area in the direction specified by the orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.AddToolBar(QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Equivalent of calling addToolBar(Qt::TopToolBarArea, toolbar)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.AddToolBar(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a QToolBar object, setting its window title to title, and inserts it into the top toolbar area.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowTitle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.AddToolBar(QtCore.Qt.ToolBarArea,QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the toolbar into the specified area in this main window. The toolbar is placed at the end of the current tool bar block (i.e. line). If the main window already manages toolbar then it will only move the toolbar to area.</para>
            <para>See also insertToolBar(), addToolBarBreak(), and insertToolBarBreak().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.AddToolBarBreak(QtCore.Qt.ToolBarArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a toolbar break to the given area after all the other objects that are present.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.Corner(QtCore.Qt.Corner)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dock widget area that occupies the specified corner.</para>
            <para>See also setCorner().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.CreatePopupMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a popup menu containing checkable entries for the toolbars and dock widgets present in the main window. If there are no toolbars and dock widgets present, this function returns a null pointer.</para>
            <para>By default, this function is called by the main window when the user activates a context menu, typically by right-clicking on a toolbar or a dock widget.</para>
            <para>If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function and return a newly-created popup menu. Ownership of the popup menu is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>See also addDockWidget(), addToolBar(), and menuBar().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockWidgetArea(QtGui.QDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the Qt::DockWidgetArea for dockwidget. If dockwidget has not been added to the main window, this function returns Qt::NoDockWidgetArea.</para>
            <para>See also addDockWidget(), splitDockWidget(), and Qt::DockWidgetArea.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.OnIconSizeChanged(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of the icons used in the window is changed. The new icon size is passed in iconSize.</para>
            <para>You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.</para>
            <para>See also setIconSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.InsertToolBar(QtGui.QToolBar,QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the toolbar into the area occupied by the before toolbar so that it appears before it. For example, in normal left-to-right layout operation, this means that toolbar will appear to the left of the toolbar specified by before in a horizontal toolbar area.</para>
            <para>See also insertToolBarBreak(), addToolBar(), and addToolBarBreak().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.InsertToolBarBreak(QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a toolbar break before the toolbar specified by before.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.RemoveDockWidget(QtGui.QDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the dockwidget from the main window layout and hides it. Note that the dockwidget is not deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.RemoveToolBar(QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the toolbar from the main window layout and hides it. Note that the toolbar is not deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.RemoveToolBarBreak(QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes a toolbar break previously inserted before the toolbar specified by before.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.RestoreDockWidget(QtGui.QDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the state of dockwidget if it is created after the call to restoreState(). Returns true if the state was restored; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also restoreState() and saveState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.RestoreState(QtCore.QByteArray,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the state of this mainwindow's toolbars and dockwidgets. The version number is compared with that stored in state. If they do not match, the mainwindow's state is left unchanged, and this function returns false; otherwise, the state is restored, and this function returns true.</para>
            <para>To restore geometry saved using QSettings, you can use code like this:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::readSettings()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QSettings settings(&quot;MyCompany&quot;, &quot;MyApp&quot;);</para>
            <para>     restoreGeometry(settings.value(&quot;myWidget/geometry&quot;).toByteArray());</para>
            <para>     restoreState(settings.value(&quot;myWidget/windowState&quot;).toByteArray());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also saveState(), QWidget::saveGeometry(), QWidget::restoreGeometry(), and restoreDockWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.SaveState(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the current state of this mainwindow's toolbars and dockwidgets. The version number is stored as part of the data.</para>
            <para>The objectName property is used to identify each QToolBar and QDockWidget. You should make sure that this property is unique for each QToolBar and QDockWidget you add to the QMainWindow</para>
            <para>To restore the saved state, pass the return value and version number to restoreState().</para>
            <para>To save the geometry when the window closes, you can implement a close event like this:</para>
            <para> void MyMainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QSettings settings(&quot;MyCompany&quot;, &quot;MyApp&quot;);</para>
            <para>     settings.setValue(&quot;geometry&quot;, saveGeometry());</para>
            <para>     settings.setValue(&quot;windowState&quot;, saveState());</para>
            <para>     QMainWindow::closeEvent(event);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also restoreState(), QWidget::saveGeometry(), and QWidget::restoreGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.SetCorner(QtCore.Qt.Corner,QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given dock widget area to occupy the specified corner.</para>
            <para>See also corner().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.SetTabPosition(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea,QtGui.QTabWidget.TabPosition)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the tab position for the given dock widget areas to the specified tabPosition. By default, all dock areas show their tabs at the bottom.</para>
            <para>Note: The VerticalTabs dock option overrides the tab positions set by this method.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also tabPosition() and setTabShape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.SplitDockWidget(QtGui.QDockWidget,QtGui.QDockWidget,QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Splits the space covered by the first dock widget into two parts, moves the first dock widget into the first part, and moves the second dock widget into the second part.</para>
            <para>The orientation specifies how the space is divided: A Qt::Horizontal split places the second dock widget to the right of the first; a Qt::Vertical split places the second dock widget below the first.</para>
            <para>Note: if first is currently in a tabbed docked area, second will be added as a new tab, not as a neighbor of first. This is because a single tab can contain only one dock widget.</para>
            <para>Note: The Qt::LayoutDirection influences the order of the dock widgets in the two parts of the divided area. When right-to-left layout direction is enabled, the placing of the dock widgets will be reversed.</para>
            <para>See also tabifyDockWidget(), addDockWidget(), and removeDockWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.TabPosition(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tab position for area.</para>
            <para>Note: The VerticalTabs dock option overrides the tab positions returned by this function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabPosition() and tabShape().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.TabifiedDockWidgets(QtGui.QDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dock widgets that are tabified together with dockwidget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also tabifyDockWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.TabifyDockWidget(QtGui.QDockWidget,QtGui.QDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves second dock widget on top of first dock widget, creating a tabbed docked area in the main window.</para>
            <para>See also tabifiedDockWidgets().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.ToolBarArea(QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the Qt::ToolBarArea for toolbar. If toolbar has not been added to the main window, this function returns Qt::NoToolBarArea.</para>
            <para>See also addToolBar(), addToolBarBreak(), and Qt::ToolBarArea.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.ToolBarBreak(QtGui.QToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether there is a toolbar break before the toolbar.</para>
            <para>See also addToolBarBreak() and insertToolBarBreak().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.OnToolButtonStyleChanged(QtCore.Qt.ToolButtonStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the style used for tool buttons in the window is changed. The new style is passed in toolButtonStyle.</para>
            <para>You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.</para>
            <para>See also setToolButtonStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMainWindow.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the main window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMainWindow.IconSizeChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of the icons used in the window is changed. The new icon size is passed in iconSize.</para>
            <para>You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.</para>
            <para>See also setIconSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMainWindow.ToolButtonStyleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the style used for tool buttons in the window is changed. The new style is passed in toolButtonStyle.</para>
            <para>You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.</para>
            <para>See also setToolButtonStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.CentralWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the central widget for the main window. This function returns zero if the central widget has not been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the given widget to be the main window's central widget.</para>
            <para>Note: QMainWindow takes ownership of the widget pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.MenuBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the menu bar for the main window. This function creates and returns an empty menu bar if the menu bar does not exist.</para>
            <para>If you want all windows in a Mac application to share one menu bar, don't use this function to create it, because the menu bar created here will have this QMainWindow as its parent. Instead, you must create a menu bar that does not have a parent, which you can then share among all the Mac windows. Create a parent-less menu bar this way:</para>
            <para> QMenuBar *menuBar = new QMenuBar(0);</para>
            <para>Sets the menu bar for the main window to menuBar.</para>
            <para>Note: QMainWindow takes ownership of the menuBar pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.MenuWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the menu bar for the main window. This function returns null if a menu bar hasn't been constructed yet.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the menu bar for the main window to menuBar.</para>
            <para>QMainWindow takes ownership of the menuBar pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.StatusBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the status bar for the main window. This function creates and returns an empty status bar if the status bar does not exist.</para>
            <para>Sets the status bar for the main window to statusbar.</para>
            <para>Setting the status bar to 0 will remove it from the main window. Note that QMainWindow takes ownership of the statusbar pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds size of toolbar icons in this mainwindow.</para>
            <para>The default is the default tool bar icon size of the GUI style. Note that the icons used must be at least of this size as the icons are only scaled down.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.ToolButtonStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds style of toolbar buttons in this mainwindow.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.Animated">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether manipulating dock widgets and tool bars is animated.</para>
            <para>When a dock widget or tool bar is dragged over the main window, the main window adjusts its contents to indicate where the dock widget or tool bar will be docked if it is dropped. Setting this property causes QMainWindow to move its contents in a smooth animation. Clearing this property causes the contents to snap into their new positions.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set. It may be cleared if the main window contains widgets which are slow at resizing or repainting themselves.</para>
            <para>Setting this property is identical to setting the AnimatedDocks option using setDockOptions().</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.DocumentMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the tab bar for tabbed dockwidgets is set to document mode.</para>
            <para>The default is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.TabShape">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the tab shape used for tabbed dock widgets.</para>
            <para>The default is QTabWidget::Rounded.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockNestingEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether docks can be nested.</para>
            <para>If this property is false, dock areas can only contain a single row (horizontal or vertical) of dock widgets. If this property is true, the area occupied by a dock widget can be split in either direction to contain more dock widgets.</para>
            <para>Dock nesting is only necessary in applications that contain a lot of dock widgets. It gives the user greater freedom in organizing their main window. However, dock nesting leads to more complex (and less intuitive) behavior when a dock widget is dragged over the main window, since there are more ways in which a dropped dock widget may be placed in the dock area.</para>
            <para>Setting this property is identical to setting the AllowNestedDocks option using setDockOptions().</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOptions">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the docking behavior of QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>The default value is AnimatedDocks | AllowTabbedDocks.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMainWindow.UnifiedTitleAndToolBarOnMac">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the window uses the unified title and toolbar look on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>This property is false by default and only has any effect on Mac OS X 10.4 or higher.</para>
            <para>If set to true, then the top toolbar area is replaced with a Carbon HIToolbar or a Cocoa NSToolbar (depending on whether Qt was built with Carbon or Cocoa). All toolbars in the top toolbar area and any toolbars added afterwards are moved to that. This means a couple of things.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QToolBars in this toolbar area are not movable and you cannot drag other toolbars to it</para>
            <para>Toolbar breaks are not respected or preserved</para>
            <para>Any custom widgets in the toolbar will not be shown if the toolbar becomes too small (only actions will be shown)</para>
            <para>Before Qt 4.5, if you called showFullScreen() on the main window, the QToolbar would disappear since it is considered to be part of the title bar. Qt 4.5 and up will now work around this by pulling the toolbars out and back into the regular toolbar and vice versa when you swap out.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Setting this back to false will remove these restrictions.</para>
            <para>The Qt::WA_MacBrushedMetal attribute takes precedence over this property.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum contains flags that specify the docking behavior of QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>These options only control how dock widgets may be dropped in a QMainWindow. They do not re-arrange the dock widgets to conform with the specified options. For this reason they should be set before any dock widgets are added to the main window. Exceptions to this are the AnimatedDocks and VerticalTabs options, which may be set at any time.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOption.AllowNestedDocks">
            <summary>
            <para>Identical to the dockNestingEnabled property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOption.AllowTabbedDocks">
            <summary>
            <para>The user can drop one dock widget &quot;on top&quot; of another. The two widgets are stacked and a tab bar appears for selecting which one is visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOption.AnimatedDocks">
            <summary>
            <para>Identical to the animated property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOption.ForceTabbedDocks">
            <summary>
            <para>Each dock area contains a single stack of tabbed dock widgets. In other words, dock widgets cannot be placed next to each other in a dock area. If this option is set, AllowNestedDocks has no effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMainWindow.DockOption.VerticalTabs">
            <summary>
            <para>The two vertical dock areas on the sides of the main window show their tabs vertically. If this option is not set, all dock areas show their tabs at the bottom. Implies AllowTabbedDocks. See also setTabPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMatrix">
            <summary>
            The QMatrix class specifies 2D transformations of a coordinate system.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A matrix specifies how to translate, scale, shear or rotate the coordinate system, and is typically used when rendering graphics. QMatrix, in contrast to QTransform, does not allow perspective transformations. QTransform is the recommended transformation class in Qt.</para>
            <para>A QMatrix object can be built using the setMatrix(), scale(), rotate(), translate() and shear() functions. Alternatively, it can be built by applying basic matrix operations. The matrix can also be defined when constructed, and it can be reset to the identity matrix (the default) using the reset() function.</para>
            <para>The QMatrix class supports mapping of graphic primitives: A given point, line, polygon, region, or painter path can be mapped to the coordinate system defined by this matrix using the map() function. In case of a rectangle, its coordinates can be transformed using the mapRect() function. A rectangle can also be transformed into a polygon (mapped to the coordinate system defined by this matrix), using the mapToPolygon() function.</para>
            <para>QMatrix provides the isIdentity() function which returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix, and the isInvertible() function which returns true if the matrix is non-singular (i.e. AB = BA = I). The inverted() function returns an inverted copy of this matrix if it is invertible (otherwise it returns the identity matrix). In addition, QMatrix provides the determinant() function returning the matrix's determinant.</para>
            <para>Finally, the QMatrix class supports matrix multiplication, and objects of the class can be streamed as well as compared.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Rendering Graphics</para>
            <para>When rendering graphics, the matrix defines the transformations but the actual transformation is performed by the drawing routines in QPainter.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter operates on the associated device's own coordinate system. The standard coordinate system of a QPaintDevice has its origin located at the top-left position. The x values increase to the right; y values increase downward. For a complete description, see the coordinate system documentation.</para>
            <para>QPainter has functions to translate, scale, shear and rotate the coordinate system without using a QMatrix. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 void SimpleTransformation::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 1, Qt::DashLine));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.rotate(45);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;, 24));</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 1));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(20, 10, &amp;quot;QMatrix&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Although these functions are very convenient, it can be more efficient to build a QMatrix and call QPainter::setMatrix() if you want to perform more than a single transform operation. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 void CombinedTransformation::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 1, Qt::DashLine));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMatrix matrix;</para>
            <para>     matrix.translate(50, 50);</para>
            <para>     matrix.rotate(45);</para>
            <para>     matrix.scale(0.5, 1.0);</para>
            <para>     painter.setMatrix(matrix);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;, 24));</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 1));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(20, 10, &amp;quot;QMatrix&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Basic Matrix Operations</para>
            <para>A QMatrix object contains a 3 x 3 matrix. The dx and dy elements specify horizontal and vertical translation. The m11 and m22 elements specify horizontal and vertical scaling. And finally, the m21 and m12 elements specify horizontal and vertical shearing.</para>
            <para>QMatrix transforms a point in the plane to another point using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para>The point (x, y) is the original point, and (x', y') is the transformed point. (x', y') can be transformed back to (x, y) by performing the same operation on the inverted() matrix.</para>
            <para>The various matrix elements can be set when constructing the matrix, or by using the setMatrix() function later on. They can also be manipulated using the translate(), rotate(), scale() and shear() convenience functions, The currently set values can be retrieved using the m11(), m12(), m21(), m22(), dx() and dy() functions.</para>
            <para>Translation is the simplest transformation. Setting dx and dy will move the coordinate system dx units along the X axis and dy units along the Y axis. Scaling can be done by setting m11 and m22. For example, setting m11 to 2 and m22 to 1.5 will double the height and increase the width by 50%. The identity matrix has m11 and m22 set to 1 (all others are set to 0) mapping a point to itself. Shearing is controlled by m12 and m21. Setting these elements to values different from zero will twist the coordinate system. Rotation is achieved by carefully setting both the shearing factors and the scaling factors.</para>
            <para>Here's the combined transformations example using basic matrix operations:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 void BasicOperations::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     double pi = 3.14;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     double a    = pi/180 * 45.0;</para>
            <para>     double sina = sin(a);</para>
            <para>     double cosa = cos(a);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMatrix translationMatrix(1, 0, 0, 1, 50.0, 50.0);</para>
            <para>     QMatrix rotationMatrix(cosa, sina, -sina, cosa, 0, 0);</para>
            <para>     QMatrix scalingMatrix(0.5, 0, 0, 1.0, 0, 0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMatrix matrix;</para>
            <para>     matrix =  scalingMatrix * rotationMatrix * translationMatrix;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 1, Qt::DashLine));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawRect(0, 0, 100, 100);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setMatrix(matrix);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Helvetica&amp;quot;, 24));</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 1));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(20, 10, &amp;quot;QMatrix&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter, QTransform, Coordinate System, Affine Transformations Demo, and Transformations Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale), which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.#ctor(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a matrix that is a copy of the given matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Initialization)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale), which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            <para>All elements are set to zero except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale), which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Determinant">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix's determinant.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Dx">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal translation factor.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Dy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical translation factor.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Inverted">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an inverted copy of this matrix.</para>
            <para>If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the returned matrix is the identity matrix. If invertible is valid (i.e. not 0), its value is set to true if the matrix is invertible, otherwise it is set to false.</para>
            <para>See also isInvertible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Inverted(System.Boolean@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an inverted copy of this matrix.</para>
            <para>If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the returned matrix is the identity matrix. If invertible is valid (i.e. not 0), its value is set to true if the matrix is invertible, otherwise it is set to false.</para>
            <para>See also isInvertible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.IsIdentity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.IsInvertible">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the matrix is invertible, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also inverted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.M11">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal scaling factor.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.M12">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical shearing factor.</para>
            <para>See also shear() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.M21">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal shearing factor.</para>
            <para>See also shear() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.M22">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical scaling factor.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPoint object that is a copy of the given point, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPointF object that is a copy of the given point, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtCore.QLine)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QLine object that is a copy of the given line, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtCore.QLineF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QLineF object that is a copy of the given line, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygonF object that is a copy of the given polygon, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygon object that is a copy of the given polygon, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QRegion object that is a copy of the given region, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            <para>Calling this method can be rather expensive if rotations or shearing are used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPainterPath object that is a copy of the given path, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Maps the given coordinates x and y into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. The resulting values are put in *tx and *ty, respectively. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Map(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double@,System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps the given coordinates x and y into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. The resulting values are put in *tx and *ty, respectively.</para>
            <para>The coordinates are transformed using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para>The point (x, y) is the original point, and (x', y') is the transformed point.</para>
            <para>See also Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.MapRect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a QRect object that is a copy of the given rectangle, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix. Note that the transformed coordinates are rounded to the nearest integer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.MapRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QRectF object that is a copy of the given rectangle, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            <para>The rectangle's coordinates are transformed using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para>If rotation or shearing has been specified, this function returns the bounding rectangle. To retrieve the exact region the given rectangle maps to, use the mapToPolygon() function instead.</para>
            <para>See also mapToPolygon() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.MapToPolygon(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QPolygon representation of the given rectangle, mapped into the coordinate system defined by this matrix.</para>
            <para>The rectangle's coordinates are transformed using the following formulas:</para>
            <para> x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx</para>
            <para> y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy</para>
            <para>Polygons and rectangles behave slightly differently when transformed (due to integer rounding), so matrix.map(QPolygon(rectangle)) is not always the same as matrix.mapToPolygon(rectangle).</para>
            <para>See also mapRect() and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.op_Inequality(QtGui.QMatrix,QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is not equal to the given matrix, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix,QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by the given matrix.</para>
            <para>Note that matrix multiplication is not commutative, i.e. a*b != b*a.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.op_Equality(QtGui.QMatrix,QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is equal to the given matrix, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the matrix to an identity matrix, i.e. all elements are set to zero, except m11 and m22 (specifying the scale) which are set to 1.</para>
            <para>See also QMatrix(), isIdentity(), and Basic Matrix Operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Rotate(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Rotates the coordinate system the given degrees counterclockwise.</para>
            <para>Note that if you apply a QMatrix to a point defined in widget coordinates, the direction of the rotation will be clockwise because the y-axis points downwards.</para>
            <para>Returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Scale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the coordinate system by sx horizontally and sy vertically, and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.SetMatrix(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the matrix elements to the specified values, m11, m12, m21, m22, dx and dy.</para>
            <para>Note that this function replaces the previous values. QMatrix provide the translate(), rotate(), scale() and shear() convenience functions to manipulate the various matrix elements based on the currently defined coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also QMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Shear(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shears the coordinate system by sh horizontally and sv vertically, and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the coordinate system dx along the x axis and dy along the y axis, and returns a reference to the matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMatrix4x4">
            <summary>
            The QMatrix4x4 class represents a 4x4 transformation matrix in 3D space.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QVector3D and QGenericMatrix.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a 4x4 matrix from the conventional Qt 2D transformation matrix transform.</para>
            <para>If transform has a special type (identity, translate, scale, etc), the programmer should follow this constructor with a call to optimize() if they wish QMatrix4x4 to optimize further calls to translate(), scale(), etc.</para>
            <para>See also toTransform() and optimize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a 4x4 matrix from a conventional Qt 2D affine transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>If matrix has a special type (identity, translate, scale, etc), the programmer should follow this constructor with a call to optimize() if they wish QMatrix4x4 to optimize further calls to translate(), scale(), etc.</para>
            <para>See also toAffine() and optimize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor(QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor(System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor(System.Double@,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the product of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the product of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the product of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the product of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the product of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Multiply(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the product of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Addition(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the sum of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_UnaryNegation(QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the negation of matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the difference of m1 and m2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Division(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the result of dividing all elements of matrix by divisor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Column(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the elements of column index as a 4D vector.</para>
            <para>See also setColumn() and row().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.ConstData">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a constant pointer to the raw data of this matrix.</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.CopyDataTo(System.Double@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Retrieves the 16 items in this matrix and copies them to values in row-major order.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Data">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the raw data of this matrix.</para>
            <para>See also constData() and optimize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Determinant">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the determinant of this matrix.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Fill(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills all elements of this matrx with value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.FlipCoordinates">
            <summary>
            <para>Flips between right-handed and left-handed coordinate systems by multiplying the y and z co-ordinates by -1. This is normally used to create a left-handed orthographic view without scaling the viewport as ortho() does.</para>
            <para>See also ortho().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Frustum(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that applies a perspective frustum projection for a window with lower-left corner (left, bottom), upper-right corner (right, top), and the specified nearPlane and farPlane clipping planes.</para>
            <para>See also ortho() and perspective().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Inverted">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inverse of this matrix. Returns the identity if this matrix cannot be inverted; i.e. determinant() is zero. If invertible is not null, then true will be written to that location if the matrix can be inverted; false otherwise.</para>
            <para>If the matrix is recognized as the identity or an orthonormal matrix, then this function will quickly invert the matrix using optimized routines.</para>
            <para>See also determinant() and normalMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Inverted(System.Boolean@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inverse of this matrix. Returns the identity if this matrix cannot be inverted; i.e. determinant() is zero. If invertible is not null, then true will be written to that location if the matrix can be inverted; false otherwise.</para>
            <para>If the matrix is recognized as the identity or an orthonormal matrix, then this function will quickly invert the matrix using optimized routines.</para>
            <para>See also determinant() and normalMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.IsIdentity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is the identity; false otherwise.</para>
            <para>See also setToIdentity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.LookAt(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that applies an eye position transformation. The center value indicates the center of the view that the eye is looking at. The up value indicates which direction should be considered up with respect to the eye.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Map(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps point by multiplying this matrix by point.</para>
            <para>See also mapRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Map(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps point by multiplying this matrix by point.</para>
            <para>See also mapRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Map(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps point by multiplying this matrix by point.</para>
            <para>See also mapRect() and mapVector().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Map(QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps point by multiplying this matrix by point.</para>
            <para>See also mapRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.MapRect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps rect by multiplying this matrix by the corners of rect and then forming a new rectangle from the results. The returned rectangle will be an ordinary 2D rectangle with sides parallel to the horizontal and vertical axes.</para>
            <para>See also map().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.MapRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps rect by multiplying this matrix by the corners of rect and then forming a new rectangle from the results. The returned rectangle will be an ordinary 2D rectangle with sides parallel to the horizontal and vertical axes.</para>
            <para>See also map().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.MapVector(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Maps vector by multiplying the top 3x3 portion of this matrix by vector. The translation and projection components of this matrix are ignored.</para>
            <para>See also map().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Inequality(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is not identical to other; false otherwise. This operator uses an exact floating-point comparison.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.op_Equality(QtGui.QMatrix4x4,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this matrix is identical to other; false otherwise. This operator uses an exact floating-point comparison.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Optimize">
            <summary>
            <para>Optimize the usage of this matrix from its current elements.</para>
            <para>Some operations such as translate(), scale(), and rotate() can be performed more efficiently if the matrix being modified is already known to be the identity, a previous translate(), a previous scale(), etc.</para>
            <para>Normally the QMatrix4x4 class keeps track of this special type internally as operations are performed. However, if the matrix is modified directly with operator()() or data(), then QMatrix4x4 will lose track of the special type and will revert to the safest but least efficient operations thereafter.</para>
            <para>By calling optimize() after directly modifying the matrix, the programmer can force QMatrix4x4 to recover the special type if the elements appear to conform to one of the known optimized types.</para>
            <para>See also operator()(), data(), and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Ortho(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that applies an orthographic projection for a window with boundaries specified by rect. The near and far clipping planes will be -1 and 1 respectively.</para>
            <para>See also frustum() and perspective().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Ortho(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that applies an orthographic projection for a window with boundaries specified by rect. The near and far clipping planes will be -1 and 1 respectively.</para>
            <para>See also frustum() and perspective().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Ortho(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that applies an orthographic projection for a window with lower-left corner (left, bottom), upper-right corner (right, top), and the specified nearPlane and farPlane clipping planes.</para>
            <para>See also frustum() and perspective().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Perspective(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that applies a perspective projection. The field of view will be angle degrees within a window with a given aspect ratio. The projection will have the specified nearPlane and farPlane clipping planes.</para>
            <para>See also ortho() and frustum().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Rotate(QtGui.QQuaternion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiples this matrix by another that rotates coordinates according to a specified quaternion. The quaternion is assumed to have been normalized.</para>
            <para>See also scale(), translate(), and QQuaternion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Rotate(System.Double,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiples this matrix by another that rotates coordinates through angle degrees about vector.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Rotate(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiples this matrix by another that rotates coordinates through angle degrees about vector.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Row(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the elements of row index as a 4D vector.</para>
            <para>See also setRow() and column().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Scale(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that scales coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Scale(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that scales coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Scale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that scales coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Scale(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that scales coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also translate() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.SetColumn(System.Int32,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the elements of column index to the components of value.</para>
            <para>See also column() and setRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.SetRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the elements of row index to the components of value.</para>
            <para>See also row() and setColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.SetToIdentity">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets this matrix to the identity.</para>
            <para>See also isIdentity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.ToAffine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the conventional Qt 2D affine transformation matrix that corresponds to this matrix. It is assumed that this matrix only contains 2D affine transformation elements.</para>
            <para>See also toTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.ToTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the conventional Qt 2D transformation matrix that corresponds to this matrix.</para>
            <para>The returned QTransform is formed by simply dropping the third row and third column of the QMatrix4x4. This is suitable for implementing orthographic projections where the z co-ordinate should be dropped rather than projected.</para>
            <para>See also toAffine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.ToTransform(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the conventional Qt 2D transformation matrix that corresponds to this matrix.</para>
            <para>The returned QTransform is formed by simply dropping the third row and third column of the QMatrix4x4. This is suitable for implementing orthographic projections where the z co-ordinate should be dropped rather than projected.</para>
            <para>See also toAffine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Translate(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that translates coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that translates coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Translate(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies this matrix by another that translates coordinates by the components of vector.</para>
            <para>See also scale() and rotate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMatrix4x4.Transposed">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this matrix, transposed about its diagonal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMdiArea">
            <summary>
            The QMdiArea widget provides an area in which MDI windows are displayed.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMdiArea functions, essentially, like a window manager for MDI windows. For instance, it draws the windows it manages on itself and arranges them in a cascading or tile pattern. QMdiArea is commonly used as the center widget in a QMainWindow to create MDI applications, but can also be placed in any layout. The following code adds an area to a main window:</para>
            <para>     QMainWindow *mainWindow = new QMainWindow;</para>
            <para>     mainWindow-&amp;gt;setCentralWidget(mdiArea);</para>
            <para>Unlike the window managers for top-level windows, all window flags (Qt::WindowFlags) are supported by QMdiArea as long as the flags are supported by the current widget style. If a specific flag is not supported by the style (e.g., the WindowShadeButtonHint), you can still shade the window with showShaded().</para>
            <para>Subwindows in QMdiArea are instances of QMdiSubWindow. They are added to an MDI area with addSubWindow(). It is common to pass a QWidget, which is set as the internal widget, to this function, but it is also possible to pass a QMdiSubWindow directly.The class inherits QWidget, and you can use the same API as with a normal top-level window when programming. QMdiSubWindow also has behavior that is specific to MDI windows. See the QMdiSubWindow class description for more details.</para>
            <para>A subwindow becomes active when it gets the keyboard focus, or when setFocus() is called. The user activates a window by moving focus in the usual ways. The MDI area emits the subWindowActivated() signal when the active window changes, and the activeSubWindow() function returns the active subwindow.</para>
            <para>The convenience function subWindowList() returns a list of all subwindows. This information could be used in a popup menu containing a list of windows, for example.</para>
            <para>The subwindows are sorted by the current WindowOrder. This is used for the subWindowList() and for activateNextSubWindow() and acivatePreviousSubWindow(). Also, it is used when cascading or tiling the windows with cascadeSubWindows() and tileSubWindows().</para>
            <para>QMdiArea provides two built-in layout strategies for subwindows: cascadeSubWindows() and tileSubWindows(). Both are slots and are easily connected to menu entries.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note: The default scroll bar property for QMdiArea is Qt::ScrollBarAlwaysOff.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMdiSubWindow.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty mdi area. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.ActivateNextSubWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives the keyboard focus to another window in the list of child windows. The window activated will be the next one determined by the current activation order.</para>
            <para>See also activatePreviousSubWindow() and QMdiArea::WindowOrder.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.ActivatePreviousSubWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives the keyboard focus to another window in the list of child windows. The window activated will be the previous one determined by the current activation order.</para>
            <para>See also activateNextSubWindow() and QMdiArea::WindowOrder.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.AddSubWindow(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds widget as a new subwindow to the MDI area. If windowFlags are non-zero, they will override the flags set on the widget.</para>
            <para>The widget can be either a QMdiSubWindow or another QWidget (in which case the MDI area will create a subwindow and set the widget as the internal widget).</para>
            <para>Note: Once the subwindow has been added, its parent will be the viewport widget of the QMdiArea.</para>
            <para>     QMdiArea mdiArea;</para>
            <para>     QMdiSubWindow *subWindow1 = new QMdiSubWindow;</para>
            <para>     subWindow1-&gt;setWidget(internalWidget1);</para>
            <para>     subWindow1-&gt;setAttribute(Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose);</para>
            <para>     mdiArea.addSubWindow(subWindow1);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMdiSubWindow *subWindow2 =</para>
            <para>         mdiArea.addSubWindow(internalWidget2);</para>
            <para>When you create your own subwindow, you must set the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose widget attribute if you want the window to be deleted when closed in the MDI area. If not, the window will be hidden and the MDI area will not activate the next subwindow.</para>
            <para>Returns the QMdiSubWindow that is added to the MDI area.</para>
            <para>See also removeSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.CascadeSubWindows">
            <summary>
            <para>Arranges all the child windows in a cascade pattern.</para>
            <para>See also tileSubWindows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.CloseActiveSubWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the active subwindow.</para>
            <para>See also closeAllSubWindows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.CloseAllSubWindows">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes all subwindows by sending a QCloseEvent to each window. You may receive subWindowActivated() signals from subwindows before they are closed (if the MDI area activates the subwindow when another is closing).</para>
            <para>Subwindows that ignore the close event will remain open.</para>
            <para>See also closeActiveSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.CurrentSubWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current subwindow, or 0 if there is no current subwindow.</para>
            <para>This function will return the same as activeSubWindow() if the QApplication containing QMdiArea is active.</para>
            <para>See also activeSubWindow() and QApplication::activeWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.RemoveSubWindow(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes widget from the MDI area. The widget must be either a QMdiSubWindow or a widget that is the internal widget of a subwindow. Note widget is never actually deleted by QMdiArea. If a QMdiSubWindow is passed in its parent is set to 0 and it is removed, but if an internal widget is passed in the child widget is set to 0 but the QMdiSubWindow is not removed.</para>
            <para>See also addSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.SetOption(QtGui.QMdiArea.AreaOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If on is true, option is enabled on the MDI area; otherwise it is disabled. See AreaOption for the effect of each option.</para>
            <para>See also AreaOption and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.SetupViewport(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called by QAbstractScrollArea after setViewport() has been called. Reimplement this function in a subclass of QMdiArea to initialize the new viewport before it is used.</para>
            <para>See also setViewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnSubWindowActivated(QtGui.QMdiSubWindow)">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiArea emits this signal after window has been activated. When window is 0, QMdiArea has just deactivated its last active window, and there are no active windows on the workspace.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::activeSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.SubWindowList(QtGui.QMdiArea.WindowOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all subwindows in the MDI area. If order is CreationOrder (the default), the windows are sorted in the order in which they were inserted into the workspace. If order is StackingOrder, the windows are listed in their stacking order, with the topmost window as the last item in the list. If order is ActivationHistoryOrder, the windows are listed according to their recent activation history.</para>
            <para>See also WindowOrder.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.TestOption(QtGui.QMdiArea.AreaOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if option is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also AreaOption and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.TileSubWindows">
            <summary>
            <para>Arranges all child windows in a tile pattern.</para>
            <para>See also cascadeSubWindows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.OnViewportEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiArea.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the MDI area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMdiArea.SubWindowActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiArea emits this signal after window has been activated. When window is 0, QMdiArea has just deactivated its last active window, and there are no active windows on the workspace.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::activeSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.ActiveSubWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current active subwindow. If no window is currently active, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Subwindows are treated as top-level windows with respect to window state, i.e., if a widget outside the MDI area is the active window, no subwindow will be active. Note that if a widget in the window in which the MDI area lives gains focus, the window will be activated.</para>
            <para>Activates the subwindow window. If window is 0, any current active window is deactivated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the background brush for the workspace.</para>
            <para>This property sets the background brush for the workspace area itself. By default, it is a gray color, but can be any brush (e.g., colors, gradients or pixmaps).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.ActivationOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the ordering criteria for subwindow lists.</para>
            <para>This property specifies the ordering criteria for the list of subwindows returned by subWindowList(). By default, it is the window creation order.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.viewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the way sub-windows are displayed in the QMdiArea.</para>
            <para>By default, the SubWindowView is used to display sub-windows.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.DocumentMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the tab bar is set to document mode in tabbed view mode.</para>
            <para>Document mode is disabled by default.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.TabsClosable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the tab bar should place close buttons on each tab in tabbed view mode.</para>
            <para>Tabs are not closable by default.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.TabsMovable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the user can move the tabs within the tabbar area in tabbed view mode.</para>
            <para>Tabs are not movable by default.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.TabShape">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the shape of the tabs in tabbed view mode.</para>
            <para>Possible values for this property are QTabWidget::Rounded (default) or QTabWidget::Triangular.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiArea.TabPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position of the tabs in tabbed view mode.</para>
            <para>Possible values for this property are described by the QTabWidget::TabPosition enum.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMdiArea.AreaOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes options that customize the behavior of the QMdiArea.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiArea.AreaOption.DontMaximizeSubWindowOnActivation">
            <summary>
            <para>When the active subwindow is maximized, the default behavior is to maximize the next subwindow that is activated. Set this option if you do not want this behavior.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMdiArea.ViewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the view mode of the area; i.e. how sub-windows will be displayed.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setViewMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiArea.ViewMode.SubWindowView">
            <summary>
            <para>Display sub-windows with window frames (default).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiArea.ViewMode.TabbedView">
            <summary>
            <para>Display sub-windows with tabs in a tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMdiArea.WindowOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the criteria to use for ordering the list of child windows returned by subWindowList(). The functions cascadeSubWindows() and tileSubWindows() follow this order when arranging the windows.</para>
            <para>See also subWindowList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiArea.WindowOrder.ActivationHistoryOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>The windows are returned in the order in which they were activated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiArea.WindowOrder.CreationOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>The windows are returned in the order of their creation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiArea.WindowOrder.StackingOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>The windows are returned in the order in which they are stacked, with the top-most window being last in the list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow">
            <summary>
            The QMdiSubWindow class provides a subwindow class for QMdiArea.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow represents a top-level window in a QMdiArea, and consists of a title bar with window decorations, an internal widget, and (depending on the current style) a window frame and a size grip. QMdiSubWindow has its own layout, which consists of the title bar and a center area for the internal widget.</para>
            <para>The most common way to construct a QMdiSubWindow is to call QMdiArea::addSubWindow() with the internal widget as the argument. You can also create a subwindow yourself, and set an internal widget by calling setWidget().</para>
            <para>You use the same API when programming with subwindows as with regular top-level windows (e.g., you can call functions such as show(), hide(), showMaximized(), and setWindowTitle()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subwindow Handling</para>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow also supports behavior specific to subwindows in an MDI area.</para>
            <para>By default, each QMdiSubWindow is visible inside the MDI area viewport when moved around, but it is also possible to specify transparent window movement and resizing behavior, where only the outline of a subwindow is updated during these operations. The setOption() function is used to enable this behavior.</para>
            <para>The isShaded() function detects whether the subwindow is currently shaded (i.e., the window is collapsed so that only the title bar is visible). To enter shaded mode, call showShaded(). QMdiSubWindow emits the windowStateChanged() signal whenever the window state has changed (e.g., when the window becomes minimized, or is restored). It also emits aboutToActivate() before it is activated.</para>
            <para>In keyboard-interactive mode, the windows are moved and resized with the keyboard. You can enter this mode through the system menu of the window. The keyboardSingleStep and keyboardPageStep properties control the distance the widget is moved or resized for each keypress event. When shift is pressed down page step is used; otherwise single step is used.</para>
            <para>You can also change the active window with the keyboard. By pressing the control and tab keys at the same time, the next (using the current WindowOrder) subwindow will be activated. By pressing control, shift, and tab, you will activate the previous window. This is equivalent to calling activateNextSubWindow() and activatePreviousSubWindow(). Note that these shortcuts overrides global shortcuts, but not the QMdiAreas shortcuts.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QMdiSubWindow widget. The parent and flags arguments are passed to QWidget's constructor.</para>
            <para>Instead of using addSubWindow(), it is also simply possible to use setParent() when you add the subwindow to a QMdiArea.</para>
            <para>Note that only QMdiSubWindows can be set as children of QMdiArea; you cannot, for instance, write:</para>
            <para> QMdiArea mdiArea;</para>
            <para> QTextEdit editor(&amp;mdiArea); // invalid child widget</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::addSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnAboutToActivate">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow emits this signal immediately before it is activated. After the subwindow has been activated, the QMdiArea that manages the subwindow will also emit the subWindowActivated() signal.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::subWindowActivated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.IsShaded">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this window is shaded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>A window is shaded if it is collapsed so that only the title bar is visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnLeaveEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.MdiArea">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the area containing this sub-window, or 0 if there is none.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::addSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnMoveEvent(QtGui.QMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::moveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SetOption(QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SubWindowOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If on is true, option is enabled on the subwindow; otherwise it is disabled. See SubWindowOption for the effect of each option.</para>
            <para>See also SubWindowOption and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.ShowShaded">
            <summary>
            <para>Calling this function makes the subwindow enter the shaded mode. When the subwindow is shaded, only the title bar is visible.</para>
            <para>Although shading is not supported by all styles, this function will still show the subwindow as shaded, regardless of whether support for shading is available. However, when used with styles without shading support, the user will be unable to return from shaded mode through the user interface (e.g., through a shade button in the title bar).</para>
            <para>See also isShaded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.ShowSystemMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the system menu below the system menu icon in the title bar.</para>
            <para>See also setSystemMenu() and systemMenu().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.TestOption(QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SubWindowOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if option is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also SubWindowOption and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.OnWindowStateChanged(QtCore.Qt.WindowState,QtCore.Qt.WindowState)">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow emits this signal after the window state changes. oldState is the window state before it changed, and newState is the new, current state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the subwindow.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::removeSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.WindowStateChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow emits this signal after the window state changes. oldState is the window state before it changed, and newState is the new, current state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.AboutToActivate">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow emits this signal immediately before it is activated. After the subwindow has been activated, the QMdiArea that manages the subwindow will also emit the subWindowActivated() signal.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::subWindowActivated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SystemMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current system menu, or zero if no system menu is set. QMdiSubWindow provides a default system menu, but you can also set the menu with setSystemMenu().</para>
            <para>Sets systemMenu as the current system menu for this subwindow.</para>
            <para>By default, each QMdiSubWindow has a standard system menu.</para>
            <para>QActions for the system menu created by QMdiSubWindow will automatically be updated depending on the current window state; e.g., the minimize action will be disabled after the window is minimized.</para>
            <para>QActions added by the user are not updated by QMdiSubWindow.</para>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow takes ownership of systemMenu; you do not have to delete it. Any existing menus will be deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current internal widget.</para>
            <para>Sets widget as the internal widget of this subwindow. The internal widget is displayed in the center of the subwindow beneath the title bar.</para>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow takes temporary ownership of widget; you do not have to delete it. Any existing internal widget will be removed and reparented to the root window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.KeyboardSingleStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds sets how far a widget should move or resize when using the keyboard arrow keys.</para>
            <para>When in keyboard-interactive mode, you can use the arrow and page keys to either move or resize the window. This property controls the arrow keys. The common way to enter keyboard interactive mode is to enter the subwindow menu, and select either &quot;resize&quot; or &quot;move&quot;.</para>
            <para>The default keyboard single step value is 5 pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.KeyboardPageStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds sets how far a widget should move or resize when using the keyboard page keys.</para>
            <para>When in keyboard-interactive mode, you can use the arrow and page keys to either move or resize the window. This property controls the page keys. The common way to enter keyboard interactive mode is to enter the subwindow menu, and select either &quot;resize&quot; or &quot;move&quot;.</para>
            <para>The default keyboard page step value is 20 pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SubWindowOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes options that customize the behavior of QMdiSubWindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SubWindowOption.RubberBandMove">
            <summary>
            <para>If you enable this option, a rubber band control is used to represent the subwindow's outline, and the user moves this instead of the subwindow itself. As a result, the subwindow remains in its original position until the move operation has completed, at which time a QMoveEvent is sent to the window. By default, this option is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMdiSubWindow.SubWindowOption.RubberBandResize">
            <summary>
            <para>If you enable this option, a rubber band control is used to represent the subwindow's outline, and the user resizes this instead of the subwindow itself. As a result, the subwindow maintains its original position and size until the resize operation has been completed, at which time it will receive a single QResizeEvent. By default, this option is disabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMenu">
            <summary>
            The QMenu class provides a menu widget for use in menu bars, context menus, and other popup menus.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context menu. Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar when the user clicks on the respective item or presses the specified shortcut key. Use QMenuBar::addMenu() to insert a menu into a menu bar. Context menus are usually invoked by some special keyboard key or by right-clicking. They can be executed either asynchronously with popup() or synchronously with exec(). Menus can also be invoked in response to button presses; these are just like context menus except for how they are invoked.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Fig. A menu shown in Plastique widget style, Windows XP widget style, and Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Actions</para>
            <para>A menu consists of a list of action items. Actions are added with the addAction(), addActions() and insertAction() functions. An action is represented vertically and rendered by QStyle. In addition, actions can have a text label, an optional icon drawn on the very left side, and shortcut key sequence such as &amp;quot;Ctrl+X&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para>The existing actions held by a menu can be found with actions().</para>
            <para>There are four kinds of action items: separators, actions that show a submenu, widgets, and actions that perform an action. Separators are inserted with addSeparator(), submenus with addMenu(), and all other items are considered action items.</para>
            <para>When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a slot. The receiver will be notifed whenever the item is triggered(). In addition, QMenu provides two signals, activated() and highlighted(), which signal the QAction that was triggered from the menu.</para>
            <para>You clear a menu with clear() and remove individual action items with removeAction().</para>
            <para>A QMenu can also provide a tear-off menu. A tear-off menu is a top-level window that contains a copy of the menu. This makes it possible for the user to &amp;quot;tear off&amp;quot; frequently used menus and position them in a convenient place on the screen. If you want this functionality for a particular menu, insert a tear-off handle with setTearOffEnabled(). When using tear-off menus, bear in mind that the concept isn't typically used on Microsoft Windows so some users may not be familiar with it. Consider using a QToolBar instead.</para>
            <para>Widgets can be inserted into menus with the QWidgetAction class. Instances of this class are used to hold widgets, and are inserted into menus with the addAction() overload that takes a QAction.</para>
            <para>Conversely, actions can be added to widgets with the addAction(), addActions() and insertAction() functions.</para>
            <para>Warning: To make QMenu visible on the screen, exec() or popup() should be used instead of show().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMenu on Qt for Windows CE</para>
            <para>If a menu is integrated into the native menubar on Windows Mobile we do not support the signals: aboutToHide (), aboutToShow () and hovered (). It is not possible to display an icon in a native menu on Windows Mobile.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMenu on Mac OS X with Qt build against Cocoa</para>
            <para>QMenu can be inserted only once in a menu/menubar. Subsequent insertions will have no effect or will result in a disabled menu item.</para>
            <para>See the Menus example for an example of how to use QMenuBar and QMenu in your application.</para>
            <para>Important inherited functions: addAction(), removeAction(), clear(), addSeparator(), and addMenu().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMenuBar, GUI Design Handbook: Menu, Drop-Down and Pop-Up, Application Example, Menus Example, and Recent Files Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a menu with parent parent.</para>
            <para>Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other QObject).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a menu with a title and a parent.</para>
            <para>Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other QObject).</para>
            <para>See also title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnAboutToHide">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just before the menu is hidden from the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also aboutToShow() and hide().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnAboutToShow">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just before the menu is shown to the user.</para>
            <para>See also aboutToHide() and show().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.ActionAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item at pt; returns 0 if there is no item there.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnActionEvent(QtGui.QActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.ActionGeometry(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the geometry of action act.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Appends the action action to the menu's list of actions.</para>
            <para>See also QMenuBar::addAction() and QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddAction(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new action with an icon and some text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddAction(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,QtCore.QObject,System.String,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new action with an icon and some text and an optional shortcut shortcut. The action's triggered() signal is connected to the member slot of the receiver object. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddAction(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddAction(System.String,QtCore.QObject,System.String,QtGui.QKeySequence)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new action with the text text and an optional shortcut shortcut. The action's triggered() signal is connected to the receiver's member slot. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddMenu(QtGui.QMenu)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function adds menu as a submenu to this menu. It returns menu's menuAction(). This menu does not take ownership of menu.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddMenu(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new QMenu with icon and title to the menu. The menu takes ownership of the menu. Returns the new menu.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddMenu(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new QMenu with title to the menu. The menu takes ownership of the menu. Returns the new menu.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.AddSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new separator action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true, and adds the new action to this menu's list of actions. It returns the newly created action.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all the menu's actions. Actions owned by the menu and not shown in any other widget are deleted.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>If a menu does not fit on the screen it lays itself out so that it does fit. It is style dependent what layout means (for example, on Windows it will use multiple columns).</para>
            <para>This functions returns the number of columns necessary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnEnterEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::enterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Exec">
            <summary>
            <para>Executes this menu synchronously.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to exec(pos()).</para>
            <para>This returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).</para>
            <para>In most situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for example, the current mouse position:</para>
            <para> exec(QCursor::pos());</para>
            <para>or aligned to a widget:</para>
            <para> exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)));</para>
            <para>or in reaction to a QMouseEvent *e:</para>
            <para> exec(e-&gt;globalPos());</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Exec(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Executes this menu synchronously.</para>
            <para>Pops up the menu so that the action action will be at the specified global position p. To translate a widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use QWidget::mapToGlobal().</para>
            <para>This returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).</para>
            <para>Note that all signals are emitted as usual. If you connect a QAction to a slot and call the menu's exec(), you get the result both via the signal-slot connection and in the return value of exec().</para>
            <para>Common usage is to position the menu at the current mouse position:</para>
            <para> exec(QCursor::pos());</para>
            <para>or aligned to a widget:</para>
            <para> exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(QPoint(0, 0)));</para>
            <para>or in reaction to a QMouseEvent *e:</para>
            <para> exec(e-&gt;globalPos());</para>
            <para>When positioning a menu with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that you cannot rely on the menu's current size(). For performance reasons, the menu adapts its size only when necessary. So in many cases, the size before and after the show is different. Instead, use sizeHint() which calculates the proper size depending on the menu's current contents.</para>
            <para>See also popup() and QWidget::mapToGlobal().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Exec(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QAction},QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Executes a menu synchronously.</para>
            <para>The menu's actions are specified by the list of actions. The menu will pop up so that the specified action, at, appears at global position pos. If at is not specified then the menu appears at position pos.</para>
            <para>The function returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to:</para>
            <para> QMenu menu;</para>
            <para> QAction *at = actions[0]; // Assumes actions is not empty</para>
            <para> foreach (QAction *a, actions)</para>
            <para>     menu.addAction(a);</para>
            <para> menu.exec(pos, at);</para>
            <para>See also popup() and QWidget::mapToGlobal().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Exec(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QAction},QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Executes a menu synchronously.</para>
            <para>The menu's actions are specified by the list of actions. The menu will pop up so that the specified action, at, appears at global position pos. If at is not specified then the menu appears at position pos. parent is the menu's parent widget; specifying the parent will provide context when pos alone is not enough to decide where the menu should go (e.g., with multiple desktops or when the parent is embedded in QGraphicsView).</para>
            <para>The function returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to:</para>
            <para> QMenu menu;</para>
            <para> QAction *at = actions[0]; // Assumes actions is not empty</para>
            <para> foreach (QAction *a, actions)</para>
            <para>     menu.addAction(a);</para>
            <para> menu.exec(pos, at);</para>
            <para>See also popup() and QWidget::mapToGlobal().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.HideTearOffMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>This function will forcibly hide the torn off menu making it disappear from the users desktop.</para>
            <para>See also isTearOffMenuVisible() and isTearOffEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnHovered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Often this is used to update status information.</para>
            <para>See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this menu and information from action. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionMenuItem, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QMenuBar::initStyleOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.InsertMenu(QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QMenu)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function inserts menu before action before and returns the menus menuAction().</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::insertAction() and addMenu().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.InsertSeparator(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new separator action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true. The function inserts the newly created action into this menu's list of actions before action before and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::insertAction() and addSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if there are no visible actions inserted into the menu, false otherwise.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::actions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.IsTearOffMenuVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>When a menu is torn off a second menu is shown to display the menu contents in a new window. When the menu is in this mode and the menu is visible returns true; otherwise false.</para>
            <para>See also hideTearOffMenu() and isTearOffEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnLeaveEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.MenuAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the action associated with this menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Popup(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays the menu so that the action atAction will be at the specified global position p. To translate a widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use QWidget::mapToGlobal().</para>
            <para>When positioning a menu with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that you cannot rely on the menu's current size(). For performance reasons, the menu adapts its size only when necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is different. Instead, use sizeHint() which calculates the proper size depending on the menu's current contents.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::mapToGlobal() and exec().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnTriggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in this menu is triggered.</para>
            <para>action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Normally, you connect each menu action's triggered() signal to its own custom slot, but sometimes you will want to connect several actions to a single slot, for example, when you have a group of closely related actions, such as &quot;left justify&quot;, &quot;center&quot;, &quot;right justify&quot;.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal is emitted for the main parent menu in a hierarchy. Hence, only the parent menu needs to be connected to a slot; sub-menus need not be connected.</para>
            <para>See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenu.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMenu.AboutToShow">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just before the menu is shown to the user.</para>
            <para>See also aboutToHide() and show().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMenu.AboutToHide">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just before the menu is hidden from the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also aboutToShow() and hide().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMenu.Triggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in this menu is triggered.</para>
            <para>action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Normally, you connect each menu action's triggered() signal to its own custom slot, but sometimes you will want to connect several actions to a single slot, for example, when you have a group of closely related actions, such as &quot;left justify&quot;, &quot;center&quot;, &quot;right justify&quot;.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal is emitted for the main parent menu in a hierarchy. Hence, only the parent menu needs to be connected to a slot; sub-menus need not be connected.</para>
            <para>See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMenu.Hovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Often this is used to update status information.</para>
            <para>See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenu.ActiveAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently highlighted action, or 0 if no action is currently highlighted.</para>
            <para>Sets the currently highlighted action to act.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenu.DefaultAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current default action.</para>
            <para>This sets the default action to act. The default action may have a visual cue, depending on the current QStyle. A default action usually indicates what will happen by default when a drop occurs.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenu.TearOffEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the menu supports being torn off.</para>
            <para>When true, the menu contains a special tear-off item (often shown as a dashed line at the top of the menu) that creates a copy of the menu when it is triggered.</para>
            <para>This &quot;torn-off&quot; copy lives in a separate window. It contains the same menu items as the original menu, with the exception of the tear-off handle.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenu.Title">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the title of the menu.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to the QAction::text property of the menuAction().</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenu.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the icon of the menu.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to the QAction::icon property of the menuAction().</para>
            <para>By default, if no icon is explicitly set, this property contains a null icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenu.SeparatorsCollapsible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether consecutive separators should be collapsed.</para>
            <para>This property specifies whether consecutive separators in the menu should be visually collapsed to a single one. Separators at the beginning or the end of the menu are also hidden.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMenuBar">
            <summary>
            The QMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add menu items with addMenu(). For example, asuming that menubar is a pointer to a QMenuBar and fileMenu is a pointer to a QMenu, the following statement inserts the menu into the menu bar:</para>
            <para> menubar-&amp;gt;addMenu(fileMenu);</para>
            <para>The ampersand in the menu item's text sets Alt+F as a shortcut for this menu. (You can use &amp;quot;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;&amp;quot; to get a real ampersand in the menu bar.)</para>
            <para>There is no need to lay out a menu bar. It automatically sets its own geometry to the top of the parent widget and changes it appropriately whenever the parent is resized.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Usage</para>
            <para>In most main window style applications you would use the menuBar() function provided in QMainWindow, adding QMenus to the menu bar and adding QActions to the pop-up menus.</para>
            <para>Example (from the Menus example):</para>
            <para>     fileMenu = menuBar()-&amp;gt;addMenu(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;File&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     fileMenu-&amp;gt;addAction(newAct);</para>
            <para>Menu items may be removed with removeAction().</para>
            <para>Widgets can be added to menus by using instances of the QWidgetAction class to hold them. These actions can then be inserted into menus in the usual way; see the QMenu documentation for more details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Platform Dependent Look and Feel</para>
            <para>Different platforms have different requirements for the appearance of menu bars and their behavior when the user interacts with them. For example, Windows systems are often configured so that the underlined character mnemonics that indicate keyboard shortcuts for items in the menu bar are only shown when the Alt key is pressed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> Plastique widget style.	The Plastique widget style, like most other styles, handles the Help menu in the same way as it handles any other menu.</para>
            <para> Motif widget style.	The Motif widget style treats Help menus in a special way, placing them at right-hand end of the menu bar.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMenuBar on Mac OS X</para>
            <para>QMenuBar on Mac OS X is a wrapper for using the system-wide menu bar. If you have multiple menu bars in one dialog the outermost menu bar (normally inside a widget with widget flag Qt::Window) will be used for the system-wide menu bar.</para>
            <para>Qt for Mac OS X also provides a menu bar merging feature to make QMenuBar conform more closely to accepted Mac OS X menu bar layout. The merging functionality is based on string matching the title of a QMenu entry. These strings are translated (using QObject::tr()) in the &amp;quot;QMenuBar&amp;quot; context. If an entry is moved its slots will still fire as if it was in the original place. The table below outlines the strings looked for and where the entry is placed if matched:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>String matchesPlacementNotes</para>
            <para>about.*	Application Menu | About &amp;lt;application name&amp;gt;	The application name is fetched from the Info.plist file (see note below). If this entry is not found no About item will appear in the Application Menu.</para>
            <para>config, options, setup, settings or preferences	Application Menu | Preferences	If this entry is not found the Settings item will be disabled</para>
            <para>quit or exit	Application Menu | Quit &amp;lt;application name&amp;gt;	If this entry is not found a default Quit item will be created to call QApplication::quit()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can override this behavior by using the QAction::menuRole() property.</para>
            <para>If you want all windows in a Mac application to share one menu bar, you must create a menu bar that does not have a parent. Create a parent-less menu bar this way:</para>
            <para> QMenuBar *menuBar = new QMenuBar(0);</para>
            <para>Note: Do not call QMainWindow::menuBar() to create the shared menu bar, because that menu bar will have the QMainWindow as its parent. That menu bar would only be displayed for the parent QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>Note: The text used for the application name in the menu bar is obtained from the value set in the Info.plist file in the application's bundle. See Deploying an Application on Mac OS X for more information.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMenuBar on Windows CE</para>
            <para>QMenuBar on Windows CE is a wrapper for using the system-wide menu bar, similar to the Mac. This feature is activated for Windows Mobile and integrates QMenuBar with the native soft keys. The left soft key can be controlled with QMenuBar::setDefaultAction() and the right soft key can be used to access the menu bar.</para>
            <para>The hovered() signal is not supported for the native menu integration. Also, it is not possible to display an icon in a native menu on Windows Mobile.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Examples</para>
            <para>The Menus example shows how to use QMenuBar and QMenu. The other main window application examples also provide menus using these classes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMenu, QShortcut, QAction, Introduction to Apple Human Interface Guidelines, GUI Design Handbook: Menu Bar, and Menus Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a menu bar with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.ActionAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QAction at pt. Returns 0 if there is no action at pt or if the location has a separator.</para>
            <para>See also addAction() and addSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnActionEvent(QtGui.QActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.ActionGeometry(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the geometry of action act as a QRect.</para>
            <para>See also actionAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Appends the action action to the menu bar's list of actions.</para>
            <para>See also QMenu::addAction(), QWidget::addAction(), and QWidget::actions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddAction(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QWidget::actions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddAction(System.String,QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new action with the given text. The action's triggered() signal is connected to the receiver's member slot. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QWidget::actions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddMenu(QtGui.QMenu)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends menu to the menu bar. Returns the menu's menuAction().</para>
            <para>Note: The returned QAction object can be used to hide the corresponding menu.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddMenu(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new QMenu with icon and title to the menu bar. The menu bar takes ownership of the menu. Returns the new menu.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddMenu(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new QMenu with title to the menu bar. The menu bar takes ownership of the menu. Returns the new menu.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.AddSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a separator to the menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all the actions from the menu bar.</para>
            <para>Note: On Mac OS X, menu items that have been merged to the system menu bar are not removed by this function. One way to handle this would be to remove the extra actions yourself. You can set the menu role on the different menus, so that you know ahead of time which menu items get merged and which do not. Then decide what to recreate or remove yourself.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.CornerWidget(QtCore.Qt.Corner)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget on the left of the first or on the right of the last menu item, depending on corner.</para>
            <para>Note: Using a corner other than Qt::TopRightCorner or Qt::TopLeftCorner will result in a warning.</para>
            <para>See also setCornerWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnHovered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the event to be sent.</para>
            <para>Often this is used to update status information.</para>
            <para>See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem,QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from the menu bar and information from action. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionMenuItem, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QMenu::initStyleOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.InsertMenu(QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QMenu)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function inserts menu before action before and returns the menus menuAction().</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::insertAction() and addMenu().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.InsertSeparator(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This convenience function creates a new separator action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true. The function inserts the newly created action into this menu bar's list of actions before action before and returns it.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::insertAction() and addSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnLeaveEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.SetCornerWidget(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.Corner)">
            <summary>
            <para>This sets the given widget to be shown directly on the left of the first menu item, or on the right of the last menu item, depending on corner.</para>
            <para>The menu bar takes ownership of widget, reparenting it into the menu bar. However, if the corner already contains a widget, this previous widget will no longer be managed and will still be a visible child of the menu bar.</para>
            <para>Note: Using a corner other than Qt::TopRightCorner or Qt::TopLeftCorner will result in a warning.</para>
            <para>See also cornerWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.OnTriggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in a menu belonging to this menubar is triggered as a result of a mouse click; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Note: QMenuBar has to have ownership of the QMenu in order this signal to work.</para>
            <para>Normally, you connect each menu action to a single slot using QAction::triggered(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.</para>
            <para>See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMenuBar.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the menu bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMenuBar.Triggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in a menu belonging to this menubar is triggered as a result of a mouse click; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Note: QMenuBar has to have ownership of the QMenu in order this signal to work.</para>
            <para>Normally, you connect each menu action to a single slot using QAction::triggered(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.</para>
            <para>See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMenuBar.Hovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the event to be sent.</para>
            <para>Often this is used to update status information.</para>
            <para>See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenuBar.ActiveAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QAction that is currently highlighted. A null pointer will be returned if no action is currently selected.</para>
            <para>Sets the currently highlighted action to act.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenuBar.DefaultUp">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the popup orientation.</para>
            <para>The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop &quot;down&quot; the screen. By setting the property to true, the menu will pop &quot;up&quot;. You might call this for menus that are below the document to which they refer.</para>
            <para>If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is used automatically.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMenuBar.NativeMenuBar">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not a menubar will be used as a native menubar on platforms that support it.</para>
            <para>This property specifies whether or not the menubar should be used as a native menubar on platforms that support it. The currently supported platforms are Mac OS X and Windows CE. On these platforms if this property is true, the menubar is used in the native menubar and is not in the window of its parent, if false the menubar remains in the window. On other platforms the value of this attribute has no effect.</para>
            <para>The default is to follow whether the Qt::AA_DontUseNativeMenuBar attribute is set for the application. Explicitly settings this property overrides the presence (or abscence) of the attribute.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMessageBox">
            <summary>
            The QMessageBox class provides a modal dialog for informing the user or for asking the user a question and receiving an answer.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A message box displays a primary text to alert the user to a situation, an informative text to further explain the alert or to ask the user a question, and an optional detailed text to provide even more data if the user requests it. A message box can also display an icon and standard buttons for accepting a user response.</para>
            <para>Two APIs for using QMessageBox are provided, the property-based API, and the static functions. Calling one of the static functions is the simpler approach, but it is less flexible than using the property-based API, and the result is less informative. Using the property-based API is recommended.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Property-based API</para>
            <para>To use the property-based API, construct an instance of QMessageBox, set the desired properties, and call exec() to show the message. The simplest configuration is to set only the message text property.</para>
            <para> QMessageBox msgBox;</para>
            <para> msgBox.setText(&amp;quot;The document has been modified.&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> msgBox.exec();</para>
            <para>The user must click the OK button to dismiss the message box. The rest of the GUI is blocked until the message box is dismissed.</para>
            <para>A better approach than just alerting the user to an event is to also ask the user what to do about it. Store the question in the informative text property, and set the standard buttons property to the set of buttons you want as the set of user responses. The buttons are specified by combining values from StandardButtons using the bitwise OR operator. The display order for the buttons is platform-dependent. For example, on Windows, Save is displayed to the left of Cancel, whereas on Mac OS, the order is reversed.</para>
            <para>Mark one of your standard buttons to be your default button.</para>
            <para> QMessageBox msgBox;</para>
            <para> msgBox.setText(&amp;quot;The document has been modified.&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> msgBox.setInformativeText(&amp;quot;Do you want to save your changes?&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> msgBox.setStandardButtons(QMessageBox::Save | QMessageBox::Discard | QMessageBox::Cancel);</para>
            <para> msgBox.setDefaultButton(QMessageBox::Save);</para>
            <para> int ret = msgBox.exec();</para>
            <para>This is the approach recommended in the Mac OS X Guidelines. Similar guidelines apply for the other platforms, but note the different ways the informative text is handled for different platforms.</para>
            <para>The exec() slot returns the StandardButtons value of the button that was clicked.</para>
            <para> switch (ret) {</para>
            <para>   case QMessageBox::Save:</para>
            <para>       // Save was clicked</para>
            <para>       break;</para>
            <para>   case QMessageBox::Discard:</para>
            <para>       // Don't Save was clicked</para>
            <para>       break;</para>
            <para>   case QMessageBox::Cancel:</para>
            <para>       // Cancel was clicked</para>
            <para>       break;</para>
            <para>   default:</para>
            <para>       // should never be reached</para>
            <para>       break;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>To give the user more information to help him answer the question, set the detailed text property. If the detailed text property is set, the Show Details... button will be shown.</para>
            <para>Clicking the Show Details... button displays the detailed text.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Rich Text and the Text Format Property</para>
            <para>The detailed text property is always interpreted as plain text. The main text and informative text properties can be either plain text or rich text. These strings are interpreted according to the setting of the text format property. The default setting is auto-text.</para>
            <para>Note that for some plain text strings containing XML meta-characters, the auto-text rich text detection test may fail causing your plain text string to be interpreted incorrectly as rich text. In these rare cases, use Qt::convertFromPlainText() to convert your plain text string to a visually equivalent rich text string, or set the text format property explicitly with setTextFormat().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Severity Levels and the Icon and Pixmap Properties</para>
            <para>QMessageBox supports four predefined message severity levels, or message types, which really only differ in the predefined icon they each show. Specify one of the four predefined message types by setting the icon property to one of the predefined icons. The following rules are guidelines:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	Question	For asking a question during normal operations.</para>
            <para>	Information	For reporting information about normal operations.</para>
            <para>	Warning	For reporting non-critical errors.</para>
            <para>	Critical	For reporting critical errors.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Predefined icons are not defined by QMessageBox, but provided by the style. The default value is No Icon. The message boxes are otherwise the same for all cases. When using a standard icon, use the one recommended in the table, or use the one recommended by the style guidelines for your platform. If none of the standard icons is right for your message box, you can use a custom icon by setting the icon pixmap property instead of setting the icon property.</para>
            <para>In summary, to set an icon, use either setIcon() for one of the standard icons, or setIconPixmap() for a custom icon.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Static Functions API</para>
            <para>Building message boxes with the static functions API, although convenient, is less flexible than using the property-based API, because the static function signatures lack parameters for setting the informative text and detailed text properties. One work-around for this has been to use the title parameter as the message box main text and the text parameter as the message box informative text. Because this has the obvious drawback of making a less readable message box, platform guidelines do not recommend it. The Microsoft Windows User Interface Guidelines recommend using the application name as the window's title, which means that if you have an informative text in addition to your main text, you must concatenate it to the text parameter.</para>
            <para>Note that the static function signatures have changed with respect to their button parameters, which are now used to set the standard buttons and the default button.</para>
            <para>Static functions are available for creating information(), question(), warning(), and critical() message boxes.</para>
            <para> int ret = QMessageBox::warning(this, tr(&amp;quot;My Application&amp;quot;),</para>
            <para>                                tr(&amp;quot;The document has been modified.\n&amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                                   &amp;quot;Do you want to save your changes?&amp;quot;),</para>
            <para>                                QMessageBox::Save | QMessageBox::Discard</para>
            <para>                                | QMessageBox::Cancel,</para>
            <para>                                QMessageBox::Save);</para>
            <para>The Standard Dialogs example shows how to use QMessageBox and the other built-in Qt dialogs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Advanced Usage</para>
            <para>If the standard buttons are not flexible enough for your message box, you can use the addButton() overload that takes a text and a ButtonRoleto to add custom buttons. The ButtonRole is used by QMessageBox to determine the ordering of the buttons on screen (which varies according to the platform). You can test the value of clickedButton() after calling exec(). For example,</para>
            <para> QMessageBox msgBox;</para>
            <para> QPushButton *connectButton = msgBox.addButton(tr(&amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot;), QMessageBox::ActionRole);</para>
            <para> QPushButton *abortButton = msgBox.addButton(QMessageBox::Abort);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> msgBox.exec();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> if (msgBox.clickedButton() == connectButton) {</para>
            <para>     // connect</para>
            <para> } else if (msgBox.clickedButton() == abortButton) {</para>
            <para>     // abort</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Default and Escape Keys</para>
            <para>The default button (i.e., the button activated when Enter is pressed) can be specified using setDefaultButton(). If a default button is not specified, QMessageBox tries to find one based on the button roles of the buttons used in the message box.</para>
            <para>The escape button (the button activated when Esc is pressed) can be specified using setEscapeButton(). If an escape button is not specified, QMessageBox tries to find one using these rules:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If there is only one button, it is the button activated when Esc is pressed.</para>
            <para>If there is a Cancel button, it is the button activated when Esc is pressed.</para>
            <para>If there is exactly one button having either the Reject role or the the No role, it is the button activated when Esc is pressed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>When an escape button can't be determined using these rules, pressing Esc has no effect.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDialogButtonBox, GUI Design Handbook: Message Box, Standard Dialogs Example, and Application Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.#ctor(QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.#ctor(System.String,System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.About(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays a simple about box with title title and text text. The about box's parent is parent.</para>
            <para>about() looks for a suitable icon in four locations:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>It prefers parent-&gt;icon() if that exists.</para>
            <para>If not, it tries the top-level widget containing parent.</para>
            <para>If that fails, it tries the active window.</para>
            <para>As a last resort it uses the Information icon.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The about box has a single button labelled &quot;OK&quot;. On Mac OS X, the about box is popped up as a modeless window; on other platforms, it is currently application modal.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::windowIcon() and QApplication::activeWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.AboutQt(QtGui.QWidget,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays a simple message box about Qt, with the given title and centered over parent (if parent is not 0). The message includes the version number of Qt being used by the application.</para>
            <para>This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application, as shown in the Menus example.</para>
            <para>QApplication provides this functionality as a slot.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, the about box is popped up as a modeless window; on other platforms, it is currently application modal.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::aboutQt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.AddButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton,QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given button to the message box with the specified role.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also removeButton(), button(), and setStandardButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.AddButton(QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Adds a standard button to the message box if it is valid to do so, and returns the push button.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setStandardButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.AddButton(System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a button with the given text, adds it to the message box for the specified role, and returns it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Button(QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer corresponding to the standard button which, or 0 if the standard button doesn't exist in this message box.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also standardButtons and standardButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnButtonClicked(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a button is clicked inside the QMessageBox. The button that was clicked in returned in button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.buttonRole(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button role for the specified button. This function returns InvalidRole if button is 0 or has not been added to the message box.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also buttons() and addButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonText(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the message box button button, or an empty string if the message box does not contain the button.</para>
            <para>Use button() and QPushButton::text() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setButtonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all the buttons that have been added to the message box.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also buttonRole(), addButton(), and removeButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.ClickedButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button that was clicked by the user, or 0 if the user hit the Esc key and no escape button was set.</para>
            <para>If exec() hasn't been called yet, returns 0.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QMessageBox messageBox(this);</para>
            <para> QAbstractButton *disconnectButton =</para>
            <para>       messageBox.addButton(tr(&quot;Disconnect&quot;), QMessageBox::ActionRole);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> messageBox.exec();</para>
            <para> if (messageBox.clickedButton() == disconnectButton) {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also standardButton() and button().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Critical(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), warning(), and information().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Critical(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), warning(), and information().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Critical(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), warning(), and information().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Information(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), warning(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Information(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), warning(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Information(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), warning(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its finished() or buttonClicked() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member. If the slot in member has a pointer for its first parameter the connection is to buttonClicked(), otherwise the connection is to finished().</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its finished() or buttonClicked() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member. If the slot in member has a pointer for its first parameter the connection is to buttonClicked(), otherwise the connection is to finished().</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Question(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also information(), warning(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Question(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also information(), warning(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Question(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also information(), warning(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.RemoveButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes button from the button box without deleting it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addButton() and setStandardButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.SetButtonText(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text of the message box button button to text. Setting the text of a button that is not in the message box is silently ignored.</para>
            <para>Use addButton() instead.</para>
            <para>See also buttonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.SetDefaultButton(QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the message box's default button to button.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also addButton() and QPushButton::setDefault().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.SetEscapeButton(QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the buttons that gets activated when the Escape key is pressed to button.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also addButton() and clickedButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.SetWindowModality(QtCore.Qt.WindowModality)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function shadows QWidget::setWindowModality().</para>
            <para>Sets the modality of the message box to windowModality.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, if the modality is set to Qt::WindowModal and the message box has a parent, then the message box will be a Qt::Sheet, otherwise the message box will be a standard dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.SetWindowTitle(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function shadows QWidget::setWindowTitle().</para>
            <para>Sets the title of the message box to title. On Mac OS X, the window title is ignored (as required by the Mac OS X Guidelines).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.standardButton(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the standard button enum value corresponding to the given button, or NoButton if the given button isn't a standard button.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also button() and standardButtons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardIcon(QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap used for a standard icon. This allows the pixmaps to be used in more complex message boxes. icon specifies the required icon, e.g. QMessageBox::Question, QMessageBox::Information, QMessageBox::Warning or QMessageBox::Critical.</para>
            <para>Call QStyle::standardIcon() with QStyle::SP_MessageBoxInformation etc. instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Warning(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton,QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), information(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Warning(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), information(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Warning(QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.</para>
            <para>The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.</para>
            <para>Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.</para>
            <para>The message box is an application modal dialog box.</para>
            <para>Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also question(), information(), and critical().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMessageBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the message box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a button is clicked inside the QMessageBox. The button that was clicked in returned in button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.DefaultButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button that should be the message box's default button. Returns 0 if no default button was set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the message box's default button to button.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.EscapeButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button that is activated when escape is pressed.</para>
            <para>By default, QMessageBox attempts to automatically detect an escape button as follows:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If there is only one button, it is made the escape button.</para>
            <para>If there is a Cancel button, it is made the escape button.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X only, if there is exactly one button with the role QMessageBox::RejectRole, it is made the escape button.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>When an escape button could not be automatically detected, pressing Esc has no effect.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the button that gets activated when the Escape key is pressed to button.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the message box text to be displayed.</para>
            <para>The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as rich text, depending on the text format setting (QMessageBox::textFormat). The default setting is Qt::AutoText, i.e., the message box will try to auto-detect the format of the text.</para>
            <para>The default value of this property is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the message box's icon.</para>
            <para>The icon of the message box can be specified with one of the values:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMessageBox::NoIcon</para>
            <para>QMessageBox::Question</para>
            <para>QMessageBox::Information</para>
            <para>QMessageBox::Warning</para>
            <para>QMessageBox::Critical</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The default is QMessageBox::NoIcon.</para>
            <para>The pixmap used to display the actual icon depends on the current GUI style. You can also set a custom pixmap for the icon by setting the icon pixmap property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.IconPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current icon.</para>
            <para>The icon currently used by the message box. Note that it's often hard to draw one pixmap that looks appropriate in all GUI styles; you may want to supply a different pixmap for each platform.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.TextFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the format of the text displayed by the message box.</para>
            <para>The current text format used by the message box. See the Qt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible options.</para>
            <para>The default format is Qt::AutoText.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds collection of standard buttons in the message box.</para>
            <para>This property controls which standard buttons are used by the message box.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains no standard buttons.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.DetailedText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text to be displayed in the details area.</para>
            <para>The text will be interpreted as a plain text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMessageBox.InformativeText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the informative text that provides a fuller description for the message.</para>
            <para>Infromative text can be used to expand upon the text() to give more information to the user. On the Mac, this text appears in small system font below the text(). On other platforms, it is simply appended to the existing text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the roles that can be used to describe buttons in the button box. Combinations of these roles are as flags used to describe different aspects of their behavior.</para>
            <para>See also StandardButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.AcceptRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes the dialog to be accepted (e.g. OK).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.ActionRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes changes to the elements within the dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.ApplyRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button applies current changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.DestructiveRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes a destructive change (e.g. for Discarding Changes) and closes the dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.HelpRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button can be clicked to request help.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.InvalidRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.NoRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button is a &quot;No&quot;-like button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.RejectRole">
            <summary>
            <para>Clicking the button causes the dialog to be rejected (e.g. Cancel).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.ResetRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button resets the dialog's fields to default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.ButtonRole.YesRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The button is a &quot;Yes&quot;-like button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum has the following values:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon.Critical">
            <summary>
            <para>An icon indicating that the message represents a critical problem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon.Information">
            <summary>
            <para>An icon indicating that the message is nothing out of the ordinary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon.NoIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>The message box does not have any icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon.Question">
            <summary>
            <para>An icon indicating that the message is asking a question.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.Icon.Warning">
            <summary>
            <para>An icon indicating that the message is a warning, but can be dealt with.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton">
            <summary>
            <para>These enums describe flags for standard buttons. Each button has a defined ButtonRole.</para>
            <para>The following values are obsolete:</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also ButtonRole and standardButtons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Abort">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;Abort&quot; button defined with the RejectRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Apply">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;Apply&quot; button defined with the ApplyRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Cancel">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Cancel&quot; button defined with the RejectRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Close">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Close&quot; button defined with the RejectRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Default">
            <summary>
            <para>Use the defaultButton argument of information(), warning(), etc. instead, or call setDefaultButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Discard">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Discard&quot; or &quot;Don't Save&quot; button, depending on the platform, defined with the DestructiveRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Escape">
            <summary>
            <para>Call setEscapeButton() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Help">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Help&quot; button defined with the HelpRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Ignore">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;Ignore&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.No">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;No&quot; button defined with the NoRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.NoAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Use NoToAll instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.NoButton">
            <summary>
            <para>An invalid button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.NoToAll">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;No to All&quot; button defined with the NoRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Ok">
            <summary>
            <para>An &quot;OK&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Open&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Reset&quot; button defined with the ResetRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.RestoreDefaults">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Restore Defaults&quot; button defined with the ResetRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Retry">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Retry&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Save">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Save&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.SaveAll">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Save All&quot; button defined with the AcceptRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.Yes">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Yes&quot; button defined with the YesRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.YesAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Use YesToAll instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMessageBox.StandardButton.YesToAll">
            <summary>
            <para>A &quot;Yes to All&quot; button defined with the YesRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMimeSource">
            <summary>
            The QMimeSource class is an abstraction of objects that provided formatted data of a certain MIME type.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The preferred approach to drag and drop is to use QDrag in conjunction with QMimeData. See Drag and Drop for details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMimeData and QDrag.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMimeSource.EncodedData(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the encoded data of this object in the specified MIME format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMimeSource.Format(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the (i - 1)-th supported MIME format, or 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMimeSource.Provides(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the object can provide the data in format mimeType; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If you inherit from QMimeSource, for consistency reasons it is better to implement the more abstract canDecode() functions such as QTextDrag::canDecode() and QImageDrag::canDecode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMimeSource.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the MIME source.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMouseEvent">
            <summary>
            The QMouseEvent class contains parameters that describe a mouse event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Mouse events occur when a mouse button is pressed or released inside a widget, or when the mouse cursor is moved.</para>
            <para>Mouse move events will occur only when a mouse button is pressed down, unless mouse tracking has been enabled with QWidget::setMouseTracking().</para>
            <para>Qt automatically grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed inside a widget; the widget will continue to receive mouse events until the last mouse button is released.</para>
            <para>A mouse event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. You should call ignore() if the mouse event is not handled by your widget. A mouse event is propagated up the parent widget chain until a widget accepts it with accept(), or an event filter consumes it.</para>
            <para>Note: If a mouse event is propagated to a widget for which Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation has been set, that mouse event will not be propagated further up the parent widget chain.</para>
            <para>The state of the keyboard modifier keys can be found by calling the modifiers() function, inherited from QInputEvent.</para>
            <para>The functions pos(), x(), and y() give the cursor position relative to the widget that receives the mouse event. If you move the widget as a result of the mouse event, use the global position returned by globalPos() to avoid a shaking motion.</para>
            <para>The QWidget::setEnabled() function can be used to enable or disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget.</para>
            <para>Reimplement the QWidget event handlers, QWidget::mousePressEvent(), QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent(), QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and QWidget::mouseMoveEvent() to receive mouse events in your own widgets.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setMouseTracking(), QWidget::grabMouse(), and QCursor::pos().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a mouse event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be one of QEvent::MouseButtonPress, QEvent::MouseButtonRelease, QEvent::MouseButtonDblClick, or QEvent::MouseMove.</para>
            <para>The position is the mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget. The button that caused the event is given as a value from the Qt::MouseButton enum. If the event type is MouseMove, the appropriate button for this event is Qt::NoButton. The mouse and keyboard states at the time of the event are specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            <para>The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos(), which may not be appropriate. Use the other constructor to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a mouse event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be one of QEvent::MouseButtonPress, QEvent::MouseButtonRelease, QEvent::MouseButtonDblClick, or QEvent::MouseMove.</para>
            <para>The position is the mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget. The button that caused the event is given as a value from the Qt::MouseButton enum. If the event type is MouseMove, the appropriate button for this event is Qt::NoButton. The mouse and keyboard states at the time of the event are specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            <para>The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos(), which may not be appropriate. Use the other constructor to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a mouse event object.</para>
            <para>The type parameter must be one of QEvent::MouseButtonPress, QEvent::MouseButtonRelease, QEvent::MouseButtonDblClick, or QEvent::MouseMove.</para>
            <para>The position is the mouse cursor's position relative to the receiving widget. The button that caused the event is given as a value from the Qt::MouseButton enum. If the event type is MouseMove, the appropriate button for this event is Qt::NoButton. The mouse and keyboard states at the time of the event are specified by buttons and modifiers.</para>
            <para>The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos(), which may not be appropriate. Use the other constructor to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.Button">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button that caused the event.</para>
            <para>Note that the returned value is always Qt::NoButton for mouse move events.</para>
            <para>See also buttons() and Qt::MouseButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button state when the event was generated. The button state is a combination of Qt::LeftButton, Qt::RightButton, Qt::MidButton using the OR operator. For mouse move events, this is all buttons that are pressed down. For mouse press and double click events this includes the button that caused the event. For mouse release events this excludes the button that caused the event.</para>
            <para>See also button() and Qt::MouseButton.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.GlobalPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global position of the mouse cursor at the time of the event. This is important on asynchronous window systems like X11. Whenever you move your widgets around in response to mouse events, globalPos() may differ a lot from the current pointer position QCursor::pos(), and from QWidget::mapToGlobal(pos()).</para>
            <para>See also globalX() and globalY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.GlobalX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global x position of the mouse cursor at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalY() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.GlobalY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global y position of the mouse cursor at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalX() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>If you move the widget as a result of the mouse event, use the global position returned by globalPos() to avoid a shaking motion.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.PosF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor as a QPointF, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>If you move the widget as a result of the mouse event, use the global position returned by globalPos() to avoid a shaking motion.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), pos(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also y() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEvent.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also x() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition">
            <summary>
            The QMouseEventTransition class provides a transition for mouse events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QMouseEventTransition is part of The State Machine Framework.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QState::addTransition().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.#ctor(QtCore.QState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new mouse event transition with the given sourceState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.#ctor(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.QState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new mouse event transition for events of the given type for the given object, with the given button and sourceState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.EventTest(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::eventTest().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.OnTransition(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::onTransition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this mouse event transition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.HitTestPath">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hit test path for this mouse event transition.</para>
            <para>Sets the hit test path for this mouse event transition to path. If a valid path has been set, the transition will only trigger if the mouse event position (QMouseEvent::pos()) is inside the path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.Button">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the button that this mouse event transition is associated with.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMouseEventTransition.ModifierMask">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the keyboard modifier mask that this mouse event transition checks for.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMoveEvent">
            <summary>
            The QMoveEvent class contains event parameters for move events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Move events are sent to widgets that have been moved to a new position relative to their parent.</para>
            <para>The event handler QWidget::moveEvent() receives move events.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget::move() and QWidget::setGeometry().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMoveEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a move event with the new and old widget positions, pos and oldPos respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMoveEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a move event with the new and old widget positions, pos and oldPos respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMoveEvent.OldPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the old position of the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMoveEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the new position of the widget. This excludes the window frame for top level widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMovie">
            <summary>
            The QMovie class is a convenience class for playing movies with QImageReader.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is used to show simple animations without sound. If you want to display video and media content, use the Phonon multimedia framework instead.</para>
            <para>First, create a QMovie object by passing either the name of a file or a pointer to a QIODevice containing an animated image format to QMovie's constructor. You can call isValid() to check if the image data is valid, before starting the movie. To start the movie, call start(). QMovie will enter Running state, and emit started() and stateChanged(). To get the current state of the movie, call state().</para>
            <para>To display the movie in your application, you can pass your QMovie object to QLabel::setMovie(). Example:</para>
            <para> QLabel label;</para>
            <para> QMovie *movie = new QMovie(&amp;quot;animations/fire.gif&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> label.setMovie(movie);</para>
            <para> movie-&amp;gt;start();</para>
            <para>Whenever a new frame is available in the movie, QMovie will emit updated(). If the size of the frame changes, resized() is emitted. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the current frame. When the movie is done, QMovie emits finished(). If any error occurs during playback (i.e, the image file is corrupt), QMovie will emit error().</para>
            <para>You can control the speed of the movie playback by calling setSpeed(), which takes the percentage of the original speed as an argument. Pause the movie by calling setPaused(true). QMovie will then enter Paused state and emit stateChanged(). If you call setPaused(false), QMovie will reenter Running state and start the movie again. To stop the movie, call stop().</para>
            <para>Certain animation formats allow you to set the background color. You can call setBackgroundColor() to set the color, or backgroundColor() to retrieve the current background color.</para>
            <para>currentFrameNumber() returns the sequence number of the current frame. The first frame in the animation has the sequence number 0. frameCount() returns the total number of frames in the animation, if the image format supports this. You can call loopCount() to get the number of times the movie should loop before finishing. nextFrameDelay() returns the number of milliseconds the current frame should be displayed.</para>
            <para>QMovie can be instructed to cache frames of an animation by calling setCacheMode().</para>
            <para>Call supportedFormats() for a list of formats that QMovie supports.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLabel, QImageReader, and Movie Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QMovie object, passing the parent object to QObject's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setFileName(), setDevice(), and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QMovie object, passing the parent object to QObject's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setFileName(), setDevice(), and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice,QtCore.QByteArray,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QMovie object, passing the parent object to QObject's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setFileName(), setDevice(), and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QMovie object, passing the parent object to QObject's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setFileName(), setDevice(), and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QByteArray,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QMovie object, passing the parent object to QObject's constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setFileName(), setDevice(), and setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.CurrentFrameNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the sequence number of the current frame. The number of the first frame in the movie is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.CurrentImage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current frame as a QImage.</para>
            <para>See also currentPixmap() and updated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.CurrentPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current frame as a QPixmap.</para>
            <para>See also currentImage() and updated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnError(QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QMovie when the error error occurred during playback. QMovie will stop the movie, and enter QMovie::NotRunning state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the movie has finished.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::stop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnFrameChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the frame number has changed to frameNumber. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the frame.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.FrameCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of frames in the movie.</para>
            <para>Certain animation formats do not support this feature, in which case 0 is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.FrameRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rect of the last frame. If no frame has yet been updated, an invalid QRect is returned.</para>
            <para>See also currentImage() and currentPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the movie is valid (e.g., the image data is readable and the image format is supported); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.JumpToFrame(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Jumps to frame number frameNumber. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.JumpToNextFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Jumps to the next frame. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.LoopCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of times the movie will loop before it finishes. If the movie will only play once (no looping), loopCount returns 0. If the movie loops forever, loopCount returns -1.</para>
            <para>Note that, if the image data comes from a sequential device (e.g. a socket), QMovie can only loop the movie if the cacheMode is set to QMovie::CacheAll.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.NextFrameDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of milliseconds QMovie will wait before updating the next frame in the animation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnResized(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current frame has been resized to size. This effect is sometimes used in animations as an alternative to replacing the frame. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the updated frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.SetPaused(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If paused is true, QMovie will enter Paused state and emit stateChanged(Paused); otherwise it will enter Running state and emit stateChanged(Running).</para>
            <para>See also paused() and state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.Start">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts the movie. QMovie will enter Running state, and start emitting updated() and resized() as the movie progresses.</para>
            <para>If QMovie is in the Paused state, this function is equivalent to calling setPaused(false). If QMovie is already in the Running state, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also stop() and setPaused().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnStarted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted after QMovie::start() has been called, and QMovie has entered QMovie::Running state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.State">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current state of QMovie.</para>
            <para>See also MovieState and stateChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnStateChanged(QtGui.QMovie.MovieState)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted every time the state of the movie changes. The new state is specified by state.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.Stop">
            <summary>
            <para>Stops the movie. QMovie enters NotRunning state, and stops emitting updated() and resized(). If start() is called again, the movie will restart from the beginning.</para>
            <para>If QMovie is already in the NotRunning state, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also start() and setPaused().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.SupportedFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of image formats supported by QMovie.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QImageReader::supportedImageFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.OnUpdated(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rect rect in the current frame has been updated. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the updated frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QMovie.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the QMovie object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.Started">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted after QMovie::start() has been called, and QMovie has entered QMovie::Running state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.Resized">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current frame has been resized to size. This effect is sometimes used in animations as an alternative to replacing the frame. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the updated frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.Updated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rect rect in the current frame has been updated. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the updated frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.StateChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted every time the state of the movie changes. The new state is specified by state.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.Error">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QMovie when the error error occurred during playback. QMovie will stop the movie, and enter QMovie::NotRunning state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.Finished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the movie has finished.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::stop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QMovie.FrameChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the frame number has changed to frameNumber. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the frame.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.BackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the background color of the movie. If no background color has been assigned, an invalid QColor is returned.</para>
            <para>For image formats that support it, this function sets the background color to color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the device QMovie reads image data from. If no device has currently been assigned, 0 is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the current device to device. QMovie will read image data from this device when the movie is running.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.FileName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the file that QMovie reads image data from. If no file name has been assigned, or if the assigned device is not a file, an empty QString is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the file that QMovie reads image data from, to fileName.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format that QMovie uses when decoding image data. If no format has been assigned, an empty QByteArray() is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the format that QMovie will use when decoding image data, to format. By default, QMovie will attempt to guess the format of the image data.</para>
            <para>You can call supportedFormats() for the full list of formats QMovie supports.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.ScaledSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scaled size of frames.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the scaled frame size to size.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.Speed">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the movie's speed.</para>
            <para>The speed is measured in percentage of the original movie speed. The default speed is 100%. Example:</para>
            <para> QMovie movie(&quot;racecar.gif&quot;);</para>
            <para> movie.setSpeed(200); // 2x speed</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QMovie.cacheMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the movie's cache mode.</para>
            <para>Caching frames can be useful when the underlying animation format handler that QMovie relies on to decode the animation data does not support jumping to particular frames in the animation, or even &quot;rewinding&quot; the animation to the beginning (for looping). Furthermore, if the image data comes from a sequential device, it is not possible for the underlying animation handler to seek back to frames whose data has already been read (making looping altogether impossible).</para>
            <para>To aid in such situations, a QMovie object can be instructed to cache the frames, at the added memory cost of keeping the frames in memory for the lifetime of the object.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to CacheNone.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMovie.CacheMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different cache modes of QMovie.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMovie.CacheMode.CacheAll">
            <summary>
            <para>All frames are cached.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMovie.CacheMode.CacheNone">
            <summary>
            <para>No frames are cached (the default).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QMovie.MovieState">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different states of QMovie.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMovie.MovieState.NotRunning">
            <summary>
            <para>The movie is not running. This is QMovie's initial state, and the state it enters after stop() has been called or the movie is finished.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMovie.MovieState.Paused">
            <summary>
            <para>The movie is paused, and QMovie stops emitting updated() or resized(). This state is entered after calling pause() or setPaused(true). The current frame number it kept, and the movie will continue with the next frame when unpause() or setPaused(false) is called.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QMovie.MovieState.Running">
            <summary>
            <para>The movie is running.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog">
            <summary>
            The QPageSetupDialog class provides a configuration dialog for the page-related options on a printer.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>On Windows and Mac OS X the page setup dialog is implemented using the native page setup dialogs.</para>
            <para>Note that on Windows and Mac OS X custom paper sizes won't be reflected in the native page setup dialogs. Additionally, custom page margins set on a QPrinter won't show in the native Mac OS X page setup dialog.</para>
            <para>In Symbian, there is no support for printing. Hence, this dialog should not be used in Symbian.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPrinter and QPrintDialog.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a page setup dialog that configures a default-constructed QPrinter with parent as the parent widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also printer().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a page setup dialog that configures printer with parent as the parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.AddEnabledOption(QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.PageSetupDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use setOption(option, true) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.IsOptionEnabled(QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.PageSetupDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use testOption(option) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its accepted() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its accepted() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.SetOption(QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.PageSetupDialogOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>See also options and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.TestOption(QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.PageSetupDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also options and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.EnabledOptions">
            <summary>
            <para>Use options() instead.</para>
            <para>Use setOptions(options) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.Options">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the various options that affect the look and feel of the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, all options are disabled.</para>
            <para>Options should be set before showing the dialog. Setting them while the dialog is visible is not guaranteed to have an immediate effect on the dialog (depending on the option and on the platform).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.PageSetupDialogOption">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to specify options to the page setup dialog</para>
            <para>This value is obsolete and does nothing since Qt 4.5:</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPageSetupDialog.PageSetupDialogOption.DontUseSheet">
            <summary>
            <para>In previous versions of QDialog::exec() the page setup dialog would create a sheet by default if the dialog was given a parent. This is no longer supported from Qt 4.5. If you want to use sheets, use QPageSetupDialog::open() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintEngine">
            <summary>
            The QPaintEngine class provides an abstract definition of how QPainter draws to a given device on a given platform.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt 4.0 provides several premade implementations of QPaintEngine for the different painter backends we support. We provide one paint engine for each window system and painting framework we support. This includes X11 on Unix/Linux and CoreGraphics on Mac OS X. In addition we provide QPaintEngine implementations for OpenGL (accessible through QGLWidget) and PostScript (accessible through QPSPrinter on X11). Additionally there is a raster-based paint engine that is a fallback for when an engine does not support a certain capability.</para>
            <para>If one wants to use QPainter to draw to a different backend, one must subclass QPaintEngine and reimplement all its virtual functions. The QPaintEngine implementation is then made available by subclassing QPaintDevice and reimplementing the virtual function QPaintDevice::paintEngine().</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine is created and owned by the QPaintDevice that created it.</para>
            <para>The big advantage of the QPaintEngine approach opposed to Qt 3's QPainter/QPaintDevice::cmd() approach is that it is now possible to adapt to multiple technologies on each platform and take advantage of each to the fullest.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter, QPaintDevice::paintEngine(), and Paint System.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.#ctor(QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a paint engine with the featureset specified by caps.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Begin(QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to initialise your paint engine when painting is to start on the paint device pdev. Return true if the initialization was successful; otherwise return false.</para>
            <para>See also end() and isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawEllipse(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to draw the largest ellipse that can be contained within rectangle rect.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls drawPolygon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawEllipse(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>The default implementation of this function calls the floating point version of this function</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawImage(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QImage,QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to draw the part of the image specified by the sr rectangle in the given rectangle using the given conversion flags flags, to convert it to a pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawLines(QtCore.QLine,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The default implementation converts the first lineCount lines in lines to a QLineF and calls the floating point version of this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawLines(QtCore.QLineF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>The default implementation splits the list of lines in lines into lineCount separate calls to drawPath() or drawPolygon() depending on the feature set of the paint engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawPath(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>The default implementation ignores the path and does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to draw the part of the pm specified by the sr rectangle in the given r.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawPoints(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the first pointCount points in the buffer points</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawPoints(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the first pointCount points in the buffer points</para>
            <para>The default implementation converts the first pointCount QPoints in points to QPointFs and calls the floating point version of drawPoints.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawPolygon(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32,QtGui.QPaintEngine.PolygonDrawMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this virtual function to draw the polygon defined by the pointCount first points in points, using mode mode.</para>
            <para>Note: At least one of the drawPolygon() functions must be reimplemented.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawPolygon(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32,QtGui.QPaintEngine.PolygonDrawMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this virtual function to draw the polygon defined by the pointCount first points in points, using mode mode.</para>
            <para>Note: At least one of the drawPolygon() functions must be reimplemented.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawRects(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The default implementation converts the first rectCount rectangles in the buffer rects to a QRectF and calls the floating point version of this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawRects(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the first rectCount rectangles in the buffer rects. The default implementation of this function calls drawPath() or drawPolygon() depending on the feature set of the paint engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawTextItem(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QTextItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function draws the text item textItem at position p. The default implementation of this function converts the text to a QPainterPath and paints the resulting path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DrawTiledPixmap(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to draw the pixmap in the given rect, starting at the given p. The pixmap will be drawn repeatedly until the rect is filled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.End">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to finish painting on the current paint device. Return true if painting was finished successfully; otherwise return false.</para>
            <para>See also begin() and isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.HasFeature(QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the paint engine supports the specified feature; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.IsActive">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the paint engine is actively drawing; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Painter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paint engine's painter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.SetActive(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the active state of the paint engine to state.</para>
            <para>See also isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.type">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to return the paint engine Type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.UpdateState(QtGui.QPaintEngineState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplement this function to update the state of a paint engine.</para>
            <para>When implemented, this function is responsible for checking the paint engine's current state and update the properties that are changed. Use the QPaintEngineState::state() function to find out which properties that must be updated, then use the corresponding get function to retrieve the current values for the given properties.</para>
            <para>See also QPaintEngineState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the paint engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintDevice">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the device that this engine is painting on, if painting is active; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>These types are used by QPainter to trigger lazy updates of the various states in the QPaintEngine using QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            <para>A paint engine must update every dirty state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.AllDirty">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience enum used internally.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyBackground">
            <summary>
            <para>The background is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyBackgroundMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The background mode is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>The brush is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyBrushOrigin">
            <summary>
            <para>The brush origin is dirty and needs to updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyClipEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Whether clipping is enabled or not is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyClipPath">
            <summary>
            <para>The clip path is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyClipRegion">
            <summary>
            <para>The clip region is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyCompositionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The composition mode is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyFont">
            <summary>
            <para>The font is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyHints">
            <summary>
            <para>The render hints is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyOpacity">
            <summary>
            <para>The constant opacity has changed and needs to be updated as part of the state change in QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyPen">
            <summary>
            <para>The pen is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.DirtyFlag.DirtyTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>The transform is dirty and needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to describe the features or capabilities that the paint engine has. If a feature is not supported by the engine, QPainter will do a best effort to emulate that feature through other means and pass on an alpha blended QImage to the engine with the emulated results. Some features cannot be emulated: AlphaBlend and PorterDuff.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.AllFeatures">
            <summary>
            <para>All of the above features. This enum value is usually used as a bit mask.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.AlphaBlend">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine can alpha blend primitives.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.Antialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine can use antialising to improve the appearance of rendered primitives.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.BlendModes">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports blending modes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.BrushStroke">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports drawing strokes that contain brushes as fills, not just solid colors (e.g. a dashed gradient line of width 2).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.ConicalGradientFill">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports conical gradient fills.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.ConstantOpacity">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports the feature provided by QPainter::setOpacity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.LinearGradientFill">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports linear gradient fills.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.MaskedBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine is capable of rendering brushes that has a texture with an alpha channel or a mask.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.ObjectBoundingModeGradients">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine has native support for gradients with coordinate mode QGradient::ObjectBoundingMode. Otherwise, if QPaintEngine::PatternTransform is supported, object bounding mode gradients are converted to gradients with coordinate mode QGradient::LogicalMode and a brush transform for the coordinate mapping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PaintOutsidePaintEvent">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine is capable of painting outside of paint events.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PainterPaths">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine has path support.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PatternBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine is capable of rendering brushes with the brush patterns specified in Qt::BrushStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PatternTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine has support for transforming brush patterns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PerspectiveTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine has support for performing perspective transformations on primitives.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PixmapTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine can transform pixmaps, including rotation and shearing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PorterDuff">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports Porter-Duff operations</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.PrimitiveTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine has support for transforming drawing primitives.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.RadialGradientFill">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports radial gradient fills.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PaintEngineFeature.RasterOpModes">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine supports bitwise raster operations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PolygonDrawMode.ConvexMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The polygon is a convex polygon and can be drawn using specialized algorithms where available.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PolygonDrawMode.OddEvenMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The polygon should be drawn using OddEven fill rule.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PolygonDrawMode.PolylineMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Only the outline of the polygon should be drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.PolygonDrawMode.WindingMode">
            <summary>
            <para>The polygon should be drawn using Winding fill rule.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.CoreGraphics">
            <summary>
            <para>Mac OS X's Quartz2D (CoreGraphics)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.Direct3D">
            <summary>
            <para>Windows only, Direct3D based engine</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.MaxUser">
            <summary>
            <para>Last user type ID</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.Pdf">
            <summary>
            <para>Portable Document Format</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.Picture">
            <summary>
            <para>QPicture format</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.QWindowSystem">
            <summary>
            <para>Qt for Embedded Linux</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.QuickDraw">
            <summary>
            <para>Mac OS X's QuickDraw</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.SVG">
            <summary>
            <para>Scalable Vector Graphics XML format</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPaintEngine.Type.User">
            <summary>
            <para>First user type ID</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintEngineState">
            <summary>
            The QPaintEngineState class provides information about the active paint engine's current state.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPaintEngineState records which properties that have changed since the last time the paint engine was updated, as well as their current value.</para>
            <para>Which properties that have changed can at any time be retrieved using the state() function. This function returns an instance of the QPaintEngine::DirtyFlags type which stores an OR combination of QPaintEngine::DirtyFlag values. The QPaintEngine::DirtyFlag enum defines whether a property has changed since the last update or not.</para>
            <para>If a property is marked with a dirty flag, its current value can be retrieved using the corresponding get function:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Property FlagCurrent Property Value</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyBackground	backgroundBrush()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyBackgroundMode	backgroundMode()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyBrush	brush()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyBrushOrigin	brushOrigin()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyClipRegion or QPaintEngine::DirtyClipPath	clipOperation()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyClipPath	clipPath()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyClipRegion	clipRegion()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyCompositionMode	compositionMode()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyFont	font()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyTransform	transform()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyClipEnabled	isClipEnabled()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyPen	pen()</para>
            <para>QPaintEngine::DirtyHints	renderHints()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QPaintEngineState class also provide the painter() function which returns a pointer to the painter that is currently updating the paint engine.</para>
            <para>An instance of this class, representing the current state of the active paint engine, is passed as argument to the QPaintEngine::updateState() function. The only situation in which you will have to use this class directly is when implementing your own paint engine.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPaintEngine.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.BackgroundBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the background brush in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyBackground flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.BackgroundMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the background mode in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyBackgroundMode flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Brush">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyBrush flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.BrushNeedsResolving">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the coordinate of the fill have been specified as bounded by the current rendering operation and have to be resolved (about the currently rendered primitive).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.BrushOrigin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush origin in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyBrushOrigin flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.ClipOperation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clip operation in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes either the QPaintEngine::DirtyClipPath or the QPaintEngine::DirtyClipRegion flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.ClipPath">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clip path in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyClipPath flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.ClipRegion">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clip region in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyClipRegion flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.CompositionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the composition mode in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyCompositionMode flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyFont flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.IsClipEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether clipping is enabled or not in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyClipEnabled flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Matrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>Note: It is advisable to use transform() instead of this function to preserve the properties of perspective transformations.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyTransform flag.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Opacity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the opacity in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Painter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the painter currently updating the paint engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Pen">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyPen flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.PenNeedsResolving">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the coordinate of the stroke have been specified as bounded by the current rendering operation and have to be resolved (about the currently rendered primitive).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.RenderHints">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the render hints in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyHints flag.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.State">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a combination of flags identifying the set of properties that need to be updated when updating the paint engine's state (i.e. during a call to the QPaintEngine::updateState() function).</para>
            <para>See also QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEngineState.Transform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix in the current paint engine state.</para>
            <para>This variable should only be used when the state() returns a combination which includes the QPaintEngine::DirtyTransform flag.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also state() and QPaintEngine::updateState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPaintEvent">
            <summary>
            The QPaintEvent class contains event parameters for paint events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Paint events are sent to widgets that need to update themselves, for instance when part of a widget is exposed because a covering widget was moved.</para>
            <para>The event contains a region() that needs to be updated, and a rect() that is the bounding rectangle of that region. Both are provided because many widgets can't make much use of region(), and rect() can be much faster than region().boundingRect().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Automatic Clipping</para>
            <para>Painting is clipped to region() during the processing of a paint event. This clipping is performed by Qt's paint system and is independent of any clipping that may be applied to a QPainter used to draw on the paint device.</para>
            <para>As a result, the value returned by QPainter::clipRegion() on a newly-constructed QPainter will not reflect the clip region that is used by the paint system.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter, QWidget::update(), QWidget::repaint(), and QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a paint event object with the region that needs to be updated. The region is specified by paintRegion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle that needs to be updated. The region is specified by paintRect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a paint event object with the region that needs to be updated. The region is specified by paintRegion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEvent.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle that needs to be updated.</para>
            <para>See also region() and QPainter::setClipRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPaintEvent.Region">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the region that needs to be updated.</para>
            <para>See also rect() and QPainter::setClipRegion().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainter">
            <summary>
            The QPainter class performs low-level painting on widgets and other paint devices.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPainter provides highly optimized functions to do most of the drawing GUI programs require. It can draw everything from simple lines to complex shapes like pies and chords. It can also draw aligned text and pixmaps. Normally, it draws in a &amp;quot;natural&amp;quot; coordinate system, but it can also do view and world transformation. QPainter can operate on any object that inherits the QPaintDevice class.</para>
            <para>The common use of QPainter is inside a widget's paint event: Construct and customize (e.g. set the pen or the brush) the painter. Then draw. Remember to destroy the QPainter object after drawing. For example:</para>
            <para> void SimpleExampleWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     painter.setPen(Qt::blue);</para>
            <para>     painter.setFont(QFont(&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot;, 30));</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(rect(), Qt::AlignCenter, &amp;quot;Qt&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The core functionality of QPainter is drawing, but the class also provide several functions that allows you to customize QPainter's settings and its rendering quality, and others that enable clipping. In addition you can control how different shapes are merged together by specifying the painter's composition mode.</para>
            <para>The isActive() function indicates whether the painter is active. A painter is activated by the begin() function and the constructor that takes a QPaintDevice argument. The end() function, and the destructor, deactivates it.</para>
            <para>Together with the QPaintDevice and QPaintEngine classes, QPainter form the basis for Qt's paint system. QPainter is the class used to perform drawing operations. QPaintDevice represents a device that can be painted on using a QPainter. QPaintEngine provides the interface that the painter uses to draw onto different types of devices. If the painter is active, device() returns the paint device on which the painter paints, and paintEngine() returns the paint engine that the painter is currently operating on. For more information, see the Paint System.</para>
            <para>Sometimes it is desirable to make someone else paint on an unusual QPaintDevice. QPainter supports a static function to do this, setRedirected().</para>
            <para>Warning: When the paintdevice is a widget, QPainter can only be used inside a paintEvent() function or in a function called by paintEvent(); that is unless the Qt::WA_PaintOutsidePaintEvent widget attribute is set. On Mac OS X and Windows, you can only paint in a paintEvent() function regardless of this attribute's setting.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Settings</para>
            <para>There are several settings that you can customize to make QPainter draw according to your preferences:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>font() is the font used for drawing text. If the painter isActive(), you can retrieve information about the currently set font, and its metrics, using the fontInfo() and fontMetrics() functions respectively.</para>
            <para>brush() defines the color or pattern that is used for filling shapes.</para>
            <para>pen() defines the color or stipple that is used for drawing lines or boundaries.</para>
            <para>backgroundMode() defines whether there is a background() or not, i.e it is either Qt::OpaqueMode or Qt::TransparentMode.</para>
            <para>background() only applies when backgroundMode() is Qt::OpaqueMode and pen() is a stipple. In that case, it describes the color of the background pixels in the stipple.</para>
            <para>brushOrigin() defines the origin of the tiled brushes, normally the origin of widget's background.</para>
            <para>viewport(), window(), worldTransform() make up the painter's coordinate transformation system. For more information, see the Coordinate Transformations section and the Coordinate System documentation.</para>
            <para>hasClipping() tells whether the painter clips at all. (The paint device clips, too.) If the painter clips, it clips to clipRegion().</para>
            <para>layoutDirection() defines the layout direction used by the painter when drawing text.</para>
            <para>worldMatrixEnabled() tells whether world transformation is enabled.</para>
            <para>viewTransformEnabled() tells whether view transformation is enabled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that some of these settings mirror settings in some paint devices, e.g. QWidget::font(). The QPainter::begin() function (or equivalently the QPainter constructor) copies these attributes from the paint device.</para>
            <para>You can at any time save the QPainter's state by calling the save() function which saves all the available settings on an internal stack. The restore() function pops them back.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Drawing</para>
            <para>QPainter provides functions to draw most primitives: drawPoint(), drawPoints(), drawLine(), drawRect(), drawRoundedRect(), drawEllipse(), drawArc(), drawPie(), drawChord(), drawPolyline(), drawPolygon(), drawConvexPolygon() and drawCubicBezier(). The two convenience functions, drawRects() and drawLines(), draw the given number of rectangles or lines in the given array of QRects or QLines using the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para>The QPainter class also provides the fillRect() function which fills the given QRect, with the given QBrush, and the eraseRect() function that erases the area inside the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>All of these functions have both integer and floating point versions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	Basic Drawing ExampleThe Basic Drawing example shows how to display basic graphics primitives in a variety of styles using the QPainter class.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If you need to draw a complex shape, especially if you need to do so repeatedly, consider creating a QPainterPath and drawing it using drawPath().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> Painter Paths exampleThe QPainterPath class provides a container for painting operations, enabling graphical shapes to be constructed and reused.</para>
            <para>The Painter Paths example shows how painter paths can be used to build complex shapes for rendering.</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPainter also provides the fillPath() function which fills the given QPainterPath with the given QBrush, and the strokePath() function that draws the outline of the given path (i.e. strokes the path).</para>
            <para>See also the Vector Deformation demo which shows how to use advanced vector techniques to draw text using a QPainterPath, the Gradients demo which shows the different types of gradients that are available in Qt, and the Path Stroking demo which shows Qt's built-in dash patterns and shows how custom patterns can be used to extend the range of available patterns.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Vector DeformationGradientsPath Stroking</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>There are functions to draw pixmaps/images, namely drawPixmap(), drawImage() and drawTiledPixmap(). Both drawPixmap() and drawImage() produce the same result, except that drawPixmap() is faster on-screen while drawImage() may be faster on a QPrinter or other devices.</para>
            <para>Text drawing is done using drawText(). When you need fine-grained positioning, boundingRect() tells you where a given drawText() command will draw.</para>
            <para>There is a drawPicture() function that draws the contents of an entire QPicture. The drawPicture() function is the only function that disregards all the painter's settings as QPicture has its own settings.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Rendering Quality</para>
            <para>To get the optimal rendering result using QPainter, you should use the platform independent QImage as paint device; i.e. using QImage will ensure that the result has an identical pixel representation on any platform.</para>
            <para>The QPainter class also provides a means of controlling the rendering quality through its RenderHint enum and the support for floating point precision: All the functions for drawing primitives has a floating point version. These are often used in combination with the QPainter::Antialiasing render hint.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	Concentric Circles ExampleThe Concentric Circles example shows the improved rendering quality that can be obtained using floating point precision and anti-aliasing when drawing custom widgets.</para>
            <para>The application's main window displays several widgets which are drawn using the various combinations of precision and anti-aliasing.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The RenderHint enum specifies flags to QPainter that may or may not be respected by any given engine. QPainter::Antialiasing indicates that the engine should antialias edges of primitives if possible, QPainter::TextAntialiasing indicates that the engine should antialias text if possible, and the QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform indicates that the engine should use a smooth pixmap transformation algorithm. HighQualityAntialiasing is an OpenGL-specific rendering hint indicating that the engine should use fragment programs and offscreen rendering for antialiasing.</para>
            <para>The renderHints() function returns a flag that specifies the rendering hints that are set for this painter. Use the setRenderHint() function to set or clear the currently set RenderHints.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Coordinate Transformations</para>
            <para>Normally, the QPainter operates on the device's own coordinate system (usually pixels), but QPainter has good support for coordinate transformations.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>noprotate()scale()translate()</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The most commonly used transformations are scaling, rotation, translation and shearing. Use the scale() function to scale the coordinate system by a given offset, the rotate() function to rotate it clockwise and translate() to translate it (i.e. adding a given offset to the points). You can also twist the coordinate system around the origin using the shear() function. See the Affine Transformations demo for a visualization of a sheared coordinate system.</para>
            <para>See also the Transformations example which shows how transformations influence the way that QPainter renders graphics primitives. In particular it shows how the order of transformations affects the result.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> Affine Transformations DemoThe Affine Transformations demo show Qt's ability to perform affine transformations on painting operations. The demo also allows the user to experiment with the transformation operations and see the results immediately.</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>All the tranformation operations operate on the transformation worldTransform(). A matrix transforms a point in the plane to another point. For more information about the transformation matrix, see the Coordinate System and QTransform documentation.</para>
            <para>The setWorldTransform() function can replace or add to the currently set worldTransform(). The resetTransform() function resets any transformations that were made using translate(), scale(), shear(), rotate(), setWorldTransform(), setViewport() and setWindow() functions. The deviceTransform() returns the matrix that transforms from logical coordinates to device coordinates of the platform dependent paint device. The latter function is only needed when using platform painting commands on the platform dependent handle, and the platform does not do transformations nativly.</para>
            <para>When drawing with QPainter, we specify points using logical coordinates which then are converted into the physical coordinates of the paint device. The mapping of the logical coordinates to the physical coordinates are handled by QPainter's combinedTransform(), a combination of viewport() and window() and worldTransform(). The viewport() represents the physical coordinates specifying an arbitrary rectangle, the window() describes the same rectangle in logical coordinates, and the worldTransform() is identical with the transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>See also Coordinate System</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Clipping</para>
            <para>QPainter can clip any drawing operation to a rectangle, a region, or a vector path. The current clip is available using the functions clipRegion() and clipPath(). Whether paths or regions are preferred (faster) depends on the underlying paintEngine(). For example, the QImage paint engine prefers paths while the X11 paint engine prefers regions. Setting a clip is done in the painters logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>After QPainter's clipping, the paint device may also clip. For example, most widgets clip away the pixels used by child widgets, and most printers clip away an area near the edges of the paper. This additional clipping is not reflected by the return value of clipRegion() or hasClipping().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Composition Modes</para>
            <para>QPainter provides the CompositionMode enum which defines the Porter-Duff rules for digital image compositing; it describes a model for combining the pixels in one image, the source, with the pixels in another image, the destination.</para>
            <para>The two most common forms of composition are Source and SourceOver. Source is used to draw opaque objects onto a paint device. In this mode, each pixel in the source replaces the corresponding pixel in the destination. In SourceOver composition mode, the source object is transparent and is drawn on top of the destination.</para>
            <para>Note that composition transformation operates pixelwise. For that reason, there is a difference between using the graphic primitive itself and its bounding rectangle: The bounding rect contains pixels with alpha == 0 (i.e the pixels surrounding the primitive). These pixels will overwrite the other image's pixels, affectively clearing those, while the primitive only overwrites its own area.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	Composition Modes DemoThe Composition Modes demo, available in Qt's demo directory, allows you to experiment with the various composition modes and see the results immediately.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Limitations</para>
            <para>If you are using coordinates with Qt's raster-based paint engine, it is important to note that, while coordinates greater than +/- 215 can be used, any painting performed with coordinates outside this range is not guaranteed to be shown; the drawing may be clipped. This is due to the use of short int in the implementation.</para>
            <para>The outlines generated by Qt's stroker are only an approximation when dealing with curved shapes. It is in most cases impossible to represent the outline of a bezier curve segment using another bezier curve segment, and so Qt approximates the curve outlines by using several smaller curves. For performance reasons there is a limit to how many curves Qt uses for these outlines, and thus when using large pen widths or scales the outline error increases. To generate outlines with smaller errors it is possible to use the QPainterPathStroker class, which has the setCurveThreshold member function which let's the user specify the error tolerance. Another workaround is to convert the paths to polygons first and then draw the polygons instead.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Performance</para>
            <para>QPainter is a rich framework that allows developers to do a great variety of graphical operations, such as gradients, composition modes and vector graphics. And QPainter can do this across a variety of different hardware and software stacks. Naturally the underlying combination of hardware and software has some implications for performance, and ensuring that every single operation is fast in combination with all the various combinations of composition modes, brushes, clipping, transformation, etc, is close to an impossible task because of the number of permutations. As a compromise we have selected a subset of the QPainter API and backends, where performance is guaranteed to be as good as we can sensibly get it for the given combination of hardware and software.</para>
            <para>The backends we focus on as high-performance engines are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Raster - This backend implements all rendering in pure software and is always used to render into QImages. For optimal performance only use the format types QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied, QImage::Format_RGB32 or QImage::Format_RGB16. Any other format, including QImage::Format_ARGB32, has significantly worse performance. This engine is also used by default on Windows and on QWS. It can be used as default graphics system on any OS/hardware/software combination by passing -graphicssystem raster on the command line</para>
            <para>OpenGL 2.0 (ES) - This backend is the primary backend for hardware accelerated graphics. It can be run on desktop machines and embedded devices supporting the OpenGL 2.0 or OpenGL/ES 2.0 specification. This includes most graphics chips produced in the last couple of years. The engine can be enabled by using QPainter onto a QGLWidget or by passing -graphicssystem opengl on the command line when the underlying system supports it.</para>
            <para>OpenVG - This backend implements the Khronos standard for 2D and Vector Graphics. It is primarily for embedded devices with hardware support for OpenVG. The engine can be enabled by passing -graphicssystem openvg on the command line when the underlying system supports it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>These operations are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Simple transformations, meaning translation and scaling, pluss 0, 90, 180, 270 degree rotations.</para>
            <para>drawPixmap() in combination with simple transformations and opacity with non-smooth transformation mode (QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform not enabled as a render hint).</para>
            <para>Rectangle fills with solid color, two-color linear gradients and simple transforms.</para>
            <para>Rectangular clipping with simple transformations and intersect clip.</para>
            <para>Composition Modes QPainter::CompositionMode_Source and QPainter::CompositionMode_SourceOver</para>
            <para>Rounded rectangle filling using solid color and two-color linear gradients fills.</para>
            <para>3x3 patched pixmaps, via qDrawBorderPixmap.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>This list gives an indication of which features to safely use in an application where performance is critical. For certain setups, other operations may be fast too, but before making extensive use of them, it is recommended to benchmark and verify them on the system where the software will run in the end. There are also cases where expensive operations are ok to use, for instance when the result is cached in a QPixmap.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPaintDevice, QPaintEngine, QtSvg Module, Basic Drawing Example, and Drawing Utility Functions.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a painter.</para>
            <para>See also begin() and end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.#ctor(QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device immediately.</para>
            <para>This constructor is convenient for short-lived painters, e.g. in a QWidget::paintEvent() and should be used only once. The constructor calls begin() for you and the QPainter destructor automatically calls end().</para>
            <para>Here's an example using begin() and end():</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter p;</para>
            <para>     p.begin(this);</para>
            <para>     p.drawLine(...);        // drawing code</para>
            <para>     p.end();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The same example using this constructor:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter p(this);</para>
            <para>     p.drawLine(...);        // drawing code</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Since the constructor cannot provide feedback when the initialization of the painter failed you should rather use begin() and end() to paint on external devices, e.g. printers.</para>
            <para>See also begin() and end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Begin(QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Begins painting the paint device and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Notice that all painter settings (setPen(), setBrush() etc.) are reset to default values when begin() is called.</para>
            <para>The errors that can occur are serious problems, such as these:</para>
            <para> painter-&gt;begin(0); // impossible - paint device cannot be 0</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPixmap image(0, 0);</para>
            <para> painter-&gt;begin(&amp;image); // impossible - image.isNull() == true;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> painter-&gt;begin(myWidget);</para>
            <para> painter2-&gt;begin(myWidget); // impossible - only one painter at a time</para>
            <para>Note that most of the time, you can use one of the constructors instead of begin(), and that end() is automatically done at destruction.</para>
            <para>Warning: A paint device can only be painted by one painter at a time.</para>
            <para>Warning: Painting on a QImage with the format QImage::Format_Indexed8 is not supported.</para>
            <para>See also end() and QPainter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.BeginNativePainting">
            <summary>
            <para>Flushes the painting pipeline and prepares for the user issuing commands directly to the underlying graphics context. Must be followed by a call to endNativePainting().</para>
            <para>Note that only the states the underlying paint engine changes will be reset to their respective default states. The states we reset may change from release to release. The following states are currently reset in the OpenGL 2 engine:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>blending is disabled</para>
            <para>the depth, stencil and scissor tests are disabled</para>
            <para>the active texture unit is reset to 0</para>
            <para>the depth mask, depth function and the clear depth are reset to their default values</para>
            <para>the stencil mask, stencil operation and stencil function are reset to their default values</para>
            <para>the current color is reset to solid white</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If, for example, the OpenGL polygon mode is changed by the user inside a beginNativePaint()/endNativePainting() block, it will not be reset to the default state by endNativePainting(). Here is an example that shows intermixing of painter commands and raw OpenGL commands:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.fillRect(0, 0, 128, 128, Qt::green);</para>
            <para> painter.beginNativePainting();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> glEnable(GL_SCISSOR_TEST);</para>
            <para> glScissor(0, 0, 64, 64);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> glClearColor(1, 0, 0, 1);</para>
            <para> glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> glDisable(GL_SCISSOR_TEST);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> painter.endNativePainting();</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also endNativePainting().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the text as it will appear when drawn inside the given rectangle with the specified flags using the currently set font(); i.e the function tells you where the drawText() function will draw when given the same arguments.</para>
            <para>If the text does not fit within the given rectangle using the specified flags, the function returns the required rectangle.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is a bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignTop</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignBottom</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignVCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordWrap</para>
            <para>Qt::TextIncludeTrailingSpaces</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also drawText(), Qt::Alignment, and Qt::TextFlag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.String,QtGui.QTextOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the text as it will appear when drawn inside the given rectangle with the specified flags using the currently set font(); i.e the function tells you where the drawText() function will draw when given the same arguments.</para>
            <para>If the text does not fit within the given rectangle using the specified flags, the function returns the required rectangle.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is a bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignTop</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignBottom</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignVCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordWrap</para>
            <para>Qt::TextIncludeTrailingSpaces</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also drawText(), Qt::Alignment, and Qt::TextFlag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the text as it will appear when drawn inside the given rectangle with the specified flags using the currently set font(); i.e the function tells you where the drawText() function will draw when given the same arguments.</para>
            <para>If the text does not fit within the given rectangle using the specified flags, the function returns the required rectangle.</para>
            <para>The flags argument is a bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignTop</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignBottom</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignVCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordWrap</para>
            <para>Qt::TextIncludeTrailingSpaces</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also drawText(), Qt::Alignment, and Qt::TextFlag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.BoundingRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the text as it will appear when drawn inside the given rectangle with the specified flags using the currently set font().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.BoundingRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the given text as it will appear when drawn inside the rectangle beginning at the point (x, y) with width w and height h.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.ClipBoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the current clip if there is a clip; otherwise returns an empty rectangle. Note that the clip region is given in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>The bounding rectangle is not guaranteed to be tight.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also setClipRect(), setClipPath(), and setClipRegion().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.CombinedMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the transformation matrix combining the current window/viewport and world transformation.</para>
            <para>It is advisable to use combinedTransform() instead of this function to preserve the properties of perspective transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform(), setWindow(), and setViewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.CombinedTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the transformation matrix combining the current window/viewport and world transformation.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform(), setWindow(), and setViewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paint device on which this painter is currently painting, or 0 if the painter is not active.</para>
            <para>See also isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DeviceMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix that transforms from logical coordinates to device coordinates of the platform dependent paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: It is advisable to use deviceTransform() instead of this function to preserve the properties of perspective transformations.</para>
            <para>This function is only needed when using platform painting commands on the platform dependent handle (Qt::HANDLE), and the platform does not do transformations nativly.</para>
            <para>The QPaintEngine::PaintEngineFeature enum can be queried to determine whether the platform performs the transformations or not.</para>
            <para>See also worldMatrix() and QPaintEngine::hasFeature().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DeviceTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the matrix that transforms from logical coordinates to device coordinates of the platform dependent paint device.</para>
            <para>This function is only needed when using platform painting commands on the platform dependent handle (Qt::HANDLE), and the platform does not do transformations nativly.</para>
            <para>The QPaintEngine::PaintEngineFeature enum can be queried to determine whether the platform performs the transformations or not.</para>
            <para>See also worldTransform() and QPaintEngine::hasFeature().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawArc(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the arc defined by the given rectangle, startAngle and spanAngle.</para>
            <para>The startAngle and spanAngle must be specified in 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full circle equals 5760 (16 * 360). Positive values for the angles mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> int startAngle = 30 * 16;</para>
            <para> int spanAngle = 120 * 16;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawArc(rectangle, startAngle, spanAngle);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawArc(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the arc defined by the given rectangle, startAngle and spanAngle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawArc(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the arc defined by the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the specified width and height, and the given startAngle and spanAngle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawChord(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the chord defined by the given rectangle, startAngle and spanAngle. The chord is filled with the current brush().</para>
            <para>The startAngle and spanAngle must be specified in 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full circle equals 5760 (16 * 360). Positive values for the angles mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> int startAngle = 30 * 16;</para>
            <para> int spanAngle = 120 * 16;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawChord(rect, startAngle, spanAngle);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawChord(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the chord defined by the given rectangle, startAngle and spanAngle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawChord(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the chord defined by the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the specified width and height, and the given startAngle and spanAngle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawConvexPolygon(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the convex polygon defined by polygon using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawConvexPolygon(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the convex polygon defined by polygon using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawConvexPolygon(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the convex polygon defined by the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 static const QPointF points[4] = {</para>
            <para>     QPointF(10.0, 80.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(20.0, 10.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(80.0, 30.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(90.0, 70.0)</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawConvexPolygon(points, 4);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawConvexPolygon(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the convex polygon defined by the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawEllipse(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the ellipse defined by the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>A filled ellipse has a size of rectangle.size(). A stroked ellipse has a size of rectangle.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawEllipse(rectangle);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawEllipse(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the ellipse defined by the given rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawEllipse(QtCore.QPointF,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the ellipse defined by the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>A filled ellipse has a size of rectangle.size(). A stroked ellipse has a size of rectangle.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawEllipse(rectangle);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawEllipse(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the ellipse positioned at center with radii rx and ry.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawEllipse(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the ellipse defined by the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawGlyphRun(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QGlyphRun)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the specified glyphs at the given position. The position gives the edge of the baseline for the string of glyphs. The glyphs will be retrieved from the font selected by glyphs and at offsets given by the positions in glyphs.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also QGlyphRun::setRawFont(), QGlyphRun::setPositions(), and QGlyphRun::setGlyphIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given image into the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given image into the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given image at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QImage)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given image at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QImage,QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given image into the target rectangle in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            <para>If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to specify how you would prefer this to happen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QRectF target(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> QRectF source(0.0, 0.0, 70.0, 40.0);</para>
            <para> QImage image(&quot;:/images/myImage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawImage(target, image, source);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QImage,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given image into the target rectangle in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            <para>If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to specify how you would prefer this to happen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QRectF target(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> QRectF source(0.0, 0.0, 70.0, 40.0);</para>
            <para> QImage image(&quot;:/images/myImage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawImage(target, image, source);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QImage,QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given image into the target rectangle in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            <para>If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to specify how you would prefer this to happen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QRectF target(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> QRectF source(0.0, 0.0, 70.0, 40.0);</para>
            <para> QImage image(&quot;:/images/myImage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawImage(target, image, source);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QImage,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given image into the target rectangle in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            <para>If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to specify how you would prefer this to happen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QRectF target(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> QRectF source(0.0, 0.0, 70.0, 40.0);</para>
            <para> QImage image(&quot;:/images/myImage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawImage(target, image, source);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawImage(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QImage,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.ImageConversionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given image into the target rectangle in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The image is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the image and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            <para>If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the flags to specify how you would prefer this to happen.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QRectF target(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> QRectF source(0.0, 0.0, 70.0, 40.0);</para>
            <para> QImage image(&quot;:/images/myImage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawImage(target, image, source);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLine(QtCore.QLineF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a line defined by line.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLineF line(10.0, 80.0, 90.0, 20.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawLine(line);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLine(QtCore.QLine)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a line defined by line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLine(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a line from p1 to p2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLine(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a line from p1 to p2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLine(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a line from (x1, y1) to (x2, y2) and sets the current pen position to (x2, y2).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(QtCore.QLineF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the first lineCount lines in the array lines using the current pen.</para>
            <para>See also drawLine() and drawPolyline().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the first lineCount lines in the array pointPairs using the current pen. The lines are specified as pairs of points so the number of entries in pointPairs must be at least lineCount * 2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(QtCore.QLine,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the first lineCount lines in the array lines using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the first lineCount lines in the array pointPairs using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QLineF})">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the set of lines defined by the list lines using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QPointF})">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a line for each pair of points in the vector pointPairs using the current pen. If there is an odd number of points in the array, the last point will be ignored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QLine})">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the set of lines defined by the list lines using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawLines(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QPoint})">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a line for each pair of points in the vector pointPairs using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPath(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given painter path using the current pen for outline and the current brush for filling.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QPainterPath path;</para>
            <para> path.moveTo(20, 80);</para>
            <para> path.lineTo(20, 30);</para>
            <para> path.cubicTo(80, 0, 50, 50, 80, 80);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(path);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPicture(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replays the given picture at the given point.</para>
            <para>The QPicture class is a paint device that records and replays QPainter commands. A picture serializes the painter commands to an IO device in a platform-independent format. Everything that can be painted on a widget or pixmap can also be stored in a picture.</para>
            <para>This function does exactly the same as QPicture::play() when called with point = QPoint(0, 0).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QPicture picture;</para>
            <para> QPointF point(10.0, 20.0)</para>
            <para> picture.load(&quot;drawing.pic&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPicture(0, 0, picture);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPicture(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Replays the given picture at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPicture(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given picture at point (x, y).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPie(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a pie defined by the given rectangle, startAngle and and spanAngle.</para>
            <para>The pie is filled with the current brush().</para>
            <para>The startAngle and spanAngle must be specified in 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full circle equals 5760 (16 * 360). Positive values for the angles mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> int startAngle = 30 * 16;</para>
            <para> int spanAngle = 120 * 16;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPie(rectangle, startAngle, spanAngle);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPie(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a pie defined by the given rectangle, startAngle and and spanAngle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPie(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the pie defined by the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the specified width and height, and the given startAngle and spanAngle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given pixmap with its origin at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given pixmap with its origin at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given pixmap into the given rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note: The pixmap is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the pixmap and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given pixmap into the given target in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The pixmap is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the pixmap and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  QRectF target(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para> QRectF source(0.0, 0.0, 70.0, 40.0);</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(&quot;:myPixmap.png&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPixmap(target, image, source);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given pixmap into the given target in the paint device.</para>
            <para>Note: The pixmap is scaled to fit the rectangle, if both the pixmap and rectangle size disagree.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given pixmap with its origin at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion source of the given pixmap with its origin at the given point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given pixmap at position (x, y).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a pixmap at (x, y) by copying a part of the given pixmap into the paint device.</para>
            <para>(x, y) specifies the top-left point in the paint device that is to be drawn onto. (sx, sy) specifies the top-left point in pixmap that is to be drawn. The default is (0, 0).</para>
            <para>(sw, sh) specifies the size of the pixmap that is to be drawn. The default, (0, 0) (and negative) means all the way to the bottom-right of the pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the pixmap into the rectangle at position (x, y) with the given width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmap(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the rectangular portion with the origin (sx, sy), width sw and height sh, of the given pixmap , at the point (x, y), with a width of w and a height of h. If sw or sh are equal to zero the width/height of the pixmap is used and adjusted by the offset sx/sy;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmapFragments(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragmentHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is used to draw pixmap, or a sub-rectangle of pixmap, at multiple positions with different scale, rotation and opacity. fragments is an array of fragmentCount elements specifying the parameters used to draw each pixmap fragment. The hints parameter can be used to pass in drawing hints.</para>
            <para>This function is potentially faster than multiple calls to drawPixmap(), since the backend can optimize state changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QPainter::PixmapFragment and QPainter::PixmapFragmentHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPixmapFragments(QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragmentHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is used to draw pixmap, or a sub-rectangle of pixmap, at multiple positions with different scale, rotation and opacity. fragments is an array of fragmentCount elements specifying the parameters used to draw each pixmap fragment. The hints parameter can be used to pass in drawing hints.</para>
            <para>This function is potentially faster than multiple calls to drawPixmap(), since the backend can optimize state changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QPainter::PixmapFragment and QPainter::PixmapFragmentHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoint(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a single point at the given position using the current pen's color.</para>
            <para>See also Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoint(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a single point at the given position using the current pen's color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoint(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a single point at position (x, y).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoints(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the points in the vector points.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoints(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the points in the vector points.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoints(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen's color.</para>
            <para>See also Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPoints(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen's color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolygon(QtGui.QPolygonF,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the polygon defined by the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 static const QPointF points[4] = {</para>
            <para>     QPointF(10.0, 80.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(20.0, 10.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(80.0, 30.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(90.0, 70.0)</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPolygon(points, 4);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolygon(QtGui.QPolygon,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the polygon defined by the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 static const QPointF points[4] = {</para>
            <para>     QPointF(10.0, 80.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(20.0, 10.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(80.0, 30.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(90.0, 70.0)</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPolygon(points, 4);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolygon(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the polygon defined by the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 static const QPointF points[4] = {</para>
            <para>     QPointF(10.0, 80.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(20.0, 10.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(80.0, 30.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(90.0, 70.0)</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPolygon(points, 4);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolygon(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.FillRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the polygon defined by the first pointCount points in the array points using the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 static const QPointF points[4] = {</para>
            <para>     QPointF(10.0, 80.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(20.0, 10.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(80.0, 30.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(90.0, 70.0)</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPolygon(points, 4);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolyline(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the polyline defined by the given points using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolyline(QtGui.QPolygon)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the polyline defined by the given points using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolyline(QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the polyline defined by the first pointCount points in points using the current pen.</para>
            <para>Note that unlike the drawPolygon() function the last point is not connected to the first, neither is the polyline filled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  static const QPointF points[3] = {</para>
            <para>     QPointF(10.0, 80.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(20.0, 10.0),</para>
            <para>     QPointF(80.0, 30.0),</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPolyline(points, 3);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawPolyline(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the polyline defined by the first pointCount points in points using the current pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the current rectangle with the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of rectangle.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of rectangle.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawRect(rectangle);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the current rectangle with the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a rectangle with upper left corner at (x, y) and with the given width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRects(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the first rectCount of the given rectangles using the current pen and brush.</para>
            <para>See also drawRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRects(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the first rectCount of the given rectangles using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRects(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QRectF})">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given rectangles using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRects(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QRect})">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given rectangles using the current pen and brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRoundRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a rectangle r with rounded corners.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of r.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of r.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para>See also drawRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRoundRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a rectangle r with rounded corners.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of r.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of r.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para>See also drawRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRoundRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a rectangle r with rounded corners.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of r.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of r.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para>See also drawRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRoundedRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.SizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given rectangle rect with rounded corners.</para>
            <para>The xRadius and yRadius arguments specify the radii of the ellipses defining the corners of the rounded rectangle. When mode is Qt::RelativeSize, xRadius and yRadius are specified in percentage of half the rectangle's width and height respectively, and should be in the range 0.0 to 100.0.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of rect.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of rect.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawRoundedRect(rectangle, 20.0, 15.0);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRoundedRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.SizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given rectangle rect with rounded corners.</para>
            <para>The xRadius and yRadius arguments specify the radii of the ellipses defining the corners of the rounded rectangle. When mode is Qt::RelativeSize, xRadius and yRadius are specified in percentage of half the rectangle's width and height respectively, and should be in the range 0.0 to 100.0.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of rect.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of rect.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawRoundedRect(rectangle, 20.0, 15.0);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawRoundedRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.SizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given rectangle rect with rounded corners.</para>
            <para>The xRadius and yRadius arguments specify the radii of the ellipses defining the corners of the rounded rectangle. When mode is Qt::RelativeSize, xRadius and yRadius are specified in percentage of half the rectangle's width and height respectively, and should be in the range 0.0 to 100.0.</para>
            <para>A filled rectangle has a size of rect.size(). A stroked rectangle has a size of rect.size() plus the pen width.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QRectF rectangle(10.0, 20.0, 80.0, 60.0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawRoundedRect(rectangle, 20.0, 15.0);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawStaticText(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QStaticText)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given staticText at the given topLeftPosition.</para>
            <para>The text will be drawn using the font and the transformation set on the painter. If the font and/or transformation set on the painter are different from the ones used to initialize the layout of the QStaticText, then the layout will have to be recalculated. Use QStaticText::prepare() to initialize staticText with the font and transformation with which it will later be drawn.</para>
            <para>If topLeftPosition is not the same as when staticText was initialized, or when it was last drawn, then there will be a slight overhead when translating the text to its new position.</para>
            <para>Note: If the painter's transformation is not affine, then staticText will be drawn using regular calls to drawText(), losing any potential for performance improvement.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the top of the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QStaticText.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawStaticText(QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QStaticText)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the staticText at the topLeftPosition.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the top of the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawStaticText(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QStaticText)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the staticText at coordinates left and top.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the top of the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QPointF,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given text with the currently defined text direction, beginning at the given position.</para>
            <para>This function does not handle the newline character (\n), as it cannot break text into multiple lines, and it cannot display the newline character. Use the QPainter::drawText() overload that takes a rectangle instead if you want to draw multiple lines of text with the newline character, or if you want the text to be wrapped.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the baseline of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QPoint,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given text with the currently defined text direction, beginning at the given position.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the baseline of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QRectF,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given text with the currently defined text direction, beginning at the given position.</para>
            <para>This function does not handle the newline character (\n), as it cannot break text into multiple lines, and it cannot display the newline character. Use the QPainter::drawText() overload that takes a rectangle instead if you want to draw multiple lines of text with the newline character, or if you want the text to be wrapped.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the baseline of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QRectF,System.String,QtGui.QTextOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given text with the currently defined text direction, beginning at the given position.</para>
            <para>This function does not handle the newline character (\n), as it cannot break text into multiple lines, and it cannot display the newline character. Use the QPainter::drawText() overload that takes a rectangle instead if you want to draw multiple lines of text with the newline character, or if you want the text to be wrapped.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the baseline of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.String,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given text within the provided rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.drawText(rect, Qt::AlignCenter, tr(&quot;Qt by\nNokia&quot;));</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.String,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given text within the provided rectangle according to the specified flags. The boundingRect (if not null) is set to the what the bounding rectangle should be in order to enclose the whole text.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-coordinate of rectangle is used as the top of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(QtCore.QPointF,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the given text with the currently defined text direction, beginning at the given position.</para>
            <para>This function does not handle the newline character (\n), as it cannot break text into multiple lines, and it cannot display the newline character. Use the QPainter::drawText() overload that takes a rectangle instead if you want to draw multiple lines of text with the newline character, or if you want the text to be wrapped.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the baseline of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given text at position (x, y), using the painter's currently defined text direction.</para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the baseline of the font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawText(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.String,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws the given text within the rectangle with origin (x, y), width and height.</para>
            <para>The boundingRect (if not null) is set to the actual bounding rectangle of the output. The flags argument is a bitwise OR of the following flags:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::AlignLeft</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignRight</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignHCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignJustify</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignTop</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignBottom</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignVCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::AlignCenter</para>
            <para>Qt::TextSingleLine</para>
            <para>Qt::TextExpandTabs</para>
            <para>Qt::TextShowMnemonic</para>
            <para>Qt::TextWordWrap</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>By default, QPainter draws text anti-aliased.</para>
            <para>Note: The y-position is used as the top of the font.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::AlignmentFlag and Qt::TextFlag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawTiledPixmap(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a tiled pixmap, inside the given rectangle with its origin at the given position.</para>
            <para>Calling drawTiledPixmap() is similar to calling drawPixmap() several times to fill (tile) an area with a pixmap, but is potentially much more efficient depending on the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>See also drawPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawTiledPixmap(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a tiled pixmap, inside the given rectangle with its origin at the given position.</para>
            <para>Calling drawTiledPixmap() is similar to calling drawPixmap() several times to fill (tile) an area with a pixmap, but is potentially much more efficient depending on the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>See also drawPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawTiledPixmap(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a tiled pixmap, inside the given rectangle with its origin at the given position.</para>
            <para>Calling drawTiledPixmap() is similar to calling drawPixmap() several times to fill (tile) an area with a pixmap, but is potentially much more efficient depending on the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>See also drawPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawTiledPixmap(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a tiled pixmap, inside the given rectangle with its origin at the given position.</para>
            <para>Calling drawTiledPixmap() is similar to calling drawPixmap() several times to fill (tile) an area with a pixmap, but is potentially much more efficient depending on the underlying window system.</para>
            <para>See also drawPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.DrawTiledPixmap(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a tiled pixmap in the specified rectangle.</para>
            <para>(x, y) specifies the top-left point in the paint device that is to be drawn onto; with the given width and height. (sx, sy) specifies the top-left point in the pixmap that is to be drawn; this defaults to (0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.End">
            <summary>
            <para>Ends painting. Any resources used while painting are released. You don't normally need to call this since it is called by the destructor.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the painter is no longer active; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also begin() and isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.EndNativePainting">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the painter after manually issuing native painting commands. Lets the painter restore any native state that it relies on before calling any other painter commands.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also beginNativePainting().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.EraseRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Erases the area inside the given rectangle. Equivalent to calling</para>
            <para> fillRect(rectangle, background()).</para>
            <para>See also fillRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.EraseRect(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Erases the area inside the given rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.EraseRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Erases the area inside the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillPath(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills the given path using the given brush. The outline is not drawn.</para>
            <para>Alternatively, you can specify a QColor instead of a QBrush; the QBrush constructor (taking a QColor argument) will automatically create a solid pattern brush.</para>
            <para>See also drawPath().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the brush specified.</para>
            <para>Alternatively, you can specify a QColor instead of a QBrush; the QBrush constructor (taking a QColor argument) will automatically create a solid pattern brush.</para>
            <para>See also drawRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the specified brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the color specified.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the color specified.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the specified color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the specified color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the brush style specified.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the given rectangle with the brush style specified.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height, using the given brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height, using the given color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height, using the given color.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FillRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Fills the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height, using the brush style specified.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FontInfo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font info for the painter if the painter is active. Otherwise, the return value is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also font(), isActive(), and Settings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.FontMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font metrics for the painter if the painter is active. Otherwise, the return value is undefined.</para>
            <para>See also font(), isActive(), and Settings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.HasClipping">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if clipping has been set; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setClipping() and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.InitFrom(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initializes the painters pen, background and font to the same as the given widget. This function is called automatically when the painter is opened on a QWidget.</para>
            <para>See also begin() and Settings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.IsActive">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if begin() has been called and end() has not yet been called; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also begin() and QPaintDevice::paintingActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.PaintEngine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paint engine that the painter is currently operating on if the painter is active; otherwise 0.</para>
            <para>See also isActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Redirected(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Using QWidget::render() obsoletes the use of this function.</para>
            <para>Returns the replacement for given device. The optional out parameter offset returns the offset within the replaced device.</para>
            <para>Warning: Making use of redirections in the QPainter API implies that QPainter::begin() and QPaintDevice destructors need to hold a mutex for a short period. This can impact performance. Use of QWidget::render is strongly encouraged.</para>
            <para>Note: This function is thread-safe.</para>
            <para>See also setRedirected() and restoreRedirected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.ResetMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets any transformations that were made using translate(), scale(), shear(), rotate(), setWorldMatrix(), setViewport() and setWindow().</para>
            <para>It is advisable to use resetTransform() instead of this function to preserve the properties of perspective transformations.</para>
            <para>See also Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.ResetTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets any transformations that were made using translate(), scale(), shear(), rotate(), setWorldTransform(), setViewport() and setWindow().</para>
            <para>See also Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Restore">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the current painter state (pops a saved state off the stack).</para>
            <para>See also save().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.RestoreRedirected(QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Using QWidget::render() obsoletes the use of this function.</para>
            <para>Restores the previous redirection for the given device after a call to setRedirected().</para>
            <para>Warning: Making use of redirections in the QPainter API implies that QPainter::begin() and QPaintDevice destructors need to hold a mutex for a short period. This can impact performance. Use of QWidget::render is strongly encouraged.</para>
            <para>Note: This function is thread-safe.</para>
            <para>See also redirected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Rotate(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Rotates the coordinate system the given angle clockwise.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform() and Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Save">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the current painter state (pushes the state onto a stack). A save() must be followed by a corresponding restore(); the end() function unwinds the stack.</para>
            <para>See also restore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Scale(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scales the coordinate system by (sx, sy).</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform() and Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetBrush(QtCore.Qt.BrushStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's brush to black color and the specified style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetBrushOrigin(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the brush origin to position.</para>
            <para>The brush origin specifies the (0, 0) coordinate of the painter's brush.</para>
            <para>Note that while the brushOrigin() was necessary to adopt the parent's background for a widget in Qt 3, this is no longer the case since the Qt 4 painter doesn't paint the background unless you explicitly tell it to do so by setting the widget's autoFillBackground property to true.</para>
            <para>See also brushOrigin() and Settings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetBrushOrigin(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush's origin to point (x, y).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetClipPath(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtCore.Qt.ClipOperation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables clipping, and sets the clip path for the painter to the given path, with the clip operation.</para>
            <para>Note that the clip path is specified in logical (painter) coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also clipPath(), clipRegion(), and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetClipRect(QtCore.QRectF,QtCore.Qt.ClipOperation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables clipping, and sets the clip region to the given rectangle using the given clip operation. The default operation is to replace the current clip rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note that the clip rectangle is specified in logical (painter) coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also clipRegion(), setClipping(), and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetClipRect(QtCore.QRect,QtCore.Qt.ClipOperation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables clipping, and sets the clip region to the given rectangle using the given clip operation. The default operation is to replace the current clip rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note that the clip rectangle is specified in logical (painter) coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also clipRegion(), setClipping(), and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetClipRect(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.ClipOperation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables clipping, and sets the clip region to the given rectangle using the given clip operation. The default operation is to replace the current clip rectangle.</para>
            <para>Note that the clip rectangle is specified in logical (painter) coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also clipRegion(), setClipping(), and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetClipRegion(QtGui.QRegion,QtCore.Qt.ClipOperation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the clip region to the given region using the specified clip operation. The default clip operation is to replace the current clip region.</para>
            <para>Note that the clip region is given in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also clipRegion(), setClipRect(), and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetClipping(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Enables clipping if enable is true, or disables clipping if enable is false.</para>
            <para>See also hasClipping() and Clipping.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetMatrix(QtGui.QMatrix,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use setWorldTransform() instead.</para>
            <para>See also matrix() and setWorldTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetPen(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's pen to have style Qt::SolidLine, width 0 and the specified color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetPen(QtCore.Qt.PenStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's pen to have the given style, width 0 and black color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetRedirected(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Please use QWidget::render() instead.</para>
            <para>Redirects all paint commands for the given paint device, to the replacement device. The optional point offset defines an offset within the source device.</para>
            <para>The redirection will not be effective until the begin() function has been called; make sure to call end() for the given device's painter (if any) before redirecting. Call restoreRedirected() to restore the previous redirection.</para>
            <para>Warning: Making use of redirections in the QPainter API implies that QPainter::begin() and QPaintDevice destructors need to hold a mutex for a short period. This can impact performance. Use of QWidget::render is strongly encouraged.</para>
            <para>Note: This function is thread-safe.</para>
            <para>See also redirected() and restoreRedirected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetRedirected(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Please use QWidget::render() instead.</para>
            <para>Redirects all paint commands for the given paint device, to the replacement device. The optional point offset defines an offset within the source device.</para>
            <para>The redirection will not be effective until the begin() function has been called; make sure to call end() for the given device's painter (if any) before redirecting. Call restoreRedirected() to restore the previous redirection.</para>
            <para>Warning: Making use of redirections in the QPainter API implies that QPainter::begin() and QPaintDevice destructors need to hold a mutex for a short period. This can impact performance. Use of QWidget::render is strongly encouraged.</para>
            <para>Note: This function is thread-safe.</para>
            <para>See also redirected() and restoreRedirected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetRenderHint(QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given render hint on the painter if on is true; otherwise clears the render hint.</para>
            <para>See also setRenderHints(), renderHints(), and Rendering Quality.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetRenderHints(QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given render hints on the painter if on is true; otherwise clears the render hints.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setRenderHint(), renderHints(), and Rendering Quality.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetTransform(QtGui.QTransform,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the world transformation matrix. If combine is true, the specified transform is combined with the current matrix; otherwise it replaces the current matrix.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also transform() and setWorldTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetViewport(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's viewport rectangle to be the rectangle beginning at (x, y) with the given width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetWindow(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's window to the rectangle beginning at (x, y) and the given width and height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetWorldMatrix(QtGui.QMatrix,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the transformation matrix to matrix and enables transformations.</para>
            <para>Note: It is advisable to use setWorldTransform() instead of this function to preserve the properties of perspective transformations.</para>
            <para>If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current transformation matrix; otherwise matrix replaces the current transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>If matrix is the identity matrix and combine is false, this function calls setWorldMatrixEnabled(false). (The identity matrix is the matrix where QMatrix::m11() and QMatrix::m22() are 1.0 and the rest are 0.0.)</para>
            <para>The following functions can transform the coordinate system without using a QMatrix:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>translate()</para>
            <para>scale()</para>
            <para>shear()</para>
            <para>rotate()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>They operate on the painter's worldMatrix() and are implemented like this:</para>
            <para> void QPainter::rotate(qreal angle)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QMatrix matrix;</para>
            <para>     matrix.rotate(angle);</para>
            <para>     setWorldMatrix(matrix, true);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Note that when using setWorldMatrix() function you should always have combine be true when you are drawing into a QPicture. Otherwise it may not be possible to replay the picture with additional transformations; using the translate(), scale(), etc. convenience functions is safe.</para>
            <para>For more information about the coordinate system, transformations and window-viewport conversion, see Coordinate System.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also worldMatrix(), setWorldTransform(), and QTransform.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.SetWorldTransform(QtGui.QTransform,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the world transformation matrix. If combine is true, the specified matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise it replaces the current matrix.</para>
            <para>See also worldTransform(), transform(), and setTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Shear(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shears the coordinate system by (sh, sv).</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform() and Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.StrokePath(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPen)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the outline (strokes) the path path with the pen specified by pen</para>
            <para>See also fillPath() and Drawing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.TestRenderHint(QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if hint is set; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also renderHints() and setRenderHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Translate(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the coordinate system by the given offset; i.e. the given offset is added to points.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform() and Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Translate(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Translates the coordinate system by the given offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates the coordinate system by the given offset; i.e. the given offset is added to points.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform() and Coordinate Transformations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the painter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current background brush.</para>
            <para>Sets the background brush of the painter to the given brush.</para>
            <para>The background brush is the brush that is filled in when drawing opaque text, stippled lines and bitmaps. The background brush has no effect in transparent background mode (which is the default).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.BackgroundMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current background mode.</para>
            <para>Sets the background mode of the painter to the given mode</para>
            <para>Qt::TransparentMode (the default) draws stippled lines and text without setting the background pixels. Qt::OpaqueMode fills these space with the current background color.</para>
            <para>Note that in order to draw a bitmap or pixmap transparently, you must use QPixmap::setMask().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Brush">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the painter's current brush.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's brush to the given brush.</para>
            <para>The painter's brush defines how shapes are filled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.BrushOrigin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set brush origin.</para>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush's origin to the given position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.compositionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current composition mode.</para>
            <para>Sets the composition mode to the given mode.</para>
            <para>Warning: Only a QPainter operating on a QImage fully supports all composition modes. The RasterOp modes are supported for X11 as described in compositionMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set font used for drawing text.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's font to the given font.</para>
            <para>This font is used by subsequent drawText() functions. The text color is the same as the pen color.</para>
            <para>If you set a font that isn't available, Qt finds a close match. font() will return what you set using setFont() and fontInfo() returns the font actually being used (which may be the same).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout direction used by the painter when drawing text.</para>
            <para>Sets the layout direction used by the painter when drawing text, to the specified direction.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::LayoutDirectionAuto, which will implicitly determine the direction from the text drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.MatrixEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Use worldMatrixEnabled() instead</para>
            <para>Use setWorldMatrixEnabled() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Opacity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the opacity of the painter. The default value is 1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the opacity of the painter to opacity. The value should be in the range 0.0 to 1.0, where 0.0 is fully transparent and 1.0 is fully opaque.</para>
            <para>Opacity set on the painter will apply to all drawing operations individually.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Pen">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the painter's current pen.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's pen to be the given pen.</para>
            <para>The pen defines how to draw lines and outlines, and it also defines the text color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.ViewTransformEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Enables view transformations if enable is true, or disables view transformations if enable is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Viewport">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the viewport rectangle.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's viewport rectangle to the given rectangle, and enables view transformations.</para>
            <para>The viewport rectangle is part of the view transformation. The viewport specifies the device coordinate system. Its sister, the window(), specifies the logical coordinate system.</para>
            <para>The default viewport rectangle is the same as the device's rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Window">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window rectangle.</para>
            <para>Sets the painter's window to the given rectangle, and enables view transformations.</para>
            <para>The window rectangle is part of the view transformation. The window specifies the logical coordinate system. Its sister, the viewport(), specifies the device coordinate system.</para>
            <para>The default window rectangle is the same as the device's rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.WorldMatrixEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Enables transformations if enable is true, or disables transformations if enable is false. The world transformation matrix is not changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.ClipPath">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently clip as a path. Note that the clip path is given in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Warning: QPainter does not store the combined clip explicitly as this is handled by the underlying QPaintEngine, so the path is recreated on demand and transformed to the current logical coordinate system. This is potentially an expensive operation.</para>
            <para>See also setClipPath(), clipRegion(), and setClipping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.ClipRegion">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set clip region. Note that the clip region is given in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Warning: QPainter does not store the combined clip explicitly as this is handled by the underlying QPaintEngine, so the path is recreated on demand and transformed to the current logical coordinate system. This is potentially an expensive operation.</para>
            <para>See also setClipRegion(), clipPath(), and setClipping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Matrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Use worldTransform() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setMatrix() and worldTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHints">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a flag that specifies the rendering hints that are set for this painter.</para>
            <para>See also setRenderHints(), testRenderHint(), and Rendering Quality.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.Transform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the world transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setTransform() and worldTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.WorldMatrix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the world transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>It is advisable to use worldTransform() because worldMatrix() does not preserve the properties of perspective transformations.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldMatrix(), Coordinate Transformations, and Coordinate System.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.WorldTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the world transformation matrix.</para>
            <para>See also setWorldTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment">
            <summary>
            This class is used in conjunction with the QPainter::drawPixmapFragments() function to specify how a pixmap, or sub-rect of a pixmap, is drawn.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The sourceLeft, sourceTop, width and height variables are used as a source rectangle within the pixmap passed into the QPainter::drawPixmapFragments() function. The variables x, y, width and height are used to calculate the target rectangle that is drawn. x and y denotes the center of the target rectangle. The width and height in the target rectangle is scaled by the scaleX and scaleY values. The resulting target rectangle is then rotated rotation degrees around the x, y center point.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter::drawPixmapFragments().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.Create(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.QRectF,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function that returns a QPainter::PixmapFragment that is initialized with the pos, sourceRect, scaleX, scaleY, rotation, opacity parameters.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the height of the source rectangle and is used to calculate the height of the target rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.Opacity">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the opacity of the target rectangle, where 0.0 is fully transparent and 1.0 is fully opaque.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.Rotation">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the rotation of the target rectangle in degrees. The target rectangle is rotated after it has been scaled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.ScaleX">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the horizontal scale of the target rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.ScaleY">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the vertical scale of the target rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.SourceLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the left coordinate of the source rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.SourceTop">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the top coordinate of the source rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the width of the source rectangle and is used to calculate the width of the target rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.X">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the x coordinate of center point in the target rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragment.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the y coordinate of the center point in the target rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines the modes supported for digital image compositing. Composition modes are used to specify how the pixels in one image, the source, are merged with the pixel in another image, the destination.</para>
            <para>Please note that the bitwise raster operation modes, denoted with a RasterOp prefix, are only natively supported in the X11 and raster paint engines. This means that the only way to utilize these modes on the Mac is via a QImage. The RasterOp denoted blend modes are not supported for pens and brushes with alpha components. Also, turning on the QPainter::Antialiasing render hint will effectively disable the RasterOp modes.</para>
            <para>The most common type is SourceOver (often referred to as just alpha blending) where the source pixel is blended on top of the destination pixel in such a way that the alpha component of the source defines the translucency of the pixel.</para>
            <para>When the paint device is a QImage, the image format must be set to Format_ARGB32Premultiplied or Format_ARGB32 for the composition modes to have any effect. For performance the premultiplied version is the preferred format.</para>
            <para>When a composition mode is set it applies to all painting operator, pens, brushes, gradients and pixmap/image drawing.</para>
            <para>See also compositionMode(), setCompositionMode(), Composition Modes, and Image Composition Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>The pixels in the destination are cleared (set to fully transparent) independent of the source.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_ColorBurn">
            <summary>
            <para>The destination color is darkened to reflect the source color. A white source color leaves the destination color unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_ColorDodge">
            <summary>
            <para>The destination color is brightened to reflect the source color. A black source color leaves the destination color unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Darken">
            <summary>
            <para>The darker of the source and destination colors is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Destination">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the destination pixel. This means that the blending has no effect. This mode is the inverse of CompositionMode_Source.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_DestinationAtop">
            <summary>
            <para>The destination pixel is blended on top of the source, with the alpha of the destination pixel is reduced by the alpha of the destination pixel. This mode is the inverse of CompositionMode_SourceAtop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_DestinationIn">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the destination, where the alpha is reduced by that of the source. This mode is the inverse of CompositionMode_SourceIn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_DestinationOut">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the destination, where the alpha is reduced by the inverse of the source. This mode is the inverse of CompositionMode_SourceOut.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_DestinationOver">
            <summary>
            <para>The alpha of the destination is used to blend it on top of the source pixels. This mode is the inverse of CompositionMode_SourceOver.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Difference">
            <summary>
            <para>Subtracts the darker of the colors from the lighter. Painting with white inverts the destination color, whereas painting with black leaves the destination color unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Exclusion">
            <summary>
            <para>Similar to CompositionMode_Difference, but with a lower contrast. Painting with white inverts the destination color, whereas painting with black leaves the destination color unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_HardLight">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies or screens the colors depending on the source color. A light source color will lighten the destination color, whereas a dark source color will darken the destination color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Lighten">
            <summary>
            <para>The lighter of the source and destination colors is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Multiply">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the source color multiplied by the destination. Multiplying a color with white leaves the color unchanged, while multiplying a color with black produces black.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Overlay">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies or screens the colors depending on the destination color. The destination color is mixed with the source color to reflect the lightness or darkness of the destination.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Plus">
            <summary>
            <para>Both the alpha and color of the source and destination pixels are added together.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Screen">
            <summary>
            <para>The source and destination colors are inverted and then multiplied. Screening a color with white produces white, whereas screening a color with black leaves the color unchanged.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_SoftLight">
            <summary>
            <para>Darkens or lightens the colors depending on the source color. Similar to CompositionMode_HardLight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Source">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the source pixel. (This means a basic copy operation and is identical to SourceOver when the source pixel is opaque).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_SourceAtop">
            <summary>
            <para>The source pixel is blended on top of the destination, with the alpha of the source pixel reduced by the alpha of the destination pixel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_SourceIn">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the source, where the alpha is reduced by that of the destination.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_SourceOut">
            <summary>
            <para>The output is the source, where the alpha is reduced by the inverse of destination.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_SourceOver">
            <summary>
            <para>This is the default mode. The alpha of the source is used to blend the pixel on top of the destination.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.CompositionMode_Xor">
            <summary>
            <para>The source, whose alpha is reduced with the inverse of the destination alpha, is merged with the destination, whose alpha is reduced by the inverse of the source alpha. CompositionMode_Xor is not the same as the bitwise Xor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_NotSource">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise operation where the source pixels are inverted (NOT src).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_NotSourceAndDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise operation where the source is inverted and then AND'ed with the destination ((NOT src) AND dst).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_NotSourceAndNotDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise NOR operation on the source and destination pixels ((NOT src) AND (NOT dst)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_NotSourceOrNotDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise NAND operation on the source and destination pixels ((NOT src) OR (NOT dst)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_NotSourceXorDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise operation where the source pixels are inverted and then XOR'ed with the destination ((NOT src) XOR dst).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_SourceAndDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise AND operation on the source and destination pixels (src AND dst).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_SourceAndNotDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise operation where the source is AND'ed with the inverted destination pixels (src AND (NOT dst)).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_SourceOrDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise OR operation on the source and destination pixels (src OR dst).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.CompositionMode.RasterOp_SourceXorDestination">
            <summary>
            <para>Does a bitwise XOR operation on the source and destination pixels (src XOR dst).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragmentHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter::drawPixmapFragments() and QPainter::PixmapFragment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.PixmapFragmentHint.OpaqueHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the pixmap fragments to be drawn are opaque. Opaque fragments are potentially faster to draw.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Renderhints are used to specify flags to QPainter that may or may not be respected by any given engine.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also renderHints(), setRenderHint(), Rendering Quality, and Concentric Circles Example.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint.Antialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the engine should antialias edges of primitives if possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint.HighQualityAntialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>An OpenGL-specific rendering hint indicating that the engine should use fragment programs and offscreen rendering for antialiasing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint.NonCosmeticDefaultPen">
            <summary>
            <para>The engine should interpret pens with a width of 0 (which otherwise enables QPen::isCosmetic()) as being a non-cosmetic pen with a width of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint.SmoothPixmapTransform">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the engine should use a smooth pixmap transformation algorithm (such as bilinear) rather than nearest neighbor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainter.RenderHint.TextAntialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the engine should antialias text if possible. To forcibly disable antialiasing for text, do not use this hint. Instead, set QFont::NoAntialias on your font's style strategy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainterPath">
            <summary>
            The QPainterPath class provides a container for painting operations, enabling graphical shapes to be constructed and reused.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A painter path is an object composed of a number of graphical building blocks, such as rectangles, ellipses, lines, and curves. Building blocks can be joined in closed subpaths, for example as a rectangle or an ellipse. A closed path has coinciding start and end points. Or they can exist independently as unclosed subpaths, such as lines and curves.</para>
            <para>A QPainterPath object can be used for filling, outlining, and clipping. To generate fillable outlines for a given painter path, use the QPainterPathStroker class. The main advantage of painter paths over normal drawing operations is that complex shapes only need to be created once; then they can be drawn many times using only calls to the QPainter::drawPath() function.</para>
            <para>QPainterPath provides a collection of functions that can be used to obtain information about the path and its elements. In addition it is possible to reverse the order of the elements using the toReversed() function. There are also several functions to convert this painter path object into a polygon representation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Composing a QPainterPath</para>
            <para>A QPainterPath object can be constructed as an empty path, with a given start point, or as a copy of another QPainterPath object. Once created, lines and curves can be added to the path using the lineTo(), arcTo(), cubicTo() and quadTo() functions. The lines and curves stretch from the currentPosition() to the position passed as argument.</para>
            <para>The currentPosition() of the QPainterPath object is always the end position of the last subpath that was added (or the initial start point). Use the moveTo() function to move the currentPosition() without adding a component. The moveTo() function implicitly starts a new subpath, and closes the previous one. Another way of starting a new subpath is to call the closeSubpath() function which closes the current path by adding a line from the currentPosition() back to the path's start position. Note that the new path will have (0, 0) as its initial currentPosition().</para>
            <para>QPainterPath class also provides several convenience functions to add closed subpaths to a painter path: addEllipse(), addPath(), addRect(), addRegion() and addText(). The addPolygon() function adds an unclosed subpath. In fact, these functions are all collections of moveTo(), lineTo() and cubicTo() operations.</para>
            <para>In addition, a path can be added to the current path using the connectPath() function. But note that this function will connect the last element of the current path to the first element of given one by adding a line.</para>
            <para>Below is a code snippet that shows how a QPainterPath object can be used:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QPainterPath path;</para>
            <para> path.addRect(20, 20, 60, 60);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> path.moveTo(0, 0);</para>
            <para> path.cubicTo(99, 0,  50, 50,  99, 99);</para>
            <para> path.cubicTo(0, 99,  50, 50,  0, 0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.fillRect(0, 0, 100, 100, Qt::white);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(QPen(QColor(79, 106, 25), 1, Qt::SolidLine,</para>
            <para>                     Qt::FlatCap, Qt::MiterJoin));</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(QColor(122, 163, 39));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(path);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The painter path is initially empty when constructed. We first add a rectangle, which is a closed subpath. Then we add two bezier curves which together form a closed subpath even though they are not closed individually. Finally we draw the entire path. The path is filled using the default fill rule, Qt::OddEvenFill. Qt provides two methods for filling paths:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::OddEvenFillQt::WindingFill</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See the Qt::FillRule documentation for the definition of the rules. A painter path's currently set fill rule can be retrieved using the fillRule() function, and altered using the setFillRule() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPainterPath Information</para>
            <para>The QPainterPath class provides a collection of functions that returns information about the path and its elements.</para>
            <para>The currentPosition() function returns the end point of the last subpath that was added (or the initial start point). The elementAt() function can be used to retrieve the various subpath elements, the number of elements can be retrieved using the elementCount() function, and the isEmpty() function tells whether this QPainterPath object contains any elements at all.</para>
            <para>The controlPointRect() function returns the rectangle containing all the points and control points in this path. This function is significantly faster to compute than the exact boundingRect() which returns the bounding rectangle of this painter path with floating point precision.</para>
            <para>Finally, QPainterPath provides the contains() function which can be used to determine whether a given point or rectangle is inside the path, and the intersects() function which determines if any of the points inside a given rectangle also are inside this path.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPainterPath Conversion</para>
            <para>For compatibility reasons, it might be required to simplify the representation of a painter path: QPainterPath provides the toFillPolygon(), toFillPolygons() and toSubpathPolygons() functions which convert the painter path into a polygon. The toFillPolygon() returns the painter path as one single polygon, while the two latter functions return a list of polygons.</para>
            <para>The toFillPolygons() and toSubpathPolygons() functions are provided because it is usually faster to draw several small polygons than to draw one large polygon, even though the total number of points drawn is the same. The difference between the two is the number of polygons they return: The toSubpathPolygons() creates one polygon for each subpath regardless of intersecting subpaths (i.e. overlapping bounding rectangles), while the toFillPolygons() functions creates only one polygon for overlapping subpaths.</para>
            <para>The toFillPolygon() and toFillPolygons() functions first convert all the subpaths to polygons, then uses a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule. Note that rewinding inserts additional lines in the polygon so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Examples</para>
            <para>Qt provides the Painter Paths Example and the Vector Deformation Demo which are located in Qt's example and demo directories respectively.</para>
            <para>The Painter Paths Example shows how painter paths can be used to build complex shapes for rendering and lets the user experiment with the filling and stroking. The Vector Deformation Demo shows how to use QPainterPath to draw text.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Painter Paths ExampleVector Deformation Demo</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainterPathStroker, QPainter, QRegion, and Painter Paths Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QPainterPath object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QPainterPath object with the given startPoint as its current position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.#ctor(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QPainterPath object that is a copy of the given path.</para>
            <para>See also operator=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddEllipse(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an ellipse within the specified boundingRectangle and adds it to the painter path as a closed subpath.</para>
            <para>The ellipse is composed of a clockwise curve, starting and finishing at zero degrees (the 3 o'clock position).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QRectF boundingRectangle;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addEllipse(boundingRectangle);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddEllipse(QtCore.QPointF,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an ellipse within the specified boundingRectangle and adds it to the painter path as a closed subpath.</para>
            <para>The ellipse is composed of a clockwise curve, starting and finishing at zero degrees (the 3 o'clock position).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QRectF boundingRectangle;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addEllipse(boundingRectangle);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddEllipse(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an ellipse within the specified boundingRectangle and adds it to the painter path as a closed subpath.</para>
            <para>The ellipse is composed of a clockwise curve, starting and finishing at zero degrees (the 3 o'clock position).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QRectF boundingRectangle;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addEllipse(boundingRectangle);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddPath(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given path to this path as a closed subpath.</para>
            <para>See also connectPath() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddPolygon(QtGui.QPolygonF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given polygon to the path as an (unclosed) subpath.</para>
            <para>Note that the current position after the polygon has been added, is the last point in polygon. To draw a line back to the first point, use the closeSubpath() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QPolygonF myPolygon;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addPolygon(myPolygon);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRect(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given rectangle to this path as a closed subpath.</para>
            <para>The rectangle is added as a clockwise set of lines. The painter path's current position after the rectangle has been added is at the top-left corner of the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QRectF myRectangle;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addRect(myRectangle);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given rectangle to this path as a closed subpath.</para>
            <para>The rectangle is added as a clockwise set of lines. The painter path's current position after the rectangle has been added is at the top-left corner of the rectangle.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QRectF myRectangle;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addRect(myRectangle);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRegion(QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given region to the path by adding each rectangle in the region as a separate closed subpath.</para>
            <para>See also addRect() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRoundRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a rectangle r with rounded corners to the path.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>See also addRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRoundRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a rectangle r with rounded corners to the path.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>See also addRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRoundRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a rectangle r with rounded corners to the path.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>See also addRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRoundRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a rectangle r with rounded corners to the path.</para>
            <para>The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.</para>
            <para>See also addRoundedRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRoundedRect(QtCore.QRectF,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.SizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given rectangle rect with rounded corners to the path.</para>
            <para>The xRadius and yRadius arguments specify the radii of the ellipses defining the corners of the rounded rectangle. When mode is Qt::RelativeSize, xRadius and yRadius are specified in percentage of half the rectangle's width and height respectively, and should be in the range 0.0 to 100.0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also addRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddRoundedRect(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtCore.Qt.SizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given rectangle rect with rounded corners to the path.</para>
            <para>The xRadius and yRadius arguments specify the radii of the ellipses defining the corners of the rounded rectangle. When mode is Qt::RelativeSize, xRadius and yRadius are specified in percentage of half the rectangle's width and height respectively, and should be in the range 0.0 to 100.0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also addRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddText(QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QFont,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given text to this path as a set of closed subpaths created from the font supplied. The subpaths are positioned so that the left end of the text's baseline lies at the specified point.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QFont myFont;</para>
            <para> QPointF baseline(x, y);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addText(baseline, myFont, tr(&quot;Qt&quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AddText(System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QFont,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given text to this path as a set of closed subpaths created from the font supplied. The subpaths are positioned so that the left end of the text's baseline lies at the specified point.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para> QFont myFont;</para>
            <para> QPointF baseline(x, y);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.addText(baseline, myFont, tr(&quot;Qt&quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.AngleAtPercent(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the angle of the path tangent at the percentage t. The argument t has to be between 0 and 1.</para>
            <para>Positive values for the angles mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.</para>
            <para>Note that similarly to the other percent methods, the percentage measurement is not linear with regards to the length if curves are present in the path. When curves are present the percentage argument is mapped to the t parameter of the Bezier equations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ArcMoveTo(QtCore.QRectF,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a move to that lies on the arc that occupies the given rectangle at angle.</para>
            <para>Angles are specified in degrees. Clockwise arcs can be specified using negative angles.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also moveTo() and arcTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ArcMoveTo(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a move to that lies on the arc that occupies the given rectangle at angle.</para>
            <para>Angles are specified in degrees. Clockwise arcs can be specified using negative angles.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also moveTo() and arcTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ArcTo(QtCore.QRectF,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an arc that occupies the given rectangle, beginning at the specified startAngle and extending sweepLength degrees counter-clockwise.</para>
            <para>Angles are specified in degrees. Clockwise arcs can be specified using negative angles.</para>
            <para>Note that this function connects the starting point of the arc to the current position if they are not already connected. After the arc has been added, the current position is the last point in arc. To draw a line back to the first point, use the closeSubpath() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPointF center, startPoint;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.moveTo(center);</para>
            <para> myPath.arcTo(boundingRect, startAngle,</para>
            <para>              sweepLength);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ArcTo(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an arc that occupies the given rectangle, beginning at the specified startAngle and extending sweepLength degrees counter-clockwise.</para>
            <para>Angles are specified in degrees. Clockwise arcs can be specified using negative angles.</para>
            <para>Note that this function connects the starting point of the arc to the current position if they are not already connected. After the arc has been added, the current position is the last point in arc. To draw a line back to the first point, use the closeSubpath() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPointF center, startPoint;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.moveTo(center);</para>
            <para> myPath.arcTo(boundingRect, startAngle,</para>
            <para>              sweepLength);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of this painter path as a rectangle with floating point precision.</para>
            <para>See also controlPointRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.CloseSubpath">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the current subpath by drawing a line to the beginning of the subpath, automatically starting a new path. The current point of the new path is (0, 0).</para>
            <para>If the subpath does not contain any elements, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also moveTo() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ConnectPath(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Connects the given path to this path by adding a line from the last element of this path to the first element of the given path.</para>
            <para>See also addPath() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Contains(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given point is inside the path, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also intersects().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Contains(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given rectangle is inside the path, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Contains(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given path p is contained within the current path. Returns false if any edges of the current path and p intersect.</para>
            <para>Set operations on paths will treat the paths as areas. Non-closed paths will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also intersects().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ControlPointRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle containing all the points and control points in this path.</para>
            <para>This function is significantly faster to compute than the exact boundingRect(), and the returned rectangle is always a superset of the rectangle returned by boundingRect().</para>
            <para>See also boundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.CubicTo(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a cubic Bezier curve between the current position and the given endPoint using the control points specified by c1, and c2.</para>
            <para>After the curve is added, the current position is updated to be at the end point of the curve.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.cubicTo(c1, c2, endPoint);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.CubicTo(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a cubic Bezier curve between the current position and the given endPoint using the control points specified by c1, and c2.</para>
            <para>After the curve is added, the current position is updated to be at the end point of the curve.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	 QLinearGradient myGradient;</para>
            <para> QPen myPen;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainterPath myPath;</para>
            <para> myPath.cubicTo(c1, c2, endPoint);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> painter.setBrush(myGradient);</para>
            <para> painter.setPen(myPen);</para>
            <para> painter.drawPath(myPath);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.CurrentPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current position of the path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the element at the given index in the painter path.</para>
            <para>See also ElementType, elementCount(), and isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of path elements in the painter path.</para>
            <para>See also ElementType, elementAt(), and isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Intersected(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a path which is the intersection of this path's fill area and p's fill area. Bezier curves may be flattened to line segments due to numerical instability of doing bezier curve intersections.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Intersects(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if any point in the given rectangle intersects the path; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>There is an intersection if any of the lines making up the rectangle crosses a part of the path or if any part of the rectangle overlaps with any area enclosed by the path. This function respects the current fillRule to determine what is considered inside the path.</para>
            <para>See also contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Intersects(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the current path intersects at any point the given path p. Also returns true if the current path contains or is contained by any part of p.</para>
            <para>Set operations on paths will treat the paths as areas. Non-closed paths will be treated as implicitly closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also contains().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if either there are no elements in this path, or if the only element is a MoveToElement; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also elementCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the current path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.LineTo(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a straight line from the current position to the given endPoint. After the line is drawn, the current position is updated to be at the end point of the line.</para>
            <para>See also addPolygon(), addRect(), and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.LineTo(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a straight line from the current position to the given endPoint. After the line is drawn, the current position is updated to be at the end point of the line.</para>
            <para>See also addPolygon(), addRect(), and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.MoveTo(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the current point to the given point, implicitly starting a new subpath and closing the previous one.</para>
            <para>See also closeSubpath() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.MoveTo(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the current point to the given point, implicitly starting a new subpath and closing the previous one.</para>
            <para>See also closeSubpath() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.op_Inequality(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this painter path differs from the given path.</para>
            <para>Note that comparing paths may involve a per element comparison which can be slow for complex paths.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.op_BitwiseAnd(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the intersection of this path and the other path.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also intersected(), operator&amp;=(), united(), and operator|().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.op_Addition(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the union of this path and the other path. This function is equivalent to operator|().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also united(), operator+=(), and operator-().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Subtracts the other path from a copy of this path, and returns the copy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also subtracted(), operator-=(), and operator+().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.op_Equality(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this painterpath is equal to the given path.</para>
            <para>Note that comparing paths may involve a per element comparison which can be slow for complex paths.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.op_BitwiseOr(QtGui.QPainterPath,QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the union of this path and the other path.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also united(), operator|=(), intersected(), and operator&amp;().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.PercentAtLength(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns percentage of the whole path at the specified length len.</para>
            <para>Note that similarly to other percent methods, the percentage measurement is not linear with regards to the length, if curves are present in the path. When curves are present the percentage argument is mapped to the t parameter of the Bezier equations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.PointAtPercent(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point at at the percentage t of the current path. The argument t has to be between 0 and 1.</para>
            <para>Note that similarly to other percent methods, the percentage measurement is not linear with regards to the length, if curves are present in the path. When curves are present the percentage argument is mapped to the t parameter of the Bezier equations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.QuadTo(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a quadratic Bezier curve between the current position and the given endPoint with the control point specified by c.</para>
            <para>After the curve is added, the current point is updated to be at the end point of the curve.</para>
            <para>See also cubicTo() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.QuadTo(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a quadratic Bezier curve between the current position and the given endPoint with the control point specified by c.</para>
            <para>After the curve is added, the current point is updated to be at the end point of the curve.</para>
            <para>See also cubicTo() and Composing a QPainterPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.SetElementPositionAt(System.Int32,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the x and y coordinate of the element at index index to x and y.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Simplified">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a simplified version of this path. This implies merging all subpaths that intersect, and returning a path containing no intersecting edges. Consecutive parallel lines will also be merged. The simplified path will always use the default fill rule, Qt::OddEvenFill. Bezier curves may be flattened to line segments due to numerical instability of doing bezier curve intersections.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.SlopeAtPercent(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the slope of the path at the percentage t. The argument t has to be between 0 and 1.</para>
            <para>Note that similarly to other percent methods, the percentage measurement is not linear with regards to the length, if curves are present in the path. When curves are present the percentage argument is mapped to the t parameter of the Bezier equations.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Subtracted(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a path which is p's fill area subtracted from this path's fill area.</para>
            <para>Set operations on paths will treat the paths as areas. Non-closed paths will be treated as implicitly closed. Bezier curves may be flattened to line segments due to numerical instability of doing bezier curve intersections.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.SubtractedInverted(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use subtracted() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also subtracted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Swap(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps painter path other with this painter path. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToFillPolygon">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a polygon using the QTransform matrix, and returns the polygon.</para>
            <para>The polygon is created by first converting all subpaths to polygons, then using a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule.</para>
            <para>Note that rewinding inserts addition lines in the polygon so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para>See also toSubpathPolygons(), toFillPolygons(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToFillPolygon(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a polygon using the QTransform matrix, and returns the polygon.</para>
            <para>The polygon is created by first converting all subpaths to polygons, then using a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule.</para>
            <para>Note that rewinding inserts addition lines in the polygon so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para>See also toSubpathPolygons(), toFillPolygons(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToFillPolygon(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a polygon using the QTransform matrix, and returns the polygon.</para>
            <para>The polygon is created by first converting all subpaths to polygons, then using a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule.</para>
            <para>Note that rewinding inserts addition lines in the polygon so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para>See also toSubpathPolygons(), toFillPolygons(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToFillPolygons">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a list of polygons using the QTransform matrix, and returns the list.</para>
            <para>The function differs from the toFillPolygon() function in that it creates several polygons. It is provided because it is usually faster to draw several small polygons than to draw one large polygon, even though the total number of points drawn is the same.</para>
            <para>The toFillPolygons() function differs from the toSubpathPolygons() function in that it create only polygon for subpaths that have overlapping bounding rectangles.</para>
            <para>Like the toFillPolygon() function, this function uses a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule. Note that rewinding inserts addition lines in the polygons so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para>See also toSubpathPolygons(), toFillPolygon(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToFillPolygons(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a list of polygons using the QTransform matrix, and returns the list.</para>
            <para>The function differs from the toFillPolygon() function in that it creates several polygons. It is provided because it is usually faster to draw several small polygons than to draw one large polygon, even though the total number of points drawn is the same.</para>
            <para>The toFillPolygons() function differs from the toSubpathPolygons() function in that it create only polygon for subpaths that have overlapping bounding rectangles.</para>
            <para>Like the toFillPolygon() function, this function uses a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule. Note that rewinding inserts addition lines in the polygons so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para>See also toSubpathPolygons(), toFillPolygon(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToFillPolygons(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a list of polygons using the QTransform matrix, and returns the list.</para>
            <para>The function differs from the toFillPolygon() function in that it creates several polygons. It is provided because it is usually faster to draw several small polygons than to draw one large polygon, even though the total number of points drawn is the same.</para>
            <para>The toFillPolygons() function differs from the toSubpathPolygons() function in that it create only polygon for subpaths that have overlapping bounding rectangles.</para>
            <para>Like the toFillPolygon() function, this function uses a rewinding technique to make sure that overlapping subpaths can be filled using the correct fill rule. Note that rewinding inserts addition lines in the polygons so the outline of the fill polygon does not match the outline of the path.</para>
            <para>See also toSubpathPolygons(), toFillPolygon(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToReversed">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a reversed copy of the path.</para>
            <para>It is the order of the elements that is reversed: If a QPainterPath is composed by calling the moveTo(), lineTo() and cubicTo() functions in the specified order, the reversed copy is composed by calling cubicTo(), lineTo() and moveTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToSubpathPolygons">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a list of polygons using the QTransform matrix, and returns the list.</para>
            <para>This function creates one polygon for each subpath regardless of intersecting subpaths (i.e. overlapping bounding rectangles). To make sure that such overlapping subpaths are filled correctly, use the toFillPolygons() function instead.</para>
            <para>See also toFillPolygons(), toFillPolygon(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToSubpathPolygons(QtGui.QMatrix)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a list of polygons using the QTransform matrix, and returns the list.</para>
            <para>This function creates one polygon for each subpath regardless of intersecting subpaths (i.e. overlapping bounding rectangles). To make sure that such overlapping subpaths are filled correctly, use the toFillPolygons() function instead.</para>
            <para>See also toFillPolygons(), toFillPolygon(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.ToSubpathPolygons(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the path into a list of polygons using the QTransform matrix, and returns the list.</para>
            <para>This function creates one polygon for each subpath regardless of intersecting subpaths (i.e. overlapping bounding rectangles). To make sure that such overlapping subpaths are filled correctly, use the toFillPolygons() function instead.</para>
            <para>See also toFillPolygons(), toFillPolygon(), and QPainterPath Conversion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Translate(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Translates all elements in the path by the given offset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Translate(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Translates all elements in the path by (dx, dy).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Translated(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a copy of the path that is translated by the given offset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Translated(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the path that is translated by (dx, dy).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also translate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.United(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a path which is the union of this path's fill area and p's fill area.</para>
            <para>Set operations on paths will treat the paths as areas. Non-closed paths will be treated as implicitly closed. Bezier curves may be flattened to line segments due to numerical instability of doing bezier curve intersections.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also intersected() and subtracted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this QPainterPath object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPath.FillRule">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the painter path's currently set fill rule.</para>
            <para>Sets the fill rule of the painter path to the given fillRule. Qt provides two methods for filling paths:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt::OddEvenFill (default)Qt::WindingFill</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element">
            <summary>
            The QPainterPath::Element class specifies the position and type of a subpath.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Once a QPainterPath object is constructed, subpaths like lines and curves can be added to the path (creating QPainterPath::LineToElement and QPainterPath::CurveToElement components).</para>
            <para>The lines and curves stretch from the currentPosition() to the position passed as argument. The currentPosition() of the QPainterPath object is always the end position of the last subpath that was added (or the initial start point). The moveTo() function can be used to move the currentPosition() without adding a line or curve, creating a QPainterPath::MoveToElement component.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainterPath.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element.IsCurveTo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the element is a curve, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also type and QPainterPath::CurveToElement.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element.IsLineTo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the element is a line, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also type and QPainterPath::LineToElement.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element.IsMoveTo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the element is moving the current position, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also type and QPainterPath::MoveToElement.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the type of element.</para>
            <para>See also isCurveTo(), isLineTo(), and isMoveTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element.X">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the x coordinate of the element's position.</para>
            <para>See also operator QPointF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPath.Element.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the y coordinate of the element's position.</para>
            <para>See also operator QPointF().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types of elements used to connect vertices in subpaths.</para>
            <para>Note that elements added as closed subpaths using the addEllipse(), addPath(), addPolygon(), addRect(), addRegion() and addText() convenience functions, is actually added to the path as a collection of separate elements using the moveTo(), lineTo() and cubicTo() functions.</para>
            <para>See also elementAt() and elementCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementType.CurveToDataElement">
            <summary>
            <para>The extra data required to describe a curve in a CurveToElement element.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementType.CurveToElement">
            <summary>
            <para>A curve. See also cubicTo() and quadTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementType.LineToElement">
            <summary>
            <para>A line. See also lineTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPainterPath.ElementType.MoveToElement">
            <summary>
            <para>A new subpath. See also moveTo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker">
            <summary>
            The QPainterPathStroker class is used to generate fillable outlines for a given painter path.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>By calling the createStroke() function, passing a given QPainterPath as argument, a new painter path representing the outline of the given path is created. The newly created painter path can then be filled to draw the original painter path's outline.</para>
            <para>You can control the various design aspects (width, cap styles, join styles and dash pattern) of the outlining using the following functions:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>setWidth()</para>
            <para>setCapStyle()</para>
            <para>setJoinStyle()</para>
            <para>setDashPattern()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The setDashPattern() function accepts both a Qt::PenStyle object and a vector representation of the pattern as argument.</para>
            <para>In addition you can specify a curve's threshold, controlling the granularity with which a curve is drawn, using the setCurveThreshold() function. The default threshold is a well adjusted value (0.25), and normally you should not need to modify it. However, you can make the curve's appearance smoother by decreasing its value.</para>
            <para>You can also control the miter limit for the generated outline using the setMiterLimit() function. The miter limit describes how far from each join the miter join can extend. The limit is specified in the units of width so the pixelwise miter limit will be miterlimit * width. This value is only used if the join style is Qt::MiterJoin.</para>
            <para>The painter path generated by the createStroke() function should only be used for outlining the given painter path. Otherwise it may cause unexpected behavior. Generated outlines also require the Qt::WindingFill rule which is set by default.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPen and QBrush.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new stroker.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.CreateStroke(QtGui.QPainterPath)">
            <summary>
            <para>Generates a new path that is a fillable area representing the outline of the given path.</para>
            <para>The various design aspects of the outline are based on the stroker's properties: width(), capStyle(), joinStyle(), dashPattern(), curveThreshold() and miterLimit().</para>
            <para>The generated path should only be used for outlining the given painter path. Otherwise it may cause unexpected behavior. Generated outlines also require the Qt::WindingFill rule which is set by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.SetDashPattern(QtCore.Qt.PenStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the dash pattern for the generated outlines to style.</para>
            <para>See also dashPattern().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the stroker.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.CapStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cap style of the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Sets the cap style of the generated outlines to style. If a dash pattern is set, each segment of the pattern is subject to the cap style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.CurveThreshold">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the curve flattening threshold for the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Specifies the curve flattening threshold, controlling the granularity with which the generated outlines' curve is drawn.</para>
            <para>The default threshold is a well adjusted value (0.25), and normally you should not need to modify it. However, you can make the curve's appearance smoother by decreasing its value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.DashOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dash offset for the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Sets the dash offset for the generated outlines to offset.</para>
            <para>See the documentation for QPen::setDashOffset() for a description of the dash offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.DashPattern">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dash pattern for the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Sets the dash pattern for the generated outlines to style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.JoinStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the join style of the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Sets the join style of the generated outlines to style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.MiterLimit">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the miter limit for the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Sets the miter limit of the generated outlines to limit.</para>
            <para>The miter limit describes how far from each join the miter join can extend. The limit is specified in units of the currently set width. So the pixelwise miter limit will be miterlimit * width.</para>
            <para>This value is only used if the join style is Qt::MiterJoin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPainterPathStroker.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the generated outlines.</para>
            <para>Sets the width of the generated outline painter path to width.</para>
            <para>The generated outlines will extend approximately 50% of width to each side of the given input path's original outline.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPalette">
            <summary>
            The QPalette class contains color groups for each widget state.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A palette consists of three color groups: Active, Disabled, and Inactive. All widgets in Qt contain a palette and use their palette to draw themselves. This makes the user interface easily configurable and easier to keep consistent.</para>
            <para>If you create a new widget we strongly recommend that you use the colors in the palette rather than hard-coding specific colors.</para>
            <para>The color groups:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Active group is used for the window that has keyboard focus.</para>
            <para>The Inactive group is used for other windows.</para>
            <para>The Disabled group is used for widgets (not windows) that are disabled for some reason.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Both active and inactive windows can contain disabled widgets. (Disabled widgets are often called inaccessible or grayed out.)</para>
            <para>In most styles, Active and Inactive look the same.</para>
            <para>Colors and brushes can be set for particular roles in any of a palette's color groups with setColor() and setBrush(). A color group contains a group of colors used by widgets for drawing themselves. We recommend that widgets use color group roles from the palette such as &amp;quot;foreground&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;base&amp;quot; rather than literal colors like &amp;quot;red&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;turquoise&amp;quot;. The color roles are enumerated and defined in the ColorRole documentation.</para>
            <para>We strongly recommend that you use the default palette of the current style (returned by QApplication::palette()) and modify that as necessary. This is done by Qt's widgets when they are drawn.</para>
            <para>To modify a color group you call the functions setColor() and setBrush(), depending on whether you want a pure color or a pixmap pattern.</para>
            <para>There are also corresponding color() and brush() getters, and a commonly used convenience function to get the ColorRole for the current ColorGroup: window(), windowText(), base(), etc.</para>
            <para>You can copy a palette using the copy constructor and test to see if two palettes are identical using isCopyOf().</para>
            <para>QPalette is optimized by the use of implicit sharing, so it is very efficient to pass QPalette objects as arguments.</para>
            <para>Warning: Some styles do not use the palette for all drawing, for instance, if they make use of native theme engines. This is the case for both the Windows XP, Windows Vista, and the Mac OS X styles.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QApplication::setPalette(), QWidget::setPalette(), and QColor.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a palette object that uses the application's default palette.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::setPalette() and QApplication::palette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a palette from the button color. The other colors are automatically calculated, based on this color. Window will be the button color as well.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor(QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of p.</para>
            <para>This constructor is fast thanks to implicit sharing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a palette from a button color and a window. The other colors are automatically calculated, based on these colors.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor(QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a palette object that uses the application's default palette.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::setPalette() and QApplication::palette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor(QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a palette. You can pass either brushes, pixmaps or plain colors for windowText, button, light, dark, mid, text, bright_text, base and window.</para>
            <para>See also QBrush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.GlobalColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a palette from the button color. The other colors are automatically calculated, based on this color. Window will be the button color as well.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.AlternateBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alternate base brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>Use window() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Base">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the base brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.BrightText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bright text foreground brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Brush(QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the brush that has been set for the given color role in the current ColorGroup.</para>
            <para>See also color(), setBrush(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Brush(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush in the specified color group, used for the given color role.</para>
            <para>See also color(), setBrush(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Button">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.ButtonText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button text foreground brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.CacheKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies the contents of this QPalette object. Distinct QPalette objects can have the same key if they refer to the same contents.</para>
            <para>The cacheKey() will change when the palette is altered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Color(QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the color that has been set for the given color role in the current ColorGroup.</para>
            <para>See also brush() and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Color(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color in the specified color group, used for the given color role.</para>
            <para>See also brush(), setColor(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Dark">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dark brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Foreground">
            <summary>
            <para>Use windowText() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Highlight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the highlight brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.HighlightedText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the highlighted text brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.IsBrushSet(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the ColorGroup cg and ColorRole cr has been set previously on this palette; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setBrush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.IsCopyOf(QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this palette and p are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither was subsequently modified; otherwise returns false. This is much stricter than equality.</para>
            <para>See also operator=() and operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.IsEqual(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true (usually quickly) if color group cg1 is equal to cg2; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Light">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the light brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Link">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the unvisited link text brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.LinkVisited">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visited link text brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Mid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mid brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Midlight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the midlight brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.op_Inequality(QtGui.QPalette,QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true (slowly) if this palette is different from p; otherwise returns false (usually quickly).</para>
            <para>Note: The current ColorGroup is not taken into account when comparing palettes</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.op_Equality(QtGui.QPalette,QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to p; otherwise returns false (slowly).</para>
            <para>Note: The current ColorGroup is not taken into account when comparing palettes</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Resolve">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new QPalette that has attributes copied from other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Resolve(QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new QPalette that has attributes copied from other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Resolve(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new QPalette that has attributes copied from other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.SerialNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a number that identifies the contents of this QPalette object. Distinct QPalette objects can only have the same serial number if they refer to the same contents (but they don't have to). Also, the serial number of a QPalette may change during the lifetime of the object.</para>
            <para>Use cacheKey() instead.</para>
            <para>Warning: The serial number doesn't necessarily change when the palette is altered. This means that it may be dangerous to use it as a cache key.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.SetBrush(QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the brush for the given color role to the specified brush for all groups in the palette.</para>
            <para>See also brush(), setColor(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.SetBrush(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush in the specified color group, used for the given color role, to brush.</para>
            <para>See also brush(), setColor(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.SetColor(QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the color used for the given color role, in all color groups, to the specified solid color.</para>
            <para>See also brush(), setColor(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.SetColor(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the color in the specified color group, used for the given color role, to the specified solid color.</para>
            <para>See also setBrush(), color(), and ColorRole.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.SetColorGroup(QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets a the group at cg. You can pass either brushes, pixmaps or plain colors for windowText, button, light, dark, mid, text, bright_text, base and window.</para>
            <para>See also QBrush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Shadow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the shadow brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text foreground brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.ToolTipBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tool tip base brush of the current color group. This brush is used by QToolTip and QWhatsThis.</para>
            <para>Note: Tool tips use the Inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.ToolTipText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tool tip text brush of the current color group. This brush is used by QToolTip and QWhatsThis.</para>
            <para>Note: Tool tips use the Inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Window">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window (general background) brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.WindowText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the window text (general foreground) brush of the current color group.</para>
            <para>See also ColorRole and brush().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPalette.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the palette.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPalette.CurrentColorGroup">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the palette's current color group.</para>
            <para>Set the palette's current color group to cg.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorGroup.Normal">
            <summary>
            <para>Synonym for Active</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole">
            <summary>
            <para>The ColorRole enum defines the different symbolic color roles used in current GUIs.</para>
            <para>The central roles are:</para>
            <para>There are some color roles used mostly for 3D bevel and shadow effects. All of these are normally derived from Window, and used in ways that depend on that relationship. For example, buttons depend on it to make the bevels look attractive, and Motif scroll bars depend on Mid to be slightly different from Window.</para>
            <para>Selected (marked) items have two roles:</para>
            <para>There are two color roles related to hyperlinks:</para>
            <para>Note that we do not use the Link and LinkVisited roles when rendering rich text in Qt, and that we recommend that you use CSS and the QTextDocument::setDefaultStyleSheet() function to alter the appearance of links. For example:</para>
            <para>     QTextBrowser browser;</para>
            <para>     QColor linkColor(Qt::red);</para>
            <para>     QString sheet = QString::fromLatin1(&quot;a { text-decoration: underline; color: %1 }&quot;).arg(linkColor.name());</para>
            <para>     browser.document()-&gt;setDefaultStyleSheet(sheet);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.AlternateBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Used as the alternate background color in views with alternating row colors (see QAbstractItemView::setAlternatingRowColors()).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>This value is obsolete. Use Window instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Base">
            <summary>
            <para>Used mostly as the background color for text entry widgets, but can also be used for other painting - such as the background of combobox drop down lists and toolbar handles. It is usually white or another light color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.BrightText">
            <summary>
            <para>A text color that is very different from WindowText, and contrasts well with e.g. Dark. Typically used for text that needs to be drawn where Text or WindowText would give poor contrast, such as on pressed push buttons. Note that text colors can be used for things other than just words; text colors are usually used for text, but it's quite common to use the text color roles for lines, icons, etc.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Button">
            <summary>
            <para>The general button background color. This background can be different from Window as some styles require a different background color for buttons.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.ButtonText">
            <summary>
            <para>A foreground color used with the Button color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Dark">
            <summary>
            <para>Darker than Button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Foreground">
            <summary>
            <para>This value is obsolete. Use WindowText instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Highlight">
            <summary>
            <para>A color to indicate a selected item or the current item. By default, the highlight color is Qt::darkBlue.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.HighlightedText">
            <summary>
            <para>A text color that contrasts with Highlight. By default, the highlighted text color is Qt::white.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Light">
            <summary>
            <para>Lighter than Button color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Link">
            <summary>
            <para>A text color used for unvisited hyperlinks. By default, the link color is Qt::blue.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.LinkVisited">
            <summary>
            <para>A text color used for already visited hyperlinks. By default, the linkvisited color is Qt::magenta.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Mid">
            <summary>
            <para>Between Button and Dark.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Midlight">
            <summary>
            <para>Between Button and Light.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.NoRole">
            <summary>
            <para>No role; this special role is often used to indicate that a role has not been assigned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Shadow">
            <summary>
            <para>A very dark color. By default, the shadow color is Qt::black.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>The foreground color used with Base. This is usually the same as the WindowText, in which case it must provide good contrast with Window and Base.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.ToolTipBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Used as the background color for QToolTip and QWhatsThis. Tool tips use the Inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.ToolTipText">
            <summary>
            <para>Used as the foreground color for QToolTip and QWhatsThis. Tool tips use the Inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.Window">
            <summary>
            <para>A general background color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole.WindowText">
            <summary>
            <para>A general foreground color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPanGesture">
            <summary>
            The QPanGesture class describes a panning gesture made by the user.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPinchGesture and QSwipeGesture.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPanGesture.LastOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the last offset recorded for this gesture.</para>
            <para>The last offset contains the change in position of the user's input as reported in the offset property when a previous gesture event was delivered for this gesture.</para>
            <para>If no previous event was delivered with information about this gesture (i.e., this gesture object contains information about the first movement in the gesture) then this property contains a zero size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPanGesture.Offset">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the total offset from the first input position to the current input position.</para>
            <para>The offset measures the total change in position of the user's input covered by the gesture on the input device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPanGesture.Delta">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the offset from the previous input position to the current input.</para>
            <para>This is essentially the same as the difference between offset() and lastOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPanGesture.Acceleration">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the acceleration in the motion of the touch point for this gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPicture">
            <summary>
            The QPicture class is a paint device that records and replays QPainter commands.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A picture serializes painter commands to an IO device in a platform-independent format. They are sometimes referred to as meta-files.</para>
            <para>Qt pictures use a proprietary binary format. Unlike native picture (meta-file) formats on many window systems, Qt pictures have no limitations regarding their contents. Everything that can be painted on a widget or pixmap (e.g., fonts, pixmaps, regions, transformed graphics, etc.) can also be stored in a picture.</para>
            <para>QPicture is resolution independent, i.e. a QPicture can be displayed on different devices (for example svg, pdf, ps, printer and screen) looking the same. This is, for instance, needed for WYSIWYG print preview. QPicture runs in the default system dpi, and scales the painter to match differences in resolution depending on the window system.</para>
            <para>Example of how to record a picture:</para>
            <para>         QPicture picture;</para>
            <para>         QPainter painter;</para>
            <para>         painter.begin(&amp;amp;picture);           // paint in picture</para>
            <para>         painter.drawEllipse(10,20, 80,70); // draw an ellipse</para>
            <para>         painter.end();                     // painting done</para>
            <para>         picture.save(&amp;quot;drawing.pic&amp;quot;);       // save picture</para>
            <para>Note that the list of painter commands is reset on each call to the QPainter::begin() function.</para>
            <para>Example of how to replay a picture:</para>
            <para>         QPicture picture;</para>
            <para>         picture.load(&amp;quot;drawing.pic&amp;quot;);           // load picture</para>
            <para>         QPainter painter;</para>
            <para>         painter.begin(&amp;amp;myImage);               // paint in myImage</para>
            <para>         painter.drawPicture(0, 0, picture);    // draw the picture at (0,0)</para>
            <para>         painter.end();                         // painting done</para>
            <para>Pictures can also be drawn using play(). Some basic data about a picture is available, for example, size(), isNull() and boundingRect().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMovie.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.#ctor(QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of pic.</para>
            <para>This constructor is fast thanks to implicit sharing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty picture.</para>
            <para>The formatVersion parameter may be used to create a QPicture that can be read by applications that are compiled with earlier versions of Qt.</para>
            <para>Note that the default formatVersion is -1 which signifies the current release, i.e. for Qt 4.0 a formatVersion of 7 is the same as the default formatVersion of -1.</para>
            <para>Reading pictures generated by earlier versions of Qt is not supported in Qt 4.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.InputFormatList">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of picture formats that are supported for picture input.</para>
            <para>Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy, e.g.</para>
            <para>         QStringList list = QPicture::inputFormatList();</para>
            <para>         foreach (const QString &amp;string, list)</para>
            <para>             myProcessing(string);</para>
            <para>See also outputFormatList(), inputFormats(), and QPictureIO.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.InputFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of picture formats that are supported for picture input.</para>
            <para>See also outputFormats(), inputFormatList(), and QPictureIO.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Load(QtCore.QIODevice,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>dev is the device to use for loading.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Load(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads a picture from the file specified by fileName and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Please note that the format parameter has been deprecated and will have no effect.</para>
            <para>See also save().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.OutputFormatList">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of picture formats that are supported for picture output.</para>
            <para>Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy, e.g.</para>
            <para>         QStringList list = QPicture::outputFormatList();</para>
            <para>         foreach (const QString &amp;string, list)</para>
            <para>             myProcessing(string);</para>
            <para>See also inputFormatList(), outputFormats(), and QPictureIO.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.OutputFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of picture formats that are supported for picture output.</para>
            <para>See also inputFormats(), outputFormatList(), and QPictureIO.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.PictureFormat(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string that specifies the picture format of the file fileName, or 0 if the file cannot be read or if the format is not recognized.</para>
            <para>See also load() and save().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Play(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replays the picture using painter, and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function does exactly the same as QPainter::drawPicture() with (x, y) = (0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Save(QtCore.QIODevice,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>dev is the device to use for saving.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Save(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves a picture to the file specified by fileName and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Please note that the format parameter has been deprecated and will have no effect.</para>
            <para>See also load().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.SetData(System.String,System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the picture data directly from data and size. This function copies the input data.</para>
            <para>See also data() and size().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the picture data.</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Swap(QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps picture other with this picture. This operation is very fast and never fails.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPicture.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the picture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPicture.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the picture's bounding rectangle or an invalid rectangle if the picture contains no data.</para>
            <para>Sets the picture's bounding rectangle to r. The automatically calculated value is overridden.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPicture.Data">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the picture data. The pointer is only valid until the next non-const function is called on this picture. The returned pointer is 0 if the picture contains no data.</para>
            <para>See also setData(), size(), and isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin">
            <summary>
            The QPictureFormatPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom picture format plugins.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The picture format plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy to create custom picture formats that can be used transparently by applications.</para>
            <para>Writing an picture format plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys(), loadPicture(), savePicture(), and installIOHandler(), and exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also How to Create Qt Plugins.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an picture format plugin with the given parent. This is invoked automatically by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin.InstallIOHandler(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Installs a QPictureIO(obsolete) picture I/O handler for the picture format format.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of picture formats this plugin supports.</para>
            <para>See also installIOHandler().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin.LoadPicture(System.String,System.String,QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads the picture stored in the file called fileName, with the given format, into *picture. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also savePicture().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin.SavePicture(System.String,System.String,QtGui.QPicture)">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the given picture into the file called fileName, using the specified format. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also loadPicture().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureFormatPlugin.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the picture format plugin.</para>
            <para>You never have to call this explicitly. Qt destroys a plugin automatically when it is no longer used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPictureIO">
            <summary>
            The QPictureIO class contains parameters for loading and saving pictures.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPictureIO contains a QIODevice object that is used for picture data I/O. The programmer can install new picture file formats in addition to those that Qt provides.</para>
            <para>You don't normally need to use this class; QPicture::load(), QPicture::save().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPicture, QPixmap, and QFile.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPictureIO object with all parameters set to zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPictureIO object with the I/O device ioDevice and a format tag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.#ctor(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPictureIO object with the file name fileName and a format tag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.DefineIOHandler(System.String,System.String,System.String,QtGui.Global.ActionQPictureIO,QtGui.Global.ActionQPictureIO)">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines a picture I/O handler for the picture format called format, which is recognized using the regular expression defined in header, read using readPicture and written using writePicture.</para>
            <para>flags is a string of single-character flags for this format. The only flag defined currently is T (upper case), so the only legal value for flags are &quot;T&quot; and the empty string. The &quot;T&quot; flag means that the picture file is a text file, and Qt should treat all newline conventions as equivalent. (XPM files and some PPM files are text files for example.)</para>
            <para>format is used to select a handler to write a QPicture; header is used to select a handler to read an picture file.</para>
            <para>If readPicture is a null pointer, the QPictureIO will not be able to read pictures in format. If writePicture is a null pointer, the QPictureIO will not be able to write pictures in format. If both are null, the QPictureIO object is valid but useless.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void readSVG(QPictureIO *picture)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // read the picture using the picture-&gt;ioDevice()</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void writeSVG(QPictureIO *picture)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     // write the picture using the picture-&gt;ioDevice()</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     // add the SVG picture handler</para>
            <para>     // ...</para>
            <para>Before the regular expression test, all the 0 bytes in the file header are converted to 1 bytes. This is done because when Qt was ASCII-based, QRegExp could not handle 0 bytes in strings.</para>
            <para>The regexp is only applied on the first 14 bytes of the file.</para>
            <para>(Note that if one handlerIO supports writing a format and another supports reading it, Qt supports both reading and writing. If two handlers support the same operation, Qt chooses one arbitrarily.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.InputFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sorted list of picture formats that are supported for picture input.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.OutputFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a sorted list of picture formats that are supported for picture output.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.PictureFormat(QtCore.QIODevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a string that specifies the picture format of the picture read from IO device d, or 0 if the device cannot be read or if the format is not recognized.</para>
            <para>Make sure that d is at the right position in the device (for example, at the beginning of the file).</para>
            <para>See also QIODevice::at().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.PictureFormat(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string that specifies the picture format of the file fileName, or null if the file cannot be read or if the format is not recognized.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.Read">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads an picture into memory and returns true if the picture was successfully read; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Before reading an picture you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device will be used.</para>
            <para>Setting the picture file format string is optional.</para>
            <para>Note that this function does not set the format used to read the picture. If you need that information, use the pictureFormat() static functions.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para>         QPictureIO iio;</para>
            <para>         QPixmap  pixmap;</para>
            <para>         iio.setFileName(&quot;vegeburger.pic&quot;);</para>
            <para>         if (iio.read()) {        // OK</para>
            <para>             QPicture picture = iio.picture();</para>
            <para>             QPainter painter(&amp;pixmap);</para>
            <para>             painter.drawPicture(0, 0, picture);</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>See also setIODevice(), setFileName(), setFormat(), write(), and QPixmap::load().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.Write">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes an picture to an IO device and returns true if the picture was successfully written; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Before writing an picture you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device will be used.</para>
            <para>The picture will be written using the specified picture format.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para>         QPictureIO iio;</para>
            <para>         QPicture   picture;</para>
            <para>         QPainter painter(&amp;picture);</para>
            <para>         painter.drawPixmap(0, 0, pixmap);</para>
            <para>         iio.setPicture(picture);</para>
            <para>         iio.setFileName(&quot;vegeburger.pic&quot;);</para>
            <para>         iio.setFormat(&quot;PIC&quot;);</para>
            <para>         if (iio.write())</para>
            <para>             return true; // returned true if written successfully</para>
            <para>See also setIODevice(), setFileName(), setFormat(), read(), and QPixmap::save().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPictureIO.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the object and all related data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Description">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the picture description string.</para>
            <para>Sets the picture description string for picture handlers that support picture descriptions to description.</para>
            <para>Currently, no picture format supported by Qt uses the description string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.FileName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the file name currently set.</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the file to read or write an picture from to fileName.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the picture format string or 0 if no format has been explicitly set.</para>
            <para>Sets the picture format to format for the picture to be read or written.</para>
            <para>It is necessary to specify a format before writing an picture, but it is not necessary to specify a format before reading an picture.</para>
            <para>If no format has been set, Qt guesses the picture format before reading it. If a format is set the picture will only be read if it has that format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Gamma">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the gamma value at which the picture will be viewed.</para>
            <para>Sets the gamma value at which the picture will be viewed to gamma. If the picture format stores a gamma value for which the picture is intended to be used, then this setting will be used to modify the picture. Setting to 0.0 will disable gamma correction (i.e. any specification in the file will be ignored).</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.IoDevice">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the IO device currently set.</para>
            <para>Sets the IO device to be used for reading or writing an picture.</para>
            <para>Setting the IO device allows pictures to be read/written to any block-oriented QIODevice.</para>
            <para>If ioDevice is not null, this IO device will override file name settings.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Parameters">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the picture's parameters string.</para>
            <para>Sets the picture's parameter string to parameters. This is for picture handlers that require special parameters.</para>
            <para>Although the current picture formats supported by Qt ignore the parameters string, it may be used in future extensions or by contributions (for example, JPEG).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Picture">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the picture currently set.</para>
            <para>Sets the picture to picture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Quality">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the quality of the written picture, related to the compression ratio.</para>
            <para>Sets the quality of the written picture to q, related to the compression ratio.</para>
            <para>q must be in the range -1..100. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files. (-1 signifies the default compression.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPictureIO.Status">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the picture's IO status. A non-zero value indicates an error, whereas 0 means that the IO operation was successful.</para>
            <para>Sets the picture IO status to status. A non-zero value indicates an error, whereas 0 means that the IO operation was successful.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPinchGesture">
            <summary>
            The QPinchGesture class describes a pinch gesture made by the user.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A pinch gesture is a form of touch user input in which the user typically touches two points on the input device with a thumb and finger, before moving them closer together or further apart to change the scale factor, zoom, or level of detail of the user interface.</para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para>Instead of repeatedly applying the same pinching gesture, the user may continue to touch the input device in one place, and apply a second touch to a new point, continuing the gesture. When this occurs, gesture events will continue to be delivered to the target object, containing an instance of QPinchGesture in the Qt::GestureUpdated state.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPanGesture and QSwipeGesture.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.TotalChangeFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the property of the gesture that has change.</para>
            <para>This property indicates which of the other properties has changed since the gesture has started. You can use this information to determine which aspect of your user interface needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.ChangeFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the property of the gesture that has changed in the current step.</para>
            <para>This property indicates which of the other properties has changed since the previous gesture event included information about this gesture. You can use this information to determine which aspect of your user interface needs to be updated.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.TotalScaleFactor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the total scale factor.</para>
            <para>The total scale factor measures the total change in scale factor from the original value to the current scale factor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.LastScaleFactor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the last scale factor recorded for this gesture.</para>
            <para>The last scale factor contains the scale factor reported in the scaleFactor property when a previous gesture event included information about this gesture.</para>
            <para>If no previous event was delivered with information about this gesture (i.e., this gesture object contains information about the first movement in the gesture) then this property contains zero.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.ScaleFactor">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current scale factor.</para>
            <para>The scale factor measures the scale factor associated with the distance between two of the user's inputs on a touch device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.TotalRotationAngle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the total angle covered by the gesture.</para>
            <para>This total angle measures the complete angle covered by the gesture. Usually, this is equal to the value held by the rotationAngle property, except in the case where the user performs multiple rotations by removing and repositioning one of the touch points, as described above. In this case, the total angle will be the sum of the rotation angles for the multiple stages of the gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.LastRotationAngle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the last reported angle covered by the gesture motion.</para>
            <para>The last rotation angle is the angle as reported in the rotationAngle property when a previous gesture event was delivered for this gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.RotationAngle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the angle covered by the gesture motion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.StartCenterPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the starting position of the center point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.LastCenterPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the last position of the center point recorded for this gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPinchGesture.CenterPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current center point.</para>
            <para>The center point is the midpoint between the two input points in the gesture.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPinchGesture.ChangeFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the changes that can occur to the properties of the gesture object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also changeFlags and totalChangeFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPinchGesture.ChangeFlag.CenterPointChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The center point held by centerPoint changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPinchGesture.ChangeFlag.RotationAngleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The rotation angle held by rotationAngle changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPinchGesture.ChangeFlag.ScaleFactorChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>The scale factor held by scaleFactor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPixmapCache">
            <summary>
            The QPixmapCache class provides an application-wide cache for pixmaps.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is a tool for optimized drawing with QPixmap. You can use it to store temporary pixmaps that are expensive to generate without using more storage space than cacheLimit(). Use insert() to insert pixmaps, find() to find them, and clear() to empty the cache.</para>
            <para>QPixmapCache contains no member data, only static functions to access the global pixmap cache. It creates an internal QCache object for caching the pixmaps.</para>
            <para>The cache associates a pixmap with a user-provided string as a key, or with a QPixmapCache::Key that the cache generates. Using QPixmapCache::Key for keys is faster than using strings. The string API is very convenient for complex keys but the QPixmapCache::Key API will be very efficient and convenient for a one-to-one object-to-pixmap mapping — in this case, you can store the keys as members of an object.</para>
            <para>If two pixmaps are inserted into the cache using equal keys then the last pixmap will replace the first pixmap in the cache. This follows the behavior of the QHash and QCache classes.</para>
            <para>The cache becomes full when the total size of all pixmaps in the cache exceeds cacheLimit(). The initial cache limit is 2048 KB (2 MB) on embedded platforms, 10240 KB (10 MB) on desktop platforms; you can change this by calling setCacheLimit() with the required value. A pixmap takes roughly (width * height * depth)/8 bytes of memory.</para>
            <para>The Qt Quarterly article Optimizing with QPixmapCache explains how to use QPixmapCache to speed up applications by caching the results of painting.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QCache and QPixmap.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all pixmaps from the cache.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Find(QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the given key in the cache. If the pixmap is found, the function sets pixmap to that pixmap and returns true; otherwise it leaves pixmap alone and returns false. If the pixmap is not found, it means that the key is no longer valid, so it will be released for the next insertion.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Find(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the given key in the cache. If the pixmap is found, the function sets pixmap to that pixmap and returns true; otherwise it leaves pixmap alone and returns false.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pm;</para>
            <para> if (!QPixmapCache::find(&quot;my_big_image&quot;, &amp;pm)) {</para>
            <para>     pm.load(&quot;bigimage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPixmapCache::insert(&quot;my_big_image&quot;, pm);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para> painter-&gt;drawPixmap(0, 0, pm);</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Find(System.String,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the given key in the cache. If the pixmap is found, the function sets pixmap to that pixmap and returns true; otherwise it leaves pixmap alone and returns false.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pm;</para>
            <para> if (!QPixmapCache::find(&quot;my_big_image&quot;, &amp;pm)) {</para>
            <para>     pm.load(&quot;bigimage.png&quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPixmapCache::insert(&quot;my_big_image&quot;, pm);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para> painter-&gt;drawPixmap(0, 0, pm);</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Insert(QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a copy of the given pixmap into the cache and returns a key that can be used to retrieve it.</para>
            <para>When a pixmap is inserted and the cache is about to exceed its limit, it removes pixmaps until there is enough room for the pixmap to be inserted.</para>
            <para>The oldest pixmaps (least recently accessed in the cache) are deleted when more space is needed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setCacheLimit() and replace().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Insert(System.String,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a copy of the pixmap pixmap associated with the key into the cache.</para>
            <para>All pixmaps inserted by the Qt library have a key starting with &quot;$qt&quot;, so your own pixmap keys should never begin &quot;$qt&quot;.</para>
            <para>When a pixmap is inserted and the cache is about to exceed its limit, it removes pixmaps until there is enough room for the pixmap to be inserted.</para>
            <para>The oldest pixmaps (least recently accessed in the cache) are deleted when more space is needed.</para>
            <para>The function returns true if the object was inserted into the cache; otherwise it returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setCacheLimit().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Remove(QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the pixmap associated with key from the cache and releases the key for a future insertion.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Remove(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the pixmap associated with key from the cache.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Replace(QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replaces the pixmap associated with the given key with the pixmap specified. Returns true if the pixmap has been correctly inserted into the cache; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setCacheLimit() and insert().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPixmapCache.CacheLimit">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cache limit (in kilobytes).</para>
            <para>The default cache limit is 2048 KB on embedded platforms, 10240 KB on desktop platforms.</para>
            <para>Sets the cache limit to n kilobytes.</para>
            <para>The default setting is 2048 KB on embedded platforms, 10240 KB on desktop platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key">
            <summary>
            The QPixmapCache::Key class can be used for efficient access to the QPixmapCache.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use QPixmapCache::insert() to receive an instance of Key generated by the pixmap cache. You can store the key in your own objects for a very efficient one-to-one object-to-pixmap mapping.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty Key object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty Key object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPixmapCache.Key.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the key.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout">
            <summary>
            The QPlainTextDocumentLayout class implements a plain text layout for QTextDocument
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QPlainTextDocumentLayout is required for text documents that can be display or edited in a QPlainTextEdit. See QTextDocument::setDocumentLayout().</para>
            <para>QPlainTextDocumentLayout uses the QAbstractTextDocumentLayout API that QTextDocument requires, but redefines it partially in order to support plain text better. For instances, it does not operate on vertical pixels, but on paragraphs (called blocks) instead. The height of a document is identical to the number of paragraphs it contains. The layout also doesn't support tables or nested frames, or any sort of advanced text layout that goes beyond a list of paragraphs with syntax highlighting.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a plain text document layout for the text document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.BlockBoundingRect(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::blockBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.DocumentChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::documentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.DocumentSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::documentSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.Draw(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout.PaintContext)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::draw().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.EnsureBlockLayout(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Ensures that block has a valid layout</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.FrameBoundingRect(QtGui.QTextFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::frameBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.HitTest(QtCore.QPointF,QtCore.Qt.HitTestAccuracy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::hitTest().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.PageCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::pageCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.RequestUpdate">
            <summary>
            <para>Requests a complete update on all views.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs a plain text document layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextDocumentLayout.CursorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property specifies the width of the cursor in pixels. The default value is 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit">
            <summary>
            The QPlainTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and display plain text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Introduction and Concepts</para>
            <para>QPlainTextEdit is an advanced viewer/editor supporting plain text. It is optimized to handle large documents and to respond quickly to user input.</para>
            <para>QPlainText uses very much the same technology and concepts as QTextEdit, but is optimized for plain text handling.</para>
            <para>QPlainTextEdit works on paragraphs and characters. A paragraph is a formatted string which is word-wrapped to fit into the width of the widget. By default when reading plain text, one newline signifies a paragraph. A document consists of zero or more paragraphs. Paragraphs are separated by hard line breaks. Each character within a paragraph has its own attributes, for example, font and color.</para>
            <para>The shape of the mouse cursor on a QPlainTextEdit is Qt::IBeamCursor by default. It can be changed through the viewport()'s cursor property.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using QPlainTextEdit as a Display Widget</para>
            <para>The text is set or replaced using setPlainText() which deletes the existing text and replaces it with the text passed to setPlainText().</para>
            <para>Text can be inserted using the QTextCursor class or using the convenience functions insertPlainText(), appendPlainText() or paste().</para>
            <para>By default, the text edit wraps words at whitespace to fit within the text edit widget. The setLineWrapMode() function is used to specify the kind of line wrap you want, WidgetWidth or NoWrap if you don't want any wrapping. If you use word wrap to the widget's width WidgetWidth, you can specify whether to break on whitespace or anywhere with setWordWrapMode().</para>
            <para>The find() function can be used to find and select a given string within the text.</para>
            <para>If you want to limit the total number of paragraphs in a QPlainTextEdit, as it is for example useful in a log viewer, then you can use the maximumBlockCount property. The combination of setMaximumBlockCount() and appendPlainText() turns QPlainTextEdit into an efficient viewer for log text. The scrolling can be reduced with the centerOnScroll() property, making the log viewer even faster. Text can be formatted in a limited way, either using a syntax highlighter (see below), or by appending html-formatted text with appendHtml(). While QPlainTextEdit does not support complex rich text rendering with tables and floats, it does support limited paragraph-based formatting that you may need in a log viewer.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Read-only Key Bindings</para>
            <para>When QPlainTextEdit is used read-only the key bindings are limited to navigation, and text may only be selected with the mouse:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeypressesAction</para>
            <para>Qt::UpArrow	Moves one line up.</para>
            <para>Qt::DownArrow	Moves one line down.</para>
            <para>Qt::LeftArrow	Moves one character to the left.</para>
            <para>Qt::RightArrow	Moves one character to the right.</para>
            <para>PageUp	Moves one (viewport) page up.</para>
            <para>PageDown	Moves one (viewport) page down.</para>
            <para>Home	Moves to the beginning of the text.</para>
            <para>End	Moves to the end of the text.</para>
            <para>Alt+Wheel	Scrolls the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel).</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Wheel	Zooms the text.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+A	Selects all text.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using QPlainTextEdit as an Editor</para>
            <para>All the information about using QPlainTextEdit as a display widget also applies here.</para>
            <para>Selection of text is handled by the QTextCursor class, which provides functionality for creating selections, retrieving the text contents or deleting selections. You can retrieve the object that corresponds with the user-visible cursor using the textCursor() method. If you want to set a selection in QPlainTextEdit just create one on a QTextCursor object and then make that cursor the visible cursor using setCursor(). The selection can be copied to the clipboard with copy(), or cut to the clipboard with cut(). The entire text can be selected using selectAll().</para>
            <para>QPlainTextEdit holds a QTextDocument object which can be retrieved using the document() method. You can also set your own document object using setDocument(). QTextDocument emits a textChanged() signal if the text changes and it also provides a isModified() function which will return true if the text has been modified since it was either loaded or since the last call to setModified with false as argument. In addition it provides methods for undo and redo.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Syntax Highlighting</para>
            <para>Just like QTextEdit, QPlainTextEdit works together with QSyntaxHighlighter.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Editing Key Bindings</para>
            <para>The list of key bindings which are implemented for editing:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeypressesAction</para>
            <para>Backspace	Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Delete	Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+C	Copy the selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Insert	Copy the selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+K	Deletes to the end of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+V	Pastes the clipboard text into text edit.</para>
            <para>Shift+Insert	Pastes the clipboard text into text edit.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+X	Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Shift+Delete	Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Z	Undoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Y	Redoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>LeftArrow	Moves the cursor one character to the left.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+LeftArrow	Moves the cursor one word to the left.</para>
            <para>RightArrow	Moves the cursor one character to the right.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+RightArrow	Moves the cursor one word to the right.</para>
            <para>UpArrow	Moves the cursor one line up.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+UpArrow	Moves the cursor one word up.</para>
            <para>DownArrow	Moves the cursor one line down.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Down Arrow	Moves the cursor one word down.</para>
            <para>PageUp	Moves the cursor one page up.</para>
            <para>PageDown	Moves the cursor one page down.</para>
            <para>Home	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Home	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the text.</para>
            <para>End	Moves the cursor to the end of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+End	Moves the cursor to the end of the text.</para>
            <para>Alt+Wheel	Scrolls the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel).</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Wheel	Zooms the text.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To select (mark) text hold down the Shift key whilst pressing one of the movement keystrokes, for example, Shift+Right Arrow will select the character to the right, and Shift+Ctrl+Right Arrow will select the word to the right, etc.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Differences to QTextEdit</para>
            <para>QPlainTextEdit is a thin class, implemented by using most of the technology that is behind QTextEdit and QTextDocument. Its performance benefits over QTextEdit stem mostly from using a different and simplified text layout called QPlainTextDocumentLayout on the text document (see QTextDocument::setDocumentLayout()). The plain text document layout does not support tables nor embedded frames, and replaces a pixel-exact height calculation with a line-by-line respectively paragraph-by-paragraph scrolling approach. This makes it possible to handle significantly larger documents, and still resize the editor with line wrap enabled in real time. It also makes for a fast log viewer (see setMaximumBlockCount()).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument, QTextCursor, Application Example, Code Editor Example, Syntax Highlighter Example, and Rich Text Processing.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QPlainTextEdit with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPlainTextEdit with parent parent. The text edit will display the plain text text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.AnchorAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the reference of the anchor at position pos, or an empty string if no anchor exists at that point.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.AppendHtml(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new paragraph with html to the end of the text edit.</para>
            <para>appendPlainText()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.AppendPlainText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new paragraph with text to the end of the text edit.</para>
            <para>See also appendHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.BlockBoundingGeometry(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the text block in content coordinates. Translate the rectangle with the contentOffset() to get visual coordinates on the viewport.</para>
            <para>See also firstVisibleBlock() and blockBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.BlockBoundingRect(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bounding rectangle of the text block in the block's own coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also blockBoundingGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnBlockCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the block count changes. The new block count is passed in newBlockCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CanInsertFromMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns true if the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, can be decoded and inserted into the document. It is called for example when during a drag operation the mouse enters this widget and it is necessary to determine whether it is possible to accept the drag.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CanPaste">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether text can be pasted from the clipboard into the textedit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CenterCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the document in order to center the cursor vertically.</para>
            <para>See also ensureCursorVisible() and centerOnScroll.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Deletes all the text in the text edit.</para>
            <para>Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.</para>
            <para>See also cut() and setPlainText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.ContentOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the content's origin in viewport coordinates.</para>
            <para>The origin of the content of a plain text edit is always the top left corner of the first visible text block. The content offset is different from (0,0) when the text has been scrolled horizontally, or when the first visible block has been scrolled partially off the screen, i.e. the visible text does not start with the first line of the first visible block, or when the first visible block is the very first block and the editor displays a margin.</para>
            <para>See also firstVisibleBlock(), horizontalScrollBar(), and verticalScrollBar().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            <para>Shows the standard context menu created with createStandardContextMenu().</para>
            <para>If you do not want the text edit to have a context menu, you can set its contextMenuPolicy to Qt::NoContextMenu. If you want to customize the context menu, reimplement this function. If you want to extend the standard context menu, reimplement this function, call createStandardContextMenu() and extend the menu returned.</para>
            <para>Information about the event is passed in the event object.</para>
            <para> void MyQPlainTextEdit::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QMenu *menu = createStandardContextMenu();</para>
            <para>     menu-&gt;addAction(tr(&quot;My Menu Item&quot;));</para>
            <para>     //...</para>
            <para>     menu-&gt;exec(event-&gt;globalPos());</para>
            <para>     delete menu;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Copy">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies any selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnCopyAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.</para>
            <para>When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.</para>
            <para>If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CreateMimeDataFromSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns a new MIME data object to represent the contents of the text edit's current selection. It is called when the selection needs to be encapsulated into a new QMimeData object; for example, when a drag and drop operation is started, or when data is copied to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function, note that the ownership of the returned QMimeData object is passed to the caller. The selection can be retrieved by using the textCursor() function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CreateStandardContextMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CursorForPosition(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>returns a QTextCursor at position pos (in viewport coordinates).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnCursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CursorRect">
            <summary>
            <para>returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor of the text edit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CursorRect(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Cut">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it from the text edit.</para>
            <para>If there is no selected text nothing happens.</para>
            <para>See also copy() and paste().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.EnsureCursorVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if necessary.</para>
            <para>See also centerCursor() and centerOnScroll.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Find(System.String,QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.FirstVisibleBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first visible block.</para>
            <para>See also blockBoundingRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.GetPaintContext">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paint context for the viewport(), useful only when reimplementing paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.InsertFromMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function inserts the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, into the text edit at the current cursor position. It is called whenever text is inserted as the result of a clipboard paste operation, or when the text edit accepts data from a drag and drop operation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.InsertPlainText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience slot that inserts text at the current cursor position.</para>
            <para>It is equivalent to</para>
            <para> edit-&gt;textCursor().insertText(text);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.LoadResource(System.Int32,QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads the resource specified by the given type and name.</para>
            <para>This function is an extension of QTextDocument::loadResource().</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::loadResource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.MergeCurrentCharFormat(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Merges the properties specified in modifier into the current character format by calling QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the properties of modifier are directly applied to the selection.</para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnModificationChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.MoveCursor(QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation,QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor by performing the given operation.</para>
            <para>If mode is QTextCursor::KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.</para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor::movePosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Paste">
            <summary>
            <para>Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the current cursor position.</para>
            <para>If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.</para>
            <para>To change the behavior of this function, i.e. to modify what QPlainTextEdit can paste and how it is being pasted, reimplement the virtual canInsertFromMimeData() and insertFromMimeData() functions.</para>
            <para>See also cut() and copy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Print(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to print the text edit's document to the given printer. This is equivalent to calling the print method on the document directly except that this function also supports QPrinter::Selection as print range.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::print().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Redoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.</para>
            <para>See also undo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnRedoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects all text.</para>
            <para>See also copy(), cut(), and textCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Undoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.</para>
            <para>See also redo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnUndoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnUpdateRequest(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the text document needs an update of the specified rect. If the text is scrolled, rect will cover the entire viewport area. If the text is scrolled vertically, dy carries the amount of pixels the viewport was scrolled.</para>
            <para>The purpose of the signal is to support extra widgets in plain text edit subclasses that e.g. show line numbers, breakpoints, or other extra information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.TextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.UndoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.RedoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CopyAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.</para>
            <para>When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.</para>
            <para>If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.UpdateRequest">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the text document needs an update of the specified rect. If the text is scrolled, rect will cover the entire viewport area. If the text is scrolled vertically, dy carries the amount of pixels the viewport was scrolled.</para>
            <para>The purpose of the signal is to support extra widgets in plain text edit subclasses that e.g. show line numbers, breakpoints, or other extra information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.BlockCountChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the block count changes. The new block count is passed in newBlockCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.ModificationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CurrentCharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the char format that is used when inserting new text.</para>
            <para>Sets the char format that is be used when inserting new text to format by calling QTextCursor::setCharFormat() on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the char format is directly applied to the selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the underlying document.</para>
            <para>Makes document the new document of the text editor.</para>
            <para>The parent QObject of the provided document remains the owner of the object. If the current document is a child of the text editor, then it is deleted.</para>
            <para>The document must have a document layout that inherits QPlainTextDocumentLayout (see QTextDocument::setDocumentLayout()).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.ExtraSelections">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns previously set extra selections.</para>
            <para>This function allows temporarily marking certain regions in the document with a given color, specified as selections. This can be useful for example in a programming editor to mark a whole line of text with a given background color to indicate the existence of a breakpoint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.TextCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the QTextCursor that represents the currently visible cursor. Note that changes on the returned cursor do not affect QPlainTextEdit's cursor; use setTextCursor() to update the visible cursor.</para>
            <para>Sets the visible cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.TabChangesFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether Tab changes focus or is accepted as input.</para>
            <para>In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the Tab key, as this breaks the focus chain. The default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.DocumentTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the title of the document parsed from the text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.UndoRedoEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether undo and redo are enabled.</para>
            <para>Users are only able to undo or redo actions if this property is true, and if there is an action that can be undone (or redone).</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.lineWrapMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the line wrap mode.</para>
            <para>The default mode is WidgetWidth which causes words to be wrapped at the right edge of the text edit. Wrapping occurs at whitespace, keeping whole words intact. If you want wrapping to occur within words use setWordWrapMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the text edit is read-only.</para>
            <para>In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.</para>
            <para>This property's default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.PlainText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property gets and sets the plain text editor's contents. The previous contents are removed and undo/redo history is reset when this property is set.</para>
            <para>By default, for an editor with no contents, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.OverwriteMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether text entered by the user will overwrite existing text.</para>
            <para>As with many text editors, the plain text editor widget can be configured to insert or overwrite existing text with new text entered by the user.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, existing text is overwritten, character-for-character by new text; otherwise, text is inserted at the cursor position, displacing existing text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false (new text does not overwrite existing text).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.TabStopWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the tab stop width in pixels.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 80.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CursorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property specifies the width of the cursor in pixels. The default value is 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.BlockCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of text blocks in the document.</para>
            <para>By default, in an empty document, this property contains a value of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.MaximumBlockCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the limit for blocks in the document.</para>
            <para>Specifies the maximum number of blocks the document may have. If there are more blocks in the document that specified with this property blocks are removed from the beginning of the document.</para>
            <para>A negative or zero value specifies that the document may contain an unlimited amount of blocks.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>Note that setting this property will apply the limit immediately to the document contents. Setting this property also disables the undo redo history.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.BackgroundVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the palette background is visible outside the document area.</para>
            <para>If set to true, the plain text edit paints the palette background on the viewport area not covered by the text document. Otherwise, if set to false, it won't. The feature makes it possible for the user to visually distinguish between the area of the document, painted with the base color of the palette, and the empty area not covered by any document.</para>
            <para>The default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPlainTextEdit.CenterOnScroll">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the cursor should be centered on screen.</para>
            <para>If set to true, the plain text edit scrolls the document vertically to make the cursor visible at the center of the viewport. This also allows the text edit to scroll below the end of the document. Otherwise, if set to false, the plain text edit scrolls the smallest amount possible to ensure the cursor is visible. The same algorithm is applied to any new line appended through appendPlainText().</para>
            <para>The default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintDialog">
            <summary>
            The QPrintDialog class provides a dialog for specifying the printer's configuration.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The dialog allows users to change document-related settings, such as the paper size and orientation, type of print (color or grayscale), range of pages, and number of copies to print.</para>
            <para>Controls are also provided to enable users to choose from the printers available, including any configured network printers.</para>
            <para>Typically, QPrintDialog objects are constructed with a QPrinter object, and executed using the exec() function.</para>
            <para> QPrintDialog printDialog(printer, parent);</para>
            <para> if (printDialog.exec() == QDialog::Accepted) {</para>
            <para>     // print ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>If the dialog is accepted by the user, the QPrinter object is correctly configured for printing.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The printer dialog (shown above in Plastique style) enables access to common printing properties. On X11 platforms that use the CUPS printing system, the settings for each available printer can be modified via the dialog's Properties push button.</para>
            <para>On Windows and Mac OS X, the native print dialog is used, which means that some QWidget and QDialog properties set on the dialog won't be respected. The native print dialog on Mac OS X does not support setting printer options, i.e. setOptions() and setOption() have no effect.</para>
            <para>In Qt 4.4, it was possible to use the static functions to show a sheet on Mac OS X. This is no longer supported in Qt 4.5. If you want this functionality, use QPrintDialog::open().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPageSetupDialog, QPrinter, Pixelator Example, Order Form Example, Image Viewer Example, and Scribble Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a print dialog with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new modal printer dialog for the given printer with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.OnAccepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user accepts the values set in the print dialog. The printer parameter includes the printer that the settings were applied to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.OnAccepted(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user accepts the values set in the print dialog. The printer parameter includes the printer that the settings were applied to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            <para>Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.</para>
            <para>See also QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Exec">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractPrintDialog::exec().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its accepted() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its accepted() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.SetOption(QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>See also options and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.TestOption(QtGui.QAbstractPrintDialog.PrintDialogOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also options and setOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the print dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Accepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user accepts the values set in the print dialog. The printer parameter includes the printer that the settings were applied to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrintDialog.Options">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the various options that affect the look and feel of the dialog.</para>
            <para>By default, all options are disabled.</para>
            <para>Options should be set before showing the dialog. Setting them while the dialog is visible is not guaranteed to have an immediate effect on the dialog (depending on the option and on the platform).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintEngine">
            <summary>
            The QPrintEngine class defines an interface for how QPrinter interacts with a given printing subsystem.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The common case when creating your own print engine is to derive from both QPaintEngine and QPrintEngine. Various properties of a print engine are given with property() and set with setProperty().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPaintEngine.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.Abort">
            <summary>
            <para>Instructs the print engine to abort the printing process. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.Metric(QtGui.QPaintDevice.PaintDeviceMetric)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the metric for the given id.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.NewPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Instructs the print engine to start a new page. Returns true if the printer was able to create the new page; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrinterState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current state of the printer being used by the print engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.Property(QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the print engine's property specified by key.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.SetProperty(QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the print engine's property specified by key to the given value.</para>
            <para>See also property().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintEngine.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the print engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to communicate properties between the print engine and QPrinter. A property may or may not be supported by a given print engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_CollateCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value indicating whether the printout should be collated or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_ColorMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Refers to QPrinter::ColorMode, either color or monochrome.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_CopyCount">
            <summary>
            <para>An integer specifying the number of copies to print.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_Creator">
            <summary>
            <para>A string describing the document's creator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Basis for extension.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_CustomPaperSize">
            <summary>
            <para>A QSizeF specifying a custom paper size in the QPrinter::Point unit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_DocumentName">
            <summary>
            <para>A string describing the document name in the spooler.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_Duplex">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value indicating whether both sides of the printer paper should be used for the printout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_FontEmbedding">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value indicating whether data for the document's fonts should be embedded in the data sent to the printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_FullPage">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean describing if the printer should be full page or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_NumberOfCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>Obsolete. An integer specifying the number of copies. Use PPK_CopyCount instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies a QPrinter::Orientation value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_OutputFileName">
            <summary>
            <para>The output file name as a string. An empty file name indicates that the printer should not print to a file.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PageMargins">
            <summary>
            <para>A QList&lt;QVariant&gt; containing the left, top, right and bottom margin values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PageOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies a QPrinter::PageOrder value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PageRect">
            <summary>
            <para>A QRect specifying the page rectangle</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PageSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Obsolete. Use PPK_PaperSize instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PaperRect">
            <summary>
            <para>A QRect specifying the paper rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PaperSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies a QPrinter::PaperSize value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PaperSource">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies a QPrinter::PaperSource value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PaperSources">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies more than one QPrinter::PaperSource value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PrinterName">
            <summary>
            <para>A string specifying the name of the printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_PrinterProgram">
            <summary>
            <para>A string specifying the name of the printer program used for printing,</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_Resolution">
            <summary>
            <para>An integer describing the dots per inch for this printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_SupportedResolutions">
            <summary>
            <para>A list of integer QVariants describing the set of supported resolutions that the printer has.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_SupportsMultipleCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>A boolean value indicating whether or not the printer supports printing multiple copies in one job.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_SuppressSystemPrintStatus">
            <summary>
            <para>Suppress the built-in dialog for showing printing progress. As of 4.1 this only has effect on Mac OS X where, by default, a status dialog is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintEngine.PrintEnginePropertyKey.PPK_WindowsPageSize">
            <summary>
            <para>An integer specifying a DM_PAPER entry on Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog">
            <summary>
            The QPrintPreviewDialog class provides a dialog for previewing and configuring page layouts for printer output.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using QPrintPreviewDialog in your existing application is straightforward:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Create the QPrintPreviewDialog.You can construct a QPrintPreviewDialog with an existing QPrinter object, or you can have QPrintPreviewDialog create one for you, which will be the system default printer.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Connect the paintRequested() signal to a slot.When the dialog needs to generate a set of preview pages, the paintRequested() signal will be emitted. You can use the exact same code for the actual printing as for having the preview generated, including calling QPrinter::newPage() to start a new page in the preview. Connect a slot to the paintRequested() signal, where you draw onto the QPrinter object that is passed into the slot.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Call exec().Call QPrintPreviewDialog::exec() to show the preview dialog.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>In Symbian, there is no support for printing. Hence, this dialog should not be used in Symbian.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPrinter, QPrintDialog, QPageSetupDialog, and QPrintPreviewWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPrintPreviewDialog based on printer and with parent as the parent widget. The widget flags flags are passed on to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPrintPreviewDialog based on printer and with parent as the parent widget. The widget flags flags are passed on to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its finished(int) signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its finished(int) signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.OnPaintRequested(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the QPrintPreviewDialog needs to generate a set of preview pages.</para>
            <para>The printer instance supplied is the paint device onto which you should paint the contents of each page, using the QPrinter instance in the same way as you would when printing directly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.Printer">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the QPrinter object this dialog is currently operating on.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QPrintPreviewDialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPrintPreviewDialog.PaintRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the QPrintPreviewDialog needs to generate a set of preview pages.</para>
            <para>The printer instance supplied is the paint device onto which you should paint the contents of each page, using the QPrinter instance in the same way as you would when printing directly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget">
            <summary>
            The QPrintPreviewWidget class provides a widget for previewing page layouts for printer output.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QPrintPreviewDialog uses a QPrintPreviewWidget internally, and the purpose of QPrintPreviewWidget is to make it possible to embed the preview into other widgets. It also makes it possible to build a different user interface around it than the default one provided with QPrintPreviewDialog.</para>
            <para>Using QPrintPreviewWidget is straightforward:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Create the QPrintPreviewWidgetConstruct the QPrintPreviewWidget either by passing in an existing QPrinter object, or have QPrintPreviewWidget create a default constructed QPrinter object for you.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Connect the paintRequested() signal to a slot.When the widget needs to generate a set of preview pages, a paintRequested() signal will be emitted from the widget. Connect a slot to this signal, and draw onto the QPrinter passed in as a signal parameter. Call QPrinter::newPage(), to start a new page in the preview.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPrinter, QPrintDialog, QPageSetupDialog, and QPrintPreviewDialog.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPrintPreviewWidget based on printer and with parent as the parent widget. The widget flags flags are passed on to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPrintPreviewWidget based on printer and with parent as the parent widget. The widget flags flags are passed on to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.FitInView">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setZoomMode(QPrintPreviewWidget::FitInView).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.FitToWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setZoomMode(QPrintPreviewWidget::FitToWidth).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.PageCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of pages in the preview.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.OnPaintRequested(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the preview widget needs to generate a set of preview pages. printer is the printer associated with this preview widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.OnPreviewChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the preview widget has changed some internal state, such as the orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.Print">
            <summary>
            <para>Prints the preview to the printer associated with the preview.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.SetAllPagesViewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setViewMode(QPrintPreviewWidget::AllPagesView).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.SetFacingPagesViewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setViewMode(QPrintPreviewWidget::FacingPagesView).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.SetLandscapeOrientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setOrientation(QPrinter::Landscape).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.SetPortraitOrientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setOrientation(QPrinter::Portrait).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.SetSinglePageViewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This is a convenience function and is the same as calling setViewMode(QPrintPreviewWidget::SinglePageView).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.UpdatePreview">
            <summary>
            <para>This function updates the preview, which causes the paintRequested() signal to be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomIn(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Zooms the current view in by factor. The default value for factor is 1.1, which means the view will be scaled up by 10%.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomOut(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Zooms the current view out by factor. The default value for factor is 1.1, which means the view will be scaled down by 10%.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QPrintPreviewWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.PaintRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the preview widget needs to generate a set of preview pages. printer is the printer associated with this preview widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.PreviewChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the preview widget has changed some internal state, such as the orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.CurrentPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently viewed page in the preview.</para>
            <para>Sets the current page in the preview. This will cause the view to skip to the beginning of page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current orientation of the preview. This value is obtained from the QPrinter object associated with the preview.</para>
            <para>Sets the current orientation to orientation. This value will be set on the QPrinter object associated with the preview.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.viewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current view mode. The default view mode is SinglePageView.</para>
            <para>Sets the view mode to mode. The default view mode is SinglePageView.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomFactor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the zoom factor of the view.</para>
            <para>Sets the zoom factor of the view to factor. For example, a value of 1.0 indicates an unscaled view, which is approximately the size the view will have on paper. A value of 0.5 will halve the size of the view, while a value of 2.0 will double the size of the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.zoomMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current zoom mode.</para>
            <para>Sets the zoom mode to zoomMode. The default zoom mode is FitInView.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ViewMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to describe the view mode of the preview widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ViewMode.AllPagesView">
            <summary>
            <para>A view mode where all the pages in the preview is viewed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ViewMode.FacingPagesView">
            <summary>
            <para>A mode where the facing pages in the preview is viewed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ViewMode.SinglePageView">
            <summary>
            <para>A mode where single pages in the preview is viewed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to describe zoom mode of the preview widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomMode.CustomZoom">
            <summary>
            <para>The zoom is set to a custom zoom value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomMode.FitInView">
            <summary>
            <para>This mode fits the current page inside the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrintPreviewWidget.ZoomMode.FitToWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This mode fits the current page to the width of the view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter">
            <summary>
            The QPrinter class is a paint device that paints on a printer.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This device represents a series of pages of printed output, and is used in almost exactly the same way as other paint devices such as QWidget and QPixmap. A set of additional functions are provided to manage device-specific features, such as orientation and resolution, and to step through the pages in a document as it is generated.</para>
            <para>When printing directly to a printer on Windows or Mac OS X, QPrinter uses the built-in printer drivers. On X11, QPrinter uses the Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) or the standard Unix lpr utility to send PostScript or PDF output to the printer. As an alternative, the printProgram() function can be used to specify the command or utility to use instead of the system default.</para>
            <para>Note that setting parameters like paper size and resolution on an invalid printer is undefined. You can use QPrinter::isValid() to verify this before changing any parameters.</para>
            <para>QPrinter supports a number of parameters, most of which can be changed by the end user through a print dialog. In general, QPrinter passes these functions onto the underlying QPrintEngine.</para>
            <para>The most important parameters are:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>setOrientation() tells QPrinter which page orientation to use.</para>
            <para>setPaperSize() tells QPrinter what paper size to expect from the printer.</para>
            <para>setResolution() tells QPrinter what resolution you wish the printer to provide, in dots per inch (DPI).</para>
            <para>setFullPage() tells QPrinter whether you want to deal with the full page or just with the part the printer can draw on.</para>
            <para>setCopyCount() tells QPrinter how many copies of the document it should print.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many of these functions can only be called before the actual printing begins (i.e., before QPainter::begin() is called). This usually makes sense because, for example, it's not possible to change the number of copies when you are halfway through printing. There are also some settings that the user sets (through the printer dialog) and that applications are expected to obey. See QAbstractPrintDialog's documentation for more details.</para>
            <para>When QPainter::begin() is called, the QPrinter it operates on is prepared for a new page, enabling the QPainter to be used immediately to paint the first page in a document. Once the first page has been painted, newPage() can be called to request a new blank page to paint on, or QPainter::end() can be called to finish printing. The second page and all following pages are prepared using a call to newPage() before they are painted.</para>
            <para>The first page in a document does not need to be preceded by a call to newPage(). You only need to calling newPage() after QPainter::begin() if you need to insert a blank page at the beginning of a printed document. Similarly, calling newPage() after the last page in a document is painted will result in a trailing blank page appended to the end of the printed document.</para>
            <para>If you want to abort the print job, abort() will try its best to stop printing. It may cancel the entire job or just part of it.</para>
            <para>Since QPrinter can print to any QPrintEngine subclass, it is possible to extend printing support to cover new types of printing subsystem by subclassing QPrintEngine and reimplementing its interface.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPrintDialog and Printing with Qt.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinterInfo,QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new printer object with the given printer and mode.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new printer object with the given mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.Abort">
            <summary>
            <para>Aborts the current print run. Returns true if the print run was successfully aborted and printerState() will return QPrinter::Aborted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>It is not always possible to abort a print job. For example, all the data has gone to the printer but the printer cannot or will not cancel the job when asked to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.ActualNumCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of copies that will be printed. The default value is 1.</para>
            <para>This function always returns the actual value specified in the print dialog or using setNumCopies().</para>
            <para>Use copyCount() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also setNumCopies() and numCopies().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.FromPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of the first page in a range of pages to be printed (the &quot;from page&quot; setting). Pages in a document are numbered according to the convention that the first page is page 1.</para>
            <para>By default, this function returns a special value of 0, meaning that the &quot;from page&quot; setting is unset.</para>
            <para>Note: If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0, this indicates that the whole document will be printed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setFromTo() and toPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.GetPageMargins(System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,System.Double@,QtGui.QPrinter.Unit)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the page margins for this printer in left, top, right, bottom. The unit of the returned margins are specified with the unit parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the printer currently selected is a valid printer in the system, or a pure PDF/PostScript printer; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>To detect other failures check the output of QPainter::begin() or QPrinter::newPage().</para>
            <para>     QPrinter printer;</para>
            <para>     printer.setOutputFormat(QPrinter::PdfFormat);</para>
            <para>     printer.setOutputFileName(&quot;/foobar/nonwritable.pdf&quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter;</para>
            <para>     if (! painter.begin(&amp;printer)) { // failed to open file</para>
            <para>         qWarning(&quot;failed to open file, is it writable?&quot;);</para>
            <para>         return 1;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(10, 10, &quot;Test&quot;);</para>
            <para>     if (! printer.newPage()) {</para>
            <para>         qWarning(&quot;failed in flushing page to disk, disk full?&quot;);</para>
            <para>         return 1;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     painter.drawText(10, 10, &quot;Test 2&quot;);</para>
            <para>     painter.end();</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setPrinterName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.NewPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Tells the printer to eject the current page and to continue printing on a new page. Returns true if this was successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Calling newPage() on an inactive QPrinter object will always fail.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.PageRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the page's rectangle; this is usually smaller than the paperRect() since the page normally has margins between its borders and the paper.</para>
            <para>The unit of the returned rectangle is DevicePixel.</para>
            <para>See also paperSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.PageRect(QtGui.QPrinter.Unit)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the page's rectangle in unit; this is usually smaller than the paperRect() since the page normally has margins between its borders and the paper.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also paperSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.PaintEngine">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QPaintDevice::paintEngine().</para>
            <para>Returns the paint engine used by the printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paper's rectangle; this is usually larger than the pageRect().</para>
            <para>The unit of the returned rectangle is DevicePixel.</para>
            <para>See also pageRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperRect(QtGui.QPrinter.Unit)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paper's rectangle in unit; this is usually larger than the pageRect().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also pageRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.paperSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the printer paper size. The default value is driver-dependent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setPaperSize(), pageRect(), and paperRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.paperSize(QtGui.QPrinter.Unit)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paper size in unit.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setPaperSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintEngine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the print engine used by the printer.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.printerState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current state of the printer. This may not always be accurate (for example if the printer doesn't have the capability of reporting its state to the operating system).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SetEngines(QtGui.QPrintEngine,QtGui.QPaintEngine)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is used by subclasses of QPrinter to specify custom print and paint engines (printEngine and paintEngine, respectively).</para>
            <para>QPrinter does not take ownership of the engines, so you need to manage these engine instances yourself.</para>
            <para>Note that changing the engines will reset the printer state and all its properties.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also printEngine(), paintEngine(), and setOutputFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SetFromTo(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the range of pages to be printed to cover the pages with numbers specified by from and to, where from corresponds to the first page in the range and to corresponds to the last.</para>
            <para>Note: Pages in a document are numbered according to the convention that the first page is page 1. However, if from and to are both set to 0, the whole document will be printed.</para>
            <para>This function is mostly used to set a default value that the user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also fromPage() and toPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SetPageMargins(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,QtGui.QPrinter.Unit)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function sets the left, top, right and bottom page margins for this printer. The unit of the margins are specified with the unit parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SetPaperSize(QtCore.QSizeF,QtGui.QPrinter.Unit)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the paper size based on paperSize in unit.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also paperSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SetPaperSize(QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the printer paper size to newPaperSize if that size is supported. The result is undefined if newPaperSize is not supported.</para>
            <para>The default paper size is driver-dependent.</para>
            <para>This function is useful mostly for setting a default value that the user can override in the print dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also paperSize(), PaperSize, setFullPage(), setResolution(), pageRect(), and paperRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SupportedPaperSources">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the supported paper sizes for this printer.</para>
            <para>The values will be either a value that matches an entry in the QPrinter::PaperSource enum or a driver spesific value. The driver spesific values are greater than the constant DMBIN_USER declared in wingdi.h.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is only available in windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SupportedResolutions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the resolutions (a list of dots-per-inch integers) that the printer says it supports.</para>
            <para>For X11 where all printing is directly to postscript, this function will always return a one item list containing only the postscript resolution, i.e., 72 (72 dpi -- but see PrinterMode).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.SupportsMultipleCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the printer supports printing multiple copies of the same document in one job; otherwise false is returned.</para>
            <para>On most systems this function will return true. However, on X11 systems that do not support CUPS, this function will return false. That means the application has to handle the number of copies by printing the same document the required number of times.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also setCopyCount() and copyCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.ToPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of the last page in a range of pages to be printed (the &quot;to page&quot; setting). Pages in a document are numbered according to the convention that the first page is page 1.</para>
            <para>By default, this function returns a special value of 0, meaning that the &quot;to page&quot; setting is unset.</para>
            <para>Note: If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0, this indicates that the whole document will be printed.</para>
            <para>The programmer is responsible for reading this setting and printing accordingly.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setFromTo() and fromPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the printer object and frees any allocated resources. If the printer is destroyed while a print job is in progress this may or may not affect the print job.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.CollateCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if collation is turned on when multiple copies is selected. Returns false if it is turned off when multiple copies is selected. When collating is turned off the printing of each individual page will be repeated the numCopies() amount before the next page is started. With collating turned on all pages are printed before the next copy of those pages is started.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the default value for collation checkbox when the print dialog appears. If collate is true, it will enable setCollateCopiesEnabled(). The default value is false. This value will be changed by what the user presses in the print dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.colorMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current color mode.</para>
            <para>Sets the printer's color mode to newColorMode, which can be either Color or GrayScale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.CopyCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of copies that will be printed. The default value is 1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of copies to be printed to count.</para>
            <para>The printer driver reads this setting and prints the specified number of copies.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.Creator">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the application that created the document.</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the application that created the document to creator.</para>
            <para>This function is only applicable to the X11 version of Qt. If no creator name is specified, the creator will be set to &quot;Qt&quot; followed by some version number.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.DocName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document name.</para>
            <para>Sets the document name to name.</para>
            <para>On X11, the document name is for example used as the default output filename in QPrintDialog. Note that the document name does not affect the file name if the printer is printing to a file. Use the setOutputFile() function for this.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.DoubleSidedPrinting">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if double side printing is enabled.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Enables double sided printing if doubleSided is true; otherwise disables it.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.Duplex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current duplex mode.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Enables double sided printing based on the duplex mode.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.FontEmbeddingEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if font embedding is enabled.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Enabled or disables font embedding depending on enable.</para>
            <para>Currently this option is only supported on X11.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.FullPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is at the corner of the page and false if it is at the edge of the printable area.</para>
            <para>See setFullPage() for details and caveats.</para>
            <para>If fp is true, enables support for painting over the entire page; otherwise restricts painting to the printable area reported by the device.</para>
            <para>By default, full page printing is disabled. In this case, the origin of the QPrinter's coordinate system coincides with the top-left corner of the printable area.</para>
            <para>If full page printing is enabled, the origin of the QPrinter's coordinate system coincides with the top-left corner of the paper itself. In this case, the device metrics will report the exact same dimensions as indicated by PaperSize. It may not be possible to print on the entire physical page because of the printer's margins, so the application must account for the margins itself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.NumCopies">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of copies to be printed. The default value is 1.</para>
            <para>On Windows, Mac OS X and X11 systems that support CUPS, this will always return 1 as these operating systems can internally handle the number of copies.</para>
            <para>On X11, this value will return the number of times the application is required to print in order to match the number specified in the printer setup dialog. This has been done since some printer drivers are not capable of buffering up the copies and in those cases the application must make an explicit call to the print code for each copy.</para>
            <para>Use copyCount() in conjunction with supportsMultipleCopies() instead.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of copies to be printed to numCopies.</para>
            <para>The printer driver reads this setting and prints the specified number of copies.</para>
            <para>Use setCopyCount() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the orientation setting. This is driver-dependent, but is usually QPrinter::Portrait.</para>
            <para>Sets the print orientation to orientation.</para>
            <para>The orientation can be either QPrinter::Portrait or QPrinter::Landscape.</para>
            <para>The printer driver reads this setting and prints using the specified orientation.</para>
            <para>On Windows, this option can be changed while printing and will take effect from the next call to newPage().</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, changing the orientation during a print job has no effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.OutputFileName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the output file. By default, this is an empty string (indicating that the printer shouldn't print to file).</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the output file to fileName.</para>
            <para>Setting a null or empty name (0 or &quot;&quot;) disables printing to a file. Setting a non-empty name enables printing to a file.</para>
            <para>This can change the value of outputFormat(). If the file name has the suffix &quot;.ps&quot; then PostScript is automatically selected as output format. If the file name has the &quot;.pdf&quot; suffix PDF is generated. If the file name has a suffix other than &quot;.ps&quot; and &quot;.pdf&quot;, the output format used is the one set with setOutputFormat().</para>
            <para>QPrinter uses Qt's cross-platform PostScript or PDF print engines respectively. If you can produce this format natively, for example Mac OS X can generate PDF's from its print engine, set the output format back to NativeFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.outputFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the output format for this printer.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the output format for this printer to format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.pageOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current page order.</para>
            <para>The default page order is FirstPageFirst.</para>
            <para>Sets the page order to pageOrder.</para>
            <para>The page order can be QPrinter::FirstPageFirst or QPrinter::LastPageFirst. The application is responsible for reading the page order and printing accordingly.</para>
            <para>This function is mostly useful for setting a default value that the user can override in the print dialog.</para>
            <para>This function is only supported under X11.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.PageSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the printer page size. The default value is driver-dependent.</para>
            <para>Use paperSize() instead.</para>
            <para>Sets the printer page size based on newPageSize.</para>
            <para>Use setPaperSize() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.paperSource">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the printer's paper source. This is Manual or a printer tray or paper cassette.</para>
            <para>Sets the paper source setting to source.</para>
            <para>Windows only: This option can be changed while printing and will take effect from the next call to newPage()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintProgram">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the program that sends the print output to the printer.</para>
            <para>The default is to return an empty string; meaning that QPrinter will try to be smart in a system-dependent way. On X11 only, you can set it to something different to use a specific print program. On the other platforms, this returns an empty string.</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the program that should do the print job to printProg.</para>
            <para>On X11, this function sets the program to call with the PostScript output. On other platforms, it has no effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.printRange">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the page range of the QPrinter. After the print setup dialog has been opened, this function returns the value selected by the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the print range option in to be range.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the printer name. This value is initially set to the name of the default printer.</para>
            <para>Sets the printer name to name.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.Resolution">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current assumed resolution of the printer, as set by setResolution() or by the printer driver.</para>
            <para>Requests that the printer prints at dpi or as near to dpi as possible.</para>
            <para>This setting affects the coordinate system as returned by, for example QPainter::viewport().</para>
            <para>This function must be called before QPainter::begin() to have an effect on all platforms.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QPrinter.WinPageSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the page size used by the printer under Windows.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is not portable so you may prefer to use paperSize() instead.</para>
            <para>Sets the page size to be used by the printer under Windows to pageSize.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function is not portable so you may prefer to use setPaperSize() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.ColorMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type is used to indicate whether QPrinter should print in color or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.ColorMode.Color">
            <summary>
            <para>Print in color if available, otherwise in grayscale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.ColorMode.GrayScale">
            <summary>
            <para>Print in grayscale, even on color printers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.DuplexMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to indicate whether printing will occur on one or both sides of each sheet of paper (simplex or duplex printing).</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.DuplexMode.DuplexAuto">
            <summary>
            <para>The printer's default setting is used to determine whether duplex printing is used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.DuplexMode.DuplexLongSide">
            <summary>
            <para>Both sides of each sheet of paper are used for printing. The paper is turned over its longest edge before the second side is printed</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.DuplexMode.DuplexNone">
            <summary>
            <para>Single sided (simplex) printing only.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.DuplexMode.DuplexShortSide">
            <summary>
            <para>Both sides of each sheet of paper are used for printing. The paper is turned over its shortest edge before the second side is printed</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type (not to be confused with Orientation) is used to specify each page's orientation.</para>
            <para>This type interacts with QPrinter::PaperSize and QPrinter::setFullPage() to determine the final size of the page available to the application.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.Orientation.Landscape">
            <summary>
            <para>The page's width is greater than its height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.Orientation.Portrait">
            <summary>
            <para>The page's height is greater than its width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.OutputFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The OutputFormat enum is used to describe the format QPrinter should use for printing.</para>
            <para>See also outputFormat(), setOutputFormat(), and setOutputFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.OutputFormat.NativeFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>QPrinter will print output using a method defined by the platform it is running on. This mode is the default when printing directly to a printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.OutputFormat.PdfFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>QPrinter will generate its output as a searchable PDF file. This mode is the default when printing to a file.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.OutputFormat.PostScriptFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>QPrinter will generate its output as in the PostScript format. (This feature was introduced in Qt 4.2.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.PageOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type is used by QPrinter to tell the application program how to print.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PageOrder.FirstPageFirst">
            <summary>
            <para>The lowest-numbered page should be printed first.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PageOrder.LastPageFirst">
            <summary>
            <para>The highest-numbered page should be printed first.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type specifies what paper size QPrinter should use. QPrinter does not check that the paper size is available; it just uses this information, together with QPrinter::Orientation and QPrinter::setFullPage(), to determine the printable area.</para>
            <para>The defined sizes (with setFullPage(true)) are:</para>
            <para>With setFullPage(false) (the default), the metrics will be a bit smaller; how much depends on the printer in use.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A0">
            <summary>
            <para>841 x 1189 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A1">
            <summary>
            <para>594 x 841 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A2">
            <summary>
            <para>420 x 594 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A3">
            <summary>
            <para>297 x 420 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A4">
            <summary>
            <para>210 x 297 mm, 8.26 x 11.69 inches</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A5">
            <summary>
            <para>148 x 210 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A6">
            <summary>
            <para>105 x 148 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A7">
            <summary>
            <para>74 x 105 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A8">
            <summary>
            <para>52 x 74 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.A9">
            <summary>
            <para>37 x 52 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B0">
            <summary>
            <para>1000 x 1414 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B1">
            <summary>
            <para>707 x 1000 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B10">
            <summary>
            <para>31 x 44 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B2">
            <summary>
            <para>500 x 707 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B3">
            <summary>
            <para>353 x 500 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B4">
            <summary>
            <para>250 x 353 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B5">
            <summary>
            <para>176 x 250 mm, 6.93 x 9.84 inches</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B6">
            <summary>
            <para>125 x 176 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B7">
            <summary>
            <para>88 x 125 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B8">
            <summary>
            <para>62 x 88 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.B9">
            <summary>
            <para>33 x 62 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.C5E">
            <summary>
            <para>163 x 229 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Comm10E">
            <summary>
            <para>105 x 241 mm, U.S. Common 10 Envelope</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Custom">
            <summary>
            <para>Unknown, or a user defined size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.DLE">
            <summary>
            <para>110 x 220 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Executive">
            <summary>
            <para>7.5 x 10 inches, 190.5 x 254 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Folio">
            <summary>
            <para>210 x 330 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Ledger">
            <summary>
            <para>431.8 x 279.4 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Legal">
            <summary>
            <para>8.5 x 14 inches, 215.9 x 355.6 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Letter">
            <summary>
            <para>8.5 x 11 inches, 215.9 x 279.4 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSize.Tabloid">
            <summary>
            <para>279.4 x 431.8 mm</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.PaperSource">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type specifies what paper source QPrinter is to use. QPrinter does not check that the paper source is available; it just uses this information to try and set the paper source. Whether it will set the paper source depends on whether the printer has that particular source.</para>
            <para>Warning: This is currently only implemented for Windows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintRange">
            <summary>
            <para>Used to specify the print range selection option.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractPrintDialog::PrintRange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintRange.AllPages">
            <summary>
            <para>All pages should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintRange.CurrentPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Only the current page should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintRange.PageRange">
            <summary>
            <para>The specified page range should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrintRange.Selection">
            <summary>
            <para>Only the selection should be printed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the mode the printer should work in. It basically presets a certain resolution and working mode.</para>
            <para>Note: When rendering text on a QPrinter device, it is important to realize that the size of text, when specified in points, is independent of the resolution specified for the device itself. Therefore, it may be useful to specify the font size in pixels when combining text with graphics to ensure that their relative sizes are what you expect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterMode.HighResolution">
            <summary>
            <para>On Windows, sets the printer resolution to that defined for the printer in use. For PostScript printing, sets the resolution of the PostScript driver to 1200 dpi.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterMode.PrinterResolution">
            <summary>
            <para>This value is deprecated. Is is equivalent to ScreenResolution on Unix and HighResolution on Windows and Mac. Due do the difference between ScreenResolution and HighResolution, use of this value may lead to non-portable printer code.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QPrinter.PrinterMode.ScreenResolution">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the resolution of the print device to the screen resolution. This has the big advantage that the results obtained when painting on the printer will match more or less exactly the visible output on the screen. It is the easiest to use, as font metrics on the screen and on the printer are the same. This is the default value. ScreenResolution will produce a lower quality output than HighResolution and should only be used for drafts.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinter.Unit">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type is used to specify the measurement unit for page and paper sizes.</para>
            <para>Note the difference between Point and DevicePixel. The Point unit is defined to be 1/72th of an inch, while the DevicePixel unit is resolution dependant and is based on the actual pixels, or dots, on the printer.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QPrinterInfo">
            <summary>
            The QPrinterInfo class gives access to information about existing printers.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Use the static functions to generate a list of QPrinterInfo objects. Each QPrinterInfo object in the list represents a single printer and can be queried for name, supported paper sizes, and whether or not it is the default printer.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QPrinterInfo object.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinterInfo)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.#ctor(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QPrinterInfo object from printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.AvailablePrinters">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of available printers on the system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.DefaultPrinter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default printer on the system.</para>
            <para>The return value should be checked using isNull() before being used, in case there is no default printer.</para>
            <para>See also isNull().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.IsDefault">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether this printer is the default printer.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether this QPrinterInfo object holds a printer definition.</para>
            <para>An empty QPrinterInfo object could result for example from calling defaultPrinter() when there are no printers on the system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.PrinterName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the printer.</para>
            <para>See also QPrinter::setPrinterName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.SupportedPaperSizes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of supported paper sizes by the printer.</para>
            <para>Not all printer drivers support this query, so the list may be empty. On Mac OS X 10.3, this function always returns an empty list.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QPrinterInfo.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QPrinterInfo object. References to the values in the object become invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QProgressBar">
            <summary>
            The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal or vertical progress bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A progress bar is used to give the user an indication of the progress of an operation and to reassure them that the application is still running.</para>
            <para>The progress bar uses the concept of steps. You set it up by specifying the minimum and maximum possible step values, and it will display the percentage of steps that have been completed when you later give it the current step value. The percentage is calculated by dividing the progress (value() - minimum()) divided by maximum() - minimum().</para>
            <para>You can specify the minimum and maximum number of steps with setMinimum() and setMaximum. The current number of steps is set with setValue(). The progress bar can be rewound to the beginning with reset().</para>
            <para>If minimum and maximum both are set to 0, the bar shows a busy indicator instead of a percentage of steps. This is useful, for example, when using QFtp or QNetworkAccessManager to download items when they are unable to determine the size of the item being downloaded.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	A progress bar shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A progress bar shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A progress bar shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QProgressDialog and GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a progress bar with the given parent.</para>
            <para>By default, the minimum step value is set to 0, and the maximum to 100.</para>
            <para>See also setRange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QProgressBar. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionProgressBar or QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves. This function will check the version of the QStyleOptionProgressBar and fill in the additional values for a QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reset the progress bar. The progress bar &quot;rewinds&quot; and shows no progress.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.SetRange(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the progress bar's minimum and maximum values to minimum and maximum respectively.</para>
            <para>If maximum is smaller than minimum, minimum becomes the only legal value.</para>
            <para>If the current value falls outside the new range, the progress bar is reset with reset().</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressBar.OnValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the value shown in the progress bar changes. value is the new value shown by the progress bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QProgressBar.ValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the value shown in the progress bar changes. value is the new value shown by the progress bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the progress bar's minimum value.</para>
            <para>When setting this property, the maximum is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. If the current value falls outside the new range, the progress bar is reset with reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the progress bar's maximum value.</para>
            <para>When setting this property, the minimum is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. If the current value falls outside the new range, the progress bar is reset with reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the progress bar's current value.</para>
            <para>Attempting to change the current value to one outside the minimum-maximum range has no effect on the current value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the progress bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.TextVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the current completed percentage should be displayed.</para>
            <para>This property may be ignored by the style (e.g., QMacStyle never draws the text).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the orientation of the progress bar.</para>
            <para>The orientation must be Qt::Horizontal (the default) or Qt::Vertical.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.InvertedAppearance">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not a progress bar shows its progress inverted.</para>
            <para>If this property is false, the progress bar grows in the other direction (e.g. from right to left). By default, the progress bar is not inverted.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.TextDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the reading direction of the text for vertical progress bars.</para>
            <para>This property has no impact on horizontal progress bars. By default, the reading direction is QProgressBar::TopToBottom.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressBar.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the string used to generate the current text.</para>
            <para>%p - is replaced by the percentage completed. %v - is replaced by the current value. %m - is replaced by the total number of steps.</para>
            <para>The default value is &quot;%p%&quot;.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QProgressBar.Direction">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the reading direction of the text for vertical progress bars.</para>
            <para>Note that whether or not the text is drawn is dependent on the style. Currently CDE, CleanLooks, Motif, and Plastique draw the text. Mac, Windows and WindowsXP style do not.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also textDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QProgressBar.Direction.BottomToTop">
            <summary>
            <para>The text is rotated 90 degrees counter-clockwise.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QProgressBar.Direction.TopToBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>The text is rotated 90 degrees clockwise.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QProgressDialog">
            <summary>
            The QProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a slow operation.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A progress dialog is used to give the user an indication of how long an operation is going to take, and to demonstrate that the application has not frozen. It can also give the user an opportunity to abort the operation.</para>
            <para>A common problem with progress dialogs is that it is difficult to know when to use them; operations take different amounts of time on different hardware. QProgressDialog offers a solution to this problem: it estimates the time the operation will take (based on time for steps), and only shows itself if that estimate is beyond minimumDuration() (4 seconds by default).</para>
            <para>Use setMinimum() and setMaximum() or the constructor to set the number of &amp;quot;steps&amp;quot; in the operation and call setValue() as the operation progresses. The number of steps can be chosen arbitrarily. It can be the number of files copied, the number of bytes received, the number of iterations through the main loop of your algorithm, or some other suitable unit. Progress starts at the value set by setMinimum(), and the progress dialog shows that the operation has finished when you call setValue() with the value set by setMaximum() as its argument.</para>
            <para>The dialog automatically resets and hides itself at the end of the operation. Use setAutoReset() and setAutoClose() to change this behavior. Note that if you set a new maximum (using setMaximum() or setRange()) that equals your current value(), the dialog will not close regardless.</para>
            <para>There are two ways of using QProgressDialog: modal and modeless.</para>
            <para>Compared to a modeless QProgressDialog, a modal QProgressDialog is simpler to use for the programmer. Do the operation in a loop, call setValue() at intervals, and check for cancellation with wasCanceled(). For example:</para>
            <para>     QProgressDialog progress(&amp;quot;Copying files...&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Abort Copy&amp;quot;, 0, numFiles, this);</para>
            <para>     progress.setWindowModality(Qt::WindowModal);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     for (int i = 0; i &amp;lt; numFiles; i++) {</para>
            <para>         progress.setValue(i);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         if (progress.wasCanceled())</para>
            <para>             break;</para>
            <para>         //... copy one file</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     progress.setValue(numFiles);</para>
            <para>A modeless progress dialog is suitable for operations that take place in the background, where the user is able to interact with the application. Such operations are typically based on QTimer (or QObject::timerEvent()), QSocketNotifier, or QUrlOperator; or performed in a separate thread. A QProgressBar in the status bar of your main window is often an alternative to a modeless progress dialog.</para>
            <para>You need to have an event loop to be running, connect the canceled() signal to a slot that stops the operation, and call setValue() at intervals. For example:</para>
            <para> // Operation constructor</para>
            <para> Operation::Operation(QObject *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QObject(parent), steps(0)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     pd = new QProgressDialog(&amp;quot;Operation in progress.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;, 0, 100);</para>
            <para>     connect(pd, SIGNAL(canceled()), this, SLOT(cancel()));</para>
            <para>     t = new QTimer(this);</para>
            <para>     connect(t, SIGNAL(timeout()), this, SLOT(perform()));</para>
            <para>     t-&amp;gt;start(0);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void Operation::perform()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     pd-&amp;gt;setValue(steps);</para>
            <para>     //... perform one percent of the operation</para>
            <para>     steps++;</para>
            <para>     if (steps &amp;gt; pd-&amp;gt;maximum())</para>
            <para>         t-&amp;gt;stop();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void Operation::cancel()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     t-&amp;gt;stop();</para>
            <para>     //... cleanup</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>In both modes the progress dialog may be customized by replacing the child widgets with custom widgets by using setLabel(), setBar(), and setCancelButton(). The functions setLabelText() and setCancelButtonText() set the texts shown.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDialog, QProgressBar, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, Find Files Example, and Pixelator Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a progress dialog.</para>
            <para>Default settings:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The label text is empty.</para>
            <para>The cancel button text is (translated) &quot;Cancel&quot;.</para>
            <para>minimum is 0;</para>
            <para>maximum is 100</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.#ctor(System.String,System.String,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a progress dialog.</para>
            <para>Default settings:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The label text is empty.</para>
            <para>The cancel button text is (translated) &quot;Cancel&quot;.</para>
            <para>minimum is 0;</para>
            <para>maximum is 100</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Cancel">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes true until the progress dialog is reset. The progress dialog becomes hidden.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.OnCanceled">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked. It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.</para>
            <para>See also wasCanceled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.OnCloseEvent(QtGui.QCloseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.ForceShow">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the dialog if it is still hidden after the algorithm has been started and minimumDuration milliseconds have passed.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimumDuration().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Open">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its accepted() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Open(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Opens the dialog and connects its accepted() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.</para>
            <para>The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Resets the progress dialog. The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is true.</para>
            <para>See also setAutoClose() and setAutoReset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.SetBar(QtGui.QProgressBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the progress bar widget to bar. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The progress dialog takes ownership of the progress bar which will be deleted when necessary, so do not use a progress bar allocated on the stack.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.SetCancelButton(QtGui.QPushButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the cancel button to the push button, cancelButton. The progress dialog takes ownership of this button which will be deleted when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object that is on the stack, i.e. use new() to create the button. If 0 is passed then no cancel button will be shown.</para>
            <para>See also setCancelButtonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.SetCancelButtonText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the cancel button's text to cancelButtonText. If the text is set to QString() then it will cause the cancel button to be hidden and deleted.</para>
            <para>See also setCancelButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.SetLabel(QtGui.QLabel)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the label to label. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The label becomes owned by the progress dialog and will be deleted when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object on the stack.</para>
            <para>See also setLabelText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.SetRange(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the progress dialog's minimum and maximum values to minimum and maximum, respectively.</para>
            <para>If maximum is smaller than minimum, minimum becomes the only legal value.</para>
            <para>If the current value falls outside the new range, the progress dialog is reset with reset().</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns a size that fits the contents of the progress dialog. The progress dialog resizes itself as required, so you should not need to call this yourself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the progress dialog.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Canceled">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked. It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.</para>
            <para>See also wasCanceled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.WasCanceled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the lowest value represented by the progress bar.</para>
            <para>The default is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the highest value represented by the progress bar.</para>
            <para>The default is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the current amount of progress made.</para>
            <para>For the progress dialog to work as expected, you should initially set this property to 0 and finally set it to QProgressDialog::maximum(); you can call setValue() any number of times in-between.</para>
            <para>Warning: If the progress dialog is modal (see QProgressDialog::QProgressDialog()), setValue() calls QApplication::processEvents(), so take care that this does not cause undesirable re-entrancy in your code. For example, don't use a QProgressDialog inside a paintEvent()!</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.AutoReset">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as value() equals maximum().</para>
            <para>The default is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.AutoClose">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by reset().</para>
            <para>The default is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.MinimumDuration">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the time that must pass before the dialog appears.</para>
            <para>If the expected duration of the task is less than the minimumDuration, the dialog will not appear at all. This prevents the dialog popping up for tasks that are quickly over. For tasks that are expected to exceed the minimumDuration, the dialog will pop up after the minimumDuration time or as soon as any progress is set.</para>
            <para>If set to 0, the dialog is always shown as soon as any progress is set. The default is 4000 milliseconds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProgressDialog.LabelText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label's text.</para>
            <para>The default text is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QProxyModel">
            <summary>
            The QProxyModel class provides support for processing data passed between another model and a view.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>If you want to do filtering and sorting, see QSortFilterProxyModel.</para>
            <para>Proxy models provide a standard model interface that can be used to manipulate the data retrieved through an underlying model. They can be used to perform operations such as sorting and filtering on the data obtained without changing the contents of the model.</para>
            <para>Just as with subclasses of QAbstractItemView, QProxyModel provides the setModel() function that is used to specify the model to be acted on by the proxy. Views can be connected to either the underlying model or the proxy model with QAbstractItemView::setModel().</para>
            <para>Since views rely on the information provided in model indexes to identify items of data from models, and to position these items in some visual representation, proxy models must create their own model indexes instead of supplying model indexes from their underlying models.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Model/View Programming and QAbstractItemModel.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a proxy model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of columns for the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.ColumnCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of columns for the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>Returns the data stored in the item with the given index under the specified role.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.DropMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the model accepts the data dropped onto an attached view for the specified action; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The parent, row, and column details can be used to control which MIME types are acceptable to different parts of a model when received via the drag and drop system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.FetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::fetchMore().</para>
            <para>Fetches more child items of the given parent. This function is used by views to tell the model that they can display more data than the model has provided.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::fetchMore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            <para>Returns the item flags for the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the item corresponding to the parent index has child items; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.HasChildren(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the item corresponding to the parent index has child items; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.HeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().</para>
            <para>Returns the data stored in the section of the header with specified orientation under the given role.</para>
            <para>See also setHeaderData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            <para>Returns the model index with the given row, column, and parent.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            <para>Returns the model index with the given row, column, and parent.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            <para>Inserts count columns into the model, creating new items as children of the given parent. The new columns are inserted before the column specified. If the parent item has no children, a single row is created to contain the required number of columns.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the columns were successfully inserted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            <para>Inserts count columns into the model, creating new items as children of the given parent. The new columns are inserted before the column specified. If the parent item has no children, a single row is created to contain the required number of columns.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the columns were successfully inserted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            <para>Inserts count rows into the model, creating new items as children of the given parent. The new rows are inserted before the row specified. If the parent item has no children, a single column is created to contain the required number of rows.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the rows were successfully inserted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            <para>Inserts count rows into the model, creating new items as children of the given parent. The new rows are inserted before the row specified. If the parent item has no children, a single column is created to contain the required number of rows.</para>
            <para>Returns true if the rows were successfully inserted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Match(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Object,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::match().</para>
            <para>Returns a list of model indexes that each contain the given value for the role specified. The search begins at the start index and is performed according to the specified flags. The search continues until the number of matching data items equals hits, the last row is reached, or the search reaches start again, depending on whether MatchWrap is specified in flags.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::match().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeData().</para>
            <para>Returns MIME data for the specified indexes in the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().</para>
            <para>Returns a list of MIME types that are supported by the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            <para>Returns the model index that corresponds to the parent of the given child index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Parent(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            <para>Returns the model index that corresponds to the parent of the given child index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Revert">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::revert().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of rows for the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.RowCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of rows for the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>Sets the role data for the item at index to value. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The base class implementation returns false. This function and data() must be reimplemented for editable models.</para>
            <para>See also data(), itemData(), and QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.SetHeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setHeaderData().</para>
            <para>Sets the role data in the section of the header with the specified orientation to the value given.</para>
            <para>See also headerData() and QAbstractItemModel::setHeaderData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            <para>Sorts the child items in the specified column according to the sort order defined by order.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Span(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::span().</para>
            <para>Returns the size of the item that corresponds to the specified index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Submit">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::submit().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            <para>Returns the drop actions that are supported by the model; this is a combination of the individual actions defined in Qt::DropActions.</para>
            <para>The selection of drop actions provided by the model will influence the behavior of the component that started the drag and drop operation.</para>
            <para>See also Drag and Drop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the proxy model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProxyModel.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model that contains the data that is available through the proxy model.</para>
            <para>Sets the given model to be processed by the proxy model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QProxyStyle">
            <summary>
            The QProxyStyle class is a convenience class that simplifies dynamically overriding QStyle elements.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QProxyStyle wraps a QStyle (usually the default system style) for the purpose of dynamically overriding painting or other specific style behavior.</para>
            <para>The following example shows how to override the shortcut underline behavior on any platform:</para>
            <para> #include &amp;quot;textedit.h&amp;quot;</para>
            <para> #include &amp;lt;QApplication&amp;gt;</para>
            <para> #include &amp;lt;QProxyStyle&amp;gt;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> class MyProxyStyle : public QProxyStyle</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>   public:</para>
            <para>     int styleHint(StyleHint hint, const QStyleOption *option = 0,</para>
            <para>                   const QWidget *widget = 0, QStyleHintReturn *returnData = 0) const</para>
            <para>     {</para>
            <para>         if (hint == QStyle::SH_UnderlineShortcut)</para>
            <para>             return 0;</para>
            <para>         return QProxyStyle::styleHint(hint, option, widget, returnData);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int main(int argc, char **argv)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     Q_INIT_RESOURCE(textedit);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QApplication a(argc, argv);</para>
            <para>     a.setStyle(new MyProxyStyle);</para>
            <para>     TextEdit mw;</para>
            <para>     mw.resize(700, 800);</para>
            <para>     mw.show();</para>
            <para>     //...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Warning: The common styles provided by Qt will respect this hint, because they call QStyle::proxy(), but there is no guarantee that QStyle::proxy() will be called for user defined or system controlled styles. It would not work on a Mac, for example, where menus are handled by the operating system.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyle.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.#ctor(QtGui.QStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QProxyStyle object for overriding behavior in style or in the current application style if style is 0 (default). Normally style is 0, because you want to override behavior in the system style.</para>
            <para>Ownership of style is transferred to QProxyStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.DrawComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.DrawControl(QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.DrawItemPixmap(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawItemPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.DrawItemText(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPalette,System.Boolean,System.String,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawItemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.DrawPrimitive(QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::drawPrimitive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.GeneratedIconPixmap(QtGui.QIcon.Mode,QtGui.QPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::generatedIconPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.HitTestComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtCore.QPoint,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::hitTestComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.ItemPixmapRect(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::itemPixmapRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.ItemTextRect(QtGui.QFontMetrics,QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,System.Boolean,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::itemTextRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.LayoutSpacingImplementation(QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called by layoutSpacing() to determine the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns -1.</para>
            <para>See also layoutSpacing() and combinedLayoutSpacing().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.pixelMetric(QtGui.QStyle.PixelMetric,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.Polish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.Polish(QtGui.QPalette)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.Polish(QtGui.QApplication)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.SizeFromContents(QtGui.QStyle.ContentsType,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtCore.QSize,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::sizeFromContents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.StandardIconImplementation(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this slot to provide your own icons in a QStyle subclass. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required to find the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to help find the icon.</para>
            <para>Note: Because of binary compatibility constraints, standardIcon() introduced in Qt 4.1 is not virtual. Therefore it must dynamically detect and call this slot. This default implementation simply calls standardIcon() with the given parameters.</para>
            <para>See also standardIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.StandardPalette">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPalette().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.standardPixmap(QtGui.QStyle.StandardPixmap,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.styleHint(QtGui.QStyle.StyleHint,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleHintReturn)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.SubControlRect(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex,QtGui.QStyle.SubControl,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::subControlRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.SubElementRect(QtGui.QStyle.SubElement,QtGui.QStyleOption,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::subElementRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.Unpolish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.Unpolish(QtGui.QApplication)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QProxyStyle.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QProxyStyle object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QProxyStyle.BaseStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the proxy base style object. If no base style is set on the proxy style, QProxyStyle will create an instance of the application style instead.</para>
            <para>Sets the base style that should be proxied.</para>
            <para>Ownership of style is transferred to QProxyStyle.</para>
            <para>If style is zero, a desktop-dependant style will be assigned automatically.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QQuaternion">
            <summary>
            The QQuaternion class represents a quaternion consisting of a vector and scalar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Quaternions are used to represent rotations in 3D space, and consist of a 3D rotation axis specified by the x, y, and z coordinates, and a scalar representing the rotation angle.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity quaternion, i.e. with coordinates (1, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.#ctor(QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a quaternion from the components of vector.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.#ctor(QtGui.QQuaternion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity quaternion, i.e. with coordinates (1, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.#ctor(System.Double,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity quaternion, i.e. with coordinates (1, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an identity quaternion, i.e. with coordinates (1, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.op_Multiply(QtGui.QQuaternion,QtGui.QQuaternion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies q1 and q2 using quaternion multiplication. The result corresponds to applying both of the rotations specified by q1 and q2.</para>
            <para>See also QQuaternion::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.op_Multiply(QtGui.QQuaternion,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies q1 and q2 using quaternion multiplication. The result corresponds to applying both of the rotations specified by q1 and q2.</para>
            <para>See also QQuaternion::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.op_Addition(QtGui.QQuaternion,QtGui.QQuaternion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QQuaternion object that is the sum of the given quaternions, q1 and q2; each component is added separately.</para>
            <para>See also QQuaternion::operator+=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.op_UnaryNegation(QtGui.QQuaternion)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a QQuaternion object that is formed by changing the sign of all three components of the given quaternion.</para>
            <para>Equivalent to QQuaternion(0,0,0,0) - quaternion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QQuaternion,QtGui.QQuaternion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QQuaternion object that is formed by subtracting q2 from q1; each component is subtracted separately.</para>
            <para>See also QQuaternion::operator-=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.op_Division(QtGui.QQuaternion,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QQuaternion object formed by dividing all components of the given quaternion by the given divisor.</para>
            <para>See also QQuaternion::operator/=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.Conjugate">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the conjugate of this quaternion, which is (-x, -y, -z, scalar).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.FromAxisAndAngle(QtGui.QVector3D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a normalized quaternion that corresponds to rotating through angle degrees about the specified 3D axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.FromAxisAndAngle(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a normalized quaternion that corresponds to rotating through angle degrees about the specified 3D axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.IsIdentity">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the x, y, and z components of this quaternion are set to 0.0, and the scalar component is set to 1.0; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the x, y, z, and scalar components of this quaternion are set to 0.0; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the quaternion. This is also called the &quot;norm&quot;.</para>
            <para>See also lengthSquared() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.LengthSquared">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the squared length of the quaternion.</para>
            <para>See also length().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.Nlerp(QtGui.QQuaternion,QtGui.QQuaternion,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Interpolates along the shortest linear path between the rotational positions q1 and q2. The value t should be between 0 and 1, indicating the distance to travel between q1 and q2. The result will be normalized().</para>
            <para>If t is less than or equal to 0, then q1 will be returned. If t is greater than or equal to 1, then q2 will be returned.</para>
            <para>The nlerp() function is typically faster than slerp() and will give approximate results to spherical interpolation that are good enough for some applications.</para>
            <para>See also slerp().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.Normalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Normalizes the currect quaternion in place. Nothing happens if this is a null quaternion or the length of the quaternion is very close to 1.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.Normalized">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized unit form of this quaternion.</para>
            <para>If this quaternion is null, then a null quaternion is returned. If the length of the quaternion is very close to 1, then the quaternion will be returned as-is. Otherwise the normalized form of the quaternion of length 1 will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.RotatedVector(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Rotates vector with this quaternion to produce a new vector in 3D space. The following code:</para>
            <para> QVector3D result = q.rotatedVector(vector);</para>
            <para>is equivalent to the following:</para>
            <para> QVector3D result = (q * QQuaternion(0, vector) * q.conjugate()).vector();</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.SetVector(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the vector component of this quaternion to vector.</para>
            <para>See also vector() and setScalar().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.Slerp(QtGui.QQuaternion,QtGui.QQuaternion,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Interpolates along the shortest spherical path between the rotational positions q1 and q2. The value t should be between 0 and 1, indicating the spherical distance to travel between q1 and q2.</para>
            <para>If t is less than or equal to 0, then q1 will be returned. If t is greater than or equal to 1, then q2 will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also nlerp().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QQuaternion.ToVector4D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this quaternion as a 4D vector.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QQuaternion.Scalar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scalar component of this quaternion.</para>
            <para>Sets the scalar component of this quaternion to scalar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QQuaternion.Vector">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vector component of this quaternion.</para>
            <para>Sets the vector component of this quaternion to vector.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QQuaternion.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x coordinate of this quaternion's vector.</para>
            <para>Sets the x coordinate of this quaternion's vector to the given x coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QQuaternion.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y coordinate of this quaternion's vector.</para>
            <para>Sets the y coordinate of this quaternion's vector to the given y coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QQuaternion.Z">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the z coordinate of this quaternion's vector.</para>
            <para>Sets the z coordinate of this quaternion's vector to the given z coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRadialGradient">
            <summary>
            The QRadialGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify a radial gradient brush.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt supports both simple and extended radial gradients.</para>
            <para>Simple radial gradients interpolate colors between a focal point and end points on a circle surrounding it. Extended radial gradients interpolate colors between a focal circle and a center circle. Points outside the cone defined by the two circles will be transparent. For simple radial gradients the focal point is adjusted to lie inside the center circle, whereas the focal point can have any position in an extended radial gradient.</para>
            <para>Outside the end points the gradient is either padded, reflected or repeated depending on the currently set spread method:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>PadSpread (default)	ReflectSpread	RepeatSpread</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The colors in a gradient is defined using stop points of the QGradientStop type, i.e. a position and a color. Use the QGradient::setColorAt() or the QGradient::setStops() function to define the stop points. It is the gradient's complete set of stop points that describes how the gradient area should be filled. If no stop points have been specified, a gradient of black at 0 to white at 1 is used.</para>
            <para>In addition to the functions inherited from QGradient, the QRadialGradient class provides the center(), focalPoint() and radius() functions returning the gradient's center, focal point and radius respectively.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLinearGradient, QConicalGradient, and The Gradients Demo.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(QtGui.QRadialGradient)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF,System.Double,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF,System.Double,QtCore.QPointF,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a simple radial gradient with the center and focal point at (0, 0) with a radius of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.SetCenter(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the center of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to center.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also center().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadialGradient.SetFocalPoint(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the focal point of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to focalPoint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also focalPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRadialGradient.Center">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the center of this radial gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets the center of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to center.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRadialGradient.CenterRadius">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the center radius of this radial gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the center radius of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to radius</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRadialGradient.FocalPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the focal point of this radial gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Sets the focal point of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to focalPoint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRadialGradient.FocalRadius">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the focal radius of this radial gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the focal radius of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to radius</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRadialGradient.Radius">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the radius of this radial gradient in logical coordinates.</para>
            <para>Equivalent to centerRadius()</para>
            <para>Sets the radius of this radial gradient in logical coordinates to radius</para>
            <para>Equivalent to setCenterRadius()</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRadioButton">
            <summary>
            The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text label.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QRadioButton is an option button that can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). Radio buttons typically present the user with a &amp;quot;one of many&amp;quot; choice. In a group of radio buttons only one radio button at a time can be checked; if the user selects another button, the previously selected button is switched off.</para>
            <para>Radio buttons are autoExclusive by default. If auto-exclusive is enabled, radio buttons that belong to the same parent widget behave as if they were part of the same exclusive button group. If you need multiple exclusive button groups for radio buttons that belong to the same parent widget, put them into a QButtonGroup.</para>
            <para>Whenever a button is switched on or off it emits the toggled() signal. Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action each time the button changes state. Use isChecked() to see if a particular button is selected.</para>
            <para>Just like QPushButton, a radio button displays text, and optionally a small icon. The icon is set with setIcon(). The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(). A shortcut key can be specified by preceding the preferred character with an ampersand in the text. For example:</para>
            <para> QRadioButton *button = new QRadioButton(&amp;quot;Search from the &amp;amp;cursor&amp;quot;, this);</para>
            <para>In this example the shortcut is Alt+c. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;amp;&amp;amp;').</para>
            <para>Important inherited members: text(), setText(), text(), setDown(), isDown(), autoRepeat(), group(), setAutoRepeat(), toggle(), pressed(), released(), clicked(), and toggled().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A radio button shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para>	A radio button shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A radio button shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPushButton, QToolButton, QCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Group Box Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a radio button with the given parent, but with no text or pixmap.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a radio button with the given parent and a text string.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.HitButton(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::hitButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QRadioButton. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionButton, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRadioButton.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRawFont">
            <summary>
            The QRawFont class provides access to a single physical instance of a font.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note: QRawFont is a low level class. For most purposes QFont is a more appropriate class.</para>
            <para>Most commonly, when presenting text in a user interface, the exact fonts used to render the characters is to some extent unknown. This can be the case for several reasons: For instance, the actual, physical fonts present on the target system could be unexpected to the developers, or the text could contain user selected styles, sizes or writing systems that are not supported by font chosen in the code.</para>
            <para>Therefore, Qt's QFont class really represents a query for fonts. When text is interpreted, Qt will do its best to match the text to the query, but depending on the support, different fonts can be used behind the scenes.</para>
            <para>For most use cases, this is both expected and necessary, as it minimizes the possibility of text in the user interface being undisplayable. In some cases, however, more direct control over the process might be useful. It is for these use cases the QRawFont class exists.</para>
            <para>A QRawFont object represents a single, physical instance of a given font in a given pixel size. I.e. in the typical case it represents a set of TrueType or OpenType font tables and uses a user specified pixel size to convert metrics into logical pixel units. It can be used in combination with the QGlyphRun class to draw specific glyph indexes at specific positions, and also have accessors to some relevant data in the physical font.</para>
            <para>QRawFont only provides support for the main font technologies: GDI and DirectWrite on Windows platforms, FreeType on Symbian and Linux platforms and CoreText on Mac OS X. For other font back-ends, the APIs will be disabled.</para>
            <para>QRawFont can be constructed in a number of ways:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>It can be constructed by calling QTextLayout::glyphs() or QTextFragment::glyphs(). The returned QGlyphs objects will contain QRawFont objects which represent the actual fonts used to render each portion of the text.</para>
            <para>It can be constructed by passing a QFont object to QRawFont::fromFont(). The function will return a QRawFont object representing the font that will be selected as response to the QFont query and the selected writing system.</para>
            <para>It can be constructed by passing a file name or QByteArray directly to the QRawFont constructor, or by calling loadFromFile() or loadFromData(). In this case, the font will not be registered in QFontDatabase, and it will not be available as part of regular font selection.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QRawFont is considered local to the thread in which it is constructed (either using a constructor, or by calling loadFromData() or loadFromFile()). The QRawFont cannot be moved to a different thread, but will have to be recreated in the thread in question.</para>
            <para>Note: For the requirement of caching glyph indexes and font selections for static text to avoid reshaping and relayouting in the inner loop of an application, a better choice is the QStaticText class, since it optimizes the memory cost of the cache and also provides the possibility of paint engine specific caches for an additional speed-up.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid QRawFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.#ctor(QtGui.QRawFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QRawFont which is a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.#ctor(QtCore.QByteArray,System.Double,QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid QRawFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.#ctor(System.String,System.Double,QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid QRawFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.AdvancesForGlyphIndexes(System.UInt32@,QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QRawFont's advances for each of the glyphIndexes in pixel units. The advances give the distance from the position of a given glyph to where the next glyph should be drawn to make it appear as if the two glyphs are unspaced.</para>
            <para>See also QTextLine::horizontalAdvance() and QFontMetricsF::width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.AdvancesForGlyphIndexes(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.UInt32})">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QRawFont's advances for each of the glyphIndexes in pixel units. The advances give the distance from the position of a given glyph to where the next glyph should be drawn to make it appear as if the two glyphs are unspaced.</para>
            <para>See also QTextLine::horizontalAdvance() and QFontMetricsF::width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.AlphaMapForGlyph(System.UInt32,QtGui.QRawFont.AntialiasingType)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns a rasterized image of the glyph at the given glyphIndex in the underlying font, using the transform specified. If the QRawFont is not valid, this function will return an invalid QImage.</para>
            <para>If antialiasingType is set to QRawFont::SubPixelAntialiasing, then the resulting image will be in QImage::Format_RGB32 and the RGB values of each pixel will represent the subpixel opacities of the pixel in the rasterization of the glyph. Otherwise, the image will be in the format of QImage::Format_Indexed8 and each pixel will contain the opacity of the pixel in the rasterization.</para>
            <para>See also pathForGlyph() and QPainter::drawGlyphRun().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.AlphaMapForGlyph(System.UInt32,QtGui.QRawFont.AntialiasingType,QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns a rasterized image of the glyph at the given glyphIndex in the underlying font, using the transform specified. If the QRawFont is not valid, this function will return an invalid QImage.</para>
            <para>If antialiasingType is set to QRawFont::SubPixelAntialiasing, then the resulting image will be in QImage::Format_RGB32 and the RGB values of each pixel will represent the subpixel opacities of the pixel in the rasterization of the glyph. Otherwise, the image will be in the format of QImage::Format_Indexed8 and each pixel will contain the opacity of the pixel in the rasterization.</para>
            <para>See also pathForGlyph() and QPainter::drawGlyphRun().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.Ascent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the ascent of this QRawFont in pixel units.</para>
            <para>See also QFontMetricsF::ascent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.AverageCharWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the average character width of this QRawFont in pixel units.</para>
            <para>See also QFontMetricsF::averageCharWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.Descent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the descent of this QRawFont in pixel units.</para>
            <para>See also QFontMetricsF::descent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.FamilyName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the family name of this QRawFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.FontTable(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Retrieves the sfnt table named tagName from the underlying physical font, or an empty byte array if no such table was found. The returned font table's byte order is Big Endian, like the sfnt format specifies. The tagName must be four characters long and should be formatted in the default endianness of the current platform.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.FromFont(QtGui.QFont,QtGui.QFontDatabase.WritingSystem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Fetches the physical representation based on a font query. The physical font returned is the font that will be preferred by Qt in order to display text in the selected writingSystem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.GlyphIndexesForChars(QtCore.QChar,System.Int32,System.UInt32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts a string of unicode points to glyph indexes using the CMAP table in the underlying font. The function works like glyphIndexesForString() except it take an array (chars), the results will be returned though glyphIndexes array and number of glyphs will be set in numGlyphs. The size of glyphIndexes array must be at least numChars, if that's still not enough, this function will return false, then you can resize glyphIndexes from the size returned in numGlyphs.</para>
            <para>See also glyphIndexesForString(), advancesForGlyphIndexes(), QGlyphRun, QTextLayout::glyphRuns(), and QTextFragment::glyphRuns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.GlyphIndexesForString(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the string of unicode points given by text to glyph indexes using the CMAP table in the underlying font, and returns a vector containing the result.</para>
            <para>Note that, in cases where there are other tables in the font that affect the shaping of the text, the returned glyph indexes will not correctly represent the rendering of the text. To get the correctly shaped text, you can use QTextLayout to lay out and shape the text, then call QTextLayout::glyphs() to get the set of glyph index list and QRawFont pairs.</para>
            <para>See also advancesForGlyphIndexes(), glyphIndexesForChars(), QGlyphRun, QTextLayout::glyphRuns(), and QTextFragment::glyphRuns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.HintingPreference">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hinting preference used to construct this QRawFont.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::hintingPreference().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the QRawFont is valid and false otherwise.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.Leading">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the leading of this QRawFont in pixel units.</para>
            <para>See also QFontMetricsF::leading().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.LoadFromData(QtCore.QByteArray,System.Double,QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replaces the current QRawFont with the font contained in the supplied fontData for the size (in pixels) given by pixelSize, and using the hinting preference specified by hintingPreference.</para>
            <para>The fontData must contain a TrueType or OpenType font.</para>
            <para>See also loadFromFile().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.LoadFromFile(System.String,System.Double,QtGui.QFont.HintingPreference)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replaces the current QRawFont with the contents of the file referenced by fileName for the size (in pixels) given by pixelSize, and using the hinting preference specified by hintingPreference.</para>
            <para>The file must reference a TrueType or OpenType font.</para>
            <para>See also loadFromData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.MaxCharWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the widest character in the font.</para>
            <para>See also QFontMetricsF::maxWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.op_Inequality(QtGui.QRawFont,QtGui.QRawFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this QRawFont is not equal to other. Otherwise, returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.op_Equality(QtGui.QRawFont,QtGui.QRawFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this QRawFont is equal to other. Otherwise, returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.PathForGlyph(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns the shape of the glyph at a given glyphIndex in the underlying font if the QRawFont is valid. Otherwise, it returns an empty QPainterPath.</para>
            <para>The returned glyph will always be unhinted.</para>
            <para>See also alphaMapForGlyph() and QPainterPath::addText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style of this QRawFont.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::style().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.StyleName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style name of this QRawFont.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::styleName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.SupportedWritingSystems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of writing systems supported by the font according to designer supplied information in the font file. Please note that this does not guarantee support for a specific unicode point in the font. You can use the supportsCharacter() to check support for a single, specific character.</para>
            <para>Note: The list is determined based on the unicode ranges and codepage ranges set in the font's OS/2 table and requires such a table to be present in the underlying font file.</para>
            <para>See also supportsCharacter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.SupportsCharacter(QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font has a glyph that corresponds to the given character.</para>
            <para>See also supportedWritingSystems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.SupportsCharacter(System.UInt32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font has a glyph that corresponds to the given character.</para>
            <para>See also supportedWritingSystems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.UnitsPerEm">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of design units define the width and height of the em square for this QRawFont. This value is used together with the pixel size when converting design metrics to pixel units, as the internal metrics are specified in design units and the pixel size gives the size of 1 em in pixels.</para>
            <para>See also pixelSize() and setPixelSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.Weight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the weight of this QRawFont.</para>
            <para>See also QFont::weight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.xHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the xHeight of this QRawFont in pixel units.</para>
            <para>See also QFontMetricsF::xHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRawFont.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QRawFont</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRawFont.PixelSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixel size set for this QRawFont. The pixel size affects how glyphs are rasterized, the size of glyphs returned by pathForGlyph(), and is used to convert internal metrics from design units to logical pixel units.</para>
            <para>Sets the pixel size with which this font should be rendered to pixelSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRawFont.AntialiasingType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum represents the different ways a glyph can be rasterized in the function alphaMapForGlyph().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QRawFont.AntialiasingType.PixelAntialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>Will rasterize by measuring the coverage of the shape on whole pixels. The returned image contains the alpha values of each pixel based on the coverage of the glyph shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QRawFont.AntialiasingType.SubPixelAntialiasing">
            <summary>
            <para>Will rasterize by measuring the coverage of each subpixel, returning a separate alpha value for each of the red, green and blue components of each pixel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRegExpValidator">
            <summary>
            The QRegExpValidator class is used to check a string against a regular expression.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QRegExpValidator uses a regular expression (regexp) to determine whether an input string is Acceptable, Intermediate, or Invalid. The regexp can either be supplied when the QRegExpValidator is constructed, or at a later time.</para>
            <para>When QRegExpValidator determines whether a string is Acceptable or not, the regexp is treated as if it begins with the start of string assertion (^) and ends with the end of string assertion ($); the match is against the entire input string, or from the given position if a start position greater than zero is given.</para>
            <para>If a string is a prefix of an Acceptable string, it is considered Intermediate. For example, &amp;quot;&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; are Intermediate for the regexp [A-Z][0-9] (whereas &amp;quot;_&amp;quot; would be Invalid).</para>
            <para>For a brief introduction to Qt's regexp engine, see QRegExp.</para>
            <para>Example of use:</para>
            <para> // regexp: optional '-' followed by between 1 and 3 digits</para>
            <para> QRegExp rx(&amp;quot;-?\\d{1,3}&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> QValidator *validator = new QRegExpValidator(rx, this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QLineEdit *edit = new QLineEdit(this);</para>
            <para> edit-&amp;gt;setValidator(validator);</para>
            <para>Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.</para>
            <para> // integers 1 to 9999</para>
            <para> QRegExp rx(&amp;quot;[1-9]\\d{0,3}&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> // the validator treats the regexp as &amp;quot;^[1-9]\\d{0,3}$&amp;quot;</para>
            <para> QRegExpValidator v(rx, 0);</para>
            <para> QString s;</para>
            <para> int pos = 0;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;;     v.validate(s, pos);    // returns Invalid</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;12345&amp;quot;; v.validate(s, pos);    // returns Invalid</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;;     v.validate(s, pos);    // returns Acceptable</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> rx.setPattern(&amp;quot;\\S+&amp;quot;);            // one or more non-whitespace characters</para>
            <para> v.setRegExp(rx);</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;myfile.txt&amp;quot;;  v.validate(s, pos); // Returns Acceptable</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;my file.txt&amp;quot;; v.validate(s, pos); // Returns Invalid</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // A, B or C followed by exactly five digits followed by W, X, Y or Z</para>
            <para> rx.setPattern(&amp;quot;[A-C]\\d{5}[W-Z]&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> v.setRegExp(rx);</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;a12345Z&amp;quot;; v.validate(s, pos);        // Returns Invalid</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;A12345Z&amp;quot;; v.validate(s, pos);        // Returns Acceptable</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;B12&amp;quot;;     v.validate(s, pos);        // Returns Intermediate</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> // match most 'readme' files</para>
            <para> rx.setPattern(&amp;quot;read\\S?me(\.(txt|asc|1st))?&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> rx.setCaseSensitive(false);</para>
            <para> v.setRegExp(rx);</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;readme&amp;quot;;      v.validate(s, pos); // Returns Acceptable</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;README.1ST&amp;quot;;  v.validate(s, pos); // Returns Acceptable</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;read me.txt&amp;quot;; v.validate(s, pos); // Returns Invalid</para>
            <para> s = &amp;quot;readm&amp;quot;;       v.validate(s, pos); // Returns Intermediate</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QRegExp, QIntValidator, QDoubleValidator, and Settings Editor Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegExpValidator.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a validator with a parent object that accepts any string (including an empty one) as valid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegExpValidator.#ctor(QtCore.QRegExp,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a validator with a parent object that accepts all strings that match the regular expression rx.</para>
            <para>The match is made against the entire string; e.g. if the regexp is [A-Fa-f0-9]+ it will be treated as ^[A-Fa-f0-9]+$.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegExpValidator.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QValidator::validate().</para>
            <para>Returns Acceptable if input is matched by the regular expression for this validator, Intermediate if it has matched partially (i.e. could be a valid match if additional valid characters are added), and Invalid if input is not matched.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter is set to the length of the input parameter.</para>
            <para>For example, if the regular expression is \w\d\d (word-character, digit, digit) then &quot;A57&quot; is Acceptable, &quot;E5&quot; is Intermediate, and &quot;+9&quot; is Invalid.</para>
            <para>See also QRegExp::exactMatch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRegExpValidator.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the validator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QRegExpValidator.RegExp">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the regular expression used for validation.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a regular expression with the pattern .* that matches any string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QResizeEvent">
            <summary>
            The QResizeEvent class contains event parameters for resize events.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Resize events are sent to widgets that have been resized.</para>
            <para>The event handler QWidget::resizeEvent() receives resize events.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget::resize() and QWidget::setGeometry().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QResizeEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a resize event with the new and old widget sizes, size and oldSize respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QResizeEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QSize,QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a resize event with the new and old widget sizes, size and oldSize respectively.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QResizeEvent.OldSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the old size of the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QResizeEvent.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the new size of the widget. This is the same as QWidget::size().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRubberBand">
            <summary>
            The QRubberBand class provides a rectangle or line that can indicate a selection or a boundary.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A rubber band is often used to show a new bounding area (as in a QSplitter or a QDockWidget that is undocking). Historically this has been implemented using a QPainter and XOR, but this approach doesn't always work properly since rendering can happen in the window below the rubber band, but before the rubber band has been &amp;quot;erased&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para>You can create a QRubberBand whenever you need to render a rubber band around a given area (or to represent a single line), then call setGeometry(), move() or resize() to position and size it. A common pattern is to do this in conjunction with mouse events. For example:</para>
            <para> void Widget::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     origin = event-&amp;gt;pos();</para>
            <para>     if (!rubberBand)</para>
            <para>         rubberBand = new QRubberBand(QRubberBand::Rectangle, this);</para>
            <para>     rubberBand-&amp;gt;setGeometry(QRect(origin, QSize()));</para>
            <para>     rubberBand-&amp;gt;show();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void Widget::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     rubberBand-&amp;gt;setGeometry(QRect(origin, event-&amp;gt;pos()).normalized());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void Widget::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     rubberBand-&amp;gt;hide();</para>
            <para>     // determine selection, for example using QRect::intersects()</para>
            <para>     // and QRect::contains().</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>If you pass a parent to QRubberBand's constructor, the rubber band will display only inside its parent, but stays on top of other child widgets. If no parent is passed, QRubberBand will act as a top-level widget.</para>
            <para>Call show() to make the rubber band visible; also when the rubber band is not a top-level. Hiding or destroying the widget will make the rubber band disappear. The rubber band can be a Rectangle or a Line (vertical or horizontal), depending on the shape() it was given when constructed.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.#ctor(QtGui.QRubberBand.Shape,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a rubber band of shape s, with parent p.</para>
            <para>By default a rectangular rubber band (s is Rectangle) will use a mask, so that a small border of the rectangle is all that is visible. Some styles (e.g., native Mac OS X) will change this and call QWidget::setWindowOpacity() to make a semi-transparent filled selection rectangle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QRubberBand. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionRubberBand, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.Move(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Moves the rubberband to point p.</para>
            <para>See also resize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.Move(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the rubberband to point (x, y).</para>
            <para>See also resize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.OnMoveEvent(QtGui.QMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::moveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.Resize(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Resizes the rubberband so that its new size is size.</para>
            <para>See also move().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.Resize(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the rubberband so that its width is width, and its height is height.</para>
            <para>See also move().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.SetGeometry(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the geometry of the rubber band to rect, specified in the coordinate system of its parent widget.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::geometry.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.SetGeometry(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the geometry of the rubberband to the rectangle whose top-left corner lies at the point (x, y), and with dimensions specified by width and height. The geometry is specified in the parent widget's coordinate system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.shape">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the shape of this rubber band. The shape can only be set upon construction.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QRubberBand.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QRubberBand.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies what shape a QRubberBand should have. This is a drawing hint that is passed down to the style system, and can be interpreted by each QStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QRubberBand.Shape.Line">
            <summary>
            <para>A QRubberBand can represent a vertical or horizontal line. Geometry is still given in rect() and the line will fill the given geometry on most styles.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QRubberBand.Shape.Rectangle">
            <summary>
            <para>A QRubberBand can represent a rectangle. Some styles will interpret this as a filled (often semi-transparent) rectangle, or a rectangular outline.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QScrollArea">
            <summary>
            The QScrollArea class provides a scrolling view onto another widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A scroll area is used to display the contents of a child widget within a frame. If the widget exceeds the size of the frame, the view can provide scroll bars so that the entire area of the child widget can be viewed. The child widget must be specified with setWidget(). For example:</para>
            <para> QLabel *imageLabel = new QLabel;</para>
            <para> QImage image(&amp;quot;happyguy.png&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> imageLabel-&amp;gt;setPixmap(QPixmap::fromImage(image));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> scrollArea = new QScrollArea;</para>
            <para> scrollArea-&amp;gt;setBackgroundRole(QPalette::Dark);</para>
            <para> scrollArea-&amp;gt;setWidget(imageLabel);</para>
            <para>The code above creates a scroll area (shown in the images below) containing an image label. When scaling the image, the scroll area can provide the necessary scroll bars:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The scroll bars appearance depends on the currently set scroll bar policies. You can control the appearance of the scroll bars using the inherited functionality from QAbstractScrollArea.</para>
            <para>For example, you can set the QAbstractScrollArea::horizontalScrollBarPolicy and QAbstractScrollArea::verticalScrollBarPolicy properties. Or if you want the scroll bars to adjust dynamically when the contents of the scroll area changes, you can use the horizontalScrollBar() and verticalScrollBar() functions (which enable you to access the scroll bars) and set the scroll bars' values whenever the scroll area's contents change, using the QScrollBar::setValue() function.</para>
            <para>You can retrieve the child widget using the widget() function. The view can be made to be resizable with the setWidgetResizable() function. The alignment of the widget can be specified with setAlignment().</para>
            <para>Two convenience functions ensureVisible() and ensureWidgetVisible() ensure a certain region of the contents is visible inside the viewport, by scrolling the contents if necessary.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Size Hints and Layouts</para>
            <para>When using a scroll area to display the contents of a custom widget, it is important to ensure that the size hint of the child widget is set to a suitable value. If a standard QWidget is used for the child widget, it may be necessary to call QWidget::setMinimumSize() to ensure that the contents of the widget are shown correctly within the scroll area.</para>
            <para>If a scroll area is used to display the contents of a widget that contains child widgets arranged in a layout, it is important to realize that the size policy of the layout will also determine the size of the widget. This is especially useful to know if you intend to dynamically change the contents of the layout. In such cases, setting the layout's size constraint property to one which provides constraints on the minimum and/or maximum size of the layout (e.g., QLayout::SetMinAndMaxSize) will cause the size of the scroll area to be updated whenever the contents of the layout changes.</para>
            <para>For a complete example using the QScrollArea class, see the Image Viewer example. The example shows how to combine QLabel and QScrollArea to display an image.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractScrollArea, QScrollBar, and Image Viewer Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty scroll area with the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also setWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.EnsureVisible(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the point (x, y) is visible inside the region of the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.EnsureWidgetVisible(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the childWidget of QScrollArea::widget() is visible inside the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.TakeWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the scroll area's widget, and passes ownership of the widget to the caller.</para>
            <para>See also widget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollArea.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the scroll area and its child widget.</para>
            <para>See also setWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QScrollArea.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scroll area's widget, or 0 if there is none.</para>
            <para>Sets the scroll area's widget.</para>
            <para>The widget becomes a child of the scroll area, and will be destroyed when the scroll area is deleted or when a new widget is set.</para>
            <para>The widget's autoFillBackground property will be set to true.</para>
            <para>If the scroll area is visible when the widget is added, you must show() it explicitly.</para>
            <para>Note that You must add the layout of widget before you call this function; if you add it later, the widget will not be visible - regardless of when you show() the scroll area. In this case, you can also not show() the widget later.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QScrollArea.WidgetResizable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the scroll area should resize the view widget.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to false (the default), the scroll area honors the size of its widget. Regardless of this property, you can programmatically resize the widget using widget()-&gt;resize(), and the scroll area will automatically adjust itself to the new size.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to true, the scroll area will automatically resize the widget in order to avoid scroll bars where they can be avoided, or to take advantage of extra space.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QScrollArea.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the alignment of the scroll area's widget.</para>
            <para>By default, the widget stays rooted to the top-left corner of the scroll area.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QScrollBar">
            <summary>
            The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A scroll bar is a control that enables the user to access parts of a document that is larger than the widget used to display it. It provides a visual indication of the user's current position within the document and the amount of the document that is visible. Scroll bars are usually equipped with other controls that enable more accurate navigation. Qt displays scroll bars in a way that is appropriate for each platform.</para>
            <para>If you need to provide a scrolling view onto another widget, it may be more convenient to use the QScrollArea class because this provides a viewport widget and scroll bars. QScrollBar is useful if you need to implement similar functionality for specialized widgets using QAbstractScrollArea; for example, if you decide to subclass QAbstractItemView. For most other situations where a slider control is used to obtain a value within a given range, the QSlider class may be more appropriate for your needs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	Scroll bars typically include four separate controls: a slider, scroll arrows, and a page control.</para>
            <para>a. The slider provides a way to quickly go to any part of the document, but does not support accurate navigation within large documents.</para>
            <para>b. The scroll arrows are push buttons which can be used to accurately navigate to a particular place in a document. For a vertical scroll bar connected to a text editor, these typically move the current position one &amp;quot;line&amp;quot; up or down, and adjust the position of the slider by a small amount. In editors and list boxes a &amp;quot;line&amp;quot; might mean one line of text; in an image viewer it might mean 20 pixels.</para>
            <para>c. The page control is the area over which the slider is dragged (the scroll bar's background). Clicking here moves the scroll bar towards the click by one &amp;quot;page&amp;quot;. This value is usually the same as the length of the slider.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Each scroll bar has a value that indicates how far the slider is from the start of the scroll bar; this is obtained with value() and set with setValue(). This value always lies within the range of values defined for the scroll bar, from minimum() to maximum() inclusive. The range of acceptable values can be set with setMinimum() and setMaximum(). At the minimum value, the top edge of the slider (for a vertical scroll bar) or left edge (for a horizontal scroll bar) will be at the top (or left) end of the scroll bar. At the maximum value, the bottom (or right) edge of the slider will be at the bottom (or right) end of the scroll bar.</para>
            <para>The length of the slider is usually related to the value of the page step, and typically represents the proportion of the document area shown in a scrolling view. The page step is the amount that the value changes by when the user presses the Page Up and Page Down keys, and is set with setPageStep(). Smaller changes to the value defined by the line step are made using the cursor keys, and this quantity is set with setSingleStep().</para>
            <para>Note that the range of values used is independent of the actual size of the scroll bar widget. You do not need to take this into account when you choose values for the range and the page step.</para>
            <para>The range of values specified for the scroll bar are often determined differently to those for a QSlider because the length of the slider needs to be taken into account. If we have a document with 100 lines, and we can only show 20 lines in a widget, we may wish to construct a scroll bar with a page step of 20, a minimum value of 0, and a maximum value of 80. This would give us a scroll bar with five &amp;quot;pages&amp;quot;.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	The relationship between a document length, the range of values used in a scroll bar, and the page step is simple in many common situations. The scroll bar's range of values is determined by subtracting a chosen page step from some value representing the length of the document. In such cases, the following equation is useful: document length = maximum() - minimum() + pageStep().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QScrollBar only provides integer ranges. Note that although QScrollBar handles very large numbers, scroll bars on current screens cannot usefully represent ranges above about 100,000 pixels. Beyond that, it becomes difficult for the user to control the slider using either the keyboard or the mouse, and the scroll arrows will have limited use.</para>
            <para>ScrollBar inherits a comprehensive set of signals from QAbstractSlider:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>valueChanged() is emitted when the scroll bar's value has changed. The tracking() determines whether this signal is emitted during user interaction.</para>
            <para>rangeChanged() is emitted when the scroll bar's range of values has changed.</para>
            <para>sliderPressed() is emitted when the user starts to drag the slider.</para>
            <para>sliderMoved() is emitted when the user drags the slider.</para>
            <para>sliderReleased() is emitted when the user releases the slider.</para>
            <para>actionTriggered() is emitted when the scroll bar is changed by user interaction or via the triggerAction() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A scroll bar can be controlled by the keyboard, but it has a default focusPolicy() of Qt::NoFocus. Use setFocusPolicy() to enable keyboard interaction with the scroll bar:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Left/Right move a horizontal scroll bar by one single step.</para>
            <para>Up/Down move a vertical scroll bar by one single step.</para>
            <para>PageUp moves up one page.</para>
            <para>PageDown moves down one page.</para>
            <para>Home moves to the start (mininum).</para>
            <para>End moves to the end (maximum).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The slider itself can be controlled by using the triggerAction() function to simulate user interaction with the scroll bar controls. This is useful if you have many different widgets that use a common range of values.</para>
            <para>Most GUI styles use the pageStep() value to calculate the size of the slider.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A scroll bar shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A scroll bar shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A scroll bar shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QScrollArea, QSlider, QDial, QSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Scroll Bar, and Sliders Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vertical scroll bar.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a scroll bar with the given orientation.</para>
            <para>The parent argument is passed to the QWidget constructor.</para>
            <para>The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QScrollBar. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSlider, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.sliderChange(QtGui.QAbstractSlider.SliderChange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSlider::sliderChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QScrollBar.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the scroll bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSessionManager">
            <summary>
            The QSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A session manager in a desktop environment (in which Qt GUI applications live) keeps track of a session, which is a group of running applications, each of which has a particular state. The state of an application contains (most notably) the documents the application has open and the position and size of its windows.</para>
            <para>The session manager is used to save the session, e.g., when the machine is shut down, and to restore a session, e.g., when the machine is started up. We recommend that you use QSettings to save an application's settings, for example, window positions, recently used files, etc. When the application is restarted by the session manager, you can restore the settings.</para>
            <para>QSessionManager provides an interface between the application and the session manager so that the program can work well with the session manager. In Qt, session management requests for action are handled by the two virtual functions QApplication::commitData() and QApplication::saveState(). Both provide a reference to a session manager object as argument, to allow the application to communicate with the session manager. The session manager can only be accessed through these functions.</para>
            <para>No user interaction is possible unless the application gets explicit permission from the session manager. You ask for permission by calling allowsInteraction() or, if it is really urgent, allowsErrorInteraction(). Qt does not enforce this, but the session manager may.</para>
            <para>You can try to abort the shutdown process by calling cancel(). The default commitData() function does this if some top-level window rejected its closeEvent().</para>
            <para>For sophisticated session managers provided on Unix/X11, QSessionManager offers further possibilities to fine-tune an application's session management behavior: setRestartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(), setRestartHint(), setProperty(), requestPhase2(). See the respective function descriptions for further details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QApplication and Session Management.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.AllowsErrorInteraction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if error interaction is permitted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This is similar to allowsInteraction(), but also enables the application to tell the user about any errors that occur. Session managers may give error interaction requests higher priority, which means that it is more likely that an error interaction is permitted. However, you are still not guaranteed that the session manager will allow interaction.</para>
            <para>See also allowsInteraction(), release(), and cancel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.AllowsInteraction">
            <summary>
            <para>Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the user. Returns true if interaction is permitted; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session managers may ask all applications simultaneously to commit their data, resulting in a much faster shutdown.</para>
            <para>When the interaction is completed we strongly recommend releasing the user interaction semaphore with a call to release(). This way, other applications may get the chance to interact with the user while your application is still busy saving data. (The semaphore is implicitly released when the application exits.)</para>
            <para>If the user decides to cancel the shutdown process during the interaction phase, you must tell the session manager that this has happened by calling cancel().</para>
            <para>Here's an example of how an application's QApplication::commitData() might be implemented:</para>
            <para> void MyApplication::commitData(QSessionManager&amp; manager)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (manager.allowsInteraction()) {</para>
            <para>         int ret = QMessageBox::warning(</para>
            <para>                     mainWindow,</para>
            <para>                     tr(&quot;My Application&quot;),</para>
            <para>                     tr(&quot;Save changes to document?&quot;),</para>
            <para>                     QMessageBox::Save | QMessageBox::Discard | QMessageBox::Cancel);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         switch (ret) {</para>
            <para>         case QMessageBox::Save:</para>
            <para>             manager.release();</para>
            <para>             if (!saveDocument())</para>
            <para>                 manager.cancel();</para>
            <para>             break;</para>
            <para>         case QMessageBox::Discard:</para>
            <para>             break;</para>
            <para>         case QMessageBox::Cancel:</para>
            <para>         default:</para>
            <para>             manager.cancel();</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         // we did not get permission to interact, then</para>
            <para>         // do something reasonable instead</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>If an error occurred within the application while saving its data, you may want to try allowsErrorInteraction() instead.</para>
            <para>See also QApplication::commitData(), release(), and cancel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.Cancel">
            <summary>
            <para>Tells the session manager to cancel the shutdown process. Applications should not call this function without asking the user first.</para>
            <para>See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.IsPhase2">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the session manager is currently performing a second session management phase; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also requestPhase2().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.Release">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the session manager's interaction semaphore after an interaction phase.</para>
            <para>See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.RequestPhase2">
            <summary>
            <para>Requests a second session management phase for the application. The application may then return immediately from the QApplication::commitData() or QApplication::saveState() function, and they will be called again once most or all other applications have finished their session management.</para>
            <para>The two phases are useful for applications such as the X11 window manager that need to store information about another application's windows and therefore have to wait until these applications have completed their respective session management tasks.</para>
            <para>Note: If another application has requested a second phase it may get called before, simultaneously with, or after your application's second phase.</para>
            <para>See also isPhase2().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.SessionId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the identifier of the current session.</para>
            <para>If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this identifier is the same as it was in the earlier session.</para>
            <para>See also sessionKey() and QApplication::sessionId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.SessionKey">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the session key in the current session.</para>
            <para>If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.</para>
            <para>The session key changes with every call of commitData() or saveState().</para>
            <para>See also sessionId() and QApplication::sessionKey().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.SetManagerProperty(System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Low-level write access to the application's identification and state records are kept in the session manager.</para>
            <para>The property called name has its value set to the string value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSessionManager.SetManagerProperty(System.String,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Low-level write access to the application's identification and state record are kept in the session manager.</para>
            <para>The property called name has its value set to the string list value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSessionManager.DiscardCommand">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set discard command.</para>
            <para>To iterate over the list, you can use the foreach pseudo-keyword:</para>
            <para> foreach (const QString &amp;command, mySession.discardCommand())</para>
            <para>     do_something(command);</para>
            <para>Sets the discard command to the given list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSessionManager.RestartCommand">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set restart command.</para>
            <para>To iterate over the list, you can use the foreach pseudo-keyword:</para>
            <para> foreach (const QString &amp;command, mySession.restartCommand())</para>
            <para>     do_something(command);</para>
            <para>If the session manager is capable of restoring sessions it will execute command in order to restore the application. The command defaults to</para>
            <para> appname -session id</para>
            <para>The -session option is mandatory; otherwise QApplication cannot tell whether it has been restored or what the current session identifier is. See QApplication::isSessionRestored() and QApplication::sessionId() for details.</para>
            <para>If your application is very simple, it may be possible to store the entire application state in additional command line options. This is usually a very bad idea because command lines are often limited to a few hundred bytes. Instead, use QSettings, temporary files, or a database for this purpose. By marking the data with the unique sessionId(), you will be able to restore the application in a future session.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSessionManager.restartHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the application's current restart hint. The default is RestartIfRunning.</para>
            <para>Sets the application's restart hint to hint. On application startup, the hint is set to RestartIfRunning.</para>
            <para>Note: These flags are only hints, a session manager may or may not respect them.</para>
            <para>We recommend setting the restart hint in QApplication::saveState() because most session managers perform a checkpoint shortly after an application's startup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSessionManager.RestartHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the circumstances under which this application wants to be restarted by the session manager. The current values are:</para>
            <para>The default hint is RestartIfRunning.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSessionManager.RestartHint.RestartAnyway">
            <summary>
            <para>The application wants to be started at the start of the next session, no matter what. (This is useful for utilities that run just after startup and then quit.)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSessionManager.RestartHint.RestartIfRunning">
            <summary>
            <para>If the application is still running when the session is shut down, it wants to be restarted at the start of the next session.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSessionManager.RestartHint.RestartImmediately">
            <summary>
            <para>The application wants to be started immediately whenever it is not running.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSessionManager.RestartHint.RestartNever">
            <summary>
            <para>The application does not want to be restarted automatically.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QShortcut">
            <summary>
            The QShortcut class is used to create keyboard shortcuts.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QShortcut class provides a way of connecting keyboard shortcuts to Qt's signals and slots mechanism, so that objects can be informed when a shortcut is executed. The shortcut can be set up to contain all the key presses necessary to describe a keyboard shortcut, including the states of modifier keys such as Shift, Ctrl, and Alt.</para>
            <para>On certain widgets, using '&amp;amp;' in front of a character will automatically create a mnemonic (a shortcut) for that character, e.g. &amp;quot;E&amp;amp;xit&amp;quot; will create the shortcut Alt+X (use '&amp;amp;&amp;amp;' to display an actual ampersand). The widget might consume and perform an action on a given shortcut. On X11 the ampersand will not be shown and the character will be underlined. On Windows, shortcuts are normally not displayed until the user presses the Alt key, but this is a setting the user can change. On Mac, shortcuts are disabled by default. Call qt_set_sequence_auto_mnemonic() to enable them. However, because mnemonic shortcuts do not fit in with Aqua's guidelines, Qt will not show the shortcut character underlined.</para>
            <para>For applications that use menus, it may be more convenient to use the convenience functions provided in the QMenu class to assign keyboard shortcuts to menu items as they are created. Alternatively, shortcuts may be associated with other types of actions in the QAction class.</para>
            <para>The simplest way to create a shortcut for a particular widget is to construct the shortcut with a key sequence. For example:</para>
            <para> shortcut = new QShortcut(QKeySequence(tr(&amp;quot;Ctrl+O&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;File|Open&amp;quot;)),</para>
            <para>                          parent);</para>
            <para>When the user types the key sequence for a given shortcut, the shortcut's activated() signal is emitted. (In the case of ambiguity, the activatedAmbiguously() signal is emitted.) A shortcut is &amp;quot;listened for&amp;quot; by Qt's event loop when the shortcut's parent widget is receiving events.</para>
            <para>A shortcut's key sequence can be set with setKey() and retrieved with key(). A shortcut can be enabled or disabled with setEnabled(), and can have &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; help text set with setWhatsThis().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QShortcutEvent, QKeySequence, and QAction.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.</para>
            <para>See also setKey().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.#ctor(QtGui.QKeySequence,QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String,QtCore.Qt.ShortcutContext)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.</para>
            <para>See also setKey().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.OnActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user types the shortcut's key sequence.</para>
            <para>See also activatedAmbiguously().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.OnActivatedAmbiguously">
            <summary>
            <para>When a key sequence is being typed at the keyboard, it is said to be ambiguous as long as it matches the start of more than one shortcut.</para>
            <para>When a shortcut's key sequence is completed, activatedAmbiguously() is emitted if the key sequence is still ambiguous (i.e., it is the start of one or more other shortcuts). The activated() signal is not emitted in this case.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.Id">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the shortcut's ID.</para>
            <para>See also QShortcutEvent::shortcutId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.ParentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the shortcut's parent widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcut.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the shortcut.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QShortcut.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user types the shortcut's key sequence.</para>
            <para>See also activatedAmbiguously().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QShortcut.ActivatedAmbiguously">
            <summary>
            <para>When a key sequence is being typed at the keyboard, it is said to be ambiguous as long as it matches the start of more than one shortcut.</para>
            <para>When a shortcut's key sequence is completed, activatedAmbiguously() is emitted if the key sequence is still ambiguous (i.e., it is the start of one or more other shortcuts). The activated() signal is not emitted in this case.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QShortcut.Key">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the shortcut's key sequence.</para>
            <para>This is a key sequence with an optional combination of Shift, Ctrl, and Alt. The key sequence may be supplied in a number of ways:</para>
            <para> setKey(0);                  // no signal emitted</para>
            <para> setKey(QKeySequence());     // no signal emitted</para>
            <para> setKey(0x3b1);              // Greek letter alpha</para>
            <para> setKey(Qt::Key_D);              // 'd', e.g. to delete</para>
            <para> setKey('q');                // 'q', e.g. to quit</para>
            <para> setKey(Qt::CTRL + Qt::Key_P);       // Ctrl+P, e.g. to print document</para>
            <para> setKey(&quot;Ctrl+P&quot;);           // Ctrl+P, e.g. to print document</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty key sequence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QShortcut.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the shortcut's &quot;What's This?&quot; help text.</para>
            <para>The text will be shown when the application is in &quot;What's This?&quot; mode and the user types the shortcut key() sequence.</para>
            <para>To set &quot;What's This?&quot; help on a menu item (with or without a shortcut key), set the help on the item's action.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QShortcut.Enabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the shortcut is enabled.</para>
            <para>An enabled shortcut emits the activated() or activatedAmbiguously() signal when a QShortcutEvent occurs that matches the shortcut's key() sequence.</para>
            <para>If the application is in WhatsThis mode the shortcut will not emit the signals, but will show the &quot;What's This?&quot; text instead.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QShortcut.AutoRepeat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the shortcut can auto repeat.</para>
            <para>If true, the shortcut will auto repeat when the keyboard shortcut combination is held down, provided that keyboard auto repeat is enabled on the system. The default value is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QShortcut.Context">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the context in which the shortcut is valid.</para>
            <para>A shortcut's context decides in which circumstances a shortcut is allowed to be triggered. The normal context is Qt::WindowShortcut, which allows the shortcut to trigger if the parent (the widget containing the shortcut) is a subwidget of the active top-level window.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to Qt::WindowShortcut.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QShortcutEvent">
            <summary>
            The QShortcutEvent class provides an event which is generated when the user presses a key combination.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Normally you don't need to use this class directly; QShortcut provides a higher-level interface to handle shortcut keys.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QShortcut.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcutEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QShortcutEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a shortcut event for the given key press, associated with the QShortcut ID id.</para>
            <para>ambiguous specifies whether there is more than one QShortcut for the same key sequence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcutEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QKeySequence,System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a shortcut event for the given key press, associated with the QShortcut ID id.</para>
            <para>ambiguous specifies whether there is more than one QShortcut for the same key sequence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcutEvent.IsAmbiguous">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the key sequence that triggered the event is ambiguous.</para>
            <para>See also QShortcut::activatedAmbiguously().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcutEvent.Key">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the key sequence that triggered the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcutEvent.ShortcutId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the ID of the QShortcut object for which this event was generated.</para>
            <para>See also QShortcut::id().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShortcutEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the event object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QShowEvent">
            <summary>
            The QShowEvent class provides an event that is sent when a widget is shown.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>There are two kinds of show events: show events caused by the window system (spontaneous), and internal show events. Spontaneous (QEvent::spontaneous()) show events are sent just after the window system shows the window; they are also sent when a top-level window is redisplayed after being iconified. Internal show events are delivered just before the widget becomes visible.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QHideEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShowEvent.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QShowEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QShowEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QShowEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSizeGrip">
            <summary>
            The QSizeGrip class provides a resize handle for resizing top-level windows.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This widget works like the standard Windows resize handle. In the X11 version this resize handle generally works differently from the one provided by the system if the X11 window manager does not support necessary modern post-ICCCM specifications.</para>
            <para>Put this widget anywhere in a widget tree and the user can use it to resize the top-level window or any widget with the Qt::SubWindow flag set. Generally, this should be in the lower right-hand corner. Note that QStatusBar already uses this widget, so if you have a status bar (e.g., you are using QMainWindow), then you don't need to use this widget explicitly.</para>
            <para>On some platforms the size grip automatically hides itself when the window is shown full screen or maximised.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A size grip widget at the bottom-right corner of a main window, shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QSizeGrip class inherits QWidget and reimplements the mousePressEvent() and mouseMoveEvent() functions to feature the resize functionality, and the paintEvent() function to render the size grip widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStatusBar and QWidget::windowState().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a resize corner as a child widget of the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            <para>Resizes the top-level widget containing this widget. The mouse move event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            <para>Receives the mouse press events for the widget, and primes the resize operation. The mouse press event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnMoveEvent(QtGui.QMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::moveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>Paints the resize grip.</para>
            <para>Resize grips are usually rendered as small diagonal textured lines in the lower-right corner. The paint event is passed in the event parameter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizeGrip.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this size grip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSizePolicy">
            <summary>
            The QSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The size policy of a widget is an expression of its willingness to be resized in various ways, and affects how the widget is treated by the layout engine. Each widget returns a QSizePolicy that describes the horizontal and vertical resizing policy it prefers when being laid out. You can change this for a specific widget by changing its QWidget::sizePolicy property.</para>
            <para>QSizePolicy contains two independent QSizePolicy::Policy values and two stretch factors; one describes the widgets's horizontal size policy, and the other describes its vertical size policy. It also contains a flag to indicate whether the height and width of its preferred size are related.</para>
            <para>The horizontal and vertical policies can be set in the constructor, and altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and setVerticalPolicy() functions. The stretch factors can be set using the setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch() functions. The flag indicating whether the widget's sizeHint() is width-dependent (such as a menu bar or a word-wrapping label) can be set using the setHeightForWidth() function.</para>
            <para>The current size policies and stretch factors be retrieved using the horizontalPolicy(), verticalPolicy(), horizontalStretch() and verticalStretch() functions. Alternatively, use the transpose() function to swap the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches. The hasHeightForWidth() function returns the current status of the flag indicating the size hint dependencies.</para>
            <para>Use the expandingDirections() function to determine whether the associated widget can make use of more space than its sizeHint() function indicates, as well as find out in which directions it can expand.</para>
            <para>Finally, the QSizePolicy class provides operators comparing this size policy to a given policy, as well as a QVariant operator storing this QSizePolicy as a QVariant object.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QSize, QWidget::sizeHint(), QWidget::sizePolicy, and QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSizePolicy object with Fixed as its horizontal and vertical policies.</para>
            <para>The policies can be altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and setVerticalPolicy() functions. Use the setHeightForWidth() function if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.#ctor(QtGui.QSizePolicy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSizePolicy object with Fixed as its horizontal and vertical policies.</para>
            <para>The policies can be altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and setVerticalPolicy() functions. Use the setHeightForWidth() function if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.#ctor(QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSizePolicy object with the given horizontal and vertical policies, and DefaultType as the control type.</para>
            <para>Use setHeightForWidth() if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.#ctor(QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSizePolicy object with the given horizontal and vertical policies, and the specified control type.</para>
            <para>Use setHeightForWidth() if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch(), and controlType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether a widget can make use of more space than the QWidget::sizeHint() function indicates.</para>
            <para>A value of Qt::Horizontal or Qt::Vertical means that the widget can grow horizontally or vertically (i.e., the horizontal or vertical policy is Expanding or MinimumExpanding), whereas Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical means that it can grow in both dimensions.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalPolicy() and verticalPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.HasHeightForWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.HasWidthForHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the widget's width depends on its height; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also setWidthForHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.HorizontalStretch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy.</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalStretch(), verticalStretch(), and horizontalPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.op_Inequality(QtGui.QSizePolicy,QtGui.QSizePolicy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this policy is different from other; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.op_Equality(QtGui.QSizePolicy,QtGui.QSizePolicy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this policy is equal to other; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also operator!=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.SetHeightForWidth(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the flag determining whether the widget's preferred height depends on its width, to dependent.</para>
            <para>See also hasHeightForWidth() and setWidthForHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.SetHorizontalStretch(System.Byte)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy to the given stretchFactor.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch(), and setHorizontalPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.SetVerticalStretch(System.Byte)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the vertical stretch factor of the size policy to the given stretchFactor.</para>
            <para>See also verticalStretch(), setHorizontalStretch(), and setVerticalPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.SetWidthForHeight(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the flag determining whether the widget's width depends on its height, to dependent.</para>
            <para>This is only supported for QGraphicsLayout's subclasses. It is not possible to have a layout with both height-for-width and width-for-height constraints at the same time.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also hasWidthForHeight() and setHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Transpose">
            <summary>
            <para>Swaps the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSizePolicy.VerticalStretch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical stretch factor of the size policy.</para>
            <para>See also setVerticalStretch(), horizontalStretch(), and verticalPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSizePolicy.controlType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the control type associated with the widget for which this size policy applies.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the control type associated with the widget for which this size policy applies to type.</para>
            <para>The control type specifies the type of the widget for which this size policy applies. It is used by some styles, notably QMacStyle, to insert proper spacing between widgets. For example, the Mac OS X Aqua guidelines specify that push buttons should be separated by 12 pixels, whereas vertically stacked radio buttons only require 6 pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSizePolicy.HorizontalPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal component of the size policy.</para>
            <para>Sets the horizontal component to the given policy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSizePolicy.VerticalPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical component of the size policy.</para>
            <para>Sets the vertical component to the given policy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the different types of widgets in terms of layout interaction:</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also setControlType() and controlType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.ButtonBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A QDialogButtonBox instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.CheckBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A QCheckBox instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.ComboBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A QComboBox instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.DefaultType">
            <summary>
            <para>The default type, when none is specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>A QFrame instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.GroupBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A QGroupBox instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.Label">
            <summary>
            <para>A QLabel instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.Line">
            <summary>
            <para>A QFrame instance with QFrame::HLine or QFrame::VLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.LineEdit">
            <summary>
            <para>A QLineEdit instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.PushButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A QPushButton instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.RadioButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A QRadioButton instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.Slider">
            <summary>
            <para>A QAbstractSlider instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.SpinBox">
            <summary>
            <para>A QAbstractSpinBox instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.TabWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>A QTabWidget instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.ControlType.ToolButton">
            <summary>
            <para>A QToolButton instance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the various per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a QSizePolicy.</para>
            <para>See also PolicyFlag, setHorizontalPolicy(), and setVerticalPolicy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.Expanding">
            <summary>
            <para>The sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a horizontal slider).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.Fixed">
            <summary>
            <para>The QWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the vertical direction of a push button).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.Ignored">
            <summary>
            <para>The sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as much space as possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>The sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the space (e.g. a separator line). It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button). It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.MinimumExpanding">
            <summary>
            <para>The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a horizontal slider).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy.Preferred">
            <summary>
            <para>The sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default QWidget policy).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSizePolicy.PolicyFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>These flags are combined together to form the various Policy values:</para>
            <para>See also Policy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.PolicyFlag.ExpandFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>The widget should get as much space as possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.PolicyFlag.GrowFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>The widget can grow beyond its size hint if necessary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.PolicyFlag.IgnoreFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>The widget's size hint is ignored. The widget will get as much space as possible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSizePolicy.PolicyFlag.ShrinkFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>The widget can shrink below its size hint if necessary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSlider">
            <summary>
            The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The slider is the classic widget for controlling a bounded value. It lets the user move a slider handle along a horizontal or vertical groove and translates the handle's position into an integer value within the legal range.</para>
            <para>QSlider has very few of its own functions; most of the functionality is in QAbstractSlider. The most useful functions are setValue() to set the slider directly to some value; triggerAction() to simulate the effects of clicking (useful for shortcut keys); setSingleStep(), setPageStep() to set the steps; and setMinimum() and setMaximum() to define the range of the scroll bar.</para>
            <para>QSlider provides methods for controlling tickmarks. You can use setTickPosition() to indicate where you want the tickmarks to be, setTickInterval() to indicate how many of them you want. the currently set tick position and interval can be queried using the tickPosition() and tickInterval() functions, respectively.</para>
            <para>QSlider inherits a comprehensive set of signals:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>SignalDescription</para>
            <para>valueChanged()	Emitted when the slider's value has changed. The tracking() determines whether this signal is emitted during user interaction.</para>
            <para>sliderPressed()	Emitted when the user starts to drag the slider.</para>
            <para>sliderMoved()	Emitted when the user drags the slider.</para>
            <para>sliderReleased()	Emitted when the user releases the slider.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QSlider only provides integer ranges. Note that although QSlider handles very large numbers, it becomes difficult for users to use a slider accurately for very large ranges.</para>
            <para>A slider accepts focus on Tab and provides both a mouse wheel and a keyboard interface. The keyboard interface is the following:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Left/Right move a horizontal slider by one single step.</para>
            <para>Up/Down move a vertical slider by one single step.</para>
            <para>PageUp moves up one page.</para>
            <para>PageDown moves down one page.</para>
            <para>Home moves to the start (mininum).</para>
            <para>End moves to the end (maximum).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A slider shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A slider shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A slider shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QScrollBar, QSpinBox, QDial, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Sliders Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vertical slider with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a slider with the given parent. The orientation parameter determines whether the slider is horizontal or vertical; the valid values are Qt::Vertical and Qt::Horizontal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QSlider. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSlider, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSlider.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this slider.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSlider.tickPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the tickmark position for this slider.</para>
            <para>The valid values are described by the QSlider::TickPosition enum.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSlider::NoTicks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSlider.TickInterval">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the interval between tickmarks.</para>
            <para>This is a value interval, not a pixel interval. If it is 0, the slider will choose between singleStep() and pageStep().</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies where the tick marks are to be drawn relative to the slider's groove and the handle the user moves.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition.NoTicks">
            <summary>
            <para>Do not draw any tick marks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition.TicksAbove">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw tick marks above the (horizontal) slider</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition.TicksBelow">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw tick marks below the (horizontal) slider</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition.TicksBothSides">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw tick marks on both sides of the groove.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition.TicksLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw tick marks to the left of the (vertical) slider</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSlider.TickPosition.TicksRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw tick marks to the right of the (vertical) slider</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel">
            <summary>
            The QSortFilterProxyModel class provides support for sorting and filtering data passed between another model and a view.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QSortFilterProxyModel can be used for sorting items, filtering out items, or both. The model transforms the structure of a source model by mapping the model indexes it supplies to new indexes, corresponding to different locations, for views to use. This approach allows a given source model to be restructured as far as views are concerned without requiring any transformations on the underlying data, and without duplicating the data in memory.</para>
            <para>Let's assume that we want to sort and filter the items provided by a custom model. The code to set up the model and the view, without sorting and filtering, would look like this:</para>
            <para>         QTreeView *treeView = new QTreeView;</para>
            <para>         MyItemModel *model = new MyItemModel(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         treeView-&amp;gt;setModel(model);</para>
            <para>To add sorting and filtering support to MyItemModel, we need to create a QSortFilterProxyModel, call setSourceModel() with the MyItemModel as argument, and install the QSortFilterProxyModel on the view:</para>
            <para>         QTreeView *treeView = new QTreeView;</para>
            <para>         MyItemModel *sourceModel = new MyItemModel(this);</para>
            <para>         QSortFilterProxyModel *proxyModel = new QSortFilterProxyModel(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         proxyModel-&amp;gt;setSourceModel(sourceModel);</para>
            <para>         treeView-&amp;gt;setModel(proxyModel);</para>
            <para>At this point, neither sorting nor filtering is enabled; the original data is displayed in the view. Any changes made through the QSortFilterProxyModel are applied to the original model.</para>
            <para>The QSortFilterProxyModel acts as a wrapper for the original model. If you need to convert source QModelIndexes to sorted/filtered model indexes or vice versa, use mapToSource(), mapFromSource(), mapSelectionToSource(), and mapSelectionFromSource().</para>
            <para>Note: By default, the model does not dynamically re-sort and re-filter data whenever the original model changes. This behavior can be changed by setting the dynamicSortFilter property.</para>
            <para>The Basic Sort/Filter Model and Custom Sort/Filter Model examples illustrate how to use QSortFilterProxyModel to perform basic sorting and filtering and how to subclass it to implement custom behavior.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Sorting</para>
            <para>QTableView and QTreeView have a sortingEnabled property that controls whether the user can sort the view by clicking the view's horizontal header. For example:</para>
            <para>         treeView-&amp;gt;setSortingEnabled(true);</para>
            <para>When this feature is on (the default is off), clicking on a header section sorts the items according to that column. By clicking repeatedly, the user can alternate between ascending and descending order.</para>
            <para>Behind the scene, the view calls the sort() virtual function on the model to reorder the data in the model. To make your data sortable, you can either implement sort() in your model, or use a QSortFilterProxyModel to wrap your model -- QSortFilterProxyModel provides a generic sort() reimplementation that operates on the sortRole() (Qt::DisplayRole by default) of the items and that understands several data types, including int, QString, and QDateTime. For hierarchical models, sorting is applied recursively to all child items. String comparisons are case sensitive by default; this can be changed by setting the sortCaseSensitivity property.</para>
            <para>Custom sorting behavior is achieved by subclassing QSortFilterProxyModel and reimplementing lessThan(), which is used to compare items. For example:</para>
            <para> bool MySortFilterProxyModel::lessThan(const QModelIndex &amp;amp;left,</para>
            <para>                                       const QModelIndex &amp;amp;right) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QVariant leftData = sourceModel()-&amp;gt;data(left);</para>
            <para>     QVariant rightData = sourceModel()-&amp;gt;data(right);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     if (leftData.type() == QVariant::DateTime) {</para>
            <para>         return leftData.toDateTime() &amp;lt; rightData.toDateTime();</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         QRegExp *emailPattern = new QRegExp(&amp;quot;([\\w\\.]*@[\\w\\.]*)&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         QString leftString = leftData.toString();</para>
            <para>         if(left.column() == 1 &amp;amp;&amp;amp; emailPattern-&amp;gt;indexIn(leftString) != -1)</para>
            <para>             leftString = emailPattern-&amp;gt;cap(1);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         QString rightString = rightData.toString();</para>
            <para>         if(right.column() == 1 &amp;amp;&amp;amp; emailPattern-&amp;gt;indexIn(rightString) != -1)</para>
            <para>             rightString = emailPattern-&amp;gt;cap(1);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         return QString::localeAwareCompare(leftString, rightString) &amp;lt; 0;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>(This code snippet comes from the Custom Sort/Filter Model example.)</para>
            <para>An alternative approach to sorting is to disable sorting on the view and to impose a certain order to the user. This is done by explicitly calling sort() with the desired column and order as arguments on the QSortFilterProxyModel (or on the original model if it implements sort()). For example:</para>
            <para>         proxyModel-&amp;gt;sort(2, Qt::AscendingOrder);</para>
            <para>QSortFilterProxyModel can be sorted by column -1, in which case it returns to the sort order of the underlying source model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Filtering</para>
            <para>In addition to sorting, QSortFilterProxyModel can be used to hide items that do not match a certain filter. The filter is specified using a QRegExp object and is applied to the filterRole() (Qt::DisplayRole by default) of each item, for a given column. The QRegExp object can be used to match a regular expression, a wildcard pattern, or a fixed string. For example:</para>
            <para>         proxyModel-&amp;gt;setFilterRegExp(QRegExp(&amp;quot;.png&amp;quot;, Qt::CaseInsensitive,</para>
            <para>                                             QRegExp::FixedString));</para>
            <para>         proxyModel-&amp;gt;setFilterKeyColumn(1);</para>
            <para>For hierarchical models, the filter is applied recursively to all children. If a parent item doesn't match the filter, none of its children will be shown.</para>
            <para>A common use case is to let the user specify the filter regexp, wildcard pattern, or fixed string in a QLineEdit and to connect the textChanged() signal to setFilterRegExp(), setFilterWildcard(), or setFilterFixedString() to reapply the filter.</para>
            <para>Custom filtering behavior can be achieved by reimplementing the filterAcceptsRow() and filterAcceptsColumn() functions. For example (from the Custom Sort/Filter Model example), the following implementation ignores the filterKeyColumn property and performs filtering on columns 0, 1, and 2:</para>
            <para> bool MySortFilterProxyModel::filterAcceptsRow(int sourceRow,</para>
            <para>         const QModelIndex &amp;amp;sourceParent) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QModelIndex index0 = sourceModel()-&amp;gt;index(sourceRow, 0, sourceParent);</para>
            <para>     QModelIndex index1 = sourceModel()-&amp;gt;index(sourceRow, 1, sourceParent);</para>
            <para>     QModelIndex index2 = sourceModel()-&amp;gt;index(sourceRow, 2, sourceParent);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     return (sourceModel()-&amp;gt;data(index0).toString().contains(filterRegExp())</para>
            <para>             || sourceModel()-&amp;gt;data(index1).toString().contains(filterRegExp()))</para>
            <para>            &amp;amp;&amp;amp; dateInRange(sourceModel()-&amp;gt;data(index2).toDate());</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>(This code snippet comes from the Custom Sort/Filter Model example.)</para>
            <para>If you are working with large amounts of filtering and have to invoke invalidateFilter() repeatedly, using reset() may be more efficient, depending on the implementation of your model. However, reset() returns the proxy model to its original state, losing selection information, and will cause the proxy model to be repopulated.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing</para>
            <para>Since QAbstractProxyModel and its subclasses are derived from QAbstractItemModel, much of the same advice about subclassing normal models also applies to proxy models. In addition, it is worth noting that many of the default implementations of functions in this class are written so that they call the equivalent functions in the relevant source model. This simple proxying mechanism may need to be overridden for source models with more complex behavior; for example, if the source model provides a custom hasChildren() implementation, you should also provide one in the proxy model.</para>
            <para>Note: Some general guidelines for subclassing models are available in the Model Subclassing Reference.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractProxyModel, QAbstractItemModel, Model/View Programming, Basic Sort/Filter Model Example, Custom Sort/Filter Model Example, and QIdentityProxyModel.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a sorting filter model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Buddy(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::buddy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.CanFetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::canFetchMore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is obsolete. Use invalidate() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.ColumnCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.DropMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FetchMore(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::fetchMore().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterAcceptsColumn(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item in the column indicated by the given source_column and source_parent should be included in the model; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns true if the value held by the relevant item matches the filter string, wildcard string or regular expression.</para>
            <para>Note: By default, the Qt::DisplayRole is used to determine if the row should be accepted or not. This can be changed by setting the filterRole property.</para>
            <para>See also filterAcceptsRow(), setFilterFixedString(), setFilterRegExp(), and setFilterWildcard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterAcceptsRow(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item in the row indicated by the given source_row and source_parent should be included in the model; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns true if the value held by the relevant item matches the filter string, wildcard string or regular expression.</para>
            <para>Note: By default, the Qt::DisplayRole is used to determine if the row should be accepted or not. This can be changed by setting the filterRole property.</para>
            <para>See also filterAcceptsColumn(), setFilterFixedString(), setFilterRegExp(), and setFilterWildcard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is obsolete. Use invalidateFilter() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.HasChildren(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.HeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().</para>
            <para>See also setHeaderData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Invalidate">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates the current sorting and filtering.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also invalidateFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.InvalidateFilter">
            <summary>
            <para>Invalidates the current filtering.</para>
            <para>This function should be called if you are implementing custom filtering (e.g. filterAcceptsRow()), and your filter parameters have changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.LessThan(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the value of the item referred to by the given index left is less than the value of the item referred to by the given index right, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is used as the &lt; operator when sorting, and handles the following QVariant types:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QVariant::Int</para>
            <para>QVariant::UInt</para>
            <para>QVariant::LongLong</para>
            <para>QVariant::ULongLong</para>
            <para>QVariant::Double</para>
            <para>QVariant::Char</para>
            <para>QVariant::Date</para>
            <para>QVariant::Time</para>
            <para>QVariant::DateTime</para>
            <para>QVariant::String</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Any other type will be converted to a QString using QVariant::toString().</para>
            <para>Comparison of QStrings is case sensitive by default; this can be changed using the sortCaseSensitivity property.</para>
            <para>By default, the Qt::DisplayRole associated with the QModelIndexes is used for comparisons. This can be changed by setting the sortRole property.</para>
            <para>Note: The indices passed in correspond to the source model.</para>
            <para>See also sortRole, sortCaseSensitivity, and dynamicSortFilter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.MapFromSource(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractProxyModel::mapFromSource().</para>
            <para>Returns the model index in the QSortFilterProxyModel given the sourceIndex from the source model.</para>
            <para>See also mapToSource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.MapSelectionFromSource(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractProxyModel::mapSelectionFromSource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.MapSelectionToSource(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractProxyModel::mapSelectionToSource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.MapToSource(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractProxyModel::mapToSource().</para>
            <para>Returns the source model index corresponding to the given proxyIndex from the sorting filter model.</para>
            <para>See also mapFromSource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Match(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Object,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::match().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Parent(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.RemoveColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.RemoveColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.RowCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SetFilterFixedString(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the fixed string used to filter the contents of the source model to the given pattern.</para>
            <para>See also setFilterCaseSensitivity(), setFilterRegExp(), setFilterWildcard(), and filterRegExp().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SetFilterWildcard(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the wildcard expression used to filter the contents of the source model to the given pattern.</para>
            <para>See also setFilterCaseSensitivity(), setFilterRegExp(), setFilterFixedString(), and filterRegExp().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SetHeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setHeaderData().</para>
            <para>See also headerData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SortColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>the column currently used for sorting</para>
            <para>This returns the most recently used sort column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SortOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>the order currently used for sorting</para>
            <para>This returns the most recently used sort order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Span(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::span().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this sorting filter model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SourceModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractProxyModel::setSourceModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterRegExp">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the QRegExp used to filter the contents of the source model.</para>
            <para>Setting this property overwrites the current filterCaseSensitivity. By default, the QRegExp is an empty string matching all contents.</para>
            <para>If no QRegExp or an empty string is set, everything in the source model will be accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterKeyColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the column where the key used to filter the contents of the source model is read from.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0. If the value is -1, the keys will be read from all columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.DynamicSortFilter">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the proxy model is dynamically sorted and filtered whenever the contents of the source model change.</para>
            <para>Note that you should not update the source model through the proxy model when dynamicSortFilter is true. For instance, if you set the proxy model on a QComboBox, then using functions that update the model, e.g., addItem(), will not work as expected. An alternative is to set dynamicSortFilter to false and call sort() after adding items to the QComboBox.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterCaseSensitivity">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the case sensitivity of the QRegExp pattern used to filter the contents of the source model.</para>
            <para>By default, the filter is case sensitive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SortCaseSensitivity">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the case sensitivity setting used for comparing strings when sorting.</para>
            <para>By default, sorting is case sensitive.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.IsSortLocaleAware">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the local aware setting used for comparing strings when sorting.</para>
            <para>By default, sorting is not local aware.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.SortRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item role that is used to query the source model's data when sorting items.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::DisplayRole.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSortFilterProxyModel.FilterRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item role that is used to query the source model's data when filtering items.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::DisplayRole.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSound">
            <summary>
            The QSound class provides access to the platform audio facilities.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Qt provides the most commonly required audio operation in GUI applications: asynchronously playing a sound file. This is most easily accomplished using the static play() function:</para>
            <para> QSound::play(&amp;quot;mysounds/bells.wav&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>Alternatively, create a QSound object from the sound file first and then call the play() slot:</para>
            <para> QSound bells(&amp;quot;mysounds/bells.wav&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> bells.play();</para>
            <para>Once created a QSound object can be queried for its fileName() and total number of loops() (i.e. the number of times the sound will play). The number of repetitions can be altered using the setLoops() function. While playing the sound, the loopsRemaining() function returns the remaining number of repetitions. Use the isFinished() function to determine whether the sound has finished playing.</para>
            <para>Sounds played using a QSound object may use more memory than the static play() function, but it may also play more immediately (depending on the underlying platform audio facilities). Use the static isAvailable() function to determine whether sound facilities exist on the platform. Which facilities that are actually used varies:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>PlatformAudio Facility</para>
            <para>Microsoft Windows	The underlying multimedia system is used; only WAVE format sound files are supported.</para>
            <para>X11	The Network Audio System is used if available, otherwise all operations work silently. NAS supports WAVE and AU files.</para>
            <para>Mac OS X	NSSound is used. All formats that NSSound supports, including QuickTime formats, are supported by Qt for Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>Qt for Embedded Linux	A built-in mixing sound server is used, accessing /dev/dsp directly. Only the WAVE format is supported.</para>
            <para>Symbian	CMdaAudioPlayerUtility is used. All formats that Symbian OS or devices support are supported also by Qt.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note that QSound does not support resources. This might be fixed in a future Qt version.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSound object from the file specified by the given filename and with the given parent.</para>
            <para>This may use more memory than the static play() function, but it may also play more immediately (depending on the underlying platform audio facilities).</para>
            <para>See also play().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.FileName">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the filename associated with this QSound object.</para>
            <para>See also QSound().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.IsAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If no sound is available, all QSound operations work silently and quickly. An application may choose either to notify the user if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently without bothering the user.</para>
            <para>Note: On Windows this always returns true because some sound card drivers do not implement a way to find out whether it is available or not.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.IsFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Warning: On Windows this function always returns true for unlooped sounds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.LoopsRemaining">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the remaining number of times the sound will loop (this value decreases each time the sound is played).</para>
            <para>See also loops() and isFinished().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.Play">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Starts playing the sound specified by this QSound object.</para>
            <para>The function returns immediately. Depending on the platform audio facilities, other sounds may stop or be mixed with the new sound. The sound can be played again at any time, possibly mixing or replacing previous plays of the sound.</para>
            <para>See also fileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.Play(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Plays the sound stored in the file specified by the given filename.</para>
            <para>See also stop(), loopsRemaining(), and isFinished().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.Stop">
            <summary>
            <para>Stops the sound playing.</para>
            <para>Note that on Windows the current loop will finish if a sound is played in a loop.</para>
            <para>See also play().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSound.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this sound object. If the sound is not finished playing, the stop() function is called before the sound object is destructed.</para>
            <para>See also stop() and isFinished().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSound.Loops">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of times the sound will play.</para>
            <para>Sets the sound to repeat the given number of times when it is played.</para>
            <para>Note that passing the value -1 will cause the sound to loop indefinitely.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSpacerItem">
            <summary>
            The QSpacerItem class provides blank space in a layout.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Normally, you don't need to use this class directly. Qt's built-in layout managers provide the following functions for manipulating empty space in layouts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ClassFunctions</para>
            <para>QHBoxLayout	addSpacing(), addStretch(), insertSpacing(), insertStretch()</para>
            <para>QGridLayout	setRowMinimumHeight(), setRowStretch(), setColumnMinimumWidth(), setColumnStretch()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLayout, QWidgetItem, and QLayoutItem::spacerItem().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.#ctor(QtGui.QSpacerItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a spacer item with preferred width w, preferred height h, horizontal size policy hPolicy and vertical size policy vPolicy.</para>
            <para>The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if nothing else wants the space.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a spacer item with preferred width w, preferred height h, horizontal size policy hPolicy and vertical size policy vPolicy.</para>
            <para>The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if nothing else wants the space.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.ChangeSize(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy,QtGui.QSizePolicy.Policy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes this spacer item to have preferred width w, preferred height h, horizontal size policy hPolicy and vertical size policy vPolicy.</para>
            <para>The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if nothing else wants the space.</para>
            <para>Note that if changeSize() is called after the spacer item has been added to a layout, it is necessary to invalidate the layout in order for the spacer item's new size to take effect.</para>
            <para>See also QSpacerItem::invalidate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::isEmpty().</para>
            <para>Returns true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpacerItem.SpacerItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::spacerItem().</para>
            <para>Returns a pointer to this object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpacerItem.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::geometry().</para>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSpinBox">
            <summary>
            The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QSpinBox is designed to handle integers and discrete sets of values (e.g., month names); use QDoubleSpinBox for floating point values.</para>
            <para>QSpinBox allows the user to choose a value by clicking the up/down buttons or pressing up/down on the keyboard to increase/decrease the value currently displayed. The user can also type the value in manually. The spin box supports integer values but can be extended to use different strings with validate(), textFromValue() and valueFromText().</para>
            <para>Every time the value changes QSpinBox emits the valueChanged() signals. The current value can be fetched with value() and set with setValue().</para>
            <para>Clicking the up/down buttons or using the keyboard accelerator's up and down arrows will increase or decrease the current value in steps of size singleStep(). If you want to change this behaviour you can reimplement the virtual function stepBy(). The minimum and maximum value and the step size can be set using one of the constructors, and can be changed later with setMinimum(), setMaximum() and setSingleStep().</para>
            <para>Most spin boxes are directional, but QSpinBox can also operate as a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0-99 and the current value is 99, clicking &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; will give 0 if wrapping() is set to true. Use setWrapping() if you want circular behavior.</para>
            <para>The displayed value can be prepended and appended with arbitrary strings indicating, for example, currency or the unit of measurement. See setPrefix() and setSuffix(). The text in the spin box is retrieved with text() (which includes any prefix() and suffix()), or with cleanText() (which has no prefix(), no suffix() and no leading or trailing whitespace).</para>
            <para>It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default) choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with QSpinBox.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A spin box shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A spin box shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para>	A spin box shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing QSpinBox</para>
            <para>If using prefix(), suffix(), and specialValueText() don't provide enough control, you subclass QSpinBox and reimplement valueFromText() and textFromValue(). For example, here's the code for a custom spin box that allows the user to enter icon sizes (e.g., &amp;quot;32 x 32&amp;quot;):</para>
            <para> int IconSizeSpinBox::valueFromText(const QString &amp;amp;text) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QRegExp regExp(tr(&amp;quot;(\\d+)(\\s*[xx]\\s*\\d+)?&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     if (regExp.exactMatch(text)) {</para>
            <para>         return regExp.cap(1).toInt();</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         return 0;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QString IconSizeSpinBox::textFromValue(int value) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return tr(&amp;quot;%1 x %1&amp;quot;).arg(value);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See the Icons example for the full source code.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDoubleSpinBox, QDateTimeEdit, QSlider, and Spin Boxes Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a spin box with 0 as minimum value and 99 as maximum value, a step value of 1. The value is initially set to 0. It is parented to parent.</para>
            <para>See also setMinimum(), setMaximum(), and setSingleStep().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.Fixup(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::fixup().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.SetRange(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to set the minimum, and maximum values with a single function call.</para>
            <para> setRange(minimum, maximum);</para>
            <para>is equivalent to:</para>
            <para> setMinimum(minimum);</para>
            <para> setMaximum(maximum);</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.TextFromValue(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to display the given value. The default implementation returns a string containing value printed in the standard way using QWidget::locale().toString(), but with the thousand separator removed. Reimplementations may return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.)</para>
            <para>Note: QSpinBox does not call this function for specialValueText() and that neither prefix() nor suffix() should be included in the return value.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement valueFromText() and validate()</para>
            <para>See also valueFromText(), validate(), and QLocale::groupSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.Validate(System.String,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.OnValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.OnValueChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The new value is passed literally in text with no prefix() or suffix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSpinBox.ValueFromText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value.</para>
            <para>Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function.</para>
            <para>Note: QSpinBox handles specialValueText() separately; this function is only concerned with the other values.</para>
            <para>See also textFromValue() and validate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QSpinBox.ValueChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.Suffix">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the suffix of the spin box.</para>
            <para>The suffix is appended to the end of the displayed value. Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For example:</para>
            <para> sb-&gt;setSuffix(&quot; km&quot;);</para>
            <para>To turn off the suffix display, set this property to an empty string. The default is no suffix. The suffix is not displayed for the minimum() if specialValueText() is set.</para>
            <para>If no suffix is set, suffix() returns an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.Prefix">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the spin box's prefix.</para>
            <para>The prefix is prepended to the start of the displayed value. Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For example:</para>
            <para> sb-&gt;setPrefix(&quot;$&quot;);</para>
            <para>To turn off the prefix display, set this property to an empty string. The default is no prefix. The prefix is not displayed when value() == minimum() and specialValueText() is set.</para>
            <para>If no prefix is set, prefix() returns an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.CleanText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text of the spin box excluding any prefix, suffix, or leading or trailing whitespace.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the minimum value of the spin box.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the maximum is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.</para>
            <para>The default minimum value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum value of the spin box.</para>
            <para>When setting this property the minimum is adjusted if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.</para>
            <para>The default maximum value is 99.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.SingleStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the step value.</para>
            <para>When the user uses the arrows to change the spin box's value the value will be incremented/decremented by the amount of the singleStep. The default value is 1. Setting a singleStep value of less than 0 does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSpinBox.Value">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the value of the spin box.</para>
            <para>setValue() will emit valueChanged() if the new value is different from the old one.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSplashScreen">
            <summary>
            The QSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can be shown during application startup.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A splash screen is a widget that is usually displayed when an application is being started. Splash screens are often used for applications that have long start up times (e.g. database or networking applications that take time to establish connections) to provide the user with feedback that the application is loading.</para>
            <para>The splash screen appears in the center of the screen. It may be useful to add the Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint to the splash widget's window flags if you want to keep it above all the other windows on the desktop.</para>
            <para>Some X11 window managers do not support the &amp;quot;stays on top&amp;quot; flag. A solution is to set up a timer that periodically calls raise() on the splash screen to simulate the &amp;quot;stays on top&amp;quot; effect.</para>
            <para>The most common usage is to show a splash screen before the main widget is displayed on the screen. This is illustrated in the following code snippet in which a splash screen is displayed and some initialization tasks are performed before the application's main window is shown:</para>
            <para> int main(int argc, char *argv[])</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QApplication app(argc, argv);</para>
            <para>     QPixmap pixmap(&amp;quot;:/splash.png&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QSplashScreen splash(pixmap);</para>
            <para>     splash.show();</para>
            <para>     app.processEvents();</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     QMainWindow window;</para>
            <para>     window.show();</para>
            <para>     splash.finish(&amp;amp;window);</para>
            <para>     return app.exec();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The user can hide the splash screen by clicking on it with the mouse. Since the splash screen is typically displayed before the event loop has started running, it is necessary to periodically call QApplication::processEvents() to receive the mouse clicks.</para>
            <para>It is sometimes useful to update the splash screen with messages, for example, announcing connections established or modules loaded as the application starts up:</para>
            <para> QPixmap pixmap(&amp;quot;:/splash.png&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> QSplashScreen *splash = new QSplashScreen(pixmap);</para>
            <para> splash-&amp;gt;show();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> ... // Loading some items</para>
            <para> splash-&amp;gt;showMessage(&amp;quot;Loaded modules&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> qApp-&amp;gt;processEvents();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> ... // Establishing connections</para>
            <para> splash-&amp;gt;showMessage(&amp;quot;Established connections&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> qApp-&amp;gt;processEvents();</para>
            <para>QSplashScreen supports this with the showMessage() function. If you wish to do your own drawing you can get a pointer to the pixmap used in the splash screen with pixmap(). Alternatively, you can subclass QSplashScreen and reimplement drawContents().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.</para>
            <para>There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.</para>
            <para>There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.</para>
            <para>There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.#ctor(QtGui.QPixmap,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.</para>
            <para>There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.ClearMessage">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the message being displayed on the splash screen</para>
            <para>See also showMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.DrawContents(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw the contents of the splash screen using painter painter. The default implementation draws the message passed by showMessage(). Reimplement this function if you want to do your own drawing on the splash screen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.Finish(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Makes the splash screen wait until the widget mainWin is displayed before calling close() on itself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.OnMessageChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen changes. message is the new message and is a null-string when the message has been removed.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage() and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.Repaint">
            <summary>
            <para>This overrides QWidget::repaint(). It differs from the standard repaint function in that it also calls QApplication::flush() to ensure the updates are displayed, even when there is no event loop present.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.ShowMessage(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment.</para>
            <para>To make sure the splash screen is repainted immediately, you can call QCoreApplication's processEvents() after the call to showMessage(). You usually want this to make sure that the message is kept up to date with what your application is doing (e.g., loading files).</para>
            <para>See also Qt::Alignment and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.ShowMessage(System.String,System.Int32,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment.</para>
            <para>To make sure the splash screen is repainted immediately, you can call QCoreApplication's processEvents() after the call to showMessage(). You usually want this to make sure that the message is kept up to date with what your application is doing (e.g., loading files).</para>
            <para>See also Qt::Alignment and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplashScreen.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QSplashScreen.MessageChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen changes. message is the new message and is a null-string when the message has been removed.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage() and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplashScreen.Pixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap that is used in the splash screen. The image does not have any of the text drawn by showMessage() calls.</para>
            <para>Sets the pixmap that will be used as the splash screen's image to pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSplitter">
            <summary>
            The QSplitter class implements a splitter widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A splitter lets the user control the size of child widgets by dragging the boundary between the children. Any number of widgets may be controlled by a single splitter. The typical use of a QSplitter is to create several widgets and add them using insertWidget() or addWidget().</para>
            <para>The following example will show a QListView, QTreeView, and QTextEdit side by side, with two splitter handles:</para>
            <para>     QSplitter *splitter = new QSplitter(parent);</para>
            <para>     QListView *listview = new QListView;</para>
            <para>     QTreeView *treeview = new QTreeView;</para>
            <para>     QTextEdit *textedit = new QTextEdit;</para>
            <para>     splitter-&amp;gt;addWidget(listview);</para>
            <para>     splitter-&amp;gt;addWidget(treeview);</para>
            <para>     splitter-&amp;gt;addWidget(textedit);</para>
            <para>If a widget is already inside a QSplitter when insertWidget() or addWidget() is called, it will move to the new position. This can be used to reorder widgets in the splitter later. You can use indexOf(), widget(), and count() to get access to the widgets inside the splitter.</para>
            <para>A default QSplitter lays out its children horizontally (side by side); you can use setOrientation(Qt::Vertical) to lay its children out vertically.</para>
            <para>By default, all widgets can be as large or as small as the user wishes, between the minimumSizeHint() (or minimumSize()) and maximumSize() of the widgets.</para>
            <para>QSplitter resizes its children dynamically by default. If you would rather have QSplitter resize the children only at the end of a resize operation, call setOpaqueResize(false).</para>
            <para>The initial distribution of size between the widgets is determined by multiplying the initial size with the stretch factor. You can also use setSizes() to set the sizes of all the widgets. The function sizes() returns the sizes set by the user. Alternatively, you can save and restore the sizes of the widgets from a QByteArray using saveState() and restoreState() respectively.</para>
            <para>When you hide() a child its space will be distributed among the other children. It will be reinstated when you show() it again.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QSplitterHandle, QHBoxLayout, QVBoxLayout, and QTabWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent argument passed on to the QFrame constructor.</para>
            <para>See also setOrientation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a splitter with the given orientation and parent.</para>
            <para>See also setOrientation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to the splitter's layout after all the other items.</para>
            <para>If widget is already in the splitter, it will be moved to the new position.</para>
            <para>See also insertWidget(), widget(), and indexOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            <para>Tells the splitter that the child widget described by c has been inserted or removed.</para>
            <para>This method is also used to handle the situation where a widget is created with the splitter as a parent but not explicitly added with insertWidget() or addWidget(). This is for compatibility and not the recommended way of putting widgets into a splitter in new code. Please use insertWidget() or addWidget() in new code.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget() and insertWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.ClosestLegalPosition(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the closest legal position to pos of the widget with index index.</para>
            <para>For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. Positions are then measured from the right edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also getRange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of widgets contained in the splitter's layout.</para>
            <para>See also widget() and handle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.CreateHandle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new splitter handle as a child widget of this splitter. This function can be reimplemented in subclasses to provide support for custom handles.</para>
            <para>See also handle() and indexOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.GetRange(System.Int32,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the valid range of the splitter with index index in *min and *max if min and max are not 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.Handle(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the handle to the left (or above) for the item in the splitter's layout at the given index. The handle at index 0 is always hidden.</para>
            <para>For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. The handle will be to the right of the widget at index.</para>
            <para>See also count(), widget(), indexOf(), createHandle(), and setHandleWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.IndexOf(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index in the splitter's layout of the specified widget. This also works for handles.</para>
            <para>Handles are numbered from 0. There are as many handles as there are child widgets, but the handle at position 0 is always hidden.</para>
            <para>See also count() and widget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.InsertWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the widget specified into the splitter's layout at the given index.</para>
            <para>If widget is already in the splitter, it will be moved to the new position.</para>
            <para>if index is an invalid index, then the widget will be inserted at the end.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), indexOf(), and widget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.IsCollapsible(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the widget at index is collapsible, otherwise returns false</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.MoveSplitter(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the left or top edge of the splitter handle at index as close as possible to position pos, which is the distance from the left or top edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also splitterMoved(), closestLegalPosition(), and getRange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.Refresh">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the splitter's state. You should not need to call this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.RestoreState(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Restores the splitter's layout to the state specified. Returns true if the state is restored; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to restore the size from a past session. Here is an example:</para>
            <para>Restore the splitters's state:</para>
            <para>     QSettings settings;</para>
            <para>     splitter-&gt;restoreState(settings.value(&quot;splitterSizes&quot;).toByteArray());</para>
            <para>A failure to restore the splitter's layout may result from either invalid or out-of-date data in the supplied byte array.</para>
            <para>See also saveState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.SaveState">
            <summary>
            <para>Saves the state of the splitter's layout.</para>
            <para>Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to remember the size for a future session. A version number is stored as part of the data. Here is an example:</para>
            <para>     QSettings settings;</para>
            <para>     settings.setValue(&quot;splitterSizes&quot;, splitter-&gt;saveState());</para>
            <para>See also restoreState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.SetCollapsible(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the child widget at index index is collapsible to collapse.</para>
            <para>By default, children are collapsible, meaning that the user can resize them down to size 0, even if they have a non-zero minimumSize() or minimumSizeHint(). This behavior can be changed on a per-widget basis by calling this function, or globally for all the widgets in the splitter by setting the childrenCollapsible property.</para>
            <para>See also isCollapsible() and childrenCollapsible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.SetRubberBand(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Displays a rubber band at position pos. If pos is negative, the rubber band is removed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.SetStretchFactor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Updates the size policy of the widget at position index to have a stretch factor of stretch.</para>
            <para>stretch is not the effective stretch factor; the effective stretch factor is calculated by taking the initial size of the widget and multiplying it with stretch.</para>
            <para>This function is provided for convenience. It is equivalent to</para>
            <para> QWidget *widget = splitter-&gt;widget(index);</para>
            <para> QSizePolicy policy = widget-&gt;sizePolicy();</para>
            <para> policy.setHorizontalStretch(stretch);</para>
            <para> policy.setVerticalStretch(stretch);</para>
            <para> widget-&gt;setSizePolicy(policy);</para>
            <para>See also setSizes() and widget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.OnSplitterMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the splitter handle at a particular index has been moved to position pos.</para>
            <para>For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also moveSplitter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.Widget(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget at the given index in the splitter's layout.</para>
            <para>See also count(), handle(), indexOf(), and insertWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the splitter. All children are deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QSplitter.SplitterMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the splitter handle at a particular index has been moved to position pos.</para>
            <para>For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also moveSplitter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplitter.Sizes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of the size parameters of all the widgets in this splitter.</para>
            <para>If the splitter's orientation is horizontal, the list contains the widgets width in pixels, from left to right; if the orientation is vertical, the list contains the widgets height in pixels, from top to bottom.</para>
            <para>Giving the values to another splitter's setSizes() function will produce a splitter with the same layout as this one.</para>
            <para>Note that invisible widgets have a size of 0.</para>
            <para>Sets the child widgets respective sizes to the values given in the list.</para>
            <para>If the splitter is horizontal, the values set the widths of each widget in pixels, from left to right. If the splitter is vertical, the heights of each widget is set, from top to bottom.</para>
            <para>Extra values in the list are ignored. If list contains too few values, the result is undefined but the program will still be well-behaved.</para>
            <para>The overall size of the splitter widget is not affected. Instead, any additional/missing space is distributed amongst the widgets according to the relative weight of the sizes.</para>
            <para>If you specify a size of 0, the widget will be invisible. The size policies of the widgets are preserved. That is, a value smaller then the minimal size hint of the respective widget will be replaced by the value of the hint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplitter.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the orientation of the splitter.</para>
            <para>By default the orientation is horizontal (i.e., the widgets are laid out side by side). The possible orientations are Qt::Horizontal and Qt::Vertical.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplitter.OpaqueResize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether resizing is opaque.</para>
            <para>Opaque resizing is on by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplitter.HandleWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the width of the splitter handles.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and style preferences.</para>
            <para>If you set handleWidth to 1, the actual grab area will grow to overlap a few pixels of it's respective widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplitter.ChildrenCollapsible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user.</para>
            <para>By default, children are collapsible. It is possible to enable and disable the collapsing of individual children using setCollapsible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSplitterHandle">
            <summary>
            The QSplitterHandle class provides handle functionality of the splitter.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QSplitterHandle is typically what people think about when they think about a splitter. It is the handle that is used to resize the widgets.</para>
            <para>A typical developer using QSplitter will never have to worry about QSplitterHandle. It is provided for developers who want splitter handles that provide extra features, such as popup menus.</para>
            <para>The typical way one would create splitter handles is to subclass QSplitter then reimplement QSplitter::createHandle() to instantiate the custom splitter handle. For example, a minimum QSplitter subclass might look like this:</para>
            <para> class Splitter : public QSplitter</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para> public:</para>
            <para>     Splitter(Qt::Orientation orientation, QWidget *parent = 0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> protected:</para>
            <para>     QSplitterHandle *createHandle();</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>The createHandle() implementation simply constructs a custom splitter handle, called Splitter in this example:</para>
            <para> QSplitterHandle *Splitter::createHandle()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return new SplitterHandle(orientation(), this);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Information about a given handle can be obtained using functions like orientation() and opaqueResize(), and is retrieved from its parent splitter. Details like these can be used to give custom handles different appearances depending on the splitter's orientation.</para>
            <para>The complexity of a custom handle subclass depends on the tasks that it needs to perform. A simple subclass might only provide a paintEvent() implementation:</para>
            <para> void SplitterHandle::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) {</para>
            <para>         gradient.setStart(rect().left(), rect().height()/2);</para>
            <para>         gradient.setFinalStop(rect().right(), rect().height()/2);</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         gradient.setStart(rect().width()/2, rect().top());</para>
            <para>         gradient.setFinalStop(rect().width()/2, rect().bottom());</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     painter.fillRect(event-&amp;gt;rect(), QBrush(gradient));</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>In this example, a predefined gradient is set up differently depending on the orientation of the handle. QSplitterHandle provides a reasonable size hint for the handle, so the subclass does not need to provide a reimplementation of sizeHint() unless the handle has special size requirements.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QSplitter.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.Orientation,QtGui.QSplitter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QSplitter handle with the given orientation and QSplitter parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.ClosestLegalPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the closest legal position to pos of the splitter handle. The positions are measured from the left or top edge of the splitter, even for right-to-left languages.</para>
            <para>See also QSplitter::closestLegalPosition() and moveSplitter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.MoveSplitter(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Tells the splitter to move this handle to position pos, which is the distance from the left or top edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>Note that pos is also measured from the left (or top) for right-to-left languages. This function will map pos to the appropriate position before calling QSplitter::moveSplitter().</para>
            <para>See also QSplitter::moveSplitter() and closestLegalPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OpaqueResize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if widgets are resized dynamically (opaquely), otherwise returns false. This value is controlled by the QSplitter.</para>
            <para>See also QSplitter::opaqueResize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.Splitter">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the splitter associated with this splitter handle.</para>
            <para>See also QSplitter::handle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSplitterHandle.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the handle's orientation. This is usually propagated from the QSplitter.</para>
            <para>Sets the orientation of the splitter handle to orientation. This is usually propagated from the QSplitter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStackedLayout">
            <summary>
            The QStackedLayout class provides a stack of widgets where only one widget is visible at a time.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStackedLayout can be used to create a user interface similar to the one provided by QTabWidget. There is also a convenience QStackedWidget class built on top of QStackedLayout.</para>
            <para>A QStackedLayout can be populated with a number of child widgets (&amp;quot;pages&amp;quot;). For example:</para>
            <para>     QWidget *firstPageWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     QWidget *secondPageWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     QWidget *thirdPageWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QStackedLayout *stackedLayout = new QStackedLayout;</para>
            <para>     stackedLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(firstPageWidget);</para>
            <para>     stackedLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(secondPageWidget);</para>
            <para>     stackedLayout-&amp;gt;addWidget(thirdPageWidget);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QVBoxLayout *mainLayout = new QVBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     mainLayout-&amp;gt;addLayout(stackedLayout);</para>
            <para>     setLayout(mainLayout);</para>
            <para>QStackedLayout provides no intrinsic means for the user to switch page. This is typically done through a QComboBox or a QListWidget that stores the titles of the QStackedLayout's pages. For example:</para>
            <para>     QComboBox *pageComboBox = new QComboBox;</para>
            <para>     pageComboBox-&amp;gt;addItem(tr(&amp;quot;Page 1&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     pageComboBox-&amp;gt;addItem(tr(&amp;quot;Page 2&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     pageComboBox-&amp;gt;addItem(tr(&amp;quot;Page 3&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     connect(pageComboBox, SIGNAL(activated(int)),</para>
            <para>             stackedLayout, SLOT(setCurrentIndex(int)));</para>
            <para>When populating a layout, the widgets are added to an internal list. The indexOf() function returns the index of a widget in that list. The widgets can either be added to the end of the list using the addWidget() function, or inserted at a given index using the insertWidget() function. The removeWidget() function removes the widget at the given index from the layout. The number of widgets contained in the layout, can be obtained using the count() function.</para>
            <para>The widget() function returns the widget at a given index position. The index of the widget that is shown on screen is given by currentIndex() and can be changed using setCurrentIndex(). In a similar manner, the currently shown widget can be retrieved using the currentWidget() function, and altered using the setCurrentWidget() function.</para>
            <para>Whenever the current widget in the layout changes or a widget is removed from the layout, the currentChanged() and widgetRemoved() signals are emitted respectively.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStackedWidget and QTabWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStackedLayout with no parent.</para>
            <para>This QStackedLayout must be installed on a widget later on to become effective.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget() and insertWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QStackedLayout with the given parent.</para>
            <para>This layout will install itself on the parent widget and manage the geometry of its children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QLayout)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QStackedLayout and inserts it into the given parentLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.AddItem(QtGui.IQLayoutItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to the end of this layout and returns the index position of the widget.</para>
            <para>If the QStackedLayout is empty before this function is called, the given widget becomes the current widget.</para>
            <para>See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.OnCurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current widget in the layout changes. The index specifies the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedLayout)</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.InsertWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the given widget at the given index in this QStackedLayout. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).</para>
            <para>If the QStackedLayout is empty before this function is called, the given widget becomes the current widget.</para>
            <para>Inserting a new widget at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current widget.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.ItemAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.TakeAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.Widget(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget at the given index, or 0 if there is no widget at the given position.</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and indexOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.OnWidgetRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed from the layout. The widget's index is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this QStackedLayout. Note that the layout's widgets are not destroyed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QStackedLayout.WidgetRemoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed from the layout. The widget's index is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QStackedLayout.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current widget in the layout changes. The index specifies the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedLayout)</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedLayout.CurrentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current widget, or 0 if there are no widgets in this layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the current widget to be the specified widget. The new current widget must already be contained in this stacked layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedLayout.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedLayout.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index position of the widget that is visible.</para>
            <para>The current index is -1 if there is no current widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedLayout.stackingMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property determines the way visibility of child widgets are handled.</para>
            <para>The default value is StackOne. Setting the property to StackAll allows you to make use of the layout for overlay widgets that do additional drawing on top of other widgets, for example, graphical editors.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStackedLayout.StackingMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies how the layout handles its child widgets regarding their visibility.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStackedLayout.StackingMode.StackAll">
            <summary>
            <para>All widgets are visible. The current widget is merely raised.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStackedLayout.StackingMode.StackOne">
            <summary>
            <para>Only the current widget is visible. This is the default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStackedWidget">
            <summary>
            The QStackedWidget class provides a stack of widgets where only one widget is visible at a time.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStackedWidget can be used to create a user interface similar to the one provided by QTabWidget. It is a convenience layout widget built on top of the QStackedLayout class.</para>
            <para>Like QStackedLayout, QStackedWidget can be constructed and populated with a number of child widgets (&amp;quot;pages&amp;quot;):</para>
            <para>     QWidget *firstPageWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     QWidget *secondPageWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     QWidget *thirdPageWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QStackedWidget *stackedWidget = new QStackedWidget;</para>
            <para>     stackedWidget-&amp;gt;addWidget(firstPageWidget);</para>
            <para>     stackedWidget-&amp;gt;addWidget(secondPageWidget);</para>
            <para>     stackedWidget-&amp;gt;addWidget(thirdPageWidget);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QVBoxLayout *layout = new QVBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(stackedWidget);</para>
            <para>     setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para>QStackedWidget provides no intrinsic means for the user to switch page. This is typically done through a QComboBox or a QListWidget that stores the titles of the QStackedWidget's pages. For example:</para>
            <para>     QComboBox *pageComboBox = new QComboBox;</para>
            <para>     pageComboBox-&amp;gt;addItem(tr(&amp;quot;Page 1&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     pageComboBox-&amp;gt;addItem(tr(&amp;quot;Page 2&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     pageComboBox-&amp;gt;addItem(tr(&amp;quot;Page 3&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     connect(pageComboBox, SIGNAL(activated(int)),</para>
            <para>             stackedWidget, SLOT(setCurrentIndex(int)));</para>
            <para>When populating a stacked widget, the widgets are added to an internal list. The indexOf() function returns the index of a widget in that list. The widgets can either be added to the end of the list using the addWidget() function, or inserted at a given index using the insertWidget() function. The removeWidget() function removes a widget from the stacked widget. The number of widgets contained in the stacked widget, can be obtained using the count() function.</para>
            <para>The widget() function returns the widget at a given index position. The index of the widget that is shown on screen is given by currentIndex() and can be changed using setCurrentIndex(). In a similar manner, the currently shown widget can be retrieved using the currentWidget() function, and altered using the setCurrentWidget() function.</para>
            <para>Whenever the current widget in the stacked widget changes or a widget is removed from the stacked widget, the currentChanged() and widgetRemoved() signals are emitted respectively.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStackedLayout, QTabWidget, and Config Dialog Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStackedWidget with the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget() and insertWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the given widget to the QStackedWidget and returns the index position. Ownership of widget is passed on to the QStackedWidget.</para>
            <para>If the QStackedWidget is empty before this function is called, widget becomes the current widget.</para>
            <para>See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.OnCurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current widget changes.</para>
            <para>The parameter holds the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedWidget).</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.IndexOf(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the given widget, or -1 if the given widget is not a child of the QStackedWidget.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex() and widget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.InsertWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the given widget at the given index in the QStackedWidget. Ownership of widget is passed on to the QStackedWidget. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).</para>
            <para>If the QStackedWidget was empty before this function is called, the given widget becomes the current widget.</para>
            <para>Inserting a new widget at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current widget.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.RemoveWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes widget from the QStackedWidget. i.e., widget is not deleted but simply removed from the stacked layout, causing it to be hidden.</para>
            <para>Note: Ownership of widget reverts to the application.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), insertWidget(), and currentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.Widget(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget at the given index, or 0 if there is no such widget.</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and indexOf().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.OnWidgetRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed. The widget's index is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStackedWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this stacked widget, and frees any allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QStackedWidget.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current widget changes.</para>
            <para>The parameter holds the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedWidget).</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QStackedWidget.WidgetRemoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed. The widget's index is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedWidget.CurrentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current widget, or 0 if there are no child widgets.</para>
            <para>Sets the current widget to be the specified widget. The new current widget must already be contained in this stacked widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedWidget.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index position of the widget that is visible.</para>
            <para>The current index is -1 if there is no current widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of -1 because the stack is initially empty.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStackedWidget.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of widgets contained by this stacked widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStandardItem">
            <summary>
            The QStandardItem class provides an item for use with the QStandardItemModel class.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Items usually contain text, icons, or checkboxes.</para>
            <para>Each item can have its own background brush which is set with the setBackground() function. The current background brush can be found with background(). The text label for each item can be rendered with its own font and brush. These are specified with the setFont() and setForeground() functions, and read with font() and foreground().</para>
            <para>By default, items are enabled, editable, selectable, checkable, and can be used both as the source of a drag and drop operation and as a drop target. Each item's flags can be changed by calling setFlags(). Checkable items can be checked and unchecked with the setCheckState() function. The corresponding checkState() function indicates whether the item is currently checked.</para>
            <para>You can store application-specific data in an item by calling setData().</para>
            <para>Each item can have a two-dimensional table of child items. This makes it possible to build hierarchies of items. The typical hierarchy is the tree, in which case the child table is a table with a single column (a list).</para>
            <para>The dimensions of the child table can be set with setRowCount() and setColumnCount(). Items can be positioned in the child table with setChild(). Get a pointer to a child item with child(). New rows and columns of children can also be inserted with insertRow() and insertColumn(), or appended with appendRow() and appendColumn(). When using the append and insert functions, the dimensions of the child table will grow as needed.</para>
            <para>An existing row of children can be removed with removeRow() or takeRow(); correspondingly, a column can be removed with removeColumn() or takeColumn().</para>
            <para>An item's children can be sorted by calling sortChildren().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing</para>
            <para>When subclassing QStandardItem to provide custom items, it is possible to define new types for them so that they can be distinguished from the base class. The type() function should be reimplemented to return a new type value equal to or greater than UserType.</para>
            <para>Reimplement data() and setData() if you want to perform custom handling of data queries and/or control how an item's data is represented.</para>
            <para>Reimplement clone() if you want QStandardItemModel to be able to create instances of your custom item class on demand (see QStandardItemModel::setItemPrototype()).</para>
            <para>Reimplement read() and write() if you want to control how items are represented in their serialized form.</para>
            <para>Reimplement operator&amp;lt;() if you want to control the semantics of item comparison. operator&amp;lt;() determines the sorted order when sorting items with sortChildren() or with QStandardItemModel::sort().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStandardItemModel, Item View Convenience Classes, and Model/View Programming.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.#ctor(QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other. Note that model() is not copied.</para>
            <para>This function is useful when reimplementing clone().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item with the given icon and text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item with the given text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item with rows rows and columns columns of child items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.AppendColumn(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a column containing items. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>See also insertColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.AppendRow(QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Appends a row containing item.</para>
            <para>When building a list or a tree that has only one column, this function provides a convenient way to append a single new item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.AppendRow(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a row containing items. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>See also insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.AppendRows(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends rows containing items. The column count will not change.</para>
            <para>See also insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Child(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the child item at (row, column) if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also setChild(), takeChild(), and parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Clone">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of this item. The item's children are not copied.</para>
            <para>When subclassing QStandardItem, you can reimplement this function to provide QStandardItemModel with a factory that it can use to create new items on demand.</para>
            <para>See also QStandardItemModel::setItemPrototype() and operator=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Column">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column where the item is located in its parent's child table, or -1 if the item has no parent.</para>
            <para>See also row() and parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Data(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's data for the given role, or an invalid QVariant if there is no data for the role.</para>
            <para>Note: The default implementation treats Qt::EditRole and Qt::DisplayRole as referring to the same data.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.EmitDataChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>Causes the model associated with this item to emit a dataChanged() signal for this item.</para>
            <para>You normally only need to call this function if you have subclassed QStandardItem and reimplemented data() and/or setData().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item has any children; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also rowCount(), columnCount(), and child().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Index">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QModelIndex associated with this item.</para>
            <para>When you need to invoke item functionality in a QModelIndex-based API (e.g. QAbstractItemView), you can call this function to obtain an index that corresponds to the item's location in the model.</para>
            <para>If the item is not associated with a model, an invalid QModelIndex is returned.</para>
            <para>See also model() and QStandardItemModel::itemFromIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.InsertColumn(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a column at column containing items. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>See also insertColumns() and insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts count columns of child items at column column.</para>
            <para>See also insertColumn() and insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a row at row containing item.</para>
            <para>When building a list or a tree that has only one column, this function provides a convenient way to insert a single new item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.InsertRow(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a row at row containing items. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows() and insertColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts count rows of child items at row row.</para>
            <para>See also insertRow() and insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts items at row. The column count wont be changed.</para>
            <para>See also insertRow() and insertColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsCheckable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item is user-checkable.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>See also setCheckable(), checkState(), and isTristate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsDragEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item is drag enabled. An item that is drag enabled can be dragged by the user.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>Note that item dragging must be enabled in the view for dragging to work; see QAbstractItemView::dragEnabled.</para>
            <para>See also setDragEnabled(), isDropEnabled(), and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsDropEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item is drop enabled. When an item is drop enabled, it can be used as a drop target.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>See also setDropEnabled(), isDragEnabled(), and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsEditable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item can be edited by the user.</para>
            <para>When an item is editable (and enabled), the user can edit the item by invoking one of the view's edit triggers; see QAbstractItemView::editTriggers.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>See also setEditable() and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item is enabled.</para>
            <para>When an item is enabled, the user can interact with it. The possible types of interaction are specified by the other item flags, such as isEditable() and isSelectable().</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>See also setEnabled() and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsSelectable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item is selectable by the user.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>See also setSelectable() and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.IsTristate">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the item is tristate; that is, if it's checkable with three separate states.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>See also setTristate(), isCheckable(), and checkState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QStandardItemModel that this item belongs to.</para>
            <para>If the item is not a child of another item that belongs to the model, this function returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.op_LessThan(QtGui.QStandardItem,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this item is less than other; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>The default implementation uses the data for the item's sort role (see QStandardItemModel::sortRole) to perform the comparison if the item belongs to a model; otherwise, the data for the item's Qt::DisplayRole (text()) is used to perform the comparison.</para>
            <para>sortChildren() and QStandardItemModel::sort() use this function when sorting items. If you want custom sorting, you can subclass QStandardItem and reimplement this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's parent item, or 0 if the item has no parent.</para>
            <para>See also child().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Read(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads the item from stream in. Only the data and flags of the item are read, not the child items.</para>
            <para>See also write().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.RemoveColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given column. The items that were in the column are deleted.</para>
            <para>See also takeColumn(), removeColumns(), and removeRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.RemoveColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes count columns at column column. The items that were in those columns are deleted.</para>
            <para>See also removeColumn() and removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.RemoveRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given row. The items that were in the row are deleted.</para>
            <para>See also takeRow(), removeRows(), and removeColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes count rows at row row. The items that were in those rows are deleted.</para>
            <para>See also removeRow() and removeColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Row">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row where the item is located in its parent's child table, or -1 if the item has no parent.</para>
            <para>See also column() and parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetCheckable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is user-checkable. If checkable is true, the item can be checked by the user; otherwise, the user cannot check the item.</para>
            <para>The item delegate will render a checkable item with a check box next to the item's text.</para>
            <para>See also isCheckable(), setCheckState(), and setTristate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetChild(System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the child at row to item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetChild(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the child item at (row, column) to item. This item (the parent item) takes ownership of item. If necessary, the row count and column count are increased to fit the item.</para>
            <para>See also child().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetData(System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's data for the given role to the specified value.</para>
            <para>If you subclass QStandardItem and reimplement this function, your reimplementation should call emitDataChanged() if you do not call the base implementation of setData(). This will ensure that e.g. views using the model are notified of the changes.</para>
            <para>Note: The default implementation treats Qt::EditRole and Qt::DisplayRole as referring to the same data.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemDataRole, data(), and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetDragEnabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is drag enabled. If dragEnabled is true, the item can be dragged by the user; otherwise, the user cannot drag the item.</para>
            <para>Note that you also need to ensure that item dragging is enabled in the view; see QAbstractItemView::dragEnabled.</para>
            <para>See also isDragEnabled(), setDropEnabled(), and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetDropEnabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is drop enabled. If dropEnabled is true, the item can be used as a drop target; otherwise, it cannot.</para>
            <para>Note that you also need to ensure that drops are enabled in the view; see QWidget::acceptDrops(); and that the model supports the desired drop actions; see QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            <para>See also isDropEnabled(), setDragEnabled(), and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetEditable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is editable. If editable is true, the item can be edited by the user; otherwise, the user cannot edit the item.</para>
            <para>How the user can edit items in a view is determined by the view's edit triggers; see QAbstractItemView::editTriggers.</para>
            <para>See also isEditable() and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetEnabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is enabled. If enabled is true, the item is enabled, meaning that the user can interact with the item; if enabled is false, the user cannot interact with the item.</para>
            <para>This flag takes precedence over the other item flags; e.g. if an item is not enabled, it cannot be selected by the user, even if the Qt::ItemIsSelectable flag has been set.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled(), Qt::ItemIsEnabled, and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetSelectable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is selectable. If selectable is true, the item can be selected by the user; otherwise, the user cannot select the item.</para>
            <para>You can control the selection behavior and mode by manipulating their view properties; see QAbstractItemView::selectionMode and QAbstractItemView::selectionBehavior.</para>
            <para>See also isSelectable() and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SetTristate(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets whether the item is tristate. If tristate is true, the item is checkable with three separate states; otherwise, the item is checkable with two states. (Note that this also requires that the item is checkable; see isCheckable().)</para>
            <para>See also isTristate(), setCheckable(), and setCheckState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.SortChildren(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts the children of the item using the given order, by the values in the given column.</para>
            <para>Note: This function is recursive, therefore it sorts the children of the item, its grandchildren, etc.</para>
            <para>See also operator&lt;().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.TakeChild(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the child item at (row, column) without deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item. If there was no child at the given location, then this function returns 0.</para>
            <para>Note that this function, unlike takeRow() and takeColumn(), does not affect the dimensions of the child table.</para>
            <para>See also child(), takeRow(), and takeColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.TakeColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes column without deleting the column items, and returns a list of pointers to the removed items. For items in the column that have not been set, the corresponding pointers in the list will be 0.</para>
            <para>See also removeColumn(), insertColumn(), and takeRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.TakeRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes row without deleting the row items, and returns a list of pointers to the removed items. For items in the row that have not been set, the corresponding pointers in the list will be 0.</para>
            <para>See also removeRow(), insertRow(), and takeColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of this item. The type is used to distinguish custom items from the base class. When subclassing QStandardItem, you should reimplement this function and return a new value greater than or equal to UserType.</para>
            <para>See also QStandardItem::Type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Write(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the item to stream out. Only the data and flags of the item are written, not the child items.</para>
            <para>See also read().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the item. This causes the item's children to be destructed as well.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.AccessibleDescription">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's accessible description.</para>
            <para>The accessible description is used by assistive technologies (i.e. for users who cannot use conventional means of interaction).</para>
            <para>Sets the item's accessible description to the string specified by accessibleDescription.</para>
            <para>The accessible description is used by assistive technologies (i.e. for users who cannot use conventional means of interaction).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.AccessibleText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's accessible text.</para>
            <para>The accessible text is used by assistive technologies (i.e. for users who cannot use conventional means of interaction).</para>
            <para>Sets the item's accessible text to the string specified by accessibleText.</para>
            <para>The accessible text is used by assistive technologies (i.e. for users who cannot use conventional means of interaction).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render the item's background.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's background brush to the specified brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.CheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the checked state of the item.</para>
            <para>Sets the check state of the item to be state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of child item columns that the item has.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of child item columns to columns. If this is less than columnCount(), the data in the unwanted columns is discarded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.Flags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item flags for the item.</para>
            <para>The item flags determine how the user can interact with the item.</para>
            <para>By default, items are enabled, editable, selectable, checkable, and can be used both as the source of a drag and drop operation and as a drop target.</para>
            <para>Sets the item flags for the item to flags.</para>
            <para>The item flags determine how the user can interact with the item. This is often used to disable an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font used to render the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the font used to display the item's text to the given font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.Foreground">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render the item's foreground (e.g. text).</para>
            <para>Sets the brush used to display the item's foreground (e.g. text) to the given brush.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's icon.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's icon to the icon specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of child item rows that the item has.</para>
            <para>Sets the number of child item rows to rows. If this is less than rowCount(), the data in the unwanted rows is discarded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint set for the item, or an invalid QSize if no size hint has been set.</para>
            <para>If no size hint has been set, the item delegate will compute the size hint based on the item data.</para>
            <para>Sets the size hint for the item to be size. If no size hint is set, the item delegate will compute the size hint based on the item data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.StatusTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's status tip.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's status tip to the string specified by statusTip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's text. This is the text that's presented to the user in a view.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's text to the text specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.TextAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text alignment for the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the text alignment for the item's text to the alignment specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's tooltip.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's tooltip to the string specified by toolTip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItem.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's &quot;What's This?&quot; help.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's &quot;What's This?&quot; help to the string specified by whatsThis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStandardItem.ItemType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types that are used to describe standard items.</para>
            <para>You can define new user types in QStandardItem subclasses to ensure that custom items are treated specially; for example, when items are sorted.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStandardItem.ItemType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The default type for standard items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStandardItem.ItemType.UserType">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimum value for custom types. Values below UserType are reserved by Qt.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStandardItemModel">
            <summary>
            The QStandardItemModel class provides a generic model for storing custom data.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStandardItemModel can be used as a repository for standard Qt data types. It is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>QStandardItemModel provides a classic item-based approach to working with the model. The items in a QStandardItemModel are provided by QStandardItem.</para>
            <para>QStandardItemModel implements the QAbstractItemModel interface, which means that the model can be used to provide data in any view that supports that interface (such as QListView, QTableView and QTreeView, and your own custom views). For performance and flexibility, you may want to subclass QAbstractItemModel to provide support for different kinds of data repositories. For example, the QDirModel(obsolete) provides a model interface to the underlying file system.</para>
            <para>When you want a list or tree, you typically create an empty QStandardItemModel and use appendRow() to add items to the model, and item() to access an item. If your model represents a table, you typically pass the dimensions of the table to the QStandardItemModel constructor and use setItem() to position items into the table. You can also use setRowCount() and setColumnCount() to alter the dimensions of the model. To insert items, use insertRow() or insertColumn(), and to remove items, use removeRow() or removeColumn().</para>
            <para>You can set the header labels of your model with setHorizontalHeaderLabels() and setVerticalHeaderLabels().</para>
            <para>You can search for items in the model with findItems(), and sort the model by calling sort().</para>
            <para>Call clear() to remove all items from the model.</para>
            <para>An example usage of QStandardItemModel to create a table:</para>
            <para> QStandardItemModel model(4, 4);</para>
            <para> for (int row = 0; row &amp;lt; 4; ++row) {</para>
            <para>     for (int column = 0; column &amp;lt; 4; ++column) {</para>
            <para>         QStandardItem *item = new QStandardItem(QString(&amp;quot;row %0, column %1&amp;quot;).arg(row).arg(column));</para>
            <para>         model.setItem(row, column, item);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>An example usage of QStandardItemModel to create a tree:</para>
            <para> QStandardItemModel model;</para>
            <para> QStandardItem *parentItem = model.invisibleRootItem();</para>
            <para> for (int i = 0; i &amp;lt; 4; ++i) {</para>
            <para>     QStandardItem *item = new QStandardItem(QString(&amp;quot;item %0&amp;quot;).arg(i));</para>
            <para>     parentItem-&amp;gt;appendRow(item);</para>
            <para>     parentItem = item;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>After setting the model on a view, you typically want to react to user actions, such as an item being clicked. Since a QAbstractItemView provides QModelIndex-based signals and functions, you need a way to obtain the QStandardItem that corresponds to a given QModelIndex, and vice versa. itemFromIndex() and indexFromItem() provide this mapping. Typical usage of itemFromIndex() includes obtaining the item at the current index in a view, and obtaining the item that corresponds to an index carried by a QAbstractItemView signal, such as QAbstractItemView::clicked(). First you connect the view's signal to a slot in your class:</para>
            <para> QTreeView *treeView = new QTreeView(this);</para>
            <para> treeView-&amp;gt;setModel(myStandardItemModel);</para>
            <para> connect(treeView, SIGNAL(clicked(QModelIndex)),</para>
            <para>         this, SLOT(clicked(QModelIndex)));</para>
            <para>When you receive the signal, you call itemFromIndex() on the given model index to get a pointer to the item:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::clicked(const QModelIndex &amp;amp;index)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QStandardItem *item = myStandardItemModel-&amp;gt;itemFromIndex(index);</para>
            <para>     // Do stuff with the item ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Conversely, you must obtain the QModelIndex of an item when you want to invoke a model/view function that takes an index as argument. You can obtain the index either by using the model's indexFromItem() function, or, equivalently, by calling QStandardItem::index():</para>
            <para> treeView-&amp;gt;scrollTo(item-&amp;gt;index());</para>
            <para>You are, of course, not required to use the item-based approach; you could instead rely entirely on the QAbstractItemModel interface when working with the model, or use a combination of the two as appropriate.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStandardItem, Model/View Programming, QAbstractItemModel, Simple Tree Model example, and Item View Convenience Classes.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new item model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new item model that initially has rows rows and columns columns, and that has the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.AppendColumn(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a column containing items. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also insertColumn() and appendRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.AppendRow(QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>When building a list or a tree that has only one column, this function provides a convenient way to append a single new item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.AppendRow(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a row containing items. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also insertRow() and appendColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all items (including header items) from the model and sets the number of rows and columns to zero.</para>
            <para>See also removeColumns() and removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            <para>See also setColumnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.ColumnCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().</para>
            <para>See also setColumnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.DropMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction,System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.FindItems(System.String,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of items that match the given text, using the given flags, in the given column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.HasChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.HasChildren(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.HeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().</para>
            <para>See also setHeaderData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.HorizontalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal header item for column if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalHeaderItem() and verticalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Index(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.IndexFromItem(QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item.</para>
            <para>Use this function when you want to perform an operation that requires the QModelIndex of the item, such as QAbstractItemView::scrollTo(). QStandardItem::index() is provided as convenience; it is equivalent to calling this function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also itemFromIndex() and QStandardItem::index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a column at column containing items. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeColumn(), appendColumn(), and insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertColumn(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a column at column containing items. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeColumn(), appendColumn(), and insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertColumn(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a column at column containing items. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeColumn(), appendColumn(), and insertRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a row at row containing items. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeRow(), appendRow(), and insertColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a row at row containing item.</para>
            <para>When building a list or a tree that has only one column, this function provides a convenient way to append a single new item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertRow(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a row at row containing items. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeRow(), appendRow(), and insertColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertRow(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QStandardItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a row at row containing items. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeRow(), appendRow(), and insertColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.InvisibleRootItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model's invisible root item.</para>
            <para>The invisible root item provides access to the model's top-level items through the QStandardItem API, making it possible to write functions that can treat top-level items and their children in a uniform way; for example, recursive functions involving a tree model.</para>
            <para>Note: Calling index() on the QStandardItem object retrieved from this function is not valid.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Item(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item for the given row and column if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setItem(), takeItem(), and itemFromIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.OnItemChanged(QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.ItemData(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::itemData().</para>
            <para>See also setItemData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.ItemFromIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the QStandardItem associated with the given index.</para>
            <para>Calling this function is typically the initial step when processing QModelIndex-based signals from a view, such as QAbstractItemView::activated(). In your slot, you call itemFromIndex(), with the QModelIndex carried by the signal as argument, to obtain a pointer to the corresponding QStandardItem.</para>
            <para>Note that this function will lazily create an item for the index (using itemPrototype()), and set it in the parent item's child table, if no item already exists at that index.</para>
            <para>If index is an invalid index, this function returns 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also indexFromItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Parent(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.RemoveColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.RemoveColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>See also setRowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.RowCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>See also setRowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetColumnCount(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the number of columns in this model to columns. If this is less than columnCount(), the data in the unwanted columns is discarded.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also columnCount() and setRowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetHeaderData(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.Orientation,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setHeaderData().</para>
            <para>See also headerData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetHorizontalHeaderItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the horizontal header item for column to item. The model takes ownership of the item. If necessary, the column count is increased to fit the item. The previous header item (if there was one) is deleted.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalHeaderItem(), setHorizontalHeaderLabels(), and setVerticalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetHorizontalHeaderLabels(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the horizontal header labels using labels. If necessary, the column count is increased to the size of labels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetItem(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item for the given row and column to item. The model takes ownership of the item. If necessary, the row count and column count are increased to fit the item. The previous item at the given location (if there was one) is deleted.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also item().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetItemData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Collections.Generic.Dictionary{System.Int32,System.Object})">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setItemData().</para>
            <para>See also itemData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetRowCount(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the number of rows in this model to rows. If this is less than rowCount(), the data in the unwanted rows is discarded.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also rowCount() and setColumnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetVerticalHeaderItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the vertical header item for row to item. The model takes ownership of the item. If necessary, the row count is increased to fit the item. The previous header item (if there was one) is deleted.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also verticalHeaderItem(), setVerticalHeaderLabels(), and setHorizontalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SetVerticalHeaderLabels(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the vertical header labels using labels. If necessary, the row count is increased to the size of labels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setVerticalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            <para>QStandardItemModel supports both copy and move.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.TakeColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given column without deleting the column items, and returns a list of pointers to the removed items. The model releases ownership of the items. For items in the column that have not been set, the corresponding pointers in the list will be 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.TakeHorizontalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the horizontal header item at column from the header without deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item. The model releases ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalHeaderItem() and takeVerticalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.TakeItem(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item at (row, column) without deleting it. The model releases ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also item(), takeRow(), and takeColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.TakeRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given row without deleting the row items, and returns a list of pointers to the removed items. The model releases ownership of the items. For items in the row that have not been set, the corresponding pointers in the list will be 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also takeColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.TakeVerticalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the vertical header item at row from the header without deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item. The model releases ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also verticalHeaderItem() and takeHorizontalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.VerticalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical header item for row row if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setVerticalHeaderItem() and horizontalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the model. The model destroys all its items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.ItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.ItemPrototype">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item prototype used by the model. The model uses the item prototype as an item factory when it needs to construct new items on demand (for instance, when a view or item delegate calls setData()).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the item prototype for the model to the specified item. The model takes ownership of the prototype.</para>
            <para>The item prototype acts as a QStandardItem factory, by relying on the QStandardItem::clone() function. To provide your own prototype, subclass QStandardItem, reimplement QStandardItem::clone() and set the prototype to be an instance of your custom class. Whenever QStandardItemModel needs to create an item on demand (for instance, when a view or item delegate calls setData())), the new items will be instances of your custom class.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStandardItemModel.SortRole">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item role that is used to query the model's data when sorting items.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::DisplayRole.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStaticText">
            <summary>
            The QStaticText class enables optimized drawing of text when the text and its layout is updated rarely.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStaticText provides a way to cache layout data for a block of text so that it can be drawn more efficiently than by using QPainter::drawText() in which the layout information is recalculated with every call.</para>
            <para>The class primarily provides an optimization for cases where the text, its font and the transformations on the painter are static over several paint events. If the text or its layout is changed for every iteration, QPainter::drawText() is the more efficient alternative, since the static text's layout would have to be recalculated to take the new state into consideration.</para>
            <para>Translating the painter will not cause the layout of the text to be recalculated, but will cause a very small performance impact on drawStaticText(). Altering any other parts of the painter's transformation or the painter's font will cause the layout of the static text to be recalculated. This should be avoided as often as possible to maximize the performance benefit of using QStaticText.</para>
            <para>In addition, only affine transformations are supported by drawStaticText(). Calling drawStaticText() on a projected painter will perform slightly worse than using the regular drawText() call, so this should be avoided.</para>
            <para> class MyWidget: public QWidget</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para> public:</para>
            <para>     MyWidget(QWidget *parent = 0) : QWidget(parent), m_staticText(&amp;quot;This is static text&amp;quot;)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> protected:</para>
            <para>     void paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para>     {</para>
            <para>         QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>         painter.drawStaticText(0, 0, m_staticText);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> private:</para>
            <para>     QStaticText m_staticText;</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>The QStaticText class can be used to mimic the behavior of QPainter::drawText() to a specific point with no boundaries, and also when QPainter::drawText() is called with a bounding rectangle.</para>
            <para>If a bounding rectangle is not required, create a QStaticText object without setting a preferred text width. The text will then occupy a single line.</para>
            <para>If you set a text width on the QStaticText object, this will bound the text. The text will be formatted so that no line exceeds the given width. The text width set for QStaticText will not automatically be used for clipping. To achieve clipping in addition to line breaks, use QPainter::setClipRect(). The position of the text is decided by the argument passed to QPainter::drawStaticText() and can change from call to call with a minimal impact on performance.</para>
            <para>For extra convenience, it is possible to apply formatting to the text using the HTML subset supported by QTextDocument. QStaticText will attempt to guess the format of the input text using Qt::mightBeRichText(), and interpret it as rich text if this function returns true. To force QStaticText to display its contents as either plain text or rich text, use the function QStaticText::setTextFormat() and pass in, respectively, Qt::PlainText and Qt::RichText.</para>
            <para>QStaticText can only represent text, so only HTML tags which alter the layout or appearance of the text will be respected. Adding an image to the input HTML, for instance, will cause the image to be included as part of the layout, affecting the positions of the text glyphs, but it will not be displayed. The result will be an empty area the size of the image in the output. Similarly, using tables will cause the text to be laid out in table format, but the borders will not be drawn.</para>
            <para>If it's the first time the static text is drawn, or if the static text, or the painter's font has been altered since the last time it was drawn, the text's layout has to be recalculated. On some paint engines, changing the matrix of the painter will also cause the layout to be recalculated. In particular, this will happen for any engine except for the OpenGL2 paint engine. Recalculating the layout will impose an overhead on the QPainter::drawStaticText() call where it occurs. To avoid this overhead in the paint event, you can call prepare() ahead of time to ensure that the layout is calculated.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPainter::drawText(), QPainter::drawStaticText(), QTextLayout, and QTextDocument.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QStaticText</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.#ctor(QtGui.QStaticText)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStaticText object which is a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStaticText object with the given text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.op_Inequality(QtGui.QStaticText,QtGui.QStaticText)">
            <summary>
            <para>Compares other to this QStaticText. Returns true if the texts, fonts or maximum sizes are different.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.op_Equality(QtGui.QStaticText,QtGui.QStaticText)">
            <summary>
            <para>Compares other to this QStaticText. Returns true if the texts, fonts and text widths are equal.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.Prepare">
            <summary>
            <para>Prepares the QStaticText object for being painted with the given matrix and the given font to avoid overhead when the actual drawStaticText() call is made.</para>
            <para>When drawStaticText() is called, the layout of the QStaticText will be recalculated if any part of the QStaticText object has changed since the last time it was drawn. It will also be recalculated if the painter's font is not the same as when the QStaticText was last drawn, or, on any other paint engine than the OpenGL2 engine, if the painter's matrix has been altered since the static text was last drawn.</para>
            <para>To avoid the overhead of creating the layout the first time you draw the QStaticText after making changes, you can use the prepare() function and pass in the matrix and font you expect to use when drawing the text.</para>
            <para>See also QPainter::setFont() and QPainter::setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.Prepare(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Prepares the QStaticText object for being painted with the given matrix and the given font to avoid overhead when the actual drawStaticText() call is made.</para>
            <para>When drawStaticText() is called, the layout of the QStaticText will be recalculated if any part of the QStaticText object has changed since the last time it was drawn. It will also be recalculated if the painter's font is not the same as when the QStaticText was last drawn, or, on any other paint engine than the OpenGL2 engine, if the painter's matrix has been altered since the static text was last drawn.</para>
            <para>To avoid the overhead of creating the layout the first time you draw the QStaticText after making changes, you can use the prepare() function and pass in the matrix and font you expect to use when drawing the text.</para>
            <para>See also QPainter::setFont() and QPainter::setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.Prepare(QtGui.QTransform,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Prepares the QStaticText object for being painted with the given matrix and the given font to avoid overhead when the actual drawStaticText() call is made.</para>
            <para>When drawStaticText() is called, the layout of the QStaticText will be recalculated if any part of the QStaticText object has changed since the last time it was drawn. It will also be recalculated if the painter's font is not the same as when the QStaticText was last drawn, or, on any other paint engine than the OpenGL2 engine, if the painter's matrix has been altered since the static text was last drawn.</para>
            <para>To avoid the overhead of creating the layout the first time you draw the QStaticText after making changes, you can use the prepare() function and pass in the matrix and font you expect to use when drawing the text.</para>
            <para>See also QPainter::setFont() and QPainter::setMatrix().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.Size">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size of the bounding rect for this QStaticText.</para>
            <para>See also textWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStaticText.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QStaticText.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStaticText.performanceHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns which performance hint is set for the QStaticText.</para>
            <para>Sets the performance hint of the QStaticText according to the performanceHint provided. The performanceHint is used to customize how much caching is done internally to improve performance.</para>
            <para>The default is QStaticText::ModerateCaching.</para>
            <para>Note: This function will cause the layout of the text to require recalculation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStaticText.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the QStaticText.</para>
            <para>Sets the text of the QStaticText to text.</para>
            <para>Note: This function will cause the layout of the text to require recalculation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStaticText.TextFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text format of the QStaticText.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format of the QStaticText to textFormat. If textFormat is set to Qt::AutoText (the default), the format of the text will try to be determined using the function Qt::mightBeRichText(). If the text format is Qt::PlainText, then the text will be displayed as is, whereas it will be interpreted as HTML if the format is Qt::RichText. HTML tags that alter the font of the text, its color, or its layout are supported by QStaticText.</para>
            <para>Note: This function will cause the layout of the text to require recalculation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStaticText.TextOption">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current text option used to control the layout process.</para>
            <para>Sets the text option structure that controls the layout process to the given textOption.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStaticText.TextWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the preferred width for this QStaticText.</para>
            <para>Sets the preferred width for this QStaticText. If the text is wider than the specified width, it will be broken into multiple lines and grow vertically. If the text cannot be split into multiple lines, it will be larger than the specified textWidth.</para>
            <para>Setting the preferred text width to a negative number will cause the text to be unbounded.</para>
            <para>Use size() to get the actual size of the text.</para>
            <para>Note: This function will cause the layout of the text to require recalculation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStaticText.PerformanceHint">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum the different performance hints that can be set on the QStaticText. These hints can be used to indicate that the QStaticText should use additional caches, if possible, to improve performance at the expense of memory. In particular, setting the performance hint AggressiveCaching on the QStaticText will improve performance when using the OpenGL graphics system or when drawing to a QGLWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStaticText.PerformanceHint.AggressiveCaching">
            <summary>
            <para>Use additional caching when available. This may improve performance at a higher memory cost.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStaticText.PerformanceHint.ModerateCaching">
            <summary>
            <para>Do basic caching for high performance at a low memory cost.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStatusBar">
            <summary>
            The QStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for presenting status information.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Each status indicator falls into one of three categories:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Temporary - briefly occupies most of the status bar. Used to explain tool tip texts or menu entries, for example.</para>
            <para>Normal - occupies part of the status bar and may be hidden by temporary messages. Used to display the page and line number in a word processor, for example.</para>
            <para>Permanent - is never hidden. Used for important mode indications, for example, some applications put a Caps Lock indicator in the status bar.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStatusBar lets you display all three types of indicators.</para>
            <para>Typically, a request for the status bar functionality occurs in relation to a QMainWindow object. QMainWindow provides a main application window, with a menu bar, tool bars, dock widgets and a status bar around a large central widget. The status bar can be retrieved using the QMainWindow::statusBar() function, and replaced using the QMainWindow::setStatusBar() function.</para>
            <para>Use the showMessage() slot to display a temporary message:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::createStatusBar()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     statusBar()-&amp;gt;showMessage(tr(&amp;quot;Ready&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>To remove a temporary message, use the clearMessage() slot, or set a time limit when calling showMessage(). For example:</para>
            <para> void MainWindow::print()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para> #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTDIALOG</para>
            <para>     QTextDocument *document = textEdit-&amp;gt;document();</para>
            <para>     QPrinter printer;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QPrintDialog *dlg = new QPrintDialog(&amp;amp;printer, this);</para>
            <para>     if (dlg-&amp;gt;exec() != QDialog::Accepted)</para>
            <para>         return;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     document-&amp;gt;print(&amp;amp;printer);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     statusBar()-&amp;gt;showMessage(tr(&amp;quot;Ready&amp;quot;), 2000);</para>
            <para> #endif</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Use the currentMessage() function to retrieve the temporary message currently shown. The QStatusBar class also provide the messageChanged() signal which is emitted whenever the temporary status message changes.</para>
            <para>Normal and Permanent messages are displayed by creating a small widget (QLabel, QProgressBar or even QToolButton) and then adding it to the status bar using the addWidget() or the addPermanentWidget() function. Use the removeWidget() function to remove such messages from the status bar.</para>
            <para> statusBar()-&amp;gt;addWidget(new MyReadWriteIndication);</para>
            <para>By default QStatusBar provides a QSizeGrip in the lower-right corner. You can disable it using the setSizeGripEnabled() function. Use the isSizeGripEnabled() function to determine the current status of the size grip.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMainWindow, QStatusTipEvent, GUI Design Handbook: Status Bar, and Application Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a status bar with a size grip and the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also setSizeGripEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.AddPermanentWidget(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget permanently to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.</para>
            <para>Permanently means that the widget may not be obscured by temporary messages. It is is located at the far right of the status bar.</para>
            <para>See also insertPermanentWidget(), removeWidget(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.</para>
            <para>The widget is located to the far left of the first permanent widget (see addPermanentWidget()) and may be obscured by temporary messages.</para>
            <para>See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and addPermanentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.ClearMessage">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes any temporary message being shown.</para>
            <para>See also currentMessage(), showMessage(), and removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.CurrentMessage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the temporary message currently shown, or an empty string if there is no such message.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.HideOrShow">
            <summary>
            <para>Ensures that the right widgets are visible.</para>
            <para>Used by the showMessage() and clearMessage() functions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.InsertPermanentWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the given widget at the given index permanently to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).</para>
            <para>The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.</para>
            <para>Permanently means that the widget may not be obscured by temporary messages. It is is located at the far right of the status bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addPermanentWidget(), removeWidget(), and addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.InsertWidget(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the given widget at the given index to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).</para>
            <para>The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.</para>
            <para>The widget is located to the far left of the first permanent widget (see addPermanentWidget()) and may be obscured by temporary messages.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and addPermanentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.OnMessageChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the temporary status message changes. The new temporary message is passed in the message parameter which is a null-string when the message has been removed.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage() and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>Shows the temporary message, if appropriate, in response to the paint event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.Reformat">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the status bar's appearance to account for item changes.</para>
            <para>Special subclasses may need this function, but geometry management will usually take care of any necessary rearrangements.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.RemoveWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the specified widget from the status bar.</para>
            <para>Note: This function does not delete the widget but hides it. To add the widget again, you must call both the addWidget() and show() functions.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget(), addPermanentWidget(), and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.ShowMessage(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the normal status indications and displays the given message for the specified number of milli-seconds (timeout). If timeout is 0 (default), the message remains displayed until the clearMessage() slot is called or until the showMessage() slot is called again to change the message.</para>
            <para>Note that showMessage() is called to show temporary explanations of tool tip texts, so passing a timeout of 0 is not sufficient to display a permanent message.</para>
            <para>See also messageChanged(), currentMessage(), and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusBar.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this status bar and frees any allocated resources and child widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QStatusBar.MessageChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the temporary status message changes. The new temporary message is passed in the message parameter which is a null-string when the message has been removed.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage() and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStatusBar.SizeGripEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the QSizeGrip in the bottom-right corner of the status bar is enabled.</para>
            <para>The size grip is enabled by default.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStatusTipEvent">
            <summary>
            The QStatusTipEvent class provides an event that is used to show messages in a status bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Status tips can be set on a widget using the QWidget::setStatusTip() function. They are shown in the status bar when the mouse cursor enters the widget. For example:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  MainWindow::MainWindow(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QMainWindow(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QWidget *myWidget = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     myWidget-&amp;gt;setStatusTip(tr(&amp;quot;This is my widget.&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     setCentralWidget(myWidget);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Status tips can also be set on actions using the QAction::setStatusTip() function:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>  MainWindow::MainWindow(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QMainWindow(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QMenu *fileMenu = menuBar()-&amp;gt;addMenu(tr(&amp;quot;File&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QAction *newAct = new QAction(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;New&amp;quot;), this);</para>
            <para>     newAct-&amp;gt;setStatusTip(tr(&amp;quot;Create a new file.&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     fileMenu-&amp;gt;addAction(newAct);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Finally, status tips are supported for the item view classes through the Qt::StatusTipRole enum value.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStatusBar, QHelpEvent, and QWhatsThisClickedEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusTipEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QStatusTipEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a status tip event with the text specified by tip.</para>
            <para>See also tip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusTipEvent.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a status tip event with the text specified by tip.</para>
            <para>See also tip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStatusTipEvent.Tip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the message to show in the status bar.</para>
            <para>See also QStatusBar::showMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStringListModel">
            <summary>
            The QStringListModel class provides a model that supplies strings to views.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStringListModel is an editable model that can be used for simple cases where you need to display a number of strings in a view widget, such as a QListView or a QComboBox.</para>
            <para>The model provides all the standard functions of an editable model, representing the data in the string list as a model with one column and a number of rows equal to the number of items in the list.</para>
            <para>Model indexes corresponding to items are obtained with the index() function, and item flags are obtained with flags(). Item data is read with the data() function and written with setData(). The number of rows (and number of items in the string list) can be found with the rowCount() function.</para>
            <para>The model can be constructed with an existing string list, or strings can be set later with the setStringList() convenience function. Strings can also be inserted in the usual way with the insertRows() function, and removed with removeRows(). The contents of the string list can be retrieved with the stringList() convenience function.</para>
            <para>An example usage of QStringListModel:</para>
            <para>     QStringListModel *model = new QStringListModel();</para>
            <para>     QStringList list;</para>
            <para>     list &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;c&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para>     model-&amp;gt;setStringList(list);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAbstractListModel, QAbstractItemModel, and Model Classes.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a string list model with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a string list model containing the specified strings with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.Data(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            <para>Returns data for the specified role, from the item with the given index.</para>
            <para>If the view requests an invalid index, an invalid variant is returned.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.Flags(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            <para>Returns the flags for the item with the given index.</para>
            <para>Valid items are enabled, selectable, editable, drag enabled and drop enabled.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            <para>Inserts count rows into the model, beginning at the given row.</para>
            <para>The parent index of the rows is optional and is only used for consistency with QAbstractItemModel. By default, a null index is specified, indicating that the rows are inserted in the top level of the model.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            <para>Inserts count rows into the model, beginning at the given row.</para>
            <para>The parent index of the rows is optional and is only used for consistency with QAbstractItemModel. By default, a null index is specified, indicating that the rows are inserted in the top level of the model.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::insertRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            <para>Removes count rows from the model, beginning at the given row.</para>
            <para>The parent index of the rows is optional and is only used for consistency with QAbstractItemModel. By default, a null index is specified, indicating that the rows are removed in the top level of the model.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            <para>Removes count rows from the model, beginning at the given row.</para>
            <para>The parent index of the rows is optional and is only used for consistency with QAbstractItemModel. By default, a null index is specified, indicating that the rows are removed in the top level of the model.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::removeRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the model. This value corresponds to the number of items in the model's internal string list.</para>
            <para>The optional parent argument is in most models used to specify the parent of the rows to be counted. Because this is a list if a valid parent is specified, the result will always be 0.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows(), removeRows(), and QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.RowCount(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the model. This value corresponds to the number of items in the model's internal string list.</para>
            <para>The optional parent argument is in most models used to specify the parent of the rows to be counted. Because this is a list if a valid parent is specified, the result will always be 0.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows(), removeRows(), and QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.SetData(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Object,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().</para>
            <para>Sets the data for the specified role in the item with the given index in the model, to the provided value.</para>
            <para>The dataChanged() signal is emitted if the item is changed.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemDataRole and data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.Sort(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStringListModel.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStringListModel.StringList">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the string list used by the model to store data.</para>
            <para>Sets the model's internal string list to strings. The model will notify any attached views that its underlying data has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleFactory">
            <summary>
            The QStyleFactory class creates QStyle objects.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QStyle class is an abstract base class that encapsulates the look and feel of a GUI. QStyleFactory creates a QStyle object using the create() function and a key identifying the style. The styles are either built-in or dynamically loaded from a style plugin (see QStylePlugin).</para>
            <para>The valid keys can be retrieved using the keys() function. Typically they include &amp;quot;windows&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;motif&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;cde&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;plastique&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;cleanlooks&amp;quot;. Depending on the platform, &amp;quot;windowsxp&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;windowsvista&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;macintosh&amp;quot; may be available. Note that keys are case insensitive.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyle.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleFactory.Create(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QStyle object that matches the given key, or returns 0 if no matching style is found.</para>
            <para>Both built-in styles and styles from style plugins are queried for a matching style.</para>
            <para>Note: The keys used are case insensitive.</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleFactory.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of valid keys, i.e. the keys this factory can create styles for.</para>
            <para>See also create().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn">
            <summary>
            The QStyleHintReturn class provides style hints that return more than basic data types.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleHintReturn and its subclasses are used to pass information from a style back to the querying widget. This is most useful when the return value from QStyle::styleHint() does not provide enough detail; for example, when a mask is to be returned.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleHintReturn)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleHintReturn with version version and type type.</para>
            <para>The version has no special meaning for QStyleHintReturn; it can be used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of the same hint type.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::version and QStyleOption::type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleHintReturn with version version and type type.</para>
            <para>The version has no special meaning for QStyleHintReturn; it can be used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of the same hint type.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::version and QStyleOption::type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the type of the style hint container.</para>
            <para>See also HintReturnType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the version of the style hint return container.</para>
            <para>This value can be used by subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast&lt;T&gt;(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.HintReturnType.SH_Default">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleHintReturn</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.HintReturnType.SH_Mask">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyle::SH_RubberBand_Mask QStyle::SH_FocusFrame_Mask</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.HintReturnType.SH_Variant">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyle::SH_TextControl_FocusIndicatorTextCharFormat</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SH_Default for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturn.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask">
            <summary>
            The QStyleHintReturnMask class provides style hints that return a QRegion.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleHintReturnMask. The member variables are initialized to default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleHintReturnMask. The member variables are initialized to default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.Region">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the region for style hints that return a QRegion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SH_Mask for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnMask.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant">
            <summary>
            The QStyleHintReturnVariant class provides style hints that return a QVariant.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleHintReturnVariant. The member variables are initialized to default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleHintReturnVariant. The member variables are initialized to default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.Variant">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the variant for style hints that return a QVariant.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SH_Variant for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleHintReturnVariant.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOption">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOption class stores the parameters used by QStyle functions.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOption and its subclasses contain all the information that QStyle functions need to draw a graphical element.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, there are few member functions and the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>The caller of a QStyle function usually creates QStyleOption objects on the stack. This combined with Qt's extensive use of implicit sharing for types such as QString, QPalette, and QColor ensures that no memory allocation needlessly takes place.</para>
            <para>The following code snippet shows how to use a specific QStyleOption subclass to paint a push button:</para>
            <para> void MyPushButton::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QStyleOptionButton option;</para>
            <para>     option.initFrom(this);</para>
            <para>     option.state = isDown() ? QStyle::State_Sunken : QStyle::State_Raised;</para>
            <para>     if (isDefault())</para>
            <para>         option.features |= QStyleOptionButton::DefaultButton;</para>
            <para>     option.text = text();</para>
            <para>     option.icon = icon();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para>     style()-&amp;gt;drawControl(QStyle::CE_PushButton, &amp;amp;option, &amp;amp;painter, this);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>In our example, the control is a QStyle::CE_PushButton, and according to the QStyle::drawControl() documentation the corresponding class is QStyleOptionButton.</para>
            <para>When reimplementing QStyle functions that take a QStyleOption parameter, you often need to cast the QStyleOption to a subclass. For safety, you can use qstyleoption_cast() to ensure that the pointer type is correct. For example:</para>
            <para> void MyStyle::drawPrimitive(PrimitiveElement element,</para>
            <para>                             const QStyleOption *option,</para>
            <para>                             QPainter *painter,</para>
            <para>                             const QWidget *widget)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (element == PE_FrameFocusRect) {</para>
            <para>         const QStyleOptionFocusRect *focusRectOption =</para>
            <para>                 qstyleoption_cast&amp;lt;const QStyleOptionFocusRect *&amp;gt;(option);</para>
            <para>         if (focusRectOption) {</para>
            <para>             // ...</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     // ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The qstyleoption_cast() function will return 0 if the object to which option points is not of the correct type.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyle and QStylePainter.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOption.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOption.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOption with the specified version and type.</para>
            <para>The version has no special meaning for QStyleOption; it can be used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of the same option type.</para>
            <para>The state member variable is initialized to QStyle::State_None.</para>
            <para>See also version and type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOption.Init(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use initFrom(widget) instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOption.InitFrom(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initializes the state, direction, rect, palette, and fontMetrics member variables based on the specified widget.</para>
            <para>This is a convenience function; the member variables can also be initialized manually.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::layoutDirection(), QWidget::rect(), QWidget::palette(), and QWidget::fontMetrics().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOption.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this style option object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.Direction">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text layout direction that should be used when drawing text in the control.</para>
            <para>By default, the layout direction is Qt::LeftToRight.</para>
            <para>See also initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.FontMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the font metrics that should be used when drawing text in the control.</para>
            <para>By default, the application's default font is used.</para>
            <para>See also initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the palette that should be used when painting the control.</para>
            <para>By default, the application's default palette is used.</para>
            <para>See also initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the area that should be used for various calculations and painting.</para>
            <para>This can have different meanings for different types of elements. For example, for a QStyle::CE_PushButton element it would be the rectangle for the entire button, while for a QStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel element it would be just the area for the push button label.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            <para>See also initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.State">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the style flags that are used when drawing the control.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyle::State_None.</para>
            <para>See also initFrom(), QStyle::drawPrimitive(), QStyle::drawControl(), QStyle::drawComplexControl(), and QStyle::State.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the option type of the style option.</para>
            <para>The default value is SO_Default.</para>
            <para>See also OptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOption.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the version of the style option.</para>
            <para>This value can be used by subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use the qstyleoption_cast() function, you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>The default value is 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>The following values are used for custom controls:</para>
            <para>Some style options are defined for various Qt3Support controls:</para>
            <para>See also type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Button">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionButton</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ComboBox">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionComboBox</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Complex">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionComplex</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ComplexCustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Reserved for custom QStyleOptions; all custom complex controls values must be above this value</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_CustomBase">
            <summary>
            <para>Reserved for custom QStyleOptions; all custom controls values must be above this value</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Default">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOption</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_DockWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionDockWidget</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_FocusRect">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionFocusRect</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionFrame QStyleOptionFrameV2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_GraphicsItem">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionGraphicsItem</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_GroupBox">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionGroupBox</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Header">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionHeader</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_MenuItem">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionMenuItem</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ProgressBar">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionProgressBar QStyleOptionProgressBarV2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Q3DockWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Q3ListView">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionQ3ListView</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Q3ListViewItem">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_RubberBand">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionRubberBand</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_SizeGrip">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionSizeGrip</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Slider">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionSlider</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_SpinBox">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionSpinBox</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_Tab">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionTab</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_TabBarBase">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionTabBarBase</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_TabWidgetFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_TitleBar">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionTitleBar</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ToolBar">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolBar</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ToolBox">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolBox</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ToolButton">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolButton</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.OptionType.SO_ViewItem">
            <summary>
            <para>QStyleOptionViewItem (used in Interviews)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOption.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOption.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOption.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionButton class is used to describe the parameters for drawing buttons.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw graphical elements like QPushButton, QCheckBox, and QRadioButton.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QStyleOptionToolButton.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionButton, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionButton, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a bitwise OR of the features that describe this button.</para>
            <para>See also ButtonFeature.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon of the button.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            <para>See also iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the icon for the button.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text of the button.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different types of features a push button can have.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also features.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature.AutoDefaultButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the button is an auto default button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature.CommandLinkButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the button is a Windows Vista type command link.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature.DefaultButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the button is a default button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature.Flat">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates a flat push button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature.HasMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the button has a drop down menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.ButtonFeature.None">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates a normal push button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Button for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionButton.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionComboBox class is used to describe the parameter for drawing a combobox.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QComboBox.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, and QComboBox.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionComplex class is used to hold parameters that are common to all complex controls.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is not used on its own. Instead it is used to derive other complex control options, for example QStyleOptionSlider and QStyleOptionSpinBox.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator).</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionComplex of the specified type and version, initializing the member variables to their default values. This constructor is usually called by subclasses.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.ActiveSubControls">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a bitwise OR of the sub-controls that are active for the complex control.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyle::SC_None.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::SubControl.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.SubControls">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a bitwise OR of the sub-controls to be drawn for the complex control.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyle::SC_All.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::SubControl.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Complex for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QStyleOptionComboBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QStyleOptionComboBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.CurrentIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon for the current item of the combo box.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.CurrentText">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text for the current item of the combo box.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.Editable">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether or not the combobox is editable or not.</para>
            <para>the default value is false</para>
            <para>See also QComboBox::isEditable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the combo box has a frame.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon size for the current item of the combo box.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.PopupRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the popup rectangle for the combobox.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            <para>This variable is currently unused. You can safely ignore it.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ComboBox for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionComboBox.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionDockWidget class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a dock widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionDockWidget contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw graphical elements like QDockWidget.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionDockWidget, initializing the member variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionDockWidget, initializing the member variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.Closable">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the dock window is closable.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.Floatable">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the dock window is floatable.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.Movable">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the dock window is movable.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.Title">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the title of the dock window.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_DockWidget for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionDockWidget.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionFocusRect class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a focus rectangle with QStyle.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFocusRect, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFocusRect, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.BackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the background color on which the focus rectangle is being drawn.</para>
            <para>The default value is an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the underlying window system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_FocusRect for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFocusRect.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionFrame class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a frame.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionFrame is used for drawing several built-in Qt widgets, including QFrame, QGroupBox, QLineEdit, and QMenu. Note that to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above, you must use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 subclass.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionFrame class has type SO_Frame and version 1.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOptionFrameV2.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionFrameV2 and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrame, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrame, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the line width for drawing the frame.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QFrame::lineWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.MidLineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the mid-line width for drawing the frame.</para>
            <para>This is usually used in drawing sunken or raised frames.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QFrame::midLineWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Frame for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionFrameV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionFrameV2 inherits QStyleOptionFrame which is used for drawing several built-in Qt widgets, including QFrame, QGroupBox, QLineEdit, and QMenu.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 class has type SO_Frame and version 2. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOptionFrameV2. One way to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy constructor. For example:</para>
            <para>     QStyleOptionFrame *option;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     if (const QStyleOptionFrame *frameOption =</para>
            <para>            qstyleoption_cast&amp;lt;const QStyleOptionFrame *&amp;gt;(option)) {</para>
            <para>         QStyleOptionFrameV2 frameOptionV2(*frameOption);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         // draw the frame using frameOptionV2</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>In the example above: If the frameOption's version is 1, FrameFeature is set to None for frameOptionV2. If frameOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy the frameOption's FrameFeature value.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 or QStyleOptionFrame types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's FrameFeature value is set to QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If its version is 2, its FrameFeature value is simply copied to the new style option.</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a bitwise OR of the features that describe this frame.</para>
            <para>See also FrameFeature.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.FrameFeature">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different types of features a frame can have.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.FrameFeature.Flat">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates a flat frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.FrameFeature.None">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates a normal frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionFrameV3 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionFrameV3 inherits QStyleOptionFrameV2</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionFrameV3 class has type SO_Frame and version 3. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionFrameV2 and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV3 or QStyleOptionFrame types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's FrameFeature value is set to QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If its version is 2 or lower, QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape value is QFrame::NoFrame</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionFrameV3.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>3</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionGraphicsItem class is used to describe the parameters needed to draw a QGraphicsItem.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QGraphicsItem::paint().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.LevelOfDetailFromTransform(QtGui.QTransform)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the level of detail from the worldTransform.</para>
            <para>Its value represents the maximum value of the height and width of a unity rectangle, mapped using the worldTransform of the painter used to draw the item. By default, if no transformations are applied, its value is 1. If zoomed out 1:2, the level of detail will be 0.5, and if zoomed in 2:1, its value is 2.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.ExposedRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the exposed rectangle, in item coordinates.</para>
            <para>Make use of this rectangle to speed up item drawing when only parts of the item are exposed. If the whole item is exposed, this rectangle will be the same as QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().</para>
            <para>This member is only initialized for items that have the QGraphicsItem::ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption flag set.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.LevelOfDetail">
            <summary>
            <para>Use QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetailFromTransform() together with QPainter::worldTransform() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.Matrix">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the complete transformation matrix for the item.</para>
            <para>The QMatrix provided through this member does include information about any perspective transformations applied to the view or item. To get the correct transformation matrix, use QPainter::transform() on the painter passed into the QGraphicsItem::paint() implementation.</para>
            <para>This matrix is the combination of the item's scene matrix and the matrix of the painter used for drawing the item. It is provided for convenience, allowing anvanced level-of-detail metrics that can be used to speed up item drawing.</para>
            <para>To find the dimensions of an item in screen coordinates (i.e., pixels), you can use the mapping functions of QMatrix, such as QMatrix::map().</para>
            <para>This member is only initialized for items that have the QGraphicsItem::ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption flag set.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetailFromTransform().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_GraphicsItem for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionGraphicsItem.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionGroupBox class describes the parameters for drawing a group box.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle functions need the various graphical elements of a group box.</para>
            <para>It holds the lineWidth and the midLineWidth for drawing the panel, the group box's title and the title's alignment and color.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, and QGroupBox.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionGroupBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionGroupBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the features of the group box frame.</para>
            <para>The frame is flat by default.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeature.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the line width for drawing the panel.</para>
            <para>The value of this variable is, currently, always 1.</para>
            <para>See also QFrame::lineWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.MidLineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the mid-line width for drawing the panel.</para>
            <para>The mid-line width is usually used when drawing sunken or raised group box frames. The value of this variable is, currently, always 0.</para>
            <para>See also QFrame::midLineWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text of the group box.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            <para>See also QGroupBox::title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.TextAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the alignment of the group box title.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            <para>See also QGroupBox::alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.TextColor">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the color of the group box title.</para>
            <para>The default value is an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the underlying window system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_GroupBox for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionGroupBox.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionHeader class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a header.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionHeader contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the item views' header pane, header sort arrow, and header label.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionHeader, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionHeader, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon of the header.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.IconAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the alignment flags for the icon of the header.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the header's orientation (horizontal or vertical).</para>
            <para>The default orientation is Qt::Horizontal</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the section's position in relation to the other sections.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.Section">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds which section of the header is being painted.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.selectedPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the section's position in relation to the selected section.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.sortIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the direction the sort indicator should be drawn.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::None.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text of the header.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.TextAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the alignment flags for the text of the header.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SectionPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum lets you know where the section's position is in relation to the other sections.</para>
            <para>See also position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SectionPosition.Beginning">
            <summary>
            <para>At the beginining of the header</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SectionPosition.End">
            <summary>
            <para>At the end of the header</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SectionPosition.Middle">
            <summary>
            <para>In the middle of the header</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SectionPosition.OnlyOneSection">
            <summary>
            <para>Only one header section</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SelectedPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum lets you know where the section's position is in relation to the selected section.</para>
            <para>See also selectedPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SelectedPosition.NextAndPreviousAreSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>Both the next and previous section are selected</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SelectedPosition.NextIsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>The next section is selected</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SelectedPosition.NotAdjacent">
            <summary>
            <para>Not adjacent to the selected section</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SelectedPosition.PreviousIsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>The previous section is selected</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SortIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates which direction the sort indicator should be drawn</para>
            <para>See also sortIndicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SortIndicator.None">
            <summary>
            <para>No sort indicator is needed</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SortIndicator.SortDown">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw a down indicator</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.SortIndicator.SortUp">
            <summary>
            <para>Draw an up indicator</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Header for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionHeader.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionMenuItem class is used to describe the parameter necessary for drawing a menu item.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionMenuItem contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the menu items from QMenu. It is also used for drawing other menu-related widgets.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionMenuItem, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionMenuItem, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.checkType">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the type of checkmark of the menu item.</para>
            <para>The default value is NotCheckable.</para>
            <para>See also CheckType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.Checked">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the menu item is checked or not.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the font used for the menu item text.</para>
            <para>This is the font that should be used for drawing the menu text minus the shortcut. The shortcut is usually drawn using the painter's font. By default, the application's default font is used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon for the menu item.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MaxIconWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the maximum icon width for the icon in the menu item.</para>
            <para>This can be used for drawing the icon into the correct place or properly aligning items. The variable must be set regardless of whether or not the menu item has an icon. The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuHasCheckableItems">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the menu as a whole has checkable items or not.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>If this option is set to false, then the menu has no checkable items. This makes it possible for GUI styles to save some horizontal space that would normally be used for the check column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.menuItemType">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the type of menu item.</para>
            <para>The default value is Normal.</para>
            <para>See also MenuItemType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the rectangle for the entire menu.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.TabWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the tab width for the menu item.</para>
            <para>The tab width is the distance between the text of the menu item and the shortcut. The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text for the menu item.</para>
            <para>Note that the text format is something like this &quot;Menu text\tShortcut&quot;.</para>
            <para>If the menu item doesn't have a shortcut, it will just contain the menu item's text. The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.CheckType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to indicate whether or not a check mark should be drawn for the item, or even if it should be drawn at all.</para>
            <para>See also checkType, QAction::checkable, QAction::checked, and QActionGroup::exclusive.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.CheckType.Exclusive">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is an exclusive check item (like a radio button).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.CheckType.NonExclusive">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is a non-exclusive check item (like a check box).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.CheckType.NotCheckable">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is not checkable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum indicates the type of menu item that the structure describes.</para>
            <para>See also menuItemType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.DefaultItem">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu item that is the default action as specified with QMenu::defaultAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.EmptyArea">
            <summary>
            <para>The empty area of the menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.Margin">
            <summary>
            <para>The margin of the menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.Normal">
            <summary>
            <para>A normal menu item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.Scroller">
            <summary>
            <para>A popup menu scroller (currently only used on Mac OS X).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.Separator">
            <summary>
            <para>A menu separator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.SubMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates the menu item points to a sub-menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.MenuItemType.TearOff">
            <summary>
            <para>A tear-off handle for the menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_MenuItem for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionMenuItem.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionProgressBar class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a progress bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.1, Qt uses the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 subclass for drawing QProgressBar.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionProgressBar class has type SO_ProgressBar and version 1.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBar, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBar, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the maximum value for the progress bar.</para>
            <para>This is the maximum value in the progress bar. The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the minimum value for the progress bar.</para>
            <para>This is the minimum value in the progress bar. The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::minimum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.Progress">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the current progress for the progress bar.</para>
            <para>The current progress. A value of QStyleOptionProgressBar::minimum - 1 indicates that the progress hasn't started yet. The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text for the progress bar.</para>
            <para>The progress bar text is usually just the progress expressed as a string. An empty string indicates that the progress bar has not started yet. The default value is an empty string.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.TextAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text alignment for the text in the QProgressBar.</para>
            <para>This can be used as a guide on where the text should be in the progress bar. The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.TextVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a flag indicating whether or not text is visible.</para>
            <para>If this flag is true then the text is visible. Otherwise, the text is not visible. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::textVisible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ProgressBar for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a progress bar in Qt 4.1 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An instance of this class has type SO_ProgressBar and version 2.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2. One way to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 copy constructor. For example:</para>
            <para>     if (const QStyleOptionProgressBar *progressBarOption =</para>
            <para>            qstyleoption_cast&amp;lt;const QStyleOptionProgressBar *&amp;gt;(option)) {</para>
            <para>         QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 progressBarV2(*progressBarOption);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         // draw the progress bar using progressBarV2</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>In the example above: If the progressBarOption's version is 1, the extra members (orientation, invertedAppearance, and bottomToTop) are set to default values for progressBarV2. If the progressBarOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy the extra members to progressBarV2.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, initializing he members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the extra members (orientation, invertedAppearance, and bottomToTop) are set to default values for the new style option. If other's version is 2, the extra members are simply copied.</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, initializing he members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.BottomToTop">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the text reads from bottom to top when the progress bar is vertical.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::textDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.InvertedAppearance">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the progress bar's appearance is inverted.</para>
            <para>The default value is false.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::invertedAppearance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the progress bar's orientation (horizontal or vertical); the default orentation is Qt::Horizontal.</para>
            <para>See also QProgressBar::orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ProgressBar for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionRubberBand class is used to describe the parameters needed for drawing a rubber band.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionRubberBand contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QRubberBand.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QRubberBand.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QStyleOptionRubberBand, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QStyleOptionRubberBand, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.Opaque">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the rubber band is required to be drawn in an opaque style.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the shape of the rubber band.</para>
            <para>The default shape is QRubberBand::Line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_RubberBand for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionRubberBand.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionSizeGrip class is used to describe the parameter for drawing a size grip.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QSizeGrip.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, and QSizeGrip.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionSizeGrip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionSizeGrip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.Corner">
            <summary>
            <para>The corner in which the size grip is located.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_TabBarBase for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionSizeGrip.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionSlider class is used to describe the parameters needed for drawing a slider.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionSlider contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QSlider and QScrollBar.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionComplex, QSlider, and QScrollBar.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionSlider, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionSlider, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.DialWrapping">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the dial should wrap or not.</para>
            <para>The default value is false, i.e. the dial is not wrapped.</para>
            <para>See also QDial::wrapping().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.Maximum">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the maximum value for the slider.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.Minimum">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the minimum value for the slider.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.NotchTarget">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the number of pixel between notches.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.0.</para>
            <para>See also QDial::notchTarget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the slider's orientation (horizontal or vertical).</para>
            <para>The default orientation is Qt::Horizontal.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::Orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.PageStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the page step of the slider.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSlider::pageStep.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.SingleStep">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the single step of the slider.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSlider::singleStep.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.SliderPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the slider handle.</para>
            <para>If the slider has active feedback (i.e., QAbstractSlider::tracking is true), this value will be the same as sliderValue. Otherwise, it will have the current position of the handle. The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSlider::tracking and sliderValue.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.SliderValue">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the value of the slider.</para>
            <para>If the slider has active feedback (i.e., QAbstractSlider::tracking is true), this value will be the same as sliderPosition. Otherwise, it will have the value the slider had before the mouse was pressed.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSlider::tracking and sliderPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.TickInterval">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the interval that should be drawn between tick marks.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.TickPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the slider's tick marks, if any.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSlider::NoTicks.</para>
            <para>See also QSlider::TickPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.UpsideDown">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the slider control orientation.</para>
            <para>Normally a slider increases as it moves up or to the right; upsideDown indicates that it should do the opposite (increase as it moves down or to the left). The default value is false, i.e. the slider increases as it moves up or to the right.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::sliderPositionFromValue(), QStyle::sliderValueFromPosition(), and QAbstractSlider::invertedAppearance.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Slider for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionSlider.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionSpinBox class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a spin box.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionSpinBox contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QSpinBox and QDateTimeEdit.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QStyleOptionComplex.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionSpinBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionSpinBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.ButtonSymbols">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the type of button symbols to draw for the spin box.</para>
            <para>The default value is QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows specufying little arrows in the classic style.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSpinBox::ButtonSymbols.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.Frame">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the spin box has a frame.</para>
            <para>The default value is false, i.e. the spin box has no frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.StepEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds which buttons of the spin box that are enabled.</para>
            <para>The default value is QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractSpinBox::StepEnabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_SpinBox for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionSpinBox.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTab class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a tab bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QStyleOptionTab class is used for drawing several built-in Qt widgets including QTabBar and the panel for QTabWidget. Note that to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above, you must use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 subclass.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptiontabV2 class has type SO_Tab and version 1. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOptionTabV2.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionTabV2 and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTab object, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTab)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTab object, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.CornerWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds an OR combination of CornerWidget values indicating the corner widgets of the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is NoCornerWidgets.</para>
            <para>See also CornerWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon for the tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the tab in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is Beginning, i.e. the tab is the first tab in the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.Row">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds which row the tab is currently in.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0, indicating the front row. Currently this property can only be 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.selectedPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the selected tab in relation to this tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is NotAdjacent, i.e. the tab is not adjacent to a selected tab nor is it the selected tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the tab shape used to draw the tab; by default QTabBar::RoundedNorth.</para>
            <para>See also QTabBar::Shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text of the tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.CornerWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>These flags indicate the corner widgets in a tab.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also cornerWidgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.CornerWidget.LeftCornerWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Left corner widget</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.CornerWidget.NoCornerWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>There are no corner widgets</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.CornerWidget.RightCornerWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Right corner widget</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.SelectedPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the position of the selected tab. Some styles need to draw a tab differently depending on whether or not it is adjacent to the selected tab.</para>
            <para>See also selectedPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.SelectedPosition.NextIsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>The next tab (typically the tab on the right) is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.SelectedPosition.NotAdjacent">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is not adjacent to a selected tab (or is the selected tab).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.SelectedPosition.PreviousIsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>The previous tab (typically the tab on the left) is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_Tab for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.TabPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the position of the tab.</para>
            <para>See also position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.TabPosition.Beginning">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is the first tab in the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.TabPosition.End">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is the last tab in the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.TabPosition.Middle">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is neither the first nor the last tab in the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTab.TabPosition.OnlyOneTab">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is both the first and the last tab in the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTabBarBase class is used to describe the base of a tab bar, i.e. the part that the tab bar usually overlaps with.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionTabBarBase contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the tab bar base. Note that this is only drawn for a standalone QTabBar (one that isn't part of a QTabWidget).</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QTabBar::drawBase().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBase, initializing the members vaiables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBase, initializing the members vaiables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.SelectedTabRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the rectangle containing the selected tab.</para>
            <para>This rectangle is contained within the tabBarRect. The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the shape of the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is QTabBar::RoundedNorth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.TabBarRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the rectangle containing all the tabs.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_TabBarBase for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 class is used to describe the base of a tab bar, i.e. the part that the tab bar usually overlaps with.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionTabBarBase contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the tab bar base.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QTabBar::drawBase().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2, initializing the members vaiables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBase)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2, initializing the members vaiables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.DocumentMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the tabbar is in document mode.</para>
            <para>The default value is false;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTabV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a tabs in Qt 4.1 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionTabV2 class has type SO_Tab and version 2. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOptionTabV2. One way to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionTabV2 copy constructor. For example:</para>
            <para>     if (const QStyleOptionTab *tabOption =</para>
            <para>            qstyleoption_cast&amp;lt;const QStyleOptionTab *&amp;gt;(option)) {</para>
            <para>         QStyleOptionTabV2 tabV2(*tabOption);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         // draw the tab using tabV2</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para>In the example above: If tabOption's version is 1, the extra member (iconSize) will be set to an invalid size for tabV2. If tabOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy the tab's iconSize.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTab)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV2 or QStyleOptionTab types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's iconSize is set to an invalid value. If its version is 2, its iconSize value is simply copied to the new style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size for the icons.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size; use QStyle::pixelMetric() to find the default icon size for tab bars.</para>
            <para>See also QTabBar::iconSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTabV3 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a tabs in Qt 4.5 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionTabV3 class has type SO_Tab and version 3. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOptionTabV2 and QStyleOptionTabV3. One way to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionTabV3 copy constructor. For example:</para>
            <para>     if (const QStyleOptionTab *tabOption =</para>
            <para>            qstyleoption_cast&amp;lt;const QStyleOptionTab *&amp;gt;(option)) {</para>
            <para>         QStyleOptionTabV2 tabV2(*tabOption);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>         // draw the tab using tabV2</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para>In the example above: If tabOption's version is 1, the extra member (iconSize) will be set to an invalid size for tabV2. If tabOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy the tab's iconSize.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTab)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV3, QStyleOptionTabV2 or QStyleOptionTab types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1 or 2, the new style option's leftButtonSize and rightButtonSize is set to an invalid value. If its version is 3, its leftButtonSize and rightButtonSize values are simply copied to the new style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.DocumentMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the tabbar is in document mode.</para>
            <para>The default value is false;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.LeftButtonSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size for the left widget on the tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.RightButtonSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size for the right widget on the tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabV3.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>3</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame class is used to describe the parameters for drawing the frame around a tab widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the frame around QTabWidget.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QTabWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.LeftCornerWidgetSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the left-corner widget.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the line width for drawing the panel.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.MidLineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the mid-line width for drawing the panel.</para>
            <para>The mid line width is usually used in drawing sunken or raised frames. The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.RightCornerWidgetSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the right-corner widget.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the tab shape used to draw the tabs.</para>
            <para>The default value is QTabBar::RoundedNorth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.TabBarSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_TabWidgetFrame for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 class is used to describe the parameters for drawing the frame around a tab widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the frame around QTabWidget.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QTabWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 copy of the other style option.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's selectedTabRect and tabBarRect will contain null rects</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 copy of the other style option.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's selectedTabRect and tabBarRect will contain null rects</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.SelectedTabRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the rectangle containing the selected tab.</para>
            <para>This rectangle is contained within the tabBarRect. The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.TabBarRect">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the rectangle containing all the tabs.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width and the height set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionTitleBar class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a title bar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionTitleBar contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the title bar of a QMdiSubWindow.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, and QMdiSubWindow.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTitleBar, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionTitleBar, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon for the title bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text of the title bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.TitleBarFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the widget flags for the title bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::Widget.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::WindowFlags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.TitleBarState">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the state of the title bar.</para>
            <para>This is basically the window state of the underlying widget. The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::windowState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_TitleBar for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionTitleBar.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionToolBar class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a toolbar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolBar contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QToolBar.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>The QStyleOptionToolBar class holds the lineWidth and the midLineWidth for drawing the widget. It also stores information about which area the toolbar should be located in, whether it is movable or not, which position the toolbar line should have (positionOfLine), and the toolbar's position within the line (positionWithinLine).</para>
            <para>In addition, the class provides a couple of enums: The ToolBarFeature enum is used to describe whether a toolbar is movable or not, and the ToolBarPosition enum is used to describe the position of a toolbar line, as well as the toolbar's position within the line.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBar, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBar, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the toolbar is movable or not.</para>
            <para>The default value is None.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.LineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the line width for drawing the toolbar.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.MidLineWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the mid-line width for drawing the toolbar.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.PositionOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the toolbar line.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyleOptionToolBar::OnlyOne.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.PositionWithinLine">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the toolbar within a line.</para>
            <para>The default value is QStyleOptionToolBar::OnlyOne.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarArea">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the location for drawing the toolbar.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::TopToolBarArea.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ToolBarArea.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ToolBar for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarFeature">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to describe whether a toolbar is movable or not.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also features and QToolBar::isMovable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarFeature.Movable">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbar is movable, and a handle will appear when holding the cursor over the toolbar's boundary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarFeature.None">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbar cannot be moved. The default value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to describe the position of a toolbar line, as well as the toolbar's position within the line.</para>
            <para>The order of the positions within a line starts at the top of a vertical line, and from the left within a horizontal line. The order of the positions for the lines is always from the the parent widget's boundary edges.</para>
            <para>See also positionWithinLine and positionOfLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarPosition.Beginning">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbar is located at the beginning of the line, or the toolbar line is the first of several lines. There can only be one toolbar (and only one line) with this position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarPosition.End">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbar is located at the end of the line, or the toolbar line is the last of several lines. There can only be one toolbar (and only one line) with this position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarPosition.Middle">
            <summary>
            <para>The toolbar is located in the middle of the line, or the toolbar line is in the middle of several lines. There can several toolbars (and lines) with this position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBar.ToolBarPosition.OnlyOne">
            <summary>
            <para>There is only one toolbar or line. This is the default value of the positionOfLine and positionWithinLine variables.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionToolBox class is used to describe the parameters needed for drawing a tool box.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolBox contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QToolBox.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and QToolBox.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QStyleOptionToolBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QStyleOptionToolBox, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon for the tool box tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text for the tool box tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ToolBox for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.3 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 inherits QStyleOptionToolBox which is used for drawing the tabs in a QToolBox.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 class has type SO_ToolBox and version 2. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both QStyleOptionToolBox and QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionToolBox and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Contsructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBox)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 or QStyleOptionToolBox types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's position value is set to QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::Beginning and selectedPosition is set to QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::NotAdjacent. If its version is 2, the position selectedPosition values are simply copied to the new style option.</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Contsructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.selectedPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the selected tab in relation to this tab.</para>
            <para>The default value is NotAdjacent, i.e. the tab is not adjacent to a selected tab nor is it the selected tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.SelectedPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the position of the selected tab. Some styles need to draw a tab differently depending on whether or not it is adjacent to the selected tab.</para>
            <para>See also selectedPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.SelectedPosition.NextIsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>The next tab (typically the tab on the right) is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.SelectedPosition.NotAdjacent">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is not adjacent to a selected tab (or is the selected tab).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.SelectedPosition.PreviousIsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>The previous tab (typically the tab on the left) is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum holds the version of this style option</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.TabPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes tab positions relative to other tabs.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.TabPosition.Beginning">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is the first (i.e., top-most) tab in the toolbox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.TabPosition.End">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is placed at the bottom of the toolbox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.TabPosition.Middle">
            <summary>
            <para>The tab is placed in the middle of the toolbox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.TabPosition.OnlyOneTab">
            <summary>
            <para>There is only one tab in the toolbox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionToolButton class is used to describe the parameters for drawing a tool button.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionToolButton contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw QToolButton.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, and QStyleOptionButton.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionToolButton, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionToolButton, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ArrowType">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the direction of the arrow for the tool button.</para>
            <para>This value is only used if features includes Arrow. The default value is Qt::DownArrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds an OR combination of the tool button's features.</para>
            <para>The default value is None.</para>
            <para>See also ToolButtonFeature.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the font that is used for the text.</para>
            <para>This value is only used if toolButtonStyle is Qt::ToolButtonTextUnderIcon, Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon, or Qt::ToolButtonTextOnly. By default, the application's default font is used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the icon for the tool button.</para>
            <para>The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a pixmap nor a filename.</para>
            <para>See also iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the icon for the tool button.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the tool button.</para>
            <para>The default value is a null point, i.e. (0, 0)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the text of the tool button.</para>
            <para>This value is only used if toolButtonStyle is Qt::ToolButtonTextUnderIcon, Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon, or Qt::ToolButtonTextOnly. The default value is an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a Qt::ToolButtonStyle value describing the appearance of the tool button.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly.</para>
            <para>See also QToolButton::toolButtonStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ToolButton for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature">
            <summary>
            <para>Describes the various features that a tool button can have.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also features, QToolButton::toolButtonStyle(), and QToolButton::popupMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature.Arrow">
            <summary>
            <para>The tool button is an arrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature.HasMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>The button has a popup menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature.Menu">
            <summary>
            <para>The tool button has a menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature.MenuButtonPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>The button should display an arrow to indicate that a menu is present.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature.None">
            <summary>
            <para>A normal tool button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton.ToolButtonFeature.PopupDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>There is a delay to showing the menu.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionViewItem class is used to describe the parameters used to draw an item in a view widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionViewItem contains all the information that QStyle functions need to draw the items for Qt's model/view classes.</para>
            <para>For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the . or -&amp;gt; operator). This low-level feel makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply parameters used by the style functions.</para>
            <para>For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see the Styles example.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption and Model/View Programming.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItem, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of the other style option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItem, initializing the members variables to their default values.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.DecorationAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the alignment of the decoration for the item.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.DecorationPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the position of the decoration for the item.</para>
            <para>The default value is Left.</para>
            <para>See also Position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.DecorationSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the size of the decoration for the item.</para>
            <para>The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.</para>
            <para>See also decorationAlignment and decorationPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.DisplayAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the alignment of the display value for the item.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds the font used for the item.</para>
            <para>By default, the application's default font is used.</para>
            <para>See also QFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.ShowDecorationSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds whether the decoration should be highlighted on selected items.</para>
            <para>If this option is true, the branch and any decorations on selected items should be highlighted, indicating that the item is selected; otherwise, no highlighting is required. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected and QAbstractItemView.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.TextElideMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds where ellipsis should be added for text that is too long to fit into an item.</para>
            <para>The default value is Qt::ElideMiddle, i.e. the ellipsis appears in the middle of the text.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::TextElideMode and QStyle::SH_ItemView_EllipsisLocation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the position of the item's decoration.</para>
            <para>See also decorationPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.Position.Bottom">
            <summary>
            <para>Below the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.Position.Left">
            <summary>
            <para>On the left of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.Position.Right">
            <summary>
            <para>On the right of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.Position.Top">
            <summary>
            <para>Above the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.StyleOptionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionVersion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.StyleOptionType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The type of style option provided (SO_ViewItem for this class).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>1</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionViewItemV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.2 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionViewItemV2 inherits QStyleOptionViewItem.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 class has type SO_ViewItem and version 2. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See QStyleOptionFrameV2's detailed description for a discussion of how to handle &amp;quot;V2&amp;quot; classes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionViewItem and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 or QStyleOptionViewItem types.</para>
            <para>If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's ViewItemFeature value is set to QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None. If its version is 2, its ViewItemFeature value is simply copied to the new style option.</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.Features">
            <summary>
            <para>This variable holds a bitwise OR of the features that describe this view item.</para>
            <para>See also ViewItemFeature.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>2</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different types of features an item can have.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature.Alternate">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the item's background is rendered using alternateBase.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature.HasCheckIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the item has a check state indicator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature.HasDecoration">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the item has a decoration role.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature.HasDisplay">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates that the item has a display role.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature.None">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates a normal item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV2.ViewItemFeature.WrapText">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates an item with wrapped text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionViewItemV3 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.3 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionViewItemV3 inherits QStyleOptionViewItem.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 class has type SO_ViewItem and version 3. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See QStyleOptionFrameV2's detailed description for a discussion of how to handle &amp;quot;V2&amp;quot; and other versioned classes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionViewItem and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV3 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV3 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV3.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>3</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4">
            <summary>
            The QStyleOptionViewItemV4 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.4 or above.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyleOptionViewItemV4 inherits QStyleOptionViewItemV3.</para>
            <para>An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV4 class has type SO_ViewItem and version 4. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See QStyleOptionViewItemV3's detailed description for a discussion of how to handle &amp;quot;V3&amp;quot; classes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleOptionViewItem and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.#ctor(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 copy of the other style option which can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or QStyleOptionViewItem types.</para>
            <para>See also version.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.BackgroundBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>The QBrush that should be used to paint the view items background.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.CheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>If this view item is checkable, i.e., ViewItemFeature::HasCheckIndicator is true, checkState is true if the item is checked; otherwise, it is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>The icon (if any) to be drawn in the view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.Index">
            <summary>
            <para>The model index that is to be drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>The text (if any) to be drawn in the view item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.viewItemPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives the position of this view item relative to other items. See the ViewItemPosition enum for the details.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.StyleOptionVersion">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.</para>
            <para>The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.</para>
            <para>See also StyleOptionType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.StyleOptionVersion.Version">
            <summary>
            <para>4</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.ViewItemPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum is used to represent the placement of the item on a row. This can be used to draw items differently depending on their placement, for example by putting rounded edges at the beginning and end, and straight edges in between.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.ViewItemPosition.Beginning">
            <summary>
            <para>The item appears at the beginning of the row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.ViewItemPosition.End">
            <summary>
            <para>The item appears at the end of the row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.ViewItemPosition.Invalid">
            <summary>
            <para>The ViewItemPosition is unknown and should be disregarded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.ViewItemPosition.Middle">
            <summary>
            <para>The item appears in the middle of the row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItemV4.ViewItemPosition.OnlyOne">
            <summary>
            <para>The item is the only one on the row, and is therefore both at the beginning and the end.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStylePainter">
            <summary>
            The QStylePainter class is a convenience class for drawing QStyle elements inside a widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStylePainter extends QPainter with a set of high-level draw...() functions implemented on top of QStyle's API. The advantage of using QStylePainter is that the parameter lists get considerably shorter. Whereas a QStyle object must be able to draw on any widget using any painter (because the application normally has one QStyle object shared by all widget), a QStylePainter is initialized with a widget, eliminating the need to specify the QWidget, the QPainter, and the QStyle for every function call.</para>
            <para>Example using QStyle directly:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent * /* event */)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QStyleOptionFocusRect option;</para>
            <para>     option.initFrom(this);</para>
            <para>     option.backgroundColor = palette().color(QPalette::Background);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     style()-&amp;gt;drawPrimitive(QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect, &amp;amp;option, &amp;amp;painter, this);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Example using QStylePainter:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent * /* event */)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QStylePainter painter(this);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QStyleOptionFocusRect option;</para>
            <para>     option.initFrom(this);</para>
            <para>     option.backgroundColor = palette().color(QPalette::Background);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     painter.drawPrimitive(QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect, option);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyle and QStyleOption.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QStylePainter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a QStylePainter using widget widget for its paint device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.#ctor(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a QStylePainter using pd for its paint device, and attributes from widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.Begin(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Begin painting operations on the specified widget. Returns true if the painter is ready to use; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This is automatically called by the constructor that takes a QWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.Begin(QtGui.IQPaintDevice,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Begin painting operations on paint device pd as if it was widget.</para>
            <para>This is automatically called by the constructor that takes a QPaintDevice and a QWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.DrawComplexControl(QtGui.QStyle.ComplexControl,QtGui.QStyleOptionComplex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use the widget's style to draw a complex control cc specified by the QStyleOptionComplex option.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::drawComplexControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.DrawControl(QtGui.QStyle.ControlElement,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use the widget's style to draw a control element ce specified by QStyleOption option.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::drawControl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.DrawItemPixmap(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the pixmap in rectangle rect. The pixmap is aligned according to flags.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::drawItemPixmap() and Qt::Alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.DrawItemText(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32,QtGui.QPalette,System.Boolean,System.String,QtGui.QPalette.ColorRole)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the text in rectangle rect and palette pal. The text is aligned and wrapped according to flags.</para>
            <para>The pen color is specified with textRole. The enabled bool indicates whether or not the item is enabled; when reimplementing this bool should influence how the item is drawn.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::drawItemText() and Qt::Alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.DrawPrimitive(QtGui.QStyle.PrimitiveElement,QtGui.QStyleOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Use the widget's style to draw a primitive element pe specified by QStyleOption option.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::drawPrimitive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePainter.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>Return the current style used by the QStylePainter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStylePlugin">
            <summary>
            The QStylePlugin class provides an abstract base for custom QStyle plugins.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStylePlugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy to create custom styles that can be loaded dynamically into applications using the QStyleFactory class.</para>
            <para>Writing a style plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class, reimplementing the pure virtual keys() and create() functions, and exporting the class using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro. See How to Create Qt Plugins for details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStyleFactory and QStyle.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePlugin.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a style plugin with the given parent.</para>
            <para>Note that this constructor is invoked automatically by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro, so there is no need for calling it explicitly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePlugin.Create(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a QStyle object for the given style key. If a plugin cannot create a style, it should return 0 instead.</para>
            <para>The style key is usually the class name of the required style. Note that the keys are case insensitive. For example:</para>
            <para> QStringList MyStylePlugin::keys() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return QStringList() &lt;&lt; &quot;Rocket&quot; &lt;&lt; &quot;StarBuster&quot;;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QStyle *MyStylePlugin::create(const QString &amp;key)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QString lcKey = key;</para>
            <para>     if (lcKey == &quot;rocket&quot;) {</para>
            <para>         return new RocketStyle;</para>
            <para>     } else if (lcKey == &quot;starbuster&quot;) {</para>
            <para>         return new StarBusterStyle;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     return 0;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also keys().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePlugin.Keys">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of style keys this plugin supports.</para>
            <para>These keys are usually the class names of the custom styles that are implemented in the plugin.</para>
            <para>See also create().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStylePlugin.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the style plugin.</para>
            <para>Note that Qt destroys a plugin automatically when it is no longer used, so there is no need for calling the destructor explicitly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate">
            <summary>
            The QStyledItemDelegate class provides display and editing facilities for data items from a model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When displaying data from models in Qt item views, e.g., a QTableView, the individual items are drawn by a delegate. Also, when an item is edited, it provides an editor widget, which is placed on top of the item view while editing takes place. QStyledItemDelegate is the default delegate for all Qt item views, and is installed upon them when they are created.</para>
            <para>The QStyledItemDelegate class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework. The delegate allows the display and editing of items to be developed independently from the model and view.</para>
            <para>The data of items in models are assigned an ItemDataRole; each item can store a QVariant for each role. QStyledItemDelegate implements display and editing for the most common datatypes expected by users, including booleans, integers, and strings.</para>
            <para>The data will be drawn differently depending on which role they have in the model. The following table describes the roles and the data types the delegate can handle for each of them. It is often sufficient to ensure that the model returns appropriate data for each of the roles to determine the appearance of items in views.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>RoleAccepted Types</para>
            <para>Qt::BackgroundRole	QBrush</para>
            <para>Qt::BackgroundColorRole	QColor (obsolete; use Qt::BackgroundRole instead)</para>
            <para>Qt::CheckStateRole	Qt::CheckState</para>
            <para>Qt::DecorationRole	QIcon, QPixmap, QImage and QColor</para>
            <para>Qt::DisplayRole	QString and types with a string representation</para>
            <para>Qt::EditRole	See QItemEditorFactory for details</para>
            <para>Qt::FontRole	QFont</para>
            <para>Qt::SizeHintRole	QSize</para>
            <para>Qt::TextAlignmentRole	Qt::Alignment</para>
            <para>Qt::ForegroundRole	QBrush</para>
            <para>Qt::TextColorRole	QColor (obsolete; use Qt::ForegroundRole instead)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Editors are created with a QItemEditorFactory; a default static instance provided by QItemEditorFactory is installed on all item delegates. You can set a custom factory using setItemEditorFactory() or set a new default factory with QItemEditorFactory::setDefaultFactory(). It is the data stored in the item model with the EditRole that is edited. See the QItemEditorFactory class for a more high-level introduction to item editor factories. The Color Editor Factory example shows how to create custom editors with a factory.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing QStyledItemDelegate</para>
            <para>If the delegate does not support painting of the data types you need or you want to customize the drawing of items, you need to subclass QStyledItemDelegate, and reimplement paint() and possibly sizeHint(). The paint() function is called individually for each item, and with sizeHint(), you can specify the hint for each of them.</para>
            <para>When reimplementing paint(), one would typically handle the datatypes one would like to draw and use the superclass implementation for other types.</para>
            <para>The painting of check box indicators are performed by the current style. The style also specifies the size and the bounding rectangles in which to draw the data for the different data roles. The bounding rectangle of the item itself is also calculated by the style. When drawing already supported datatypes, it is therefore a good idea to ask the style for these bounding rectangles. The QStyle class description describes this in more detail.</para>
            <para>If you wish to change any of the bounding rectangles calculated by the style or the painting of check box indicators, you can subclass QStyle. Note, however, that the size of the items can also be affected by reimplementing sizeHint().</para>
            <para>It is possible for a custom delegate to provide editors without the use of an editor item factory. In this case, the following virtual functions must be reimplemented:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>createEditor() returns the widget used to change data from the model and can be reimplemented to customize editing behavior.</para>
            <para>setEditorData() provides the widget with data to manipulate.</para>
            <para>updateEditorGeometry() ensures that the editor is displayed correctly with respect to the item view.</para>
            <para>setModelData() returns updated data to the model.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The Star Delegate example creates editors by reimplementing these methods.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>QStyledItemDelegate vs. QItemDelegate</para>
            <para>Since Qt 4.4, there are two delegate classes: QItemDelegate and QStyledItemDelegate. However, the default delegate is QStyledItemDelegate. These two classes are independent alternatives to painting and providing editors for items in views. The difference between them is that QStyledItemDelegate uses the current style to paint its items. We therefore recommend using QStyledItemDelegate as the base class when implementing custom delegates or when working with Qt style sheets. The code required for either class should be equal unless the custom delegate needs to use the style for drawing.</para>
            <para>If you wish to customize the painting of item views, you should implement a custom style. Please see the QStyle class documentation for details.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Delegate Classes, QItemDelegate, QAbstractItemDelegate, QStyle, Spin Box Delegate Example, Star Delegate Example, and Color Editor Factory Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an item delegate with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.CreateEditor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().</para>
            <para>Returns the widget used to edit the item specified by index for editing. The parent widget and style option are used to control how the editor widget appears.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.DisplayText(System.Object,QtCore.QLocale)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns the string that the delegate will use to display the Qt::DisplayRole of the model in locale. value is the value of the Qt::DisplayRole provided by the model.</para>
            <para>The default implementation uses the QLocale::toString to convert value into a QString.</para>
            <para>This function is not called for empty model indices, i.e., indices for which the model returns an invalid QVariant.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel::data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.OnEditorEvent(QtCore.QEvent,QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::editorEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the given editor is a valid QWidget and the given event is handled; otherwise returns false. The following key press events are handled by default:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Tab</para>
            <para>Backtab</para>
            <para>Enter</para>
            <para>Return</para>
            <para>Esc</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>In the case of Tab, Backtab, Enter and Return key press events, the editor's data is comitted to the model and the editor is closed. If the event is a Tab key press the view will open an editor on the next item in the view. Likewise, if the event is a Backtab key press the view will open an editor on the previous item in the view.</para>
            <para>If the event is a Esc key press event, the editor is closed without committing its data.</para>
            <para>See also commitData() and closeEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values using the index index. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionViewItem, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves. This function will check the version of the QStyleOptionViewItem and fill in the additional values for a QStyleOptionViewItemV2, QStyleOptionViewItemV3 and QStyleOptionViewItemV4.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.Paint(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::paint().</para>
            <para>Renders the delegate using the given painter and style option for the item specified by index.</para>
            <para>This function paints the item using the view's QStyle.</para>
            <para>When reimplementing paint in a subclass. Use the initStyleOption() to set up the option in the same way as the QStyledItemDelegate; the option will always be an instance of QStyleOptionViewItemV4. Please see its class description for information on its contents.</para>
            <para>Whenever possible, use the option while painting. Especially its rect variable to decide where to draw and its state to determine if it is enabled or selected.</para>
            <para>After painting, you should ensure that the painter is returned to its the state it was supplied in when this function was called. For example, it may be useful to call QPainter::save() before painting and QPainter::restore() afterwards.</para>
            <para>See also QItemDelegate::paint(), QStyle::drawControl(), and QStyle::CE_ItemViewItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.SetEditorData(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData().</para>
            <para>Sets the data to be displayed and edited by the editor from the data model item specified by the model index.</para>
            <para>The default implementation stores the data in the editor widget's user property.</para>
            <para>See also QMetaProperty::isUser().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.SetModelData(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QAbstractItemModel,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData().</para>
            <para>Gets data from the editor widget and stores it in the specified model at the item index.</para>
            <para>The default implementation gets the value to be stored in the data model from the editor widget's user property.</para>
            <para>See also QMetaProperty::isUser().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.SizeHint(QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns the size needed by the delegate to display the item specified by index, taking into account the style information provided by option.</para>
            <para>This function uses the view's QStyle to determine the size of the item.</para>
            <para>See also QStyle::sizeFromContents() and QStyle::CT_ItemViewItem.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.UpdateEditorGeometry(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::updateEditorGeometry().</para>
            <para>Updates the editor for the item specified by index according to the style option given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the item delegate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QStyledItemDelegate.ItemEditorFactory">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the editor factory used by the item delegate. If no editor factory is set, the function will return null.</para>
            <para>Sets the editor factory to be used by the item delegate to be the factory specified. If no editor factory is set, the item delegate will use the default editor factory.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSwipeGesture">
            <summary>
            The QSwipeGesture class describes a swipe gesture made by the user.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPanGesture and QPinchGesture.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.HorizontalDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the horizontal direction of the gesture.</para>
            <para>If the gesture has a horizontal component, the horizontal direction is either Left or Right; otherwise, it is NoDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.VerticalDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the vertical direction of the gesture.</para>
            <para>If the gesture has a vertical component, the vertical direction is either Up or Down; otherwise, it is NoDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeAngle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the angle of the motion associated with the gesture.</para>
            <para>If the gesture has either a horizontal or vertical component, the swipe angle describes the angle between the direction of motion and the x-axis as defined using the standard widget coordinate system.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the possible directions for the gesture's motion along the horizontal and vertical axes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeDirection.Down">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture involved a downward vertical motion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeDirection.Left">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture involved a horizontal motion to the left.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeDirection.NoDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture had no motion associated with it on a particular axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeDirection.Right">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture involved a horizontal motion to the right.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSwipeGesture.SwipeDirection.Up">
            <summary>
            <para>The gesture involved an upward vertical motion.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter">
            <summary>
            The QSyntaxHighlighter class allows you to define syntax highlighting rules, and in addition you can use the class to query a document's current formatting or user data.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for implementing QTextEdit syntax highlighters. A syntax highligher automatically highlights parts of the text in a QTextEdit, or more generally in a QTextDocument. Syntax highlighters are often used when the user is entering text in a specific format (for example source code) and help the user to read the text and identify syntax errors.</para>
            <para>To provide your own syntax highlighting, you must subclass QSyntaxHighlighter and reimplement highlightBlock().</para>
            <para>When you create an instance of your QSyntaxHighlighter subclass, pass it the QTextEdit or QTextDocument that you want the syntax highlighting to be applied to. For example:</para>
            <para> QTextEdit *editor = new QTextEdit;</para>
            <para> MyHighlighter *highlighter = new MyHighlighter(editor-&amp;gt;document());</para>
            <para>After this your highlightBlock() function will be called automatically whenever necessary. Use your highlightBlock() function to apply formatting (e.g. setting the font and color) to the text that is passed to it. QSyntaxHighlighter provides the setFormat() function which applies a given QTextCharFormat on the current text block. For example:</para>
            <para> void MyHighlighter::highlightBlock(const QString &amp;amp;text)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QTextCharFormat myClassFormat;</para>
            <para>     myClassFormat.setFontWeight(QFont::Bold);</para>
            <para>     myClassFormat.setForeground(Qt::darkMagenta);</para>
            <para>     QString pattern = &amp;quot;\\bMy[A-Za-z]+\\b&amp;quot;;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QRegExp expression(pattern);</para>
            <para>     int index = text.indexOf(expression);</para>
            <para>     while (index &amp;gt;= 0) {</para>
            <para>         int length = expression.matchedLength();</para>
            <para>         setFormat(index, length, myClassFormat);</para>
            <para>         index = text.indexOf(expression, index + length);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Some syntaxes can have constructs that span several text blocks. For example, a C++ syntax highlighter should be able to cope with /*...*/ multiline comments. To deal with these cases it is necessary to know the end state of the previous text block (e.g. &amp;quot;in comment&amp;quot;).</para>
            <para>Inside your highlightBlock() implementation you can query the end state of the previous text block using the previousBlockState() function. After parsing the block you can save the last state using setCurrentBlockState().</para>
            <para>The currentBlockState() and previousBlockState() functions return an int value. If no state is set, the returned value is -1. You can designate any other value to identify any given state using the setCurrentBlockState() function. Once the state is set the QTextBlock keeps that value until it is set set again or until the corresponding paragraph of text is deleted.</para>
            <para>For example, if you're writing a simple C++ syntax highlighter, you might designate 1 to signify &amp;quot;in comment&amp;quot;:</para>
            <para> QTextCharFormat multiLineCommentFormat;</para>
            <para> multiLineCommentFormat.setForeground(Qt::red);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QRegExp startExpression(&amp;quot;/\\*&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> QRegExp endExpression(&amp;quot;\\*/&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> setCurrentBlockState(0);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int startIndex = 0;</para>
            <para> if (previousBlockState() != 1)</para>
            <para>     startIndex = text.indexOf(startExpression);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> while (startIndex &amp;gt;= 0) {</para>
            <para>    int endIndex = text.indexOf(endExpression, startIndex);</para>
            <para>    int commentLength;</para>
            <para>    if (endIndex == -1) {</para>
            <para>        setCurrentBlockState(1);</para>
            <para>        commentLength = text.length() - startIndex;</para>
            <para>    } else {</para>
            <para>        commentLength = endIndex - startIndex</para>
            <para>                        + endExpression.matchedLength();</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para>    setFormat(startIndex, commentLength, multiLineCommentFormat);</para>
            <para>    startIndex = text.indexOf(startExpression,</para>
            <para>                              startIndex + commentLength);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>In the example above, we first set the current block state to 0. Then, if the previous block ended within a comment, we higlight from the beginning of the current block (startIndex = 0). Otherwise, we search for the given start expression. If the specified end expression cannot be found in the text block, we change the current block state by calling setCurrentBlockState(), and make sure that the rest of the block is higlighted.</para>
            <para>In addition you can query the current formatting and user data using the format() and currentBlockUserData() functions respectively. You can also attach user data to the current text block using the setCurrentBlockUserData() function. QTextBlockUserData can be used to store custom settings. In the case of syntax highlighting, it is in particular interesting as cache storage for information that you may figure out while parsing the paragraph's text. For an example, see the setCurrentBlockUserData() documentation.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextEdit and Syntax Highlighter Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSyntaxHighlighter with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSyntaxHighlighter and installs it on parent. The specified QTextDocument also becomes the owner of the QSyntaxHighlighter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.#ctor(QtGui.QTextEdit)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSyntaxHighlighter and installs it on parent 's QTextDocument. The specified QTextEdit also becomes the owner of the QSyntaxHighlighter.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.CurrentBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current text block.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.Format(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format at position inside the syntax highlighter's current text block.</para>
            <para>See also setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.HighlightBlock(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Highlights the given text block. This function is called when necessary by the rich text engine, i.e. on text blocks which have changed.</para>
            <para>To provide your own syntax highlighting, you must subclass QSyntaxHighlighter and reimplement highlightBlock(). In your reimplementation you should parse the block's text and call setFormat() as often as necessary to apply any font and color changes that you require. For example:</para>
            <para> void MyHighlighter::highlightBlock(const QString &amp;text)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QTextCharFormat myClassFormat;</para>
            <para>     myClassFormat.setFontWeight(QFont::Bold);</para>
            <para>     myClassFormat.setForeground(Qt::darkMagenta);</para>
            <para>     QString pattern = &quot;\\bMy[A-Za-z]+\\b&quot;;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QRegExp expression(pattern);</para>
            <para>     int index = text.indexOf(expression);</para>
            <para>     while (index &gt;= 0) {</para>
            <para>         int length = expression.matchedLength();</para>
            <para>         setFormat(index, length, myClassFormat);</para>
            <para>         index = text.indexOf(expression, index + length);</para>
            <para>      }</para>
            <para>  }</para>
            <para>Some syntaxes can have constructs that span several text blocks. For example, a C++ syntax highlighter should be able to cope with /*...*/ multiline comments. To deal with these cases it is necessary to know the end state of the previous text block (e.g. &quot;in comment&quot;).</para>
            <para>Inside your highlightBlock() implementation you can query the end state of the previous text block using the previousBlockState() function. After parsing the block you can save the last state using setCurrentBlockState().</para>
            <para>The currentBlockState() and previousBlockState() functions return an int value. If no state is set, the returned value is -1. You can designate any other value to identify any given state using the setCurrentBlockState() function. Once the state is set the QTextBlock keeps that value until it is set set again or until the corresponding paragraph of text gets deleted.</para>
            <para>For example, if you're writing a simple C++ syntax highlighter, you might designate 1 to signify &quot;in comment&quot;. For a text block that ended in the middle of a comment you'd set 1 using setCurrentBlockState, and for other paragraphs you'd set 0. In your parsing code if the return value of previousBlockState() is 1, you would highlight the text as a C++ comment until you reached the closing */.</para>
            <para>See also previousBlockState(), setFormat(), and setCurrentBlockState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.PreviousBlockState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the end state of the text block previous to the syntax highlighter's current block. If no value was previously set, the returned value is -1.</para>
            <para>See also highlightBlock() and setCurrentBlockState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.Rehighlight">
            <summary>
            <para>Reapplies the highlighting to the whole document.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also rehighlightBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.RehighlightBlock(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reapplies the highlighting to the given QTextBlock block.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also rehighlight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.SetFormat(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is applied to the syntax highlighter's current text block (i.e. the text that is passed to the highlightBlock() function).</para>
            <para>The specified format is applied to the text from the start position for a length of count characters (if count is 0, nothing is done). The formatting properties set in format are merged at display time with the formatting information stored directly in the document, for example as previously set with QTextCursor's functions. Note that the document itself remains unmodified by the format set through this function.</para>
            <para>See also format() and highlightBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.SetFormat(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The specified color is applied to the current text block from the start position for a length of count characters.</para>
            <para>The other attributes of the current text block, e.g. the font and background color, are reset to default values.</para>
            <para>See also format() and highlightBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.SetFormat(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>The specified font is applied to the current text block from the start position for a length of count characters.</para>
            <para>The other attributes of the current text block, e.g. the font and background color, are reset to default values.</para>
            <para>See also format() and highlightBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructor. Uninstalls this syntax highlighter from the text document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.CurrentBlockState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the state of the current text block. If no value is set, the returned value is -1.</para>
            <para>Sets the state of the current text block to newState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.CurrentBlockUserData">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QTextBlockUserData object previously attached to the current text block.</para>
            <para>Attaches the given data to the current text block. The ownership is passed to the underlying text document, i.e. the provided QTextBlockUserData object will be deleted if the corresponding text block gets deleted.</para>
            <para>QTextBlockUserData can be used to store custom settings. In the case of syntax highlighting, it is in particular interesting as cache storage for information that you may figure out while parsing the paragraph's text.</para>
            <para>For example while parsing the text, you can keep track of parenthesis characters that you encounter ('{[(' and the like), and store their relative position and the actual QChar in a simple class derived from QTextBlockUserData:</para>
            <para> struct ParenthesisInfo</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QChar char;</para>
            <para>     int position;</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> struct BlockData : public QTextBlockUserData</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QVector&lt;ParenthesisInfo&gt; parentheses;</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>During cursor navigation in the associated editor, you can ask the current QTextBlock (retrieved using the QTextCursor::block() function) if it has a user data object set and cast it to your BlockData object. Then you can check if the current cursor position matches with a previously recorded parenthesis position, and, depending on the type of parenthesis (opening or closing), find the next opening or closing parenthesis on the same level.</para>
            <para>In this way you can do a visual parenthesis matching and highlight from the current cursor position to the matching parenthesis. That makes it easier to spot a missing parenthesis in your code and to find where a corresponding opening/closing parenthesis is when editing parenthesis intensive code.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSyntaxHighlighter.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QTextDocument on which this syntax highlighter is installed.</para>
            <para>Installs the syntax highlighter on the given QTextDocument doc. A QSyntaxHighlighter can only be used with one document at a time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon">
            <summary>
            The QSystemTrayIcon class provides an icon for an application in the system tray.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Modern operating systems usually provide a special area on the desktop, called the system tray or notification area, where long-running applications can display icons and short messages.</para>
            <para>The QSystemTrayIcon class can be used on the following platforms:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>All supported versions of Windows.</para>
            <para>All window managers for X11 that implement the freedesktop.org system tray specification, including recent versions of KDE and GNOME.</para>
            <para>All supported versions of Mac OS X. Note that the Growl notification system must be installed for QSystemTrayIcon::showMessage() to display messages.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To check whether a system tray is present on the user's desktop, call the QSystemTrayIcon::isSystemTrayAvailable() static function.</para>
            <para>To add a system tray entry, create a QSystemTrayIcon object, call setContextMenu() to provide a context menu for the icon, and call show() to make it visible in the system tray. Status notification messages (&amp;quot;balloon messages&amp;quot;) can be displayed at any time using showMessage().</para>
            <para>If the system tray is unavailable when a system tray icon is constructed, but becomes available later, QSystemTrayIcon will automatically add an entry for the application in the system tray if the icon is visible.</para>
            <para>The activated() signal is emitted when the user activates the icon.</para>
            <para>Only on X11, when a tooltip is requested, the QSystemTrayIcon receives a QHelpEvent of type QEvent::ToolTip. Additionally, the QSystemTrayIcon receives wheel events of type QEvent::Wheel. These are not supported on any other platform.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDesktopServices, QDesktopWidget, Desktop Integration, and System Tray Icon Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSystemTrayIcon object with the given parent.</para>
            <para>The icon is initially invisible.</para>
            <para>See also visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QSystemTrayIcon object with the given icon and parent.</para>
            <para>The icon is initially invisible.</para>
            <para>See also visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.OnActivated(QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user activates the system tray icon. reason specifies the reason for activation. QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason enumerates the various reasons.</para>
            <para>See also QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the geometry of the system tray icon in screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Hide">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the system tray entry.</para>
            <para>See also show() and visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.IsSystemTrayAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the system tray is available; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If the system tray is currently unavailable but becomes available later, QSystemTrayIcon will automatically add an entry in the system tray if it is visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.OnMessageClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the message displayed using showMessage() was clicked by the user.</para>
            <para>Currently this signal is not sent on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>Note: We follow Microsoft Windows XP/Vista behavior, so the signal is also emitted when the user clicks on a tray icon with a balloon message displayed.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Show">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the icon in the system tray.</para>
            <para>See also hide() and visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ShowMessage(System.String,System.String,QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageIcon,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows a balloon message for the entry with the given title, message and icon for the time specified in millisecondsTimeoutHint. title and message must be plain text strings.</para>
            <para>Message can be clicked by the user; the messageClicked() signal will emitted when this occurs.</para>
            <para>Note that display of messages are dependent on the system configuration and user preferences, and that messages may not appear at all. Hence, it should not be relied upon as the sole means for providing critical information.</para>
            <para>On Windows, the millisecondsTimeoutHint is usually ignored by the system when the application has focus.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, the Growl notification system must be installed for this function to display messages.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also show() and supportsMessages().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.SupportsMessages">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the system tray supports balloon messages; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the icon from the system tray and frees all allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user activates the system tray icon. reason specifies the reason for activation. QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason enumerates the various reasons.</para>
            <para>See also QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the message displayed using showMessage() was clicked by the user.</para>
            <para>Currently this signal is not sent on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>Note: We follow Microsoft Windows XP/Vista behavior, so the signal is also emitted when the user clicks on a tray icon with a balloon message displayed.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ContextMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current context menu for the system tray entry.</para>
            <para>Sets the specified menu to be the context menu for the system tray icon.</para>
            <para>The menu will pop up when the user requests the context menu for the system tray icon by clicking the mouse button.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X, this is currenly converted to a NSMenu, so the aboutToHide() signal is not emitted.</para>
            <para>Note: The system tray icon does not take ownership of the menu. You must ensure that it is deleted at the appropriate time by, for example, creating the menu with a suitable parent object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the tooltip for the system tray entry.</para>
            <para>On some systems, the tooltip's length is limited. The tooltip will be truncated if necessary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the system tray icon.</para>
            <para>On Windows, the system tray icon size is 16x16; on X11, the preferred size is 22x22. The icon will be scaled to the appropriate size as necessary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.Visible">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the system tray entry is visible.</para>
            <para>Setting this property to true or calling show() makes the system tray icon visible; setting this property to false or calling hide() hides it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the reason the system tray was activated.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason.Context">
            <summary>
            <para>The context menu for the system tray entry was requested</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason.DoubleClick">
            <summary>
            <para>The system tray entry was double clicked</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason.MiddleClick">
            <summary>
            <para>The system tray entry was clicked with the middle mouse button</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason.Trigger">
            <summary>
            <para>The system tray entry was clicked</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason.Unknown">
            <summary>
            <para>Unknown reason</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the icon that is shown when a balloon message is displayed.</para>
            <para>See also QMessageBox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageIcon.Critical">
            <summary>
            <para>A critical warning icon is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageIcon.Information">
            <summary>
            <para>An information icon is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageIcon.NoIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>No icon is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.MessageIcon.Warning">
            <summary>
            <para>A standard warning icon is shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabBar">
            <summary>
            The QTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QTabBar is straightforward to use; it draws the tabs using one of the predefined shapes, and emits a signal when a tab is selected. It can be subclassed to tailor the look and feel. Qt also provides a ready-made QTabWidget.</para>
            <para>Each tab has a tabText(), an optional tabIcon(), an optional tabToolTip(), optional tabWhatsThis() and optional tabData(). The tabs's attributes can be changed with setTabText(), setTabIcon(), setTabToolTip(), setTabWhatsThis and setTabData(). Each tabs can be enabled or disabled individually with setTabEnabled().</para>
            <para>Each tab can display text in a distinct color. The current text color for a tab can be found with the tabTextColor() function. Set the text color for a particular tab with setTabTextColor().</para>
            <para>Tabs are added using addTab(), or inserted at particular positions using insertTab(). The total number of tabs is given by count(). Tabs can be removed from the tab bar with removeTab(). Combining removeTab() and insertTab() allows you to move tabs to different positions.</para>
            <para>The shape property defines the tabs' appearance. The choice of shape is a matter of taste, although tab dialogs (for preferences and similar) invariably use RoundedNorth. Tab controls in windows other than dialogs almost always use either RoundedSouth or TriangularSouth. Many spreadsheets and other tab controls in which all the pages are essentially similar use TriangularSouth, whereas RoundedSouth is used mostly when the pages are different (e.g. a multi-page tool palette). The default in QTabBar is RoundedNorth.</para>
            <para>The most important part of QTabBar's API is the currentChanged() signal. This is emitted whenever the current tab changes (even at startup, when the current tab changes from 'none'). There is also a slot, setCurrentIndex(), which can be used to select a tab programmatically. The function currentIndex() returns the index of the current tab, count holds the number of tabs.</para>
            <para>QTabBar creates automatic mnemonic keys in the manner of QAbstractButton; e.g. if a tab's label is &amp;quot;&amp;amp;Graphics&amp;quot;, Alt+G becomes a shortcut key for switching to that tab.</para>
            <para>The following virtual functions may need to be reimplemented in order to tailor the look and feel or store extra data with each tab:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>tabSizeHint() calcuates the size of a tab.</para>
            <para>tabInserted() notifies that a new tab was added.</para>
            <para>tabRemoved() notifies that a tab was removed.</para>
            <para>tabLayoutChange() notifies that the tabs have been re-laid out.</para>
            <para>paintEvent() paints all tabs.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>For subclasses, you might also need the tabRect() functions which returns the visual geometry of a single tab.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A tab bar shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para>	A truncated tab bar shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTabWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new tab bar with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.AddTab(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Adds a new tab with icon icon and text text. Returns the new tab's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.AddTab(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a new tab with text text. Returns the new tab's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnCurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tab bar's current tab changes. The new current has the given index, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no tab in the QTabBar)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionTab,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from the tab at tabIndex. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOptionTabV2, or QStyleOptionTabV3 but don't want to fill in all the information themselves. This function will check the version of the QStyleOptionTab and fill in the additional values for a QStyleOptionTabV2 and QStyleOptionTabV3.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QTabWidget::initStyleOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.InsertTab(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a new tab with icon icon and text text at position index. If index is out of range, the new tab is appended. Returns the new tab's index.</para>
            <para>If the QTabBar was empty before this function is called, the inserted tab becomes the current tab.</para>
            <para>Inserting a new tab at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.InsertTab(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a new tab with text text at position index. If index is out of range, the new tab is appened. Returns the new tab's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.IsTabEnabled(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the tab at position index is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.MoveTab(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the item at index position from to index position to.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also tabMoved() and tabLayoutChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.RemoveTab(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the tab at position index.</para>
            <para>See also SelectionBehavior.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabButton(System.Int32,QtGui.QTabBar.ButtonPosition,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets widget on the tab index. The widget is placed on the left or right hand side depending upon the position.</para>
            <para>Any previously set widget in position is hidden.</para>
            <para>The tab bar will take ownership of the widget and so all widgets set here will be deleted by the tab bar when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other widget (or 0).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also tabButton() and tabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabData(System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the data of the tab at position index to data.</para>
            <para>See also tabData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabEnabled(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true then the tab at position index is enabled; otherwise the item at position index is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also isTabEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabIcon(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the icon of the tab at position index to icon.</para>
            <para>See also tabIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabText(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text of the tab at position index to text.</para>
            <para>See also tabText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabTextColor(System.Int32,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the color of the text in the tab with the given index to the specified color.</para>
            <para>If an invalid color is specified, the tab will use the QTabBar foreground role instead.</para>
            <para>See also tabTextColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabToolTip(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the tool tip of the tab at position index to tip.</para>
            <para>See also tabToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SetTabWhatsThis(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the What's This help text of the tab at position index to text.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also tabWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the tab that covers position or -1 if no tab covers position;</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabButton(System.Int32,QtGui.QTabBar.ButtonPosition)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget set a tab index and position or 0 if one is not set.</para>
            <para>See also setTabButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnTabCloseRequested(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabData(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the data of the tab at position index, or a null variant if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setTabData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabIcon(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon of the tab at position index, or a null icon if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setTabIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabInserted(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called after a new tab was added or inserted at position index.</para>
            <para>See also tabRemoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabLayoutChange">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called whenever the tab layout changes.</para>
            <para>See also tabRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnTabMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tab has moved the tab at index position from to index position to.</para>
            <para>note: QTabWidget will automatically move the page when this signal is emitted from its tab bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also moveTab().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabRect(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visual rectangle of the tab at position index, or a null rectangle if index is out of range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called after a tab was removed from position index.</para>
            <para>See also tabInserted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabSizeHint(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint for the tab at position index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabText(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setTabText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabTextColor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text color of the tab with the given index, or a invalid color if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setTabTextColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabToolTip(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tool tip of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setTabToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.TabWhatsThis(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the What's This help text of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setTabWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabBar.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTabBar.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tab bar's current tab changes. The new current has the given index, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no tab in the QTabBar)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTabBar.TabCloseRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTabBar.TabMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tab has moved the tab at index position from to index position to.</para>
            <para>note: QTabWidget will automatically move the page when this signal is emitted from its tab bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also moveTab().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>Possible values for this property are described by the Shape enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index of the tab bar's visible tab.</para>
            <para>The current index is -1 if there is no current tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.DrawBase">
            <summary>
            <para>This property defines whether or not tab bar should draw its base.</para>
            <para>If true then QTabBar draws a base in relation to the styles overlab. Otherwise only the tabs are drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size for icons in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is style-dependent. iconSize is a maximum size; icons that are smaller are not scaled up.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.ElideMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how to elide text in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>This property controls how items are elided when there is not enough space to show them for a given tab bar size.</para>
            <para>By default the value is style dependent.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.UsesScrollButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not a tab bar should use buttons to scroll tabs when it has many tabs.</para>
            <para>When there are too many tabs in a tab bar for its size, the tab bar can either choose to expand its size or to add buttons that allow you to scroll through the tabs.</para>
            <para>By default the value is style dependant.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.TabsClosable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not a tab bar should place close buttons on each tab.</para>
            <para>When tabsClosable is set to true a close button will appear on the tab on either the left or right hand side depending upon the style. When the button is clicked the tab the signal tabCloseRequested will be emitted.</para>
            <para>By default the value is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.SelectionBehaviorOnRemove">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds what tab should be set as current when removeTab is called if the removed tab is also the current tab.</para>
            <para>By default the value is SelectRightTab.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.Expanding">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds when expanding is true QTabBar will expand the tabs to use the empty space.</para>
            <para>By default the value is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.Movable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds this property holds whether the user can move the tabs within the tabbar area.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false;</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabBar.DocumentMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not the tab bar is rendered in a mode suitable for the main window.</para>
            <para>This property is used as a hint for styles to draw the tabs in a different way then they would normally look in a tab widget. On Mac OS X this will look similar to the tabs in Safari or Leopard's Terminal.app.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabBar.ButtonPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type lists the location of the widget on a tab.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.ButtonPosition.LeftSide">
            <summary>
            <para>Left side of the tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.ButtonPosition.RightSide">
            <summary>
            <para>Right side of the tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabBar.SelectionBehavior">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type lists the behavior of QTabBar when a tab is removed and the tab being removed is also the current tab.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.SelectionBehavior.SelectLeftTab">
            <summary>
            <para>Select the tab to the left of the one being removed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.SelectionBehavior.SelectPreviousTab">
            <summary>
            <para>Select the previously selected tab.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.SelectionBehavior.SelectRightTab">
            <summary>
            <para>Select the tab to the right of the one being removed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type lists the built-in shapes supported by QTabBar. Treat these as hints as some styles may not render some of the shapes. However, position should be honored.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.RoundedEast">
            <summary>
            <para>The normal rounded look on the right side the pages</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.RoundedNorth">
            <summary>
            <para>The normal rounded look above the pages</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.RoundedSouth">
            <summary>
            <para>The normal rounded look below the pages</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.RoundedWest">
            <summary>
            <para>The normal rounded look on the left side of the pages</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.TriangularEast">
            <summary>
            <para>Triangular tabs on the right of the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.TriangularNorth">
            <summary>
            <para>Triangular tabs above the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.TriangularSouth">
            <summary>
            <para>Triangular tabs similar to those used in the Excel spreadsheet, for example</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabBar.Shape.TriangularWest">
            <summary>
            <para>Triangular tabs on the left of the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabWidget">
            <summary>
            The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A tab widget provides a tab bar (see QTabBar) and a &amp;quot;page area&amp;quot; that is used to display pages related to each tab. By default, the tab bar is shown above the page area, but different configurations are available (see TabPosition). Each tab is associated with a different widget (called a page). Only the current page is shown in the page area; all the other pages are hidden. The user can show a different page by clicking on its tab or by pressing its Alt+letter shortcut if it has one.</para>
            <para>The normal way to use QTabWidget is to do the following:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Create a QTabWidget.</para>
            <para>Create a QWidget for each of the pages in the tab dialog, but do not specify parent widgets for them.</para>
            <para>Insert child widgets into the page widget, using layouts to position them as normal.</para>
            <para>Call addTab() or insertTab() to put the page widgets into the tab widget, giving each tab a suitable label with an optional keyboard shortcut.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The position of the tabs is defined by tabPosition, their shape by tabShape.</para>
            <para>The signal currentChanged() is emitted when the user selects a page.</para>
            <para>The current page index is available as currentIndex(), the current page widget with currentWidget(). You can retrieve a pointer to a page widget with a given index using widget(), and can find the index position of a widget with indexOf(). Use setCurrentWidget() or setCurrentIndex() to show a particular page.</para>
            <para>You can change a tab's text and icon using setTabText() or setTabIcon(). A tab and its associated page can be removed with removeTab().</para>
            <para>Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled, the tab text is drawn normally and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled, the tab is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that tab. Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be visible, for example if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.</para>
            <para>Tab widgets can be a very good way to split up a complex dialog. An alternative is to use a QStackedWidget for which you provide some means of navigating between pages, for example, a QToolBar or a QListWidget.</para>
            <para>Most of the functionality in QTabWidget is provided by a QTabBar (at the top, providing the tabs) and a QStackedWidget (most of the area, organizing the individual pages).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style tab widget.	A Macintosh style tab widget.	A Plastique style tab widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTabBar, QStackedWidget, QToolBox, and Tab Dialog Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tabbed widget with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.AddTab(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Adds a tab with the given page, icon, and label to the tab widget, and returns the index of the tab in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>This function is the same as addTab(), but with an additional icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.AddTab(QtGui.QWidget,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a tab with the given page and label to the tab widget, and returns the index of the tab in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as a shortcut for the tab, e.g. if the label is &quot;Bro&amp;wse&quot; then Alt+W becomes a shortcut which will move the focus to this tab.</para>
            <para>Note: If you call addTab() after show(), the layout system will try to adjust to the changes in its widgets hierarchy and may cause flicker. To prevent this, you can set the QWidget::updatesEnabled property to false prior to changes; remember to set the property to true when the changes are done, making the widget receive paint events again.</para>
            <para>See also insertTab().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all the pages, but does not delete them. Calling this function is equivalent to calling removeTab() until the tab widget is empty.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.CornerWidget(QtCore.Qt.Corner)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget shown in the corner of the tab widget or 0.</para>
            <para>See also setCornerWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnCurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current page index changes. The parameter is the new current page index position, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QTabWidget)</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and currentIndex.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.IndexOf(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index position of the page occupied by the widget w, or -1 if the widget cannot be found.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QTabWidget. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QTabBar::initStyleOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.InsertTab(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a tab with the given label, page, and icon into the tab widget at the specified index, and returns the index of the inserted tab in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>This function is the same as insertTab(), but with an additional icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.InsertTab(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a tab with the given label and page into the tab widget at the specified index, and returns the index of the inserted tab in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The label is displayed in the tab and may vary in appearance depending on the configuration of the tab widget.</para>
            <para>If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as a shortcut for the tab, e.g. if the label is &quot;Bro&amp;wse&quot; then Alt+W becomes a shortcut which will move the focus to this tab.</para>
            <para>If index is out of range, the tab is simply appended. Otherwise it is inserted at the specified position.</para>
            <para>If the QTabWidget was empty before this function is called, the new page becomes the current page. Inserting a new tab at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current page.</para>
            <para>Note: If you call insertTab() after show(), the layout system will try to adjust to the changes in its widgets hierarchy and may cause flicker. To prevent this, you can set the QWidget::updatesEnabled property to false prior to changes; remember to set the property to true when the changes are done, making the widget receive paint events again.</para>
            <para>See also addTab().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.IsTabEnabled(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the page at position index is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setTabEnabled() and QWidget::isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            <para>Returns a suitable minimum size for the tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>Paints the tab widget's tab bar in response to the paint event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.RemoveTab(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the tab at position index from this stack of widgets. The page widget itself is not deleted.</para>
            <para>See also addTab() and insertTab().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SetCornerWidget(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.Corner)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given widget to be shown in the specified corner of the tab widget. The geometry of the widget is determined based on the widget's sizeHint() and the style().</para>
            <para>Only the horizontal element of the corner will be used.</para>
            <para>Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.</para>
            <para>Any previously set corner widget is hidden.</para>
            <para>All widgets set here will be deleted by the tab widget when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0).</para>
            <para>Note: Corner widgets are designed for North and South tab positions; other orientations are known to not work properly.</para>
            <para>See also cornerWidget() and setTabPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SetTabEnabled(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enable is true, the page at position index is enabled; otherwise the page at position index is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.</para>
            <para>QTabWidget uses QWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a separate flag.</para>
            <para>Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is visible already, QTabWidget will not hide it; if all the pages are disabled, QTabWidget will show one of them.</para>
            <para>See also isTabEnabled() and QWidget::setEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SetTabIcon(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Sets the icon for the tab at position index.</para>
            <para>See also tabIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SetTabText(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines a new label for the page at position index's tab.</para>
            <para>If the provided text contains an ampersand character ('&amp;'), a shortcut is automatically created for it. The character that follows the '&amp;' will be used as the shortcut key. Any previous shortcut will be overwritten, or cleared if no shortcut is defined by the text. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;&amp;').</para>
            <para>See also tabText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SetTabToolTip(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the tab tool tip for the page at position index to tip.</para>
            <para>See also tabToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SetTabWhatsThis(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the What's This help text for the page at position index to text.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also tabWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.OnTabCloseRequested(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabIcon(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon for the tab on the page at position index.</para>
            <para>See also setTabIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabInserted(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called after a new tab was added or inserted at position index.</para>
            <para>See also tabRemoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called after a tab was removed from position index.</para>
            <para>See also tabInserted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabText(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the label text for the tab on the page at position index.</para>
            <para>See also setTabText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabToolTip(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tab tool tip for the page at position index or an empty string if no tool tip has been set.</para>
            <para>See also setTabToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabWhatsThis(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the What's This help text for the page at position index, or an empty string if no help text has been set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setTabWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.Widget(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tab page at index position index or 0 if the index is out of range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the tabbed widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTabWidget.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current page index changes. The parameter is the new current page index position, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QTabWidget)</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and currentIndex.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabCloseRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.CurrentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the tab dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).</para>
            <para>Makes widget the current widget. The widget used must be a page in this tab widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabBar">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current QTabBar.</para>
            <para>Replaces the dialog's QTabBar heading with the tab bar tb. Note that this must be called before any tabs have been added, or the behavior is undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.tabPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position of the tabs in this tab widget.</para>
            <para>Possible values for this property are described by the TabPosition enum.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to North.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.tabShape">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the shape of the tabs in this tab widget.</para>
            <para>Possible values for this property are QTabWidget::Rounded (default) or QTabWidget::Triangular.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index position of the current tab page.</para>
            <para>The current index is -1 if there is no current widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of -1 because there are initially no tabs in the widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the size for icons in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>The default value is style-dependent. This is the maximum size that the icons will have. Icons are not scaled up if they are of smaller size.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.ElideMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds how to elide text in the tab bar.</para>
            <para>This property controls how items are elided when there is not enough space to show them for a given tab bar size.</para>
            <para>By default the value is style dependant.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.UsesScrollButtons">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not a tab bar should use buttons to scroll tabs when it has many tabs.</para>
            <para>When there are too many tabs in a tab bar for its size, the tab bar can either choose to expand its size or to add buttons that allow you to scroll through the tabs.</para>
            <para>By default the value is style dependant.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.DocumentMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether or not the tab widget is rendered in a mode suitable for document pages. This is the same as document mode on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>When this property is set the tab widget frame is not rendered. This mode is useful for showing document-type pages where the page covers most of the tab widget area.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabsClosable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether close buttons are automatically added to each tab.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTabWidget.Movable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds this property holds whether the user can move the tabs within the tabbar area.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false;</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines where QTabWidget draws the tab row:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabPosition.East">
            <summary>
            <para>The tabs are drawn to the right of the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabPosition.North">
            <summary>
            <para>The tabs are drawn above the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabPosition.South">
            <summary>
            <para>The tabs are drawn below the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabPosition.West">
            <summary>
            <para>The tabs are drawn to the left of the pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabShape">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum type defines the shape of the tabs:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabShape.Rounded">
            <summary>
            <para>The tabs are drawn with a rounded look. This is the default shape.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabWidget.TabShape.Triangular">
            <summary>
            <para>The tabs are drawn with a triangular look.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTableView">
            <summary>
            The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QTableView implements a table view that displays items from a model. This class is used to provide standard tables that were previously provided by the QTable class, but using the more flexible approach provided by Qt's model/view architecture.</para>
            <para>The QTableView class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>QTableView implements the interfaces defined by the QAbstractItemView class to allow it to display data provided by models derived from the QAbstractItemModel class.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Navigation</para>
            <para>You can navigate the cells in the table by clicking on a cell with the mouse, or by using the arrow keys. Because QTableView enables tabKeyNavigation by default, you can also hit Tab and Backtab to move from cell to cell.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Visual Appearance</para>
            <para>The table has a vertical header that can be obtained using the verticalHeader() function, and a horizontal header that is available through the horizontalHeader() function. The height of each row in the table can be found by using rowHeight(); similarly, the width of columns can be found using columnWidth(). Since both of these are plain widgets, you can hide either of them using their hide() functions.</para>
            <para>Rows and columns can be hidden and shown with hideRow(), hideColumn(), showRow(), and showColumn(). They can be selected with selectRow() and selectColumn(). The table will show a grid depending on the showGrid property.</para>
            <para>The items shown in a table view, like those in the other item views, are rendered and edited using standard delegates. However, for some tasks it is sometimes useful to be able to insert widgets in a table instead. Widgets are set for particular indexes with the setIndexWidget() function, and later retrieved with indexWidget().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	By default, the cells in a table do not expand to fill the available space.You can make the cells fill the available space by stretching the last header section. Access the relevant header using horizontalHeader() or verticalHeader() and set the header's stretchLastSection property.</para>
            <para>To distribute the available space according to the space requirement of each column or row, call the view's resizeColumnsToContents() or resizeRowsToContents() functions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Coordinate Systems</para>
            <para>For some specialized forms of tables it is useful to be able to convert between row and column indexes and widget coordinates. The rowAt() function provides the y-coordinate within the view of the specified row; the row index can be used to obtain a corresponding y-coordinate with rowViewportPosition(). The columnAt() and columnViewportPosition() functions provide the equivalent conversion operations between x-coordinates and column indexes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Styles</para>
            <para>QTableView is styled appropriately for each platform. The following images show how it looks on three different platforms. Go to the Qt Widget Gallery to see its appearance in other styles.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style table view.	A Macintosh style table view.	A Plastique style table view.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTableWidget, View Classes, QAbstractItemModel, QAbstractItemView, Chart Example, Pixelator Example, and Table Model Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a table view with a parent to represent the data.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ClearSpans">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all row and column spans in the table view.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setSpan().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column in which the given x-coordinate, x, in contents coordinates is located.</para>
            <para>Note: This function returns -1 if the given coordinate is not valid (has no column).</para>
            <para>See also rowAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnCountChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called whenever columns are added or deleted. The previous number of columns is specified by oldCount, and the new number of columns is specified by newCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called to change the index of the given column in the table view. The old index is specified by oldIndex, and the new index by newIndex.</para>
            <para>See also rowMoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnResized(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called to change the width of the given column. The old width is specified by oldWidth, and the new width by newWidth.</para>
            <para>See also rowResized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnSpan(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column span of the table element at (row, column). The default is 1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setSpan() and rowSpan().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnViewportPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x-coordinate in contents coordinates of the given column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ColumnWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the given column.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnWidth(), resizeColumnToContents(), and rowHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.HideColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hide the given column.</para>
            <para>See also showColumn() and hideRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.HideRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hide the given row.</para>
            <para>See also showRow() and hideColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.HorizontalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().</para>
            <para>Returns the horizontal offset of the items in the table view.</para>
            <para>Note that the table view uses the horizontal header section positions to determine the positions of columns in the view.</para>
            <para>See also verticalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.IndexAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().</para>
            <para>Returns the index position of the model item corresponding to the table item at position pos in contents coordinates.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.IsColumnHidden(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given column is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isRowHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.IsIndexHidden(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.IsRowHidden(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given row is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isColumnHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.MoveCursor(QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().</para>
            <para>Moves the cursor in accordance with the given cursorAction, using the information provided by the modifiers.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemView::CursorAction.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>Paints the table on receipt of the given paint event event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ResizeColumnToContents(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the given column based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the column.</para>
            <para>Note: Only visible columns will be resized. Reimplement sizeHintForColumn() to resize hidden columns as well.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ResizeColumnsToContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes all columns based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the columns.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ResizeRowToContents(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the given row based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ResizeRowsToContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes all rows based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the rows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row in which the given y-coordinate, y, in contents coordinates is located.</para>
            <para>Note: This function returns -1 if the given coordinate is not valid (has no row).</para>
            <para>See also columnAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowCountChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called whenever rows are added or deleted. The previous number of rows is specified by oldCount, and the new number of rows is specified by newCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowHeight(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the given row.</para>
            <para>See also setRowHeight(), resizeRowToContents(), and columnWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called to change the index of the given row in the table view. The old index is specified by oldIndex, and the new index by newIndex.</para>
            <para>See also columnMoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowResized(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called to change the height of the given row. The old height is specified by oldHeight, and the new height by newHeight.</para>
            <para>See also columnResized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowSpan(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row span of the table element at (row, column). The default is 1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setSpan() and columnSpan().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.RowViewportPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y-coordinate in contents coordinates of the given row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SelectColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the given column in the table view if the current SelectionMode and SelectionBehavior allows columns to be selected.</para>
            <para>See also selectRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SelectRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the given row in the table view if the current SelectionMode and SelectionBehavior allows rows to be selected.</para>
            <para>See also selectColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SelectedIndexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SetColumnHidden(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true the given column will be hidden; otherwise it will be shown.</para>
            <para>See also isColumnHidden() and setRowHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SetColumnWidth(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the width of the given column to be width.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also columnWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SetRowHeight(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the height of the given row to be height.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also rowHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SetRowHidden(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true row will be hidden, otherwise it will be shown.</para>
            <para>See also isRowHidden() and setColumnHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SetSelection(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().</para>
            <para>Selects the items within the given rect and in accordance with the specified selection flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SetSpan(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the span of the table element at (row, column) to the number of rows and columns specified by (rowSpanCount, columnSpanCount).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also rowSpan() and columnSpan().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ShowColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the given column.</para>
            <para>See also hideColumn() and showRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ShowRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the given row.</para>
            <para>See also hideRow() and showColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SizeHintForColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::sizeHintForColumn().</para>
            <para>Returns the size hint for the given column's width or -1 if there is no model.</para>
            <para>If you need to set the width of a given column to a fixed value, call QHeaderView::resizeSection() on the table's horizontal header.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function in a subclass, note that the value you return will be used when resizeColumnToContents() or QHeaderView::resizeSections() is called. If a larger column width is required by either the horizontal header or the item delegate, the larger width will be used instead.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::sizeHint and horizontalHeader().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SizeHintForRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::sizeHintForRow().</para>
            <para>Returns the size hint for the given row's height or -1 if there is no model.</para>
            <para>If you need to set the height of a given row to a fixed value, call QHeaderView::resizeSection() on the table's vertical header.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function in a subclass, note that the value you return is only used when resizeRowToContents() is called. In that case, if a larger row height is required by either the vertical header or the item delegate, that width will be used instead.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::sizeHint and verticalHeader().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SortByColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts the model by the values in the given column in the given order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also sortingEnabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.SortByColumn(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts the model by the values in the given column in the given order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also sortingEnabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.UpdateGeometries">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::updateGeometries().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.VerticalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().</para>
            <para>Returns the vertical offset of the items in the table view.</para>
            <para>Note that the table view uses the vertical header section positions to determine the positions of rows in the view.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.ViewOptions">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::viewOptions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the table view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.HorizontalHeader">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table view's horizontal header.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget to use for the horizontal header to header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.RootIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setRootIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.SelectionModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.VerticalHeader">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table view's vertical header.</para>
            <para>Sets the widget to use for the vertical header to header.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.ShowGrid">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the grid is shown.</para>
            <para>If this property is true a grid is drawn for the table; if the property is false, no grid is drawn. The default value is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.GridStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the pen style used to draw the grid.</para>
            <para>This property holds the style used when drawing the grid (see showGrid).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.SortingEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether sorting is enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, sorting is enabled for the table. If this property is false, sorting is not enabled. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>Note:. Setting the property to true with setSortingEnabled() immediately triggers a call to sortByColumn() with the current sort section and order.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.WordWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item text word-wrapping policy.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then the item text is wrapped where necessary at word-breaks; otherwise it is not wrapped at all. This property is true by default.</para>
            <para>Note that even of wrapping is enabled, the cell will not be expanded to fit all text. Ellipsis will be inserted according to the current textElideMode.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableView.CornerButtonEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button in the top-left corner is enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then button in the top-left corner of the table view is enabled. Clicking on this button will select all the cells in the table view.</para>
            <para>This property is true by default.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTableWidget">
            <summary>
            The QTableWidget class provides an item-based table view with a default model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Table widgets provide standard table display facilities for applications. The items in a QTableWidget are provided by QTableWidgetItem.</para>
            <para>If you want a table that uses your own data model you should use QTableView rather than this class.</para>
            <para>Table widgets can be constructed with the required numbers of rows and columns:</para>
            <para>     tableWidget = new QTableWidget(12, 3, this);</para>
            <para>Alternatively, tables can be constructed without a given size and resized later:</para>
            <para>     tableWidget = new QTableWidget(this);</para>
            <para>     tableWidget-&amp;gt;setRowCount(10);</para>
            <para>     tableWidget-&amp;gt;setColumnCount(5);</para>
            <para>Items are created ouside the table (with no parent widget) and inserted into the table with setItem():</para>
            <para>     QTableWidgetItem *newItem = new QTableWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;%1&amp;quot;).arg(</para>
            <para>         (row+1)*(column+1)));</para>
            <para>     tableWidget-&amp;gt;setItem(row, column, newItem);</para>
            <para>If you want to enable sorting in your table widget, do so after you have populated it with items, otherwise sorting may interfere with the insertion order (see setItem() for details).</para>
            <para>Tables can be given both horizontal and vertical headers. The simplest way to create the headers is to supply a list of strings to the setHorizontalHeaderLabels() and setVerticalHeaderLabels() functions. These will provide simple textual headers for the table's columns and rows. More sophisticated headers can be created from existing table items that are usually constructed outside the table. For example, we can construct a table item with an icon and aligned text, and use it as the header for a particular column:</para>
            <para>     QTableWidgetItem *cubesHeaderItem = new QTableWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;Cubes&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     cubesHeaderItem-&amp;gt;setIcon(QIcon(QPixmap(&amp;quot;:/Images/cubed.png&amp;quot;)));</para>
            <para>     cubesHeaderItem-&amp;gt;setTextAlignment(Qt::AlignVCenter);</para>
            <para>The number of rows in the table can be found with rowCount(), and the number of columns with columnCount(). The table can be cleared with the clear() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style table widget.	A Macintosh style table widget.	A Plastique style table widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTableWidgetItem, QTableView, and Model/View Programming.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new table view with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new table view with the given rows and columns, and with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCellActivated(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cell specified by row and column has been activated</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCellChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of the item in the cell specified by row and column has changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCellClicked(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was clicked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCellDoubleClicked(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is double clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was double clicked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCellEntered(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters a cell. The cell is specified by row and column.</para>
            <para>This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCellPressed(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is pressed. The row and column specified is the cell that was pressed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellWidget(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget displayed in the cell in the given row and column.</para>
            <para>Note: The table takes ownership of the widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setCellWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all items in the view. This will also remove all selections. The table dimensions stay the same.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.ClearContents">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all items not in the headers from the view. This will also remove all selections. The table dimensions stay the same.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.ClosePersistentEditor(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the persistent editor for item.</para>
            <para>See also openPersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.Column(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column for the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCurrentCellChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current cell changes. The cell specified by previousRow and previousColumn is the cell that previously had the focus, the cell specified by currentRow and currentColumn is the new current cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.CurrentColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column of the current item.</para>
            <para>See also currentRow() and setCurrentCell().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnCurrentItemChanged(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem,QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous item is the item that previously had the focus, current is the new current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.CurrentRow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row of the current item.</para>
            <para>See also currentColumn() and setCurrentCell().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.DropMimeData(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action in the given row and column. Returns true if the data and action can be handled by the model; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.EditItem(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts editing the item if it is editable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.FindItems(System.String,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds items that matches the text using the given flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.HorizontalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal header item for column, column, if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also setHorizontalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.IndexFromItem(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QModelIndex assocated with the given item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.InsertColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts an empty column into the table at column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.InsertRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts an empty row into the table at row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.IsItemSelected(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is selected, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTableWidgetItem::isSelected() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.Item(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item for the given row and column if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also setItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemActivated(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item has been activated</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item at the given point, or returns 0 if point is not covered by an item in the table widget.</para>
            <para>See also item().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item at the position equivalent to QPoint(ax, ay) in the table widget's coordinate system, or returns 0 if the specified point is not covered by an item in the table widget.</para>
            <para>See also item().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemChanged(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemClicked(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is clicked. The item specified is the item that was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemDoubleClicked(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is double clicked. The item specified is the item that was double clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemEntered(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered.</para>
            <para>This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemFromIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the QTableWidgetItem assocated with the given index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemPressed(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is pressed. The item specified is the item that was pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OnItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also selectedItems() and QTableWidgetItem::isSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.Items(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of pointers to the items contained in the data object. If the object was not created by a QTreeWidget in the same process, the list is empty.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTableWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an object that contains a serialized description of the specified items. The format used to describe the items is obtained from the mimeTypes() function.</para>
            <para>If the list of items is empty, 0 is returned rather than a serialized empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of tablewidget items.</para>
            <para>See also mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.OpenPersistentEditor(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens an editor for the give item. The editor remains open after editing.</para>
            <para>See also closePersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.RemoveCellWidget(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the widget set on the cell indicated by row and column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.RemoveColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the column column and all its items from the table.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.RemoveRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the row row and all its items from the table.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.Row(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row for the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.ScrollToItem(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item is visible. The hint parameter specifies more precisely where the item should be located after the operation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SelectedItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all selected items.</para>
            <para>This function returns a list of pointers to the contents of the selected cells. Use the selectedIndexes() function to retrieve the complete selection including empty cells.</para>
            <para>See also selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SelectedRanges">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all selected ranges.</para>
            <para>See also QTableWidgetSelectionRange.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetCellWidget(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given widget to be displayed in the cell in the given row and column, passing the ownership of the widget to the table.</para>
            <para>If cell widget A is replaced with cell widget B, cell widget A will be deleted. For example, in the code snippet below, the QLineEdit object will be deleted.</para>
            <para> setCellWidget(index, new QLineEdit);</para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para> setCellWidget(index, new QTextEdit);</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also cellWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetCurrentCell(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current cell to be the cell at position (row, column).</para>
            <para>Depending on the current selection mode, the cell may also be selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentItem(), currentRow(), and currentColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetCurrentCell(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current cell to be the cell at position (row, column).</para>
            <para>Depending on the current selection mode, the cell may also be selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentItem(), currentRow(), and currentColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetCurrentItem(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current item to item.</para>
            <para>Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected.</para>
            <para>See also currentItem() and setCurrentCell().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetHorizontalHeaderItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the horizontal header item for column column to item.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetHorizontalHeaderLabels(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the horizontal header labels using labels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetItem(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item for the given row and column to item.</para>
            <para>The table takes ownership of the item.</para>
            <para>Note that if sorting is enabled (see sortingEnabled) and column is the current sort column, the row will be moved to the sorted position determined by item.</para>
            <para>If you want to set several items of a particular row (say, by calling setItem() in a loop), you may want to turn off sorting before doing so, and turn it back on afterwards; this will allow you to use the same row argument for all items in the same row (i.e. setItem() will not move the row).</para>
            <para>See also item() and takeItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetItemSelected(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects or deselects item depending on select.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTableWidgetItem::setSelected() instead.</para>
            <para>See also isItemSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetRangeSelected(QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects or deselects the range depending on select.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetVerticalHeaderItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the vertical header item for row row to item.</para>
            <para>See also verticalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SetVerticalHeaderLabels(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the vertical header labels using labels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SortItems(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts all the rows in the table widget based on column and order.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the drop actions supported by this view.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::DropActions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.TakeHorizontalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the horizontal header item at column from the header without deleting it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.TakeItem(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item at row and column from the table without deleting it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.TakeVerticalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the vertical header item at row from the header without deleting it.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.VerticalHeaderItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical header item for row row.</para>
            <para>See also setVerticalHeaderItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.VisualColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visual column of the given logicalColumn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.VisualItemRect(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.VisualRow(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visual row of the given logicalRow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this QTableWidget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is pressed. The item specified is the item that was pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is clicked. The item specified is the item that was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemDoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is double clicked. The item specified is the item that was double clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item has been activated</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered.</para>
            <para>This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CurrentItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous item is the item that previously had the focus, current is the new current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also selectedItems() and QTableWidgetItem::isSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is pressed. The row and column specified is the cell that was pressed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was clicked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellDoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is double clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was double clicked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cell specified by row and column has been activated</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters a cell. The cell is specified by row and column.</para>
            <para>This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CellChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of the item in the cell specified by row and column has changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTableWidget.CurrentCellChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current cell changes. The cell specified by previousRow and previousColumn is the cell that previously had the focus, the cell specified by currentRow and currentColumn is the new current cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidget.CurrentItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current item.</para>
            <para>Sets the current item to item.</para>
            <para>Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidget.ItemPrototype">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item prototype used by the table.</para>
            <para>Sets the item prototype for the table to the specified item.</para>
            <para>The table widget will use the item prototype clone function when it needs to create a new table item. For example when the user is editing in an empty cell. This is useful when you have a QTableWidgetItem subclass and want to make sure that QTableWidget creates instances of your subclass.</para>
            <para>The table takes ownership of the prototype.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidget.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of rows in the table.</para>
            <para>By default, for a table constructed without row and column counts, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidget.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of columns in the table.</para>
            <para>By default, for a table constructed without row and column counts, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem">
            <summary>
            The QTableWidgetItem class provides an item for use with the QTableWidget class.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Table items are used to hold pieces of information for table widgets. Items usually contain text, icons, or checkboxes</para>
            <para>The QTableWidgetItem class is a convenience class that replaces the QTableItem class in Qt 3. It provides an item for use with the QTableWidget class.</para>
            <para>Top-level items are constructed without a parent then inserted at the position specified by a pair of row and column numbers:</para>
            <para>     QTableWidgetItem *newItem = new QTableWidgetItem(tr(&amp;quot;%1&amp;quot;).arg(</para>
            <para>         pow(row, column+1)));</para>
            <para>     tableWidget-&amp;gt;setItem(row, column, newItem);</para>
            <para>Each item can have its own background brush which is set with the setBackground() function. The current background brush can be found with background(). The text label for each item can be rendered with its own font and brush. These are specified with the setFont() and setForeground() functions, and read with font() and foreground().</para>
            <para>By default, items are enabled, editable, selectable, checkable, and can be used both as the source of a drag and drop operation and as a drop target. Each item's flags can be changed by calling setFlags() with the appropriate value (see Qt::ItemFlags). Checkable items can be checked and unchecked with the setCheckState() function. The corresponding checkState() function indicates whether the item is currently checked.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing</para>
            <para>When subclassing QTableWidgetItem to provide custom items, it is possible to define new types for them so that they can be distinguished from standard items. The constructors for subclasses that require this feature need to call the base class constructor with a new type value equal to or greater than UserType.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTableWidget, Model/View Programming, QListWidgetItem, and QTreeWidgetItem.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a copy of other. Note that type() and tableWidget() are not copied.</para>
            <para>This function is useful when reimplementing clone().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also data() and flags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a table item with the given icon and text.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a table item of the specified type that does not belong to any table.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.#ctor(System.String,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a table item with the given text.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Clone">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a copy of the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Column">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column of the item in the table. If the item is not in a table, this function will return -1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also row().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Data(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's data for the given role.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.IsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is selected, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.op_LessThan(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem,QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is less than the other item; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Read(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads the item from stream in.</para>
            <para>See also write().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Row">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the row of the item in the table. If the item is not in a table, this function will return -1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also column().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.SetData(System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item's data for the given role to the specified value.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::ItemDataRole and data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.SetSelected(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the selected state of the item to select.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.TableWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table widget that contains the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type passed to the QTableWidgetItem constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Write(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the item to stream out.</para>
            <para>See also read().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the table item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render the item's background.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's background brush to the specified brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.BackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use background() instead.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setBackground() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.CheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the checked state of the table item.</para>
            <para>Sets the check state of the table item to be state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Flags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the flags used to describe the item. These determine whether the item can be checked, edited, and selected.</para>
            <para>Sets the flags for the item to the given flags. These determine whether the item can be selected or modified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font used to render the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the font used to display the item's text to the given font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Foreground">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render the item's foreground (e.g. text).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's foreground brush to the specified brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Icon">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's icon.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's icon to the icon specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint set for the table item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Sets the size hint for the table item to be size. If no size hint is set, the item delegate will compute the size hint based on the item data.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.StatusTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's status tip.</para>
            <para>Sets the status tip for the table item to the text specified by statusTip. QTableWidget mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's text to the text specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.TextAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text alignment for the item's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the text alignment for the item's text to the alignment specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.TextColor">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use foreground() instead.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setForeground() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's tooltip.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's tooltip to the string specified by toolTip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.WhatsThis">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's &quot;What's This?&quot; help.</para>
            <para>Sets the item's &quot;What's This?&quot; help to the string specified by whatsThis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.ItemType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types that are used to describe table widget items.</para>
            <para>You can define new user types in QTableWidgetItem subclasses to ensure that custom items are treated specially.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.ItemType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The default type for table widget items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTableWidgetItem.ItemType.UserType">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimum value for custom types. Values below UserType are reserved by Qt.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange">
            <summary>
            The QTableWidgetSelectionRange class provides a way to interact with selection in a model without using model indexes and a selection model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QTableWidgetSelectionRange class stores the top left and bottom right rows and columns of a selection range in a table. The selections in the table may consist of several selection ranges.</para>
            <para>Note: If the item within the selection range is marked as not selectable, e.g., itemFlags() &amp;amp; Qt::ItemIsSelectable == 0 then it will not appear in the selection range.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTableWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an table selection range, i.e. a range whose rowCount() and columnCount() are 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.#ctor(QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a the table selection range by copying the given other table selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.#ctor(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs the table selection range from the given top, left, bottom and right table rows and columns.</para>
            <para>See also topRow(), leftColumn(), bottomRow(), and rightColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.BottomRow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the bottom row of the range.</para>
            <para>See also topRow(), rightColumn(), and rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in the range.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to rightColumn() - leftColumn() + 1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also rowCount(), leftColumn(), and rightColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.LeftColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the left column of the range.</para>
            <para>See also rightColumn(), topRow(), and columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.RightColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the right column of the range.</para>
            <para>See also leftColumn(), bottomRow(), and columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.RowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the range.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to bottomRow() - topRow() + 1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also columnCount(), topRow(), and bottomRow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.TopRow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the top row of the range.</para>
            <para>See also bottomRow(), leftColumn(), and rowCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTableWidgetSelectionRange.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the table selection range.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabletEvent">
            <summary>
            The QTabletEvent class contains parameters that describe a Tablet event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Tablet Events are generated from a Wacom tablet. Most of the time you will want to deal with events from the tablet as if they were events from a mouse; for example, you would retrieve the cursor position with x(), y(), pos(), globalX(), globalY(), and globalPos(). In some situations you may wish to retrieve the extra information provided by the tablet device driver; for example, you might want to do subpixeling with higher resolution coordinates or you may want to adjust color brightness based on pressure. QTabletEvent allows you to read the pressure(), the xTilt(), and yTilt(), as well as the type of device being used with device() (see TabletDevice). It can also give you the minimum and maximum values for each device's pressure and high resolution coordinates.</para>
            <para>A tablet event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. You should call QTabletEvent::accept() if you handle the tablet event; otherwise it will be sent to the parent widget. The exception are TabletEnterProximity and TabletLeaveProximity events, these are only sent to QApplication and don't check whether or not they are accepted.</para>
            <para>The QWidget::setEnabled() function can be used to enable or disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget.</para>
            <para>The event handler QWidget::tabletEvent() receives all three types of tablet events. Qt will first send a tabletEvent then, if it is not accepted, it will send a mouse event. This allows applications that don't utilize tablets to use a tablet like a mouse, while also enabling those who want to use both tablets and mouses differently.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Notes for X11 Users</para>
            <para>Qt uses the following hard-coded names to identify tablet devices from the xorg.conf file on X11 (apart from IRIX): 'stylus', 'pen', and 'eraser'. If the devices have other names, they will not be picked up Qt.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QTabletEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a tablet event of the given type.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter indicates where the event occurred in the widget; globalPos is the corresponding position in absolute coordinates. The hiResGlobalPos contains a high resolution measurement of the position.</para>
            <para>pressure contains the pressure exerted on the device.</para>
            <para>pointerType describes the type of pen that is being used.</para>
            <para>xTilt and yTilt contain the device's degree of tilt from the x and y axes respectively.</para>
            <para>keyState specifies which keyboard modifiers are pressed (e.g., Ctrl).</para>
            <para>The uniqueID parameter contains the unique ID for the current device.</para>
            <para>The z parameter contains the coordinate of the device on the tablet, this is usually given by a wheel on 4D mouse. If the device does not support a Z-axis, pass zero here.</para>
            <para>The tangentialPressure parameter contins the tangential pressure of an air brush. If the device does not support tangential pressure, pass 0 here.</para>
            <para>rotation contains the device's rotation in degrees. 4D mice support rotation. If the device does not support rotation, pass 0 here.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), globalPos(), device(), pressure(), xTilt(), yTilt(), uniqueId(), rotation(), tangentialPressure(), and z().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Double,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Double,System.Double,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,System.Int64)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a tablet event of the given type.</para>
            <para>The pos parameter indicates where the event occurred in the widget; globalPos is the corresponding position in absolute coordinates. The hiResGlobalPos contains a high resolution measurement of the position.</para>
            <para>pressure contains the pressure exerted on the device.</para>
            <para>pointerType describes the type of pen that is being used.</para>
            <para>xTilt and yTilt contain the device's degree of tilt from the x and y axes respectively.</para>
            <para>keyState specifies which keyboard modifiers are pressed (e.g., Ctrl).</para>
            <para>The uniqueID parameter contains the unique ID for the current device.</para>
            <para>The z parameter contains the coordinate of the device on the tablet, this is usually given by a wheel on 4D mouse. If the device does not support a Z-axis, pass zero here.</para>
            <para>The tangentialPressure parameter contins the tangential pressure of an air brush. If the device does not support tangential pressure, pass 0 here.</para>
            <para>rotation contains the device's rotation in degrees. 4D mice support rotation. If the device does not support rotation, pass 0 here.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), globalPos(), device(), pressure(), xTilt(), yTilt(), uniqueId(), rotation(), tangentialPressure(), and z().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of device that generated the event.</para>
            <para>See also TabletDevice.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.GlobalPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global position of the device at the time of the event. This is important on asynchronous windows systems like X11; whenever you move your widgets around in response to mouse events, globalPos() can differ significantly from the current position QCursor::pos().</para>
            <para>See also globalX(), globalY(), and hiResGlobalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.GlobalX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global x position of the mouse pointer at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalY(), globalPos(), and hiResGlobalX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.GlobalY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global y position of the tablet device at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalX(), globalPos(), and hiResGlobalY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.HiResGlobalPos">
            <summary>
            <para>The high precision coordinates delivered from the tablet expressed. Sub pixeling information is in the fractional part of the QPointF.</para>
            <para>See also globalPos(), hiResGlobalX(), and hiResGlobalY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.HiResGlobalX">
            <summary>
            <para>The high precision x position of the tablet device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.HiResGlobalY">
            <summary>
            <para>The high precision y position of the tablet device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.pointerType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of point that generated the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the device, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>If you move widgets around in response to mouse events, use globalPos() instead of this function.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.Pressure">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pressure for the device. 0.0 indicates that the stylus is not on the tablet, 1.0 indicates the maximum amount of pressure for the stylus.</para>
            <para>See also tangentialPressure().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.Rotation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rotation of the current device in degress. This is usually given by a 4D Mouse. If the device doesn't support rotation this value is always 0.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TangentialPressure">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tangential pressure for the device. This is typically given by a finger wheel on an airbrush tool. The range is from -1.0 to 1.0. 0.0 indicates a neutral position. Current airbrushes can only move in the positive direction from the neutrual position. If the device does not support tangential pressure, this value is always 0.0.</para>
            <para>See also pressure().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.UniqueId">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a unique ID for the current device, making it possible to differentiate between multiple devices being used at the same time on the tablet.</para>
            <para>Support of this feature is dependent on the tablet.</para>
            <para>Values for the same device may vary from OS to OS.</para>
            <para>Later versions of the Wacom driver for Linux will now report the ID information. If you have a tablet that supports unique ID and are not getting the information on Linux, consider upgrading your driver.</para>
            <para>As of Qt 4.2, the unique ID is the same regardless of the orientation of the pen. Earlier versions would report a different value when using the eraser-end versus the pen-end of the stylus on some OS's.</para>
            <para>See also pointerType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x position of the device, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also y() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.xTilt">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the angle between the device (a pen, for example) and the perpendicular in the direction of the x axis. Positive values are towards the tablet's physical right. The angle is in the range -60 to +60 degrees.</para>
            <para>See also yTilt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y position of the device, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also x() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.yTilt">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the angle between the device (a pen, for example) and the perpendicular in the direction of the y axis. Positive values are towards the bottom of the tablet. The angle is within the range -60 to +60 degrees.</para>
            <para>See also xTilt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTabletEvent.Z">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the z position of the device. Typically this is represented by a wheel on a 4D Mouse. If the device does not support a Z-axis, this value is always zero. This is not the same as pressure.</para>
            <para>See also pressure().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabletEvent.PointerType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum defines what type of point is generating the event.</para>
            <para>See also pointerType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.PointerType.Cursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Any puck-like device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.PointerType.Eraser">
            <summary>
            <para>Eraser end of a stylus-like device (the broad end of the pen).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.PointerType.Pen">
            <summary>
            <para>Tip end of a stylus-like device (the narrow end of the pen).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.PointerType.UnknownPointer">
            <summary>
            <para>An unknown device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum defines what type of device is generating the event.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice.Airbrush">
            <summary>
            <para>An airbrush</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice.FourDMouse">
            <summary>
            <para>A 4D Mouse.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice.NoDevice">
            <summary>
            <para>No device, or an unknown device.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice.Puck">
            <summary>
            <para>A Puck (a device that is similar to a flat mouse with a transparent circle with cross-hairs).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice.RotationStylus">
            <summary>
            <para>A special stylus that also knows about rotation (a 6D stylus).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTabletEvent.TabletDevice.Stylus">
            <summary>
            <para>A Stylus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTapAndHoldGesture">
            <summary>
            The QTapAndHoldGesture class describes a tap-and-hold (aka LongTap) gesture made by the user.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPanGesture and QPinchGesture.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTapAndHoldGesture.Timeout">
            <summary>
            <para>Gets the timeout, in milliseconds, before the gesture triggers.</para>
            <para>The recognizer will detect a touch down and and if timeout() later the touch is still down, it will trigger the QTapAndHoldGesture. The default value is 700 milliseconds.</para>
            <para>Set the timeout, in milliseconds, before the gesture triggers.</para>
            <para>The recognizer will detect a touch down and and if msecs later the touch is still down, it will trigger the QTapAndHoldGesture. The default value is 700 milliseconds.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTapAndHoldGesture.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position of the tap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTapGesture">
            <summary>
            The QTapGesture class describes a tap gesture made by the user.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of gesture handling in Qt and information on using gestures in your applications, see the Gestures Programming document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPanGesture and QPinchGesture.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTapGesture.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position of the tap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBlock">
            <summary>
            The QTextBlock class provides a container for text fragments in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A text block encapsulates a block or paragraph of text in a QTextDocument. QTextBlock provides read-only access to the block/paragraph structure of QTextDocuments. It is mainly of use if you want to implement your own layouts for the visual representation of a QTextDocument, or if you want to iterate over a document and write out the contents in your own custom format.</para>
            <para>Text blocks are created by their parent documents. If you need to create a new text block, or modify the contents of a document while examining its contents, use the cursor-based interface provided by QTextCursor instead.</para>
            <para>Each text block is located at a specific position() in a document(). The contents of the block can be obtained by using the text() function. The length() function determines the block's size within the document (including formatting characters). The visual properties of the block are determined by its text layout(), its charFormat(), and its blockFormat().</para>
            <para>The next() and previous() functions enable iteration over consecutive valid blocks in a document under the condition that the document is not modified by other means during the iteration process. Note that, although blocks are returned in sequence, adjacent blocks may come from different places in the document structure. The validity of a block can be determined by calling isValid().</para>
            <para>QTextBlock provides comparison operators to make it easier to work with blocks: operator==() compares two block for equality, operator!=() compares two blocks for inequality, and operator&amp;lt;() determines whether a block precedes another in the same document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextBlockFormat, QTextCharFormat, and QTextFragment.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the other text block's attributes to this text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.#ctor(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the other text block's attributes to this text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Begin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a text block iterator pointing to the beginning of the text block.</para>
            <para>See also end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.BlockFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QTextBlockFormat that describes block-specific properties.</para>
            <para>See also charFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.BlockFormatIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an index into the document's internal list of block formats for the text block's format.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::allFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.BlockNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of this block, or -1 if the block is invalid.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor::blockNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.CharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QTextCharFormat that describes the block's character format. The block's character format is used when inserting text into an empty block.</para>
            <para>See also blockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.CharFormatIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an index into the document's internal list of character formats for the text block's character format.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::allFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.ClearLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the QTextLayout that is used to lay out and display the block's contents.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also layout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Contains(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given position is located within the text block; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text document this text block belongs to, or 0 if the text block does not belong to any document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.End">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a text block iterator pointing to the end of the text block.</para>
            <para>See also begin(), next(), and previous().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.FirstLineNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first line number of this block, or -1 if the block is invalid. Unless the layout supports it, the line number is identical to the block number.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock::blockNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text block is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.IsVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the block is visible; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Layout">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QTextLayout that is used to lay out and display the block's contents.</para>
            <para>Note that the returned QTextLayout object can only be modified from the documentChanged implementation of a QAbstractTextDocumentLayout subclass. Any changes applied from the outside cause undefined behavior.</para>
            <para>See also clearLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the block in characters.</para>
            <para>Note: The length returned includes all formatting characters, for example, newline.</para>
            <para>See also text(), charFormat(), and blockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Next">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text block in the document after this block, or an empty text block if this is the last one.</para>
            <para>Note that the next block may be in a different frame or table to this block.</para>
            <para>See also previous(), begin(), and end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTextBlock,QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text block is different from the other text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.op_LessThan(QtGui.QTextBlock,QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text block occurs before the other text block in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.op_Equality(QtGui.QTextBlock,QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text block is the same as the other text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the block's first character within the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Previous">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text block in the document before this block, or an empty text block if this is the first one.</para>
            <para>Note that the next block may be in a different frame or table to this block.</para>
            <para>See also next(), begin(), and end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the block's visibility to visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also isVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the block's contents as plain text.</para>
            <para>See also length(), charFormat(), and blockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.TextDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the resolved text direction.</para>
            <para>If the block has no explicit direction set, it will resolve the direction from the blocks content. Returns either Qt::LeftToRight or Qt::RightToLeft.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QTextFormat::layoutDirection(), QString::isRightToLeft(), and Qt::LayoutDirection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.TextList">
            <summary>
            <para>If the block represents a list item, returns the list that the item belongs to; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlock.LineCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line count. Not all document layouts support this feature.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>Sets the line count to count.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlock.Revision">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the blocks revision.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets a blocks revision to rev.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlock.UserData">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to a QTextBlockUserData object if previously set with setUserData() or a null pointer.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Attaches the given data object to the text block.</para>
            <para>QTextBlockUserData can be used to store custom settings. The ownership is passed to the underlying text document, i.e. the provided QTextBlockUserData object will be deleted if the corresponding text block gets deleted. The user data object is not stored in the undo history, so it will not be available after undoing the deletion of a text block.</para>
            <para>For example, if you write a programming editor in an IDE, you may want to let your user set breakpoints visually in your code for an integrated debugger. In a programming editor a line of text usually corresponds to one QTextBlock. The QTextBlockUserData interface allows the developer to store data for each QTextBlock, like for example in which lines of the source code the user has a breakpoint set. Of course this could also be stored externally, but by storing it inside the QTextDocument, it will for example be automatically deleted when the user deletes the associated line. It's really just a way to store custom information in the QTextDocument without using custom properties in QTextFormat which would affect the undo/redo stack.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlock.UserState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the integer value previously set with setUserState() or -1.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>Stores the specified state integer value in the text block. This may be useful for example in a syntax highlighter to store a text parsing state.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBlock.iterator">
            <summary>
            The QTextBlock::iterator class provides an iterator for reading the contents of a QTextBlock.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A block consists of a sequence of text fragments. This class provides a way to iterate over these, and read their contents. It does not provide a way to modify the internal structure or contents of the block.</para>
            <para>An iterator can be constructed and used to access the fragments within a text block in the following way:</para>
            <para>     QTextBlock::iterator it;</para>
            <para>     for (it = currentBlock.begin(); !(it.atEnd()); ++it) {</para>
            <para>         QTextFragment currentFragment = it.fragment();</para>
            <para>         if (currentFragment.isValid())</para>
            <para>             processFragment(currentFragment);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextFragment.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.iterator.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an iterator for this text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.iterator.#ctor(QtGui.QTextBlock.iterator)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an iterator for this text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.iterator.AtEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the current item is the last item in the text block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlock.iterator.Fragment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text fragment the iterator currently points to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextBlockFormat class provides formatting information for blocks of text in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A document is composed of a list of blocks, represented by QTextBlock objects. Each block can contain an item of some kind, such as a paragraph of text, a table, a list, or an image. Every block has an associated QTextBlockFormat that specifies its characteristics.</para>
            <para>To cater for left-to-right and right-to-left languages you can set a block's direction with setDirection(). Paragraph alignment is set with setAlignment(). Margins are controlled by setTopMargin(), setBottomMargin(), setLeftMargin(), setRightMargin(). Overall indentation is set with setIndent(), the indentation of the first line with setTextIndent().</para>
            <para>Line spacing is set with setLineHeight() and retrieved via lineHeight() and lineHeightType(). The types of line spacing available are in the LineHeightTypes enum.</para>
            <para>Line breaking can be enabled and disabled with setNonBreakableLines().</para>
            <para>The brush used to paint the paragraph's background is set with setBackground(), and other aspects of the text's appearance can be customized by using the setProperty() function with the OutlinePen, ForegroundBrush, and BackgroundBrush QTextFormat::Property values.</para>
            <para>If a text block is part of a list, it can also have a list format that is accessible with the listFormat() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock and QTextCharFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextFormat class provides formatting information for a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QTextFormat is a generic class used for describing the format of parts of a QTextDocument. The derived classes QTextCharFormat, QTextBlockFormat, QTextListFormat, and QTextTableFormat are usually more useful, and describe the formatting that is applied to specific parts of the document.</para>
            <para>A format has a FormatType which specifies the kinds of text item it can format; e.g. a block of text, a list, a table, etc. A format also has various properties (some specific to particular format types), as described by the Property enum. Every property has a corresponding Property.</para>
            <para>The format type is given by type(), and the format can be tested with isCharFormat(), isBlockFormat(), isListFormat(), isTableFormat(), isFrameFormat(), and isImageFormat(). If the type is determined, it can be retrieved with toCharFormat(), toBlockFormat(), toListFormat(), toTableFormat(), toFrameFormat(), and toImageFormat().</para>
            <para>A format's properties can be set with the setProperty() functions, and retrieved with boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), and stringProperty() as appropriate. All the property IDs used in the format can be retrieved with allPropertyIds(). One format can be merged into another using merge().</para>
            <para>A format's object index can be set with setObjectIndex(), and retrieved with objectIndex(). These methods can be used to associate the format with a QTextObject. It is used to represent lists, frames, and tables inside the document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Rich Text Processing.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new text format with an InvalidFormat.</para>
            <para>See also FormatType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new text format with the same attributes as the other text format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new text format of the given type.</para>
            <para>See also FormatType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.BoolProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property specified by propertyId. If the property isn't of QTextFormat::Bool type, false is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), colorProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.BrushProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property given by propertyId; if the property isn't of QVariant::Brush type, Qt::NoBrush is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ClearBackground">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the brush used to paint the document's background. The default brush will be used.</para>
            <para>See also background(), setBackground(), and clearForeground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ClearForeground">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the brush used to paint the document's foreground. The default brush will be used.</para>
            <para>See also foreground(), setForeground(), and clearBackground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ClearProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the value of the property given by propertyId</para>
            <para>See also Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ColorProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property given by propertyId; if the property isn't of QVariant::Color type, an invalid color is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.DoubleProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property specified by propertyId. If the property isn't of QVariant::Double or QMetaType::Float type, 0 is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), stringProperty(), colorProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.HasProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text format has a property with the given propertyId; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also properties() and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IntProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property specified by propertyId. If the property is not of QTextFormat::Integer type, 0 is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), colorProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsBlockFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is a BlockFormat; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsCharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is a CharFormat; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsFrameFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is a FrameFormat; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsImageFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is an image format; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsListFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is a ListFormat; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsTableCellFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is a TableCellFormat; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsTableFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is a TableFormat; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the format is valid (i.e. is not InvalidFormat); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.LengthProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property given by propertyId.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), colorProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.LengthVectorProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property given by propertyId. If the property isn't of QTextFormat::LengthVector type, an empty length vector is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), colorProperty(), lengthProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.Merge(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Merges the other format with this format; where there are conflicts the other format takes precedence.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTextFormat,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is different from the other text format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.op_Equality(QtGui.QTextFormat,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text format is the same as the other text format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.PenProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property given by propertyId; if the property isn't of QVariant::Pen type, Qt::NoPen is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), stringProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.Properties">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a map with all properties of this text format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.property(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the property specified by the given propertyId.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty() and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.PropertyCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of properties stored in the format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.SetProperty(System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the property specified by the propertyId to the given value.</para>
            <para>See also property() and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.SetProperty(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTextLength})">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the value of the property given by propertyId to value.</para>
            <para>See also lengthVectorProperty() and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.StringProperty(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the property given by propertyId; if the property isn't of QVariant::String type, an empty string is returned instead.</para>
            <para>See also setProperty(), boolProperty(), intProperty(), doubleProperty(), colorProperty(), lengthProperty(), lengthVectorProperty(), and Property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToBlockFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as a block format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToCharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as a character format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToFrameFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as a frame format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToImageFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as an image format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToListFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as a list format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToTableCellFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as a table cell format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.ToTableFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns this format as a table format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of this format.</para>
            <para>See also FormatType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFormat.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this text format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFormat.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to paint the document's background.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush use to paint the document's background to the brush specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFormat.Foreground">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render foreground details, such as text, frame outlines, and table borders.</para>
            <para>Sets the foreground brush to the specified brush. The foreground brush is mostly used to render text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFormat.LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document's layout direction.</para>
            <para>Sets the document's layout direction to the specified direction.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFormat.ObjectIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the format object, or -1 if the format object is invalid.</para>
            <para>Sets the format object's object index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFormat.ObjectType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text format's object type.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's object type to type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the text item a QTextFormat object is formatting.</para>
            <para>See also QTextCharFormat, QTextBlockFormat, QTextListFormat, QTextTableFormat, and type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType.BlockFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The object formats a text block</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType.CharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The object formats a single character</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType.FrameFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The object formats a frame</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType.InvalidFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>An invalid format as created by the default constructor</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType.ListFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The object formats a list</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.FormatType.TableFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>The object formats a table</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFormat.ObjectTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes what kind of QTextObject this format is associated with.</para>
            <para>See also QTextObject, QTextTable, and QTextObject::format().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.ObjectTypes.UserObject">
            <summary>
            <para>The first object that can be used for application-specific purposes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFormat.PageBreakFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how page breaking is performed when printing. It maps to the corresponding css properties.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextBlockFormat::pageBreakPolicy(), QTextFrameFormat::pageBreakPolicy(), and PageBreakPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.PageBreakFlag.PageBreak_AlwaysAfter">
            <summary>
            <para>A new page is always started after the paragraph/table</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.PageBreakFlag.PageBreak_AlwaysBefore">
            <summary>
            <para>The page is always broken before the paragraph/table</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.PageBreakFlag.PageBreak_Auto">
            <summary>
            <para>The page break is determined automatically depending on the available space on the current page</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different properties a format can have.</para>
            <para>Paragraph and character properties</para>
            <para>Paragraph properties</para>
            <para>Character properties</para>
            <para>List properties</para>
            <para>Table and frame properties</para>
            <para>Table cell properties</para>
            <para>Image properties</para>
            <para>Selection properties</para>
            <para>Page break properties</para>
            <para>See also property() and setProperty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.BlockTrailingHorizontalRulerWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of a horizontal ruler element.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.CssFloat">
            <summary>
            <para>How a frame is located relative to the surrounding text</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontCapitalization">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the capitalization type that is to be applied to the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontHintingPreference">
            <summary>
            <para>Controls the use of hinting according to values of the QFont::HintingPreference enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontKerning">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies whether the font has kerning turned on.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontLetterSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the default spacing between individual letters in the font. The value is specified in percentage, with 100 as the default value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontSizeAdjustment">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the change in size given to the fontsize already set using FontPointSize or FontPixelSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontStyleHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Corresponds to the QFont::StyleHint property</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontStyleStrategy">
            <summary>
            <para>Corresponds to the QFont::StyleStrategy property</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>This property has been deprecated. Use QTextFormat::TextUnderlineStyle instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FontWordSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the default spacing between individual words. A positive value increases the word spacing by the corresponding pixels; a negative value decreases the spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FrameBorderStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>See the BorderStyle enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.FullWidthSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>When set on the characterFormat of a selection, the whole width of the text will be shown selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.LayoutDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>The layout direction of the text in the document (Qt::LayoutDirection).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.ListIndent">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the amount of indentation used for a list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.ListNumberPrefix">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines the text which is prepended to item numbers in numeric lists.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.ListNumberSuffix">
            <summary>
            <para>Defines the text which is appended to item numbers in numeric lists.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.ListStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the style used for the items in a list, described by values of the QTextListFormat::Style enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.ObjectIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>The index of the formatted object. See objectIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.PageBreakPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies how pages are broken. See the PageBreakFlag enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.TabPositions">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the tab positions. The tab positions are structs of QTextOption::Tab which are stored in a QList (internally, in a QList&lt;QVariant&gt;).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextFormat.Property.TextToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the (optional) tool tip to be displayed for a fragment of text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QTextBlockFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QTextBlockFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextBlockFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new QTextBlockFormat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this block format is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This returns the LineHeight property for the paragraph.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also LineHeightTypes, setLineHeight(), and lineHeightType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeight(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the lines in the paragraph based on the height of the script line given by scriptLineHeight and the specified scaling factor.</para>
            <para>The value that is returned is also dependent on the given LineHeightType of the paragraph as well as the LineHeight setting that has been set for the paragraph.</para>
            <para>The scaling is needed for heights that include a fixed number of pixels, to scale them appropriately for printing.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also LineHeightTypes, setLineHeight(), and lineHeightType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightType">
            <summary>
            <para>This returns the LineHeightType property of the paragraph.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also LineHeightTypes, setLineHeight(), and lineHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.SetLineHeight(System.Double,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the line height for the paragraph to the value given by height which is dependent on heightType in the way described by the LineHeightTypes enum.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also LineHeightTypes, lineHeight(), and lineHeightType().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's alignment.</para>
            <para>Sets the paragraph's alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.BottomMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's bottom margin.</para>
            <para>Sets the paragraph's bottom margin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.Indent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's indent.</para>
            <para>Sets the paragraph's indentation. Margins are set independently of indentation with setLeftMargin() and setTextIndent(). The indentation is an integer that is multiplied with the document-wide standard indent, resulting in the actual indent of the paragraph.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LeftMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's left margin.</para>
            <para>Sets the paragraph's left margin. Indentation can be applied separately with setIndent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.NonBreakableLines">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the lines in the paragraph are non-breakable; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If b is true, the lines in the paragraph are treated as non-breakable; otherwise they are breakable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.PageBreakPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set page break policy for the paragraph. The default is QTextFormat::PageBreak_Auto.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the page break policy for the paragraph to policy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.RightMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's right margin.</para>
            <para>Sets the paragraph's right margin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.TabPositions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of tab positions defined for the text block.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the tab positions for the text block to those specified by tabs.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.TextIndent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's text indent.</para>
            <para>Sets the indent for the first line in the block. This allows the first line of a paragraph to be indented differently to the other lines, enhancing the readability of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.TopMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the paragraph's top margin.</para>
            <para>Sets the paragraph's top margin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the various types of line spacing support paragraphs can have.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also lineHeight(), lineHeightType(), and setLineHeight().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightTypes.FixedHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This sets the line height to a fixed line height (in pixels).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightTypes.LineDistanceHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This adds the specified height between lines (in pixels).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightTypes.MinimumHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This sets the minimum line height (in pixels).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightTypes.ProportionalHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This sets the spacing proportional to the line (in percentage). For example, set to 200 for double spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextBlockFormat.LineHeightTypes.SingleHeight">
            <summary>
            <para>This is the default line height: single spacing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup">
            <summary>
            The QTextBlockGroup class provides a container for text blocks within a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Block groups can be used to organize blocks of text within a document. They maintain an up-to-date list of the text blocks that belong to them, even when text blocks are being edited.</para>
            <para>Each group has a parent document which is specified when the group is constructed.</para>
            <para>Text blocks can be inserted into a group with blockInserted(), and removed with blockRemoved(). If a block's format is changed, blockFormatChanged() is called.</para>
            <para>The list of blocks in the group is returned by blockList(). Note that the blocks in the list are not necessarily adjacent elements in the document; for example, the top-level items in a multi-level list will be separated by the items in lower levels of the list.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock and QTextDocument.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextObject">
            <summary>
            The QTextObject class is a base class for different kinds of objects that can group parts of a QTextDocument together.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The common grouping text objects are lists (QTextList), frames (QTextFrame), and tables (QTextTable). A text object has an associated format() and document().</para>
            <para>There are essentially two kinds of text objects: those that are used with blocks (block formats), and those that are used with characters (character formats). The first kind are derived from QTextBlockGroup, and the second kind from QTextFrame.</para>
            <para>You rarely need to use this class directly. When creating custom text objects, you will also need to reimplement QTextDocument::createObject() which acts as a factory method for creating text objects.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument and Text Object Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new QTextObject for the given document.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function should never be called directly, but only from QTextDocument::createObject().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document this object belongs to.</para>
            <para>See also format().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text object's format.</para>
            <para>See also setFormat() and document().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.FormatIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the object's format in the document's internal list of formats.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::allFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.ObjectIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the object index of this object. This can be used together with QTextFormat::setObjectIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.SetFormat(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text object's format.</para>
            <para>See also format().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObject.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the text object.</para>
            <para>Warning: Text objects are owned by the document, so you should never destroy them yourself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new new block group for the given document.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function should only be called from QTextDocument::createObject().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup.BlockFormatChanged(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called whenever the specified block of text is changed. The text block is a member of this group.</para>
            <para>The base class implementation does nothing.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup.BlockInserted(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the given block to the end of the group.</para>
            <para>Warning: If you reimplement this function you must call the base class implementation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup.BlockList">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a (possibly empty) list of all the blocks that are part of the block group.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup.BlockRemoved(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given block from the group; the block itself is not deleted, it simply isn't a member of this group anymore.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockGroup.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this block group; the blocks are not deleted, they simply don't belong to this block anymore.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBlockUserData">
            <summary>
            The QTextBlockUserData class is used to associate custom data with blocks of text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QTextBlockUserData provides an abstract interface for container classes that are used to associate application-specific user data with text blocks in a QTextDocument.</para>
            <para>Generally, subclasses of this class provide functions to allow data to be stored and retrieved, and instances are attached to blocks of text using QTextBlock::setUserData(). This makes it possible to store additional data per text block in a way that can be retrieved safely by the application.</para>
            <para>Each subclass should provide a reimplementation of the destructor to ensure that any private data is automatically cleaned up when user data objects are deleted.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBlockUserData.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the user data.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextBrowser">
            <summary>
            The QTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class extends QTextEdit (in read-only mode), adding some navigation functionality so that users can follow links in hypertext documents.</para>
            <para>If you want to provide your users with an editable rich text editor, use QTextEdit. If you want a text browser without hypertext navigation use QTextEdit, and use QTextEdit::setReadOnly() to disable editing. If you just need to display a small piece of rich text use QLabel.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Document Source and Contents</para>
            <para>The contents of QTextEdit are set with setHtml() or setPlainText(), but QTextBrowser also implements the setSource() function, making it possible to use a named document as the source text. The name is looked up in a list of search paths and in the directory of the current document factory.</para>
            <para>If a document name ends with an anchor (for example, &amp;quot;#anchor&amp;quot;), the text browser automatically scrolls to that position (using scrollToAnchor()). When the user clicks on a hyperlink, the browser will call setSource() itself with the link's href value as argument. You can track the current source by connecting to the sourceChanged() signal.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Navigation</para>
            <para>QTextBrowser provides backward() and forward() slots which you can use to implement Back and Forward buttons. The home() slot sets the text to the very first document displayed. The anchorClicked() signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. To override the default navigation behavior of the browser, call the setSource() function to supply new document text in a slot connected to this signal.</para>
            <para>If you want to load documents stored in the Qt resource system use qrc as the scheme in the URL to load. For example, for the document resource path :/docs/index.html use qrc:/docs/index.html as the URL with setSource(). To access local files, use file as the scheme in the URL.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextEdit and QTextDocument.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextEdit">
            <summary>
            The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and display both plain and rich text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Introduction and Concepts</para>
            <para>QTextEdit is an advanced WYSIWYG viewer/editor supporting rich text formatting using HTML-style tags. It is optimized to handle large documents and to respond quickly to user input.</para>
            <para>QTextEdit works on paragraphs and characters. A paragraph is a formatted string which is word-wrapped to fit into the width of the widget. By default when reading plain text, one newline signifies a paragraph. A document consists of zero or more paragraphs. The words in the paragraph are aligned in accordance with the paragraph's alignment. Paragraphs are separated by hard line breaks. Each character within a paragraph has its own attributes, for example, font and color.</para>
            <para>QTextEdit can display images, lists and tables. If the text is too large to view within the text edit's viewport, scroll bars will appear. The text edit can load both plain text and HTML files (a subset of HTML 3.2 and 4).</para>
            <para>If you just need to display a small piece of rich text use QLabel.</para>
            <para>The rich text support in Qt is designed to provide a fast, portable and efficient way to add reasonable online help facilities to applications, and to provide a basis for rich text editors. If you find the HTML support insufficient for your needs you may consider the use of QtWebKit, which provides a full-featured web browser widget.</para>
            <para>The shape of the mouse cursor on a QTextEdit is Qt::IBeamCursor by default. It can be changed through the viewport()'s cursor property.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using QTextEdit as a Display Widget</para>
            <para>QTextEdit can display a large HTML subset, including tables and images.</para>
            <para>The text is set or replaced using setHtml() which deletes any existing text and replaces it with the text passed in the setHtml() call. If you call setHtml() with legacy HTML, and then call toHtml(), the text that is returned may have different markup, but will render the same. The entire text can be deleted with clear().</para>
            <para>Text itself can be inserted using the QTextCursor class or using the convenience functions insertHtml(), insertPlainText(), append() or paste(). QTextCursor is also able to insert complex objects like tables or lists into the document, and it deals with creating selections and applying changes to selected text.</para>
            <para>By default the text edit wraps words at whitespace to fit within the text edit widget. The setLineWrapMode() function is used to specify the kind of line wrap you want, or NoWrap if you don't want any wrapping. Call setLineWrapMode() to set a fixed pixel width FixedPixelWidth, or character column (e.g. 80 column) FixedColumnWidth with the pixels or columns specified with setLineWrapColumnOrWidth(). If you use word wrap to the widget's width WidgetWidth, you can specify whether to break on whitespace or anywhere with setWordWrapMode().</para>
            <para>The find() function can be used to find and select a given string within the text.</para>
            <para>If you want to limit the total number of paragraphs in a QTextEdit, as for example it is often useful in a log viewer, then you can use QTextDocument's maximumBlockCount property for that.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Read-only Key Bindings</para>
            <para>When QTextEdit is used read-only the key bindings are limited to navigation, and text may only be selected with the mouse:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeypressesAction</para>
            <para>Up	Moves one line up.</para>
            <para>Down	Moves one line down.</para>
            <para>Left	Moves one character to the left.</para>
            <para>Right	Moves one character to the right.</para>
            <para>PageUp	Moves one (viewport) page up.</para>
            <para>PageDown	Moves one (viewport) page down.</para>
            <para>Home	Moves to the beginning of the text.</para>
            <para>End	Moves to the end of the text.</para>
            <para>Alt+Wheel	Scrolls the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel).</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Wheel	Zooms the text.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+A	Selects all text.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The text edit may be able to provide some meta-information. For example, the documentTitle() function will return the text from within HTML &amp;lt;title&amp;gt; tags.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Using QTextEdit as an Editor</para>
            <para>All the information about using QTextEdit as a display widget also applies here.</para>
            <para>The current char format's attributes are set with setFontItalic(), setFontWeight(), setFontUnderline(), setFontFamily(), setFontPointSize(), setTextColor() and setCurrentFont(). The current paragraph's alignment is set with setAlignment().</para>
            <para>Selection of text is handled by the QTextCursor class, which provides functionality for creating selections, retrieving the text contents or deleting selections. You can retrieve the object that corresponds with the user-visible cursor using the textCursor() method. If you want to set a selection in QTextEdit just create one on a QTextCursor object and then make that cursor the visible cursor using setTextCursor(). The selection can be copied to the clipboard with copy(), or cut to the clipboard with cut(). The entire text can be selected using selectAll().</para>
            <para>When the cursor is moved and the underlying formatting attributes change, the currentCharFormatChanged() signal is emitted to reflect the new attributes at the new cursor position.</para>
            <para>QTextEdit holds a QTextDocument object which can be retrieved using the document() method. You can also set your own document object using setDocument(). QTextDocument emits a textChanged() signal if the text changes and it also provides a isModified() function which will return true if the text has been modified since it was either loaded or since the last call to setModified with false as argument. In addition it provides methods for undo and redo.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Drag and Drop</para>
            <para>QTextEdit also supports custom drag and drop behavior. By default, QTextEdit will insert plain text, HTML and rich text when the user drops data of these MIME types onto a document. Reimplement canInsertFromMimeData() and insertFromMimeData() to add support for additional MIME types.</para>
            <para>For example, to allow the user to drag and drop an image onto a QTextEdit, you could the implement these functions in the following way:</para>
            <para> bool TextEdit::canInsertFromMimeData( const QMimeData *source ) const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (source-&amp;gt;hasImage())</para>
            <para>         return true;</para>
            <para>     else</para>
            <para>         return QTextEdit::canInsertFromMimeData(source);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>We add support for image MIME types by returning true. For all other MIME types, we use the default implementation.</para>
            <para> void TextEdit::insertFromMimeData( const QMimeData *source )</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (source-&amp;gt;hasImage())</para>
            <para>     {</para>
            <para>         QImage image = qvariant_cast&amp;lt;QImage&amp;gt;(source-&amp;gt;imageData());</para>
            <para>         QTextCursor cursor = this-&amp;gt;textCursor();</para>
            <para>         QTextDocument *document = this-&amp;gt;document();</para>
            <para>         document-&amp;gt;addResource(QTextDocument::ImageResource, QUrl(&amp;quot;image&amp;quot;), image);</para>
            <para>         cursor.insertImage(&amp;quot;image&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>We unpack the image from the QVariant held by the MIME source and insert it into the document as a resource.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Editing Key Bindings</para>
            <para>The list of key bindings which are implemented for editing:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeypressesAction</para>
            <para>Backspace	Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Delete	Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+C	Copy the selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Insert	Copy the selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+K	Deletes to the end of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+V	Pastes the clipboard text into text edit.</para>
            <para>Shift+Insert	Pastes the clipboard text into text edit.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+X	Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Shift+Delete	Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Z	Undoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Y	Redoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>Left	Moves the cursor one character to the left.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Left	Moves the cursor one word to the left.</para>
            <para>Right	Moves the cursor one character to the right.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Right	Moves the cursor one word to the right.</para>
            <para>Up	Moves the cursor one line up.</para>
            <para>Down	Moves the cursor one line down.</para>
            <para>PageUp	Moves the cursor one page up.</para>
            <para>PageDown	Moves the cursor one page down.</para>
            <para>Home	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+Home	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the text.</para>
            <para>End	Moves the cursor to the end of the line.</para>
            <para>Ctrl+End	Moves the cursor to the end of the text.</para>
            <para>Alt+Wheel	Scrolls the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>To select (mark) text hold down the Shift key whilst pressing one of the movement keystrokes, for example, Shift+Right will select the character to the right, and Shift+Ctrl+Right will select the word to the right, etc.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument, QTextCursor, Application Example, Syntax Highlighter Example, and Rich Text Processing.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextEdit with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTextEdit with parent parent. The text edit will display the text text. The text is interpreted as html.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.AnchorAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the reference of the anchor at position pos, or an empty string if no anchor exists at that point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Append(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends a new paragraph with text to the end of the text edit.</para>
            <para>Note: The new paragraph appended will have the same character format and block format as the current paragraph, determined by the position of the cursor.</para>
            <para>See also currentCharFormat() and QTextCursor::blockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CanInsertFromMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns true if the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, can be decoded and inserted into the document. It is called for example when during a drag operation the mouse enters this widget and it is necessary to determine whether it is possible to accept the drag and drop operation.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function to enable drag and drop support for additional MIME types.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CanPaste">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether text can be pasted from the clipboard into the textedit.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Deletes all the text in the text edit.</para>
            <para>Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.</para>
            <para>See also cut(), setPlainText(), and setHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnContextMenuEvent(QtGui.QContextMenuEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().</para>
            <para>Shows the standard context menu created with createStandardContextMenu().</para>
            <para>If you do not want the text edit to have a context menu, you can set its contextMenuPolicy to Qt::NoContextMenu. If you want to customize the context menu, reimplement this function. If you want to extend the standard context menu, reimplement this function, call createStandardContextMenu() and extend the menu returned.</para>
            <para>Information about the event is passed in the event object.</para>
            <para> void MyTextEdit::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QMenu *menu = createStandardContextMenu();</para>
            <para>     menu-&gt;addAction(tr(&quot;My Menu Item&quot;));</para>
            <para>     //...</para>
            <para>     menu-&gt;exec(event-&gt;globalPos());</para>
            <para>     delete menu;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Copy">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies any selected text to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnCopyAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.</para>
            <para>When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.</para>
            <para>If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CreateMimeDataFromSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns a new MIME data object to represent the contents of the text edit's current selection. It is called when the selection needs to be encapsulated into a new QMimeData object; for example, when a drag and drop operation is started, or when data is copyied to the clipboard.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function, note that the ownership of the returned QMimeData object is passed to the caller. The selection can be retrieved by using the textCursor() function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CreateStandardContextMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the text edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>We recommend that you use the createStandardContextMenu(QPoint) version instead which will enable the actions that are sensitive to where the user clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CreateStandardContextMenu(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the text edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler and it takes the position of where the mouse click was. This can enable actions that are sensitive to the position where the user clicked. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnCurrentCharFormatChanged(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current character format has changed, for example caused by a change of the cursor position.</para>
            <para>The new format is f.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CursorForPosition(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>returns a QTextCursor at position pos (in viewport coordinates).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnCursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CursorRect">
            <summary>
            <para>returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor of the text edit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.CursorRect(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Cut">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it from the text edit.</para>
            <para>If there is no selected text nothing happens.</para>
            <para>See also copy() and paste().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnDragEnterEvent(QtGui.QDragEnterEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnDragLeaveEvent(QtGui.QDragLeaveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.EnsureCursorVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if necessary.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Find(System.String,QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnFocusInEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnInputMethodEvent(QtGui.QInputMethodEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.InputMethodQuery(QtCore.Qt.InputMethodQuery)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.InsertFromMimeData(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function inserts the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, into the text edit at the current cursor position. It is called whenever text is inserted as the result of a clipboard paste operation, or when the text edit accepts data from a drag and drop operation.</para>
            <para>Reimplement this function to enable drag and drop support for additional MIME types.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.InsertHtml(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience slot that inserts text which is assumed to be of html formatting at the current cursor position.</para>
            <para>It is equivalent to:</para>
            <para> edit-&gt;textCursor().insertHtml(fragment);</para>
            <para>Note: When using this function with a style sheet, the style sheet will only apply to the current block in the document. In order to apply a style sheet throughout a document, use QTextDocument::setDefaultStyleSheet() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.InsertPlainText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience slot that inserts text at the current cursor position.</para>
            <para>It is equivalent to</para>
            <para> edit-&gt;textCursor().insertText(text);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnKeyReleaseEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.LoadResource(System.Int32,QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads the resource specified by the given type and name.</para>
            <para>This function is an extension of QTextDocument::loadResource().</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::loadResource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.MergeCurrentCharFormat(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Merges the properties specified in modifier into the current character format by calling QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the properties of modifier are directly applied to the selection.</para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.MoveCursor(QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation,QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor by performing the given operation.</para>
            <para>If mode is QTextCursor::KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor::movePosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events passed in event. It is usually unnecessary to reimplement this function in a subclass of QTextEdit.</para>
            <para>Warning: The underlying text document must not be modified from within a reimplementation of this function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Paste">
            <summary>
            <para>Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the current cursor position.</para>
            <para>If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.</para>
            <para>To change the behavior of this function, i.e. to modify what QTextEdit can paste and how it is being pasted, reimplement the virtual canInsertFromMimeData() and insertFromMimeData() functions.</para>
            <para>See also cut() and copy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Print(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Convenience function to print the text edit's document to the given printer. This is equivalent to calling the print method on the document directly except that this function also supports QPrinter::Selection as print range.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::print().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Redoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also undo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnRedoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.ScrollToAnchor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Scrolls the text edit so that the anchor with the given name is visible; does nothing if the name is empty, or is already visible, or isn't found.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects all text.</para>
            <para>See also copy(), cut(), and textCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.SetText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text edit's text. The text can be plain text or HTML and the text edit will try to guess the right format.</para>
            <para>Use setHtml() or setPlainText() directly to avoid text edit's guessing.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also text(), toPlainText(), and toHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Undoes the last operation.</para>
            <para>If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also redo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnUndoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.ZoomIn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.</para>
            <para>See also zoomOut().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.ZoomOut(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.</para>
            <para>See also zoomIn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextEdit.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.TextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.UndoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.RedoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.CurrentCharFormatChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current character format has changed, for example caused by a change of the cursor position.</para>
            <para>The new format is f.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.CopyAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.</para>
            <para>When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.</para>
            <para>If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextEdit.CursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the alignment of the current paragraph.</para>
            <para>Sets the alignment of the current paragraph to a. Valid alignments are Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight, Qt::AlignJustify and Qt::AlignCenter (which centers horizontally).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.CurrentCharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the char format that is used when inserting new text.</para>
            <para>Sets the char format that is be used when inserting new text to format by calling QTextCursor::setCharFormat() on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the char format is directly applied to the selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.CurrentFont">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font of the current format.</para>
            <para>Sets the font of the current format to f.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the underlying document.</para>
            <para>Makes document the new document of the text editor.</para>
            <para>Note: The editor does not take ownership of the document unless it is the document's parent object. The parent object of the provided document remains the owner of the object.</para>
            <para>The editor does not delete the current document, even if it is a child of the editor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.ExtraSelections">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns previously set extra selections.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>This function allows temporarily marking certain regions in the document with a given color, specified as selections. This can be useful for example in a programming editor to mark a whole line of text with a given background color to indicate the existence of a breakpoint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.FontFamily">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font family of the current format.</para>
            <para>Sets the font family of the current format to fontFamily.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.FontItalic">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font of the current format is italic; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If italic is true, sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets the current format to non-italic.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.FontPointSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the point size of the font of the current format.</para>
            <para>Sets the point size of the current format to s.</para>
            <para>Note that if s is zero or negative, the behavior of this function is not defined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.FontUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font of the current format is underlined; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If underline is true, sets the current format to underline; otherwise sets the current format to non-underline.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.FontWeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font weight of the current format.</para>
            <para>Sets the font weight of the current format to the given weight, where the value used is in the range defined by the QFont::Weight enum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.TextBackgroundColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text background color of the current format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the text background color of the current format to c.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.TextColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text color of the current format.</para>
            <para>Sets the text color of the current format to c.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.TextCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the QTextCursor that represents the currently visible cursor. Note that changes on the returned cursor do not affect QTextEdit's cursor; use setTextCursor() to update the visible cursor.</para>
            <para>Sets the visible cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.AutoFormatting">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the enabled set of auto formatting features.</para>
            <para>The value can be any combination of the values in the AutoFormattingFlag enum. The default is AutoNone. Choose AutoAll to enable all automatic formatting.</para>
            <para>Currently, the only automatic formatting feature provided is AutoBulletList; future versions of Qt may offer more.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.TabChangesFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether Tab changes focus or is accepted as input.</para>
            <para>In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the Tab key, as this breaks the focus chain. The default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.DocumentTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the title of the document parsed from the text.</para>
            <para>By default, for a newly-created, empty document, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.UndoRedoEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether undo and redo are enabled.</para>
            <para>Users are only able to undo or redo actions if this property is true, and if there is an action that can be undone (or redone).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.lineWrapMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the line wrap mode.</para>
            <para>The default mode is WidgetWidth which causes words to be wrapped at the right edge of the text edit. Wrapping occurs at whitespace, keeping whole words intact. If you want wrapping to occur within words use setWordWrapMode(). If you set a wrap mode of FixedPixelWidth or FixedColumnWidth you should also call setLineWrapColumnOrWidth() with the width you want.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.LineWrapColumnOrWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.</para>
            <para>If the wrap mode is FixedPixelWidth, the value is the number of pixels from the left edge of the text edit at which text should be wrapped. If the wrap mode is FixedColumnWidth, the value is the column number (in character columns) from the left edge of the text edit at which text should be wrapped.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.ReadOnly">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the text edit is read-only.</para>
            <para>In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.</para>
            <para>This property's default is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.Html">
            <summary>
            <para>This property provides an HTML interface to the text of the text edit.</para>
            <para>toHtml() returns the text of the text edit as html.</para>
            <para>setHtml() changes the text of the text edit. Any previous text is removed and the undo/redo history is cleared. The input text is interpreted as rich text in html format.</para>
            <para>Note: It is the responsibility of the caller to make sure that the text is correctly decoded when a QString containing HTML is created and passed to setHtml().</para>
            <para>By default, for a newly-created, empty document, this property contains text to describe an HTML 4.0 document with no body text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.PlainText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property gets and sets the text editor's contents as plain text. Previous contents are removed and undo/redo history is reset when the property is set.</para>
            <para>If the text edit has another content type, it will not be replaced by plain text if you call toPlainText(). The only exception to this is the non-break space, nbsp;, that will be converted into standard space.</para>
            <para>By default, for an editor with no contents, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.OverwriteMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether text entered by the user will overwrite existing text.</para>
            <para>As with many text editors, the text editor widget can be configured to insert or overwrite existing text with new text entered by the user.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, existing text is overwritten, character-for-character by new text; otherwise, text is inserted at the cursor position, displacing existing text.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false (new text does not overwrite existing text).</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.TabStopWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the tab stop width in pixels.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains a value of 80 pixels.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.AcceptRichText">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the text edit accepts rich text insertions by the user.</para>
            <para>When this propery is set to false text edit will accept only plain text input from the user. For example through clipboard or drag and drop.</para>
            <para>This property's default is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.CursorWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>This property specifies the width of the cursor in pixels. The default value is 1.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextEdit.ExtraSelection">
            <summary>
            The QTextEdit::ExtraSelection structure provides a way of specifying a character format for a given selection in a document
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.ExtraSelection.Cursor">
            <summary>
            <para>A cursor that contains a selection in a QTextDocument</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextEdit.ExtraSelection.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>A format that is used to specify a foreground or background brush/color for the selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextEdit.AutoFormattingFlag.AutoAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Apply all automatic formatting. Currently only automatic bullet lists are supported.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextEdit.AutoFormattingFlag.AutoBulletList">
            <summary>
            <para>Automatically create bullet lists (e.g. when the user enters an asterisk ('*') in the left most column, or presses Enter in an existing list item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextEdit.AutoFormattingFlag.AutoNone">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't do any automatic formatting.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextBrowser with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnAnchorClicked(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>Note that the browser will automatically handle navigation to the location specified by link unless the openLinks property is set to false or you call setSource() in a slot connected. This mechanism is used to override the default navigation features of the browser.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.Backward">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the document displayed to the previous document in the list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no previous document.</para>
            <para>See also forward() and backwardAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnBackwardAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the availability of backward() changes. available is false when the user is at home(); otherwise it is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.BackwardHistoryCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of locations backward in the history.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.ClearHistory">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the history of visited documents and disables the forward and backward navigation.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also backward() and forward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.FocusNextPrevChild(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnFocusOutEvent(QtGui.QFocusEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.Forward">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the document displayed to the next document in the list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no next document.</para>
            <para>See also backward() and forwardAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnForwardAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes. available is true after the user navigates backward() and false when the user navigates or goes forward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.ForwardHistoryCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of locations forward in the history.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnHighlighted(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not activated an anchor in the document. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnHighlighted(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Convenience signal that allows connecting to a slot that takes just a QString, like for example QStatusBar's message().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnHistoryChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the history changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also historyTitle() and historyUrl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.HistoryTitle(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the documentTitle() of the HistoryItem.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>InputReturn</para>
            <para>i &lt; 0	backward() history</para>
            <para>i == 0	current, see QTextBrowser::source()</para>
            <para>i &gt; 0	forward() history</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> backaction.setToolTip(browser.historyTitle(-1));</para>
            <para> forwardaction.setToolTip(browser.historyTitle(+1));</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.HistoryUrl(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the url of the HistoryItem.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>InputReturn</para>
            <para>i &lt; 0	backward() history</para>
            <para>i == 0	current, see QTextBrowser::source()</para>
            <para>i &gt; 0	forward() history</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.Home">
            <summary>
            <para>Changes the document displayed to be the first document from the history.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.IsBackwardAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text browser can go backward in the document history using backward().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also backwardAvailable() and backward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.IsForwardAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text browser can go forward in the document history using forward().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also forwardAvailable() and forward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            <para>The event ev is used to provide the following keyboard shortcuts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeypressAction</para>
            <para>Alt+Left Arrow	backward()</para>
            <para>Alt+Right Arrow	forward()</para>
            <para>Alt+Up Arrow	home()</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.LoadResource(System.Int32,QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QTextEdit::loadResource().</para>
            <para>This function is called when the document is loaded and for each image in the document. The type indicates the type of resource to be loaded. An invalid QVariant is returned if the resource cannot be loaded.</para>
            <para>The default implementation ignores type and tries to locate the resources by interpreting name as a file name. If it is not an absolute path it tries to find the file in the paths of the searchPaths property and in the same directory as the current source. On success, the result is a QVariant that stores a QByteArray with the contents of the file.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function, you can return other QVariant types. The table below shows which variant types are supported depending on the resource type:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ResourceTypeQVariant::Type</para>
            <para>QTextDocument::HtmlResource	QString or QByteArray</para>
            <para>QTextDocument::ImageResource	QImage, QPixmap or QByteArray</para>
            <para>QTextDocument::StyleSheetResource	QString or QByteArray</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.Reload">
            <summary>
            <para>Reloads the current set source.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OnSourceChanged(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the source has changed, src being the new source.</para>
            <para>Source changes happen both programmatically when calling setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextBrowser.BackwardAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the availability of backward() changes. available is false when the user is at home(); otherwise it is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextBrowser.ForwardAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes. available is true after the user navigates backward() and false when the user navigates or goes forward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextBrowser.HistoryChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the history changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also historyTitle() and historyUrl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextBrowser.SourceChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the source has changed, src being the new source.</para>
            <para>Source changes happen both programmatically when calling setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextBrowser.Highlighted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not activated an anchor in the document. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextBrowser.AnchorClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>Note that the browser will automatically handle navigation to the location specified by link unless the openLinks property is set to false or you call setSource() in a slot connected. This mechanism is used to override the default navigation features of the browser.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBrowser.Source">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the name of the displayed document.</para>
            <para>This is a an invalid url if no document is displayed or if the source is unknown.</para>
            <para>When setting this property QTextBrowser tries to find a document with the specified name in the paths of the searchPaths property and directory of the current source, unless the value is an absolute file path. It also checks for optional anchors and scrolls the document accordingly</para>
            <para>If the first tag in the document is &lt;qt type=detail&gt;, the document is displayed as a popup rather than as new document in the browser window itself. Otherwise, the document is displayed normally in the text browser with the text set to the contents of the named document with setHtml().</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty URL.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBrowser.SearchPaths">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the search paths used by the text browser to find supporting content.</para>
            <para>QTextBrowser uses this list to locate images and documents.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextBrowser.OpenLinks">
            <summary>
            <para>This property specifies whether QTextBrowser should automatically open links the user tries to activate by mouse or keyboard.</para>
            <para>Regardless of the value of this property the anchorClicked signal is always emitted.</para>
            <para>The default value is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCharFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextCharFormat class provides formatting information for characters in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The character format of text in a document specifies the visual properties of the text, as well as information about its role in a hypertext document.</para>
            <para>The font used can be set by supplying a font to the setFont() function, and each aspect of its appearance can be adjusted to give the desired effect. setFontFamily() and setFontPointSize() define the font's family (e.g. Times) and printed size; setFontWeight() and setFontItalic() provide control over the style of the font. setFontUnderline(), setFontOverline(), setFontStrikeOut(), and setFontFixedPitch() provide additional effects for text.</para>
            <para>The color is set with setForeground(). If the text is intended to be used as an anchor (for hyperlinks), this can be enabled with setAnchor(). The setAnchorHref() and setAnchorNames() functions are used to specify the information about the hyperlink's destination and the anchor's name.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextFormat, QTextBlockFormat, QTextTableFormat, and QTextListFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new character format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new character format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new character format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.IsAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text is formatted as an anchor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setAnchor(), setAnchorHref(), and setAnchorNames().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this character format is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.SetAnchor(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If anchor is true, text with this format represents an anchor, and is formatted in the appropriate way; otherwise the text is formatted normally. (Anchors are hyperlinks which are often shown underlined and in a different color from plain text.)</para>
            <para>The way the text is rendered is independent of whether or not the format has a valid anchor defined. Use setAnchorHref(), and optionally setAnchorNames() to create a hypertext link.</para>
            <para>See also isAnchor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.SetFontStyleHint(QtGui.QFont.StyleHint,QtGui.QFont.StyleStrategy)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the font style hint and strategy.</para>
            <para>Qt does not support style hints on X11 since this information is not provided by the window system.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also fontStyleHint(), setFont(), and QFont::setStyleHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.AnchorHref">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text format's hypertext link, or an empty string if none has been set.</para>
            <para>Sets the hypertext link for the text format to the given value. This is typically a URL like &quot;http://example.com/index.html&quot;.</para>
            <para>The anchor will be displayed with the value as its display text; if you want to display different text call setAnchorNames().</para>
            <para>To format the text as a hypertext link use setAnchor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.AnchorName">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use anchorNames() instead.</para>
            <para>Returns the anchor name associated with this text format, or an empty string if none has been set. If the anchor name is set, text with this format can be the destination of a hypertext link.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setAnchorNames() instead.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's anchor name. For the anchor to work as a hyperlink, the destination must be set with setAnchorHref() and the anchor must be enabled with setAnchor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.AnchorNames">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the anchor names associated with this text format, or an empty string list if none has been set. If the anchor names are set, text with this format can be the destination of a hypertext link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's anchor names. For the anchor to work as a hyperlink, the destination must be set with setAnchorHref() and the anchor must be enabled with setAnchor().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font for this character format.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's font.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontCapitalization">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current capitalization type of the font.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the capitalization of the text that apppears in this font to capitalization.</para>
            <para>A font's capitalization makes the text appear in the selected capitalization mode.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontFamily">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text format's font family.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's font family.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontFixedPitch">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text format's font is fixed pitch; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If fixedPitch is true, sets the text format's font to be fixed pitch; otherwise a non-fixed pitch font is used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontHintingPreference">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the hinting preference set for this text format.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the hinting preference of the text format's font to be hintingPreference.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontItalic">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text format's font is italic; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If italic is true, sets the text format's font to be italic; otherwise the font will be non-italic.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontKerning">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the font kerning is enabled.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>Enables kerning for this font if enable is true; otherwise disables it.</para>
            <para>When kerning is enabled, glyph metrics do not add up anymore, even for Latin text. In other words, the assumption that width('a') + width('b') is equal to width(&quot;ab&quot;) is not neccesairly true.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontLetterSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current letter spacing percentage.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the letter spacing of this format to the given spacing, in percent. A value of 100 indicates default spacing; a value of 200 doubles the amount of space a letter takes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontOverline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text format's font is overlined; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If overline is true, sets the text format's font to be overlined; otherwise the font is displayed non-overlined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontPointSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font size used to display text in this format.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's font size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontStrikeOut">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text format's font is struck out (has a horizontal line drawn through it); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If strikeOut is true, sets the text format's font with strike-out enabled (with a horizontal line through it); otherwise it is displayed without strikeout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontStyleStrategy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current font style strategy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>Sets the font style strategy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text format's font is underlined; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If underline is true, sets the text format's font to be underlined; otherwise it is displayed non-underlined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontWeight">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text format's font weight.</para>
            <para>Sets the text format's font weight to weight.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontWordSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current word spacing value.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the word spacing of this format to the given spacing, in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.TextOutline">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pen used to draw the outlines of characters in this format.</para>
            <para>Sets the pen used to draw the outlines of characters to the given pen.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.ToolTip">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tool tip that is displayed for a fragment of text.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the tool tip for a fragment of text to the given text.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineColor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the color used to underline the characters with this format.</para>
            <para>Sets the underline color used for the characters with this format to the color specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.underlineStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style of underlining the text.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the style of underlining the text to style.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.verticalAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vertical alignment used for characters with this format.</para>
            <para>Sets the vertical alignment used for the characters with this format to the alignment specified.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.FontStyleHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font style hint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setFontStyleHint() and font().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different ways drawing underlined text.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::PenStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.DashDotDotLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Underlines draw drawn using Qt::DashDotDotLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.DashDotLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Dashs and dots are drawn using Qt::DashDotLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.DashUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>Dashes are drawn using Qt::DashLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.DotLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Dots are drawn using Qt::DotLine;</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.NoUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>Text is draw without any underlining decoration.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.SingleUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>A line is drawn using Qt::SolidLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.SpellCheckUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>The underline is drawn depending on the QStyle::SH_SpellCeckUnderlineStyle style hint of the QApplication style. By default this is mapped to WaveUnderline, on Mac OS X it is mapped to DashDotLine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.UnderlineStyle.WaveUnderline">
            <summary>
            <para>The text is underlined using a wave shaped line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the ways that adjacent characters can be vertically aligned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignBaseline">
            <summary>
            <para>The base lines of the characters are aligned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignBottom">
            <summary>
            <para>The bottom edge of the object is vertically aligned with the base line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignMiddle">
            <summary>
            <para>The center of the object is vertically aligned with the base line. Currently, this is only implemented for inline objects.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignNormal">
            <summary>
            <para>Adjacent characters are positioned in the standard way for text in the writing system in use.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignSubScript">
            <summary>
            <para>Characters are placed below the base line for normal text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignSuperScript">
            <summary>
            <para>Characters are placed above the base line for normal text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCharFormat.VerticalAlignment.AlignTop">
            <summary>
            <para>The top edge of the object is vertically aligned with the base line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCursor">
            <summary>
            The QTextCursor class offers an API to access and modify QTextDocuments.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Text cursors are objects that are used to access and modify the contents and underlying structure of text documents via a programming interface that mimics the behavior of a cursor in a text editor. QTextCursor contains information about both the cursor's position within a QTextDocument and any selection that it has made.</para>
            <para>QTextCursor is modeled on the way a text cursor behaves in a text editor, providing a programmatic means of performing standard actions through the user interface. A document can be thought of as a single string of characters. The cursor's current position() then is always either between two consecutive characters in the string, or else before the very first character or after the very last character in the string. Documents can also contain tables, lists, images, and other objects in addition to text but, from the developer's point of view, the document can be treated as one long string. Some portions of that string can be considered to lie within particular blocks (e.g. paragraphs), or within a table's cell, or a list's item, or other structural elements. When we refer to &amp;quot;current character&amp;quot; we mean the character immediately before the cursor position() in the document. Similarly, the &amp;quot;current block&amp;quot; is the block that contains the cursor position().</para>
            <para>A QTextCursor also has an anchor() position. The text that is between the anchor() and the position() is the selection. If anchor() == position() there is no selection.</para>
            <para>The cursor position can be changed programmatically using setPosition() and movePosition(); the latter can also be used to select text. For selections see selectionStart(), selectionEnd(), hasSelection(), clearSelection(), and removeSelectedText().</para>
            <para>If the position() is at the start of a block atBlockStart() returns true; and if it is at the end of a block atBlockEnd() returns true. The format of the current character is returned by charFormat(), and the format of the current block is returned by blockFormat().</para>
            <para>Formatting can be applied to the current text document using the setCharFormat(), mergeCharFormat(), setBlockFormat() and mergeBlockFormat() functions. The 'set' functions will replace the cursor's current character or block format, while the 'merge' functions add the given format properties to the cursor's current format. If the cursor has a selection the given format is applied to the current selection. Note that when only parts of a block is selected the block format is applied to the entire block. The text at the current character position can be turned into a list using createList().</para>
            <para>Deletions can be achieved using deleteChar(), deletePreviousChar(), and removeSelectedText().</para>
            <para>Text strings can be inserted into the document with the insertText() function, blocks (representing new paragraphs) can be inserted with insertBlock().</para>
            <para>Existing fragments of text can be inserted with insertFragment() but, if you want to insert pieces of text in various formats, it is usually still easier to use insertText() and supply a character format.</para>
            <para>Various types of higher-level structure can also be inserted into the document with the cursor:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Lists are ordered sequences of block elements that are decorated with bullet points or symbols. These are inserted in a specified format with insertList().</para>
            <para>Tables are inserted with the insertTable() function, and can be given an optional format. These contain an array of cells that can be traversed using the cursor.</para>
            <para>Inline images are inserted with insertImage(). The image to be used can be specified in an image format, or by name.</para>
            <para>Frames are inserted by calling insertFrame() with a specified format.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Actions can be grouped (i.e. treated as a single action for undo/redo) using beginEditBlock() and endEditBlock().</para>
            <para>Cursor movements are limited to valid cursor positions. In Latin writing this is between any two consecutive characters in the text, before the first character, or after the last character. In some other writing systems cursor movements are limited to &amp;quot;clusters&amp;quot; (e.g. a syllable in Devanagari, or a base letter plus diacritics). Functions such as movePosition() and deleteChar() limit cursor movement to these valid positions.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Rich Text Processing.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor pointing to the beginning of the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFrame)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor pointing to the beginning of the frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a cursor pointing to the beginning of the block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.#ctor(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new cursor that is a copy of cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.Anchor">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the anchor position; this is the same as position() unless there is a selection in which case position() marks one end of the selection and anchor() marks the other end. Just like the cursor position, the anchor position is between characters.</para>
            <para>See also position(), setPosition(), movePosition(), selectionStart(), and selectionEnd().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.AtBlockEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor is at the end of a block; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also atBlockStart() and atEnd().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.AtBlockStart">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor is at the start of a block; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also atBlockEnd() and atStart().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.AtEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor is at the end of the document; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also atStart() and atBlockEnd().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.AtStart">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor is at the start of the document; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also atBlockStart() and atEnd().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.BeginEditBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates the start of a block of editing operations on the document that should appear as a single operation from an undo/redo point of view.</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> QTextCursor cursor(textDocument);</para>
            <para> cursor.beginEditBlock();</para>
            <para> cursor.insertText(&quot;Hello&quot;);</para>
            <para> cursor.insertText(&quot;World&quot;);</para>
            <para> cursor.endEditBlock();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> textDocument-&gt;undo();</para>
            <para>The call to undo() will cause both insertions to be undone, causing both &quot;World&quot; and &quot;Hello&quot; to be removed.</para>
            <para>It is possible to nest calls to beginEditBlock and endEditBlock. The top-most pair will determine the scope of the undo/redo operation.</para>
            <para>See also endEditBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.Block">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the block that contains the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.BlockNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of the block the cursor is in, or 0 if the cursor is invalid.</para>
            <para>Note that this function only makes sense in documents without complex objects such as tables or frames.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.ClearSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the current selection by setting the anchor to the cursor position.</para>
            <para>Note that it does not delete the text of the selection.</para>
            <para>See also removeSelectedText() and hasSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.ColumnNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the cursor within its containing line.</para>
            <para>Note that this is the column number relative to a wrapped line, not relative to the block (i.e. the paragraph).</para>
            <para>You probably want to call positionInBlock() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also positionInBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.CreateList(QtGui.QTextListFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a new list with the given format, and makes the current paragraph the cursor is in the first list item.</para>
            <para>See also insertList() and currentList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.CreateList(QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates and returns a new list with the given style, making the cursor's current paragraph the first list item.</para>
            <para>The style to be used is defined by the QTextListFormat::Style enum.</para>
            <para>See also insertList() and currentList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.CurrentFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current frame. Returns 0 if the cursor is invalid.</para>
            <para>See also insertFrame().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.CurrentList">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current list if the cursor position() is inside a block that is part of a list; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also insertList() and createList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.CurrentTable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current table if the cursor position() is inside a block that is part of a table; otherwise returns 0.</para>
            <para>See also insertTable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.DeleteChar">
            <summary>
            <para>If there is no selected text, deletes the character at the current cursor position; otherwise deletes the selected text.</para>
            <para>See also deletePreviousChar(), hasSelection(), and clearSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.DeletePreviousChar">
            <summary>
            <para>If there is no selected text, deletes the character before the current cursor position; otherwise deletes the selected text.</para>
            <para>See also deleteChar(), hasSelection(), and clearSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document this cursor is associated with.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.EndEditBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Indicates the end of a block of editing operations on the document that should appear as a single operation from an undo/redo point of view.</para>
            <para>See also beginEditBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.HasComplexSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor contains a selection that is not simply a range from selectionStart() to selectionEnd(); otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Complex selections are ones that span at least two cells in a table; their extent is specified by selectedTableCells().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.HasSelection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor contains a selection; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a new empty block at the cursor position() with the current blockFormat() and charFormat().</para>
            <para>See also setBlockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertBlock(QtGui.QTextBlockFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a new empty block at the cursor position() with block format format and the current charFormat() as block char format.</para>
            <para>See also setBlockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertBlock(QtGui.QTextBlockFormat,QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a new empty block at the cursor position() with block format format and charFormat as block char format.</para>
            <para>See also setBlockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertFragment(QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the text fragment at the current position().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertFrame(QtGui.QTextFrameFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a frame with the given format at the current cursor position(), moves the cursor position() inside the frame, and returns the frame.</para>
            <para>If the cursor holds a selection, the whole selection is moved inside the frame.</para>
            <para>See also hasSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertHtml(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the text html at the current position(). The text is interpreted as HTML.</para>
            <para>Note: When using this function with a style sheet, the style sheet will only apply to the current block in the document. In order to apply a style sheet throughout a document, use QTextDocument::setDefaultStyleSheet() instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertImage(QtGui.QTextImageFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the image defined by format at the current position().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertImage(QtGui.QTextImageFormat,QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Position)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts the image defined by the given format at the cursor's current position with the specified alignment.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also position().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertImage(QtGui.QImage,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the image defined by format at the current position().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertImage(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Convenience method for inserting the image with the given name at the current position().</para>
            <para> QImage img = ...</para>
            <para> textDocument-&gt;addResource(QTextDocument::ImageResource, QUrl(&quot;myimage&quot;), img);</para>
            <para> cursor.insertImage(&quot;myimage&quot;);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertList(QtGui.QTextListFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a new block at the current position and makes it the first list item of a newly created list with the given format. Returns the created list.</para>
            <para>See also currentList(), createList(), and insertBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertList(QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts a new block at the current position and makes it the first list item of a newly created list with the given style. Returns the created list.</para>
            <para>See also currentList(), createList(), and insertBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertTable(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a new table with the given number of rows and columns, inserts it at the current cursor position() in the document, and returns the table object. The cursor is moved to the beginning of the first cell.</para>
            <para>There must be at least one row and one column in the table.</para>
            <para>See also currentTable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertTable(System.Int32,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextTableFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new table with the given number of rows and columns in the specified format, inserts it at the current cursor position() in the document, and returns the table object. The cursor is moved to the beginning of the first cell.</para>
            <para>There must be at least one row and one column in the table.</para>
            <para>See also currentTable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts text at the current position, using the current character format.</para>
            <para>If there is a selection, the selection is deleted and replaced by text, for example:</para>
            <para> cursor.clearSelection();</para>
            <para> cursor.movePosition(QTextCursor::NextWord, QTextCursor::KeepAnchor);</para>
            <para> cursor.insertText(&quot;Hello World&quot;);</para>
            <para>This clears any existing selection, selects the word at the cursor (i.e. from position() forward), and replaces the selection with the phrase &quot;Hello World&quot;.</para>
            <para>Any ASCII linefeed characters (\n) in the inserted text are transformed into unicode block separators, corresponding to insertBlock() calls.</para>
            <para>See also charFormat() and hasSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.InsertText(System.String,QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts text at the current position with the given format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.IsCopyOf(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this cursor and other are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has moved since. This is much stricter than equality.</para>
            <para>See also operator=() and operator==().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor is null; otherwise returns false. A null cursor is created by the default constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.JoinPreviousEditBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Like beginEditBlock() indicates the start of a block of editing operations that should appear as a single operation for undo/redo. However unlike beginEditBlock() it does not start a new block but reverses the previous call to endEditBlock() and therefore makes following operations part of the previous edit block created.</para>
            <para>For example:</para>
            <para> QTextCursor cursor(textDocument);</para>
            <para> cursor.beginEditBlock();</para>
            <para> cursor.insertText(&quot;Hello&quot;);</para>
            <para> cursor.insertText(&quot;World&quot;);</para>
            <para> cursor.endEditBlock();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> ...</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> cursor.joinPreviousEditBlock();</para>
            <para> cursor.insertText(&quot;Hey&quot;);</para>
            <para> cursor.endEditBlock();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> textDocument-&gt;undo();</para>
            <para>The call to undo() will cause all three insertions to be undone.</para>
            <para>See also beginEditBlock() and endEditBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.MergeBlockCharFormat(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Modifies the block char format of the current block (or all blocks that are contained in the selection) with the block format specified by modifier.</para>
            <para>See also setBlockCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.MergeBlockFormat(QtGui.QTextBlockFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Modifies the block format of the current block (or all blocks that are contained in the selection) with the block format specified by modifier.</para>
            <para>See also setBlockFormat() and blockFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.MergeCharFormat(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Merges the cursor's current character format with the properties described by format modifier. If the cursor has a selection, this function applies all the properties set in modifier to all the character formats that are part of the selection.</para>
            <para>See also hasSelection() and setCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.MovePosition(QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation,QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor by performing the given operation n times, using the specified mode, and returns true if all operations were completed successfully; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>For example, if this function is repeatedly used to seek to the end of the next word, it will eventually fail when the end of the document is reached.</para>
            <para>By default, the move operation is performed once (n = 1).</para>
            <para>If mode is KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.</para>
            <para>See also setVisualNavigation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the other cursor is at a different position in the document as this cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.op_LessThan(QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the other cursor is positioned later in the document than this cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.op_LessThanOrEqual(QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the other cursor is positioned later or at the same position in the document as this cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.op_Equality(QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the other cursor is at the same position in the document as this cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.op_GreaterThan(QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the other cursor is positioned earlier in the document than this cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.op_GreaterThanOrEqual(QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the other cursor is positioned earlier or at the same position in the document as this cursor; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.PositionInBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the relative position of the cursor within the block. The cursor is positioned between characters.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to position() - block().position().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also position().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.RemoveSelectedText">
            <summary>
            <para>If there is a selection, its content is deleted; otherwise does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also hasSelection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.Select(QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects text in the document according to the given selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectedTableCells(System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@,System.Int32@)">
            <summary>
            <para>If the selection spans over table cells, firstRow is populated with the number of the first row in the selection, firstColumn with the number of the first column in the selection, and numRows and numColumns with the number of rows and columns in the selection. If the selection does not span any table cells the results are harmless but undefined.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectedText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current selection's text (which may be empty). This only returns the text, with no rich text formatting information. If you want a document fragment (i.e. formatted rich text) use selection() instead.</para>
            <para>Note: If the selection obtained from an editor spans a line break, the text will contain a Unicode U+2029 paragraph separator character instead of a newline \n character. Use QString::replace() to replace these characters with newlines.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.Selection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current selection (which may be empty) with all its formatting information. If you just want the selected text (i.e. plain text) use selectedText() instead.</para>
            <para>Note: Unlike QTextDocumentFragment::toPlainText(), selectedText() may include special unicode characters such as QChar::ParagraphSeparator.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocumentFragment::toPlainText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the end of the selection or position() if the cursor doesn't have a selection.</para>
            <para>See also selectionStart(), position(), and anchor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionStart">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the start of the selection or position() if the cursor doesn't have a selection.</para>
            <para>See also selectionEnd(), position(), and anchor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.SetPosition(System.Int32,QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the cursor to the absolute position in the document specified by pos using a MoveMode specified by m. The cursor is positioned between characters.</para>
            <para>See also position(), movePosition(), and anchor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextCursor.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QTextCursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.BlockCharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the block character format of the block the cursor is in.</para>
            <para>The block char format is the format used when inserting text at the beginning of an empty block.</para>
            <para>Sets the block char format of the current block (or all blocks that are contained in the selection) to format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.BlockFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the block format of the block the cursor is in.</para>
            <para>Sets the block format of the current block (or all blocks that are contained in the selection) to format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.CharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format of the character immediately before the cursor position(). If the cursor is positioned at the beginning of a text block that is not empty then the format of the character immediately after the cursor is returned.</para>
            <para>Sets the cursor's current character format to the given format. If the cursor has a selection, the given format is applied to the current selection.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.KeepPositionOnInsert">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns whether the cursor should keep its current position when text gets inserted at the position of the cursor.</para>
            <para>The default is false;</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>Defines whether the cursor should keep its current position when text gets inserted at the current position of the cursor.</para>
            <para>If b is true, the cursor keeps its current position when text gets inserted at the positing of the cursor. If b is false, the cursor moves along with the inserted text.</para>
            <para>The default is false.</para>
            <para>Note that a cursor always moves when text is inserted before the current position of the cursor, and it always keeps its position when text is inserted after the current position of the cursor.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.VerticalMovementX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the visual x position for vertical cursor movements.</para>
            <para>A value of -1 indicates no predefined x position. It will then be set automatically the next time the cursor moves up or down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>Sets the visual x position for vertical cursor movements to x.</para>
            <para>The vertical movement x position is cleared automatically when the cursor moves horizontally, and kept unchanged when the cursor moves vertically. The mechanism allows the cursor to move up and down on a visually straight line with proportional fonts, and to gently &quot;jump&quot; over short lines.</para>
            <para>A value of -1 indicates no predefined x position. It will then be set automatically the next time the cursor moves up or down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.VisualNavigation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the cursor does visual navigation; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Visual navigation means skipping over hidden text pragraphs. The default is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets visual navigation to b.</para>
            <para>Visual navigation means skipping over hidden text pragraphs. The default is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextCursor.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the absolute position of the cursor within the document. The cursor is positioned between characters.</para>
            <para>See also setPosition(), movePosition(), anchor(), and positionInBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode">
            <summary>
            <para>If the anchor() is kept where it is and the position() is moved, the text in between will be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode.KeepAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>Keeps the anchor where it is.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveMode.MoveAnchor">
            <summary>
            <para>Moves the anchor to the same position as the cursor itself.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation">
            <summary>
            <para>See also movePosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.Down">
            <summary>
            <para>Move down one line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.End">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the end of the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.EndOfBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the end of the current block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.EndOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the end of the current line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.EndOfWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the end of the current word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.Left">
            <summary>
            <para>Move left one character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.NextBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the beginning of the next block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.NextCell">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the beginning of the next table cell inside the current table. If the current cell is the last cell in the row, the cursor will move to the first cell in the next row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.NextCharacter">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the next character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.NextRow">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the first new cell of the next row in the current table.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.NextWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the next word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.NoMove">
            <summary>
            <para>Keep the cursor where it is</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.PreviousBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the start of the previous block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.PreviousCell">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the beginning of the previous table cell inside the current table. If the current cell is the first cell in the row, the cursor will move to the last cell in the previous row.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.PreviousCharacter">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the previous character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.PreviousRow">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the last cell of the previous row in the current table.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.PreviousWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the beginning of the previous word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.Right">
            <summary>
            <para>Move right one character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.Start">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the start of the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.StartOfBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the start of the current block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.StartOfLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the start of the current line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.StartOfWord">
            <summary>
            <para>Move to the start of the current word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.Up">
            <summary>
            <para>Move up one line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.WordLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Move left one word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.MoveOperation.WordRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Move right one word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types of selection that can be applied with the select() function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionType.BlockUnderCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the block of text under the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionType.Document">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the entire document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionType.LineUnderCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the line of text under the cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextCursor.SelectionType.WordUnderCursor">
            <summary>
            <para>Selects the word under the cursor. If the cursor is not positioned within a string of selectable characters, no text is selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextDocument">
            <summary>
            The QTextDocument class holds formatted text that can be viewed and edited using a QTextEdit.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QTextDocument is a container for structured rich text documents, providing support for styled text and various types of document elements, such as lists, tables, frames, and images. They can be created for use in a QTextEdit, or used independently.</para>
            <para>Each document element is described by an associated format object. Each format object is treated as a unique object by QTextDocuments, and can be passed to objectForFormat() to obtain the document element that it is applied to.</para>
            <para>A QTextDocument can be edited programmatically using a QTextCursor, and its contents can be examined by traversing the document structure. The entire document structure is stored as a hierarchy of document elements beneath the root frame, found with the rootFrame() function. Alternatively, if you just want to iterate over the textual contents of the document you can use begin(), end(), and findBlock() to retrieve text blocks that you can examine and iterate over.</para>
            <para>The layout of a document is determined by the documentLayout(); you can create your own QAbstractTextDocumentLayout subclass and set it using setDocumentLayout() if you want to use your own layout logic. The document's title and other meta-information can be obtained by calling the metaInformation() function. For documents that are exposed to users through the QTextEdit class, the document title is also available via the QTextEdit::documentTitle() function.</para>
            <para>The toPlainText() and toHtml() convenience functions allow you to retrieve the contents of the document as plain text and HTML. The document's text can be searched using the find() functions.</para>
            <para>Undo/redo of operations performed on the document can be controlled using the setUndoRedoEnabled() function. The undo/redo system can be controlled by an editor widget through the undo() and redo() slots; the document also provides contentsChanged(), undoAvailable(), and redoAvailable() signals that inform connected editor widgets about the state of the undo/redo system. The following are the undo/redo operations of a QTextDocument:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Insertion or removal of characters. A sequence of insertions or removals within the same text block are regarded as a single undo/redo operation.</para>
            <para>Insertion or removal of text blocks. Sequences of insertion or removals in a single operation (e.g., by selecting and then deleting text) are regarded as a single undo/redo operation.</para>
            <para>Text character format changes.</para>
            <para>Text block format changes.</para>
            <para>Text block group format changes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor, QTextEdit, Rich Text Processing, and Text Object Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextDocument with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTextDocument containing the plain (unformatted) text specified, and with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.AddResource(System.Int32,QtCore.QUrl,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the resource resource to the resource cache, using type and name as identifiers. type should be a value from QTextDocument::ResourceType.</para>
            <para>For example, you can add an image as a resource in order to reference it from within the document:</para>
            <para>     document-&gt;addResource(QTextDocument::ImageResource,</para>
            <para>         QUrl(&quot;mydata://image.png&quot;), QVariant(image));</para>
            <para>The image can be inserted into the document using the QTextCursor API:</para>
            <para>     QTextImageFormat imageFormat;</para>
            <para>     imageFormat.setName(&quot;mydata://image.png&quot;);</para>
            <para>     cursor.insertImage(imageFormat);</para>
            <para>Alternatively, you can insert images using the HTML img tag:</para>
            <para>     editor-&gt;append(&quot;&lt;img src=\&quot;mydata://image.png\&quot; /&gt;&quot;);</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.AdjustSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Adjusts the document to a reasonable size.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also idealWidth(), textWidth, and size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.AllFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a vector of text formats for all the formats used in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.AvailableRedoSteps">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of available redo steps.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isRedoAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.AvailableUndoSteps">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of available undo steps.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isUndoAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Begin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document's first text block.</para>
            <para>See also firstBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnBlockCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the total number of text blocks in the document changes. The value passed in newBlockCount is the new total.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.CharacterAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the character at position pos, or a null character if the position is out of range.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also characterCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.CharacterCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of characters of this document.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also blockCount() and characterAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.ClearUndoRedoStacks(QtGui.QTextDocument.Stacks)">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the stacks specified by stacksToClear.</para>
            <para>This method clears any commands on the undo stack, the redo stack, or both (the default). If commands are cleared, the appropriate signals are emitted, QTextDocument::undoAvailable() or QTextDocument::redoAvailable().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::undoAvailable() and QTextDocument::redoAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Clone(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new QTextDocument that is a copy of this text document. parent is the parent of the returned text document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnContentsChange(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            <para>Information is provided about the position of the character in the document where the change occurred, the number of characters removed (charsRemoved), and the number of characters added (charsAdded).</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted before the document's layout manager is notified about the change. This hook allows you to implement syntax highlighting for the document.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::documentChanged() and contentsChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnContentsChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            <para>See also contentsChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.CreateObject(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates and returns a new document object (a QTextObject), based on the given format.</para>
            <para>QTextObjects will always get created through this method, so you must reimplement it if you use custom text objects inside your document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnCursorPositionChanged(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of a cursor changed due to an editing operation. The cursor that changed is passed in cursor. If you need a signal when the cursor is moved with the arrow keys you can use the cursorPositionChanged() signal in QTextEdit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnDocumentLayoutChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a new document layout is set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setDocumentLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.DrawContents(QtGui.QPainter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the content of the document with painter p, clipped to rect. If rect is a null rectangle (default) then the document is painted unclipped.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.DrawContents(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the content of the document with painter p, clipped to rect. If rect is a null rectangle (default) then the document is painted unclipped.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.End">
            <summary>
            <para>This function returns a block to test for the end of the document while iterating over it.</para>
            <para>     for (QTextBlock it = doc-&gt;begin(); it != doc-&gt;end(); it = it.next())</para>
            <para>         cout &lt;&lt; it.text().toStdString() &lt;&lt; endl;</para>
            <para>The block returned is invalid and represents the block after the last block in the document. You can use lastBlock() to retrieve the last valid block of the document.</para>
            <para>See also lastBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Find(QtCore.QRegExp,QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds the next occurrence of the string, subString, in the document. The search starts at the position of the given cursor, and proceeds forwards through the document unless specified otherwise in the search options. The options control the type of search performed.</para>
            <para>Returns a cursor with the match selected if subString was found; otherwise returns a null cursor.</para>
            <para>If the given cursor has a selection, the search begins after the selection; otherwise it begins at the cursor's position.</para>
            <para>By default the search is case-sensitive, and can match text anywhere in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Find(QtCore.QRegExp,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds the next occurrence of the string, subString, in the document. The search starts at the position of the given cursor, and proceeds forwards through the document unless specified otherwise in the search options. The options control the type of search performed.</para>
            <para>Returns a cursor with the match selected if subString was found; otherwise returns a null cursor.</para>
            <para>If the given cursor has a selection, the search begins after the selection; otherwise it begins at the cursor's position.</para>
            <para>By default the search is case-sensitive, and can match text anywhere in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Find(System.String,QtGui.QTextCursor,QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds the next occurrence of the string, subString, in the document. The search starts at the position of the given cursor, and proceeds forwards through the document unless specified otherwise in the search options. The options control the type of search performed.</para>
            <para>Returns a cursor with the match selected if subString was found; otherwise returns a null cursor.</para>
            <para>If the given cursor has a selection, the search begins after the selection; otherwise it begins at the cursor's position.</para>
            <para>By default the search is case-sensitive, and can match text anywhere in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Find(System.String,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Finds the next occurrence of the string, subString, in the document. The search starts at the position of the given cursor, and proceeds forwards through the document unless specified otherwise in the search options. The options control the type of search performed.</para>
            <para>Returns a cursor with the match selected if subString was found; otherwise returns a null cursor.</para>
            <para>If the given cursor has a selection, the search begins after the selection; otherwise it begins at the cursor's position.</para>
            <para>By default the search is case-sensitive, and can match text anywhere in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindBlock(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text block that contains the pos-th character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindBlockByLineNumber(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text block that contains the specified lineNumber.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock::firstLineNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindBlockByNumber(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text block with the specified blockNumber.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock::blockNumber().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.FirstBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document's first text block.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.IdealWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the ideal width of the text document. The ideal width is the actually used width of the document without optional alignments taken into account. It is always &lt;= size().width().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also adjustSize() and textWidth.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the document is empty; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.IsRedoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if redo is available; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isUndoAvailable() and availableRedoSteps().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.IsUndoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if undo is available; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isRedoAvailable() and availableUndoSteps().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.LastBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document's last (valid) text block.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.LineCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of lines of this document (if the layout supports this). Otherwise, this is identical to the number of blocks.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also blockCount() and characterCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.LoadResource(System.Int32,QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>Loads data of the specified type from the resource with the given name.</para>
            <para>This function is called by the rich text engine to request data that isn't directly stored by QTextDocument, but still associated with it. For example, images are referenced indirectly by the name attribute of a QTextImageFormat object.</para>
            <para>When called by Qt, type is one of the values of QTextDocument::ResourceType.</para>
            <para>If the QTextDocument is a child object of a QTextEdit, QTextBrowser, or a QTextDocument itself then the default implementation tries to retrieve the data from the parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.MarkContentsDirty(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Marks the contents specified by the given position and length as &quot;dirty&quot;, informing the document that it needs to be laid out again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.metaInformation(QtGui.QTextDocument.MetaInformation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns meta information about the document of the type specified by info.</para>
            <para>See also setMetaInformation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnModificationChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Object(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text object associated with the given objectIndex.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.ObjectForFormat(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text object associated with the format f.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.PageCount">
            <summary>
            <para>returns the number of pages in this document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Print(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>Prints the document to the given printer. The QPrinter must be set up before being used with this function.</para>
            <para>This is only a convenience method to print the whole document to the printer.</para>
            <para>If the document is already paginated through a specified height in the pageSize() property it is printed as-is.</para>
            <para>If the document is not paginated, like for example a document used in a QTextEdit, then a temporary copy of the document is created and the copy is broken into multiple pages according to the size of the QPrinter's paperRect(). By default a 2 cm margin is set around the document contents. In addition the current page number is printed at the bottom of each page.</para>
            <para>Note that QPrinter::Selection is not supported as print range with this function since the selection is a property of QTextCursor. If you have a QTextEdit associated with your QTextDocument then you can use QTextEdit's print() function because QTextEdit has access to the user's selection.</para>
            <para>See also QTextEdit::print().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Redoes the last editing operation on the document if redo is available.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Redo(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Redoes the last editing operation on the document if redo is available.</para>
            <para>The provided cursor is positioned at the end of the location where the edition operation was redone.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnRedoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Resource(System.Int32,QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns data of the specified type from the resource with the given name.</para>
            <para>This function is called by the rich text engine to request data that isn't directly stored by QTextDocument, but still associated with it. For example, images are referenced indirectly by the name attribute of a QTextImageFormat object.</para>
            <para>Resources are cached internally in the document. If a resource can not be found in the cache, loadResource is called to try to load the resource. loadResource should then use addResource to add the resource to the cache.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::ResourceType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Revision">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document's revision (if undo is enabled).</para>
            <para>The revision is guaranteed to increase when a document that is not modified is edited.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock::revision() and isModified().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.RootFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document's root frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.SetHtml(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replaces the entire contents of the document with the given HTML-formatted text in the html string.</para>
            <para>The HTML formatting is respected as much as possible; for example, &quot;&lt;b&gt;bold&lt;/b&gt; text&quot; will produce text where the first word has a font weight that gives it a bold appearance: &quot;bold text&quot;.</para>
            <para>Note: It is the responsibility of the caller to make sure that the text is correctly decoded when a QString containing HTML is created and passed to setHtml().</para>
            <para>See also setPlainText() and Supported HTML Subset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.SetMetaInformation(QtGui.QTextDocument.MetaInformation,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the document's meta information of the type specified by info to the given string.</para>
            <para>See also metaInformation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.SetPlainText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Replaces the entire contents of the document with the given plain text.</para>
            <para>See also setHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.ToHtml">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string containing an HTML representation of the document.</para>
            <para>The encoding parameter specifies the value for the charset attribute in the html header. For example if 'utf-8' is specified then the beginning of the generated html will look like this:</para>
            <para> &lt;html&gt;&lt;head&gt;&lt;meta http-equiv=&quot;Content-Type&quot; content=&quot;text/html; charset=utf-8&quot;&gt;&lt;/head&gt;&lt;body&gt;...</para>
            <para>If no encoding is specified then no such meta information is generated.</para>
            <para>If you later on convert the returned html string into a byte array for transmission over a network or when saving to disk you should specify the encoding you're going to use for the conversion to a byte array here.</para>
            <para>See also Supported HTML Subset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.ToHtml(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a string containing an HTML representation of the document.</para>
            <para>The encoding parameter specifies the value for the charset attribute in the html header. For example if 'utf-8' is specified then the beginning of the generated html will look like this:</para>
            <para> &lt;html&gt;&lt;head&gt;&lt;meta http-equiv=&quot;Content-Type&quot; content=&quot;text/html; charset=utf-8&quot;&gt;&lt;/head&gt;&lt;body&gt;...</para>
            <para>If no encoding is specified then no such meta information is generated.</para>
            <para>If you later on convert the returned html string into a byte array for transmission over a network or when saving to disk you should specify the encoding you're going to use for the conversion to a byte array here.</para>
            <para>See also Supported HTML Subset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.ToPlainText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the plain text contained in the document. If you want formatting information use a QTextCursor instead.</para>
            <para>See also toHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Undo(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Undoes the last editing operation on the document if undo is available. The provided cursor is positioned at the end of the location where the edition operation was undone.</para>
            <para>See the Qt Undo Framework documentation for details.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also undoAvailable() and isUndoRedoEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnUndoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            <para>See the Qt Undo Framework documentation for details.</para>
            <para>See also undo() and isUndoRedoEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.OnUndoCommandAdded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted every time a new level of undo is added to the QTextDocument.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocument.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.ContentsChange">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            <para>Information is provided about the position of the character in the document where the change occurred, the number of characters removed (charsRemoved), and the number of characters added (charsAdded).</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted before the document's layout manager is notified about the change. This hook allows you to implement syntax highlighting for the document.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::documentChanged() and contentsChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.ContentsChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            <para>See also contentsChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.UndoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            <para>See the Qt Undo Framework documentation for details.</para>
            <para>See also undo() and isUndoRedoEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.RedoAvailable">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.UndoCommandAdded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted every time a new level of undo is added to the QTextDocument.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.ModificationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.CursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of a cursor changed due to an editing operation. The cursor that changed is passed in cursor. If you need a signal when the cursor is moved with the arrow keys you can use the cursorPositionChanged() signal in QTextEdit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.BlockCountChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the total number of text blocks in the document changes. The value passed in newBlockCount is the new total.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTextDocument.DocumentLayoutChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a new document layout is set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setDocumentLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.DefaultCursorMoveStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>The default cursor movement style is used by all QTextCursor objects created from the document. The default is Qt::LogicalMoveStyle.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the default cursor movement style to the given style.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.DocumentLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document layout for this document.</para>
            <para>Sets the document to use the given layout. The previous layout is deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.UndoRedoEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether undo/redo are enabled for this document.</para>
            <para>This defaults to true. If disabled, the undo stack is cleared and no items will be added to it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.Modified">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the document has been modified by the user.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.PageSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the page size that should be used for laying out the document.</para>
            <para>By default, for a newly-created, empty document, this property contains an undefined size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.DefaultFont">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the default font used to display the document's text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.UseDesignMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the document uses design metrics of fonts to improve the accuracy of text layout.</para>
            <para>If this property is set to true, the layout will use design metrics. Otherwise, the metrics of the paint device as set on QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::setPaintDevice() will be used.</para>
            <para>Using design metrics makes a layout have a width that is no longer dependent on hinting and pixel-rounding. This means that WYSIWYG text layout becomes possible because the width scales much more linearly based on paintdevice metrics than it would otherwise.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocument.MaximumBlockCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property specifies the limit for blocks in the document.</para>
            <para>Specifies the maximum number of blocks the document may have. If there are more blocks in the document that specified with this property blocks are removed from the beginning of the document.</para>
            <para>A negative or zero value specifies that the document may contain an unlimited amount of blocks.</para>
            <para>The default value is 0.</para>
            <para>Note that setting this property will apply the limit immediately to the document contents.</para>
            <para>Setting this property also disables the undo redo history.</para>
            <para>This property is undefined in documents with tables or frames.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the options available to QTextDocument's find function. The options can be OR-ed together from the following list:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag.FindBackward">
            <summary>
            <para>Search backwards instead of forwards.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag.FindCaseSensitively">
            <summary>
            <para>By default find works case insensitive. Specifying this option changes the behaviour to a case sensitive find operation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.FindFlag.FindWholeWords">
            <summary>
            <para>Makes find match only complete words.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextDocument.MetaInformation">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different types of meta information that can be added to a document.</para>
            <para>See also metaInformation() and setMetaInformation().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.MetaInformation.DocumentTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>The title of the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.MetaInformation.DocumentUrl">
            <summary>
            <para>The url of the document. The loadResource() function uses this url as the base when loading relative resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextDocument.ResourceType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types of resources that can be loaded by QTextDocument's loadResource() function.</para>
            <para>See also loadResource().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.ResourceType.HtmlResource">
            <summary>
            <para>The resource contains HTML.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.ResourceType.ImageResource">
            <summary>
            <para>The resource contains image data. Currently supported data types are QVariant::Pixmap and QVariant::Image. If the corresponding variant is of type QVariant::ByteArray then Qt attempts to load the image using QImage::loadFromData. QVariant::Icon is currently not supported. The icon needs to be converted to one of the supported types first, for example using QIcon::pixmap.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.ResourceType.StyleSheetResource">
            <summary>
            <para>The resource contains CSS.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.ResourceType.UserResource">
            <summary>
            <para>The first available value for user defined resource types.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.Stacks.RedoStack">
            <summary>
            <para>The redo stack.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.Stacks.UndoAndRedoStacks">
            <summary>
            <para>Both the undo and redo stacks.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextDocument.Stacks.UndoStack">
            <summary>
            <para>The undo stack.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment">
            <summary>
            The QTextDocumentFragment class represents a piece of formatted text from a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QTextDocumentFragment is a fragment of rich text, that can be inserted into a QTextDocument. A document fragment can be created from a QTextDocument, from a QTextCursor's selection, or from another document fragment. Document fragments can also be created by the static functions, fromPlainText() and fromHtml().</para>
            <para>The contents of a document fragment can be obtained as plain text by using the toPlainText() function, or it can be obtained as HTML with toHtml().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextDocumentFragment.</para>
            <para>See also isEmpty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the given document into a QTextDocumentFragment. Note that the QTextDocumentFragment only stores the document contents, not meta information like the document's title.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.#ctor(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a QTextDocumentFragment from the cursor's selection. If the cursor doesn't have a selection, the created fragment is empty.</para>
            <para>See also isEmpty() and QTextCursor::selection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copy constructor. Creates a copy of the other fragment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.FromHtml(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QTextDocumentFragment based on the arbitrary piece of HTML in the given text. The formatting is preserved as much as possible; for example, &quot;&lt;b&gt;bold&lt;/b&gt;&quot; will become a document fragment with the text &quot;bold&quot; with a bold character format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.FromHtml(System.String,QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QTextDocumentFragment based on the arbitrary piece of HTML in the given text. The formatting is preserved as much as possible; for example, &quot;&lt;b&gt;bold&lt;/b&gt;&quot; will become a document fragment with the text &quot;bold&quot; with a bold character format.</para>
            <para>If the provided HTML contains references to external resources such as imported style sheets, then they will be loaded through the resourceProvider.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.FromPlainText(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a document fragment that contains the given plainText.</para>
            <para>When inserting such a fragment into a QTextDocument the current char format of the QTextCursor used for insertion is used as format for the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the fragment is empty; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.ToHtml">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.ToHtml(QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the contents of the document fragment as HTML, using the specified encoding (e.g., &quot;UTF-8&quot;, &quot;ISO 8859-1&quot;).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also toPlainText(), QTextDocument::toHtml(), and QTextCodec.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.ToPlainText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the document fragment's text as plain text (i.e. with no formatting information).</para>
            <para>See also toHtml().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the document fragment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter">
            <summary>
            The QTextDocumentWriter class provides a format-independent interface for writing a QTextDocument to files or other devices.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>To write a document, construct a QTextDocumentWriter object with either a file name or a device object, and specify the document format to be written. You can construct a writer and set the format using setFormat() later.</para>
            <para>Call write() to write the document to the device. If the document is successfully written, this function returns true. However, if an error occurs when writing the document, it will return false.</para>
            <para>Call supportedDocumentFormats() for a list of formats that QTextDocumentWriter can write.</para>
            <para>Since the capabilities of the supported output formats vary considerably, the writer simply outputs the appropriate subset of objects for each format. This typically includes the formatted text and images contained in a document.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextDocumentWriter object. Before writing, you must call setFormat() to set a document format, then setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.#ctor(QtCore.QIODevice,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTextDocumentWriter object to write to the given device in the document format specified by format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextDocumentWriter object. Before writing, you must call setFormat() to set a document format, then setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.#ctor(System.String,QtCore.QByteArray)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty QTextDocumentWriter object. Before writing, you must call setFormat() to set a document format, then setDevice() or setFileName().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.SupportedDocumentFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of document formats supported by QTextDocumentWriter.</para>
            <para>By default, Qt can write the following formats:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>FormatDescription</para>
            <para>plaintext	Plain text</para>
            <para>HTML	HyperText Markup Language</para>
            <para>ODF	OpenDocument Format</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also setFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.Write(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the given document to the assigned device or file and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.Write(QtGui.QTextDocumentFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the document fragment specified by fragment to the assigned device or file and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QTextDocumentWriter object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.Codec">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the codec that is currently assigned to the writer.</para>
            <para>Sets the codec for this stream to codec. The codec is used for encoding any data that is written. By default, QTextDocumentWriter uses UTF-8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.Device">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the device currently assigned, or 0 if no device has been assigned.</para>
            <para>Sets the writer's device to the device specified. If a device has already been set, the old device is removed but otherwise left unchanged.</para>
            <para>If the device is not already open, QTextDocumentWriter will attempt to open the device in QIODevice::WriteOnly mode by calling open().</para>
            <para>Note: This will not work for certain devices, such as QProcess, QTcpSocket and QUdpSocket, where some configuration is required before the device can be opened.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.FileName">
            <summary>
            <para>If the currently assigned device is a QFile, or if setFileName() has been called, this function returns the name of the file to be written to. In all other cases, it returns an empty string.</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the file to be written to fileName. Internally, QTextDocumentWriter will create a QFile and open it in QIODevice::WriteOnly mode, and use this file when writing the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextDocumentWriter.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the format used for writing documents.</para>
            <para>Sets the format used to write documents to the format specified. format is a case insensitive text string. For example:</para>
            <para>         QTextDocumentWriter writer;</para>
            <para>         writer.setFormat(&quot;odf&quot;); // same as writer.setFormat(&quot;ODF&quot;);</para>
            <para>You can call supportedDocumentFormats() for the full list of formats QTextDocumentWriter supports.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFragment">
            <summary>
            The QTextFragment class holds a piece of text in a QTextDocument with a single QTextCharFormat.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A text fragment describes a piece of text that is stored with a single character format. Text in which the character format changes can be represented by sequences of text fragments with different formats.</para>
            <para>If the user edits the text in a fragment and introduces a different character format, the fragment's text will be split at each point where the format changes, and new fragments will be created. For example, changing the style of some text in the middle of a sentence will cause the fragment to be broken into three separate fragments: the first and third with the same format as before, and the second with the new style. The first fragment will contain the text from the beginning of the sentence, the second will contain the text from the middle, and the third takes the text from the end of the sentence.</para>
            <para>A fragment's text and character format can be obtained with the text() and charFormat() functions. The length() function gives the length of the text in the fragment. position() gives the position in the document of the start of the fragment. To determine whether the fragment contains a particular position within the document, use the contains() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument and Rich Text Document Structure.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new empty text fragment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copies the content (text and format) of the other text fragment to this text fragment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.CharFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text fragment's character format.</para>
            <para>See also text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.CharFormatIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an index into the document's internal list of character formats for the text fragment's character format.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::allFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.Contains(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text fragment contains the text at the given position in the document; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.GlyphRuns">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the glyphs of this text fragment. The positions of the glyphs are relative to the position of the QTextBlock's layout.</para>
            <para>See also QGlyphRun, QTextBlock::layout(), QTextLayout::position(), and QPainter::drawGlyphRun().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this is a valid text fragment (i.e. has a valid position in a document); otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of characters in the text fragment.</para>
            <para>See also text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTextFragment,QtGui.QTextFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text fragment is different (at a different position) from the other text fragment; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.op_LessThan(QtGui.QTextFragment,QtGui.QTextFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text fragment appears earlier in the document than the other text fragment; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.op_Equality(QtGui.QTextFragment,QtGui.QTextFragment)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text fragment is the same (at the same position) as the other text fragment; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of this text fragment in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFragment.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text fragment's as plain text.</para>
            <para>See also length() and charFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFrame">
            <summary>
            The QTextFrame class represents a frame in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Text frames provide structure for the text in a document. They are used as generic containers for other document elements. Frames are usually created by using QTextCursor::insertFrame().</para>
            <para>Frames can be used to create hierarchical structures in rich text documents. Each document has a root frame (QTextDocument::rootFrame()), and each frame beneath the root frame has a parent frame and a (possibly empty) list of child frames. The parent frame can be found with parentFrame(), and the childFrames() function provides a list of child frames.</para>
            <para>Each frame contains at least one text block to enable text cursors to insert new document elements within. As a result, the QTextFrame::iterator class is used to traverse both the blocks and child frames within a given frame. The first and last child elements in the frame can be found with begin() and end().</para>
            <para>A frame also has a format (specified using QTextFrameFormat) which can be set with setFormat() and read with format().</para>
            <para>Text cursors can be obtained that point to the first and last valid cursor positions within a frame; use the firstCursorPosition() and lastCursorPosition() functions for this. The frame's extent in the document can be found with firstPosition() and lastPosition().</para>
            <para>You can iterate over a frame's contents using the QTextFrame::iterator class: this provides read-only access to its internal list of text blocks and child frames.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextCursor and QTextDocument.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.#ctor(QtGui.QTextDocument)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new empty frame for the text document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.Begin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an iterator pointing to the first document element inside the frame. Please see the document STL-style-Iterators for more information.</para>
            <para>See also end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.ChildFrames">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a (possibly empty) list of the frame's child frames.</para>
            <para>See also parentFrame().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.End">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an iterator pointing to the position past the last document element inside the frame. Please see the document STL-Style Iterators for more information.</para>
            <para>See also begin().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.FirstCursorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first cursor position inside the frame.</para>
            <para>See also lastCursorPosition(), firstPosition(), and lastPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.FirstPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first document position inside the frame.</para>
            <para>See also lastPosition(), firstCursorPosition(), and lastCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.LastCursorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last cursor position inside the frame.</para>
            <para>See also firstCursorPosition(), firstPosition(), and lastPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.LastPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last document position inside the frame.</para>
            <para>See also firstPosition(), firstCursorPosition(), and lastCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.ParentFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the frame's parent frame. If the frame is the root frame of a document, this will return 0.</para>
            <para>See also childFrames() and QTextDocument::rootFrame().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the frame, and removes it from the document's layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrame.FrameFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the frame's format.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid iterator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid iterator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator.AtEnd">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the current item is the last item in the text frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator.CurrentBlock">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current block the iterator points to. If the iterator points to a child frame, the returned block is invalid.</para>
            <para>See also currentFrame().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator.CurrentFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current frame pointed to by the iterator, or 0 if the iterator currently points to a block.</para>
            <para>See also currentBlock().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrame.iterator.ParentFrame">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the parent frame of the current frame.</para>
            <para>See also currentFrame() and QTextFrame::parentFrame().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextFrameFormat class provides formatting information for frames in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A text frame groups together one or more blocks of text, providing a layer of structure larger than the paragraph. The format of a frame specifies how it is rendered and positioned on the screen. It does not directly specify the behavior of the text formatting within, but provides constraints on the layout of its children.</para>
            <para>The frame format defines the width() and height() of the frame on the screen. Each frame can have a border() that surrounds its contents with a rectangular box. The border is surrounded by a margin() around the frame, and the contents of the frame are kept separate from the border by the frame's padding(). This scheme is similar to the box model used by Cascading Style Sheets for HTML pages.</para>
            <para>The position() of a frame is set using setPosition() and determines how it is located relative to the surrounding text.</para>
            <para>The validity of a QTextFrameFormat object can be determined with the isValid() function.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextFrame and QTextBlockFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text frame format object with the default properties.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text frame format object with the default properties.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFrameFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text frame format object with the default properties.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the format description is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.SetHeight(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the frame's height.</para>
            <para>See also height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.SetWidth(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the frame's border rectangle's width.</para>
            <para>See also width() and QTextLength.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Border">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the border in pixels.</para>
            <para>Sets the width (in pixels) of the frame's border.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.BorderBrush">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used for the frame's border.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the brush used for the frame's border.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.borderStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the style of the frame's border.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the style of the frame's border.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.BottomMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's bottom margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's bottom margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the frame's border rectangle.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's height.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.LeftMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's left margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's left margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Margin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's external margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's margin in pixels. This method also sets the left, right, top and bottom margins of the frame to the same value. The individual margins override the general margin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Padding">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's internal padding in pixels.</para>
            <para>Sets the width of the frame's internal padding in pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.PageBreakPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the currently set page break policy for the frame/table. The default is QTextFormat::PageBreak_Auto.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the page break policy for the frame/table to policy.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.position">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the positioning policy for frames with this frame format.</para>
            <para>Sets the policy for positioning frames with this frame format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.RightMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's right margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's right margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.TopMargin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's top margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's top margin in pixels.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the frame's border rectangle.</para>
            <para>Sets the frame's border rectangle's width.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.BorderStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes different border styles for the text frame.</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also borderStyle() and FrameBorderStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextFrameFormat.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how a frame is located relative to the surrounding text.</para>
            <para>See also position() and CssFloat.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextImageFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextImageFormat class provides formatting information for images in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Inline images are represented by an object replacement character (0xFFFC in Unicode) which has an associated QTextImageFormat. The image format specifies a name with setName() that is used to locate the image. The size of the rectangle that the image will occupy is specified using setWidth() and setHeight().</para>
            <para>Images can be supplied in any format for which Qt has an image reader, so SVG drawings can be included alongside PNG, TIFF and other bitmap formats.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QImage and QImageReader.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new image format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new image format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextImageFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new image format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this image format is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the rectangle occupied by the image.</para>
            <para>Sets the height of the rectangle occupied by the image.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.Name">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the name of the image. The name refers to an entry in the application's resources file.</para>
            <para>Sets the name of the image. The name is used to locate the image in the application's resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextImageFormat.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the rectangle occupied by the image.</para>
            <para>Sets the width of the rectangle occupied by the image.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextInlineObject">
            <summary>
            The QTextInlineObject class represents an inline object in a QTextLayout.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is only used if the text layout is used to lay out parts of a QTextDocument.</para>
            <para>The inline object has various attributes that can be set, for example using, setWidth(), setAscent(), and setDescent(). The rectangle it occupies is given by rect(), and its direction by isRightToLeft(). Its position in the text layout is given by at(), and its format is given by format().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new inline object for the item at position i in the text engine e.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.#ctor(QtGui.QTextInlineObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a new inline object for the item at position i in the text engine e.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns format of the inline object within the text layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.FormatIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an integer describing the format of the inline object within the text layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inline object's total height. This is equal to ascent() + descent() + 1.</para>
            <para>See also ascent(), descent(), width(), and rect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this inline object is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inline object's rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also ascent(), descent(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.TextDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns if the object should be laid out right-to-left or left-to-right.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.TextPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>The position of the inline object within the text layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.Ascent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inline object's ascent.</para>
            <para>Sets the inline object's ascent to a.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.Descent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inline object's descent.</para>
            <para>Sets the inline object's decent to d.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextInlineObject.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the inline object's width.</para>
            <para>Sets the inline object's width to w.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextItem">
            <summary>
            The QTextItem class provides all the information required to draw text in a custom paint engine.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When you reimplement your own paint engine, you must reimplement QPaintEngine::drawTextItem(), a function that takes a QTextItem as one of its arguments.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextItem.Ascent">
            <summary>
            <para>Corresponds to the ascent of the piece of text that is drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextItem.Descent">
            <summary>
            <para>Corresponds to the descent of the piece of text that is drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextItem.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font that should be used to draw the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextItem.RenderFlags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the render flags used.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextItem.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text that should be drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextItem.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the total width of the text to be drawn.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextItem.RenderFlag.Overline">
            <summary>
            <para>Paint a line above the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextItem.RenderFlag.RightToLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Render the text from right to left.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextItem.RenderFlag.StrikeOut">
            <summary>
            <para>Paint a line through the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextItem.RenderFlag.Underline">
            <summary>
            <para>Paint a line under the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextLayout">
            <summary>
            The QTextLayout class is used to lay out and render text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>It offers many features expected from a modern text layout engine, including Unicode compliant rendering, line breaking and handling of cursor positioning. It can also produce and render device independent layout, something that is important for WYSIWYG applications.</para>
            <para>The class has a rather low level API and unless you intend to implement your own text rendering for some specialized widget, you probably won't need to use it directly.</para>
            <para>QTextLayout can be used with both plain and rich text.</para>
            <para>QTextLayout can be used to create a sequence of QTextLine instances with given widths and can position them independently on the screen. Once the layout is done, these lines can be drawn on a paint device.</para>
            <para>The text to be laid out can be provided in the constructor or set with setText().</para>
            <para>The layout can be seen as a sequence of QTextLine objects; use createLine() to create a QTextLine instance, and lineAt() or lineForTextPosition() to retrieve created lines.</para>
            <para>Here is a code snippet that demonstrates the layout phase:</para>
            <para> int leading = fontMetrics.leading();</para>
            <para> qreal height = 0;</para>
            <para> textLayout.beginLayout();</para>
            <para> while (1) {</para>
            <para>     QTextLine line = textLayout.createLine();</para>
            <para>     if (!line.isValid())</para>
            <para>         break;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     line.setLineWidth(lineWidth);</para>
            <para>     height += leading;</para>
            <para>     line.setPosition(QPointF(0, height));</para>
            <para>     height += line.height();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para> textLayout.endLayout();</para>
            <para>The text can then be rendered by calling the layout's draw() function:</para>
            <para> QPainter painter(this);</para>
            <para> textLayout.draw(&amp;amp;painter, QPoint(0, 0));</para>
            <para>For a given position in the text you can find a valid cursor position with isValidCursorPosition(), nextCursorPosition(), and previousCursorPosition().</para>
            <para>The QTextLayout itself can be positioned with setPosition(); it has a boundingRect(), and a minimumWidth() and a maximumWidth().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QStaticText.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty text layout.</para>
            <para>See also setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty text layout.</para>
            <para>See also setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text layout to lay out the given text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QFont,QtGui.IQPaintDevice)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text layout to lay out the given text with the specified font.</para>
            <para>All the metric and layout calculations will be done in terms of the paint device, paintdevice. If paintdevice is 0 the calculations will be done in screen metrics.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.BeginLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Begins the layout process.</para>
            <para>See also endLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.BoundingRect">
            <summary>
            <para>The smallest rectangle that contains all the lines in the layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.ClearAdditionalFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the list of additional formats supported by the text layout.</para>
            <para>See also additionalFormats() and setAdditionalFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.ClearLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the line information in the layout. After having called this function, lineCount() returns 0.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.CreateLine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a new text line to be laid out if there is text to be inserted into the layout; otherwise returns an invalid text line.</para>
            <para>The text layout creates a new line object that starts after the last line in the layout, or at the beginning if the layout is empty. The layout maintains an internal cursor, and each line is filled with text from the cursor position onwards when the QTextLine::setLineWidth() function is called.</para>
            <para>Once QTextLine::setLineWidth() is called, a new line can be created and filled with text. Repeating this process will lay out the whole block of text contained in the QTextLayout. If there is no text left to be inserted into the layout, the QTextLine returned will not be valid (isValid() will return false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.Draw(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the whole layout on the painter p at the position specified by pos. The rendered layout includes the given selections and is clipped within the rectangle specified by clip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.Draw(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPointF,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange})">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the whole layout on the painter p at the position specified by pos. The rendered layout includes the given selections and is clipped within the rectangle specified by clip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.Draw(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPointF,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange},QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the whole layout on the painter p at the position specified by pos. The rendered layout includes the given selections and is clipped within the rectangle specified by clip.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.DrawCursor(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Draws a text cursor with the current pen at the given position using the painter specified. The corresponding position within the text is specified by cursorPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.DrawCursor(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPointF,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a text cursor with the current pen and the specified width at the given position using the painter specified. The corresponding position within the text is specified by cursorPosition.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.EndLayout">
            <summary>
            <para>Ends the layout process.</para>
            <para>See also beginLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.GlyphRuns">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the glyph indexes and positions for all glyphs in this QTextLayout. This is an expensive function, and should not be called in a time sensitive context.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also draw() and QPainter::drawGlyphRun().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.IsValidCursorPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if position pos is a valid cursor position.</para>
            <para>In a Unicode context some positions in the text are not valid cursor positions, because the position is inside a Unicode surrogate or a grapheme cluster.</para>
            <para>A grapheme cluster is a sequence of two or more Unicode characters that form one indivisible entity on the screen. For example the latin character `&#196;' can be represented in Unicode by two characters, `A' (0x41), and the combining diaresis (0x308). A text cursor can only validly be positioned before or after these two characters, never between them since that wouldn't make sense. In indic languages every syllable forms a grapheme cluster.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.LeftCursorPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor position to the left of oldPos, next to it. The position is dependent on the visual position of characters, after bi-directional reordering.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also rightCursorPosition() and previousCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.LineAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the i-th line of text in this text layout.</para>
            <para>See also lineCount() and lineForTextPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.LineCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of lines in this text layout.</para>
            <para>See also lineAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.LineForTextPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line that contains the cursor position specified by pos.</para>
            <para>See also isValidCursorPosition() and lineAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.MaximumWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The maximum width the layout could expand to; this is essentially the width of the entire text.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function only returns a valid value after the layout has been done.</para>
            <para>See also minimumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.MinimumWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimum width the layout needs. This is the width of the layout's smallest non-breakable substring.</para>
            <para>Warning: This function only returns a valid value after the layout has been done.</para>
            <para>See also maximumWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.NextCursorPosition(System.Int32,QtGui.QTextLayout.CursorMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the next valid cursor position after oldPos that respects the given cursor mode. Returns value of oldPos, if oldPos is not a valid cursor position.</para>
            <para>See also isValidCursorPosition() and previousCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.PreeditAreaPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the area in the text layout that will be processed before editing occurs.</para>
            <para>See also preeditAreaText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.PreeditAreaText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text that is inserted in the layout before editing occurs.</para>
            <para>See also preeditAreaPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.PreviousCursorPosition(System.Int32,QtGui.QTextLayout.CursorMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first valid cursor position before oldPos that respects the given cursor mode. Returns value of oldPos, if oldPos is not a valid cursor position.</para>
            <para>See also isValidCursorPosition() and nextCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.RightCursorPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cursor position to the right of oldPos, next to it. The position is dependent on the visual position of characters, after bi-directional reordering.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also leftCursorPosition() and nextCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.SetPreeditArea(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the position and text of the area in the layout that is processed before editing occurs.</para>
            <para>See also preeditAreaPosition() and preeditAreaText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destructs the layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.AdditionalFormats">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of additional formats supported by the text layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the additional formats supported by the text layout to formatList.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.CacheEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the complete layout information is cached; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Enables caching of the complete layout information if enable is true; otherwise disables layout caching. Usually QTextLayout throws most of the layouting information away after a call to endLayout() to reduce memory consumption. If you however want to draw the laid out text directly afterwards enabling caching might speed up drawing significantly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.CursorMoveStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>The cursor movement style of this QTextLayout. The default is Qt::LogicalMoveStyle.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Set the cursor movement style. If the QTextLayout is backed by a document, you can ignore this and use the option in QTextDocument, this option is for widgets like QLineEdit or custom widgets without a QTextDocument. Default value is Qt::LogicalMoveStyle.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current font that is used for the layout, or a default font if none is set.</para>
            <para>Sets the layout's font to the given font. The layout is invalidated and must be laid out again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>The global position of the layout. This is independent of the bounding rectangle and of the layout process.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Moves the text layout to point p.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the layout's text.</para>
            <para>Sets the layout's text to the given string. The layout is invalidated and must be laid out again.</para>
            <para>Notice that when using this QTextLayout as part of a QTextDocument this method will have no effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.TextOption">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current text option used to control the layout process.</para>
            <para>Sets the text option structure that controls the layout process to the given option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange">
            <summary>
            The QTextLayout::FormatRange structure is used to apply extra formatting information for a specified area in the text layout's content.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextLayout::setAdditionalFormats() and QTextLayout::draw().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the format to apply.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the numer of characters the format range spans.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange.Start">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the beginning of the format range within the text layout's text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextLength">
            <summary>
            The QTextLength class encapsulates the different types of length used in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>When we specify a value for the length of an element in a text document, we often need to provide some other information so that the length is used in the way we expect. For example, when we specify a table width, the value can represent a fixed number of pixels, or it can be a percentage value. This information changes both the meaning of the value and the way it is used.</para>
            <para>Generally, this class is used to specify table widths. These can be specified either as a fixed amount of pixels, as a percentage of the containing frame's width, or by a variable width that allows it to take up just the space it requires.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextTable.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new length object which represents a variable size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.#ctor(QtGui.QTextLength)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new length object which represents a variable size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.#ctor(QtGui.QTextLength.Type,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new length object which represents a variable size.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTextLength,QtGui.QTextLength)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text length is different from the other text length.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.op_Equality(QtGui.QTextLength,QtGui.QTextLength)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text length is the same as the other text length.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.RawValue">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the constraint value that is specific for the type of the length. If the length is QTextLength::PercentageLength then the raw value is in percent, in the range of 0 to 100. If the length is QTextLength::FixedLength then that fixed amount is returned. For variable lengths, zero is returned.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type of this length object.</para>
            <para>See also QTextLength::Type.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLength.Value(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the effective length, constrained by the type of the length object and the specified maximumLength.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextLength.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the different types a length object can have.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextLength.Type.FixedLength">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of the object is fixed</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextLength.Type.PercentageLength">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of the object is in percentage of the maximum width</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextLength.Type.VariableLength">
            <summary>
            <para>The width of the object is variable</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextLine">
            <summary>
            The QTextLine class represents a line of text inside a QTextLayout.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A text line is usually created by QTextLayout::createLine().</para>
            <para>After being created, the line can be filled using the setLineWidth() or setNumColumns() functions. A line has a number of attributes including the rectangle it occupies, rect(), its coordinates, x() and y(), its textLength(), width() and naturalTextWidth(), and its ascent() and decent() relative to the text. The position of the cursor in terms of the line is available from cursorToX() and its inverse from xToCursor(). A line can be moved with setPosition().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an invalid line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.#ctor(QtGui.QTextLine)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an invalid line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Ascent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's ascent.</para>
            <para>See also descent() and height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.CursorToX(System.Int32@,QtGui.QTextLine.Edge)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the cursor position cursorPos to the corresponding x position inside the line, taking account of the edge.</para>
            <para>If cursorPos is not a valid cursor position, the nearest valid cursor position will be used instead, and cpos will be modified to point to this valid cursor position.</para>
            <para>See also xToCursor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.CursorToX(System.Int32,QtGui.QTextLine.Edge)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Descent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's descent.</para>
            <para>See also ascent() and height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Draw(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QPointF,QtGui.QTextLayout.FormatRange)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws a line on the given painter at the specified position. The selection is reserved for internal use.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Height">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's height. This is equal to ascent() + descent() + 1 if leading is not included. If leading is included, this equals to ascent() + descent() + leading() + 1.</para>
            <para>See also ascent(), descent(), leading(), and setLeadingIncluded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.HorizontalAdvance">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal advance of the text. The advance of the text is the distance from its position to the next position at which text would naturally be drawn.</para>
            <para>By adding the advance to the position of the text line and using this as the position of a second text line, you will be able to position the two lines side-by-side without gaps in-between.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this text line is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Leading">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's leading.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also ascent(), descent(), and height().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.LineNumber">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the line in the text engine.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.NaturalTextRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle covered by the line.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.NaturalTextWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the line that is occupied by text. This is always &lt;= to width(), and is the minimum width that could be used by layout() without changing the line break position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's bounding rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), textLength(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.SetLineWidth(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Lays out the line with the given width. The line is filled from its starting position with as many characters as will fit into the line. In case the text cannot be split at the end of the line, it will be filled with additional characters to the next whitespace or end of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.SetNumColumns(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Lays out the line. The line is filled from its starting position with as many characters as are specified by numColumns. In case the text cannot be split until numColumns characters, the line will be filled with as many characters to the next whitespace or end of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.SetNumColumns(System.Int32,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Lays out the line. The line is filled from its starting position with as many characters as are specified by numColumns. In case the text cannot be split until numColumns characters, the line will be filled with as many characters to the next whitespace or end of the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.TextLength">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the text in the line.</para>
            <para>See also naturalTextWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.TextStart">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the start of the line from the beginning of the string passed to the QTextLayout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Width">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's width as specified by the layout() function.</para>
            <para>See also naturalTextWidth(), x(), y(), textLength(), and rect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's x position.</para>
            <para>See also rect(), y(), textLength(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.xToCursor(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the x-coordinate x, to the nearest matching cursor position, depending on the cursor position type, cpos.</para>
            <para>See also cursorToX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.xToCursor(System.Double,QtGui.QTextLine.CursorPosition)">
            <summary>
            <para>Converts the x-coordinate x, to the nearest matching cursor position, depending on the cursor position type, cpos.</para>
            <para>See also cursorToX().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextLine.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's y position.</para>
            <para>See also x(), rect(), textLength(), and width().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLine.LeadingIncluded">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if positive leading is included into the line's height; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>By default, leading is not included.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>Includes positive leading into the line's height if included is true; otherwise does not include leading.</para>
            <para>By default, leading is not included.</para>
            <para>Note that negative leading is ignored, it must be handled in the code using the text lines by letting the lines overlap.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextLine.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the line's position relative to the text layout's position.</para>
            <para>Moves the line to position pos.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextList">
            <summary>
            The QTextList class provides a decorated list of items in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A list contains a sequence of text blocks, each of which is marked with a bullet point or other symbol. Multiple levels of lists can be used, and the automatic numbering feature provides support for ordered numeric and alphabetical lists.</para>
            <para>Lists are created by using a text cursor to insert an empty list at the current position or by moving existing text into a new list. The QTextCursor::insertList() function inserts an empty block into the document at the cursor position, and makes it the first item in a list.</para>
            <para>     QTextListFormat listFormat;</para>
            <para>     if (list) {</para>
            <para>         listFormat = list-&amp;gt;format();</para>
            <para>         listFormat.setIndent(listFormat.indent() + 1);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     listFormat.setStyle(QTextListFormat::ListDisc);</para>
            <para>     cursor.insertList(listFormat);</para>
            <para>The QTextCursor::createList() function takes the contents of the cursor's current block and turns it into the first item of a new list.</para>
            <para>The cursor's current list is found with QTextCursor::currentList().</para>
            <para>The number of items in a list is given by count(). Each item can be obtained by its index in the list with the item() function. Similarly, the index of a given item can be found with itemNumber(). The text of each item can be found with the itemText() function.</para>
            <para>Note that the items in the list may not be adjacent elements in the document. For example, the top-level items in a multi-level list will be separated by the items in lower levels of the list.</para>
            <para>List items can be deleted by index with the removeItem() function. remove() deletes the specified item in the list.</para>
            <para>The list's format is set with setFormat() and read with format(). The format describes the decoration of the list itself, and not the individual items.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextBlock, QTextListFormat, and QTextCursor.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.Add(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Makes the given block part of the list.</para>
            <para>See also remove() and removeItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of items in the list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the list has no items; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>Note: Empty lists are automatically deleted by the QTextDocument that owns them.</para>
            <para>See also count().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.Item(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the i-th text block in the list.</para>
            <para>See also count() and itemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.ItemNumber(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the list item that corresponds to the given block. Returns -1 if the block was not present in the list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.ItemText(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the list item that corresponds to the given block.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.Remove(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given block from the list.</para>
            <para>See also add() and removeItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextList.RemoveItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item at item position i from the list. When the last item in the list is removed, the list is automatically deleted by the QTextDocument that owns it.</para>
            <para>See also add() and remove().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextList.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list's format.</para>
            <para>Sets the list's format to format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextListFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextListFormat class provides formatting information for lists in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A list is composed of one or more items, represented as text blocks. The list's format specifies the appearance of items in the list. In particular, it determines the indentation and the style of each item.</para>
            <para>The indentation of the items is an integer value that causes each item to be offset from the left margin by a certain amount. This value is read with indent() and set with setIndent().</para>
            <para>The style used to decorate each item is set with setStyle() and can be read with the style() function. The style controls the type of bullet points and numbering scheme used for items in the list. Note that lists that use the decimal numbering scheme begin counting at 1 rather than 0.</para>
            <para>Style properties can be set to further configure the appearance of list items; for example, the ListNumberPrefix and ListNumberSuffix properties can be used to customize the numbers used in an ordered list so that they appear as (1), (2), (3), etc.:</para>
            <para> QTextListFormat listFormat;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> listFormat.setStyle(QTextListFormat::ListDecimal);</para>
            <para> listFormat.setNumberPrefix(&amp;quot;(&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> listFormat.setNumberSuffix(&amp;quot;)&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> cursor.insertList(listFormat);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextList.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextListFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new list format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextListFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new list format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextListFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextListFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new list format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextListFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this list format is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Indent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list format's indentation. The indentation is multiplied by the QTextDocument::indentWidth property to get the effective indent in pixels.</para>
            <para>Sets the list format's indentation. The indentation is multiplied by the QTextDocument::indentWidth property to get the effective indent in pixels.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextListFormat.NumberPrefix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list format's number prefix.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the list format's number prefix to the string specified by numberPrefix. This can be used with all sorted list types. It does not have any effect on unsorted list types.</para>
            <para>The default prefix is an empty string.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextListFormat.NumberSuffix">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list format's number suffix.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>Sets the list format's number suffix to the string specified by numberSuffix. This can be used with all sorted list types. It does not have any effect on unsorted list types.</para>
            <para>The default suffix is &quot;.&quot;.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextListFormat.style">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list format's style.</para>
            <para>Sets the list format's style.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the symbols used to decorate list items:</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListCircle">
            <summary>
            <para>An empty circle</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListDecimal">
            <summary>
            <para>Decimal values in ascending order</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListDisc">
            <summary>
            <para>A filled circle</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListLowerAlpha">
            <summary>
            <para>Lower case Latin characters in alphabetical order</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListLowerRoman">
            <summary>
            <para>Lower case roman numerals (supports up to 4999 items only)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListSquare">
            <summary>
            <para>A filled square</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListUpperAlpha">
            <summary>
            <para>Upper case Latin characters in alphabetical order</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextListFormat.Style.ListUpperRoman">
            <summary>
            <para>Upper case roman numerals (supports up to 4999 items only)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextObjectInterface">
            <summary>
            The QTextObjectInterface class allows drawing of custom text objects in QTextDocuments.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A text object describes the structure of one or more elements in a text document; for instance, images imported from HTML are implemented using text objects. A text object knows how to lay out and draw its elements when a document is being rendered.</para>
            <para>Qt allows custom text objects to be inserted into a document by registering a custom object type with QTextCharFormat. A QTextObjectInterface must also be implemented for this type and be registered with the QAbstractTextDocumentLayout of the document. When the object type is encountered while rendering a QTextDocument, the intrinsicSize() and drawObject() functions of the interface are called.</para>
            <para>The following list explains the required steps of inserting a custom text object into a document:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Choose an objectType. The objectType is an integer with a value greater or equal to QTextFormat::UserObject.</para>
            <para>Create a QTextCharFormat object and set the object type to the chosen type using the setObjectType() function.</para>
            <para>Implement the QTextObjectInterface class.</para>
            <para>Call QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::registerHandler() with an instance of your QTextObjectInterface subclass to register your object type.</para>
            <para>Insert QChar::ObjectReplacementCharacter with the aforementioned QTextCharFormat of the chosen object type into the document. As mentioned, the functions of QTextObjectInterface intrinsicSize() and drawObject() will then be called with the QTextFormat as parameter whenever the replacement character is encountered.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A class implementing a text object needs to inherit both QObject and QTextObjectInterface. QObject must be the first class inherited. For instance:</para>
            <para> class SvgTextObject : public QObject, public QTextObjectInterface</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     Q_OBJECT</para>
            <para>     Q_INTERFACES(QTextObjectInterface)</para>
            <para>The data of a text object is usually stored in the QTextCharFormat using QTextCharFormat::setProperty(), and then retrieved with QTextCharFormat::property().</para>
            <para>Warning: Copy and Paste operations ignore custom text objects.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also Text Object Example, QTextCharFormat, and QTextLayout.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObjectInterface.DrawObject(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRectF,QtGui.QTextDocument,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws this text object using the specified painter.</para>
            <para>The size of the rectangle, rect, to draw in is the size previously calculated by intrinsicSize(). The rectangles position is relative to the painter.</para>
            <para>You also get the document (doc) and the position (posInDocument) of the format in that document.</para>
            <para>See also intrinsicSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObjectInterface.IntrinsicSize(QtGui.QTextDocument,System.Int32,QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>The intrinsicSize() function returns the size of the text object represented by format in the given document (doc) at the given position (posInDocument).</para>
            <para>The size calculated will be used for subsequent calls to drawObject() for this format.</para>
            <para>See also drawObject().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextObjectInterface.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this QTextObjectInterface.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextOption">
            <summary>
            The QTextOption class provides a description of general rich text properties.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QTextOption is used to encapsulate common rich text properties in a single object. It contains information about text alignment, layout direction, word wrapping, and other standard properties associated with text rendering and layout.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextEdit, QTextDocument, and QTextCursor.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text option with default properties for text. The text alignment property is set to Qt::AlignLeft. The word wrap property is set to QTextOption::WordWrap. The using of design metrics flag is set to false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.#ctor(QtGui.QTextOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Construct a copy of the other text option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.AlignmentFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a text option with default properties for text. The text alignment property is set to Qt::AlignLeft. The word wrap property is set to QTextOption::WordWrap. The using of design metrics flag is set to false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the text option.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text alignment defined by the option.</para>
            <para>Sets the option's text alignment to the specified alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.Flags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the flags associated with the option.</para>
            <para>Sets the flags associated with the option to the given flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.TabArray">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of tab positions defined for the text layout.</para>
            <para>Sets the tab positions for the text layout to those specified by tabStops.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.TabStop">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance in device units between tab stops. Convenient function for the above method</para>
            <para>Sets the default distance in device units between tab stops to the value specified by tabStop.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.Tabs">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of tab positions defined for the text layout.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Set the Tab properties to tabStops.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.TextDirection">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the direction of the text layout defined by the option.</para>
            <para>Sets the direction of the text layout defined by the option to the given direction.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.UseDesignMetrics">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the layout uses design rather than device metrics; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If enable is true then the layout will use design metrics; otherwise it will use the metrics of the paint device (which is the default behavior).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.wrapMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text wrap mode defined by the option.</para>
            <para>Sets the option's text wrap mode to the given mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a default left tab with position 80.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.#ctor(QtGui.QTextOption.Tab)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a default left tab with position 80.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.#ctor(System.Double,QtGui.QTextOption.TabType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a default left tab with position 80.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.#ctor(System.Double,QtGui.QTextOption.TabType,QtCore.QChar)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a default left tab with position 80.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.Delimiter">
            <summary>
            <para>If type is DelimitorTab; tab until this char is found in the text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.Position">
            <summary>
            <para>Distance from the start of the paragraph. The position of a tab is from the start of the paragraph which implies that when the alignment of the paragraph is set to centered, the tab is interpreted to be moved the same distance as the left ege of the paragraph does. In case the paragraph is set to have a layoutDirection() RightToLeft the position is interpreted to be from the right side of the paragraph with higher numbers moving the tab to the left.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextOption.Tab.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Determine which type is used. In a paragraph that has layoutDirection() RightToLeft the type LeftTab will be interpreted to be a RightTab and vice versa.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.Flag.AddSpaceForLineAndParagraphSeparators">
            <summary>
            <para>While determining the line-break positions take into account the space added for drawing a separator character.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.Flag.IncludeTrailingSpaces">
            <summary>
            <para>When this option is set, QTextLine::naturalTextWidth() and naturalTextRect() will return a value that includes the width of trailing spaces in the text; otherwise this width is excluded.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.Flag.ShowLineAndParagraphSeparators">
            <summary>
            <para>Visualize line and paragraph separators with appropriate symbol characters.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.Flag.ShowTabsAndSpaces">
            <summary>
            <para>Visualize spaces with little dots, and tabs with little arrows.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.Flag.SuppressColors">
            <summary>
            <para>Suppress all color changes in the character formats (except the main selection).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextOption.TabType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum holds the different types of tabulator</para>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.TabType.CenterTab">
            <summary>
            <para>A centered-tab</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.TabType.DelimiterTab">
            <summary>
            <para>A tab stopping at a certain delimiter-character</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.TabType.LeftTab">
            <summary>
            <para>A left-tab</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.TabType.RightTab">
            <summary>
            <para>A right-tab</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextOption.WrapMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes how text is wrapped in a document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.WrapMode.ManualWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>Same as QTextOption::NoWrap</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.WrapMode.NoWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>Text is not wrapped at all.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.WrapMode.WordWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>Text is wrapped at word boundaries.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.WrapMode.WrapAnywhere">
            <summary>
            <para>Text can be wrapped at any point on a line, even if it occurs in the middle of a word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTextOption.WrapMode.WrapAtWordBoundaryOrAnywhere">
            <summary>
            <para>If possible, wrapping occurs at a word boundary; otherwise it will occur at the appropriate point on the line, even in the middle of a word.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextTable">
            <summary>
            The QTextTable class represents a table in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A table is a group of cells ordered into rows and columns. Each table contains at least one row and one column. Each cell contains a block, and is surrounded by a frame.</para>
            <para>Tables are usually created and inserted into a document with the QTextCursor::insertTable() function. For example, we can insert a table with three rows and two columns at the current cursor position in an editor using the following lines of code:</para>
            <para>     QTextCursor cursor(editor-&amp;gt;textCursor());</para>
            <para>     cursor.movePosition(QTextCursor::Start);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QTextTable *table = cursor.insertTable(rows, columns, tableFormat);</para>
            <para>The table format is either defined when the table is created or changed later with setFormat().</para>
            <para>The table currently being edited by the cursor is found with QTextCursor::currentTable(). This allows its format or dimensions to be changed after it has been inserted into a document.</para>
            <para>A table's size can be changed with resize(), or by using insertRows(), insertColumns(), removeRows(), or removeColumns(). Use cellAt() to retrieve table cells.</para>
            <para>The starting and ending positions of table rows can be found by moving a cursor within a table, and using the rowStart() and rowEnd() functions to obtain cursors at the start and end of each row.</para>
            <para>Rows and columns within a QTextTable can be merged and split using the mergeCells() and splitCell() functions. However, only cells that span multiple rows or columns can be split. (Merging or splitting does not increase or decrease the number of rows and columns.)</para>
            <para>Note that if you have merged multiple columns and rows into one cell, you will not be able to split the merged cell into new cells spanning over more than one row or column. To be able to split cells spanning over several rows and columns you need to do this over several iterations.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	Suppose we have a 2x3 table of names and addresses. To merge both columns in the first row we invoke mergeCells() with row = 0, column = 0, numRows = 1 and numColumns = 2.     table-&amp;gt;mergeCells(0, 0, 1, 2);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	This gives us the following table. To split the first row of the table back into two cells, we invoke the splitCell() function with numRows and numCols = 1.     table-&amp;gt;splitCell(0, 0, 1, 1);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	This results in the original table.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextTableFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.AppendColumns(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends count columns at the right side of the table.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also insertColumns(), insertRows(), resize(), removeRows(), removeColumns(), and appendRows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.AppendRows(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends count rows at the bottom of the table.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also insertColumns(), insertRows(), resize(), removeRows(), removeColumns(), and appendColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.CellAt(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the table cell containing the given cursor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.CellAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the table cell that contains the character at the given position in the document.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.CellAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table cell at the given row and column in the table.</para>
            <para>See also columns() and rows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.Columns">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in the table.</para>
            <para>See also rows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.InsertColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a number of columns before the column with the specified index.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows(), resize(), removeRows(), removeColumns(), appendRows(), and appendColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.InsertRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a number of rows before the row with the specified index.</para>
            <para>See also resize(), insertColumns(), removeRows(), removeColumns(), appendRows(), and appendColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.MergeCells(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Merges the cells selected by the provided cursor.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also splitCell().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.MergeCells(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Merges the cell at the specified row and column with the adjacent cells into one cell. The new cell will span numRows rows and numCols columns. If numRows or numCols is less than the current number of rows or columns the cell spans then this method does nothing.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also splitCell().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.RemoveColumns(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes a number of columns starting with the column at the specified index.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows(), insertColumns(), removeRows(), resize(), appendRows(), and appendColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.RemoveRows(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes a number of rows starting with the row at the specified index.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows(), insertColumns(), resize(), removeColumns(), appendRows(), and appendColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.Resize(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the table to contain the required number of rows and columns.</para>
            <para>See also insertRows(), insertColumns(), removeRows(), and removeColumns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.RowEnd(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a cursor pointing to the end of the row that contains the given cursor.</para>
            <para>See also rowStart().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.RowStart(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a cursor pointing to the start of the row that contains the given cursor.</para>
            <para>See also rowEnd().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.Rows">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the table.</para>
            <para>See also columns().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTable.SplitCell(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Splits the specified cell at row and column into an array of multiple cells with dimensions specified by numRows and numCols.</para>
            <para>Note: It is only possible to split cells that span multiple rows or columns, such as rows that have been merged using mergeCells().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also mergeCells().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTable.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table's format.</para>
            <para>Sets the table's format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextTableCell">
            <summary>
            The QTextTableCell class represents the properties of a cell in a QTextTable.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Table cells are pieces of document structure that belong to a table. The table orders cells into particular rows and columns; cells can also span multiple columns and rows.</para>
            <para>Cells are usually created when a table is inserted into a document with QTextCursor::insertTable(), but they are also created and destroyed when a table is resized.</para>
            <para>Cells contain information about their location in a table; you can obtain the row() and column() numbers of a cell, and its rowSpan() and columnSpan().</para>
            <para>The format() of a cell describes the default character format of its contents. The firstCursorPosition() and lastCursorPosition() functions are used to obtain the extent of the cell in the document.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextTable and QTextTableFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an invalid table cell.</para>
            <para>See also isValid().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.#ctor(QtGui.QTextTableCell)">
            <summary>
            <para>Copy constructor. Creates a new QTextTableCell object based on the other cell.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.Begin">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a frame iterator pointing to the beginning of the table's cell.</para>
            <para>See also end().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.Column">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of the column in the table that contains this cell.</para>
            <para>See also row().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.ColumnSpan">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns this cell spans. The default is 1.</para>
            <para>See also rowSpan().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.End">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a frame iterator pointing to the end of the table's cell.</para>
            <para>See also begin().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.FirstCursorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the first valid cursor position in this cell.</para>
            <para>See also lastCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this is a valid table cell; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.LastCursorPosition">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the last valid cursor position in this cell.</para>
            <para>See also firstCursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.op_Inequality(QtGui.QTextTableCell,QtGui.QTextTableCell)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this cell object and the other cell object describe different cells; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.op_Equality(QtGui.QTextTableCell,QtGui.QTextTableCell)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this cell object and the other cell object describe the same cell; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.Row">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of the row in the table that contains this cell.</para>
            <para>See also column().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.RowSpan">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows this cell spans. The default is 1.</para>
            <para>See also columnSpan().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.TableCellFormatIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the tableCell's format in the document's internal list of formats.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QTextDocument::allFormats().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCell.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the table cell.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableCell.Format">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cell's character format.</para>
            <para>Sets the cell's character format to format. This can for example be used to change the background color of the entire cell:</para>
            <para>QTextTableCell cell = table-&gt;cellAt(2, 3); QTextCharFormat format = cell.format(); format.setBackground(Qt::blue); cell.setFormat(format);</para>
            <para>Note that the cell's row or column span cannot be changed through this function. You have to use QTextTable::mergeCells and QTextTable::splitCell instead.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextTableCellFormat class provides formatting information for table cells in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The table cell format of a table cell in a document specifies the visual properties of the table cell.</para>
            <para>The padding properties of a table cell are controlled by setLeftPadding(), setRightPadding(), setTopPadding(), and setBottomPadding(). All the paddings can be set at once using setPadding().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextFormat, QTextBlockFormat, QTextTableFormat, and QTextCharFormat.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new table cell format object.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new table cell format object.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new table cell format object.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this table cell format is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.SetPadding(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the left, right, top, and bottom padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setLeftPadding(), setRightPadding(), setTopPadding(), and setBottomPadding().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.BottomPadding">
            <summary>
            <para>Gets the bottom padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the bottom padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.LeftPadding">
            <summary>
            <para>Gets the left padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the left padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.RightPadding">
            <summary>
            <para>Gets the right padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the right padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableCellFormat.TopPadding">
            <summary>
            <para>Gets the top padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>Sets the top padding of the table cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTextTableFormat">
            <summary>
            The QTextTableFormat class provides formatting information for tables in a QTextDocument.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A table is a group of cells ordered into rows and columns. Each table contains at least one row and one column. Each cell contains a block. Tables in rich text documents are formatted using the properties defined in this class.</para>
            <para>Tables are horizontally justified within their parent frame according to the table's alignment. This can be read with the alignment() function and set with setAlignment().</para>
            <para>Cells within the table are separated by cell spacing. The number of pixels between cells is set with setCellSpacing() and read with cellSpacing(). The contents of each cell is surrounded by cell padding. The number of pixels between each cell edge and its contents is set with setCellPadding() and read with cellPadding().</para>
            <para>The table's background color can be read with the background() function, and can be specified with setBackground(). The background color of each cell can be set independently, and will control the color of the cell within the padded area.</para>
            <para>The table format also provides a way to constrain the widths of the columns in the table. Columns can be assigned a fixed width, a variable width, or a percentage of the available width (see QTextLength). The columns() function returns the number of columns with constraints, and the columnWidthConstraints() function returns the constraints defined for the table. These quantities can also be set by calling setColumnWidthConstraints() with a vector containing new constraints. If no constraints are required, clearColumnWidthConstraints() can be used to remove them.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTextTable, QTextTableCell, and QTextLength.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new table format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new table format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.#ctor(QtGui.QTextTableFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new table format object.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.ClearColumnWidthConstraints">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the column width constraints for the table.</para>
            <para>See also columnWidthConstraints() and setColumnWidthConstraints().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.IsValid">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this table format is valid; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.Alignment">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table's alignment.</para>
            <para>Sets the table's alignment.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.CellPadding">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table's cell padding. This describes the distance between the border of a cell and its contents.</para>
            <para>Sets the cell padding for the table. This determines the distance between the border of a cell and its contents.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.CellSpacing">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the table's cell spacing. This describes the distance between adjacent cells.</para>
            <para>Sets the cell spacing for the table. This determines the distance between adjacent cells.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.ColumnWidthConstraints">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of constraints used by this table format to control the appearance of columns in a table.</para>
            <para>Sets the column width constraints for the table.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.Columns">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns specified by the table format.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTextTableFormat.HeaderRowCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of rows in the table that define the header.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Declares the first count rows of the table as table header. The table header rows get repeated when a table is broken across a page boundary.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTileRules.#ctor(QtGui.QTileRules)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTileRules with the given horizontalRule and verticalRule.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTileRules.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.TileRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTileRules with the given horizontalRule and verticalRule.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTileRules.#ctor(QtCore.Qt.TileRule,QtCore.Qt.TileRule)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTileRules with the given horizontalRule and verticalRule.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTimeEdit">
            <summary>
            The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times based on the QDateTimeEdit widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Many of the properties and functions provided by QTimeEdit are implemented in QDateTimeEdit. The following properties are most relevant to users of this class:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>time holds the date displayed by the widget.</para>
            <para>minimumTime defines the minimum (earliest) time that can be set by the user.</para>
            <para>maximumTime defines the maximum (latest) time that can be set by the user.</para>
            <para>displayFormat contains a string that is used to format the time displayed in the widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	A time editing widget shown in the Windows XP widget style.</para>
            <para>	A time editing widget shown in the Macintosh widget style.</para>
            <para>	A time editing widget shown in the Plastique widget style.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDateEdit and QDateTimeEdit.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTimeEdit.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty time editor with a parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTimeEdit.#ctor(QtCore.QTime,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty time editor with a parent. The time is set to time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QToolBar">
            <summary>
            The QToolBar class provides a movable panel that contains a set of controls.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Toolbar buttons are added by adding actions, using addAction() or insertAction(). Groups of buttons can be separated using addSeparator() or insertSeparator(). If a toolbar button is not appropriate, a widget can be inserted instead using addWidget() or insertWidget(); examples of suitable widgets are QSpinBox, QDoubleSpinBox, and QComboBox. When a toolbar button is pressed it emits the actionTriggered() signal.</para>
            <para>A toolbar can be fixed in place in a particular area (e.g. at the top of the window), or it can be movable (isMovable()) between toolbar areas; see allowedAreas() and isAreaAllowed().</para>
            <para>When a toolbar is resized in such a way that it is too small to show all the items it contains, an extension button will appear as the last item in the toolbar. Pressing the extension button will pop up a menu containing the items that does not currently fit in the toolbar.</para>
            <para>When a QToolBar is not a child of a QMainWindow, it loses the ability to populate the extension pop up with widgets added to the toolbar using addWidget(). Please use widget actions created by inheriting QWidgetAction and implementing QWidgetAction::createWidget() instead.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QToolButton, QMenu, QAction, and Application Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QToolBar with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QToolBar with the given parent.</para>
            <para>The given window title identifies the toolbar and is shown in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.</para>
            <para>See also setWindowTitle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.ActionAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the action at point p. This function returns zero if no action was found.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::childAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.ActionAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the action at the point x, y. This function returns zero if no action was found.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnActionEvent(QtGui.QActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnActionTriggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in this toolbar is triggered. This happens when the action's tool button is pressed, or when the action is triggered in some other way outside the tool bar. The parameter holds the triggered action.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Appends the action action to the toolbar's list of actions.</para>
            <para>See also QMenu::addAction() and QWidget::addAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddAction(QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a new action with the given icon and text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddAction(QtGui.QIcon,System.String,QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a new action with the icon icon and text text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar. The action's triggered() signal is connected to member in receiver.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddAction(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a new action with the given text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddAction(System.String,QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Creates a new action with the given text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar. The action's triggered() signal is connected to member in receiver.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddSeparator">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a separator to the end of the toolbar.</para>
            <para>See also insertSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.AddWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given widget to the toolbar as the toolbar's last item.</para>
            <para>The toolbar takes ownership of widget.</para>
            <para>If you add a QToolButton with this method, the tools bar's Qt::ToolButtonStyle will not be respected.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use QAction::setVisible() to change the visibility of the widget. Using QWidget::setVisible(), QWidget::show() and QWidget::hide() does not work.</para>
            <para>See also insertWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnAllowedAreasChanged(QtCore.Qt.ToolBarArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the collection of allowed areas for the toolbar is changed. The new areas in which the toolbar can be positioned are specified by allowedAreas.</para>
            <para>See also allowedAreas.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes all actions from the toolbar.</para>
            <para>See also removeAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnIconSizeChanged(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the icon size is changed. The iconSize parameter holds the toolbar's new icon size.</para>
            <para>See also iconSize and QMainWindow::iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.InsertSeparator(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts a separator into the toolbar in front of the toolbar item associated with the before action.</para>
            <para>See also addSeparator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.InsertWidget(QtGui.QAction,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the given widget in front of the toolbar item associated with the before action.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use QAction::setVisible() to change the visibility of the widget. Using QWidget::setVisible(), QWidget::show() and QWidget::hide() does not work.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.IsAreaAllowed(QtCore.Qt.ToolBarArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this toolbar is dockable in the given area; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnMovableChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes movable or fixed. If the toolbar can be moved, movable is true; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also movable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnOrientationChanged(QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes. The new orientation is specified by the orientation given.</para>
            <para>See also orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.ToggleViewAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a checkable action that can be used to show or hide this toolbar.</para>
            <para>The action's text is set to the toolbar's window title.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::text and QWidget::windowTitle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnToolButtonStyleChanged(QtCore.Qt.ToolButtonStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tool button style is changed. The toolButtonStyle parameter holds the toolbar's new tool button style.</para>
            <para>See also toolButtonStyle and QMainWindow::toolButtonStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnTopLevelChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the toolbar is now floating; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.OnVisibilityChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.WidgetForAction(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget associated with the specified action.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also addWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBar.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the toolbar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.ActionTriggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in this toolbar is triggered. This happens when the action's tool button is pressed, or when the action is triggered in some other way outside the tool bar. The parameter holds the triggered action.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.MovableChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes movable or fixed. If the toolbar can be moved, movable is true; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also movable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.AllowedAreasChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the collection of allowed areas for the toolbar is changed. The new areas in which the toolbar can be positioned are specified by allowedAreas.</para>
            <para>See also allowedAreas.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.OrientationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes. The new orientation is specified by the orientation given.</para>
            <para>See also orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.IconSizeChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the icon size is changed. The iconSize parameter holds the toolbar's new icon size.</para>
            <para>See also iconSize and QMainWindow::iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.ToolButtonStyleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tool button style is changed. The toolButtonStyle parameter holds the toolbar's new tool button style.</para>
            <para>See also toolButtonStyle and QMainWindow::toolButtonStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.TopLevelChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the toolbar is now floating; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBar.VisibilityChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.Movable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the user can move the toolbar within the toolbar area, or between toolbar areas.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense if the toolbar is in a QMainWindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.AllowedAreas">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds areas where the toolbar may be placed.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::AllToolBarAreas.</para>
            <para>This property only makes sense if the toolbar is in a QMainWindow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds orientation of the toolbar.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::Horizontal.</para>
            <para>This function should not be used when the toolbar is managed by QMainWindow. You can use QMainWindow::addToolBar() or QMainWindow::insertToolBar() if you wish to move a toolbar (that is already added to a main window) to another Qt::ToolBarArea.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.IconSize">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds size of icons in the toolbar.</para>
            <para>The default size is determined by the application's style and is derived from the QStyle::PM_ToolBarIconSize pixel metric. It is the maximum size an icon can have. Icons of smaller size will not be scaled up.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.ToolButtonStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the style of toolbar buttons.</para>
            <para>This property defines the style of all tool buttons that are added as QActions. Note that if you add a QToolButton with the addWidget() method, it will not get this button style.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.Floating">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the toolbar is an independent window.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBar.Floatable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the toolbar can be dragged and dropped as an independent window.</para>
            <para>The default is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QToolBox">
            <summary>
            The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A toolbox is a widget that displays a column of tabs one above the other, with the current item displayed below the current tab. Every tab has an index position within the column of tabs. A tab's item is a QWidget.</para>
            <para>Each item has an itemText(), an optional itemIcon(), an optional itemToolTip(), and a widget(). The item's attributes can be changed with setItemText(), setItemIcon(), and setItemToolTip(). Each item can be enabled or disabled individually with setItemEnabled().</para>
            <para>Items are added using addItem(), or inserted at particular positions using insertItem(). The total number of items is given by count(). Items can be deleted with delete, or removed from the toolbox with removeItem(). Combining removeItem() and insertItem() allows you to move items to different positions.</para>
            <para>The index of the current item widget is returned by currentIndex(), and set with setCurrentIndex(). The index of a particular item can be found using indexOf(), and the item at a given index is returned by item().</para>
            <para>The currentChanged() signal is emitted when the current item is changed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTabWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new toolbox with the given parent and the flags, f.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.AddItem(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the widget in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The new tab's text is set to text, and the iconSet is displayed to the left of the text. Returns the new tab's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.AddItem(QtGui.QWidget,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Adds the widget w in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The new tab's text is set to text. Returns the new tab's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.OnCurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current item is changed. The new current item's index is passed in index, or -1 if there is no current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.IndexOf(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of widget, or -1 if the item does not exist.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QIcon,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the widget at position index, or at the bottom of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's text is set to text, and the icon is displayed to the left of the text. Returns the new item's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.InsertItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Inserts the widget at position index, or at the bottom of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's text is set to text. Returns the new item's index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.IsItemEnabled(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item at position index is enabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.ItemIcon(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon of the item at position index, or a null icon if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setItemIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.ItemInserted(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called after a new item was added or inserted at position index.</para>
            <para>See also itemRemoved().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.ItemRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual handler is called after an item was removed from position index.</para>
            <para>See also itemInserted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.ItemText(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the item at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setItemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.ItemToolTip(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tooltip of the item at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.</para>
            <para>See also setItemToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.RemoveItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item at position index from the toolbox. Note that the widget is not deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.SetItemEnabled(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If enabled is true then the item at position index is enabled; otherwise the item at position index is disabled.</para>
            <para>See also isItemEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.SetItemIcon(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the icon of the item at position index to icon.</para>
            <para>See also itemIcon().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.SetItemText(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text of the item at position index to text.</para>
            <para>If the provided text contains an ampersand character ('&amp;'), a mnemonic is automatically created for it. The character that follows the '&amp;' will be used as the shortcut key. Any previous mnemonic will be overwritten, or cleared if no mnemonic is defined by the text. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&amp;&amp;').</para>
            <para>See also itemText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.SetItemToolTip(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the tooltip of the item at position index to toolTip.</para>
            <para>See also itemToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.Widget(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget at position index, or 0 if there is no such item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolBox.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the toolbox.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolBox.CurrentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current item is changed. The new current item's index is passed in index, or -1 if there is no current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBox.CurrentWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current widget, or 0 if there is no such item.</para>
            <para>Makeswidget the current widget. The widget must be an item in this tool box.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBox.CurrentIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the index of the current item.</para>
            <para>By default, for an empty toolbox, this property has a value of -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolBox.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of items contained in the toolbox.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QToolButton">
            <summary>
            The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A tool button is a special button that provides quick-access to specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command button, a tool button usually doesn't show a text label, but shows an icon instead.</para>
            <para>Tool buttons are normally created when new QAction instances are created with QToolBar::addAction() or existing actions are added to a toolbar with QToolBar::addAction(). It is also possible to construct tool buttons in the same way as any other widget, and arrange them alongside other widgets in layouts.</para>
            <para>One classic use of a tool button is to select tools; for example, the &amp;quot;pen&amp;quot; tool in a drawing program. This would be implemented by using a QToolButton as a toggle button (see setToggleButton()).</para>
            <para>QToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button draws a 3D frame only when the mouse points at it. The feature is automatically turned on when a button is used inside a QToolBar. Change it with setAutoRaise().</para>
            <para>A tool button's icon is set as QIcon. This makes it possible to specify different pixmaps for the disabled and active state. The disabled pixmap is used when the button's functionality is not available. The active pixmap is displayed when the button is auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it.</para>
            <para>The button's look and dimension is adjustable with setToolButtonStyle() and setIconSize(). When used inside a QToolBar in a QMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to QMainWindow's settings (see QMainWindow::setToolButtonStyle() and QMainWindow::setIconSize()). Instead of an icon, a tool button can also display an arrow symbol, specified with arrowType.</para>
            <para>A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The popup menu can be set using setMenu(). Use setPopupMode() to configure the different modes available for tool buttons with a menu set. The default mode is DelayedPopupMode which is sometimes used with the &amp;quot;Back&amp;quot; button in a web browser. After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. The default delay is 600 ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> </para>
            <para>Qt Assistant's toolbar contains tool buttons that are associated with actions used in other parts of the main window.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QPushButton, QToolBar, QMainWindow, QAction, and GUI Design Handbook: Push Button.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty tool button with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnActionEvent(QtGui.QActionEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnEnterEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::enterEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.HitButton(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::hitButton().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.InitStyleOption(QtGui.QStyleOptionToolButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Initialize option with the values from this QToolButton. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionToolButton, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.</para>
            <para>See also QStyleOption::initFrom().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnLeaveEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.MinimumSizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.NextCheckState">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::nextCheckState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            <para>Paints the button in response to the paint event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.ShowMenu">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return until the popup menu has been closed by the user.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.OnTriggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action is triggered.</para>
            <para>The action may also be associated with other parts of the user interface, such as menu items and keyboard shortcuts. Sharing actions in this way helps make the user interface more consistent and is often less work to implement.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolButton.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QToolButton.Triggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action is triggered.</para>
            <para>The action may also be associated with other parts of the user interface, such as menu items and keyboard shortcuts. Sharing actions in this way helps make the user interface more consistent and is often less work to implement.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolButton.DefaultAction">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default action.</para>
            <para>Sets the default action to action.</para>
            <para>If a tool button has a default action, the action defines the button's properties like text, icon, tool tip, etc.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolButton.Menu">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the associated menu, or 0 if no menu has been defined.</para>
            <para>Associates the given menu with this tool button.</para>
            <para>The menu will be shown according to the button's popupMode.</para>
            <para>Ownership of the menu is not transferred to the tool button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolButton.PopupMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This property describes the way that popup menus are used with tool buttons.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to DelayedPopup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolButton.ToolButtonStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the tool button displays an icon only, text only, or text beside/below the icon.</para>
            <para>The default is Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly.</para>
            <para>To have the style of toolbuttons follow the system settings (as available in GNOME and KDE desktop environments), set this property to Qt::ToolButtonFollowStyle.</para>
            <para>QToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant signal in the QMainWindow in which is resides.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolButton.AutoRaise">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled or not.</para>
            <para>The default is disabled (i.e. false).</para>
            <para>This property is currently ignored on Mac OS X when using QMacStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolButton.ArrowType">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the button displays an arrow instead of a normal icon.</para>
            <para>This displays an arrow as the icon for the QToolButton.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is set to Qt::NoArrow.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QToolButton.ToolButtonPopupMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Describes how a menu should be popped up for tool buttons that has a menu set or contains a list of actions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QToolButton.ToolButtonPopupMode.DelayedPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>After pressing and holding the tool button down for a certain amount of time (the timeout is style dependant, see QStyle::SH_ToolButton_PopupDelay), the menu is displayed. A typical application example is the &quot;back&quot; button in some web browsers's tool bars. If the user clicks it, the browser simply browses back to the previous page. If the user presses and holds the button down for a while, the tool button shows a menu containing the current history list</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QToolButton.ToolButtonPopupMode.InstantPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>The menu is displayed, without delay, when the tool button is pressed. In this mode, the button's own action is not triggered.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QToolButton.ToolButtonPopupMode.MenuButtonPopup">
            <summary>
            <para>In this mode the tool button displays a special arrow to indicate that a menu is present. The menu is displayed when the arrow part of the button is pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QToolTip">
            <summary>
            The QToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for any widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The tip is a short piece of text reminding the user of the widget's function. It is drawn immediately below the given position in a distinctive black-on-yellow color combination. The tip can be any rich text formatted string.</para>
            <para>Rich text displayed in a tool tip is implicitly word-wrapped unless specified differently with &amp;lt;p style='white-space:pre'&amp;gt;.</para>
            <para>The simplest and most common way to set a widget's tool tip is by calling its QWidget::setToolTip() function.</para>
            <para>It is also possible to show different tool tips for different regions of a widget, by using a QHelpEvent of type QEvent::ToolTip. Intercept the help event in your widget's event() function and call QToolTip::showText() with the text you want to display. The Tooltips example illustrates this technique.</para>
            <para>If you are calling QToolTip::hideText(), or QToolTip::showText() with an empty string, as a result of a ToolTip-event you should also call ignore() on the event, to signal that you don't want to start any tooltip specific modes.</para>
            <para>Note that, if you want to show tooltips in an item view, the model/view architecture provides functionality to set an item's tool tip; e.g., the QTableWidgetItem::setToolTip() function. However, if you want to provide custom tool tips in an item view, you must intercept the help event in the QAbstractItemView::viewportEvent() function and handle it yourself.</para>
            <para>The default tool tip color and font can be customized with setPalette() and setFont(). When a tooltip is currently on display, isVisible() returns true and text() the currently visible text.</para>
            <para>Note: Tool tips use the inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWidget::toolTip, QAction::toolTip, and Tool Tips Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolTip.HideText">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the tool tip. This is the same as calling showText() with an empty string.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also showText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolTip.IsVisible">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this tooltip is currently shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also showText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolTip.ShowText(QtCore.QPoint,System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>This is analogous to calling QToolTip::showText(pos, text, w, QRect())</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolTip.ShowText(QtCore.QPoint,System.String,QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows text as a tool tip, with the global position pos as the point of interest. The tool tip will be shown with a platform specific offset from this point of interest.</para>
            <para>If you specify a non-empty rect the tip will be hidden as soon as you move your cursor out of this area.</para>
            <para>The rect is in the coordinates of the widget you specify with w. If the rect is not empty you must specify a widget. Otherwise this argument can be 0 but it is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.</para>
            <para>If text is empty the tool tip is hidden. If the text is the same as the currently shown tooltip, the tip will not move. You can force moving by first hiding the tip with an empty text, and then showing the new tip at the new position.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QToolTip.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tooltip text, if a tooltip is visible, or an empty string if a tooltip is not visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolTip.Font">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font used to render tooltips.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>Sets the font used to render tooltips.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QToolTip.Palette">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the palette used to render tooltips.</para>
            <para>Note: Tool tips use the inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            <para>Sets the palette used to render tooltips.</para>
            <para>Note: Tool tips use the inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTouchEvent">
            <summary>
            The QTouchEvent class contains parameters that describe a touch event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Enabling Touch Events</para>
            <para>Touch events occur when pressing, releasing, or moving one or more touch points on a touch device (such as a touch-screen or track-pad). To receive touch events, widgets have to have the Qt::WA_AcceptTouchEvents attribute set and graphics items need to have the acceptTouchEvents attribute set to true.</para>
            <para>When using QAbstractScrollArea based widgets, you should enable the Qt::WA_AcceptTouchEvents attribute on the scroll area's viewport.</para>
            <para>Similarly to QMouseEvent, Qt automatically grabs each touch point on the first press inside a widget, and the widget will receive all updates for the touch point until it is released. Note that it is possible for a widget to receive events for numerous touch points, and that multiple widgets may be receiving touch events at the same time.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Event Handling</para>
            <para>All touch events are of type QEvent::TouchBegin, QEvent::TouchUpdate, or QEvent::TouchEnd. Reimplement QWidget::event() or QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent() for widgets and QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent() for items in a graphics view to receive touch events.</para>
            <para>The QEvent::TouchUpdate and QEvent::TouchEnd events are sent to the widget or item that accepted the QEvent::TouchBegin event. If the QEvent::TouchBegin event is not accepted and not filtered by an event filter, then no further touch events are sent until the next QEvent::TouchBegin.</para>
            <para>The touchPoints() function returns a list of all touch points contained in the event. Information about each touch point can be retrieved using the QTouchEvent::TouchPoint class. The Qt::TouchPointState enum describes the different states that a touch point may have.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Event Delivery and Propagation</para>
            <para>By default, QWidget::event() translates the first non-primary touch point in a QTouchEvent into a QMouseEvent. This makes it possible to enable touch events on existing widgets that do not normally handle QTouchEvent. See below for information on some special considerations needed when doing this.</para>
            <para>QEvent::TouchBegin is the first touch event sent to a widget. The QEvent::TouchBegin event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. By default, the event is accepted. You should call ignore() if the touch event is not handled by your widget. The QEvent::TouchBegin event is propagated up the parent widget chain until a widget accepts it with accept(), or an event filter consumes it. For QGraphicsItems, the QEvent::TouchBegin event is propagated to items under the mouse (similar to mouse event propagation for QGraphicsItems).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Touch Point Grouping</para>
            <para>As mentioned above, it is possible that several widgets can be receiving QTouchEvents at the same time. However, Qt makes sure to never send duplicate QEvent::TouchBegin events to the same widget, which could theoretically happen during propagation if, for example, the user touched 2 separate widgets in a QGroupBox and both widgets ignored the QEvent::TouchBegin event.</para>
            <para>To avoid this, Qt will group new touch points together using the following rules:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>When the first touch point is detected, the destination widget is determined firstly by the location on screen and secondly by the propagation rules.</para>
            <para>When additional touch points are detected, Qt first looks to see if there are any active touch points on any ancestor or descendent of the widget under the new touch point. If there are, the new touch point is grouped with the first, and the new touch point will be sent in a single QTouchEvent to the widget that handled the first touch point. (The widget under the new touch point will not receive an event).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>This makes it possible for sibling widgets to handle touch events independently while making sure that the sequence of QTouchEvents is always correct.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Mouse Events and the Primary Touch Point</para>
            <para>QTouchEvent delivery is independent from that of QMouseEvent. On some windowing systems, mouse events are also sent for the primary touch point. This means it is possible for your widget to receive both QTouchEvent and QMouseEvent for the same user interaction point. You can use the QTouchEvent::TouchPoint::isPrimary() function to identify the primary touch point.</para>
            <para>Note that on some systems, it is possible to receive touch events without a primary touch point. All this means is that there will be no mouse event generated for the touch points in the QTouchEvent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Caveats</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>As mentioned above, enabling touch events means multiple widgets can be receiving touch events simultaneously. Combined with the default QWidget::event() handling for QTouchEvents, this gives you great flexibility in designing touch user interfaces. Be aware of the implications. For example, it is possible that the user is moving a QSlider with one finger and pressing a QPushButton with another. The signals emitted by these widgets will be interleaved.</para>
            <para>Recursion into the event loop using one of the exec() methods (e.g., QDialog::exec() or QMenu::exec()) in a QTouchEvent event handler is not supported. Since there are multiple event recipients, recursion may cause problems, including but not limited to lost events and unexpected infinite recursion.</para>
            <para>QTouchEvents are not affected by a mouse grab or an active pop-up widget. The behavior of QTouchEvents is undefined when opening a pop-up or grabbing the mouse while there are more than one active touch points.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTouchEvent::TouchPoint, Qt::TouchPointState, Qt::WA_AcceptTouchEvents, and QGraphicsItem::acceptTouchEvents().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTouchEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QTouchEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTouchEvent with the given eventType, deviceType, and touchPoints. The touchPointStates and modifiers are the current touch point states and keyboard modifiers at the time of the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTouchEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtGui.QTouchEvent.DeviceType,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,QtCore.Qt.TouchPointState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTouchEvent with the given eventType, deviceType, and touchPoints. The touchPointStates and modifiers are the current touch point states and keyboard modifiers at the time of the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTouchEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QEvent.Type,QtGui.QTouchEvent.DeviceType,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,QtCore.Qt.TouchPointState,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint})">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QTouchEvent with the given eventType, deviceType, and touchPoints. The touchPointStates and modifiers are the current touch point states and keyboard modifiers at the time of the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTouchEvent.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QTouchEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.deviceType">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the touch device Type, which is of type DeviceType.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPointStates">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a bitwise OR of all the touch point states for this event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoints">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of touch points contained in the touch event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget on which the event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.IsPrimary">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this touch point is the primary touch point. The primary touch point is the point for which the windowing system generates mouse events.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.Id">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the id number of this touch point.</para>
            <para>Id numbers are globally sequential, starting at zero, meaning the first touch point in the application has id 0, the second has id 1, and so on.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.LastNormalizedPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized position of this touch point from the previous touch event.</para>
            <para>The coordinates are normalized to the size of the touch device, i.e. (0,0) is the top-left corner and (1,1) is the bottom-right corner.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.LastPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of this touch point from the previous touch event, relative to the widget or QGraphicsItem that received the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.LastScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene position of this touch point from the previous touch event.</para>
            <para>The scene position is the position in QGraphicsScene coordinates if the QTouchEvent is handled by a QGraphicsItem::touchEvent() reimplementation, and identical to the screen position for widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.LastScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the screen position of this touch point from the previous touch event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.NormalizedPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized position of this touch point.</para>
            <para>The coordinates are normalized to the size of the touch device, i.e. (0,0) is the top-left corner and (1,1) is the bottom-right corner.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of this touch point, relative to the widget or QGraphicsItem that received the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.Pressure">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pressure of this touch point. The return value is in the range 0.0 to 1.0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.Rect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rect for this touch point, relative to the widget or QGraphicsItem that received the event. The rect is centered around the point returned by pos().</para>
            <para>Note: This function returns an empty rect if the device does not report touch point sizes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.ScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the scene position of this touch point.</para>
            <para>The scene position is the position in QGraphicsScene coordinates if the QTouchEvent is handled by a QGraphicsItem::touchEvent() reimplementation, and identical to the screen position for widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.SceneRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rect for this touch point in scene coordinates.</para>
            <para>Note: This function returns an empty rect if the device does not report touch point sizes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.ScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the screen position of this touch point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.ScreenRect">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rect for this touch point in screen coordinates.</para>
            <para>Note: This function returns an empty rect if the device does not report touch point sizes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.StartNormalizedPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized starting position of this touch point.</para>
            <para>The coordinates are normalized to the size of the touch device, i.e. (0,0) is the top-left corner and (1,1) is the bottom-right corner.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.StartPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the starting position of this touch point, relative to the widget or QGraphicsItem that received the event.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.StartScenePos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the starting scene position of this touch point.</para>
            <para>The scene position is the position in QGraphicsScene coordinates if the QTouchEvent is handled by a QGraphicsItem::touchEvent() reimplementation, and identical to the screen position for widgets.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.StartScreenPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the starting screen position of this touch point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTouchEvent.TouchPoint.State">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current state of this touch point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTouchEvent.DeviceType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum represents the type of device that generated a QTouchEvent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTouchEvent.DeviceType.TouchPad">
            <summary>
            <para>In this type of device, the touch surface is separate from the display. There is not a direct relationship between the physical touch location and the on-screen coordinates. Instead, they are calculated relative to the current mouse position, and the user must use the touch-pad to move this reference point. Unlike touch-screens, Qt allows users to only interact with a single QWidget or QGraphicsItem at a time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTouchEvent.DeviceType.TouchScreen">
            <summary>
            <para>In this type of device, the touch surface and display are integrated. This means the surface and display typically have the same size, such that there is a direct relationship between the touch points' physical positions and the coordinate reported by QTouchEvent::TouchPoint. As a result, Qt allows the user to interact directly with multiple QWidgets and QGraphicsItems at the same time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeView">
            <summary>
            The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A QTreeView implements a tree representation of items from a model. This class is used to provide standard hierarchical lists that were previously provided by the QListView class, but using the more flexible approach provided by Qt's model/view architecture.</para>
            <para>The QTreeView class is one of the Model/View Classes and is part of Qt's model/view framework.</para>
            <para>QTreeView implements the interfaces defined by the QAbstractItemView class to allow it to display data provided by models derived from the QAbstractItemModel class.</para>
            <para>It is simple to construct a tree view displaying data from a model. In the following example, the contents of a directory are supplied by a QFileSystemModel and displayed as a tree:</para>
            <para>     QFileSystemModel *model = new QFileSystemModel;</para>
            <para>     model-&amp;gt;setRootPath(QDir::currentPath());</para>
            <para>     QTreeView *tree = new QTreeView(splitter);</para>
            <para>     tree-&amp;gt;setModel(model);</para>
            <para>The model/view architecture ensures that the contents of the tree view are updated as the model changes.</para>
            <para>Items that have children can be in an expanded (children are visible) or collapsed (children are hidden) state. When this state changes a collapsed() or expanded() signal is emitted with the model index of the relevant item.</para>
            <para>The amount of indentation used to indicate levels of hierarchy is controlled by the indentation property.</para>
            <para>Headers in tree views are constructed using the QHeaderView class and can be hidden using header()-&amp;gt;hide(). Note that each header is configured with its stretchLastSection property set to true, ensuring that the view does not waste any of the space assigned to it for its header. If this value is set to true, this property will override the resize mode set on the last section in the header.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Key Bindings</para>
            <para>QTreeView supports a set of key bindings that enable the user to navigate in the view and interact with the contents of items:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>KeyAction</para>
            <para>Up	Moves the cursor to the item in the same column on the previous row. If the parent of the current item has no more rows to navigate to, the cursor moves to the relevant item in the last row of the sibling that precedes the parent.</para>
            <para>Down	Moves the cursor to the item in the same column on the next row. If the parent of the current item has no more rows to navigate to, the cursor moves to the relevant item in the first row of the sibling that follows the parent.</para>
            <para>Left	Hides the children of the current item (if present) by collapsing a branch.</para>
            <para>Minus	Same as LeftArrow.</para>
            <para>Right	Reveals the children of the current item (if present) by expanding a branch.</para>
            <para>Plus	Same as RightArrow.</para>
            <para>Asterisk	Expands all children of the current item (if present).</para>
            <para>PageUp	Moves the cursor up one page.</para>
            <para>PageDown	Moves the cursor down one page.</para>
            <para>Home	Moves the cursor to an item in the same column of the first row of the first top-level item in the model.</para>
            <para>End	Moves the cursor to an item in the same column of the last row of the last top-level item in the model.</para>
            <para>F2	In editable models, this opens the current item for editing. The Escape key can be used to cancel the editing process and revert any changes to the data displayed.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style tree view.	A Macintosh style tree view.	A Plastique style tree view.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Improving Performance</para>
            <para>It is possible to give the view hints about the data it is handling in order to improve its performance when displaying large numbers of items. One approach that can be taken for views that are intended to display items with equal heights is to set the uniformRowHeights property to true.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QListView, QTreeWidget, View Classes, QAbstractItemModel, QAbstractItemView, and Dir View Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree view with a parent to represent a model's data. Use setModel() to set the model.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractItemModel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.Collapse(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Collapses the model item specified by the index.</para>
            <para>See also collapsed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.CollapseAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Collapses all expanded items.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also expandAll(), expand(), collapse(), and setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnCollapsed(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is collapsed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ColumnAt(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column in the tree view whose header covers the x coordinate given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ColumnCountChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Informs the tree view that the number of columns in the tree view has changed from oldCount to newCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ColumnMoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This slot is called whenever a column has been moved.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ColumnResized(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called whenever column's size is changed in the header. oldSize and newSize give the previous size and the new size in pixels.</para>
            <para>See also setColumnWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ColumnViewportPosition(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the horizontal position of the column in the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ColumnWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the width of the column.</para>
            <para>See also resizeColumnToContents() and setColumnWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.DataChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::dataChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnDragMoveEvent(QtGui.QDragMoveEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.DrawBranches(QtGui.QPainter,QtCore.QRect,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the branches in the tree view on the same row as the model item index, using the painter given. The branches are drawn in the rectangle specified by rect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.DrawRow(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QStyleOptionViewItem,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the row in the tree view that contains the model item index, using the painter given. The option control how the item is displayed.</para>
            <para>See also setAlternatingRowColors().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.DrawTree(QtGui.QPainter,QtGui.QRegion)">
            <summary>
            <para>Draws the part of the tree intersecting the given region using the specified painter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.Expand(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Expands the model item specified by the index.</para>
            <para>See also expanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ExpandAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Expands all expandable items.</para>
            <para>Warning: if the model contains a large number of items, this function will take some time to execute.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also collapseAll(), expand(), collapse(), and setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ExpandToDepth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Expands all expandable items to the given depth.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also expandAll(), collapseAll(), expand(), collapse(), and setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnExpanded(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is expanded.</para>
            <para>See also setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.HideColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the column given.</para>
            <para>Note: This function should only be called after the model has been initialized, as the view needs to know the number of columns in order to hide column.</para>
            <para>See also showColumn() and setColumnHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.HorizontalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().</para>
            <para>Returns the horizontal offset of the items in the treeview.</para>
            <para>Note that the tree view uses the horizontal header section positions to determine the positions of columns in the view.</para>
            <para>See also verticalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IndexAbove(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model index of the item above index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IndexAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IndexBelow(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the model index of the item below index.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IndexRowSizeHint(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint for the row indicated by index.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHintForColumn() and uniformRowHeights().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IsColumnHidden(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the column is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also hideColumn() and isRowHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IsExpanded(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the model item index is expanded; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also expand(), expanded(), and setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IsFirstColumnSpanned(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item in first column in the given row of the parent is spanning all the columns; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setFirstColumnSpanned().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IsIndexHidden(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.IsRowHidden(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item in the given row of the parent is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setRowHidden() and isColumnHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnKeyPressEvent(QtGui.QKeyEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.KeyboardSearch(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::keyboardSearch().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnMouseDoubleClickEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnMouseMoveEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnMousePressEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnMouseReleaseEvent(QtGui.QMouseEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.MoveCursor(QtGui.QAbstractItemView.CursorAction,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().</para>
            <para>Move the cursor in the way described by cursorAction, using the information provided by the button modifiers.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.Reset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::reset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ResizeColumnToContents(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Resizes the column given to the size of its contents.</para>
            <para>See also columnWidth() and setColumnWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.RowHeight(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the height of the row indicated by the given index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also indexRowSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.RowsAboutToBeRemoved(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsAboutToBeRemoved().</para>
            <para>Informs the view that the rows from the start row to the end row inclusive are about to removed from the given parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.RowsInserted(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsInserted().</para>
            <para>Informs the view that the rows from the start row to the end row inclusive have been inserted into the parent model item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.RowsRemoved(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Informs the view that the rows from the start row to the end row inclusive have been removed from the given parent model item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ScrollContentsBy(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().</para>
            <para>Scrolls the contents of the tree view by (dx, dy).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ScrollTo(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().</para>
            <para>Scroll the contents of the tree view until the given model item index is visible. The hint parameter specifies more precisely where the item should be located after the operation. If any of the parents of the model item are collapsed, they will be expanded to ensure that the model item is visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SelectAll">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectAll().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SelectedIndexes">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectedIndexes().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SetColumnHidden(System.Int32,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true the column is hidden, otherwise the column is shown.</para>
            <para>See also isColumnHidden(), hideColumn(), and setRowHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SetColumnWidth(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the width of the given column to the width specified.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also columnWidth() and resizeColumnToContents().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SetExpanded(QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item referred to by index to either collapse or expanded, depending on the value of expanded.</para>
            <para>See also expanded(), expand(), and isExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SetFirstColumnSpanned(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If span is true the item in the first column in the row with the given parent is set to span all columns, otherwise all items on the row are shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also isFirstColumnSpanned().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SetRowHidden(System.Int32,QtCore.QModelIndex,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If hide is true the row with the given parent is hidden, otherwise the row is shown.</para>
            <para>See also isRowHidden() and setColumnHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SetSelection(QtCore.QRect,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().</para>
            <para>Applies the selection command to the items in or touched by the rectangle, rect.</para>
            <para>See also selectionCommand().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.ShowColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows the given column in the tree view.</para>
            <para>See also hideColumn() and setColumnHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SizeHintForColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::sizeHintForColumn().</para>
            <para>Returns the size hint for the column's width or -1 if there is no model.</para>
            <para>If you need to set the width of a given column to a fixed value, call QHeaderView::resizeSection() on the view's header.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function in a subclass, note that the value you return is only used when resizeColumnToContents() is called. In that case, if a larger column width is required by either the view's header or the item delegate, that width will be used instead.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::sizeHint and header().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SortByColumn(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the model up for sorting by the values in the given column and order.</para>
            <para>column may be -1, in which case no sort indicator will be shown and the model will return to its natural, unsorted order. Note that not all models support this and may even crash in this case.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also sortingEnabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.SortByColumn(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the model up for sorting by the values in the given column and order.</para>
            <para>column may be -1, in which case no sort indicator will be shown and the model will return to its natural, unsorted order. Note that not all models support this and may even crash in this case.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also sortingEnabled.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnTimerEvent(QtCore.QTimerEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.UpdateGeometries">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::updateGeometries().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.VerticalOffset">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().</para>
            <para>Returns the vertical offset of the items in the tree view.</para>
            <para>See also horizontalOffset().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.OnViewportEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.VisualRect(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRect().</para>
            <para>Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at index. If the index is not visible or explicitly hidden, the returned rectangle is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.VisualRegionForSelection(QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRegionForSelection().</para>
            <para>Returns the rectangle from the viewport of the items in the given selection.</para>
            <para>Since 4.7, the returned region only contains rectangles intersecting (or included in) the viewport.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the tree view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeView.Expanded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is expanded.</para>
            <para>See also setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeView.Collapsed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is collapsed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.Header">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the header for the tree view.</para>
            <para>Sets the header for the tree view, to the given header.</para>
            <para>The view takes ownership over the given header and deletes it when a new header is set.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.Model">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.RootIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setRootIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.SelectionModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.AutoExpandDelay">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the delay time before items in a tree are opened during a drag and drop operation.</para>
            <para>This property holds the amount of time in milliseconds that the user must wait over a node before that node will automatically open or close. If the time is set to less then 0 then it will not be activated.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of -1, meaning that auto-expansion is disabled.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.Indentation">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds indentation of the items in the tree view.</para>
            <para>This property holds the indentation measured in pixels of the items for each level in the tree view. For top-level items, the indentation specifies the horizontal distance from the viewport edge to the items in the first column; for child items, it specifies their indentation from their parent items.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 20.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.RootIsDecorated">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether to show controls for expanding and collapsing top-level items.</para>
            <para>Items with children are typically shown with controls to expand and collapse them, allowing their children to be shown or hidden. If this property is false, these controls are not shown for top-level items. This can be used to make a single level tree structure appear like a simple list of items.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.UniformRowHeights">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether all items in the treeview have the same height.</para>
            <para>This property should only be set to true if it is guaranteed that all items in the view has the same height. This enables the view to do some optimizations.</para>
            <para>The height is obtained from the first item in the view. It is updated when the data changes on that item.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.ItemsExpandable">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the items are expandable by the user.</para>
            <para>This property holds whether the user can expand and collapse items interactively.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.SortingEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether sorting is enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, sorting is enabled for the tree; if the property is false, sorting is not enabled. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>Note: In order to avoid performance issues, it is recommended that sorting is enabled after inserting the items into the tree. Alternatively, you could also insert the items into a list before inserting the items into the tree.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.Animated">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether animations are enabled.</para>
            <para>If this property is true the treeview will animate expandsion and collasping of branches. If this property is false, the treeview will expand or collapse branches immediately without showing the animation.</para>
            <para>By default, this property is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.AllColumnsShowFocus">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns.</para>
            <para>If this property is true all columns will show focus, otherwise only one column will show focus.</para>
            <para>The default is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.WordWrap">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the item text word-wrapping policy.</para>
            <para>If this property is true then the item text is wrapped where necessary at word-breaks; otherwise it is not wrapped at all. This property is false by default.</para>
            <para>Note that even if wrapping is enabled, the cell will not be expanded to fit all text. Ellipsis will be inserted according to the current textElideMode.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.HeaderHidden">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the header is shown or not.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, the header is not shown otherwise it is. The default value is false.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeView.ExpandsOnDoubleClick">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the items can be expanded by double-clicking.</para>
            <para>This property holds whether the user can expand and collapse items by double-clicking. The default value is true.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeWidget">
            <summary>
            The QTreeWidget class provides a tree view that uses a predefined tree model.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QTreeWidget class is a convenience class that provides a standard tree widget with a classic item-based interface similar to that used by the QListView class in Qt 3. This class is based on Qt's Model/View architecture and uses a default model to hold items, each of which is a QTreeWidgetItem.</para>
            <para>Developers who do not need the flexibility of the Model/View framework can use this class to create simple hierarchical lists very easily. A more flexible approach involves combining a QTreeView with a standard item model. This allows the storage of data to be separated from its representation.</para>
            <para>In its simplest form, a tree widget can be constructed in the following way:</para>
            <para> QTreeWidget *treeWidget = new QTreeWidget();</para>
            <para> treeWidget-&amp;gt;setColumnCount(1);</para>
            <para> QList&amp;lt;QTreeWidgetItem *&amp;gt; items;</para>
            <para> for (int i = 0; i &amp;lt; 10; ++i)</para>
            <para>     items.append(new QTreeWidgetItem((QTreeWidget*)0, QStringList(QString(&amp;quot;item: %1&amp;quot;).arg(i))));</para>
            <para> treeWidget-&amp;gt;insertTopLevelItems(0, items);</para>
            <para>Before items can be added to the tree widget, the number of columns must be set with setColumnCount(). This allows each item to have one or more labels or other decorations. The number of columns in use can be found with the columnCount() function.</para>
            <para>The tree can have a header that contains a section for each column in the widget. It is easiest to set up the labels for each section by supplying a list of strings with setHeaderLabels(), but a custom header can be constructed with a QTreeWidgetItem and inserted into the tree with the setHeaderItem() function.</para>
            <para>The items in the tree can be sorted by column according to a predefined sort order. If sorting is enabled, the user can sort the items by clicking on a column header. Sorting can be enabled or disabled by calling setSortingEnabled(). The isSortingEnabled() function indicates whether sorting is enabled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> 	</para>
            <para>A Windows XP style tree widget.	A Macintosh style tree widget.	A Plastique style tree widget.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTreeWidgetItem, QTreeWidgetItemIterator, QTreeView, Model/View Programming, and Settings Editor Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.AddTopLevelItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the item as a top-level item in the widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also insertTopLevelItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.AddTopLevelItems(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the list of items as a top-level items in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also insertTopLevelItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the tree widget by removing all of its items and selections.</para>
            <para>Note: Since each item is removed from the tree widget before being deleted, the return value of QTreeWidgetItem::treeWidget() will be invalid when called from an item's destructor.</para>
            <para>See also takeTopLevelItem(), topLevelItemCount(), and columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ClosePersistentEditor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the persistent editor for the item in the given column.</para>
            <para>This function has no effect if no persistent editor is open for this combination of item and column.</para>
            <para>See also openPersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.CollapseItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the item. This causes the tree containing the item's children to be collapsed.</para>
            <para>See also expandItem(), currentItem(), itemAt(), and topLevelItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.CurrentColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current column in the tree widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentItem() and columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnCurrentItemChanged(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current item changes. The current item is specified by current, and this replaces the previous current item.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnDropEvent(QtGui.QDropEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.DropMimeData(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32,QtCore.QMimeData,QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action in the index in the given parent item.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns true if the drop was successfully handled by decoding the mime data and inserting it into the model; otherwise it returns false.</para>
            <para>See also supportedDropActions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.EditItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Starts editing the item in the given column if it is editable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ExpandItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Expands the item. This causes the tree containing the item's children to be expanded.</para>
            <para>See also collapseItem(), currentItem(), itemAt(), topLevelItem(), and itemExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.FindItems(System.String,QtCore.Qt.MatchFlag,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of items that match the given text, using the given flags, in the given column.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.IndexFromItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QModelIndex assocated with the given item in the given column.</para>
            <para>See also itemFromIndex() and topLevelItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.IndexOfTopLevelItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the given top-level item, or -1 if the item cannot be found.</para>
            <para>See also sortItems() and topLevelItemCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.InsertTopLevelItem(System.Int32,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the item at index in the top level in the view.</para>
            <para>If the item has already been inserted somewhere else it wont be inserted.</para>
            <para>See also addTopLevelItem() and columnCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.InsertTopLevelItems(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the list of items at index in the top level in the view.</para>
            <para>Items that have already been inserted somewhere else wont be inserted.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also addTopLevelItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.InvisibleRootItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tree widget's invisible root item.</para>
            <para>The invisible root item provides access to the tree widget's top-level items through the QTreeWidgetItem API, making it possible to write functions that can treat top-level items and their children in a uniform way; for example, recursive functions.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.IsFirstItemColumnSpanned(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given item is set to show only one section over all columns; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setFirstItemColumnSpanned().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.IsItemExpanded(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given item is open; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded() instead.</para>
            <para>See also itemExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.IsItemHidden(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is explicitly hidden, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTreeWidgetItem::isHidden() instead.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.IsItemSelected(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is selected; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTreeWidgetItem::isSelected() instead.</para>
            <para>See also itemSelectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemAbove(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item above the given item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemActivated(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user activates an item by single- or double-clicking (depending on the platform, i.e. on the QStyle::SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick style hint) or pressing a special key (e.g., Enter).</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemAt(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates p. The coordinates are relative to the tree widget's viewport().</para>
            <para>See also visualItemRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemAt(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates (x, y). The coordinates are relative to the tree widget's viewport().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemBelow(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item visually below the given item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemChanged(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the contents of the column in the specified item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemClicked(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was clicked, no signal will be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemCollapsed(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item is collapsed so that none of its children are displayed.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when collapseAll() is invoked.</para>
            <para>See also QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemExpanded(), and collapseItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemDoubleClicked(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user double clicks inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was double clicked, no signal will be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemEntered(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item over the specified column. QTreeWidget mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemExpanded(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item is expanded so that all of its children are displayed.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when expandAll() is invoked.</para>
            <para>See also setItemExpanded(), QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemCollapsed(), and expandItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemFromIndex(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the QTreeWidgetItem assocated with the given index.</para>
            <para>See also indexFromItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemPressed(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user presses a mouse button inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OnItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the selection changes in the tree widget. The current selection can be found with selectedItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemWidget(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget displayed in the cell specified by item and the given column.</para>
            <para>Note: The tree takes ownership of the widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setItemWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.Items(QtCore.QMimeData)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an empty list</para>
            <para>See also mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.MimeData(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns an object that contains a serialized description of the specified items. The format used to describe the items is obtained from the mimeTypes() function.</para>
            <para>If the list of items is empty, 0 is returned rather than a serialized empty list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.MimeTypes">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of treewidget items.</para>
            <para>See also mimeData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.OpenPersistentEditor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Opens a persistent editor for the item in the given column.</para>
            <para>See also closePersistentEditor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.RemoveItemWidget(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the widget set in the given item in the given column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ScrollToItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,QtGui.QAbstractItemView.ScrollHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Ensures that the item is visible, scrolling the view if necessary using the specified hint.</para>
            <para>See also currentItem(), itemAt(), and topLevelItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SelectedItems">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all selected non-hidden items.</para>
            <para>See also itemSelectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetCurrentItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current item in the tree widget and the current column to column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also currentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetCurrentItem(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32,QtGui.QItemSelectionModel.SelectionFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the current item in the tree widget.</para>
            <para>Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected.</para>
            <para>See also currentItem() and currentItemChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetFirstItemColumnSpanned(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given item to only show one section for all columns if span is true; otherwise the item will show one section per column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also isFirstItemColumnSpanned().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetHeaderLabel(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Same as setHeaderLabels(QStringList(label)).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetHeaderLabels(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds a column in the header for each item in the labels list, and sets the label for each column.</para>
            <para>Note that setHeaderLabels() won't remove existing columns.</para>
            <para>See also setHeaderItem() and setHeaderLabel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetItemExpanded(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item referred to by item to either closed or opened, depending on the value of expand.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTreeWidgetItem::setExpanded() instead.</para>
            <para>See also expandItem(), collapseItem(), and itemExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetItemHidden(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the given item if hide is true; otherwise shows the item.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTreeWidgetItem::setHidden() instead.</para>
            <para>See also isItemHidden() and itemChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetItemSelected(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If select is true, the given item is selected; otherwise it is deselected.</para>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use QTreeWidgetItem::setSelected() instead.</para>
            <para>See also isItemSelected() and itemSelectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SetItemWidget(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given widget to be displayed in the cell specified by the given item and column.</para>
            <para>The given widget's autoFillBackground property must be set to true, otherwise the widget's background will be transparent, showing both the model data and the tree widget item.</para>
            <para>This function should only be used to display static content in the place of a tree widget item. If you want to display custom dynamic content or implement a custom editor widget, use QTreeView and subclass QItemDelegate instead.</para>
            <para>This function cannot be called before the item hierarchy has been set up, i.e., the QTreeWidgetItem that will hold widget must have been added to the view before widget is set.</para>
            <para>Note: The tree takes ownership of the widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also itemWidget() and Delegate Classes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SortColumn">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the column used to sort the contents of the widget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also sortItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SortItems(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts the items in the widget in the specified order by the values in the given column.</para>
            <para>See also sortColumn().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SupportedDropActions">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the drop actions supported by this view.</para>
            <para>See also Qt::DropActions.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.TakeTopLevelItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the top-level item at the given index in the tree and returns it, otherwise returns 0;</para>
            <para>See also insertTopLevelItem(), topLevelItem(), and topLevelItemCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.TopLevelItem(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the top level item at the given index, or 0 if the item does not exist.</para>
            <para>See also topLevelItemCount() and insertTopLevelItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.VisualItemRect(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at item.</para>
            <para>See also itemAt().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidget.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the tree widget and all its items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user presses a mouse button inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was clicked, no signal will be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemDoubleClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user double clicks inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was double clicked, no signal will be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user activates an item by single- or double-clicking (depending on the platform, i.e. on the QStyle::SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick style hint) or pressing a special key (e.g., Enter).</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item over the specified column. QTreeWidget mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the contents of the column in the specified item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemExpanded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item is expanded so that all of its children are displayed.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when expandAll() is invoked.</para>
            <para>See also setItemExpanded(), QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemCollapsed(), and expandItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemCollapsed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item is collapsed so that none of its children are displayed.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when collapseAll() is invoked.</para>
            <para>See also QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemExpanded(), and collapseItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.CurrentItemChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current item changes. The current item is specified by current, and this replaces the previous current item.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the selection changes in the tree widget. The current selection can be found with selectedItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidget.CurrentItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the current item in the tree widget.</para>
            <para>Sets the current item in the tree widget.</para>
            <para>Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also be selected.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidget.HeaderItem">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item used for the tree widget's header.</para>
            <para>Sets the header item for the tree widget. The label for each column in the header is supplied by the corresponding label in the item.</para>
            <para>The tree widget takes ownership of the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidget.SelectionModel">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidget.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of columns displayed in the tree widget.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidget.TopLevelItemCount">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the number of top-level items.</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem">
            <summary>
            The QTreeWidgetItem class provides an item for use with the QTreeWidget convenience class.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Tree widget items are used to hold rows of information for tree widgets. Rows usually contain several columns of data, each of which can contain a text label and an icon.</para>
            <para>The QTreeWidgetItem class is a convenience class that replaces the QListViewItem class in Qt 3. It provides an item for use with the QTreeWidget class.</para>
            <para>Items are usually constructed with a parent that is either a QTreeWidget (for top-level items) or a QTreeWidgetItem (for items on lower levels of the tree). For example, the following code constructs a top-level item to represent cities of the world, and adds a entry for Oslo as a child item:</para>
            <para>     QTreeWidgetItem *cities = new QTreeWidgetItem(treeWidget);</para>
            <para>     cities-&amp;gt;setText(0, tr(&amp;quot;Cities&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     QTreeWidgetItem *osloItem = new QTreeWidgetItem(cities);</para>
            <para>     osloItem-&amp;gt;setText(0, tr(&amp;quot;Oslo&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     osloItem-&amp;gt;setText(1, tr(&amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>Items can be added in a particular order by specifying the item they follow when they are constructed:</para>
            <para>     QTreeWidgetItem *planets = new QTreeWidgetItem(treeWidget, cities);</para>
            <para>     planets-&amp;gt;setText(0, tr(&amp;quot;Planets&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>Each column in an item can have its own background brush which is set with the setBackground() function. The current background brush can be found with background(). The text label for each column can be rendered with its own font and brush. These are specified with the setFont() and setForeground() functions, and read with font() and foreground().</para>
            <para>The main difference between top-level items and those in lower levels of the tree is that a top-level item has no parent(). This information can be used to tell the difference between items, and is useful to know when inserting and removing items from the tree. Children of an item can be removed with takeChild() and inserted at a given index in the list of children with the insertChild() function.</para>
            <para>By default, items are enabled, selectable, checkable, and can be the source of a drag and drop operation. Each item's flags can be changed by calling setFlags() with the appropriate value (see Qt::ItemFlags). Checkable items can be checked and unchecked with the setCheckState() function. The corresponding checkState() function indicates whether the item is currently checked.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Subclassing</para>
            <para>When subclassing QTreeWidgetItem to provide custom items, it is possible to define new types for them so that they can be distinguished from standard items. The constructors for subclasses that require this feature need to call the base class constructor with a new type value equal to or greater than UserType.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTreeWidget, QTreeWidgetItemIterator, Model/View Programming, QListWidgetItem, and QTableWidgetItem.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidget,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item of the specified type and inserts it into the given parent after the preceding item.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item of the specified type that is inserted into the parent after the preceding child item.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidget,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item of the specified type and appends it to the items in the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item and append it to the given parent.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidget,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item of the specified type and appends it to the items in the given parent. The given list of strings will be set as the item text for each column in the item.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item and append it to the given parent. The given list of strings will be set as the item text for each column in the item.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item of the specified type. The item must be inserted into a tree widget.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.#ctor(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String},System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a tree widget item of the specified type. The item must be inserted into a tree widget. The given list of strings will be set as the item text for each column in the item.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.AddChild(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the child item to the list of children.</para>
            <para>See also insertChild() and takeChild().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.AddChildren(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Appends the given list of children to the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also insertChildren() and takeChildren().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Background(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render the background of the specified column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setBackground() and foreground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.BackgroundColor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use background() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setBackgroundColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.CheckState(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the check state of the label in the given column.</para>
            <para>See also setCheckState() and Qt::CheckState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Child(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item at the given index in the list of the item's children.</para>
            <para>See also parent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ChildCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of child items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Clone">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a deep copy of the item and of its children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ColumnCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of columns in the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Data(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value for the item's column and role.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.EmitDataChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>Causes the model associated with this item to emit a dataChanged() signal for this item.</para>
            <para>You normally only need to call this function if you have subclassed QTreeWidgetItem and reimplemented data() and/or setData().</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setData().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Font(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the font used to render the text in the specified column.</para>
            <para>See also setFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Foreground(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the brush used to render the foreground (e.g. text) of the specified column.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setForeground() and background().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Icon(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the icon that is displayed in the specified column.</para>
            <para>See also setIcon() and iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.IndexOfChild(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the given child in the item's list of children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.InsertChild(System.Int32,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the child item at index in the list of children.</para>
            <para>If the child has already been inserted somewhere else it wont be inserted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.InsertChildren(System.Int32,System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem})">
            <summary>
            <para>Inserts the given list of children into the list of the item children at index .</para>
            <para>Children that have already been inserted somewhere else wont be inserted.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.IsDisabled">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is disabled; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.IsExpanded">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is expanded, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.IsFirstColumnSpanned">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is spanning all the columns in a row; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setFirstColumnSpanned().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.IsHidden">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is hidden, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.IsSelected">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the item is selected, otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also setSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.op_LessThan(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the text in the item is less than the text in the other item, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Parent">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item's parent.</para>
            <para>See also child().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Read(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reads the item from stream in. This only reads data into a single item.</para>
            <para>See also write().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.RemoveChild(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the given item indicated by child. The removed item will not be deleted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetBackground(System.Int32,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the background brush of the label in the given column to the specified brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also background() and setForeground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetBackgroundColor(System.Int32,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setBackground() instead.</para>
            <para>See also backgroundColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetCheckState(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.CheckState)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the item in the given column check state to be state.</para>
            <para>See also checkState().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetData(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the value for the item's column and role to the given value.</para>
            <para>The role describes the type of data specified by value, and is defined by the Qt::ItemDataRole enum.</para>
            <para>See also data().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetDisabled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Disables the item if disabled is true; otherwise enables the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also isDisabled() and setFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetExpanded(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Expands the item if expand is true, otherwise collapses the item.</para>
            <para>Warning: The QTreeWidgetItem must be added to the QTreeWidget before calling this function.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetFirstColumnSpanned(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the first section to span all columns if span is true; otherwise all item sections are shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also isFirstColumnSpanned().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetFont(System.Int32,QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the font used to display the text in the given column to the given font.</para>
            <para>See also font(), setText(), and setForeground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetForeground(System.Int32,QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the foreground brush of the label in the given column to the specified brush.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also foreground() and setBackground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetHidden(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Hides the item if hide is true, otherwise shows the item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetIcon(System.Int32,QtGui.QIcon)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the icon to be displayed in the given column to icon.</para>
            <para>See also icon(), setText(), and iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetSelected(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the selected state of the item to select.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetSizeHint(System.Int32,QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the size hint for the tree item in the given column to be size. If no size hint is set, the item delegate will compute the size hint based on the item data.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetStatusTip(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the status tip for the given column to the given statusTip. QTreeWidget mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also statusTip(), setToolTip(), and setWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetText(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text to be displayed in the given column to the given text.</para>
            <para>See also text(), setFont(), and setForeground().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetTextAlignment(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text alignment for the label in the given column to the alignment specified (see Qt::AlignmentFlag).</para>
            <para>See also textAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetTextColor(System.Int32,QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use setForeground() instead.</para>
            <para>See also textColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetToolTip(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the tooltip for the given column to toolTip.</para>
            <para>See also toolTip(), setStatusTip(), and setWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SetWhatsThis(System.Int32,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the &quot;What's This?&quot; help for the given column to whatsThis.</para>
            <para>See also whatsThis(), setStatusTip(), and setToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SizeHint(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the size hint set for the tree item in the given column (see QSize).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also setSizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.SortChildren(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sorts the children of the item using the given order, by the values in the given column.</para>
            <para>Note: This function does nothing if the item is not associated with a QTreeWidget.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.StatusTip(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the status tip for the contents of the given column.</para>
            <para>See also setStatusTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.TakeChild(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the item at index and returns it, otherwise return 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.TakeChildren">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the list of children and returns it, otherwise returns an empty list.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Text(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text in the specified column.</para>
            <para>See also setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.TextAlignment(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text alignment for the label in the given column (see Qt::AlignmentFlag).</para>
            <para>See also setTextAlignment().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.TextColor(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is deprecated. Use foreground() instead.</para>
            <para>See also setTextColor().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ToolTip(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tool tip for the given column.</para>
            <para>See also setToolTip().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.TreeWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the tree widget that contains the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the type passed to the QTreeWidgetItem constructor.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.WhatsThis(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the &quot;What's This?&quot; help for the contents of the given column.</para>
            <para>See also setWhatsThis().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Write(QtCore.QDataStream)">
            <summary>
            <para>Writes the item to stream out. This only writes data from one single item.</para>
            <para>See also read().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this tree widget item.</para>
            <para>The item will be removed from QTreeWidgets to which it has been added. This makes it safe to delete an item at any time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.childIndicatorPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the item indicator policy. This policy decides when the tree branch expand/collapse indicator is shown.</para>
            <para>Sets the item indicator policy. This policy decides when the tree branch expand/collapse indicator is shown. The default value is ShowForChildren.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.Flags">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the flags used to describe the item. These determine whether the item can be checked, edited, and selected.</para>
            <para>The default value for flags is Qt::ItemIsSelectable | Qt::ItemIsUserCheckable | Qt::ItemIsEnabled | Qt::ItemIsDragEnabled. If the item was constructed with a parent, flags will in addition contain Qt::ItemIsDropEnabled.</para>
            <para>Sets the flags for the item to the given flags. These determine whether the item can be selected or modified. This is often used to disable an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ChildIndicatorPolicy">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ChildIndicatorPolicy.DontShowIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>The controls for expanding and collapsing will never be shown even if there are children. If the node is forced open the user will not be able to expand or collapse the item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ChildIndicatorPolicy.DontShowIndicatorWhenChildless">
            <summary>
            <para>The controls for expanding and collapsing will be shown if the item contains children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ChildIndicatorPolicy.ShowIndicator">
            <summary>
            <para>The controls for expanding and collapsing will be shown for this item even if there are no children.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ItemType">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum describes the types that are used to describe tree widget items.</para>
            <para>You can define new user types in QTreeWidgetItem subclasses to ensure that custom items are treated specially; for example, when items are sorted.</para>
            <para>See also type().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ItemType.Type">
            <summary>
            <para>The default type for tree widget items.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem.ItemType.UserType">
            <summary>
            <para>The minimum value for custom types. Values below UserType are reserved by Qt.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator">
            <summary>
            The QTreeWidgetItemIterator class provides a way to iterate over the items in a QTreeWidget instance.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The iterator will walk the items in a pre-order traversal order, thus visiting the parent node before it continues to the child nodes.</para>
            <para>For example, the following code examples each item in a tree, checking the text in the first column against a user-specified search string:</para>
            <para>     QTreeWidgetItemIterator it(treeWidget);</para>
            <para>     while (*it) {</para>
            <para>         if ((*it)-&amp;gt;text(0) == itemText)</para>
            <para>             (*it)-&amp;gt;setSelected(true);</para>
            <para>         ++it;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>It is also possible to filter out certain types of node by passing certain flags to the constructor of QTreeWidgetItemIterator.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QTreeWidget, Model/View Programming, and QTreeWidgetItem.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidget,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.IteratorFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.#ctor(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.IteratorFlag)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.op_Increment(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator)">
            <summary>
            <para>The prefix ++ operator (++it) advances the iterator to the next matching item and returns a reference to the resulting iterator. Sets the current pointer to 0 if the current item is the last matching item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.op_Decrement(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator)">
            <summary>
            <para>The prefix -- operator (--it) advances the iterator to the previous matching item and returns a reference to the resulting iterator. Sets the current pointer to 0 if the current item is the first matching item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the iterator.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QTreeWidgetItemIterator.IteratorFlag">
            <summary>
            <para>These flags can be passed to a QTreeWidgetItemIterator constructor (OR-ed together if more than one is used), so that the iterator will only iterate over items that match the given flags.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QUndoCommand">
            <summary>
            The QUndoCommand class is the base class of all commands stored on a QUndoStack.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of Qt's Undo Framework, see the overview document.</para>
            <para>A QUndoCommand represents a single editing action on a document; for example, inserting or deleting a block of text in a text editor. QUndoCommand can apply a change to the document with redo() and undo the change with undo(). The implementations for these functions must be provided in a derived class.</para>
            <para> class AppendText : public QUndoCommand</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para> public:</para>
            <para>     AppendText(QString *doc, const QString &amp;amp;text)</para>
            <para>         : m_document(doc), m_text(text) { setText(&amp;quot;append text&amp;quot;); }</para>
            <para>     virtual void undo()</para>
            <para>         { m_document-&amp;gt;chop(m_text.length()); }</para>
            <para>     virtual void redo()</para>
            <para>         { m_document-&amp;gt;append(m_text); }</para>
            <para> private:</para>
            <para>     QString *m_document;</para>
            <para>     QString m_text;</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>A QUndoCommand has an associated text(). This is a short string describing what the command does. It is used to update the text properties of the stack's undo and redo actions; see QUndoStack::createUndoAction() and QUndoStack::createRedoAction().</para>
            <para>QUndoCommand objects are owned by the stack they were pushed on. QUndoStack deletes a command if it has been undone and a new command is pushed. For example:</para>
            <para> MyCommand *command1 = new MyCommand();</para>
            <para> stack-&amp;gt;push(command1);</para>
            <para> MyCommand *command2 = new MyCommand();</para>
            <para> stack-&amp;gt;push(command2);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> stack-&amp;gt;undo();</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> MyCommand *command3 = new MyCommand();</para>
            <para> stack-&amp;gt;push(command3); // command2 gets deleted</para>
            <para>In effect, when a command is pushed, it becomes the top-most command on the stack.</para>
            <para>To support command compression, QUndoCommand has an id() and the virtual function mergeWith(). These functions are used by QUndoStack::push().</para>
            <para>To support command macros, a QUndoCommand object can have any number of child commands. Undoing or redoing the parent command will cause the child commands to be undone or redone. A command can be assigned to a parent explicitly in the constructor. In this case, the command will be owned by the parent.</para>
            <para>The parent in this case is usually an empty command, in that it doesn't provide its own implementation of undo() and redo(). Instead, it uses the base implementations of these functions, which simply call undo() or redo() on all its children. The parent should, however, have a meaningful text().</para>
            <para> QUndoCommand *insertRed = new QUndoCommand(); // an empty command</para>
            <para> insertRed-&amp;gt;setText(&amp;quot;insert red text&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> new InsertText(document, idx, text, insertRed); // becomes child of insertRed</para>
            <para> new SetColor(document, idx, text.length(), Qt::red, insertRed);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> stack.push(insertRed);</para>
            <para>Another way to create macros is to use the convenience functions QUndoStack::beginMacro() and QUndoStack::endMacro().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.#ctor(QtGui.QUndoCommand)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QUndoCommand object with parent parent.</para>
            <para>If parent is not 0, this command is appended to parent's child list. The parent command then owns this command and will delete it in its destructor.</para>
            <para>See also ~QUndoCommand().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.#ctor(System.String,QtGui.QUndoCommand)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a QUndoCommand object with the given parent and text.</para>
            <para>If parent is not 0, this command is appended to parent's child list. The parent command then owns this command and will delete it in its destructor.</para>
            <para>See also ~QUndoCommand().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.ActionText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a short text string describing what this command does; for example, &quot;insert text&quot;.</para>
            <para>The text is used when the text properties of the stack's undo and redo actions are updated.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.8.</para>
            <para>See also text(), setText(), QUndoStack::createUndoAction(), and QUndoStack::createRedoAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.Child(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the child command at index.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also childCount() and QUndoStack::command().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.ChildCount">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of child commands in this command.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also child().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.Id">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the ID of this command.</para>
            <para>A command ID is used in command compression. It must be an integer unique to this command's class, or -1 if the command doesn't support compression.</para>
            <para>If the command supports compression this function must be overridden in the derived class to return the correct ID. The base implementation returns -1.</para>
            <para>QUndoStack::push() will only try to merge two commands if they have the same ID, and the ID is not -1.</para>
            <para>See also mergeWith() and QUndoStack::push().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.MergeWith(QtGui.QUndoCommand)">
            <summary>
            <para>Attempts to merge this command with command. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>If this function returns true, calling this command's redo() must have the same effect as redoing both this command and command. Similarly, calling this command's undo() must have the same effect as undoing command and this command.</para>
            <para>QUndoStack will only try to merge two commands if they have the same id, and the id is not -1.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns false.</para>
            <para> bool AppendText::mergeWith(const QUndoCommand *other)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (other-&gt;id() != id()) // make sure other is also an AppendText command</para>
            <para>         return false;</para>
            <para>     m_text += static_cast&lt;const AppendText*&gt;(other)-&gt;m_text;</para>
            <para>     return true;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also id() and QUndoStack::push().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Applies a change to the document. This function must be implemented in the derived class. Calling QUndoStack::push(), QUndoStack::undo() or QUndoStack::redo() from this function leads to undefined beahavior.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls redo() on all child commands.</para>
            <para>See also undo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Reverts a change to the document. After undo() is called, the state of the document should be the same as before redo() was called. This function must be implemented in the derived class. Calling QUndoStack::push(), QUndoStack::undo() or QUndoStack::redo() from this function leads to undefined beahavior.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls undo() on all child commands in reverse order.</para>
            <para>See also redo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoCommand.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QUndoCommand object and all child commands.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoCommand().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoCommand.Text">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a short text string describing what this command does; for example, &quot;insert text&quot;.</para>
            <para>The text is used for names of items in QUndoView.</para>
            <para>Sets the command's text to be the text specified.</para>
            <para>The specified text should be a short user-readable string describing what this command does.</para>
            <para>If you need to have two different strings for text() and actionText(), separate them with &quot;\n&quot; and pass into this function. Even if you do not use this feature for English strings during development, you can still let translators use two different strings in order to match specific languages' needs. The described feature and the function actionText() are available since Qt 4.8.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QUndoGroup">
            <summary>
            The QUndoGroup class is a group of QUndoStack objects.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of the Qt's undo framework, see the overview.</para>
            <para>An application often has multiple undo stacks, one for each opened document. At the same time, an application usually has one undo action and one redo action, which triggers undo or redo in the active document.</para>
            <para>QUndoGroup is a group of QUndoStack objects, one of which may be active. It has an undo() and redo() slot, which calls QUndoStack::undo() and QUndoStack::redo() for the active stack. It also has the functions createUndoAction() and createRedoAction(). The actions returned by these functions behave in the same way as those returned by QUndoStack::createUndoAction() and QUndoStack::createRedoAction() of the active stack.</para>
            <para>Stacks are added to a group with addStack() and removed with removeStack(). A stack is implicitly added to a group when it is created with the group as its parent QObject.</para>
            <para>It is the programmer's responsibility to specify which stack is active by calling QUndoStack::setActive(), usually when the associated document window receives focus. The active stack may also be set with setActiveStack(), and is returned by activeStack().</para>
            <para>When a stack is added to a group using addStack(), the group does not take ownership of the stack. This means the stack has to be deleted separately from the group. When a stack is deleted, it is automatically removed from a group. A stack may belong to only one group. Adding it to another group will cause it to be removed from the previous group.</para>
            <para>A QUndoGroup is also useful in conjunction with QUndoView. If a QUndoView is set to watch a group using QUndoView::setGroup(), it will update itself to display the active stack.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an empty QUndoGroup object with parent parent.</para>
            <para>See also addStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnActiveStackChanged(QtGui.QUndoStack)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack of the group changes. This can happen when setActiveStack() or QUndoStack::setActive() is called, or when the active stack is removed form the group. stack is the new active stack. If no stack is active, stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also setActiveStack() and QUndoStack::setActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.AddStack(QtGui.QUndoStack)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds stack to this group. The group does not take ownership of the stack. Another way of adding a stack to a group is by specifying the group as the stack's parent QObject in QUndoStack::QUndoStack(). In this case, the stack is deleted when the group is deleted, in the usual manner of QObjects.</para>
            <para>See also removeStack(), stacks(), and QUndoStack::QUndoStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CanRedo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::canRedo().</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns false.</para>
            <para>See also canUndo() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnCanRedoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>canRedo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CanUndo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::canUndo().</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns false.</para>
            <para>See also canRedo() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnCanUndoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>canUndo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnCleanChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::cleanChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>clean is the new state, or true if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::cleanChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CreateRedoAction(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an redo QAction object with parent parent.</para>
            <para>Triggering this action will cause a call to QUndoStack::redo() on the active stack. The text of this action will always be the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo(), prefixed by prefix. If there is no command available for redo, if the group is empty or if none of the stacks are active, this action will be disabled.</para>
            <para>If prefix is empty, the default template &quot;Redo %1&quot; is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix &quot;Redo&quot; was used by default.</para>
            <para>See also createUndoAction(), canRedo(), and QUndoCommand::text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CreateUndoAction(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an undo QAction object with parent parent.</para>
            <para>Triggering this action will cause a call to QUndoStack::undo() on the active stack. The text of this action will always be the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo(), prefixed by prefix. If there is no command available for undo, if the group is empty or if none of the stacks are active, this action will be disabled.</para>
            <para>If prefix is empty, the default template &quot;Undo %1&quot; is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix &quot;Undo&quot; was used by default.</para>
            <para>See also createRedoAction(), canUndo(), and QUndoCommand::text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnIndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::indexChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>idx is the new current index, or 0 if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::indexChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.IsClean">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::isClean().</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns true.</para>
            <para>See also setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Calls QUndoStack::redo() on the active stack.</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also undo(), canRedo(), and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.RedoText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::redoText().</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns an empty string.</para>
            <para>See also undoText() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnRedoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>redoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.RemoveStack(QtGui.QUndoStack)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes stack from this group. If the stack was the active stack in the group, the active stack becomes 0.</para>
            <para>See also addStack(), stacks(), and QUndoStack::~QUndoStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.Stacks">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of stacks in this group.</para>
            <para>See also addStack() and removeStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Calls QUndoStack::undo() on the active stack.</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also redo(), canUndo(), and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.UndoText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::undoText().</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns an empty string.</para>
            <para>See also redoText() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.OnUndoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>undoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoGroup.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the QUndoGroup.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.ActiveStackChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack of the group changes. This can happen when setActiveStack() or QUndoStack::setActive() is called, or when the active stack is removed form the group. stack is the new active stack. If no stack is active, stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also setActiveStack() and QUndoStack::setActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.IndexChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::indexChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>idx is the new current index, or 0 if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::indexChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CleanChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::cleanChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>clean is the new state, or true if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::cleanChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CanUndoChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>canUndo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.CanRedoChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>canRedo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.UndoTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>undoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoGroup.RedoTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>redoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoGroup.ActiveStack">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the active stack of this group.</para>
            <para>If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns 0.</para>
            <para>Sets the active stack of this group to stack.</para>
            <para>If the stack is not a member of this group, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>Synonymous with calling QUndoStack::setActive() on stack.</para>
            <para>The actions returned by createUndoAction() and createRedoAction() will now behave in the same way as those returned by stack's QUndoStack::createUndoAction() and QUndoStack::createRedoAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QUndoStack">
            <summary>
            The QUndoStack class is a stack of QUndoCommand objects.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>For an overview of Qt's Undo Framework, see the overview document.</para>
            <para>An undo stack maintains a stack of commands that have been applied to a document.</para>
            <para>New commands are pushed on the stack using push(). Commands can be undone and redone using undo() and redo(), or by triggering the actions returned by createUndoAction() and createRedoAction().</para>
            <para>QUndoStack keeps track of the current command. This is the command which will be executed by the next call to redo(). The index of this command is returned by index(). The state of the edited object can be rolled forward or back using setIndex(). If the top-most command on the stack has already been redone, index() is equal to count().</para>
            <para>QUndoStack provides support for undo and redo actions, command compression, command macros, and supports the concept of a clean state.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Undo and Redo Actions</para>
            <para>QUndoStack provides convenient undo and redo QAction objects, which can be inserted into a menu or a toolbar. When commands are undone or redone, QUndoStack updates the text properties of these actions to reflect what change they will trigger. The actions are also disabled when no command is available for undo or redo. These actions are returned by QUndoStack::createUndoAction() and QUndoStack::createRedoAction().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Command Compression and Macros</para>
            <para>Command compression is useful when several commands can be compressed into a single command that can be undone and redone in a single operation. For example, when a user types a character in a text editor, a new command is created. This command inserts the character into the document at the cursor position. However, it is more convenient for the user to be able to undo or redo typing of whole words, sentences, or paragraphs. Command compression allows these single-character commands to be merged into a single command which inserts or deletes sections of text. For more information, see QUndoCommand::mergeWith() and push().</para>
            <para>A command macro is a sequence of commands, all of which are undone and redone in one go. Command macros are created by giving a command a list of child commands. Undoing or redoing the parent command will cause the child commands to be undone or redone. Command macros may be created explicitly by specifying a parent in the QUndoCommand constructor, or by using the convenience functions beginMacro() and endMacro().</para>
            <para>Although command compression and macros appear to have the same effect to the user, they often have different uses in an application. Commands that perform small changes to a document may be usefully compressed if there is no need to individually record them, and if only larger changes are relevant to the user. However, for commands that need to be recorded individually, or those that cannot be compressed, it is useful to use macros to provide a more convenient user experience while maintaining a record of each command.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Clean State</para>
            <para>QUndoStack supports the concept of a clean state. When the document is saved to disk, the stack can be marked as clean using setClean(). Whenever the stack returns to this state through undoing and redoing commands, it emits the signal cleanChanged(). This signal is also emitted when the stack leaves the clean state. This signal is usually used to enable and disable the save actions in the application, and to update the document's title to reflect that it contains unsaved changes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QUndoCommand and QUndoView.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an empty undo stack with the parent parent. The stack will initially be in the clean state. If parent is a QUndoGroup object, the stack is automatically added to the group.</para>
            <para>See also push().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.BeginMacro(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Begins composition of a macro command with the given text description.</para>
            <para>An empty command described by the specified text is pushed on the stack. Any subsequent commands pushed on the stack will be appended to the empty command's children until endMacro() is called.</para>
            <para>Calls to beginMacro() and endMacro() may be nested, but every call to beginMacro() must have a matching call to endMacro().</para>
            <para>While a macro is composed, the stack is disabled. This means that:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>indexChanged() and cleanChanged() are not emitted,</para>
            <para>canUndo() and canRedo() return false,</para>
            <para>calling undo() or redo() has no effect,</para>
            <para>the undo/redo actions are disabled.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The stack becomes enabled and appropriate signals are emitted when endMacro() is called for the outermost macro.</para>
            <para> stack.beginMacro(&quot;insert red text&quot;);</para>
            <para> stack.push(new InsertText(document, idx, text));</para>
            <para> stack.push(new SetColor(document, idx, text.length(), Qt::red));</para>
            <para> stack.endMacro(); // indexChanged() is emitted</para>
            <para>This code is equivalent to:</para>
            <para> QUndoCommand *insertRed = new QUndoCommand(); // an empty command</para>
            <para> insertRed-&gt;setText(&quot;insert red text&quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> new InsertText(document, idx, text, insertRed); // becomes child of insertRed</para>
            <para> new SetColor(document, idx, text.length(), Qt::red, insertRed);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> stack.push(insertRed);</para>
            <para>See also endMacro().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.CanRedo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if there is a command available for redo; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function returns false if the stack is empty or if the top command on the stack has already been redone.</para>
            <para>Synonymous with index() == count().</para>
            <para>See also index() and canUndo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.OnCanRedoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of canRedo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). canRedo specifies the new value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.CanUndo">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if there is a command available for undo; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>This function returns false if the stack is empty, or if the bottom command on the stack has already been undone.</para>
            <para>Synonymous with index() == 0.</para>
            <para>See also index() and canRedo().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.OnCanUndoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of canUndo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). canUndo specifies the new value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.OnCleanChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the stack enters or leaves the clean state. If clean is true, the stack is in a clean state; otherwise this signal indicates that it has left the clean state.</para>
            <para>See also isClean() and setClean().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.CleanIndex">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the clean index. This is the index at which setClean() was called.</para>
            <para>A stack may not have a clean index. This happens if a document is saved, some commands are undone, then a new command is pushed. Since push() deletes all the undone commands before pushing the new command, the stack can't return to the clean state again. In this case, this function returns -1.</para>
            <para>See also isClean() and setClean().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Clear">
            <summary>
            <para>Clears the command stack by deleting all commands on it, and returns the stack to the clean state.</para>
            <para>Commands are not undone or redone; the state of the edited object remains unchanged.</para>
            <para>This function is usually used when the contents of the document are abandoned.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Command(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a const pointer to the command at index.</para>
            <para>This function returns a const pointer, because modifying a command, once it has been pushed onto the stack and executed, almost always causes corruption of the state of the document, if the command is later undone or redone.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoCommand::child().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Count">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the number of commands on the stack. Macro commands are counted as one command.</para>
            <para>See also index(), setIndex(), and command().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.CreateRedoAction(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an redo QAction object with the given parent.</para>
            <para>Triggering this action will cause a call to redo(). The text of this action is the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo(), prefixed by the specified prefix. If there is no command available for redo, this action will be disabled.</para>
            <para>If prefix is empty, the default template &quot;Redo %1&quot; is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix &quot;Redo&quot; was used by default.</para>
            <para>See also createUndoAction(), canRedo(), and QUndoCommand::text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.CreateUndoAction(QtCore.QObject,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an undo QAction object with the given parent.</para>
            <para>Triggering this action will cause a call to undo(). The text of this action is the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo(), prefixed by the specified prefix. If there is no command available for undo, this action will be disabled.</para>
            <para>If prefix is empty, the default template &quot;Undo %1&quot; is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix &quot;Undo&quot; was used by default.</para>
            <para>See also createRedoAction(), canUndo(), and QUndoCommand::text().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.EndMacro">
            <summary>
            <para>Ends composition of a macro command.</para>
            <para>If this is the outermost macro in a set nested macros, this function emits indexChanged() once for the entire macro command.</para>
            <para>See also beginMacro().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.OnIndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a command modifies the state of the document. This happens when a command is undone or redone. When a macro command is undone or redone, or setIndex() is called, this signal is emitted only once.</para>
            <para>idx specifies the index of the current command, ie. the command which will be executed on the next call to redo().</para>
            <para>See also index() and setIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.IsClean">
            <summary>
            <para>If the stack is in the clean state, returns true; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setClean() and cleanIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Push(QtGui.QUndoCommand)">
            <summary>
            <para>Pushes cmd on the stack or merges it with the most recently executed command. In either case, executes cmd by calling its redo() function.</para>
            <para>If cmd's id is not -1, and if the id is the same as that of the most recently executed command, QUndoStack will attempt to merge the two commands by calling QUndoCommand::mergeWith() on the most recently executed command. If QUndoCommand::mergeWith() returns true, cmd is deleted.</para>
            <para>In all other cases cmd is simply pushed on the stack.</para>
            <para>If commands were undone before cmd was pushed, the current command and all commands above it are deleted. Hence cmd always ends up being the top-most on the stack.</para>
            <para>Once a command is pushed, the stack takes ownership of it. There are no getters to return the command, since modifying it after it has been executed will almost always lead to corruption of the document's state.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoCommand::id() and QUndoCommand::mergeWith().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Redo">
            <summary>
            <para>Redoes the current command by calling QUndoCommand::redo(). Increments the current command index.</para>
            <para>If the stack is empty, or if the top command on the stack has already been redone, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also undo() and index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.RedoText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo().</para>
            <para>See also QUndoCommand::actionText() and undoText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.OnRedoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of redoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). redoText specifies the new text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.SetClean">
            <summary>
            <para>Marks the stack as clean and emits cleanChanged() if the stack was not already clean.</para>
            <para>Whenever the stack returns to this state through the use of undo/redo commands, it emits the signal cleanChanged(). This signal is also emitted when the stack leaves the clean state.</para>
            <para>See also isClean() and cleanIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Text(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the command at index idx.</para>
            <para>See also beginMacro().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Undo">
            <summary>
            <para>Undoes the command below the current command by calling QUndoCommand::undo(). Decrements the current command index.</para>
            <para>If the stack is empty, or if the bottom command on the stack has already been undone, this function does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also redo() and index().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.UndoText">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo().</para>
            <para>See also QUndoCommand::actionText() and redoText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.OnUndoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of undoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). undoText specifies the new text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoStack.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the undo stack, deleting any commands that are on it. If the stack is in a QUndoGroup, the stack is automatically removed from the group.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoStack.IndexChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a command modifies the state of the document. This happens when a command is undone or redone. When a macro command is undone or redone, or setIndex() is called, this signal is emitted only once.</para>
            <para>idx specifies the index of the current command, ie. the command which will be executed on the next call to redo().</para>
            <para>See also index() and setIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoStack.CleanChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the stack enters or leaves the clean state. If clean is true, the stack is in a clean state; otherwise this signal indicates that it has left the clean state.</para>
            <para>See also isClean() and setClean().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoStack.CanUndoChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of canUndo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). canUndo specifies the new value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoStack.CanRedoChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of canRedo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). canRedo specifies the new value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoStack.UndoTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of undoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). undoText specifies the new text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QUndoStack.RedoTextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of redoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). redoText specifies the new text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoStack.Index">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the index of the current command. This is the command that will be executed on the next call to redo(). It is not always the top-most command on the stack, since a number of commands may have been undone.</para>
            <para>Repeatedly calls undo() or redo() until the current command index reaches idx. This function can be used to roll the state of the document forwards of backwards. indexChanged() is emitted only once.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoStack.Active">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the active status of this stack.</para>
            <para>An application often has multiple undo stacks, one for each opened document. The active stack is the one associated with the currently active document. If the stack belongs to a QUndoGroup, calls to QUndoGroup::undo() or QUndoGroup::redo() will be forwarded to this stack when it is active. If the QUndoGroup is watched by a QUndoView, the view will display the contents of this stack when it is active. If the stack does not belong to a QUndoGroup, making it active has no effect.</para>
            <para>It is the programmer's responsibility to specify which stack is active by calling setActive(), usually when the associated document window receives focus.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoStack.UndoLimit">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the maximum number of commands on this stack.</para>
            <para>When the number of commands on a stack exceedes the stack's undoLimit, commands are deleted from the bottom of the stack. Macro commands (commands with child commands) are treated as one command. The default value is 0, which means that there is no limit.</para>
            <para>This property may only be set when the undo stack is empty, since setting it on a non-empty stack might delete the command at the current index. Calling setUndoLimit() on a non-empty stack prints a warning and does nothing.</para>
            <para>This property was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QUndoView">
            <summary>
            The QUndoView class displays the contents of a QUndoStack.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QUndoView is a QListView which displays the list of commands pushed on an undo stack. The most recently executed command is always selected. Selecting a different command results in a call to QUndoStack::setIndex(), rolling the state of the document backwards or forward to the new command.</para>
            <para>The stack can be set explicitly with setStack(). Alternatively, a QUndoGroup object can be set with setGroup(). The view will then update itself automatically whenever the active stack of the group changes.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoView.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new view with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoView.#ctor(QtGui.QUndoStack,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new view with parent parent and sets the observed stack to stack.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoView.#ctor(QtGui.QUndoGroup,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new view with parent parent and sets the observed group to group.</para>
            <para>The view will update itself autmiatically whenever the active stack of the group changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QUndoView.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this view.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoView.Group">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the group displayed by this view.</para>
            <para>If the view is not looking at group, this function returns 0.</para>
            <para>Sets the group displayed by this view to group. If group is 0, the view will be empty.</para>
            <para>The view will update itself autmiatically whenever the active stack of the group changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoView.Stack">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the stack currently displayed by this view. If the view is looking at a QUndoGroup, this the group's active stack.</para>
            <para>Sets the stack displayed by this view to stack. If stack is 0, the view will be empty.</para>
            <para>If the view was previously looking at a QUndoGroup, the group is set to 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoView.EmptyLabel">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the label used for the empty state.</para>
            <para>The empty label is the topmost element in the list of commands, which represents the state of the document before any commands were pushed on the stack. The default is the string &quot;&lt;empty&gt;&quot;.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QUndoView.CleanIcon">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the icon used to represent the clean state.</para>
            <para>A stack may have a clean state set with QUndoStack::setClean(). This is usually the state of the document at the point it was saved. QUndoView can display an icon in the list of commands to show the clean state. If this property is a null icon, no icon is shown. The default value is the null icon.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QVBoxLayout">
            <summary>
            The QVBoxLayout class lines up widgets vertically.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is used to construct vertical box layout objects. See QBoxLayout for details.</para>
            <para>The simplest use of the class is like this:</para>
            <para>     QWidget *window = new QWidget;</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button1 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;One&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button2 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Two&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button3 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Three&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button4 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Four&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     QPushButton *button5 = new QPushButton(&amp;quot;Five&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QVBoxLayout *layout = new QVBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button1);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button2);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button3);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button4);</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(button5);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     window-&amp;gt;setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para>     window-&amp;gt;show();</para>
            <para>First, we create the widgets we want in the layout. Then, we create the QVBoxLayout object and add the widgets into the layout. Finally, we call QWidget::setLayout() to install the QVBoxLayout object onto the widget. At that point, the widgets in the layout are reparented to have window as their parent.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QHBoxLayout, QGridLayout, QStackedLayout, Layout Management, and Basic Layouts Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVBoxLayout.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new vertical box. You must add it to another layout.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVBoxLayout.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a new top-level vertical box with parent parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVBoxLayout.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys this box layout.</para>
            <para>The layout's widgets aren't destroyed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QVector2D">
            <summary>
            The QVector2D class represents a vector or vertex in 2D space.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QVector2D class can also be used to represent vertices in 2D space. We therefore do not need to provide a separate vertex class.</para>
            <para>Note: By design values in the QVector2D instance are stored as float. This means that on platforms where the qreal arguments to QVector2D functions are represented by double values, it is possible to lose precision.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QVector3D, QVector4D, and QQuaternion.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 2D point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 2D point.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 3D vector. The z coordinate of vector is dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toVector3D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 3D vector. The z and w coordinates of vector are dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toVector4D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector2D,QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies the components of v1 by the corresponding components in v2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector2D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given vector, multiplied by the given factor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector2D::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.op_Addition(QtGui.QVector2D,QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QVector2D object that is the sum of the given vectors, v1 and v2; each component is added separately.</para>
            <para>See also QVector2D::operator+=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.op_UnaryNegation(QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a QVector2D object that is formed by changing the sign of the components of the given vector.</para>
            <para>Equivalent to QVector2D(0,0) - vector.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QVector2D,QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QVector2D object that is formed by subtracting v2 from v1; each component is subtracted separately.</para>
            <para>See also QVector2D::operator-=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.op_Division(QtGui.QVector2D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QVector2D object formed by dividing all three components of the given vector by the given divisor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector2D::operator/=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.DotProduct(QtGui.QVector2D,QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dot product of v1 and v2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the x and y coordinates are set to 0.0, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the vector from the origin.</para>
            <para>See also lengthSquared() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.LengthSquared">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the squared length of the vector from the origin. This is equivalent to the dot product of the vector with itself.</para>
            <para>See also length() and dotProduct().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.Normalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Normalizes the currect vector in place. Nothing happens if this vector is a null vector or the length of the vector is very close to 1.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.Normalized">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized unit vector form of this vector.</para>
            <para>If this vector is null, then a null vector is returned. If the length of the vector is very close to 1, then the vector will be returned as-is. Otherwise the normalized form of the vector of length 1 will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.ToPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPoint form of this 2D vector.</para>
            <para>See also toPointF() and toVector3D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.ToPointF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPointF form of this 2D vector.</para>
            <para>See also toPoint() and toVector3D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.ToVector3D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 3D form of this 2D vector, with the z coordinate set to zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector4D() and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector2D.ToVector4D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 4D form of this 2D vector, with the z and w coordinates set to zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector3D() and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector2D.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the x coordinate of this point to the given x coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector2D.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the y coordinate of this point to the given y coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QVector3D">
            <summary>
            The QVector3D class represents a vector or vertex in 3D space.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Vectors are one of the main building blocks of 3D representation and drawing. They consist of three coordinates, traditionally called x, y, and z.</para>
            <para>The QVector3D class can also be used to represent vertices in 3D space. We therefore do not need to provide a separate vertex class.</para>
            <para>Note: By design values in the QVector3D instance are stored as float. This means that on platforms where the qreal arguments to QVector3D functions are represented by double values, it is possible to lose precision.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QVector2D, QVector4D, and QQuaternion.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 2D point, and a z coordinate of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 2D point, and a z coordinate of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a 3D vector from the specified 2D vector. The z coordinate is set to zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector2D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a 3D vector from the specified 4D vector. The w coordinate is dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toVector4D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector2D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given vector, multiplied by the given factor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector3D::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Multiplies the components of v1 by the corresponding components in v2.</para>
            <para>Note: this is not the same as the crossProduct() of v1 and v2.</para>
            <para>See also QVector3D::crossProduct().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector3D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given vector, multiplied by the given factor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector3D::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_Addition(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QVector3D object that is the sum of the given vectors, v1 and v2; each component is added separately.</para>
            <para>See also QVector3D::operator+=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_UnaryNegation(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a QVector3D object that is formed by changing the sign of all three components of the given vector.</para>
            <para>Equivalent to QVector3D(0,0,0) - vector.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QVector3D object that is formed by subtracting v2 from v1; each component is subtracted separately.</para>
            <para>See also QVector3D::operator-=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.op_Division(QtGui.QVector3D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QVector3D object formed by dividing all three components of the given vector by the given divisor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector3D::operator/=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.CrossProduct(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the cross-product of vectors v1 and v2, which corresponds to the normal vector of a plane defined by v1 and v2.</para>
            <para>See also normal().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.DistanceToLine(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance that this vertex is from a line defined by point and the unit vector direction.</para>
            <para>If direction is a null vector, then it does not define a line. In that case, the distance from point to this vertex is returned.</para>
            <para>See also distanceToPlane().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.DistanceToPlane(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance from this vertex to a plane defined by the vertex plane and a normal unit vector. The normal parameter is assumed to have been normalized to a unit vector.</para>
            <para>The return value will be negative if the vertex is below the plane, or zero if it is on the plane.</para>
            <para>See also normal() and distanceToLine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.DistanceToPlane(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the distance from this vertex a plane defined by the vertices plane1, plane2 and plane3.</para>
            <para>The return value will be negative if the vertex is below the plane, or zero if it is on the plane.</para>
            <para>The two vectors that define the plane are plane2 - plane1 and plane3 - plane1.</para>
            <para>See also normal() and distanceToLine().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.DotProduct(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dot product of v1 and v2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the x, y, and z coordinates are set to 0.0, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the vector from the origin.</para>
            <para>See also lengthSquared() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.LengthSquared">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the squared length of the vector from the origin. This is equivalent to the dot product of the vector with itself.</para>
            <para>See also length() and dotProduct().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.Normal(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normal vector of a plane defined by vectors v1 and v2, normalized to be a unit vector.</para>
            <para>Use crossProduct() to compute the cross-product of v1 and v2 if you do not need the result to be normalized to a unit vector.</para>
            <para>See also crossProduct() and distanceToPlane().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.Normal(QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D,QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns the normal vector of a plane defined by vectors v2 - v1 and v3 - v1, normalized to be a unit vector.</para>
            <para>Use crossProduct() to compute the cross-product of v2 - v1 and v3 - v1 if you do not need the result to be normalized to a unit vector.</para>
            <para>See also crossProduct() and distanceToPlane().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.Normalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Normalizes the currect vector in place. Nothing happens if this vector is a null vector or the length of the vector is very close to 1.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.Normalized">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized unit vector form of this vector.</para>
            <para>If this vector is null, then a null vector is returned. If the length of the vector is very close to 1, then the vector will be returned as-is. Otherwise the normalized form of the vector of length 1 will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.ToPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPoint form of this 3D vector. The z coordinate is dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toPointF() and toVector2D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.ToPointF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPointF form of this 3D vector. The z coordinate is dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toPoint() and toVector2D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.ToVector2D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 2D vector form of this 3D vector, dropping the z coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also toVector4D() and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector3D.ToVector4D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 4D form of this 3D vector, with the w coordinate set to zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector2D() and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector3D.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the x coordinate of this point to the given x coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector3D.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the y coordinate of this point to the given y coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector3D.Z">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the z coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the z coordinate of this point to the given z coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QVector4D">
            <summary>
            The QVector4D class represents a vector or vertex in 4D space.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>The QVector4D class can also be used to represent vertices in 4D space. We therefore do not need to provide a separate vertex class.</para>
            <para>Note: By design values in the QVector4D instance are stored as float. This means that on platforms where the qreal arguments to QVector4D functions are represented by double values, it is possible to lose precision.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QQuaternion, QVector2D, and QVector3D.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 2D point, and z and w coordinates of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a vector with x and y coordinates from a 2D point, and z and w coordinates of 0.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector2D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a 4D vector from the specified 2D vector. The z and w coordinates are set to zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector2D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector3D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a 4D vector from the specified 3D vector. The w coordinate is set to zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector3D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector3D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(QtGui.QVector2D,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.#ctor(System.Double,System.Double,System.Double,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a null vector, i.e. with coordinates (0, 0, 0, 0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector4D,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the vector consisting of the multiplication of the components from v1 and v2.</para>
            <para>See also QVector4D::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector4D,QtGui.QMatrix4x4)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given vector, multiplied by the given factor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector4D::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_Multiply(QtGui.QVector4D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a copy of the given vector, multiplied by the given factor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector4D::operator*=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_Addition(QtGui.QVector4D,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QVector4D object that is the sum of the given vectors, v1 and v2; each component is added separately.</para>
            <para>See also QVector4D::operator+=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_UnaryNegation(QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>This is an overloaded function.</para>
            <para>Returns a QVector4D object that is formed by changing the sign of all three components of the given vector.</para>
            <para>Equivalent to QVector4D(0,0,0,0) - vector.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_Subtraction(QtGui.QVector4D,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a QVector4D object that is formed by subtracting v2 from v1; each component is subtracted separately.</para>
            <para>See also QVector4D::operator-=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.op_Division(QtGui.QVector4D,System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QVector4D object formed by dividing all four components of the given vector by the given divisor.</para>
            <para>See also QVector4D::operator/=().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.DotProduct(QtGui.QVector4D,QtGui.QVector4D)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the dot product of v1 and v2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.IsNull">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the x, y, z, and w coordinates are set to 0.0, otherwise returns false.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.Length">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the length of the vector from the origin.</para>
            <para>See also lengthSquared() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.LengthSquared">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the squared length of the vector from the origin. This is equivalent to the dot product of the vector with itself.</para>
            <para>See also length() and dotProduct().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.Normalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Normalizes the currect vector in place. Nothing happens if this vector is a null vector or the length of the vector is very close to 1.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalized().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.Normalized">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the normalized unit vector form of this vector.</para>
            <para>If this vector is null, then a null vector is returned. If the length of the vector is very close to 1, then the vector will be returned as-is. Otherwise the normalized form of the vector of length 1 will be returned.</para>
            <para>See also length() and normalize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.ToPoint">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPoint form of this 4D vector. The z and w coordinates are dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toPointF() and toVector2D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.ToPointF">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the QPointF form of this 4D vector. The z and w coordinates are dropped.</para>
            <para>See also toPoint() and toVector2D().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.ToVector2D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 2D vector form of this 4D vector, dropping the z and w coordinates.</para>
            <para>See also toVector2DAffine(), toVector3D(), and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.ToVector2DAffine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 2D vector form of this 4D vector, dividing the x and y coordinates by the w coordinate and dropping the z coordinate. Returns a null vector if w is zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector2D(), toVector3DAffine(), and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.ToVector3D">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 3D vector form of this 4D vector, dropping the w coordinate.</para>
            <para>See also toVector3DAffine(), toVector2D(), and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QVector4D.ToVector3DAffine">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the 3D vector form of this 4D vector, dividing the x, y, and z coordinates by the w coordinate. Returns a null vector if w is zero.</para>
            <para>See also toVector3D(), toVector2DAffine(), and toPoint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector4D.W">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the w coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the w coordinate of this point to the given w coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector4D.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the x coordinate of this point to the given x coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector4D.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the y coordinate of this point to the given y coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QVector4D.Z">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the z coordinate of this point.</para>
            <para>Sets the z coordinate of this point to the given z coordinate.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWhatsThis">
            <summary>
            The QWhatsThis class provides a simple description of any widget, i.e. answering the question &quot;What's This?&quot;.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>&amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; help is part of an application's online help system, and provides users with information about the functionality and usage of a particular widget. &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; help texts are typically longer and more detailed than tooltips, but generally provide less information than that supplied by separate help windows.</para>
            <para>QWhatsThis provides a single window with an explanatory text that pops up when the user asks &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot;. The default way for users to ask the question is to move the focus to the relevant widget and press Shift+F1. The help text appears immediately; it goes away as soon as the user does something else. (Note that if there is a shortcut for Shift+F1, this mechanism will not work.) Some dialogs provide a &amp;quot;?&amp;quot; button that users can click to enter &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; mode; they then click the relevant widget to pop up the &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; window. It is also possible to provide a a menu option or toolbar button to switch into &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; mode.</para>
            <para>To add &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; text to a widget or an action, you simply call QWidget::setWhatsThis() or QAction::setWhatsThis().</para>
            <para>The text can be either rich text or plain text. If you specify a rich text formatted string, it will be rendered using the default stylesheet, making it possible to embed images in the displayed text. To be as fast as possible, the default stylesheet uses a simple method to determine whether the text can be rendered as plain text. See Qt::mightBeRichText() for details.</para>
            <para>     newAct = new QAction(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;New&amp;quot;), this);</para>
            <para>     newAct-&amp;gt;setShortcut(tr(&amp;quot;Ctrl+N&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     newAct-&amp;gt;setStatusTip(tr(&amp;quot;Create a new file&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     newAct-&amp;gt;setWhatsThis(tr(&amp;quot;Click this option to create a new file.&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>An alternative way to enter &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; mode is to call createAction(), and add the returned QAction to either a menu or a tool bar. By invoking this context help action (in the picture below, the button with the arrow and question mark icon) the user switches into &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; mode. If they now click on a widget the appropriate help text is shown. The mode is left when help is given or when the user presses Esc.</para>
            <para>You can enter &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; mode programmatically with enterWhatsThisMode(), check the mode with inWhatsThisMode(), and return to normal mode with leaveWhatsThisMode().</para>
            <para>If you want to control the &amp;quot;What's This?&amp;quot; behavior of a widget manually see Qt::WA_CustomWhatsThis.</para>
            <para>It is also possible to show different help texts for different regions of a widget, by using a QHelpEvent of type QEvent::WhatsThis. Intercept the help event in your widget's QWidget::event() function and call QWhatsThis::showText() with the text you want to display for the position specified in QHelpEvent::pos(). If the text is rich text and the user clicks on a link, the widget also receives a QWhatsThisClickedEvent with the link's reference as QWhatsThisClickedEvent::href(). If a QWhatsThisClickedEvent is handled (i.e. QWidget::event() returns true), the help window remains visible. Call QWhatsThis::hideText() to hide it explicitly.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QToolTip.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThis.CreateAction(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a ready-made QAction, used to invoke &quot;What's This?&quot; context help, with the given parent.</para>
            <para>The returned QAction provides a convenient way to let users enter &quot;What's This?&quot; mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThis.EnterWhatsThisMode">
            <summary>
            <para>This function switches the user interface into &quot;What's This?&quot; mode. The user interface can be switched back into normal mode by the user (e.g. by them clicking or pressing Esc), or programmatically by calling leaveWhatsThisMode().</para>
            <para>When entering &quot;What's This?&quot; mode, a QEvent of type Qt::EnterWhatsThisMode is sent to all toplevel widgets.</para>
            <para>See also inWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThis.HideText">
            <summary>
            <para>If a &quot;What's This?&quot; window is showing, this destroys it.</para>
            <para>See also showText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThis.InWhatsThisMode">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the user interface is in &quot;What's This?&quot; mode; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also enterWhatsThisMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThis.LeaveWhatsThisMode">
            <summary>
            <para>If the user interface is in &quot;What's This?&quot; mode, this function switches back to normal mode; otherwise it does nothing.</para>
            <para>When leaving &quot;What's This?&quot; mode, a QEvent of type Qt::LeaveWhatsThisMode is sent to all toplevel widgets.</para>
            <para>See also enterWhatsThisMode() and inWhatsThisMode().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThis.ShowText(QtCore.QPoint,System.String,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Shows text as a &quot;What's This?&quot; window, at global position pos. The optional widget argument, w, is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.</para>
            <para>See also hideText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWhatsThisClickedEvent">
            <summary>
            The QWhatsThisClickedEvent class provides an event that can be used to handle hyperlinks in a &quot;What's This?&quot; text.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWhatsThis, QHelpEvent, and QStatusTipEvent.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThisClickedEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QWhatsThisClickedEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an event containing a URL specified by href when a link is clicked in a &quot;What's This?&quot; message.</para>
            <para>See also href().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThisClickedEvent.#ctor(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an event containing a URL specified by href when a link is clicked in a &quot;What's This?&quot; message.</para>
            <para>See also href().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWhatsThisClickedEvent.Href">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the URL that was clicked by the user in the &quot;What's This?&quot; text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWheelEvent">
            <summary>
            The QWheelEvent class contains parameters that describe a wheel event.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Wheel events are sent to the widget under the mouse cursor, but if that widget does not handle the event they are sent to the focus widget. The rotation distance is provided by delta(). The functions pos() and globalPos() return the mouse cursor's location at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>A wheel event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. You should call ignore() if you do not handle the wheel event; this ensures that it will be sent to the parent widget.</para>
            <para>The QWidget::setEnabled() function can be used to enable or disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget.</para>
            <para>The event handler QWidget::wheelEvent() receives wheel events.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QMouseEvent and QWidget::grabMouse().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.#ctor(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a wheel event object.</para>
            <para>The position, pos, is the location of the mouse cursor within the widget. The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos() which is usually, but not always, correct. Use the other constructor if you need to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            <para>The buttons describe the state of the mouse buttons at the time of the event, delta contains the rotation distance, modifiers holds the keyboard modifier flags at the time of the event, and orient holds the wheel's orientation.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), delta(), and state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint,QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a wheel event object.</para>
            <para>The position, pos, is the location of the mouse cursor within the widget. The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos() which is usually, but not always, correct. Use the other constructor if you need to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            <para>The buttons describe the state of the mouse buttons at the time of the event, delta contains the rotation distance, modifiers holds the keyboard modifier flags at the time of the event, and orient holds the wheel's orientation.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), delta(), and state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.#ctor(QtCore.QPoint,System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.MouseButton,QtCore.Qt.KeyboardModifier,QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a wheel event object.</para>
            <para>The position, pos, is the location of the mouse cursor within the widget. The globalPos() is initialized to QCursor::pos() which is usually, but not always, correct. Use the other constructor if you need to specify the global position explicitly.</para>
            <para>The buttons describe the state of the mouse buttons at the time of the event, delta contains the rotation distance, modifiers holds the keyboard modifier flags at the time of the event, and orient holds the wheel's orientation.</para>
            <para>See also pos(), delta(), and state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.Buttons">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the mouse state when the event occurred.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.Delta">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the distance that the wheel is rotated, in eighths of a degree. A positive value indicates that the wheel was rotated forwards away from the user; a negative value indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards toward the user.</para>
            <para>Most mouse types work in steps of 15 degrees, in which case the delta value is a multiple of 120; i.e., 120 units * 1/8 = 15 degrees.</para>
            <para>However, some mice have finer-resolution wheels and send delta values that are less than 120 units (less than 15 degrees). To support this possibility, you can either cumulatively add the delta values from events until the value of 120 is reached, then scroll the widget, or you can partially scroll the widget in response to each wheel event.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     int numDegrees = event-&gt;delta() / 8;</para>
            <para>     int numSteps = numDegrees / 15;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     if (event-&gt;orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) {</para>
            <para>         scrollHorizontally(numSteps);</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         scrollVertically(numSteps);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     event-&gt;accept();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.GlobalPos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global position of the mouse pointer at the time of the event. This is important on asynchronous window systems such as X11; whenever you move your widgets around in response to mouse events, globalPos() can differ a lot from the current cursor position returned by QCursor::pos().</para>
            <para>See also globalX() and globalY().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.GlobalX">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global x position of the mouse cursor at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalY() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.GlobalY">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the global y position of the mouse cursor at the time of the event.</para>
            <para>See also globalX() and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.Orientation">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the wheel's orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.Pos">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the position of the mouse cursor relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>If you move your widgets around in response to mouse events, use globalPos() instead of this function.</para>
            <para>See also x(), y(), and globalPos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.X">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the x position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also y() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWheelEvent.Y">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the y position of the mouse cursor, relative to the widget that received the event.</para>
            <para>See also x() and pos().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWidgetAction">
            <summary>
            The QWidgetAction class extends QAction by an interface for inserting custom widgets into action based containers, such as toolbars.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Most actions in an application are represented as items in menus or buttons in toolbars. However sometimes more complex widgets are necessary. For example a zoom action in a word processor may be realized using a QComboBox in a QToolBar, presenting a range of different zoom levels. QToolBar provides QToolBar::insertWidget() as convenience function for inserting a single widget. However if you want to implement an action that uses custom widgets for visualization in multiple containers then you have to subclass QWidgetAction.</para>
            <para>If a QWidgetAction is added for example to a QToolBar then QWidgetAction::createWidget() is called. Reimplementations of that function should create a new custom widget with the specified parent.</para>
            <para>If the action is removed from a container widget then QWidgetAction::deleteWidget() is called with the previously created custom widget as argument. The default implementation hides the widget and deletes it using QObject::deleteLater().</para>
            <para>If you have only one single custom widget then you can set it as default widget using setDefaultWidget(). That widget will then be used if the action is added to a QToolBar, or in general to an action container that supports QWidgetAction. If a QWidgetAction with only a default widget is added to two toolbars at the same time then the default widget is shown only in the first toolbar the action was added to. QWidgetAction takes over ownership of the default widget.</para>
            <para>Note that it is up to the widget to activate the action, for example by reimplementing mouse event handlers and calling QAction::trigger().</para>
            <para>Mac OS X: If you add a widget to a menu in the application's menu bar on Mac OS X, the widget will be added and it will function but with some limitations:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The widget is reparented away from the QMenu to the native menu view. If you show the menu in some other place (e.g. as a popup menu), the widget will not be there.</para>
            <para>Focus/Keyboard handling of the widget is not possible.</para>
            <para>Due to Apple's design, mouse tracking on the widget currently does not work.</para>
            <para>Connecting the triggered() signal to a slot that opens a modal dialog will cause a crash in Mac OS X 10.4 (known bug acknowledged by Apple), a workaround is to use a QueuedConnection instead of a DirectConnection.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QAction, QActionGroup, and QWidget.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.#ctor(QtCore.QObject)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs an action with parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.CreateWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called whenever the action is added to a container widget that supports custom widgets. If you don't want a custom widget to be used as representation of the action in the specified parent widget then 0 should be returned.</para>
            <para>See also deleteWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.CreatedWidgets">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of widgets that have been using createWidget() and are currently in use by widgets the action has been added to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.DeleteWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called whenever the action is removed from a container widget that displays the action using a custom widget previously created using createWidget(). The default implementation hides the widget and schedules it for deletion using QObject::deleteLater().</para>
            <para>See also createWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.ReleaseWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Releases the specified widget.</para>
            <para>Container widgets that support actions call this function when a widget action is removed.</para>
            <para>See also requestWidget(), deleteWidget(), and defaultWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.RequestWidget(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a widget that represents the action, with the given parent.</para>
            <para>Container widgets that support actions can call this function to request a widget as visual representation of the action.</para>
            <para>See also releaseWidget(), createWidget(), and defaultWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetAction.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidgetAction.DefaultWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the default widget.</para>
            <para>Sets widget to be the default widget. The ownership is transferred to QWidgetAction. Unless createWidget() is reimplemented by a subclass to return a new widget the default widget is used when a container widget requests a widget through requestWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWidgetItem">
            <summary>
            The QWidgetItem class is a layout item that represents a widget.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>Normally, you don't need to use this class directly. Qt's built-in layout managers provide the following functions for manipulating widgets in layouts:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ClassFunctions</para>
            <para>QBoxLayout	addWidget(), insertWidget(), setStretchFactor()</para>
            <para>QGridLayout	addWidget()</para>
            <para>QStackedLayout	addWidget(), insertWidget(), currentWidget(), setCurrentWidget(), widget()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QLayout, QSpacerItem, and QLayoutItem::widget().</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates an item containing the given widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.ExpandingDirections">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.HasHeightForWidth">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.HeightForWidth(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.IsEmpty">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::isEmpty().</para>
            <para>Returns true if the widget is hidden; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::isHidden().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.MaximumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.MinimumSize">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWidgetItem.Widget">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::widget().</para>
            <para>Returns the widget managed by this item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWidgetItem.Geometry">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::geometry().</para>
            <para>Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWindowStateChangeEvent">
            <summary>
            The QWindowStateChangeEvent class provides the window state before a window state change.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWindowStateChangeEvent.OldState">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the state of the window before the change.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWizard">
            <summary>
            The QWizard class provides a framework for wizards.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>A wizard (also called an assistant on Mac OS X) is a special type of input dialog that consists of a sequence of pages. A wizard's purpose is to guide the user through a process step by step. Wizards are useful for complex or infrequent tasks that users may find difficult to learn.</para>
            <para>QWizard inherits QDialog and represents a wizard. Each page is a QWizardPage (a QWidget subclass). To create your own wizards, you can use these classes directly, or you can subclass them for more control.</para>
            <para>Topics:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A Trivial Example</para>
            <para>The following example illustrates how to create wizard pages and add them to a wizard. For more advanced examples, see Class Wizard and License Wizard.</para>
            <para> QWizardPage *createIntroPage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QWizardPage *page = new QWizardPage;</para>
            <para>     page-&amp;gt;setTitle(&amp;quot;Introduction&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QLabel *label = new QLabel(&amp;quot;This wizard will help you register your copy &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                                &amp;quot;of Super Product Two.&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     label-&amp;gt;setWordWrap(true);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QVBoxLayout *layout = new QVBoxLayout;</para>
            <para>     layout-&amp;gt;addWidget(label);</para>
            <para>     page-&amp;gt;setLayout(layout);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     return page;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QWizardPage *createRegistrationPage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> QWizardPage *createConclusionPage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int main(int argc, char *argv[])</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QApplication app(argc, argv);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QString translatorFileName = QLatin1String(&amp;quot;qt_&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     translatorFileName += QLocale::system().name();</para>
            <para>     QTranslator *translator = new QTranslator(&amp;amp;app);</para>
            <para>     if (translator-&amp;gt;load(translatorFileName, QLibraryInfo::location(QLibraryInfo::TranslationsPath)))</para>
            <para>         app.installTranslator(translator);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QWizard wizard;</para>
            <para>     wizard.addPage(createIntroPage());</para>
            <para>     wizard.addPage(createRegistrationPage());</para>
            <para>     wizard.addPage(createConclusionPage());</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     wizard.setWindowTitle(&amp;quot;Trivial Wizard&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para> #ifdef Q_OS_SYMBIAN</para>
            <para>     wizard.showMaximized();</para>
            <para> #else</para>
            <para>     wizard.show();</para>
            <para> #endif</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     return app.exec();</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Wizard Look and Feel</para>
            <para>QWizard supports four wizard looks:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ClassicStyle</para>
            <para>ModernStyle</para>
            <para>MacStyle</para>
            <para>AeroStyle</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can explicitly set the look to use using setWizardStyle() (e.g., if you want the same look on all platforms).</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>ClassicStyleModernStyleMacStyleAeroStyle</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Note: AeroStyle has effect only on a Windows Vista system with alpha compositing enabled. ModernStyle is used as a fallback when this condition is not met.</para>
            <para>In addition to the wizard style, there are several options that control the look and feel of the wizard. These can be set using setOption() or setOptions(). For example, HaveHelpButton makes QWizard show a Help button along with the other wizard buttons.</para>
            <para>You can even change the order of the wizard buttons to any arbitrary order using setButtonLayout(), and you can add up to three custom buttons (e.g., a Print button) to the button row. This is achieved by calling setButton() or setButtonText() with CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3 to set up the button, and by enabling the HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, or HaveCustomButton3 options. Whenever the user clicks a custom button, customButtonClicked() is emitted. For example:</para>
            <para>         wizard()-&amp;gt;setButtonText(QWizard::CustomButton1, tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Print&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>         wizard()-&amp;gt;setOption(QWizard::HaveCustomButton1, true);</para>
            <para>         connect(wizard(), SIGNAL(customButtonClicked(int)),</para>
            <para>                 this, SLOT(printButtonClicked()));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Elements of a Wizard Page</para>
            <para>Wizards consist of a sequence of QWizardPages. At any time, only one page is shown. A page has the following attributes:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>A title.</para>
            <para>A subTitle.</para>
            <para>A set of pixmaps, which may or may not be honored, depending on the wizard's style:</para>
            <para>WatermarkPixmap (used by ClassicStyle and ModernStyle)</para>
            <para>BannerPixmap (used by ModernStyle)</para>
            <para>LogoPixmap (used by ClassicStyle and ModernStyle)</para>
            <para>BackgroundPixmap (used by MacStyle)</para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para></para>
            <para>The diagram belows shows how QWizard renders these attributes, assuming they are all present and ModernStyle is used:</para>
            <para>When a subTitle is set, QWizard displays it in a header, in which case it also uses the BannerPixmap and the LogoPixmap to decorate the header. The WatermarkPixmap is displayed on the left side, below the header. At the bottom, there is a row of buttons allowing the user to navigate through the pages.</para>
            <para>The page itself (the QWizardPage widget) occupies the area between the header, the watermark, and the button row. Typically, the page is a QWizardPage on which a QGridLayout is installed, with standard child widgets (QLabels, QLineEdits, etc.).</para>
            <para>If the wizard's style is MacStyle, the page looks radically different:</para>
            <para>The watermark, banner, and logo pixmaps are ignored by the MacStyle. If the BackgroundPixmap is set, it is used as the background for the wizard; otherwise, a default &amp;quot;assistant&amp;quot; image is used.</para>
            <para>The title and subtitle are set by calling QWizardPage::setTitle() and QWizardPage::setSubTitle() on the individual pages. They may be plain text or HTML (see titleFormat and subTitleFormat). The pixmaps can be set globally for the entire wizard using setPixmap(), or on a per-page basis using QWizardPage::setPixmap().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Registering and Using Fields</para>
            <para>In many wizards, the contents of a page may affect the default values of the fields of a later page. To make it easy to communicate between pages, QWizard supports a &amp;quot;field&amp;quot; mechanism that allows you to register a field (e.g., a QLineEdit) on a page and to access its value from any page. It is also possible to specify mandatory fields (i.e., fields that must be filled before the user can advance to the next page).</para>
            <para>To register a field, call QWizardPage::registerField() field. For example:</para>
            <para> ClassInfoPage::ClassInfoPage(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizardPage(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     classNameLabel = new QLabel(tr(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;Class name:&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     classNameLineEdit = new QLineEdit;</para>
            <para>     classNameLabel-&amp;gt;setBuddy(classNameLineEdit);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     baseClassLabel = new QLabel(tr(&amp;quot;B&amp;amp;ase class:&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para>     baseClassLineEdit = new QLineEdit;</para>
            <para>     baseClassLabel-&amp;gt;setBuddy(baseClassLineEdit);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     qobjectMacroCheckBox = new QCheckBox(tr(&amp;quot;Generate Q_OBJECT &amp;amp;macro&amp;quot;));</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     registerField(&amp;quot;className*&amp;quot;, classNameLineEdit);</para>
            <para>     registerField(&amp;quot;baseClass&amp;quot;, baseClassLineEdit);</para>
            <para>     registerField(&amp;quot;qobjectMacro&amp;quot;, qobjectMacroCheckBox);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The above code registers three fields, className, baseClass, and qobjectMacro, which are associated with three child widgets. The asterisk (*) next to className denotes a mandatory field.</para>
            <para>The fields of any page are accessible from any other page. For example:</para>
            <para> void OutputFilesPage::initializePage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QString className = field(&amp;quot;className&amp;quot;).toString();</para>
            <para>     headerLineEdit-&amp;gt;setText(className.toLower() + &amp;quot;.h&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     implementationLineEdit-&amp;gt;setText(className.toLower() + &amp;quot;.cpp&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     outputDirLineEdit-&amp;gt;setText(QDir::convertSeparators(QDir::tempPath()));</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Here, we call QWizardPage::field() to access the contents of the className field (which was defined in the ClassInfoPage) and use it to initialize the OuputFilePage. The field's contents is returned as a QVariant.</para>
            <para>When we create a field using QWizardPage::registerField(), we pass a unique field name and a widget. We can also provide a Qt property name and a &amp;quot;changed&amp;quot; signal (a signal that is emitted when the property changes) as third and fourth arguments; however, this is not necessary for the most common Qt widgets, such as QLineEdit, QCheckBox, and QComboBox, because QWizard knows which properties to look for.</para>
            <para>If an asterisk (*) is appended to the name when the property is registered, the field is a mandatory field. When a page has mandatory fields, the Next and/or Finish buttons are enabled only when all mandatory fields are filled.</para>
            <para>To consider a field &amp;quot;filled&amp;quot;, QWizard simply checks that the field's current value doesn't equal the original value (the value it had when initializePage() was called). For QLineEdit and QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QWizard also checks that hasAcceptableInput() returns true, to honor any validator or mask.</para>
            <para>QWizard's mandatory field mechanism is provided for convenience. A more powerful (but also more cumbersome) alternative is to reimplement QWizardPage::isComplete() and to emit the QWizardPage::completeChanged() signal whenever the page becomes complete or incomplete.</para>
            <para>The enabled/disabled state of the Next and/or Finish buttons is one way to perform validation on the user input. Another way is to reimplement validateCurrentPage() (or QWizardPage::validatePage()) to perform some last-minute validation (and show an error message if the user has entered incomplete or invalid information). If the function returns true, the next page is shown (or the wizard finishes); otherwise, the current page stays up.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Linear Wizards</para>
            <para>Most wizards have a linear structure, with page 1 followed by page 2 and so on until the last page. The Class Wizard example is such a wizard. With QWizard, linear wizards are created by instantiating the QWizardPages and inserting them using addPage(). By default, the pages are shown in the order in which they were added. For example:</para>
            <para> ClassWizard::ClassWizard(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizard(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     addPage(new IntroPage);</para>
            <para>     addPage(new ClassInfoPage);</para>
            <para>     addPage(new CodeStylePage);</para>
            <para>     addPage(new OutputFilesPage);</para>
            <para>     addPage(new ConclusionPage);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>When a page is about to be shown, QWizard calls initializePage() (which in turn calls QWizardPage::initializePage()) to fill the page with default values. By default, this function does nothing, but it can be reimplemented to initialize the page's contents based on other pages' fields (see the example above).</para>
            <para>If the user presses Back, cleanupPage() is called (which in turn calls QWizardPage::cleanupPage()). The default implementation resets the page's fields to their original values (the values they had before initializePage() was called). If you want the Back button to be non-destructive and keep the values entered by the user, simply enable the IndependentPages option.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Creating Non-Linear Wizards</para>
            <para>Some wizards are more complex in that they allow different traversal paths based on the information provided by the user. The License Wizard example illustrates this. It provides five wizard pages; depending on which options are selected, the user can reach different pages.</para>
            <para>In complex wizards, pages are identified by IDs. These IDs are typically defined using an enum. For example:</para>
            <para> class LicenseWizard : public QWizard</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     enum { Page_Intro, Page_Evaluate, Page_Register, Page_Details,</para>
            <para>            Page_Conclusion };</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> };</para>
            <para>The pages are inserted using setPage(), which takes an ID and an instance of QWizardPage (or of a subclass):</para>
            <para> LicenseWizard::LicenseWizard(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizard(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     setPage(Page_Intro, new IntroPage);</para>
            <para>     setPage(Page_Evaluate, new EvaluatePage);</para>
            <para>     setPage(Page_Register, new RegisterPage);</para>
            <para>     setPage(Page_Details, new DetailsPage);</para>
            <para>     setPage(Page_Conclusion, new ConclusionPage);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>By default, the pages are shown in increasing ID order. To provide a dynamic order that depends on the options chosen by the user, we must reimplement QWizardPage::nextId(). For example:</para>
            <para> int IntroPage::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (evaluateRadioButton-&amp;gt;isChecked()) {</para>
            <para>         return LicenseWizard::Page_Evaluate;</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         return LicenseWizard::Page_Register;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int EvaluatePage::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return LicenseWizard::Page_Conclusion;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int RegisterPage::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (upgradeKeyLineEdit-&amp;gt;text().isEmpty()) {</para>
            <para>         return LicenseWizard::Page_Details;</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         return LicenseWizard::Page_Conclusion;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int DetailsPage::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return LicenseWizard::Page_Conclusion;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> int ConclusionPage::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     return -1;</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>It would also be possible to put all the logic in one place, in a QWizard::nextId() reimplementation. For example:</para>
            <para> int LicenseWizard::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     switch (currentId()) {</para>
            <para>     case Page_Intro:</para>
            <para>         if (field(&amp;quot;intro.evaluate&amp;quot;).toBool()) {</para>
            <para>             return Page_Evaluate;</para>
            <para>         } else {</para>
            <para>             return Page_Register;</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     case Page_Evaluate:</para>
            <para>         return Page_Conclusion;</para>
            <para>     case Page_Register:</para>
            <para>         if (field(&amp;quot;register.upgradeKey&amp;quot;).toString().isEmpty()) {</para>
            <para>             return Page_Details;</para>
            <para>         } else {</para>
            <para>             return Page_Conclusion;</para>
            <para>         }</para>
            <para>     case Page_Details:</para>
            <para>         return Page_Conclusion;</para>
            <para>     case Page_Conclusion:</para>
            <para>     default:</para>
            <para>         return -1;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>To start at another page than the page with the lowest ID, call setStartId().</para>
            <para>To test whether a page has been visited or not, call hasVisitedPage(). For example:</para>
            <para> void ConclusionPage::initializePage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QString licenseText;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     if (wizard()-&amp;gt;hasVisitedPage(LicenseWizard::Page_Evaluate)) {</para>
            <para>         licenseText = tr(&amp;quot;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Evaluation License Agreement:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                          &amp;quot;You can use this software for 30 days and make one &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                          &amp;quot;backup, but you are not allowed to distribute it.&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     } else if (wizard()-&amp;gt;hasVisitedPage(LicenseWizard::Page_Details)) {</para>
            <para>         licenseText = tr(&amp;quot;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;First-Time License Agreement:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                          &amp;quot;You can use this software subject to the license &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                          &amp;quot;you will receive by email.&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         licenseText = tr(&amp;quot;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Upgrade License Agreement:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                          &amp;quot;This software is licensed under the terms of your &amp;quot;</para>
            <para>                          &amp;quot;current license.&amp;quot;);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para>     bottomLabel-&amp;gt;setText(licenseText);</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage, Class Wizard Example, and License Wizard Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a wizard with the given parent and window flags.</para>
            <para>See also parent() and windowFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.AddPage(QtGui.QWizardPage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given page to the wizard, and returns the page's ID.</para>
            <para>The ID is guaranteed to be larger than any other ID in the QWizard so far.</para>
            <para>See also setPage(), page(), and pageAdded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Back">
            <summary>
            <para>Goes back to the previous page.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to pressing the Back button.</para>
            <para>See also next(), accept(), reject(), and restart().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Button(QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the button corresponding to role which.</para>
            <para>See also setButton() and setButtonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.ButtonText(QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text on button which.</para>
            <para>If a text has ben set using setButtonText(), this text is returned.</para>
            <para>By default, the text on buttons depends on the wizardStyle. For example, on Mac OS X, the Next button is called Continue.</para>
            <para>See also button(), setButton(), setButtonText(), QWizardPage::buttonText(), and QWizardPage::setButtonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.CleanupPage(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard to clean up page id just before the user leaves it by clicking Back (unless the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set).</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls QWizardPage::cleanupPage() on page(id).</para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::cleanupPage() and initializePage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnCurrentIdChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current page changes, with the new current id.</para>
            <para>See also currentId() and currentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.CurrentPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the current page, or 0 if there is no current page (e.g., before the wizard is shown).</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to calling page(currentId()).</para>
            <para>See also page(), currentId(), and restart().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnCustomButtonClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks a custom button. which can be CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3.</para>
            <para>By default, no custom button is shown. Call setOption() with HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, or HaveCustomButton3 to have one, and use setButtonText() or setButton() to configure it.</para>
            <para>See also helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Done(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QDialog::done().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Field(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the field called name.</para>
            <para>This function can be used to access fields on any page of the wizard.</para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::registerField(), QWizardPage::field(), and setField().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.HasVisitedPage(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the page history contains page id; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>Pressing Back marks the current page as &quot;unvisited&quot; again.</para>
            <para>See also visitedPages().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnHelpRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks the Help button.</para>
            <para>By default, no Help button is shown. Call setOption(HaveHelpButton, true) to have one.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> LicenseWizard::LicenseWizard(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizard(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     setOption(HaveHelpButton, true);</para>
            <para>     connect(this, SIGNAL(helpRequested()), this, SLOT(showHelp()));</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void LicenseWizard::showHelp()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     static QString lastHelpMessage;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QString message;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     switch (currentId()) {</para>
            <para>     case Page_Intro:</para>
            <para>         message = tr(&quot;The decision you make here will affect which page you &quot;</para>
            <para>                      &quot;get to see next.&quot;);</para>
            <para>         break;</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     default:</para>
            <para>         message = tr(&quot;This help is likely not to be of any help.&quot;);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMessageBox::information(this, tr(&quot;License Wizard Help&quot;), message);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also customButtonClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.InitializePage(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard to prepare page id just before it is shown either as a result of QWizard::restart() being called, or as a result of the user clicking Next. (However, if the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set, this function is only called the first time the page is shown.)</para>
            <para>By reimplementing this function, you can ensure that the page's fields are properly initialized based on fields from previous pages.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls QWizardPage::initializePage() on page(id).</para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::initializePage() and cleanupPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Next">
            <summary>
            <para>Advances to the next page.</para>
            <para>This is equivalent to pressing the Next or Commit button.</para>
            <para>See also nextId(), back(), accept(), reject(), and restart().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.NextId">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard to find out which page to show when the user clicks the Next button.</para>
            <para>The return value is the ID of the next page, or -1 if no page follows.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls QWizardPage::nextId() on the currentPage().</para>
            <para>By reimplementing this function, you can specify a dynamic page order.</para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::nextId() and currentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Page(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the page with the given id, or 0 if there is no such page.</para>
            <para>See also addPage() and setPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnPageAdded(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a page is added to the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also addPage(), setPage(), and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.PageIds">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of page IDs.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnPageRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a page is removed from the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also removePage() and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Pixmap(QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap set for role which.</para>
            <para>By default, the only pixmap that is set is the BackgroundPixmap on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>See also setPixmap(), QWizardPage::pixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.RemovePage(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>Removes the page with the given id. cleanupPage() will be called if necessary.</para>
            <para>Note: Removing a page may influence the value of the startId property.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also addPage(), setPage(), pageRemoved(), and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Restart">
            <summary>
            <para>Restarts the wizard at the start page. This function is called automatically when the wizard is shown.</para>
            <para>See also startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetButton(QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton,QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the button corresponding to role which to button.</para>
            <para>To add extra buttons to the wizard (e.g., a Print button), one way is to call setButton() with CustomButton1 to CustomButton3, and make the buttons visible using the HaveCustomButton1 to HaveCustomButton3 options.</para>
            <para>See also button(), setButtonText(), setButtonLayout(), and options.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetButtonLayout(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton})">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the order in which buttons are displayed to layout, where layout is a list of WizardButtons.</para>
            <para>The default layout depends on the options (e.g., whether HelpButtonOnRight) that are set. You can call this function if you need more control over the buttons' layout than what options already provides.</para>
            <para>You can specify horizontal stretches in the layout using Stretch.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> MyWizard::MyWizard(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizard(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     QList&lt;QWizard::WizardButton&gt; layout;</para>
            <para>     layout &lt;&lt; QWizard::Stretch &lt;&lt; QWizard::BackButton &lt;&lt; QWizard::CancelButton</para>
            <para>            &lt;&lt; QWizard::NextButton &lt;&lt; QWizard::FinishButton;</para>
            <para>     setButtonLayout(layout);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also setButton(), setButtonText(), and setOptions().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetButtonText(QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text on button which to be text.</para>
            <para>By default, the text on buttons depends on the wizardStyle. For example, on Mac OS X, the Next button is called Continue.</para>
            <para>To add extra buttons to the wizard (e.g., a Print button), one way is to call setButtonText() with CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3 to set their text, and make the buttons visible using the HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, and/or HaveCustomButton3 options.</para>
            <para>Button texts may also be set on a per-page basis using QWizardPage::setButtonText().</para>
            <para>See also buttonText(), setButton(), button(), setButtonLayout(), setOptions(), and QWizardPage::setButtonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetDefaultProperty(System.String,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the default property for className to be property, and the associated change signal to be changedSignal.</para>
            <para>The default property is used when an instance of className (or of one of its subclasses) is passed to QWizardPage::registerField() and no property is specified.</para>
            <para>QWizard knows the most common Qt widgets. For these (or their subclasses), you don't need to specify a property or a changedSignal. The table below lists these widgets:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>WidgetPropertyChange Notification Signal</para>
            <para>QAbstractButton	bool checked	toggled()</para>
            <para>QAbstractSlider	int value	valueChanged()</para>
            <para>QComboBox	int currentIndex	currentIndexChanged()</para>
            <para>QDateTimeEdit	QDateTime dateTime	dateTimeChanged()</para>
            <para>QLineEdit	QString text	textChanged()</para>
            <para>QListWidget	int currentRow	currentRowChanged()</para>
            <para>QSpinBox	int value	valueChanged()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::registerField().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetField(System.String,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the value of the field called name to value.</para>
            <para>This function can be used to set fields on any page of the wizard.</para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::registerField(), QWizardPage::setField(), and field().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetOption(QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption,System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.</para>
            <para>See also options, testOption(), and setWizardStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetPage(System.Int32,QtGui.QWizardPage)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds the given page to the wizard with the given id.</para>
            <para>Note: Adding a page may influence the value of the startId property in case it was not set explicitly.</para>
            <para>See also addPage(), page(), and pageAdded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetPixmap(QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the pixmap for role which to pixmap.</para>
            <para>The pixmaps are used by QWizard when displaying a page. Which pixmaps are actually used depend on the wizard style.</para>
            <para>Pixmaps can also be set for a specific page using QWizardPage::setPixmap().</para>
            <para>See also pixmap(), QWizardPage::setPixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SetVisible(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.TestOption(QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.</para>
            <para>See also options, setOption(), and setWizardStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.ValidateCurrentPage">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard when the user clicks Next or Finish to perform some last-minute validation. If it returns true, the next page is shown (or the wizard finishes); otherwise, the current page stays up.</para>
            <para>The default implementation calls QWizardPage::validatePage() on the currentPage().</para>
            <para>When possible, it is usually better style to disable the Next or Finish button (by specifying mandatory fields or by reimplementing QWizardPage::isComplete()) than to reimplement validateCurrentPage().</para>
            <para>See also QWizardPage::validatePage() and currentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.VisitedPages">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the list of IDs of visited pages, in the order in which the pages were visited.</para>
            <para>Pressing Back marks the current page as &quot;unvisited&quot; again.</para>
            <para>See also hasVisitedPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizard.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the wizard and its pages, releasing any allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWizard.CurrentIdChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current page changes, with the new current id.</para>
            <para>See also currentId() and currentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWizard.HelpRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks the Help button.</para>
            <para>By default, no Help button is shown. Call setOption(HaveHelpButton, true) to have one.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> LicenseWizard::LicenseWizard(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizard(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     setOption(HaveHelpButton, true);</para>
            <para>     connect(this, SIGNAL(helpRequested()), this, SLOT(showHelp()));</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void LicenseWizard::showHelp()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     static QString lastHelpMessage;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QString message;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     switch (currentId()) {</para>
            <para>     case Page_Intro:</para>
            <para>         message = tr(&quot;The decision you make here will affect which page you &quot;</para>
            <para>                      &quot;get to see next.&quot;);</para>
            <para>         break;</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     default:</para>
            <para>         message = tr(&quot;This help is likely not to be of any help.&quot;);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMessageBox::information(this, tr(&quot;License Wizard Help&quot;), message);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also customButtonClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWizard.CustomButtonClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks a custom button. which can be CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3.</para>
            <para>By default, no custom button is shown. Call setOption() with HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, or HaveCustomButton3 to have one, and use setButtonText() or setButton() to configure it.</para>
            <para>See also helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWizard.PageAdded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a page is added to the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also addPage(), setPage(), and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWizard.PageRemoved">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a page is removed from the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also removePage() and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.SideWidget">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the widget on the left side of the wizard or 0.</para>
            <para>By default, no side widget is present.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>Sets the given widget to be shown on the left side of the wizard. For styles which use the WatermarkPixmap (ClassicStyle and ModernStyle) the side widget is displayed on top of the watermark, for other styles or when the watermark is not provided the side widget is displayed on the left side of the wizard.</para>
            <para>Passing 0 shows no side widget.</para>
            <para>When the widget is not 0 the wizard reparents it.</para>
            <para>Any previous side widget is hidden.</para>
            <para>You may call setSideWidget() with the same widget at different times.</para>
            <para>All widgets set here will be deleted by the wizard when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other side widget (or 0).</para>
            <para>By default, no side widget is present.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.wizardStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the look and feel of the wizard.</para>
            <para>By default, QWizard uses the AeroStyle on a Windows Vista system with alpha compositing enabled, regardless of the current widget style. If this is not the case, the default wizard style depends on the current widget style as follows: MacStyle is the default if the current widget style is QMacStyle, ModernStyle is the default if the current widget style is QWindowsStyle, and ClassicStyle is the default in all other cases.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.Options">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the various options that affect the look and feel of the wizard.</para>
            <para>By default, the following options are set (depending on the platform):</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Windows: HelpButtonOnRight.</para>
            <para>Mac OS X: NoDefaultButton and NoCancelButton.</para>
            <para>X11 and QWS (Qt for Embedded Linux): none.</para>
            <para></para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.TitleFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text format used by page titles.</para>
            <para>The default format is Qt::AutoText.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.SubTitleFormat">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the text format used by page subtitles.</para>
            <para>The default format is Qt::AutoText.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.StartId">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the ID of the first page.</para>
            <para>If this property isn't explicitly set, this property defaults to the lowest page ID in this wizard, or -1 if no page has been inserted yet.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizard.CurrentId">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the ID of the current page.</para>
            <para>This property cannot be set directly. To change the current page, call next(), back(), or restart().</para>
            <para>By default, this property has a value of -1, indicating that no page is currently shown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the buttons in a wizard.</para>
            <para>The following value is only useful when calling setButtonLayout():</para>
            <para>See also setButton(), setButtonText(), setButtonLayout(), and customButtonClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.BackButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Back button (Go Back on Mac OS X)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.CancelButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Cancel button (see also NoCancelButton)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.CommitButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Commit button</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.CustomButton1">
            <summary>
            <para>The first user-defined button (see also HaveCustomButton1)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.CustomButton2">
            <summary>
            <para>The second user-defined button (see also HaveCustomButton2)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.CustomButton3">
            <summary>
            <para>The third user-defined button (see also HaveCustomButton3)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.FinishButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Finish button (Done on Mac OS X)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.HelpButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Help button (see also HaveHelpButton)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.NextButton">
            <summary>
            <para>The Next button (Continue on Mac OS X)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton.Stretch">
            <summary>
            <para>A horizontal stretch in the button layout</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies various options that affect the look and feel of a wizard.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also setOptions(), setOption(), and testOption().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.CancelButtonOnLeft">
            <summary>
            <para>Put the Cancel button on the left of Back (rather than on the right of Finish or Next).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.DisabledBackButtonOnLastPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Disable the Back button on the last page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.ExtendedWatermarkPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>Extend any WatermarkPixmap all the way down to the window's edge.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HaveCustomButton1">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the first user-defined button (CustomButton1).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HaveCustomButton2">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the second user-defined button (CustomButton2).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HaveCustomButton3">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the third user-defined button (CustomButton3).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HaveFinishButtonOnEarlyPages">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the (disabled) Finish button on non-final pages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HaveHelpButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the Help button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HaveNextButtonOnLastPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Show the (disabled) Next button on the last page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.HelpButtonOnRight">
            <summary>
            <para>Put the Help button on the far right of the button layout (rather than on the far left).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.IgnoreSubTitles">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't show any subtitles, even if they are set.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.IndependentPages">
            <summary>
            <para>The pages are independent of each other (i.e., they don't derive values from each other).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.NoBackButtonOnLastPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't show the Back button on the last page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.NoBackButtonOnStartPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't show the Back button on the start page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.NoCancelButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't show the Cancel button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardOption.NoDefaultButton">
            <summary>
            <para>Don't make the Next or Finish button the dialog's default button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the pixmaps that can be associated with a page.</para>
            <para>See also setPixmap(), QWizardPage::setPixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap.BackgroundPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>The pixmap that occupies the background of a MacStyle wizard</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap.BannerPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>The pixmap that occupies the background of a ModernStyle page header</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap.LogoPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>The small pixmap on the right side of a ClassicStyle or ModernStyle page header</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap.WatermarkPixmap">
            <summary>
            <para>The tall pixmap on the left side of a ClassicStyle or ModernStyle page</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWizard.WizardStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>This enum specifies the different looks supported by QWizard.</para>
            <para>See also setWizardStyle(), WizardOption, and Wizard Look and Feel.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardStyle.AeroStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Windows Aero look</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardStyle.ClassicStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Classic Windows look</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardStyle.MacStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Mac OS X look</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWizard.WizardStyle.ModernStyle">
            <summary>
            <para>Modern Windows look</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWizardPage">
            <summary>
            The QWizardPage class is the base class for wizard pages.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>QWizard represents a wizard. Each page is a QWizardPage. When you create your own wizards, you can use QWizardPage directly, or you can subclass it for more control.</para>
            <para>A page has the following attributes, which are rendered by QWizard: a title, a subTitle, and a set of pixmaps. See Elements of a Wizard Page for details. Once a page is added to the wizard (using QWizard::addPage() or QWizard::setPage()), wizard() returns a pointer to the associated QWizard object.</para>
            <para>Page provides five virtual functions that can be reimplemented to provide custom behavior:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>initializePage() is called to initialize the page's contents when the user clicks the wizard's Next button. If you want to derive the page's default from what the user entered on previous pages, this is the function to reimplement.</para>
            <para>cleanupPage() is called to reset the page's contents when the user clicks the wizard's Back button.</para>
            <para>validatePage() validates the page when the user clicks Next or Finish. It is often used to show an error message if the user has entered incomplete or invalid information.</para>
            <para>nextId() returns the ID of the next page. It is useful when creating non-linear wizards, which allow different traversal paths based on the information provided by the user.</para>
            <para>isComplete() is called to determine whether the Next and/or Finish button should be enabled or disabled. If you reimplement isComplete(), also make sure that completeChanged() is emitted whenever the complete state changes.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>Normally, the Next button and the Finish button of a wizard are mutually exclusive. If isFinalPage() returns true, Finish is available; otherwise, Next is available. By default, isFinalPage() is true only when nextId() returns -1. If you want to show Next and Final simultaneously for a page (letting the user perform an &amp;quot;early finish&amp;quot;), call setFinalPage(true) on that page. For wizards that support early finishes, you might also want to set the HaveNextButtonOnLastPage and HaveFinishButtonOnEarlyPages options on the wizard.</para>
            <para>In many wizards, the contents of a page may affect the default values of the fields of a later page. To make it easy to communicate between pages, QWizard supports a &amp;quot;field&amp;quot; mechanism that allows you to register a field (e.g., a QLineEdit) on a page and to access its value from any page. Fields are global to the entire wizard and make it easy for any single page to access information stored by another page, without having to put all the logic in QWizard or having the pages know explicitly about each other. Fields are registered using registerField() and can be accessed at any time using field() and setField().</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QWizard, Class Wizard Example, and License Wizard Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a wizard page with the given parent.</para>
            <para>When the page is inserted into a wizard using QWizard::addPage() or QWizard::setPage(), the parent is automatically set to be the wizard.</para>
            <para>See also wizard().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.ButtonText(QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the text on button which on this page.</para>
            <para>If a text has ben set using setButtonText(), this text is returned. Otherwise, if a text has been set using QWizard::setButtonText(), this text is returned.</para>
            <para>By default, the text on buttons depends on the QWizard::wizardStyle. For example, on Mac OS X, the Next button is called Continue.</para>
            <para>See also setButtonText(), QWizard::buttonText(), and QWizard::setButtonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.CleanupPage">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard::cleanupPage() when the user leaves the page by clicking Back (unless the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set).</para>
            <para>The default implementation resets the page's fields to their original values (the values they had before initializePage() was called).</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::cleanupPage(), initializePage(), and QWizard::IndependentPages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.OnCompleteChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the complete state of the page (i.e., the value of isComplete()) changes.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement isComplete(), make sure to emit completeChanged() whenever the value of isComplete() changes, to ensure that QWizard updates the enabled or disabled state of its buttons.</para>
            <para>See also isComplete().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.Field(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the value of the field called name.</para>
            <para>This function can be used to access fields on any page of the wizard. It is equivalent to calling wizard()-&gt;field(name).</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> void OutputFilesPage::initializePage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QString className = field(&quot;className&quot;).toString();</para>
            <para>     headerLineEdit-&gt;setText(className.toLower() + &quot;.h&quot;);</para>
            <para>     implementationLineEdit-&gt;setText(className.toLower() + &quot;.cpp&quot;);</para>
            <para>     outputDirLineEdit-&gt;setText(QDir::convertSeparators(QDir::tempPath()));</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::field(), setField(), and registerField().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.InitializePage">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard::initializePage() to prepare the page just before it is shown either as a result of QWizard::restart() being called, or as a result of the user clicking Next. (However, if the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set, this function is only called the first time the page is shown.)</para>
            <para>By reimplementing this function, you can ensure that the page's fields are properly initialized based on fields from previous pages. For example:</para>
            <para> void OutputFilesPage::initializePage()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     QString className = field(&quot;className&quot;).toString();</para>
            <para>     headerLineEdit-&gt;setText(className.toLower() + &quot;.h&quot;);</para>
            <para>     implementationLineEdit-&gt;setText(className.toLower() + &quot;.cpp&quot;);</para>
            <para>     outputDirLineEdit-&gt;setText(QDir::convertSeparators(QDir::tempPath()));</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>The default implementation does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::initializePage(), cleanupPage(), and QWizard::IndependentPages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.IsCommitPage">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns true if this page is a commit page; otherwise returns false.</para>
            <para>See also setCommitPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.IsComplete">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard to determine whether the Next or Finish button should be enabled or disabled.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns true if all mandatory fields are filled; otherwise, it returns false.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement this function, make sure to emit completeChanged(), from the rest of your implementation, whenever the value of isComplete() changes. This ensures that QWizard updates the enabled or disabled state of its buttons. An example of the reimplementation is available here.</para>
            <para>See also completeChanged() and isFinalPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.IsFinalPage">
            <summary>
            <para>This function is called by QWizard to determine whether the Finish button should be shown for this page or not.</para>
            <para>By default, it returns true if there is no next page (i.e., nextId() returns -1); otherwise, it returns false.</para>
            <para>By explicitly calling setFinalPage(true), you can let the user perform an &quot;early finish&quot;.</para>
            <para>See also isComplete() and QWizard::HaveFinishButtonOnEarlyPages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.NextId">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard::nextId() to find out which page to show when the user clicks the Next button.</para>
            <para>The return value is the ID of the next page, or -1 if no page follows.</para>
            <para>By default, this function returns the lowest ID greater than the ID of the current page, or -1 if there is no such ID.</para>
            <para>By reimplementing this function, you can specify a dynamic page order. For example:</para>
            <para> int IntroPage::nextId() const</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     if (evaluateRadioButton-&gt;isChecked()) {</para>
            <para>         return LicenseWizard::Page_Evaluate;</para>
            <para>     } else {</para>
            <para>         return LicenseWizard::Page_Register;</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::nextId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.Pixmap(QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the pixmap set for role which.</para>
            <para>Pixmaps can also be set for the entire wizard using QWizard::setPixmap(), in which case they apply for all pages that don't specify a pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also setPixmap(), QWizard::pixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.RegisterField(System.String,QtGui.QWidget,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Creates a field called name associated with the given property of the given widget. From then on, that property becomes accessible using field() and setField().</para>
            <para>Fields are global to the entire wizard and make it easy for any single page to access information stored by another page, without having to put all the logic in QWizard or having the pages know explicitly about each other.</para>
            <para>If name ends with an asterisk (*), the field is a mandatory field. When a page has mandatory fields, the Next and/or Finish buttons are enabled only when all mandatory fields are filled. This requires a changedSignal to be specified, to tell QWizard to recheck the value stored by the mandatory field.</para>
            <para>QWizard knows the most common Qt widgets. For these (or their subclasses), you don't need to specify a property or a changedSignal. The table below lists these widgets:</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>WidgetPropertyChange Notification Signal</para>
            <para>QAbstractButton	bool checked	toggled()</para>
            <para>QAbstractSlider	int value	valueChanged()</para>
            <para>QComboBox	int currentIndex	currentIndexChanged()</para>
            <para>QDateTimeEdit	QDateTime dateTime	dateTimeChanged()</para>
            <para>QLineEdit	QString text	textChanged()</para>
            <para>QListWidget	int currentRow	currentRowChanged()</para>
            <para>QSpinBox	int value	valueChanged()</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>You can use QWizard::setDefaultProperty() to add entries to this table or to override existing entries.</para>
            <para>To consider a field &quot;filled&quot;, QWizard simply checks that their current value doesn't equal their original value (the value they had before initializePage() was called). For QLineEdit, it also checks that hasAcceptableInput() returns true, to honor any validator or mask.</para>
            <para>QWizard's mandatory field mechanism is provided for convenience. It can be bypassed by reimplementing QWizardPage::isComplete().</para>
            <para>See also field(), setField(), and QWizard::setDefaultProperty().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.SetButtonText(QtGui.QWizard.WizardButton,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the text on button which to be text on this page.</para>
            <para>By default, the text on buttons depends on the QWizard::wizardStyle, but may be redefined for the wizard as a whole using QWizard::setButtonText().</para>
            <para>See also buttonText(), QWizard::setButtonText(), and QWizard::buttonText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.SetCommitPage(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets this page to be a commit page if commitPage is true; otherwise, sets it to be a normal page.</para>
            <para>A commit page is a page that represents an action which cannot be undone by clicking Back or Cancel.</para>
            <para>A Commit button replaces the Next button on a commit page. Clicking this button simply calls QWizard::next() just like clicking Next does.</para>
            <para>A page entered directly from a commit page has its Back button disabled.</para>
            <para>See also isCommitPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.SetField(System.String,System.Object)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the value of the field called name to value.</para>
            <para>This function can be used to set fields on any page of the wizard. It is equivalent to calling wizard()-&gt;setField(name, value).</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::setField(), field(), and registerField().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.SetFinalPage(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>Explicitly sets this page to be final if finalPage is true.</para>
            <para>After calling setFinalPage(true), isFinalPage() returns true and the Finish button is visible (and enabled if isComplete() returns true).</para>
            <para>After calling setFinalPage(false), isFinalPage() returns true if nextId() returns -1; otherwise, it returns false.</para>
            <para>See also isFinalPage(), isComplete(), and QWizard::HaveFinishButtonOnEarlyPages.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.SetPixmap(QtGui.QWizard.WizardPixmap,QtGui.QPixmap)">
            <summary>
            <para>Sets the pixmap for role which to pixmap.</para>
            <para>The pixmaps are used by QWizard when displaying a page. Which pixmaps are actually used depend on the wizard style.</para>
            <para>Pixmaps can also be set for the entire wizard using QWizard::setPixmap(), in which case they apply for all pages that don't specify a pixmap.</para>
            <para>See also pixmap(), QWizard::setPixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.ValidatePage">
            <summary>
            <para>This virtual function is called by QWizard::validateCurrentPage() when the user clicks Next or Finish to perform some last-minute validation. If it returns true, the next page is shown (or the wizard finishes); otherwise, the current page stays up.</para>
            <para>The default implementation returns true.</para>
            <para>When possible, it is usually better style to disable the Next or Finish button (by specifying mandatory fields or reimplementing isComplete()) than to reimplement validatePage().</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::validateCurrentPage() and isComplete().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWizardPage.Wizard">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns the wizard associated with this page, or 0 if this page hasn't been inserted into a QWizard yet.</para>
            <para>See also QWizard::addPage() and QWizard::setPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWizardPage.CompleteChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the complete state of the page (i.e., the value of isComplete()) changes.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement isComplete(), make sure to emit completeChanged() whenever the value of isComplete() changes, to ensure that QWizard updates the enabled or disabled state of its buttons.</para>
            <para>See also isComplete().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizardPage.Title">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the title of the page.</para>
            <para>The title is shown by the QWizard, above the actual page. All pages should have a title.</para>
            <para>The title may be plain text or HTML, depending on the value of the QWizard::titleFormat property.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWizardPage.SubTitle">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the subtitle of the page.</para>
            <para>The subtitle is shown by the QWizard, between the title and the actual page. Subtitles are optional. In ClassicStyle and ModernStyle, using subtitles is necessary to make the header appear. In MacStyle, the subtitle is shown as a text label just above the actual page.</para>
            <para>The subtitle may be plain text or HTML, depending on the value of the QWizard::subTitleFormat property.</para>
            <para>By default, this property contains an empty string.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWorkspace">
            <summary>
            The QWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can be used in an MDI application.
            </summary>
            <remarks>
            <para></para>
            <para>This class is deprecated. Use QMdiArea instead.</para>
            <para>Multiple Document Interface (MDI) applications are typically composed of a main window containing a menu bar, a toolbar, and a central QWorkspace widget. The workspace itself is used to display a number of child windows, each of which is a widget.</para>
            <para>The workspace itself is an ordinary Qt widget. It has a standard constructor that takes a parent widget. Workspaces can be placed in any layout, but are typically given as the central widget in a QMainWindow:</para>
            <para> MainWindow::MainWindow()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     workspace = new QWorkspace;</para>
            <para>     setCentralWidget(workspace);</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Child windows (MDI windows) are standard Qt widgets that are inserted into the workspace with addWindow(). As with top-level widgets, you can call functions such as show(), hide(), showMaximized(), and setWindowTitle() on a child window to change its appearance within the workspace. You can also provide widget flags to determine the layout of the decoration or the behavior of the widget itself.</para>
            <para>To change or retrieve the geometry of a child window, you must operate on its parentWidget(). The parentWidget() provides access to the decorated frame that contains the child window widget. When a child window is maximised, its decorated frame is hidden. If the top-level widget contains a menu bar, it will display the maximised window's operations menu to the left of the menu entries, and the window's controls to the right.</para>
            <para>A child window becomes active when it gets the keyboard focus, or when setFocus() is called. The user can activate a window by moving focus in the usual ways, for example by clicking a window or by pressing Tab. The workspace emits a signal windowActivated() when the active window changes, and the function activeWindow() returns a pointer to the active child window, or 0 if no window is active.</para>
            <para>The convenience function windowList() returns a list of all child windows. This information could be used in a popup menu containing a list of windows, for example. This feature is also available as part of the Window Menu Solution.</para>
            <para>QWorkspace provides two built-in layout strategies for child windows: cascade() and tile(). Both are slots so you can easily connect menu entries to them.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>	</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>If you want your users to be able to work with child windows larger than the visible workspace area, set the scrollBarsEnabled property to true.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>See also QDockWidget and MDI Example.</para>
            </remarks>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.#ctor(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>Constructs a workspace with the given parent.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.ActivateNextWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives the input focus to the next window in the list of child windows.</para>
            <para>See also activatePreviousWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.ActivatePreviousWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Gives the input focus to the previous window in the list of child windows.</para>
            <para>See also activateNextWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.AddWindow(QtGui.QWidget,QtCore.Qt.WindowType)">
            <summary>
            <para>Adds widget w as new sub window to the workspace. If flags are non-zero, they will override the flags set on the widget.</para>
            <para>Returns the widget used for the window frame.</para>
            <para>To remove the widget w from the workspace, simply call setParent() with the new parent (or 0 to make it a stand-alone window).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.ArrangeIcons">
            <summary>
            <para>Arranges all iconified windows at the bottom of the workspace.</para>
            <para>See also cascade() and tile().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.Cascade">
            <summary>
            <para>Arranges all the child windows in a cascade pattern.</para>
            <para>See also tile() and arrangeIcons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnChangeEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnChildEvent(QtCore.QChildEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.CloseActiveWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes the child window that is currently active.</para>
            <para>See also closeAllWindows().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.CloseAllWindows">
            <summary>
            <para>Closes all child windows.</para>
            <para>If any child window fails to accept the close event, the remaining windows will remain open.</para>
            <para>See also closeActiveWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnEvent(QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::event().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.EventFilter(QtCore.QObject,QtCore.QEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnHideEvent(QtGui.QHideEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnPaintEvent(QtGui.QPaintEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnResizeEvent(QtGui.QResizeEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnShowEvent(QtGui.QShowEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.SizeHint">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.Tile">
            <summary>
            <para>Arranges all child windows in a tile pattern.</para>
            <para>See also cascade() and arrangeIcons().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnWheelEvent(QtGui.QWheelEvent)">
            <summary>
            <para>Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.OnWindowActivated(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the child window w becomes active. Note that w can be 0, and that more than one signal may be emitted for a single activation event.</para>
            <para>See also activeWindow() and windowList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.WindowList(QtGui.QWorkspace.WindowOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a list of all visible or minimized child windows. If order is CreationOrder (the default), the windows are listed in the order in which they were inserted into the workspace. If order is StackingOrder, the windows are listed in their stacking order, with the topmost window as the last item in the list.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.QWorkspace.Finalize">
            <summary>
            <para>Destroys the workspace and frees any allocated resources.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="E:QtGui.QWorkspace.WindowActivated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the child window w becomes active. Note that w can be 0, and that more than one signal may be emitted for a single activation event.</para>
            <para>See also activeWindow() and windowList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWorkspace.ActiveWindow">
            <summary>
            <para>Returns a pointer to the widget corresponding to the active child window, or 0 if no window is active.</para>
            <para>Makes the child window that contains w the active child window.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWorkspace.ScrollBarsEnabled">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds whether the workspace provides scroll bars.</para>
            <para>If this property is true, the workspace will provide scroll bars if any of the child windows extend beyond the edges of the visible workspace. The workspace area will automatically increase to contain child windows if they are resized beyond the right or bottom edges of the visible area.</para>
            <para>If this property is false (the default), resizing child windows out of the visible area of the workspace is not permitted, although it is still possible to position them partially outside the visible area.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="P:QtGui.QWorkspace.Background">
            <summary>
            <para>This property holds the workspace's background.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="T:QtGui.QWorkspace.WindowOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>Specifies the order in which child windows are returned from windowList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWorkspace.WindowOrder.CreationOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>The windows are returned in the order of their creation</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="F:QtGui.QWorkspace.WindowOrder.StackingOrder">
            <summary>
            <para>The windows are returned in the order of their stacking</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWidgetSignals.CustomContextMenuRequested(QtCore.QPoint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::CustomContextMenu, and the user has requested a context menu on the widget. The position pos is the position of the context menu event that the widget receives. Normally this is in widget coordinates. The exception to this rule is QAbstractScrollArea and its subclasses that map the context menu event to coordinates of the viewport() .</para>
            <para>See also mapToGlobal(), QMenu, and contextMenuPolicy.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractButtonSignals.Pressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>See also released() and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractButtonSignals.Released">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is released.</para>
            <para>See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractButtonSignals.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the shortcut key is typed, or when click() or animateClick() is called. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setDown(), setChecked() or toggle().</para>
            <para>If the button is checkable, checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also pressed(), released(), and toggled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractButtonSignals.Toggled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a checkable button changes its state. checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.</para>
            <para>This may be the result of a user action, click() slot activation, or because setChecked() was called.</para>
            <para>The states of buttons in exclusive button groups are updated before this signal is emitted. This means that slots can act on either the &quot;off&quot; signal or the &quot;on&quot; signal emitted by the buttons in the group whose states have changed.</para>
            <para>For example, a slot that reacts to signals emitted by newly checked buttons but which ignores signals from buttons that have been unchecked can be implemented using the following pattern:</para>
            <para> void MyWidget::reactToToggle(bool checked)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>    if (checked) {</para>
            <para>       // Examine the new button states.</para>
            <para>       ...</para>
            <para>    }</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>Button groups can be created using the QButtonGroup class, and updates to the button states monitored with the QButtonGroup::buttonClicked() signal.</para>
            <para>See also checked and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemDelegateSignals.CommitData(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal must be emitted when the editor widget has completed editing the data, and wants to write it back into the model.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemDelegateSignals.CloseEditor(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QAbstractItemDelegate.EndEditHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user has finished editing an item using the specified editor.</para>
            <para>The hint provides a way for the delegate to influence how the model and view behave after editing is completed. It indicates to these components what action should be performed next to provide a comfortable editing experience for the user. For example, if EditNextItem is specified, the view should use a delegate to open an editor on the next item in the model.</para>
            <para>See also EndEditHint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemDelegateSignals.SizeHintChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal must be emitted when the sizeHint() of index changed.</para>
            <para>Views automatically connect to this signal and relayout items as necessary.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemViewSignals.Pressed(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is pressed. The item the mouse was pressed on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>Use the QApplication::mouseButtons() function to get the state of the mouse buttons.</para>
            <para>See also activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and entered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemViewSignals.Clicked(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The item the mouse was clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>See also activated(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemViewSignals.DoubleClicked(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is double-clicked. The item the mouse was double-clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.</para>
            <para>See also clicked() and activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemViewSignals.Activated(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is activated by the user. How to activate items depends on the platform; e.g., by single- or double-clicking the item, or by pressing the Return or Enter key when the item is current.</para>
            <para>See also clicked(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemViewSignals.Entered(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the item specified by index. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also viewportEntered(), activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractItemViewSignals.ViewportEntered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the viewport. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            <para>See also entered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogSignals.Finished(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog's result code has been set, either by the user or by calling done(), accept(), or reject().</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also accepted() and rejected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogSignals.Accepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog has been accepted either by the user or by calling accept() or done() with the QDialog::Accepted argument.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also finished() and rejected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogSignals.Rejected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dialog has been rejected either by the user or by calling reject() or done() with the QDialog::Rejected argument.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also finished() and accepted().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSliderSignals.ValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider value has changed, with the new slider value as argument.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSliderSignals.SliderPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(true) is called.</para>
            <para>See also sliderReleased(), sliderMoved(), and isSliderDown().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSliderSignals.SliderMoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when sliderDown is true and the slider moves. This usually happens when the user is dragging the slider. The value is the new slider position.</para>
            <para>This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.</para>
            <para>See also setTracking(), valueChanged(), isSliderDown(), sliderPressed(), and sliderReleased().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSliderSignals.SliderReleased">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(false) is called.</para>
            <para>See also sliderPressed(), sliderMoved(), and sliderDown.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSliderSignals.RangeChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider range has changed, with min being the new minimum, and max being the new maximum.</para>
            <para>See also minimum and maximum.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSliderSignals.ActionTriggered(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the slider action action is triggered. Actions are SliderSingleStepAdd, SliderSingleStepSub, SliderPageStepAdd, SliderPageStepSub, SliderToMinimum, SliderToMaximum, and SliderMove.</para>
            <para>When the signal is emitted, the sliderPosition has been adjusted according to the action, but the value has not yet been propagated (meaning the valueChanged() signal was not yet emitted), and the visual display has not been updated. In slots connected to this signal you can thus safely adjust any action by calling setSliderPosition() yourself, based on both the action and the slider's value.</para>
            <para>See also triggerAction().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractSpinBoxSignals.EditingFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted editing is finished. This happens when the spinbox loses focus and when enter is pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractTextDocumentLayoutSignals.Update">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rectangle rect has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of the contents change in order to repaint.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractTextDocumentLayoutSignals.UpdateBlock(QtGui.QTextBlock)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified block has been updated.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the layout of block has changed in order to repaint.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractTextDocumentLayoutSignals.DocumentSizeChanged(QtCore.QSizeF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of the document layout changes to newSize.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the document's entire layout size changes. This signal is useful for widgets that display text documents since it enables them to update their scroll bars correctly.</para>
            <para>See also documentSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQAbstractTextDocumentLayoutSignals.PageCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of pages in the layout changes; newPages is the updated page count.</para>
            <para>Subclasses of QAbstractTextDocumentLayout should emit this signal when the number of pages in the layout has changed. Changes to the page count are caused by changes to the layout or the document content itself.</para>
            <para>See also pageCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQActionSignals.Changed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action has changed. If you are only interested in actions in a given widget, you can watch for QWidget::actionEvent() sent with an QEvent::ActionChanged.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::actionEvent().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQActionSignals.Triggered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination, or when trigger() was called. Notably, it is not emitted when setChecked() or toggle() is called.</para>
            <para>If the action is checkable, checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate(), QAction::toggled(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQActionSignals.Hovered">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQActionSignals.Toggled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a checkable action changes its isChecked() status. This can be the result of a user interaction, or because setChecked() was called.</para>
            <para>checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate(), QAction::triggered(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQActionGroupSignals.Triggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>Connect to this signal for command actions.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQActionGroupSignals.Hovered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.</para>
            <para>See also QAction::activate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQApplicationSignals.LastWindowClosed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted from QApplication::exec() when the last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed.</para>
            <para>By default,</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>this attribute is set for all widgets except transient windows such as splash screens, tool windows, and popup menus</para>
            <para>QApplication implicitly quits when this signal is emitted.</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>This feature can be turned off by setting quitOnLastWindowClosed to false.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::close().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQApplicationSignals.FocusChanged(QtGui.QWidget,QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the widget that has keyboard focus changed from old to now, i.e., because the user pressed the tab-key, clicked into a widget or changed the active window. Both old and now can be the null-pointer.</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted after both widget have been notified about the change through QFocusEvent.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::clearFocus(), and Qt::FocusReason.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQApplicationSignals.FontDatabaseChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when application fonts are loaded or removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also QFontDatabase::addApplicationFont(), QFontDatabase::addApplicationFontFromData(), QFontDatabase::removeAllApplicationFonts(), and QFontDatabase::removeApplicationFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQApplicationSignals.CommitDataRequest(QtGui.QSessionManager)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal deals with session management. It is emitted when the QSessionManager wants the application to commit all its data.</para>
            <para>Usually this means saving all open files, after getting permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means by which the user can cancel the shutdown.</para>
            <para>You should not exit the application within this signal. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this signal, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example usage.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use Qt::DirectConnection when connecting to this signal.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), saveState(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQApplicationSignals.SaveStateRequest(QtGui.QSessionManager)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal deals with session management. It is invoked when the session manager wants the application to preserve its state for a future session.</para>
            <para>For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.</para>
            <para>You should never exit the application within this signal. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after the application has been started. This permits the session manager to learn about the application's restart policy.</para>
            <para>Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the manager for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.</para>
            <para>Note: You should use Qt::DirectConnection when connecting to this signal.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and Session Management.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQButtonGroupSignals.ButtonClicked(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is clicked. A button is clicked when it is first pressed and then released, when its shortcut key is typed, or programmatically when QAbstractButton::click() or QAbstractButton::animateClick() is called.</para>
            <para>See also checkedButton() and QAbstractButton::clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQButtonGroupSignals.ButtonPressed(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is pressed down.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::pressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQButtonGroupSignals.ButtonReleased(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given button is released.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractButton::released().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCalendarWidgetSignals.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the currently selected date is changed.</para>
            <para>The currently selected date can be changed by the user using the mouse or keyboard, or by the programmer using setSelectedDate().</para>
            <para>See also selectedDate().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCalendarWidgetSignals.Clicked(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The date the mouse was clicked on is specified by date. The signal is only emitted when clicked on a valid date, e.g., dates are not outside the minimumDate() and maximumDate(). If the selection mode is NoSelection, this signal will not be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCalendarWidgetSignals.Activated(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the Return or Enter key or double-clicks a date in the calendar widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCalendarWidgetSignals.CurrentPageChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the currently shown month is changed. The new year and month are passed as parameters.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCheckBoxSignals.StateChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the check box's state changes, i.e. whenever the user checks or unchecks it.</para>
            <para>state contains the check box's new Qt::CheckState.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQClipboardSignals.Changed(QtGui.QClipboard.Mode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the data for the given clipboard mode is changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), selectionChanged(), and findBufferChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQClipboardSignals.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the selection is changed. This only applies to windowing systems that support selections, e.g. X11. Windows and Mac OS X don't support selections.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), findBufferChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQClipboardSignals.FindBufferChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the find buffer is changed. This only applies to Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>With Qt version 4.3 or higher, clipboard changes made by other applications will only be detected when the application is activated.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also dataChanged(), selectionChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQClipboardSignals.DataChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the clipboard data is changed.</para>
            <para>On Mac OS X and with Qt version 4.3 or higher, clipboard changes made by other applications will only be detected when the application is activated.</para>
            <para>See also findBufferChanged(), selectionChanged(), and changed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQColorDialogSignals.CurrentColorChanged(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current color changes in the dialog. The current color is specified by color.</para>
            <para>See also color and colorSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQColorDialogSignals.ColorSelected(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just after the user has clicked OK to select a color to use. The chosen color is specified by color.</para>
            <para>See also color and currentColorChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQColumnViewSignals.UpdatePreviewWidget(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the preview widget should be updated to provide rich information about index</para>
            <para>See also previewWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQComboBoxSignals.EditTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the text in the combobox's line edit widget is changed. The new text is specified by text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQComboBoxSignals.Activated(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when the user chooses an item in the combobox. The item's index is passed. Note that this signal is sent even when the choice is not changed. If you need to know when the choice actually changes, use signal currentIndexChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQComboBoxSignals.Highlighted(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the combobox popup list is highlighted by the user. The item's index is passed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQComboBoxSignals.CurrentIndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent whenever the currentIndex in the combobox changes either through user interaction or programmatically. The item's index is passed or -1 if the combobox becomes empty or the currentIndex was reset.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCompleterSignals.Activated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is activated by the user. (by clicking or pressing return). The item's index in the completionModel() is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQCompleterSignals.Highlighted(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is highlighted by the user. It is also sent if complete() is called with the completionMode() set to QCompleter::InlineCompletion. The item's index in the completionModel() is given.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDataWidgetMapperSignals.CurrentIndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted after the current index has changed and all widgets were populated with new data. index is the new current index.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex() and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDateTimeEditSignals.DateTimeChanged(QtCore.QDateTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the date or time is changed. The new date and time is passed in datetime.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDateTimeEditSignals.TimeChanged(QtCore.QTime)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the time is changed. The new time is passed in time.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDateTimeEditSignals.DateChanged(QtCore.QDate)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the date is changed. The new date is passed in date.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDesktopWidgetSignals.Resized(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of screen changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDesktopWidgetSignals.WorkAreaResized(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the work area available on screen changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDesktopWidgetSignals.ScreenCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of screens changes to newCount.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also screenCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogButtonBoxSignals.Clicked(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked. The specific button that was pressed is specified by button.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), rejected(), and helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogButtonBoxSignals.Accepted">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the AcceptRole or YesRole.</para>
            <para>See also rejected(), clicked(), and helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogButtonBoxSignals.HelpRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the HelpRole.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), rejected(), and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDialogButtonBoxSignals.Rejected">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the RejectRole or NoRole.</para>
            <para>See also accepted(), helpRequested(), and clicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDockWidgetSignals.FeaturesChanged(QtGui.QDockWidget.DockWidgetFeature)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the features property changes. The features parameter gives the new value of the property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDockWidgetSignals.TopLevelChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the dock widget is now floating; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDockWidgetSignals.AllowedAreasChanged(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the allowedAreas property changes. The allowedAreas parameter gives the new value of the property.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDockWidgetSignals.VisibilityChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dock widget becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown, as well as when it is docked in a tabbed dock area and its tab becomes selected or unselected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDockWidgetSignals.DockLocationChanged(QtCore.Qt.DockWidgetArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the dock widget is moved to another dock area, or is moved to a different location in its current dock area. This happens when the dock widget is moved programmatically or is dragged to a new location by the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDoubleSpinBoxSignals.ValueChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value is passed in d.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDragSignals.ActionChanged(QtCore.Qt.DropAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the action associated with the drag changes.</para>
            <para>See also targetChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQDragSignals.TargetChanged(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the target of the drag and drop operation changes, with newTarget the new target.</para>
            <para>See also target() and actionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileDialogSignals.FileSelected(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) selected file.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileDialogSignals.FilesSelected(System.Collections.Generic.List{System.String})">
            <summary>
            <para>When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) list of selected files.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileDialogSignals.CurrentChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>When the current file changes, this signal is emitted with the new file name as the path parameter.</para>
            <para>See also filesSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileDialogSignals.DirectoryEntered(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user enters a directory.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileDialogSignals.FilterSelected(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileSystemModelSignals.RootPathChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the root path has been changed to a newPath.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileSystemModelSignals.FileRenamed(System.String,System.String,System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a file with the oldName is successfully renamed to newName. The file is located in in the directory path.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFileSystemModelSignals.DirectoryLoaded(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the gatherer thread has finished to load the path.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFontComboBoxSignals.CurrentFontChanged(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current font changes, with the new font.</para>
            <para>See also currentFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFontDialogSignals.CurrentFontChanged(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current font is changed. The new font is specified in font.</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted while a user is selecting a font. Ultimately, the chosen font may differ from the font currently selected.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also currentFont, fontSelected(), and selectedFont().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQFontDialogSignals.FontSelected(QtGui.QFont)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a font has been selected. The selected font is specified in font.</para>
            <para>The signal is only emitted when a user has chosen the final font to be used. It is not emitted while the user is changing the current font in the font dialog.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also selectedFont(), currentFontChanged(), and currentFont.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsEffectSignals.EnabledChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect is enabled or disabled. The enabled parameter holds the effects's new enabled state.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsBlurEffectSignals.BlurRadiusChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur radius changes. The radius parameter holds the effect's new blur radius.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsBlurEffectSignals.BlurHintsChanged(QtGui.QGraphicsBlurEffect.BlurHint)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur hints changes. The hints parameter holds the effect's new blur hints.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsColorizeEffectSignals.ColorChanged(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's color changes. The color parameter holds the effect's new color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsColorizeEffectSignals.StrengthChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever setStrength() changes the colorize strength property. strength contains the new strength value of the colorize effect.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsDropShadowEffectSignals.OffsetChanged(QtCore.QPointF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's shadow offset changes. The offset parameter holds the effect's new shadow offset.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsDropShadowEffectSignals.BlurRadiusChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's blur radius changes. The blurRadius parameter holds the effect's new blur radius.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsDropShadowEffectSignals.ColorChanged(QtGui.QColor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's color changes. The color parameter holds the effect's new color.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsObjectSignals.ParentChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the parent of the item changes</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsObjectSignals.OpacityChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the opacity of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsItem::opacity().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsObjectSignals.VisibleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the visibility of the item changes</para>
            <para>See also visible.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsObjectSignals.EnabledChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the item get's enabled or disabled.</para>
            <para>See also isEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsObjectSignals.RotationChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the roation of the item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsObjectSignals.ScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the scale of the item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsOpacityEffectSignals.OpacityChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's opacity changes. The opacity parameter holds the effect's new opacity.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsOpacityEffectSignals.OpacityMaskChanged(QtGui.QBrush)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the effect's opacity mask changes. The mask parameter holds the effect's new opacity mask.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsWidgetSignals.GeometryChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal gets emitted whenever the geometry is changed in setGeometry().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsRotationSignals.OriginChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the origin has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsRotationSignals.AngleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the angle has changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::angle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsRotationSignals.AxisChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the axis of the object changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsRotation::axis.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsScaleSignals.OriginChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>QGraphicsScale emits this signal when its origin changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScale::origin.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsScaleSignals.ScaleChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the xScale, yScale, or zScale of the object changes.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsScale::xScale, QGraphicsScale::yScale, and QGraphicsScale::zScale.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsSceneSignals.Changed(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QRectF})">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene when control reaches the event loop, if the scene content changes. The region parameter contains a list of scene rectangles that indicate the area that has been changed.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::updateScene().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsSceneSignals.SceneRectChanged(QtCore.QRectF)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the scene rect changes. The rect parameter is the new scene rectangle.</para>
            <para>See also QGraphicsView::updateSceneRect().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsSceneSignals.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the selection changes. You can call selectedItems() to get the new list of selected items.</para>
            <para>The selection changes whenever an item is selected or unselected, a selection area is set, cleared or otherwise changed, if a preselected item is added to the scene, or if a selected item is removed from the scene.</para>
            <para>QGraphicsScene emits this signal only once for group selection operations. For example, if you set a selection area, select or unselect a QGraphicsItemGroup, or if you add or remove from the scene a parent item that contains several selected items, selectionChanged() is emitted only once after the operation has completed (instead of once for each item).</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setSelectionArea(), selectedItems(), and QGraphicsItem::setSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsTextItemSignals.LinkActivated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks on a link on a text item that enables Qt::LinksAccessibleByMouse or Qt::LinksAccessibleByKeyboard. link is the link that was clicked.</para>
            <para>See also setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGraphicsTextItemSignals.LinkHovered(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link on a text item that enables Qt::LinksAccessibleByMouse. link is the link that was hovered over.</para>
            <para>See also setTextInteractionFlags().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGroupBoxSignals.Clicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the check box is activated (i.e. pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), or when the shortcut key is typed, Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setChecked().</para>
            <para>If the check box is checked checked is true; it is false if the check box is unchecked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also checkable, toggled(), and checked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQGroupBoxSignals.Toggled(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>If the group box is checkable, this signal is emitted when the check box is toggled. on is true if the check box is checked; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also checkable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is moved. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, the old index by oldVisualIndex, and the new index position by newVisualIndex.</para>
            <para>See also moveSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionResized(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is resized. The section's logical number is specified by logicalIndex, the old size by oldSize, and the new size by newSize.</para>
            <para>See also resizeSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionPressed(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>Note that the sectionPressed signal will also be emitted.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable() and sectionPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionEntered(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cursor moves over the section and the left mouse button is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable() and sectionPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionDoubleClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionCountChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the number of sections changes, i.e., when sections are added or deleted. The original count is specified by oldCount, and the new count by newCount.</para>
            <para>See also count(), length(), and headerDataChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionHandleDoubleClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.</para>
            <para>See also setClickable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SectionAutoResize(System.Int32,QtGui.QHeaderView.ResizeMode)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a section is automatically resized. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, and the resize mode by mode.</para>
            <para>See also setResizeMode() and stretchLastSection().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.GeometriesChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the header's geometries have changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQHeaderViewSignals.SortIndicatorChanged(System.Int32,QtCore.Qt.SortOrder)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the section containing the sort indicator or the order indicated is changed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex and the sort order is specified by order.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            <para>See also setSortIndicator().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQInputDialogSignals.TextValueChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text string changes in the dialog. The current string is specified by text.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQInputDialogSignals.TextValueSelected(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a text string by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected string is specified by text.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQInputDialogSignals.IntValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the integer value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQInputDialogSignals.IntValueSelected(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a integer value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQInputDialogSignals.DoubleValueChanged(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the double value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQInputDialogSignals.DoubleValueSelected(System.Double)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a double value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.</para>
            <para>This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQItemSelectionModelSignals.SelectionChanged(QtGui.QItemSelection,QtGui.QItemSelection)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes. The change in the selection is represented as an item selection of deselected items and an item selection of selected items.</para>
            <para>Note the that the current index changes independently from the selection. Also note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also select() and currentChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQItemSelectionModelSignals.CurrentChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous model item index is replaced by the current index as the selection's current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentIndex(), setCurrentIndex(), and selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQItemSelectionModelSignals.CurrentRowChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current item changes and its row is different to the row of the previous current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged(), currentColumnChanged(), currentIndex(), and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQItemSelectionModelSignals.CurrentColumnChanged(QtCore.QModelIndex,QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current item changes and its column is different to the column of the previous current item.</para>
            <para>Note that this signal will not be emitted when the item model is reset.</para>
            <para>See also currentChanged(), currentRowChanged(), currentIndex(), and setCurrentIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLCDNumberSignals.Overflow">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the QLCDNumber is asked to display a too-large number or a too-long string.</para>
            <para>It is never emitted by setDigitCount().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLabelSignals.LinkActivated(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also linkHovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLabelSignals.LinkHovered(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also linkActivated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLineEditSignals.TextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The text argument is the new text.</para>
            <para>Unlike textEdited(), this signal is also emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLineEditSignals.TextEdited(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the text is edited. The text argument is the new text.</para>
            <para>Unlike textChanged(), this signal is not emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLineEditSignals.CursorPositionChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the cursor moves. The previous position is given by old, and the new position by new.</para>
            <para>See also setCursorPosition() and cursorPosition().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLineEditSignals.ReturnPressed">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLineEditSignals.EditingFinished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed or the line edit loses focus. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit and enter/return is pressed, the editingFinished() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQLineEditSignals.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also hasSelectedText() and selectedText().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListViewSignals.IndexesMoved(System.Collections.Generic.List{QtCore.QModelIndex})">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified indexes are moved in the view.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemPressed(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is pressed on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemClicked() and itemDoubleClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemClicked(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is clicked on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemPressed() and itemDoubleClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemDoubleClicked(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is double clicked on an item in the widget.</para>
            <para>See also itemClicked() and itemPressed().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemActivated(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item is activated. The item is activated when the user clicks or double clicks on it, depending on the system configuration. It is also activated when the user presses the activation key (on Windows and X11 this is the Return key, on Mac OS X it is Ctrl+0).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemEntered(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered. This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            <para>See also QWidget::setMouseTracking().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemChanged(QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.CurrentItemChanged(QtGui.QListWidgetItem,QtGui.QListWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>previous is the item that previously had the focus; current is the new current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.CurrentTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>currentText is the text data in the current item. If there is no current item, the currentText is invalid.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.CurrentRowChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.</para>
            <para>currentRow is the row of the current item. If there is no current item, the currentRow is -1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQListWidgetSignals.ItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also selectedItems(), QListWidgetItem::isSelected(), and currentItemChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMainWindowSignals.IconSizeChanged(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the size of the icons used in the window is changed. The new icon size is passed in iconSize.</para>
            <para>You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.</para>
            <para>See also setIconSize().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMainWindowSignals.ToolButtonStyleChanged(QtCore.Qt.ToolButtonStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the style used for tool buttons in the window is changed. The new style is passed in toolButtonStyle.</para>
            <para>You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.</para>
            <para>See also setToolButtonStyle().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMdiAreaSignals.SubWindowActivated(QtGui.QMdiSubWindow)">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiArea emits this signal after window has been activated. When window is 0, QMdiArea has just deactivated its last active window, and there are no active windows on the workspace.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::activeSubWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMdiSubWindowSignals.WindowStateChanged(QtCore.Qt.WindowState,QtCore.Qt.WindowState)">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow emits this signal after the window state changes. oldState is the window state before it changed, and newState is the new, current state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMdiSubWindowSignals.AboutToActivate">
            <summary>
            <para>QMdiSubWindow emits this signal immediately before it is activated. After the subwindow has been activated, the QMdiArea that manages the subwindow will also emit the subWindowActivated() signal.</para>
            <para>See also QMdiArea::subWindowActivated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMenuSignals.AboutToShow">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just before the menu is shown to the user.</para>
            <para>See also aboutToHide() and show().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMenuSignals.AboutToHide">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted just before the menu is hidden from the user.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            <para>See also aboutToShow() and hide().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMenuSignals.Triggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in this menu is triggered.</para>
            <para>action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Normally, you connect each menu action's triggered() signal to its own custom slot, but sometimes you will want to connect several actions to a single slot, for example, when you have a group of closely related actions, such as &quot;left justify&quot;, &quot;center&quot;, &quot;right justify&quot;.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal is emitted for the main parent menu in a hierarchy. Hence, only the parent menu needs to be connected to a slot; sub-menus need not be connected.</para>
            <para>See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMenuSignals.Hovered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Often this is used to update status information.</para>
            <para>See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMenuBarSignals.Triggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in a menu belonging to this menubar is triggered as a result of a mouse click; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.</para>
            <para>Note: QMenuBar has to have ownership of the QMenu in order this signal to work.</para>
            <para>Normally, you connect each menu action to a single slot using QAction::triggered(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.</para>
            <para>See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMenuBarSignals.Hovered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the event to be sent.</para>
            <para>Often this is used to update status information.</para>
            <para>See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMessageBoxSignals.ButtonClicked(QtGui.QAbstractButton)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a button is clicked inside the QMessageBox. The button that was clicked in returned in button.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.Started">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted after QMovie::start() has been called, and QMovie has entered QMovie::Running state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.Resized(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current frame has been resized to size. This effect is sometimes used in animations as an alternative to replacing the frame. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the updated frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.Updated(QtCore.QRect)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the rect rect in the current frame has been updated. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the updated frame.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.StateChanged(QtGui.QMovie.MovieState)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted every time the state of the movie changes. The new state is specified by state.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::state().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.Error(QtGui.QImageReader.ImageReaderError)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted by QMovie when the error error occurred during playback. QMovie will stop the movie, and enter QMovie::NotRunning state.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.Finished">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the movie has finished.</para>
            <para>See also QMovie::stop().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQMovieSignals.FrameChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the frame number has changed to frameNumber. You can call currentImage() or currentPixmap() to get a copy of the frame.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.TextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.UndoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.RedoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.CopyAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.</para>
            <para>When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.</para>
            <para>If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.CursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.UpdateRequest(QtCore.QRect,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the text document needs an update of the specified rect. If the text is scrolled, rect will cover the entire viewport area. If the text is scrolled vertically, dy carries the amount of pixels the viewport was scrolled.</para>
            <para>The purpose of the signal is to support extra widgets in plain text edit subclasses that e.g. show line numbers, breakpoints, or other extra information.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.BlockCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the block count changes. The new block count is passed in newBlockCount.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPlainTextEditSignals.ModificationChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPrintDialogSignals.Accepted(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user accepts the values set in the print dialog. The printer parameter includes the printer that the settings were applied to.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPrintPreviewDialogSignals.PaintRequested(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the QPrintPreviewDialog needs to generate a set of preview pages.</para>
            <para>The printer instance supplied is the paint device onto which you should paint the contents of each page, using the QPrinter instance in the same way as you would when printing directly.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPrintPreviewWidgetSignals.PaintRequested(QtGui.QPrinter)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the preview widget needs to generate a set of preview pages. printer is the printer associated with this preview widget.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQPrintPreviewWidgetSignals.PreviewChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the preview widget has changed some internal state, such as the orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQProgressBarSignals.ValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the value shown in the progress bar changes. value is the new value shown by the progress bar.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQProgressDialogSignals.Canceled">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked. It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.</para>
            <para>See also wasCanceled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQShortcutSignals.Activated">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user types the shortcut's key sequence.</para>
            <para>See also activatedAmbiguously().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQShortcutSignals.ActivatedAmbiguously">
            <summary>
            <para>When a key sequence is being typed at the keyboard, it is said to be ambiguous as long as it matches the start of more than one shortcut.</para>
            <para>When a shortcut's key sequence is completed, activatedAmbiguously() is emitted if the key sequence is still ambiguous (i.e., it is the start of one or more other shortcuts). The activated() signal is not emitted in this case.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQSpinBoxSignals.ValueChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQSplashScreenSignals.MessageChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen changes. message is the new message and is a null-string when the message has been removed.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage() and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQSplitterSignals.SplitterMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the splitter handle at a particular index has been moved to position pos.</para>
            <para>For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.</para>
            <para>See also moveSplitter().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQStackedLayoutSignals.WidgetRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed from the layout. The widget's index is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQStackedLayoutSignals.CurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current widget in the layout changes. The index specifies the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedLayout)</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQStackedWidgetSignals.CurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current widget changes.</para>
            <para>The parameter holds the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedWidget).</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQStackedWidgetSignals.WidgetRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed. The widget's index is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>See also removeWidget().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQStandardItemModelSignals.ItemChanged(QtGui.QStandardItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQStatusBarSignals.MessageChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the temporary status message changes. The new temporary message is passed in the message parameter which is a null-string when the message has been removed.</para>
            <para>See also showMessage() and clearMessage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQSystemTrayIconSignals.Activated(QtGui.QSystemTrayIcon.ActivationReason)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user activates the system tray icon. reason specifies the reason for activation. QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason enumerates the various reasons.</para>
            <para>See also QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQSystemTrayIconSignals.MessageClicked">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the message displayed using showMessage() was clicked by the user.</para>
            <para>Currently this signal is not sent on Mac OS X.</para>
            <para>Note: We follow Microsoft Windows XP/Vista behavior, so the signal is also emitted when the user clicks on a tray icon with a balloon message displayed.</para>
            <para>See also activated().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTabBarSignals.CurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tab bar's current tab changes. The new current has the given index, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no tab in the QTabBar)</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTabBarSignals.TabCloseRequested(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTabBarSignals.TabMoved(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tab has moved the tab at index position from to index position to.</para>
            <para>note: QTabWidget will automatically move the page when this signal is emitted from its tab bar.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also moveTab().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTabWidgetSignals.CurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current page index changes. The parameter is the new current page index position, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QTabWidget)</para>
            <para>See also currentWidget() and currentIndex.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTabWidgetSignals.TabCloseRequested(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.</para>
            <para>See also setTabsClosable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemPressed(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is pressed. The item specified is the item that was pressed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemClicked(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is clicked. The item specified is the item that was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemDoubleClicked(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is double clicked. The item specified is the item that was double clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemActivated(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item has been activated</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemEntered(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered.</para>
            <para>This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemChanged(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CurrentItemChanged(QtGui.QTableWidgetItem,QtGui.QTableWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous item is the item that previously had the focus, current is the new current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.ItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also selectedItems() and QTableWidgetItem::isSelected().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CellPressed(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is pressed. The row and column specified is the cell that was pressed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CellClicked(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was clicked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CellDoubleClicked(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is double clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was double clicked.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CellActivated(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the cell specified by row and column has been activated</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CellEntered(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters a cell. The cell is specified by row and column.</para>
            <para>This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CellChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the data of the item in the cell specified by row and column has changed.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTableWidgetSignals.CurrentCellChanged(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the current cell changes. The cell specified by previousRow and previousColumn is the cell that previously had the focus, the cell specified by currentRow and currentColumn is the new current cell.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.TextChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.UndoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.RedoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.CurrentCharFormatChanged(QtGui.QTextCharFormat)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted if the current character format has changed, for example caused by a change of the cursor position.</para>
            <para>The new format is f.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentCharFormat().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.CopyAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.</para>
            <para>When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.</para>
            <para>If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.</para>
            <para>See also selectionChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.SelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.</para>
            <para>See also copyAvailable().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextEditSignals.CursorPositionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextBrowserSignals.BackwardAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the availability of backward() changes. available is false when the user is at home(); otherwise it is true.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextBrowserSignals.ForwardAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes. available is true after the user navigates backward() and false when the user navigates or goes forward().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextBrowserSignals.HistoryChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the history changes.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also historyTitle() and historyUrl().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextBrowserSignals.SourceChanged(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the source has changed, src being the new source.</para>
            <para>Source changes happen both programmatically when calling setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextBrowserSignals.Highlighted(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not activated an anchor in the document. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextBrowserSignals.AnchorClicked(QtCore.QUrl)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.</para>
            <para>Note that the browser will automatically handle navigation to the location specified by link unless the openLinks property is set to false or you call setSource() in a slot connected. This mechanism is used to override the default navigation features of the browser.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.ContentsChange(System.Int32,System.Int32,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            <para>Information is provided about the position of the character in the document where the change occurred, the number of characters removed (charsRemoved), and the number of characters added (charsAdded).</para>
            <para>The signal is emitted before the document's layout manager is notified about the change. This hook allows you to implement syntax highlighting for the document.</para>
            <para>See also QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::documentChanged() and contentsChanged().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.ContentsChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.</para>
            <para>See also contentsChange().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.UndoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            <para>See the Qt Undo Framework documentation for details.</para>
            <para>See also undo() and isUndoRedoEnabled().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.RedoAvailable(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.UndoCommandAdded">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted every time a new level of undo is added to the QTextDocument.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.ModificationChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.CursorPositionChanged(QtGui.QTextCursor)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the position of a cursor changed due to an editing operation. The cursor that changed is passed in cursor. If you need a signal when the cursor is moved with the arrow keys you can use the cursorPositionChanged() signal in QTextEdit.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.BlockCountChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the total number of text blocks in the document changes. The value passed in newBlockCount is the new total.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTextDocumentSignals.DocumentLayoutChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when a new document layout is set.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.</para>
            <para>See also setDocumentLayout().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.ActionTriggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when an action in this toolbar is triggered. This happens when the action's tool button is pressed, or when the action is triggered in some other way outside the tool bar. The parameter holds the triggered action.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.MovableChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes movable or fixed. If the toolbar can be moved, movable is true; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>See also movable.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.AllowedAreasChanged(QtCore.Qt.ToolBarArea)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the collection of allowed areas for the toolbar is changed. The new areas in which the toolbar can be positioned are specified by allowedAreas.</para>
            <para>See also allowedAreas.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.OrientationChanged(QtCore.Qt.Orientation)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes. The new orientation is specified by the orientation given.</para>
            <para>See also orientation.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.IconSizeChanged(QtCore.QSize)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the icon size is changed. The iconSize parameter holds the toolbar's new icon size.</para>
            <para>See also iconSize and QMainWindow::iconSize.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.ToolButtonStyleChanged(QtCore.Qt.ToolButtonStyle)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the tool button style is changed. The toolButtonStyle parameter holds the toolbar's new tool button style.</para>
            <para>See also toolButtonStyle and QMainWindow::toolButtonStyle.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.TopLevelChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the toolbar is now floating; otherwise it is false.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.</para>
            <para>See also isWindow().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBarSignals.VisibilityChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolBoxSignals.CurrentChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current item is changed. The new current item's index is passed in index, or -1 if there is no current item.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQToolButtonSignals.Triggered(QtGui.QAction)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the given action is triggered.</para>
            <para>The action may also be associated with other parts of the user interface, such as menu items and keyboard shortcuts. Sharing actions in this way helps make the user interface more consistent and is often less work to implement.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeViewSignals.Expanded(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is expanded.</para>
            <para>See also setExpanded().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeViewSignals.Collapsed(QtCore.QModelIndex)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is collapsed.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemPressed(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user presses a mouse button inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemClicked(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was clicked, no signal will be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemDoubleClicked(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user double clicks inside the widget.</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was double clicked, no signal will be emitted.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemActivated(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user activates an item by single- or double-clicking (depending on the platform, i.e. on the QStyle::SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick style hint) or pressing a special key (e.g., Enter).</para>
            <para>The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemEntered(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item over the specified column. QTreeWidget mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemChanged(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the contents of the column in the specified item changes.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemExpanded(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item is expanded so that all of its children are displayed.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when expandAll() is invoked.</para>
            <para>See also setItemExpanded(), QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemCollapsed(), and expandItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemCollapsed(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the specified item is collapsed so that none of its children are displayed.</para>
            <para>Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when collapseAll() is invoked.</para>
            <para>See also QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemExpanded(), and collapseItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.CurrentItemChanged(QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem,QtGui.QTreeWidgetItem)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current item changes. The current item is specified by current, and this replaces the previous current item.</para>
            <para>See also setCurrentItem().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQTreeWidgetSignals.ItemSelectionChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the selection changes in the tree widget. The current selection can be found with selectedItems().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.ActiveStackChanged(QtGui.QUndoStack)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack of the group changes. This can happen when setActiveStack() or QUndoStack::setActive() is called, or when the active stack is removed form the group. stack is the new active stack. If no stack is active, stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also setActiveStack() and QUndoStack::setActive().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.IndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::indexChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>idx is the new current index, or 0 if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::indexChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.CleanChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::cleanChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>clean is the new state, or true if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::cleanChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.CanUndoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>canUndo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.CanRedoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>canRedo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.UndoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>undoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoGroupSignals.RedoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.</para>
            <para>redoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.</para>
            <para>See also QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoStackSignals.IndexChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a command modifies the state of the document. This happens when a command is undone or redone. When a macro command is undone or redone, or setIndex() is called, this signal is emitted only once.</para>
            <para>idx specifies the index of the current command, ie. the command which will be executed on the next call to redo().</para>
            <para>See also index() and setIndex().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoStackSignals.CleanChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the stack enters or leaves the clean state. If clean is true, the stack is in a clean state; otherwise this signal indicates that it has left the clean state.</para>
            <para>See also isClean() and setClean().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoStackSignals.CanUndoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of canUndo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). canUndo specifies the new value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoStackSignals.CanRedoChanged(System.Boolean)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of canRedo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). canRedo specifies the new value.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoStackSignals.UndoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of undoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). undoText specifies the new text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQUndoStackSignals.RedoTextChanged(System.String)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the value of redoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). redoText specifies the new text.</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWizardSignals.CurrentIdChanged(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the current page changes, with the new current id.</para>
            <para>See also currentId() and currentPage().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWizardSignals.HelpRequested">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks the Help button.</para>
            <para>By default, no Help button is shown. Call setOption(HaveHelpButton, true) to have one.</para>
            <para>Example:</para>
            <para> LicenseWizard::LicenseWizard(QWidget *parent)</para>
            <para>     : QWizard(parent)</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     setOption(HaveHelpButton, true);</para>
            <para>     connect(this, SIGNAL(helpRequested()), this, SLOT(showHelp()));</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> void LicenseWizard::showHelp()</para>
            <para> {</para>
            <para>     static QString lastHelpMessage;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QString message;</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     switch (currentId()) {</para>
            <para>     case Page_Intro:</para>
            <para>         message = tr(&quot;The decision you make here will affect which page you &quot;</para>
            <para>                      &quot;get to see next.&quot;);</para>
            <para>         break;</para>
            <para>     ...</para>
            <para>     default:</para>
            <para>         message = tr(&quot;This help is likely not to be of any help.&quot;);</para>
            <para>     }</para>
            <para></para>
            <para>     QMessageBox::information(this, tr(&quot;License Wizard Help&quot;), message);</para>
            <para></para>
            <para> }</para>
            <para>See also customButtonClicked().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWizardSignals.CustomButtonClicked(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the user clicks a custom button. which can be CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3.</para>
            <para>By default, no custom button is shown. Call setOption() with HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, or HaveCustomButton3 to have one, and use setButtonText() or setButton() to configure it.</para>
            <para>See also helpRequested().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWizardSignals.PageAdded(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a page is added to the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also addPage(), setPage(), and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWizardSignals.PageRemoved(System.Int32)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever a page is removed from the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.</para>
            <para>This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.</para>
            <para>See also removePage() and startId().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWizardPageSignals.CompleteChanged">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted whenever the complete state of the page (i.e., the value of isComplete()) changes.</para>
            <para>If you reimplement isComplete(), make sure to emit completeChanged() whenever the value of isComplete() changes, to ensure that QWizard updates the enabled or disabled state of its buttons.</para>
            <para>See also isComplete().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
        <member name="M:QtGui.IQWorkspaceSignals.WindowActivated(QtGui.QWidget)">
            <summary>
            <para>This signal is emitted when the child window w becomes active. Note that w can be 0, and that more than one signal may be emitted for a single activation event.</para>
            <para>See also activeWindow() and windowList().</para>
            </summary>
        </member>
    </members>
</doc>
